HDB Specification A&A

HOUSING & DEVELOPMENT BOARD
SINGAPORE
STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS FOR UPGRADING WORKS (2007 EDITION)
UPG07/IND.DOC(1) lkk(181206) DPD
Published by Housing & Development Board, Republic of Singapore. No part of this document may be reproduced or copied in any form or by any means without the prior written permission of the publisher.
STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS FOR UPGRADING WORKS
INDEX PAGE SECTION 1 GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS SECTION 2 SECTION 3 SECTION 4 SECTION 5 SECTION 6 SECTION 7 SECTION 8 SECTION 9 SECTION 10 SECTION 11 SECTION 12 SECTION 13 SECTION 14 SECTION 15 SECTION 16 SECTION 17 SECTION 18 SECTION 19 SECTION 20 SECTION 21 SECTION 22 SECTION 23 SECTION 24 SECTION 25 PILING RESERVED STRUCTURAL CONCRETE MECHANISED FORMWORK SYSTEM SEMI-PRECAST CONSTRUCTION PRESTRESSED CONCRETE FIBRE REINFORCED POLYMER (FRP) SYSTEM REINFORCED CONCRETE WATER TANKS PRECAST LIGHTWEIGHT CONCRETE PARTITIONS NON-STRUCTURAL CONCRETE BRICKWORK AND BLOCKWORK ROOFING CONCRETE FLAT ROOF CARPENTRY AND JOINERY IRONMONGERY STRUCTURAL STEELWORK METALWORK FLOOR FINISHES WALL FINISHES ELECTRICAL, TELEPHONE AND CATV INSTALLATIONS GLAZING PAINTING AND DECORATING RESERVED CHILDREN'S PLAYGROUND, FITNESS STATION AND HARDCOURT TS 2-1 TS 3-1 TS 4-1 TS 5-1 TS 6-1 TS 7-1 TS 8-1 TS 9-1 TS 10-1 TS 11-1 TS 12-1 TS 13-1 TS 14-1 TS 15-1 TS 16-1 TS 17-1 TS 18-1 TS 19-1 TS 20-1 TS 21-1 TS 22-1 TS 23-1 TS 24-1 TS 25-1 GS 1
The contents of this index on this page shall not be deemed to be part of the Specifications or be taken into consideration in the interpretation or construction thereof or of the Contract. HDB, being a ISO 14001 certified organisation, is committed to be the leader in environment management. The details of HDB's environmental policy can be found in the Corporate Philosophy at HDB Website http://www.hdb.gov.sg
-2INDEX PAGE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS (CONT'D) SECTION 26 SECTION 27 SECTION 28 SECTION 29 SECTION 30 SECTION 31 SECTION 32 SECTION 33 SECTION 34 SECTION 35 SECTION 36 SECTION 37 SECTION 38 SECTION 39 SECTION 40 SECTION 41 SECTION 42 SECTION 43 SECTION 44 SECTION 45 SECTION 46 TREE & SHRUB PLANTING AND TURFING MULTI-STOREY CARPARK ELECTRICAL SUB-STATION/UTILITIES CENTRE/DUSTBIN COMPOUND EATING HOUSES MISCELLANEOUS (BUILDING) LIFT INSTALLATION/REFURBISHMENT GENERAL REPAIR TO BUILDING WORKS REMEDIAL WORK TO RAINWATER SEEPAGE THROUGH THE EXTERNAL WALLS RECTIFICATION OF ALIGNMENT OF BUILDING ELEMENTS AND STRUCTURAL REPAIRS SITE LANDSCAPING WORKS GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR SANITARY, WATER AND OTHER PLUMBING INSTALLATION SANITARY INSTALLATION WATER INSTALLATION GAS PIPE INSTALLATION TRANSFER PUMPING SYSTEM INSTALLATION MISCELLANEOUS (SANITARY & WATER INSTALLATION) RESERVED BOOSTER PUMPING SYSTEM INSTALLATION DRY/WET RISING MAIN AND DOWN COMER (FIRE FIGHTING) INSTALLATION FIRE PROTECTION INSTALLATION GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR ELECTRICITY SUPPLY AND EXISTING ELECTRICAL/TELEPHONE INSTALLATIONS AND LIGHTNING PROTECTION SYSTEM ELECTRICAL INSTALLATIONS OUTDOOR AMENITIES LIGHTING TS 26-1 TS 27-1 TS 28-1 TS 29-1 TS 30-1 TS 31-1 TS 32-1 TS 33-1 TS 34-1 TS 35-1 TS 36-1 TS 37-1 TS 38-1 TS 39-1 TS 40-1 TS 41-1 TS 42-1 TS 43-1/11 TS 44-1 TS 45-1 TS 46-1
SECTION 47 SECTION 48
TS 47-1 TS 48-1
The contents of this index on this page shall not be deemed to be part of the Specifications or be taken into consideration in the interpretation or construction thereof or of the Contract.
-3INDEX PAGE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS (CONT'D) SECTION 49 SECTION 50 SECTION 51 SECTION 52 SECTION 53 SECTION 54 SECTION 55 SECTION 56 LIGHTNING PROTECTION MATV INSTALLATIONS SETTING OUT, EXCAVATION AND DRAINLAYING MATERIALS, WORKMANSHIP AND CONSTRUCTION IN GENERAL FOR EXCAVATION AND CIVIL ENGINEERING WORKS CONSTRUCTION AND WORKMANSHIP FOR ROADS AND DRAINS CONSTRUCTION AND WORKMANSHIP FOR SEWERS CONSTRUCTION AND WORKMANSHIP FOR EARTHWORKS APPENDICES TS 49-1 TS 50-1 TS 51-1 TS 52-1 TS 53-1 TS 54-1 TS 55-1 TS 56
The contents of this index on this page shall not be deemed to be part of the Specifications or be taken into consideration in the interpretation or construction thereof or of the Contract.
GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS
SECTION 1 : GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS
CONTENT Page 1.1 1.1.1 1.1.2 1.1.3 1.1.4 1.1.5 1.1.6 1.1.7 1.1.8 1.1.9 1.1.10 1.1.11 1.1.12 1.1.13 1.1.14 1.1.15 1.1.16 1.1.17 1.1.18 1.1.19 1.1.20 1.1.21 1.1.22 1.1.23 1.1.24 1.1.25 1.1.26 1.1.27 1.1.28 1.2 1.2.1 1.2.2 1.2.3 1.2.4 1.2.5 1.2.6 1.2.7 1.2.8 1.2.9 1.2.10 1.2.11 1.3 1.3.1 1.3.2 1.3.3 1.3.4 1.3.5 General Definitions, Abbreviations and Interpretations Payment of Employer's Bills, Expenses, etc Insurance Policies Stamp Duties Novation, Assignment and Direct Submission of Warranties and Agreements Liquidated Damages for Delay in Completion Indemnity Against Claims by Occupants Provisional Sum Prime Cost Sums Overclaim Leading to Overpayment Recovery of Legal Costs for Court Proceedings Goods and Services Tax Carriage by Sea Bribery Site Occupation Works and/or Materials Warranty Assessment of Extension of Time due to Exceptionally Inclement Weather Research Work, Publicity Materials and Community Relations Activities Contract Documents And Reference Materials On Site Shortfall In Floor Area Trade Subcontractors Contract Payment By GIRO/EPS Restriction On Use Of Project Information Stand-By Plumber And Electrician For Restoring Essential Services During Defects Liability Period Audit Of M & E Systems Protection Of Personal Data Precautionary Measures To Be Taken During A Disease Pandemic Alternative Offer For Inclusion Of M& E Lift Plant Work Parameters Maximum Allowable Working Period Maximum Number of Workers for Works Within Flat Working Hours Maximum Allowable Noise Level Site Conditions and Information Joint Site Inspection Use of Common Areas and Surrounding Estate TOL Fee for Land outside Contract Boundary Detailed Work Programme Preservation of Trees Earth Control Measures Site Management Site Management Project Team Employment Of Contractor's Site Personnel Project Manager - Qualification/Experience/Responsibilities Public Relations Officer - Qualification/Experience/Responsibilities GS 21 GS 21 GS 22 GS 23 GS 23 GS 14 GS 14 GS 14 GS 14 GS 15 GS 15 GS 16 GS 16 GS 17 GS 17 GS 19 GS 1 GS 2 GS 3 GS 5 GS 5 GS 5 GS 6 GS 6 GS 6 GS 6 GS 6 GS 7 GS 7 GS 7 GS 8 GS 8 GS 8 GS 9 GS 9 GS 9 GS 10 GS 10 GS 11 GS 11 GS 11 GS 12 GS 13 GS 13
-2-
CONTENT Page 1.3.6 1.3.7 1.3.8 1.3.9 1.3.10 1.3.11 1.3.12 1.3.13 1.3.14 1.3.15 1.3.16 1.3.17 1.3.18 1.3.19 1.3.20 1.3.21 1.3.22 1.3.23 1.3.24 1.3.25 1.3.26 1.3.27 1.3.28 1.4 1.4.1 1.4.2 1.4.3 1.4.4 1.4.5 1.4.6 1.4.7 1.4.8 1.4.9 1.4.10 1.4.11 1.4.12 1.4.13 1.4.14 1.4.15 Assistant Public Relations Officer - Qualifications/Experience/Responsibilities Standby Plumber and Standby Electrician - Qualifications/Experience/Responsibilities Safety Officer and Supervisor Health Supervisor Security Guard Housekeeper Replacement Of Site Personnel Compliance With Requirements And Submission Of Information Of Site Personnel Inclusion Of Cost And Failure To Employ The Site Personnel Application For Release Of Site Personnel Superintending Officer's Decision Employment of Workmen/Workmanship, Uniforms and Identification Badges Project Manager/Engineers To Attend BCA's Course On Effective Supervision In Retrofitting Projects Monthly Progress Reports Conservancy Works Pest Control and Surveillance Warning/Notices of Works and Disruption Reserved Contractor's Work in Connection with Subsidiary Contracts Project Plaque Telephone Techniques Course for Public Relations Officer Assistance Public Relations Officer and Senior Security Guard Environmental Public Health Measures Allocation Of Man-Year Entitlements Services, Utilities & Temporary Facilities Cables/Services Detection Diversion of Services Disruption to Services, Utilities and Facilities Existing Services Valves, Manholes, Etc Site Layout Plan Site Offices Study Room and Rest Area Workers' Rest Area Erection of Temporary Structures Certificate of Supervision for Temporary Structures Lightning Protection to Temporary Structures and Metal Structures Water Electricity Cost of Water and Electricity Computer Software and Hardware GS 32 GS 32 GS 33 GS 33 GS 34 GS 34 GS 38 GS 38 GS 39 GS 39 GS 39 GS 39 GS 39 GS 40 GS 41 GS 24 GS 24 GS 24 GS 24 GS 25 GS 25 GS 26 GS 26 GS 26 GS 27 GS 27 GS 27 GS 27 GS 28 GS 28 GS 29 GS 29 GS 29 GS 30 GS 30 GS 30 GS 30 GS 31
-3-
CONTENT Page 1.4.16 1.4.17 1.4.18 1.4.19 1.4.20 1.4.21 1.4.22 1.4.23 1.4.24 1.4.25 1.4.26 1.4.27 1.4.28 1.4.29 1.4.30 Provision of Safety Helmets and Safety Boots Equipment for Defect Checking Metal Detector Temporary Sanitary Facilities for Occupants Temporary Sanitary Facilities for Staff and Workmen Temporary Drainage System Temporary Store Room for Lift Parts Site Access and Control and Provision of Hoarding Access Roads and Protective Crossings Signboards Gas Works Information Centre and Infoline Stationery for Employer's Officers Temporary Electricity Supply And Installation Compliance With The Technical Guidelines For Fire Safety In Temporary Buildings In Construction Worksites 1.5 1.5.1 1.5.2 1.5.3 1.5.4 1.5.5 1.5.6 1.5.7 1.5.8 1.5.9 1.5.10 1.5.11 1.5.12 1.5.13 1.5.14 1.5.15 1.5.16 1.5.17 1.5.18 1.5.19 1.5.20 1.5.21 1.5.22 1.5.23 1.5.24 Work Methods Work Methods for all Trades Measurement Plan and Survey Method Workshop Drawings and Samples Part Removal or Demolition of Existing Structure Demolition of Existing RC/Masonry Wall Screen Wall Occupants' Fixtures and Fittings Affected by the Works Protection of existing Structures Services and Properties Care of the Works and Materials Damage to Public/Private Property Lifts and Transportation of Workers/Materials Use of Mobile Work Platforms for External Facade Works Bell System for Passenger/Material Hoist Handheld Hacking Tools Cutting of Steel Member Pollution or Disturbance Inspection of the Works Equipment/Material Storage Removal and Dumping of Debris, Surplus Materials, Etc Cleaning of Public and HDB Maintained Roads and Drains Cleaning Up on Substantial Completion Rectification of Defects after Certification of Completion Mechanical Mixer Pasting of Translucent PVC Film at Affected Bedroom Windows GS 55 GS 55 GS 56 GS 56 GS 56 GS 57 GS 57 GS 59 GS 59 GS 60 GS 60 GS 60 GS 60 GS 60 GS 60 GS 61 GS 61 GS 62 GS 62 GS 62 GS 63 GS 63 GS 63 GS 63 GS 47 GS 47 GS 47 GS 47 GS 48 GS 49 GS 49 GS 49 GS 51 GS 51 GS 51 GS 52 GS 52 GS 54 GS 54
-4-
CONTENT Page 1.6 1.6.1 1.6.2 1.6.3 1.6.4 1.6.5 1.6.6 1.6.7 1.6.8 1.6.9 1.6.10 1.6.11 1.6.12 1.6.13 Materials Metric Components Materials and Workmanship Approval of Samples And Trade Names Reserved PSB Quality Certificate Precautions Against Materials Being Taken Out Of Site Approval for the use of Ready-Mixed Concrete Colour of Works/Materials Delivery and Preparation of Materials Storage Facility for Cement Supply Of Concreting Materials Credit Terms and Conditions For Employers Materials Ordering Materials Appendix A10 Appendix A10A 1.7 1.7.1 1.7.2 1.7.3 1.7.4 1.8 1.8.1 1.8.2 1.8.3 1.8.4 1.8.5 1.8.6 1.9 1.9.1 1.9.2 1.10 1.10.1 1.11 1.11.1 Labour Labour Laws Keeping Records Of Workmen Employment Of Illegal Immigrants Employment Of Skilled Tiler Construction Equipment Maintenance of Construction Equipment Contractor's Construction Equipment Movement of Construction Equipment Works within Railway Protection Zone and Railway Safety Zone Construction Equipment Approved Construction Equipment Safety Site Safety Measures Reporting of Accidents Nuisance and Irregularities Nuisance And Irregularities Quantum of Security Deposit Security Deposit Appendix W1 Attachment A GS 100 GS 101 GS 108 GS 99 GS 85 GS 98 GS 80 GS 80 GS 80 GS 80 GS 81 GS 84 GS 79 GS 79 GS 79 GS 79 GS 64 GS 64 GS 64 GS 65 GS 66 GS 66 GS 66 GS 66 GS 66 GS 66 GS 67 GS 68 GS 69 GS 70 GS 71
Ugdg Spec GS Page 1
HOUSING & DEVELOPMENT BOARD
STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS FOR UPGRADING WORKS
SECTION 1 : GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS
1.1
GENERAL
1.1.1
Definitions, Abbreviations and Interpretations In the Specifications, the following words and expressions shall have the meanings hereby assigned to them except where the context otherwise requires : "SO Rep"or SO's Rep" "as approved" "as directed" "or other approved" shall mean the Superintending Officer's Representative.
shall mean as approved by the Superintending Officer's Representative. shall mean as directed by the Superintending Officer's Representative. shall mean as approved by the Superintending Officer's Representative and as further defined in subclause 1.6.3 "Approval of Samples and Trade Names" of the General Specifications. shall mean as required or as shown or as indicated in the Drawings and/or Specifications.
"as required" or "as shown" or "as indicated" "HDB List"
shall mean the Housing and Development Board's List Of Products And Suppliers.
The following abbreviations are used in the Specifications : AISI ANSI ASTM BCD BS BCA cm cm2 or cm2 3 cm or cm3 CP CPF DIN EIA EMA FSSD g Grid/PowerGrid HDB IDA IEC IECEE JIS kg KN or kN LTA m ml mm m2 or m2 = American Iron & Steel Institute American National Standard Institute American Society for Testing and Material Building Control Division British Standard Building and Construction Authority centimetre square centimetre cubic centimetre Code of Practice Central Provident Fund Board Deutche Industrie Normen Electronic Industry Association Energy Market Authority Fire Safety & Shelter Department gram Power Grid Ltd Housing & Development Board Info-Communications Development Authority of Singapore International Electrotechnical Commission IEC System for Conformity Testing and Certification of Electrical Equipment Japanese Industrial Standard kilogram kilonewton Land Transport Authority metre millilitre millimetre square metre
UPG07/S1.DOC(1) lkk(181206) DPD
Ugdg Spec GS Page 2
1.1.1
Definitions, Abbreviations and Interpretations (Cont'd) mm or mm2 3 m or m3 mm3 or mm3 MEWR MSSL MOM MRT MRTC N NEA NParks No. or no. PE SPSL PSB PUB RC or rc SAC SCV SINGLAS SS TC TIA SingTel v/v w/w C % < >
2
square millimetre cubic metre cubic millimetre Ministry of the Environment and Water Resources Market Support Services Licensee Ministry of Manpower Mass Rapid Transit Mass Rapid Transit Corporation newton National Environment Agency National Parks Board number Professional Engineer SP Services Ltd PSB Corporation Pte Ltd Public Utilities Board Reinforced Concrete Singapore Accreditation Council StarHub Cable Vision Pte Ltd Singapore Laboratory Accreditation Scheme Singapore Standard Town Council Telecommunications Industry Association Singapore Telecommunications Ltd measured by volume measured by weight degree Celcius percent or percentage plus or minus lesser than or equal greater than or equal lesser than greater than
Words importing the singular shall also include the plural and vice versa where the context requires. The clause headings in the Specifications shall not be deemed to be part thereof or be taken into consideration in the interpretation or construction thereof or of the Contract. All clauses in the Specifications shall be deemed to be directed at the Contractor unless expressly specified otherwise to the contrary and the Contractor shall perform and/or comply with such instructions, directions, requirements and obligations specified in the Specifications and required under the Contract. All Acts of Parliament, statutes, regulations, bye-laws, orders, local and foreign standards and codes of practice specified shall be deemed to refer to the latest and shall be deemed to include any amendments, and/or modifications and/or additions and/or re-enactments thereto.
1.1.2
Payment of Employer's Bills Expenses, etc The Contractor shall duly and punctually pay to the Employer the billed and any other expenses incurred by the Employer in respect of the supply of materials, services, etc. The Contractor shall also pay to the Employer interest at the rate of seven percent per annum or such other rate as may be determined from time to time by the Employer in respect of any arrears of payment or other outstanding sums due and payable to the Employer, from the due dates until payment in full is received by the Employer. The Employer reserves the right to set off such bills and expenses against monies due or becoming due to the Contractor before payment of the balance, if any, to the Contractor. In this respect, all Employer's bills and other expenses due from the Contractor shall have priority over debts due to third parties.
Ugdg Spec GS Page 3
1.1.3
Insurance Policies The Contractor shall warrant that the insurance policies issued in accordance with Clauses 27 and 28 of the Conditions shall include the following requirements : (A) Insurance for Workmen's Compensation (i) (ii) The Policy shall be issued in the prescribed form attached and shown as Appendix W1. The Insured shall be "(Name of Contractor to insert) as Contractor and all his subcontractors, and the Housing & Development Board as Principal FTRR & I". The period of insurance shall commence from the date the site is handed over to the Contractor and shall end upon expiry of the Defects Liability Period under the Contract. The policy shall firstly cover the whole of original Time for Completion plus 6 months and plus a further 12 months for Defects Liability Period.
(iii)
(B)
Insurance for Personal Injury and Property Damage (i) The Policy shall be issued in the joint names of the Employer, the Contractor and all his sub-contractors. The limits of liability shall be as specified under the Appendix To Public Sector Standard Conditions Of Contract For Construction Works. The period of insurance shall commence from the date the site is handed over to the Contractor and shall end upon expiry of the Defects Liability Period under the Contract. The policy shall firstly cover the whole of original Time for Completion plus 6 months and plus a further 12 months for Defects Liability Period. The period of notice for cancellation of the Policy, if such period is stipulated, shall read 30 days. The Policy shall expressly include coverage of the following risks : (a) Death, bodily injury or damage to property caused or occasioned by the insured's sub-contractor or by such sub-contractors' employees. Death, bodily injury or damage to property caused or occasioned by or connected with or arising from the ownership, possession or use by or on behalf of the insured of any equipment or machinery not expressly specified in the Schedule of such equipment or machinery. Liability assumed by the insured by agreement, unless such liability would have attached to the insured notwithstanding such agreement. Liability in respect of loss or damage to property belonging to or in the charge or control of the insured or of any servant or agent of the insured. Liability in respect of injury to or illness of any person or loss or damage to any property or land or building caused by vibration or removal or weakening of support. Liability in respect of injury, illness, loss or damage caused by or connected with or arising from any commodity, article or thing supplied, repaired, altered or treated by or to the order of the insured, happening at any of the insured's premises.
(ii)
(iii)
(iv)
(v)
(b)
(c)
(d)
(e)
(f)
Ugdg Spec GS Page 4
1.1.3
Insurance Policies (Cont'd) (B) Insurance for Personal Injury and Property Damage (Cont'd) (vi) The policy shall expressly contain the following endorsements : (a) "This Policy shall cover all the Contractor's insurance obligations with regard to personal injuries or death and injury or damage to property real or personal (including property of the Housing & Development Board but not the Works themselves) arising out of or in the course of or by reasons of the carrying out of the Works stated in the Contract between the Housing & Development Board and the Contractor (name of Contractor to insert)." "Each of the parties comprising the Insured shall for the purpose of this Policy be considered as a separate and distinct unit and the words "the Insured" shall be considered as applying to such party in the same manner as if a separate policy had been issued to each of the parties and the insurers hereby agree to waive all rights of subrogation action which they may have or acquired against of any accident in respect of which any claims is made hereunder provided nevertheless that nothing in this clause shall be deemed to increase the limitation on extent of Insurer's liability in respect of any one accident or series of accidents as stated in the Schedule." "This Policy is extended to cover the employees and/or representatives of the Housing & Development Board, consultants, other professional parties and clerk-ofworks whilst on the contract site as third parties". Notwithstanding anything stated in the Policy to the contrary, cover under the Policy shall not be suspended in the event of stoppage of work by the Contractor on the Contract site from any cause for a period not exceeding 90 days. In the event of partial or total cessation of work, the Insured shall use diligence and do all things reasonably practicable to protect the insured property. Subject otherwise to the Terms Exceptions and Conditions of this Policy
(b)
(c)
(d)
(C)
Insurance for Works (i) (ii) (iii) (iv) The Policy shall be issued in the joint names of the Employer and the Contractor. The Works insured shall read the project title given in the Employer's Letter of Acceptance. The sum insured shall be the same as the Contract Sum. The period of insurance shall commence form the date the site is handed over to the Contractor and shall end upon expiry of the Defects Liability Period under the Contract. The policy shall firstly cover the whole of original Time for Completion plus 6 months and plus a further 12 months for Defects Liability Period. The period of notice for cancellation of the Policy, if such period is stipulated, shall read 30 days. The policy shall expressly contain the following endorsements : (a) "This Policy shall cover all the Contractor's Works insurance obligations stated in the Contract between the Housing & Development Board and the Contractor (name of Contractor to insert)." Notwithstanding anything stated in the Policy to the contrary, cover under the Policy shall not be suspended in the event of stoppage of work by the Contractor on the Contract site from any cause for a period not exceeding 90 days. In the event of partial or total cessation of work, the Insured shall use diligence and do all things reasonably practicable to protect the insured property. Subject otherwise to the Terms Exceptions and Conditions of this Policy
(v)
(vi)
(b)
Ugdg Spec GS Page 5
1.1.4
Stamp Duties The Contractor shall have all documents required by or arising out of or in connection with this Contract properly stamped to comply with the Stamp Duties Act. The costs and expenses arising out this obligation, including all stamp duties required, shall be borne by the Contractor and shall be deemed to have been allowed for in the Contract Sum.
1.1.5
Novation, Assignment and Direct Submission of Warranties and Agreements In the event the management and maintenance of the Employer's properties or the Works or any part thereof shall be taken over by a duly constituted Town Council, the Employer shall have the right to arrange for, and the Contractor and his Specialist (if applicable) shall agree and accept the whole or part of the Contract to be novated and/or assigned to the aforesaid Town Council upon the same terms and conditions. The Employer shall also have the right to require and the Contractor and his Specialist (if applicable) shall agree and accept, that any Deeds of Warranty and/or Maintenance Agreements and/or Bonds and/or Deposits required under the Contract shall be executed and submitted direct to and for the benefit of the aforesaid Town Council. The Contractor is deemed to have allowed in the Contract Sum all costs, expenses, stamp duties and losses arising from compliance with these provisions.
1.1.6
Liquidated Damages for Delay in Completion In the event completion of the Works specified in the Appendix to the Public Sector Standard Conditions of Contract For Construction Works is further divided into separate phases or sub-phases, the rate of liquidated damages in respect of each phase or sub-phase of the Works shall be re-computed according to the following rates and pro-rated against the original amount specified in the aforesaid Appendix : Works inside Flats (exceeding Maximum Allowable Working Days) Works inside Shops with/without Living Quarter (exceeding Maximum Allowable Working Days) Works inside Eating Houses/Fast Food Outlet/Coffee House/ Restaurant with/without Living Quarter (exceeding Maximum Allowable Working Days) Works inside Communal and Social premises, eg. kindergarten (exceeding Maximum Allowable Working Days) Works in common areas within the Block Outside Units Works in common areas within the Precinct Outside Blocks Multi-storey carpark - Carpark Lot Utility Centre/Detached Dustbin Compound Electrical Substation Consumer Switchroom Market/Hawker Centre : $100.00 per unit per day
$80.00 per unit per day
: : : : : : :
$240.00 per block per day $600.00 per day $5.00 per lot per day $45.00 per number per day $470.00 per number per day $25.00 per number per day $50.00 per 100 m
2
Ugdg Spec GS Page 6
1.1.7
Indemnity Against Claims By Occupants The Contractor shall indemnify the Employer against all claims, demands proceedings damages costs charges and expenses submitted by any Occupant arising out of or in consequence of any delay in completion of the Works.
1.1.8
Provisional Sum Where Provisional Sum Items are included in the Contract, they shall be inclusive of all costs necessary in carrying out or supplying the work, materials or goods. These Provisional Sum Items shall be inclusive of the Contractor's profit and overheads but shall be net of trade and cash discounts.
1.1.9
Prime Cost Sums Where Prime Cost Sums (P.C. Sums) are provided for any work, materials or goods, these sums shall be inclusive of carriage but exclusive of Contractor's profit and attendance. These P.C. Sums shall also be net of trade and cash discounts. The Contractor shall allow and separately price for profit and attendance in respect of such P.C. Sums in the Form of Tender. P.C. Sums shall be deducted from the Contract Sum and in lieu thereof shall be added the sums due to the Contractor for the said work, materials or goods. The sum allowed by the Contractor in the Contract for attendance in respect of any P.C. Sum shall be fixed regardless of whether the actual sum expended is greater or less than the P.C. Sum. In respect of profit, the amount to be paid shall be the percentage quoted by the Contractor against the actual sum expended in relation to the P.C. Sum. Should the work, materials or goods for which a P.C. Sum is provided in the Contract be not required, or if the Employer chooses to carry out or supply the aforesaid work, materials or goods by his own workmen or by other contractors, which the Employer is contractually entitled so to choose, then such P.C. Sum together with the profit and attendance allowed by the Contractor in the Contract shall be deducted in full from the Contract Sum. Should the Contractor himself be engaged or instructed to carry out or supply any work, materials or goods under a P.C. Sum, the profit and attendance allowed by the Contractor in the Contract in respect of the P.C. Sum shall be deducted in full from the Contract Sum. In such event, the amount to be paid to the Contractor for the work, materials or goods shall be inclusive of the Contractor's overheads and profit for the work, materials and goods.
1.1.10
Overclaim Leading to Overpayment If at any time during the Time for Completion and any time period where liquidated damages are imposed under the Contract, the Contractor is found to have over-claimed and was paid for more than the value of the Permanent Works carried out and/or approved unfixed materials at the Site, the SO Rep shall be empowered to deduct from the Contractor's subsequent payments the sum overpaid together with the Employer's charge and interest calculated at seven percent per annum.
1.1.11
Recovery of Legal Costs for Court Proceedings All legal costs, charges and expenses (including but not limited to solicitors' fees as between solicitor and client) incurred by the Employer for the purpose of or incidental to the enforcement by the Employer of any rights and remedies under the Contract or any other contracts between the Employer and the Contractor or in respect of any garnishee proceedings which may be brought or commenced against the Employer by the Contractor's creditors may be deducted by the Employer from monies due or becoming due to the Contractor including any retention monies, financial bonds or security deposits or other bonds.
Ugdg Spec GS Page 7
1.1.12
Goods and Services Tax The Contractor shall not include in the rates and prices quoted in the Contract Sum, the Goods and Services Tax (hereinafter referred to as "GST") chargeable from 1 April 1994 for the supply of goods, services or works required in the Contract. All rates and prices quoted shall be exclusive of GST. The Employer shall reimburse the Contractor any GST charged on the goods, services or works supplied. The Contractor shall declare his GST status in his Tender. The Contractor shall clearly indicate whether he is, or whether he will be a taxable person under the GST Act. The Contractor shall, if available, furnish the GST registration number to the Employer. The Contractor will be deemed to be a taxable person if no declaration to the contrary is made in the Form of Tender. The Contractor who declares himself to be a non-taxable person under the GST Act but who becomes a taxable person after he has been awarded the Contract shall forthwith inform the Employer of his change in GST status. The Contractor shall be entitled to reimbursement by the Employer of any GST charged on the goods, services or works he supplies after his change in GST status.
1.1.13
Carriage by Sea The Contractor shall ensure that the carriage by sea of all goods, materials and equipment imported for the purposes of this Contract shall be on vessels owned and operated by shipping lines which are approved lines at the time the contract of carriage is entered into. Other ships may be used only if no approved line: (a) can deliver the goods, material and equipment in time to meet the delivery dates specified in the Contract; or can provide the same measure of service at the same cost.
(b)
The Bills of Lading for the goods, material or equipment used by an approved line(s) shall be sufficient evidence of their carriage by an approved line(s) in compliance with this Clause. Where the carrier is not an approved line, the Contractor shall satisfy the SO Rep that the conditions herein stated have been satisfied. The SO Rep may require and the Contractor shall forthwith furnish to the SO Rep letters from each and every approved line at the time the contract of carriage with the carrier is entered into stating that in respect of the shipment in issue they are either unable to quote or to provide the service required. Notwithstanding anything contained in this Clause, the Employer shall not be responsible for any act or default of the carrier or for any loss or damage sustained by the Contractor on account of having to comply with this Clause. The list of current approved lines can be obtained from the Procurment Office, Development And Procurement Department, HDB, Basement 1, HDB Hub, 480 Lorong 6, Toa Payoh, Singapore 310480.
1.1.14
Bribery During the currency of this Contract, the Contractor and his authorized agents or representatives shall not offer or attempt to offer any bribes, commission or gift to the Employer's employees. Should it be discovered that bribes, commission or gift have been given to any of the Employer's employees, the employment of the Contractor under this Contract may be terminated. The decision of the Superintending Officer with regard to the interpretation and implementation of this Clause shall be final and binding on and conclusive against the Contractor.
Ugdg Spec GS Page 8
1.1.15
Site Occupation The Site will be occupied by occupants throughout the duration of the Works. The Employer has also engaged and/or will engage other Contractor or other Contractors who will also use the Site at the same time as the Contractor is carrying out the Works. The Contractor shall not make any claim against the Employer in respect of acts or omissions of such occupants other than claims falling within Clause 14 of the Conditions. The Contractor shall not delay or obstruct or interfere unnecessarily or improperly with the occupants' right of peaceful and quiet enjoyment of the premises and site or to delay or obstruct or interfere with such other Contractors in carrying out of their works.
1.1.16
Works And/Or Materials Warranty (a) In every case where the Specifications require the Contractor's Specialist to co-warrant the works or materials to be executed or supplied under the Contract, such Specialist, subject to such other requirements as may be prescribed in the Specifications, may only be employed by the Contractor with the Employer's prior written approval, and the Employer will approve such employment if the Specialist gives his written undertaking to execute the Deed of Warranty prescribed under the Specifications. If such written undertaking is not given, then the Contractor shall appoint an alternative Specialist willing to give the written undertaking. The employment of any Specialist who refuses to give his written undertaking will not be recognised by the Employer, and no Specialist may commence any work or supply any materials before his written undertaking is given. The Employer's prior written approval of such Specialist's employment shall not in any way affect or diminish the Contractor's contractual obligations to the Employer in respect of any work or materials executed or supplied by such Specialist on behalf of the Contractor, and the provisions of this Clause shall not in any way affect or diminish the Employer's entitlement to withhold the payment of any sums due to the Contractor by reason of the Contractor's and/or Specialist's failure to execute and submit the Deed of Warranty within the time specified.
(b)
1.1.17
Assessment Of Extension Of Time Due To Exceptionally Inclement Weather
The assessment of exceptionally inclement weather shall not take place until the expiry of the Time for Completion or previously extended Time for Completion. Such assessment shall be made on the following basis :
(a)
There shall first be assessed the number of wet days and equivalent wet days (as specified in paragraph (f) below on which the Contractor has been substantially delayed in the carrying out of the Works by rain (hereinafter called "delay days"). A wet day shall be one where the rainfall figure as calculated as described in this paragraph exceeds 10.2 mm during the 24 hour period used by the Meteorological Service. The rainfall figure shall be the average island-wide rainfall calculated by the Employer using rainfall records received by the Employer monthly from the 5 Standard Stations of the Meteorological Service. The expected number of wet days during the Time for Completion or extended Time for Completion as the case may be shall be derived from the following table which is deemed to record the average number of wet days for the respective months based on the Meteorological Service's records between 1995 and 2004 (hereinafter referred to as "expected wet days") :
(b)
(c)
Jan 7 Jul 5 (d)
Feb 4 Aug 6
Mar 6 Sep 5
Apr 7 Oct 6
May 5 Nov 7
Jun 4 Dec 8
For each month of the Time for Completion or extended Time for Completion as the case may be there shall be assessed whether the number of delay days in that month is more than (positive) or equal to (zero) or less than (negative) the expected wet days in that month.
Ugdg Spec GS Page 9
1.1.17
Assessment Of Extension Of Time Due To Exceptionally Inclement Weather (Cont'd) (e) The positive, zero and negative monthly assessments made in accordance with paragraph (d) above shall then be added together and a net total reached. If such total is a positive number then such total shall constitute the extension of time due to exceptionally inclement weather. The period commencing from excavation works to the completion of ground beams where the ground floor slab is not a critical activity or the completion of ground floor slab where the ground floor slab is a critical activity is hereinafter called "sub-structure construction period" and the works carried out during such period is hereinafter called "sub-structure works". For the assessment of extension of time due to exceptionally inclement weather during the substructure construction period, the respective monthly average number of wet days as specified in paragraph (b) above shall be multiplied by a factor of 2.0 if the wet days are less than or equal to 5 or by a factor of 1.6 if the wet days exceed 5. The product so derived shall be referred to as "equivalent wet days" and are subject to a maximum of 30 days per month. (g) If the sub-structure works do not commence on the first day of the month, then the number of equivalent wet days for that month in which the sub-structure works commence shall be pro-rated in accordance with the proportion of the number of calendar days for the construction of substructure works in that month to the total number of calendar days in the said month. Similarly, if the sub-structure works are not completed on the last calendar day of the month, then the number of equivalent wet days for that month in which the sub-structure works are completed shall be prorated in accordance with the proportion of the number of calendar days for the construction of substructure works in that month to the total number of calendar days in the said month. The assessment of extension of time due to exceptionally inclement weather during the sub-structure construction period shall be based on the actual sub-structure construction period of each building block, including multi-storey carpark/garage.
(f)
1.1.18
Research Work, Publicity Materials and Community Relations Activities The Contractor shall render all necessary assistance to the SO Rep or other authorised persons undertaking research work or procuring publicity material or organising any community relations activities on any aspects of the work including the holding of block parties. The Contractor shall provide all necessary assistance, attendance, facilities, utilities, etc for filming, video recording or other media activities undertaken on the Employer's behalf. The Contractor shall also allow his staff and workers to be featured in such films, recordings or other media activities. All costs and expense incurred by the Contractor shall be deemed to be included in the tender sum.
1.1.19
Contract Documents And Reference Material On Site The Contractor shall keep at the Site a complete set of the signed Contract documents described in the Agreement; and a complete set of the further or revised Drawings and instructions referred to in the Conditions, and the relevant Codes of Practice or Standards. The documents shall be made available for inspection and use by the Superintending Officer, SO Rep and any other person authorised by the Superintending Officer in writing.
1.1.20
Shortfall In Floor Area The Contractor shall at his own cost and expense ensure that the Space Adding Items constructed comply in all respects with all Drawings and Specifications. In the event of any departure from such Drawings and Specifications resulting in a shortfall in the floor area of any of the Space Adding Items constructed as compared to the same floor area as measured in accordance with the Drawings and Specifications, the Contractor shall indemnify, reimburse and hold the Employer harmless in respect of any demands, claims, damages, loss and/or expense (including any legal fees and expense that the Employer may incur) arising therefrom. The Contractor shall remain so liable notwithstanding the issuance by the Superintending Officer of any Certificate of Substantial Completion, Final Completion Certificate and/or any Final Account Certificate under the Contract.
Ugdg Spec GS Page 10 1.1.21 Trade Subcontractors The Contractor, with the exception of his own direct employed workers, shall engage only BCA registered contractors or SLOTS (Singapore List of Trade Subcontractors) registered trade subcontractors or corporations/firms listed in the HDB List for executing the Works for the following trades : (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8) (9) (10) (11) (12) (13) (14) (15) (16) (17) (18) (19) (20) (21) (22) (23) Timber formwork; Metal formwork; Steel reinforcement work; Structural steel fitting; Concreting; Bricklaying; Joinery; Painting; Plastering; Roofing; Tiling; Electrical engineering; Air-conditioning, refrigeration & ventilation works; Plumbing & sanitary and gas piping; Fire protection; Waterproofing; Piling; Concrete repairs; Metal work; Cable installation & road reinstatement; Drain laying/Pavement & kerb construction; Curtain Wall/Cladding; Metal scaffolding (Erectors);
Within 14 days from the date of the Letter of Acceptance, the Contractor shall submit a list of his subcontractors for the Works to the SO Rep. Where the Contractor changes his subcontractor, he shall also submit such information to the SO Rep. For the purposes of this clause, the relevant BCA register, SLOTS register and HDB List shall be those applicable at the commencement of work for the respective trades. The Contractor shall be responsible for any eventual delay in the progress of the Works owing to his failure to ensure the required on-time registration of his subcontractors and no extension to the Time for Completion shall be granted on account of such delays.
1.1.22
Contract Payment By GIRO/EPS All payments under the Contract by the Employer to the Contractor shall be effected through the InterBank GIRO System and/or other Electronic Payment Systems. The Contractor shall submit all the necessary forms, such as Inter-Bank GIRO (IBG) form, etc, duly completed and signed, to the Finance Department, HDB, HDB Hub, 480 Lorong 6, Toa Payoh, Singapore 310480; within fourteen days from the date of the Letter of Acceptance to effect payments through such Systems. In the event the payment arrangement through such Systems terminates for whatever reasons, the Contractor shall re-submit all the necessary forms to the Finance Department within 14 days from the date of the termination.
Ugdg Spec GS Page 11 1.1.23 Restriction on Use of Project Information The Contractor shall ensure that he or his subcontractors/suppliers do not quote or make references to the project design, products, technologies or methods of construction used in the Works for trade promotion, advertisement, publicity, etc or any other purposes without the written approval of the SO Rep. This requirement shall not be applicable to proprietary products, technologies or methods of construction introduced by the contractor or his subcontractor/suppliers. The Contractor shall further undertake that all information and documentation disclosed or made available to him pertaining to particulars of residents or their flats, shall not be used for any purpose other than for effective execution of the Works. In this regard, the Contractor shall, within 21 days after the acceptance of the Contractor's Tender by the Employer, submit, without any proviso, a Letter of Undertaking as shown in Attachment A.
1.1.24
STAND-BY PLUMBER AND ELECTRICIAN FOR RESTORING ESSENTIAL SERVICES DURING DEFECTS LIABILITY PERIOD (a) The Contractor shall also provide a stand-by plumber and a stand-by electrician for 24 hour standby duties for every day, including Sundays and Public Holidays, throughout the Defects Liability Period. The plumber and electrician need not be stationed on the Site but would be called upon to rectify Defect causing disruption to essential supply such as water and electricity The Contractor or his representatives shall be contactable 24 hours a day, for every day, including Sundays and Public Holidays throughout the Defects Liability Period by means of telephone, handphone, radio pager, facsimile or any other suitable modes of communications The stand-by plumber and/or stand-by electrician shall attend to such Defect within 30 minutes from the time a request for their services is made. They shall carry out the rectification expeditiously and in a workmanlike manner to restore the essential services quickly to minimise any inconveniences to the residents. In the event the stand-by plumber and/or stand-by electrician fail to attend or fail to attend within the time frame stipulated, the SO Rep shall exercise his right to impose charges under clause 1.6 'Nuisance and Irregularities". Within fourteen days from the Date of Substantial Completion of the 1st building block, the Contractor shall submit to the SO Rep for his approval the name and contact numbers of the standby plumber and stand-by electrician.
(b)
(c)
(d)
1.1.25
Audit Of M & E Systems The Contractor shall test the M&E systems and rectify all Defect before submiting all M&E systems test reports endorsed by the Consultant to HDB Building Quality Department. HDB Building Quality Department reserves the right to audit any of the M & E systems installed by the Contractor. The Contractor shall provide the necessary manpower, equipment and means of access for the audit by HDB. The Contractor shall rectify all Defect detected during the audit and report to the Consultant for verification
Ugdg Spec GS Page 12
1.1.26 1.1.26.1
PROTECTION OF PERSONAL DATA Security The Contractor shall take all reasonable measures to ensure that Personal Data held in connection with this Contract is protected against loss, and against unauthorised access, use, modification, disclosure or other misuse in accordance with the procedures set out in these Clause and subclauses, and that only authorised personnel have access to the data. The Contractor shall not vary the security procedures set out in this Contract without the prior written approval of the HDB.
1.1.26.2
Use The Contractor shall use any Personal Data held in connection with this Contract only for the purposes of fulfilling its obligations under this Contract.
1.1.26.3
Disclosure The Contractor shall not disclose any Personal Data obtained in connection with this Contract without the written approval of the HDB. The Contractor shall immediately notify the HDB where it becomes aware that a disclosure of Personal Data may be required by law.
1.1.26.4
Transfer Of Personal Data Outside Singapore The Contractor shall not transfer Personal Data held in connection with this Contract outside Singapore, or allow parties outside Singapore to have access to it, without the prior written approval of the HDB.
1.1.26.5
Employee Awareness Of Data Protection Requirements And Undertakings The Contractor shall ensure that any employee of the Contractor or any sub-contractor, requiring access to any Personal Data held in connection with this Contract gives an undertaking in writing to not access, use disclose or retain Personal Data except in performing their duties of employment and is informed that failure to comply with this undertaking may be a criminal offence and may also lead the Contractor to take disciplinary action against the employee.
1.1.26.6
Advising The HDB Of Any Breach Of The Data Protection Clauses The Contractor shall in respect of any Personal Data held in connection with this Contract immediately notify the HDB where the Contractor becomes aware of any breach of the obligations contained herein by itself or any sub- contractor, or by their respective employees.
1.1.26.7
Reasonable Requests, Directions And Guidelines The Contractor shall in respect of any Personal Data held in connection with this Contract co-operate with any reasonable requests, directions or guidelines of the HDB, or HDBs nominee/agent, arising in connection with the handling of Personal Data.
1.1.26.8
Ensuring Clauses Have Effect After The Contract Has Ended All the above Clauses shall continue to have effect after the termination or expiry of the Contract.
1.1.26.9
Sub-Contracting Whether or not the Contract contains clauses that prevent sub-contracting or assignment without the consent of the HDB, the written approval of the HDB must still be obtained pursuant to the clauses herein, before any Personal Data can be disclosed to any sub-contractor or assignee. The Contractor shall ensure that all clauses relating to protection of Personal Data are included in any Contract between the Contractor and sub-contractor or assignee.
1.1.27
Precautionary Measures To Be Taken During A Disease Pandemic The contractor shall be required to implement necessary precautionary measures as advised by the Ministry of Health or other relevant Authorities during a disease pandemic. Based on the recommendations from the government's advisory, the contractor shall follow up expeditiously to plan for such contingency and stock up necessary supplies or equipment (eg thermometers) so as to be able to implement the required measures in a short notice.
1.1.28
Alternative Offer For Inclusion Of M& E Lift Plant Notwithstanding that the Form of Tender may not have any option for Tenderers to offer M& E Lift Plant, Tenderers may, in addition to submitting a Base Offer which comply fully or very substantially with the Specifications, submit alternative offers which include the provision of M&E Lift Plant. The M& E Lift Plant offered shall be from approved suppliers listed in the HDBs List of Products & Suppliers. Tenderers shall also comply with all the provisions stipulated in the Instructions To Tenderers
1.2
WORK PARAMETERS
1.2.1
Maximum Allowable Working Period All Works inside each Unit must be entirely completed in not more than the total number of working days (Maximum Allowable Working Days) stated in the Appendix to the Public Sector Standard Conditions of Contract For Construction Works. The Maximum Allowable Working Days for all Works Inside Units for all Units located in the same Block or Phase must fall within the Overall Time For Completion stated in the aforesaid Appendix. For the purpose of this Clause, the Maximum Allowable Working Days shall not include the part of work in the erection of any components (including balconies, room extensions etc.) or fittings where workers do not need to gain access into the interior of the Units. The computation of the number of working days in which the Contractor has access into the interior of Units shall be based on the minimum unit of one day irrespective of the amount of time the Contractor spent inside the Unit during the particular day. If the works inside each Unit remains incomplete within the Maximum Allowable Working Days and/or within the Overall Time for Completion, the amount(s) stated in the Appendix to the Public Sector Standard Conditions of Contract For Construction Works as liquidated damages for Works Inside Units exceeding the Maximum Allowable Working Days or exceeding the Overall Time for Completion or both shall become payable by the contractor.
1.2.2
Maximum Number of Workers for Works within Flat Not more than five (5) workers shall be allowed to carry out works within each unit at anytime. The Contractor shall employ the same workers for each trade to execute and complete the works within each unit. The workers shall not be replaced unless prior approval from the SO Rep has been obtained.
1.2.3
Working Hours Notwithstanding Clause 11.1 of the Public Sector Standard Conditions of Contract For Construction Works and the Particular Conditions of Contract, the Contractor shall carry out Works within the flats between 9.00 am and 5.00 pm daily from Mondays to Saturdays. For Works within the block outside the flat and works within the precinct, the Contractor shall carry out the works between 8.00 am to 6.00 pm daily from Mondays through Saturdays. None of the Works shall be carried out during the hours outside the time period aforesaid or on Sundays or on public holidays without the permission in writing of the SO Rep.
1.2.4
Maximum Allowable Noise Level Judicious management and control over the activities within the construction site shall be exercised by the Contractor for the abatement of noise nuisance. The noise level generated shall comply with the following maximum allowable noise standards and the latest noise control regulations imposed by the relevant authorities : Duration Per Day [Hours] 8 4 2 1 The method of measurement shall be as follows : Source of Noise Outside the flat Within the flat Point of Measurement The nearest flat or not exceeding 10m from source. The nearest room or not exceeding 5m from source. Point of Measurement [dB(A)] 80 85 90 95 100
1.2.4
Maximum Allowable Noise Level (Cont'd) Failure to comply with the above noise level requirements shall be deemed a breach of Clause 1.10 "Nuisance & Irregularities". An administrative charge will be imposed for each occasion of noncompliance. The Contractor shall, whenever necessary, modify his work methods immediately to ensure compliance with the noise level specified. The Contractor shall provide two numbers of one-man-operated sound level meters for the SO Rep to measure and monitor the noise level throughout the duration of the Works. The Contractor shall submit proposals for the purchase and use of the sound measurement instrument within 14 days after acceptance of his Tender for the approval of the SO Rep.
1.2.5
Site Conditions and Information The flats, shops, etc on Site shall remain occupied by the Occupants during the execution of all Works. The information on the existing buildings and services on Site furnished in this Contract is offered as available information and may not reflect the most accurate data; its accuracy is not guaranteed and the Contractor must verify actual site conditions to his satisfaction by whatever non-destructive methods he deems appropriate, subject to the Employer's approval. The Contractor shall be deemed to have visited the Site before tendering and satisfied himself as to the local conditions, accessibility, the full extent and character of the Works, the supply of and conditions affecting labour and the probable adverse effect of weather on the general execution of the Contract. The Contractor shall also be deemed to have satisfied himself as to the Occupants' fittings and fixtures (including furniture, electrical appliances, finishes, etc.) within flats, shops, etc. that will be affected by the Works and the probable extent of damage, removal and protection, of such fittings and fixtures that may be required. The occupants' fittings and fixtures that are likely to be affected may include but are not limited to the following items : (a) (b) (c) (d) (e) (f) (g) (h) (i) window grilles furniture cookers, ovens sinks, basins etc. cabinets, wardrobes, etc electrical appliances and wirings water/gas pipes floor/wall tiles air-conditioners (window units, compressors, etc)
No claims shall be allowed on grounds of ignorance of the conditions under which the Works will be executed.
1.2.6
Joint Site Inspection Prior to the commencement of the Works on site, the Contractor shall arrange a joint site inspection with the SO Rep to determine the existing conditions of the site. For Works within the flats, the joint site inspection shall involve the occupants of the flats. All existing defects, type and conditions of structures, fittings and fixtures on site including those within occupants' flats shall be properly recorded by way of notes, sketches and photographs. The records of items in common areas within the block and precinct shall be endorsed jointly by the Contractor and the SO Rep. The records of items within the flats shall be jointly endorsed by the Contractor, SO Rep and the occupants of each individual flat. The original copy of the records shall be retained by the SO Rep with a copy kept by the Contractor.
1.2.6
Joint Site Inspection (Cont'd) The records shall include but not be limited to the following : (i) (ii) (iii) (iv) (v) (vi) (vii) (viii) (ix) (x) Existing defects to be repaired and rectified by the Contractor; Existing defects the rectification of which is not included in the contract; Elements to be altered and the extent of alteration; Elements to be demolished and the extent of demolition; Elements to be replaced; Elements to be added; Existing condition and/or defects of occupants' fittings and fixtures; Occupants' fittings and fixtures to be removed and the extent of such removal; Occupants' fittings and fixtures that are likely to be damaged, the probable extent of such damage and reasons why such damage is inevitable. Any other items as directed by the SO Rep.
1.2.7
Use of Common Areas and Surrounding Estate The Contractor shall confine his work site within the designated contract boundary unless prior written permission has been obtained from the SO Rep. No trespassing on the surrounding carpark/property is permitted. The Contractor shall ensure that his workers take their meals and rest within the approved workers' rest area and that they do not make use of the common areas (eg. void decks, common corridors, etc), empty units or other structures and open spaces whether within or outside the contract boundary as living quarters, rest area or for any other use at any time during the Time for Completion and any time period where liquidated damages are imposed under the Contract. No workman, except on official duty approved by the SO Rep, is allowed to stay within the site boundary after working hours. Building materials are not allowed to be placed or stored outside the contract boundary unless approved by SO Rep. Unless otherwise approved by the SO Rep, an adequate area within the contract boundary shall be set aside by the Contractor for the residents to hold functions like religious ceremonies, funeral wakes, etc. The size of the area to be provided, its location and any subsequent changes to them shall be subject to the approval of the SO Rep.
1.2.8
TOL Fee for Land outside Contract Boundary Where the Contractor requires land outside the contract boundary for the setting up of workers' quarters and storage of materials for the Works, the Contractor shall check on the availability of such land and apply to the relevant Authority or Lands Management Section of HDB for the use of such land. In the event the relevant Authority or HDB's Lands Management Section allows the Contractor the use of such land, the Contractor shall at his own costs and expenses comply with all the terms and conditions, pay all TOL (Temporary Occupation Licence) fees, bear all costs and expenses for the use and maintenance of and access to the said land imposed by the relevant Authority or HDB's Lands Management Section. The Contractor shall reinstate the land to its original condition before handing over the land back to the Lands Management Section. The Contractor shall use such land allocated solely for the purpose of executing this Contract. Any payment for unused materials or goods stored at such land shall be subject to the provisions in Option Module B "Unused Materials or Goods not Delivered to Site" of the Conditions.
1.2.9
Detailed Work Programme Within one (1) month after the acceptance of his Tender, the Contractor shall submit a detailed programme of all works in the Contract to the SO Rep for approval. The programme shall include sequence of operations of all works inside each unit of flat, within each block and within the precinct and provide details of probable services disruption. Activities along the critical path shall be highlighted in the programme. Two and a half (2) months prior to the commencement of work within each unit of flat, the Contractor shall submit a detailed programme stating the types of work and all tasks to be carried out on each working day for the SO Rep's approval. In the event the SO Rep considers that the programme is unrealistic, incorrect or incomplete the SO Rep shall instruct the Contractor to correct, complete and re-submit the programme in a manner the SO Rep deems fit. The Contractor shall endeavour to plan carefully and diligently to ensure that any programme determined and submitted by him is within his ability to comply and perform. The Contractor is not allowed to commence any work before obtaining the written approval of the work programme from the SO Rep.
1.2.10
Preservation Of Trees Where any existing tree(s) on the Site is stipulated to be preserved (hereinafter referred to as "preserved trees" for the purpose of this clause), the Contractor shall take all necessary precaution to avoid damage or injury to such trees and its roots and comply with the following requirements : (A) Treatment of Preserved Trees In Area Of Fill (a) Tolerable Depth of Fill The area around preserved trees shall not be filled more than 300mm in depth. (b) Construction of Well Around Trees Well not exceeding 1m in depth shall be constructed around preserved trees. The minimum diameter of well shall be 6 times the diameter of preserved trees measured at the trunk 0.5m above ground level. Details of well shall be as shown in the Drawings. (B) Treatment Of Preserved Trees in Area of Cut (a) Tolerable Depth of Cut The area around preserved trees shall not be cut to a depth exceeding 300mm. (b) Retention of Raised Planter Around Tree An area around preserved trees shall be retained as raised planter to conserve the root system. The minimum diameter of raised planter shall be 6 times the diameter of preserved trees measured at the trunk 0.5m above ground level. Details of retention of raised planter are as shown in the Drawings.
1.2.10
Preservation Of Trees (Cont'd) (C) Protection Of Existing Trees From Physical Damage By Equipment Etc During Construction (a) All preserved trees shall be protected against damage during construction operation by suitable fencing or armouring. The protection of preserved trees shall be placed before commencing any excavation or grading operation/work and shall be maintained in repair for the duration of the contract unless otherwise directed. The extent of fencing shall be determined by the SO Rep. Fencing shall be erected all round not less than 1.2m from the trunk of preserved trees. Individual preserved trees near heavy construction traffic shall be wrapped with gunny sacks and 50mm x 100mm planks worn vertically as armour around the trunk and spaced at no more than 50mm apart to a height of 1.5m above ground. (b) Any damage to preserved tree root system shall be repaired immediately by the Contractor under the supervision of a qualified horticulturist. Roots that are exposed and/or damaged during grading operations shall be cut off immediately and the inside of the exposed and/or damaged area cleaned; cut surfaces shall be treated with approved sealing compound and topsoil spread over the exposed root area. Any damage to preserved tree branches shall be treated in accordance with the Drawings. (i) Branch Trimming Of Damaged Branches (1) A first cutting is to be made at point A, 300mm from the main trunk of preserved trees; depending on the diameter of the branch being cut. The depth of the cut shall not be more than of the diameter of the branch. A second cutting is to be made at point B, parallel to cutting at point A. The distance between these two cuttings shall be 75mm to 150mm. Make a shallow cut at C. Final cut is to be sharp and clear. 2 coats of anti-fungus wound sealant are to be applied on cut area.
(c)
(2) (3) (4) (5) (ii)
Wound Treatment (1) (2) (3) Clean away ragged or loose edges of bark with a sharp pruning knife. Shape the wound into an oval, pointed at both ends. Coat the entire exposed surface with tree-wound paint.
(d)
If any preserved trees are severely injured by mechanical equipment, etc., the SO Rep shall impose charges against the Contractor in accordance with Clause 1.10 "Nuisance And Irregularities".
(D)
Health & Condition Of Preserved Trees (a) The Contractor shall ensure that : (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) Compaction of soil around preserved trees shall be avoided. No materials shall be stored within the root system. There shall be no spillage of any nature within the spread of the preserved trees. There shall be no parking of vehicles underneath the preserved trees. There shall be no dumping of excavated materials, concrete, equipment etc. within the spread of the preserved trees crown. Soil around preserved trees is properly cultivated to ensure that adequate supply of air and water get to the roots.
1.2.10
Preservation Of Trees (Cont'd) (D) Health & Condition Of Preserved Trees (Cont'd) (a) (Cont'd) (7) (b) The site is drained in periods of heavy rainfall and irrigated during periods of drought.
The Contractor shall also carry out any other routine maintenance of the preserved trees eg. branch trimming, pesticide spraying etc. as instructed by the SO Rep. If the growth of the preserved trees is stifled, the Contractor shall inter-alia bear the cost of making good and charges in accordance with Clause 1.10 "Nuisance and Irregularities" shall be imposed against the Contractor.
(c)
1.2.11
EARTH CONTROL MEASURES The Contractor shall be responsible for preventing silt from being washed into public drains by implementing effective Earth Control Measures (ECM) for the construction site to meet the requirements under the latest Sewerage and Drainage Act Cap 294. (Information on ECM requirements can be found in the Code of Practice on Surface Water Drainage and the website www.pub.gov.sg/ECM). The Contractor shall note that the ECM are for the containment and treatment of silty discharges due to the impact of rainwater. ECM are not meant for the treatment of wastewater due to construction activities (such as slurry from tunnelling, pipe-jacking and bore-piling works) which shall be treated to comply with the requirements under Environmental Pollution Control Act (Chapter 94A). The Contractor shall submit in his Tender, the schematic ECM plans of the Site for the whole of the Time for Completion including any time periods where liquidated damages are imposed under the Contract, taking into account the different phases of construction activities. He shall also provide the name of the Qualified Erosion Control Professional (QECP) who will be endorsing the ECM plan after the tender is awarded. These schematic ECM plans shall make the Contractor aware of the ECM requirements to implement an effective ECM. Notwithstanding the submission of these schematic ECM plans, the Contractor shall be deemed to have included all costs and expenses for complying with all the ECM requirements in the Contract Sum Before construction works commence on site, the Contractor shall engage a QECP to plan and design the ECM, and he shall install the ECM according to the QECP's design. The ECM plan and design shall be submitted 1 week after the award of the contract. During the course of the construction works, the Contractor together with his QECP shall review the ECM proposal regularly to meet the changing needs of the construction activities. The Contractor shall improve the ECM as advised by his QECP. The planning and design of the ECM shall meet the minimum requirements stipulated and in accordance to the Code of Practice on Surface Water Drainage. The Contractor shall maintain the ECM for the whole duration of the Time for Completion including any time periods where liquidated damages are imposed under the Contract, to ensure that it is effective at all times. Proper records detailing the maintenance works, supported by dated photographs, shall be kept by the Contractor for verification. The Contractor shall not remove the ECM until all works are completed and upon the advice of his QECP. The Contractor shall submit the ECM proposal duly endorsed by his QECP to PUB for records. The proposed ECM shall consist of the following four parts: (i) Project Particulars The following information shall be provided under the Project Particulars: (a) Project description (b) Name and address of site occupier; (c) Site area and contract period; (d) Location map and site plan. (ii) Erosion Control Plan (described in 1.2.11.1) (iii) Sediment Control Plan (described in 1.2.11.2) (iv) Site ECM Management System (described in 1.2.11.3)
1.2.11.1
Erosion Control Measures During construction, the Contractor shall minimize the formation of bare surfaces under the ECM's Erosion Control Plan. The Plan shall depict graphically the activities, including sequence of work, type and duration for each phase of construction activities to include the following measures to: (a) sequence and schedule of the earthworks I demolition works in stages and progressively with the subsequent construction activities and building works. (b) minimise site disturbance by keeping site clearance works to a minimum by retaining as much of the existing vegetation as possible. (c) pave up the bare surfaces and all construction access by concrete or milled waste or other suitable materials. (d) protect the bare slopes with close-turfing, concrete grouting, or erosion control blanket. (e) protect the earth stockpiles with erosion control blanket. (f) restore ground cover over disturbed areas, which are or have become bare, as soon as possible.
(g) cover up the active work surfaces with canvas sheet during rain or at the end of the workday. 1.2.11.2 Sediment Control Plan The Contractor shall put in place the ECM's Sediment Control Plan, which aims to capture the sediments washed down from the construction sites. Some of these sediment control measures and facilities, which must be in place before the works start, shall include but not limited to the following: (a) concrete-lined cut-off drains (minimum C7 precast channel) along the perimeter of the construction sites. (b) silt fence properly installed and embedded onto the ground along the perimeter cut-off drains (between the construction site and the cut-off drain). (c) sedimentation basins or any other sediment filtering or settling system of adequate size and sufficient numbers along the perimeter cut-off drain and before the discharge points into public drain. (d) a storage basin / tank may be required to temporarily store the large amount of rainwater falling on to the whole site before treatment. (e) a treatment system to treat silty discharge shall be provided before the discharge points into public drain. (f) turbidity curtains shall be installed along all the exposed slopes / riverbanks for works in or adjacent to water bodies, such as canals, rivers, sea or in a reclamation work. The silty discharge trapped within the turbidity curtain shall be allowed to be settled / treated and removed.
1.2.11.3
Site ECM Management System The Contractor, shall at the advice of his QECP, put in place a site monitoring and reporting system including but not limited to the following: (a) Daily ECM inspection report by the QECP appointed site personnel (b) Regular site inspection by the QECP (c) Continuous monitoring and recording system shall be installed at the discharge point (after ECM) before public drain
1.2.11.4
Submission Of Design Basis And Calculations The QECP shall submit full basis of design back up with design calculations to show clearly how the perimeter cut-off drains, silt fence, sedimentation basins, storage basin / tank and treatment system are designed and sized as well as how such design will effectively filter off silt and allow only clean water to discharge into public drains. The QECP shall also submit the design specifications on the treatment system which can effectively treat the silty discharge from the construction site. The intensity of a one-intwo year storm should be adopted for the proposed design.
1.3
SITE MANAGEMENT
1.3.1
Site Management Prior to the commencement of works on site, the Contractor shall submit to the SO Rep for his approval the following details on site planning : (a) (b) (c) (d) (e) (f) (g) (h) (i) Site organisation structure Names and roles of Contractor's staff Names and roles of sub-contractors Names of manufacturers and suppliers Manpower schedule for each trade Materials purchase and delivery schedule for each trade Site layout plan as specified in the Specifications Schedule of heavy equipment Master Schedule of Construction for each Block and each unit of flat therein
as specified in the Clause for Programme of Work The site organisation chart shall include the appointment of project manager, engineer(s), foremen, supervisors, clerical staff, public relations personnel, standby tradesmen, security guards, housekeepers, the reporting system, procedure and method to monitor work progress, handle complaints/claims, and provide coordination with HDB's officers, Town Councils' officers and residents. The Contractor shall also furnish the SO Rep with such further details and information as the SO Rep may require in regard to the above items. Should it appear to the SO Rep at any time that the site planning proposed by the Contractor is not able to ensure minimum disruption to occupants' daily and household routines, a smooth progress of and good workmanship in the Works, the SO Rep is empowered to require the Contractor to make at the Contractor's own costs and expenses all necessary modifications to the plans as may be necessary or appropriate. Approval by the SO Rep of the Contractor's site planning details, revised site planning details and further information provided under this clause shall not in any way affect the Contractor's liabilities or obligations under the Contract.
1.3.2
Project Team The Contractor shall form a project team to ensure the smooth completion of the project. The team shall be led by a project manager, engineers, supervisors, public relations officers and foremen to manage the Works. The project team shall ensure : (i) (ii) (iii) (iv) (v) (vi) (vii) (viii) great care in detailed preparation and planning of the Works; careful monitoring of all activities on site; coordination of all works/services; constant supervision; thorough quality control; immediate reporting and respond to SO Rep's call within 10 minutes; great attention given to the residents' requests, complaints or claims; site cleanliness
The project team shall attend progress meetings chaired by the SO Rep to ensure full control of supply of materials, good performance of workers, correct sequence of operation, smooth progress of works and to solve problems, complaints and/or claims. No claim from the residents shall be left unanswered for more than three (3) days. All complaints from the residents shall be acted within the same working day.
Ugdg Spec GS Page 22 1.3.3 Employment Of Contractors Site Personnel Unless otherwise stated in other clauses and subclauses, the Contractor shall employ all the site personnel and station them full-time on the Site throughout the Time for Completion and any time period where liquidated damages are imposed under the Contract all as specified below :
Number of Each Type of Personnel to be Employed Based On Contract Sum Value Fully Agreed & Accepted Rate by the Contractor & the Employer for the Cost & Expense Deemed to be Allowed by the Contractor for the Employment of Each Personnel $8,600 per Project Manager per month $3,600 per Public Relations Officer per month $2,700 per Assistant Public Relations Officer per month $150 per Standby Plumber per day $150 per Standby electrician per day $4,800 per Safety Officer per month $4,000 per Safety Supervisor per month $3,000 per Health Supervisor per Month
S/N
Type of Personnel
Not Exceeding $10 Million
Exceeding $10 Million But Not Exceeding $25 Million
Exceeding $100 Million
Project Manager Public Relations Officer Assistant Public Relations Officer Standby Plumber Standby Electrician
One
One
One
One
One
One
One
One
One
Two
Two
Two
One
One
One
Two
Two
Two
One
One
One
Two
Two
Two
One
One
One
Two
Two
Two
Registered Safety Officer
One
One
One
One
One
One
Safety Supervisor
One
One
One
Two
Two
Three
Health Supervisor
One
One
Two
Two
Two
Two
Ugdg Spec GS Page 23 1.3.3 Employment Of Contractors Site Personnel (Cont'd)

Number of Each Type of Personnel to be Employed Based On Contract Sum Value Fully Agreed & Accepted Rate by the Contractor & the Employer for the Cost & Expense Deemed to be Allowed by the Contractor for the Employment of Each Personnel $1,967 per Security Guard per Month
S/N
Type of Personnel
Not Exceeding $10 Million
Exceeding $100 Million
10
11
Senior Security Guard (per shift after working hours) Security Guard (per shift after working hours) Security Guard(during working hours) Housekeeper
One
One
One
One
One
One
Two
Two
Three
Three
Four
Four
$1,967 per Security Guard per Month $1,967 per Security Guard per Month $1,200 per Housekeeper per Month $2,000 per Horticultural Supervisor per Month
Two One per building block One
12
13
Horticultural Supervisor*
* Note: The period and duration of employment of the Horticultural Supervisor shall be in accordance with subclause 26.1.5 "Horticultural Supervisor"
1.3.4
Project Manager - Qualifications/Experience/Responsibilities The Contractor's Project Manager shall be qualified, competent and possess the skill, knowledge and ability to manage and co-ordinate the project effectively. The Project Manager shall be the Contractor's Representative as required under the Contract. The Project Manager shall possess the following minimum academic qualifications and experiences : For the appointment of Project Manager, the candidate shall have a recognised Degree in Architecture/ Civil/Structural Engineering/Building Science/Quantity Surveying with at least 5 years of relevant postgraduate working experience in the building construction industry. A member of the Society of Project Managers, Singapore is preferred.
1.3.5
Public Relations Officer - Qualifications/Experience/Responsibilities The Public Relations Officer shall be competent and possesses the skill, knowledge and ability to manage public relations with the residents effectively. The Public Relations Officers duties and responsibilities shall include dealing with requests and resolving complaints of the residents, arrange for works to be carried out within flats and to ensure a high standard of public relations with the residents. The public relations officer shall have a minimum qualification of GCE "A" Level Certificate with at least two years of public relations work experience. The Public Relations Officer shall be capable of communicating effectively in English and one other official language.
Ugdg Spec GS Page 24 1.3.6 Assistant Public Relations Officer - Qualifications/Experience/Responsibilities The Assistant Public Relations Officer shall be competent and possesses the skill, knowledge and ability to handle public relations with the residents effectively. The Assistant Public Relations Officers duties and responsibilities shall include attending to residents requests and complaints by manning the information counter and the information hotline. In addition, the Assistant Public Relations Officer shall perform any clerical duties such as typing, photo-stating and filing assigned by the SO Rep. The Assistant Public Relations Officer shall have a minimum qualification of GCE "O" Level Certificate with at least a year of clerical work experience. The Assistant Public Relations Officer shall be capable of communicating effectively in English and one other official language. 1.3.7 Standby Plumber and Standby Electrician - Qualifications/Experience/Responsibilities The Contractor shall provide 24-hour standby plumbing and standby electrical services, including Saturdays, Sundays and Public Holidays. The standby plumber and standby electrician shall be competent and possess the necessary skill knowledge and ability to resolve all plumbing and electrical faults or problems on site respectively. The standby plumber and standby electrician shall be responsible for the rectification of any failure of water/sanitary installations and electrical installations respectively including clearing of pipe or minor sewer chokages and restoration of any disrupted services or utilities. The Contractor shall provide each standby plumber and standby electrician with a pager. The Contractor shall ensure that the pagers are switched on at all times. The standby plumber and standby electrician shall respond to all calls from the SO Rep, residents, Contractors staff and security guards within five (5) minutes and carry out any necessary repairs within thirty (30) minutes from receipt of the call. The standby plumber and standby electrician shall be stationed on the site from 8.00 am to 10.00 pm on all working days.
1.3.8
Safety Officer and Supervisor The employment of a Safety Officer on a full-time basis is required notwithstanding the requirements of The Factories (Safety Officers) Order 1994 or other provisions in the Contract. The qualifications of the Safety Officer, his duties and responsibilities shall be in accordance with the requirements of The Factories (Safety Officers) Order 1994. In addition, the Safety Officers duties shall include those of the Safety Supervisors. The Safety Officer shall also be responsible for the Safety Management System on the site. The Contractor's Safety Supervisors shall possess recognised and approved certification in construction safety to take charge of all matters relating to safety. The Safety Supervisors shall spend their time fully performing the following: (i) (ii) (iii) (iv) To supervise safety and promote safety conduct; To inspect and rectify any unsafe place of work; To correct any unsafe practice; and To ensure that the provisions of the Factories Act and its Subsidiary Legislation made thereunder are complied with.
1.3.9
Health Supervisor (i) The Contractor's Health Supervisor shall have a certificate in "Vector Control Course for Construction Site Supervisors" issued by ENV or equivalent and competent to take charge of all matters related to environmental health on the Site. The Health Supervisor shall have at least one year's previous experience in a similar capacity and be able to converse in either English or Mandarin. The Health Supervisor shall conduct regular site checks and take prompt enforcement or corrective actions to ensure that the occupied buildings, workers' rest areas, toilets, site offices and other facilities and general surroundings of the Site are kept clean, tidy and hygienic at all times. In addition, the Health Supervisor shall also ensure that the Site is kept mosquito-free at all times. The Health Supervisor shall put on a suitable uniform issued by the Contractor. The uniform shall be subject to the approval of the SO Rep.
(ii)
(iii)
1.3.10
Security Guard (i) The Contractor shall employ security guards from agencies that are certified/accredited to the Association of Certified Security Agencies (ACSA) or the Security Association Singapore (SAS). A listing of these certified/accredited security agencies may be obtained from the Licensing Division of the Singapore Police Force (SPF). The Contractor shall inform the SO Rep in writing of the security agency that will supply the security guards, within 21 days from the date of the Letter of Acceptance. The security guard shall be employed to perform site security duties on a 24 hours basis. The security guards shall work in shifts of not more than 12 hours per shift. The contractor shall proposed the shift arrangement for the approval of the SO Rep. The security guard shall not leave the Site even if his shift has ended until he is properly relieved by a replacement. All security guards must be above the age of 18 years and below the age of 60 years old. The Senior Security Guard shall have a minimum experience of five years in a similar position and shall be able to communicate effectively in English and one other official language. The Security Guards shall have a minimum experience of two years in a similar position. The security guards shall at all times put on the uniform of their security agency, complete with their names and identification tags. Essential security enforcement equipment such as whistle, torchlight, walkie talkie etc shall be provided to them. The security guards must not be armed with weapons that are disallowed by the Singapore Police Force. The Contractor shall at his own cost provide and maintain one pager for use by the security guards. The security guards shall be responsible for the general security of the Site. The Senior Security Guard shall be stationed at the Information Centre to handle complaints and requests from the residents. He shall immediately contact the Contractors Project Manager or the Standby Plumber or Standby Electrician in the event of any disruption to services or other emergencies on the site. The Senior Security Guard shall also record all requests and complaints received and report them to the SO Rep on the following working day. The Security Guards shall patrol the site. They shall immediately report to the Senior Security Guard when they encounter or detect any security problems or other incidents such as damage to or disruption of services. The Security Guards shall also remove fire hazards such as discarded mattresses, furniture, etc. from the common areas of the buildings, which they may encounter during their patrols. The Contractor shall propose the route and schedule of patrols by the security guards for the approval of the SO Rep. The SO Rep may change the patrolling route and schedule from time to time as he deems necessary for the security of the site. To ensure that the patrols are carried out, the Contractor shall provide an approved digital clocking device with clocking points fixed securely at locations selected by the SO Rep. Unless otherwise approved by the SO Rep, the number of clocking points to be installed shall not be less than three (3) per block. A proper record of the Security Guards' attendance must be kept and made available to the SO Rep upon request.
(ii)
(iii)
(iv)
(v)
(vi)
1.3.11
Housekeeper The duty of the Housekeeper shall be to ensure that the common areas of the building block such as access corridors, staircases, lift lobbies and landings, void decks, etc. are kept in a clean and hygienic condition fit for habitation at all times. The Housekeeper shall also be responsible for keeping the surroundings of the block as assigned by the SO Rep a clean, neat and tidy condition at all times. The Housekeeper shall ensure that all rubbish, debris, rubbles, excess earth, surplus materials, unwanted tools and equipment etc. generated by the Works including the works of other contractors or that discarded by the Occupants are cleared at least twice a day. During works inside the flat, the Housekeeper shall also ensure that all rubbish, debris, tools and equipment, materials etc. in the flat are removed or cleared or stored in a neat and tidy manner before leaving the flat for tea, coffee or lunch breaks. At the end of each working day inside the flat, the housekeeper shall ensure that all rubbish, debris, tools and equipment, surplus materials etc. are removed from each flat. The flat shall also be cleaned of all dust and dirt. At the end of each working day, the housekeeper shall clean off all dust and dirt from the access corridors, staircases, lift lobbies and landings, void decks, aprons and any other paved common areas and leave these areas in a clean and hygienic condition. The rooftop of all overhead peripheral shelters, existing corridors and walkways shall be cleared of rubbish, debris and litter.
1.3.11
Housekeeper (Cont'd) The duties of the Housekeeper shall be carried out over and above that required by Clause 1.3.21 Conservancy Works. For avoidance of doubt, the Housekeeper shall not double up as conservancy workers carrying out the conservancy works specified in the aforesaid Clause 1.3.21 Conservancy Works.
1.3.12
Replacement Of Site Personnel The SO Rep shall be empowered to instruct the Contractor for a replacement at the Contractor's own costs and expenses if any of the site personnel is found not carrying his duties to the satisfaction of the SO Rep.
1.3.13
Compliance With Requirements And Submission Of Information Of Site Personnel (a) The Contractor shall submit to the SO Rep within 21 days from the date of the Letter of Acceptance, the name, identity card numbers and documentary evidence of the educational qualifications and experience of all the site personnel employed by the Contractor. The employment of the site personnel shall be subject to the approval of the SO Rep. In addition, the Contractor shall comply with the requirements specified below, keep proper records and submit the stipulated information to the SO Rep as and when required by him : (i) Except for the security guards and safety officer/supervisors, all the site personnel employed shall be on the Contractor's monthly payroll. The Contractor shall keep records indicating the number of days the site personnel are employed for each month and the monthly contributions to CPF. Such information may be proof of employment of the site personnel. A letter from every site personnel employed by the Contractor to testify that he is employed full-time for this Site only. Further to (ii) above, if any site personnel is found to be working in more than one running project, the particular site personnel will be barred from working in all the Employer's projects for a period of two years from the date of the breach. It shall be the Contractor's duty to bring to the attention of the site personnel the contents of this clause.
(b)
(ii) (iii)
1.3.14
Inclusion Of Cost And Failure To Employ The Site Personnel (a) (b) The Contractor shall be deemed to have included in the Contract Sum all costs and expenses to be incurred by him for compliance with the requirements stipulated in this clause. In the event of the Contractor not employing the number of site personnel, required by the Contract or not employing such site personnel for the period or periods required by the Contract, without prejudice to the Employer's rights under the Contract, the Contractor shall be indebted to the Employer at the rate or rates as specified for each of the respective site personnel and such indebtedness shall be deducted by the Employer from any monies due or becoming due to the Contractor or be recovered by the Employer as a debt due from the Contractor. These rate or rates shall be deemed to have been fully agreed and accepted by the Contractor and the Employer as the costs and expenses allowed by the Contractor for the employment of each of the respective site personnel. For the purpose of this clause, each site personnel shall be employed by the Contractor for at least 20 days within a calendar month before he can be considered as being employed for that particular month under the Contract, except where expressly specified otherwise. In the event that the first and/or the last calendar month of the Time for Completion or any time period where liquidated damages are imposed under the Contract, have less than 20 days, each of the site personnel shall be employed for the full number of days in the said first and last calendar month of the Time for Completion or any time period where liquidated damages are imposed under the Contract. Notwithstanding other provisions in this clause, if the Contractor incurs additional costs and expenses over and above the agreed rates specified herein in complying with the requirements stipulated in this clause, the Contractor alone shall bear such additional costs and expenses in full.
(c)
(d)
1.3.15
Application For Release Of Site Personnel The SO Rep may consider a request by the Contractor in writing to release any of his site personnel from the obligations of this clause if the Works has been certified more than 95% complete. It shall be up to the absolute discretion of the SO Rep to decide whether the Contractor's site personnel can be released and the number of site personnel to be released as provided for under this clause. A written approval from the SO Rep shall be obtained in this respect.
1.3.16
Superintending Officer's Decision All differences and/or disputes arising under this clause including all subclauses under it (including questions relating to interpretation) shall be determined by the Superintending Officer whose decision shall be final and binding on and conclusive against the Contractor.
1.3.17
Employment of Workmen/Workmanship, Uniforms and Identification Badges The Contractor shall employ in and about the execution of the Works only such persons as are careful, skilled and experienced in their various trades. The Works shall be carried out to the best of workmanship. The main Contractor and his subcontractor shall provide their workers with adequate numbers of working uniforms bearing the main Contractor's name and the name of the upgrading precinct. The Contractor shall ensure that all his workmen, including his subcontractors' workmen, on site put on the approved uniforms in a proper and tidy manner at all times. Uniforms that have worn out shall be replaced by the Contractor. The main contractor shall issue identification badges to each of his workers and subcontractor's workers. The identification badge shall contain the worker's photograph, name, identification card number or passport number and name of his employer and the Contractor, a serial number and the Contractor's company stamp and the SO Rep's stamp. The Contractor shall maintain a register of all identification badges issued to workmen on site and keep it updated at all times. The SO Rep may inspect the register at any time. The Contractor shall ensure that all his workmen, including his subcontractors' workmen, on site wear the identification badges at all times. Within 14 days after the acceptance of the Contractor's Tender, the Contractor shall submit the design of the identification badge and uniform for the SO Rep's approval. The SO Rep may object to the employment of, or require the removal from site any workmen who, in the opinion of the SO Rep, misconducts himself or is incompetent or negligent in the proper performance of his duties and such persons should not be again employed without permission of the SO Rep.
1.3.18
Project Manager/Engineers To Attend BCA's Course On Effective Supervision In Retrofitting Projects The Contractor shall send the Project Manager and all his Engineers engaged on Site to attend BCA's course on Effective Supervision in Retrofitting Projects. The Project Manager and all Engineers must attend the aforesaid course within six (6) months from the commencement date of the Time for Completion. Provided always that the Project Manager and Engineers who have previously attended the aforesaid course need not attend the same course again. The Contractor shall submit certified true copies of the Certificate of Attendance of the aforesaid course to the SO Rep upon expiry of the six months period. In the event the Contractor fails to send his Project Manager or Engineers to attend the aforesaid course as required by his Clause, without prejudice to the Employer's right under the contract, the Contractor shall be indebted to the Employer at the rate of $2,000.00 per non-provided Certificate of Attendance for each Project Manager/Engineer and such indebtedness shall be deducted by the Employer from any monies due or becoming due to the Contractor or be recovered by the Employer as a debt due from the Contractor. Such rate or rates shall be deemed to have been fully agreed and accepted by the Contractor and the Employer as the costs and expenses allowed by the Contractor for sending each Project Manager or Engineer to attend BCA's "Effective Supervision in Retrofitting Projects" course. All the differences and/or disputes arising under this Clause (including questions relating to interpretation) shall be determined by the SO Rep whose decision shall be final and binding on and conclusive against the Contractor.
1.3.19
Monthly Progress Reports The Contractor shall maintain up-to-date records of all progress of the Works on Site from the commencement to the completion of the contract. The records shall be captured on forms approved by the SO Rep. The Contractor shall produce and submit to the SO Rep, monthly reports of work progress on site. A schedule of submission dates will be forwarded to the Contractor upon the commencement of the contract. The Contractor shall adhere to these submission dates strictly. The format of the monthly progress reports shall be subjected to the approval of the SO Rep. Each monthly progress report shall include the following items : (a) (b) overall progress chart indicating the actual work done versus target set in the master programme; a chart showing monthly and cumulative projected and actual progress claims for the whole contract period. The chart shall also capture actual monthly and cumulative certified progress payment amount. a schedule indicating dates and approval status of various submissions (eg. method statements, shop drawings, etc). a resource level report listing the Contractor's site personnel, particulars of suppliers and details of subcontractors on site for the month. The lists shall indicate the quantum manpower and/or labour employed by the Contractor and each of his subcontractors. one recent dated "3R" size photographs per block. any other item as direct by the SO Rep from time to time.
(c)
(d)
(e) (f)
1.3.20
Conservancy Works The Contractor shall be responsible for the conservancy works of all common areas within the contract boundary for the duration of the Time for Completion and any time period where liquidated damages are imposed under the Contract unless otherwise specified. The types of conservancy works, its methods and schedule shall, subject to the additional tasks specified below or elsewhere in the contract, be the same as that found in the existing conservancy contract between the Town Council (TC) and the TC's conservancy contractor. In addition to the requirements specified in the TC's existing conservancy contracts, the Contractor shall carry out the following works : (a) Dry sweep all corridors, staircases, landings, lobbies, void decks, aprons and any other paved common areas twice a day, once in the morning and once in the afternoon; Weekly washing of all corridors, staircases, landings, lobbies, void decks, aprons and any other paved common areas; and Fortnightly maintenance of landscaped areas and grass cutting of all turfed areas.
(b)
(c)
Where the access to refuse chutes, or any aspect of the tasks of daily removal of domestic refuse is affected by the Works, the Contractor shall make all necessary arrangements to ensure that the daily refuse collection from the refuse chutes is not disrupted. The Contractor shall obtain the SO Rep's approval for the aforesaid arrangements before they are implemented. The Contractor's responsibility for conservancy works within each block shall be discharged upon substantial completion of all Works within the block and the handing over of the same block to the TC. The Contractor shall ensure that the route and access from each block's refuse chutes to the bin centre are properly constructed and accessible to the TC's refuse collection cart before the handing over of the block. For avoidance of doubt, the Contractor shall remain responsible for the conservancy works of all common areas Within the Precinct Outside the Blocks until the substantial completion and handing over of the precinct works to the TC.
1.3.21
Pest Control and Surveillance The Contractor shall engage a Pest Control Operator who is registered with the CIDB under the Work Head for Pest Control to provide comprehensive pest control and surveillance work on the Site. In this respect, the Contractor shall submit the name of the Pest Control Operator and proof of CIDB registration to the SO Rep for approval prior to carrying out the Works. The SO Rep may disapprove the Pest Control Operator selected by the Contractor and the Contractor shall not be entitled to any claim arising from such decision. Pest control measures and surveillance programmes shall fully comply with the requirements of ENV as well as the following : (1) The Contractor is required to submit a detailed pest control and surveillance programme inclusive of fogging at the Site to the Environmental Health Office, ENV and the SO Rep prior to commencement of the work. The frequency of fogging shall be at least once per week and the chemical used for fogging shall be approved by the ENV. The Contractor shall maintain a site register containing an up-to-date record of pest control and surveillance work that has been carried out. The site register shall be made available and ready for inspection by the SO Rep when required. The Contractor shall submit monthly summarised returns of the site records required by ENV to the Environmental Health Office, ENV.
(2)
(3)
The work required under this Clause shall include all necessary measures to prevent the Site from becoming conducive to the breeding or harbouring of vectors. The Contractor shall carry out site checks at least once a week to detect and remove breeding and harbouring grounds. If breeding or harbouring of vectors is found at the Site, enforcement action shall be taken against the Contractor by ENV. The SO Rep may also exercise its rights under Clause 1.10 "Nuisance & Irregularities" by imposing a charge on the Contractor. 1.3.22 Warning/Notices of Works and Disruption The Contractor shall inform all residents, SO Rep and relevant parties in advance every inevitable inconvenience and disruption of services to the public and the residents that is due to occur in the course of the upgrading Works, such as piling work, sewer diversion, etc. The Contractor shall issue advance notice to all the residents on the proposed schedule of works to be carried out within the flats two months before the commencement of the proposed work. Fourteen days before commencement of work within each flat, the Contractor shall visit the flat and issue notice to the resident to inform him of the work affecting his flat with precise starting date and the duration. One of the adult family members is requested to be present in the flat during this period. The Contractor shall brief the residents on the details of work, the work procedure and advise the residents on the removal of affected furniture, fittings and fixture and the safekeeping of their belongings. The Contractor shall remind the residents again 3 days before entering the flat. In addition to the advance notices, the Contractor shall also issue to all the residents, circulars as and when deemed necessary by the SO Rep as well as monthly newsletters to update residents on the work progress. All advance notices, circulars and newsletters shall be approved by the SO Rep prior to their distribution. All notices related to work outside the flat and within the block or precinct shall be displayed at the designated notice board unless otherwise required by the SO Rep. The Contractor shall be deemed to have allowed in his Contract Sum, all costs and expenses for the printing and distribution of the advance notices, circulars and newsletters to the residents. 1.3.23 Reserved
1.3.24
Contractor's Work in Connection with Subsidiary Contracts All holes and openings, including PVC sleeves through beams, walls, floor slabs or any other part of the building required for lift electrical, sanitary or water installation or gas piping, electrical wiring, conduit and trunking shall be provided by the Contractor. The Contractor shall be responsible for the proper patching up with non-shrink cementitious mortar gauged with waterproofing additive of all holes/openings for pipes/conduits done or caused to be done by the lift, electrical, CATV or any other contractor in the course of such Contractor's work, and shall make good such work to the satisfaction of the SO Rep.
1.3.25
Project Plaque The Contractor shall supply and install one number of project plaque as shown in the Drawings and to the approval of the SO Rep.
1.3.26
Telephone Techniques Course for Public Relations Officer Assistant Public Relations Officer and Senior Security Guard The Contractor shall send the Public Relations Officer (PRO), the Assistant Public Relations Officer (APRO) and the Senior Security Guard (SSG) to attend a "Telephone Techniques Course" conducted by Singapore Telecommunications Limited, Singapore Institute of Management, or other approved institutions. Provided always that the PRO and/or APRO and/or SSG who have previously attended the aforesaid course need not attend the same again. Certified true copies of the Certificate of Attendance for the aforesaid course shall be submitted to the SO Rep within three (3) months from the commencement date of the Time For Completion. In the event of the Contractor failing to send the PRO and/or APRO and/or SSG to attend the "Telephone Techniques Course" as required by this Clause, without prejudice to the Employer's rights under the contract, the Contractor shall be indebted to the Employer at the rate of $1,000.00 per non-provided Certificate of Attendance for each PRO or APRO or SSG and such indebtedness shall be deducted by the Employer from any monies due or becoming due to the Contractor or be recovered by the Employer as a debt due from the Contractor. Such rate or rates shall be deemed to have been fully agreed and accepted by the Contractor and the Employer as the costs and expenses allowed by the Contractor for sending each PRO or APRO or SSG to attend the aforesaid course. All the differences and/or disputes arising under this Clause (including questions relating to interpretation) shall be determined by the SO Rep whose decision shall be final and binding on and conclusive against the Contractor.
1.3.27
Environmental Public Health Measures (a) General Requirements The Contractor shall comply with the Environmental Public Health Act ( hereafter referred to as the Act for the purposes of this clause including all sub-clauses under it) and its Subsidiary Legislations including the Environmental Public Health (Employment of Environmental Control Officers) Order 1999, (hereafter referred to as the Order for the purposes of this clause including all sub-clauses under it) and any amendment or re-enactment thereto throughout the Time for Completion and any time period where liquidated damages are imposed under the Contract. (b) Environmental Control Officer (ECO) The Contractor shall employ Environmental Control Officer (hereinafter referred to as ECO for the purposes of this clause including all subclauses under it) to comply with the Environmental Public Health Act Environmental Public Health (Employment of Environmental Control Officers) Order 1999. The ECO shall be employed on a full-time basis where the Contract Sum is above $50 million or on a part-time basis where the Contract Sum is between $10 million and $50 million. The ECO shall be responsible for monitoring and advising the Contractor on the following main areas : (i) (ii) (iii) Control of disease-bearing vectors and rodents. Proper management and disposal of solid waste. Control of noise and dust pollution.
Ugdg Spec GS Page 31 1.3.27 Environmental Public Health Measures (Cont'd) (b) Environmental Control Officer (ECO) (Cont'd) (iv) (v) (vi) Drainage and silt control. Air and water pollution control. General housekeeping management of the project.
Any Safety Officer who is registered with the MOM under the Safety Officer Scheme and who is also registered as an ECO with the Commissioner of Public Health, ENV, can be allowed to hold both the appointment of Safety Officer and ECO concurrently for the Works at the Site, provided that both officers duties are performed with the same standard of supervision as compared with those performed by different officers holding such appointment separately. If the Works have been certified more than 95% completed, the SO Rep may consider the Contractors request in writing to allow the ECO to perform on a part-time basis.
1.3.28
Allocation Of Man-Year Entitlements Where the supply of materials, goods or products included in the scope of this contract is to be obtained by the Contractor from HDB, the Contractor shall allocate Man-Year Entitlements to the other suppliers or contractors engaged by HDB to make such supply. This requirement shall be applicable, but not limited, to the supply of precast components and cut and bend steel reinforcement bars which are supplied by HDB. The Contractor shall be deemed to have included in the Contract Sum for all costs and expenses arising from his compliance with the requirements stipulated in this clause.
1.4
SERVICES, UTILITIES & TEMPORARY FACILITIES
1.4.1
Cables/Services Detection The Contractor shall be deemed to have visited and examined the Site carefully and have ascertained its nature and made provision in the Contract Sum or prices for the type of ground conditions, constraints and underground services. The Contractor shall provide cables/services detecting equipment/devices to locate all existing cables/services, including the digging of trial holes, prior to the commencement of excavation or any other work such as driving of piles, piling of earth electrode and lightning conductors or poles and columns which are liable to damage existing buried services. The Contractor shall engage both EMA and IDA licensed cables/services detection workers to carry out all cables/services detection work. The proposed line of excavation or area of other work shall be checked for existing services in a systematic manner by making sufficient passes in a grid formation to cover the entire area of work. The extent of checking carried out shall be properly documented and countersigned by the SO Rep. The Contractor shall be liable for all cost and charges incurred if he damages any services. The Contractor shall seek assistance from the relevant Government Department or Statutory Board if he has any query on the location of existing cables/services belonging to the relevant Government Department or Statutory Board. In the case of underground supply cables/services belonging to other service provider, the Contractor may seek assistance from the relevant service provider. The Contractor shall engage SP PowerGrid Ltd's registered Licensed Excavator Operator only for the purpose of carrying out all excavation works. In the event of failure by the Contractor to employ SP PowerGrid Ltd's Registered Excavator Operator, no excavation works shall be allowed in the upgrading site.
1.4.2
Diversion of Services All permanent and temporary diversion or relocation of all existing services including services mains affected or required by the works, whether within precinct or within blocks or within flats, on, above or under ground shall be carried out by the Contractor. The diversions, disconnections and reinstatement of services shall be carried out by licensed electrical worker, gas workers and plumbers or the relevant authorities or authorised service providers and shall comply with the current requirements, by-laws and regulations of the relevant authorities. The diversion or relocation of services shall include but is not limited to the following : (a) (b) (c) (d) (e) (f) (g) (h) (i) (j) (k) (l) services and pipes on roof top CATV/MATV lightning protection system water, electricity, gas risers and mains house sewers telecommunication and multimedia installations like telephone wires, risers and cables; cable television and cable modem Aviation Obstruction Lights Dry risers (including the earthing points) Fire hose reels Water pump sets & electrical control wiring conduit/trunking Gas supply pipes and gas meters Water pipe, sub-meter, water rising main and roof-top water distribution mains.
The Contractor shall propose the details and routing of the diversion works for the SO Rep approval. The diversion works shall be planned and completed before the scheduled commencement of the affected or associated works. The costs and expenses for such diversion and/or relocation works shall be deemed included in the Contractor's Contract Sum.
1.4.2
Diversion of Services (Contd) Provided always that where the existing underground services belonging to the various services providers/authorities have to be permanently diverted or relocated because it is, in the opinion of the SO Rep, affected by the permanent works, the diversions shall not be undertaken by the Contractor unless otherwise specified. For avoidance of doubt, underground services belonging to the relevant services providers/authorities shall be defined as follows : (a) (b) (c) For water supply, the water mains and tap-off branches up to the bulk meter for direct and indirect supply. Where there is no bulk meter, up to the individual meter points for direct supply. For gas supply, the gas mains and tap-off branches up to the gas providers service isolation valves. For electricity supply, the incoming service cables up to and terminating at the main switchboards or indoor distribution boxes in the switch rooms or the incoming service termination point where there is no switch room. For telecommunication installations, the underground cables up to and including the Openable Joint (usually but not necessarily located on the first storey of each block). For multimedia installations like cable television and cable modem, up to and including the Node Box in the block or, where the block does not have a Node Box, up to and including the first amplifier (Panel Box) serving the block.
(d) (e)
For further avoidance of doubt, temporary or permanent diversion of services belonging to the various services providers/authorities to construct temporary structures, install construction equipment, etc shall be deemed included in the Contractor's Contract Sum. For the aforesaid diversions works, the Contractor shall liaise with and make payment to the various services providers/authorities directly and keep the SO Rep informed. 1.4.3 Disruption to Services, Utilities and Facilities The Contractor shall ensure that the Works are carried out with minimal disruption to existing services or utilities. For this purpose, the Contractor shall locate all underground existing services on site prior to the commencement of any piling or excavation works. The Contractor shall not disrupt any existing services or utilities without the prior written approval of the SO Rep. The Contractor shall as far as possible arrange for alternative services or supply of utilities whether permanent or temporary before any existing services or utilities are terminated or disrupted. All diversion of house services required to minimise disruption shall be undertaken by the Contractor, the cost of which is deemed to have been included in the Contractor's Contract Sum. All diversions, disconnections and reinstatement of services shall be carried out by licensed electrical worker, gas workers and plumbers and shall comply with the current requirements, bylaws and regulations of the relevant Authorities. For works within flats, the Contractor shall ensure that each flat remains, at all times in a clean, hygienic and habitable condition fit for continuous habitation and the carrying out of occupants' normal daily routines such as cooking and sleeping. The contractor shall also ensure that all services, utilities and amenities such as access, lighting, security, CATV, remain in normal working condition at all times. Toilet/bath facilities shall be put back in normal working order at the end of each working day. 1.4.4 Existing Services Valves, Manholes, Etc All existing services valves, manholes, etc shall not be shifted, tampered, covered over with hardcore or debris or concreted over, etc in the course of execution of the Works. The contractor shall arrange a joint inspection with the relevant services authorities at the start of the Time for Completion to identify all the existing services valves, manholes, etc in the precinct. If deemed necessary by the relevant services authorities, the contractor shall arrange for protection works to be carried out on site by the relevant services authorities to protect the existing services valves, manholes, etc from possible damage or being buried in the course of upgrading works by the building contractor and to make the existing services valves, manholes, etc easier to locate in the event of an emergency. Such works would include raising of walls around the existing services valves, manholes, etc, raising the position of the existing services valves, manholes, etc to facilitate the works or in the event that a chamber may be buried over for access, tagging of the fixtures by inserting electronic sensors in the ground. On Substantial Completion of the upgrading works, another joint inspection would be conducted with the relevant services authorities to confirm that the existing services valves, manholes, etc are in order. The contractor shall be deemed to have included in the Contract Sum all costs and expenses to be incurred by him for compliance with the requirements stipulated in this clause, including the cost of the protection works carried out by the relevant services authorities.
1.4.5
Site Layout Plan Within 14 days from Letter of Acceptance, the Contractor shall submit a site layout plan to the SO Rep indicating proposed locations of all temporary structures (for example site offices, stores, hoistways, Construction Equipment, labour lines, information centre, study room, rest area, temporary carpark and driveway, and temporary access for construction activities) for approval before their erection. Notwithstanding such approval, the Contractor shall relocate any such structures at his own costs and expenses when required to do so by the SO Rep. All such materials and structures shall be kept away from proposed roads, driveways, car parks and services lines unless otherwise approved in writing by the SO Rep and the relevant Authorities. Should any hoistway or structure be erected without the SO Rep's approval, the Contractor shall pull down and re-erect the hoistway or structure in an approved position within seven days from the date of instruction by the SO Rep. The Contractor shall provide for the maintenance of all such structures in a clean, hygienic and safe condition for the duration of the Works. All such structures and hoistways shall be removed on Substantial Completion of the Works. The Contractor is not allowed to set up worker's quarters, precast yard or canteen within the contract boundary.
1.4.6
Site Offices Within one (1) month from the commencement date of the Time for Completion, the Contractor shall erect and complete on site, temporary site offices complying with all regulations/requirements of the relevant Authorities. The Contractor shall liaise with the SO Rep to survey a suitable location for the site offices. The Contractor shall submit his proposal for the design configuration and layout of the site offices, taking full consideration of site constraints and conditions, for the approval of the SO Rep. The temporary site offices shall house the SO Rep's rooms, Clerk-of-Works' room(s), Meeting room(s), Information Centre complete with Display Area and any other usage required by the SO Rep. Prior written approval by the SO Rep shall be obtained before erection of the site offices. The site offices shall be constructed and furnished in accordance with the minimum requirements stipulated below. All facilities, furniture and fittings, etc specified herein shall be subjected to the approval of the SO Rep. No. of Items Clerk-of-Works' Room Meeting Below 800 Du Room 800 & DU Above 1 1 1 -
S/N
Rooms, Facilities, Furniture and Fittings
SO Rep's Room
SO Rep (TP)'s Room
Information Computer Centre room
1.
Room Size : 2 (i) 5m 2 (i) 15m (ii) 40m2 (iii) 45m2 2 (iv) 50m 2 (v) 70m
1 -
1 -
1 -
1 -
1.4.6
Site Offices (Cont'd) No. of Items Clerk-of-Works' Room Meeting Below 800 Du Room 800 & DU Above -
S/N
SO Rep's Room
SO Rep (TP)'s Room
Information Computer Centre room
2.
Tables and Chairs : (i) 1.5m x 0.8m office table complete with at least 3 drawers 2 2 7 11 4 1 computer table
(ii) 1.5m x 0.8m working table complete with storage space for drawings (iii) 1.2m x 0.8m table (iv) Chair with hand rests (v) Chair without hand rests
1 2
2 2
7 3
11 6
8 20
4 4
1 -
(vi) High Chair without hand rests (for working table)

3. 1.7m x 0.8m x 0.4m Steel Cabinet complete with shelves and doubleleave doors 2.4m x 1.2m Soft Board complete with accessories 1.2m x 0.9m Soft Board complete with accessories 2.4m x 1.2m White Board complete with accessories 1.2m x 0.9m white Board complete with accessories 0.3m x 0.3m Suggestion Box Air-Conditioner of minimum 10,000 BTU output
1
1
1
1
1
3
2
4
4.
5.
6.
7.
8 9.
1 1
1.4.6
SITE OFFICES (Cont'd) No. of Items Clerk-of-Works' Room Meeting Below 800 Du Room 800 DU & Above
S/N
SO Rep's Room
SO Rep (TP)'s Room
Information Centre
Computer room
10.
Telephone Installation : (i) Separate telephone line 1 1 2 1 1
(ii)
Caller ID feature
(iii) Telephone set approved by IDA (iv) Pager with message paging (v) Facsimile machine using A4 size plain printing paper and equipped with facility to print transmission report 11. Drawing Rack complete with drawing holders
1 -
1 -
12.
Electrical Installation, Connections & Accessories:
(i) 40W fluorescent lighting
10
(ii) 13 Amp socket outlet
(iii) 15 Amp socket outlet
1.4.6
SITE OFFICES (Cont'd)
S/N
SO Rep's Room
SO Rep (TP)'s Room
No. of Items Clerk-of-Works' Room Meeting Below 800 Du Room 800 DU & Above 1 1 -
Information Centre
Computer room
13.
Hot & Cold drinking water dispenser
14.
Photocopying Machine
One of the plain paper photocopying machine at the site office shall be with the following specifications: (i) (ii) (iii) iv) minimum 50 ppm in black and white; + Support paper up to 160gsm and A3 ; Auto paper selections; Auto response sensor
The photocopying machine shall be kept in the Clerk-of-Works room throughout the Time for Completion and any time period where liquidated damages are imposed under the Contract. The photo copying machine shall be for the exclusive use by the SO Rep and/or Employers officers only. The Contractor should provide another photo copying machine for their own use. The Contractor shall pay all charges, bear all costs and expenses and be responsible for the maintenance of such photocopying machine. Produce the maintenance agreement with the vendor to the SO Rep for checking when requested. The maintenance agreement shall cover the whole duration of the Time for Completion and any time period where liquidated damages are imposed under the Contract The doors leading to the SO Rep's room, the Clerk-of-Works' room, the Information Centre and the Meeting Room shall be provided with lock-sets and all the keys to the lock-sets shall be given to the SO Rep. In addition to the above, the Contractor shall provide the following items for use by the SO Rep and Clerkof-Works : (a) An approved compact camera capable of producing clear photographs with date feature and slides. All films for photographs and slides including developing, printing, processing and duplicating. A pair of binoculars with seven (7) times magnification. One torchlight per block. A First Aid Box containing medications and medical paraphernalia compiled by a pharmacy.
(b) (c) (d)
The Contractor shall provide for the maintenance and housekeeping of site offices and ensure that all the facilities, equipment, furniture and fittings therein are in a clean, habitable and good working condition to the satisfaction of the SO Rep. Upon Substantial Completion of the works or when directed by the SO Rep, the contractor shall remove the site offices and make good to the satisfaction of the SO Rep. Such making good shall include but not be limited to the reinstatement of damaged turf including topping up with good quality top soil. All concrete areas shall be repaired and thoroughly washed. All costs expenses charges and fees for the site offices, furniture, fixtures and fittings, facilities and equipment specified herein and including but not limited to replenishment for consumables such as batteries, photostating and facsimile papers, etc and payment for all utilities bills shall be deemed included in the Contract Sum.
1.4.6
SITE OFFICES (Cont'd) Should the Contractor fail to provide any of the above specified requirements after the commencement of the Contract, the SO Rep may forthwith purchase and provide the same on the Contractor's behalf. In addition, the SO Rep may exercise the Employer's right under Clause 1.10 "Nuisance and Irregularities" to impose a charge against the Contractor. All cost expenses charges and fees incurred shall be recovered by the Employer from any monies due or becoming due to the Contractor or as a debt due by the Contractor to the Employer.
1.4.7
Study Room and Rest Area Within two months after the commencement of the Contract, the Contractor shall erect and maintain on site study room and rest area for the duration of the Time for Completion and any time period where liquidated damages are imposed under the Contract and complying with all regulations/requirements of the relevant Authorities. The Contractor shall manage the study room and rest area from 8.00 am to 10.00 pm. The Contractor shall liaise with the SO Rep to survey suitable locations for the study room and rest area. The Contractor shall submit his proposal for the design and construction of the study room and rest area for the approval of the SO Rep before erection of the facilities. The study room and rest area shall be air-conditioned, complete with adequate artificial lighting and the following basic fittings and furniture : Room, Facilities, Furniture and Fittings Capacity (Accommodate No. of Persons) Room Size Study Table (1.5m x 0.6m) Chair without arm rest 5-seater sitting set complete with coffee table and side tables Capacity/No. of Items Study Room 2% of total dwelling units (minimum 18) Minimum 2m per person 1 table for 2 persons 1 per person 2
S/No. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.
Rest Area 1.5% of total dwelling units (minimum 18) Minimum 2m per person 1 set for 5 persons
2
The study room and rest area shall be sited away from the construction activities. The study room and rest area shall be acoustically insulated and the Contractor shall ensure that the noise level in these room/area is kept below 50dB and 60dB respectively at all times. The Contractor shall allow for the maintenance of the study room and rest area and ensure that all the facilities, furniture and fittings are in a clean, habitable and good condition to the satisfaction of SO Rep at all times. Upon completion and handover of all works within block for all blocks within the precinct or when directed by the SO Rep the Contractor shall remove the study room and rest area and make good. Such making good shall include but not be limited to the reinstatement of damaged turfing including topping up with good quality top soil and the washing of all concrete areas thoroughly. The Contractor shall pay all charges for the provision and use of electricity, water and all other utilities at the study room and rest areas.
1.4.8
Workers' Rest Area The Contractor shall construct a sheltered rest area of not more than 100m in total for his workers to rest and take their meals during all working hours within the Time for Completion and any time period where liquidated damages are imposed under the Contract. Preparation, cooking or selling of food is strictly disallowed in the rest area. The Contractor shall submit detailed drawings indicating the construction, materials to be used, finishes, fittings, furniture and location of the rest area for the SO Rep's approval three weeks prior to its construction. The fittings and furnishings to be provided shall include an adequate number of wash basins and waste receptacles. The Contractor shall ensure that the workers' rest area is maintained and kept in a clean, hygienic and presentable condition at all times. Other than the rest area, the Contractor shall ensure that his workers do not rest, loiter or use any other places within the precinct or in surrounding blocks and common area.
2
1.4.9
Erection of Temporary Structures In addition to the submission of the site layout plan, the Contractor shall further submit detailed structural plans and design calculations, certified by his Professional Engineer, for temporary structures of two storeys or higher. His Professional Engineer may make use of the drawings in the Standard Detail Manual as a guide to the design and submission of the temporary structures. The Contractor shall erect all temporary structures in strict compliance with his Professional Engineer's plans and calculations.
1.4.10
Certificate of Supervision for Temporary Structures All works which require the submission of structural plans and design calculations by the Contractor's Professional Engineer shall be supervised by his Professional Engineer. The Contractor's Professional Engineer shall submit a Certificate of Supervision prior to usage or not later than two weeks after Substantial Completion of the works stating that he has carried out such supervision work and is fully satisfied that the works have been constructed in accordance with the structural plans and design calculations.
1.4.11
Lightning Protection To Temporary Structures And Metal Structures The Contractor shall ensure that all temporary structures such as site office, study room, rest area, and any other temporary structures with continuous metal such as steel framework, scaffolding, tower cranes, batching plants and mobile machineries such as crawler cranes and concrete pumps are adequately and effectively protected from lightning strike at all times. the lightning protection system shall be in accordance with and complying with Singapore Standard CP33 and/or any latest requirements by the BCA. Notwithstanding the provisions of CP33, reinforced concrete structure and foundation shall not be used as lightning conductors or earth electrodes. Lightning conductors shall not be embedded in any structural component and steel reinforcement shall not be used as part of the protection system. The Contractor shall submit detailed drawings showing the design of the lightning protection system duly endorsed by the Contractor's Electrical PE stating that the design complies with Singapore Standard CP33. The Contractor's Electrical PE shall shall provide a Certificate of Supervision together with the earthing reports after the lightning protection installation is completed. The Contractor's PE shall also conduct routine inspections once every 6 months to ensure that the Contractor has provided adequate and effective lightning protection system to the Site.
1.4.12
Water Water approved by the SO Rep shall be used for the works except where specified in Section 2 -Structural Concrete. Where water is to be drawn from Employer's properties, the Contractor shall obtain the prior consent of the SO Rep. The Contractor shall pay for all charges and the temporary plumbing required.
1.4.13
Electricity Electricity supply from Power Supply Ltd mains shall be used for the works. The Contractor shall apply to the Power Supply Ltd for a separate metered supply for each of the blocks where works are to be carried out and must pay for all charges and temporary wiring and equipment required. Extensions of wirings from one block to any adjacent block(s) is not allowed. The Contractor shall not use the switch room as a store for materials and equipment. The Contractor shall employ a licensed electrical worker of appropriate grade to carry out the work. A licensed electrical worker shall mean a qualified competent person to perform electrical works under the Electrical Workers and Contractors Licensing Act 1974. The electrical worker shall be responsible for supervising the Works and shall be empowered to receive and act upon instructions given by the SO Rep. Any such instructions given to the electrical worker shall be deemed to have been given to the Contractor.
1.4.13
Electricity (Cont'd) The electrical installation shall comply with all statutory rules and regulations of the EMA, Government Authorities, Statutory Authorities, SPSL and PowerGrid current at the time of tender and to the complete satisfaction of the SO Rep. In particular, it shall comply with the following: (1) Electricity (Electrical Installations) Regulations made under The Electricity Act (CAP. 89A) including any subsequent updates and amendments of the Regulations, Singapore Standard CP 5; Any additional regulations issued by EMA, SPSL and PowerGrid. All other electrical works shall comply with their respective Codes of Practice
(2) (3) (4)
There shall be one white application card for each of the blocks where electricity supply is required. All particulars of the metered electrical services shall be clearly written on each application card. All application cards shall be forwarded to the HDB's Plan Approval (M&E/Testing) Unit for endorsement. After endorsement, the Contractor shall collect and submit the application card(s) to Power Supply Ltd. The Contractor shall arrange with the Power Supply Ltd for inspection and testing of the installation and for the installation of kilowatt-hour meter(s). The Contractor may, in lieu of electricity supply from Power Supply Ltd mains, use generators to supply electricity for the construction work. The Contractor shall obtain the SO Rep's approval on the type of generator to be used and their locations on site. The Contractor shall take all necessary measures to minimise the noise level of the generators to the satisfaction of the SO Rep. The contractor shall provide, install and maintain the socket-outlet assembly (SOA) for all temporary electrical installations. The SOA shall be manufactured in accordance with CP88:2001:Part 1 (Code of Practice For Temporary Electrical installations in Construction & Building Sites). It shall be designed for wall mounting or fitted with castors so that it can move around in the worksite. Every electrical equipment used must be plugged directly into the industrial SOA.
1.4.14
Cost Of Water And Electricity The Contractor shall arrange for the provision of suitable and adequate supply of water and electricity for the Site including for the purposes of conducting tests on the Works. Where directed by the SO Rep, the Contractor shall provide and allow other contractors on the Site employed by the Employer, free and unrestricted use of the water and electricity for carrying out testing and commissioning of such other contractors' works. The Contractor shall bear all costs and expenses for the water and electricity consumed at the Site including the cost of water and electricity consumed for carrying out testing and commissioning by such other contractors employed by the Employer on the Site. Where applicable, the SO Rep may at his sole discretion, direct the Contractor to transfer the SPSL account for the water and electricity supply to the Employer or such Town Council(s) or such other party. The Contractor shall be deemed to have included in the Contract Sum for all costs and expenses to be incurred by him for compliance with the requirements stipulated in this clause.
1.4.15 1.4.15.1
COMPUTER SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE Computerised Project Management Software Within one month from the commencement date of the Time for Completion, the Contractor shall provide and implement a Computerised Project Management Software (hereinafter called the "CPMS" for the purpose of this clause including all subclauses under it) during the Time for Completion and any time period where liquidated damages are imposed under the Contract. The SO Rep and the Employer's officers shall be allowed to have full and free access and usage of the CPMS at all times. The Contractor shall use the CPMS, which shall be installed on the Site to prepare the programme for the Works based on the Critical Path Method. The programme for the Works shall include the duration, early start/finish dates, late start/finish dates and floats for all activities involved in the Works. It shall also include constraints and parameters such as fixed start/finish and target start/finish dates for the activities and milestones for the different phases or stages of the Works. The programme for the Works shall comprise of summary and detailed reports in textual and graphical forms. It shall be updated monthly or as and when required by the SO Rep to indicate, inter-alia, the critical path, actual start and finish dates of completed activities, actual start dates and percentage completion of the activities in progress and target start and finish dates of the delayed activities, their slippages and floats. The Contractor shall submit to the SO Rep the actual programme for the Works within three weeks after the Date of Substantial Completion.
1.4.15.2
Computer Hardware Within one month from the commencement date of the Time for Completion, the Contractor shall provide the Computer Hardware during the Time for Completion and any time period where liquidated damages are imposed under the Contract. Personal Computer The Contractor shall provide FOUR(4) Personal Computers (hereinafter referred to as "PC" ). One PC shall be located in the Information Centre, and the remaining three PC shall be for the exclusive use of the SO Rep, SO Rep(TP) and other HDB staff respectively. A peer-to-peer network for 3 PC(one PC in the Information Centre and two PC for the exclusive use of SO Rep and other HDB staff) must be set up by the Contractor at the Upgrading site. The PC at the Information Centre shall be set up to act as a server (hereinafter referred to as Server) and the other two PC will act as clients (hereinafter referred to as Clients) on the network. The HDB MUP Information Centre System (hereinafter referred to as MICS) will be installed into the Server by the SO Rep. The Contractor must implement share-level security such that the Clients can access the MICS in the Server but the Server cannot access any of the files in the Clients. The specifications for setting up peer-to-peer network for the 3 PC at the Upgrading sites are as stated in this clause including all subclauses under it. Each PC shall comply with the following minimum specifications: (i) (ii) (iii) An Intel Pentium 4 processor running at a speed of 2.0 GHz; 512 MB of Memory RAM, expandable to 2 GB; One 3-inch form factor enhanced or fast Ultra ATA100 hard disk of total capacity of 20 GB, or more with average spin time of 5400 rpm or faster; [The hard disk must has 2 partitions eg. C and D drive]; One AGP 2X high-speed Super VGA video adapter with at least 32 MB RAM, and able to display at least 32-bit true colour at Super VGA resolution of 1024x768 pixels; One 17-inch or more Super VGA non-interlaced, low radiation colour monitor able to display at least 32-bit true colour at Super VGA resolution of 1024x768 pixels and at a refresh rate of 75 Hz; One 17-inch anti-glare glass screen filter; One 1.44 MB 3-inch floppy drive; Integrated sound card audio feature with integrated/external speakers and Sound Blaster Pro compatibility or equivalent;
(iv) (v) (vi) (vii) (viii)

1.4.15.2
Computer Hardware (Cont'd) Personal Computer (Cont'd) (ix) (x) System BIOS updateable via software should be licensed flash BIOS of the latest version; One bi-directional 25-pin parallel port, two 16550 UART compatible asynchronous serial ports, one mouse port, one keyboard port and at least two universal serial bus(USB) port; Bus architecture should consist of 64-bit process-cache memory data bus and at least three 32-bit PCI expansion slots; One power supply of at least 200 Watts at 220/230 Volts 50Hz; One enhanced AT type keyboard with 104 typematic repeating keys including 12 programmable function keys and 3 Windows function keys; One Microsoft mouse or compatible; One IDE CD-RW drive; (24X Write / 10X Rewrite / 40X Max Read) or higher. Must be able to read CD-ROM, Multi Read, CD Text, Audio CD, CD-I, CD-RW, CD-R, CD-DA, Video CD, CD EXTRA, CD-ROM XA and Photo CD/Multi-session and also able to write CD-R and CD-RW, Track at once, Disc at once, Fixed Packet, Variable Packet and Multi-session. Casing must be secure and comes with one good quality chassis lock of unique combination. All keys to the lock shall be given to the SO Rep.
(xi)
(xii) (xiii)
(xiv) (xv)
(xvi)
(xvii) ONE Netrust-Ready serial Smart Card Reader (ADC serial or equivalent). (The smart card reader shall be applicable only for the three PC designated for the exclusive use of the SO Rep, SO Rep(TP) and other HDB staff. (xviii) Must include all the necessary features and accessories required to support the type of broadband connection services specified in this clause including all sub-clauses under it. (xix) Loaded with the software as specified in this clause including all subclauses under it.
The PC must be fully compatible with Windows 2000, or later, and shall be Microsoft certified. The PC shall also be certified by Novell Testing Laboratory as a LAN workstation for Novell NetWare Version 5.0 or later. The Contractor shall at his own cost and expense provide and maintain Broadband Connection Services (with minimum connection speed of 512 kbps) via a Broadband Service Provider (such as Starhub Maxonline, Pacific Internet Ltd, Reach Internet Services Pte Ltd, SingNet, Little Green Apples Pte Ltd or equivalent to be approved by the SO Rep) for each of the three PC during the Time for Completion and any time period where liquidated damages are imposed under the Contract. The broadband cable or telephone line shall be used solely for the PC Laser Printer The Contractor shall provide ONE LaserJet printer complying with the following specifications: (i) (ii) (iii) (iv) (v) At least 16 MB of RAM and upgradeable to at least 160 MB; Able to print at least 20 pages of A4 per minute and 11 pages of A3 per minute; Automatic Duplex Printing Unit Print at 600 x 600 dpi resolution or more; Support high speed bi-directional IEEE 1284-compliant parallel port (C-type connector) and 10/100Base-TX Ethernet; Support PCL 5e, PCL 6 and Postscript Level 3 emulation Must be able to support printing in the software specified in this clause including all sub-clauses under it as well as Lotus Notes Release 5.04 or later. Bundled with drivers for the software specified in this clause including all sub-clauses under it.
(vi) (vii)
(viii)
1.4.15.2
Computer Hardware (Cont'd) Uninterruptible Power Supply (UPS) The Contractor shall provide FOUR Uninterruptible Power Supply (UPS) complying with the following specifications: (i) (ii) (iii) (iv) (v) (vi) Conform to industry standards as follows : IEEE 446, NEMA PE1, ANSI C62.41, IEEE587B, IEC 801-146; Conform to the safety standards as follows : UL 1778, CSA C22.2 and VDE; 10 minutes or more runtime at full load; Shall provide alert on AC power failure, power restore and diagnostic tests through management software; Shall provide at least 3 output ports; Must include all connecting cables joining the UPS output ports and equipment.
Colour Scanner The Contractor shall provide ONE colour scanner complying with the following specifications: (i) (ii) (iii) (iv) (v) (vi) Flatbed, one-pass colour and monochrome At least 600dpi x 600dpi resolution Able to scan A4 size documents Support Universal Serial Bus(USB) port Shall include scanning software that can display the image file size to users at the preview screen Able to support all image formats including but not limited to, TIFF BMP JPEG FPX GIF WMF Bundled with drivers for the software specified in this clause including all sub-clauses under it.
(vii)
Network Interface Card The Contractor shall provide :(i) THREE(3) 3COM Fast EtherLink 10/100 Mbps PCI TX NM or equivalent Fast Ethernet network interface cards or integrated to be installed on each of the three PC designated for the use of the Information Centre, SO Rep and other HDB staff complying with the following specifications: (a) (b) (c) (d) Shall be fully compatible with IEEE 802.3; Shall support 10/100 Mbps via RJ-45 Port using Category-5 UTP; Shall support autosensing of Ethernet speed; Shall have LEDs indicators that indicate it is in 10 mbps operational mode, 100Mbps operational mode and light that blinks when there is network activity; Shall be Plug-and-Play for Windows 98SE or later;
(e)
1.4.15.2
Computer Hardware (Cont'd) Network Interface Card (Cont'd) (i) (f) Shall provide all drivers;
(g) (h) (ii)
Shall work with all the 10/100BaseT switches and hubs in the market; Shall provide Category-5 UTP cables for each adapter for connecting to the hub.
ONE(1) 3COM Office Connect Dual Speed Hub 5 (10/100BASE-TX Hub) 3C16755 or equivalent 5-port RJ-45 Fast Ethernet Hub complying with following specifications: a) b) c) Shall be fully compatible with IEEE 802.3; Shall have at least Five(5) 10/100 autosensing RJ-45 ports; Shall have the following LED indicators:- Power LED; - Port status LED including link, activity and partition; - Collision LED that detect collision in the network; Shall provide all other accessories, hardware, software, cables, boards, etc required so that the hub can operate in the network; Shall provide full documentation.
d)
e)
Computer Cabling The Contractor shall provide CAT 5 UTP Cables complying with the following specifications:a) All items, unless otherwise stated, shall include the use of materials, labour, equipment, tools and vehicles, replacement and making good, fixing in position, all cutting and waste, return of packings, labour dismantling, making good all affected works and disposal of fittings including checking, tracing and clearing of faults(if any). All computer cables shall be laid in existing cable trays or trunkings from the computer distribution rooms to all computer points. Where cable trays are not available, the contractor shall supply and install new cable trays(measure separately). The location of the new cable tray must be approved by the Superintending Officers Representative before work can commence. All cables shall run directly from point to point without joints, and both ends shall be terminated with Cat 5 RJ45 Plug & Socket. All cables shall run on cable trays and laid in bunches of six, tied together with releasable cable ties every 600 mm. Care should be taken to ensure that the cables are not twisted and entangled within the bunch. All Cat 5 UTP cables will be run above the ceiling. However, all these cables must be enclosed in metal or PVC trunking. Each cable shall be identified by a unique numbering system (which will be specified in the cable layout plans) with the numbers clearly labelled in the Distribution Cabinet and at both ends of the cable. All additional openings for installation of floor and desktop opening are readily available. Should any additional floor and desktop openings be required, they shall be constructed by the contractor. All openings used for computer cable must be fire-stopped after the installation. 3 faceplates are needed which includes fixing and installation.
b)
c)
d)
e)
f)
g)
h)
i) j)
1.4.15.2
Computer Hardware (Cont'd) Computer Cabling (Cont'd) k) l) Cat 5 RJ45 cables( multi strands) is to be used for all patch cables. Electro-galvanised perforated steel cable tray with epoxy coating including all hangers, supports and fitting is to be used to support the computer cables when running from the ceiling.
1.4.15.3
Computer Software Within one month from the commencement date of the Time for Completion, the Contractor shall provide the Computer Software during the Time for Completion and any time period where liquidated damages are imposed under the Contract. The Contractor shall provide the following licensed software packages (full packs with Original licences, documentation and media provided) for each PC provided under this clause including all subclauses under it: (i) (ii) Microsoft Windows 2000 Professional Edition, or later; Microsoft Project 2002 Standard Edition, or later (only for the PC designated for the exclusive use of the SO Rep); Microsoft Office 2000 Professional Edition; or later Norton Internet Security Software Version 3.0, or later; F-Secure Anti-Virus Version 5.40, or later.
(iii) (iv) (v)
The Contractor shall purchase maintenance license for the VirusScan softwares to cover the Time for Completion and any time period where liquidated damages are imposed under the Contract. The PC must be set to automatically scan for virus at least once a day when the PC is switched on. The latest FSecure(DOS Version) BootDisk must be given to the SO Rep whenever there is any update. 1.4.15.4 Computer Software Licensing All the Computer Software as specified in this clause including all subclauses under it shall be licensed copies obtained from Authorised distributors or dealers. The Contractor shall at his own cost and expense provide any software upgrade, to the latest version or release upon request by SO Rep during the Time for Completion and any time period where liquidated damages are imposed under the Contract. The Contractor shall ensure that only authorised software are used with the Hardware and obtain written approval from the SO Rep before installing any software other than the ones specified in this clause including all subclauses under it, into the Computer Hardware System. 1.4.15.5 Approval and Testing of Computer Hardware and Software The Contractor shall submit specifications and details of the Computer Hardware and Software as specified in this clause including all subclauses under it to the SO Rep for approval BEFORE the purchase of the Hardware and Software. The Contractor shall at his own cost and expense make such necessary arrangement for the hardware and software to be tested at HDBCorp's office and the subsequent delivery to the worksite upon request by the SO Rep. 1.4.15.6 Installation/Upgrade/Removal of HDB Applications The Contractor shall at his own cost and expense make such necessary arrangement for the installation/upgrade/removal of HDB software at the relevant Consultant's office and the subsequent delivery to the worksite upon request by the SO Rep. 1.4.15.7 Computer Furniture and Accessories The Contractor shall provide the necessary furniture and accessories at the site office to accommodate and facilitate the usage of the Computer Hardware and Software. The PC designated for the exclusive use of HDB staff other than the SO Rep shall be located in a fully enclosed room within the site office. The room shall be of minimum size 5 m as specified. The room shall be provided with a lock and be partitioned in half-height glass panels.
1.4.15.8
Computer System Maintenance The Contractor shall ensure that the Computer Hardware and Software are in good working condition and pay for all maintenance, license fees, subscription fees and etc for the Hardware and Software during the Time for Completion and any time period where liquidated damages are imposed under the Contract. If the Contractor fails to make available the Hardware and Software within one calendar month from the commencement date of the Time for Completion or fails to rectify any Hardware or Software faults, within one day, the SO Rep will make the necessary arrangement to acquire or to rectify the faults and all costs and expenses thus incurred shall be deducted from payments due to or becoming due to the Contractor or recovered as a debt due from the Contractor.
1.4.15.9
Security The Contractor shall make all necessary arrangement and provision to prevent theft/burglary of the Computer Hardware and Software. The Contractor shall replace any stolen or missing Hardware and Software within 3 days of such occurrence, failing which the SO Rep will make the necessary arrangement to acquire the systems and all costs and expenses thus incurred shall be deducted from payment due to or becoming due to the Contractor or recovered as a debt due from the Contractor. In addition, the Contractor is required to provide on site a 2-hour fireproof safe with dial lock of external dimensions 440mm(H) x 330 mm(W) x 480mm(D) or equivalent for safe keeping of backup MICS data on site for fire safety and security on site.
1.4.15.10
Unauthorised Usage The Contractor shall ensure that the Hardware and Software are not used for any other purpose except for those approved by the SO Rep.
1.4.16
Provision Of Safety Helmets And Safety Boots The Contractor shall provide sufficient safety helmets and safety boots for use by the Employers officers and visitors visiting the Site throughout the Time for Completion and any time periods where liquidated damages are imposed under the Contract. The ownership of the safety helmets and safety boots shall be reverted to the Contractor upon the satisfactory Substantial Completion of the Works. The requirements are as follows : (a) Safety Helmets (i) (ii) (iii) (b) white colour with HDB logo in front of helmet. (Colour code for HDB logo : Pantone 485) complete with canvas chin straps and sweat resisting lining. comply with SS98.
Safety Boots (i) (ii) (iii) (iv) (v) (vi) (vii) (viii) (ix) at least 24cm in height black/brown colour with steel toe cap long-wearing of great flexibility and resilience slip proof, resistant to oil, acid and heat nail proof of excellent insulation comfortable and light comply with SS105
The Contractor shall immediately replace those safety helmets and safety boots which the SO Rep considers to be not in good working condition. 1.4.17 Equipment for Defect Checking The Contractor shall provide all necessary tools and equipment for the SO Rep and Clerk-of-Works to carry out defect checking. Number of such tools and equipment shall be determined by the SO Rep and shall include but not limited to the following : (a) (b) (c) (d) (e) (f) (g) (h) 1.4.18 marker pens measuring tapes vernier calipers spirit levels plumbs set squares steel rod with a steel ball welded at one end (tapping rods) any other equipment required by SO's Rep
Metal Detector The Contractor shall provide a battery-operated portable metal detector for the purpose of detecting metal reinforcement embedded in cement mortar joints of brickwalls. The detector must have either a light or buzzer indicator to indicate the presence of metal.
1.4.19 1.4.19.1
Temporary Sanitary Facilities for Occupants Portable Bathroom/Toilet Inside Flats The Contractor shall provide, install and maintain a Portable bathroom/toilet, complete with water supply and equipped with shower and tap points, inside each flat during the period of upgrading of its existing bathrooms/toilets. The Portable bathroom/toilet may be installed in the kitchen or other locations within the flat identified by the SO Rep and shall be made functional at all times including during the execution of the Works inside the flat. The Portable bathroom/toilet shall be connected to the existing or newly installed main soil stack for the discharge of waste. Where the SO Rep is of the opinion that the Portable bathroom/toilet cannot be made functional during the working hours without severely obstructing the Works, the Contractor shall be required to make the Portable bathroom/toilet functional at the end of each working day.
1.4.19 1.4.19.1
Temporary Sanitary Facilities for Occupants (Cont'd) Portable Bathroom/Toilet Inside Flats (Cont'd) The Contractor shall propose the type of Portable bathroom/toilet to be used and obtain the SO Reps written approval for it prior to the procurement of the Portable bath/toilet and its use inside the flats. Two types of Portable bathroom/toilet shall be provided by the Contractor for the residents selection. Portable bathroom/toilet with pedestal pan and Portable bathroom/toilet with squat pan. Unless otherwise approved by the SO Rep, the Portable bath/toilet shall remain inside each flat for the duration of the Works inside the existing bathroom/toilet. Upon completion of the upgrading of the existing bathroom/toilet, the Contractor shall wash and clean the Portable bath/toilet thoroughly before dismantling it and reassembling it in another flat. In the event that the Portable bath/toilet cannot be placed inside the flat without, in the opinion of the SO Rep, severely obstructing the residents daily routine, the Contractor shall render the existing bathroom/toilet undergoing upgrading suitable for use by the residents including the provision of a temporary PVC or other approved pedestal pan. The temporary pedestal pan for the residents to use at the end of each working day shall be connected to the existing or newly installed main soil stack for the discharge of waste. New works completed during the day shall be properly protected against possible damage due to usage of the existing bathroom/toilet by the residents. The Contractor shall be responsible for the rectification of all damages to the new works resulting from the existing bathroom/toilet undergoing upgrading being subject to usage by the residents. Provide always that the SO Rep may direct the Contractor to both provide the Portable bathroom/toilet and render the existing bathrooms/toilets undergoing upgrading suitable for use by the residents in different flats. The Contractor is deemed to have included in his Contract Sum, all costs and expenses for the provision, installation and maintenance of the temporary sanitary facilities specified herein.
1.4.19.2
Common Temporary Sanitary Facilities Prior to the commencement of work in any existing bathroom/toilet in each block of flats, the Contractor shall provide common temporary bathrooms and toilets adjacent to the affected block or at a location approved by the SO Rep. The minimum number of common temporary toilets to be provided per block for the duration of the works in each block shall be as follows : Male Toilets 2 Female Toilets 2
Provided always that the Contractor shall increase the number of common temporary toilets provided where the SO Rep is of the opinion that the aforementioned minimum numbers are insufficient to serve the affected residents. All common temporary toilets shall be equipped with wash hand basins, pedestal water closets/squat pans and support bars for the disabled. Prior written approval by the SO Rep shall be obtained before erection of the temporary toilets. Site staff and workmen shall not be permitted to use these temporary toilets. The Contractor shall provide for the maintenance of the temporary toilets and bathrooms in a clean, hygienic and good working condition at all times to the satisfaction of the SO Rep. Upon completion of all works affecting existing bathroom/toilet in each block of flats, the Contractor shall dismantle and remove the temporary toilets and bathrooms and make good.
1.4.20
Temporary Sanitary Facilities For Staff and Workmen Within 21 days after the acceptance of the Contractors Tender by the Employer, the Contractor shall provide temporary sanitary facilities with adequate lighting and of suitable structures on the Site to be approved by the SO Rep. The Contractor may use the Employers Standard Drawings as a guide in designing the temporary sanitary facilities. The temporary facilities shall contain water closets and shower compartments in the proportion of 1 closet and 1 shower to every 25 workmen, for the duration of the Works. In addition, the Contractor shall provide separate sanitary facilities with water closets and shower compartments for the use of the Employers officers. Prior written approval by the SO Rep shall be obtained before erection of these facilities.
1.4.20
Temporary Sanitary Facilities For Staff and Workmen (Cont'd)
The water closets shall be of a type, make and pattern approved by ENV. The doors to the cubicles of the temporary facilities shall be of an approved material. All waste discharge from the water closets and all waste water from the temporary sanitary facilities and from the Site shall be discharged into a public sewer. The Contractor shall arrange with ENV to carry out work from temporary sanitary facilities to the public sewer and pay all charges and maintenance in connection therewith. The Contractor shall be responsible for all damages to and shall indemnify the Employer against all liabilities in respect of such sewer connections. Where a public sewer is not available or where it is not possible to connect to a public sewer, the Contractor shall at its own cost and expense provide and install temporary septic tanks of a type, pattern and capacity approved by ENV, to serve the water closets, showers, and baths. Drawings of such septic tanks may be obtained from ENV.
1.4.21
Temporary Drainage System The Contractor shall construct temporary drainage, including concrete-lined temporary drains where directed by the SO Rep before commencement of piling, excavation or as and when directed by the SO Rep. The Contractor shall maintain the system until completion of the construction. In discharging surface run-off into existing water courses, the Contractor shall take measures to prevent silting of such water courses. The SO Rep reserves the right to make alterations to the system when necessary. The Contractor shall allow for the cost of construction and maintenance of such drainage system in his Tender. On completion of the Works, the Contractor shall remove all temporary drains and make good to the original site condition or in accordance with the drawings to the satisfaction of the SO Rep. The Contractor shall also keep all affected drains and walkways free from obstruction and clear the drains from chokage at all times. The Contractor shall also ensure that all stagnant water is drained off immediately.
1.4.22
Temporary Store Room for Lift Parts The Contractor shall provide a temporary storage space with a floor area of 50 square metres unless otherwise approved by the SO Rep and another temporary store room properly secured and complete with door and latch and with a floor area of 15 square metres at the ground floor of each building block where lifts are to be installed or upgraded. The temporary storage space/temporary store room shall be used solely by the lift contractor for keeping lift parts during the lift installation or upgrading period which shall commence from the date of handing over of the lift hoistway and lift motor room to the lift contractor. If the abovementioned temporary storage space/temporary store room need to be removed to allow the Contractor and/or other contractors to proceed with their work, the Contractor shall first provide an alternative storage space/store room and arrange with the lift contractor to vacate the original temporary storage space/temporary store room and transfer such lift parts to the alternative storage space/store room. The location and type of temporary storage space/temporary store room shall be approved by the SO Rep.
1.4.23
Site Access and Control and Provision of Hoarding The Contractor may use the surrounding roads for access subject to approval by the relevant Authorities and the SO Rep. The Contractor shall ensure that ingress and egress to and from site are sited suitably far from traffic junctions to avoid causing traffic congestion. The Contractor shall erect adequate warning signs and lights to avoid causing any safety hazard. The proposed locations for ingress and egress must be submitted for approval by the relevant authorities and the SO Rep prior to the commencement of works on site.
1.4.23
Site Access and Control and Provision of Hoarding (Cont'd) The Contractor shall ensure that the site/blocks are properly cordoned off to the satisfaction of the SO's Rep and the public is kept away from the construction activity during the construction period. Where existing walkways are affected, alternative temporary walkways must be provided. The Contractor shall also ensure that public access to the premises on site is not unnecessarily obstructed. The Contractor shall obtain the SO Rep's approval if any public access is re-sited. The Contractor shall be responsible for the erection and maintenance of temporary walkways, hoardings/protective shelters and directional signs within the contract boundary. All hoardings must be painted with at least three(3) coats of approved enamel paint of approved colour and graphics on one side prior to commencement of the construction works or when directed by the SO Rep. For hoardings along the contract boundary, approved coloured graphic designs must be painted on the exposed surfaces. All directional signs shall be of metal or PVC type with reflective surfaces easily visible at night. The hoarding along the contract boundary shall be 2m high. Unless otherwise approved by the SO Rep, hoarding next to public walkways, access corridors, void decks, etc. shall also be 2m high complete with an overhead shelter of at least 1.5m in length and incline at an angle of 45 degrees. All work areas shall be cordoned off with hoardings or barricades to the approval of the SO Rep. The Contractor shall maintain all temporary walkways and hoardings/protective shelters in good condition at all times and repaint them if in the opinion of SO Rep, the surface is dirty/faded. All temporary walkways and hoardings/protective shelters shall be repainted at lease once a year. Any damage shall be repaired immediately. Where ground floor units are occupied, the Contractor shall submit details of the proposed hoarding to the SO's Rep for approval. The Contractor shall incorporate measures to ensure that the lighting and ventilation of the flats are not unduly affected. The hoarding shall be designed in accordance with relevant statutory requirement by a Professional Engineer employed by the Contractor. The proposed layout and design of the hoarding shall be submitted for SO Rep's approval at least two weeks before the erection. Should the Contractor fail to comply with the requirements of this clause, the SO Rep is empowered to engage a Professional Engineer to design the hoarding and all cost and expense so incurred including charges by the Employer shall be recoverable from the Contractor. The hoarding shall be constructed in accordance with approved layout and design. The Professional Engineer shall satisfy himself that the hoarding erected is able to resist the imposed loadings designed for. The hoarding shall meet the following minimum requirements : (a) 0.42mm thick zincalume steel galvanised steel of 2m height with 200mm clearance above ground. All exposed metal sheet surface of new metal hoarding shall be finished with 25 microns colourbond silicone modified polyester coating. A `toe board' shall be fixed at the working side of the hoarding to prevent materials and debris from spilling over to the public area. Metal posts under Grade 43 of BS 5950 (size to Professional Engineer's design). 300mm x 300mm x 300mm Grade 20 concrete foundation. Approved graphic/colour design with upgrading logos on one side of the hoarding. Reflective directional signs on PVC/metal plate displayed along the route of movement. Approved gates/doors with self-closing and locking devices at all "openings" of hoardings. "Danger - Keep Out" reflective signs on PVC/metal plate displayed at conspicuous locations as and when required. Such signs shall be in red on white background. Size of 400mm x 600mm viewing panels made of transparent perspex or other equivalent material installed at about 12m interval on hoardings along void deck/walkway. Undamaged recycle metal hoarding are allowed. All exposed surface of recycled metal hoarding shall be painted with at least 3 coats of approved paint of approved colour scheme and with graphic design.
(b) (c) (d) (e) (f) (g) (h) (i) (j)
The Contractor shall install artificial lighting at the void decks, access corridors and walkways whenever natural lighting is partially blocked by the hoardings or protective shelters. The Contractor shall also install sufficient artificial lighting to ensure that the whole precinct is lit at night, including facilities under construction, temporary works and scaffolding. The Contractor shall submit the layout for the artificial lighting and choice of the lighting facilities for the SO Rep's approval.
1.4.23
Site Access and Control and Provision of Hoarding (Cont'd) When any hoarding, protective shelter, or walkway needs to be temporarily dismantled, removed or shifted for the purpose of the movement of equipment, materials, erection or hoisting of components, the Contractor shall provide adequate warning signs and station at least one safety officer at each affected location to ensure the safety of the public. The Contractor shall reinstate the hoarding, protective shelter or walkway to its original approved position immediately after completion of the work and not later than the end of the working day. As and when instructed by the SO Rep, the Contractor shall at his own cost provide additional hoardings/protective shelters or temporary walkways or adjust the layout of different phases of construction to the satisfaction of the SO Rep. All surrounding roads, driveways, carparks shall be kept clean at all times. Soil droppings shall be removed daily.
1.4.24
Access Roads and Protective Crossings The Contractor shall repair and maintain all access roads serving the Site and provide temporary protective crossings over existing drains, channels, footways, etc throughout the duration of the Contract. The Contractor shall be responsible for making good all damage and/or clearing away on Substantial Completion to the requirements of the relevant Authorities and to the satisfaction of the SO Rep.
1.4.25
Signboards (a) Signboards in Other Languages Where erection of signboards with more than one language is required, all translations must be carried out by competent translators approved by the SO Rep. All completed signboards shall be approved by the SO Rep before they are erected. The Contractor shall bear all costs and expenses arising. (b) No Parking/No Dumping Signboards Upon the award of the contract, the Contractor shall provide and fabricate an adequate number of "No Parking/No Dumping" signboards of a manner shown in the drawings to prevent unauthorised vehicles/persons from parking/dumping debris on the site. The positions where the signboards are to be installed shall be decided by the SO Rep. (c) Temporary Roads Signage Works carried out on/or near gazetted roads must comply with LTA Temporary Road Signage recommendations. (d) Directional Signboards Upon the award of the contract, the Contractor shall provide and fabricate an adequate number of directional signboards indicating traffic diversions, directions to information centre, various blocks and any other directions as required by the SO Rep. The numbers and locations of the signboards to be installed shall be subject to the approval of the SO Rep. Notwithstanding any prior approvals, the SO Rep reserves the right to increase the number or change the locations of directional signboards as and when he considers it necessary. All signboards shall be made of metal or PVC with luminous surfaces for increased visibility at night.
1.4.26
Gas Works Notwithstanding other provisions in the Contract, the Contractor shall engage only City Gas Ltd to carry out all works relating to the existing gas installations unless otherwise approved by the SO Rep. The Contractor shall not carry out any gas diversion works on its own or in any way tamper with the existing gas installations such as shifting support brackets of existing gas pipes, without the prior approval of the SO Rep.
Ugdg Spec GS Page 52 1.4.27 Information Centre and Infoline Within one (1) month from the date of the Letter of Acceptance, the Contractor shall set up an Information Centre complete with a Toll Free Telephone Information Hotline (hereinafter referred as "Infoline"). During working hours from 8.00 am to 6.00 pm, Monday through Saturdays, the Information Centre and Infoline shall be manned by the Public Relations Officer and/or Clerical Officer. After working hours and on Sundays and Public Holidays, the Information Centre and Infoline shall be manned by the Senior Security Guard. All telephone conversation on the Infoline shall be recorded. The Infoline shall be connected to a voiceactivated tape recording system which shall operate 24 hours a day, including Sundays and Public Holidays. The recording system shall include the equipment and functional capabilities stipulated below: (a) A compact voice-activated cassette recorder with the following functions or features : (i) (ii) (iii) (b) capture date and time of each and every telephone call; display or indicate date and time of each and every telephone call during playback built-in microphone and speaker end-of-tape alarm warning feature
A secured cabinet complete with lock and key to house the cassette recorder. Location of the cabinet shall be determined by the SO Rep. All keys and recorded cassette tapes shall be kept by the SO Rep.
An audio cassette player, cassette tapes and any other accessories necessary for the proper running of the recording system and playback of recorded conversations shall be provided by the Contractor. The Infoline and the recording system shall be maintained in good working order at all times. All breakdowns shall be repaired within 24 hours unless otherwise permitted by the SO Rep. All costs, expenses, charges and fees for the Information Centre and Infoline specified herein and including but not limited to replenishment for consumables such as cassette tapes and payment for all utilities bills shall be deemed included in the Contractor's Contract Sum. Should the Contractor fail to provide or repair the aforementioned Infoline complete with the specified functions and features within the stipulated time period, the SO Rep may forthwith purchase and provide the same on the Contractor's behalf. All costs and expenses so incurred plus charges shall be recovered by the Employer from monies due or becoming due to the Contractor or as a debt due by the Contractor to the Employer.
1.4.28
Stationery for Employer's Officers The Contractor shall provide stationery and other devices for site use by the Employer's officers upon commencement of the Works. The list of stationery to be provided is as follows : Item No. 1. Description Ball Point Pen (Black/Blue/Red) Quantity (Maximum) 2 no. each per Clerk of Works.
2. 3. 4.
Correction Fluid Eraser (Pencil) Exercise Book : a) 60 pages b) 120 pages Glue Tube Hard Cover Book : a) A4 size b) A5 size Manila File
1 no. per Clerk of Works 1 no. per Clerk of Works
a) b)
5 each 5 each.
5. 6.
1 no. per Clerk of Works
a) b) 25 no.
5 each. 5 each.
7.
1.4.28
Stationery for Employer's Officers (Cont'd) Item No. 8. Description Paper Clip : a) Medium Size b) 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14. 15. 16. 17. 18. 19. 20. 21. 22. 23. 24. 25. 26 27. 28. 29. 30. 31 Large Size a) b) 2 no. 2 no. per Clerk of Works. 2 no. 1 no. per Clerk of Works. 1 no. per Clerk of Works 2 no. 1 no. per Clerk of Works. 1 no. per Clerk of Works. 1 no. per Clerk of Works. 1 no. 1 set 1 set 1 no. 1 no. per Clerk of Works. 40 no. plus 3 no. per building block 1 no. per Clerk of Works 1 no. per Clerk of Works Max. 5 nos per contract 1 no. per Clerk of Works 2 boxes of 10 formatted diskettes per contract 1 no. per Clerk of Works 1 no. per Clerk of Works 1 box of 10 CDRW discs Quantity (Maximum) 2 boxes. 2 boxes.
Pen Knife Pencil (2B) Perforator Pocket Notebook Ruler (300 mm) Scissor Stamp Pad (Violet) Staple Machine (B3) Staples (B3) Calculator (without scientific functions) Colour Pencils Highlighter of Assorted Colours Scale Ruler Writing Pad (A4) Hard Cover Ring File Ear Plugs Measuring Tape Rubber Stamp Retractable tapping rod 3.5 inch diskettes (1.44MB) Measuring Tape of minimum 5 metre length Laser Pointer CD Re-write able discs
Should the Contractor fails to provide any of the aforementioned stationery after the commencement date of the Time for Completion, the SO Rep shall forthwith purchase and provide the same on the Contractor's behalf and all costs and expenses for such purchase and provision plus charges shall be recovered by the Employer from any monies due or becoming due to the Contractor or be recovered as a debt due by the Contractor to the Employer.
Ugdg Spec GS Page 54 1.4.29 Temporary Electricity Supply And Installation The Contractor shall employed a Licensed Electrical Worker (LEW) of at least an "Electrical Technical" Grade to design and install all temporary electrical installations necessary for the works. The temporary electrical installations shall comply with the requirements of the CP88:2001:Part 1 (Code of Practice For Temporary Electrical installations in Construction & Building Sites). Throughout the Time for Completion and any time period where liquidated damages are imposed under the Contract, the Contractors LEW shall ensure good safety standards and practices and including the following : (a) The Contractor shall use M/s Power Grid Ltd's power supply to provide temporary electricity supply during the construction stage unless otherwise approved by the SO Rep. The electrical switch board which holds the RCCB shall be housed in a switch box located at least 1.5 m from the floor level; All sheaths of cables, sockets outlets and plugs are in good working condition; All cables are properly bound and do not cause obstruction to passageways, walkways and stairs; All cables are properly supported with L-shaped galvanised steel brackets and placed at a suitable height, away from any source which cause mechanical damage; All plugs, socket-outlets and cable couplers are to be of the standard industrial type and of minimum classification of IP 44.
(b)
(c) (d) (e)
(f)
Subject to the prior approval of the SO Rep, the Contractor may, in lieu of electricity supply from Power Supply Ltd mains, use generators to supply electricity for the construction work. All electrical generator sets shall be licensed with valid EMA license when they are in use. The Contractor shall take all necessary measures to minimise the noise level of the generators to the satisfaction of the SO Rep. 1.4.30 COMPLIANCE WITH THE TECHNICAL GUIDELINES FOR FIRE SAFETY IN TEMPORARY BUILDINGS IN CONSTRUCTION WORKSITES The Contractor shall comply with the Technical Guidelines for Fire Safety in Temporary Buildings in Construction Worksites, including any amendment thereto, issued by the FSSD, Singapore Civil Defence Force. In this connection, the Contractors PE shall endorse on the plans for all temporary buildings to certify compliance with the said FSSD Guidelines.
1.5
WORK METHODS
1.5.1
Work Methods for All Trades The Contractor shall submit to the SO Rep for his approval the work methods to ensure minimum inconvenience and disruption to occupants' daily household routine and good workmanship for all the trades engaged in the Works at least three (3) weeks prior to the commencement of work for each trade. A marking system, where applicable, showing inter alia, the control, grid and level reference lines shall be included in the work methods. The work methods shall include but is not limited to the following work items : (a) (b) (c) (d) (e) (f) replacement of sanitary pipes waterproofing and retiling of bath/w.c. rescreeding of common area erection of additional space removal of existing wall any other works required by the SO's Rep
Where required by the SO Rep, the Contractor shall arrange for the demonstration of the work methods before approval may be granted for its implementation. The Contractor shall also ensure that subcontractors engaged for each trade shall also comply with the work methods approved by the SO Rep. Should it appear to the SO Rep at any time that the work methods proposed by the Contractor will not ensure minimum inconvenience and disruption to occupants' household routine and good workmanship in the Works, the SO Rep may require the Contractor to make at his own costs and expenses such modifications to the original work methods as the SO Rep may consider necessary or appropriate. The Contractor shall use and employ only workers who are skilled and capable of executing the Works in accordance with the works methods approved by the SO Rep. Approval by the SO Rep of the Contractor's work methods, revised work methods or any details and information provided under this clause shall not in any way affect the Contractor's liabilities or obligations under the Contract.
1.5.2
Measurement Plan and Survey Method At least fourteen days before the commencement of Works, the Contractor shall submit to the SO Rep for his approval the measurement plan and survey methods. The areas of Works to be measured and incorporated into the measurement plan and survey methods shall, inter alia, include the following : (a) (b) (c) (d) (e) Verticality and alignment of corners of every building block Verticality and alignment of columns Evenness and verticality of walls Straightness, horizontality, alignment and evenness of beams and slabs Consistency of storey heights
Proper records of all measurements made on the various areas of Works shall be kept by the Contractor. The Contractor shall when directed by the SO Rep submit the records of measurements made in respect of every building block before seeking his approval to proceed with the next stage of the Works. The Contractor shall engage a registered surveyor to carry out measurement of every building block prior to the commencement of the finishing work. Upon completion of the finishing work, the Contractor shall carry out another measurement of the building block. All measurement data shall be submitted by the Contractor to the SO Rep for his approval. Approval by the SO Rep of the Contractor's measurement plan and data, survey methods and further details and information provided under this Clause shall not in any way affect the Contractor's liabilities or obligations under the Contract.
1.5.3
Workshop Drawings and Samples When required, the Contractor shall provide or erect samples of works on Site for the approval of the SO Rep. The Contractor shall not commence any work prior to the approval of the sample. The SO Rep may instruct the Contractor to carry out different methods of fixing, to modify design and to provide alternative panels of finishes for his approval. All subsequent work shall be constructed conforming to the standard of the approved samples. All costs and expenses incurred for the erection of samples shall be deemed to be included in the Contract by the Contractor.
1.5.4
Part Removal or Demolition of Existing Structure Where existing structures or part thereof are to be removed or demolished, the Contractor shall confirm with the SO Rep on the extent of the existing structure to be removed or demolished at least 7 days prior to the commencement of the removal or demolition work. The Contractor shall highlight any existing services or utilities that may be affected by the removal or demolition work and submit proposals to the SO Rep for approval of any diversion or minimisation of disruption in the supply of such services or utilities before commencing work. The Contractor shall ensure that all adjoining existing structures which are not to be removed or demolished would not be damaged during the removal or demolition works. If such adjoining structures are damaged during the removal or demolition works, the Contractor shall immediately report the matter to the SO Rep. The Contractor shall be responsible for any damage to the adjoining structures and shall at his own cost repair, rectify and make good such damage to the satisfaction of the SO Rep.
1.5.5
Demolition of Existing RC/Masonry Wall Where the works involve demolition of the existing wall adjacent to the new space-adding item and/or any other external wall within unit or block as shown in the drawing, the demolition work shall only be carried out after installation of screen wall. If any existing fitting or fixture such as sink, cabinet, cupboard, air-conditioned unit, electrical socket, washing machine, water pipe, drain pipe etc. is attached to the wall to be demolished, the Contractor shall temporarily relocate such fitting or fixture to a position inside the flat approved by the SO Rep, in order that the residents may continue to use these facilities. Upon completion of the affecting works, the Contractor shall reinstate or re-install the fittings or fixtures at a location approved by the SO Rep. Where the existing wall is a block wall, the Contractor may demolish the wall with a hammer or other equipment that will generate noise and dust within the standard specified. Where the existing wall is an RC wall, the Contractor shall use such equipment as a coring machine, diamond saw cutter, diamond chain saw or any other equipment that will generate noise and dust within the standard specified and will not adversely affect the adjacent structures. The Contractor shall provide all necessary protection to existing fitting, fixture and floor adjacent to the wall to be demolished to avoid damage by the equipment used and/or the debris generated. All debris shall be removed and the site cleaned at the end of each day. The Contractor is not allowed to carry debris through a flat for any purpose. The Contractor shall provide all necessary safety measures to prevent the occupants being endangered by exposed steel bars, cut concrete edges etc. The Contractor shall submit his proposed method and equipment to the SO Rep for approval one month prior to commencement of demolition work. The SO Rep may require the Contractor to conduct demonstration of the proposed wall demolition method before granting approval for the same.
1.5.6
Screen Wall The Contractor shall supply and install a screen wall adjacent to all space-adding items (additional balcony, utility room, extension of existing space, etc.) before removal of any existing wall to ensure minimum noise and dust. Where the work does not involve space-adding items but requires the removal of external walls of Units, the Contractor shall also, unless otherwise approved by the SO Rep, supply and install screen walls adjacent to the existing external walls of Units before the removal/demolition and reconstruction of such external walls including parapet walls. The screen walls shall be installed irrespective of the type of existing external walls to be removed/demolished (i.e. brickwalls, concrete walls, metal walls, etc.) The screen wall shall be installed in such a manner that the Occupants continue to have access to their toilets, bathrooms and refuse chute hoppers without any hazard to their safety and security. The screen wall shall be demountable and consist of panels of width not exceeding one metre and thickness not less than 50mm which can take up any position with built-in jacking mechanism to lock the panels between floor and ceiling to avoid damage to adjacent finishes and fittings. The built-in jacking mechanism shall be housed in a cast metal die-block with high tension springs to absorb uneven gradient to the underside of ceilings and to floor levels. It shall be operated only from the side facing the internal of the flat with tools which are specially designed for the system. The use of ordinary bolts and nuts to form the system is not permitted. The screen wall shall incorporate 2 windows (each 700mm x 700mm with 6mm thick opaque polycarbonate/high impact acrylic louvre panels on the inside surface). Where access to essential facilities and/or utilities must be provided for residents through the screen wall, the Contractor shall install a door (700mm width x 2000mm height, lockable from inside a flat) to replace one of the aforesaid windows. The screen wall shall have acoustical quality of not less than 8 dB (A) noise reduction measured from the noise source (outside the screen wall) to one metre away from the other side of the screen and can be erected or dismantled within one hour. Grooves shall be provided at the side of individual panels for inserting PVC or rubberised bulb-seal to reduce the penetration of noise and dust. The surface of the panels shall be of a smooth covering veneer for easy cleaning. If any existing fitting or fixture such as cooker, sink, cabinet, cupboard, etc, should be in the way of the screen wall erection, the Contractor shall modify the demountable system with in-situ panels to suit the site conditions. The Contractor shall submit shop drawings to the SO Rep for his approval of the design and detailing of the screen wall at least one month prior to its erection. The Contractor shall dismantle and remove the screen wall upon completion of the works within each flat. A screen wall may be re-used if its wall surface, window and door are in good condition. The Contractor shall arrange for the SO Rep's inspection and approval prior to the erection of any used screen wall.
1.5.7
Occupants' Fixtures and Fittings Affected by the Works (a) Joint Visit to Flat One week prior to the commencement of work within any particular flat, the Contractor shall visit the flat jointly with the SO Rep and advise its occupants of the fixtures and fittings (including furniture, electrical appliances, finishes, etc) that are likely to be affected by the Works, possible disruption of services and other imminent inconveniences. The fixtures and fitting shall include but is not limited to the items indicated in Clause 1.2.5 "Site Conditions and Information". Where damage to fixtures and fittings is inevitable, the Contractor shall identify the items so affected, the expected extent of damage and provide reasonable explanations to the satisfaction of the SO Rep.
Ugdg Spec GS Page 58 1.5.7 Occupants' Fixtures and Fittings Affected by the Works (Cont'd) (b) Fixtures and Fittings Affected by the Works Unless otherwise specified, the Contractor shall be responsible for the reinstatement, reinstallation, repair, rectification, making good, replacement as required of all fixtures, fittings and attachments damaged or removed or otherwise affected either directly or indirectly by or in connection with the Works. Such reinstatement, reinstallation, repairs rectification, making good or replacement shall be done to a reasonable standard and to match as closely and in every respect with the existing fixtures, fittings, attachments and surroundings to the satisfaction of the SO Rep. Where Occupants' existing fixtures and fittings affected by the Works were not originally done or installed according to or in any way do not comply with the latest HDB requirements on similar renovation works and/or latest requirements, regulations, etc of all relevant authorities, the Contractor shall reinstate the affected fixtures and fittings to comply with the aforesaid requirements, regulations, etc. Such reinstatement works shall be deemed included in Contractor's Contract Sum and shall include but is not limited to the following : (i) (ii) (c) re-lay water supply pipes originally buried under floor or wall tiles; replace existing mild steel supports for air-conditioners with stainless steel supports complete with proper condensation drainage trays and/or pipes.
Fixtures and Fittings Affected by the Replacement of Waste Stack and/or Sanitary Branch Pipes in the Kitchen For fixtures and fittings affected by the replacement of waste stack and/or sanitary branch pipes in the kitchen, the Contractor shall assist the residents to remove the affected fittings and fixtures carefully and place them in a location inside the Unit or flat identified by the residents. Except for the provisions herein, the Contractor is not required to reinstate back the fittings and fixtures after the completion of the works. The fittings and fixtures affected by the replacement of the waste stack and/or sanitary branch pipe in the kitchen that the Contractor shall reinstate to the satisfaction of the SO Rep as follows : (i) (ii) the wall and floor tiles or other affected wall and floor finishes; if the existing tiles or other finishes on the dapoh slab are damaged by the Contractor, the Contractor shall relay the entire top surface of the dapoh slab with the same finishes to match closely with the existing tiles or other finishes; for HDB's rental flats, all fixtures and fittings affected by the works shall be reinstated by the Contractor.
(iii) (d)
Water Supply Pipes/PVC Cable Trunking/Ceiling Skim Coat In Existing Bathroom/Toilet The Contractor shall provide and lay new water supply pipes in the existing bathroom and/or toilet. The new water supply pipes shall be connected to the nearest existing water supply pipe joint outside the bathroom and/or toilet. Where the existing water supply pipe is made of galvanised iron, it shall be replaced with new UPVC water supply pipes. If the existing water pipe is made of stainless steel, copper or UPVC, the Contractor shall provide and lay new water pipe, made of the same material as the existing pipes. The Contractor shall provide and install new PVC cable trunking to enclose all electrical wiring, including existing wiring, within the bathroom/toilet. The Contractor shall skim coat and repaint the entire ceiling of the existing bathroom and/or toilet. Prior to the skim coat, the contractor shall remove thoroughly all existing paint work including grinding smooth existing rough finishing and clean the surface. The Contractor shall ensure that the completed ceiling is smooth and even to the satisfaction of the SO Rep.
Ugdg Spec GS Page 59 1.5.7 Occupants' Fixtures and Fittings Affected by the Works (Cont'd) (e) Records of Fixtures and Fittings For each flat, the Contractor shall record by way of notes, plans and photographs all fittings and fixtures identified as likely to be affected by the Works and categorise them into two main categories :Items affected by replacement of Waste Stack and/or sanitary branch pipes in the kitchen and/or any other work identified by the SO Rep; and Items affected by all other Works. (f) General The Contractor is deemed to have included in his Contract Sum all costs for complying fully with the requirements of this clause. In the event of a dispute with regard to the requirements and interpretation of this clause, the decision of the SO Rep shall be final binding on and conclusive against the Contractor.
1.5.8
Protection of Existing Structures Services and Properties The Contractor shall provide all necessary barricadings, hoardings shorings and other measures to protect existing structures services and occupants' properties on site against all risk of damage or loss. Such protective measures shall be provided where the risk of damage or loss can be reasonably expected or where directed by the SO Rep. The costs of providing the protective measures shall be deemed included in the Contractor's Contract Sum. The Contractor shall be responsible for any damage or loss to existing structures services and occupants' properties from whatsoever cause arising directly or indirectly out of in relation to or in connection with the Works. Where external walls, doors, windows and any other external elements of each flat, switchrooms, pumprooms etc are affected by the Works, the Contractor shall provide adequate security measures to safeguard properties, equipment etc. within the said flats or rooms. The Contractor shall also provide all necessary measures to protect from damage all fittings and fixtures within flats or equipment within the switchrooms, pumprooms etc. The Contractor shall ensure that such protection and security measures do not damage the existing structures or elements to which the measures are fixed or attached. Upon completion of the works within the flats, pumprooms/switchrooms etc., the Contractor shall remove all the protection and security measures and reinstate or make good the affected existing structures or elements to their original condition. The Contractor shall submit all details of the protection and security measures to the SO Rep for written approval before erection of such measures. The approval of the SO Rep shall not in any way affect the Contractor's liabilities or obligations under the Contract. In the event of damage or loss to existing structures services or occupants' properties, the Contractor shall within seven (7) working days from the date of written notification by the Employer at the Contractor's own cost repair, rectify and make good or replace to the satisfaction of the Employer all or such damage or loss. If the Contractor fails to repair, rectify and make good or replace all the damage or loss as aforesaid, the Employer may exercise its rights under Clause 1.10 "Nuisance and Irregularities" and impose charges against the Contractor for such damage or loss as aforesaid until the same are repaired, rectified and made good or replaced all to the satisfaction of the Employer. Without prejudice to the aforesaid, the Employer shall have the right to engage other person(s) or contractor(s) to repair rectify and make good or replaced all such damage or loss if the same are not repaired, rectified and make good or replaced after seven (7) working days from the date of written notification by the Employer, and the cost of repair, rectification and making good or replacement of the same shall be recovered from the Contractor. In addition, the Employer may exercise its rights under Clause 1.10 "Nuisance and Irregularities" to impose charges against the Contractor. The aforesaid cost recovery and imposition of charges shall be deducted from any monies due or becoming due to the Contractor or recovered as a debt due by the Contractor to the Employer.
1.5.9
Care of the Works and Materials The Contractor shall be responsible for the care of the Works and the safe custody of all materials delivered to the Site by his specialists, suppliers or sub-contractors, against all risks arising from weather, negligence, damage or loss until the Works are certified complete by the SO Rep. The Contractor shall also allow for all necessary watching and security lighting.
1.5.10
Damage to Public/Private Property In the event damage is caused by the Contractor to public/private services or property such as carparks, cables, pipes, fittings and fixtures, etc whether by accident or otherwise leading to black-outs or other nuisance or inconvenience to the public or is likely to bring the Employer into disrepute, all costs and expenses incurred for necessary reinstatement or repairs shall be recoverable by the Employer from the Contractor by deduction from monies due or becoming due to the Contractor or as a debt due by the Contractor to the Employer.
1.5.11
Lifts and Transportation of Workers/Materials The Contractor shall not use any of the existing lifts for transportation of workers and materials. Provision of other forms of transport for materials and workers shall be made at the Contractor's own cost. No materials or Workers are allowed to be transported through the internal of the flats or Units except for materials and workers meant solely for the purpose of executing Works inside the flats/units falling under the Maximum Allowable Working Days.
1.5.12
Use of Mobile Workplatforms for External Facade Works The Contractor shall erect mobile workplatforms for the purpose of executing works to the external facade (ie. front, rear and side elevations) of all building blocks including the erection of and works to the spaceadding items, where applicable. All mobile workplatforms shall comply with Clause 1.9.1(s) "Mobile Workplatform". The Contractor shall be deemed to have included in the contract sum, all costs and expenses for the provision of the aforesaid mobile workplatforms. Where the mobile workplatforms are not suitable for use due to site constraints or other reasons acceptable to the SO Rep, the Contractor may, subject to the approval of the SO Rep, use other alternative system to carry out the works to the external facade of building blocks.
1.5.13
Bell System For Passenger/Material Hoist The Contractor shall provide a bell system for all passenger/material hoists. The bell shall be loud enough for the hoist operator to hear whenever the hoist is required at a different level. There shall be a bell activation button at every storey level for the purpose of calling the hoist operator to bring the hoist to that level.
1.5.14
Hand held hacking tools All hacking tools shall be approved by the SO Rep. prior to use on the site. Only electricity driven hacking tools shall be used. The gross weight of any hacking tool shall not exceed 7kg. The hacking tools shall also comply with the following criteria: (a) (b) (weight) x (impact energy per stroke) = 50 kgj (impact energy per stroke) x (full load impact rate) = 23,500j/min
The Contractor is required to plan his work so that not more than one hacking tool is used at the same location at any one time.
1.5.15
Cutting Of Steel Member The Contractor shall not use oxygen and acetylene gas cutting method to cut new and/or existing structural steel member such as steel piles, steel sections, steel bars, etc., within the site boundary. The Contractor may use 'Air Plasma Cutting System' or other approved method and/or equipment to cut the structural steel members on site. The proposed method of cutting of structural steel member on site shall be submitted to the SO Rep for approval at least one month prior to the commencement of the cutting operations.
1.5.16
Pollution or Disturbance The Contractor shall comply with the relevant provisions of the Clean Air (Amendment) Act 1975 and any other relevant law, order, instrument, rule, regulation or bye-law. All works shall be carried out without unreasonable pollution or disturbance. The Contractor shall take all necessary measures to prevent or abate noise dirt dust spillage or the discharge of smoke fumes or obnoxious gases from plant and equipment on site. When notified by the SO Rep that a particular method of working or plant or equipment is creating or discharging excessive noise, dirt, dust spillage, smoke, fumes or obnoxious gases, the Contractor shall stop the use of that method of working or plant or equipment and adopt an alternative method of working or replace the plant or equipment or introduce other preventive/abatement measures. No claims from the Contractor shall be entertained on account of the foregoing.
1.5.17 1.5.17.1
Inspection of the Works Inspections of the Works prior to Certification of Substantial Completion (a) The Works can be considered as substantially completed only upon: (i) Compliance with the relevant requirement of the authorities, including obtaining a Temporary Occupation Permit where applicable; and The SO Rep and/or the Employers Inspection Team consider the Works to have met the requirements of the Contract.
(ii)
(b)
The Contractor shall conduct thorough inspections of the Works to ensure that all defects are rectified and the Works have been completed to fully meet the requirements of the Contract and the workmanship standards as displayed in the approved Sample Units or Sample Panels before requesting for an inspection by the SO Rep and/or the Employers Inspection Team for Certification of Substantial Completion. The Contractor shall notify the SO Rep in advance to request for an inspection. Upon receipt of the Contractors request, the SO Rep shall arrange for an inspection date with the Employers Inspection Team. The Works shall be certified substantially complete if the SO Rep and the Employers Inspection Team consider the Works to have met the requirements of the Contract including the approved workmanship standards and there is no major defects detected during the inspection. Otherwise, the SO Rep shall give the Contractor a list of outstanding defects for rectification. The Contractor shall proceed to rectify the defects with due diligence and expedition and without delay. In addition, the Contractor shall also rectify all other defects that surfaced after the inspection. Upon completion of the defects rectification, the Contractor shall notify the SO Rep in writing that all outstanding defects found in the previous inspection, as well as all apparent defects surfaced after the inspections have been rectified and to request for another inspection. For works within each flat, notwithstanding the handing over of the works within each flat to the flat owner, the SO Rep and Employers Inspection Team reserves the right to inspect such works prior to the Certification of Substantial Completion for the entire block or phase in which the flat is located. If the works is not certified substantially completed after two inspections, the SO Rep may exercise the Employers rights under Clause 1.6 Nuisance and Irregularities. The Contractor shall on Certification of Substantial Completion continue to maintain the Works in a clean and hygienic condition fit for habitation, including carrying out conservancy works, until the Works is handed over to the Town Council.
(c)
(d)
(e)
(f)
(g)
(h)
The Contractor shall note that the Time for Completion or any extensions thereof is deemed to include the time required for the aforementioned inspections.
1.5.17.2
Inspections of the Works prior to Handing Over (a) For works within each flat, the SO Rep, the contractor and the residents of the flat shall carry out the handing over inspection jointly. The contractor shall rectify all defects highlighted before handing over the flat. For works within the block outside flat and works within the precinct (siteworks), the handing over inspection shall be carried out jointly by the SO Rep, the Contractor and representatives of the Town Council. The SO Rep shall arrange for the handing over inspection with the Town Council after the Certification of Substantial Completion for the Works. The contractor shall rectify any defect highlighted by the Town Council with due diligence and expedition and without delay.
(b)
1.5.18
Equipment/Material Storage At the end of each working day and as and when required by the SO Rep, all tools, equipment and surplus materials must be properly kept in storage container at locations to be approved by the SO Rep. No tools, equipment or surplus materials shall be stored in the open unless otherwise approved by the SO Reps.
1.5.19
Removal and Dumping of Debris, Surplus Materials, Etc The Contractor shall be responsible for the daily removal of all rubbish, debris, rubbles, excess earth, surplus materials, unwanted tools and equipment, etc from site including that generated by other contractors engaged by the Employer. All the rubbish, debris, etc shall be temporarily stored in neat containers/bins in accordance with ENV requirements and placed at a central location approved by the SO Rep. The Contractor shall ensure that all the containers/bins are covered at the end of each working day. All materials and components removed from existing buildings shall not be re-used unless otherwise specified. The Contractor shall dispose of all rubbish, debris, etc at approved dumping grounds. If the Contractor dumps rubbish, debris, etc on land owned by the Employer or the Government without written permission, he shall remove all such debris, rubble or excess earth from such land at his own costs and expenses. The Contractor shall be deemed to have included in his Contract Sum all costs and expenses for the removal and disposal of the rubbish, debris, etc including all charges levied for the use of the approved dumping grounds.
1.5.20
Cleaning of Public and HDB Maintained Roads and Drains The Contractor shall ensure that all vehicles used by him, his servants or agents, or by his sub-contractors or suppliers, their servants or agents (hereinafter referred to as "the Contractor's vehicles") shall not dirty any public or HDB maintained roads and drains. In this respect, it is the Contractor's responsibility to ensure that all such vehicles are properly cleaned before they move onto these roads. The Contractor shall check with the SO Rep if he is in doubt as to whether any road is a public or HDB maintained road and the decision of the SO Rep in this respect shall be final and binding on and conclusive against the Contractor. In the event the Site abuts a public or HDB maintained road and the Contractor's vehicles use the road for site access, the Contractor shall provide a washing bay to wash and clean his vehicles before they move onto the public or HDB maintained road. If the vehicles of other contractors also use such public or HDB maintained road for site access, the Contractor shall provide similar washing and cleaning facilities for these vehicles before they move onto the public or HDB maintained road. The Contractor shall also provide the same facilities for similar purposes in the event a road abutting the Site becomes a public or HDB maintained road and is used for site access by the Contractor's or other contractors' vehicles.
1.5.21
Cleaning Up on Substantial Completion The Contractor shall on Substantial Completion of the Works remove all rubbish, Construction Equipment and surplus materials, wash and scrub clean all floors, staircases, pavings, drains and all parts of the buildings and leave the Works in a clean and hygienic condition fit for habitation. The Site and periphery shall be cleared of all rubbish left from the Contractor's work.
1.5.22
Rectification of Defects After Certification of Completion The Contractor shall within fourteen (14) working days from the date of written notification by the SO Rep and at his own costs repair, rectify and make good to the satisfaction of the SO Rep all defects, imperfections, shrinkages and other faults arising from or out of the use of materials or workmanship not in accordance with the Contract or from neglect or failure by the Contractor to comply with any obligation on his part under the Contract which may become manifest. The Contractor shall make prior arrangements with the occupants or the Town Council to carry out such rectification work. If the Contractor fails to carry out his obligations as aforesaid, the Employer may exercise its right under Clause 1.10 "Nuisance and Irregularities" to impose a charge on the Contractor. Without prejudice to the foregoing provisions, the Employer shall have the right to engage other person(s) or contractor(s) to repair rectify and make good all such defects, imperfections, shrinkages and other faults if the same are not repaired, rectified and made good after fourteen (14) working days from the date of written notification by the SO Rep, and the costs and expenses incurred shall be recovered from the Contractor.
1.5.23
Mechanical Mixer Mixing of constituent materials shall be by means of mechanical mixer unless otherwise approved by the SO Rep, for the undermentioned works : (a) Floor Tiles Protective waterproofing cement/sand screed and final layer of cement screed for floor tiles. (b) Wall Tiles Mortar bedding for wall tiles. (c) Plaster All internal and external plastering works.
1.5.24
Pasting of Adhesive Translucent PVC Film at affected Bedroom Window Before upgrading works commence outside the bedroom windows using the mast climbing platform, the Contractor shall paste a layer of adhesive translucent PVC film at the bedroom windows panes next to the mast climbing platform. The effect of the film shall be such that the residents inside the bedrooms will not be able to see the workers working outside the windows and vice versa. the Contractor shall install one sample on site to be approved by SO Rep before proceeding with full installation. the Contractor shall remove the film from the windows after the dismantling of the mast climbing platform. There shall be no cost adjustment to the Contract if some of the units do not wish to install the film.
1.6
MATERIALS
1.6.1
Metric Components All components for incorporation into the Works shall be in metric units. However, when metric components are not available, their equivalent in imperial units may, subject to the approval of the SO Rep, be used and such a substitution shall not constitute a variation to the Contract.
1.6.2
Materials and Workmanship The Contractor shall furnish the SO Rep as and when directed, with approved documents to prove that materials are as specified. The documents shall include but not be limited to any or all of the following, such that the authenticity of the materials can be easily ascertained : (i) (ii) (iii) shipping documents serial numbers warranty certificates
In the event that any documents submitted are not original copies, they shall be duly certified by the originating parties. No information within the documents shall be tampered with, unless it is clearly discernible that the items are not related to the materials specified in the contract. Where specific brand and model number are specified, or where alternative brands and model numbers are offered by the contractor and accepted by the SO Rep, it shall be deemed that the finished products are entirely of original make by the registered manufacturer and fully supported by the manufacturer's warranty. In the event that any alteration is made to the goods by a local agent or any other intermediary, the approval of the SO Rep shall be sought and the result of the alteration shall be fully supported by the manufacturer such that the manufacturer's warranty is maintained. All references to local or foreign standards and/or Codes of Practice shall be deemed to be inclusive of the prevailing amendments to these standards and/or Codes of Practice. Samples of materials shall be submitted to the SO Rep for approval before order is placed with the supplier. Such approval by the SO Rep shall not relieve the Contractor of its obligations under the Contract. The Contractor shall ensure that the materials are free from any defects, damages or any other flaws.
1.6.3
Approval Of Samples And Trade Names Where trade names or catalogue numbers are specified in the Specifications and/or shown in the Drawings, they are intended only to serve as a guide to the respective type and quality of material required. Other material proposed by the Contractor may be used subject to the prior approval of the SO Rep. In this respect, the Contractor shall submit samples of the proposed material to the SO Rep for approval. When a sample is approved by the SO Rep and subsequently work is carried out in accordance with this approved sample, any cost difference resulting from the higher price of the approved sample as compared with the price of the material as required and/or as shown shall not be payable to the Contractor, unless the change of material is ordered by the SO Rep.
1.6.3
Approval Of Samples And Trade Names (Cont'd) With the exception of lighting luminares, where the procedure for cost recovery are provided for differently, in the event that the price of the approved sample is lower than that of the material as required and/or as shown, the cost difference shall be recovered by the Employer by way of contract variation in accordance with the following table : Recovery (or Non-Recovery) by the Employer from the Contractor in the event that the price of the approved material is lower than that of the material as required and/or as shown S/N 1. Material as required and/or as shown On the HDB List Of Products And Suppliers On the HDB List Of Products And Suppliers Not On the HDB List Of Products And Suppliers Not On the HDB List Of Products And Suppliers Alternative material proposed by Contractor and approved by SO Rep On the HDB List Of Products And Suppliers Not On the HDB List Of Products And Suppliers On the HDB List Of Products And Suppliers Not On the HDB List Of Products And Suppliers Cost Adjustment No cost recovery
2.
3.
4.
) ) ) Cost Recovery ) by the ) Employer from ) the Contractor ) )
For lighting luminaires, in the event that the price of the approved sample is lower than that of the material as required and/or as shown, the cost difference shall be recovered by the Employer by way of contract variation regardless of whether or not the approved sample and/or the material as required and/or as shown are shown in the HDB List Of Products And Suppliers. The HDB List Of Products And Supplier is shown in the website http:// www.hdb.gov.sg under the Business Info tab. For the purposes of this clause only, the applicable HDB List Of Products And Suppliers shall be the prevailing HDB List Of Products And Suppliers applicable at the time the Contractor submit the material for approval by the SO Rep. Where cost recovery is required, the basis of such adjustment shall be the difference between the price of the proposed material and that of the material as required and/or as shown (where one type of material is specified) or that of the cheapest of the materials as required and/or as shown (where more than one type of material is specified). The Contractor shall point out to the SO Rep all items in the approved sample which do not comply with the Specifications and/or Drawings. Notwithstanding approval of the sample by the SO Rep, the Contractor shall be liable for any items in the sample which do not comply with the Specifications and/or Drawings and which the Contractor has failed to point out to the SO Rep. Where the Contract requires the Contractor to obtain materials from the HDB List Of Products And Suppliers or where it is specified that materials provided are subject to the approval of the SO Rep, such requirements shall not in any way affect, vary or relieve the Contractor's obligations under the Contract. The Contractor shall ensure that the materials used or selected by them: (a) are free from defects, damages or faults; (b) are of merchantable quality and fit for their intended purpose; and (c) comply with the Specifications and/or Drawings. 1.6.4 Reserved
1.6.5
PSB Quality Certificate Where two or more alternative materials are proposed by the Contractor under Clause 1.6.3 "Approval of Samples and Trade Names", the SO Rep may at his sole discretion give preference to the use of a material that is approved under any of PSB's quality certification schemes.
1.6.6
Precautions against Materials being taken out of Site The Contractor shall be responsible for the safe custody of cement and all other materials delivered to the Site and shall therefore ensure adequate protection and prevention of such materials from being taken out of the Site. The SO Rep will not accept any excuse for materials taken out of the Site by the Contractor, his foreman or other individual even without the knowledge of the Contractor who is deemed to have provided for proper control against such malpractice. If it is established that cement or any other material is taken out of the construction site without specific written approval from the SO Rep, this shall be deemed to be an irregularity and inter-alia, the right of the Contractor to compensation for price fluctuations for all materials shall lapse.
1.6.7
Approval for the use of Ready-Mixed Concrete The Contractor shall obtain the ready mixed concrete from any of the pre-approved suppliers. Provide the name and address of the ready mixed concrete suppliers to the SO Rep. The use of ready-mixed concrete shall be subject to the terms and conditions set by the SO Rep. All Delivery Orders for the ready-mixed concrete delivered to the Site shall be endorsed by the Employer's Clerk-of-works and submitted to the SO Rep. Failure to inform the SO Rep or non-compliance with the terms and conditions set by the SO Rep for the use of ready-mixed concrete shall, inter-alia, result in the Contractor forfeiting his right to claim compensation for price fluctuations for all materials.
1.6.8
Colour Of Works/Materials The finishing colour of all works/materials shall be selected and approved by the SO Rep. The Contractor shall seek approval from the SO Rep for the colours of all works/materials prior to the commencement of such works or purchase of such materials.
1.6.9
Delivery and Preparation of Materials All materials, cement and sand delivered to within the block shall be properly packed, sealed and clearly labelled. Delivery of materials in loose, unlabelled packing to within the block is not allowed. Cement and sand shall be mixed by mechanical mixer. Mixing by manual method is not allowed.
1.6.10
Storage Facility for Cement Where storage of cement is required, the Contractor shall provide adequate storage facilities at the Site to accommodate cement up to two weeks requirement for the Works. The store to accommodate the cement shall be constructed so that each consignment of cement can be separately stacked. Each consignment of cement shall also be used in the same sequence as they are delivered, that is, on a `first-in-first-out' basis. The Contractor shall ensure that the cement stored in his site is kept dry and properly protected against loss or damage at all times.
1.6.11 1.6.11.1
SUPPLY OF CONCRETING MATERIALS Supply Of Concreting Materials From The Employer Notwithstanding other provisions in the Specifications, the Contractor shall have the option to purchase the following concreting materials from the Employer: (a) Ordinary Portland Cement (b) 20mm Granite Aggregate (c) Concreting Sand For the purpose of this clause, these materials shall hereinafter be referred to as the Protected Materials and their respective quantities indicated by the Contractor shall hereinafter be referred as the Protected Quantity.
1.6.11.2
Quantity To Be Supplied The Contractor shall indicate the respective quantities of the above materials to be purchased from the Employer in Annex D of the Form of Tender, subject to the Maximum Protected Quantity specified therein. If the Contractor wishes to purchase more than the Maximum Protected Quantity, he shall within one (1) month from the date of the Letter of Acceptance, request in writing to the SO Rep in the format as shown in Appendix A10 "Request For Revision Of Protected Quantity Of Concreting Materials". The requested Protected Quantity shall be subject to the SO Rep's approval and the SO Rep reserves the right to approve a lower quantity than that requested (hereinafter known as "Approved Protected Quantity" upon the approval of the SO Rep, for the purpose of this Clause only). The Contractor shall be invoiced for the Protected Quantity or Approved Protected Quantity, whichever is applicable, at the Basic Price as defined in the subclause 1.6.11.3 "Quantity To Be Protected". The Contractor shall be required to arrange for his own supply for any requirement in excess of the Protected Quantity or Approved Protected Quantity, whichever is applicable. The Contractor shall place his orders directly with the Employer and comply strictly with the "Conditions For The Supply Of Materials From The Employer" as stipulated in Appendix A10A. The Contractor shall be deemed to have included all costs and expenses to be incurred by him in compliance with the requirements stipulated in this clause in the Contract Sum. The SO Rep reserves the right to allocate the monthly quantity to the Contractor as well as to nominate the Employers supplier. The Contractor shall absorb the total quantity allocated to him. If the Contractor's requirement is more than the Employer's capacity to supply, the SO Rep may direct the Contractor to supplement his requirement from other sources. In this event, the Contractor shall bear any additional cost and expense so incurred.
1.6.11.3
Quantity To be Protected The quantity to be covered under the provision of this clause shall be as stipulated in the Maximum Protected Quantity (MPQ) or Approved Protected Quantity (APQ) or Protected Quantity (PQ) as provided in the clause "Supply of Concreting Materials", whichever applicable (hereinafter referred to as the "Protected Quantity" for the purposes of this Clause only). The Contractor shall be invoiced for the Protected Quantity at the Basic Price. In a situation where the Contractor is required to obtain the supply of precast concrete components from the Employer, the quantity of concreting materials required for these precast concrete components is not included in the Protected Quantity. The HDB posted prices of the Protected Materials at any time shall be deemed to be those in the HDB's Monthly Price Lists which are posted on the HDB Infoweb/cxSurbana.com website. Alternatively, the posted prices are also available for viewing at the Procurement Office, Basement 1 HDB Hub.
1.6.11.3
Quantity To be Protected (Contd) The Contractor is deemed to have based his Tender on the posted price for the Protected Materials and Protected Quantity, at the date Fourteen (14) days before the closing date of the Tender (hereinafter referred to as the "Basic Price"), for the Protected Materials. To illustrate: if a Tender closes on the 14th day of a particular month, the Contractor is deemed to have based his Tender on the posted price prevailing on the last day of the preceding month. In the event of the Contractor failing to obtain the Protected Quantity in full throughout the Time for Completion and any time during which liquidated damages are imposed under the Contract, a shortfall recovery shall be effected using the following formula: Amount of Shortfall Recovery where:PB = QP QA = PB x (QP - QA)
Basic Price; = Protected Quantity (MPQ or APQ or PQ where applicable); = Actual quantity purchased under this clause;
In a situation where the Employer is not able to supply in full the Protected Quantity and the SO Rep has directed the Contractor to supplement his requirement from other sources, such purchases shall not be covered by the provisions under this clause. However, for the purpose of ascertaining for shortfall quantity, the quantity purchased from the Contractor's own source shall be included in QA when determining whether the Contractor has obtained in full the Protected Quantity. For this purpose, the Contractor shall be required to maintain proper documentary evidence of the delivery of each of the materials and such evidence shall be duly endorsed by the SO Rep.
1.6.11.4
Supply Of Concreting Materials From The Contractors Sources The Contractor shall be allowed to use his own supply only after the Protected Quantity or Approved Protected Quantity, whichever is applicable, has been used up. The Contractor shall be required to seek the approval of the SO Rep in writing prior to using his own supply. The Contractor shall also ensure that the quality of the concreting materials obtained from his own supply shall fully comply with the Specifications.
1.6.12
Credit Terms and Conditions for Employer's Materials Contractors who purchase materials directly supplied by the Employer may be allowed a 2-month credit facility from the date of delivery. The Employer reserves the right to deliver the materials to the Contractor's site or other designated locations even if he fails to re-confirm his earlier purchase order to the Employer. The cost of the materials so delivered will be deducted by the Employer from the Contractor by deduction from monies due or becoming due to the Contractor or as a debt due by the Contractor to the Employer. The Employer reserves its sole and unfettered discretion to withdraw such credit facility without any prior notice to the Contractor under any circumstance as it deems fit, including but not limited to when a garnishee order is served on the Employer in respect of any contracts the Contractor has with the Employer or when a petition in bankruptcy or winding up order is presented by or made against the Contractor. Under no circumstances shall the Employer be liable to the Contractor's claim for any cost, expense, profit and loss arising out of or in consequence of the withdrawal of such credit facility. When such credit facility is withdrawn, the Contractor has to pay the Employer in cash for all materials he has ordered for the Works before the Employer will deliver the materials to site or allow the Contractor to collect the materials. When the garnishee order is discharged or withdrawn or made absolute or when the petition in bankruptcy or winding up order is withdrawn, the Contractor may apply to the Employer in writing, with documentary proof, to have the credit facility reinstated. The Employer reserves the right to reinstate credit facility to the Contractor and the Employer is under no obligation to provide any explanation if it decides not to reinstate the credit facility. The decision by the Superintending Officer in this case shall be final and binding on and conclusive against the Contractor.
1.6.13
Ordering Materials The Contractor shall place orders for all materials required for the Works within a month from the date of the Letter of Acceptance. The Contractor shall be responsible for any eventual delay owing to his failure to order materials on time and no extension of time shall be granted on account of such delays.
APPENDIX A10 Our Ref Date Tel Fax Housing & Development Board Attn : SO Rep, Mr/Ms _____________________(CM i/c) Dear Sir BY FAX (Fax No. : 2715100) : : : :
REQUEST FOR REVISION OF PROTECTED QUANTITY OF CONCRETING MATERIALS CONTRACT NO. SITE : __________________________________ : __________________________________
1. Pursuant to the Contract clause Supply Of Materials From Employers Sources, I wish to purchase a higher quantity of the concreting materials than that specified in the Schedule of Protected Quantity. 2. The details of my request are as follows, for your approval : Protected Quantity No Material Unit Specified * 1 2 3 Ordinary Portland Cement 20mm Aggregate Concreting Sand Tonne Tonne Tonne Proposed
*As specified in the Schedule of Protected Quantity 3. I understand that you reserve the right to approve a lower quantity for the respective materials than the proposed quantity, and I undertake to accept any quantity which you so approve.
Yours faithfully
_____________________________ (Signature) Name Designation : : _______________________________ _______________________________
________________________ (Company Stamp)
(NOTE :
THIS LETTER SHALL BE FAXED TO THE SO REP (FAX NO. 2715100) WITHIN ONE (1) MONTH FROM THE DATE OF LETTER OF ACCEPTANCE, FAILING WHICH THE REQUEST WILL NOT BE CONSIDERED)
APPENDIX A10A HOUSING & DEVELOPMENT BOARD 480 Lorong 6 TOA PAYOH HDB HUB SINGAPORE 310480
CONDITIONS FOR THE SUPPLY OF MATERIALS FROM THE EMPLOYER

1 1.1 DEFINITION In this "Conditions For The Supply Of Materials From The Employer", the following words and expressions shall have the meanings hereby assigned to them except where the context otherwise requires : (a) (b) (c) "Employer" "Materials" "Surbana" : : : means the Housing & Development Board, Republic of Singapore. means Ordinary Portland Cement, Concreting Sand and 20mm Aggregate to be supplied by the Employer. means Surbana Construction Resources Pte. Ltd., the company engaged by the Employer for managing the supply & distribution of Materials to the Contractor. means the Superintending Officer's Representative. In addition, for the purposes of managing the supply and distribution of Materials to the Contractor only, shall also means the General Manager of Surbana Construction Resources Pte. Ltd. means the Contract Site and/or any other places within Singapore as approved by the SO Rep to which the Materials shall be delivered. shall mean the Employers supplier of the Materials who shall be responsible for delivering the Materials to the Site.
(d)
"SO Rep"
(e)
"Destination of Delivery" or "Site"
(f) 1.2 2
Employers Supplier
Words importing the singular also include the plural and vice versa where the context requires. SUPPLY ARRANGEMENT The Materials shall be supplied by the Employer inclusive of delivery to the Destination of Delivery as requested by the Contractor and approved by the SO Rep. The Employer's delivery service shall be provided only for Destination of Delivery within Singapore.
SCHEDULE OF MATERIALS REQUIREMENT The Contractor shall complete Form A as attached hereafter and submit by fax to Surbana as indicated at the top of the Form. The Form must be submitted ONE WEEK before the commencement of the Contract for all the Materials to be obtained from the Employer. No Materials will be delivered prior to the receipt of the duly completed Form.
APPENDIX A10A Page 2
MONTHLY ORDERS AND QUANTITY SUPPLIED
4.1
The Contractor shall submit monthly orders for each of the Materials required in separate order forms.
4.2
All monthly order forms shall reach Surbana within the time indicated in the order forms.
4.3
The monthly order forms may be obtained from Surbana at the following address: Surbana Construction Resources Pte. Ltd. Tampines Avenue 10 Singapore 520000 Tel : 67861618 Fax : 67865996
4.4
Late and/or additional orders/loads may be accepted subject to the availability of supply and transport and priority will be given to daily schedule. The Employer shall not be responsible for any delay or disruption to the works as a result of late and/or additional orders. The Contractor shall allow for at least 2 working days for the processing of any late and/or additional order.
4.5
The monthly ordered quantities shall indicate the quantities of Materials that the Contractor requires based on the projected progress of work. Notwithstanding the quantities submitted by the Contractor in the monthly orders, the SO Rep reserves the right to deliver the quantities which the SO Rep considers are the quantities reflective of the Contractor's work progress. In such an event, the SO Rep shall inform the Contractor of the allocated quantities.
4.6
The quantity of Materials delivered shall be determined by the Employer's weighbridges or the Employers Suppliers weighbridges.
4.7
The Contractor shall consume at least 80% of their monthly orders. Any cancellation of the monthly orders greater than 20% of the monthly orders shall be made in writing to Surbana.
4.8
Additional orders for any particular month may be accepted only after the Contractor has consumed at least 80% of the monthly ordered/allocated quantity. The Contractor must submit their written additional order duly signed by SO Rep before sending to Surbana (Please refer to 4.4)
4.9
The Contractor shall maintain at least 3 days' stock of Materials at their Site whenever possible.
DAILY DELIVERY OF MATERIALS
5.1
Notwithstanding the submission by the Contractor of the aforementioned Schedule of Materials Requirement and the monthly orders of Materials or the revisions thereof, the Contractor shall place daily orders of Materials directly with Surbana.
5.2
The Contractor shall give at least TWO WORKING DAYS' PRIOR NOTICE for the daily delivery or cancellation of supply. The notice shall reach Surbana before 4.00pm on weekdays and 12 noon on Saturdays & the eves of public holidays.
APPENDIX A10A Page 3 5.3 The delivery of Materials shall be made from 8.00am to 6.00pm on Mondays to Saturdays. For any delivery of Materials to be made after these hours, the Contractor shall be required to make his own arrangement with the Employers Suppliers who are under no obligation to deliver after these hours. All deliveries shall be made in full lorry loads and the Contractor shall not request delivery of partial lorry loads in any case. In this respect, the Contractor shall note that delivery will cease at the last lorry load before exceeding the quantity stipulated or approved in the Contract (hereinafter known as Stipulated Contract Quantity). The Contractor shall inform Surbana separately in writing for any request for delivery of an additional lorry load for the purpose of meeting the Stipulated Contract Quantity. For the quantities exceeding the Stipulated Contract Quantity consequent to such delivery, the Contractor shall agree to pay to the Employer the rates specified in the Contract for such quantities. The Contractor shall sign and stamp the Delivery Orders with the appropriate stamp (see Table 2). If the Contractor shall fail to observe this requirement, the SO Rep shall take appropriate action and the Employer shall not be responsible for any resulting delay. The Delivery Orders can only be stamped once. The Contractor shall inform Surbana immediately and rectify the error if the Contractor has affixed the wrong Company stamp on the Delivery Orders. The SO Rep reserves the right to suspend delivery of Material for three (3) days if such default happens more than three (3) times within a calendar month, or to impose a charge as specified under the "Nuisance And Irregularities" clause on the Contractor per default including the first three (3) defaults. The SO Rep reserves the right to immediately suspend the delivery of Material for seven (7) days if the Contractor was found to have failed to inform Surbana that they have affixed the wrong Company stamp. The Employer shall not be responsible for any delays resulting from such suspensions. Table 2 Different Types Of Rubber Stamps To Be Used Destination of Delivery 1. 2. 3. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 1. 2. 3. 4. Information to be produced on Contractor's Rubber Stamp Contractor's Company Name Contract Site Contract No. Contractor's Company Name Contract Site Contract No. RMC Company RMC Site Contractor's Company Name Contract Site Contract No. Batching Plant Site
5.4
5.5
5.5.1
Contract Site
Ready-Mixed Company
Batching Plant Site
5.5.2
When a Delivery Order is signed by a Contractor's Representative (whether authorised or otherwise) with the Contractor's Company stamp, the delivery is deemed to have been made to and accepted by the Contractor and no dispute shall be raised by the Contractor that the said Materials have not been received and accepted by the Contractor. The Contractor shall immediately inform and request Surbana for instructions should there be any load of Material wrongly delivered to the Site. The Contractor shall not alter any Delivery Order without the consent of Surbana . The SO Rep reserves the right to take appropriate action against the Contractor for any unauthorised alteration of the Delivery Orders. The Contractor may submit a report to Surbana for appropriate action if the load of Material is unloaded at a wrong place within the Site. This notwithstanding, the Contractor shall still acknowledge receipt of the Material.
5.6
5.7
QUALITY OF MATERIALS SUPPLIED
The quality of Materials supplied by the Employer shall comply with the Specifications in the Contract.
WRITTEN APPROVAL FOR DELIVERY TO PLACES OTHER THAN THE CONTRACT SITE
The Contractor shall obtain the written approval of the SO Rep for delivery of Materials to ready-mixed companies, batching plant sites or to any other location or place.
SKETCH MAP AND ACCESS ROAD
8.1
The Contractor shall provide a sketch map in the space provided in Form A, showing the location of the Site and the stockpile areas where the respective Materials should be delivered.
8.2
The Contractor shall maintain and ensure that all access roads at the Site leading to the stockpile areas as shown on their sketch map are accessible to the lorries of the Employers Supplier. The Contractor shall provide all necessary assistance and facilities to the Employers Supplier.
8.3
The SO Rep reserves the right to immediately suspend the supply of Materials if the access road to the Site is bad or muddy. The SO Rep shall inform the Contractor of the suspension and the Contractor shall take immediate action to make good the access roads and inform Surbana accordingly before delivery of Materials can resume. The Employer shall not be responsible for any delay or disruption of the work as a result of this aforesaid suspension.
8.4
The Contractor shall be responsible for and shall pay any summon issued by the Ministry Of The Environment to the Employers Supplier(s) for muddying up public roads due to muddy access within the Contractor's Site and the Contractor shall keep the Employer fully indemnified against such penalties and liabilities. The Contractor is advised to employ labourers to wash the lorries of the Employer Supplier(s) before the lorries leave the Contractor's Site.
ABSENCE OF SITE REPRESENTATIVE OR IN ACCESSIBLE ACCESS
If any load of Materials cannot, upon arrival at Site within the specified time, be unloaded due to the absence of the Contractor's Site representative or bad access or failure to inform Surbana of any termination of the usage of ready-mix companies, batching plant sites or to any other location or place, the load of Material will be returned to Surbana . For such cases, the SO Rep reserves the right to recover from the Contractor, the costs involved in transporting the Material and to impose a charge on the Contractor as specified in the "Nuisance And Irregularities" clause in the Specifications.
10
SIPHONING OF MATERIALS
The Contractor shall not siphon Materials obtained from the Employer for his own use. Action shall be taken by the SO Rep to impose a charge on the Contractor as specified in the "Nuisance And Irregularities" clause in the event of any such breach.
11
LOSS OF DELIVERY ORDERS
If the Contractor loses any Delivery Order and wishes to request for a duplicate copy of the lost Delivery Order, the SO Rep reserves the right to impose a fee of $50.00 (DOLLARS: FIFTY ONLY) per occasion.
12
METHOD OF PAYMENT
The Contractor shall pay the Employer in full for the value of Materials supplied every month at the rates specified in the Contract. The amount owed by the Contractor shall be recoverable from the Contractor by the Employer or may be deducted by the Employer from any monies due or becoming due to the Contractor.
13
MISCONDUCT OF CONTRACTOR'S WORKMEN
The Contractor is required to exercise firm control over the conduct of his workmen, agents and staff at the Site and shall give full cooperation to the Employers Suppliers drivers in the delivery and unloading of Materials. Any grievances should be directed to the SO Rep in writing. The Contractor shall bear all the cost plus administrative cost for investigations and other consequential expenses, if their complaints is proven to be unfounded.
FORM A-1 HOUSING & DEVELOPMENT BOARD (Manager: Surbana Construction Resources Pte. Ltd. Fax :67865996) FOR OFFICIAL USE BCC Code Tpt Zone Contract No. Site Arch Ref
Checked By
Certified By
1)
PARTICULARS OF CONTRACT
Nature of Contract (Building/CE/Others)*
Contract No. Site
Expiry of the Time For Completion Contractor's Office Address
Site Office Tel. No: Site Office Fax. No: Site Rep's Name
Office Tel. No: HDB Project Manager HDB Clerk-of-Works

(*) Delete where not applicable
2)
CAPACITY OF SITE STOCKYARD FOR Concreting Sand (Tonne)
20mm Aggregate (Tonne) Cement (Tonne)
3)
TIME FOR DELIVERY Saturdays From 8.00 a.m. to 6.00 p.m.
Weekdays From 8.00 a.m. to 6.00 p.m.
4)
SAMPLE OF RUBBER STAMP (Separate forms must be used if there are multiple locations for each of these destination) Ready-Mixed Company
Contract Site
Batching Plant Site
FORM A-2 5) SKETCH MAP [Separate forms MUST be used for different "Destination of Delivery" and/or multiple locations of each "Destination of Delivery"]
The sketch below shows the location of our work and stockpile area where the material should be delivered.
Site
Contract No.
P/
Contractor's Stamp
Date
FORM A-3 SCHEDULE OF MATERIAL'S REQUIREMENT SITE : ___________________________________________ CONTRACT NO. : __________________________________ S/N 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 TOTAL
Note : Please fill in the month/yr and the quantities of each month's requirements for the whole contract.
MTH/YR
CONCRETING SAND (T)
20MM AGGREGATE (T)
CEMENT (T)
1.7
LABOUR
1.7.1
Labour Laws The Contractor shall pay his workmen promptly, and observe workmen's working hours and holidays in accordance with current laws and regulations. He shall keep records and produce them for inspection by the SO Rep.
1.7.2
Keeping Records of Workmen The Contractor shall comply with all labour laws regarding the engagement of non-citizen workmen. Work Permits from MOM shall be obtained for these workmen. The Contractor shall be held solely liable for and shall indemnify the Employer in respect of all actions against the Employer for employing foreign workmen without permits. The Contractor shall maintain and update daily records of all workmen engaged on Site. These records shall include the following information : (a) (b) (c) (d) (e) (f) (g) (h) (i) Name of Workmen (and alias if any) Identity Card No./Passport No. Address Work Permit No., if any Expiry date of work permit Dates Tasks assigned Location of work Remarks
This information shall be recorded before any workman is allowed to commence duty. Severe action will be taken by the SO Rep if the Contractor fails to record any of the abovementioned information of any worker found at the Site.
1.7.3
Employment of Illegal Immigrants For the purpose of this Clause "illegal immigrants" shall refer to any person who enters the Republic of Singapore in contravention of the provisions of the Immigration Act or any statutory modification or reenactment thereof. The Contractor shall ascertain the legitimacy of all Foreign Workers employed by him and/or any subcontractor prior to employment and throughout the duration of the Works. Clarification as to the legitimacy of Foreign Workers may be made with the Immigration Authority, the Ministry of Labour and/or the Police. The Contractor shall ensure that no illegal immigrants are employed by him and/or any sub-contractor in the execution of the Works. The Employer shall not be responsible for any such act or acts by the Contractor and/or any of his sub-contractors and the Contractor shall indemnify the Employer for all consequences arising thereof.
1.7.4
Employment Of Skilled Tilers The contractor shall employ workers that are capable of producing good tiling workmanship. They shall possess Skill Evaluation Certificate on tiling works from local institutions. A list of these workers shall be submitted to the SO Rep for pre-screening and approval before they are allowed to commence work. These workers are also required to wear identification pass upon approval by the SO Rep. The pass shall be easily distinguishable from other pass used at the contract, by their colour, size or pattern
1.8
CONSTRUCTION EQUIPMENT
1.8.1
Maintenance of Construction Equipment The Contractor shall during the progress of the Works put the Construction Equipment to proper use and carry out regular maintenance to avoid any breakdown. No extension of time shall be granted for any breakdown or misuse of the Construction Equipment.
1.8.2
Contractor's Construction Equipment All mechanical Construction Equipment used in the execution of the Works shall be of such type, size and of such method of working as the SO Rep shall approve. The SO Rep's approval to the use of mechanical Construction Equipment shall not be unreasonably withheld, but if in the SO Rep's opinion, circumstances arise which make it desirable that the use of Construction Equipment should be suspended either temporarily or permanently, the Contractor shall change the method of performing the Works affected at his own cost and he shall be deemed to have no cause for claim against the Employer on account of having to carry out the Works by another method nor shall he be deemed to have cause for claim if any other instruction issued by the SO Rep results in the mechanical Construction Equipment having either to stand idle for a period of any duration whatsoever or to be removed. This Clause shall apply also to Construction Equipment which, in the opinion of the SO Rep, are not as quiet in operating as the circumstances seem to the SO Rep to warrant. Use every possible means to prevent noise and annoyance to the residents of the neighbourhood in which the Works and the Contractor's worksites are situated and all machinery shall be of such design and so arranged to be reasonably free of noise in working. In the event of air compressors or pneumatic tools being used on the Works, the Contractor shall, if and when required, arrange for such compressors or tools to be fitted with silencers of approved design or adopt other means approved by the SO Rep for the purpose of reducing noise as far as possible. The Contractors shall not be allowed to make any extra claim for work or expense incurred in complying with the requirements of this Clause.
1.8.3
Movement of Construction Equipment All heavy machinery and other Construction Equipment, such as mobile platforms, cranes, excavator, grader, etc required for the Works shall not be removed from Site without the SO Rep's notice. If progress of work is held up due to the absence of certain particular machinery, the Employer shall be at liberty to bring in the required machinery from other sources and the cost thus incurred plus Employer's charges shall be recovered from monies due or becoming due to the Contractor or as a debt due by the Contractor to the Employer.
1.8.4
Works Within Railway Protection Zone and Railway Safety Zone The Contractor shall comply with the Land Transport Authority (LTA) Code of Practice for Railway Protection and the Mass Rapid Transit (Rail Protection, Restricted Activities) Regulations for construction of the Works and other activities within the railway protection zone and railway safety zone. The Contractor shall submit proposals on the effective measures for the protection of Mass Rapid Transit below, at grade and above ground structre together with the detail of activities of mobile cranes, tower cranes and other mechanical equipment adjacent to the Mass Rapid Transit line structures to the SO Rep for approval at least one month prior to the use of such Construction Equipment. No jib or lifting appliance or any other moving or stationary part of the mechanical Construction Equipment shall encroach within 6.0m on plan from the edge of the nearest Mass Rapid Transit above-ground or at-grade structure unless the Construction Equipment is restricted beneath the structure. The foundation of the mechanical Construction Equipment shall be certified structurally sound and adequate by the Contractor's Professional Engineer prior to its installation. The contractor shall engage a PE to prepare necessary engineering works method statement and submission, carry out full time standing supervision and other duties of the Qualified Person as stipulated in the Code of Practice for Railway Protection and Rapid Transit Systems Act (Chapter 263A) for any engineering works within the railway protection zone.
1.8.4
Works Within Railway Protection Zone and Railway Safety Zone (Cont'd) Contractor shall engage a PE to certify that the access and the foundation of all mechanical Equipment to be structurally sound, prepare necessary engineering works method statement and submission as stipulated in Code of Practice for Railway Protection and Guide to Carry Out Restricted Activities within Railway Protection and Safety Zone. Contractor shall engage a PE to carry out full time standing supervision for crane or other mechanical equipments operation within the railway protection and safety zone as stipulated in Guide to Carry Out Restricted Activities within Railway Protection and Safety Zone by LTA. Auto cut-off system shall be installed for tower cranes to prevent the top of the boom to swing closer than 6.0m from the edge of the viaduct structure. The jibs of the cranes must always be pointed away from the Mass Rapid Transit line structure. The temporary structure shall be stable and level for the Construction Equipment to move on. Regular checks shall be carried out to ensure that all mechanised Construction Equipment are in good working condition at all times. Only experienced, trained and competent operators shall be employed for mobile cranes, tower cranes and other mechanical equipment. Temporary height restriction gantry with signboard shall be installed 6.0m away from the edge of both sides of the viaduct structure for any access passing underneath the Mass Rapid Transit line structures.
1.8.5 1.8.5.1
Construction Equipment Technical Specifications (A) Concrete Pump The concrete pump shall be either trailer mounted or truck mounted type. The pump shall have an output of at least 40m3 per hour of compacted concrete. (B) Crane The crane shall be either crawler, truck mounted, rough terrain or tower crane. The age of the crane used on the Site shall not exceed 15 years. The lifting capacity of the crawler, truck mounted or rough terrain shall be at least 20 metric tonnes. The moment capacity of the tower crane shall be at least 50 metre-tonnes. The crane shall be based on the Site during the concreting stage. The concreting stage shall be defined as the duration of concreting work from the second storey slab to roof of all building blocks. (C) Passenger Cum Material Hoist The design of a passenger cum material hoist shall be in accordance with BS 4465 or other approved equivalent standards. The payload shall be at least one tonne and the travel speed of the cage shall be at least 25m per minute. For passenger cum material hoist serving buildings of more than 16 storeys, each hoist shall have a minimum of 2 winches. The Contractor shall ensure that the foundations, the masts and tie-backs for the passenger cum material hoist shall be designed by a PE. The design calculations and detailings shall also be certified by the PE. The Contractor shall also ensure that his PE submit a Certificate of Supervision to the SO Rep not later than two weeks after the completion of installation of each hoist. The age of the hoist used on the Site shall not exceed 10 years. The hoist shall be provided and commissioned for use before concreting the sixth storey for building blocks of six storeys and above. The Contractor shall provide an overloading device to detect and stop the current if the hoist is overloaded. The Contractor shall provide a siren warning device to warn users that the hoist is ascending or descending. The Contractor shall provide a one-way locking device to the swing gate at every landing of the hoist in accordance with the details shown in the Drawing or sketch attached.
Ugdg Spec GS Page 82 1.8.5.1 Technical Specifications (Contd) (C) Passenger Cum Material Hoist (Contd) The Contractor shall provide a bell system for all hoists. The bell shall be loud enough for the hoist operator to hear whenever the hoist is required at a different level. There shall be a bell activation button at every storey level for the purpose of calling the hoist operator to bring the hoist to that level. Before operating a passenger cum material hoist on the Site, the Contractor shall submit the following : (i) (ii) Record of latest overhaul servicing of the hoist. The latest overhaul servicing of the hoist shall be conducted within six months before transferring it to the Site; Record of checking the connecting devices between parts/components and the conditions of parts/components by the Approved Person. Any Defect found in the checking shall be rectified immediately; and Certificate of test/thorough visual examination of lifting equipment by the Approved Person.
(iii)
The Contractor shall maintain the hoist in good working order at all times on the Site. Document and keep all records and certificates of checking and testing in the site office for inspection by the SO Rep upon request. The Contractor shall : (i) (ii) (iii) Require an authorised hoist operator to check the hoist daily before operation; Engage a competent mechanic to conduct servicing of the hoist once in every three months; Engage the Approved Person to check the connecting devices between parts/components and condition of parts/components once in every three months. Any Defect found in the checkings shall be rectified immediately; and Engage the Approved Person to carry out test and visual examination on the hoist once in every three months. The swing gates are to be maintained, checked and certified to be in a good working conditions by the Approved Person every month.
(iv) (v) (D)
Rough Terrain Forklift The rough terrain forklift shall have a lifting capacity of at least 2 tonnes and a lifting height of at least 3.6m.
(E)
Formwork System Generally, the Contractor shall provide formwork system in accordance with the Drawings and Specifications. The Contractor shall submit detailed drawings and design calculations of all formwork system to the SO Rep for approval within six weeks from the Letter of Acceptance. Trial setting out of the formwork system shall be carried out on the Site two weeks after approval of submission. Formwork support system of beams and slabs shall consist of rigid steel props or steel frames of adequate strength.
1.8.5.2
Maintenance All Construction Equipment provide to the Site shall be kept in good working order at all times and the Contractor shall comply with all statutory regulations vis-a-vis the said Construction Equipment. (A) Mobile Crane Before operating a mobile crane on the Site, the Contractor shall submit the following : (i) (ii) Record of latest overhaul servicing of the crane. The latest overhaul servicing of the crane shall be conducted within one year before transferring it to the Site; Record of checking the connecting devices between parts/ components and the condition of parts/ components by an Approved Person. Any Defect found in the checking shall be rectified immediately; and Certificate of test/ thorough visual examination of lifting equipment by the Approved Person.
(iii)
Ugdg Spec GS Page 83 1.8.5 1.8.5.2 Construction Equipment (Cont'd) Maintenance (Cont'd) (A) Mobile Crane (Cont'd) The Contractor shall maintain the crane in good working order at all times on the Site. Document and keep all records and certificates of checking and testing in the site office for inspection by the SO Rep upon request. The Contractor shall : (i) Require a crane operator to check the crane daily before operation. The operator shall have a Certificate of Competence; Engage a competent mechanic to conduct servicing of the crane once in every three months; and Engage the Approved Person to carry out test and visual examination on the crane once every six months.
(ii)
(iii)
(B)
Tower Crane Before operating a tower crane on the Site, the Contractor shall submit the following : (i) Record of latest overhaul servicing of the crane. The latest overhaul servicing of the crane shall be conducted within one year before transferring it to the Site; Record of checking the connecting devices between parts/ components and the condition of parts/ components by an Approved Person. Any Defect found in the checking shall be rectified immediately; Record of checking the installation and functioning of safety devices by the Approved Person; and Certificate of test/ thorough visual examination of lifting equipment by the Approved Person.
(ii)
(iii)
(iv)
The contractor shall maintain the crane in good working order at all times on the Site. Document and keep all records and certificates of checking and testing in the site office for inspection by the SO Rep upon request. The Contractor shall : (i) Require a crane operator to check the crane daily before operation. The operator shall have a Certificate of Competence; Engage a competent mechanic to conduct servicing of the crane once in every three months; Engage the Approved Person to check the installation and functioning of the safety devices once in every six months; and Engage the Approved Person to carry out test and visual examination on the crane once in every six months.
(ii)
(iii)
(iv)
For every extension of height made on the tower mast and before operating the crane with the new height, the Contractor shall engage the Approved Person to conduct test and thorough visual examination on the crane.
Ugdg Spec GS Page 84 1.8.5 1.8.5.2 Construction Equipment (Cont'd) Maintenance (Contd) (C) Passenger Cum Material Hoist Before operating a passenger cum material hoist on the Site, the Contractor shall submit the following : (i) Record of latest overhaul servicing of the hoist. The latest overhaul servicing of the hoist shall be conducted within six months before transferring it to the Site; Record of checking the connecting devices between parts/ components and the conditions of parts/ components by the Approved Person. Any Defect found in the checking shall be rectified immediately; and Certificate of test/ thorough visual examination of lifting equipment by the Approved Person.
(ii)
(iii)
The Contractor shall maintain the hoist in good working order at all times on the Site. Document and keep all records and certificates of checking and testing in the site office for inspection by the SO Rep upon request. The Contractor shall : (i) (ii) (iii) Require an authorised hoist operator to check the hoist daily before operation; Engage a competent mechanic to conduct servicing of the hoist once in every three months; Engage the Approved Person to check the connecting devices between parts/ components and condition of parts/ components once in every three months. Any Defect found in the checkings shall be rectified immediately; and Engage the Approved Person to carry out test and visual examination on the hoist once in every three months.
(iv)
(D)
Approved Person For the purposes of this Clause including all sub-clauses, the Approved Person is any person who is approved by the Chief Inspector of the Ministry of Labour by a Certificate in writing for the purpose of carrying out examinations and tests on lifting equipment in accordance with Section 29 to 31 of the Factories Act.
1.8.6
Approved Construction Equipment All Construction Equipment used at the Site as specified hereunder shall be obtained from Approved Suppliers registered with the Safety Unit, HDB. Such Construction Equipment are : (a) (b) (c) (d) (e) mobile crane; tower crane; gondola; mast climbing platform; and metal scaffold.
The HDB List can be inspected during office hours at the Procurement Office, Basement 1, HDB Hub, 480 Lorong 6 Toa Payoh. For Construction Equipment from other sources, such Construction Equipment shall firstly be registered with the Safety Unit, HDB before the Contractor can use such Construction Equipment at the Site. Where, such Construction Equipment is used at the Site for a duration of less than a week, the SO Rep may at his sole discretion, waive the aforementioned requirement. Under such a case, there shall be no adjustment to the Contract Sum.
1.9
SAFETY
1.9.1
Site Safety Measures The Contractor shall allow for the compliance with the Factories Act (hereafter referred to as "the Act") and its Subsidiary Legislation including the provisions of the Factories (Building Operations and Works of Engineering Construction- BOWEC) Regulations (hereafter referred to as "the Regulations") and any amendment or re-enactment thereto. Precedent to the commencement of the Works, the Contractor shall first obtain a Certificate of Registration, under Part III of the Act. It shall be the duty of the Contractor to comply with all such requirements of the Act and its Subsidiary Legislation, as affect him or any person or persons employed by him, and as related to any work, act or operation performed or about to be performed by him. The Contractor shall not permit any person to do anything not in accordance with the generally accepted principles of safe and sound practice. The Contractor shall ensure a safe environment on the Site at all times. All safety provisions shall be properly maintained and shall not be removed without the written approval of the SO Rep. The Contractor shall ensure that necessary and sufficient precautions are taken by his workmen when safety provisions are used. The Contractor shall not allow any of the safety provisions to be used unless he has satisfied himself that the provision is safe. The Contractor shall submit the following to the SO Rep within 14 days from the date of the Letter of Acceptance for approval prior to the commencement of the Works. The submissions of safety programme shall comply with and be submitted with the prescribed forms obtainable from the Safety Unit, HDB. The safety programme shall be kept in the site office and made available for reference at all times. The Contractor shall display safety posters at the site office, exit/entry points of buildings and passenger cum material hoist area. The Contractor shall submit drawings, detailings and calculation for all temporary structures as required, certified by his Professional Engineer (hereinafter referred to as "PE" for the purpose of this Clause), for approval at least one week before the commencement of the Works unless otherwise specified. The approval of the SO Rep shall not relieve the Contractor and his PE of the need to ensure the adequacy and sufficiency of the safety provisions. The Contractor is deemed to have allowed in the Contract Sum for all cost and expense for the safety provisions and for all additional costs that may arise from amendments to the Act and its Subsidiary Legislation or changes in the requirements of MOM and the Safety Unit, HDB.
1.9.1.1
Regulations and Requirements Compliance The Contractor shall ensure that the requirements of the Regulations and the following requirements are strictly complied with at all times : (a) Metal Access Scaffold And Working Platforms The Contractor shall provide, erect and maintain all metal access scaffold for all multi-storey carpark/garage or buildings other than residential of 4 storeys and above or 12.0m in height and above. This requirement may be waived, subject to approval by the SO Rep, where industrialised and semi-industrialised methods of construction together with peripheral safety nets are employed. Under such case, there shall be no adjustment to the Contract Sum. The Contractor shall allow free use of the scaffold by all sub-contractors, specialists, artisans and other tradesmen employed by the Employer or the Contractor. The metal access scaffold shall be of the type approved by the MOM. It shall comply with the requirements of the Singapore Standard Code of Practice for Scaffolding, CP 14 and any amendment or re-enactment thereto. The metal access scaffold shall be prezinc galvanised or other approved by the SO Rep.
1.9.1.1
(a)
Metal Access Scaffold And Working Platforms The metal access scaffold shall be erected, or substantially extended to, or dismantled, by approved scaffold contractor, in accordance with the Factories (Scaffolds) Regulations. The metal access scaffold and any components therein shall be designed according to the CP14 and Factories (Scaffolds) Regulations by a Professional Engineer employed by the Contractor (herein referred to as PE) and they shall be removed only with the permission of the SO Rep. The PEs drawings and calculations shall be submitted to the SO Rep for approval prior to the erection and dismantling. The PE shall satisfy himself that his proposal shall not duly overload the RC structure. The submission shall be submitted before the commencement of the works. The metal access scaffold, for access and finishing work, shall be erected ahead of the structural work (including the construction of water tank rooms), from the second storey and shall be supported by cantilevered platforms erected in accordance with the drawings of the PE. The cantilevered platforms shall project about 1.1m from the edge of the building or any other distance approved by the SO Rep. Where the structure does not allow the metal access scaffold to be erected from the second storey or where the building is less than 12m in height, the Contractor may erect the metal access scaffold from the first storey subject to the approval of the SO Rep. The material used for the metal working platform shall be prezinc galvanised steel and comply with SS 280. The working platform shall be adequately secured to the metal access scaffold frame at the required levels. The connections between metal working platform and metal access scaffold frame, and between the working platforms shall be subjected to the approval of the SO Rep. For any portion of the working platform where the use of metal is not suitable, the Contractor may use timber working platform subject to the approval of the SO Rep. The working platform shall be complete with at least 90mm high coloured toeboards and metal guardrails of at least 1.1m above the platform. The vertical distance between any 2 adjacent guardrails shall not exceed 600mm. Any working platform or workplace and the guardrail immediately above it shall not exceed 600mm. The working platform shall be at least 500mm in width and distance between the edge of the platform shall not exceed 300mm from building edge The Contractor shall provide, erect and maintain an overlying screening net to cover the entire external face of the scaffold. The installation of the net shall follow the erection of the fence closely. A 90mm high toeboard shall be provided at the base of the net. After installation, there shall be no opening between separate sets of the net and any torn net shall be replaced or repaired immediately. The net shall comply with the following requirements: (i) Maximum mesh size : 15mm square (ii) Twine No. : Minimum 350D (iii) Minimum 12 ply (iv) Knot Type : Single or English knot The overlying screening net shall be installed on the entire external face of the access scaffold and its installation shall follow the erection of the metal access scaffold closely. The SO Rep shall have the preogative to decide on the colour of the net al at the Contrctors cost and expense. The metal access scaffold shall be effectively tied to the building structure by means of tie-backs. All tie-backs shall be painted with a bright colour for easy identification.
(b)
Personal Protective Equipment The Contractor shall provide and maintain suitable personal protective equipment to all workmen employed on the Site. The Contractor shall ensure that such personal protective equipment comply with the requirements of the Regulations. The Contractor shall also ensure that all equipment are properly used by his workmen during the course of their work. The Contractor shall record the issuance of all equipment to his workmen in the prescribed forms obtainable from the Safety Unit, HDB, and such forms shall be kept in the site office and made available for inspection at all times. The colour code of safety helmets provided by the Contractor shall comply with the Factories (Building Operations and Works of Engineering Construction) Regulations. Three mirrors of sizes 600mm x 1500mm are to be installed for workers to check their personal protective equipment during Tool Box Meeting. The location of these mirrors are to be approved by the SO Rep.
1.9.1.1
(c)
Safety (Anti-fall) Net The Contractor shall provide and maintain a safety net system to catch person(s) falling whilst working in any location from where he would be liable to fall. The safety net system shall be obtained from suppliers approved by the SO Rep. The Contractor may propose an alternative system, to be certified by his PE, to the SO Rep for approval. He shall submit his proposal at least one week prior to its installation. The safety net shall comply with SS292 or other approved standards. The net shall be of sufficient size and strength to catch any person for whose protection it is to be used and the net shall be located as to cover the area of the possible fall. The Contractor shall conduct a sample test on the safety net system, comprising the net and its supporting structures, before it is installed. Subsequent tests shall be carried out when directed by the SO Rep. For all building blocks four storeys and above, a peripheral safety net system shall be provided. Initially the net shall be installed at the second storey. As construction progresses, it shall be repositioned to follow the topmost working level but shall be kept at not more than 6m below it. It shall be removed only with the approval of the SO Rep. Where access scaffolding is used, or any alternative safety measure approved by the SO Rep is used, a peripheral safety net system is not required.
(d)
Working Platforms The Contractor shall construct temporary working platforms, complete with toe boards and middle and top rails, to the design and drawings of his PE. The working platforms shall be at least 635mm wide and shall be used for : (i) (ii) (iii) erecting and dismantling of formwork of columns, walls and peripheral beams; transferring of formwork or other materials from one working level to another; and external finishing works.
(e)
Working Platforms For Lift Shafts, Central Refuse Chute And Voids The Contractor shall provide working platforms, according to the design of his PE, for the erection of lift shafts. The lift shaft platforms shall effectively cover the voids at alternate storeys. The lift shaft platforms shall be left in place until approval is given by the SO Rep to remove them.
(f)
Overhead Shelters The Contractor shall provide, erect and maintain overhead shelters at every point of entry/exit to existing and new buildings of two or more storeys in height. The overhead shelters shall be constructed immediately below the second storey. The overhead shelter shall project at least 3m from the building edge and shall be at least 1.5m wide. The overhead shelters shall be made of curved metal roofing with diameter of at least 1.5m or pitched metal roofing with a slope greater than one in two, with timber hoarding below supported by steel pipes resting on rigid base. All passageways shall be kept free from obstructions and accumulation of mud, water and debris. The overhead shelter shall be designed in accordance with the relevant statutory requirements by a PE. The PE's drawings, detailings and calculation shall be submitted for the approval of the SO Rep at least one month prior to its construction. The access to, along and egress from the entry/ exit points shall be kept free from obstructions and accumulation of oil, grease, water and other substances causing slipping and tripping. Overhead shelters shall also be provided for person(s) exposed to falling objects.
1.9.1.1
(g)
Peripheral Overhead Shelters The Contractor shall provide peripheral overhead shelters for buildings of more than 15m in height. It shall be erected in place when the construction reaches the fourth storey slab. The overhead shelter shall be at least 2m wide and erected at a height not more than 5m from the base of the building, and inclined so that the outer edge is at least 150 mm higher than the inner edge. The overhead shelter shall be sufficiently strong to support a weight of at least 75-kg point load.
(h)
Barricades To Lift Openings, Voids, The Open Sides Of Buildings And Excavations The Contractor shall barricade all lift openings, internal voids and the open sides of buildings and excavations where a person is liable to fall. The barricade shall be at least 1.1m high with 90mm high toeboard and shall have sufficient strength and rigidity to withstand a lateral point load of 50 kg. All services opening shall be fully covered and secured to prevent unauthorised removal.
(i)
Mechanical Suspended Scaffold Mechanical suspended scaffold system shall only be used for touching up, repair and redecoration and minor work. Where mechanical suspended scaffold system is to be used, the Contractor shall first obtain a Certificate of Registration under the Factories Act from MOM and a written approval from the SO Rep prior to its installation and usage. The mechanical suspended scaffold system shall comply with the requirements of the Singapore Standard Code Of Practice for Suspended Scaffold CP20 and any amendment or re-enactment thereto. Where the use of access scaffolding is not stipulated, suspended scaffold may be used for finishing work. Life lines shall be provided for the mechanical suspended scaffold users to anchor their safety belts.
(j)
Authorised Operators For Machinery And Vehicles The Contractor shall employ only qualified operators for his site machinery. The operator for the machinery shall possess a Skill Evaluation Certificate (SEC) from the Construction Industry Training Institute (CITI) or other approved training centre. For those machinery whereby CITI or other approved training centre does not conduct courses or practical tests for machinery operator, the Contractor shall only authorise an experienced and trained operator who has at least a minimum of 2 years experience in operating the machinery. In the case of vehicles, which are operated within the contract boundary, the authorised operator shall possess a minimum valid Class 3 driving licence from the Registrar of Vehicles (Singapore) or an equivalent from their originating countries. The equivalent of a minimum Class 3 driving licence shall first be verified by respective embassy in Singapore and thereafter submitted to the SO Rep for approval. The Contractor shall record the particulars of the operators for the machinery and vehicles in the prescribed form obtainable from the Safety Unit, HDB. The Contractor shall submit the prescribed form to SO Rep for approval one week before the commencement of the Works. The prescribed form shall be updated and kept on the Site and made available for inspection at all times.
(k)
Safety Guards The Contractor shall provide metal safety guards to all moving machine parts that are likely to injure a workman.
(l)
Safety Training (i) Safety Orientation Course The Contractor shall employ workmen who possess valid Safety Orientation Course Certificates. The Contractor shall be required to ensure that his workmen attend a prescribed safety refresher course at an interval of time to be decided by the SO Rep.
Ugdg Spec GS Page 89 1.9.1.1 (l) Safety Training (ii) Safety Training Course When directed by the SO Rep, the Contractor shall send his employees/staff as stipulated hereunder to MOM, CITI or other approved training centre for appropriate safety training as shown hereunder: Safety Training Courses Conducted by MOM Course Safety Officers Training Course Construction Safety Course for Project Managers Safety Management Course Training Course for Safety Committee Members Building Construction Safety Supervisor Course SIC (Manhole) for Supervisors Lifting Supervisors Safety Course Industrial First Aid Course Industrial First Aid Refresher Course Applicable to Safety Personnel for registration as Safety Officer Chairman of Safety Committees, Project Managers, Engineers Chairman of Safety Committees, Managers, Engineers and Supervisory Staff Safety Committee Members Building Construction Foremen and Supervisors Supervisors Supervisors and Foremen Workers, Safety Personnel and Supervisors Trained First Aiders
Safety Training Courses Conducted by CITI (Construction Industry Training Institute) Courses Crawler Crane Operator Course : - New Entrant Programme - Refresher Programme - Familiarisation Programme Erection of Metal Scaffold Slingers/Riggers Course Tower Crane Operator Course : - New Entrant Programme - Familiarisation Programme Supervision of Metal Scaffold Erection Climbing Work Platform Operation Explosive Powered Tools Operation Applicable to
Crane Operators
Erectors Workers, Foremen and Supervisors Crane Operators Supervisors Supervisors, Workers and Operators Workers and Operations
The safety training shall be applicable to all levels of employees/staff stipulated in this clause including top management at the work Site. Particular attention shall be given to the needs of young employees/staff. Further training shall be required where : (i) Employees/staff are transferred or where employees/staff take on new responsibilities or where a change in the work activity or work environment could arise; and There is a change in the work equipment or systems of work in use.
(ii)
Training shall be repeated periodically to ensure continued competence.
1.9.1.1
(m)
Tower Cranes And Other Tall Construction Equipment The Contractor shall comply with all height restrictions on the use of tower crane or other tall construction equipment, imposed by the Civil Aviation Authority of Singapore and Ministry of Defence. In addition, the height clearance of tower crane or other tall construction equipment shall be submitted to the SO Rep for approval before they are brought to the Site. Force limiting device, speed limiters and moment limit switches shall be installed for all cranes. The Contractor shall submit detailed layout drawings of the tower cranes to the MOM and the SO Rep for approval at least one month prior to their installation. The slewing radii of the tower cranes shall not overlap, unless the tower cranes are equipped with slewing limit switches and their jibs are at different levels. The slewing limit switch shall be activated to stop the slewing action before the jib slews into the overlap zone. The jib of a tower crane shall not be allowed to slew outside the contract boundary lines without the written approval of the SO Rep. The free standing mast of a tower crane must be certified by the Contractor's PE prior to its use on the Site. The Contractor shall submit detailed drawings and calculations of the type of foundation support and the tie-back for the tower crane, duly endorsed by his PE, together with technical information to the SO Rep for approval at least one month prior to their construction. The Contractor's PE shall certify that the free standing height of the mast is structurally adequate and sound before the tieback is installed. The mast and boom of tower cranes shall be similarly certified by the Contractor's PE when they are first installed on site. Free standing tower cranes must also be certified by Contractor's PE prior to its use. No tower crane shall be installed and supported on the constructed RC structure of a building. The crane operator must carry out daily inspection of the crane prior to its use. Notwithstanding the validity of its test certificates, the tower cranes must have an overhaul check by an "Approved Person" prior to its installation on site. Test certificates, overhaul certificates, 3monthly maintenance certificates, all inspection records by the crane operator and the "Approved Person" must be properly documented, kept on Site and produced for examination as and when directed by the SO Rep. The Safety Factor for tower crane shall have a minimum of 1.5, which includes the built-in Factor of Safety for the tower crane. The lifting load shall include the weight of the component, the spreader beam, and the lifting device. The crane's flying jib must be maintained at a safe working head room/ clearance of at least 10m higher than all surrounding works and proposed new works. The said works includes the existing building, the roof of watertank room, the roof lift motor room, all treatment works to be upgraded above the roof.
(n)
Crane Access/Crane Outrigger Base For The Use Of Mobile Crane Where the Contractor uses mobile cranes and piling machines on the Site which is next to existing buildings or public roads or Mass Rapid Transit lines, the access for the mobile cranes and piling machines shall be of steel plates or reinforced concrete or bituminous pavement as approved by the SO Rep. All such access shall be provided over an adequately compacted hardcore base. The Contractor shall provide full access for the movement of the mobile cranes and piling machines and for their lifting/pile driving operations. The access shall be able to distribute the load so as not to exceed the bearing capacity of the underlying materials. The design bearing capacity 2 of the compacted access shall not exceed 30kN/m unless otherwise verified. The Contractor shall engage at his own costs and expenses a PE to design the access/outingger base according to the worst loading condition. The worst loading condition imposed on the access/outingger base shall be provided by crane manufacturer, verified and certified by the crane suppliers PE. The drawings and calculation for the access/outrigger designed and endorsed by the PE shall be submitted for approval by the SO Rep before the construction of the access. The access shall be constructed according to the approved drawings and maintained in good condition at all times throughout the Time for Completion and any time period where liquidated damages are imposed under the Contract. The access shall be inspected by the Contractor's PE prior to its use.
Ugdg Spec GS Page 91 1.9.1.1 (o) Mobile Crane The Contractor shall submit layout and details of the crane access to the SO Rep for approval prior to the use of the crane on the access. The Contractor shall ensure and check that the crane access is properly constructed. The Contractor shall keep all records of inspections of the crane access at the Site and produce them for examination when requested by the SO Rep. The boom of the mobile crane with hoisted load shall not be allowed to swing outside the contract boundary without the written approval of the SO Rep. All the hoisting area must be effectively barricaded. The Contractor shall ensure the installation of barriers to warn the crane operator of depressions, excavated areas and other obstructions. Moment limiters shall be installed for all cranes. The Contractor shall station a Lifting Supervisor on the Site to oversee and guide the crane operator during positioning, hoisting and slewing. The cranes shall be tested by an "Approved Person" before its use on the Site irrespective of any valid test certificate. Test certificate, overhaul certificates, maintenance certificates, inspection records by crane operator, Approved Persons and the Contractor's site engineer shall be properly documented, kept on the Site and produced for inspection by the SO Rep. The Safety Factor for mobile crane shall have a minimum of 1.5, which includes the built-in Factor of Safety for the mobile crane. The lifting load shall include the weight of the component, the spreader beam, and the lifting device. The crane's boom must be maintained at a safe working clearance of at least 1.5m from all surrounding works. The said works includes: the existing building, the mast of mobile platform, the work platform itself, scaffolding, and any other work which may affect the safe operation of the crane. (p) Crane Operator, Lifting Supervisor, Rigger and Signalman The Contractor shall comply with the Factories (Operation of Cranes) Regulations 1998. He shall appoint at least one full time lifting supervisor to supervise all lifting operations of any crane for the Site. However, where more than one crane are used on the Site, the number of lifting supervisor employed by the Contractor shall be increased as required by the SO Rep. No lifting activity shall be allowed without the supervision of the lifting supervisor. The lifting supervisor shall have a minimum of 3 years of experience in construction work and lifting operations. He must be a site foreman or site engineer and possesses a certificate on Safety Instruction Course for Lifting Supervisor. He shall spend his time fully on all lifting activities and ensure that unsafe conditions are rectified. For lifting operation within site which is next to existing buildings, public roads or mass rapid transit lines, the crane operator shall have a minimum of 5 years of experience in the operation of cranes. For other sites, the operator shall have a minimum of 2 years of experience in crane operation in the construction site. The Contractor shall appoint qualified rigger and signalman who had completed an approved training course for lifting operation. The crane operator, lifting supervisor, riggers and signalman shall carry out their duties strictly according to the abovementioned Regulations and other duties as the SO Rep deems necessary from time to time. The Contractor shall submit a list of crane operators, lifting supervisors, riggers and signalman with the names, identification card or passport numbers, qualifications and years of experience to the SO Rep for approval one week before the use of the crane. The list shall be updated and kept on the Site at all times. The SO Rep reserves the right to examine the list as and when required. (q) Hoisting of Materials The Contractor shall install material hoist or other equipment approved by the SO Rep for the hoisting of materials and the removal of debris. The hoist and its foundation shall be constructed in accordance with the design and drawings of the Contractor's PE. The hoist shall be grounded at the end of each working day.
Ugdg Spec GS Page 92 1.9.1 1.9.1.1 Site Safety Measures (Cont'd) Regulations and Requirements Compliance (Cont'd) (r) Mobile Workplatform When the mobile workplatform is to be used, the contractor shall obtain approval from SO Rep and MOM. The mobile workplatform shall be tested and thoroughly examined by an "Approved Person" after installation. A trained person shall be designated to operate the mobile workplatform at all times. The mobile workplatform shall comply with the following : (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) The mast of the mobile platform shall be supported on concrete base of required thickness. The mast shall be properly secured on to the concrete base. The lateral tieback shall be designed and installed in accordance with the manufacturers specifications. The lateral force of the tieback shall be transferred to the building by independent connections. Minimum 1.1m high handrail shall be barricaded all round the peripheral of the work platform. Handrail shall be provided for all staircases leading to the work platform. Foldable bridge/s shall be provided for access from the work platform to the SAI.
The contractor shall submit detailed drawings calculations for work platforms, its related structural supports and anchorage system endorsed by his PE to the SO Rep for approval at least one month prior to its installation. All parts and components of the workplatform must be original from the manufacturer. Fine netting must be installed at least 1.0m above the workplatform to prevent debris, chips or materials from falling out. Efficient devices must be installed to ensure that the platform will stop if it comes into contact with any obstruction. The ground floor below the workplatform must be barricaded to prevent unauthorised entry. (s) Safety Information Board, Assembly Stage and Safety Notice Board The Contractor shall erect and maintain a Safety Information Board, which shall not be smaller than 5m x 2.5m, at a location near the Site Entrance as directed by the SO Rep. The Safety Information Board shall contain, at least, the following information : (i) (ii) (iii) (iv) (v) (vi) Description of Contract Name of Contractor Number of Working Days Number of Accident-Free Days Number of Accidents Safety Pictures
The Contractor shall also erect and maintain an assembly stage together with a Safety Notice Board at a location near the Site Office as directed by the SO Rep. The assembly stage shall consist of raised platform and steps. The size of both the assembly stage and Safety Notice Board shall be 5m x 3m. The Safety Notice Board shall display safety posters, safety slogans, names of all site equipment suppliers and subcontractors, photographs of good safety practices and/or measures, safety news and shall also contain one 600mm x 1500 mm mirror. The Safety Information Board, assembly stage and Safety Notice Board shall be erected and completed within one(1) month from the commencement of the Contract. The Contractor shall submit his proposed details and locations for the Safety Information Board, assembly stage and Safety Notice Board to the SO Rep for approval before erection. The Safety Information Board, assembly stage and Safety Notice Board shall not be removed without the prior approval of the SO Rep.
1.9.1 1.9.1.1
Site Safety Measures (Cont'd) Regulations and Requirements Compliance (Cont'd) (t) Warning Signs And Lights The Contractor shall display warning signs of sizes 900mm x 600mm at strategic points around the periphery of the Site where trespassing is likely to occur. Such signs shall have the words "DANGER - KEEP OUT" in the four official languages painted in red on a white background in gloss finishing paint. Warning lights shall be placed at similar positions at night to serve as a warning. If work is carried out near public roads, all signage shall comply with the recommendations of the Code of Practice for Temporary Traffic Control issued by LTA. (u) Demolition of existing structures The method of demolition shall not produce excessive noise, dust, vibration and other nuisance which will cause inconvenience to the residents and the public. The Contractor shall propose his method of demolition to the SO Rep for approval prior to commencement of work. When the demolition work is carried out at the edge of building, the Contractor shall install timber shelter and fine screening net at the level where the demolition work is carried out. The ground floor below the work area above shall be barricaded to prevent accidental encroachment by occupants, workers and the public. All openings resulting from demolition shall be barricaded. Fine screening net shall be provided to prevent entry and exit of dust and fine debris. The demolition of all existing structures at high levels shall be carried out only in the presence of the Site Safety Supervisor. (v) Temporary Chute For The Removal Of Construction Debris The Contractor shall provide adequate number of temporary chute to dispose construction debris from the upper storeys for all building blocks of 4 storeys (including multi-storey carpark) and above. It shall be erected to follow the construction work. A large bin at the lower end of each of the chute shall be provided and emptied regularly. The chute can be a proprietary system or fabricated on Site. The Contractor shall submit detailed drawings and calculations duly endorsed by his PE to the SO Rep at least one week prior to their installation. The temporary chute shall be removed only with the permission of the SO Rep. (w) Housekeeping The Contractor shall maintain and ensure a safe working environment by keeping the Site neat and tidy, and free from all hazards and debris. Materials shall be stacked up safely. All workstations and accesses thereto shall be kept free from hazards and debris. Such housekeeping shall be carried out in such a manner and at such times as not to cause any inconvenience to either the adjoining owners, occupiers and the public. Debris shall be wet to minimize the risk of dust. Containers for debris and rubbish are to be provided at the designated places. (x) Electronic Distance Meter Unless otherwise directed, use Electronic Distance Meter in the measurement of distances over public roads and in built-up areas accessible to the public where the use of measuring tapes may pose a danger to motorists and members of the public.
1.9.1 1.9.1.1
Site Safety Measures (Cont'd) Regulations and Requirements Compliance (Cont'd) (y) Safety Reflective Apparel All workmen engaged in any type of work on public roads shall wear approved type of reflective apparel during all hours of the day and night when so engaged. The approved types of apparel shall be : (i) short-sleeved vests covering the top half of the body with or without perforations for wear comfort; and a one-piece shoulder and waist strap (also called the wrap).
(ii)
The apparel shall cover at least 25% of the trunk of the body and it shall be fastened together by press-buttons, tying, burdok fastener or by any other approved means. The material to be used shall be fabric with poly vinyl chloride coating and shall be retro-reflective. It shall be reinforced at the edges and shall offer resistance against tearing. It shall be free of ragged edges, surface blemishes, loose stitches or seams. The apparel shall be coated or covered with retro-reflective material in two colours, namely bright orange and white or bright orange and yellow. The two colours shall alternate with each other to provide contrast. The material shall either have (i) self-cleaning surface so that there will not be a heavy accumulation of dirt on the reflective surface; or (ii) a surface that permits ready removal of accumulated dirt and contaminants by wiping with soft rags and mild detergent solution. The reflective intensity of the material when tested in accordance with the US Federal Specifications shall have the following minimum value in candelas per lux per square metre : Divergence angle Incidence angle -4 40 0.2 0.5 1.5
20.0 4.7
12.0 3.0
1.7 1.0
The brightness of the reflective vests, totally wet by rain shall not be less than 90% of the above values. (z) Ventilation Provide adequate ventilation and efficient safety and protective equipment to keep all excavations, trenches, tunnels and heading structures, sewers and manholes free from all gases whether generated in the strata, arising from the use of explosives for blasting, sewage gases or otherwise and take precautions to ascertain that conditions are safe before allowing workmen to proceed. No person shall enter any confined space (whether above or below ground) unless a responsible person has tested the space using an oxygen testing instrument and has certified to the satisfaction of the SO Rep and ENV that the space is suitable to enter. (i) Safety Requirement for Men Working in Sewers, Pumping Mains, Manholes, Chambers, Sumps and Other Confined Spaces For work in sewers, pumping mains, manholes, chambers, sumps and other confined spaces, ensure that the following safety procedures are adhered to.
1.9.1 1.9.1.1
Site Safety Measures (Cont'd) Regulations and Requirements Compliance (Cont'd) (z) Ventilation (Cont'd) (ii) Safety and Protective Equipment Provide the following equipment for the safety and protection of the workmen. Make available this equipment at the works site before the commencement of any work. Ensure that all workmen are familiar with the use of all safety and protective equipment required. Safety Apparatus Multi-gas monitor, lifting harness, torch light, first aid kit, life lines, aluminium ladder, air blower, breathing apparatus, oxygen meter. Safety belt, safety helmet and gloves, knee length rubber boots, overall, illuminous vest. Portable air blower, traffic warning lights & signs, barricades, pedestrian warning signs, manhole gratings, non-sparking tools, flame proof lights.
Protective Equipment
Other Equipment and Tools
(iii)
Preparatory Work Identify the position of the nearest telephone so that in the event of an emergency, help can be summoned immediately. Do not allow smoking or naked light or fire in the vicinity of any manhole or chamber. Place proper barricades and traffic warning signs around the working manhole. For safety of the public, place proper gratings over manholes that are opened. Where a sewer is at a downstream of a pump main discharge chamber, obtain prior clearance with the Pumping Station Unit. During the course of the work in this sewer, maintain close co-ordination with the Pumping Station Unit to ensure non-operation of the pumping station.
(iv)
Before Entering Manholes and Chambers Remove the cover of the working manhole and those immediately upstream and downstream to provide ventilation and to serve as emergency exits. Provide manhole gratings for public safety. Use air blowers of adequate capacity (min. flow rate of 1200 m per hour) for ventilation. Place the blower as far as possible from the working manhole and vehicles exhausts and operate for a sufficient time to ensure that all gases are driven out. Test for the presence of gases by lowering the multi-gas monitor into the manhole. Do not enter the manhole if the multi-gas monitor indicates dangerous conditions. Inspecting team shall carry Multi-gas monitor in the sewer. Test oxygen deficiency. (The oxygen level must be maintained above 19% but not exceeding 23%). No workmen shall enter the manhole or sewer if they detect smell or if they feel giddy or suspicious even if safe conditions are indicated in the tests above. If a manhole is safe to enter, wear safety belt, helmet and protective footwear before entering. Allow no person to enter a manhole or sewer alone. Detail at least two men as top men. The top men shall carry breathing apparatus. The supervisor shall keep count of his men before entering the sewer.
3
Ugdg Spec GS Page 96 1.9.1 1.9.1.1 Site Safety Measures (Cont'd) Regulations and Requirements Compliance (Cont'd) (z) Ventilation (Cont'd) (iv) Before Entering Manholes and Chambers (Cont'd) Use ladders for access into or out of any manhole which exceeds 1m deep. Allow only one man on a ladder at one time. If aluminium alloy ladder is used, provide the ladder with non-slip rungs to prevent slipping. Wooden ladder shall not be used. (v) While Men are in Manholes or Sewers Allow no man to work in a sewer alone. Use lifelines when working in sewers. The top man shall keep in touch with the men below by calling or signalling at frequent intervals. If dangerous conditions are encountered or if danger is suspected then the men below shall return to the surface immediately through the nearest manhole. During the whole of the time that the men are below ground, maintain proper and adequate ventilation. No smoking or naked light in manholes or sewers shall be allowed. Wear safety belts and helmets at all times while working inside manholes and sewers. Test the air inside a manhole or sewer continuously with the use of "personal gas monitor" by those working below. The gas monitor shall be capable of measuring the concentration of Carbon Monoxide, Oxygen, Hydrogen sulphide and combustible gases. Where the sewers are large enough to enter, keep guard bars or safety chains in position across the sewer downstream of the place of work. Where natural light is not adequate, use only artificial light of the explosive proof type. (vi) After Working in Sewers or Manholes The supervisory staff in charge shall check carefully that all men have left the sewer or manhole. Replace properly all manholes or sumps cover. (vii) In An Emergency Inform the Water Reclamation (Network) Department, PUB and the HDB's Safety Unit in the event of an emergency. (aa) Prefabricated Mesh Barricade The Contractor shall provide, erect and maintain a vertical prefabricated mesh barricade (hereafter referred to as mesh barricade for the purpose of this clause including all subclauses under it) for all peripheral open sides of construction level of building (excluding multi-storey carpark/garage) where a person is liable to fall from height. Metal access scaffold and working platforms shall be maintained for multi-storey carpark/garage where a person is liable to fall from height. Mesh barricade shall be of sound construction and produced in the factory and installed at the construction level from the inside of the building. Mesh barricade and its support shall be prezinc galvanised or other approved equivalent by the SO Rep, easily installed and dismantled, and reusable throughout the construction (super-structure) stage. External works of the building, such as painting, touching up works, repair and redecoration, and other minor works, shall be carried out using mechanical suspended scaffold or other vertical access equipment.
1.9.1.1
(aa) Prefabricated Mesh Barricade Where the use of mesh barricade is not feasible, as interpreted by SO Rep, during the construction (super-structure) stage, the contractor can counter-propose localised alternative system other than the use of metal access scaffold. Mesh barricade/ counter-proposals for localised alternative system, its vertical support and any components therein shall be in modular sizes and designed according to the Factories (BOWEC) Regulations by a PE employed by the Contractor. The PEs drawings and calculation shall then be submitted to the SO Rep for approval within six weeks from the Letter of Acceptance, before installation and use. Trial setting out of mesh barricade shall be carried out on Site two weeks after approval of submission. The mesh barricade shall be erected ahead of the structural work (including the construction of water tank rooms) from the second storey and held by a supporting system designed by the said PE. The height of the mesh barricade shall be at least 1.1m above the construction level. The Contractor and his PE shall ensure that the substrate at which the mesh barricade is affixed to, can resist the designed imposed loads. The PE shall satisfy himself that his proposal shall not duly overload the RC structure. Where necessary, the Contractor shall provide, erect and maintain an overlying screening net to cover the entire internal face of the mesh barricade. The installation of the net shall follow the erection of the fence closely. Where necessary, a 90mm high toeboards shall be provided at the base of the net from the inside of mesh barricade. After installation, there shall be no opening between separate sets of the net and any torn net shall be replaced or repaired immediately. The net shall comply with the following requirements: (i) (ii) (iii) (iv) Maximum mesh size (square) : 15mm square Twine No. : Minimum 350D Knot Type : Single or English knot Minimum 12 ply
The vertical supports of mesh barricade shall be effectively anchored to the building structure. All vertical supports shall be painted with a bright colour for easy identification. The mesh barricade shall be erected according to a pre-determined safe work procedure established by the Contractor, or substantially dismantled, by trained erectors, under the immediate supervision of a competent supervisor. The mesh barricade and its components shall only be erected and dismantled by workers using life-line and safety belts or other equivalent, if not better, means of preventing a fall. The Contractor shall under no circumstance, use the prefabricated mesh barricade and vertical supports for other purposes. (bb) Others The Contractor shall put up appropriate and adequate guards, fence or barrier around excavations, lift pits or other similar potential places of danger to prevent accidents. Daily checking on all temporary electrical wiring and passenger cum material hoist shall be conducted by qualified persons employed by the Contractor. Safety Infringement The above provisions shall be made to the satisfaction of the SO Rep. The Contractor shall include in his Contract Sum all the costs and expenses for complying with the safety requirements. In the event of any accident or mishap occurring on Site, whether or not caused by the inadequacy of safety provision or non-compliance with safety regulations, the Contractor shall immediately notify the SO Rep and the HDB's Safety Unit and any other relevant Authority.
1.9.1 1.9.1.1
Site Safety Measures (Cont'd) Regulations and Requirements Compliance (Cont'd) (bb) Others (Cont'd) Safety Infringement (Cont'd) Depending on the nature and extent of the accident or mishap, the SO Rep or any other Authority may order a total or partial stoppage of work to allow investigations and/or remedial measures to be effected. In the event of such stoppage, or any stoppages of work due to safety violations, the Contractor shall not be entitled to any claims for compensation or extension of time for completion. The SO Rep will conduct periodic inspections on the provision of safety measures together with the Contractor's safety supervisor or foreman. The Contractor shall rectify immediately all contraventions against the Factories Act or the Regulations. All Works or partial works may be stopped until further notice from the SO Rep if the total number of contraventions or noncompliance is four or more or when the SO Rep considers the working environment unsafe for Works to continue. If the contravention or non-compliance is not rectified at a subsequent inspection, the SO Rep shall exercise its rights under Clause 1.10 "Nuisance and Irregularities" to impose charges against the Contractor. The SO Rep shall at its absolute discretion exercise its rights under Clause 1.10 "Nuisance and Irregularities" to impose charges against the Contractor for the following types of accidents occurring in the course of or arising out of or in the consequence of the Works: (i) For each instance of fatal accident, if the accident is established in part or in whole by the SO Rep or any local Authority, to be the result of the negligence of the Contractor. This charge shall not be refunded to the Contractor; For each instance of accident injuring a person or persons, if the SO Rep is of the opinion that the accident is the result of the objects falling from height; For each instance of accident, if the SO Rep is of the opinion that the accident is the result of the failure of the Contractor to provide necessary and sufficient safety measures stipulated in the Contract or by any legislation.
(ii)
(iii)
1.9.2
Reporting Of Accidents In the case of an accident or a dangerous occurrence, as classified under Section 51 and in the Fourth Schedule respectively of the Factories Act including any amendment or re-enactment thereto, the Contractor shall notify forthwith the Safety And Building Protection Unit, HDB by telephone and by facsimile transmission of such accident or dangerous occurrence. Upon receipt of information of an accident or dangerous occurrence, the Safety And Building Protection Unit, HDB shall at its discretion make a preliminary investigation of the circumstances and record its finding upon such investigation. Notwithstanding the aforementioned requirements, the Contractor shall in addition, make an incident investigation in the form set out in the INCIDENT INVESTIGATION REPORT - HDB and submit it to the Safety And Building Protection Unit, HDB within 10 working days of the accident or dangerous occurrence. The form is obtainable at the Safety And Building Protection Unit, HDB. Upon submitting the INCIDENT INVESTIGATION REPORT to the Safety And Building Protection Unit, HDB, the Contractor shall arrange for the injured workman, witnesses and an interpreter, if necessary, to report to the Safety And Building Protection Unit, HDB to furnish evidence relating to the accident or dangerous occurrence. If the Contractor fails to give any required notice or fails to furnish evidence of the accident or dangerous occurrence as required in this Clause, the SO Rep may at his absolute discretion exercise his rights under Clause 1.10 "Nuisance And Irregularities" to impose charges against the Contractor.
1.10
NUISANCE AND IRREGULARITIES
1.10.1
Nuisance and Irregularities If the Contractor is found to have committed any of the following irregularities : (i) Omitting building materials or labour, reducing the sizes of the materials, using inferior materials; or materials constructed not according to the Specifications or Drawings; Creating nuisance at the Site thereby causing inconvenience to the SO Rep or the public or committing similar acts (such as not complying with site safety requirements, etc.) which are likely to bring the Employer into disrepute; Non-compliance with any part of the Specifications or Drawings, or non-fulfilment of any contractual obligation.
(ii)
(iii)
the SO Rep reserves the right to impose on the Contractor, and the Contractor hereby fully accepts and agrees to pay without dispute or question, a charge based on prevailing guidelines set by the Employer but not exceeding $100,000.00, and for contract with a Contract Sum of less than $300,000.00, a charge not exceeding 30% of the Contract Sum per occasion as agreed compensation to the Employer for the inconvenience caused, investigation and administration expenses incurred by the Employer and for damage to the Employer's reputation and standing generally. Furthermore, the Contractor may be barred from tendering for a specified period. In addition to the above charges, the SO Rep is empowered either : (a) to order any irregular work to be removed and made good to the satisfaction of the SO Rep at the Contractor's own cost and expense, or (b) in lieu of correcting work not done in accordance with the Contract, the SO Rep may allow such work to remain and shall recover any cost differences between the specified requirements and the non-compliance.
For nuisance committed on Site, the Contractor shall take immediate action to cease the nuisance committed upon instruction given by the SO Rep.
1.11
QUANTUM OF SECURITY DEPOSIT The security deposit for the Contract shall be 7.5 percent of the Contract Sum. Notwithstanding this, the security deposit shall be increased by 2.5% of the Contract Sum if the tender sum for the recommended tender is more than 10% lower than the average (Average Tender Sum") of the lowest 3 tender sums. For the purpose of deriving the Average Tender Sum, the tender sums to be used in the computation shall refer to valid tender proposals submitted at the close of tender excluding tender/s withdrawn and invalid tender submissions as defined under the Invitation to Tender. For tenders that require the submission of tender offers for 2 or more options prescribed by HDB, only the lowest 3 tender sums for the option recommended for award will be used for the computation of the Average Tender Sum to ascertain whether the additional 2.5% security deposit is required. The security deposit required in the Contract shall be indicated in the Letter of Acceptance to be issued to the Contractor. The Contractor is deemed to have allowed in the Contract Sum for all costs, expenses and losses arising from the compliance with these provisions.
UPG07/S1.DOC(100) lkk(181206) DPD
APPENDIX W1 Page 1
INSTRUCTION ON WORKMEN'S COMPENSATION POLICY
1.
The Policy shall be issued in the prescribed form produced in Appendix W1(R) (please do not re-type).
2.
The Policy shall include the following requirements : (a) The Insured shall be " (Name of Contractor to insert) as Contractor and all his sub-contractors, and the Housing & Development Board as Principal FTRR & I ". The period of insurance shall commence from the date the site is handed over to the Contractor and shall end upon expiry of the Defects Liability Period under the Contract.
(b)
UPG07/S1.DOC(101) lkk(181206) DPD
APPENDIX W1 Page 2
Policy No. : Insurer's Company Stamp :
WORKMEN'S COMPENSATION POLICY
UPG07/S1.DOC(102) lkk(181206) DPD
APPENDIX W1 Page 3
Policy No. : Insurer's Company Stamp :
WORKMEN'S COMPENSATION POLICY WHEREAS the Insured carrying on the Business described in the SCHEDULE and no other for the purpose of this insurance by an application which shall be the basis of this contract and is deemed to be incorporated herein has applied to the Insurer for the insurance hereinafter contained and has paid or agreed to pay the Premium stated in the SCHEDULE as consideration for such insurance. NOW THIS POLICY WITNESSETH that if any workman in the Insured's employment shall sustain personal injury by accident or disease caused during the Period of Insurance and arising out of and in the course of his employment by the Insured in the Business, the Insurer will subject to the terms exceptions conditions and warranties, and any memorandum if applicable, contained herein or endorsed hereon (all of which are hereinafter collectively referred to as the Terms of this Policy) indemnify the Insured against all sums for which the Insured shall be liable to pay compensation either under the Legislation or at Common Law, and will in addition pay all costs and expenses incurred by the Insured with the written consent of the Insurer. In the event of the death of the Insured the Insurer will indemnify the Insured's legal personal representatives in accordance with the Terms of this Policy in respect of liability incurred by the Insured provided that such personal representatives shall as though they were the Insured observe comply fulfil and be subject to the Terms of this Policy in so far as they can apply. PROVIDED ALWAYS that in the event of any change in the Legislation or the substitution by other Legislation therefor this policy shall remain in force and the Insurer reserves the right to charge additional premium therefor.
JURISDICTION 1. 2. This Policy shall be governed by the laws of the Republic of Singapore. The indemnity under this Policy shall not apply in respect of judgements which are not in the first instance delivered by or obtained from a court of tribunal of competent jurisdiction within the Republic of Singapore.
AVOIDANCE OF CERTAIN TERMS AND RIGHT OF RECOVERY Nothing in this Policy or any endorsement hereon shall affect : (a) (b) the right of any person entitled to indemnity under this Policy; or the right of any other person to recover compensation,
under or by virtue of the Legislation. BUT the Insured shall repay to the Insurer all sums paid by the Insurer which the Insurer would not have been liable to pay but for the Legislation.
UPG07/S1.DOC(103) lkk(181206) DPD
APPENDIX W1 Page 4 Policy No. : Insurer's Company Stamp :
EXCEPTIONS The Insurer shall not be liable in respect of : (a) (b) the Insured's liability to employees of independent contractors engaged by the Insured; any employee of the Insured who is not a "workman" within the meaning of the Legislation unless such employee of the Insured is covered under this Policy by virtue of Clause 11 and 12 of the Conditions; any injury by accident or disease attributable to war hostilities (whether war be declared or not) invasion act of foreign enemies rebellion revolution insurrection or military or usurped power or civil war; any liability of whatsoever nature directly or indirectly caused by or contributed to by or arising from : (i) ionising radiations or contamination by radioactivity from any nuclear fuel or from any nuclear waste from the combustion of nuclear fuel radio-active toxic explosive or other hazardous properties of any explosive nuclear assembly or nuclear component pressure waves caused by aircraft or other aerial devices travelling at sonic or supersonic speeds
(c)
(d)
(ii) (e)
any injury to any employee of the Insured resulting from an accident if it is proved that the injury to the employee is directly attributable to the employee having been at the time thereof under the influence of alcohol or a drug not prescribed by a medical practitioner unless the Insured is liable under the Legislation; any incapacity or death resulting from a deliberate self-injury or the deliberate aggravation of an accidental injury.
(f)
CONDITIONS 1. This Policy and the SCHEDULE shall be read together as one contract and any word or expression to which a specific meaning has been attached in any part of this Policy or the SCHEDULE shall bear such specific meaning wherever it may appear. In so far as it is not prohibited by the Legislation the Insured shall at all times observe, comply and fulfil the Terms of this Policy. The truth of the statements and answers in the application shall be conditions precedent to any liability of the Insurer to make any payment under this Policy and shall be the basis of this contract. Every notice or communication to be given or made under this Policy shall be delivered in writing to the Insurer. The Insured shall take all reasonable precautions to prevent accidents and disease to the Insured's workman and shall comply with all statutory obligations and requirements. (a) In the event of any accident which may give rise to a claim under this Policy, the Insured shall give notice of the accident in accordance with the time limits set out by the Legislation to the Insurer with full particulars. In the case of any disease which may give rise to a claim under this Policy the Insured shall give notice of the discovery of the disease to the Insurer within 30 days of his discovery. Every letter claim writ summons and process shall be notified or forwarded to the Insurer immediately on receipt. Notice shall also be given to the Insurer immediately the Insured shall have knowledge of any impending prosecution inquest or fatal inquiry in connection with any such accident or disease.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
(b)
(c)
UPG07/S1.DOC(104) lkk(181206) DPD
7.
No admission offer promise or payment shall be made by or on behalf of the Insured without the written consent of the Insurer. The Insurer shall be entitled if it so desires to take over and conduct in the Insured's name the defence or settlement of any claim or to prosecute in the Insured's name for its own benefit any claim for indemnity or damages or otherwise and shall have full discretion in the conduct of any proceedings and in the settlement of any claim and the Insured shall give such information and assistance as the Insurer may require. The Insurer may cancel this Policy by giving thirty (30) days' notice by registered letter to the Insured at his last known address and in such event the Insurer will return to the Insured the premium paid less the actual premium payable for the period during which the Policy had been in force subject to a minimum premium payment of #$ by the Insured. This Policy may be cancelled at any time by the Insured by giving seven (7) days' written notice to the Insurer and provided no claim has arisen during the period which the Policy had been in force the Insured shall be entitled to a return of premium subject to a minimum premium payment of #$ by the Insured and subject to any adjustment of premium required by the terms or conditions of this Policy. The Insurer shall notify the Principal Housing & Development Board before the cancellation of this Policy.
8.
9.
This Policy shall cover all * 's insurance obligations with regard to Workmen's Compensation stated in the Contract between the Principal Housing & Development Board and * . (i) In the event of any workman employed by the within Insured or by the Insured's Contractors as referred to in (ii) hereon or any dependant of such workman, bringing or making a claim under any Workmen's Compensation Act for the time being in force in Singapore or at Common Law against the Principal Housing & Development Board for personal injury or disease sustained whilst at work on any Contract covered by this Policy which the Insured may be carrying out for the Principal Housing & Development Board the Insurer will indemnify the said Principal Housing & Development Board against such claim and any costs charges and expenses in respect thereof. Provided always that the Insurer shall be entitled to have the sole conduct and control of all proceedings connected with claims covered by this. Nothing herein shall be construed as affecting the Insured's right to recover damages in any other way under the said Legislation. The indemnity herein granted is intended to cover the legal liability of the Insured to workmen in the employment of contractors performing work for the Insured while engaged in the business and occupation in respect of which the Policy is granted but only so far as regards claims under any Workmen's Compensation Act for the time being in force in Singapore or at Common Law.
10.
(ii)
11.
In consideration of premium being paid in respect of employees of the Insured in an Occupation described in the Schedule who are not a workman within the meaning of the Legislation it is hereby agreed that the Insurer will not in the event of any accident or disease arising out of and in the course of their employment by the Insured in the Business raise the defence that such employee is not a workman within the meaning of the Legislation. In consideration of premium being paid in respect of employees of the Insured in an Occupation described in the Schedule who are not a workman within the meaning of the Legislation it is hereby agreed that the Policy is extended to indemnify the Insured in respect of the Insured's liability at common law for any accident or disease arising out of and in the course of their employment by the Insured in the Business. All disputes or differences under this Policy shall be referred to Arbitration in accordance with the Arbitration Act (Chapter 10) or any statutory re-enactment thereof. The making of an Award by an Arbitrator or Arbitrators as hereinbefore specified shall be a condition precedent to any right of action against the Insurer.
12.
13.
*Name of Contractor to be inserted # To be filled in by Insurer
UPG07/S1.DOC(105) lkk(181206) DPD
APPENDIX W1 Page 6 Policy No. : Insurer's Company Stamp : 14. At any time after the happening of any accident or disease giving rise to a claim or series of claims under this Policy the Insurer may pay to the Insured the full amount of the Insurer's liability and relinquish the conduct of any claim defence or proceedings and the Insurer shall not be responsible for any damage loss or liability alleged to have been caused to the Insured in consequence of any alleged act or omission of the Insurer in connection with such claim defence or proceedings or of the Insurer relinquishing such conduct nor shall the Insurer be liable for any costs or expenses whatsoever incurred by the Insured or any claimant or other person after the Insurer shall have relinquished such conduct. INTERPRETATION 1. 2. ALL references to "Legislation" in this Policy shall mean the Workmen's Compensation Act (Cap 354), amendments and re-enactments thereof and any regulations made thereunder. Words used in the Policy shall have the same meanings as that defined in the Legislation. WARRANTY The Insured warrants that in the event of any failure by him to comply with any of the Terms of this Policy, he shall repay to the Insurer all sums paid by the Insurer which the Insurer would not have been liable to pay but for the Legislation. PREMIUM WARRANTY CLAUSE 1. Notwithstanding anything herein contained to the contrary, and subject only and without prejudice to Clause 2 hereinafter set out, it is hereby declared and agreed that it is a condition precedent to liability under this Policy, Renewal Certificate, Endorsement or Cover Note that any premium due must be paid and actually received in full by the Insurer, the registered broker or registered agent through whom this Policy was effected : (a) when the period of insurance is 60 days or more, within SIXTY (60) days from the : i. ii. INCEPTION date of the coverage under the Policy, Renewal Certificate or Cover Note; or EFFECTIVE date of the coverage stated on each Endorsement, if any, issued under the Policy, Renewal Certificate or Cover Note when the effective date of coverage stated on the Endorsement is on or after the issuance date of the Endorsement; or ISSUANCE date of each Endorsement, if any, issued under the Policy, Renewal Certificate or Cover Note where the effective date of coverage under the Endorsement is before the issuance date;
iii.
OR (b) Where the total premium under any single Policy exceeds #$ and the Insurer has allowed payment of that premium by instalments within SIXTY (60) days from the : i. INCEPTION date of the cover under the Policy, Renewal Certificate or Cover Note for the first instalment and thereafter from the agreed dates on which the subsequent instalments become payable; or EFFECTIVE date of coverage of any Endorsement issued under such Policy, for the first instalment and thereafter from the agreed dates on which the subsequent instalments become payable;
ii.
OR (c) when the period of insurance is LESS than SIXTY (60) days, within the period of insurance specified in the Policy, Endorsement, Renewal Certificate or Cover Note.
UPG07/S1.DOC(106) lkk(181206) DPD
2.
In the event any of the abovementioned premium is not paid in full to the Insurer, registered broker or registered agent as described above in the manner and within the time stipulated above (the "premium warranty period"), the cover under this Policy, Renewal Certificate, Endorsement or Cover Note shall be deemed to have terminated from the expiry of the premium warranty period and the Insurer shall be discharged from all liability therefrom but without prejudice to any liability incurred before that date and # the Insurer will be entitled to a pro-rata time on risk premium subject to a minimum of $ .
To be filled in by Insurer
UPG07/S1.DOC(107) lkk(181206) DPD
ATTACHMENT A
UNDERTAKING FOR NON-DISCLOSURE ("UNDERTAKING")
TO :
THE HOUSING & DEVELOPMENT BOARD SINGAPORE
In consideration of your agreeing to disclose/make available to us such information and documentation ("Information") as may be applicable to the ( Description of Contract ) expressed to be entered into between yourselves and us ("Agreement"), we ( Name of Company ) of ( Address ) undertake that, save as hereinafter provided, such Information shall be treated by us as confidential at all times and further agree and undertake as follows : hereby agree and
1.
We will not without your prior written consent disclose the Information to any other person, firm or corporation save where expressly provided otherwise in this Undertaking and shall ensure that there is no unauthorised publication or disclosure of the information.
2.
We will divulge the Information only to those personnel who are directly connected with the Agreement ("Personnel") and Personnel shall refer to our employees, subcontractors and their employees;
3.
We will ensure that the Personnel are aware of and will comply with the confidentiality and non-disclosure obligations contained herein during their periods of service with you and at any time thereafter. We will fully indemnify you and keep you indemnified at all times against any costs, expenses, losses or damages that you may sustain or incur as a result of any breach of confidence or the terms of this undertaking.
4.
We will not use the Information for any purpose other than for effectively carrying out our obligations under the Agreement.
UPG07/S1.DOC(108) lkk(181206) DPD
ATTACHMENT A
5.
All documents given to us by you relating to the Agreement and any other copies made or reproduced from such documents or part thereof will be returned to you or otherwise disposed of in any manner as may be directed by you.
6.
The foregoing obligations shall continue in full force and effect not withstanding the expiry or termination of the Agreement, as the case may be.
SIGNED for and on behalf of (name of company)
Name
Title
Date
Witness by
SECTION 2/...
UPG07/S1.DOC(109) lkk(181206) DPD
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
UPG07/indTSC.DOC(1) lkk(181206) DPD
Ugdg Spec TS 2-1/35
SECTION 2
2.0
PILING
2.1.1
Scope of Piling Works The Contract requires the supply of all materials, labour, Construction Equipment, tools and everything necessary for the construction and complete installation of any one or combination of the following piling systems under the supervision of the SO Rep : (a) (b) (c) (d) (e) H-Section Steel Piling Large Diameter Bored Piling Micro Pile System Jack-In Piling System Reinforced Concrete Piles
Where the Tender Cost Breakdown of the Form of Tender provides for itemised breakdown for piling to certain items of work, the rates indicated shall be used for estimating the sum for the said piling items. Where the Tender Cost Breakdown does not provide for itemised breakdown for piling to an item of work even though the item of work involves piling, such piling work is deemed to be included in the sum for the said item of work. Notwithstanding the above, the Contractor may propose the use of other types of piles, patented or otherwise. For this purpose, the Contractor may obtain a copy of the soil investigation report from the SO Rep. However, the Employer accepts no responsibility for the accuracy of the information given. The Contractor's proposal shall comply with the Specifications and subject to the approval of the SO Rep. For all piling works whether specified herein or proposed by Contractor and accepted by the SO Rep, the Contractor shall maintain records and perform tests as the SO Rep may deem necessary for ensuring compliance with various provisions of the Specification. All piling works shall also comply with the requirements of Clauses 2.1.4 to 2.1.32 specified herein.
2.1.2
Reserved
2.1.3
Adjustment To Contract Sum And Pay Length Of Piles Upon completion, the value of piling works executed by the Contractor shall be determined by the SO Rep. The Lump Sum for the whole of the piling works as entered by the Contractor in the Form of Tender shall then be adjusted based on the value of piling works executed by the Contractor. The adjustment (addition or omission) shall be the net difference between the Lump Sum and the value of piling works executed by the Contractor. The addition or omission amount shall be added to or deducted from the Contract Sum as the case may be. The value of the piling work executed by the Contractor shall be the product of the total actual pay length and the Basic Rate per metre. The actual pay length of each pile shall be measured from the specified cut-off level of the pile to the end of the pile. The pay length shall be measured to the accuracy of the nearest 10mm.
Ugdg Spec TS 2-2/35
2.1.3
Adjustment To Contract Sum And Pay Length Of Piles (Contd) The Basic Rate for the respective pile size shall be derived as follows: Basic Rate = Lump Sum for Respective Pile Size in the Form Of Tender* Provisional Quantity (metre) for Respective Pile Size in the Form Of Tender
The value of Standard Load Test (SLT) shall be the product of the actual number of tests and the Basic Rate as derived as follows: Basic Rate = Lump Sum for SLT in the Form Of Tender* Provisional Quantity (Nos) for SLT in the Form Of Tender
The value of Ultimate Load Test (ULT) shall be the product of the actual number of tests and the Basic Rate as derived as follows: Basic Rate = Lump Sum for ULT in the Form Of Tender* Provisional Quantity (Nos) for ULT in the Form Of Tender
Note * As shown in respective items of the breakdown of Total Lump Sum in the Form Of Tender.
2.1.4
Machinery Required The type of piling machine adopted shall be able to install piles taking into account the headroom constraint and the proximity of the piles to the existing building. The Contractor shall provide sufficient piling machines and accessory equipment at any one time throughout the Time for Completion. The use of diesel piling hammers is strictly disallowed in the contract.
2.1.5
Damages to Existing Carpark Concrete Aprons Drains, Turfing and Embankment Etc The Contractor shall break up and reinstate existing carpark concrete apron, apron drain, turfing, landscaping and embankment etc to facilitate the installation of piles. Areas to be broken shall be kept to absolute minimum. All reinstatement works are to be carried out to the satisfaction of SO Rep.
2.1.6
Noise, Vibration & Disturbance All piling operations and excavation works shall be carried out without unreasonable noise, vibration and disturbance. The Contractor shall bear all risks and responsibilities in carrying out the piling operations and excavation works and shall be responsible during the progress of the piling operation and excavation works for any damage or disturbance to existing or adjoining properties, or annoyance or nuisance to Occupants of these properties.
2.1.7
Safety Of Existing Buildings/Structures The Contractor shall be responsible for the safety of the existing buildings/structures and shall include in his contract sum the provision and construction of necessary and adequate shoring and supports within existing buildings/structures, to underpin and strengthen the existing building foundations against any adverse effect arising out of the execution of the piling operation and excavation works.
Ugdg Spec TS 2-3/35
2.1.8
Soil Investigation and Other Factors Affecting the Works Geotechnical information concerning the site shall be provided by the HDB to the Contractor. However, HDB accepts no responsibility for the accuracy and/or comprehensiveness of any such information provided. The Contractor shall inspect and examine the site and its surroundings, and carry out all independent investigations, satisfy himself as to the nature of the ground and sub-soil, the form and nature of the site and nature of the works and obtain all necessary information as to other circumstances which may affect his design or Tender price. If the tenderer wishes to carry out his own ground testing, he shall submit his proposal to the SO Rep for approval prior to such tests and all expenses incurred as a result of the tests shall be borne by the tenderer. All such proposals must be submitted not later than 2 weeks before the Tender closing date for the project. The Tender closing date will not be extended for any ground testing requested by the tenderer. No claim by the Contractor for additional payment will be allowed on the ground of any misunderstanding or misinterpretation of any such matter or for the Contractor's failure to obtain all necessary information nor shall the Contractor be released from any duties, responsibilities or obligations imposed on or undertaken by him under the Contract on any such ground or on the ground that he did not or could not foresee any matter which might affect the works.
2.1.9
Site Survey, Vibration and Crack Monitoring Where piling works are to be carried out close to the existing buildings or structures, the Contractor shall carry out a joint inspection with the SO Rep and representatives of the appropriate Town Council and/or HDB Branch Office including taking photographs and notes to record the conditions of the existing buildings or structures prior to the commencement of the piling works. The records shall be jointly endorsed by the Contractor, SO Rep and the representative of the Town Council and/or HDB Branch Office. In addition the Contractor shall be required to carry out vibration and crack monitoring at his own cost and expense when piling works are to be carried out close to the existing buildings or structures or when public complaints have been received. The numbers and locations as well as the duration of the vibration and crack monitoring shall be decided by the SO Rep. The vibration monitoring shall measure the peak particle velocity (mm/s) and frequency (Hz) of the vibration. Acceleration and displacement values shall also be derived from the transducer operating range chart if requested by SO Rep. Tell-tale crack metres shall be installed as and when necessary, to monitor movement across cracks in vertical and horizontal directions. Inclinometers and extensometers shall be used where necessary. The monitoring shall be read daily unless otherwise instructed by SO Rep. Four sets of the comprehensive reports shall be submitted weekly and the final report shall be submitted within 2 weeks after the completion of the monitoring works.
2.1.10
Surveying Works on Settlement Benchmarks The Contractor shall be required to set up adequate settlement benchmarks as deemed necessary by SO Rep to monitor the settlement of the existing or adjoining properties/structures, if any, throughout the piling operation and excavation. The monitoring programme of the surveying works on settlement benchmarks shall be submitted to the SO Rep for approval. When any of the following criteria is reached irrespective of whether damage has occurred, the Contractor shall notify the SO Rep immediately : (i) (ii) 5mm settlement or movement between consecutive readings. 15mm total settlement of any part of a building/structure.
Ugdg Spec TS 2-4/35 2.1.11 Standard and Certificates All materials used in the installation of piles shall be obtained from approved manufacturers. Materials and articles used shall comply with appropriate Singapore Standards (S.S.) published by PSB where these exist, otherwise British Standards (B.S.) or other approved Standards will apply. Where the standard given in this document has been amended or superseded, the current Standard shall apply. Where British Standards are given in this document, the corresponding Singapore Standards (S.S.) where existing shall prevail. The recommendations in the appropriate Singapore Codes of Practice (C.P.) shall be referred to during the construction where these exist otherwise British Codes of Practice or other approved codes shall apply unless otherwise directed by the SO Rep. In all cases where materials or articles are specified to comply with respective Standards the Contractor shall, if required, obtain from the manufacturers and supply to the SO Rep the appropriate Certificate of Compliance with the Standard. 2.1.12 Testing of Materials The SO Rep may appoint independent persons to carry out tests on materials to be used in the works. The cost of making any test shall be borne by the Contractor unless otherwise specified. The SO Rep may cause a sample to be taken from each consignment of materials to be tested and the results of such testing shall be accepted as final. If a sample does not conform to the required standard, the whole consignment will be rejected and shall be removed from site at the Contractor's own expense. The costs of the tests together with all administrative expenses incurred shall be borne by the Contractor. All the tests must be carried out at SAC-SINGLAS accredited laboratories or test centres. 2.1.13 2.1.14 Reserved Tolerance from True Position The centre of each pile at the cut-off level shall not deviate from its true position as shown in the drawings by more than 75mm in any direction. In the event the deviation be more than the allowable tolerance as stated above for the respective piling system, the affected pile(s) is liable to be rejected and compensating pile(s) shall be installed at the Contractor's own cost and expense when directed by the SO's Rep. All additional cost of amendment in pile cap, beams, etc designed as a counter measure to the pile eccentricities exceeding the permissible tolerance shall also be borne by the Contractor. 2.1.15 Removal of obstruction The Contractor shall at his own cost, allow for excavation in any material to remove obstructions which prevent driving or which interfere with the proper alignment of the piles, timbering, backfilling, restoration of ground surrounding the piles and any other works necessary to complete the operation to the satisfaction of the SO Rep. No claims will be entertained for standing time for rigs in consequence of obstructions of any kind. 2.1.16 Penetration and Size of Piles The Contractor shall be required to install any size of the piles as shown in the specifications or drawings and each pile in the position indicated on the drawings to the required depth. The onus of obtaining the required resistance to withstand the required test load within the limit of settlement shall rest with the Contractor but the piles shall not be installed unnecessarily beyond the depth for them to develop the required test load. Should Contractor find that a longer penetration is required due to poor ground conditions being encountered as work proceeds, this will be permitted only if it is proved to be justified by examination and tests of the soils in the boreholes. The Contractor must also state sound and acceptable basis for determining the penetration required. If ground conditions indicate that the sizes of any subsequent piles as proposed and shown on the drawings are inadequate then the Contractor shall produce sufficient evidence to prove that a larger size would be more suitable. Conversely, where a pile is to be constructed in very good ground, the Contractor must produce sufficient evidence to show that the reduced length of pile will be capable of carrying the specified load. However, the Contractor must first obtain the approval of the SO Rep if longer or shorter penetration is required.
Ugdg Spec TS 2-5/35
2.1.17
Damaged and Rejected Piles Damaged piles and piles installed out of position or twisted shall be rejected and/or removed and replacement pile or piles shall be substituted by the Contractor at his own expense even if piles of bigger capacity are required. Piles shall be installed truly vertical and any pile with an inclination exceeding 1 (horizontal) to 75 (vertical) is liable to be rejected and shall be similarly removed and replaced when ordered by the SO Rep at Contractor's own expense. In addition, the Contractor shall also bear the extra cost as a result of rejection and replacement or installation of additional pile or piles due to an increase in size of pile caps, strengthening of the ground beam etc. Piles which have risen or are disturbed as a result of installing adjacent piles shall be reinstated to the original depth and resistance. Otherwise, it shall be replaced by compensating piles at the Contractor's expense.
2.1.18
Pile Verticality Measurement The Contractor shall provide the necessary tools approved by the SO Rep to measure the verticality of piles.
2.1.19
Standard Load Test Standard Load Test shall be conducted on working piles by loading the piles to twice their nominal working loads. Two (2) Standard Load Tests are to be carried out on each piling block unless otherwise specified. A piling block shall include only the multi-storey carpark (MSCP) and residential building. In cases where the Electrical Substation (ESS) is located within the MSCP, any Standard Load Test carried out at the said ESS shall be deemed to be part of the two tests to be carried out at the MSCP. The SO Rep shall decide when testing shall commence and the Contractor shall proceed with testing only after the SO Rep's instructions have been given to him to test the pile. As soon as a test pile has been selected the Contractor shall prepare for the test without delay. All selected test piles must be tested within two weeks from the date of selection or earlier. Standard Load Tests shall be carried out on any such working piles as may be ordered by the SO Rep. The Standard Load test shall be carried out in one cycle only.
2.1.20
Ultimate Load Test Ultimate Load Test shall be conducted by loading the piles to three (3) times their nominal working loads. The Contractor shall include in the Contract Sum, two (2) ultimate load test (including the installation of the test piles) for the whole contract, unless otherwise specified. The ultimate load test shall be conducted before the installation of the working piles to determine the ultimate capacity of a pile installed separately from the working pile. The Ultimate Load test shall be carried out in one cycle only. The total settlement of the ultimate load test shall not exceed (i) 25mm at 2 times nominal working load; and (ii) 40mm at 3 times nominal working load for all piling systems. In the event of failure of ultimate load test, subsequent tests (including the installation of test piles) shall be carried out at the contractor's expense. If the subsequent test fail again, the ultimate load test results may be used to assess the suitability of the pile layout proposed, or further tests (including the installation of the test piles) may be ordered by the SO's Rep if deemed necessary. Cost for the further tests (including the installation of the test piles) or related works shall be borne by the Contractor.
2.1.21
Provision of Testing Equipment Adequate facilities and sufficient equipment shall be provided by the Contractor for at least 2 Load Tests to proceed at any one time.
Ugdg Spec TS 2-6/35 2.1.22 Loading of Test Piles (i) The test load may be applied to the pile by jacking against kentledge or anchor pile. The clear distance between a test pile and any anchor pile shall not be less than 3 metres. Where piles are in groups, the use of other working piles as anchor piles may be allowed subject to the approval of the SO Rep. Notwithstanding such approval the Contractor shall be solely responsible for making good as the SO Rep considers necessary any damage to such anchor piles which are used as permanent piles. Levels of test piles shall be recorded immediately after selection and in any case before the erection of kentledge platform. This shall be done by reading levels on two diagonally opposite corners of the pile cap. All test equipment such as lever, dial gauge, oil pumps and hydraulic jack, shall be submitted to the Superintending Officers Representative to show the date of last checking for accuracy. Equipment calibrated within 3 months, by approved laboratory, of the date of test shall be used. In the preparation of all test piles the Contractor shall ensure the rigidity of the supports at all corners of the platform. If piles are required to support the platform they shall be installed at Contractor's expense. If any test is discontinued or fails to reach the specified load due to (a) faulty jack or gauge, (b) unstable support of kentledge, (c) damage to or of the pile cap (d) the datums not being set out properly or any other cause, then the test shall be abandoned and the results disregarded. A further test shall be carried out at the Contractor's own expense. The settlement shall be measured to an accuracy of not more than half millimeter from a datum which must be on an immovable structure or be on a pile and it shall not be affected by any movement of the ground due to the test loading, driving of piles or any other causes. The load test shall be carried out in one cycle only. The test load shall be imposed by equal increments of 0.25 x nominal working load of test pile at approved intervals until the full test load is reached. The maximum settlement under full test load shall remain for a period of not less than three (3) days or as directed by the SO Rep. The results shall be plotted to produce a loadsettlement curve. The test load shall be imposed by equal increments of load equivalent to 25% of the working load of the pile with each load increment being maintained for at least 15 minutes until the full load of the test pile is reached. This test load at the nominal working load shall be maintained for 24 hours before the operation to load the pile to its full test load (2 or 3 times the nominal working load) is continued. The above procedure shall be considered as one operation. Contractor shall not release the loading at any stage of the test before reaching the full test load. The test pile shall be deemed to have failed if the Contractor failed to comply with the requirements. The maximum settlement under full test load should remain for a period of not less than 3 days or as directed by the Superintending Officers Representative. The results shall be plotted to produce a load settlement curve.
(ii)
(iii)
(iv)
(v)
(vi)
(vii)
(viii)
2.1.23
Failure of Standard Load Test A Standard Load Test shall be deemed to have failed if the settlement exceeds 25mm at 2 times nominal working load for driven steel piles, large diameter bored piles, jack-in piles, micropiles and precast reinforced concrete piles. For pile subjected to negative skin friction, the standard load test can be performed in the normal manner, but with its acceptance subject to satisfaction of an additional criterion that pile settlement at the test load of 1.0 time column load plus 2.0 times negative friction should not exceed 10mm. If a working pile so tested as herein specified, fails to sustain the full standard test load over a period to be decided by the SO Rep, but in any case not less than 3 days, then TWO further tests on other piles in any block at the same area selected by the SO Rep may be carried out as directed by the SO Rep at the Contractor's expense. Where a pile fails under test, compensating piles as directed by the SO Rep shall be driven and the group re-tested if deemed necessary by the SO Rep, the whole of the work shall be carried out at the Contractor's expense.
Ugdg Spec TS 2-7/35 2.1.24 Soundness of Work The Contractor shall be aware that load tests on piles are conducted for the purpose of studying the behaviour of piles and in particular settlement under load. As not every pile can be tested, the Contractor shall ensure that all piles are installed such that the total settlement or differential settlement shall be limited to a maximum angle of 1:500 so that the building to be supported will not be damaged due to settlement. For bored piles in buildings of ten(10) storeys or taller, the Contractor shall monitor and submit the settlement records at various selected columns to the SO Rep. The acceptance of a few piles which pass the load tests does not relieve the Contractor from the responsibility for the soundness of the whole of the pile foundation. The Contractor shall be solely responsible for ensuring that all the piles are installed to such a depth that the required resistance is obtained. 2.1.25 Ultimate Load Test and Standard Load Test Report Three sets of test reports, endorsed by the Contractor's Professional Engineer, shall be submitted to the SO Rep within one week after the completion of the test. The test reports shall contain detailed information such as background, soil log, details of the test pile, test procedures, full analysis of the test results, etc. The reports must also be properly bound in booklet form. If the pile tested failed to sustain the required load or if the pile top settlement exceeds the permitted settlement specified, the report shall also contain an analysis of the pile behaviour concerning the pile settlement. Recommended measurement on improving the pile performance shall also be included 2.1.26 Checking and Cutting of Piles The Contractor shall include in the Contract Sum excavation, cutting back the pile, true and level, to the cut-off level, backfilling and any other necessary works for the completion of the operation. Immediately after piling is completed in a block, the Contractor shall check and record the exact actual position of every pile as compared with the positions indicated on the drawings. Excavation and cutting of piles to the required cut-off levels (+25mm) shall follow immediately. Test loading of working piles shall commence immediately after as a selection is made by the SO Rep and may be carried out before the completion of piling in the block. All the above works shall not take more than three (3) weeks as from the date the last pile is driven in the block regardless of inclement weather or testing time. The Contractor shall ensure that adequate number of Registered Surveyors are available at the sites for such work. If the Contractor fails to comply with this requirement, the Employer shall be entitled to employ and pay other persons to carry out the same and all expenses consequent thereof shall be deducted from the monies due to the Contractor without prejudice to the Employer's right to claim any sum over and above monies thus applied. 2.1.27 Multiple Failure of Working Piles A block containing up to 500 piles will be deemed to have failed if 3 tests therein fail. In the event of such failure, the Contractor shall carry out sufficient further piling in accordance with the contract document as will ensure the safety of the buildings which are to be carried by the piles. The whole of such work shall be executed at the Contractor's expense, and the cost for amending pile caps and ground beams arising out of this, if any, shall be borne by the Contractor. 2.1.28 Rate of Progress The Contractor shall submit a progress schedule showing the number of piling rigs, the rate of progress and the time required for piling and follow up works to the SO Rep as soon as that site is handed to the Contractor. The Contractor shall adhere strictly to the approved schedule otherwise he shall be liable for Liquidated Damages. The Contractor shall inform the SO Rep in writing the dates of arrival and departure of each piling rig at every site. No piling rig shall leave a site without prior approval of the SO Rep.
Ugdg Spec TS 2-8/35
2.1.29
Pile Penetration and Eccentricity Plans Completed pile penetration and eccentricity plans (3 copies) shall be checked and certified by the Contractor's Licensed Surveyor and endorsed by a Professional Engineer directly employed by the Contractor before submitting to the Employer. All plans must bear the original certification/endorsement by the Licensed Surveyor and Professional Engineer. The duly endorsed eccentricity plans and penetration plans for each block must be submitted to the SO's Rep not more than one month from the date the last pile is driven in the block regardless of inclement weather or testing time. The SO Rep may require a copy of the as-built piling plan to be submitted in soft copy in DWG format or other approved format.
2.1.30
Contract Sum/Basic Rate The sum and/or rates in the Tender Cost Breakdown of the Form of Tender shall be the full and inclusive price to cover the supply of Construction Equipment, materials and labour for the execution thereof in any ground, completely and as specified and shall thus include the following : (a) All preliminary works on site including the setting up of site office test cube shed, water supply, washing bay, etc. The provision and mobilisation of piling rig to install any size of Piles including hammer or auger and all necessary accessories, equipment, tools and appliances brought to the site, erection, movement of piling rig from pile to pile and from building block to other building block within the piling site, dismantling and removal on completion of the work on site. The installation of piles to any level below ground level and to a resistance as specified, including the supply, use and removal of drilling mud or steel casings to support the borehole prior to concreting or cement grouting. The setting out of all pile positions in accordance with the drawings. To excavate in any material and cut back piles to cut-off level as specified and subsequent backfilling. To check the final position and cut-off level of all piles. The removal of all spoil, cement slurry and water from site or pile pits as directed by the SO Rep. The cleaning of the site on completion. The payment of all insurance, water and other charges. The observance of all other directions, instructions and clauses contained in all documents forming this Tender and the carrying out of the complete work to the satisfaction of the SO Rep and in accordance with the Specification.
(b)
(c)
(d) (e)
(f) (g) (h) (i) (j)
2.1.31
Method Statement for Piling Works The contractor shall submit method statement pertaining to piling works with regards to ULT, SLT and installation of working piles. The method statement has to be approved by the SO Rep prior to commencement of works. If the site conditions warrants that the method of construction be revised or altered, the contractor shall make the alterations accordingly.
2.1.32
Professional Engineer The contractor shall engage a Professional Engineer (PE) who will specify the method, procedures, precautions, etc in carrying out the proposed piling and its related excavation works. The PE shall study the nature of the proposed piling works, ground conditions, existing and proposed buildings and structures within the site, existing neighbouring buildings, structures, properties and gather any other relevant information in order to make the following necessary submissions to the BCA/HDB: (a) The PE shall submit to BCA/HDB a vibration monitoring layout plan. The allowable vibration level must be explicitly stated in the submission.
Ugdg Spec TS 2-9/35
2.1.32
Professional Engineer (Contd) (b) The PE shall submit to BCA/HDB his design drawing on retaining works and the allowable ground movements for excavation that is related to piling works. The contractor and PE shall carry out a pre-construction survey on all the neighbouring properties. A Registered Surveyor has to be engaged in the process if necessary. The Contractor and PE shall extend a copy of the survey report to the owners of all the neighbouring properties.
(c)
The contractor and his PE shall be fully responsible on the adequacy of the above designs and submissions. The PE shall be aware of his responsibility as spelt out by Building and Construction Authority's circulars and announcements in making the above submissions. All of the above requirements are to be complied with before commencement of works
2.2 2.2.1
H-SECTION STEEL PILING Hydraulic Hammer Pile Driving Machines The Contractor shall use only hydraulic hammer pile driving machines which are fully enclosed with noise dampening enclosures and the usage of such machine shall comply with all relevant regulations as well as provisions in this Specifications in regard to pollution control. Generator sets for electricity supply and welding purposes shall have adequate housing and exhaust silencer to minimise noise and shall be subjected to the approval of the SO Rep prior to use on site.
2.2.2
Steel Pile Sections The steel pile sections shall comply with the relevant Singapore Standards, where these exist, or the equivalent British Standard BS 4360 for mild steel. Before driving commences, all sections shall be clean and free from any contamination or materials which will impair their strength.
2.2.3
Nominal Working Load The nominal working loads of various sizes of H-section steel piles shall be as indicated in the Drawings.
2.2.4
Length of Steel Pile Sections The length of new steel pile sections delivered to the piling site shall be 12 metres long. If the Contractor intends to use steel pile sections of other lengths, the approval of the SO Rep must first be obtained prior to their delivery to the stockyard or the piling site.
2.2.5
Quality of Welded Joints and Welders The Contractor shall ensure and maintain a high standard of quality of welded joints. The quality of the welded joint between pile sections depends not only on the quality of the weld material but also on the skill of the welder. The welder shall possess at least a National Trade Certificate 3 (NTC3) for Arc Welding issued by a recognised and approved institute. Notwithstanding this, the welder shall be subjected to re-qualifying by approved welding inspectors as and when required by the SO Rep. A high standard of workmanship of welders shall be maintained to ensure a high standard of quality of the welded joints. All pile sections at each piling site must be neatly stacked in the `H' position to facilitate cutting of the 45 degree chamfer. Before commencement of piling, each welder shall execute a sample joint for inspection. If the quality of the welded joint is unsatisfactory, the welder will be disallowed to carry out welding until he has proved by way of a subsequent demonstration that he can perform a welded joint satisfactorily. During piling, all welded joints of pile sections shall be checked. A welder who produces unsatisfactory welds shall be replaced and shall be disallowed from carrying out welding at any other piling site. The Contractor shall fabricate and supply adequate number of weld gauge for use by Consultants site supervision staff.
Ugdg Spec TS 2-10/35
2.2.6
Record of Steel Pile Driving Records of driving for every steel pile shall be kept by the Contractor and a copy shall be submitted to the SO Rep on site. The records shall include the following information : (a) (b) (c) (d) (e) (f) (g) (h) set temporary compression full length and serial numbers of steel sections reduced level at top of pile reduced cut-off level pay length time of completion inclination of the pile
The form of this record must be approved by the SO Rep before driving commences. The method of measuring the set and temporary compression shall be approved by the SO Rep. The above record must show a series of sets and temporary compressions measured during the process of driving. Once the driving of a pile is commenced it shall continue until the final penetration or set is reached. Immediately after a pile reaches its final set, the reduced level of the top of the pile section shall be certified so that the exact pay length of the pile may be recorded. 2.2.7 Marking of Steel Sections Serial number and length shall be marked in paint on every steel section on arrival at Site. Length of sections shall be measured to the nearest 10mm. Full record shall be submitted to the SO Rep daily for checking. 2.2.8 Steel Pile Sections The detail of the mild steel H-Section piles and their respective nominal working loads are as shown on the drawings. Alternative mild steel H-Section shall not be used unless they are approved by the SO Rep. The nominal working load of such sections shall be submitted to the SO Rep for approval. 2.2.9 Dynamic Test Pile For Steel H-Pile The Contractor shall engage an independent testing specialist who provides at all times, operate and maintain a set of portable equipment for the dynamic testing of pile foundations. The total number of tests to be conducted shall be 2 Nos or 2 % of the total number of piles in each building block, whichever is greater. The equipment shall be the latest model of its kind, Model GCPC Pile Driving Analyzer or its equivalent. The equipment shall also be equipped with the latest revision of the CAPWAP programme to perform data analysis of the field data. The CAPWAP programme should include features for interactive or automated mode for calculation and matching of the forces, velocity waves, calculation of CASE capacity, calculation of pile-toe resistance vs toe movement for end-bearing piles, wave equation analysis using pile top measurements, static load-settlement analysis based on the CAPWAP results and capable of giving both numerical and graphic output and other utilities for the processing of the field data. The Contractor shall ensure that the Hardware and Software owned by the third party testing specialist are in good working condition to the satisfaction of the SO Rep. The Contractor shall submit specifications and details of the Hardware and Software for the SO Rep approval before carrying out the dynamic test pile. If the Contractor fails to make available the Hardware and Software within 2 weeks after notification by the SO Rep on the need to carry out the test, the SO Rep will make the necessary arrangement to engage other testing specialists to carry out the dynamic pile test and CAPWAP Analysis and all costs and expenses thus incurred shall be recovered from the Contractor. The portable dynamic testing equipment should be in a compact unit suitable for rugged use at the piling site. The unit shall contain automatic signal conditioner, printer and a high resolution screen for display. The printer should be capable of producing report quality graphs as well as printout of data in the field. The Contractor shall ensure that qualified personnel viz. an engineer and a technician are available at all times for the operation of equipment and for conducting the test.
2.2.10
Failure of Dynamic Pile Test A Dynamic Pile Test shall be deemed to have failed if the maximum resistance of pile (RMX) at any time during blow, using a Case Damping Coefficient (J) as approved by the SO Rep, is less than 2 times the nominal working load of a working pile under test. If the force/velocity-time graph taken during the test does not indicate any abnormality, the SO Rep may allow the Contractor to re-tap the pile and another Dynamic Pile Test may be carried out all at the Contractor's cost and expense. If a working pile so tested fails and is rejected by the SO Rep, then TWO further Dynamic Pile Tests on other piles in any building block at the site may be carried out as directed by the SO Rep at the Contractor's cost and expense. In addition, compensating pile(s), as directed by the SO Rep shall be driven all at the Contractor's cost and expense. When the integrity of the pile from a Dynamic Pile Test is doubtful to the SO Rep, the Contractor is required to show proof that the integrity of the pile is acceptable to the SO Rep. Otherwise, compensating pile(s), as directed by the SO Rep, shall be driven all at the Contractor's cost and expense.
2.3 2.3.1
LARGE DIAMETER BORED PILING System of Piling The system and equipment offered by the Contractor for installation of large diameter bored piles : (i) shall be capable of sinking boreholes with a range of diameters between 600mm and 1,800mm and to depth ranging from 10 metres to 60 metres depending on the nature of the ground. may include, Flight Auger type system as the principal method for the work in general. shall be capable of being modified to deal with whatever strata encountered, by the addition of further cutting or extraction or protective devices as may be required to deal with all ground conditions including : 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. (iv) Water-bearing ground Soft ground which caves in unless supported Medium stiff or stiff clays Sands or sandstone Coarse gravel Very stiff clays Boulders and bedrocks Thinly bedded shales Tree roots or buried trunks
(ii) (iii)
shall generate the minimum degree of vibration when operating alongside weak structures or until such depth is reached where vibrations may be dissipated without damage to existing foundations. shall be capable of sinking and removing casings for the support of the boreholes to whatever depth that may be required (to the full depth of the bore where necessary) and without disturbance to the ground surrounding the pile. shall be capable of under-reaming the bases of the piles.
(v)
(vi)
Unless the Contractor is prepared to work in all ground conditions, his Tender will not be considered.
2.3.2
Cement All cement used in the works shall be of approved local manufacture except otherwise permitted by the SO Rep. Where cement is specified it shall comply with SS26 and BS12. The SO Rep may test the quality specified at the Contractor's own expense. With each delivery the Contractor may be required to send to the SO Rep a memorandum of the quantity delivered and the manufacturer's test certificate. Unless otherwise specified, the compressive strength test shall be used to determine the strength of cement.
2.3.3
Aggregates The materials used as aggregates shall be strong, hard, durable and free from clay lumps and organic and other impurities. All materials and grading of aggregates shall comply with SS 31. Notwithstanding the above, fine aggregates for concrete shall be clean sharp well graded sand free from clay, loam or organic matter. Samples shall be submitted by the Contractor for the approval of the SO Rep prior to their use as fine aggregates. Coarse aggregates for concrete shall be clean crushed granite, well graded between the limits of 20mm and 5mm. Samples shall be submitted by the Contractor for the approval of the SO Rep, prior to their use as coarse aggregates.
2.3.4
Steel Steel reinforcement shall be obtained from local manufacturer or other manufacturers as may be approved in writing by the SO Rep and shall comply with SS 2, SS 18, SS 32, Bs 4449, BS 4461, BS 4482 and BS 4483 wherever applicable. All reinforcement shall be free from scale and all loose rust. It shall not be coated with any grease, oil, paint or adhering earth that may impair the bond between the concrete and reinforcement.
2.3.5
Testing of Concrete Where bored piles are included in the Works, a minimum of 4 cubes shall be cast for every 10m3 of concrete or part thereof for the purpose of compression tests at 7 days strength and 28 days strength. 2 cubes shall be tested at 7 days and the remaining 2 cubes shall be tested at 28 days. The SO Rep shall exercise his rights under clause 1.10 Nuisance And Irregularities to impose a charge against the Contractor for every cube which fails to attain the minimum specified strength at 7 days age and 28 days age as specified; in addition, the SO Rep reserves the right to reject the pile and the Contractor shall install compensating piles that will ensure the safety of the building to be supported by the piles. The compensating piles shall be installed all at the Contractors cost and expense, and as directed by the SO Rep. The test cubes shall be made and cured in accordance with SS78 and BS 1881. The cubes shall be tested at the HDB Prefabrication Technology Centre.
2.3.6
Ready-Mix Concrete If the Contractor wishes to use ready-mix concrete he must obtain prior approval from the SO Rep who will, inter alia, require to be satisfied that the proposed supplier will adhere to this Specification and that the quality and control of the mix are satisfactory and comply with SS 119 and BS 1926. The SO Rep shall have access to the concrete batching plant of the Contractor's ready mix concrete supplier during all working hours of the plant. The ready-mix concrete shall comply in all respects with the specified requirements for concrete as outlined in this Specification, and the Contractor shall arrange and pay for the making of all the requisite tests. Ready-mixed concrete shall only be transported in continuous mixing trucks and comply with the manufacturer's operating standard. Appropriate retarder when used shall be subject to the approval of the SO Rep. No additional water shall be added to the ready-mixed concrete.
2.3.7
Concrete Mixes The Contractor shall submit, for the SO Rep's approval, a chart showing the design mixes he proposes to use in the ready-mix concrete. For each grade of concrete mix used, the Contractor shall inter alia state the weights of cement, granite and fine aggregates, the type and amount of admixture and the water cement ratio to be used in the mix.
2.3.7
Concrete Mixes (Contd) Concrete to be used for the installation of bored piles shall be of Grades 30 or 35 whichever is appropriate, and as decided by the SO Rep after considering the soil conditions prior to concreting. Grade 30 concrete is used for concreting in the dry, and Grade 35 for tremie concreting under water or any other approved water-sealing fluid. In all conditions, the free water-cement ratio shall not be more than 0.55 for Grade 30 concrete and 0.5 for Grade 35 concrete Notwithstanding the above, the slump for concrete measured by the standard slump cone shall be 3 between 100mm and 150mm and the cement content in any mix shall not be less than 360 kg/m . Where concrete is to be placed underwater or where pile will be exposed to sea water, the cement content shall not be less than 400 kg/m3. For tremie concreting the slump for the concrete shall be between 170mm to 225mm. The SO Rep reserves the right to instruct the Contractor to modify, alter and improve the concrete mix, if necessary.
2.3.8
Concrete Strength The compressive strength of the concrete shall be not less than the strength in the following table corresponding to the class (grade) of concrete : Compressive Strength N/mm 7 days Grade 35 Grade 30 28 24 28 days 38 33
2
Class of Concrete
2.3.9
Nominal Working Load of Bored Piles For large diameter bored piles, the pile diameters to be adopted shall be from 600mm to 1800mm in increment of 100mm. The nominal working load of various sizes of bored piles shall be indicated in the drawings.
2.3.10
Steel Reinforcement and Stirrups The cross-sectional area of the main steel reinforcement should be not less than 0.5% of the crosssectional area of the pile. The length of the reinforcement cage shall extend to 16m below the cut-off level of the piles or the full length of the pile if length below cut off level is less than 16 m, lap lengths for the main reinforcements shall be a minimum of 600mm in length. The first top rung of stirrups where the reinforcing cage will be lifted shall consist of 3 layers of R10 bars, fully welded to the main steel reinforcing bars. All other stirrups (one layer of R10 bar) shall be spot welded to the main steel reinforcing bars of the reinforcing cage which shall conform in size, spacing, type, quality, concrete cover and bond length of the main reinforcement projecting above the pile cut off level etc as detailed in this Specification and the table therein. The lapping joint for the stirrups shall be 50mm (fully welded) or 200mm (without weld) and the weld of the stirrups to the main reinforcing bars shall be able to withstand all condition of handling, transportation and during concreting. The reinforcing cage should not be distorted in any way during these processes and shall be vertical when lowered into the boreholes.
2.3.11
Plastic Circular Spacers Plastic circular spacers of 50mm thickness to provide 80mm cover to the main reinforcement shall be used. The spacers shall be placed at not more than one metre below the top of the reinforcement cage and at not more than 4 metres interval measured along the main reinforcement.
2.3.12
Penetration and Size of Piles The Contractor shall be required to install any size of the piles as shown in Clause 2.3.9 and each pile in the position indicated on the drawings to a depth which affords not less than the minimum penetration of 10 metres below cut-off level or as may be agreed by the SO Rep. The Contractor shall submit design calculations to the SO Rep before commencement of boring, on the estimated penetration of piles at each block. The onus for obtaining the required resistance to withstand the required test load within the limit of settlement shall rest with the Contractor but the piles shall not be installed unnecessarily beyond the depth for them to develop the required test load. Should Contractor find that a longer penetration is required due to poor ground condition being encountered as work proceeds, this will be permitted only if it is proved to be justified by examination and tests of the soils in the boreholes. The Contractor must also state sound and acceptable basis for determining the penetration required. However, the Contractor must first obtain the approval of the SO Rep if longer penetration is required. If a pile is founded at a depth which in the opinion of the SO Rep, is in excess of that seemed necessary in the light of soil conditions encountered, then the Contractor shall be paid only for that length of pile which is deemed necessary. The decision of the SO Rep is final, binding on and conclusive against the Contractor. If ground conditions indicate that the sizes of any subsequent piles as proposed and shown on the drawings are inadequate then the Contractor shall produce sufficient evidence to prove that a large diameter would be more suitable. Conversely, where a pile is to be constructed in very good ground, the Contractor must produce sufficient evidence to show that the reduced length of pile will be capable of carrying the specified load. The shaft of all piles shall not be less than 10 metres in length and shall penetrate into the hard strata to a depth or not less than 3 times the diameter of the pile unless otherwise approved by the SO Rep.
2.3.13
Trial Bore The Contractor shall carry out trial bores by boring outside the pile location at his own expense to determine the required depth or suitability of bored piles as directed by the SO Rep. Sufficient safety measures must be provided to ensure protection against falling or tripping into the bored hole. The bored hole must be covered up immediately after it has been inspected.
2.3.14
Boring and Concreting of Piles (i) Boring shall be carried down to such soil strata determined from results of ground boring and soil tests carried out previously as agreed by the SO Rep. The sides of all boring shall be kept intact and no loose material shall be permitted to fall to the bottom of the bored holes. The Contractor's equipment shall be capable of sinking a steel casing to support and keep the side of the borehole intact when directed by the SO Rep. In the case where soil conditions are sufficiently stiff or hard or dense and steel casings are not necessary, temporary casings of at least 5 metres long shall be placed in the bored holes before the inspection of bored holes by the SO Rep. These temporary casings must be at least 1 metre above ground to prevent fall of loose materials or persons into the bored holes. All bored holes waiting for concreting shall be set up with the temporary casing at all times. All bored holes shall be inspected by the SO Rep on site prior to concrete placing. All loose material likely to affect the strength of the pile shall be removed forthwith by the Contractor to the satisfaction of the SO Rep. The Contractor must provide all facilities to enable the SO Rep to carry out his inspection safely. Holes reamed out at the base shall likewise be clean and firm before placing of concrete.
(ii)
(iii)
(iv)
(v) (vi)
2.3.14
Boring and Concreting of Piles (Contd) (vii) If ground water is found in the borehole and it affects the excavation and removal of soil from the borehole, or if it causes the collapse of the sides of the borehole, or if the side collapses irrespective of the presence of water, then steel casing of appropriate size and length shall be installed in the bored hole. In addition, approved chemical or bentonite solution of sufficient strength to maintain the sides of borehole shall be utilised by the Contractor if needed. The steel casing must be sunk as deep as the borehole or the approved chemical or bentonite solution must be maintained at a level within the borehole at least 150mm higher than the surrounding ground level during the whole of the boring operation. All concrete placed in boreholes shall be lowered by hoppers with exceptional care so as to prevent segregation. Tremie pipes extending to the full depth of the pile shall be used for concreting under water. The top of the pile shall be brought up at least 500mm above the cut-off level of the pile to permit all laitance and weak concrete to be removed and to ensure that it can be properly keyed into the pile cap. Any defective concrete in the head of the completed pile should be cut away and made good with new concrete well bonded into the old concrete. All boreholes shall be protected from the possibility of ground surface water entering the hole from the time the boring is completed and ready to be concreted until the pile is complete. No concreting shall commence until the hole has been inspected and the above precautions made. Reinforcement cages shall be supported centrally and firmly within the hole so that no movement will occur during the concreting operation.
(viii)
(ix)
(x)
(xi)
(xii)
2.3.15
Record of Each Pile A record of every pile shall be kept by the Contractor and a copy shall be submitted to the SO Rep on site. This record shall include the following information : (a) (b) (c) (d) (e) (f) (g) (h) (i) (j) (k) (l) (m) (n) (o) Diameter of pile Ground level Cut-off level Length of pile as measured from ground level and cut-off level Length of reinforcement cage Water table below ground level Length of casing Strata of ground penetrated and where boring stops Result of tests on soils Concrete cubes test results Time for completion of boring and concreting works Grade of concrete used Volume of concrete used and slump Dry or tremie concreting Other information as required by SO Rep.
The form of this record must be approved by the SO Rep before piling commences.
2.3.16
Installation of UPVC Pipe And Wire For Pile Penetration Checking The Contractor shall install in all bored piles an approximately 16mm Nominal Internal Diameter hollow UPVC pipe of approved quality with a prelaid 3mm diameter wire inside the UPVC pipe within each castin-situ pile. The Contractor shall be paid separately for the installation of these UPVC pipes with wires (based on the pile penetration lengths) as a variation to the Contract Sum. The UPVC pipe with prelaid wire shall be placed from the base of the bored hole to the ground level for checking the length of each completed bored pile immediately after concreting. Upon completion of concreting of the pile, the UPVC pipe shall then be cut about 0.5m below ground level and capped.
2.3.16
Installation of UPVC Pipe And Wire For Pile Penetration Checking (Contd) The UPVC pipe shall include joints and stoppers at the top and bottom ends of the pipe and the 3mm diameter wire shall be prelaid inside it from bottom of the pile to 0.5m above the cut off level prior to capping of the UPVC pipe. The prelaid wire, UPVC pipe thickness, glue length for joints, strength of pipe material and other qualities must be approved by the SO Rep before the commencement of work. Notwithstanding this, the pipe thickness and joint length between pipes shall be not less than 3mm and 150mm respectively. The pipes shall be installed vertically and concrete counterweights shall be used at the base of the UPVC pipe to ensure the verticality of the pipe. The Contractor shall ensure that the pipe is vertical and free from any obstruction which may prevent measurement of its length at a later date. The prelaid wire shall not be removed from the UPVC pipe and the contractor shall facilitate in the measurement of the pile length after the hacking of the bored pile to cut off level. In the event that substantial ground water is present in the borehole and the pile has to be formed by tremie concreting underwater or any other approved fluid, the Contractor shall not be required to install the UPVC pipe with wire. The Contractor shall note that the Employer attaches great importance on the condition of the UPVC pipes and prelaid wires. Where UPVC pipes are found choked or damaged or missing or without the prelaid wires during construction, the Contractor shall not be paid for the installation of these UPVC pipes with wires. In addition, during the conduct of pile penetration checking of selected piles for a block, a UPVC pipe is considered choked if the prelaid wire is unable to be extracted from the UPVC pipe for pile penetration checking. The percentage of chokage of the UPVC pipes based on these selected piles shall be calculated for this block. This percentage shall be deemed as representative of the percentage of chokage of UPVC pipes installed in piles in the entire block. For the payment of UPVC pipes with wires installed for this block, the Contractor shall be paid only for the total length of UPVC pipes with wires installed in the block (excluding UPVC pipes that are found choked or damaged or without the prelaid wires during construction) less the percentage of chokage of UPVC pipes for this block. In addition, an administrative charge may be imposed on the Contractor for the chokage of UPVC pipes.
2.3.17
Piles in Same Group or in Close Proximity The Contractor must submit proposed sequence of installation of piles in a group or in close proximity to the SO Rep for approval. The SO Rep reserves the right to order changes to the approved sequence of piling if he considers it necessary to do so. Generally, no two piles in the same group or in close proximity may be allowed to be bored and/or concreted on the same day, unless with the written approval of the SO Rep.
2.3.18
Earth from the Bore Hole The disposal of all earth from the boreholes shall be included in the Contract Sum.
2.3.19
Pile Integrity Test (PIT) for Bored Pile Where bored piles are included in the Works, the Contractor shall engage an independent specialist testing firm to conduct Pile Integrity Tests on the bored piles. The Sonic Echo method shall be adopted. The total number of tests to be conducted shall be 2 Nos or 2 % of the total number of piles in each building block, whichever is greater. The testing equipment shall be capable of carrying out exponential amplification of the signal with time, if necessary, so that weak reflections from locations at or near the pile toe can be clearly displayed.
2.3.19
Pile Integrity Test (PIT) for Bored Pile (Contd) The Contractor shall provide proper access for the specialists testing firm to carrying out the test. The pile shall not be tested until at least 4 days after installation. During preparation, loose concrete, mud or debris, etc shall be removed from the pile head. The pile head shall be trimmed to expose sound concrete and to have flat top surface. The pile shall be tested by means of light blows from the small impact hammer. The Contractor shall ensure that the test is conducted by qualified personnel i.e. an engineer and a technician. Upon completion of the Pile Integrity Test, the Contractor shall furnish a preliminary report indicating the estimated pile penetration on the same day of the Pile Integrity Test to the SO Rep. Two sets of the final report, to be signed by a qualified testing specialist, shall be submitted within 5 days to the SO Rep. The final report, in printed form, shall include the following: (a) (b) (c) (d) (e) (f) (g) Contract name and number Block number Pile reference number Pile diameter Date of pile installation and date of testing Graphical representation of the estimated pile shaft profile Qualitative analysis of the pile integrity which cover concrete quality, location and severity of the defect such as discontinuity or change in cross section of the pile, etc.
2.4 2.4.1
MICRO PILE SYSTEM Hydraulic Drilling Rig and Accessories The Contractor shall use only electrically powered hydraulic drilling rigs to minimise noise generated during drilling operation. The slurry circulation tanks shall be used to remove all spoil cement slurry and water from the pile pits. Generator sets for the supply of electricity shall have adequate housing and exhaust silencer to minimise noise and shall be subject to the approval of the SO Rep prior to use on site.
2.4.2
Installation of Micro Piles The installation of micro piles shall include inter-alia the following requirements : (a) The quality of materials such as 40 HT Grade 460 steel bar, cement grout, grout additive, splice material, etc must be approved by the SO Rep. Equipment tools, and other accessories must be in good working condition. All site safety precautions must be observed and safety measures provided and maintained throughout the installation work. Grout shall be mixed from ordinary Portland cement complying to current British or Singapore Standards and clean water supplied from the public mains. Whenever necessary, "Intrusion Aid" grout additive shall be added to the manufacturer's recommendation to improve workability and reduce shrinkage. The grouting shall be executed within such time as may be directed or approved by the SO Rep. The strength of grout shall not be less than Grade 30. (d) The installation date of every micro pile and the test results for any one piling site shall be captured and recorded and a comprehensive report, to be verified and certified by Contractor's Professional Engineer involved in the micro pile installation, shall be submitted to the SO Rep within two weeks after the completion of the work at each piling site. Any other conditions that may be imposed by the SO Rep to ensure the safety and soundness of each micro pile.
(b)
(c)
(e)
2.4.3
Nominal Working Load of Micro Pile For micro piles, the pile diameters to be adopted shall be from 150mm to 300mm in increment of 25mm. The nominal working loads of the various sizes of micro piles shall be as shown in the Drawings
2.4.4
Boring of Micro Piles For soft and collapsible soils, the borehole shall be temporarily cased or stabilised with bentonite slurry. Upon reaching rock or firm soil strata drilling may be continued without casing. Drilling in rock shall be executed with a down-the-hole hammer. Boring in soil can be done by wet or dry rotary drilling depending on the soil type and site environment. Upon completion of the drilling, the borehole shall be cleaned by flushing out any loose chipping/soil particles from the inside of the casing.
2.4.5
Main Steel Component of Micro Piles Axial steel component of the micro pile shall be in accordance with the drawings. The main steel bars shall be joined by splicing. Splicing shall be of mechanical splicing. Top anchorage of the micropile shall consist of extension of the axial steel component of the pile through a steel bearing plate. The circumference of the steel bars through the steel plate shall be securely welded. The contractor shall propose his method of reinforcement splicing or coupling to SO Rep for approval. Upon approval of the method, the contractor shall proceed to fabricate samples of splicing or coupling and send them to an approved laboratory for testing on its tensile strength. The splicing or coupling shall be strong enough such that its tensile strength is higher than the reinforcement. Three samples shall be tested and the results of the tests are to be accepted before installation of working piles. The costs of fabrication of the test samples and testing are to be borne by the contractor.
2.4.6
Grout Mix The proportion of grout and the minimum strength of work cubes shall comply with the following requirement : Range of Water/Cement Ratio 0.40 to 0.45 Resistance to Crushing (Cube Strength) 7 days 24 N/mm
2
28 days 33 N/mm
2
The quantities of cement in the mix shall be measured by weight. Grout shall be mixed on site and shall be pumped into its final position not later than half an hour after mixing. Grout shall be free from segregation, slumping and bleeding.
2.4.7
Grouting Grouting shall be placed using tremie method where grout mix is pumped into the bored hole by grouting pump under low pressure and delivered using PVC hose or galvanised iron pipe in one continuous operation until "good grout" appears at the top of borehole.
2.4.8
Grout Test Where micro piles are included in the Works, 4 test cubes shall be taken from the grout mix of every 3 m3 or a portion thereof for testing purpose for each day when there is grouting works, unless further tests are required due to failure in complying with the specified strength. The 2 test cubes shall be tested at 7 days and the remaining 2 cubes shall be tested at 28 days. at the HDB Prefabricated Technology Centre. An administrative charge in accordance with clause 1.10 "Nuisance and Irregularities" shall be imposed on every cube which fails to attain the minimum specified strength. In addition, the SO Rep reserves the right to reject the pile and the Contractor shall install compensating piles when ordered by the SO Rep all at the contractors cost and expense.
2.4.9
Fabrication of Steel Bar Spiral reinforcement (R6) is fixed around the bars to prevent bursting of grout under load. Lantern centralisers are fixed to the bars at 3m interval to ensure sufficient grout cover to the steel bars. Steel spacers are placed at 3m interval to ensure the bars are vertically placed.
2.4.10
Pile Integrity Test (PIT) for Micro Pile Where micro piles are included in the Works, the Contractor shall engage an independent specialist testing firm to conduct Pile Integrity Tests on the piles. The Sonic Echo method shall be adopted. The total number of tests to be conducted shall be 2 Nos or 2 % of the total number of piles in each building block, whichever is greater. The testing equipment shall be capable of carrying out exponential amplification of the signal with time, if necessary, so that weak reflections from locations at or near the pile toe can be clearly displayed. The Contractor shall provide proper access for the specialists testing firm to carrying out the test. The pile shall not be tested until at least 4 days after installation. During preparation, loose concrete, mud or debris, etc shall be removed from the pile head. The pile head shall be trimmed to expose sound concrete and to have flat top surface. The pile shall be tested by means of light blows from the small impact hammer. The Contractor shall ensure that the test is conducted by qualified personnel i.e. an engineer and a technician. Upon completion of the Pile Integrity Test, the Contractor shall furnish a preliminary report indicating the estimated pile penetration on the same day of the Pile Integrity Test to the SO Rep. Two sets of the final report, to be signed by a qualified testing specialist, shall be submitted within 5 days to the SO Rep. The final report, in printed form, shall include the following: (a) Contract name and number (b) Block number (c) Pile reference number (d) Pile diameter (e) Date of pile installation and date of testing (f) Graphical representation of the estimated pile shaft profile (g) Qualitative analysis of the pile integrity which cover concrete quality, location and severity of the defect such as discontinuity or change in cross section of the pile, etc.
2.5
JACK-IN PILING SYSTEM
2.5.1
System of Piling The jack-in piling system consists essentially of H-section steel piles, hollow steel pipe piles or Reinforced Concrete piles forced into the ground using a non-impact jacking system. The pile sections used shall comply with the relevant Singapore Standards, where these exist, or the equivalent British Standards. The Contractor shall ensure that when concrete piles are used, they would not be damaged during handling and transportation.
2.5.2
Nominal Working Load The nominal working load shall be as specified in the Drawings.
2.5.3
Resistance and Penetration of Piles The resistance of all piles shall be a minimum of 2.5 times the nominal working load of the pile. The Contractor shall install all working piles to such a depth that the required resistance is obtained. The minimum depth of pile shall not be less than 7.0 metres below the cut-off level of the pile or as may be agreed by the SO Rep.
2.5.4
Installation During pile installation, the hydraulic pressure of jack corresponding to depth of pile penetration shall be recorded at every 0.5 meter depth intervals. Except for pile jointing, each pile shall be jacked in continuously until the required penetration or required resistance as shown on the pressure gauge of the jack is achieved. A maximum jacking pressure of 2.5 times the nominal working load shall be maintained for at least 2 minutes. The final set recorded shall not exceed 10mm. In areas of special ground conditions, the SO Rep may require the jacking force to be increased to 3 times the nominal working load of piles.
2.5.5
Quality of Welded Joints and Welders Where welding of pile sections are required the quality of welded joints and welders is as provided in Clause 2.2.5 "Quality of Welded Joints and Welders" of this Specification.
2.6
REINFORCED CONCRETE PILES
2.6.1
Scope of Work Where applicable, the scope of work shall include the manufacturing, delivery, storage, driving, completion and maintenance of precast concrete piling work for foundations of buildings or other structures. The Contractor shall provide all materials, labour, Construction Equipment, tools and everything necessary for the execution of the Works in so far as these are specified in or can be reasonably inferred from the Contract.
2.6.2
Piling System and Nominal Working Load The piling system manufactured shall include piles with nominal working load as shown in the drawings. The nominal working loads shall be such that the manufactured pile and the ground in which the pile is driven is : (a) capable of sustaining a load of not less than 3 times the working load before ultimate failure and as may be determined by calculation; capable of sustaining a load of 2 times the working load without exceeding the limits of settlement as specified in Clause 2.6.39 "Load-Settlement Curve"; and the maximum permissible stress in the pile under working load condition shall not exceed 0.25 times the characteristics cube strength of the concrete.
(b)
(c)
2.6.3
Size of Piles The piles required for the Contract shall generally be of the following sizes : Type Ap Bp Cp Dp Ep Fp Cross Sectional Size 150mm x 150mm 175mm x 175mm 200mm x 200mm 230mm x 230mm 260mm x 260mm 300mm x 300mm
The Employer reserves the right to use any particular size of pile in various compositions. The Contractor is deemed to have allowed for this in the Contract Sum.
2.6.4
Pile Manufacturing Piles shall be manufactured strictly in accordance with approved piling plan and shall be cast in the casting yard of the Contractor. The casting yard for all concrete piles should be so arranged that they can be shifted from their beds and transported to sites with a minimum of handling. PVC tube, external diameter 25mm x 2.5mm thick with the length as shown in the drawing shall be provided and cast together with the reinforcement bars. The method and material used for securing the pvc tube, reinforcement bars and links in position during casting shall be proposed by the contractor and submitted to the Engineer for approval. It is the sole responsibility of contractor to ensure the PVC tube is firmly secured and straight before and after casting. Mild steel hollow inset (25mm external diameter x 2.5mm thick x 90mm length), backer rod stopper (50mm external diameter x length 100mm) and measuring rod shall be provided by the Contractor. Samples of these material shall be submitted to the SO Rep for approval prior to the commencement of piling work. The piles should be cast in a continuous operation. The piles shall not be cast in tiers on top of each other. The casting beds shall be sited on firm and well-prepared ground in order to prevent bending of piles during the after casting.
2.6.4
Pile Manufacturing (Cont'd) The Contractor shall adhere to the following minimum periods and cube strengths for the pile manufacturing : Operation Lifting from Casting Bed Curing by water spraying Minimum Period 24 hours 7 days Minimum Cube Strength 12 N/mm 2
The Contractor shall appoint a competent foreman to supervise the production of reinforced concrete piles throughout the term of contract. The Contractor shall submit to the SO Rep a monthly chart of pile production.
2.6.5
Pile Transporting Care should be taken at all stages of transporting, lifting and handling to ensure that the piles are not damaged or cracked. All cracked piles shall be rejected on site. If piles are put down temporarily after being lifted, they should be placed on trestles or blocks located at the lifting points.
2.6.6
Pile Stacking and Storing Piles shall be stored on firm ground not liable to unequal settlement under the weight of the stack of piles. The piles shall be placed on firm supports which are truly level and spaced so as to avoid undue bending in the piles. The supports should be vertically above one another. Spaces shall be left round the piles to enable them to be lifted without difficulty. The order of stacking shall be such that the older piles can be withdrawn for driving without disturbing newer piles. Separate stacks should be provided for different lengths of piles. Piles shall be watered if necessary, to met weather conditions or to provide further curing during storage. In hot weather the piles shall be shaded from direct sunshine. The first pile section without hole on the end plate, shall be painted in red near to the end plate on all four sides, the method to be approved by the SO Rep.
2.6.7
Tolerances in Pile Dimensions The cross-sectional dimensions of the pile shall be within the tolerances of +5mm. Any face of a pile shall not deviate by more than 6mm from a straight edge 3m long laid on the face, and the centroid of any cross-section of the pile shall not deviate by more than 12mm from the straight line connecting the centroids of the end faces of the pile. Piles which have exceeded the above tolerances will be rejected and the Contractor shall remove them from site upon the SO Rep's instruction.
2.6.8
Pay Length of Driven Piles The pay length of driven piles is the actual length measured from the bottom tip to the cut-off level of the driven piles. The penetration and pay length of every pile shall be recorded by the SO Rep and the Contractor. The concrete pile shall be marked with red paint at every 1m to enable easy determination of pile penetration, the method of marking to be approved by the SO Rep.
2.6.9 2.6.9.1
Materials for Concrete Cement Unless otherwise specified or instructed by the SO Rep, the cement shall be of an approved brand and manufacture and comply with the following standards : Type Ordinary Portland Cement Rapid Hardening Portland Cement Relevant Standard SS 26 SS 26
High alumina cement shall not be used for any concrete work. The Contractor shall, at the request of the SO Rep, produce a certificate showing the date and place of manufacture of the cement. As and when directed by the SO Rep, samples of cement shall be provided for testing. Any cement failing to comply with the requirements of the relevant standard shall be rejected. The cement shall be fresh and delivered in unbroken bags of the manufacturer or in properly designed bulk containers. All cement delivered in bags shall be stored in a weatherproof dry shed with raised boarded floor of at least 300mm above natural ground level. Cement delivered in bulk tankers shall be stored in properly designed bulk storage tanks. Cements of different manufacture and types shall be kept separate at all times and shall not be used in the same mix. Concrete of different brands of cement shall not be mixed during casting. Consignments of cement shall be used in the order of delivery and any caked or lumpy cement shall not be used. All cement unfit for use shall be removed from site immediately. 2.6.9.2 Sulphate Resisting Cement If directed by the SO Rep in writing, sulphate resisting cement for precast concrete piles will be used instead of ordinary portland cement. Sulphate resisting cement is to be in accordance with BS 4027. 2.6.9.3 Aggregates Fine aggregates shall be natural sand or crushed gravel sand or crushed stone sand complying with SS 31. Coarse aggregates shall be crushed or uncrushed gravel, crushed or uncrushed stone complying with SS 31. Coarse aggregates shall not exceed 20mm for reinforced concrete, unless otherwise specified. All-in aggregates as specified in SS 31 shall not be used. Aggregates delivered to site shall be stored on clean surfaces in separate stockpiles or bunkers to prevent intermingling of different materials and contamination. The SO Rep reserves the right to draw samples of aggregates from any stockpile at any time and have them tested for compliance with SS 31. Aggregates failing to comply with SS 31 shall be rejected. The Contractor shall be required to inform the SO Rep in writing of any change in the source of supply of these aggregates. 2.6.9.4 Water Potable water supplied by the Power Supply Limited shall be used for mixing concrete, mortar and grout, for washing out formwork and for curing of concrete.
2.6.9 2.6.9.5
Materials for Concrete (Cont'd) Steel Reinforcement Steel used for reinforced concrete shall have tensile strength and other properties equal to or better than the requirements of the relevant Standards. Plain mild steel and high yield deformed reinforcement bars shall comply with SS2 or BS 4449. Reinforcement shall be free from pitting, loose rust, mill scale, paint, oil, grease, adhering earth or any other material that may impair the bond between the concrete and the reinforcement or that may cause corrosion of the reinforcement or disintegration of the concrete. The Contractor shall provide the SO Rep with every facility to cut samples of steel bars for testing at HDB's testing centres or a testing authority approved by the Employer. The steel reinforcement bars should comply with the following tensile properties : Specified Characteristic 2 Strength (N/mm ) Plain Mild Steel Deformed High Yield Steel 250 460 Minimum Elongation (%) 22 12
The tensile strength of any bar shall be at least 15% greater than the actual yield stress measured in the tensile test. Test samples of standard 600mm lengths shall be selected from each batch of steel bars at a frequency not less than that specified below except that, if a batch comprises bars from more than one cast, at least one test sample shall be selected to represent each cast. Nominal Size < 10mm > 10mm <16mm > 16mm Quantity 1 sample from each 25 tonnes or part thereof 1 sample from each 35 tonnes or part thereof 1 sample from each 45 tonnes or part thereof
One sample shall consist of two (2) 600mm long bars. Should any sample fail the test, two (2) additional test samples shall be taken from the sample batch and subjected to same tests. Should either of them fail, that batch of steel reinforcement bars shall be rejected. Should both of them pass the tests, that batch of steel reinforcement bars will be accepted. 2.6.9.6 Admixtures When admixture is proposed to be used in concrete mix, the Contractor shall be required to furnish information concerning the admixture, admixture acceptance tests and additional information as stipulated in BS 5075 for approval by the SO Rep prior to the use of admixture. Admixture used shall comply with BS 5075 or relevant Singapore Standard. Requests for permission to use other types of admixtures not covered by these standards may only be considered when accompanied by full supporting information. Admixture containing calcium chloride shall not be used. The Contractor shall provide the SO Rep with every facility for inspection and sampling of the admixture(s) at least once every three-month of active concreting period. The sample(s) shall be kept for reference and shall be sent, if requested by the SO Rep for Admixture uniformity tests in accordance with BS 5075 or the relevant Singapore Standard.
2.6.10
Fabrication of Reinforcement All reinforcement shall be accurately cut and bent to the dimensions and shapes shown in the Drawings. Bends shall be cold-formed by machine or by other approved means which produce a gradual and even bending action. Reinforcement incorrectly bent shall not be used unless the method for straightening and rebending will not cause any cracking, and approval for rebending is given by the SO Rep. Reinforcement shall be securely tied with steel wire. The projecting ends of the steel wire shall be directed away from the formwork so as not to encroach into the concrete cover. Reinforcement shall be adequately supported by approved spacers and chairs to maintain the specified concrete cover. Concrete or mortar spacer blocks shall not be bigger than 50mm x 50mm x the specified concrete cover, shall be provided with typing wire, and shall not be lower in compressive strength and durability characteristics than the surrounding concrete. Sleeve jointing for reinforcement may be used provided that the strength and deformation characteristics have been determined by tests carried out by a competent testing authority and approved by the SO Rep. Fabrication and placing of reinforcement in each part of the Works shall be approved by the SO Rep before any concrete can be placed thereon. Reinforcement shall not be displaced during concreting. Reinforcement projecting from works being concreted or already concreted shall not be bent without approval by the SO Rep and shall be protected from accidental deformation and damage.
2.6.11
Form Releasing Agent The Contractor shall use, for each casting of concrete, form releasing agent acceptable to the SO Rep and shall bear the cost.
2.6.12 2.6.12.1
Concrete Mixes Designed Mix For designed mixes the Contractor shall submit a mix design report covering all concrete mixes to the SO Rep for approval. The designed mix shall comply with the following requirements : Concrete Grade Minimum cement content (kg/m ) Maximum cement content (kg/m ) Maximum fine aggregate total aggregate (%)
3 3
40 420 550 50 0.45

2
Maximum water/cement ratio
In the designing of mixes, a current margin shall be 15 N/mm . If a current margin other than that recommended is to be used, sufficient valid data shall be made available to the SO Rep for his consideration and approval, mix adjustment is allowed only when sufficient results are available, however, such mix shall remain compliance with the specifications. In all cases, it is the responsibility of the Contractor to ensure that the designed mix shall be durable, workable and comply with the strength grade requirement as specified in the drawings.
2.6.12 2.6.12.2
Concrete Mixes (Cont'd) Trial Mixes The designed mix with a designed maximum consistency as measured by slump or flow shall be verified by preparation of trial mixes witnessed by the SO Rep. The mix shall be judged for suitable workability as well as strength. A minimum of 18 cubes from three batches shall be taken. The mix may be considered suitable if both. (a) The designed maximum consistency is achieved in accordance with SS78 or BS1881 : Part 105 if a flow test is specified. The average strength of the nine cubes tested at 28 days shall exceed the specified characteristic 2 strength by the current margin minus 3.5 N/mm , or if the nine cubes at an earlier age indicate that it is likely to be exceeded by this amount.
(b)
Trial mixes may not be required if approved by the SO Rep when the concrete is supplied by prequalified ready-mix concrete suppliers approved by the SO Rep. 2.6.12.3 Mix Adjustment Once the designed mix is approved by the SO Rep the Contractor is not allowed to change the mix without prior approval of the SO Rep. An increase or reduction of cement content by 20 kg/m and above, or % fine aggregate by 5% and above, or any changes in the type or dosage of admixture, or consistency is considered a change in mix design. This does not constitute a tolerance allowance on the mix design used in relation to the specified requirements. An administrative charge shall be imposed if the Contractor is found to be using a mix design inferior to the approved mix.
3
2.6.13
Batching Cement shall be measured by weight or batched in whole bags if so packed and delivered. Fine and coarse aggregates shall be measured by volume and due allowance shall be made for the amount of water present in the mass of fine aggregate by deducting this amount from the volume of water to be added during the mixing of concrete. Solid admixtures may be measured by weight or volume. The accuracy of the measuring equipment shall be within +3% of the quantity of cement, water or total aggregate being measured, and within +5% of the quantity of admixture added. Before commencement of work and subsequently whenever so directed by the SO Rep, the measuring equipment shall be calibrated with known weights and volume measures.
2.6.14
Mixing Concrete Concrete shall be mixed in a batch type mechanical mixer. The quantity of constituent material in each batch shall not exceed the rated capacity of the mixer. The constituent material shall be thoroughly and continually mixed at the mixing speed specified by the mixer manufacturer until the resulting concrete is uniform in colour and consistency. The mixing time shall be as follows : (i) (ii) Pan mixer Truck mixer or drum mixer minimum 30 seconds minimum minutes for 1m of concrete plus minute for 3 each additional 1m .
3
The mixing time shall be reckoned from the time when all the solid materials are in the mixer. No portion of the time required for discharging shall be considered as part of the mixing time.
Ugdg Spec TS 2-27/35 2.6.14 Mixing Concrete (Cont'd) The first batch of concrete fed into the mixer shall have an increase of an appropriate amount of dry mortar similar in proportion to that of the concrete to be mixed and of mixing water for coating the mixer. The mixer shall be emptied completely before being refilled. Mixers which have been out of use for more than 30 minutes should be thoroughly cleaned before any fresh concrete is mixed. The mixer shall be free from hardened concrete and worn-off blades or paddles shall be replaced. 2.6.15 Ready-Mixed Concrete The Contractor shall seek the written approval of the SO's Rep for the use of ready-mixed concrete. Such approval to use ready-mixed concrete shall be subject to the terms and conditions set by the Employer and all Delivery Orders for the ready-mixed concrete delivered to the Site shall be endorsed by the Employer's Clerk-of-Works and submitted to the SO Rep. Where ready-mix concrete is used, it shall comply with SS 289 and the mix design and admixture used shall be approved by the Superintending Officer's Representative. The cement content shall comply with Clause 2.6.12 "Concrete Mixes". No water in excess of the quantity required in the approved mix shall be allowed to be added to the concrete to increase its workability affected by elapsed time and/or temperature. While it is not being discharged, the concrete shall be kept continuously agitated. The concrete shall be placed in its final position and left undisturbed within two hours from the time when the cement was added to the mix. 2.6.16 Workability and Consistency The workability shall be such as to produce a concrete which can be well compacted, be worked into the corners of the shuttering and around the reinforcements, give the specified surface finish and attain the specified strength. The mix design shall ensure that this workability is obtainable. On each concreting day, workability shall be assessed on site at the discharge point of the mixer by means of the slump test in accordance with SS 78. If the measured slump deviates from the agreed value by more than +25mm or one third of the required value whichever is greater, the concrete shall be rejected. As an alternative, flow test to BS1881: Part 105 or other means of assessing workability may be considered subject to approval by the SO Rep. No water shall be added to the concrete subsequent to the completion of the mixing. 2.6.17 Placing of Concrete All concrete shall be transported from the mixer to the place of final deposit as speedily as possible before it has commenced to set, and in no case shall this exceed 20 minutes after mixing. Where retarders are used such interval may be extended subject to the approval of the SO Rep. The method of transit shall be such that it will prevent the segregation, loss or contamination of the ingredients. In the use of concrete pumps, the Contractor shall ensure that the following is complied with : (i) (ii) Pipes shall not be secured to formwork or reinforcement which maybe displaced by the pulsating movement of the pipe. Pumping shall commence first with blowing of water through the pipeline, followed by cement mortar, both of sufficient quantities and all these shall be discharged away from the area to be concrete. When extra sections of pipe are to be added, each length of pipe must be thoroughly wetted inside but no free water shall remain in the pipe. Where the pipeline is exposed to the sun, the line shall be protected against absorption of heat by covering with damp sacking or other approved materials during pumping.
(iii) (iv)
Ugdg Spec TS 2-28/35 2.6.17 Placing of Concrete (Cont'd) Before proceeding to place the concrete, the formwork shall be re-aligned if necessary and water and rubbish therein shall be removed. Immediately prior to placing the concrete, the formwork shall be well wetted and inspection openings shall be closed. Concrete shall be placed in the formwork by shovels or other approved implements and shall not be dropped from a height nor handled in a manner which will cause segregation. Accumulations of set concrete on the reinforcement shall be avoided. Concrete shall be placed directly in the permanent position and shall not be worked along the formwork to that position. No concrete shall be placed during wet weather, unless the entire area of pour is covered, or other measures are taken to protect the wet concrete, to the satisfaction of the SO Rep and subject to his approval. All concrete shall be placed in daylight, unless an adequate system of lighting is provided and approval for night work is given by the SO Rep and all relevant authorities prior to commencement of the concreting.
2.6.18
Compaction of Concrete All concrete shall be compacted to produce a dense homogeneous mass. It shall be compacted using approved immersion type mechanical vibrators. Sufficient numbers of vibrators in serviceable condition shall be used on site to compact the concrete at the rate at which it is placed, and a minimum of two standby vibrators shall be readily available for emergency use in case of breakdowns. The concrete shall be thoroughly worked into all parts of the formwork and between and around the steel reinforcement. It shall be compacted to give a dense and compact concrete, free from voids of any kind. Steel reinforcement shall be prevented from being displaced or deformed during concreting.
2.6.19
Curing and Protection of Concrete After being placed in position, all fresh concrete shall be protected from rain, sun and drying wind, and shall not be subjected to any vibrational disturbance other than that arising from compacting. Exposed surfaces of concrete are to be kept moist and covered for a minimum of 3 days after placing, with a material such as polytene sheet or a curing compound or an absorbent material kept constantly damp by frequent watering. The method of curing and the covering material used shall be approved by the SO Rep. Concrete damaged through improper or insufficient curing and protection shall be made good at the Contractor's expense.
2.6.20
Quality of Concrete Works Where reinforced concrete piles are included in the Works, the compressive strength of concrete shall be determined by crushing tests of 150mm cubes. The quality and consistency of the concrete shall be tested as directed by the SO Rep in accordance with SS78. The Contractor shall provide for slump test or flow test, compressive strength test, core test and any other concrete tests as and when required by the SO Rep. On each concreting day, for both precast and cast-in-situ concrete, for every 40 cubic metres or part thereof, of each grade of concrete per concrete mixer, at least one sample shall be taken from a batch chosen by the SO Rep. A sample is a quantity of concrete, consisting of a number of standard scoopfuls, taken from a batch of concrete whose properties are to be determined. Two cubes are cast per sample per age of testing unless specified otherwise. The sample shall be taken at the point of discharge from the mixer or agitating truck of a wet batching plant, or, in the case of a dry batching plant, at the point of discharge from the mixer truck. At least 6 cubes shall be cast from each sample. Two cubes shall be tested at an early age of 1 day, another two cubes at 7 days and the remaining two cubes shall be tested at 28 days. All cubes other than the 1 day age shall be tested at the HDB Prefabrication Technology Centre.
2.6.20
Quality of Concrete Works (Cont'd) The Contractor shall provide lockable humid boxes of adequate size to store all test cubes for the specified period. The humid boxes shall be placed in a covered area and maintained at a relative humidity of above 95%. The keys to such curing facility shall be exclusively held in custody by a person designated by the SO Rep. The test cubes shall be collected by the SO Rep from site for testing at the HDB Prefabrication Technology Centre at a regular interval .The SO Rep shall remove crushed cubes from the HDB Prefabrication Technology Centre. In addition to the minimum number of samples stated above, the SO Rep may, at his absolute discretion, instruct the Contractor to take extra sample from whichever batch as he may choose. The Contractor shall provide facilities to enable the identification of test cubes by radio frequency or similar means. The Contractor shall provide at least one web-based radio frequency identification (RFID) reader capable of reading the RFID tags on the concrete cube from a minimum distance of at least 40 mm. The Contractor shall include the appropriate interfacing software to a web-based controller. The Contractor shall logon to a website of the Employer to register the concrete cube data and tag IDs using the RFID reader. The registration of cube data and tag IDs shall be done within the same casting day. The appropriate RFID tags shall be placed at the corner of the cubes while the cubes are still fresh. The top surface of the RFID tag shall be level with the concrete cube surface. The Contractor shall protect the RFID tags on the concrete cube while demoulding. For damage or loss of RFID tag, the Contractor shall be charged the replacement cost based on the Employer's purchase price The Employer shall deduct the charges payable by the Contractor from any monies due or becoming due to the Contractor or recover the same from the Contractor as a debt due by the Contractor to the Employer
2.6.21
Compliance of Strength Requirement The 1 day strength and 7 day strength are obtained for quality control purpose. A minimum use strength 2 of 12 N/mm for 1 day is required to meet the design strength for lifting of piles. Compliance with the specified characteristic strength shall be judged by tests made on cubes at the age of 7 and 28 days. Compliance may be assumed if both the following are satisfied : (a) The average strength of the sample and the preceding three samples is greater than or equal to 2 the specified characteristic strength plus half a fixed current margin of 6 N/mm . Thus, the minimum average strength shall be : Grade Minimum Average 2 Strength (N/mm ) (b) 7 days 28 days 40 32.0 43.0
The sample strength is at least the level specified below : Grade Minimum Individual Sample Strength (N/mm2) 7 days 28 days 40 27.0 37.0
If a current margin lower than the fixed current margin can be consistently achieved, approval may be sought to lower the strength level specified in (a) above. If the sample strength results do not comply with either or both of the above conditions, administrative charges shall be imposed against the Contractor. All test cubes taken must be properly stored and the Contractor shall ensure that all test cubes are tested at their respective age. Administrative charges shall be imposed against the Contractor for test cubes that are lost. In addition on the payment of administrative charges, the affected concrete work may be stopped for a period to be decided by the SO Rep. No extension to the Time for Completion period shall be allowed for such stoppage of the Work.
2.6.22
Failure of Cube Strength In the event of non-compliance, the quality of concrete in question shall be interpreted in accordance with BS 5328. For 1 day non-compliance, lifting of affected piles from casting beds can not be carried out until at least 3 days have lapsed from the time of last placing of concrete on the affected piles. For 7 days non-compliance, no delivering of affected piles out from casting yard and driving can be carried out on these piles until the 28 days strength becomes available. For 28 days non-compliance, core samples shall be taken and tested on the affected piles to estimate the quality of the sub-standard concrete. The tests shall be carried out in accordance with BS 1881 (Part 120) and assessed in accordance with BS 6089. The results of any such tests shall not nullify the establishment of non-compliance. Notwithstanding the outcome of such tests, the Contractor shall bear all the cost incurred by such tests. Should the core tests fail, additional or compensating piles shall be driven for the affected piles groups at the Contractor's own cost. All sub-standard piles not driven into the ground will then be rejected.
2.6.23
Apparatus The Contractor shall provide the following apparatus for use on the casting yard at all times : (a) Concrete slump test apparatus complying with SS78 or flow test apparatus complying with BS1881:Part 105. One set of the apparatus shall be provided for each concreting location. Steel or cast iron moulds complete with rod in accordance with SS78 for casting 150mm concrete test cubes and 100mm mortar or grout test cubes. A minimum number shall be provided such that no stripping of cube is required prior to 24 hours setting and hardening period. Three measuring cylinders of 250 ml capacity, graduated to measure to the nearest 2.0 ml, for determination of silt content (field settling method). An approved apparatus for measuring moisture content in fine aggregate. One concrete rebound hammer. One electronic calculator with statistical functions.
(b)
(c)
(d) (e) (f)
2.6.24
Pile Hammer & Construction Equipment Impact hammer, either single-acting, double-acting, or hydraulic hammer shall be used in driving piles. No diesel hammers are to be used. The hammer shall be capable of producing sufficient kinetic energy to drive the piles to the required set without causing damage. The type of hammer and the height of drop of the hammer must be first approved by the SO Rep. If hydraulic hammer is used, the Contractor must ensure that the hydraulic hammer provided is suitable for the piling of all sizes of reinforced concrete piles without causing damage.
2.6.25
Set The allowable set for the final 10 blows of piles, which is dependant on factors such as pile size, pile penetration, hammer size and subsoil condition, etc shall be proposed by the contractor based on `Hiley Formula' or wave equation and must be approved by the SO Rep before being adopted as criterion in a site. The Contractor shall make available all facilities and equipments eg. Theodolite, as and when required by the SO Rep for the checking of `set' for the final 10 blows of piles. Piles shall be driven to a ultimate resistance of at least 3 time the given nominal working load of the pile section. The onus for obtaining the required resistance shall solely rest with the Contractor.
2.6.26
Making Good Defects The Contractor shall be responsible for the proper execution of the piling work in accordance with the Specification and the pile layout drawings. Any damage or Defect to the super-structure resulting from defective execution of work shall be made good by the Contractor at his own expense to the satisfaction of the SO Rep.
2.6.27
Delivery and Driving of Piles Piles shall be delivered to site not earlier than 14 days after casting and the cube strength shall be at least 2 40 N/mm . Approved piles shall be driven accurately in the correct locations true to the line both laterally and longitudinally as indicated in the drawings. Piles shall be guided at the top and bottom during driving and shall be suitably constrained to maintain their correct position by means of guides. No pile which has been deflected from its course, or has been wrongly aligned may be forcibly brought back to correct alignment except with the written approval of the SO Rep.
2.6.27
Delivery and Driving of Piles (Cont'd) Dolly shall not be used as an aid to driving a pile to its final penetration unless approval has been obtained from the SO Rep. When dolly is used, the allowance set for the final 10 blows of a pile shall be reduced to account for the higher energy loss in the dolly-pile head system. The magnitude of the reduction shall be determined by site observation and shall not be less than 25 percent.
2.6.28
Pile Length Measurement The Contractor shall provide all necessary tools to measure the length of the driven piles as and when required by the Superintending Officer's Representative. This measurement shall be done in the presence of SO Rep. The measurement of the driven pile shall be carried out immediately after driving to set and subsequently covered with stopper to prevent any possible chokage of PVC tube. In situation where a dolly is used for final driving of piles, the measurement shall be done before the use of dolly. It is the sole responsibility of contractor to ensure the measured length of piles tally with the recorded length of piles. In the event of discrepancies between the measured and recorded lengths of piles, the Contractor shall be given a week's time to verify and confirm the true length of the driven piles to the satisfaction of the Superintending Officers Representative, otherwise, the piles shall be rejected and replaced with compensating piles in accordance with Clause 2.6.38 "Compensation Piles". Notwithstanding the above, the Superintending Officer's Representative decision shall be final, binding on and conclusive against the Contractor. All additional cost of amendment in pile-cap, beams etc resulting from the above rejected piles shall be borne by the Contractor.
2.6.29
Piling Record Piles shall only be driven in the presence of the SO Rep. The penetration and set of every pile shall be subjected to the approval of the SO Rep. Record of driving for every pile shall be submitted to the SO Rep on site and a copy to be kept by the Contractor. The record shall include the following items : (a) (b) (c) (d) (e) (f) (g) set temporary compression penetration from ground level length of pile and size of section ground level cut-off level to the top of pile time of starting and time of completion
The method of measuring set and temporary compression shall be approved by the SO Rep. The above record must show a series of sets and temporary compression measured during the whole process of driving. Once the driving of a pile is commenced it shall continue until the final penetration or set is reached. 2.6.30 Marking of Serial Numbers of Pile Section Serial number, length and date of casting shall be marked on one of the end plate and any one face of the pile for every pile section. Method and presentation of marking shall be approved by the SO Rep.
2.6.31
Damaged or Rejected Piles All piles which are cracked, broken or damaged during handling or transportation shall be rejected. All rejected piles shall be marked in all the four faces. Method of presentation of marking shall be approved by the SO Rep. All piles structurally damaged during driving, or driven unduly out of position, or driven out of plumb resulting in no set after driving for considerable length, where it should set based on available soil data and site condition, shall also be rejected.
2.6.31
Damaged or Rejected Piles (Cont'd) In situation where a dolly is used, the pile shall be rejected if it does not achieve the allowable set and the full length of the dolly has been utilised to drive the pile. In the above cases of rejection, the decision of the SO Rep shall be final, binding on and conclusive against the contractor.
2.6.32
Licensed Surveyors and Survey Instrument Before commencement of piling works to each proposed block of building, the contractor shall employ a licensed Surveyor to confirm the average ground level for the purpose of determination of pay lengths and to set out the position of each pile. The licensed Surveyor shall endorse on the pile eccentricity drawings and be responsible for the measurement of pile eccentricities and cut-off levels. The eccentricities of piles shall be taken at the cutoff level. The method of measurement shall be subject to the SO Rep's approval. The Contractor is to make available all facilities and equipments for the SO Rep to confirm the measurement. To improve productivity and quality of surveying works, the Contractor shall provide at least 1 (one) Electronic Total Stations as and when required. The Electronic Total Stations complete with accessories must be made available at two weeks' notice. The Electronic Total Stations shall be able to measure distance up to 2500 metres and angles to 1" (sec) with Liquid Crystal Display. The model of the equipment shall be to the Contractor's proposal subject to Superintending Officer's Representative approval. The Contractor shall provide at his own expense the necessary assistance and personnel, etc in connection with the use of the above equipment in the checking of the surveying works by the Superintending Officer's Representative.
2.6.33
As-Built Drawings After the completion of the piling work, the Contractor shall submit three copies of às-built' (eccentricity) drawing to the SO Rep. The às-built' (eccentricity) drawing shall be prepared and signed by the licensed surveyor. All costs incurred for the preparation of these drawings shall be deemed to have been included in the Contract Sum.
2.6.34
Tolerance from True Position The centre of each pile at cut-off level shall not deviate from its true position as shown on the drawings by more than 75mm. All additional cost of amendment in pile cap, beams etc as designed by the Employer as a counter measure to the pile eccentricities exceeding the permissible tolerance shall be borne by the piling Contractor. Piles shall be truly vertical. Any pile with an inclination exceeding 1 in 75, the rectification method with or without compensating pile(s) shall be decided by the SO Rep.
2.6.35
Pile Verticality Measurement The Contractor shall provide the necessary tools to measure the verticality of piles.
2.6.36
Raking Pile For raking piles, the piling rig shall be set and maintained to attain the specified inclination. The maximum permissible deviation of the installed pile from the specified inclination is 1 in 40.
2.6.37
Compensation Piles All piles driven into ground and rejected shall be replaced with compensating pile or piles at the Contractor's expense. The position and number of compensating pile/s shall be decided by the SO Rep. The Employer will only pay the cost for the original number of pile/s in the pile group as shown in the drawings. In the computation for payment, the size of the original pile and pay length of the compensation pile shall be taken. If two or more compensating piles are used to replace the rejected pile, the computation shall be based on the size of the original pile and where applicable, the shortest pay length of the compensating piles (which compensate this particular rejected piles, as decided by the SO Rep). If there are two or more rejected piles in the same pile group and there is no indication which compensating piles are for any one particular rejected piles (as decided by the SO Rep). The computation for payment shall be based on the sizes of the original piles and the two or more shortest pay length, where applicable, of the compensation piles.
2.6.38
Cutting-Off of Piles The Contractor shall excavate and cut off the pile to the required level shown on the pile layout drawings or otherwise directed by the SO Rep. Checking and recording of cut-off level shall be followed up immediately. Precast concrete pile shall be stripped to the cut-off level to expose the longitudinal reinforcement bars. The cut-off level of the pile shall not deviate from it true level as shown on the drawings by more than +50mm. The longitudinal steel shall be left projecting 600mm above the dressed head level and cast into the pilecap. After the cutting of each pile to its required cut-off level, the Contractor must use the stopper (as shown in the drawing or approved by the SO Rep) to properly cover up the PVC tube opening. In cutting of piles, the Contractor shall ensure that a licensed surveyor is maintained at the site for such work. If the Contractor fails to comply with this requirement, the Employer shall be entitled to employ and pay other persons to carry out the same and all expenses consequent thereon including administrative charge, if any, shall be deducted from the monies due to the Contractor.
2.6.39
Load-Settlement Curve The settlement obtained at various load increments in the course of ultimate load test shall be plotted to produce a load-settlement curve. This curve shall be known as the `proximate ultimate load test curve' being proximate to a given number of working piles. The total settlement of the ultimate load test sustained at full load and over a period of not less than 3 days shall not exceed 40mm at 3 times the normal working load, otherwise the test is deemed to have failed and a replacement test shall be carried out at the Contractor's own expense, until finally, an ultimate load test passed. In the event that ultimate load test and working load test are both carried out, any test pile under twice the working load exceeds the limits of settlement as defined on the `proximate ultimate load test curve' but not exceeding a settlement of 25mm may be considered to have passed the test. The test pile shall be deemed to have failed if it exceeds the limits of settlement and also a settlement of 25mm. In the absence of ultimate load test as decided by the SO Rep, any test pile under working load test at twice the working load sustained over a period of 3 days exceeds a settlement of 25mm shall be deemed to have failed.
2.6.40
Failure of Working Piles If a working test pile fails to sustain the full working test load over a period of not less than 3 days as decided by the SO Rep, then 2 further tests on other piles at the same site selected by the SO Rep shall be carried out at the Contractor's own expense. Where a pile fails under test, additional adjacent piles, as directed by the SO Rep, shall be driven and the group re-tested if deemed necessary by the SO Rep, and the whole of the work shall be carried out at the Contractor's expense. That part of the whole Contract shall be deemed to have failed if 2 or more piles fail out of a piling area containing up to 150 piles, or 3 or more piles fail out of a piling area containing 151 to 750 piles, or 4 or more piles fail out of a piling area containing more than 750 piles. In the event of such failure, the Contractor shall carry out sufficient further piling in accordance with the Contract documents, as will, in the opinion of the SO Rep, ensure the safety of the structures which are to be carried by the rejected piles. The whole of such work shall be executed at the Contractor's expense.
2.6.41
Rate of Progress The Contractor shall submit a progress schedule showing the number of piling rigs, the rate of progress and the time required for pile driving and follow up works to the SO Rep for his approval as soon as that site is handed to the Contractor. The Contractor shall adhere strictly to the approved schedule. The Contractor shall inform the SO Rep in writing the dates of arrival and departure of each piling rig at every piling site. No piling rig shall leave a site without prior approval of the SO Rep.
2.7 2.7.1
PRECAST RC PILES Piling System and Layouts Where precast RC piles are included in the Works, submit the system of piling and furnish the following drawings and information : (a) (b) Pile layout plans. System and type of piling offered, with detailed drawings, design calculation and complete description. The proposed system should comply with BS 8004, "Code of Practice for Foundations". Cross-section dimensions of piles. Maximum length to which piles can be driven below ground level. Nominal working load which can be carried by the pile assuming complete resistance to further penetration has been obtained. Detail of steel reinforcement of piles. 28-day strength of concrete in piles which shall be guaranteed by the Contractor. Detail of pile shoe and joint splicing.
(c) (d) (e)
(f) (g) (h)
Pile layout drawings proposed shall ensure complete safety and stability of structures. Column loading plans which show all the sizes and loadings on each column, issued by the Employer shall be used in preparing pile layouts. Each pile layout drawing shall contain the cut-off level of every pile. Failure to comply with the above may render the tender to be rejected. The pile shall be designed to a working stress of 7.5N per mm in axial compression. Minimum 28-day strength of concrete in the piles which shall be guaranteed by the Contractor shall be 2 fixed at 40N per mm . 2.7.2 Materials for Precast RC Piles Where precast RC piles are included in the Works, all materials used for precast RC piles shall, where appropriate, comply with Section 4 "Structural Concrete" including all clauses and subclauses under them.
2
SECTION 3/...
Ugdg Spec TS 3-1/1
SECTION 3 RESERVED
SECTION 4/
Ugdg Spec TS 4-1/22
SECTION 4
4.0 4.1
STRUCTURAL CONCRETE READY-MIXED CONCRETE All concrete used for site casting shall be obtained from approved Ready-Mixed Concrete suppliers. Ready-mixed concrete used shall comply with SS 289. The cement content shall comply with Clause 4.8 Concrete Mixes including all sub-clauses under it. No water in excess of the quantity required in the approved mix shall be allowed to be added to the concrete to increase its workability affected by elapsed time and/or temperature. While it is not being discharged, the concrete shall be kept continuously agitated. The concrete shall be placed in its final position and left undisturbed within two hours from the time when the cement is added to the mix.
4.2 4.2.1
CEMENT General Requirements Unless otherwise specified or instructed by the SO Rep, cement shall be of an approved brand and manufacture and comply with the following standards: Ordinary Portland Cement Rapid Hardening Portland Cement Type Relevant Standard SS 26 SS 26
High alumina cement shall not be used for any concrete work. When requested by the SO Rep, the Contractor shall produce a certificate showing the date and place of manufacture of the cement. As and when directed by the SO Rep, the Contractor shall, in the presence of SO Rep, be required to take samples for testing. The samples shall be sent for testing at the HDB Prefabrication Technology Centre. Any cement failing to comply with the requirements of the relevant standard shall be rejected. The cement shall be fresh and delivered in unbroken bags of the manufacturer or in properly designed bulk containers. All cement delivered in bags shall be stored in a weatherproof dry shed with raised boarded floor of at least 300mm above natural ground level. Cement delivered in bulk tankers shall be stored in properly designed bulk storage tanks. Cement of different manufacture and types shall be kept separate at all times and shall not be used in the same mix. Concrete of different brand of cement shall not be mixed during casting. The SO Rep shall be informed in writing of any change in the source of supply. Consignments of cement shall be used in the order of delivery and any caked or lumpy cement shall not be used. All cement unfit for use shall be removed from site immediately. 4.2.2 Supply From The Contractors Source (a) Certificate of compliance The Contractor shall ensure that the quality of his own supply comply fully with the Specifications and Approved Standard. The Contractor shall within one (1) month from the date of the Letter of Acceptance inform and seek the SO Reps prior approval in writing of his source of supply together with the following documents: (i) Test Reports showing that the Contractors supply is tested according to and in compliance with SS26.
Ugdg Spec TS 4-2/22 4.2.2 (a) Certificate of compliance (Contd) (ii) If the Contractors supply is obtained from a local mill, a copy of the ISO 9000 certification on the mill.
(iii) If the Contractors supply is imported, a letter of supply declaration from the overseas manufacturer. All test reports shall be the original or certified true copies from a SAC-SINGLAS accredited laboratory. The test reports shall not be dated more than three (3) month from the submission date of the test reports to the SO Rep. Other than due to circumstances beyond the Contractor's control, the Contractor shall not be allowed to change the source of supply at his discretion. The Contractor shall be required to seek the SO Reps prior approval in writing for any change in his supply sources, together with the documents laid down hereinabove. (b) Test Requirements The Contractor shall, in the presence of SO Rep, be required to take and send samples taken from his own supply during the Time for Completion and any time period where liquidated damages are imposed under the Contract for testing at the HDB Prefabrication Technology Centre: The Cement shall be tested in accordance with the Approved Standard for Physical and Chemical Test. The test for Elemental Analysis is not required. The number of tests to be conducted during the Time for Completion and any time period where liquidated damages are imposed under the Contract shall be as follows: Supply Source Local mill with ISO 9000 Local mill without ISO 9000/Imported cement Number of Test Minimum one test six-monthly Minimum one test quarterly
The Contractor offering from two different supply sources i.e. a local mill and imported cement will have both sources subjected to the test requirements. All costs and expenses in carrying out all the tests and arranging and sending the test samples to the Approved Laboratory as required in the Contract including the cost of samples shall be borne by the Contractor. 4.3 4.3.1 AGGREGATES General Requirements Fine aggregates shall be uncrushed sand or crushed granite fines complying with SS 31. Where crushed granite fines are used, its percentage of the total amount of fine aggregates shall not exceed 20%. Coarse aggregates shall be crushed or uncrushed gravel, crushed or uncrushed stone complying with SS 31. Coarse aggregates shall not exceed 40mm in size for lean and mass concrete and 20mm for reinforced concrete, unless otherwise specified. All-in aggregates as specified in SS31 and aggregates derived from limestone or other materials inferior to granite shall not be used.
Ugdg Spec TS 4-3/22 4.3.1 General Requirements (Contd) Aggregates shall be stored on clean surfaces in separate stockpiles or bunkers to prevent intermingling of different materials and contamination and shall be covered with a light roof cover. The light roof structure shall be in good condition and requires minimum maintenance. The material for the cover can be either canvas or other light roofing sheets, as long as it serves to cover/protect the aggregates from the weather, especially sunshine. Fine aggregates shall be tested for moisture content constantly to facilitate moisture compensation during concrete production. The testing shall be carried out based on the Speedy method or other approved equivalent method approved by the SO Rep. The SO Rep reserves the right to draw samples of aggregates from any stockpile at any time and have them tested for compliance with Approved Standards of SS 31, SS 73, ASTM C295 and ASTM C289. The samples shall be sent for testing at the HDB Prefabrication Technology Centre. Aggregates failing to comply with the Approved Standards shall be rejected. 4.3.2 Supply From The Contractors Source (A) Certificate of compliance The Contractor shall ensure that the quality of his own supply comply fully with the Specifications and Approved Standards. The Contractor shall within one (1) month from the date of the Letter of Acceptance inform and seek the SO Reps prior approval in writing of his source of supply together with test reports from SAC-SINGLAS accredited laboratories for each source of his supply on the following properties: (a) 20mm Aggregate i) shape; ii) surface texture; iii) flakiness index; iv) 10% fines value; v) aggregate impact value; vi) aggregate resistance to abrasion; vii) relative density; viii) water absorption values; ix) potential alkali-silica reactivity (chemical method); x) petrographic examination; xi) grading (sieve analysis); xii) clay, silt and dust content; xiii) shell content; xiv) aggregate crushing value; xv) acid soluble sulphate content; xvi) sulphate content; xvii) organic impurities; xviii) chloride ion content; and xix) other properties as specified by the SO Rep. Concreting Sand i) ii) iii) iv) v) vi) vii) viii) ix) x) xi( xii) xiii) xiv) xv) xvi) xvii) xviii) Sieve analysis and fineness modulus; Clay, silt and dust content by decantation method (not more than 3.00%); Organic impurities (lighter than Organic Plate No 3); Chloride content (not more than 0.01%); Bulk density; Relative density, apparent relative density and water absorption; Potential reactivity; Magnesium sulphate soundness; Elemental Analysis (in percentage): Silica as SiO2 Aluminium Oxide as AI2O3 Iron Oxide as Fe2O3 Titanium Oxide as TiO2 Calcium Oxide as CaO Magnesium Oxide as MgO Chromium Oxide as Cr2O3 Sodium Oxide as Na2O Potassium Oxide as K2O
(b)
Ugdg Spec TS 4-4/22 4.3.2 (A) (b) Concreting Sand xix) xx) xxi) xxii) Sulphate as SO4 Loss on Ignition at 900 C any other element(s) which may exist in the concreting sand; and other properties as specified by the SO Rep.
All test reports shall be the original or certified true copies from a SAC-SINGLAS accredited laboratory. The test reports shall not be dated more than three (3) month from the submission date of the test reports to the SO Rep. Other than due to circumstances beyond the Contractor's control, the Contractor shall not be allowed to change the source of supply at his discretion. The Contractor shall be required seek the SO Reps prior approval in writing for any change in his supply sources, together with the documents laid down hereinabove. (B) Test Requirements The Contractor shall, in the presence of SO Rep, be required to take and send samples taken from his own supply during the Time for Completion and any time period where liquidated damages are imposed under the Contract for testing at the HDB Prefabrication Technology Centre: The quality of the aggregates to be supplied shall comply in every respect with the Specifications and Approved Standards, and the conditions, analysis and test requirements laid down in the SS, BS, ASTM (especially SS31, SS73, BS812 and BS882) classification for concreting purposes. The number of tests to be conducted during the Time for Completion and any time period where liquidated damages are imposed under the Contract shall be as follows: (a) 20mm Aggregate Properties Grading (Sieve analysis) Flakiness index 10% fines value Aggregate impact value Aggregate resistance to abrasion Aggregate crushing value Relative density Water absorption values Clay, silt and dust content Shell content Acid soluble sulphate content Sulphate content Organic impurities Chloride Ion Content Potential alkali-silica reactivity (chemical method) Petrographic examination Minimum one test Minimum one test six-monthly Frequency of Test Minimum one test quarterly
The Contractor shall be required to send their 20 mm aggregate supply for the Mortar-Bar test under ASTM Standard C227 if the need arises.
Ugdg Spec TS 4-5/22 4.3.2 (B) Test Requirements (Contd) (b) Concreting Sand Properties Sieve Analysis and Finess Modulus Clay, silt and dust content by decantation method (not more than 3%) impurities (lighter than Organic Plate No 3) Chloride content (not more than 0.01%) Bulk Density Relative density, apparent relative density and water absorption Elemental analysis (in percentage): (i) Silica as SiO2 (ii) Aluminium Oxide as Al2O3 Full list of properties as specified in the subclause Certificate of compliance. Minimum one test six-monthly Minimum one test monthly Number of Test
The Contractor offering from two different supply sources will have both sources subjected to the test requirements. All costs and expenses in carrying out all the tests and arranging and sending the test samples to the Approved Laboratory as required in the Contract including the cost of samples shall be borne by the Contractor. 4.4 WATER Potable water supplied by the Power Supply Limited shall be used for mixing concrete, mortar and grout. For cleaning of formwork, reinforcement and curing of concrete, water other than potable water may be used if approved by the SO Rep. The use of seawater shall be prohibited. 4.5 ADMIXTURES When admixture is proposed to be used in concrete mix, furnish information concerning the admixture, admixture acceptance tests and additional information as stipulated in SS320 for approval by the SO Rep prior to the use of admixture. Admixture used shall comply with SS 320 or relevant British Standards. Requests for permission to use other types of admixtures not covered by these standards may only be considered when accompanied by full supporting information. Admixture to be used shall be approved by the SO Rep. The Contractor shall provide the SO Rep every facility for inspection and sampling of the admixture(s). The sample(s) shall be kept for reference and shall be sent, if requested by the SO Rep, for admixture uniformity tests in accordance with SS320 or the relevant British Standards. 4.6 4.6.1 STEEL REINFORCEMENT Description Unless shown otherwise on the Drawings, reinforcement for concrete shall consist of plain mild steel and high yield reinforcement bars complying with SS 2 or BS 4449 and welded steel fabric complying with SS 32. Reinforcement shall be free from pitting, loose rust, mill scale, paint, oil, grease, adhering earth or any other material that may impair the bond between the concrete and the reinforcement or that may cause corrosion of the reinforcement or disintegration of the concrete. Where reinforcement is to be welded, it shall comply with CP65. The Contractor shall obtain the approval of the SO Rep in writing prior to any welding of reinforcement.
Ugdg Spec TS 4-6/22 4.6.2 Testing The Contractor shall provide the SO Rep every facility for inspection and sampling before any cutting, bending or other fabrication is undertaken. If deemed necessary, the SO Rep may cause samples to be taken from reinforcement already fixed in position. Samples for the tests shall be sent for testing at the HDB Prefabrication Technology Centre. For each sample, 3 bars shall be taken for testing. Reinforcement not complying with the appropriate Specifications shall be removed and replaced. 4.6.3 Galvanised Steel Galvanized steel reinforcement as shown in the Drawings shall be hot-dip galvanized to SS 117. The Contractor shall obtain galvanizing service or galvanised steel reinforcement only from those in the approved lists. The coating weight of zinc shall conform with Table 1 of SS 117. For steel over 5mm in diameter, the minimum average coating mass shall be 500g/m2 and the minimum coating mass on any individual 2 sample shall be 450 g/m . The coating shall be continuous, smooth and free from flux stains. If the coating appearance of any galvanised reinforcement bar be found otherwise, such reinforcement shall not be used as a galvanised reinforcement. Galvanising shall be followed by chromating as a post treatment. Store all galvanised reinforcement bars in a dry and well ventilated place to prevent the formation of white rust on them. Small areas of galvanised coating damaged by welding, cutting or by excessively rough treatment shall be made good by the application of at least two coats of good quality zinc-rich paint with minimum 85% of zinc dust, expressed as a percentage by weight of the solid content of the paint. Upon the instruction of the SO Rep, the Contractor shall send at least two samples of the galvanised reinforcement to be tested by a competent authority to determine the coating weight. The coating weight shall be determined by stripping tests in accordance with SS 117. Certificates of such tests shall be submitted to the SO Rep for verification. 4.7 FABRICATION OF REINFORCEMENT All steel reinforcement to be used in this Contract shall be pre-cut and pre-bent before delivery to Site. No cutting and/or bending of steel reinforcement will be allowed to be done on site. All reinforcement shall be accurately cut and bent to the dimensions and shapes shown in the Drawings. Bends shall be cold-formed by machine or by other approved means which produce a gradual and even bending action. Reinforcement incorrectly bent shall not be used unless the method for straightening and rebending will not cause any cracking, and approval for rebending is given by the SO Rep. Reinforcement shall be securely tied with steel wires. The projecting ends of the steel wires shall be directed away from the formwork so as not to encroach into the concrete cover. Reinforcement shall be adequately supported by approved spacers and chairs to maintain the specified concrete cover. Plastic spacers shall be used for all bottom slab reinforcement. Steel bar chairs bent according to the Drawings or proprietary-type chairs shall be used for top slab reinforcement. Parts of the chairs that need to rest on formwork shall be coated with plastic for isolation and protection. All spacers and chairs for slab reinforcement shall be placed not more than 600mm apart in a regular grid. Other than for slabs, both plastic and concrete or mortar spacer blocks may be used. Concrete or mortar spacer blocks shall be provided with tying wire, and shall not be lower in compressive strength and durability characteristics than the surrounding concrete. All spacers shall be obtained from sources approved by the SO Rep. Sleeve jointing for reinforcement may be used provided that the strength and deformation characteristics have been determined by tests carried out by a competent testing authority and approved by the SO Rep. Fabrication and placing of reinforcement in each part of the work shall be approved by the SO Rep before any concrete can be placed thereon.
Ugdg Spec TS 4-7/22 4.7 FABRICATION OF REINFORCEMENT (CONTD) Reinforcement shall not be displaced during concreting. Reinforcement projecting from work being concreted or already concreted shall not be bent without approval by the SO Rep and shall be protected from accidental deformation and damage. All column link cages and rectangular column cage reinforcement with T16 main reinforcement bars (except for open links) and all beam cages with beam cage code prefixed with "J" provided to apartment blocks shall be prefabricated in a factory approved by the SO Rep. The rectangular column cage reinforcement shall be prefabricated as welded mesh with the T16 main reinforcement bars welded to and holding in place the column links and bent into column cage reinforcement. The "J" series beam cage shall be prefabricated as welded mesh with the T13 or T16 main reinforcement bars welded to and holding in place the stirrup links and bent into beam cage reinforcement. 4.8 4.8.1 CONCRETE MIXES Designed Mix For designed mixes, the Contractor shall submit a mix design report covering all concrete mixes to the SO Rep for approval. The designed mix shall comply with the following requirements : Concrete Grade 3 Minimum Cement Content (kg/m ) 3 Maximum Cement Content (kg/m ) Maximum Fine Aggregate (%) Total Aggregate Maximum Water/Cement Ratio 25 275 550 50 0.55 30 300 550 50 0.55 35 325 550 50 0.50 40 350 550 50 0.45 45 375 550 50 0.40 50 425 550 50 0.40
For concrete with maximum aggregate size of 14 and 10mm, the minimum cement content shall be 3 increased by 20 and 40 kg/m respectively. In the designing of mixes, a current margin shall be 10 N/mm2. If a current margin other than that recommended is to be used, sufficient valid data shall be made available to the SO Rep for his consideration and approval. Mix adjustment shall be allowed only when sufficient results are available; however, such mix shall remain compliant with the Specifications. In all cases, it is the responsibility of the Contractor to ensure that the designed mix shall be durable, workable and comply with the strength grade requirement as specified in the Drawings. 4.8.2 Trial Mixes The designed mix with a designed maximum consistency as measured by slump or flow shall be verified by preparation of trial mixes witnessed by the SO Rep. The mix shall be judged for suitable workability as well as strength. A minimum of 18 cubes from three batches shall be taken. The mix may be considered suitable if : (a) (b) the designed maximum consistency is achieved in accordance with SS 78 or BS 1881 : Part 105 if a flow test is specified; and the average strength of the nine cubes tested at 28 days shall exceed the specified characteristic 2 strength by at least 10 N per mm or if the nine cubes at an earlier age indicate that it is likely to be exceeded by this amount.
Trial mixes may not be required if concrete is supplied by prequalified ready-mix concrete suppliers approved by the SO Rep.
Ugdg Spec TS 4-8/22 4.8.3 Mix Adjustment Once the designed mix is approved by the SO Rep, the contractor shall not be allowed to change the mix without prior approval of the SO Rep. An increase or reduction of cement content by 20 kg/m3 and above, or the percentage % fine aggregate by 5% and above, or any changes in the type or dosage of admixture or consistency is considered a change in mix design. These do not constitute a tolerance allowance on the mix design used in relation to the specified requirements. If the Contractor is found to be using a mix design inferior to the approved mix, the SO Rep shall exercise its rights under Clause 1.10 "Nuisance and Irregularities" to impose charges against the Contractor. 4.9 BATCHING Cement shall be measured by weight or batched in whole bags if so packed and delivered. Fine and coarse aggregates shall be measured by weight separately. Water shall be measured by volume and due allowance shall be made for the amount of water present in the mass of fine aggregate by deducting this amount from the volume of water to be added during the mixing of concrete. Solid admixtures shall be measured by weight, while liquid or paste admixtures may be measured by weight or volume. In the case of small quantities in the concrete mix, the minimum volume of the mix for each batch shall be 3 at least 3m The accuracy of the measuring equipment shall be within +3% of the quantity of cement, water or total aggregate being measured, and with +5% of the quantity of admixture added before commencement of work and subsequently whenever so directed by the SO Rep, the measuring equipment shall be calibrated with known weights and volume measures. 4.10 MIXING CONCRETE Concrete shall be mixed in a batch type mechanical mixer. The quantity of constituent material in each batch shall not exceed the rated capacity of the mixer. The constituent material shall be thoroughly and continually mixed at the mixing speed specified by the mixer manufacturer until the resulting concrete is uniform in colour and consistency. The mixing time shall be as follows : (i) (ii) Pan mixer minimum 30 seconds minimum 1.5 minutes for 1 m of concrete plus minute for each additional 1 m3.
3
Truck mixer or drum mixer -
The mixing time shall be reckoned from the time when all the solid materials are in the mixer. No portion of the time required for discharging shall be considered as part of the mixing time. The first batch of concrete fed into the mixer shall have an increase of an appropriate amount of dry mortar similar in proportion to that of the concrete to be mixed and of mixing water for coating the mixer. The mixer shall be emptied completely before being refilled. Mixers which have been out of use for more than 30 minutes should be thoroughly cleaned before any fresh concrete is mixed. The mixer shall be free from hardened concrete. Worn-off blades or paddles shall be replaced. 4.11 WORKABILITY AND CONSISTENCY The workability shall be such that the concrete can be well compacted, worked into the corners of the shuttering and around the reinforcements, gives the specified surface finish and attain the specified strength. The mix design shall ensure that this workability is obtainable.
Ugdg Spec TS 4-9/22 4.11 WORKABILITY AND CONSISTENCY (CONT'D) On each concreting day, workability shall be assessed on site at the discharge point of the mixer by means of the slump test in accordance with SS 78. If the measured slump deviates from the agreed value by more than 25 mm or one third of the required value whichever is greater, the concrete shall be rejected. As an alternative, flow test to BS 1881 : Part 105 or other means of assessing workability may be considered subject to approval by the SO Rep. No water shall be added to the concrete subsequent to the completion of the mixing. 4.12 PLACING OF CONCRETE All concrete shall be transported from the mixer to the place of final deposit as speedily as possible before it has commenced to set, and in no case shall this exceed 20 minutes after mixing. Where retarders are used such interval may be extended subject to the approval of the SO Rep. The method of transit shall be such that it will prevent the segregation, loss or contamination of the ingredients. In the use of concrete pumps, the Contractor shall ensure that the following is complied with : (a) (b) Pipes shall not be secured to formwork or reinforcement which may be displaced by the pulsating movement of the pipe. Pumping shall commence first with blowing of water through the pipeline, followed by cement mortar, both of sufficient quantities and all these shall be discharged away from the area to be concreted. When extra sections of pipe are to be added, each length of pipe shall be thoroughly wetted inside but no free water shall remain in the pipe. Where the pipeline is exposed to the sun, the line shall be protected against absorption of heat by covering with damp sacking or other approved material during pumping.
(c) (d)
Before proceeding to place the concrete, the formwork shall be re-aligned if necessary and water and rubbish therein shall be removed. Immediately prior to placing the concrete, the formwork shall be well wetted and inspection openings shall be closed. Raised gangways for workmen placing and vibrating concrete shall be provided wherever possible and shall be so constructed as to avoid damaging and displacing the reinforcement. Concrete shall be placed in the formwork by shovels or other approved equipment and shall not be dropped from a height nor handled in a manner which will cause segregation. Accumulations of set concrete on the reinforcement shall be avoided. Concrete shall be placed directly in the permanent position and shall not be worked along the formwork to that position. For beams and similar members, concrete shall be placed in a single operation to the full depth. In walls, columns and similar members, the concrete shall be placed in horizontal layers each not exceeding 1m deep. Placing of concrete shall be continuous and temporary interruption shall not normally exceed 30 minutes. At the completion of a specified part, a construction joint shall be made subject to the approval of the SO Rep. No concrete shall be placed during wet weather, unless the entire area of pour is covered, or other measures are taken to protect the wet concrete, to the satisfaction and subject to the approval of the SO Rep. All concrete shall be placed in daylight, unless an adequate system of lighting is provided and approval for night work is given by the SO Rep and all relevant authorities prior to commencement of the concreting.
4.13
COMPACTION OF CONCRETE All concrete shall be compacted to produce a dense homogeneous mass. It shall be compacted using approved immersion type mechanical vibrators. Sufficient numbers of vibrators in serviceable condition shall be used on site to compact the concrete at the rate at which it is placed, and a minimum of two standby vibrators shall be readily available for emergency use in case of breakdowns. The concrete shall be thoroughly worked into all parts of the formwork and between and around the steel reinforcement. It shall be compacted to give a dense and compact concrete, free from voids of any kind. Steel reinforcement shall be prevented from being displaced or deformed during concreting.
4.14
CURING AND PROTECTION OF CONCRETE After being placed in position, all fresh concrete shall be protected from rain, sun and drying wind, and shall not be subjected to any vibrational disturbance other than that arising from compacting. The exposed surfaces of concrete shall be cured with an appropriate curing compound as approved by the SO Rep. The curing compound shall be applied by mechanical sprayer and comply strictly with the manufacturer's instructions. If the curing compound is exposed to rain or water within 4 hours from the time the application is completed, the contractor shall re-apply the area affected with appropriate curing compound again. However, the application of the curing compound may be exempted subject to the approval of the SO Rep, if continuous wetting for at least 72 hours by rain on the concrete surface occurs immediately after the concrete sets. This waiver shall not constitute a variation to the contract. Concrete placed below ground level shall be protected from falling earth and vegetation, and the excavated ground shall be kept free of any water by pumping or other means of drainage. Approved means shall also be taken to protect immature concrete from damage by debris, excessive loading, moving vehicles, mixing with earth or other materials, flotation and other influences that would impair the strength and durability of the concrete. Concrete placed in ground containing deleterious substances shall be free from contact with such ground and with water draining therefrom, during placing and for a period of 3 days or as otherwise instructed thereafter. Concrete damaged through improper or insufficient curing and protection shall be made good at the Contractor's own costs and expenses.
4.15
CONSTRUCTION JOINTS Where joints are necessary during concreting, their positions shall be approved by the SO Rep and shall be constructed using expanded mesh as indicated in the Drawings. Before concreting resumes, the joints shall be properly chipped, cleaned and scum and loose aggregate removed therefrom. Immediately before placing new concrete, the joint shall be thoroughly wetted and coated with rich cement grout.
4.16 4.16.1
QUALITY OF CONCRETE WORKS General (a) Testing of Structural Concrete Concrete shall be tested for compliance in strength and durability requirements, except for the following non-structural Works: (i) (ii) (iii) (iv) (v) Foot paths and paved areas; Ramps and steps; Hardcourts; Inspection chambers and drain lines; Floor screed;
The compressive strength of concrete shall be determined by crushing tests on 150mm cubes. The quality and consistency of the concrete shall be tested as directed by the SO Rep in accordance with SS 78. The Contractor shall provide for slump test or flow test, compressive strength test, core test and any other concrete test as and when required by the SO Rep.
Ugdg Spec TS 4-11/22 4.16.1 General (Contd) (b) Sampling On each concreting day and for each grade of concrete per concrete mixer, samples shall be taken according to the following rates: (i) Samples Taken At Site Where samples are taken at the Site, samples shall be taken for every 40m3 of concrete or part thereof, of each grade of concrete. At least one sample shall be taken from each batch chosen by the SO Rep. (ii) Samples Taken At Precast Plants And Ready-Mixed Concrete Plants Where samples are taken at ready-mixed concrete plants, for every 40 m3 of concrete or part thereof, at least 1 sample shall be taken from a batch. Each sample cannot be used to represent the Works for more than one Contract or project. The sampling of concrete cubes in the precast plants shall be carried out by the precasters under the Approved Precast Concrete Supplier List by HDB in the List of Products & Suppliers. Notwithstanding the above, the Contractor is still liable for ensuring that the precast components quality satisfies the Drawings and Specifications requirements. In the event that the precast components quality fails to meet the requirements in the Drawings and Specifications, the Contractor shall be liable for the defective precast components. All defective precast components which failed the strength requirement shall be removed or otherwise rectified accordingly to the instructions of the SO Rep at the Contractor's own costs and expenses. No extension of time for completion shall be allowed for the rectification of such works. A sample shall be a quantity of concrete, consisting of a number of standard scoopfuls, taken from a batch of concrete whose properties are to be determined. Two cubes shall be cast per sample per age of testing unless specified otherwise. The sample shall be taken at the point of discharge from the mixer, agitating truck or mixer truck. These concrete cubes shall be cast to achieve full compaction by using an approved vibrating table. The minimum period required before demoulding these concrete cubes shall be 16 hours. At least 4 cubes shall be cast from each sample. 2 cubes shall be tested at an early age. The remaining 2 cubes shall be tested at 28 days for compliance purpose. All concrete cubes shall be tested at the HDB Prefabrication Technology Centre. or other approved accredited testing laboratory with equivalent or better testing facilities, auto-capturing and computerized monitoring system with analysis capabilities. The Contractor shall submit the information pertaining to the proposed laboratory to SO Rep for approval. All contract information and test results shall be uploaded to EPTC e-cube website. The Employer shall recover all testing fees charged by the HDB Prefabrication Technology Centre for testing of cubes including those sampled from ready-mixed concrete plants and precast plant from the Contractor. For precast concrete, additional cubes shall be taken from the same sample to determine whether adequate strength is achieved in order to meet design strength for demoulding, handling and delivery. These additional cubes shall be cured by the same methods as those used for the precast units. Testing facilities approved by the SO Rep shall be provided at the precast plant for testing of these additional cubes. The Contractor shall provide lockable humid boxes of adequate sizes to store all test cubes for the specified period. The humid boxes shall be placed in a covered area and maintained at a relative humidity of above 95%. The keys to such curing facility shall be exclusively held in custody by a person designated by the SO Rep. The test cubes to be tested at HDB Prefabrication Technology Centre shall be collected by the SO Rep from the designated site at regular interval. The SO Rep shall inform Contractor of the designated collection site and the Contractor shall deliver cubes to the designated collection site on the day of collection. The Contractor shall remove crushed cubes from the HDB Prefabrication Technology Centre and used them as recycling materials for worksites. In addition to the minimum number of samples stated above, the SO Rep may, at his absolute discretion, instruct the Contractor to take extra sample from whichever batch as he may choose.
Ugdg Spec TS 4-12/22 4.16.1 General (Contd) c) Cube Identification The Contractor shall provide facilities to enable the identification of test cubes by radio frequency or similar means. The Contractor shall provide at least one web-based radio frequency identification (RFID) reader capable of reading the RFID tags on the concrete cube from a minimum distance of at least 40 mm. The Contractor shall include the appropriate interfacing software to a web-based controller. The Contractor shall logon to a website of the Employer to register the concrete cube data and tag IDs using the RFID reader. The registration of cube data and tag IDs shall be done within the same casting day. The appropriate RFID tags shall be placed at the corner of the cubes while the cubes are still fresh. The top surface of the RFID tag shall be level with the concrete cube surface. The Contractor shall protect the RFID tags on the concrete cube while demoulding. For damage or loss of RFID tag, the Contractor shall be charged the replacement cost based on the Employer's purchase price The Employer shall deduct the charges payable by the Contractor from any monies due or becoming due to the Contractor or recover the same from the Contractor as a debt due by the Contractor to the Employer. d) Cover measurement The Contractor shall provide suitable equipment for the measurement of concrete cover to reinforcement and in-situ strength of concrete. The Contractor shall carry out measurements for all major structural elements as determined by the SO Rep. The Contractor shall analyse statistically all measurements for each of the major type of structural element. The concrete cover shall comply with the requirements of CP 65. The in-situ strength of the concrete shall be assessed in accordance with BS 6089 where applicable. The strength shall comply with the specified grade, taking into account the variability with in-situ strength. 4.16.2 Compliance Of Strength Requirement The 28 days strength shall be required for compliance with the strength specified hereunder. The early strength tests shall be required for quality control purposes. For precast concrete, the 3 days strength shall be obtained solely for quality control purpose. Early strength requirements to meet design strength for demoulding, handling and delivery shall be specified by the approved manufacturer of the precast components and approved by the SO Rep. Such strength shall be determined from the additional cubes. The SO Rep shall have the absolute right to reject any precast components should its early strength fails to meet the design strength requirements. Compliance with the specified characteristic strength shall be judged by tests made on cubes at the age of 28 days. Compliance may be assumed if the following conditions are satisfied : (a) The average strength of the sample and the preceding three samples or the average of the first four samples of the production is greater than or equal to the specified characteristic strength plus half a fixed current margin of 6 N/mm2. Thus, the minimum average strength shall be : Grade Minimum Average Strength At 28 days (N/mm2) 28 days 20 25 30 35 40 45 50
23.0
28.0
33.0
38.0
43.0
48.0
53.0
Ugdg Spec TS 4-13/22 4.16.2 Compliance Of Strength Requirement (Contd) (b) The sample strength is at least the level specified below : Grade Minimum Individual Sample Strength At 28 days (N/mm2) (c) 20 25 30 35 40 45 50
28 days
17.0
22.0
27.0
32.0
37.0
42.0
47.0
The characteristic strength shall meet the requirement of the specified concrete grade. If a current margin lower than the fixed current margin can be consistently achieved, approval may be sought to lower the strength level specified in the preceding sub-clause (a) above.
For samples taken on site, if the sample strength results do not comply with either or both of the requirements specified above, the SO Rep shall exercise its rights under Clause 1.10 Nuisance and Irregularities to impose charges against the Contractor. All test cubes taken shall be properly stored and the Contractor shall ensure that all test cubes are tested at their respective age. Test cube that are lost shall be deemed to have failed and the SO Rep shall exercise its rights under Clause 1.10 "Nuisance and Irregularities" to impose charges against the Contractor. Payment of charges to the Employer shall not in any way affect, vary or relieve the Contractor's obligations under the Contract. In addition to the payment of charges, the affected concrete work may be stopped and not be continued until so directed by the SO Rep. No extension to the Time for Completion shall be allowed for such stoppage of the concrete work. 4.17 TESTING OF HARDENED CONCRETE In the event of non-compliance, the quality of concrete in question shall be interpreted in accordance with BS 5328. For the 28 day strength non-compliance, the quality of the sub-standard concrete shall be estimated by carrying out tests on hardened concrete in the structure. In the event that such tests are not practical, the SO Rep may decide not to carry out any test. The tests may include non-destructive methods, the taking of core samples, load tests or a combination of several methods as follows : Grade 20 25 30 35 40 45 50 20 25 30 35 40 45 50 Compressive Strength of Individual Sample 2 (N per mm ) 14.5 to below 17.0 18.5 to below 22.0 23.0 to below 27.0 27.0 to below 32.0 31.5 to below 37.0 35.5 to below 42.0 40.0 to below 47.0 below 14.5 below 18.5 below 23.0 below 27.0 below 31.5 below 35.5 below 40.0 Test on Structure after 28 days ) ) ) Non-destructive ) method and/or core ) test ) ) ) ) ) Non-destructive ) method and core test ) and/or load test ) )
Ugdg Spec TS 4-14/22 4.17 TESTING OF HARDENED CONCRETE (CONTD) The tests shall be carried out by an accredited laboratory in accordance with CP 65 and assessed in accordance with BS 6089. The results of any such tests shall not nullify the establishment of noncompliance provided that the latter are based on valid cube test results. 4.18 RECTIFICATION OF DEFECTIVE WORK The action to be taken in respect of the concrete which fails to meet either of the requirements in Clause 4.16 "Quality of Concrete Works" and the assessment specified in Clause 4.17 "Testing of Hardened Concrete" shall be determined by the SO Rep. They may range from : (a) qualified acceptance in less severe cases with action taken against the Contractor under Clause 1.10 "Nuisance and Irregularities". The Contractor shall provide protective coating against carbonation and other aggressive environment if the affected concrete can be certified to be structurally sound by a Professional Engineer engaged by the Contractor at its own costs and expenses; or If the average of three core tests falls below the strength level specified in Clause 4.16.2(b), or in the event of failure of a load test. the Contractor shall carry out at his own costs and expenses any necessary approved remedial measures to the satisfaction of the SO Rep. Remedial measures shall be designed, supervised and certified by a Professional Engineer engaged by the Contractor at its own costs and expenses; or the Contractor shall remove the affected concrete, and the costs and expenses in removing all poor quality concrete shall be the responsibility of the Contractor.
(b)
(c)
All defective concrete work such as badly constructed concrete members with poor alignment and plumb, honeycombed and badly formed surfaces shall be removed or otherwise rectified according to the instructions of the SO Rep at the Contractor's own costs and expenses. 4.19 4.19.1 FORMWORK (a) Material The Contractor shall solely use metalforms for the construction of cast-in-situ reinforced concrete structures. Notwithstanding Singapore Standards CP23, other type of formwork material shall not be used, unless expressly specified otherwise or as approved by the SO Rep. In the case where metalforms are not suitable for any part of a structure, the Contractor may propose to use other formwork material which shall provide similar high quality off-form finish as compared with metalforms, all at the Contractor's own cost and expense. The use of such alternative material shall be subject to the approval of the SO Rep and no adjustment to the Contract Sum shall be effected under such case. Unless specified otherwise, all formwork shall comply with Singapore Standard CP 23. It shall be true to the shape and dimensions as shown in the Drawings. The Contractor shall provide appropriate metal formwork system that produces concrete lines and surfaces complying with Grade II requirements of SS CP23. For cases of non-compliance with the foregoing requirements, the SO Rep reserves the right to instruct the Contractor to carry out rectification Works at the Contractor's own cost and expense. The form face in contact with concrete shall be free from dirt, adhering grout, projecting nails, splits and other Defect. Formwork shall be coated with an approved form oil which is compatible with the required finish. Such oil shall be insoluble in water, non-staining, not injurious to concrete and shall not become flaky or be removed by rain or wash water. Diesel oil and liquids which retard the setting of concrete shall not be used. The same type of approved form oil shall be used for all Works. The application of the form oil shall be such that no reinforcement is coated by the oil and there shall be no accumulation of the oil on the formwork. Where the use of plywood is approved by the SO Rep, it shall be Phenolic film faced plywood, complying with SS 1 and cut to size from sheets at least 12 mm thick. Formwork to curved surfaces shall be of steel or other material approved by the SO Rep to give a good surface finish.
Ugdg Spec TS 4-15/22 4.19.1 (b) Use of Contractors Metalforms The Contractor shall use his own metalforms or metalforms from suppliers that have been approved by the SO Rep. The Contractor shall submit details of his proposed metal formwork system for the approval of the SO Rep and comply with the following requirements: i. Technical Requirements The proposed metal formwork system shall comply with Singapore Standard CP23 and shall be in every respect rigidly constructed to the shapes and dimensions as shown in the Drawings. ii. Technical Information The Contractor shall submit, within two weeks from the commencement Date of the Time for Completion, the following technical information of his proposed metalforms namely; the grade of steel, steel strength such as tensile strength, yield stress and elongation (including a recent reduced section tensile test certificate), the steel plate thickness, the manufacturing process (including a recent photo of the manufacturing machine) and the name and address of the metalform manufacturer and/or supplier, for the approval of the SO Rep. iii Samples For Contractor self-owned metalforms, the Contractor shall submit within two weeks from the commencement Date of the Time for Completion, samples of basic types of the metalforms for the reduced section tensile test to the SO Rep for approval. Five samples shall be selected by the SO Rep for testing for each contract. Reduced section tensile test shall be carried out in accordance with JIS Z2241. The samples shall comply with the minimum tensile strength of 400 N per mm2, minimum yield stress of 245 N per mm2 and minimum elongation of 30%. The minimum steel thickness shall be 2.65 mm. As and when required, the Contractor shall provide a metalform thickness gauge for verification of the steel plate thickness by the SO Rep. For Contractor self-owned metalforms and metalforms from suppliers approved by the SO Rep, the SO Rep reserves the right to sample metalforms for dimensional test. Under such case and where the dimensional test is required by the SO Rep, the number of metalform samples shall be decided by the SO Rep and such samples shall be delivered to the HDB Metalform Warehouse for checking. The SO Rep reserves the right to reject all defective metalforms. iv. Method of Manufacture All metalforms shall be manufactured so that the surface plate and side ribs are formed from the same sheet of metal to a 90 degree bend without any cutting and/or welding. The folding of the 90 degree cold-formed bend shall be completed in one single continuous operation using a continuous series of steel rollers of a roll-forming machine. Only the two end ribs and all the internal ribs shall be welded. v. Maintenance Of Old Metalforms All old metalforms shall be cleaned free of rust, grit, grout stains etc. The method of cleaning shall be by SHOT BLAST only. Such old metalforms shall be repaired to their original shape and condition to the satisfaction of the SO Rep prior to its use. The Contractor shall engage the services of the Cleaning and Repair (C&R) contractors approved by the SO Rep. In addition, the Contractor shall provide documentary proof in the form of a C&R Certificate indicating the C&R contractor, the quantities of cleaned and repaired metalforms to show that such cleaning and repair Works have been carried out. vi. Marking and Identification The Contractor shall seek the approval of the SO Rep on the type of identification mark for their metalforms. In addition, the metalforms shall be engraved with the manufacturer's logo and the date of manufacture, and the identification mark shall be different from those of the Employer's metalforms.
Ugdg Spec TS 4-16/22 4.19.1 (b) Use of Contractors Metalforms (Cont'd) vii. Irregularities Committed If the Contractor uses sub-standard metalforms which do not comply fully with those reference samples approved by the SO Rep as specified in subclause 4.19.1(c)(iii) "Samples", the SO Rep shall exercise his rights under Clause 1.10 "Nuisance And Irregularities" to impose charges against the Contractor. viii. Metalforms Usage The Contractor shall use form releasing agent approved by the SO Rep for each casting of concrete. The Contractor shall be fully liable and responsible for any consequential loss or damage due to or arising from the usage of his metalforms. 4.19.2 Design Formwork shall be designed to Singapore Standard CP 23 and shall cater for the appropriate method of placing and compacting the concrete. Adequate number of braces, ties and struts shall be provided so that the formwork shall be able to withstand the pressures resulting from whatever method of placing and compacting concrete adopted, and maintain the required position, slope and profile. Metal props shall be used to support formwork, except at irregular places where timber props may be more suitable or practical. Use of timber props shall be subject to approval by the SO Rep. Where the floor to ceiling height exceeds 9.14 m, or where the formwork deck is supported by shores constructed in two or more tiers, or where the dead, live and impact loads on the formwork exceed 732.3 kg per m, the Contractor shall engage a Professional Engineer at its own cost and expense to design the formwork structure. The Contractor shall submit the details of the design of the formwork and the supports for approval by the SO Rep. Notwithstanding the approval by the SO Rep, the strength and adequacy of the formwork and supports shall remain the responsibility of the Contractor and his Professional Engineer. 4.19.3 Construction Formwork shall be constructed sufficiently rigid and tight to prevent loss of grout from the concrete at all stages of placing and compacting. The arrangement of formwork shall be such that it can be dismantled and removed readily from the cast concrete without causing shock, disturbance or damage. For beams and slabs the arrangement shall be such that the formwork and supports for the slab soffits and beam sides can be removed without disturbing the formwork and supports of the beam soffits. Where steel props are used for multi-storey carpark/garage blocks, such steel props shall be prezinc galvanised or galvanised by other methods. Obtain approval from the SO Rep before using such galvanised steel props. Supports of an upper floor shall rest on the lower floor only if the lower floor has developed adequate strength to bear the load. If in the opinion of the SO Rep, the lower floor does not have the required strength to carry the support of the upper floors, then the method adopted to support the formwork of the upper floor shall have to be approved by the SO Rep. All props to a floor which support the formwork of an upper floor shall only be removed 3 days (minimum) after the upper floor is cast. Connections in formwork shall be either nailed, screwed, bolted, clamped or otherwise secured. Ties that are anchored against the timber shall pass through a plate washer at least 50mm x 50mm in size and of sufficient thickness so that the load is transferred to the timber without any visible deflection or penetration into the timber. All holes left in the concrete shall be filled with mortar and finished to the approval of the SO Rep. Form ties used to connect opposite faces of formwork to restrain the concrete pressures shall be metallic ties. For concrete members exposed to the external, cast-in steel spreader ties shall be used to separate and restrain the internal and external formwork faces. Concrete separators shall not be permitted. The Contractor shall be required to make allowances for any settlement or deflection of formwork which is likely to arise during construction. The soffits of beams and slabs shall be given a camber to allow for deflection after striking of formwork. The magnitude of the camber shall be approved by the SO Rep.
Ugdg Spec TS 4-17/22 4.19.3 Construction (Contd) Formwork across structure joints shall be erected such that it overlaps adjoining finished concrete by at least 200mm and holds tightly against it. Formwork shall be provided and run continuously at construction joints. Bolts to be permanently installed in concrete, fixing, boxouts, cores and other devices used for forming openings, holes, pockets, recesses and other cavities shall be as rigid as the formwork itself to prevent the leakage of any grout. No holes shall be cut in cast concrete except with the approval of the SO Rep. 4.20 STRIKING OF FORMWORK The minimum periods before striking of the formwork for ordinary portland cement concrete shall be according to the following table : Minimum Period Before Striking 12 hours 3 days 14 days 21 days
Type of Formwork
Remarks
All vertical or side formwork Soffit formwork to slabs and beams Props to slabs and beams Props to cantilever slabs and cantilever beams
The period shall commence from the time of last pour of concrete. After striking of formwork, props, shall be immediately put up to support the structure.
Shorter striking periods for beams and slabs may be permitted provided evidence is provided to the SO Rep that the strength development in the in-situ concrete is such that unacceptable deflections and cracking will not occur as a result of earlier striking. Formwork shall be removed gradually without shock or vibration and in the manner and order approved by the SO Rep. After striking of formwork, any honeycombed surface and defective or damaged concrete work arising from improper work procedures shall be immediately made good as directed by the SO Rep and at the Contractor's own costs and expenses. Any remedial measures carried out without the knowledge and approval of the SO Rep shall be liable for rejection and re-execution. All holes formed by tie bolts shall be filled with non-shrink cementitious mortar or grout of a similar or higher grade than the surrounding concrete as specified in Clause 4.26 "Cement Mortar and Grout". 4.21 OPENINGS AND RECESSES Provide openings and recesses in the reinforced concrete structure, including PVC sleeves where required, for the installation of sanitary pipes and fittings, service ducts or pipes, CATV, telecommunication and electrical cables and trunkings, as shown in the Drawings. The Contractor shall leave openings in the lift motor room floor to the requirement of the lift contractor or as instructed by the SO Rep. No openings or openings greater than the sizes shown in the Drawings shall be formed without the prior approval of the SO Rep. No coring of holes through existing structural elements shall be permitted. However, holes not exceeding 20mm in diameter may be drilled through these elements. If any steel bar obstructs the drilling through of a hole, a new position shall be selected slightly offset to avoid the obstructing bar. Under no circumstances shall any steel bar be allowed to be cut or removed without the written consent of the SO Rep. For holes with diameter greater than 20mm, submit drilling proposals to the SO Rep for approval. All openings in slabs shall be formed with sides tapering slightly downwards and trimmed on all sides with mild steel bars as shown in the Drawings. Check and ensure accuracy in the position, alignment size and shape of all openings and recesses. Otherwise, the Contractor shall make the necessary rectification at his own costs and expenses. Remove all formwork other than PVC sleeves required from openings and recesses after the concrete has set, and ensure that the openings are not blocked up. Recesses for vertical electrical trunkings shall be finished smooth.
Ugdg Spec TS 4-18/22 4.21 OPENINGS AND RECESSES (CONTD) Unless otherwise indicated in the Drawings, the Contractor shall seal openings in floor slabs with similar grade of concrete or with cement mortar as specified in Clause 4.26, "Cement Mortar and Grout" both with approved water proofing admixture added, after installation of services by the Contractor or other contractors. Other openings without PVC sleeves shall be made good with cement mortar as specified in Clause 4.26 "Cement Mortar and Grout". 4.22 BUILDING ACCURACY After removal of formwork, the Contractor shall take measurements as directed by the SO Rep to check the deviation of the reinforced concrete work from specified dimensions shown in the Drawings. All measurements shall be recorded and submitted to the SO Rep. Work in compliance with Singapore Standard CP 23 Grade II shall be deemed acceptable. 4.23 4.23.1 PERMANENT STRUCTURE JOINTS General Expansion joints, contraction joints or other permanent structure joints shall be provided in the positions and constructed and sealed with waterproofing materials as detailed in the Drawings. All exposed vertical sides of columns and walls and underside of beams at expansion joints shall be covered with 0.7mm thick aluminium cover strips fixed with masonry nails at 300mm c/c or otherwise as shown in the Drawings. The installation method and the selection, mixing, application and curing of all joint waterproofing materials shall comply with the Drawings and the manufacturers' recommendation. Alternative joint waterproofing materials may be used subject to the approval of the SO Rep. Submit supporting technical information, test reports and samples of the proposed waterproofing materials. All waterproofing materials used at public access areas shall be protected with non-shrink grout. 4.23.2 Waterstops Waterstops shall be as specified in the Drawings and shall be installed and butt jointed according to BS 5337 and the Manufacturers' recommendations. Waterstops shall be securely positioned in the formwork to prevent displacement during concreting. 4.23.3 Sealing Compound (Permanent Structural Joint) For permanent structural joints, sealing compound for external use shall be one of the three generic types namely polyurethane, polysulphide and silicone. They shall comply with ASTM C9320 or other approved. 4.23.4 Preformed Flexible Strip Sealant Preformed flexible strip sealant shall comply with the following requirements : (a) (b) (c) (d) 4.23.5 it shall only be used in horizontal joint and be subject to compression throughout its length; Good adhesion; Water resistant; Non-staining
Bitumen/Rubber Cold Applied Membrane Bitumen/rubber cold applied membrane shall comply with the following requirements : (a) (b) Min. joint movement capacity of 10% of joint width at 25C; Resistant to dilute acids and alkali.
4.23.6
Hot-Poured Rubber/Bitumen Sealing Compound Hot-poured rubber/bitumen sealing compound shall comply with BS 2449.
Ugdg Spec TS 4-19/22 4.23.7 Bituminous Sheeting Bituminous sheeting with fibre shall comply with the following requirements : (a) (b) (c) (d) Resistant to lime water (no visual effect after two weeks immersion); Max. water absorption of 10% of dry weight; 2 Min. tensile strength of 50 kg/cm ; and Ozone and ultra-violet resistance.
The strip shall be applied to the joints by burning and affixing on each side of joint to a width not less than 70mm leaving the middle part free to take any movement at the joint without damage. 4.23.8 Neoprene Bearing Pads Neoprene bearing pads shall comply with the following requirements : (a) (b) (c) 4.23.9 Shore À' hardness of 60 5 at 25C; Min. rupture strength of 105 kg/cm2; and Min. rupture elongation of 300%.
Polyethylene Foam Backing Rods Polyethylene foam backing rods used as mortar stops in panel joints shall have the following properties: (a) (b) (c) (d) (e) (f) Min. compressibility of 75% of original volume at 25C; excellent resilient properties; 3 3 Density between 35 kg/m and 45 kg/m ; totally resistant to common acids, lubricants and detergents; totally resistant to water infiltration by capillary action; and suitable for up to 70C.
4.24
APPARATUS The Contractor shall provide the following apparatus for use for all Works on the Site : (a) (b) Concrete slump test apparatus complying with SS 78 or flow test apparatus complying with BS 1881 : Part 105. One set of the apparatus shall be provided for each concreting location; Steel or cast iron moulds complete with rod in accordance with SS 78 for casting 150mm concrete test cubes and 100mm mortar or grout test cubes. A minimum number shall be provided such that no stripping of cube is required prior to 24 hours setting and hardening period; Three measuring cylinders of 250ml capacity, graduated to measure to the nearest 2.0 ml, for determination of silt content (field settling method); An approved apparatus for measuring moisture content in fine aggregate; One digital concrete rebound hammer equipped with an electronic transducer which converts the rebound of the hammer into an electric signal and displays it in the selected stress unit; One surveying level or theodolite complete with the necessary accessories; One electronic calculator with statistical functions; One 5.5m measuring tape; and One spirit level.
(c) (d) (e) (f) (g) (h) (i)
Ugdg Spec TS 4-20/22 4.25 MASS AND LEAN CONCRETE Mass and lean concrete shall compose of cement, fine aggregates and coarse aggregates in the nominal ratio by weight of 1:2:4. Where, however, a denser and more workable concrete can be produced by a variation in the ratio of fine aggregate to that of coarse aggregates, this ratio may be varied within the limits 1 to 1.5 and 1 to 3, provided that the weight of fine and coarse aggregates, each measured separately, should nevertheless equal the sum of the volumes of fine and coarse aggregates appropriate to the nominal mix. The concrete shall be mixed as specified in this Section. Reinforced concrete shall not be laid directly onto earth surfaces. A blinding coat of 40mm minimum thickness of lean concrete shall be laid on well prepared firm ground before any reinforcement is placed in position. 4.26 4.26.1 CEMENT MORTAR AND GROUT General For structural purposes, cement mortar shall compose of one part cement to one part sand, mixed with water so that water-cement ratio does not exceed 0.4 by weight and cement grout shall compose of cement and water-cement ratio between 0.4 and 0.6, or such other proportions as shall be directed by the SO Rep. 4.26.2 Grouting For Prestressed Concrete Ducts As specified in Clause 7.15 "Grouting". 4.26.3 Precast Concrete Joints Non-load bearing joints between precast concrete components and adjoining structures shall be filled with appropriate grout and/or mortar protected by proprietary sealants and backing rod. They shall be waterproof. Load bearing joints and connection shall be grouted, mortar packed or concreted. The respective mix design shall be free of lime and chloride. They shall be durable, waterproof, non-shrink and possess strength equal or higher than that of precast concrete. Curing for at least 3 days shall be provided. Designed mixes shall be submitted to the SO Rep for approval. 4.26.4 Testing Method and Compliance for Load Bearing Grout and Mortar The method of sampling and testing prescribed in BS 4551 shall be adopted. The compressive strength shall be determined by crushing test or ASTM C109. For each casting day and for each grade of grout or mortar, three samples shall be taken from three separate batches. A minimum of one cube shall be cast from each sample for testing at 28 days. The compliance of the 28 day strength shall be judged, based on the average compressive strength of 3 cubes from 3 samples taken on the same day, in accordance with the strength requirement specified in the Drawings. In the event of non-compliance, the SO Rep shall exercise its rights under Clause 1.10 "Nuisance and Irregularities" to impose charges against the Contractor. If the average compressive strength of the 3 cubes is less than the design strength, the quality of the substandard concrete shall be estimated by carrying out appropriate tests on hardened concrete in the structure. In the event that such tests are not practical, the SO Rep may decide not to carry out any test. 4.27 FOUNDATIONS All reinforced concrete footings and pile caps shall be constructed in accordance with the Drawings and to the exact depths required. Provide, maintain and remove any necessary planking and strutting, sheetpiling or cofferdams, and by pumping or other approved means keep the excavations free from water. In the case of loose or disturbed ground, the bottom of excavation for pile caps shall be well rammed and those for footings shall be excavated further to a sound layer. The whole work shall be approved by the SO Rep before it is covered with a blinding layer not less than 40mm thick. The binding layer to be used for pile caps and footings is lean concrete and grade 20 concrete respectively. The required cover of concrete under the reinforcement shall be entirely above the blinding layer. Excavation for all foundation work shall be carried out in accordance with Section 51 - "SETTING OUT, EXCAVATION AND DRAINLAYING".
Ugdg Spec TS 4-21/22 4.28 PILE CAPS Before commencing to construct pile caps, the Contractor shall employ a Registered Surveyor to check and verify the eccentricities and the cut-off levels of all piling work in the ground against pile eccentricity drawings provided and pile cap details in the Drawings, and shall notify the SO Rep in the event of any discrepancy. The Contractor shall straighten the steel reinforcement projecting above the piles for anchoring pile caps, carry out excavations, erect formwork and temporary timbering for the construction of pile caps.
4.29
LIFT PITS For lift pits below ground level, the concreting to the bottom and walls shall be carried out in one operation without construction joints and bolt holes up to the underside of ground beams and slabs. Forms ties used to connect opposite faces of formwork shall be cast-in steel speader ties. Concrete separators shall not be permitted. Where in the case water reducing admixture is used in the concrete mix, furnish information concerning the water reducing admixture for approval by the SO Rep prior to its use. Water reducing admixture shall be mixed with the concrete in accordance with the manufacturer's directions and to the satisfaction of the SO Rep. All external wall surfaces of lift pits shall be waterproofed with three coats of bitumen solution complying with BS 3416 or other cold applied bituminous coating as approved by the SO Rep. The concrete surface shall be clean and dry before application of the first coat, and ample time for each coat to dry shall be allowed. The total dry thickness of the coating shall be 0.6mm minimum.
4.30
REFUSE CHUTES All cast-in-situ reinforced concrete refuse chutes shall be constructed without bolt holes made through the chute walls. If such holes are unavoidable then they shall be completely grouted with cement mortar as specified in Clause 4.26 "Cement Mortar and Grout" or sealed and waterproofed by other approved means to prevent leakage, to the satisfaction of the SO Rep. The Contractor shall allow for casting refuse chute frames into refuse chute walls for fixing chute hoppers. Such frames shall be obtained from the same supplier of aluminium hoppers (refer to Section 18 "METALWORK").
4.31
FLOORS After initial set, the upper surface of cast-in-situ reinforce concrete floors shall be trowelled smooth with a steel float to true level and even surface. No screeding of any kind shall be applied to the floor slabs except where specified. Care shall be taken to ensure that the steel reinforcement is not displaced or lowered during trowelling. For areas which are to receive rendering or other finishes, the fresh concrete shall be struck off to a level or fall as required using a long timber trowel. The surface shall be densified by a jitterbug tamper or trowelling after the bleeding has stopped in order to eliminate settlement and plastic shrinkage cracks. Before it hardens, it shall be brushed with a stiff broom in one direction to give a rough and tidy surface.
4.32 4.32.1
ROOFS General Reinforced concrete roofs shall be constructed to fall as shown in the Drawings and finished with power trowelling, leaving the surface smooth and free from mortar droppings. The finished roof slab shall be cured immediately with an approved curing compound. Roofing access openings, 900mm x 900mm clear with 200mm upstanding kerbs, shall be constructed at the positions as shown in the Drawings. 100mm x 100mm mortar angle fillet shall be neatly provided around all upstands, pipe supports, RC stumps, walls and ventilating stacks. The finished concrete roof shall be protected against mortar droppings and damages by heavy objects during subsequent work on the roof.
Ugdg Spec TS 4-22/22 4.32.2 Watertightness and Water Stagnation Test After the completion of all structural work on the roof, the roof slab shall be tested for watertightness and to ensure no water stagnation. Where the reinforced concrete roof is to be protected by a watertight secondary roof, no water test or ponding test is to be conducted. The watertightness test shall be carried out by ponding with water to a minimum depth of 25mm for 24 hours. At the end of the watertightness test, the soffit of the slab especially the area around the pipes shall be examined for any dampness or leakage. Immediately after discharging the water off the roof, the top surface shall be examined for any water stagnation. Water collected beyond a depth of 5mm in any area is considered a stagnation. After any rectification, hacking and refilling around pipes installed after the first test, the localised area shall be retested at the Contractor's own costs and expenses for watertightness, water stagnation or both as deemed necessary by the SO Rep. 4.33 DRIPS Drips shall be formed along edges of soffit to concrete roof slabs, hoods, underside of balconies, cantilevered beams and slabs and other parts of building where rainwater is likely to adhere in drops. 4.34 TRANSPORTATION OF CHIPPING CONCRETE All ready mix concrete (9mm chipping only) and cement mortar in the Contract are to be transported to the required location using a mixer pump unit, that is actuated by air compressor or self-operating through robust flexible hoses. The mixer pump is subject to SO Rep's approval. 4.35 RC STRUCTURE CANNOT BE USED AS LIGHTING PROTECTION SYSTEM Reinforced concrete structure and foundation shall not be used as lightning conductors or earth electrodes. Lightning conductors shall not be embedded in any structural components and steel reinforcement shall not be used as part of the protection system.
SECTION 5/...
Ugdg Spec TS 5-1/2
SECTION 5
5.0
MECHANISED FORMWORK SYSTEM
5.1
TECHNICAL REQUIREMENTS The Contractor shall propose the system of mechanised formwork to be used in the contract, subject to approval of the SO Rep. The Contractor should use formwork that can produce good quality concrete surface finish so that no plastering is required to the concrete surface. Where in the opinion of the SO Rep the concrete surface finish is poor, the Contractor shall make good by plastering.
5.2
CONTRACTOR APPLYING FOR APPROVAL OF MECHANISED FORMWORK SYSTEM Submit the following details on the mechanised formwork system to the SO Rep for approval : (a) 3 complete sets of detailed drawings (including safety features) with structural calculations for the mechanised formwork system. They shall be checked and endorsed by the Contractor's Professional Engineer and shall be submitted prior to the completion of the pilecaps of the block in which the mechanised formwork system is to be used. The Professional Engineer shall satisfy himself that the building structure is able to resist the load imposed by the mechanised formwork system. The approval of the SO Rep shall not relieve the Contractor and the Professional Engineer from any liability should it be subsequently found that the design of the mechanised formwork system is inadequate, or its erection incorrect, or the material used for its construction defective. Under such circumstance, the SO Rep reserves the right to take appropriate actions as he deems necessary. (b) Total weight of the mechanised formwork system (including self-weight of the formwork, bracing, supports, safety provisions and accessories). Cycle Time The mechanised formwork system shall make provision to begin after the second storey is cast. (d) (e) (f) Number of sets of wall and table forms required for each block. Breakdown of concrete contact area with the mechanised formwork per block in m Machinery The type of machinery to be provided for the mechanised formwork system and also the purpose of such machinery.
2.
(c)
Ugdg Spec TS 5-2/2
5.3
TECHNICAL BACK-UP SERVICES Ensure that the mechanised formwork system supplier provides adequate technical back-up services, including the following : (a) (b) (c) Instruction manuals giving a detailed work sequence. Training programme for the Contractors' technical staff. On-site assistance for at least the first 4 storeys of construction.
5.4
SAFETY PROVISION Ensure that all safety devices, such as barricades and walkway are incorporated in the mechanised formwork system to the satisfaction of the SO Rep.
SECTION 6/...
Ugdg Spec TS 6-1/22
SECTION 6
6.0
SEMI-PRECAST CONSTRUCTION
6.1
PRECAST CONCRETE COMPONENTS
6.1.1
Area of Usage Precast concrete components shall be used in areas as shown on the Architectural and Structural Drawings.
6.1.2
Surface Finishes External surface treatments or finishes of the precast concrete components shall be approved by the SO Rep.
6.1.3
Suppliers The precast concrete components shall be obtained from suppliers approved by the SO Rep. The list of approved suppliers is posted at the following websites: kmo.eptc.com.sg or hdbuilders.com. The Contractor shall submit the names of his suppliers, the written contractual agreements between themselves and the suppliers and the quantities to be supplied by each supplier for the precast concrete components within four weeks from the date of the Letter of Acceptance. The contractual agreements submitted shall include detailed breakdown of precast component prices. The Contractor shall not be permitted to change their suppliers without the written consent of the SO Rep.
6.2
STRUCTURAL PRECAST CONCRETE
6.2.1
Design Structural precast concrete components shall be designed in accordance with CP 65. The Contractor may propose alternative design subject to the written approval of the SO Rep. Joints, connections and sealants shall be designed for protection against water, weather, corrosion and fire so as to provide continued water and weather tightness and structural integrity of the buildings. The positions and capacities of all lifting and erection inserts of precast concrete components shall be carefully considered for all loads induced by manufacturing, lifting, handling, storage, transportation and erection. A minimum safety factor of 3 shall be used to design the lifting and erection inserts, lifting hooks and erection devices. Submit precasting and erection techniques for precast concrete components including structural calculations and details for the lifting and erection devices. Should the load bearing joints and connections be grouted, mortar-packed or concreted, submit respective mix design for approval by the SO Rep and carry out tests in the mix design in accordance with appropriate code or proprietary requirements. Methods of installation adopted shall ensure that the joints and connections can be fully grouted, mortar-packed or concreted. Non-load bearing joints between precast concrete components and adjoining structures shall be filled with appropriate grout and/or mortar protected by proprietary sealants and backing rod. The SO Rep may, at his absolute discretion, instruct the Contractor to apply special coatings or epoxy bonding compounds to connections and joints of precast concrete components, be it welded, bolted, dowelled, grouted, mortar-packed or concreted.
Ugdg Spec TS 6-2/22
6.2.2
Drawings Submit the following Drawings for the approval of the SO Rep within one month from the date of the Employer's Letter of Acceptance of Tender : (A) Shop Drawings (a) Precast Concrete Components with Shop Drawings Where in the case shop Drawings (denoted by the words shop drawings in the drawing title) for precast concrete components are incorporated in the Drawings, the Contractor need not submit shop Drawings for approval. Not withstanding the incorporation of such shop Drawings in the Drawings, the Contractor shall be required to check and/or ensure the following : (i) That the details for such precast concrete components are adequate and suitable for the Works and that there is no discrepancy. The Contractor shall be responsible and bear all costs and expenses for all rejections, reinstatements and reproductions of such precast concrete components directly and/or indirectly resulting from and/or out of any inadequacy, unsuitability and discrepancy in the Drawings. That the handling techniques for precasting, demoulding, storage and transportation adopted shall not over-stress such precast concrete components. It is the responsibility of the Contractor to provide at his own cost and expense, any additional steel reinforcement bars required for his handling techniques to ensure that such precast components are not damaged or over-stressed during handling; Ensure the adequacy and suitability of the size, position and details of lifting and erection inserts and any additional reinforcement bars required for handling and erection purposes shall be submitted to the SO Rep for approval prior to commencement of the production works; That the minimum concrete strength of precast concrete components required for handling, demoulding, storage, transportation and erection are checked prior to the commencement of production works.
(ii)
(iii)
(iv)
(b)
Precast Concrete Components without Shop Drawings Where in the case shop drawings for precast concrete components are not incorporated in the Drawings, the Contractor shall submit shop drawings for such precast components for approval by the SO Rep. The shop drawings shall include the following details : (i) The size, position and details of lifting and erection inserts and reinforcement details; The handling techniques for precasting, storage and transportation; The minimum concrete strength for precast components required for handling, demoulding, storage, transportation and erection.
(ii) (iii)
(B)
Mould Drawings Mould drawings showing : (i) (ii) Surface treatments of moulds for casting and lifting operation. Methods of concrete consolidation and compaction such as external vibration, internal vibration, table vibration, adjusted slump and mix method. Methods of curing, demoulding and storage of precast components.
(iii)
Ugdg Spec TS 6-3/22
6.2.2
Drawings (Contd) (C) Erection Drawings Erection drawings showing : (i) (ii) Erection sequences and handling requirements. Calculation and position and sizes of backers/shims, temporary props, bracings and their installation method clearly shown. Calculation and details of method of positioning and supporting unconnected precast components including temporary bracings, struts and props.
(iii)
(D)
Waterproofing joint Drawings Procedure and sequence of installation of sealants on the Sites in their relation to erection sequence and handling requirements.
6.3
MANUFACTURING
6.3.1
Concrete Batching Plant Before operating a concrete batching plant, the Contractor shall engage a Professional Engineer (PE) to check the connecting devices between parts/components and the condition of parts/components of the concrete batching plant. Any Defect found in the checking on the concrete batching plant shall be rectified immediately. The Contractor shall maintain the concrete batching plant in good working order at all times on the Site. Document and keep all records of checkings in the site office for inspection by the SO Rep upon request. The concrete batching plant shall be checked once in every six months by the Contractors Professional Engineer. Any Defect found in the checkings shall be rectified immediately.
6.3.2
Shop Drawings Precast concrete components shall be produced in accordance with approved structural Drawings. Shop Drawings shall be based upon the structural Drawings and shall be submitted to the SO Rep for approval as per clause 6.2.2 "Drawings".
6.3.3
Moulds Check and ensure that all moulds, regardless of materials, conform to the shape, lines and dimensions of the precast concrete components to be produced. The moulds should be sufficiently rigid to produce the casting tolerances and finishes specified. Rubber seal or equivalent shall be used in all horizontal and vertical mould joints to prevent leakage of mortar or cement paste, and should be designed to prevent damage to the concrete from : (a) (b) (c) restraint as the concrete shrinks; the stripping operation when the precast components is lifted from the mould; or dimensional changes due to demoulding of prestressed components.
High quality rubber mat shall be used for carrying the tiles of precast components with tile finish.
Ugdg Spec TS 6-4/22
6.3.4
Manufacturing Requirements Where structural precast concrete are included in the works, submit proposals for marking identification and date of casting of each precast concrete component for the approval of the SO Rep prior to the commencement of manufacturing. Surface finish requirements shall be consistent with the standard achieved by the use of high quality concrete and properly designed forms or moulds having rigid and smooth surfaces. Such surface finishes including surface airholes shall be to the satisfaction of the SO Rep. Where tile finish is specified, check and ensure uniform width and depth of the groove between the tiles which shall be on the same plane. The external face of space adding item shall be coated with white paint at the factory before transporting to site. The technical requirements of the paint shall comply with Section 23. Prior to mass production of precast concrete components, produce at least one sample of each type of precast concrete component for approval by the SO Rep. The approved sample panel shall be displayed at the precasting yard. The approved sample panel shall be used as the yardstick for the minimum standard and quality to be achieved for all precast panels. The SO Rep may at his absolute discretion require more sample panels to be produced for his approval. Check and ensure that the approved sample panels are not damaged on display. The Contractor shall provide remedial work at his own costs and expenses to precast concrete components that are not satisfactorily finished as decided by the SO Rep. Gross variation from the specified finish may cause rejection of the precast concrete components and the Contractor shall replace the precast components at his own costs and expenses. Allow for the incorporation of all requirements of all trades whose work requires blockouts, recesses, notches, embedded metal work or any other items affecting the precast concrete components involved. All reinforcements shall be positioned in the moulds with the prescribed concrete covers as shown on the Structural Drawings. Approval shall be sought from the SO Rep if such work cannot be incorporated into the precast concrete components. Aluminium window frames, may either be installed on site or cast-in together with the precast concrete components. In all cases the aluminium window frames shall be protected from dirt, grout and other deleterious material by wrapping with self adhesive protective tape. There shall be adequate lapping over the joints of two protective tapes. The protective tapes shall completely adhere to the frame and provide protection to it. In the case of aluminium window frame being installed on site, check and ensure : (i) the safety and integrity of the aluminium window frame and that no part of the precast concrete is hacked; the watertightness between the aluminium window frame and precast concrete component.
(ii)
6.3.5
Manufacturing Tolerances Tolerances for manufacturing and casting of precast components shall be as follows unless otherwise instructed by the SO Rep : (a) Position tolerances for cast-in items measured from datum line locations as shown on approved Drawings : Inserts, bolts, pipe sleeves etc Flashing relets, at edge of panel Reglets for glazing gaskets Groove width for glazing gaskets Electrical outlets : : : : : 10mm 6mm 3mm 2mm 13mm
Ugdg Spec TS 6-5/22
6.3.5
Manufacturing Tolerances (Contd) (b) Position tolerances for placement of reinforcement : Reinforcing bars and meshes shall be located within 12mm of the position as shown on the approved shop Drawings, but in casting, no reinforcement shall encroach on the specified minimum cover. (c) Casting tolerances the overall height and width measured at the face adjacent to the mould when cast shall be as follows : 3m or under > 3m - 6m : : : : : : : : : : : 3mm +3mm -5mm +3mm -6mm 2mm per 3m +2mm per 150mm depth of side mould +6mm -3mm +6mm 3mm per 3m or 6mm total whichever is greater
> 6m - 9m
Each additional 3m Angular deviation of plane Thickness
Openings (cast within one member) Out of square (difference in length of two diagonal measurements)
The casting tolerances noted above should be compatible with the installation requirements of precast concrete components, which may have attachment of sash, door frames, window frames, louvres sunshades and other materials. (d) After casting tolerances - the bowing and warpage shall be as follows : Without intermediate support dimension : 1 panel 240 1 panel 360
With intermediate support dimension
6.3.6
Inspection of Manufacturing The SO Rep shall have the discretion to inspect the manufacturing plant and the precast concrete components at all times. If the inspection is not conducted at the plant, this shall not relieve the Contractor from the responsibility in manufacturing an acceptable product, and the SO Rep shall at his liberty reject any precast components on the Site not complying with design requirements even though no plant inspection has been conducted.
6.4
HANDLING The precast concrete components shall be handled and transported in a way consistent with their shapes and design in order to avoid excessive stresses or damages. Precast concrete components shall be lifted only at appropriate points shown on the production and erection Drawings.
Ugdg Spec TS 6-6/22
6.4
HANDLING (CONTD) Check and allow for : (a) (b) (c) (d) adequacy of design reinforcement to resist handling stresses; provision of additional reinforcement if required; exact number, size and location of lifting inserts or other devices; and Proper supports and support locations for storage and transportation.
Allow for developing handling techniques to ensure that all precast concrete components are successfully fabricated, delivered and installed without causing structural damage, detrimental cracking, architectural impairment, or permanent distortion.
6.5
STORAGE The storage area shall be adequate to permit easy access and ready for handling of the stored precast concrete components. It shall have a clean, hard, level and well-drained surface to permit well-organised storage, and to prevent warpage, bowing, chipping, cracking, discolouration, staining or soiling of the precast components. No precast concrete component shall be placed on the ground, they shall be stored with due protection from staining or physical damage.
6.6
ERECTION
6.6.1
Inspection of Precast Concrete Components All precast concrete components shall be inspected and approved by the SO Rep before erection and after installation. Any unauthorised erection or installation work may be rejected and necessary action taken against the Contractor. Prepare, install and check that the precast components are within the specified erection tolerances prior to calling for inspection and approval by the SO Rep. After the inspection of erected precast components, the SO Rep shall be at liberty to reject any precast components on the Sites not complying with design or specification requirements. No permanent jointing or connection between a precast concrete component and other precast concrete components or in-situ structures shall be carried out without the prior approval of the SO Rep.
6.6.2
Quality Control Only competent workers who are properly trained to handle and erect precast concrete components should be employed. Methods of erection shall be such as to avoid soiling, cracking, chipping and damage to built-in items. Only minor chipping and spalling may be repaired by patching up at the job site after installation, provided this is done to the satisfaction of the SO Rep. Check and ensure that the accuracy of location of all bearing surfaces and all anchorages for precast concrete components. Any deviations from the Structural Drawings noted shall be corrected prior to the start of erection. Bearing surfaces, notches, bolts, connection angles or plates shall be checked as to level, line and grade. Whenever inserts or lifting hooks are used for erection purposes, their location shall be checked for compliances with the location as specified on the Structural Drawings. If slings are used, the precast concrete components shall be marked so that the slings are placed at the proper locations.
Ugdg Spec TS 6-7/22
6.6.2
Quality Control (Cont'd) Field conditions shall be determined by actual measurement so that precast concrete components and joint sealants installed satisfy design or specification requirements and are within the specified erection tolerances. As and when instructed by the SO Rep, the precast concrete components shall be cleaned and repaired after installation. Ensure that good construction practice is adhered to while the precast concrete components are on the Site and bracing or props shall be provided to maintain the required position, stability and alignment of precast concrete components prior to permanent jointing or connection. Each precast concrete component shall be individually adjusted and accurately positioned within the erection tolerances. Horizontal and vertical joints shall be kept correctly aligned and positioned, and uniform joint width should be maintained as erection progresses. Adjustments or changes in connections, which could induce additional stresses should be reviewed and approved by the SO Rep. Only qualified welders shall be employed for welded connections.
6.6.3
Defects and Repair Ensure that no defective precast concrete component shall be delivered. The decision by the SO Rep to reject defective precast concrete components shall be final. The Contractor shall replace the rejected precast concrete components at his own costs and expenses. The rejection criteria shall be made on engineering basis as well as visual appearances. Damaged precast components shall be either patched up or otherwise corrected to the satisfaction of the SO Rep. Method of repairs shall be submitted to the SO Rep for approval before the commencement of repairing work. Major repairs should not be attempted until an engineering evaluation is made to determine whether the precast component will be structurally sound. In the case where localised defective tiles are detected, such defective tiles shall be replaced in accordance with the following suggested method : Two 1mm diameter copper wires shall be glued to the reverse side of each tile with epoxy resin and left to set. Similarly, copper wires shall be fixed 25mm into the concrete surface with epoxy resin. Mortar or cement paste shall then be applied. The tiles shall be tied to the concrete and set in place. In-situ pull out test shall be conducted as and when directed by the SO Rep. All repaired precast concrete component shall be architecturally and structurally acceptable to the satisfaction of the SO Rep.
6.6.4
Erection Tolerance For correct performance and appearance of the structures, check and ensure that the precast components are located in the centre of their theoretical location on the building and adjusted to accommodate adjacent components, proper joint width, and alignment with adjacent precast or in-situ members. Unless otherwise instructed by the SO Rep, the permissible erection tolerances shall be as follows : (a) Distance Between Edge of Panels at Joint For panels with dimensions (normal to the joint) up to 6m For each 3m increment in excess of 6m
: :
5mm 2mm
Ugdg Spec TS 6-8/22
6.6.4
Erection Tolerance (Cont'd) (b) Joint Taper (Panel Edges not Parallel) Per linear 300mm of joint Minimum allowable Maximum for entire length (c) Panel Alignment Alignment of horizontal and vertical joints Jog in alignment of matching edges (d) Location of Openings In precast concrete components (e) Verticality of Wall Entire height of building 1st to 4th floor Each storey height (f) Parapet Alignment at Access Balcony Deviation in plan from straight line parallel to specified linear building line : Any interval less than 6m Any 50m length Coping level : Any interval less than 6m Any 50m length (g) Verticality of Column Verticality tolerance for columns shall be similar to that for walls. (h) Column Alignment at 1st Storey In between columns up to 6m apart Entire length of building : : 12mm 30mm : : 5mm 25mm : : 1mm per metre 25mm : : : 35mm 25mm 10mm : 6mm : : 3mm 3mm : : : mm 2mm 9mm
6.6.5
Interface Between Existing And New Structures All new precast components shall be properly aligned with the existing building alignment as shown in the Drawings. All joints shall be kept straight, neat, consistent and to the required centres. Finished faces shall be levelled to the satisfaction of the SO Rep. Surfaces shall be free of loose paint and foreign matter, grease oil, mastic and wax, etc. The Contractor shall ensure water tightness.
Ugdg Spec TS 6-9/22
6.7
PRECAST PRESTRESSED CONCRETE PLANK SPECIFICATIONS Provide and install precast prestressed concrete planks as shown : (a) Design Criteria and Materials for Precast Prestressed Concrete Plank Specifications Low slump concrete shall be used for the production of precast prestressed concrete plank. The strength of concrete at 28 days shall be 40 N/mm2, and at transfer shall not be less than 25 N/mm2. The use of calcium chloride, ions or other salts is strictly prohibited. Any deviation in the strength of concrete involving a redesign shall be undertaken by a Professional Engineer and submitted to the SO Rep for approval. The minimum grade of concrete for the cast-in-situ structural topping shall be 40 N/mm2 and the minimum thickness shall be 60mm. The prestressed concrete planks shall have a minimum thickness of 65mm. Any variation on these requirements involving a redesign shall be undertaken by a Professional Engineer and submitted to the SO Rep for approval. Submit for approval of the SO Rep the joint details as well as the allowable strands slippage. (b) Manufacturing Tolerances (i) (ii) (iii) (iv) Length Cross-sectional dimensions (width or depth) Flange thickness Horizontal alignment (sweep) : : : : +3mm 1mm 1mm 1.25mm or 1/1,000 of overall length, whichever is greater. +2.5cm of centre line location shown on Drawings. 2mm 3mm
(v)
Position of anchors and inserts
(vi) (vii) (viii) (ix) (x)
Position of strands End squareness
: :
Blockouts : 10mm of centre-line location shown on the Drawings. Camber deviation at mid-span from design : 5mm from designed camber
Difference in soffit level at mid-span between adjacent members or between a precast prestressed concrete plank and an adjacent reinforced concrete slab after installation shall not be more than 3mm. Position of reinforcement designed Position of handling device : : 10mm primarily for connections. 20mm
(xi) (xii) (c)
The following requirements shall be complied with : (i) (ii) Standard underside shall be smooth, dense with no surface holes. Standard top side can have minor chips and spalls but no major imperfections, honeycomb or Defects will be allowed. The top surface shall be such that it is suitable for composite action with cast-in-situ structural topping. Exposed vertical ends shall be sawn or formed with smooth finish.
(iii)
6.7
PRECAST PRESTRESSED CONCRETE PLANK SPECIFICATIONS (CONTD) (c) The following requirements shall be complied with : (iv) Major openings or holes shall be provided in accordance with Structural or Architectural Drawings. These and any other smaller openings made in the field shall be to the approval of the SO Rep. Patching-up will be acceptable provided the structural adequacy of the product and the final appearance are not impaired. Prior to any patching-up work, submit proposal for the execution of such work for approval by the SO Rep. In any event, all patching up work shall be carried out to the approval of the SO Rep. Cast-in structural inserts, bolts and plates as detailed in the Drawings.
(v)
(vi) (d)
Product Delivery, Storage and Handling (Factory) (i) Precast prestressed concrete plank shall be lifted and supported during manufacturing, stockpiling, transporting and erection operation only at the lifting or supporting points, or both, as shown in the Drawings or shop Drawings and with approved lifting devices which shall have a minimum safety factor of 3. All transportation, site handling and erection shall be performed with acceptable equipment and methods and by experienced personnel. All precast prestressed units shall be stored off ground. All precast prestressed units shall be so placed that identification marks can be read. Precast prestressed members shall be so stacked that lifting devices are accessible and undamaged. The use of upper member of a stacked tier as storage area for shorter length of precast members or heavy equipment is strictly prohibited.
(ii)
(iii) (iv) (v)
(vi)
(e)
Erection Where precast prestressed concrete planks are included in the Works, their erection shall comply with the following: (i) Precast members shall be lifted by means of suitable lifting devices at points provided for such purposes. Temporary shoring or bracing shall be provided and they shall have a minimum load factor of 2.0 times the dead load plus construction loads. Members shall be properly aligned and levelled as required by the approved shop drawings. Variations between adjacent members shall be reasonably levelled out by jacking, loading or any other feasible methods acceptable to the SO Rep. Field welding shall be carried out by qualified welders using equipment and materials compatible to the base materials. Precast prestressed concrete members may be drilled or 'shot', provided no contact is made with the prestressing strands. Any spalling resulting therefrom shall be repaired to the satisfaction of the SO Rep. Final inspection and acceptance of erected precast prestressed concrete members shall be made by the SO Rep to verify conformity with plans and the Specifications.
(ii)
(iii) (iv)
(v)
6.8
PRECAST PRESTRESSED HOLLOW CORE SLAB SPECIFICATIONS Provide and install precast prestressed hollow core slab as shown in the Drawings. The requirements for precast prestressed hollow core slab shall be the same as those specified for the precast prestressed concrete plank except for the following : (a) Manufacturing Tolerance Position of void : Vertical Horizontal 3mm 3mm
(b)
Erection (i) (ii) Core plugs shall be inserted before erection; All ends of hollow core slabs shall be seated with approved concreting materials to the satisfaction of the SO Rep.
6.9
SUBMISSION AND APPROVAL OF SUPPLY AND ERECTION SCHEDULES Submit respective supply and erection schedules detailing the type and quantity of the precast concrete components to the SO Rep for approval as soon as the construction site is handed over to the Contractor. Adhere strictly to the approved respective delivery and erection schedules.
6.10
MATERIALS FOR PRECAST CONCRETE WORKS All materials used in the precast concrete works shall be in accordance with Section 4 "STRUCTURAL CONCRETE".
6.11
STRUCTURAL PRECAST AND CAST IN-SITU CONCRETE WORKS Section 4 "STRUCTURAL CONCRETE" shall apply.
6.12
WATER AND WEATHER TIGHTNESS
6.12.1
Approval of Materials (i) The Contractor may submit his alternative proposal, endorsed by his Professional Engineer, on joint sealants to the SO Rep for approval within two months from the date of the Employer's Letter of Acceptance of Tender. The proposal shall include technical information, samples, test reports, and proven performance records of the joint sealants. Batch testing of sealant compounds delivered to site shall be carried out as directed by the SO Rep at the Contractor's own costs and expenses. The SO Rep reserves the right to reject the use of any type of sealants if their performance is deemed to be unsatisfactory. The use of membranes and admixtures for grout, mortar or concrete for improving water and weather tightness may be approved by the SO Rep. All sealant materials used at public accessible areas such as access balcony, stair-cases, stair-landings etc shall be protected with non-shrink mortar or grout. Liquid membranes, if used, shall have specified minimum thickness and width for water and weather tightness.
6.12.1
Approval of Materials (Contd) (ii) Performance of Waterproofing Materials Waterproofing materials for joints as specified in Section 4 "STRUCTURAL CONCRETE" shall apply. (iii) Application of Sealant Materials Ensure that joints and joint sealants of precast concrete structures are correctly installed, so as to provide continuous water and weather tightness of buildings with minimum maintenance. Joints surface preparation, primers, sealant compounds and backup materials shall be installed to give the highest standard of materials and workmanship; these should conform to all applicable specifications. Whenever possible, sealants shall be applied with a power-actuated gun. The gun should have nozzle of proper size and shall provide sufficient pressure to completely fill up the joints. All compound smears, primers, solvents etc used in caulking and sealing work, should be immediately and entirely removed from adjacent materials as the work progresses. (iv) Joint Width and Sealant Depth After Installation The joint width will depend on the dimensions of panel and its coefficient of expansion. The maximum joint widths and maximum expansions for the common sealants shall be : Maximum Movement in Tension or Compression (%) 10 15 to 25 20 25 25 25
Type of Sealant
Maximum Joint Width (mm) 20 20 20 20 20 20
Butyl Acrylic One Part Polyurethane Two Parts Polyurethane One Part Polysulphide Two Parts Polysulphide
The normal design joint widths shall be 10, 14 or 15 as reflected in the Structural Drawings. For joints up to 13mm wide, the depth of the sealant shall be equal to the width. For joints over 13mm wide, the depth shall be equal to one-half the width, but not less than 13mm. Sealants installed shall not be less than 6mm wide or 6mm deep. (v) Sealant Backup Fillers Backup fillers shall be used in joints to control the depth of the sealant, to facilitate tooling of the sealant, and to serve as a bond breaker which prevents the bonding to the back of the joint. Acceptable backup materials shall be those which compress and respond to movements. These include the rod type of sponge materials such as foamed polyethylene, polystyrene, polyurethane, polyvinyl chloride or synthetic rubber. The backup materials shall also be compatible and non-staining to the selected sealants. (vi) Joint Preparation Before sealing the joints, concrete surfaces shall be smooth, clean and free of all mortar dust or other contaminants that may affect adhesion. Sealant and primer shall be supplied by the same manufacturer, and the primer shall be as recommended for the particular sealant used.
6.12.2
Method and Frequency of Testing The joints in the superstructure shall be subjected to tests for water and weather-tightness. Internal floors shall be tested prior to any tiling work. Testing is to be conducted only when all pipes, trunking, etc have been installed and the penetrations sealed, unless otherwise directed by the SO Rep. All joints shall be fully tested in the manner as described below : (i) Method of Testing (a)
Roofs of Space Adding Items (SAI), Lift Motor Rooms and other Structural Roofs
Water test shall be carried out on all roofs with precast joints by subjecting the whole roof to a minimum depth of 25mm of water after waterproofing work has been completed. The amount of water shall be replenished to maintain the required depth of water. The duration of the test shall not be less than 24 hours. No seepage of water from the ceiling below shall be permitted during the test or within the period of 24 hours after the completion of the test.
(b)
External Joints of SAI, Lift Shaft and other Precast Structures

A continuous jet of water shall be sprayed on the joint corresponding to 800 litres/hour from a water hose having a nozzle velocity of 2m/sec and a cone scatter of approximately 60o held at a distance of 1.2m from the wall surface under test. The duration of the test shall not be less than 2 hours. The hose should be placed with
the nozzle in line with the vertical joint and at a level of horizontal joints so that the jet cone will cover one vertical and two horizontal joints. The water shall not
seep into any part of the building during the test and for the subsequent 24 hours. (c) Refuse Chutes All refuse chutes shall be tested by spraying water from the top of refuse chutes. The water shall spray vertically downwards on all internal walls for a duration of 1 hour. No seepage of water from the joints shall be permitted during the test or within the period of 24 hours after the completion of the test. (d) Parapet The joints between access balcony parapets and floors shall be flooded with 25mm minimum depth of water for a period of one hour. The joints shall pass the test if no dampness or seepage occurs during the test or within one hour after the completion of test. (e) Floor Joints of Precast Slabs (Dwelling Units) The method of water testing described below is applicable to the precast prestressed hollow core slab and precast prestressed concrete plank with in-situ concrete topping. The floors of those units to be tested shall be flooded with water to a depth of 25mm for a period of one hour replenishing when necessary. The dwelling units shall pass the test if no dampness or seepage from the dwelling units under test occurs in any adjoining units or common area during the test or within one hour after the completion of test.
6.12.2
Method and Frequency of Testing (Cont'd) (i) Method of Testing (Cont'd) (f) Water Test for Kitchen/Bathroom Toilet Areas and New Balconies/Space-Adding Items (1) Carry out water test to the following items prior to any tiling work in accordance with the procedure described below : i. ii. iii. iv. (2) joints between floor slab and floor traps in bathroom and kitchen; joints between branching off for water closet and floor slab; floor joints between precast slabs and walls in bathroom and kitchen; and floor joints between precast slabs in the bathroom and kitchen.
The gratings to the floor traps in bathrooms, kitchens and new balconies/spaceadding items shall be blocked temporarily with polythene sheets or by other suitable means and the floor flooded with about 25mm depth of water at the highest level of the slab. The amount of water shall be maintained for four (4) hours, replenishing when necessary during which the underside of the floor slab shall be checked for signs of leaks. Towards the end of this test, the water will be allowed to drain off. During this process there shall be no sign of chokage in the system.
(g)
Access Balcony Floor The slab joints of balcony floor shall be tested as for the floor joints in the dwelling units in the foregoing sub-clause (e) "Floor Joints of Precast Slabs (Dwelling Units)".
(h)
Stairs and Half-Landings Joints to stairs and half-landings shall be subjected to localised flooding or wetting with running water for a duration of not less than one hour. No water shall seep through the joints during or within one hour after the completion of the test.
(i)
Floor Joint of Precast Roof Slab Test shall be carried out as specified in Clause 4.32.2 "Watertightness and Water Stagnation Test".
(j)
Horizontal Joints Between SAI/Lift Shaft/other Precast Structures and Existing Building
The water test shall be done prior to any tiling work. The joints shall be subjected to localised ponding with water to a depth of 25mm over an area of extent 200mm on either side of the joint where possible. The ponding of water shall be maintained for 1 hour, replenishing where necessary. The contractor shall ensure that proper bunding with plasticine or equivalent is used to contain the ponding water.
6.12.2
Method and Frequency of Testing (Cont'd) (ii) Frequency of Testing (a)
Roofs of Space Adding Items (SAI), Lift Motor Rooms and other Structural Roofs
All joints on the roof.
(b)
External Joints of SAI, Lift Shaft and other Precast Structures For SAI, 5 tests each covering one vertical joints and two horizontal joints shall be conducted for each block. For lift shaft and other precast structures, 1 tests covering one vertical joints and two horizontal joints shall be conducted for each individual stack. These tests shall be carried out at any locations as instructed
by the SO Rep. For each test which fails, two additional tests shall be carried out at joint locations as instructed by the SO Rep at the Contractor's own costs and expense.
(c)
Refuse Chute All refuse chute joints shall be tested.
(d)
Parapet All joints between access balcony parapets and floors shall be tested.
(e)
Floor Joints of Precast Slab (Dwelling Units) The frequency of water testing required is applicable to precast prestressed hollow core slab and precast prestressed concrete plank with in-situ concrete topping. Two dwelling units per floor shall be tested. The locations of these dwelling units to be tested shall be decided by the SO Rep. Water test by flooding the whole floor area of the selected dwelling units shall be carried out. For each dwelling unit which fails the water test, two additional dwelling units shall be selected by the SO Rep for testing at the Contractor's own costs and expenses.
(f)
Floor Joints at Kitchen Extension/Bathroom/Toilet Areas And New Balconies/Space-Adding Items All joints at kitchen extension/bathroom/toilet areas/new balconies/space-adding items shall be tested.
(g)
Access Balcony Floor, Stairs and Half-Landings All joints at new access balcony floors, stairs and half-landings shall be tested.
(h)
Floor Joint of Precast Roof Slab The whole area of all new roof slabs shall be tested.
(i)
Horizontal Joints Between SAI/Lift Shaft/other Precast Structures and Existing Building
For each new individual stack of extension to dwelling unit, 2 horizontal joints per stack shall be tested at the discretion of the SO Rep. For each new horizontal joint which fails the water test, two additional joints within the same stack in addition to the ones that failed shall be selected by the SO's Rep for testing at the Contractor's own expense.
6.12.2
Method and Frequency of Testing (Cont'd) (iii) Water Test Failure In the event of failure of a test on any joints, the Contractor shall rectify the joint and repeat the test. This procedure shall be repeated until the tests on the joints comply fully with the passing criteria. The costs and expenses of the extra water tests and rectification work shall be borne by the Contractor. Furthermore, the SO Rep reserves the right to reject the use of any waterproofing materials or joint details that perform unsatisfactorily during water tests at no cost to the Employer. Under no circumstances is the Contractor allowed to carry out his own water test without the presence of the SO Rep. All water test (specified or not specified) shall be witnessed and certified by the SO Rep as well as the Contractor's Representative.
6.13
HOMOGENEOUS MODULAR CLINKER TILES Homogeneous modular clinker tiles as external wall/slope finishes shall be casted together with precast concrete components as shown in the Drawings.
6.13.1
Submission and Approval of Samples Provide samples and patterns of clinker tiles to the SO Rep for approval prior to bulk ordering. Failure to provide the samples and/or patterns may render consignments of clinker tiles already received by the Contractor liable to rejection. Check and ensure that the samples and/or patterns submitted are representative of the clinker tiles to be provided.
6.13.2
Inspection and Rejection The SO Rep shall have the power to inspect, examine, check and test the clinker tiles either on the sites or at any factory, workshop or other place where the clinker tiles are being installed, or stored. The Contractor shall arrange to provide all such facilities and cooperation at his own costs and expenses as the SO Rep may require in this respects. All consignments of clinker tiles supplied shall be subject to inspection by the SO Rep. Any clinker tiles which do not comply with the requirements of the Specification and the samples and/or patterns submitted by the Contractor shall be rejected. The decision of the SO Rep shall be final and binding. In such case, the Contractor shall within a reasonable time as decided by the SO Rep, replace such rejected clinker tiles which shall in all respects be in accordance with the Specifications. Prior to the certification of completion of work, the Contractor shall replace the damaged clinker tiles at no extra cost to the Employer.
6.13.3
Quality Assurance Check and ensure that the quality of clinker tiles shall comply with SS 301. Provide all means to protect the clinker tile materials before, during and after installation. (a) Application of Cement/Sand Mortar & Clinker Tiles The tiles shall be laid on to the prepared rubber mould with the back pattern of the tile facing up in accordance with the tile pattern layout indicated in the architectural Drawings. The quality of the rubber mould shall be such that it can secure the tiles firmly in place and prevent displacement of the tiles during concreting.
6.13.3
Quality Assurance (Cont'd) (a) Application of Cement/Sand Mortar & Clinker Tiles (Cont'd) Prior to pouring the concrete over the entire arrangement of the tiles, the tiles shall be cleaned of deleterious materials that will affect adversely the bonding strength between the tile and the hardened concrete. The wet concrete to be used shall be mixed with water reducing agent strictly in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions. The water reducing agent shall be submitted to the SO Rep for approval prior to its use. Any concreting work carried out prior to approval by the SO Rep shall be rejected. (b) Workmanship and Surface Finish The clinker tiles to be used on the external wall faces of the precast concrete components shall be as shown in the Drawings. The colour of clinker tiles shall be as specified in the Drawings. The clinker tiles shall be free from cracks, crazing, voids, warpage, stones or particles of lime as would affect its safe use and its general appearance. The acceptance of texture and uniformity of colour of clinker tiles shall be decided by the SO Rep. When directed by the SO Rep, submit the technical information or reports of clinker tiles to be used. (c) Technical Specification Unless otherwise specified, all tests shall be conducted by PSB or other approved laboratory in accordance with SS 301:1985 and the Contractor shall be deemed to have allowed in his Contract Sum for the costs and expenses of such tests. The total number of test specimens required for testing items (i) to (iv) shall be 10. (i) Dimensional Tolerances Dimensions and their tolerances shall be as follows : Length Width Thickness : : : 190mm nominal 1% tolerance 90mm nominal 1% tolerance 12mm minimum, the average thickness of each specimen shall not deviate more than 10% from the average thickness of 10 test specimens.
(ii)
Straightness of Sides The maximum deviation from straightness, referred to the length of the side, shall not exceed 0.5%.
(iii)
Rectangularity The maximum deviation from rectangularity of each specimen shall not exceed 1.8% of the nominal dimension.
6.13.3
Quality Assurance (Contd) (c) Technical Specification (Contd) (iv) Flatness of Surface Centre curvature and warpage of the surface shall not exceed 0.5% of the length of the corresponding diagonal. The maximum edge curvature of each specimen shall not exceed 0.5% of the nominal dimension. (v) Surface Condition of Clinker Tiles The products when supplied shall be free from objectional surface blemishes such as projections, depressions, flakes and crazes. The test specimens shall form an area at least 1 sq m with a minimum of 30 tiles. (vi) Water Absorption On the average the water absorption capacity shall not exceed 3% by weight. Number of test specimens shall be 10. (vii) Modulus of Rupture The average value shall be at least 20 N/mm2 and minimum single value shall be 17 N/mm2. Number of test specimens shall be 7. (viii) Colourfastness and Lightfastness The Colour of the clinker tiles shall be light-fast. No colour change shall be detectable after exposure to ultra violet radiation for 28 days. Number of test specimens shall be 5. (ix) Acid Resistance and Alkali Resistance Macroscopic surface examination shall not reveal any visible change for acid resistance and alkali resistance tests. Number of test specimens shall be 5 for each solution. (x) Test for Adhesion Bond Strength Between Clinker Tiles and Concrete The test shall include both shear adhesion strength and tensile adhesion strength. 5 test specimens shall be sampled for each test. Test methods and procedures of shear adhesion strength shall comply with ASTM C482-78 except preparation of test samples. For preparation of test samples, clinker tiles shall be cut to 100mm x 90mm and placed on the base of the moulds with the back pattern facing upward followed by the pouring of wet concrete of similar concrete mix and water reducing agent to be used for the production of the precast concrete components. The load shall be applied perpendicular to the groove lines. The characteristic shear adhesion strength at 7 days shall not be less than 2 N/mm2. Tensile adhesive strength shall be conducted by SAC-SINGLAS accredited laboratory or other approved laboratory. The mean tensile adhesion strength at 7 days of each specimen shall not be less than 0.4 N/mm2.
6.13.4
Submission of Test Certificates for Approval Submit test certificates by SAC - SINGLAS accredited laboratory to cover the following items : (a) (b) (c) (d) (e) (f) (g) (h) (i) (j) Dimensional Tolerances Straightness of Sides Rectangularity Flatness of Surface Surface Condition of Clinker Tiles Water Absorption Modulus of Rupture Colourfastness and Lightfastness Acid Resistance and Alkali Resistance Test for Adhesion Bond Strength Between Clinker Tiles and concrete.
The test certificates shall be submitted to the SO Rep prior to bulk ordering. In addition, the Contractor shall send the clinker tiles for testing as and when required by the SO Rep. At the time of receiving clinker tiles from the supplier, check and satisfy himself that the clinker tiles comply with this Specifications, and, if so requested by the SO Rep, shall submit a certificate issued by the manufacturer that the clinker tiles as supplied in the shipment are of the best quality of its kind.
6.14
PRECAST FERROCEMENT SUNBREAKERS
6.14.1
General Unless otherwise specified, Clauses 6.1 to 6.6, 6.9 to 6.11 and 6.13 shall apply.
6.14.2
Scope Provide and install precast ferrocement sunbreakers complete with fixing accessories to the locations as shown in the Drawings.
6.14.3
Shop Drawings All structural and architectural Drawings on this provision shall only serve as a guide. Prepare and submit workshop Drawings on all relevant details including : (a) (b) (c) Reinforcement detail of sunbreaker panels in elevations and sections. Fixing and connection details. Necessary steel bolts, hooks or other approved materials required for handling and erection purposes. The size and location of these materials shall be clearly indicated in the details.
6.14.4
Materials (a) Cement Cement shall be as specified in Section 4 "Structural Concrete" (b) Fine Aggregates Fine aggregates shall be as specified in Section 4 "Structural Concrete".
6.14.4
Materials (Contd) (c) Water Water shall be as specified in Section 4 "Structural Concrete". (d) Steel Reinforcement Steel reinforcement shall be as specified in Section 4 "Structural Concrete". In addition, all welded mesh and steel bar used shall be galvanised in accordance with BS 729 (for bar diameter greater than 5mm) and BS 443 (for bar diameter less than 5mm) and other relevant approved standards. 1.5mm diameter at 25mm spacing wire mesh shall be galvanised with zinc coating of 65 gm/m2 minimum and shall have minimum proof stress of 300N/mm2. (e) Admixtures Admixtures shall be as specified in Section 4 "Structural Concrete".
6.14.5
Source Of Material The Welded Mesh Fabric and Fine Mesh Fabric shall be obtained from sources approved by the O Rep.
6.14.6
Technical Specifications (a) Mix Design The ferrocement sunbreaker panels shall be cast from a mix design which satisfy the following requirements : (i) (ii) (iii) (iv) minimum cement/sand ratio by weight of 1:2. maximum water/cement ratio by weight of 0.45. air dry density of hardened concrete (including steel) not less than 2,200 kg/m3. 28 days average cube strength from three test cubes shall be not less than 40N/mm2.
The amount of admixture in the mix design shall be in accordance with the Manufacturer's instruction. Before commencing the manufacture of precast ferrocement sunbreaker, submit a proposed mix design to the SO Rep for approval. (b) Other Properties (i) Initial Surface Absorption Test (ISAT) shall be carried out in accordance with BS 1881. The hardened panel shall have ISAT value less than that stipulated below : Time (min) ISAT Value (m1/m2/s) (ii) (iii) 10 0.100 30 0.055 60 0.035
Carbonation depth of hardened panel at installation shall be less than 3mm. Cover tolerance shall be such that no more than 3 points per section shall have a cover measurement of less than 5mm, but not less than 3mm.
(c)
Finishes The panel shall be cast on a steel base mould with the finish surface cast-face down. The finish surface is the external surface of the sunbreaker elevation where the tile and motifs are located.
(d)
Dimensional Tolerances All tolerances shall be as specified in Clauses 6.3.5 `Manufacturing Tolerances' and 6.6.4 "Erection Tolerance'"
6.14.6
Manufacturing Process The panel shall be cast flat on a steel base mould. The mortar shall be compacted by vibrators and the top surface shall be steel trowelled smooth. All reinforcement shall be galvanised and adequately supported with approved spacers. After setting and demoulding, the panels shall be marked and neatly stored with easy access and visibility to every piece. All panels must be properly cured. Seek the approval of the SO Rep with respect to the curing method, duration and facilities prior to actual production. The curing method shall be equivalent to 3 days of moist curing. Prior to commencement of the production, at least one sample of the panels shall be produced, erected and installed at site for the approval of the SO Rep. Make adjustments to the manufacturing process or equipment if so directed by the SO Rep. Maintain a record of daily work progress on a proper drawing showing where panels of a particular date of manufacture have been installed.
6.14.7
Quality Assurance Works (a) Inspection and Testing The Contractor shall provide facilities for the SO Rep to inspect the preparation and concreting work. On each concreting day, at least one sample shall be taken for casting of 3 cubes for compressive strength test (minimum size 100mm cube). Samples of welded steel fabric and steel bars shall be taken at the factory for the following tests : (i) (ii) strength testing and bar size measurement (SS 32) galvanized coating weight (BS 443)
The panels delivered and installed on site shall be subject to batch testing by an independent testing authority approved by the SO Rep, covering the following aspects : (a) (b) (c) (d) (e) (b) dimension measurement of panel cover measurement after cutting the panel density of the panel initial surface absorption test (BS 1881) Carbonation test after cutting the panel.
Sampling Rate Reinforcement shall be sampled at least once per contract, 3 bars of each size shall be taken per sampling as one sampling. Ferrocement sunbreaker panel shall be sampled once per 100 panels. If there are less than 100 panels in the contract, at least one sample shall be taken for testing.
6.14.7
Quality Assurance Works (Cont'd) (c) Passing Criteria Tests shall be conducted on the specimen sampled. If the specimen satisfies all requirements, the batch shall be deemed to satisfy the quality requirements. If the specimen fails any of the quality requirement, tests shall be conducted on another sample of specimen. If both sampled specimens fail to meet a specific requirement, the materials/products are deemed to have failed that specific requirement. If the average result of the two specimens deviates from the required level by 15% or more, the materials/products are deemed to have failed the specified requirement.
SECTION 7/...
Ugdg Spec TS 7-1/8
SECTION 7
7.0
PRESTRESSED CONCRETE
7.1
GENERAL The following specifications on Prestressed Concrete shall be treated as additional clauses to those required for Structural Concrete under Section 4.
7.2
CONCRETE MIX Only specially designed concrete mixes complying with the requirements specified in the Drawings shall be used for prestressed concrete work. Submit, for the approval of the SO Rep, details of the concrete mix proposals at least 6 weeks in advance of concreting work so as to allow strength tests from trial mixes to be made. Trial mixes shall be repeated until a satisfactory mix as regard to the cube strength and workability has been achieved. Once the SO Rep has approved the mix, it shall be used for that work and no departure shall be made from it either in properties of materials or in their relative proportions unless authorised by the SO Rep who may require further trial mixes to be made. All sampling and testing of constituent materials, fresh and hardened concrete, shall be carried out in accordance with the provisions of the appropriate Singapore or British Standard. If the strength of cube test results representing the prestressed concrete work fails to achieve the required strength, the Contractor shall be subject to charges and shall carry out further tests to ascertain the in-situ strength of concrete as specified under Clause 4.16 to 4.18. Notwithstanding that all tests have been complied with, member which cracks during or after prestressing operations to an extent which in the opinion of the SO Rep renders it unfit for its purpose in the work shall be removed from the work and replaced.
7.3
PRESTRESSING STEEL The prestressing steel, wire or strand used in prestressing tendons shall comply with the requirements of BS2691, BS3617, BS4486, BS4757 and BS5896. High tensile steel wires or high tensile steel strands shall be supplied in coils of a sufficiently large diameter so that it will retain its physical properties and will be reasonably straight when unwound from the coils. A copy of the Manufacturer's test certificates covering each coil of prestressing steels to be used shall be provided to the SO Rep. If test certificates relating to the material is not available, the Contractor shall arrange for testing of samples. The SO Rep may require the Contractor to further test the steel of each batch. All such testings shall be carried out by an approved testing authority. All wires or strands shall be cut from certified coils. Keep proper records so as to enable identification of the wires with the coil from which they are cut. The manufacture and assembly of tendons shall be done in accordance with the best quality of workmanship appropriate to the prestressing system being used. Tendons shall be made to the required length plus an allowance, where applicable, at each end for stressing operation. Splicing of strands or wires forming a tendon shall not be permitted. Flame cutting of wire or strand within 80mm of where tendon will be gripped by the anchorage or jacks shall not be permitted. Care shall be taken to ensure that the flame does not apply on the anchorage or on the tendon, within 25mm of the anchorage. A durable metal label on which shall be stamped the length of the tendon and the coil number of the wire or strand used, shall be tied to each tendon. Care shall be taken that tendons of any type are not damaged, kinked or bent. Tendons shall be kept free from loose or thick rust, oil, grease, tar, paint, mud, or any other deleterious substances but a thin film of rust will be permitted.
Ugdg Spec TS 7-2/8
7.4
ANCHORAGE DEVICES Anchorage devices shall be subjected to the approval of the SO Rep. Each anchorage device shall be capable of transmitting a force not less than the ultimate tensile strength of the tendon without overstressing the concrete. Spiral or other reinforcement specified by the manufacturer as being required for this purpose shall be considered part of the anchorage devices and shall be of the size and dimensions recommended by the Manufacturer for the prestressing system being used. Certificates of origin shall be provided for all anchorage devices. No damaged or defective anchorage devices shall be used. All steel parts shall be protected from corrosion and all threaded parts and fittings shall be protected by wrappings or plugs until used. The anchorage devices shall be kept free from mortar, loose rust, grease, tar, paint, oil, mud or any other coatings.
7.5
SHEATHING All Sheathing shall be subject to the approval of the SO Rep. Sheathing shall be of the type suitable for the prestressing system to be used and shall be strong enough for withstanding the placing and compaction of the concrete without suffering damages or deformation. Internal and external diameters of sheathing shall be within the limits specified in the design or approved by the SO Rep. The sheathing and all splices shall be mortar tight. Steel sheathing shall be galvanised or lead coated. The Manufacturer's value for the friction coefficients of the proposed sheathing shall be stated by the Contractor. Enlarged portions of the sheathing at couplings or anchorages shall be of sufficient length to provide for the extension of tendons. Grout holes shall be provided at both ends of the sheathing and shall be at least 10mm diameter. Each of the grouting holes shall be equipped with a plug valve or similar device capable of withstanding a pressure 2 of 1 N/mm without loss of water, grout or air. Additional vents, with plug valves, shall be provided at suitable points in the sheathing, including high and low points, for the purpose of bleeding air and water to ensure the complete filling of the duct with grout. The number and location of these additional vents shall be as specified in the design. Sheathing for prevention tendons shall consist of plastic tubing or other approved material of a quality, diameter and thickness approved by the SO Rep. Sheathing shall continue through end forms for at least 25mm.
7.6
PLACEMENT OF TENDONS (a) Post-tensioned Tendons Unless otherwise stated in the Drawings or approved by the SO Rep, tendons shall be sheathed and placed in position prior to concreting. Where permanent tendons cannot be placed, temporary tendons or other methods approved by the SO Rep shall be used to stiffen the sheathing. Tendons shall be handled with care and shall be pulled through the sheathing in such a manner as to avoid damage or contamination to either the tendon or the sheathing. Sheathing shall be securely fixed at points sufficiently close together to maintain a smooth tendon profile throughout the length of the tendon within a tolerance of 3mm of the position shown. If in the opinion of the SO Rep, the sheathing is liable to be damaged or deformed during concreting work, the Contractor shall take additional precautions to maintain the position and shape of the sheathing. Any temporary opening in the sheathing shall be plugged and all joints between sheathing and any other part of the prestressing system shall be effectively sealed to prevent the entry of mortar, dust, water or other deleterious matter. Sheathing shall be neatly fitted at joints without projection or reduction of diameter, and the joints shall be mortar tight.
Ugdg Spec TS 7-3/8
7.6
PLACEMENT OF TENDONS (CONT'D) (a) Post-tensioned Tendons (Cont'd) Immediately after the whole of the concrete has been placed, all tendons therein shall be pulled back and forth for about 300mm to ensure that they are perfectly free inside the sheaths. Ducts stiffened by temporary tendons shall be checked by passing through a tendon identical with the permanent tendon. Unless otherwise specified, the minimum concrete cover to the outside surface of any sheathing shall be 50mm for beam soffits and 40mm elsewhere. This minimum cover shall be increased by 15mm for members in contact with earth or water or over salt water and by 25mm for members in contact with salt water. Each anchorage device shall be set square to the line of the corresponding prestressing tendon and shall be positioned securely to prevent movement during concreting. The anchorage devices shall be cleaned to the satisfaction of the SO Rep. Any mortar or concrete which adheres to the bearing or wedging surfaces shall be removed immediately. Provision shall be made for covering anchorages with reinforced concrete after completion of stressing. The minimum cover shall be 50mm over the anchorages and 40mm over the reinforcement. (b) Pretensioned Tendons Tendons shall be located as shown on the Drawings and suitable devices shall be provided to ensure that the correct positioning of the tendons is maintained during casting. When tendons are being placed, particular care shall be taken so that the tendons shall not come into contact with the oiled surface of the forms or be otherwise soiled. Any oil, etc which might collect on the tendons shall be removed by cleaning the affected tendons with a petrol-soaked rag or by other approved methods. The anchorages shall be such as to prevent any slip during the casting or curing operations. Where not shown otherwise on the Drawings, the concrete cover to the surface of any tendon shall not be less than twice the tendon diameter or 25mm whichever is the greater. The above minimum cover shall be increased by 15mm for members situated in earth or water or over salt water.
7.7
CONCRETING Concrete in one precast unit shall be placed in one operation continuously without interruption. The Contractor shall provide such protective cover as and when required to avoid stoppage due to sudden rain. No unit shall be removed from the mould or erected until sufficiently matured to ensure that no damage shall be done to the unit. For post-tensioned construction, where necessary, temporary openings shall be provided in the formwork to enable placing and adequate compaction of concrete, especially around and underneath sheathing and anchorages. Care shall be taken to avoid damaging the sheathing. Vibrators shall not come into contact with the sheathing and if the sheathing is damaged during concreting, the whole or a portion of the concrete cast may be rejected by the SO Rep. Sheathing shall be cleaned out within half an hour of completion of each concreting operation by blowing oil-free compressed air through the length of the sheathing. The concrete shall be moist cured until the prestress is applied.
7.8
CONCRETE STRENGTH AT TRANSFER No post-tensioning of tendons or the release of pretensioned tendons shall take place until the concrete has attained the minimum strength required as stated in the Drawings or as specified. These requirements shall be ascertained from tests on concrete cubes made and cured under the same conditions as the concrete member. Sufficient cubes shall be made so that if the stipulated strength is not achieved, further cubes will be available for such additional testing as may be required.
Ugdg Spec TS 7-4/8
7.9
TENSIONING EQUIPMENT All tensioning equipment shall be approved by the SO Rep prior to use. Hydraulic pumps shall be power driven and the power unit shall be so adjusted that the rate of extension of the tendon is within the limits recommended or as directed by the SO Rep. Dynamometers, and each set of equipment comprising pump, jack and pressure gauge shall be calibrated as directed by the SO Rep and the true force determined from the calibration. Dynamometers, pressure gauges and scales shall permit force and elongation to be determined within an accuracy of 2%. Pressure gauges shall only be used as a substitute for dynamometers and shall be concentric scale gauges complying with the requirements of BS 1780 which requires gauges to be accurate to within 1% of their full capacity. They shall be selected so as to be used between the 50% and 90% of their full capacity and shall not be less than 200mm in diameter. Where pressure gauges are used, a suitable device shall be fitted so as to protect the gauge against sudden release of pressure. Provision shall also be made by such means as a "tee" connection, for the attachment of a second gauge which shall be attached and used as a check whenever so requested by the SO Rep.
7.10
TENSIONING PRECAUTIONS All tensioning operations shall be carried out in the presence of the SO Rep in accordance with the best practice applicable to the particular prestressed method proposed. The tensioning operation shall be performed only by personnel trained and experienced in this type of work. Care shall be taken during tensioning to ensure the safety of all personnel engaged on the work and of other persons in the vicinity. Jacks shall be secured in such a manner that they will be restrained should they loose their grip on the tendons. No person shall be permitted to stand behind the jacks or close to the line of the tendons while tensioning is in progress. The operation of jacks, the measurements of elongation and associated operations shall be carried out in such a manner and from such positions that the safety of all concerned is ensured. During actual stressing operations warning signs shall be prominently displayed. Where, in the opinion of the SO Rep, there is danger to the general public or to property, special precautions in the form of substantial barrier will be required.
7.11
TENSIONING FORCE Unless otherwise specified, the tensioning forces required shall be that shown in the Drawings. The tensioning force applied to any tendon shall be determined by direct measurement of the force and checked by measurement of the elongation of the tendon. The secant modulus determined from test samples or shown on test certificates shall be used when interpreting the measurement of elongation. Allowance shall be made for any anticipated draw-in at the anchorage devices on release of the jack, for elastic shortening of the member and for anticipated losses due to stressing of subsequent tendons. The final forces in each tendon, as measured by the dynamometer, shall be within an accuracy of plus or minus 3% of the values stipulated. If, on completion of tensioning each tendon to the required force, the check measurement of elongation differs from its required value by more than 5%, the SO Rep may direct that some or all of the following steps be taken : (a) (b) (c) Recalibration of equipment; Testing of tendon material to check secant modulus; Tendons released and restressed (secant modulus applicable to second stressing to be adopted); Lubrication of tendons to reduce friction losses. Only water soluble oils shall be used in ducted systems and these shall be washed out before grouting; Where only 1 jack is used previously, the tendon shall be tensioned from both ends using 2 jacks; Other methods as directed by the SO Rep.
(d)
(e) (f)
Ugdg Spec TS 7-5/8
7.12
PRETENSIONING The abutments and casting beds for pretensioning of tendons shall be strong enough to withstand the required total prestressing force with adequate safety. The abutments shall be so constructed as to provide protection at all times against injury or damage caused by slipping occurring in anchorages during or after tensioning. Provisions shall be made for free and adequate movement of the member at points of support in the direction of the expected shortening due to prestress without impairing the rigidity of the forms during casting operations. Where necessary, provision shall be made in the design of the casting bed for the use of external vibrators. In the case where tendons are to be deflected, submit details of the proposed layout for each line of tendons together with values for the portion of the force to be provided by the initial tensioning and for the portion which will be provided by the elongation resulting from subsequent deflection of the tendons. Tensioning shall not commence until the SO Rep has approved the values submitted. Special care shall be taken to apply tensioning force smoothly at an even rate and to determine its value with considerable accuracy. Tendons shall be marked for measurement of elongation and shall also be marked at both the jacking and dead ends of the stressing bed so that any slip may be observed. Should a slip of any of the tendons in a group of tendons tensioned together occur, the tensioning of the whole group shall be released, tendons reset, and the whole group tensioned again. Alternatively, the tensioning of the group of tendons can be completed without the slipped tendon(s) which can be subsequently tensioned. The prestressing force shall be transferred from the jack to the abutment of the stressing bed immediately the required force (or elongation) has been reached and the pressure in the jack shall be relaxed before any other operation commences. Tendons shall be deflected, where shown in the Drawings and the required force maintained, by use of approved fixing devices strong enough to hold the tendons firmly in their proper positions especially during concreting and curing, until the concrete has attained the required strength. In order that the required force is maintained after the tensioned steel has been anchored, an allowance shall be made in assessing the value of the applied force for loss of stress due to yield in the anchorages and for slip when the steel is wedged after tensioning. In long line beds, due consideration shall be given to the friction caused by the varying shape and number of diaphragms. Prior to concreting, a check shall be made of the accuracy of alignment of forms and of the distance centre to centre bearings, overall length, width, positioning of end blocks, tendons, sheathing and anchorages and their connections, reinforcement, bearings, dowels and any other fittings shown in the Drawings. Concreting of a member shall not commence until the approval of the SO Rep has been obtained. Prior to transfer of the prestressing force from the abutments of the casting bed to the members, all tendons shall be tested for tightness and any loose tendon found shall be reported to the SO Rep who will decide whether the members are acceptable. All tendons shall be marked at each end of every member so as to check the draw-in and any slip of the tendons. The procedure of release shall be continuous and shall be performed in the shortest possible time without interruption. The prestress shall be transferred to the members in such a manner that the tendons are released gradually and, preferably, simultaneously. The method of transferring the prestress and the equipment proposed shall be approved by the SO Rep prior to use. The SO Rep shall be present at every occasion of releasing tendons. After prestress has been transferred to the members, the tendons between the members shall be severed working along the line from the point or points of release. Every effort shall be made to avoid injury to the concrete.
7.13
POST-TENSIONING Where prestressed concrete is included in the Works, the process of prestressing each member shall be continuous, the tendons being stressed in the order indicated in the Drawings, and the operation completed without interruption in as short a time as possible. No member shall be left partially prestressed without the permission of the SO Rep unless the Drawings require the member to be prestressed in stages. In general, tensioning shall proceed symmetrically to avoid lateral distortion and development of tension on one side. At no time shall the permissible stresses in concrete and steel be exceeded.
Ugdg Spec TS 7-6/8
7.13
POST-TENSIONING (CONT'D) Tendon ducts shall be cleaned out by blowing compressed air through them and anchorages shall be thoroughly cleaned prior to commencement of tensioning. The protruding ends of tendons shall be cleaned of any coating, such as rust, mortar, oil or mud which would lessen the grip of wedges of anchorage devices. Tendons shall be checked before tensioning to see that they are free to move inside the duct. Special care shall be taken to set the jacks accurately in the line of the tendon. The force which is applied initially to take up the slack of the tendon shall be sufficient to seat the jack firmly but shall not exceed the amount normally associated with the particular method of post-tensioning. After taking up the slack, the tendon shall, where possible, be accurately marked at both ends and elongations or draw-in measured from these markings. When requested by the SO Rep readings of force and elongation shall be taken at stages during the tensioning of a tendon and plotted to determine the zero error in measuring elongation. Where tendons consist of a number of individual components, each component shall be marked so that any slip may be observed. In the case of slipping of one or more components or tendons of a group tensioned together, the SO Rep may permit a compensating increase in the elongation of the remaining tendons of the group provided that the jacking force does not exceed 80% of the minimum ultimate tensile strength of the remaining tendons. In the case of a tendon breaking or slipping after tensioning, the tendon shall be released, replaced if necessary, and restressed. Under no circumstances shall the maximum jacking force exceeds the rated capacity of the jacking equipment used, or 80% of the specified minimum ultimate strength of the tendon whichever is the lesser.
7.14
TENSIONING RECORDS All tensioning data shall be recorded and submitted to the SO Rep for checking and retention : (a) Pretensioned Tendons The following data relating to the prestressing operation shall be recorded : (i) (ii) Identification numbers of dynamometers, gauges, pumps and jacks; Force applied if dynamometer is used; alternatively, pump or jack pressure and area of piston; Elongation remaining after anchoring.
(iii) (b)
Post-Tensioned Tendons The following data, where applicable, shall be recorded : (i) (ii) (iii) (iv) (v) (vi) Identification number of each dynamometer, gauge, pump and jack; Identification particulars of tendons; Initial forces (or pressures) when tendons are marked for measurement of elongation; Final forces (or pressure) and elongations obtained on completion of tensioning; Elongation remaining after release of jacks; Elongations obtained at intervals during tensioning, together with corresponding forces (or pressures), if and when required by the SO Rep.
Ugdg Spec TS 7-7/8 7.15 GROUTING After post-tensioned tendons have been tensioned and anchored they shall be pressure-grouted as soon as practicable. The grout mix and the method of mixing and injecting the grout shall be approved by the SO Rep before grouting is commenced. The pressure at which the grout is to be pumped into the duct shall be approved by the SO Rep and shall not normally exceed 0.7 N/mm2. The grout shall preferably be either a neat cement grout with a water/cement ratio not exceeding 0.4 or cement mortar (1:1 3/4 by weight). An approved expanding plasticising admixture shall be used. Grout shall be mixed in a high speed mechanical mixer, for at least 2 minutes, until an uniform colloidal consistency is produced. Mixing by hand shall not be permitted. Pumps shall be capable of continuous operation with little pressure variation and shall have a system for recirculating the grout whilst actual grouting is not in progress. Pumps shall be fitted with a pressure gauge and shall be capable of delivery at pressures up to 1.0 N/mm2. All equipment, especially piping, shall be thoroughly washed with clean water after each series of operations and more frequently if necessary. Grouting shall not be carried out while the shade temperature exceeds 38C. All ducts and holes shall be thoroughly flushed out with clean water followed by compressed air. Grout shall be injected into each duct at a speed between 300mm and 600mm per second. A continuously steady flow of grout shall be maintained until the duct is completely filled and pure grout issues from all vents and from the far end and until all entrapped air has been expelled. The vents shall be progressively closed as required to ensure the complete filling of the duct. The grout pressure shall then be held at the required value for at least 1 minute after which the grouting end shall be plugged. All vents and ends shall be kept closed until final setting of the grout has taken place. When directed by the SO Rep duct openings shall be inspected 2 or 3 days after grouting and topped up if necessary. If serious leaks occur, the grouting shall be stopped, the duct flushed clean with water and the leakage plugged before continuing with grouting. If a blockage occurs, pumping may be quickly transferred to the far end of the duct if there are sufficient vents to ensure that the duct will be filled with grout. Alternatively, ducts may be flushed with clean water to clear the blockage. The Contractor shall be responsible for the complete filling of the ducts with grout. If several blockages occur the grout mix may be rejected and a new mix designed. On completion of grouting and after the grout has hardened sufficiently, any vents or grouting tubes which extend to the surfaces of the concrete shall be cut off 25 mm below the concrete surface and the recess plugged with concrete. Tendons shall be cut back to give, when recesses are concreted, a minimum of 25 mm cover. Wire stubs (if any) may be bent into the recesses. Recesses shall be concreted, or, when shown in the Drawings, shall be filled monolithically when other cast-in-place concrete is placed. Complete records shall be kept on all grouting of ducts and a copy of the records submitted to the SO Rep. 7.16 PRESTRESSED MEMBERS Workmanship displayed in the construction of prestressed members shall be of the highest order and every endeavour shall be made to obtain accuracy of dimensions. The dimensions and shape stated in the Drawings shall be taken to apply to the structure at the time of its completion when under self weight alone. Except where stated otherwise in the Drawings or approved by the SO Rep, the dimensions and profile of the formwork shall compensate for deformations due to prestress, etc so that the dimensions and profile of the completed structure will conform to the Drawings. Submit details of the magnitude of these deformations and how he proposes to allow for them and construction of formwork shall not commence until the approval of the SO Rep has been obtained. For precast members, the date of casting, length of member and the identification number required by the SO Rep shall be marked on every member. When requested by the SO Rep, the word 'TOP' and/or lifting positions shall also be marked on the member. All accepted members shall be clearly identified by marking in the presence of the SO Rep. Members shall not be lifted or handled until fully stressed. At all times, and especially during transportation, members shall be secured in proper positions by means of suitable packing pieces and braces. Members shall not be braced against one another but shall be provided with independent bracing. Members shall be handled, lifted and supported carefully at the positions and in the manner required by the Drawings. Where no method of lifting is shown in the Drawings. Submit for the approval of the SO Rep, details of the proposals for lifting the members and once approved no other method shall be used during the whole period of construction except with the permission of the SO Rep.
Ugdg Spec TS 7-8/8 7.16 PRESTRESSED MEMBERS (CONT'D) Precast members shall be supported on timber bearers or other approved means, over their full width. The ground or space between the bearers supporting the members shall be carefully cleared and levelled so as to prevent the member from being accidentally supported other than on the approved bearers. The bearers themselves shall be supported on firm foundation and, every precaution shall be made to prevent subsidence from occurring. Members shall not be stacked on top of one another except when approved by the SO Rep who shall determine the manner of stacking and the maximum number of layers or height of the stacking. Each layer shall be separated from the next layer by bearers. No member which is precasted away from site shall be delivered to the site without the permission of the SO Rep. The granting of permission shall be dependent on each individual member exhibiting satisfactory workmanship and finish and complying with the tolerance on dimensions and prestressing force. In addition, test loading, if specified, and concrete strength tests of representative members shall satisfy the requirements specified.
SECTION 8/...
Ugdg Spec TS 8-1/5
SECTION 8
8.0
FIBRE REINFORCED POLYMER (FRP) SYSTEM
8.1 8.1.1
TECHNICAL REQUIREMENTS Fibre Reinforced Polymer (FRP) System The fibre polymer system shall be a non-intrusive wrapping system. The system shall be used to enhance the load bearing capacity and durability of the existing reinforced concrete columns in the void decks. For glass fibre wrapping system, the wrapping configuration shall consist of minimum 3 horizontal and 2 vertical layers as shown in the drawings. For carbon fibre wrapping system, the wrapping configuration shall be 2 horizontal layers only or as otherwise proposed by the Contractor. The proposed wrapping configuration for the glass or carbon FRP system shall comply with Clause 8.2. The proposed glass or carbon FRP shall conform to the following minimum requirements: Requirement for Glass FRP
2
S/N
Property Ultimate tensile strength, of composite fibres in the primary direction Elongation of Composite Fibre Tensile modulus based on cross section area of primary fibres Shear bond strength of composite fibre on concrete (minimum Grade 30)
Requirement for Carbon FRP

2
1.
450 N/mm
750 N/mm
2.
>=1.5%
2
>=1.0%
2
3.
20,700 N/mm
2
70,000 N/mm
4.
2.4 N/mm or failure of concrete substrate
2.4 N/mm or failure of concrete substrate
The proposed system shall not include other form of strengthening methods, such as metal plate bonding or mixed fibre materials. The Contractor shall submit their proposed FRP system for the SO Reps approval. In the event of any omission to the FRP system, the valuation of the variation shall be based on the FRP system which is the most expensive.
8.1.2
Anchoring System The proposed system shall be inclusive of an anchoring system using the same FRP material, in additional to surface preparation as specified in Clause 8.7, for column with length not less than 900mm. The anchoring system shall satisfy the following requirements : (a) The diameter of anchor shall not be less than 10mm and not more than 15mm. It shall consist of a bundle of main fibre properly formed to size as shown in Drawings; fully impregnated with epoxy before insertion to the drilled hole on the column. The drilled holes shall be clean and free of dust using portable blower or equivalent. These anchors shall be installed during the installation of the FRP system.
Ugdg Spec TS 8-2/5
8.1 8.1.2
TECHNICAL REQUIREMENTS (CONTD) Anchoring System (Contd) (b) The embedded length of the anchor from the surface of column shall be of minimum : i. 50mm if there is no plaster on column;
ii. 75mm if there is plaster on column.
(c) The anchors shall be provided on the longer face of the column. The minimum number of anchors on each face shall be : i. 14 nos. for column size of length 900mm or more.
ii. 21 nos. for column size of length 1200mm or more. The layout of the anchors shall be measured from the centre of column both vertically and horizontally.
8.2
DRAWINGS The drawings in A3 size shall be submitted together with the submission of the test report and calculations. The drawings shall include the following : (a) The detail of vertical layer and horizontal layer of glass or carbon FRP on plan. For glass FRP (GFRP), the bend of the C-shape vertical layer and the lap length of the horizontal layer shall be indicated in the detail. (b) The elevational view showing the lap length between horizontal layers at lower and upper level for GFRP (c) A table showing the length of lapping and the bend required for different group of varied column sizes for GFRP. (d) The name of the project, contractor and supplier shall be indicated in the title block. The title block shall be located at the right-hand bottom corner of every drawing.
8.3 8.3.1
TESTING OF MATERIAL Requirement The Contractor shall be required to submit test report of the materials tested locally to the SO Rep for approval 6 weeks after date of the Employers Letter of Acceptance of the Contractors Tender to ensure compliance with the requirement stipulated under Clause 8.1. Three (3) composite samples shall be tested for each property tabulated in Clause 8.1. The average result of the 3 composite samples shall comply or exceed the requirement stipulated. In addition, the individual result shall not be less than 10% of the required value. Each composite sample shall be prepared using one layer of fibre. Such testing shall be tested and approved by the SO Rep before the commencement of actual work done on site. The test reports shall be submitted within 4 weeks upon instruction given by the SO Rep. All the tests shall be conducted at accredited laboratory or institution at the Contractors own expense. Further tests may be initiated with test samples taken from work site upon SO Reps instruction to ensure compliance with Clause 8.1, where applicable. Such tests shall be undertaken at Contractors own cost and expense.
Ugdg Spec TS 8-3/5
8.3 8.3.1
TESTING OF MATERIAL (CONTD) Requirement (Contd) The Contractor shall also conduct in-situ tensile pullout test on the completed works, with one test each to be carried out in each block, when directed. Each test shall cover five randomly selected spots of FRP material, with age of 2 days or more, on different columns. The average tensile pullout strength of the 5 spots shall exceed 0.4 N/mm2. In addition, the individual tensile pull out strength of each spot 2 shall not be less than 0.3 N/mm . However, if the failure in each spot is due to substantial failure of the substrate as determined by the accredited laboratory with SO Reps agreement, such result will be excluded from the computation of the average value.
8.3.2
Further testing Upon Failure Any material test that fails shall be considered not to have fulfilled the requirements under the Material Tests. In that event, the SO Rep, without prejudice to his other rights under the Contract, order such further test as he deems necessary, all at the cost and expense of the Contractor. The Contractor shall bear the cost and expense for all failed tests.
8.4
WORK METHODS The contractor shall submit 3 weeks after date of the Employers Letter of Acceptance a detailed work method with relevant illustration on the preparation and installation of the system to be approved by the SO Rep. The Work Method shall include surface preparation, method of mixing and saturation of composite fibre, method of application of fibre sheet to the column, anchoring system, curing and finishing works. The Contractor shall propose wrapping method, inclusive of anchoring system, in area where the horizontal layer is unable to wrap round the column. Such proposal shall include design calculations and is subject to the approval of SO Rep. In the event of ambiguity or dispute, SO Reps decision shall be final. The Contractor shall carry out a work demonstration on site for the approval of the SO Rep.
8.5
AIR BUBBLES Excessive air bubbles trapped in between the composite fibre and the column surface shall be make good to the SO Reps satisfaction. Contractor shall submit method of statement on such rectification for SO Reps approval.
8.6
CHECKING FOR HOLLOW PLASTER The contractor shall check for hollow plaster on all columns to be wrapped prior to column surface preparation with a steel tapping rod. The tapping rod shall have a solid steel ball of 15mm diameter rigidly attached to one end. It shall have a length of about 630mm and possesses adequate rigidity for tapping the plaster. All hollow plaster detected shall be removed and made good, upon the instruction of the SO Rep, with pre-packed plaster as in the Employers approved list. Cost for such work shall be deemed to be part of the Contractors tender price unless such works are carried out on structural member not to be wrapped. Payment for such work shall be made in accordance to the Schedule of Rates as in the Tender. No wrapping to a column should be carried out within 24 hours after reinstatement.
Ugdg Spec TS 8-4/5
8.7
COLUMN SURFACE PREPARATION The existing paintwork on the column shall be removed and such requirement will be determined in the work demonstration. The corners of the columns are to be rounded with a radius not less than 20mm. The surface of column shall be clean, dry and free of grease before application of composite fibres. All skirting are to be removed to flush with the existing column face before any wrapping. Any material used to level-off has to be approved by the SO Rep. No wrapping to a column should be carried out within 24 hours after application of such material. At all times, the Contractor shall ensure the site is not dusty and comply with Clause 8.9.
8.8
FINISHING The column shall be plastered at least 9 mm thick with pre-packed plastering material as in the Employers approved list. The plaster shall be applied in two coats if the thickness is more than 9mm arising from contractors FRP system or due to site application. Contractor shall deemed to have included in the tender the cost for any form of bonding requirement in accordance to the proposed FRP system.
8.9
MINIMUM DISRUPTION AND POLLUTION TO RESIDENTS/PUBLIC The Contractor shall submit a detailed time schedule for the Works before the commencement for the approval of the SO Rep. Works shall be carried out in a manner involving minimum disruption and inconvenience to residents on the use of the void deck. Throughout the course of the works, safety of the residents shall remain the top priority. The Contractor shall provide necessary precautionary measures to prevent dust pollution to resident/public especially near eating houses, child-care or elderly-care centres, senior citizen corners and etc.
8.10
REPAINTING All new surface finish of the fibre wrapped column shall be painted with the approved paint. The paint and painting works on all finish surface shall comply with all technical requirements, preparation work, workmanship and quality control as required under Section 23 Painting and Decorating of the Standard Specifications for Upgrading Works.
8.11
REINSTATMENT & MAKING GOOD The adjoining property or services such as pipes or electrical wiring that have been removed for execution of work shall be reinstated and made good to the original at the Contractors expense upon completion of work. All repairs are to be executed with suitable and appropriate materials and workmanship to the satisfaction of the SO Rep. The Contractor shall engage qualified personnel to execute such removal and reinstatement works.
Ugdg Spec TS 8-5/5
8.12
REPAIRS TO STRUCTURAL CRACKS AND SPALLED CONCRETE All spalled concrete appearing on the columns to be wrapped shall be repaired using approved epoxy mortar or polymer modified cement mortar or other approved material listed in the HDB List of Approved Materials and Suppliers. The surfaces shall be roughened and wire-brushed to remove any loose materials, rust, scale foreign matters. Surfaces must be primed and allowed to dry before epoxy resin compound or polymer modified cement mortar is applied. Where any bonding agent is required for the use of the repair material, it shall be obtained from the same manufacturer and carried out in accordance with the manufacturers instruction. The whole of the works shall be carried out in accordance with manufacturers instructions. Notwithstanding the manufacturers instructions, all repaired surfaces shall have at least 3 days of curing before wrapping with the proposed FRP system. All cracks appearing on columns to be wrapped shall be repaired with an approved epoxy injection method. The Contractor shall submit samples of the repair material and the method of statement for the work for approval by the SO Rep. Unless otherwise approved by the SO Rep, all repair methods shall be in accordance to the drawings.
8.13
NAME TAG FOR BLOCKS The Contractor shall provide and install three (3) tags for each block where FRP system is carried out. The location of the tag shall be determined by the SO Rep. The tag shall be made of plastic sheet of 100 x 25 x 2mm thick. The colour of the sheet and the wordings shall be approved by the SO Rep. The Contractor shall submit the fixing method to the SO Rep for approval.
8.14
DIVERSION/RELOCATION OF ANY PUBLIC AMENITIES/FACILITIES The Contractor shall conduct a preliminary survey to identify any public amenities/facilities to be diverted or relocated at the commencement of each block and submit the survey to the SO Rep. He shall liaise with the relevant Authorities and Town Councils for such works. He shall prepare a programme for such Works to the SO Rep for approval.
SECTION 9/...
Ugdg Spec TS 9-1/6
SECTION 9
9.0
REINFORCED CONCRETE WATER TANKS
9.1
SCOPE OF WORK The concrete water tank work shall include all structural, architectural and other work above reinforced concrete main roof slab level and lift motor room floor slab level and low level concrete suction tanks as shown in the Drawings. These include the following work : (a) (b) (c) (d) (e) concrete water tanks and the supporting stumps; roof top pump room adjacent to concrete water tank; lift motor room irrespective of whether it is connected to or far away from the concrete water tanks; fascia walls fencing around the concrete water tanks; all roofs for the concrete water tanks, lift motor room, roof top pump room and other roof structures including roof over void decks; and low level concrete suction tanks including supporting stumps.
(f)
The concrete water tank work shall include the construction, completion and maintenance of the work and the provision of labour, materials, Construction Equipment and other items, whether of a temporary or permanent nature, required in and for such construction, completion and maintenance in so far as these are specified in or can be reasonably inferred from the work.
9.2
WATER-PROOFING MEASURES The construction of the concrete water tanks shall be in accordance with the latest BS 8007. Provide and construct the concrete water tanks adopting closely the following waterproofing measures to ensure the water-tightness of concrete water tanks : (a) Grade 40 concrete with low water/cement ratio and high workability shall be used. The concrete shall be designed with chloride-free retarding superplasticiser. The finished concrete shall be dense, impermeable and durable. No construction joint below specified highest water level shall be allowed. The entire concrete water tank up to the soffit of the tank roof slab shall be cast in one operation with partially hanged internal formwork. The water tank roof shall be cast in second operation; The concrete tank shall be tested in accordance with BS 8007 for water tightness 28 days after casting; After passing the water test, the internal surface of the concrete tank shall be coated with approval type of cementitious waterproofing coating in accordance with the instructions of the SO Rep. The concrete tank shall be applied internally with 25mm waterproofing plaster and tiled.
(b)
(c)
(d)
9.3
PUB APPROVAL All materials used in the construction and repair of concrete water tanks shall be approved by PUB. Provide samples of the materials and their technical specification to PUB for approval well in advance of construction work. Certified copy of the PUB's approval letter of the particular type of materials together with other relevant documents, such as PSB test reports, etc shall be submitted to the SO Rep for approval prior to incorporation in the work.
Ugdg Spec TS 9-2/6
9.4
STRUCTURAL CONCRETE Grade 40 concrete shall be used for the construction of the concrete water tanks and for RC structures above the main roof and lift motor room floor level. The concrete mix shall be designed in accordance with Clause 4.8 "Concrete Mixes" and shall be approved by the SO Rep. The concrete shall be mixed with approved type of chloride-free retarding superplasticiser to achieve a highly workable mix with maximum water/cement ratio of 0.55. The proportion and dosage required for the admixture shall be carefully designed and applied in accordance with the Manufacturer's instructions to achieve a high quality concrete. Unless otherwise specified, the structural concrete work shall generally follow the provision of Clause 4.1 to 4.18 of Section 4 "Structural Concrete" where appropriate. All defective concrete work such as honeycomb, surface air pockets, poor alignment, level, finishes, etc shall be reported to the SO Rep and rectified according to the instruction of the SO Rep all at the costs and expenses of the Contractor. As and when required by the SO Rep, load tests in accordance with BS 8110 shall be conducted at the Contractor's own costs and expenses. Should the load tests fail to achieve the specified design and strength requirements, the SO Rep reserves the right to instruct the Contractor to remove and recast the concrete tanks at his own costs and expenses. No extension of time to the work shall be allowed where the delay is due to defective and remedial work.
9.5
FORMWORK SYSTEM Unless otherwise specified, formwork shall be designed and constructed in accordance with Clause 4.19 "Formwork" and Clause 4.22 "Building Accuracy" including all subclauses under them, where appropriate. Formwork can only be removed at least 7 days after concreting the concrete water tanks and the soffit of the tanks be re-propped immediately until 28 days after casting. Formwork shall be removed gradually without shock, disturbance and vibration, without damaging or overloading the finished concrete work or structures, and in a manner approved by the SO Rep.
9.6
CONCRETING All construction joints and concreting procedures for the Concrete Water Tank Work shall be approved by the SO Rep. Inform the SO Rep the areas of concreting and the locations of construction joints and obtain his approval prior to the concreting of concrete tanks. No construction joint below the specified highest water level shall be allowed. The entire concrete tank up to the soffit of the tank roof slab shall be cast in one operation. The tank roof shall be cast in the second operation. All pipes shall be cast in-situ with the concrete tank in the positions as shown in the Drawings. The following sequence of concreting the concrete water tank within the same day could be accepted by the SO Rep if the Contractor could demonstrate that these will result in a monolithic and watertight structure : (a) (b) (c) Cast the lowest 500mm of the tank walls with concrete flowing into the tank floor slab; Level the tank floor slab to the thickness required; and Immediately after initial setting, the rest of the tank walls shall be cast and topped up to the soffit of the tank roof slab.
Ugdg Spec TS 9-3/6
9.6
CONCRETING (CONT'D) The initial setting time varies with the workability of the concrete mix and shall be approved by the SO Rep. As soon as the concrete starts to set, the walls shall be immediately topped up to the level required. Any delay in the topping up operation may result in rejection of the concreting work by the SO Rep. No concreting work shall be allowed without the presence of the Clerk-of-Works. The concrete shall be highly workable and shall be compacted sufficiently to produce a dense homogeneous mass and filling all voids. The concrete shall not be subjected to any disturbance after being placed in position and shall be continuously cured for a minimum of 7 days after casting.
9.7
WATERTIGHTNESS TEST The Contractor shall test the concrete water tanks for watertightness in accordance with the latest BS 8007 requirements 28 days after casting and bear all costs of testing inclusive of water. The tank shall be filled with PUB water gradually up to overflow level and tested for possible leakage. The period of test shall be at least 7 days during which the exposed surfaces shall show no sign of leakage, no patches of dampness occur and remain apparently dry. If the tank leaks or shows sign of leakage, it shall be repaired with approved type of epoxy resin grout or other suitable methods and the tank be retested. If the tank fails the second test, the SO Rep reserves the right to instruct the Contractor to remove and recast the tank at his own costs and expenses. The recast tank shall be required to pass the same watertightness test. All watertightness tests shall be witnessed and verified by the SO Rep.
9.8
WATER-PROOFING PLASTER After passing the watertightness test, the tank shall be plastered with 25mm of approved type of waterproofing plaster. The plaster shall generally consist of 1 part of cement to 3 parts of fine washed sand rightly gauged with approved type of water-repellent admixture in accordance with the Manufacturer's instructions. The plaster mix shall be designed and proportioned by the Contractor and shall be approved by the SO Rep. No hacking or chipping of concrete shall be allowed to provide key for the plaster. Spatterdash shall be applied on the surface for the plaster backing. Plaster shall be applied in 3 coats of 10mm thickness each for the first 2 coats and 5mm thickness for the finishing coat. All plastering work shall be done in the presence of the Clerk-of-Works.
9.9
TILING The concrete water tanks shall be tiled internally with approved types of heavy duty ceramic tiles. All ceramic tiles shall be provided and laid to all the requirements as specified in Clause 19.5 "Ceramic Floor Tiles". The maximum water absorption of ceramic tiles for concrete water tank shall not exceed 1%. The scratch hardness of tiles shall not be less than 5 on the Moh scale. The surfaces and texture of all the ceramic tiles shall be glazed. The surface appearance shall be free from crack, crazing, hairline cracks and bubbles. Tile used shall be 100mm x 200mm x 8mm, level and regular in size with perfect corners and shall not be warped or deformed in any manner.
Ugdg Spec TS 9-4/6
9.10
CONNECTING PIPES WITH FLANGES FOR INLET, OVERFLOW, INTERCONNECTING AND WASHOUT PIPES Provide and fix 100mm diameter stainless steel connecting pipe of minimum 450mm in length and complete with flange. A 200mm diameter stainless steel collar with 9mm thickness shall be welded to the middle section of the connecting pipe. The connecting pipe shall be positioned and cast in-situ in the concrete wall so that the welded collar is embedded in the middle of the concrete wall. The pipe surface for the portion embedded in the concrete wall shall be properly and suitably treated to ensure proper and perfect bonding between the pipe and concrete. The connecting pipe shall be positioned to give a minimum clearance of 150mm from the external wall surface to the flange and 100mm from the internal wall finished surface to the pipe end. For washout connecting pipe, it should flush with the internal finished surface. Provide and fix for each roof water tank one inlet, one overflow, two interconnecting and one washout connecting pipes as above. The interconnecting pipes for the tanks should be accordingly and correspondingly aligned. Roof water tanks with inlet pipes direct from PUB shall have two overflow pipes per tank. Provide and fix for each suction tank one inlet, two overflow and one washout connecting pipes as shown. All inlet connecting pipes receiving water directly from PUB shall have flanges at both ends. The pipe shall be positioned such that there is a minimum clearance of 100mm from the flanges to the internal wall finished surface and 150mm to the external wall surfaces. Roof tank inlet connecting pipes receiving water directing from PUB shall be provided with stainless steel screwed boss flange for the installation of equilibrium ball valves. All stainless steel material used shall conform to AISI Grade 316. Number of bolts, holes, sizes and pitch circle diameter of bolts for the flanges shall conform to BS4504. Check and ensure that all the above are provided in accordance with the Drawings.
9.11
OUTLET CONNECTING PIPES WITH FLANGES AT TANK FLOOR SLAB Provide and fix three outlet connecting pipes with flanges at tank floor slab to roof distribution mains for each roof water tank. The connecting pipe shall be stainless steel, 100mm diameter, minimum 500mm in length and complete with flange. A 200mm diameter stainless steel collar with 9mm thickness shall be welded to the middle section of the connecting pipe and cast-in-situ in the water tank floor slab so that the collar is embedded in the middle of the tank floor slab. The pipe surface for the portion embedded in the concrete slab should be properly and suitably treated to ensure proper and perfect bonding between the pipe and concrete. The clearance between the soffit of the roof tank floor slab and the flange shall be 150mm and the connecting pipe shall protrude 100mm above the finished level of the suction tank floor slab. There are a minimum of two water pumps to be installed for each suction tank. Provide and fix one outlet connecting pipe for each water pump. The connecting pipe shall be stainless steel, 80mm in diameter, minimum 400mm in length complete with flange. A 200mm diameter stainless steel collar with 9mm thickness shall be welded to the middle section of the connecting pipes and cast-in-situ in the water tank floor slab so that the collar is embedded in the middle of the tank floor slab. The pipe surface for the portion embedded in the concrete slab should be properly and suitably treated to ensure proper and perfect bonding between the pipe and concrete. The clearance between the soffit of the suction tank floor slab and the flange shall be 150mm and the connecting pipe shall protrude 100mm above the finished level of the suction tank floor slab. All stainless steel materials used shall conform to AISI Grade 316. Number of bolts, holes, sizes and pitch circle diameter of bolts for the flanges shall conform to BS4504. Check and ensure that all the above are provided in accordance with the Drawings.
Ugdg Spec TS 9-5/6
9.12
CONNECTING PIPES FOR OVERFLOW WARNING PIPES AND BYPASS PIPE Provide and fix two 28mm diameter, minimum of 500mm long stainless steel pipes, complete with connecting adaptor or flange of 80mm diameter on one end. A collar of 80mm diameter and 9mm thickness shall be welded to the middle section of the pipe. The connecting pipe shall be positioned and cast-in-situ in the concrete tank wall. The connecting pipe shall be protruded to give a minimum clearance of 150mm from the external wall finished surface and 100mm from the internal wall finished surface. All stainless steel materials used shall conform to AISI Grade 316. Check and ensure that all the above are provided in accordance with the Drawings.
9.13
STAINLESS STEEL CONNECTING PIPES Check and take necessary precautions to ensure that the stainless steel connecting pipes are not in contact with the concrete tank reinforced steel bars during concreting. Pipe wall thickness used for Grade 316 stainless steel connecting pipes shall conform to JIS G3459-1984 Stainless Steel Pipe Schedule No. 20S. Minimum grade for filler or electrode shall be AISI Type 316L. All welds for stainless steel shall be argon shielded and by TIG or MIG welding. Ensure that all oxides or scales formed on welded surfaces are removed.
9.14
MANHOLE AND MANHOLE COVER Provide two access manholes to every roof level tank and every pump room suction tank in accordance with the Drawings. The manhole cover shall be complete with locking device and approved lock and master key. The manhole cover shall be capable of being opened fully in accordance with the Drawings.
9.15
ELECTRODE ACCESS Provide access opening to every roof water tank for the mounting of three sets of electrodes as shown in the Drawings. One access opening shall also be provided for one set of electrode to every pumproom suction tank. Access openings for electrodes shall have 3mm thick stainless steel Grade 316 plate for mounting electrodes. Electrodes for the roof water tank shall be protected from weather by an aluminium box. Check and ensure that all the above are provided in accordance with the Drawings.
9.16
AIR VENT Air vents shall be provided near the top of the wall adjacent to the water tank room where booster pumps are installed. Provide at least two 100mm diameter stainless steel air vents to every tank. All air vents shall be fitted with elbow end and suitably covered by mosquito netting. The mesh size of the netting shall not exceed 0.65 mm. All the air vents shall be provided in accordance with the Drawings.
9.17
CAT LADDER Provide and fix external aluminium cat ladder in accordance with the Drawings. One UPVC internal cat ladder shall be provided for each tank at the designated manhole and effectively hooked to the stainless steel (AISI Grade 316) hook cast-in-situ to the tank, in accordance with the Drawings.
Ugdg Spec TS 9-6/6
9.18
EXTERNAL FINISHES Provide external finishes to the external face of the concrete water tank. The finishing materials, their colour, texture, quality and methods of application shall be in accordance with the Drawings and shall be approved by the SO Rep. Any damage or Defect to the external finishes shall be repaired immediately by the Contractor within the 12 month Defects Liability period.
9.19
STERILISATION OF WATER When all work pertaining to the concrete water tank is completed, the tank shall be filled with water for at least 14 days to get rid of all odour, taste, chemicals, cement and other objectional particles. The Contractor shall bear all cost of water required for compliance with the requirement of this clause. The tank shall then be thoroughly cleaned, flushed and sterilised by the Contractor at his own costs and expenses. The sterilisation of the water tank shall be carried out in accordance with the Code of Practice on Water Service issued by Public Utilities Board (Water Department) (Singapore Standard CP 48:1989 and its latest amendments). The water samples shall be taken for bacteriological examination and chemical analysis by the Public Utilities Board (PUB), PSB or PSB accredited commercial laboratory and the Contractor shall be deemed to have allowed for all such testing fees in the Contract Sum. Provide the water examination and analysis report (issued by the Water Department, Public Utilities Board), to the SO Rep and the result of the water analysis should be within the acceptance limits for human consumption, failing which the Contractor shall sterilise the water again and bear all the costs and expenses incurred until such requirement is met. After satisfactory sterilisation, the manholes to the water tank shall be locked and no other work on the water tank shall be allowed without a written permission from the SO Rep.
SECTION 10/...
Ugdg Spec TS 10-1/6
SECTION 10
10.0
PRECAST LIGHTWEIGHT CONCRETE PARTITIONS
10.1
GENERAL Precast lightweight concrete partitions shall be used on all typical storeys at locations as shown in the Architectural Drawings. The precast lightweight concrete partitions shall be obtained from suppliers approved by the SO Rep. The list of approved Suppliers is posted at the following websites: kmo.eptc.com.sg or hdbuilders.com.
10.2
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS AND TESTS - PRECAST LIGHTWEIGHT FOAM CONCRETE PARTITIONS The precast lightweight concrete partitions shall satisfy the following technical specifications :
10.2.1
Manufacturing Requirements (a) (b) (c) (d) (e) (f) A characteristic compressive strength of 4.5 N/mm2 at 28 days. A density (air dry) of between 1400 kg/m and 1800 kg/m . A drying shrinkage not exceeding 0.09% when tested to SS 271. A total water absorption not exceeding 23.5% when tested to SS 271. A minimum fire rating of 1 hour. Materials used in the manufacturing of precast lightweight foam concrete partitions shall comply with Section 4 "Structural Concrete". The foaming agent used in the manufacturing of lightweight foam concrete partitions shall comply with the performance requirement of BS5075:Part 2. No foaming agent shall be used unless prior approval has been given by the SO Rep. Reference shall be made to the Employer's standard detailed Drawings regarding steel reinforcement and guidelines on panelling and layout of partitions. Partitions shall be cast using steel moulds in horizontal position to conform to the shape, lines and dimensions of the partitions to be produced. The mould should be sufficiently rigid to produce the casting tolerances, shapes, orientation and surface finishes specified : (i) (ii) Casting tolerance for partition height and width shall be 5mm and 3mm respectively. Casting tolerance of thickness is 3mm for either 75mm or 90mm thick partition as shown in the Architectural Drawings. The shapes and location of tongues and grooves of partitions after casting shall be correct and accurate such that the off-set between two adjacent panels after installation is within 2mm on both faces of the partitions. The geometry and arrangement of the steel moulds for casting partitions shall be such that the off-form surfaces of two adjacent panels after installation are in the same plane with compatible interlocking tongues and grooves. Bowing and warpage after casting shall not exceed 3mm in 2 metres along the height of each panel and 1mm in 600mm along the width of each panel.
3 3
(g)
(h)
(iii)
(iv)
(v)
Ugdg Spec TS 10-2/6
10.2.1
Manufacturing Requirements (Cont'd) (i) (j) The partitions shall be provided with openings where required for services. Standard fixing and connection details (including those for frames), as shown in the Employer's Standard Structural and Architectural Drawings shall be used. Details different from the Employer's standard details may only be used if submitted by a Professional Engineer with complete detailed Drawings and calculations, and approved by the SO Rep.
10.2.2
Requirements Prior to Delivery Prior to delivery of partitions to site, ensure that the partitions are manufactured to satisfy the following requirements : (a) Casting Tolerance (i) (ii) (iii) (iv) Height Width Thickness : 5mm : 3mm : 3mm
Bowing/Warpage : 3mm in 2 metres along the height 1mm in 600mm along the width
(b)
Surface Finish The surface finish of partitions shall be smooth and free from excessive voids, the contractor shall allow in his Contract Sum for the cost of touching up or other remedial work to smoothen the surface to the satisfaction of the SO Rep. For the purpose of this Clause, a smooth surface shall be defined as one with : (i) No voids or bug holes greater than 7mm in diameter within a 50mm border around the edges of the panels; and For the remaining centre portion, the number of air voids greater than 1.5mm and smaller than 3mm in diameter shall not exceed 20 in any 100 x 100mm square. No void greater than 3mm in diameter shall be allowed.
(ii)
(c)
Tongues and Grooves The accuracy of shapes and locations of tongues and grooves of partitions after casting are verified by two special steel templates. This is to ensure that the offset between any two panels after installation is within 2mm on both faces of partitions.
(d)
No partition is delivered prematurely to site before sufficient strength has been gained to withstand stresses due to transportation, handling or erection. Provision of adequate supports for partitions to prevent chipping off of panel edges during transportation and handling.
(e)
Ugdg Spec TS 10-3/6
10.3
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS AND TESTS - PRECAST LIGHTWEIGHT WOODFIBRE CONCRETE PARTITIONS The precast lightweight woodfibre concrete partitions, an alternative to the lightweight foam concrete partitions, shall be obtained from suppliers approved by the SO Rep for the supply of this product.
10.3.1
Manufacturing Requirements The partitions shall satisfy the following technical specifications : (a) (b) (c) A characteristic compressive strength of 4.5 N/mm at 28 days. A density range of between 1400 kg/m3 and 1800 kg/m3. A drying shrinkage not exceeding 0.09% when tested to modified RILEM CPC9-1975(E) or approved equivalent. A total water absorption not exceeding 20% when tested to VTT Test 359-87 or approved equivalent. A minimum fire rating of 1 hour. Materials used in the manufacturing of precast lightweight concrete partitions shall comply with Section 4 "Structural Concrete". The woodfibres used in the manufacturing shall be of the quality, when tested, complying with VTT Test Standards stipulated in Dno 4/6/88/BET. The test report for the woodfibres used shall be submitted to the SO Rep as and when requested. Reference shall be made to the Employer's standard detail Drawings regarding guidelines on panelling and layout of partitions. Partitions shall be cast using steel moulds in horizontal position or by method of extrusion by automated machine to conform to the shape, lines and dimensions of the partitions to be produced. The steel mould, if use, shall be sufficiently rigid to produce the casting tolerances, shapes, orientation and surface finishes specified : (i) (ii) Casting tolerance for partition height and width shall be 5mm and 3mm respectively. Casting tolerance of thickness is 3mm for either 75mm or 90mm thick partition as shown in the Architectural Drawings. The shapes and location of tongues and grooves of partitions after casting shall be correct and accurate such that the off-set between two adjacent panels after installation is within 2mm on both faces of the partitions. The geometry and arrangement of the steel moulds, if use, for casting partitions shall be such that the off-form surfaces of two adjacent panels after installation are in the same plane with compatible interlocking tongues and grooves. Bowing and warpage after casting shall not exceed 3mm in 2 metres along the height of each panel and 1mm in 300mm along the width of each panel.
2
(d)
(e) (f)
(g)
(h)
(iii)
(iv)
(v)
(i) (j)
The partitions shall be provided with openings where required for services. Standard fixing and connection details (including those for frames), as shown in the Employer's Standard Structural and Architectural Drawings shall be used. Details different from the Employer's standard details may only be used if submitted by the Contractor's Professional Engineer with complete detailed Drawings and calculations, and approved by the SO Rep.
Ugdg Spec TS 10-4/6
10.3.2
Requirements Prior to Delivery Prior to delivery of partitions to site, ensure that the partitions are manufactured to satisfy the following requirements : (a) Casting Tolerance (i) (ii) (iii) (iv) Height Width Thickness Bowing/Warpage : 5mm : 3mm : 3mm : 3mm in 2 metres along the height 1mm in 600mm along the width
(b)
Surface Finish The surface finish of partitions shall be skimmed to smooth such that painting can be applied onto it. The Contractor shall allow in his Contract Sum for the cost of surface finish for skimming.
(c)
Tongues and Grooves The accuracy of shapes and locations of tongues and grooves of partitions after casting shall be verified by the special steel templates. This is to ensure that the offset between any two panels after installation is within 2mm on both faces of partitions.
(d)
No partition shall be delivered prematurely to site before sufficient strength has been gained to withstand stresses due to transportation, handling or erection. Provision of adequate supports for partitions to prevent chipping off of panels edges during transportation and handling.
(e)
10.4
QUALITY OF PRECAST LIGHTWEIGHT CONCRETE PARTITIONS Where precast lightweight concrete partitions are included in the Works, the identification and date of casting shall be neatly and suitably marked on all partitions, as soon as is practicable after casting. The compressive strength of the lightweight concrete shall be measured by crushing tests on 150mm cubes. The quality and consistency of the concrete shall be tested by the SO Rep in accordance with SS 78. For every 50m3 or part thereof of concrete used for production, at least 1 sample of 3 cubes shall be made from each batch chosen by the SO Rep, subject to a minimum of 1 sample of 3 cubes for each day of production. The cubes shall be taken at the point of discharge from the mixer. In addition to the minimum numbers stated above, the SO Rep may, at his absolute discretion, instruct the Contractor to make additional test cubes from whichever batch as he may choose. All cubes shall be tested at the HDB Prefabrication Technology Centre. The Contractor shall provide lockable humid boxes of adequate size to store all test cubes for the specified period. The humid boxes shall be placed in a covered area and maintained at a relative humidity of above 95%. The keys to such curing facility shall be exclusively held in custody by a person designated by the SO Rep. The test cubes shall be collected by the SO Rep for testing at the HDB Prefabrication Technology Centre at a regular interval. The appropriate strength requirement shall be considered to be satisfied if, for each sample of 3 cubes tested at 28 days, none of the strength of the 3 cubes is below the specified characteristic strength of 4.5N 2 per mm at 28 days. If the cube test results do not comply with any of the above conditions, the Contractor shall be subjected to charges imposed based on Clause 1.10 "Nuisance and Irregularities".
Ugdg Spec TS 10-5/6
10.4
QUALITY OF PRECAST LIGHTWEIGHT CONCRETE PARTITIONS (CONT'D) If the average compressive strength of 3 cubes falls below 3.5 N/mm2 at 28 days, the entire affected lightweight concrete partitions shall be rejected. If the partitions are already installed, the Contractor shall remove them and install new partitions of adequate specified compressive strength at no extra cost to the Employer. The Contractor shall provide facilities to enable the identification of test cubes by radio frequency or similar means. The Contractor shall provide at least one web-based radio frequency identification (RFID) reader capable of reading the RFID tags on the concrete cube from a minimum distance of at least 40 mm. The Contractor shall include the appropriate interfacing software to a web-based controller. The Contractor shall logon to a website of the Employer to register the concrete cube data and tag IDs using the RFID reader. The registration of cube data and tag IDs shall be done within the same casting day. The appropriate RFID tags shall be placed at the corner of the cubes while the cubes are still fresh. The top surface of the RFID tag shall be level with the concrete cube surface. The Contractor shall protect the RFID tags on the concrete cube while demoulding. For damage or loss of RFID tag, the Contractor shall be charged the replacement cost based on the Employer's purchase price The Employer shall deduct the charges payable by the Contractor from any monies due or becoming due to the Contractor or recover the same from the Contractor as a debt due by the Contractor to the Employer.
10.5
PRICING AND CONTRACTUAL ASPECTS Submit together with his Tender the name/s of the Supplier/s and quantities to be supplied by each Supplier. Do not change the Supplier/s without the written consent of the SO Rep. Within 2 weeks from the date of the Employer's Letter of Acceptance of the Contractor's Tender, submit to the SO Rep the written contractual agreement/s with his Supplier/s.
10.6
SUBMISSION OF INFORMATION AND TEST REPORTS (PRECAST LIGHTWEIGHT FOAM CONCRETE PARTITIONS) Submit the following details to the SO Rep for approval before the manufacturing of precast lightweight concrete partition : (a) (b) (c) (d) (e) (f) (g) (h) (i) (j) Name/s of Supplier/s. Details of factories including addresses, size of workshops, equipment used and number of trained personnel. Production process, curing and storage. Mix design including foaming agent and dosage used. Test report, by PSB or approved laboratories, for technical properties specification in 10.2.1 (a) to (d). Test reports on drying shrinkage and total water absorption according to SS 271. The reports shall be dated within the validity period of six months prior to the date of submission. Mix proportions of cement mortar used. Admixture used to prevent shrinkage, efflorescence and cracking of cement mortar. Partition layout and marking for each type of dwelling unit floor plan applicable in the contract. Quantities of lightweight partitions of each thickness in square metre. Delivery and erection schedules.
Ugdg Spec TS 10-6/6 10.7 10.7.1 DELIVERY AND INSTALLATION Provision of Access Provide and maintain reasonable access into and within the site to allow the transportation and delivery of partition by the approved suppliers. The suitability of such access shall be decided by the SO Rep. 10.7.2 Erection (a) Before starting erection, check with the SO Rep whether skimming or plastering to the adjoining reinforced concrete structure is required. If this is required, erection and alignment of partitions shall allow for this, so that, in general, unless otherwise shown or noted in the Architectural Drawings, the finished surfaces of partitions shall flush with that of reinforced concrete structures. The accurate location of tongue and grooves of each partition panel shall be such that the offset between adjacent panels is within 2mm on both faces and the width of the resultant joint between the two adjacent panels is 10 2mm. In general, permanent connections shall be made as soon as the partitions are erected and aligned. Ensure that his workers have been properly trained in the handling and erection of the lightweight concrete partitions. Only qualified welders shall be employed for all welding required. Unless otherwise indicated in the Drawings, a groove shall be formed in the cement mortar joint between the lightweight concrete partition and the reinforced concrete structure. No lime shall be added to the cement mortar. An appropriate admixture, to be approved by the SO Rep, shall be used to prevent shrinkage, efflorescence and cracking.
(b)
(c)
(d)
10.7.3
Acceptable Final Surface Finish Check and ensure that visible air voids, bug holes and uneven or rough surfaces of the partitions and joints are properly skimmed at Contractor's own costs and expenses to achieve an even smooth surfaces such that painting can be applied directly. All such finishing work at site shall be to the satisfaction of the SO Rep.
10.7.4
Ensure that his workers have been properly trained in the handling and erection of the lightweight partitions. Only qualified welders shall be employed for all welding required.
10.8
STORAGE AND PROTECTION At all times the precast lightweight concrete partitions shall be properly stored and protected to prevent warping, bowing, cracking, chipping, staining and other Defects at no extra cost to Employer.
SECTION 11/...
Ugdg Spec TS 11-1/3
SECTION 11
11.0
NON-STRUCTURAL CONCRETE
11.1
CEMENT Cement shall be as specified in Section 4 "STRUCTURAL CONCRETE".
11.2
AGGREGATES Fine and coarse aggregates shall be as specified in Section 4 "STRUCTURAL CONCRETE".
11.3
WATER Water shall be as specified in Section 4 "STRUCTURAL CONCRETE".
11.4
STEEL REINFORCEMENT Steel reinforcement shall be as specified in Section 4 "STRUCTURAL CONCRETE" including all subclauses under it.
11.5
CONCRETE MIX Unless otherwise specified in this Section or in the Drawings, the grade of concrete in accordance with Section 4 shall be used for casting all non-structural concrete items in this Section. It shall be mixed, placed into position, compacted, cured and protected as for structural concrete. Precast concrete item shall be finished smooth and even, and shall not be installed into position in the Works until 14 days have elapsed from the date of casting.
11.6
HARDCORE Hardcore shall be hard, clean and dry stones, bricks, concrete or other approved material broken to pieces varying from 50mm to 75mm in size. It shall be laid to the required thickness, blinded with sand or quarry waste, well watered and consolidated with a power rammer or roller to an even surface, to the satisfaction of the SO Rep.
11.7
APRONS, PATHS AND PAVED AREAS Unless otherwise specified, all fillings under unsuspended ground floor slabs, aprons, paths, paved areas and other areas as indicated shall be 100mm thick hardcore in accordance with Clause 11.6 "Hardcore" laid over well consolidated ground, and blinded with sand well worked into the voids. Unless otherwise specified, paths and paved areas shall be cast from Grade 25 concrete as specified in Section 4 "Structural Concrete" and reinforced with one layer of No. A6 welded steel fabric. The reinforcement shall be fixed at 25mm from the top of the surface. Aprons shall be fitted with expansion joints at 3m to 4.5m maximum centres as indicated. Joints along paths and aprons shall be saw-cutted when the concrete has an age of at least one day. The depth of the saw-cut shall be at least 30mm. Paths and paved areas shall be finished with a minimum of two passes of power trowell without sprinkling with cement dust, cement grout or water. Ensure a sufficient team of workmen to complete the work before final set. The paths and paved areas shall be immediately cured for seven days with approved curing compound or other approved methods.
Ugdg Spec TS 11-2/3
11.8
PAVING SLABS FOR PATHS AND PAVED AREAS When paving slabs are specified, they shall be 600 x 600 x 50mm thick concrete slabs of Grade 25 concrete with 10mm maximum aggregate obtained from approved manufacturer. Slabs shall be laid on a bed of 75mm consolidated quarry waste and layer of sand at least 25mm thick and all joints shall be grouted and pointed in 1:3 cement mortar. Inform the SO Rep of his proposed suppliers. Samples shall be submitted for approval before bulk ordering. Slabs shall be finished rough or patterned to give non-slip surface.
11.9
CONCRETE SURROUND TO INSPECTION CHAMBERS Leave openings as shown in Structural Drawings in the aprons where manholes are located to ensure a regular pattern and complete the rendering after manhole frames are placed in position. All covers shall be aligned with reference to the building line.
11.10
REINFORCED CONCRETE DRAINS Reinforced concrete surface drains shall be constructed as indicated in the drawings.
11.11
RAMPS AND STEPS Unless otherwise specified, reinforced concrete ramps and steps shall be Grade 25 concrete as specified in Section 4 "Structural Concrete", reinforced with one layer of No. A6 welded steel fabric placed at 25mm from the top. The concrete shall be finished with a minimum of 2 passes power trowel to ramps or 2 passes of hard steel trowel to the treads without sprinkling with cement dust, cement grout or water. Ensure a sufficient team of workmen to finish the works before final set. The concrete shall be immediately cured for seven days with approved curing compound or other approved methods. Surfaces shall be finished rough or patterned to give non-slip surface.
11.12
PEDESTRIAN DRAIN CROSSINGS AND CONCRETE BOLLARDS Drain crossings and reinforced concrete barrier posts shall be constructed to positions, dimensions and details shown.
11.13
PRECAST CONCRETE JAMB LINING TO WINDOWS Precast concrete jambs and sills of windows where shown shall be 50mm thick, 370mm wide reinforced with No. 10 welded steel fabric cast in 3 separate pieces, each having 2 Nos. mild steel holdfasts 40 x 3 x 305 mm girth, one end cast into section, the other end built into bed joints of walls.
11.14
HEELSTONES All door frames shall be fixed in accordance with the Drawings. Heelstones shall be built up with 1:2 cement mortar mix in two or more operations to a height of 100/150mm as shown. It shall be carried out to the same section as the door frames and bonded into walls and bedded in strong cement mortar on floor with surface hacked rough.
Ugdg Spec TS 11-3/3
11.15
CONCRETE COPING Cast-in-situ concrete coping shall be to details as shown in the Drawings and shall be finished in plastering as specified in Section 20 "WALL FINISHES". Precast concrete coping shall be to details as shown in the Drawings and shall be finished smooth and even.
11.16
CONCRETE LINTOLS Concrete lintols shall be of the sizes and with the reinforcement as shown in the Drawings. Lintols shall have exposed surfaces finished smooth and in line with the surfaces of adjacent walls.
11.17
SCUPPER CHANNELS TO ACCESS BALCONIES AND STAIRCASE LANDINGS Scupper channels shall be formed on floors of access balconies and staircase landings, and shall be screeded to fall towards waste discharge stacks.
11.18
SLABS OVER CHANNELS 50mm thick precast cover slabs reinforced with No. B5 welded steel fabric shall be provided over channels and cast at random lengths with 100mm x 25mm hand grips at both ends and housed onto rebate sides of channels where shown.
11.19
COOKING SLABS AND PREPARATION TABLES Cooking slabs and preparation tables shall be as specified in Section 29 "EATING HOUSES."
11.20
CONCRETE INFILL AROUND W.C. STOOLING The Contractor shall attend to and backfill with 1:3:6 concrete mix around water closets after installation by sanitary contractor (if applicable) or form concrete stooling where these are shown and finished as specified in Section 19 "FLOOR FINISHES" including all clauses and subclauses under it. Apply bonding agent to concrete interface between old and new concrete.
SECTION 12/
Ugdg Spec TS 12-1/6
SECTION 12
12.0
BRICKWORK AND BLOCKWORK
12.1
MORTAR MIX FOR BLOCKWORKS AND BRICKWORKS All solid concrete blockwork and clay brickwork shall be laid and compacted with approved mortar prepacked mortar mix. The prepacked mortar mix shall be mixed mechanically and used according to the manufacturers recommendation. Potable water supplied by the Power Supply shall be used for mixing the mortar.
12.2
SOLID CONCRETE BRICKS OR BLOCKS All solid concrete blocks shall be machine-pressed and pressure vibrated cement sand blocks complying with SS 271:1983. No blocks shall be laid in position until 2 weeks after delivery to site.
12.2.1
Laying of Solid Concrete Bricks or Blocks The solid concrete blocks shall be bedded with mortar as specified in this Section. The work shall be carried out in a uniform manner with no portion raised more than 300mm above the adjacent portions. Corner shall be well bonded, plumbed and all perpends and quoins kept true and square. Joints shall be of even thickness and shall not exceed 10mm thick. They shall be raked to a depth of 5mm to10mm while the mortar is green to form adequate key for plastering. The diameter bonding ties shall be as specified in Clause 12.4(a) "Wall Tie/ Bonding Bar System" and shall be embedded into the horizontal joints. 90mm thick solid concrete blockwall shall be constructed with 290mm/190mm x 90mm x 90mm blocks and laid in stretcher bond, reinforced with minimum 64mm x 0.5mm thick expanded galvanised steel reinforcement at every third course. The bottom-most expanded metal reinforcement shall not be more than 200mm above the floor level. Laps of expanded metal reinforcement shall not be less than 100mm. 190mm thick solid concrete blockwall shall be laid in English bond and constructed with 190mm x 90mm x 90mm blocks.
12.2.2
Plastering The solid concrete blocks shall be plastered as specified in Section 20 "WALL FINISHES" including all clauses and sub-clauses under it.
12.3
CLAY BRICKS All the clay bricks shall be of modular sizes. They shall be 200mm x 100mm x 100mm and/or 300mm x 100mm x 100mm. Average Work Size Designation Length 200mm x 100mm x 100mm 300mm x 100mm x 100mm 187.5mm 287.5mm Width 88.5mm 88.5mm Depth 88.5mm 88.5mm
Ugdg Spec TS 12-2/6
12.3.1
Laying of Clay Bricks All bricks shall be well wetted before use and tops of brickwall where left off shall be well wetted before commencement of laying. Except for facing bricks, all faces of brickwork shall be left rough and the joints raked out to a depth of 5mm to 10 mm while the mortar is green to form adequate key for plaster. No four (4) courses of brickwork shall exceed 400mm in height.
12.3.2
Modular Common Clay Bricks Brickwork as shown to be plastered shall be of modular common bricks. Plastering shall be as specified in Section 20 "WALL FINISHES". All common bricks shall comply with the following requirements : Requirement (a) (b) (c) (d) (e) Width of Brick Compressive Strength Water Absorption Ratio Soluble Salt Content Efflorescence
2
Standard 88.5mm average 3.5mm Min 25 N per mm
Not more than 15% by weight Not more than 1% by weight Slight (Not more than 10% of the brick surface area shall have salt deposit)
The method of testing shall be in accordance with Singapore Standard 103:1974. Test reports showing compliance with the requirements stipulated in the above table shall be submitted to the SO Rep before the common bricks are delivered to the Site. Tests shall be carried out on common bricks delivered to the Site to ensure compliance.
12.3.3
Facing Clay Bricks Unless otherwise specified, all facing clay brick shall be red facing clay bricks. All internal faces of clay brick walls shall have joints raked off 5 to 10 mm to take plastering. External faces shall be raked off, consolidated and pointed with prepacked mortar mix. Protect the facing brickwall against dust, contaminated moisture, cement mortar droppings during construction. The completed facing brickwall surfaces shall be free of stain, dust and cement mortar droppings.
12.4
CAVITY WALLS (a) Wall Tie/Bonding Bar System All brickwalls and block walls shall be tied to the surface of reinforced concrete walls or columns by a wall tie system. The brickwalls and block walls shall also be laterally restrained at both ends by fastening it to reinforced concrete columns with bonding bar system. The wall tie system shall consist of 2 nos. of wall ties held in place by lipped frame. The frame shall have a pair of stoppers to allow each wall tie a vertical flexibility of 100mm for brick coursing. The frame and wall tie shall be 2mm and 3mm thick respectively. The fabrication details of the wall tie system shall be in accordance with the Drawings. Where the fabrication details are different from those as shown in the Drawings, the Contractor shall first obtain approval from the SO Rep before proceeding any further. The fabrication details of the bonding bar system shall be similar to that of the wall tie system except that the length of the bonding bar shall be 300mm and whereas that for the wall tie shall be 70mm for brick cladding construction and 100mm long for cavity wall construction.
Ugdg Spec TS 12-3/6
12.4
CAVITY WALLS (CONT'D) (a) Wall Tie/Bonding Bar System (Cont'd) All wall tie and bonding bar systems shall be fastened with masonry drive pin to the reinforced concrete column or wall. The masonry drive pin shall be made of stainless steel grade 304 and shall have a minimum pull-out strength of 1KN from the concrete. The wall tie system shall be spaced horizontally at 600mm centres to centres and so arranged such that individual wall ties at each horizontally-spaced system are in a staggered manner. The detailed arrangement of the wall tie system for a typical wall panel is shown in the Drawings. Individual wall tie shall be embedded 50mm into the mortar joints and at every fourth course of the bricks. The wall tie and bonding bar systems shall be hot-dipped galvanised. The coating mass to at least 3 randomly selected points for individual wall tie/ bonding bar and at least 3 randomly selected points for lipped frame shall comply with the following : (i) (ii) (iii) Wall ties/bonding bars Lipped frame ) ) ) Minimum average coating mass shall be 460g per m2 or 64 microns in accordance with BS 729;
2
Minimum coating mass on individual point shall be 410g per m or the equivalent thickness of 57 microns in accordance with BS 729.
The hot-dipped galvanised coating shall be continuous, smooth and free from flux stains. If the coating appearance of any galvanised wall tie system is found otherwise, such wall tie system shall not be used. All galvanised wall tie system shall be stored in a dry and well ventilated place to prevent the formation of white deposit on them. Small areas of galvanised coating damaged by cutting or by excessively rough treatment shall be made good by the application of at least two coats of good quality zinc-rich paint with minimum 94% of zinc dust, expressed as a percentage by weight of the solid content of the paint. Upon the instruction of the SO Rep, the Contractor shall send at least 2 samples of the galvanised wall tie or bonding bar system to be tested by an accredited laboratory to determine the coating weight. The coating weight shall be determined by a stripping test or ISO 2808 Method in accordance with SS 117. Original certificate of such tests shall be submitted to the SO Rep for verification. As and when directed by the SO Rep, the Contractor shall within 24 hours make available one elcometer on the Site for measuring the thickness of zinc coating. (b) Cavity Wall Construction The damp proof membrane (hereinafter referred to as "DPM" for the purposes of this clause) shall be extended to 200mm above the floor level as shown in the Drawings. The DPM shall be the type as specified in Clause 12.8 "Damp-Proof Membrane/Course" and shall be laid in continuous stretch to the whole width of the wall. The joints in the facing brickwall shall be completely bedded with mortar (except weep holes). Polyurethane sealant with backer rod to the manufacturer's instructions shall be applied at joints where the brickworks abuts reinforced concrete columns and beams as shown in the Drawings. The erection of the facing brickwall shall be carried out first followed by the external plastering to beams and columns. Rake off excess mortar from the inner face as the work proceeds to prevent accumulation of mortar dropping at the base of the cavity. Provide vertical joints without cement mortar as weep holes at 1st and 2nd course of the facing brickwall and spaced at 900mm centre to centre in staggered arrangement. Protect the facing brickwall against dust, contaminated moisture, cement mortar droppings during construction. The completed facing brickwall surfaces shall be free of stains, dust and cement mortar droppings.
Ugdg Spec TS 12-4/6
12.5
REINFORCEMENT TO SOLID CONCRETE BLOCK AND CLAY BRICKWORK WALLS AND PARTITIONS (a) Expanded Galvanised Steel Reinforcement 90mm clay brick walls and solid block walls shall be reinforced with minimum 64 x 0.5mm thick expanded galvanised steel reinforcement at every 3rd course. The bottom-most expanded metal reinforcement shall be 200mm above floor level. Provide a minimum lap of 100mm at reinforcement joints. Embed reinforcement into bed joints of wall and bonding bars. Blocks shall be built with the coursing and bonding as shown in the Drawings and blocks correctly bedded. (b) Bonding Bar System The bonding bar system shall be as specified in the Clause "Cavity Walls And Brick Cladding" as specified in the foregoing.
12.6
POLYURETHANE SEALANT Where external solid concrete block walls or brickwalls flush with reinforced concrete columns and beams, polyurethane sealant with backer rod to the Manufacturer's recommendations shall be applied at the joints between the walls and the columns and beams as shown in the Drawings. The depth of sealant shall be 13mm minimum.
12.7
FOAM RUBBER STRIP INFILL Where specified, provide and lay close-cell foam rubber strip infill to the top most joints between the internal walls (clay brick, or solid concrete block) and the reinforced concrete beam or roof slab of topmost end corner dwelling units as shown in the Drawings. When the wall panel exceeds 5m in length, the foam rubber strip infill shall be interrupted by the cement mortar of 1 in 3 mix by volume in fill for a length of 900mm.
12.8
DAMP-PROOF MEMBRANE/COURSE Provide damp-proof courses to all walls complying with BS 6398 Type B (felt fibre base) weighing 3.3 Kg 2 per m laid to break joint on a layer of cement and sand mortar laid immediately under the lowest course of blocks at ground floor level or at level 150mm to 220mm above ground level in brickwalls. Where applicable, provide and lay also damp-proof membrane to the underside of R.C. ground floor slab of 1st storey flat (where rooms do not have floor tiles finishes) as shown in the Drawing. The damp-proof 2 membrane shall comply with BS 6398 Type B (felt fibre base) weighing 3.3 Kg per m . The substrates shall be float finished to receive the damp proof membrane. The damp-proof membrane shall be strip bonded onto the substrates with rubberised bitumen adhesive to the Manufacturer's recommendations. All laps shall be 100mm wide and sealed with bitumen adhesive to the Manufacturer's instructions. Such damp-proof membrane shall be applied also to base of shoplets' counter at first storey as shown in the Drawings. The damp-proof course and damp-proof membrane shall conform to the following : (a) Base Material (i) (ii) The minimum mass per unit area of the base material shall not be less than 0.34 kg per m . The fibre base shall consist of one or more absorbent sheet of felt made from a mixture of animal and vegetable fibres.
2
Ugdg Spec TS 12-5/6
12.8
DAMP-PROOF MEMBRANE/COURSE (CONT'D) (b) Bituminous Materials and Fillers (i) The minimum mass per unit area of bitumen shall not be less than (1.6 +1/2 excess mass of 2 dpc material) in kg per m . The saturating material shall consist of bitumen having penetration within the range of 60 to 230 (inclusive) at 25C when tested as described in BS 4691. The coating material shall be oxidised bitumen stabilised by mineral filler and finished with a surfacing material. The mass per unit area of mineral filler and surfacing be within (0.9 +1/3 excess mass of d.p.c. material) Kg per m2 to (1.5 +1/2 of the excess mass of d.p.c. material) kg per m2. When measured as described in BS 4692, the softening point of the finished coating material shall not exceed the softening point of the oxidised bitumen by more than 20C. The mineral filler shall consist of mineral granules or other materials. Not less than 99% by mass of filler shall pass a 425 micro metres mesh sieve complying with BS 410 and not less than 50% of the mass shall pass a 212 micro metre mesh sieve complying with BS 410. The surfacing material shall consist of natural sand, mineral granules or other material which will prevent adhesion between layers of the finished damp-proof materials in the roll.
(ii)
(iii)
(iv)
(v)
(vi)
12.9
OPENINGS FOR LIFT DOORS Leave openings for new door to lift well where shown. Build up masonry work after lift door frames are fixed by lift contractor and make good walls. Floor screed at door shall have fall away from lift well as shown in the Drawings.
12.10
MORTICES, HOLES, CHASES, ETC Cut or leave mortices, recesses, holes, chases, grooves, etc. as and when required for bolts, pipes, bearers, outlets, skirtings, etc. Generally make good when necessary in cement mortar to match surrounding surfaces to the satisfaction of the SO Rep.
12.11
SCAFFOLDING Provide adequate scaffolding as specified in Section 1 "GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS" to enable masons to work from the external side of external walls to achieve a high standard of walling and pointing.
12.12
GROOVE LINES TO MASONRY WALLS Form a groove in the mortar between the masonry walls and the reinforced concrete structures where the two surfaces are flush.
12.13
70MM THICK SOLID BLOCK INFILL IN BEDROOMS, LIVING/DINING AND KITCHEN Where shown, 70mm thick solid block infill shall be constructed with 190mm x 90mm x 70mm thick solid concrete blocks approved by the SO Rep. Connection of solid block infill to lightweight concrete panel and to RC column or wall shall be as shown in the Drawings. The solid concrete panel infill shall be finished with two (2) coats of polymer modified mortar to match with the finished surface of lightweight concrete panels and to the satisfaction of the SO Rep.
Ugdg Spec TS 12-6/6
12.14
WATER TIGHTNESS TEST TO EXTERNAL FACING BRICK WALLS (a) General The Contractor shall carry out water test to the external facing brick walls to test the water tightness of external wall construction. The external facing brick walls shall include facing brick walls directly facing the exterior but exclude walls along access balcony and balcony parapet walls. (b) Source of Water The water used for filling up of reinforced concrete water tank before the sterilisation shall be used for the water tightness test to the external facing brick walls. The Contractor shall only be allowed to sterilise the water tank after completion of the water tightness test to the external facing brick walls. Power Supplys potable water shall not be used for the water tightness test to external facing brick walls except for re-test cases. (c) Method of Testing 10% of the units per block and one panel of external facing brick wall per unit sampled by the SO Rep shall be tested for water tightness. Provide the following information to the SO Rep for approval at least 2 months before the water test to be carried out : (i) (ii) (iii) (iv) The entire equipment set up to conduct the water test Procedure of the water test Pump capacity to deliver the required flow rate The method to suspend the nozzle
The nozzle of the water jet shall be fixed at a distance of 1800mm to 2000mm away from the surface of the external wall and incline at 30 to the external wall. The capacity of water delivered shall be 300 litres per hour and the duration of testing is 2 hours. The nozzle shall be placed in such a way that it covers the entire wall panel. Ensure that the drawing of water from the water tank for testing does not contaminate the water tank. The wall panel shall be considered to have passed the test if no dampness or seepage appears at the internal surface of the wall panel or the adjacent areas during the spraying and within half hour after the completion of spraying. (d) Failure of the Testing In the event of any failure in the first water tightness test, the Contractor shall rectify the dampness and/or leakage and carry out a second water tightness test. Another 10% of the units per block and one wall panel per unit shall also be sampled by the SO Rep for the second water tightness test. In the event of the second water tightness test fails, the Contractor shall carry out water tightness test to all external facing brick wall panels for the whole block. The Contractor shall rectify all leakages and repeat the test until all the external facing brick walls have passed the test. The costs and expenses of all the water tightness tests, retests and rectification work shall be borne by the Contractor. In addition, the SO Rep reserves the right to reject any external facing brick wall that perform unsatisfactorily during the water tightness tests.
SECTION 13/...
Ugdg Spec TS 13-1/4
SECTION 13
13.0
ROOFING
13.1
OVER-RIDING CLAUSE The Contractor and his Specialist executing the works as required in this Section have to ensure that the works, goods or materials used shall be suitable and reasonably fit for the purposes for which they are required (hereinafter referred as "Performance Requirement"). In the event the works, goods or materials to be used as specified in this Section are upgraded in order to meet the Performance Requirement, the Contractor and his Specialist shall do all necessary upgrading at no extra cost to the Employer, subject always to the approval of the SO Rep, but such approval shall not in any way affect the Contractor's and his Specialist's duties or obligations arising under the Contract.
13.2
CONCRETE ROOF FINISH The finished concrete roof shall be kept free from mortar droppings and damages by heavy objects during subsequent work to the roof. The roof shall be inspected by the SO Rep prior to the application of waterproofing system as shown in the drawings. Should any area of the roof be found unsatisfactory, render it with 1:3 non-shrink cement sand screed and approved bonding agent or other approved method at no extra costs to the Employer.
13.3
METAL ROOFING AND INSULATION SHEET
13.3.1
Profiled Steel Roofing Sheets Where shown in the Drawings, all profiled metal roofing and fascia sheets shall be 0.53mm "Zincalume colourbond Kliplok Hi-ten" or 0.53mm coloured "Speed Deck Hi-ten" or other approved in single lengths for each span. The colour shall be for one side and shall be selected by the SO Rep. Where shown, provide 300mm upturn to roofing at jack roof. The Contractor shall check whether design for roof can comply with the Manufacturer's specification before the actual laying of the structure. The metal roof structural plans and fastening details, supported by design calculations, shall be provided by the Contractor's Professional Engineer. The design shall satisfy the Performance Requirements for its intended use and that include withstanding wind load in accordance with CP3 Chapter V. The Contractor's Professional Engineer shall submit a Certificate of Supervision not later than two weeks after completion of the works, stating that he has carried out such supervision works and is fully satisfied that the works have been constructed with such structural plans and fastening details. The accessories such as ridge capping, fascia capping, valley gutter, longitudinal and transverse parapet flashings, cap flashing and corner moulds and others shall be of 0.6mm (24 SWG) "Colourbond" or "Met Roof" or other approved to the shape and profile as shown in the Drawings. Provide and fix also the gutter to the shape, material and profile as shown in the Drawings. The metal roofing, fascia sheets, flashings, copings, openings pipe flashings, gutters and others shall be provided and installed by an approved Specialist who can be an approved manufacturer or the Manufacturer's duly authorised representative. If by the latter, the approved manufacturer shall provide instruction as to the manner of assembly or installation of the roofing and shall further be responsible for the work. For the purpose of the Warranty specified in Clause 13.3.3 "Warranty", work shall mean all work specified or reasonably to be inferred under this clause including all subclauses under it.
Ugdg Spec TS 13-2/4
13.3.2
Reflective Roof Heat Insulation Sheet Provide and lay vertically to fall one layer approved double sided reflective roof heat insulation sheet over steel purlins. Allow vertical lapping of 50mm minimum. The double sided reflective roof heat insulation sheet shall be secured to ridge and eave purlins by self-drilling fasteners complete with 38mm square metal washers. Unless shown otherwise in the Drawings, reflective roof heat insulation sheet need not be provided for the metal roof to linkway. The double sided reflective roof heat insulation sheet shall be "Parsec Thermo-Brite II"; or "Super Brite"; or other approved double sided roof heat insulation sheet complying with the following requirements : (a) PSB Product Listing The insulation sheet shall be certified under PSB Product Listing Scheme. (b) Reflectivity The reflectivity shall be : Side 1 (average) : Side 2 (average) : (c) Fire Tests The fire tests shall be : BS 476 Part 7 BS 476 Part 6 - Index of Performance - Sub-index (d) Tear Resistance The tear resistance shall be : Machine Direction : 4000g minimum Transverse Direction : 4000g minimum The entire surface of the insulation sheets shall be evenly laid to the satisfaction of the SO Rep. The insulation sheet shall be indelibly marked and imprinted at intervals of not more than one metre. The markings shall show the Manufacturer's name and/or trade mark. : Class 1
90% minimum 90% minimum
: :
12 maximum 6 maximum
13.3.3
Lightning Protection To Metallic Roofing System, Wall Cladding And Metallic Motifs For metallic roofing system or roof structure or wall cladding or metallic motifs at the roof or envelope of the building, the whole metallic body and any individually isolated metallic parts shall be bonded to the main lightning protection system to comply with or otherwise satisfy the lightning protection requirements specified in Singapore Standard CP 33 : 1996. The design (where applicable), manufacture and installation of such metallic bodies or parts shall be carried out judiciously such as to ensure the electrical continuity of the whole metallic roofing or wall cladding or motifs by proper connections/joints and maintain its warranty. An adequate number of accessible bonding points shall be provided. Upon completion, the Contractor shall submit to the SO Rep detailed drawings showing the metallic roofing or structure or wall cladding or motif and the bonding to the main lightning protection system.
Ugdg Spec TS 13-3/4
13.4
CLAY ROOF TILES AND HEAT INSULATION
13.4.1
Clay Roof Tiles The clay roof tiles shall be the type as shown in the Drawings or as specified in the Supplementary Specification. The colour of the roof tile shall be approved by the SO Rep. (A) Performance Tests The roofing tiles shall be tested for permeability in accordance with SS 70:1990. The tiles shall be considered as satisfying the test if no water has dripped from the underside of the tile after the 6hour test. The transverse breaking strength determined in the manner described in SS 70:1990 shall not be less than the following : Average Individual 900 Newtons 675 Newtons
The test method for average water absorption percentage of tiles shall be in the manner as described in SS 70:1990. The average and individual water absorption percentage of tiles shall not be more than 8.0 percent and 10.0 percent respectively. (B) Laying and Fixing of Tiles The roofing tiles and tile accessories shall be provided and laid by the Manufacturer or by his duly authorised representative in strict accordance with the Manufacturer's instructions and recommendations. Submit Drawings to the SO Rep to show the details of fixing and fastening tiles to roof. Nails and clips shall be of hot-dip galvanised or of non-ferrous metals. Nails shall be of sufficient length to penetrate into the battens by a minimum of 20mm, but shall not protrude beyond the depth of battens. All tiles shall range straight in courses and vertical edges in line from eave to ridge. Upon completion of all necessary trades, clean down the roof. (C) Sealing of Gaps Gaps which occur through cutting of tiles at valleys shall be filled with bedding mortar. Any other gaps shall be sealed by approved means to effectively seal off the gaps. (D) Tile Accessories Provide and lay ridge connecting tiles, lip tiles, ridge tiles, verge tiles, socket tiles, eave tiles, flashing, eave comb, rafter grating, complete set of tile accessories for vent pipes (socket tiles, pipe and cap/lantern) and other tile accessories to roof to form a complete roof system. Lead flashing shall be 14.9 kg/m2 minimum and shall form a watertight joint to the profile of the roofing tile. 13.4.2 Reflective Roof Heat Insulation Sheet Provide and lay horizontally to fall, one layer approved double sided reflective roof heat insulation sheet over rafters. Allow minimum 75mm for lappings. The insulation sheet shall be nailed or stapled to wooden rafters. Unless shown otherwise in the Drawings, reflective roof heat insulation sheet need not be provided for the clay roof tiles to linkways. The double sided reflective roof heat insulation sheet shall be "Parsec Thermo-Brite II"; or "Super Brite"; or other approved double sided roof heat insulation sheet complying with the following requirements: (a) PSB Product Listing The insulation sheet shall be certified under PSB Product Listing Scheme.
Ugdg Spec TS 13-4/4
13.4.2
Reflective Roof Heat Insulation Sheet (Contd) (b) Reflectivity The reflectivity shall be : Side 1 (average) - 90% minimum Side 2 (average) - 90% minimum (c) Fire Tests The fire tests shall be : BS 476 Part 7 - Class 1 BS 476 Part 6 Index of Performance Sub-index (d) Tear Resistance The tear resistance shall be : Machine Direction - 4000g minimum Transverse Direction - 4000g minimum The entire surface of the insulation sheets shall be evenly laid to the satisfaction of the SO Rep. The insulation sheet shall be indelibly marked and imprinted at interval at not more than one metre. The markings shall show the Manufacturer's name and/or trade mark.
- 12 maximum - 6 maximum
13.5
SOUND INSULATION MATERIAL Where sound insulation material is shown in the Drawings, the insulation material shall be one layer of 3 50mm thick, 60-80 kg per m density rockwool or other approved.
SECTION 14/
SECTION 14
14.0
CONCRETE FLAT ROOF
14.1
OVER-RIDING CLAUSE The Contractor and his Specialist executing the works as required in this Section have to ensure that the works, goods or materials used shall be suitable and reasonably fit for the purposes for which they are required (hereinafter referred as "Performance Requirement"). In the event the works, goods or materials to be used as specified in this Section are upgraded in order to meet the Performance Requirement, the Contractor and his Specialist shall do all necessary upgrading at no extra cost to the Employer, subject always to the approval of the SO Rep, but such approval shall not in any way affect the Contractor's and his Specialist's duties or obligations arising under the Contract.
14.2
EXISTING ROOFING SYSTEM
14.2.1
#Existing Roofing System with Existing Warranty (#where applicable) The Contractor shall take every precaution to protect the existing roofing system. All damages to the existing roofing system shall be repaired by the Contractor. The Contractor shall also carry out new roofing works to any space-adding item or other additional structure shown in the Drawings. The Contractor shall ensure that the aforesaid repair works and new roofing works are properly executed and that the integrity of the whole roofing system is maintained. The Contractor shall engage the Employer's original Roofing Contractor(s) who is/are providing the existing warranty for the existing roofing system to carry out any patching up of openings or repair/rectification of any damages to the existing roofing system and execution of any new roofing work to space-adding item or other additional structure which overlap, abutt, adjoin or affect in any manner, the existing roofing system in order to maintain the validity of the existing warranty on the existing roofing system. Within 21 days after acceptance of the Contractor's Tender by the Employer, the Contractor shall submit Letter(s) of Undertaking from the original Roofing Contractors (Appendix 2) stating clearly and unequivocally, and without any proviso, that : (a) the original Roofing Contractor(s) is/are engaged by the Contractor as specialist sub-contractor to carry out new and/or repair/reinstatement works to the existing roofing system as specified in the Contract; and the original Roofing Contractor(s) confirm the continued validity of the original roofing warranty given by him/them for the existing roofing system on the relevant Blocks of flats in the Contract.
(b)
Failure by the Contractor to provide the required letter(s) of undertaking would render him liable to uphold the terms of the warranty given by the original Roofing Contractor(s). The Employer shall be entitled to enforce the provisions of the said warranty against the Contractor and the Contractor shall forthwith comply with the provisions of the said warranty.
14.2.2
#Existing Roofing System without Existing Warranty (#where applicable) The Contractor shall inspect the condition of the existing roofing system jointly with the SO Rep and the representatives from the relevant Town Councils. All Defects noted shall be recorded by way of notes, sketches and photographs verified by all parties concerned before the commencement of work. The Contractor shall take every precaution to protect the existing roofing system.
14.2.2
#Existing Roofing System without Existing Warranty (#where applicable) (Cont'd) The Contractor is required to re-roof those area of the existing roof-system damaged by him to the satisfaction of the SO Rep and Town Council's representatives. The Contractor shall also carry out new roofing works to any space-adding item or other additional structure as shown in the Drawings. If the Contractor executes the re-roofing works himself, he shall have to be registered with BCA under the specific contracting head for Roofing Installation or Waterproofing Installation. Otherwise the Contractor shall engage a sub-contractor who is registered with BCA under the specific contracting head for Roof Installation or Waterproofing Installation to execute the Re-roofing Works. The Contractor shall submit a copy of the BCA registration card to the SO Rep for approval prior to the commencement of the Re-roofing Works. The submission of a copy of the BCA registration card shall be a condition precedent to progress payment for the Re-roofing Works. If the Contractor fails to comply with the requirements of this Clause, the SO Rep reserves the right, to instruct the immediate removal of the unregistered sub-contractor from the Site or if the Contractor executes the Works himself, to instruct the Contractor to employ, a registered sub-contractor to continue execution of the Re-roofing Works. The Contractor shall upon receiving notice in writing of such order to remove the unregistered sub-contractor replace them with another sub-contractor who is appropriately registered with BCA. In any case any expense or cost incurred by the Contractor arising out of or in connection with the instruction of the SO Rep under this Clause shall be borne by the Contractor and he shall have no claim whatsoever against the Employer. Further the Contractor is not entitled to any extension of time arising out of or connection with the instruction of the SO Rep pursuant to this Clause. The above-mentioned rights and liabilities of the Contractor shall apply without any prejudice to any other rights and powers of the Employer under the Clause 1.10 "Nuisance and Irregularities" or under any other provisions of the Contract.
14.3
NEW ROOFING SYSTEM Where shown in the Drawings or specified in the Contract, the Contractor shall include in his Contract Sum for all new special roof treatment work comprising either one or both of the following systems : (a) (b) Complete System of Waterproofing Treatment and Ferrocement Secondary Roof Slabs; Complete System of Waterproofing Treatment and Panel Roofing.
These special roof treatment work shall be carried out by an approved roofing specialist. Submit the name of the roofing specialist whom he intends to engage to the SO Rep for approval not earlier than five (5) months and not later than two (2) months prior to the commencement of the special roof treatment work.
14.4
COMPLETE SYSTEM OF WATERPROOFING TREATMENT AND FERROCEMENT SECONDARY ROOF SLABS (A) Preparation of Surface Prior to application of the waterproofing membranes system, the entire surfaces shall be in a thoroughly clean and dry condition. (B) Waterproofing Membranes System The Contractor shall use Shell Flintkote Ultra water proofing system or waterproofing membranes system as listed in the HDB List of Products & Suppliers. The application of the waterproofing system shall fully comply with the Manufacturer's instructions.
14.4
COMPLETE SYSTEM OF WATERPROOFING TREATMENT AND FERROCEMENT SECONDARY ROOF SLABS (CONT'D) (C) Roof Details Detailing at eaves shall be as indicated in the Drawings. The waterproofing treatment shall be carried out at abutments to walls, pipes, parapets, skirtings, concrete curbs, etc as shown in the Drawings. For any upturns, waterproofing membrane is to be carried up a minimum distance of not less than 300mm. (D) Bituminous Stains In the event the external painted walls of the building blocks are affected by the bituminous stains, the Contractor shall remove the stain, make good and re-paint the affected surfaces to the satisfaction of the SO Rep. (E) Tests After the application of the last coat of bitumen emulsion and prior to the application of the reflective finish, the uniformity of the application of the waterproofing membrane shall be examined both visually and by test. The membrane shall be considered visually satisfactory if no protrusion of the fibre glass can be seen. The test involves the removal of 3 small samples from 3 randomly selected locations. The average thickness and unit area weight shall be measured. Each thickness and unit area weight shall exceed the minimum values specified by the Manufacturer. The dry film thickness inclusive of the fibreglass membrane shall not be less than 1.00mm and the unit weight inclusive of the fibreglass membrane based on 100mm x 100mm (100 cm2) shall not be less than 10g . The test shall be carried out by an approved laboratory accredited under the Singapore Laboratory Accreditation Scheme (SINGLAS).
14.4
COMPLETE SYSTEM OF WATERPROOFING TREATMENT AND FERROCEMENT SECONDARY ROOF SLABS (CONT'D) (E) Tests (Cont'd) If the membrane fail to meet one or both of the requirements, additional coat(s) of waterproofing membrane shall be applied. The rectified membrane shall be re-examined and re-tested until it passes all the requirements stipulated above. In addition, the Contractor shall make good the small areas where samples have been removed for the test(s) at his own costs and expenses. (F) Ferrocement Roof Slabs (i) Materials - General Standards (a) Cement Cement shall be Ordinary Portland Cement of an approved brand and manufacturer and shall comply with SS26. (b) Fine Aggregates Fine aggregates shall be natural sand or crushed stone sand complying with SS31. (c) Water Water used for mixing concrete, washing formwork and curing of concrete shall be potable water supplied by PUB. (d) Steel Reinforcement Steel reinforcement shall be welded steel fabric complying with SS32. (e) Admixtures Admixtures shall comply with SS320 or BS5075. (f) Solid Block Supporting Stool Concrete block shall comply with SS271. (ii) Design Specifications (a) Slab Dimension The precast concrete slab shall be 600 3mm long x 600 3mm wide x 30 2mm thick. Each slab shall be square with the difference in diagonal lengths of each panel shall not be more than 3mm. Half size panel (300 3mm long x 600 3mm wide) shall be used where necessary so as to minimise the cutting of panels. Service slit of 5mm wide and 50mm long shall be provided along two opposite sides in accordance with the Drawings.
14.4
COMPLETE SYSTEM OF WATERPROOFING TREATMENT AND FERROCEMENT SECONDARY ROOF SLABS (CONT'D) (F) Ferrocement Roof Slabs (Cont'd) (ii) Design Specifications (Cont'd) (b) Mix Design The precast concrete slab shall be cast from a mix design which satisfies the following requirements : 1) 2) 3) 4) minimum cement/sand ratio by weight of 1:2; maximum water/cement ratio by weight of 0.45; air dry density of hardened concrete (including steel) not less than 2200 kg/m3; 2 28 days average cube strength of three cubes not less than 35 N/mm .
The amount of admixture in the mix design shall be in accordance with the Manufacturer's instruction. Before commencing the manufacture of precast slabs, submit a proposed mix design to the SO Rep for approval and carry out trial mix if deemed necessary. . (c) Reinforcement The reinforcement shall consist of a layer of square wire mesh 3.25mm (minimum) at 75mm spacing sandwiched between two layers of square wire mesh 1.5mm (minimum) at 25mm spacing. The wires shall be galvanized with a zinc coating weight of 65 gm/m2 minimum. The wires shall have a minimum proof stress of 300 N/mm2. (d) Finishes The slab shall be cast on a steel base plate and the top surface shall be trowelled finish. (e) Other Properties (i) Initial Surface Absorption Test Value (BS1881). The hardened panel shall have ISAT values less than that stipulated below : Time (min) ISAT Value (ml/m2/s) (ii) (iii) 10 0.20 30 0.15 60 0.1
Carbonation depth of hardened panel at installation shall be less than 3mm. Cover tolerance shall be such that no more than 3 points per section shall have a cover measurement of less than 3mm.
(f)
Solid Block Supporting Stool The shape and size of the solid block for supporting the slabs shall be in accordance with the Drawings.
(iii)
Manufacturing Process The slab shall be cast flat using steel base mould. The mortar shall be compacted by vibrators and the top surface steel trowelled smooth. All reinforcement shall be adequately supported with approved spacers. Each slab shall bear the name of the Manufacturer preferably by imprinting onto the mould without reducing the concrete cover for the reinforcement.
14.4
COMPLETE SYSTEM OF WATERPROOFING TREATMENT AND FERROCEMENT SECONDARY ROOF SLABS (CONT'D) (F) Ferrocement Roof Slabs (Cont'd) (iii) Manufacturing Process (Cont'd) After setting and demoulding, the slabs shall be neatly stored with easy access and visibility to every piece, and shall be marked in accordance with the schedule of color-coding. During the first 7 days after casting, the slabs shall be placed on their edge during transportation. All panels shall be properly cured. Seek the approval of the SO Rep with respect to the curing method, duration and facilities prior to actual production. The curing method shall be equivalent to 3 days of moist curing. Samples of the panels shall be submitted to the SO Rep for approval prior to full production, and the Contractor shall make adjustment to the manufacturing process or equipment if so directed by the SO Rep. (iv) Installation of Secondary Roofing System On areas indicated for secondary roofing, the ferrocement panels shall be laid on top of the 225mm thick solid blocks after the waterproofing system has been applied. The solid blocks shall be centrally positioned on 200 x 200 x 3mm bitumen base pads with mineral finish. The ferrocement panels shall be placed butt-jointed with each other with the off-form surface facing up. Service slits of adjacent panels shall be aligned in the transverse direction of the building. All gaps at the edges of the secondary roof shall be sealed with 13mm x 13mm x 18 BWG square shape galvanised wire mesh bent to shape. The bent-end (100mm) shall be sandwiched between the slab and support leaving a gap of 10mm above the roof surface. Where vent pipes protrude through the ferrocement slabs, the half standard size slabs may be used and, if necessary, openings shall be provided by carefully sawing the slabs so as not to cause any cracking. Ensure that the ferrocement slabs are not indiscriminately stacked on the main reinforced concrete roof slab prior to installation of the ferrocement slabs. The position for the stacking of the secondary roofing slab shall be approved by the SO Rep. Stacking shall be allowed only at column positions and shall be limited to one pallet per column. The number of pieces per pallet shall be not more than the number of pieces supported by the column shown in the Drawings. Any Defect in the main roof structure shall be made good as directed by the SO Rep at the Contractor's own costs and expenses. All slabs shall be indelibly marked and imprinted with the Manufacturer's name before delivery to site. (v) CATV/Lightning Conductor Crossing Provide 150mm x 150mm (minimum) concrete curb crossing between water tank or lift motor room and reinforced concrete fascia for cable routing as shown in the Drawings. (vi) Quality of Concrete Work (a) Inspection and Testing Provide facilities for the SO Rep to inspect the preparation and concreting work. On each concreting day, at least one sample shall be taken for casting of 3 cubes for compressive strength test (size 100mm cube).
14.4
COMPLETE SYSTEM OF WATERPROOFING TREATMENT AND FERROCEMENT SECONDARY ROOF SLABS (CONT'D) (F) Ferrocement Roof Slabs (Cont'd) (vi) Quality of Concrete Work (Cont'd) (a) Inspection and Testing (Cont'd) Samples of welded steel fabric shall be taken at the factory for the following tests: 1) 2) strength testing and bar size measurement (SS32); galvanized coating weight (The method of testing shall be in accordance with BS 443).
Samples of ferrocement roof slab panels shall be taken at the factory subject to batch testing at a testing authority approved by the SO Rep, covering the following aspects : 1) 2) 3) 4) 5) (b) Dimension measurement of panel Cover measurement after cutting the panel Density of the panel Initial surface absorption test (BS1881) Carbonation test after cutting the panel
Sampling Rate Reinforcement shall be sampled at least once per contract, 3 bars of each size shall be taken per sampling as one sample. Ferrocement slab shall be sampled once per contract, 3 pieces shall be taken per sampling as one sample.
(c)
Passing Criteria Tests shall be conducted on one specimen out of the three sampled. If the specimen satisfies all requirements, the batch shall be deemed to satisfy the quality requirements. If the specimen fails any of the quality requirement, tests shall be conducted on the remaining two specimens. If two or more specimens within a sample fail to meet a specific requirement, the material/product shall be deemed to have failed that specific requirement. If the average result of the three specimens deviates from the required level by 15% or more, the batch of materials/products is deemed to have failed the specified requirements.
(G)
Waterproofing Treatment To Pipe Penetration Area Unless otherwise indicated in the Drawings, the Contractor shall seal openings in the roof slabs with non-shrink cementitious mortar or grout of a similar or higher grade to match with those of the surrounding concrete, after the installation of services by the Contractor and/or other contractors. The Contractor shall also provide polyurethane base liquid applied waterproofing membrane around the service pipes at a radius of 300 mm from the centre of the outlet. The application of waterproofing membrane shall be carried up the pipes at a minimum height of 100 mm from the floor surface. The surface to receive the membrane shall be free from dust, laitance and ground smooth if necessary. The application of the membrane shall comply strictly to the recommendations and instructions of the manufacturer and/or SO Rep.
14.4
COMPLETE SYSTEM OF WATERPROOFING TREATMENT AND FERROCEMENT SECONDARY ROOF SLABS (CONT'D) (G) Waterproofing Treatment To Pipe Penetration Area (Cont'd) After allowing for adequate curing, lay cement mortar to form a haunch around the pipes sufficiently to cover the waterproofing membrane. Adequate measures shall be provided to protect the membrane from being damaged during the screeding operation.
The mortar mix shall be of prepacked mortar.

The waterproofing membrane shall comply with the technical performance requirements as specified in subclause 19.3.2 "Specification of the Waterproofing Membrane". (H) Warranty The Contractor and his Specialist shall warrant the Works on the terms and conditions as stipulated in Clause (Clause 59.2.) 'Provision of Warranty' and the specimen of Deed of Warranty as produced in Appendix (Appendix A1). In this respect, the Contractor and his Specialist shall submit such Deed of Warranty to the Employer or to such other party or such Town Council(s) as the SO Rep may at his sole discretion decide. In the event that the Deed of Warranty for part of the works or for the whole works is to be submitted to such Town Council(s), the Contractor and his Specialist shall submit such Deed of Warranty in accordance with the specimen of Deed of Warranty as produced in Appendix (Appendix A1.) (TC) and Clause (Clause 59.2.) 'Provision of Warranty' to such Town Councils. The duly executed warranty shall be submitted immediately upon request by the SO Rep, and if no such request is made, then at such time when the SO Rep considers the works have been substantially completed in accordance with the Contract. In the event that the Contractor and his Specialist shall fail to execute and submit the Deed of Warranty within the time specified, the SO Rep shall be allowed to withhold 15% of the payment of any sums due to the Contractor in relation to the execution of such Works, subject to the minimum sum of S$5,000.00 per Deed of Warranty. However, such sums withheld shall be released to the Contractor upon submission by him of the duly executed Deed of Warranty.
14.5
COMPLETE SYSTEM OF WATERPROOFING TREATMENT AND PANEL ROOFING (A) Over-Riding Clause The Contractor and his Specialist executing the Works as required in this clause including all subclauses under it have to ensure that the Works, goods or materials used shall be suitable and reasonably fit for the purposes for which they are required (hereinafter referred as "Performance Requirement"). In the event the Works, goods or materials to be used as specified in this clause including all subclauses under it are upgraded in order to meet the Performance Requirement, the Contractor and his Specialist shall do all necessary upgrading at no extra cost to the Employer, subject always to the approval of the SO Rep, but such approval shall not in any way affect the Contractor's and his Specialist's duties or obligations arising under the Contract. (B) The panel roofing shall be executed in the following sequence : (a) (b) (c) (d) Waterproofing Screed Waterproofing Membrane Insulation Materials In-situ Waterproof Cement Panels
14.5
COMPLETE SYSTEM OF WATERPROOFING TREATMENT AND PANEL ROOFING (CONT'D) (C) Waterproofing Cement/Sand Screed All roof surfaces to be rendered with the prepacked screeds shall be brushed clean and well wet before prepacked screed is applied. All prepacked screed shall be kept damp and adequately cured to prevent shrinkage and cracking. The prepacked screed shall be mixed with "Sika No. 1"; or Fextile; or Smartguard; or other approved waterproofing compound and laid to fall of 25mm to every 3000mm towards the rainwater outlets, scupper drains or other outlets (where reinforced concrete roof slab is laid to fall, the screeding shall be in even thickness). Mixing of waterproofing compound shall be done strictly in accordance with the Manufacturer's printed recommendations or instructions. Screeding thickness shall be a minimum of 20mm thick at the lowest point and laid in a workmanlike manner with even fall and finished smooth with wood trowelling. The prepacked screed shall be of a brand currently approved by the SO Rep, be fresh when delivered and used in the order of delivery. (D) Waterproofing Membranes (a) Preparation of Surface Before applying the waterproofing membranes system, the entire screeded surfaces shall be in a thoroughly clean, free from dust, etc and visibly dry condition. (b) Waterproofing Membrane system The contractor shall use Shell Flintkote Ultra water proofing system or waterproofing membranes system as listed in the HDB List of Products & Suppliers. The application of the waterproofing system shall fully comply with the Manufacturer's instructions. (c) Roof Details Detailing at eaves shall be as indicated in the Drawings. The waterproofing treatment shall be carried up at abutments to walls, pipes, parapets, skirtings, concrete curbs, etc as shown in the Drawings. For any upturns, waterproofing membrane is to be carried up a minimum distance of not less than 300mm. (d) Bituminous Stains In the event the external painted walls of the building blocks are affected by bituminous stains, the Contractor shall remove the stain, make good and re-paint the affected surfaces to the satisfaction of the SO Rep. (E) Insulation Materials The insulation materials shall be 50mm thick insulation boards. The board shall be multicellular board of extruded polystyrene containing a flame retardant additive. It shall have natural skins on both surfaces and shall have the following properties : Density Thermal conductivity Compressive Strength at 10% deflection Water absorption Capillarity Maximum operating temperature : : : : : : 35 kg/m 0.029 - 0.032 W/mk 300 kpa less than 1% by volume none 74C
3
The board dimensions shall be 50mm thick 2.0mm, 600mm wide 3.0mm and 1250mm long 6.0mm. The boards shall be laid loose on top of the waterproofing membrane in a staggered pattern. All joints between the boards shall be tightly fitted. The boards that are less than half (1/2) the width of length shall not be placed at the edge but to be placed at least one row away from the edge. The whole work shall be carried out strictly in accordance with the Manufacturer's/Supplier's instructions.
14.5
COMPLETE SYSTEM OF WATERPROOFING TREATMENT AND PANEL ROOFING (CONT'D) (F) In-situ Waterproof Cement/Sand Panels The work shall be executed in the following sequence : (a) Lay an overall 38mm thick in-situ prepacked waterproof screed panel over final layer of waterproofing membrane in alternate bays of size 900mm x 900mm each. The prepacked screed shall be mixed with "Sika No. 1" or "Fextile 1"; or "Smartguard"; or other approved waterproofing compound. Waterproofing compound shall be mixed to the Manufacturer's recommendations and printed instructions and subject to approval by the SO Rep. Prepacked screed panels shall be laid in parallel strips of 900mm x 900mm. Panel surfaces should be smoothened with steel trowel without adding dry cement and truly levelled to falls indicated as a finished floor surface. Joints between panels shall be "V" shaped 10mm wide at top and tapering to 6mm at bottom. Wood strips shall be used and the completed depth of the joints shall be 16mm leaving the panel 22mm thick below the joint. Immediately after setting the panels shall be covered with hessian bags which shall be kept wet for not less than 3 days to cure thoroughly. Any defective panels shall be replaced by the Contractor at his own costs and expenses. After removal of hessian bags and cement panels are cured, the joints shall be filled and grouted with bitumen compound. The bitumen applied shall be a hot-poured rubberbitumen sealant to BS 2499 Type A1 or Type A2. The finished level shall be clean and the top-most joint shall be levelled with the panel surface to prevent water stagnation. Extreme care shall be taken at the building expansion joint and to construct roofing strictly to the details in the Drawings or as instructed by the SO Rep.
(b)
(c)
(d)
(G)
Warranty The Contractor and his Specialist shall warrant the Works on the terms and conditions as stipulated in Clause (Clause 59.2.) 'Provision of Warranty' and the specimen of Deed of Warranty as produced in Appendix (Appendix A1). In this respect, the Contractor and his Specialist shall submit such Deed of Warranty to the Employer or to such other party or such Town Council(s) as the SO Rep may at his sole discretion decide. In the event that the Deed of Warranty for part of the works or for the whole works is to be submitted to such Town Council(s), the Contractor and his Specialist shall submit such Deed of Warranty in accordance with the specimen of Deed of Warranty as produced in Appendix (Appendix A1.) (TC) and Clause (Clause 59.2.) 'Provision of Warranty' to such Town Councils. The duly executed warranty shall be submitted immediately upon request by the SO Rep, and if no such request is made, then at such time when the SO Rep considers the works have been substantially completed in accordance with the Contract. In the event that the Contractor and his Specialist shall fail to execute and submit the Deed of Warranty within the time specified, the SO Rep shall be allowed to withhold 15% of the payment of any sums due to the Contractor in relation to the execution of such Works, subject to the minimum sum of S$5,000.00 per Deed of Warranty. However, such sums withheld shall be released to the Contractor upon submission by him of the duly executed Deed of Warranty.
UPG07/S14.DOC(10) lkk(181206) DPD
14.6
RE-ROOFING WORKS Where re-roofing works is required, this clause including sub-clauses shall be applicable.
14.6.1
Scope of Work Apply water-proofing treatment and lay the light-weight precast concrete slabs secondary roofing work as specified in the Standard Specifications. No old roofing slabs and hollow blocks shall be re-used. At every stage of the work, the Contractor shall inform the Superintending Officer's Representative giving him at least one working day's notice for inspection before proceeding to the next stage. The various stages are : (a) (b) Before commencement of work, to assess existing damages to services, etc; Clearing the roof of the existing precast slabs and scrape water-proofing membrane, dismantle and re-install Lightning Protection System on roof structure; Rescreeding works where necessary and reconstruct roof expansion joints where necessary; The application of water-proofing system; The laying of precast slabs; and Removal of the existing water proofing system & application of water proofing system to existing RC roofs of water tanks/service rooms.
(c) (d) (e) (f)
14.6.2
Reconstruction of Supports All existing vertical supports to roof service line which are not of proper construction, missing or damaged, are required to be reconstructed. Collars are to be constructed at the base of all supports with prepacked screed in 150mm wide x 150mm high and splayed at 45 degrees. Splayed collars shall be similarly constructed to all existing pipe protrusions at roof top where collars are absent, improperly constructed or damaged.
14.6.3
Damage to Telemonitoring System In apartment blocks where the Employer has installed Telemonitoring Systems (TMS) running with 13mm diameter conduit pipes laid along the main roof top and the roof of the lift motor room and where re-roofing works are being carried out, the Contractor is to exercise extreme care in the execution of their works to avoid damaging the conduit line. The Contractor shall indemnify the Employer against all claims, demands, proceedings or damages, losses, costs, charges and expenses whatsoever which may arise as a result of their failure to exercise care in works affecting the TMS. Notwithstanding the above, the Employer shall not be restricted in any way whatsoever to invoke its rights as contained in Clauses of the Conditions of Contract and Clause 1.5.10 "Damage to Public/Private Property" and Clause 1.10 "Nuisance and Irregularities".
14.6.4
Protection of Existing Services The Contractor shall be responsible to take all necessary precautionary measures to prevent damages to the existing electrical installation, lightning protection system, central television antenna system, water distribution system including their supports and other services that are existing on the roof. Should these be already damaged before the Contractor commences work, he should inform the Superintending Officer's Representative and the Branch Office's representative and arrange for a joint inspection to have the nature of the damages recorded. Should the damages be the result of the Contractor's work, the Employer will arrange to have these made good and the cost plus charges to be imposed on the Contractor shall be recovered from the Contractor.
UPG07/S14.DOC(11) lkk(181206) DPD
14.6.5
Water Test to Existing Concrete Roof Surface of Blocks Before the removal of existing waterproofing membrane, the Contractor is to ascertain and satisfy himself that the existing roof slab has an even surface with a proper fall, by conducting water tests where necessary. Should there be areas of unevenness which may give rise to stagnation of water, the Contractor shall re-render these areas as directed by the SO Rep so as to achieve an even surface with proper fall over the entire roof. This re-rendering works carried out shall be paid by way of variation to the Contract. Re-rendering, shall be executed as specified below : (i) (ii) (iii) (iv) remove existing cement rendering (if any) and form keys; form keys to receive new rendering where existing roof has no rendering; clean surfaces and apply one coat of approved bonding agent before new rendering is applied; re-render the RC main roof with prepacked screed gauged with approved waterproofing additive and trowelled to smooth finish to fall as directed by S O Rep.
The Contractor shall be held responsible should there be stagnation of water during the warranty period. The Superintending Officer's Representative reserves the right to instruct the Contractor to carry out water test to any individual blocks as and when required. Water Test shall be conducted after the removal of precast secondary roof slabs and hollow blocks but before the removal of existing waterproofing membrane. 14.6.6 Provision of Nylon or Polyethylene or Rubber Mat/ Pad as Base for Loading and Unloading of Roofing Materials The Contractor shall provide nylon or polyethylene or rubber mat/pad of minimum size 1.5 times of the base area of the bucket or hopper as base for loading and unloading of roofing materials at roof top to minimise the impact noise. 14.6.7 Repair to Existing Leaking or Damaged Roof Expansion Joints The Contractor shall allow in his Contract Sum for the repair to the existing roof expansion joints where it is leaking or damaged. The necessity and extent of making good shall be determined by the Superintending Officer's Representative whose decision thereon shall be final. Damaged or leaking roof expansion joints shall be reconstructed where necessary by removing the aluminium cover, stripping off the old damaged expansion joints filling, and refill with two-part "Polyurethane" sealant ("Thioflex 600'" "Febseal" or other approved products) all in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions. Before refilling with the Polyurethane or other approved sealant, the joint interface must be clean, dry and free from oil, dust and other contaminants. Insert closed-cell polyethylene backing foam or backing rod to the joint and then fill the joint with Polyurethane sealant to a minimum of 20mm depth, and re-install the aluminium cover in position, and make the joint water-tight. Apply Polyurethane primer prior to filling with the sealant. Damaged or leaking old designed expansion joint shall be reconstructed with upstand, joint filled with approved sealant and cover with aluminium cover all as shown in the detail drawing.
UPG07/S14.DOC(12) lkk(181206) DPD
14.6.8
Reinstatement of Lightning Protection System (LPS) at Roof Surface - For Affected Sections of Work Only Before commencing the application of shellkote treatment to the roof, the existing aluminium strip conductors, clips, air-terminals and accessories running on the roof surfaces shall be temporarily dismantled and secured to the roof and reinstated into original position on completion of the shellkote treatment. The dismantling and reinstatement works of the LPS shall be carried out by licensed Electricians and any missing/damaged or additional clips, screws, air-terminals and accessories shall be replaced or added by the Contractor to the satisfaction of the Superintending Officer's Representative. Aluminium LPS Aluminium strip conductors shall be fixed with purpose-made aluminium clips with base strips at intervals not exceeding 0.6m. The aluminium base strips shall be fastened to the masonry surface by a single set screw/nail complete with nylon anchor, and the aluminium clip shall be secured on the base strip by two screws. The dismantled aluminium conductor and final points shall be continuously connected to the connecting conductor and down leads. Base strips are allowed to remain untouched on roof when dismantling the aluminium conductor. However, should the base strips spacing be more than 0.6m, the Contractor shall provide additional base strips and clips. If the existing aluminium LPS is without base strips, and the aluminium conductor is only secured by aluminium clips and nailed to the concrete roof, then the roofing contractor is required to dismantle the aluminium conductors, incorporate the base strips and cover clip as specified herewith for water tank/service room roof and main roof. Down leads are to be excluded. Air terminals shall be re-installed to their original positions. Air terminal bases shall adequately support the point and provide a strong secure continuous connection to the connecting conductor. Bases shall be of aluminium of cast or stamped construction. Points shall be attached to the base by male threads to a female hub on the base. Fixing bolts and screws, for the air terminal bases shall be of aluminium alloy or stainless steel and complete with nylon plug. ELP Systems that run on copper tape or wires are to be similarly done as before described, except that the method of reinstatement shall be as per existing. All material used shall be as that approved by the Superintending Officer's Representative.
14.6.9
Testing of Lightning Protection System For Conductivity Upon completion, the Contractor shall check and test the installation to ensure electrical continuity of all conductors, and that all bonds and joints of the LPS on the roof and their mechanical conditions have fulfilled the requirements in the Specifications. The Contractor shall furnish a testing report to the Superintending Officer's Representative. If the Superintending Officer's Representative is not satisfied with the testing report, he shall direct the Contractor to apply to him, at least seven (7) working days in advance, for the inspection and testing of the lightning protection system. The Contractor shall supply all necessary instruments, apparatus, consumable stores, connections, skilled labour, services, as well as proper, reasonable and safe facilities required for the test. The test as stated herein shall be confined to the electrical continuity and mechanical conditions of all conductors, bonds and joints on the roof. Inspection or approval of tests by the Superintending Officer's Representative of any equipment, works or installation shall not relieve the Contractor from the obligation to supply the complete equipment, and complete work and installation in accordance with this Specification.
UPG07/S14.DOC(13) lkk(181206) DPD
14.6.10
Re-testing of Lightning Protection System and Administrative Charges Administrative charges in accordance with Clause 1.10 "Nuisance and Irregularities" mentioned herein shall be imposed where omissions, defects or faults detected in the first testing are not properly and promptly rectified by the Contractor resulting in failure in subsequent re-test. The administrative charges shall be deducted from any money that may become due to the Contractor. The Contractor may be suspended from tendering further for the Employer's projects if there are still outstanding defects or faults after the 2nd retest and where necessary, another Contractor may be engaged to make good the defects or faults and all costs/expenses shall be borne by the Contractor.
14.6.11
Replacement of Balloon Grating to All Vents and Soil Pipes at Roof Top The Contractor shall salvage all balloon gratings which are in good conditions and reinstate them on completion of the roofing works. All missing and damaged balloon gratings to roof top vents and soil pipes shall replaced by new gratings dip in bituminous paint before installation. All gratings shall be secured to pipes by perforated PVC coated metal fixing strap.
14.6.12
Preparation of Roof Surface Before Laying of Secondary Roof Slabs Prior to the laying of lightweight precast concrete slabs, the Contractor shall ensure that all damaged waterproofing membrane and membrane fibre are made good. The entire surface of the roof shall be in a thoroughly clean condition.
14.6.13
Removal of Unwanted Features on the Roof When notified by the Superintending Officer's Representative that a particular feature on the roof is unnecessary, the Contractor shall hack away the said feature and make good the roof surface and waterproofing roof treatment.
14.6.14
Stripping Off Existing Roof Treatment to Blocks Strip off all roof treatment including insulating materials to existing roofs where applicable, and remove debris off site. Make good all visible cracks on the concrete roofs by cutting back about 10mm each side about 15mm deep to form "V" grooves and patch up with "THORITE", or similar approved patching compound in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Brush a coat of bonding agent before repair. Clean and prepare surface to receive roof treatment as before described. All cracks in roof beams, slabs and columns at the topmost floors are to be patched up with epoxy mortar in accordance with manufacturer's instructions before roofing work commences.
14.6.15
Repair to Water Seepage The surface to be repaired shall be free from dirt paint and other impurities. It must be thoroughly and uniformly moisturised by spraying the area with water prior to any repair works. The surface must be kept damp with no surface moisture. The waterproofing compound shall be applied in accordance with the manufacturer's specifications. The Contractor shall submit samples of the repair materials for the approval of the Superintending Officer's Representative. Materials used should be supplied by the same manufacturer and complete compatibility must be assured.
14.6.16
Precast Concrete Ferrocement Slabs to Roof Areas of Corridors, Staircases and Lift Lobbies The roof areas of corridors, staircases and lift lobbies shall be provided with precast concrete ferrocement slabs.
SECTION 15/...
UPG07/S14.DOC(14) lkk(181206) DPD
SECTION 15
15.0
CARPENTRY AND JOINERY
15.1
TIMBER Unless otherwise specified, all timber delivered to site shall be properly seasoned to moisture content not exceeding 20%. Timber shall be sawn straight, square, free from sap, shakes, waney edges, large loose or dead knots, large bores or termite holes and other objectionable Defects. Timber delivered to site shall be properly stacked under cover to ensure free air circulation around all faces and minimum warping. Any timber member or component which the SO Rep does not approve to be used shall be removed from the site immediately and replaced with new members/components. Any portion of the timber work that warps, develops shakes or other Defects within 12 months after the Substantial Completion of the project shall be removed. The defective work shall be replaced and rectified all at the Contractor's own cost and expense.
15.1.1
Structural Use Of Timber The use of timber for structural purposes shall comply with SS CP7. Timber used shall be Kempas or Keruing or Chengal or Balau, or other approved species of similar strength grade. Timber shall be treated with copper/chrome/arsenic preservatives according to SS 72. As far as possible, holes in timber shall be formed before preservative treatment. Holes and sawn surfaces of treated timber shall be brushed with two coats of creosote or other approved preservatives. Bolts, nuts, screws, nails, plates and steel section used for connecting timber shall be galvanised. Steel sections and plates shall be Grade 43A steel to BS 4360. Bolts and nuts used shall be black bolts to BS 4190. As soon as is practicable, and prior to the commencement of assembly, all structural timber delivered to the Site shall be subject to random sampling for testing by PSB or a PSB accredited laboratory in accordance with SS CP7. One test shall be done per contract. In the event that the test fails, the Contractor shall remove the batch of timber from the Site. Another test shall be done on another batch. If the second test fails, all timber shall be removed. A fresh batch shall then be obtained from another supplier and tested accordingly. The sample shall be tested for moisture content and checked for dimensional requirements. The bending, compression and shear stresses shall also be determined. Preservative penetration and salt content shall be determined in accordance with SS 72. All carpentry work shall be sawn unless otherwise specified. All exposed timber shall be sanded to a smooth finish. Painting where specified shall be in accordance with the instructions of the paint manufacturer.
15.1.2
Joinery Unless otherwise specified, all timber for joinery work shall be Kapur or Chengal or Balau or Meranti Dark Red or Meranti Yellow, or other approved. Timber frames to flush doors, built-in or free standing furniture, walls, partitions, ceilings and others shall be Kapur or Chengal or Balau or Meranti Dark Red or Meranti Yellow, or other approved. All exposed surfaces of joinery work shall be wrot by planning and sand-papering to an approved finish. Wrot timber shall be worked to the correct sizes and shapes shown in the Drawings. Sizes of timber members indicated in the Drawings are nominal and a maximum allowance of 2.5mm shall be permitted for each wrot face. Take all measurements for joinery work at the building and verify it with the dimensions shown in the Drawings. Where discrepancy occurs between the measurement shown in the Drawings and that taken on site, the Contractor shall obtain the confirmation of the SO Rep before proceeding with the work.
15.2
PREPARATION OF JOINERY WORK Place order for all joinery and carpentry items required for the work within one month from the date of the Employer's Letter of Acceptance of the Tender. The Contractor shall be responsible for any delay owing to his failure to place order in good time. Preparation of joinery work shall commence at the beginning of the contract and shall proceed until all joinery is ready. These shall then be stacked on site and protected from weather.
15.3
FRAMING TOGETHER All frames shall be put together with well proportioned and tight fitting mortice and tenon joints, wedged up tight and fixed with 10mm diameter hardwood pins. Leave pins projecting until immediately before fixing in position. Any members that warp, twist, split or develop any other Defects shall be replaced with new ones before wedging up.
15.4
JOINERY WORK All joinery work shall be made in strict accordance with detailed Drawings. Joints shall be formed in a proper workmanlike manner, well proportioned and tight fitting. Dress all exposed surfaces of joinery work. No nailing shall be permitted in joints for joinery. Where glue joinery work is likely to come into contact with moisture, the glue shall be waterproof.
15.5
PRIME FRAMES All joinery requiring painting shall be knotted, stopped and primed before fixing. The backs of all doors and windows frames, and other frames in contact with masonry work shall be coated with one coat of "Solignum", "Presotim", "Creosote" or other approved wood preservative. The preservative shall be allowed to be thoroughly dried before fixing of the frames. All sawcuts shall be similarly treated.
15.6
FIXING OF TIMBER DOOR AND WINDOW FRAMES INTO CONCRETE STRUCTURES Door and window frames shall fit neatly into the masonry openings. All crevices between frames and walls, beams or other masonry shall be filled up with prepacked mortar. Heads of window and door frames which abut concrete structure shall be fixed with minimum 2 Nos. 75mm masonry drive pin "Ramset Nails No. 2330" or other approved to the numbers as shown in the Drawings. The feet of door frames shall be fixed according to details. All nails shall be completely embedded in the frames and stopped with an approved sealer.
15.7
FIXING OF DOOR AND WINDOW FRAMES TO MASONRY Timber door and window frames shall be secured to masonry walls with 6 Nos. and 4 Nos. fishtailed holdfasts as shown in the Drawings. The M.S. holdfasts shall be 25mm x 3mm thick x 230mm girth, one end turned up and drilled and screwed to frame and the other end tailed and built into the joints of walling.
15.8
FIXING OF TIMBER CILL TO WALL/CONCRETE CILL Where shown, provide and fix minimum 2 Nos. of 10mm diameter x 75mm long mild steel dowel bar to each timber cill. One end of bar shall project 25mm into the groove of timber cill and the other end shall be embedded 50mm into the groove of the wall or concrete cills. The grooves shall then be grouted with prepacked mortar. For timber cill longer than 600mm in length, the dowel bar shall be fixed at maximum 600mm centres.
15.9
TIMBER DOORS Unless otherwise specified, all doors shall be constructed in accordance with the details as shown in the Drawings. Sizes are nominal. The types of timber veneer and decorative inlays for main entrance door, bedroom door and bathroom door shall be approved by the SO Rep. Unless otherwise specified, plywood panels shall be of Grade 2 and of Moisture Resistant Quality.
(a)
Surfaces The surfaces of doors shall be free from stains, adhesive marks, manufacturing faults, and other blemishes liable to impair the finish of the door.
(b)
Moisture Content At the time of delivery, the moisture content of timber for all timber components shall not be less than 10 per cent and not more than 15 per cent. However, any difference in moisture content of the timber shall not exceed 3 percentage units.
(c)
Marine-plywood New door been exposed behind the kitchen or utility room shall be finished with marineplywood.
(d)
Aluminium Sheet For Weather Protection All new doors shall be cladded with 0.2mm thick aluminium sheet to exterior face to services/store rooms, lift motor room, refuse rooms, switch rooms or doors of rooms exposed to weathering locations. The aluminium sheet shall be bent to return along the thickness of the door.
(e)
Adhesive Adhesive used in the manufacture of all timber doors shall comply with the requirements of AS 2754.1 : 1985 and shall develop a Type B bond quality or better. The adhesive shall be mixed and applied in accordance with the manufacturers instructions.
15.10
Half-Hour Fire-Rated Solid Timber Veneered Doors With Decorative Inlay To Entrances Of Flats
15.10.1
Over-Riding Clause The Contractor executing the works as required in this clause including sub-clauses shall ensure that the works, goods or materials used shall be suitable and reasonably fit for the purpose of complying with the required fire-rating (hereinafter referred as "Performance Requirement"). In the event the works, goods or materials to be used as specified in this clause including sub-clauses are upgraded in order to meet the Performance Requirement, the Contractor shall do all necessary upgrading at no extra cost to the Employer subject always to the approval of the SO Rep, but such approval shall not in any way affect the Contractor's duties or obligations arising under the Contract.
15.10.2
General Where specified and shown in the Drawings, the Contractor shall provide and install half-hour fire-rated timber veneered doors with decorative inlay to entrances of flats as shown in the Drawings, Provide and install such half-hour fire-rated solid timber veneered doors, mild steel door frames and ironmongery as a complete system complying with SS 332 : 2000. The complete system shall have PSB test certificates, PSB labels, FSSD approval and certified under PSB product Listing Scheme Class 1A or PSB Product Listing Scheme Class 1B. The dimensions and profiles of the mild steel door frames and door frame fixings shall be as shown in the Drawings. The thickness of door panel shall be approximately 45mm to fit into the rebate of door frame profile. The timber beading shall be fixed by nails and adhesive to the design pattern as shown in the Drawings which shall serve as a guide. The type and colour of timber veneers and decorative inlays shall be to the design pattern and shall be approved by the SO Rep. The surface finish of the fanlight panel shall be similar to the entrance door. Other details of the mild steel transom and fanlight panel shown in the Drawings shall serve as a guide only.
15.10.3
Shop Drawings and Sample Before commencement of the work, provide workshop drawings and PSB test certificates for the approval of the SO Rep. Further, a complete sample shall be installed on site for the approval of the SO Rep before the full implementation.
15.10.4
Ironmongery For Half-Hour Fire-Rated Timber Veneered Doors With Decorative Inlay To Entrances Of Flats Where specified, provide and fix all ironmongery required to complete the whole work in accordance with the following schedule subject to the approval of FSSB. All ironmongery shall be at least half-hour firerated. The brand names specified in the schedule shall serve as a guide to the respective quality and profile of the ironmongery required. (A) Schedule (I) Single Leaf The ironmongery items shall be : (i) 4 no. 102mm x 76mm x 3mm solid brass hinges (satin finish) with flat button tip and ball bearing complete with matching finish screws. "YTL" N28FIR-AT-US5; or "Accord" M4L10AB or "Posse" M4L10AB; or Forte LH888/LP8AB; or Innohaus Series 1802; or BLIY-N27-FIR-US5; or other approved mortice lever on backplate lockset with 5-pin single cylinder and thumb turn (key on the outside and thumb turn on the inside) and solid brass lever handles on plates on both sides. The finish shall be antique brass. The lever handle lockset shall be installed in a manner to clear the metal gate lockset. 90mm x 27mm wide brass barrel bolt.
(ii)
1 no.
(iii)
1 no.
15.10.4
Ironmongery For Half-Hour Fire Rated Decorative Solid Timber Entrance Doors To Flats (Contd) (A) (I) Single Leaf (Contd) (iv) 1 no. (v) 1 no. 240mm x 27mm wide brass barrel bolt. Antique brass finish door viewer : (a) "YTL" 200; or (b) Forte " H6DV18ES; or (c) "Accord" 2170 AB-A; (d) Nikon 2170AB; or (e) BLIY DV-200AB (f) other approved. The position shall be as shown in the Drawings but ensure that door viewer shall not be obstructed by entrance grille gate. (vi) 1 no. Door closer shall be listed in PSB Product Listing Scheme Class 1A. Approved slim line door closer with cushioned back checking action shall be of bronze colour.
(II)
Double Leaf ( Applicable if shown in the Drawing) The ironmongery items shall be : (i) (ii) 4 no. 1 no. 102mm x 76mm x 3mm solid brass hinges (satin finish) with flat button tip and ball bearing complete with matching finish screws per door leaf. "Posse" H61L-AB or "Union" 9401 AB/GL or "Lucky" CS-410-MAUS5; or other approved mortice lever on backplate lockset with 5-pin double cylinder deadlock (key on the outside and thumb turn on the inside) solid brass grip handle and solid brass lever handle. The finishes of the deadlock, grip handle and lever handle shall be antique brass. The lever handle lockset shall be installed in a manner to clear the metal gate lockset. Rebated parts. 200mm x 20mm wide brass lever action flush bolt in satin finish. 300mm x 20mm wide brass lever action flush bolt in satin finish. Antique brass finish door viewer : (a) "YTL" 200; or (b) Forte " H6DV18ES; or (c) "Accord" 2170 AB-A; (d) Nikon 2170AB; or (e) BLIY DV-200AB (f) other approved. The position shall be as shown in the Drawings but ensure that door viewer shall not be obstructed by entrance grille gate. (vii) 1 no. Door closer shall be listed in PSB Product Listing Scheme Class 1A. Approved slim line door closer with cushioned back checking action shall be of bronze colour.
(iii)
2 no.
(iv) 1 no. (v) 1 no.
(vi) 1 no.
(B)
Keys for Locksets The lockset shall be provided with 3 sets of keys. These keys shall be handed over to the Employer upon the Substantial Completion of Works.
(C)
Grade of Stainless Steel Unless otherwise specified, the Grade of stainless steel shall be Grade 304.
15.10.5
Certificates The Contractor shall submit certificates to the SO Rep to certify that the complete system of the fire-rated timber finish composite door including door frames and ironmongery installed are of at least half-hour firerated in all aspects approved by FSSB.
15.10.6
Surfaces The surfaces of doors shall be in accordance with Clause 15.9 "Timber Doors".
15.10.7
Moisture Content The moisture content of timber for all timber components shall be in accordance with Clause 15.9 "Timber Doors".
15.11
HALF-HOUR FIRE-RATED TIMBER SURFACE FINISHED COMPOSITE DOORS TO SWITCH ROOM, PUB SWITCH ROOM, STORE ROOM, PUMP ROOM, REFUSE ROOM, BULKY REFUSE AREA AND STAIRCASE ACCESS TO MAIN ROOF
15.11.1
15.11.2
General Where half-hour fire-rated timber doors to switchrooms, PUB switchrooms, storerooms, pump rooms, bulky refuse area, MDF Rooms, equipment closets and staircase accesses to main roof are shown in the Drawings, provide and install half-hour fire-rated timber surface finished composite doors complete with timber door frame and ironmongery. The half-hour fire-rated timber surface finished composite doors, timber door frames and ironmongery shall be provided as a complete system complying with SS 332 : 2000 and shall have PSB test certificates and PSB labels and approved by the FSSD.
15.11.3
Shop Drawings The details shown in the Drawings shall serve as a guide. Prior to the installation, provide shop drawings, and FSSB approval letter for the approval of the SO Rep. Further, a complete sample shall be installed on site for the approval of the SO Rep before full implementation.
15.11.4
Ironmongery Provide and fix all ironmongery required to complete the whole work in accordance with the following schedule subject to the approval of the FSSB. The brand names specified in the schedule shall serve as a guide to the respective quality and profile of the ironmongery. All ironmongery shall be at least half-hour fire-rated and approved by the FSSB. For each door to staircase accesses to main roofs, provide and fix one additional no. of 240mm x 27mm stainless steel barrel shoot bolt fixed on the door leaf surface facing the roof. (A) Double Leaf (i) (ii) (iii) 4 nos. 2 nos. 1 no. 100mm x 70mm (minimum) stainless steel butt hinges for each door leaf. Stainless steel locking eyes (4mm thick minimum) with hairline finish. "Nikon" C1 76mm x 76mm stainless steel cup handle; or "Goal" GC stainless steel cup handle; or "YTL-75" stainless steel cup handle; or other approved. Fixing screws shall not be exposed on the external. "Abloy" 3041 padlock under master key; or "Union" 3122/2" PL padlock under master key; or "Yale" 110.50 padlock under master key; or other approved. "Nikon" 150mm x 25mm stainless steel lever action flush bolt; or other approved. "Nikon" 225mm x 25mm stainless steel lever action flush bolt; or other approved. Door closer shall be listed in PSB Product Listing Scheme Class 1A. Approved slim line door closer with cushioned back checking action shall be of silver colour. Approved stainless steel door selector.
(iv)
1 no.
(v)
1 no.
(vi)
1 no.
(vii)
2 no..
(viii) (B)
1 no.
Single Leaf (i) (ii) (iii) 4 pairs 2 nos. 1 no. 100mm x 70mm (minimum) stainless steel butt hinges. Stainless steel locking eyes (4mm thick minimum) with hairline finish. "Abloy" PL 230 padlock under master key; or "Union" 3122/2" PL padlock under master key; or "Yale" 110.50 padlock under master key; or other approved. "Nikon" C1 76mm x 76mm stainless steel cup handle; or "Goal" GC stainless steel cup handle; or "YTL-75" stainless steel cup handle; or other approved. Fixing screws shall not be exposed on the external. Door closer shall be listed in PSB Product Listing Scheme Class 1A. Approved slim line door closer with cushioned back checking action shall be of silver colour.
(iv)
1 no.
(v)
1 no.
(C)
Doors To Staircase Accesses To Main Roofs For each door to staircase accesses to main roofs, in addition to the above-mentioned ironmongery requirements specified, provide and fix one additional no. of 240mm x 27mm stainless steel barrel shoot bolt fixed on the door leaf surface facing the roof.
(D)
Grade of Stainless Steel Unless otherwise specified, the grade of stainless steel shall be Grade 304.
15.11.5
Certificates The Contractor shall submit certificates to the SO Rep to certify that the complete system of the timber surface finished composite doors, including timber door frames and Ironmongery installed are of at least half-hour fire-rated in all aspects approved by the FSSB.
15.11.6
15.11.7
15.12
HALF-HOUR FIRE RATED TIMBER SURFACE FINISHED COMPOSITE DOORS TO SERVICE DUCTS FOR FLATS Over-Riding Clause The Contractor executing the works as required in this clause including sub-clauses shall ensure that the works, goods or materials used shall be suitable and reasonably fit for the purpose of complying with the required fire-rating (hereinafter referred as "Performance Requirement"). In the event the works, goods or materials to be used as specified in this clause including sub-clauses are upgraded in order to meet the Performance Requirement, the Contractor shall do all necessary upgrading at no extra cost to the Employer subject always to the approval of the SO Rep, but such approval shall not in any way affect the Contractor's duties or obligations arising under the Contract.
15.12.1
15.12.2
General Where half-hour fire-rated timber doors to service ducts are shown in the Drawings, the Contractor shall provide and install half-hour fire-rated timber surface finished composite doors to the service ducts complete with timber door frames and ironmongery. The half-hour fire-rated timber surface finished composite doors, timber door frames and ironmongery shall be provided as a complete system complying with SS 332 : 2000. The complete system shall have PSB test certificates, PSB labels, FSSD approval and certified under PSB Product Listing Scheme Class 1A or PSB Product Listing Scheme Class1B.
15.12.3
Shop Drawings and Sample The details shown in the Drawings shall serve as a guide. Prior to the installation, provide shop drawings, PSB test certificates and FSSB approval letter for the approval of the SO Rep. Further, a complete sample shall be installed on site for the approval of the SO Rep before the full implementation.
15.12.4
Ironmongery Provide and fix all ironmongery required to complete the whole work in accordance with the following schedule subject to the approval of FSSB. All ironmongery shall be at least half-hour rated and approved by the FSSB. The brand names specified in the schedule shall serve as a guide to the respective quality and profile of ironmongery required. (A) Single Leaf For single leaf doors : (i) (ii) 4 nos. 1 no. 102mm x 76mm x 2mm stainless steel butt hinges. Cylinder mortice night latch "Union" 2332 CH/300/2x13 under GIHBG-PH and master key series GIHBG; or "Abloy" 2295 MS/CR under HDB MK and master key series MK 911047; or "Yale" 3203/214.62 under MKAA and master key series MK 48; or "Accord" 2332/1405 under HDB MK and master key series MK 48 or other approved. The mortice night latch shall be with key cylinder on the outside and thumb turn on the inside. The cylinder and thumb turn shall be in chrome plated finish. (iii) 1 no. "Nikon" C1 76mm x 76mm or "Goal" GC or "YTL-75" stainless steel cup handle; or other approved. Fixing screws shall not be exposed on the external
15.12.4
Ironmongery (Cont'd) (B) Double Leaf For double leaf doors : (i) (ii) 4 nos. 1 no. 102mm x 76mm x 2mm stainless steel butt hinges for each door leaf. Cylinder mortice night latch "Union" 2332 CH/300/2x13 under GIHBG-PH and master key series GIHBG; or "Abloy" 2295 MS/CR under HDB MK and master key series MK 911047; or "Yale" 3203/214.62 under MKAA and master key series MK 48; or "Accord" 2332/1405 under HDB MK and master key series MK 48 or other approved. The mortice night latch shall be with key cylinder on the outside and thumb turn on the inside. The cylinder and thumb turn shall be in chrome plated finish. (iii) 1 no. "Nikon" C1 76mm x 76mm or "Goal" GC or "YTL-75" stainless steel cup handle; or other approved. Fixing screws shall not be exposed on the external. Brass rebated parts. 200mm x 20mm wide stainless steel lever action flush bolt in satin finish (box type). 300mm x 20mm wide stainless steel lever action flush bolt in satin finish (box type).
(iv) (v)
1 no. 1 no.
(vi)
1 no.
(C)
(D)
Keys for Mortice Night Latch A set of three keys shall be provided for each flat served by the service duct and shall be handed over to the Employer upon Substantial Completion of the works.
15.12.5
Certificates Submit certificates to the SO Rep to certify that the complete system of the fire rated timber surface finished composite doors including timber door frames and ironmongery installed are of at least half-hour fire-rated in all aspects approved by the FSSB.
15.12.6
15.12.7
15.13
HALF-HOUR FIRE-RATED TIMBER SURFACE FINISHED COMPOSITE DOORS TO MDF ROOM AND TELECOMS EQUIPMENT ROOM
15.13.1
15.13.2
General Where half-hour fire-rated timber doors to service ducts are shown in the Drawings, the Contractor shall provide and install half-hour fire-rated timber surface finished composite doors to the service ducts complete with timber door frames and ironmongery. The half-hour fire-rated timber surface finished composite doors, timber door frames and ironmongery shall be provided as a complete system complying with SS 332 : 2000, shall have PSB test certificates and PSB labels and shall be certified under PSB Product Listing Scheme Class 1A or Class 1B .
15.13.3
Shop Drawings and Sample The details shown in the Drawings shall serve as a guide. Prior to the installation, provide shop drawings, PSB test certificates and FSSB approval letter for the approval of the SO Rep. Further, a complete sample shall be installed on site for the approval of the SO Rep before the full implementation.
15.13.4
Ironmongery Provide and fix all ironmongery required to complete the whole works in accordance with the following schedule subject to the approval of FSSB. The brand names specified in the schedule shall serve as a guide to the respective quality and profile of ironmongery required. All ironmongery shall be at least halfhour rated and approved by FSSB. (a) Single Leaf For single leaf doors : (i) (ii) 4 no. 1 no. 100mm x 70mm (minimum) stainless steel butt hinges. "Abloy" deadlock 2295C complete with 4195 lockcase, 5781K single cylinder and thumbturn and with construction keys; or "Yale" 523.50/214.62f26 deadbolt with construction keys; or "Falcon" D441-US26D/70 satin chrome cylinder/thumbturn deadbolt with construction keys; or other approved. The lockset shall be capable of being operated by a PBTS master key. "Nikon" C1 76mm x 76mm stainless steel cup handle or "Goal" GC stainless steel cup handle or "YTL-75" stainless steel cup handle; or other approved. Fixing screws shall not be exposed on the external. Door closer shall be listed in PSB Product Listing Scheme Class 1A. Approved slim line door closer with cushioned back checking action shall be in silver finish.
(iii)
2 no.
(iv)
1 no.
UPG06/S15.DOC(10) lkk(181205) DPD
15.13.4
Ironmongery (Cont'd) (b) Double Leaf For double leaf doors : (i) (ii) 4 nos. 1 no. 100mm x 70mm (minimum) stainless steel butt hinges for each door leaf. "Abloy" deadlock 2295C complete with 4195 lockcase, 5781K single cylinder and thumbturn and with construction keys; or "Yale" 523.50/214.62f26 deadbolt with construction keys; or "Falcon" D441-US26D/70 satin chrome cylinder/thumbturn deadbolt with construction keys; or other approved. The lockset shall be capable of being operated by a PBTS master key. "Nikon" C1 76mm x 76mm stainless steel cup handle or "Goal" GC stainless steel cup handle or "YTL-75" stainless steel cup handle; or other approved. Fixing screws shall not be exposed on the external. "Nikon" 150mm x 25mm stainless steel lever action flush bolt or other approved. "Nikon" 225m x 25mm stainless steel lever action flush bolt or other approved. Door closer shall be listed in PSB Product Listing Scheme Class 1A. Approved slim line door closer with cushioned back checking action shall be in silver finish. Approved stainless steel door selector.
(iii)
2 nos.
(iv) (v) (vi)
1 no. 1 no. 1 no.
(vii) (c)
1 no.
15.13.5
Certificates Submit certificates to the SO Rep to certify that the complete system of the fire rated timber surface finished composite doors including timber door frames and ironmongery installed are of at least half-hour fire-rated in all aspects approved by the FSSB.
15.13.6
15.13.7
15.13.8
Handover Of MDF Room And Telecom Equipment Room The Contractor shall attend the handover of the MDF Room and Telecom Equipment Room for the changing of lockset from construction keys to master keys.
UPG06/S15.DOC(11) lkk(181205) DPD
Ugdg Spec TS 15-12/23 15.14 HALF-HOUR FIRE-RATED TIMBER SURFACE FINISHED COMPOSITE DOORS TO PROTECTED STAIRCASE (A) Over-Riding Clause The Contractor executing the works as required in this clause including sub-clauses has to ensure that the works, goods or materials used shall be suitable and reasonably fit for the purpose of complying with the required fire-rating (hereinafter referred as "Performance Requirement"). In the event the works, goods or materials to be used as specified in this clause including sub-clauses are upgraded in order to meet the Performance Requirement, the Contractor shall do all necessary upgrading at no extra cost to the Employer subject always to the approval of the SO Rep, but such approval shall not in any way affect the Contractor's duties or obligations arising under the Contract. (B) General Provide and install half-hour fire-rated timber surface finished composite doors complete with door frames and ironmongery to protected staircase. The half-hour fire-rated timber surface finished composite doors, door frames and ironmongery shall be provided as a complete system complying with SS 332 : 2000, shall have PSB test certificates and PSB labels and shall be be listed in PSB Product Listing Scheme Class 1A or Class 1B. Details of the half-hour fire-rated timber surface finished composite doors shown in the Drawings shall serve as a guide. (C) Shop Drawings And Sample Prior to the installation, submit workshop drawings and PSB test certificates for the approval of the SO Rep. Further, install a complete sample on the Site for the approval of the SO Rep before full implementation. (D) Ironmongery Provide and fix all ironmongery required to complete the whole work in accordance with the following schedule subject to the approval of the FSSB. All ironmongery shall be at least half-hour fire-rated. The brand names specified in the schedule shall serve as a guide to the respective quality and profile of ironmongery required. Unless otherwise specified, the grade of stainless steel shall be Grade 304. Schedule Of Ironmongery (a) (b) 4 no. Stainless steel door hinges for each door leaf. 1 no. Door closer shall be listed in PSB Product Listing Scheme Class 1A. Approved slim line door closer with cushioned back checking action shall be of silver finish. 1 no. "Tiki" PH-20/BB/225 SS; or other approved stainless steel pull handles. The diameter shall be 18mm minimum and the length shall be approximately 225mm. 1 no. Stainless steel push plate of size 300mm x 150mm. The thickness shall be 1.2mm minimum. The word "PUSH" shall be engraved and painted on the push plate.
(c) (d) (E)
Certificates The Contractor shall submit to the SO Rep certificates as documentary proof that the complete system of the fire-rated timber finish composite door including door frames and ironmongery installed are of at least half-hour fire-rated in all aspects approved by the FSSB.
UPG06/S15.DOC(12) lkk(181205) DPD
15.15
FULL PANEL EXTRUDED PVC SWING DOORS Where specified, provide and install extruded PVC swing doors to toilet of kiosks, lock-up shops, shops, eating houses and other locations as shown in the Drawings. The extruded PVC doors shall be obtained from approved manufacturers and shall be made of high impact rigid PVC and shall comply with UL94 (Tests for flammability of plastic materials) Class 94 V-O. The colour(s) of PVC doors shall be selected from the following colour range : (a) (b) (c) (d) (e) BS 18C31 BS 10B15 BS 00A01 BS 08C33 BS 06D45 (f) (g) (h) (i) (j) BS 24C33 BS 00A05 BS 04B17 BS 08C31 BS 14C31
Provide the above colour samples to the SO Rep for selection of colour of PVC doors. 3 colours shall be decided by the SO Rep. Ironmongery to all PVC swing doors shall be as specified in Clause 16.4(F) "PVC Swing Doors".
15.16
CELLULAR PVC FOLDING DOOR Provide and install cellular PVC folding doors as shown in the Drawings. The door shall be complete with PVC door frame, integrated concealed central folding mechanism, hinges, door handles, door catch; and recessed lockset. Lockset mechanism shall be of metal components. The door shall be able to be folded to one side. No gap shall be visible between the joint of the panels in the close operation. The cellular PVC door with PVC frame, handle and lockset shall be obtained from approved suppliers and shall comply with the technical requirements as shown in the table below : Test 1. Durometer Hardness ASTM D2240-91 (Shore D) Vicat Softening Temperature ASTM D1525-87 Density/Specific Gravity ASTM D792-91 Method A Flammability UL 94 Chemical Resistance - Detergent - Household Bleach - Urea 6% Water Absorption ASTM D1037-93 - After 2 hours - After 24 hours Nail Pull-off Test ASTM D1037-93 1.5mm/min crosshead speed Nail-1.7mm diameter/29.3mm Av length No. of Specimens Door Leaf 3 Door Frame 2 Requirement (Average Value) 70 Minimum
2.
75 Degrees Minimum 0.65g per cm3 Minimum Class 94V-O
3. 4. 5.
3 3 3 Drops Each
2 -
No stains after 1 week
6.
2 2
1.8% Maximum 2.8% Maximum
7.
100N Minimum
UPG06/S15.DOC(13) lkk(181205) DPD
15.16
CELLULAR PVC FOLDING DOOR (CONT'D) Requirement (Average Value) 60,000 cycles. Lockset, including handle shall not be deformed, damaged or inoperable after test. Minimum 250N. Sample shall be tested on Universal Testing Machine and shall not fail below 250N.
Test
No. of Specimens
8.
Endurance of Lockset
Compression Load of Handle
The colour of the doors shall be of approved timber grain finish or be selected from the following colour range : (a) (b) (c) (d) (e) BS 18C31 BS 10B15 BS 00A01 BS 08C33 BS 06D45 (f) (g) (h) (i) (j) BS 24C33 BS 00A05 BS 04B17 BS 08C31 BS 14C31
Provide samples of the specified colour range to the SO Rep for selection of colour and textured pattern for the PVC door, door frame, handles and all ironmongery.
15.17
NON FIRE-RATED DECORATIVE SOLID TIMBER ENTRANCE DOORS TO FLATS, DECORATIVE SOLID TIMBER BEDROOM DOORS, TIMBER FLUSH DOORS TO SERVICE DUCTS, TIMBER FLUSH DOORS WITH FIXED TIMBER LOUVRES TO SERVICE DUCTS Where specified, the non fire-rated decorative solid timber entrance doors to flats, decorative solid timber bedroom doors, timber flush doors to service ducts and timber flush doors with fixed timber louvres to service ducts shall be certified under PSB Product Listing Scheme Class 1A or PSB Product Listing Scheme Class 1B.
15.18
*SOLID TIMBER VENEERED DOORS WITH DECORATIVE INLAY TO BEDROOM AND UTILITY ROOM (*Clause applicable if specified in the Contract) General Requirements Where required under the Contract, all doors to bedrooms and utility rooms to be provided to residential units shall be solid timber veneered doors with decorative inlays. Such decorative solid timber doors shall be installed complete with mild steel door frames, door frame fixing and ironmongery. The thickness of the door panels shall be approximately 38 mm to fit into the rebate of the door frame profile. The Contractor shall make provision for at least three design patterns for approval and selection by the SO Rep. The Contractor shall check with the SO Rep on the actual quantity of each design to be installed.
15.18.1
15.18.2
Shop Drawings And Samples Before commencement of the work, provide workshop drawings for approval by the SO Rep. A complete sample shall be installed on the Site for the approval of the SO Rep before full implementation.
15.18.3
Surfaces The surfaces of doors shall be in accordance with clause 15.9 "Timber Doors".
15.18.4
Moisture Content The moisture content of timber for all timber components shall be in accordance with clause 15.9 "Timber Doors".
UPG06/S15.DOC(14) lkk(181205) DPD
15.19
TIMBER DOOR WITH HIGH PRESSURE PLASTIC LAMINATE FINISH TO BATH/WC (*Clause applicable if specified in the Contract) General Requirements Where required under the Contract, all doors to bath/wc of residential units shall be semi-solid timber doors with 0.8mm thick high pressure plastic laminate finish. Such doors shall be installed complete with mild steel door frames, door frame fixing and ironmongery. The thickness of the door panels shall be approximately 38mm to fit into the rebate of the door frame profile. The Contractor shall provide wood grain laminates to match the design pattern of the bedroom door. The type, pattern and colour of laminate shall be approved by the SO Rep. The Contractor shall check with the SO Rep on the actual quantity of doors to be installed. The high pressure plastic laminates shall meet or exceed NEMA Publication LD 3-2000. The laminates shall be Wilsonart, Nevamar, Pionite or other approved.
15.19.1
15.19.2
Installation The plastic laminates should be bonded to 6mm thick marine-ply using adhesives and techniques as recommended by the supplier. All exposed edges of the solid timber laminated door shall be finished with 12mm thick nyatoh lipping.
15.19.3
Shop Drawings and Samples Before commencement of the work, provide workshop drawings for approval by the SO Rep. A complete sample shall be installed on the Site for the approval of the SO Rep before full implementation.
15.19.4
Surfaces The surfaces of the laminate and timber door edging shall be free from stains, adhesive marks, manufacturing faults and other blemishes liable to impair the aesthetics of the door.
15.19.5
Moisture Content The moisture content of timber for all timber components shall be in accordance with Clause 15.9 Timber Doors.
15.19.6
Ironmongery For Semi-Solid Timber Door with Laminate Finish The ironmongery items for each door leaf of laminated semi-solid timber doors shall be: (a) 3 nos. 102mm x 76mm x 3mm solid brass hinges (satin finish) with flat button tip and ball bearing complete with matching finish screws; Posse C130AB or Lucky 1630 or Forte BP101 or BLIY AB-610 or other approved privacy knobset with emergency release on the outside and push button on the inside in antique brass finish.
(b)
1 no.
15.19.7
Rubber Stopper Provide and fix 25mm diameter by 30 mm thick rubber stopper to the glazed wall tile surface of every bath/wc against which the door opens in a position effective in stopping the door from damaging the wall tiles. Fix the rubber stopper with stainless steel screw and raw plug.
15.20
TREATMENT OF ROOF TIMBER All roof timber shall be treated with "Solignum", "Creosote" or other approved wood preservative applied with brush in two coats. Timber may also be treated with approved pressurised process.
15.21
FIXING OF TIMBER WALL PLATE Wall plates shall be fixed with 13mm diameter bolts cast 100mm into R.C. beams spaced at maximum 1.5 metres centre.
UPG06/S15.DOC(15) lkk(181205) DPD
15.22
CEILING Where shown in the Drawings, ceiling material to dwelling units shall be of approved 1200mm x 2400mm x 12mm thick non-combustible gypsum board. Boards shall be fixed to ceiling joists and noggings with 38mm galvanised steel clout nails at maximum 150mm centre at all edges and intermediate fixing (along the centre of board) of galvanised steel clout nails shall be of maximum 300mm centre. Joints between boards shall be covered with 38 x 15mm nominal, moulded wood fillets at edge of wall and open joint at intermediate joint.
15.23
FALSE CEILING AT 1ST STOREY LIFT LOBBY ENTRANCE (A) Calcium Silicate Boards Ceiling Where indicated in the Drawings, new false ceiling boards at first storey lift lobby entrance shall be 12mm thick approved calcium silicate boards or other approved. The false ceiling boards shall be fixed to timber joists as shown in the Drawings. The ceiling boards shall be fixed by no. 8 corrosion resistant countersunk screws at approximately 288mm centres. The length of screw shall be equal to thickness of ceiling board plus 30mm minimum penetration into timber joist. Screws shall be driven not less than 12mm from the edge of the Boards. The timber joints shall be fixed, supported and lined out all as shown in the Drawings. The ceiling boards edges shall be birdsmouthed. The edges shall form `V' joints between boards when the boards are fixed. The joints shall be wet and filled with gypsum joint compound and taped with paper tape recommended by the supplier. When the joint compound is fully dried, it shall be finished with another two coats of joint compound recommended by the Supplier. The joints shall be sanded down when it is fully dried to obtain a seamless finish. All screw holes, screw heads and uneven joints shall be filled with gypsum joint compound. Provide access panel all as shown in the Drawings and shall trim holes whenever required for electrical fittings, pipings, trunkings and others. The ceiling boards shall be sealed with an approved wall sealer before applying two coats of approved acrylic emulsion paints. All exposed timber surfaces shall be wrot by planing and sand-papering to an approved smooth finish. (B) Metal False Ceiling (a) Material Where indicated on the Drawings, new false ceiling at first storey lift lobby entrance shall be 600mm x 600mm x 0.7mm aluminium ceiling panels suspended and supported in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions and recommendations. Ceiling panels shall be perforated with 2.5mm diameter holes at 5.5mm centres, giving a 16% open area. The false ceiling shall be in polyester powder coated or polyester stove enamelled and to the colour approved by the SO Rep. Ceiling panels shall complete with suspension system and fixing accessories, all in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions and recommendations. Provide all access panels and trim holes required for electrical fittings, pipings, trunking and others, etc. All metal accessories to be used for the installation of ceiling panel shall be in galvanised steel. (b) Workshop Drawings The details shown in Drawings shall serve as a guide only. The Contractor shall submit complete set of workshop drawings showing reflected ceiling plan, sections, suspension systems, dimensions and details of access panels, electrical fittings and pipings/trunkings for the approval of the SO Rep. (c) Sample Samples of ceiling shall be submitted for the approval of the SO Rep prior to the installation.
UPG06/S15.DOC(16) lkk(181205) DPD
15.24
ALUMINIUM FRAMES FOR GLASS LOUVRED VENTS Where shown, provide and fix bronze anodised aluminium frames for glass louvred vents to size and dimension indicated in the Drawings.
15.25
REPLACEMENT OF EXISTING ENTRANCE DOOR (NON FIRE-RATED DOOR AND FIRE-RATED DOOR) Where applicable, contractor shall replace the existing entrance door with non fire-rated or fire-rated door as shown in the Drawings and include the following : (i) Remove existing flat's entrance doors along the corridor and fire escape route as instructed on site except door frames and metal gates as shown in door schedule and dispose off site. Remove existing services/store room doors and door frames along the fire escape route as instructed on site and as shown in doors schedule and dispose off site. Supply and install an equivalent rating of half-hour fire-rated timber entrance door leaf to fit into rebate of existing timber door frame profile of flats. Supply and install half-hour fire-rated solid timber doors (laminated timber core) with timber surface finish or half-hour fire-rated timber composite doors (moisture resistance Particle Board in accordance to BS 5669:Part 1) with timber surface finished and ironmongery according to Clause 15.11 (complete with timber door frames) as shown in door schedule for services rooms. Seal-up fan light adjacent to main entrance doors to comply with FSSB escape lobby requirement to minimum 1 hour fire-rating. Panel and existing frame to be painted to match existing surrounding. Seal up store room entrances under staircases with brickwork and plaster over to match existing surrounding. Provide alternative opening to the sealed up store room away from escape passage way. Provide and fix new aluminium house number plates to each of the new entrance doors to flat's units, refer to Section 30 "MISCELLANEOUS (BUILDING)". The existing accessories or any signages to services rooms shall be retained and fixed onto new doors. The number of doors given in the Tender is approximate; the Employer reserves the right to add or omit any number of doors or any other items specified in the contract to be installed. Please see Sub Clause 15.25.1 on Procedure. Timber Doors (a) Unless otherwise specified, all fire-rated timber doors shall be constructed in accordance with the details as shown in the Drawings and clauses under this Section for entrance doors of all room types. Unless otherwise specified, all non fire-rated doors shall be similar to the fire-rated door excluding the door closer and FSSB label.
(ii)
(iii)
(iv)
(v)
(vi)
(vii) (viii)
(ix)
(x)
(xi) (xii)
(b)
(xiii)
Making Good Existing Door Frames/Doors Any damages, unnecessary recess or screw holes, lockset rebate, etc. left behind on the door frames/doors when removing the old doors or old locksets are to be patched back and make good including painting or coating to match the existing finishings.
UPG06/S15.DOC(17) lkk(181205) DPD
15.25.1
Half-Hour Fire-Rated Decorative In-Lay Solid Timber Core Entrance Doors To Flats (A) Over-Riding Clause The Contractor executing the works as required in this clause including sub-clauses shall ensure that the works, goods or materials used shall be suitable and reasonably fit for the purpose of complying with the required fire-rating (hereinafter referred as "Performance Requirement"). In the event the works, goods or materials to be used as specified in this clause including subclauses are upgraded in order to meet the Performance Requirement, the Contractor shall do all necessary upgrading at no extra cost to the Employer subject always to the approval of the SO Rep, but such approval shall not in any way affect the Contractor's duties or obligations arising under the Contract. (B) General The Contractor shall provide and install half-hour fire-rated decorative in-lay solid timber doors complete with ironmongery to entrances of flats according to clause 15.10 including all sub-clauses under it. The provision and installation of the half-hour fire-rated plain or decorative solid timber doors and ironmongery as a complete system shall be carried out by approved fire door Specialist. An equivalent rating of half hour fire-rated decorative solid timber doors leaf including ironmongery shall have PSB test certificates and PSB labels and shall be approved by the FSSB. The thickness of fire-rated door panel shall fit into the existing timber or mild steel rebate of door frame profile. Where decorative door is used, the timber beading shall be fixed by hidden nails and approved adhesive to the design pattern as shown in the drawings. The linings shall be of timber veneer finish. Other details of the door leaf panel shown in the Drawings shall serve as a guide. The Contractor is not required to remove existing door frames unless otherwise indicated. In cases, where contractor/manufacturer does not have fire door that meet the requirements of HDB door frame designs, he has the option (in order of preference) of : (a) Supply and install timber strip around existing door frame of entrance door. The resultant width of the door seat rebate shall suit their fire door and shall not be more than 27mm deep. The modified door frame shall meet PSB's requirement and shall be made good and finished with enamel paints. Adding Fire Seal to the new door leaf for entrance door. Shop drawings of the new door leaf incorporated with Fire Seal and shown together with the existing door frame profile shall be submitted to PSB for assessment. If required, allow for PSB testing for the modified fire door with complete system including ironmongery and door frame similar to existing door frame profile. Deepening the door seat rebate of existing door frame of entrance door. The resultant width of the door seat retate shall suit their fire door and shall not be more than 25mm deep. The modified door frame shall meet PSB's requirement and shall be made good and finished with enamel paints.
(b)
(c)
All works to be under the supervision and to the satisfaction of the SO Rep. The Contractor shall be deemed to have included in the Contract Sum for all costs and expenses incurred by him for compliance with the requirements stipulated. (C) Shop Drawings and Sample Prior to installation, contractor is to provide workshop drawings that conform strictly to HDB standards of door or equivalent to the satisfaction of the SO's Rep. The Contractor to submit PSB test certificates and approval from the FSSD for the approval of the SO's Rep. Further, a complete sample shall be installed on site for the approval of the SO Rep before the full implementation.
UPG06/S15.DOC(18) lkk(181205) DPD
15.25.1
Half-Hour Fire-Rated Decorative Solid Timber Core Entrance Doors To Flats (Cont'd) (D) Half-Hour Fire-Rated Timber Surface Finished Solid Core Or Composite Doors To Switch Room, Store Room And Pump Room (a) Over-Riding Clause The Contractor and his Specialist executing the works as required in this Clause including sub clauses have to ensure that the works, goods or materials used shall be suitable and reasonably fit for the purposes for which they are required (hereinafter referred as "Performance Requirement"). In the event the works, goods or materials to be used as specified in this clause including sub clauses are upgraded in order to meet the Performance Requirement, the Contractor and his Specialist shall do all necessary upgrading at no extra cost to the Employer, subject always to the approval of the Superintending Officer's Representative, but such approval shall not in any way affect the Contractor's and his Specialist's duties or obligations arising under the Contract. (b) General Where half-hour fire-rated timber doors to switch rooms, store rooms and pump room are shown, provide and install half-hour fire-rated timber surface finished solid core or composite doors complete with timber door frames and ironmongery according to clause 15.11 including all sub-clauses under it. The half-hour fire-rated timber surface finished composite doors and ironmongery shall be provided as a complete system and shall have PSB test certificate and PSB labels and approved by the FSSB. (c) Shop Drawings Prior to installation, Contractor is to provide workshop drawings that conform strictly to HDB standards of door or equivalent to the satisfaction of the SO's Rep. The Contractor to submit PSB Test Certificates and approval from the FSSB for the approval of the SO Rep. (E) Other Incidental Works (a) Stain Varnishing Of Main Entrance Doors To Residential Units Apply painting according to Section 23 PAINTING AND DECORATING to SO Rep satisfaction, at least one coat of which should be applied on site. Touch up as necessary, and to the satisfaction of the resident once door is installed. (b) Painting Of Timber Surface Finished Composite/Solid Timber Core Doors To Switch Room, Store Rooms and Pump Rooms Surfaces of all existing wood work shall be prepared and painted according to Section 23 PAINTING AND DECORATING. The finishing coat colour shall be approved by the SO Rep. (c) Repainting Of Existing Main Entrance Door Frame Repaint with one coat of enamel paint to existing main entrance door frames to all units and colour to be selected by SO Rep. (d) Making Good At Services/Store Room The Contractor shall reinstate the works disturbed to match the existing surrounding (whether it is tiles, painting mural etc.) while carrying out works to these areas. (e) Sealing Up Of The Extra Opening At The Eating Houses/Shops etc. Where specified, sealing up of the extra door opening within 3m of the staircase and/or lift lobby at the ground floor staircase entrance with brickworks and plaster. Painting to match the existing wall. Reinstate the Works disturbed to match the existing surrounding. The Contractor shall be responsible for locating and informing the SO of all such openings and await approval from the SO before proceeding to seal up such openings.
UPG06/S15.DOC(19) lkk(181205) DPD
15.25.1
Half-Hour Fire-Rated Decorative Solid Timber Core Entrance Doors To Flats (Cont'd) (E) Other Incidental Works (Cont'd) (f) Sealing Up of Existing Store Room Entrances Seal up existing storeroom entrances to 1m from top of opening with 100mm thick brickwork. For top 1m of opening, seal up with 1 hour fire-rated demountable calcium silicate panel in accordance with Drawings No : HB-m-97-4906. (g) Sealing Up Of The Ventilation Openings At The Services/Store Room Sealing up of the ventilation openings within 3m of the staircase and/or lift lobby. Existing timber aluminium louvred vent are to be removed and sealed up with brickwalls and plaster; and existing P.C vent are to be sealed up with cement mortar or other equivalent. Open up another similar size opening at a position as directed on site and install with new fixed extruded louvres blades of 2.3mm thick (min.) complete with Aluminium Mullion/frame. Painting to match the existing wall. Reinstate and make good the works disturbed to match the existing surrounding. (h) Core Samples For Testing The Contractor should allow in the tender taking core samples from the existing door frames for PSB testing (or other approved accredited laboratories as directed by the SO Rep). This include all the necessary equipment, labour, transportation, etc. Make good and replace all sections removed to match existing finishes including door frame. Any sample taken shall be in accaordance with the Code of Practice and delivered on the same day of coring. (i) Procedure For Fire Doors Installation In Batch Contract (To be read together with the flow chart attached) The procedure below serves only as a guide for contractor/manufacturer on how to obtain PSB labels for the new fire-rated door and Test Report of the complete system (that is the door leaf or leaves and door frame). Ideally, selected door manufacturers should use approved fire rated door designs that have door frames that are similar to the existing HDB door frames design. The latter door frame density is to be verified for compliance to the required timber density. This is an important preliminary check. The Contractor may on their own, or preferably engage PSB, conduct density test of the existing door frame by taking timber sample of the frame. They shall submit shop drawings of their fire-rated door leaf shown together with the existing door frame profile for PSB's assessment and FSSBs approval. Where door manufacturers do not have a fire door which meets the requirements of HDB door frame designs, they could modify the existing door frames to suit their fire door. They could modify the dimension of the door frame by deepening the door seat rebate or adding timber strip to increase the width of the door seat rebate. Alternatively, they may install a fire seal on the door leaf. All these are to be done on shop drawings to be submitted to PSB for assessment and then forwarded to FSSB for approval. The manufacturer is to check that the density of the timber used for the door frame shall not be less than that of the prototype tested. The adding of timber strips, deepening of door seat or adding of fire seals are for modification made to door frame rebate for dimensional compliance with the prototype tested. Upon FSSD approval, PSB will issue Third Party Batch Inspection labels (see below) for inspected batches. These labels are to be fixed next to the manufacturers label. The latter's label should only state the manufacturers name and door ref. number. Contractors can then proceed with installations works, modifying the existing door frames if they adopt the option of adding timber strips.
UPG06/S15.DOC(20) lkk(181205) DPD
15.25.1
Half-Hour Fire-Rated Decorative Solid Timber Core Entrance Doors To Flats (Cont'd) (E) (i) Procedure For Fire Doors Installation In Batch Contract (Contd) (To be read together with the flow chart attached) Upon completion of work, PSB will carry out site inspection. This will involve dimension verification and timber density measurement of door frames sampled at the project site. The sample size will follow the standard sampling criteria. That is, eight (8) samples for every batch of one hundred and fifty (150) units, thirteen samples (13) for every batch of two hundred and eighty (280) units, or twenty samples (20) for every batch of five hundred (500) units. If works are done accordingly, PSB will issue Test Report certifying that the complete door system (ie. the door leaf and door frames) is in accordance with their half-hour fire-rated requirement for a fire door. 36mm x 20mm Label * PSB HDB xxxxxx Third Party Batch Inspected
UPG06/S15.DOC(21) lkk(181205) DPD
FLOW CHART FOR THE PROPOSED INSPECTION OF FIRE-RATED DOORS
Step 1
HDB nominate fire door manufacturer.
Step 2
Manufacturer to approach PSB for assessment on modification of existing door frames to FSSB approved prototype design.
Step 3
Manufacturer obtains FSSD approval on the assessment report.
Step 4
Manufacturer liaises with PSB for door leaf components inspection.
Step 5
PSB conduct batch inspection and stamp on components, upon their compliance with the requirements.
Step 6
Manufacturer complete assembly of components and liaise with PSB for door panel labelling.
Step 7
PSB conduct batch inspection and label the door panels upon their compliance with the requirements.
Note : The Label & the Forms will be released later with the test report on door frames inspection.
Step 8
Manufacturer modifies existing door frames to FSSB approved design and installs door panels.
Step 9
Manufacturer liaise with PSB for verification of door frames after completed door set had been installed.
Step 10
PSB conduct a batch inspection on door frames to check on modification done according to FSSD approved design. Samples of timber are to be cut from the door frames for density measurements in the laboratory. The number of pieces of timber to be cut will be according to the batch inspection sampling plan.
Step 11
PSB issue test report of the door frame's inspection upon their compliance with requirements. The Label & Forms for door panels will also be attached to this report.
Step 12
Manufacturer submits PSB test report for door frames, together with Label & Forms for the door panels to HDB.
UPG06/S15.DOC(22) lkk(181205) DPD
15.26
PVC FOLDING DOOR Provide and install PVC folding doors as shown in the Drawings. The door shall be complete with PVC door frame, integrated concealed central folding mechanism, hinges and recessed lockset. The door shall be able to be slided and folded to one side. No gap shall be visible between the joint of the panels in the close operation. The PVC door with PVC frame shall be obtained from approved suppliers and shall be of high impact rigid PVC and shall comply with UL 94 (Test for flammability of plastic materials) class 94 V-O. The colour of PVC doors shall be of approved timber grain finish or be selected from the following colour range : (a) (b) (c) (d) (e) BS 18C31 BS 10B15 BS 00A01 BS 08C33 BS 06D45 (f) (g) (h) (i) (j) BS 24C33 BS 00A05 BS 04B17 BS 08C31 BS 14C31
Provide samples of the specified colour range and/or timber grain finish to the SO Rep for selection of colour of PVC door, door frame, handles and all ironmongery. 3 colours shall be decided by the SO Rep.
15.27
DOOR LEAVES TO ROOMS IN FLATS The provision and installation of doors shown in dotted lines in the Drawings shall not be included in this contract. These doors shown in dotted lines are meant to indicate the direction of swing of the doors. Where doors are shown in solid (full) lines in the Drawings, the Contractor shall provide and install such doors which are included in this contract.
15.28
DOORS EXPOSED TO WEATHERING The Contractor shall install the doors exposed to weathering in accordance with sub-clauses 15.9(d) and 15.9(e).
SECTION 16/...
UPG06/S15.DOC(23) lkk(181205) DPD
Ugdg Spec TS 16-1/9
SECTION 16 16.0 16.1 IRONMONGERY GENERAL Where shown in the drawings, provide and fix all ironmongery required to complete the whole work in accordance with the requirements specified in this Section including all clauses and subclauses under it, subject to the approval of the SO Rep. The brand names specified in the Schedule shall serve as a guide to the respective quality and profile of ironmongery required. 16.2 FIXING All ironmongery shall be fixed with stainless steel screws, screw driven and countersunk to form a sound connection. Screws shall not be hammered into position. If screws are found to be hammered in, the whole fixture shall be taken down and refixed in accordance with the specifications at the Contractor's own costs and expenses. 16.3 GRADE OF STAINLESS STEEL Unless otherwise specified, the grade of stainless steel shall be Grade 304. 16.4 IRONMONGERY FOR FLATS, SHOPS AND KIOSKS, ETC Unless Specified otherwise the following is the Schedule of Ironmongery for flats, shops, eating houses, kiosks and services rooms : (A) Half-Hour Fire-Rated Solid Timber Veneered Doors With Decorative Inlay To Entrances Of Flats Refer to Clause 15.10 " Half-Hour Fire-Rated Solid Timber Veneered Doors With Decorative Inlay To Entrances Of Flats" including all subclauses under it. (B) Decorative Solid Timber Entrance Doors to Flats (For Non Fire-Rated Doors) Single Leaf Doors The ironmongery items for single leaf non fire-rated decorative solid timber entrance doors to flats shall be : (i) 4 nos. 102mm x 76mm x 3mm solid brass hinges (satin finish) with flat button tip and ball bearing complete with matching finish screws per leaf.
(ii)
1 no.
"YTL" N28FIR-AT-US5; or "Accord" M4L10AB or "Posse" M4L10AB; or Forte LH888/LP8AB; or Innohaus Series 1802; or BLIY-N27-FIR-US5 ; or other approved mortice lever on backplate lockset with 5-pin single cylinder deadlock (key on the outside and inside. No thumb turn on the inside for door next to the window to prevent hand reaching through the window to thumb turn. If the hand cannot reach the lock from the outside through the window, the thumb turn can be installed.) solid brass lever handles on plates on both sides. The finishes for the deadlock, grip handle and lever handle shall be antique brass. The lever handle lockset shall be installed in a manner to clear the metal gate lockset.
90mm x 27mm wide brass barrel bolt. 240mm x 27mm wide brass barrel bolt.
(iii) (iv)
1 no. 1 no.
Ugdg Spec TS 16-2/9
16.4
(B)
Decorative Solid Timber Entrance Doors to Flats (For Non Fire-Rated Doors) (Cont'd) Single Leaf Doors (Cont'd) (v) 1 no. Antique brass finish door viewer : (a) YTL 200; or (b) "Accord" 2170 AB-A; or (c) "Forte" H6DV18ES; or (d) "Nikon 2170AB; or (e) BLIY DV-200AB; (d) or other approved.
The position shall be as shown in the Drawings but ensure that door viewer shall not be obstructed by entrance grille gate. (vii) 1 no. Solid brass magnetic door holder : (a) "YTL" DH-027; or (b) "Accord" DH-027AB; or (c) "Nikon" DH-027AB; or (d) Forte H6DH75ES (e) other approved.
The door holder shall be placed at the centre of bottom rail and its position shall preferably be closer to the edge of the door subject to the approval of the SO Rep. The door holder shall be in antique brass finish. Double Leaf Doors The ironmongery items for double leaf non fire-rated decorative solid timber entrance doors to flats shall be : (i) 4 no. 102mm x 76mm x 3mm solid brass hinges (satin finish) with flat button tip and ball bearing complete with matching finish screws per door leaf. Posse H61L AB or Lucky CS-410-MA-US5; or other approved mortice lever handle lockset with 5-pin single cylinder deadlock (key on the outside and thumb turn on the inside) solid brass lever handle. The finishes for the deadlock, lever handle shall be antique brass. The lever handle lockset shall be installed in a manner to clear the metal gate lockset. Rebated parts. 200mm x 20mm wide brass level action flush bolt in satin finish. 300mm x 20mm wide brass level action flush bolt in satin finish. Antique brass finish door viewer : (a) (b) (c) (d) YTL 200; or Forte H6DV18ES; or Accord 2170 AB-A; or other approved.
(ii)
1 no.
(iii) (iv) (v) (vi)
2 no. 1 no. 1 no. 1 no.
The position shall be as shown in the Drawings but ensure that door viewer shall not be obstructed by the entrance grille gate. (vii) 1 no. Solid brass magnetic door holder : (a) "YTL" DH-027; or (b) "Accord" DH-027AB; or (c) "Nikon" DH-027AB; or (d) Forte H6DH75ES (e) other approved.
The door holder shall be placed at the centre of bottom rail and its position shall preferably be closer to the edge of the door subject to the approval of the SO Rep. The door holder shall be in antique brass finish.
Ugdg Spec TS 16-3/9 16.4 IRONMONGERY FOR FLATS, SHOPS AND KIOSKS, ETC (CONT'D) (C) Decorative Solid Timber Bedroom Doors and/or Study and/or Utility Doors Unless otherwise specified, the ironmongery items for each door leaf of decorative solid timber bedroom doors/timber doors to study and/or utility rooms shall be: (i) 3 nos. 102mm x 76mm solid brass hinges (satin finish) with flat button tip and ball bearing complete with matching finish screws; Posse J4LA600-AB or YTL LH600AB or Accord J4LA600-AB or other approved lever handle lockset with 5-pin single cylinder and thumb turn (key on the outside and thumb turn on the inside) and solid brass lever handles on both sides; or other approved. The finish shall be in antique brass. Unless otherwise specified, provide solid brass magnetic door holder : (a) (b) (c) (d) YTL DH-027; or Accord DH-027AB; or Nikon DH-027AB; or other approved.
(ii)
1 no.
(iii)
1 no.
The door holder shall be placed at the centre of the bottom rail and its position shall preferably be closer to the edge of the door subject to the approval of the SO Rep. The door holder shall be in antique brass finish. (D) PVC Swing Doors (a) For each door leaf of PVC swing doors shown with mild steel door frame : (i) 3 nos. 100mm x 70mm (minimum) x 1.5mm 0.2mm thick stainless steel butt hinges Privacy knobset with emergency release : (a) (b) (c) (d) (e) (b) "Goal" US 4E; or Accord C 130SS; or "Tesa" 2503 CM; or "Lucky" Model 1030; or "Posse" 130-SS; or other approved.
(ii)
1 no.
For each door leaf of PVC swing doors to toilet of kiosks, lock-up shops, shops and eating houses shown without door frame : (i) 2 nos. 2.64mm thick (0.14mm) 5052 aluminium alloy hinge and cotter pin 0.8mm thick x 25mm long nylon bush. 80mm brass cabin hook and eye.
(ii) (E)
1 no.
*Swing Door To Service Balcony And Courtyard (*Clause applicable if specified in the Contract) Where specified, provide and fix to each door leaf the following ironmongery : (i) 2 nos. 122mm x 96mm x 3mm or 3 nos. 102mm x 76mm x 2mm thick stainless steel butt hinges in bronze or black colour finish. Tolerance for thickness of stainless steel hinges shall be 0.2mm. "Faultless" C8903 or "Lucky" Model 1711 or "Posse" C111 AZ; or other approved double cylinder cylindrical lockset with key both sides. The lockset shall be in bronze finish.
(ii)
1 no.
Ugdg Spec TS 16-4/9 16.4 IRONMONGERY FOR FLATS, SHOPS AND KIOSKS, ETC (CONT'D) (F) Door Stopper To Bath/WC Provide and fix a 25mm diameter by 30 mm thick rubber stopper to the glazed wall tile surface of every bath/w.c. against which the door opens in a position effective in stopping the door from damaging the wall tile. Fixing shall be with 25mm stainless steel or non corrosive screw and rawl plug. (G) Metal Grille Gates To Flat Entrances Refer to Clause 18.24 "Metal Grille Gates To Flat Entrances". (H) Rear Door Of Shops/Eating Houses For each door leaf of rear doors of shops/eating houses : (i) (ii) 3 nos. 1 no. 100mm x 70mm (minimum) x 1.8mm 0.2mm thick stainless steel butt hinges Rebated 5 pin double cylinder mortice lockset : (a) "Tesa" R300 with brass chrome plated or stainless steel lever handles; or (b) "Abloy" 2390 with brass chrome plated or stainless steel lever handles; or (c) Accord 0706PZ/1406/1591SS with brass chrome plated or stainless steel lever handles; or (d) "Yale" 138L/520.50/210.62 with brass chrome plated lever handles; (e) or other approved. (iii) (iv) (v) (J) 1 no. 1 no. 1 no. 90mm x 27mm stainless steel square shoot bolt. 240mm x 27mm stainless steel square shoot bolt. 100mm stainless steel hook and eye.
Half-Hour Fire-Rated Timber Surfaced Finished Composite Doors To Switch Room, PUB Switch Room, Store Room, Pump Room, Refuse Room, Bulky Refuse Area, MDF Room, Telecoms Equipment Room And Staircase Access To Main Roof Refer to Clause 15.11 "Half-Hour Fire-Rated Timber Surface Finished Composite Doors To Switch Room, PUB Switch Room, Store Room, Pump Room, Refuse Room, Bulky Refuse Area And Staircase Access To Main Roof" including all subclauses under it.
(K)
Ironmongery For Doors (Non Fire-Rated) To Electrical Switch Room, Pump Room, Store Room and Bulky Refuse Area Where indicated, for doors (non-fire rated) to electrical switch rooms, pump rooms, store rooms and bulky refuse areas, provide and fix ironmongery in accordance with the following schedule : (a) Double Leaf For double leaf : (i) (ii) (iii) 4 nos. 2 nos. 1 no. 100mm x 70mm (minimum) stainless steel butt hinges, thickness 1.8mm 0.2mm for each door leaf. Stainless steel locking eyes (4mm thick minimum) with hairline finish. "Abloy" PL 230 padlock under master key; or "Union" 3122/2 PL padlock under master key; or "Yale" 110.50 padlock under master key; or other approved.
Ugdg Spec TS 16-5/9 16.4 (K) Ironmongery For Doors (Non Fire-Rated) To Electrical Switch Room, Pump Room, Store Room and Bulky Refuse Area (a) Double Leaf (Cont'd) (iv) 1 no. "Nikon" C1 76mm x 76mm stainless steel cup handle; or "Goal" GC stainless steel cup handle; or "YTL-75" stainless steel cup handle; or other approved. Fixing screws shall not be exposed on the external. "Nikon" 225mm x 25mm stainless steel lever action flush bolt; or other approved. "Nikon 150mm x 25mm stainless steel lever action flush bolt; or other approved.
(v) (vi) (b)
1 no. 1 no.
Single Leaf For single leaf : (i) (ii) (iii) 4 nos. 2 nos. 1 no. 100mm x 70mm (minimum) stainless steel butt hinges, thickness 1.8mm 0.2mm. Stainless steel locking eyes (4mm thick minimum) with hairline finish. "Abloy" PL230 padlock under master key; or "Union" 3122/2 PL padlock under master key; or "Yale" 110.50 padlock under master key; or other approved. "Nikon" C1 76mm x 76mm stainless steel cup handle; or "Goal" GC stainless steel cup handle; or "YTL-75" stainless steel cup handle; or other approved. Fixing screws shall not be exposed on the external.
(iv)
1 no.
(L)
Doors To MDF Room And Telecoms Equipment Room (Non-Fire Rated) For doors (non-fire rated) to MDF rooms and Telecoms equipment rooms, provide and fix : (a) Double Leaf For double leaf : (i) (ii) (iii) 4 nos. 2 nos. 1 no. 100mm x 70mm (minimum) stainless steel butt hinges, thickness 1.8mm 0.2mm for each door leaf. 240mm x 27mm width grade 304 stainless steel high barrel shoot bolt. "Abloy" deadlock 2295C complete with 4195 lockcase, 5781K single cylinder and thumbturn and with construction keys; or "Yale" 523.50/ 214.62f26 deadbolt with construction keys; or "Falcon" D441US26D/70 satin chrome cylinder/thumbturn deadbolt with construction keys; or other approved. The lockset shall be capable of being operated by PBTS master key. "Nikon" C1 76mm x 76mm stainless steel cup handle; or "Goal" GC stainless steel cup handle; or "YTL-75" stainless steel cup handle; or other approved. Fixing screws shall not be exposed on the external.
(iv)
2 nos.
(b)
Single Leaf For single leaf doors : (i) (ii) 4 nos. 1 no. 100mm x 70mm (minimum) stainless steel butt hinges, thickness 1.8mm 0.2mm. "Abloy" deadlock 2295C complete with 4195 lockcase, 5781K single cylinder and thumbturn and with construction keys; or "Yale" 523.50/ 214.62f26 deadbolt with construction keys; or "Falcon" D441US26D/70 satin chrome cylinder/thumbturn deadbolt with construction keys; or other approved. The lockset shall be capable of being operated by PBTS master key.
Ugdg Spec TS 16-6/9 16.4 (L) Doors To MDF Room And Telecoms Equipment Room (Non-Fire Rated) (Cont'd) (b) Single Leaf (Cont'd) (iii) 2 nos. "Nikon" C1 76mm x 76mm stainless steel cup handle; or "Goal" GC stainless steel cup handle; or "YTL-75" stainless steel cup handle; or other approved. Fixing screws shall not be exposed on the external.
The Contractor shall attend the handover of the MDF Room and Telecoms Equipment Room for the changing of lockset from construction keys to master keys. (M) Half-Hour Fire-Rated Timber Surface Finished Composite Doors To Service Ducts Refer to Clause 15.12 "Half-Hour Fire-Rated Timber Surface Finished Composite Doors To Service Ducts". (N) Ironmongery For Non-Fire Rated Service Duct For Flats Where indicated, for non-fire rated doors to service duct for flats, provide and fix all ironmongery in accordance with the following : (a) Single Leaf For single leaf : (i) (ii) 4 nos. 1 no. 100mm x 70mm (minimum) stainless steel butt hinges, thickness 1.8mm 0.2mm. "Accord" CH-382; or Forte H6LR76ES or BLIY 70 or "YTL" 85; or other approved stainless steel cup handles passage latch with cup handle on both sides.
(b)
Double Leaf For double leaf doors : (i) (ii) 4 nos. 1 no. 100mm x 70mm (minimum) stainless steel butt hinges, thickness 1.8mm 0.2mm for each door leaf. "Accord" CH-382; or Forte H6LR76ES or BLIY 70 or "YTL" 85; or other approved stainless steel cup handles passage latch with cup handle on both sides. Brass rebated parts. 200mm x 20mm wide stainless steel lever action flush bolt; or other approved. 300mm x 20mm wide stainless steel lever action flush bolt; or other approved.
(iii) (iv) (v) (O)
1 no. 1 no. 1 no.
Refuse Chute Aluminium Inspection Cover For each door leaf of refuse chute aluminium inspection covers : (i) (ii) (iii) 3 nos. 1 no. 1 no. 100mm x 70mm (minimum) x 1.5mm 0.2mm thick stainless steel butt hinges. Stout hasp and staple of approved design. Padlock "Union" 3104-50mm brass or "Yale" 110-30 or "Abloy" PL 220 or other approved; with master key.
Ugdg Spec TS 16-7/9 16.4 IRONMONGERY FOR FLATS, SHOPS AND KIOSKS, ETC (CONT'D) (P) Access Trap Door To Roof For each door leaf of access trap doors to roofs : (i) (ii) (Q) 1 no. 1 no. Stout hasp and staple Padlock "Union" 3142 or "Yale" 110.60 or "Abloy" PL 3030; or other approved.
Doors To Electrical Substation For doors to electrical substations, refer to the Drawings.
(R)
Doors To Toilet Of Utilities Centre/Dustbin Compound For each door leaf of toilet doors of utilities centres/dustbin compounds : (i) (ii) 3 nos. 1 no. 100mm x 70mm (minimum) x 1.5mm 0.2mm thick stainless steel butt hinges. Private knobset with emergency release : (a) (b) (c) (d) (e) (iii) 1 no. Accord C130; or "Goal" US 4E; or "Tesa" 2503cm; or "Lucky" Model No. 1030; or "Posse" 130; or other approved
25mm diameter by 20mm thick rubber stopper to the wall surface against which the door opens in a position effective in stopping the door from damaging the wall tile.
(S)
Doors To Store Of Utilities Centre/Dustbin Compound For each door leaf of doors of stores to utilities centres/dustbin compounds : (i) (ii) 4 nos. 1 no. 100mm x 70mm (minimum) x 1.8mm 0.2mm thick stainless steel butt hinges. 5 pin double cylinder mortice lockset : (a) (b) (c) (d) "Tesa" R300 with brass chrome plated or stainless steel lever handles; or "Abloy" 2390 with brass chrome plated or stainless steel handle; or "Yale" 138L/520.50/210.62 with brass chrome plated lever handles; or Accord 0706PZ/1406/1591SS with stainless steel or brass chrome plated handles or other approved.
(T)
Doors To Fuel Store of Utilities Centre/Dustbin Compound For doors to fuel stores to utilities centres/dustbin compounds : (a) Single Leaf Door Ironmongery shall be similar to sub-clause 16.4(S) "Doors To Store Of Utilities Centre/Dustbin Compound". (b) Double Leaf Door (i) 4 nos. 100mm x 70mm (minimum) x 1.8mm + 0.2mm thick stainless steel butt hinges for each door.
Ugdg Spec TS 16-8/9
16.4
(T)
Doors To Fuel Store of Utilities Centre/Dustbin Compound (Cont'd) (b) Double Leaf Door (Cont'd) (ii) 1 no. Rebated 5 pin double cylinder mortice lockset : (a) "Tesa" R300 with brass chrome plated or stainless steel lever handles; or "Abloy" 2390 with brass chrome plated or stainless steel handle; or "Yale" 138L/520.50/210.62 with brass chrome plated lever handles; or Accord 0706PZ/1406/1591SS with stainless steel or brass chrome plated handles; or other approved.
(b)
(c)
(d)
(iii) (U)
2 nos.
240mm x 27mm width stainless steel barrel shoot bolt.
Trap Door To Roof Of Booster Pump Room For each door leaf of trap doors to roofs of booster pump rooms : (i) (ii) 1 no. 1 no. Stout hasp and staple. Padlock "Union" 3142 or "Yale" 110.60 or "Abloy" 3030 or other approved.
(V)
Louvred Door To Staircase Access To Main Roof For each door leaf of louvred doors to staircase accesses to main roofs : (i) 3 nos. 100mm x 70mm (minimum) stainless steel (Grade 304) butt hinges, thickness 1.7mm 0.2mm Passage Knob Latchset : (a) (b) (c) (d) (e) Accord 182; or "Goal" US 1E; or "Lucky" Model 1082; or "Tesa" 2505CM; or "Posse" 182-SS; or other approved.
(ii)
1 no.
(W)
Escape Door At Consumer Switch Room (Where the Length of Switchroom Exceeds 6.5m) Where escape door at the consumer switchroom is shown in the Drawings, provide and fix the ironmongery as follows : For each door leaf : (i) (ii) 4 nos. 1 no. 102mm x 76mm x 2mm stainless steel grade 304 butt hinges. "Accord 376"; or other approved single panic bolt. The panic bolt shall be of aluminium die cast body with extruded aluminium guides, steel tube shoots and cross bars and shall be in silver colour finish.
Ugdg Spec TS 16-9/9
16.4
(X)
Ironmongery For Doors To Lift Machine Room Provide and fix ironmongery in accordance with the following schedule: (i) (ii) 4 no. 100mm x 70mm (minimum) stainless steel butt hinges, thickness 1.8mm 0.2mm. 1no. "Accord" 0706C/1404/1591B or YTL-N28-FIR-AT-US32D or BLIY N-27-FIR US32D or other approved half cylinder mortice lockset with stainless steel lever handles on rose or on back plate on both sides. It shall comply with CP2:2000. The door shall be openable from the outside only by the use of a key and shall not require a key to open it from within the machine room. "Dorma" TS 73 or "Tiki" 90 series or "NHN" model 1082 or "New Star" 5002 or "Accord" 93 or "YTL" 800 or "Union" or other approved slim line door closer with cushioned back checking action.
(iii)
1no.
16.5
KEYS FOR LOCKSETS Unless otherwise specified, 3 sets of keys shall be provided for all locksets provided and installed. These keys shall be handed over to the Employer upon Substantial Completion of the Works.
16.6
LOCKSETS TO PUMP ROOM, STORE ROOM (FIRST STOREY), BULKY REFUSE AREA, REFUSE ROOM, ELECTRICAL SWITCH ROOM, LIFT MOTOR ROOM, STAIRCASE ACCESS TO MAIN ROOF AND SIDE DOOR OF CENTRALISED CHUTE CHAMBER The locksets to pump rooms, store rooms, bulky refuse areas, refuse rooms, electrical switch rooms, lift motor rooms, staircase accesses to main roofs and side doors of centralised chute chambers shall be provided under the master key and key-aliked system.
16.7
MASTER KEY Padlocks and locks provided to the doors of all rooms which the PUB and/or PowerGrid and/or SPSL need access into shall be under one of the following master key series : (a) (b) (c) "Abloy" "Union" "Yale" MK911047; or G1HBG; or MK48; or other approved
SECTION 17/...
Ugdg Spec TS 17-1/7
SECTION 17
17.0
STRUCTURAL STEELWORK
17.1
STRUCTURAL STEEL Grade 43A Steel (Mild Steel) to BS EN 10025, BS EN 10113 and BS EN 10210 (Part 1) shall be used for all structural members unless otherwise stated. The dimensions, form, thickness, weight and tolerance of all rolled shape, the quality and strength of all members, joint connections, bolts, nuts, washers, studs, welds and electrodes used and their design, installation and applications shall conform to the requirements of the latest BS 5950 or other relevant British and/or Singapore Standards. Unless indicated otherwise in the Drawings, hot finished structural steel sections shall be used. All materials used shall be new, of best quality available and shall be approved by the SO Rep. Defective, substandard or undersized members shall be rejected.
17.2
QUALIFICATION OF WELDERS Only qualified welders shall be allowed to perform welding work for structural steelworks. Provide the SO Rep with the names of the welders to be employed on the steelwork, together with certification that each of these welders has passed qualification tests conducted by competent authorities using Welder Procedures covered in BS 4871 or their equivalent. Welders shall have passed the qualification test within the preceding 12-month period. If required by the SO Rep, submit test samples made by the welders to be employed. Arrange for any welder to re-take the test at the Contractor's own costs and expenses when, in the opinion of the SO Rep, the work of the welder creates a reasonable doubt as to the proficiency of the welder. Re-certification of the welder shall be made to the SO Rep only after the welder has taken and passed the required test. The SO Rep may require welded joints to be tested with radiographic or other suitable methods at the Contractor's costs and expenses. Joints with defective welds shall be rejected. Should any two weld positions from the work of any welder show defective welds, such welder shall be permanently removed from the work.
17.3
SHOP DRAWINGS Submit shop drawings duly prepared by a Professional Engineer and approved by the SO Rep. Such approval, however, shall not release the Contractor of the responsibility for furnishing accurate details and satisfactory work in accordance with the drawings. The shop drawings shall provide all shop and erection details including cuts, connections, holes and welds in structural steel. The drawings shall show the size, length and type of each member and weld, details for accessories, temporary bracing, miscellaneous structural steelworks, details of fabrication, construction and method of assembly. Once approved, the structural steelwork shall be fabricated strictly in accordance with the shop drawings.
17.4
FABRICATION Check all dimensions in the drawings before fabrication and any discrepancy shall be reported to the SO Rep. Steelwork shall be fabricated to the required details as shown in the drawings with sound workmanship acceptable by the SO Rep. All steel members shall be cut to exact lengths and with ends finished true and square so as to provide a good bed or joint.
Ugdg Spec TS 17-2/7
17.4
FABRICATION (CONT'D) Structural steelwork shall be fabricated and assembled in the shop to the greatest extent possible and shall be performed by qualified mechanics or welders skilled in the type of work required. Shearing, chipping, punching and welding of members shall be done carefully and accurately in accordance with the drawings. All burrs and shavings produced by the drilling or reaming operation shall be removed. Stiffeners shall be fitted neatly and tightly against flanges with ends milled or ground to secure an even and full bearing against the flange angles. Sole plates of beams and girders shall have full contact with the flanges. Bearing surface shall be planed to true bed and abutting surfaces be closely fitted to ensure full bearing and close contact between assembled members. Unless otherwise indicated, all exposed finished surfaces shall be straight and smooth. Exposed welds shall be ground smooth and flush with adjacent surfaces. All holes shall be accurately marked off from templates, precisely cut, drilled or punched at right angles to the surface of the metal and shall not be made or enlarged by burning. Holes shall be cleaned of burrs or rough edges. Holes for bolts shall not exceed the external diameter of bolts by more than 1.5mm and shall be well aligned to permit bolts to be freely placed in position. Oversized or misaligned bolt holes shall be rejected.
17.5
STEELWORK DELIVERED TO SITE Members delivered to site shall be straight, free from warping, twisting, distortion and accidental damages. Defective and substandard members shall be rejected and removed from site. All parts of steelwork shall be distinctly marked according to the marking as shown in the drawings. Care shall be taken at all times in unloading, handling, stacking and storing of steelwork to avoid bending, twisting or otherwise distorting the steel members.
17.6
ERECTION PROCEDURE The method and sequence of erection of structural steelwork shall be duly approved by the SO Rep. The presence of any temporary materials, falsework, braces, etc, required to ensure stability and safety of structures shall be included in the proposed erection and shall be subsequently provided during erection.
17.7
FIELD INSTALLATION Field installation shall be in accordance with the drawings. Shop fabricated members subjected to possible damage shall be braced and carefully handled to prevent distortions or other damages. After assembly, the various members forming parts of a complete frame or structure shall be aligned and adjusted accurately before being fastened. Splicing of members shall be permitted only where indicated in the drawings. Fastening of splices of compression members shall be done after the abutting surfaces have been brought completely into close contact. Bearing surfaces and surfaces that will be in permanent contact shall be cleaned before the members are assembled and re-primed where exposed. Drift pins may be used only to bring together the structural parts and shall not be used in such a manner as to distort or damage the metal.
Ugdg Spec TS 17-3/7
17.7
FIELD INSTALLATION (CONT'D) Member installed before concrete is placed shall be properly braced to prevent distortion by pressure of concrete. Bracing shall be checked and maintained during concreting operation. The use of gas-cutting torch in the field for correcting fabrication errors will be strictly prohibited under any circumstance.
17.8
ERECTION Provide for all tools, machinery, cranage, equipment, falsework, temporary braces and everything necessary for the proper erection of the steelwork. Erection equipment shall be suitable and safe for the work and the workers. Assembled frames or structures shall be neatly and carefully hoisted into position, securely and sufficiently bolted or tack-welded and temporarily braced as required so as to make adequate provision for all erection stresses and conditions including those due to erection equipment and its operation. Bracing members, either temporary or permanent, shall be provided as required as soon as practicable and left in place as long as they are required for safety and stability. No member of the structure shall be finally bolted, welded or permanently connected until the whole or a major section of the steelwork is erected, checked for alignment, level, plumb and correctness and approved by the SO Rep. Permanent connection shall be carried out and completed strictly in accordance with the drawings as soon as practicable after the approval of the SO Rep, with due care being taken not to interfere with the existing steelwork in any way. Safe working platform and accesses shall be provided for erection, welding, bolting and inspection purposes. The HDB's Safety Unit shall be consulted on the safety features of the platform. Care shall be taken to remove any temporary braces, erection clips, etc to avoid any unsightliness upon removal. All tack welds shall be ground smooth and holes shall be filled with weld metal and smoothened by grinding. All tubular members shall be sealed with cover plate to prevent access of moisture to the inside of the members. Immediately upon erection, all abraded surfaces previously shop-primed shall be touched up with approved priming paint. Erection of roofing materials, if any, can only be proceeded when all steelwork for a block is completed and sag rod, if any, is effectively installed in purlins and rigidly tied back to the apex of the roof.
17.9
STANCHION BASES Stanchion bases and bearing plates as provided under columns, beams and girders or resting walls or footing shall be fabricated, installed and set accurately to the required level alignment with full bearing contact on support in accordance with the drawings. Hold down bolts shall be cast together with reinforced concrete support. They shall be correctly placed and firmly held in position by template and accurately checked for level, alignment and centering before concreting. The bolts shall be protected to ensure that they are not subsequently bent, distorted or tampered with. Base plates and bearing plates shall be supported and aligned on levelling screws, steel wedges or shims to correct elevations. After the supporting members have been plumbed and properly positioned and the anchor nuts tightened, the entire bearing area under the plates shall be set accurately using approved type of high-strength non-shrink grout in accordance with Manufacturer's instructions. Surface to receive grout shall be cleaned and moistened thoroughly immediately before grout is placed. Exposed surfaces of grout shall be moist cured for 7 days. Wedges and shims shall be cut-off, flush with edge of column base and bearing plates and shall be left in place.
Ugdg Spec TS 17-4/7 17.10 BOLTING All structural bolts as shown in the drawings prefixed with the letter 'M' for metric series shall conform with the following British Standards : Type of Bolt Black Bolt High Strength Bolt High Strength Friction Grip Bolt Abbreviations Black HS HSFG Standards BS 4190 BS 3692 BS 4604
Nuts and washers of the quality and strength compatible to the type of bolts specified shall be used. All joint surfaces, including those adjacent to the bolt heads, nuts or washers, shall be free of scale, dust, grease, paint and other foreign material that would prevent solid seating of the members. All HSFG Bolts shall be installed strictly in accordance with the Manufacturer's instructions. All bolts shall be well screwed tight with at least one clear thread projecting beyond the nut when tightened up. Care shall be taken in getting the nut as tight as possible without stripping the thread. If after tightening, a nut or bolt is slackened off for any reason, the bolt, nut and washer shall be discarded. Where another face of the bolted parts has a slope, a smooth bevelled washer shall be used to compensate for lack of parallelism. Bolts and nuts in a group of bolts shall be tightened in a staggered sequence from center outwards. Bolted parts shall fit solidly together when assembled and shall not be separated by gaskets or any interposed compressible material. 17.11 WELDING Welding shall be done by an electric arc process complying with BS 5135 and by qualified welders to the satisfaction of the SO Rep. Welding shall be done in the shop unless otherwise shown or specified. Electrodes shall be of approved type complying with BS 639 and shall be kept in a dry store in unbroken packets. Surface and edge of metal to be welded shall be accurately prepared in accordance with BS 5135 and shall be free from loose scale, slag, rust, grease, paint and any other foreign material that would prevent proper welding or produce objectional fumes while welding is being done. All welding shall be carried out in accordance with the welding term and symbols shown in the drawings and conform with BS 499. For unspecified welding, butt weld shall be full penetration weld with size equal to the thickness of the members to be butt joined and fillet weld shall be 6mm fillet weld all around the member. Parts to be fillet welded shall be brought in as close contact as practicable. The effective throat thickness of fillet weld shall not be less than those specified in the drawings and all weld terminating at the ends or sides of members shall be returned continuously around the corners for a distance of not less than twice the size of the weld. Butt weld shall have correct weld preparation for the particular type of weld. The finished butt weld shall be proud of the surface of the parent material by an amount not exceeding 10% of the throat thickness of the weld and subsequently dressed off by grinding. Fillet and butt welds shall be made with such a number of passes as may be necessary to ensure sound thoroughly fused joints and with each deposit not exceeding 3mm of weld for each pass. Preceding layers shall be thoroughly cleaned, wire-brushed to remove scale, slag before succeeding layers are placed. Welds exposed in finished work shall be ground, dressed smooth and flush with adjacent surface. Welding work shall be carried out on a flat position whenever practicable. In assembling and jointing parts of a structure, the procedure and sequence of welding shall be such as to minimize shrinkage stresses and needless distortion.
Ugdg Spec TS 17-5/7
17.12
PAINTING All steel area to be painted shall be thoroughly cleaned, scraped, wire-brushed, free from dust, rust and scale and shall be primed with a coat of approved lead-and-chromate-free primer or zinc chromate of approved quality before erection. All galvanised steel area to be painted shall first be given one coat of polyvinyl butyral etching primer, then primed with one coat of lead-and-chromate-free primer of approved quality before erection. Where surface treatment is specified in the Drawings, blast clean the surface to BS4232, application of one coat of zinc-rich epoxy primer to the Manufacturer's specification within 4 hours of blast cleaning and two coats of Zinc Phosphate Priming Paint, one coat in Workshop and one coat on site, to the satisfaction of the SO Rep. Submit details of surface treatment to the SO Rep at least two weeks before blast cleaning. Steel members to be encased in concrete, connecting surfaces using HSFG Bolts and areas to be welded shall be free from scale, dust, grease and shall not be painted. If the steelworks are to be painted, after completion of erection, the steelwork shall be painted with at least one undercoat of enamel paint and one finishing coat of enamel paint and to the colours approved by the SO Rep.
17.13
PROTECTION OF STRUCTURAL STEEL MEMBERS Galvanised structural steel members and components as shown in the Drawings shall be hot-dip galvanised to SS 117. The Contractor shall obtain galvanising treatment service for structural steel members and components only from those Approved Galvanisers Listed in HDB List of Approved Materials And Suppliers. The coating weight of zinc shall confirm with Table 1 of SS 117. For steel over 5mm thick, the minimum 2 2 average coating mass shall be 500g per m and the minimum coating mass shall be 450g per m . For steel between 1mm and 5mm thick, the coating shall be pro-rated from Table 1. The coating shall be continuous, smooth and free from flux stains. If the coating on the galvanised steel member does not comply with the requirements as specified, the galvanised steel member shall be rejected. Galvanising shall be followed by chromating as a post treatment. Store all galvanised members and components in a dry and well ventilated place to prevent the formation of white rust on them. Small areas of galvanised coating damaged by welding, cutting or by excessively rough treatment shall be made good by the application of at least two coats of good quality zinc-rich paint with a minimum of 85% zinc dust, expressed as a percentage by weight of the solid content of the paint. Upon the instruction of the SO Rep, the Contractor shall send at least two samples of the galvanised steel member or component to be tested by a competent authority to determine the coating weight. The coating weight shall be determined by the stripping test in accordance with SS 117. Certificates of such tests shall be submitted to the SO Rep. All required tests of structural steelworks and material shall be carried out by an accredited laboratory under the Singapore laboratory Accredited Scheme of Singapore Accreditation Council.
17.14
INSPECTION & TESTING All structural steelworks and materials are subjected to inspection and testing by the SO Rep in shop and field. The number and frequency of tests shall be determined by the SO Rep and at least 10% of the welded joints shall be tested. However, such test and inspection shall not relieve the Contractor of his responsibility for furnishing satisfactory materials and work. The SO Rep reserves the right to reject steel materials and/or workmanship which do not conform with the specifications. The acceptance of the SO Rep of any materials and work shall not prevent their rejection later if Defects are discovered. The Contractor shall provide adequate facilities and bear all costs and expenses of everything necessary for the SO Rep to inspect and test any part of the steelwork and measurement of stresses and deflection, if required.
Ugdg Spec TS 17-6/7
17.14
INSPECTION & TESTING (CONTD) Any work shown to be defective shall be removed or rectified to the satisfaction of the SO Rep at the Contractor's own costs and expenses. Notwithstanding the acceptance by the SO Rep of the rectified work, the Contractor shall be held responsible for the soundness of the structure arising out of poor workmanship and defective work. The testing and inspection of welding shall conform to the following British standards : Type of Test Magnetic particle flaw detection test Penetrant flaw detection test Ultrasonic examinations Radiographic examinations Standard BS 6072 BS 6443 BS 3923 BS 2600, BS2910
All required tests of structural steelworks and material shall be carried out by an accredited laboratory under the Singapore laboratory Accredited Scheme of Singapore Accreditation Council.
17.15
STRUCTURAL STEEL DESIGN Where the Contractor is required to design for the structural steel Works, the contractor shall engage a Professional Engineer (PE) to design and supervise such Works. The Contractor shall ensure that his PE engaged consider and comply with the plan submission and minimum design requirements.
17.15.1
Plan Submission The contractor shall ensure his PE comply with the following : (a) submit a complete design calculations and structural plans of his PE to HDB, Technical Management (C&S) Unit for clearance. apply the permit to carry out Works prior to commencement of the affected Works. Upon completion of the building work, submit a set of as-built tracing and digital in pdf or other approved format.
(b) (c)
17.15.2
Technical Requirements Should any external claddings/features inclusive of those at and above roof level be supported by the main building structures, the submission shall be accompanied with a letter from the relevant Qualified Person (QP) of the main building structures that certify adequacy of the the building structures to support external claddings/features designed by the contractor's PE. In addition to comply with the required building code and standard, the design for all steel works shall meet the following minimum requirements : (a) (b) (c) the gauge thickness of purlins shall not be less than 3mm. the gauge thickness of steel members shall be 4mm for steel structures at lower than 4 -storey. the gauge thickness of steel members shall be 6mm or greater for steel structures at 4-strorey and higher.
Ugdg Spec TS 17-7/7
17.15.2
Technical Requirements (Contd) (d) Hold down bolts, anchor bolts, nuts and washers shall be hot-dipped galvanised, electroplated or of stainless steel grade 316 satisfying acceptable standard and code of practice. Use open steel section, wherever possible, to facilitate direct connection of cladding, roofing sheet and other architectural panels onto this steel section. Should the steel hollow section be used, there shall be no drilling through it for connection of cladding, roofing sheet and other architectural panels. Necessary steel connecting plates or cleat angles shall be used and welded up to steel hollow sections for securing the cladding, roofing sheet and other metal panels.
(e)
(f)
SECTION 18/...
SECTION 18
18.0
METALWORK
18.1
GRADE OF STAINLESS STEEL Unless as specified otherwise, the grade of stainless steel shall be Grade 304.
18.2
BRONZE ANODISED ALUMINIUM Unless specified otherwise all aluminium shall be bronze anodised and the anodic coating shall be minimum 15 microns.
18.3
BRONZE ANODISED EXTRUDED ALUMINIUM FRAMED WINDOWS AND GLAZING
18.3.1
General Provide and fix bronze anodised extruded aluminium framed windows and glazing complete with all the relevant components to the locations as shown in the Drawings. Such extruded aluminium frame windows shall include sliding, casement, top hung, aluminium cills and others as shown in the Drawings. Unless otherwise specified, all aluminium sliding and casement windows provided shall comply in all aspects with SS 212:2000 (but excluding the modularly co-ordinating sizes). The manufacturer/supplier of the aluminium sliding windows and casement windows shall be under PSB Singapore Quality Mark Scheme or PSB Product Listing Scheme Class 1A.
18.3.2
Performance The details shown in the Drawings shall serve as a guide only. The Contractor shall submit shop drawings to ensure compliance with SS212: 2000.
18.3.3
Material (a) Aluminium Alloy All extruded aluminium members shall be fabricated from designated treated aluminium alloy 6063T4, 6063T5 or 6063T6 complying with SS 212. (b) Accessories All screws, nuts, bolts, rivets, washers, fasteners and all other accessories to be used in the fabrication of the windows shall be stainless steel type 304 or 316 complying with BS 1449: Part 2. All screws (except screws used to fix stainless steel steel hinges), bolts and other accessories which are exposed shall be in approved matching colour. All screws used to fix stainless steel screws shall be precoated with epoxy coating as shown in the Drawing.
18.3.3
Material (Cont'd) (c) Rollers, Guides And Stoppers Rollers used shall be made of hardened synthetic resin with ball bearing at their cores. Guides and stoppers shall also be of synthetic resin material and exposed parts shall be in black colour or bronze colour or other approved matching colour. (d) Joints & Gaskets All joints shall be sealed with synthetic butyl rubber and all inner frames shall have insertion of PVC gaskets or other air gaskets or other air-tightening materials complying with SS 212 : 2000 . Gaskets shall be neoprene or polypropylene pile or ethylene propylene diene monomer (EPDM). (e) Safety Device Safety device shall be incorporated into all the glazed sliding window panels to prevent them from jumping track and shall be in black colour or bronze colour or other approved matching colour. (f) Weather Strip All weather strip shall be of approved neoprene, polypropylene pile or ethylene propylene diene monomer (EPDM). (g) Hardware For sliding windows, crescent lock shall be provided and shall be of stainless steel type 304 or 316, aluminium die cast or zinc die cast with double locking device. For casement and top hung windows, the cam handles shall be of aluminium or zinc die cast. Friction hinges shall be of Grade 304 stainless steel. All crescent locks and handles shall be finished in black or other approved matching colour. (i) Torque Testing Requirement For Crescent Lock The crescent locks shall comply with the following torque requirements : (a) (b) (ii) Average torque shall achieve a minimum value of 7 Nm; Individual torque shall not fall below 6.5 Nm.
Resistance To Wear Test Requirements For Casement Handles The casement handles when tested in accordance with BS 6462 clause 5.2.3 thereof shall comply with the following requirements : (a) Cam handle in fully engaged position after 35N was removed. Requirement : pull-in shall not be reduced to less than 0.2mm. Torque to turn the Fastener Handle to the fully engaged position. Requirement : The operating torque when measured shall not exceed 5 NM.
(b)
18.3.4
Finishes The aluminium shall be finished by one of the following : (a) (b) Anodic coating to 25 microns minimum complying with BS 3987. Combined coating to comply with JIS H8602, except the minimum thickness of coating shall be 9 microns for the anodic coat and 7 microns for the liquid organic coat. The actual appearance of the finish shall be assessed by reference to samples to be agreed upon between the Contractor and the SO Rep and thereafter maintained within agreed limits.
18.3.5
Temporary Protection And Prevention Of Damage All bronze anodised extruded aluminium windows shall not be allowed to rub or slide against each other and significant surfaces shall be well protected during transportation. They shall be wrapped with stout papers, cardboard or other protective media which shall not be allowed to get damp. The materials to be used for protection shall be in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions and recommendations.
18.3.6
Storage And Protection Ensure and provide proper and safe storage for all materials delivered to the Site and the continued proper condition of installed windows at the Site until such time the building is handed over to the Employer.
18.3.7
Installation (a) Design and Profile of Aluminium Sections The design and profile of all the anodised aluminium sliding windows, casement windows and top hung shall be as shown in the Drawings. Complete samples of windows shall be installed at the Site for approval by the SO Rep. (b) Detailing All windows and other aluminium items shall be fixed strictly to the manufacturers instructions. Any clearance spaces between the window work size and the work surrounding the window shall be sealed with an approved sealant when fixing is completed. Safety devices shall be provided to prevent window sashes from being inadvertently forced out from the frame during and after installation. For sliding windows, allow for the provision of a safety lock device or stopper, made of 6-nylon or high density polyethylene or other approved material (2 no. per sash), to be securely housed into the top rail of head section to perform this function. (c) Cement Mortar Infill The size of the openings surrounding the window shall be checked prior to installation of window frame. Any deviation exceeding the allowable tolerances shall be corrected before installation of window frame. Gap between the window and the adjacent structural member or in-fill non-structural wall shall be filled with pre-packed cement mortar. The mortar shall be of the right consistency. Approved backing piece formwork and tool shall be used to ensure that the mortar infill is properly compacted and grooves are provided for application of approved sealant (d) Application of Sealant Provide and apply approved sealant to the external periphery of the aluminium framed windows as shown in the Drawings and ensure that all joints are sealed water tight and finished to a neat flush joint with the window frame. The application of sealant shall comply with the manufacturer's guides and instructions. All sealant applicators shall possess a minimum of one year working experience on sealing works endorsed by the sealant suppliers in the HDB List of Products And Suppliers. A list of these workers shall be submitted to the SO Rep for pre-screening and approval before they are allowed to commence work They are also required to wear identity pass to prove that they are approved sealant applicators. Before sealing the joints, the surfaces shall be clean and free of all mortar dust or other contaminants that may affect adhesion
18.3.8
Glazing (a) Glass All glazing panel of aluminium sliding window, top hung and casement window shall be fixed to the aluminium frames in the factory as a complete system before delivery to the Site. All glass shall bear the label of its manufacturer and shall be relatively distortion-free. Where shown in the Drawings, all tinted glass shall be 5mm 0.3mm green gray/gray tinted float glass with a shading coefficient of 0.75. Glazing to adjustable louvre window between kitchen and service balcony/courtyard shall be 6mm 0.3 mm clear float glass. Glazing panel to vent of bath/w.c. shall be obscured wired glass of thickness 6mm 0.3mm. (b) Glazing Accessories All glazing accessories shall be new, first quality of their respective kinds and subject to the approval of the SO Rep. (c) Protection Use all means necessary to protect glass and glazing materials before, during and after installation. (d) Replacements In the event of damage, immediately carry out all repairs and replacements necessary to the approval of the SO Rep and at the Contractor's own costs and expenses. (e) Fixing Set all glass in a true plane, tight and straight, with proper and adequate clearance, firmly anchored to prevent rattling and looseness, with all edges cleanly cut; do not nip or seam the edges. (f) Cleaning Up Upon completion of glazing, thoroughly clean all glass surfaces, correct all imperfections and replace all damaged glass.
18.4
BRONZE ANODISED ALUMINIUM FRAMED ADJUSTABLE LOUVRE WINDOWS WITH POLYPROPYLENE GLASS HOLDERS/BLADE CLIPS General Provide and fix bronze anodised extruded aluminium framed adjustable louvre window and glazing complete with polypropylene glass holders/blade clips and all the relevant components to the locations as shown in the Drawings.
18.4.1
18.4.2
Performance Adjustable louvre window shall meet the following performance requirements : (a) Unlocking Test (SS 215:1979) (i) Before Accelerated Wear Test The unlocking force on the hand lever of the adjustable louvre window shall not be less than 30N and not more than 70N. (ii) After Accelerated Wear Test The unlocking force on the hand lever of the adjustable louvre window shall not be less than 5N.
18.4.2
Performance (Cont'd) (b) Accelerated Wear Test (SS 215:1979) After the testing, the window mechanism shall show no sign of buckling, warping, jamming, wear and crack which could impair the effective operation of the window and the mechanism can still be operated and locked in the closed position. (c) Weathering In Laboratory Apparatus (DIN EN ISO 4892-2) Where polypropylene glass holders/blade clips to aluminium framed adjustable louver windows are included in the Works, the polypropylene clips shall show no visual change after 750 hours when tested in accordance with the Weathering In Laboratory Apparatus (DIN EN ISO 4892-2) (d) Salt Spray Test (ASTM B117 - 90) Moderate amount of black patches and white deposits on the control mechanism after 750 hours.
18.4.3
Material (a) Aluminium Alloy All aluminium structural members shall be made of aluminium alloy 6063TF, 6063TE or 6063T5 complying with BS EN 573,BS EN755 and BS EN 12020. (b) Accessories All screws, nuts, bolts, rivets, washers, fasteners and all other accessories to be used in the fabrication of the windows shall be made from aluminium, non-magnetic stainless steel, mild steel treated to give corrosion resistant properties complying with SS212:1988. All screws, bolts and other accessories which are exposed shall be of approved matching colour. (c) Glass Holders/Blade Clips Glass holders/blade clips shall be injection moulded from ultra-violet radiation stabilised polypropylene of Shell HMA 6100 + Pentax uVS LDR 3%; or other approved. The colour of the holders/clips shall be black and shall be matt finish. The glass holders/blade clips shall be designed such as to readily accept 152mm wide and 6mm thick blades. The holders shall be designed to hold the glass firmly without the use of putty and in such a manner as to prevent the removal of the glass from the outside of the closed window. The glass holders/blade clips and drive mechanism shall be of a one piece moulding. (d) Mullion The mullion shall contain an enclosed slot to accept the control handle. (e) Control Mechanism Control mechanism shall be produced from stainless steel grade 304 or aluminium. The control mechanism shall be designed such as to provide a positive snap lock and that all components shall be easily replaced in case of failure. (f) Control Handle And Cap The control handle shall be produced from 6063 T5 grade aluminium of a minimum thickness of 2.5mm. The control handle shall be encapsulated by an injection moulded protective cap complete with an easy to operate tab. The control handle and cap when in the closed position shall be flushed with the outer frame. The control handle shall be powder-coated finished and in approved matching colour. (g) Fixing Fixing screws shall be concealed when the louvre blade clips are in the fully closed position. (h) Joints And Gaskets All joints shall be sealed with synthetic butyl rubber.
18.4.3
Material (Contd) (i) Weather Strip All weather strip shall be of approved neoprene, polypropylene pile or plasticized PVC. (j) Burglar Bars Stainless steel burglar bars as shown in the Drawings for vents in bath and/or wc.
18.4.4
Finishes The aluminium shall be finished by one of the following : (a) (b) Anodic coating to 25 microns minimum complying with BS 3987. Combined coating to comply with BS 4842, except the minimum thickness of coating shall be 9 microns for the anodic coat and 7 microns for the liquid organic coat. The actual appearance of the finish shall be assessed by reference to samples to be agreed upon between the Contractor and the SO Rep and thereafter maintained within agreed limits.
18.4.5
Temporary Protection And Prevention Of Damage All bronze anodised aluminium adjustable louvre windows shall not be allowed to rub or slide against each other and significant surfaces shall be well protected during transportation. They shall be wrapped with stout papers, cardboard or other protective media which shall not be allowed to get damp. The materials to be used for protection shall be in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions and recommendations.
18.4.6
Storage & Protection Ensure and provide proper and safe storage for all materials delivered to the Site and the continued proper condition of installed windows at the Site until such time the building is handed over to the Employer.
18.4.7
Installation (a) Design And Profile Of Aluminium Sections The design and profile of the bronze anodised aluminium framed adjustable louvre windows shall be similar to those as shown in the Drawings. Complete samples of windows shall be installed at the Site for approval by the SO Rep. (b) Detailing All windows and other aluminium items shall be fixed strictly to the manufacturer's instructions. Any clearance spaces between the window work size and the work surrounding the window shall be sealed with an approved waterproof mastic when fixing is completed. (c) Application of Sealant Provide and apply approved sealant to the external periphery of the aluminium framed windows and ensure that all joints are sealed water tight and finished to a neat flush joint with the window frame. The application of approved sealant shall comply with the manufacturer's guides and instructions. All sealant applicators shall possess a minimum of one year working experience on sealing works endorsed by the sealant suppliers in the HDB List of Approved Materials And Suppliers. A list of these workers shall be submitted to the SO Rep for pre-screening and approval before they are allowed to commence work They are also required to wear identity pass to prove that they are approved sealant applicators. Before sealing the joints, the surfaces shall be clean and free of all mortar dust or other contaminants that may affect adhesion.
18.4.8
Glazing (a) Glass Unless otherwise specified, glazing panel of adjustable louvre windows shall be 6mm 0.3mm green gray/gray tinted float glass with a shading coefficient of 0.75. Glazing panel to adjustable louvre windows between kitchen and service balcony/courtyard shall be 6mm 0.3mm clear float glass. (b) Glazing Accessories All glazing accessories shall be new, first quality of their respective kinds and subject to the approval of the SO Rep. (c) Protection Use all means necessary to protect glass and glazing materials before, during and after installation. (d) Replacements In the event of damage, immediately carry out all repairs and replacements necessary to the approval of the SO Rep and at the Contractor's own costs and expenses. (e) Fixing Set all glass in a true plane, tight and straight, with proper and adequate clearance, firmly anchored to prevent rattling and looseness, with all edges cleanly cut; do not nip or seam the edges. (f) Cleaning Up Upon completion of glazing, thoroughly clean all glass surfaces, correct all imperfections and replace all damaged glass.
18.5
BRONZE ANODISED EXTRUDED ALUMINIUM SLIDING DOORS Where specified, provide and fix bronze anodised extruded aluminium sliding doors complete with all the relevant components to the locations as shown in the Drawings. Unless otherwise specified, bronze anodised extruded aluminium sliding doors shall be in accordance with SS 268:1983 and its latest amendments.
18.5.1
Main Material All aluminium alloy doors shall be made to BS EN 573, BS EN 755 and BS EN 12020 or ASTM B221.
18.5.2
Surface Finish The exposed surface of aluminium doors shall be treated to comply with BS 3987 to provide an anodic coating of 25 microns.
18.5.3
Fastenings And Fixings All screws, nuts, bolts, rivets, washers and other fastenings shall be of stainless steel or aluminium or mild steel which has been treated to give corrosion resistant properties in accordance with SS 268-1983. All screws, rivets and other accessories which are exposed shall be in approved matching colour.
18.5.4
Hardware Hardware such as locksets, guide, roller etc including its fixing shall be in accordance with SS 268:1983. The hardware and fixing shall be of suitable materials resistant to and suitably protected against atmospheric corrosion. If materials or finishes which react adversely with aluminium are used, they shall be separated from the aluminium by materials that do not do so. Hardware shall be replaceable without removing the outer frame from the structure. Locksets and guide shall be in black colour or bronze colour or other approved matching colour. Safety devices shall be provided to prevent the door panels from jumping track and shall be in black colour or bronze colour or other approved matching colour. Unless specified otherwise, the lockset shall be openable by key from the outside and lockable by an open and shut control from the inside. The lockset shall be incorporated into the thickness of the door jamb of the slider and secured by means of stainless steel screws. For sliding door to private balcony not link to the main entrance door, the lockset shall be lockable by an open and shut control from the inside. Lockset shall be finished in black colour or bronze colour or other approved matching colour.
18.5.5
Joint Sealing Materials Joint sealing materials shall be of synthetic butyl rubber or other approved water tightness materials that will not harm adjacent materials or finishes.
18.5.6
Weather Stripping Weather stripping shall be made from materials known not to react with aluminium and such that any shrinkage, warping or adherence to sliding or closing surfaces shall not impair the performance of the door. The strips shall be of approved neoprene or polypropylene pile.
18.5.7
Glazing All glazing panels shall be fixed to the aluminium frames in the factory as a complete system before delivery to the Site. The glazing panel to the door conforming to BS 952 shall be 6mm 0.3mm thick green grey/grey tinted float glass with a shading coefficient of not more than 0.75. Glazing beads, gaskets glass adapters and glazing compounds shall be of plastics or synthetic rubber member or material that do not react with aluminium, aluminium finishes, glass or other glazing materials.
18.5.8
Performance Tests When directed by the SO Rep, the Contractor shall arrange for performance tests as required in SS 268:1983 and the following tests shall be carried out by PSB or PSB accredited laboratory : (a) (b) Roller (bearing device) - accelerated test of minimum 50,000 operations. Anodic coating (25 microns) or composite coating (aluminium 9 microns anodic coating and 7 microns for the liquid organic coating) ) ) ) under copper accelerated acetic acid ) salt spray (CASS) test for 8 hours to ) achieve a rating of 8. ) )
18.5.9
Workshop Drawings Provide two (2) complete sets of workshop drawings showing all the detailing sections, plans and relevant details and accessories to the SO Rep for approval prior to installation. When required, complete samples of doors shall be installed for approval by the SO Rep.
18.5.10
Construction And Installation The aluminium doors shall be installed to the manufacturer's instructions. The manufacturer shall provide instructions as to the manner of assembly of the aluminium doors.
18.5.11
Temporary Protection And Prevention Of Damage All bronze anodised extruded aluminium doors shall not be allowed to rub or slide against each other and significant surfaces shall be well protected during transportation. They shall be wrapped with stout papers, cardboard or other protective media which shall not be allowed to get damp. The material to be used for protection shall be in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions and recommendations.
18.5.12
Cement Mortar Infill Cement mortar infill shall be provided as shown in the Drawings.
18.6
BRONZE ANODISED EXTRUDED ALUMINIUM SWING DOORS Where specified, provide and fix bronze anodised extruded aluminium swing doors complete with all the relevant components to the locations as shown in the Drawings.
18.6.1
Main Material All aluminium alloy doors shall be made to BS EN 573, BS EN 755 and BS EN 12020 or ASTM B221.
18.6.2
Surface Finish The exposed surface of aluminium doors shall be treated and finished by one of the following : (a) (b) Anodic coating to 25 microns minimum complying with BS 3987 Combined coating to comply with BS 4842, except the minimum thickness of coatings shall be 9 microns for the anodic coat and 7 microns for the liquid organic coat.
18.6.3
Fastenings And Fixings All screws, nuts, bolts, rivets, washers and other fastenings shall be of stainless steel or aluminium or mild steel which has been treated to give corrosion resistant properties in accordance with SS268-1983. All screws, rivets and other accessories which are exposed shall be in approved matching colour.
18.6.4
Hardware The hardware and fixing shall be of suitable materials resistant to and suitably protected against atmospheric corrosion. If materials or finishes which react adversely with aluminium are used, they shall be separated from the aluminium by materials that do not do so. Hardware shall be replaceable without removing the outer frame from the structure.
Ugdg Spec TS 18-10/30 18.6.5 Joint Sealing Materials Joint sealing materials shall be of synthetic butyl rubber or other approved water tightness materials that will not harm adjacent materials or finishes. 18.6.6 Weather Stripping Weather stripping shall be made from materials known not to react with aluminium and such that any shrinkage, warping or adherence to sliding or closing surfaces shall not impair the performance of the door. The strips shall be of approved PVC or pile strip. 18.6.7 Glazing All glazing panels shall be fixed to the aluminium frames in the factory as a complete system before delivery to the Site. Unless otherwise specified, the glazing panel to the door conforming to BS 952 shall be 6mm 0.3mm thick green grey/grey tinted float glass with a shading coefficient of not more than 0.75. The glazing panel to swing door between kitchen and service balcony/courtyard shall be 6mm 0.3mm thick clear float glass. Glazing beads, gaskets glass adapters and glazing compounds shall be of plastics or synthetic rubber member or material that do not react with aluminium, aluminium finishes, glass or other glazing materials. 18.6.8 Workshop Drawings Provide two (2) complete sets of workshop drawings showing all the detailing sections, plans and relevant details and accessories to the SO Rep for approval prior to installation. When required, complete samples of doors shall be installed for approval by the SO Rep. 18.6.9 Construction And Installation The aluminium doors shall be installed to the manufacturer's instructions. The manufacturer shall provide instructions as to the manner of assembly of the aluminium doors. 18.6.10 Temporary Protection And Prevention Of Damage All bronze anodised extruded aluminium doors shall not be allowed to rub or slide against each other and significant surfaces shall be well protected during transportation. They shall be wrapped with stout papers, cardboard or other protective media which shall not be allowed to get damp. The material to be used for protection shall be in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions and recommendations. 18.6.11 Cement Mortar Infill Cement mortar infill shall be provided as shown in the Drawings. 18.7 18.8 RESERVED ALUMINIUM ROLLER SHUTTER Provide and install aluminium roller shutters to shop fronts, eating houses and other premises as shown in the Drawings. Aluminium roller shutter shall be of pole operated aluminium slates complete with channel guide, angle bolts, lock, removable mullion roller casing and all other necessary components. For individual shop unit or eating house, same lockset (with master key) shall be provided to all aluminium roller shutters. Slates shall be made from aluminium alloy extruded sections. Thickness of aluminium slates shall be 1.6mm thick (S.W.G. 16) and anodic coating shall be 15 microns minimum. The details shown in the Drawings shall serve as a guide. The Contractor shall submit workshop drawings showing all the detailed sections, plans and relevant details and accessories to the SO Rep for approval prior to installation. When required, a complete sample shall be installed on the Site for approval by the SO Rep.
UPG07/S18.DOC(10) lkk(181206) DPD
18.9
SAFETY FEATURE TO PREVENT FALLING WINDOW LEAF FOR ALUMINIUM CASEMENT AND TOP HUNG WINDOW The Contractor shall incorporate the safety features (patent application no. 9905170-8) to all the new aluminium casement and top hung windows to be in the Works. The safety features shall ensure that the window leaf will not be detached from the outer frame or friction stay accidentally even if all the fasteners at the friction stay fail. The safety feature shall include:
(a)
Incorporation of aluminium rails to the outer frame of the window to allow the friction stay to clip onto the rails in the event of failure of the fasteners. The friction stays shall have features that allowed them to detached from the outer frame to facilitate the replacement of windows leaves. Incorporation of aluminium rails to the inner frame of the window (window leaf) for the arm of the friction stay to slot in between. The friction stay hold onto the rails in the event of failure of the fasteners.
(b)
The Contractor shall submit shop drawings for the aluminium casement and top hung windows incorporating the details of the safety features for the approval of the SO Rep. The Contractor shall fabricate samples of the casement and top hung windows and demonstrate the function of the safety features to the satisfaction of the SO Rep prior to the installation of the windows. The Contractor shall also ensure that their window manufacturer is licensed to use the patented design. Copy of the licensing agreement between the window manufacturer and the vendor shall be submitted to the SO Rep together with the shop drawings. The Contractor is deemed to include the cost of the safety features and the royalty to be paid under the licensing agreement in the Contract Sum.
18.10
BRONZE ANODISED ALUMINIUM FRAME/ACRYLIC PANEL SLIDING/FOLDING DOOR Where specified, provide and install bronze anodised aluminium frame/acrylic panel sliding/folding door as shown in the Drawings. The door shall be complete with integral concealed sliding/folding mechanism and integral locking device. The door shall be able to be slided and folded to one side. No gaps shall be visible between the joint of the panels in the close operation. It shall also be complete with a towel bar/handle and a stopper on the bottom track as shown in the Drawings. Aluminium frame shall be of bronze anodised extruded aluminium finish and the anodic coating shall be 15 microns minimum. Acrylic panel shall be of 3 mm thick acrylic with opaque texture and firmly secured with gasket. All screws, nuts, bolts, washers, fasteners and all accessories used shall be aluminium or stainless steel. All screws and accessories which are exposed shall be finished in approved matching colour. The complete frame, door and ironmongery shall be obtained from approved manufacturers.
18.11
NATURAL ANODISED EXTRUDED ALUMINIUM FRAME AND ALUMINIUM INSPECTION COVER Where shown in the Drawings, provide and install natural anodised extruded aluminium frame and aluminium inspection cover to the refuse chute on the roof top in accordance with the details inclusive with the relevant components. The aluminium cover shall be complete with 1.2mm thick galvanised steel "C" channels frame and infill with rockwool insulation as indicated in the Drawings. The 5mm thick extruded aluminium section and 1.2mm thick aluminium alloy lining shall be of natural anodised to at least 25 microns. The rockwool insulation material shall be of density 150 kg per m (10% tolerance) and thickness of 2 38mm rigid enough to be able to withstand working load of 500 kg per m . The noise reduction coefficient shall be NRC 0.95 within the sound range of 125 Hz to 5000 Hz. Moisture resistance shall not be more than 0.2% by volume. The rockwool shall be non-combustible with fire hazard indices at Class O.
3
When required, complete sample of inspection cover shall be installed on the Site for approval by the SO Rep. All inspection cover and items shall be fixed strictly in accordance with the Manufacturer/Supplier's instructions and recommendations.
UPG07/S18.DOC(11) lkk(181206) DPD
18.12
BRONZE ANODISED EXTRUDED ALUMINIUM LOUVRED VENTS Provide and install bronze anodised extruded aluminium louvred vents together with all necessary components to pump room and other locations as shown in the Drawings. The aluminium louvred blades shall be of 2.3mm thick minimum and shall be of aluminium alloys to BS 1470 or ASTM B209. The aluminium vent including the aluminium louvred blades shall be anodised to a bronze finish and the anodic coating shall be 25 microns.
18.13 18.13.1
LETTER BOXES WITH MASTER DOORS THREE-WAY NATURAL ANODISED ALUMINIUM LETTER BOXES WITH MASTER DOORS Supply and fix three-way natural anodised aluminium letter boxes to locations as shown in the Drawings. These letter boxes shall be obtained from suppliers approved by the SO Rep. The thickness of the aluminium sheet shall be as shown in the Drawings and the thickness tolerance shall be 10%. The anodic coating shall be not less than 25 microns for the extruded aluminium section and not less than 15 microns for the aluminium sheets. Letter boxes shall be provided for each residential unit. A minimum of two additional letter boxes shall be provided for ground floor facilities to each building block as shown in the Drawings. In addition to the two letter boxes, one additional letter box shall be provided for For Returned Mail Only. The location of the For Returned Mail Only letter box shall be as shown in the Drawings. The building block number, road name and postal code shall be engraved on the top frame and at the location as shown in the Drawings. The unit number of the residential unit shall be engraved and painted on the individual letter box aluminium door and on the upturn as shown in the Drawings. The actual block number, unit number, road name and postal code shall be decided by the SO Rep. The phrase "For Returned Mail Only" shall be engraved and painted on the returned mail letter box aluminium door and on the upturn as shown in the Drawings. Submit complete set of workshop drawings for the approval of the SO Rep. The keys for the letter boxes shall be kept in separate envelopes and numbered to correspond with the numbers on the boxes and handed over to the Employer on Substantial Completion of the Works. Three keys shall be provided for each individual letter box. The two master doors shall be provided with different key-aliked locksets approved by the SO Rep. Three master door keys for the Town Council shall be provided for each building block and shall be handed over to the Employer on Substantial Completion of the Works. Three master door keys for Singapore Post shall be provided for each building block and shall be handed over to Singapore Post on Substantial Completion of the Works.
18.13.2
THREE-WAY POWDER COATED ALUMINIUM LETTER BOXES WITH MASTER DOORS
18.13.2.1 General Unless otherwise specified, supply and fix three-way powder coated aluminium letter boxes to locations as shown in the Drawings. These letter boxes shall be obtained from suppliers approved by the SO Rep. The list of approved suppliers is posted at the following websites: kmo.eptc.com.sg or hdbuilders.com. The thickness of the aluminium sheet shall be as shown in the Drawings and the thickness tolerance shall be 10%. Letter boxes shall be provided for each residential unit. A minimum of two additional letter boxes shall be provided for ground floor facilities to each building block as shown in the Drawings. In addition to the two letter boxes, one additional letter box shall be provided for For Returned Mail Only. The location of the For Returned Mail Only letter box shall be as shown in the Drawings.
UPG07/S18.DOC(12) lkk(181206) DPD
18.13.2.1 General (Cont'd) The building block number, road name and postal code shall be engraved on the top frame and at the location as shown in the Drawings. The unit number of the residential unit shall be engraved and painted on the individual letter box aluminium door and on the upturn as shown in the Drawings. The actual block number, unit number, road name and postal code shall be decided by the SO Rep. The phrase For Returned Mail Only shall be engraved and painted on the returned mail letter box aluminium door and on the upturn as shown in the Drawings. The keys for the letter boxes shall be kept in separate envelopes and numbered to correspond with the numbers on the boxes and handed over to the Employer on Substantial Completion of the Works. The envelopes for the keys shall be obtained from the Employer. Three keys shall be provided for each individual letter box. The two master doors shall be provided with different key aliked locksets approved by the SO Rep. Three master door keys for the Town Council shall be provided for each building block and shall be handed over to the Employer on Substantial Completion of the Works. Three master door keys for Singapore Post shall be provided for each building block and shall be handed over to Singapore Post on Substantial Completion of the Works.
18.13.2.2 Workshop Drawings Submit complete set of workshop drawings and colour range for the approval of the SO Rep.
18.13.2.3 Polyester Powder Coating The aluminium shall be finished with polyester powder coating. The polyester powder coating shall be super-durable architectural powder coating "Oxyplast APR" or "Tiger Drylac U Series 58" or other approved. The powder coating shall comply with all the requirements as specified in these clause and subclause. Unless otherwise specified, all test procedures shall be in accordance with AAMA 2604-98 "Voluntary Specifications, Performance Requirements and Test Procedures for High Performance Organic Coatings on Aluminium Extrusions And Panels". The powder coating shall be applied by approved applicator. The powder and powder coating applicator shall be certified under PSB Product Listing Scheme Class 1A. (A) General Requirements (i) Surfaces Coatings shall be visibly free from flow lines, streaks, blisters or other surface imperfections in the dry film state on the exposed surfaces when observed at a distance of ten (10) feet (120 inches) from the metal surface and inspected at an angle of 90 degrees to the surface. (ii) Thickness The total dry film thickness on each significant surface of the coating on each piece shall be 60m 100m. (iii) Minor Scratches And Blemishes Minor scratches and blemishes shall be repairable with the coating manufacturer's recommended product or system. Such repair shall match the original finish when tested as outlined in the subclause "Dry Adhesion" specified hereunder. After application, allow the repair coating to dry for at least 72 hours at 65-80 degrees F before conducting the film adhesion test. The size and number of touch-up repairs shall be kept to a minimum. (B) Test Specimens Test specimens shall consist of finished panels or extrusions representative of the production coated aluminium. A sufficient number of specimens on which to conduct instrument measurements with flat coated surfaces of at least 6" long and 3" wide, shall be submitted to the test laboratory.
UPG07/S18.DOC(13) lkk(181206) DPD
18.13.2.3 Polyester Powder Coating (Cont'd) (C) Metal Preparation And Pre-Treatment A multi-stage cleaning and pre-treatment system shall be required to remove organic and inorganic surface soils, remove residual oxides, and to apply a chemical conversion coating to which organic coatings will firmly adhere. The products used to form the chemical conversion coating on aluminium extrusions and panelling shall conform with ASTM D 1730, Type B, Method 5 or Method 7. The coating weight of the chemical conversion coating shall be a minimum of 30 mg. per sq. ft. on the exposed surfaces as specified in ASTM B 449, Section 6, Class 1. Processing shall conform with that specified in ASTM B 449, Section 5. (D) Colour Uniformity Colour uniformity shall be consistent with the colour range as established between the approved source and the applicator. (E) Specular Gloss Gloss values shall be within 5 units of the manufacturer's specification. The Standard gloss range reference values are : Gloss Colours High Medium Low (F) Dry Film Hardness No rupture of film per ASTM D 3363. (G) Film Adhesion (i) Dry Adhesion No removal of film under the tape within or outside of the cross hatched area or blistering anywhere on the test specimen. (ii) Wet Adhesion No removal of film under the tape within or outside of the cross hatched area or blistering anywhere on the wet test specimen. (iii) Boiling Water Adhesion No removal of film under the tape within or outside of the cross hatched area or blistering anywhere on the wet test specimen. (H) Impact Resistance No removal of film to substrate. (I) Abrasion Resistance Using the failing sand test method ASTM D 968, the Abrasion Coefficient Value of the coating shall be 40 minimum. Specular Gloss Value 80 - Over 20 - 79 19 or less
UPG07/S18.DOC(14) lkk(181206) DPD
18.13.2.3 Polyester Powder Coating (Cont'd) (J) Chemical Resistance (i) Muriatic Acid Resistance (15 Minute Spot Test) No blistering and no visual change in appearance when examined by the unaided eye. (ii) Mortar Resistance (24 Hour Pat Test) Mortar shall dislodge easily from the painted surface, and any residue shall be removable with a damp cloth. Any lime residue should be easily removed with the 10% muriatic acid solution described in the Clause "Muriatic Acid Resistance" of AAMA 2604-98. There shall be no loss of film adhesion or visual change in appearance when examined by the unaided eye. (iii) Nitric Acid Resistance Not more than 5 Delta E Units(Hunter) of colour change, calculated in accordance with ASTM D 2244, when comparing measurements on the acid-exposed painted surface and the unexposed surface. (iv) Detergent Resistance No loss of adhesion of the film to the metal. No blistering and no significant visual change in appearance when examined by the unaided eye. K) Corrosion Resistance (i) Humidity Resistance (For 3,000 Hours At 100 Degrees F And 100% RH With Cabinet Operated In Accordance With ASTM D 2247 or ASTM D 4585) Formation of blisters not to exceed "Few" blisters Size No. 8, as shown in Figure 4, ASTM D 714. (ii) Salt Spray Resistance(3,000 Hours According To ASTM B 117 Using 5% salt solution) Minimum rating of 7 on scribe or cut edges, and a minimum blister rating of 8 within the test specimen field. (L) Weathering The coating shall maintain its film integrity and as a minimum meet the colour retention, chalk resistance, gloss retention and erosion resistance properties specified hereunder. The SO Rep shall request data relative to the long term durability of the colour/colours selected. (i) Test Site And Duration Test sites for on-fence testing are acceptable as follows : Florida exposure South of latitude 27 degrees North at a 45 degree angle facing South for five years. (ii) Colour Retention Maximum of 5 Delta E units (Hunter) Colour change as calculated in accordance with ASTM D 2244-85, Section 6.3 after the exposure test as per foregoing subclause "Test Site and Duration". (iii) Chalk Resistance Chalking shall be no more than that represented by a No. 8 rating based on ASTM D 659 after test site exposure.
UPG07/S18.DOC(15) lkk(181206) DPD
18.13.2.3 (L)
Weathering (Cont'd) (iv) Gloss Retention Gloss retention shall be a minimum of 50% after the exposure test. (v) Resistance To Erosion Less than 10 percent film loss after the exposure test expressed as a percent loss of total film.
(M)
QUV A340 (ASTM G53, 3000 Hours - 8 Hours UV, 4 Hours Condensation) (i) Gloss Retention 70 - 100% (ii) Colour Retention Shall be not more than 5 Delta E units of colour change.
(N)
QUV B313 (336 Hours - 8 Hours UV At 60 Degrees C, 4 Hours Condensation At 50 Degrees C) (i) Gloss Retention 80 - 100 % (ii) Colour Retention Shall be not more than 5 Delta E units of colour change.
18.13.2.4
Appearance The powder coating on the significant surface shall not have any scratches through to the base metal. It shall be of even colour and gloss with good coverage. It shall not have Defect such as excessive roughness, flow lines, bubbles, inclusions, craters, blisters, dull spots, pin holes, scratches or any other unacceptable flaws. The actual appearance of the finish shall be assessed by reference to samples to be agreed upon between the Contractor and the SO Rep and thereafter maintained within agreed limits.
18.13.2.5
Colour The finishing colour of the powder coating shall be selected by the SO Rep. The Contractor shall seek approval from the SO Rep on the colour selection prior to the application of the powder coating.
18.13.2.6
Temporary Protection And Prevention Of Damage All powder coated aluminium letter boxes shall not be allowed to rub or slide against each other and significant surfaces shall be well protected during transportation. They shall be wrapped with stout papers, cardboard or other protective media which shall not be allowed to get damp. The complete letter boxes installation shall be protected against damage by contaminated moisture, cement and plaster splashes or droppings. The materials to be used for protection shall be in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions and recommendations.
18.13.2.7
Storage And Protection Ensure and provide proper and safe storage for all materials delivered to the Site and the continued proper condition of letterboxes at the Site until such time the building is handed over to the Employer.
UPG07/S18.DOC(16) lkk(181206) DPD
18.14
NATURAL ANODISED EXTRUDED ALUMINIUM FRAME AND ALUMINIUM TRAP DOOR TO MAIN ROOF Where shown, provide and install natural anodised extruded aluminium frame and aluminium trap door to main roof in accordance with the details as shown in the Drawings. The aluminium trap door shall complete with 1.2mm thick galvanised steel "C" channels frame and infill with rockwool insulation as indicated in the Drawings. The 5mm thick extruded aluminium section and 1.2mm thick aluminium alloy lining shall be of natural anodised to at least 25 microns. The density of rockwool insulation material shall be 150 kg per m3 (10% tolerance) and its thickness 2 shall be 38mm. It shall be rigid enough to be able to withstand working load of 500 kg per m . The noise reduction coefficient shall be NRC 0.95 within the sound range of 125 Hz to 5000 Hz. Moisture resistance shall not be more than 0.2% by volume. The rockwool shall be non-combustible with fire hazard indices at Class O. Trap door shall be provided with smooth running sliding roller, m.s. guides and approved padlock, hasps and staples secured to the concrete and doors by masonry drive pins or other approved means of fixing all as shown in the Drawings. When required, complete sample of trap door shall be installed on the Site for approval by the SO Rep. All trap door and items shall be fixed strictly in accordance with the Manufacturer/Supplier's instructions and recommendations.
18.15
NATURAL ANODISED EXTRUDED ALUMINIUM FRAME AND ALUMINIUM TRAP DOOR TO ROOF OF BOOSTER PUMP ROOM Where specified, the aluminium trap door shall be complete with 1.2mm thick galvanised steel "C" channel frame and infill with rockwool insulation as indicated in the Drawings. The 5mm thick extruded aluminium section and 1.2mm thick aluminium alloy lining shall be of natural anodised to at least 25 microns. The density of rockwool insulation material shall be 150 kg per m3 (10% tolerance) and its thickness shall be 38mm. It shall be rigid enough to be able to withstand working load of 500 kg per m2. The noise reduction coefficient shall be NRC 0.95 within the sound range of 125 Hz to 5000 Hz. Moisture resistance shall not be more than 0.2% by volume. The rockwool shall be non-combustible with fire hazard indices at Class O. Trap door shall be provided with smooth running sliding roller, m.s. guides and approved padlock, hasps and staples secured to the concrete and doors by masonry drive pins or other approved means of fixing all as shown in the Drawings. When required, complete sample of trap door shall be installed on the Site for approval by the SO Rep. All trap door and items shall be fixed strictly in accordance with the Manufacturer/ Supplier's instructions and recommendations.
18.16
WATER TIGHTNESS TEST TO THE JOINT/INTERFACE BETWEEN EXTERNAL ALUMINIUM WINDOW AT SAI (PRECAST COMPONENT) AND KITCHEN (WHERE THE EXTERNAL PARAPET WALL IS RECONSTRUCTED) AND THE ADJACENT STRUCTURAL COMPONENT OR IN-FILL WALL (a) General The Contractor shall carry out water test to the external joint/interface between the external aluminium window and the adjacent wall at space adding item. The water test shall also apply to kitchen window where reconstruction of external parapet wall forms part of the scope under the contract.
UPG07/S18.DOC(17) lkk(181206) DPD
18.16
WATER TIGHTNESS TEST TO THE JOINT/INTERFACE BETWEEN EXTERNAL ALUMINIUM WINDOW AT SAI (PRECAST COMPONENT) AND KITCHEN (WHERE THE EXTERNAL PARAPET WALL IS RECONSTRUCTED) AND THE ADJACENT STRUCTURAL COMPONENT OR IN-FILL WALL (CONTD) (b) Method Of Testing 5% of the units per building block sampled by the SO Rep shall be tested. All external aluminium windows of the units chosen shall be tested. For each aluminium window, one nozzle testing shall be carried out. Provide the following information to the SO Rep for approval at least 2 months before carrying out the water test : (i) (ii) (iii) (iv) The entire equipment set up to conduct the water test; Procedure of the water test; Pump capacity to deliver the required flow rate and velocity at the nozzle; The method to suspend the nozzle.
A continuous jet of water shall be sprayed on the joint/interface with a nozzle and water hose. The velocity of the water at the nozzle shall be 2m per second. The capacity of the water delivered shall be 600 litres per hour. The duration of the testing shall be 2 hours. The nozzle shall be held at a distance of 1.0m away from the joint/interface and pointed towards the joint/interface horizontally. In the case where sunbreakers come into the way, the nozzle outlet shall be brought in between the sunbreakers and the external window and pointed towards the joint/interface. The joint/interface shall be considered to have passed the test if no dampness or seepage appears at the internal side of the joint/interface or internal side of any part of the building, during spraying and within half an hour after the completion of the spraying. (c) Failure Of The Testing In the event that any joint/interface fails the water tightness test, the Contractor shall rectify the dampness and/or leakage and carry out a second water test. For each first-time window watertightness test failure, a further 5% of the units from the same building block shall be sampled by the SO Rep for testing. In addition, the SO Rep reserves the right to reject any aluminium window installation that perform unsatisfactorily during the watertightness tests. 18.17 AIR-CONDITIONER FRAME AND GLASS-FIBRE REINFORCED CEMENT PANEL Where specified, provide and fix air-conditioner frame, glass fibre reinforced cement panel and plywood panel all as shown in the Drawings. The profile and sizes of the air-conditioner (A/C) frame shall be as shown in the Drawings. The frame shall be extruded aluminium and shall be bronze anodised to 25 microns minimum. The glass-fibre reinforced cement (G.R.C.) panel shall be to the sizes as shown in the Drawings and the thickness shall be minimum 7mm. The glass fibre shall consist of 5% of the weight of the G.R.C. panel and shall be alkaline resistant. The density shall be 2,000kg per m and the exposed surfaces of the G.R.C. panel shall be finished smooth to receive 2 coats of acrylic emulsion paint. The plywood panels shall be 9mm thick and shall be to the sizes as shown in the Drawings. The exposed surfaces of the plywood panel shall be painted with one priming coat, one undercoat and one finishing coat of approved enamel paint.
3
UPG07/S18.DOC(18) lkk(181206) DPD
18.18 18.19
RESERVED STAINLESS STEEL RAILING TO PARAPETS All stainless steel railing to parapets of private and access balconies and staircase landings shall be constructed as shown in the Drawings. Stainless steel railing shall be hollow section of dimensions and thickness as shown in the Drawings. The tolerance for the dimensions and thickness shall be 0.5% and 10% respectively. All stainless steel railing shall be fixed securely into the structure as detailed in the Drawings. The dimensions and thickness of flat support shall be as shown in the Drawings. All joints shall be fully welded to neat and smooth finish. The railing shall be well protected against contaminated moisture, cement and plaster splashes and other undesirable materials during construction. The completed railing shall be clean and free from rust and stain.
18.20 18.21
RESERVED FOOT-OPERATED STAINLESS STEEL REFUSE HOPPERS FOR CENTRALIZED REFUSE CHUTE (Clause applicable if specified in the Contract) Where specified, provide and fix approved foot-operated stainless steel refuse chute hoppers to openings of centralized refuse chute walls as shown in the Drawings. The refuse chute hopper shall be constructed of stainless steel. The surface shall be of satin finish. All joints shall be welded in full and no spot welding shall be used for the works. All welds shall be smoothly and securely finished. The thickness of stainless steel shall be as shown in the Drawings. Details of the foot-operating mechanism and foot pedal shall serve as a guide only. Before installing, provide shop drawings for the approval of the SO Rep.
18.22 18.22.1
STAINLESS STEEL EYES WITH NYLON ANCHORS FOR NATIONAL FLAG General Where existing hooks have to be removed in the course of upgrading works, the contractor must reinstate the hooks at the former location or locate another suitable position as indicated in the drawings or SO Rep will confirm the location. Provide and install new stainless steel eyes with nylon anchors to parapets of access balconies, private balconies and living rooms of apartment blocks as shown below or any other locations as directed by the SO Rep all at the Contractor's costs and expenses. Stainless steel eyes shall be of grade 304 stainless steel. Description (1) (2) (3) Flats along access balcony Flats with private balcony Flats not along access balcony and without private balcony (eg. corridor end, stairs, etc) Executive Maisonette/Apartment Eye-Anchors 1 pair/unit 1 pair/unit 1 pair/unit Location to be installed Access balcony parapet/coping Private balcony parapet/coping Living room window wall
(4) 18.22.2
1 pair/unit
Private balcony parapet/coping
Quality of Materials The nylon anchors shall be "Fisher S6-8", "Hilti HUD6-8", "Ramset DNP6-8", "Rawlplug M6-8"; or other approved.
18.22.3
Dimensional Requirements Eye-anchors shall conform with the following requirements : Thickness of stainless steel Internal diameter of eye Length of screw Length of screw shank = = = = 5mm diameter 0.5mm 15mm 1mm 30mm 2mm 32mm 2mm
Size of drill bead and depth of drilling for the anchors shall comply strictly with the Manufacturer's/Suppliers written recommendations.
UPG07/S18.DOC(19) lkk(181206) DPD
18.22.4
Samples and Verification of Positions for Fixing Samples of eyes and anchors shall be submitted to the SO Rep for approval prior to the carrying out of the work. Before drilling is carried out, verify with the SO Rep and obtain his approval on the locations and positions for the installation of eye-anchors.
18.22.5
Installation Extreme care shall be exercised during installation to ensure that the parapets, copings, cills, etc. are not damaged or cracked which may cause water seepage or other defects. The Contractor shall make good, repair or replace the damaged items at his own cost and expense to the full satisfaction of the SO Rep. All over-drillings, wrong drillings and defective work shall be rectified in an approved method. Notwithstanding the approval granted for the method of rectification, the Contractor shall be liable for making good the defective work. After drilling, all cleaning of holes and preparation of surfaces for the insertion of nylon anchors shall strictly comply with the Manufacturers'/Suppliers' written recommendations. All fixing shall be accurately plumbed and aligned vertically and horizontally. The eye-screws together with the nylon anchors shall be applied with approved epoxy resin before screwing into positions. Ensure that all eye-anchors are fixed securely into the substrate to ensure a strong and firm grip. The completed fixture shall be clean and free of stains and rusts or other undesirable materials. The approved epoxy resin shall be one of the following or other approved : (a) (b) (c) (d) (e) (f) (g) (h) Araldite Injection System IS 650 or CI xh 160AB SBD EPIK; Concretin IHL; Conbextra EPLV; Chemi-EPIS; Sho-bond BICS; Febset Grout No. 6 or Non-Flow; or other approved.
18.23
STAINLESS STEEL DIRECTIONAL SIGNAGE FOR CENTRALISED REFUSE CHUTE Where specified, provide and fix 2mm thick (minimum) stainless steel directional signage for centralised refuse chute to each storey of housing building block. The size of the signage shall be as shown in the Drawings. The exact positions shall be decided and approved on the Site by the SO Rep. The stainless steel shall be Grade 304 and shall be in hair-line finish. Fixing of signage shall be by heavy duty high bond double sided adhesive tapes. All graphics and letterings shall be engraved and painted with the colour as indicated in the Drawings.
18.24
METAL GRILLE GATES TO FLAT ENTRANCES Where specified, provide and fix metal grille gates to entrance doors of flats. The gates shall be constructed in accordance with the pattern and types as shown in the Drawings. The gates shall be of the correct sizes to fit entrance door frames and be obtained from approved manufacturers. The colour of the gate shall be approved by the SO Rep. The gates shall be fabricated by welding or non-welding method. All joints shall be neat and finished smooth. The gates shall have leaf opening first on the same side as the lock on the flat entrance door. The particular type of the entrance grille gates shall be to the particular pattern to each apartment block as shown in the Drawings. Lockset required shall be "Union" 2295; or other approved with bronze anodised aluminium flush handle on both sides.
UPG07/S18.DOC(20) lkk(181206) DPD
18.25
*WROUGHT IRON STEEL GATES TO FLAT ENTRANCES (*Where specified in the Contract) Provide and fix wrought iron steel gates to all entrance doors of flats. The gates shall be constructed in accordance with the pattern and types as shown in the Drawings. The gates shall be of the correct sizes to fit the entrance door frames and be obtained from approved manufacturers. All welding and joints shall be neat and finished smooth. The gates shall have leaf opening first on the same side as the lock on the flat entrance door. The particular type of wrought iron steel gates shall be to the particular pattern to each apartment block as shown in the Drawings. All rivets shall be finished with matching colour to the gate. Provide workshop drawings for approval by the SO Rep. A complete sample shall be installed on the Site for the approval of the SO Rep before full implementation. Preparation All welded joints shall be made smooth. Remove rust mechanically from the surface of wrought iron. Clean the surface to remove oil, grease and dirt. Painting The Contractor shall seek the SO Rep approval on the painting system for the wrought iron steel gate. The Contractor shall submit a range of colours for the SO Rep approval. The colour and finishing of the gate shall be approved by the SO Rep. The painting system shall be: (i) (ii) (iii) One coat of CED primer; One coat of acrylic based or PU based finishing paint with special effects and antique appearance; One final coat of clear acrylic based or PU based lacquer.
18.26
FAN HOOKS Where specified, cast fan hooks into positions as shown; bent out of 13mm diameter mild steel rod to ceilings of shops, eating houses or other premises as shown in the Drawings.
18.27
NUMERAL AND/OR ILLUMINATED ESTATE BLOCK NUMBER SIGNAGE Where specified, new estate block number signages shall be installed according to the details as shown in the drawings. For each building block including the Precinct Pavilion, provide and fix two (2) numbers of numeral plate and/or illuminated block signages (where specified) for each building block (including multistorey carpark/garage block). The signages shall be located at the second storey beam and the position shall be decided by the SO Rep. For precinct pavilion, both the location and position of the signage shall be decided by the SO Rep. The actual block number shall be given later in the course of the contract. The signage shall be double sided illuminated estate block number and shall be made from powder coated extruded aluminium frame with an eclipse sign face as shown in the drawings. The signage shall have powder coated aluminium sign face cut out text mounted with 3-dimensional injection moulded plexiglas lettering/ number. The thickness of the aluminium frame and aluminium sheet shall be as shown in the Drawings. The signage shall be reinforced with galvanised steel brackets as shown in the Drawings. Submit shop drawings and a sample to the SO Rep for approval prior to their installations. Provide and fix all electrical cables, ballast, lamp holders, fluorescent tubes and other necessary lighting accessories including connection with wiring from the nearest connection box. The powder coating shall be superdurable architectural powder coating and shall comply with clause 18.13.2.3 Polyester Powder Coating. The colour of the powder coating shall be approved by the SO Rep.
UPG07/S18.DOC(21) lkk(181206) DPD
18.28
CAT LADDER TO MAIN ROOF Where specified, provide and fix to every access door to roof, aluminium retractable cat ladders and aluminium handrails, aluminium cage enclosures and the hand holds above roof slabs as detailed in the Drawings. Hollow blocks to which aluminium rungs are anchored shall be filled solid with cement mortar. Where shown in the Drawings, provide and fix barricade to the front of lift motor room entrance which is close to the roof edge.
18.29
PROFILED STEEL ROOFING SHEETS Where shown, the profiled steel roofing sheets shall be as specified in Section 13 "ROOFING".
18.30 18.30.1
MILD STEEL DOOR FRAME Material Requirements Where specified, the mild steel door frame shall be 1.6mm thick and the overall dimension shall have a tolerance of 1.0mm to the profile as shown in the Drawings. Fixing to brick/block walls shall be secured by mild steel fishtailed holdfast with CED primer or galvanised steel fishtailed holdfast to the number and dimension as shown in the Drawings to each side of the frame. Fixing frame to RC shall be by mild steel bracket with CED primer or galvanised steel bracket with masonry drive pin on both sides all as shown in the Drawings. Fixing to lightweight concrete partition shall be secured by 3 no. of mild steel holdfast with CED primer or galvanised steel holdfast to each side of the frame. The holdfast shall be welded to the partition reinforcement bar. Approved Cathodic Electrodeposition Primer to mild steel door frames shall be applied in the mill/ plant/factory and shall comply with the requirements shown below :
Test Adhesion Test ASTM D 3359-02 Scratch Resistance Test SS5:Part F2:03 Pencil Hardness Test ASTM 3363-00 Dry Film Thickness (measured by Elcometer 300 Coating Thickness Gauge) SS5:Part B1:03 Method No. 6 Resistance to Continuous Salt Spray SS5:Part G1:03 Resistance to Humidity under Condensation Condition (Continuous condensation) SS5:Part G6:03 Results 5B The coating shall withstand a scratch test load of 2000g 2H shall be the hardest pencil that do not scratch the film
20 microns 5 microns Tested for a period of 1,000 hours: - less than 0.1% rusting - blister size no. 6, few to no. 10 on surface Tested for a period of 1,000 hours: - less than 0.03% rusting - blister size no. 8, few to no. 10 on surface
18.30.2
Installation Requirements The Contractor shall install the door frames to good verticality within the tolerance of 3mm. Measurement of the verticality for all the metal door frames shall be submitted to the SO Rep before the installation of the door leaf. Door frames installed without good alignment and verticality shall be rejected. The grouting of the joints between the door frame and the adjacent structure shall be carried out under one operation. Before grouting, the door frame shall be checked for verticality and proper bracing. It is preferred that the door frame be installed after the block work.
UPG07/S18.DOC(22) lkk(181206) DPD
18.31
HOT DIPPED GALVANISED RAILINGS TO STAIRCASE Where specified, provide and installed galvanised steel railings as shown in the Drawings. The galvanised steel hollow section handrails, balusters, hollow section supports and flat bottom rails shall be to the dimensions and sizes as shown. The galvanised steel hollow section supports shall be securely fixed into structure as detailed. All welded joints shall be fully welded and shall be properly sanded down to a smooth finish. Galvanised steel surfaces shall first be treated with one coat of polyvinyl butyral etching primer and one coat of lead and chromate-free primer and then painted with one undercoat and one finishing coat of enamel paint. The finishing colour shall be approved by the SO Rep.
18.32
HOT DIPPED GALVANISED STEEL GRATINGS All galvanised gratings shall be zinc coated by the hot-dipped galvanising process in accordance with SS 117 or BS 729 Part 1. Every batches of galvanised gratings delivered to Site shall be accompanied by a certification letter or copy of invoice from the firm/company at which they are galvanised. The term "gratings" used in this clause shall be deemed to include the frames and their miscellaneous components. Submit details of the galvanising treatment to the SO Rep for approval. Thoroughly remove all welding slags from the gratings prior to galvanising them. Any welding slags found remaining on galvanised gratings shall be rejected. Such rejected galvanised gratings shall be removed from the Site immediately. The galvanised gratings shall be tested for the zinc mass coating. The testing shall be performed at a PSB accredited laboratory using the magnetic or electronic thickness measuring devices. Send all selected gratings for testing within one week of their delivery to the Site before their installation. 2% of the total number of gratings delivered to the Site subject to a minimum of three number of gratings shall be selected for testing. The zinc mass coating to be tested shall be carried out at regular points on the surfaces of the steel angles and flats. The total no. of points tested for each grating shall be not less than 32. The results of the test at every point for one grating shall be averaged to determine the average zinc coating weight of that grating. The mass of zinc coating on each grating shall comply with the following average coating mass : Thickness Of Steel 5mm thick and over Under 5mm, but not less than 2mm Under 2mm Average Coating Mass 2 ( g per m ) 610 410 350 Minimum Permissible Value 2 ( g per m ) 580 390 330
Gratings which fail to achieve the requirements specified above shall be dealt with as follows : (a) The SO Rep shall exercise his rights under Clause 1.10 "Nuisance and Irregularities" to impose a charge against the Contractor for any grating where the zinc coating mass is less than the average coating mass but greater than the minimum permissible value as specified. The batch of galvanised gratings from which any one of the representative samples fails to achieve the minimum permissible value as specified shall be rejected. In addition, the SO Rep shall exercise his right under clause 1.10 "Nuisance and Irregularities" to impose a charge against the Contractor for each such failure. The rejected gratings may be sent for re-galvanising and may be accepted if tests show that they comply with the requirements of the zinc mass coating.
(b)
18.33
METAL GRILLE TO COURTYARD, STAIRCASE AND END ACCESS BALCONY Where specified, provide and fix metal grille to courtyard (1st storey dwelling unit), to match with the front metal grille gate and for staircase and end access balcony to the size and profile all as shown in the Drawings.
UPG07/S18.DOC(23) lkk(181206) DPD
18.34
TEMPORARY BARRICADE MILD STEEL GATE Where shown, provide and fix temporary barricade m.s. gate at first storey level to each and every staircase. The profile, sizes, pattern etc shall be as shown in the Drawings. Fix temporary barricade as and when required and instructed by the SO Rep. Remove such temporary barricades when required by the SO Rep and to make good all Defect arising thereof. Paint gate as specified in Section 23 - "PAINTING AND DECORATING".
18.35
MILD STEEL RAILINGS TO STAIRCASES Provide and install mild steel railings to staircases as shown in the Drawings. The mild steel hollow section handrail, balusters, hollow section support and flat bottom rail shall be to the dimensions and sizes as shown. The mild steel hollow section supports shall be securely fixed into the structure as detailed. All welded joints shall be fully welded and all welding shall be properly sanded down to a smooth finish.
18.36
DIRECTIONAL SIGNBOARDS AND STOREY INDICATOR PLATES Where specified, provide and fix directional signboards and storey indicator plates to sizes and at locations as shown in the Drawings. The directional signboards and storey indicator plates shall be made of 2mm thick aluminium alloy sheets or plates conforming to BS EN 485, 515, 573 or ASTM B209 and finished with 15 microns thick anodic coating. The fixing of these items shall be carried out with stainless steel screws with nylon plugs. Unless otherwise specified, the letterings and numberings shall be engraved and painted in black.
18.37
MOTORISED ROLLER SHUTTER TO CENTRALISED REFUSE CHAMBER
18.37.1
Scope Where shown, provide and install motorised roller shutter complete with channel guide, shutter motor, angle bolts, bottom rail and other necessary components in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions to centralised refuse chamber.
18.37.2
Material Where specified, the motorised roller shutter shall be of 0.5mm thick (minimum) zincalume steel curtain permanently lock-seamed to form a continuous curtain or 0.8mm thick (minimum) galvanised steel or 1.6mm thick natural anodised aluminium curtain interlocking slats with end clips to secure laterally. The guide rails of the roller shutter shall be made of aluminium. Provide a seamless PVC weather seal at the base of the rail. Secure the curtain top and wrap it around the drum assembly. Provide box housing of similar material as the curtain to house the entire drum assembly and integral chainwheel complete with chain for manual operation. Provide perforation slots of 100mm x 25mm spaced at 400mm apart to approximately the top one-third of the curtain height to the approval of the SO Rep. Provide edge-treatment to prevent metal to metal contact between the curtain and the guides during operation.
18.37.3
Coating Aluminium shutter shall be natural anodised to 25 microns (minimum). Galvanised steel and zincalume steel shutter shall be finished with 25 microns (minimum) colourbond silicone modified polyester coating. The finishing colour of the coating shall be selected by the SO Rep.
UPG07/S18.DOC(24) lkk(181206) DPD
18.37.4
Power Supply And Operating System Tap power supply for the motor and all control devices of the motorised roller shutter from a 10 Ampere TPN isolator (the isolator shall be provided by the Employer unless otherwise specified) in the centralised refuse chamber. Connect with electrical wiring from the isolator to the motor. Provide a built-in-auto-stop safety device to the system so that the roller shutter shall automatically stop and reverse when it is obstructed during the closing operation. Either limit switch or motor overload device shall be used for the activation of stop and reverse action. Provide push-button switches enclosed in a weatherproof plastic control box and mount it inside a recess opening (325mm height x 225mm width x 160mm depth) located outside and on the right hand side of the centralised refuse chute chamber viewing from the front. Provide the control box with "Camlock" model "L & F" A/CR 11 or 16 with key No. 01/3S/N65; or other approved. The control box shall contain "Up", "Down" and "Stop" buttons and one lever override control to switch from electrical to manual operation. Indicating arrows pointing upwards and downwards shall be marked on the "Up" and "Down" buttons. The motorised roller shutter shall stop automatically after the end of opening or closing operation. The "Down" button shall be incorporated with a delay timer to enable the motorised roller shutter to commence closing after a preset time upon activation of the "Down" button. The setting range of the timer shall be from 0 to 3 minutes. Set the timer at the 1 minute value. A second lever override control shall be provided within the centralised refuse chamber. When activated, all lever override controls shall enable the roller shutter to be lifted up (minimum 1.5m height) manually from the outside as well as from the inside. The outside control shall enable entry to the refuse chamber in case of electrical breakdown or other emergency. The operator shall then be able to roll up the shutter using the chain provided within the chamber.
18.37.5
Workshop Drawings The details shown in the Drawings shall serve as a guide. Submit workshop drawings showing all the detailed sections, plans, relevant details and accessories to the SO Rep for approval prior to ordering the system.
18.38
CONTRACT SIGNBOARD Where specified, provide, erect and maintain a contract signboard. The size of the contract signboard shall not be smaller than the dimensions shown in the Drawings. However, the other details shown in the Drawings shall serve as a guide. Before erecting the contract signboard, submit details and drawings of the proposed contract signboard for the approval of the SO Rep. The position and location of the contract signboard at the Site shall be approved by the SO Rep. The contract signboard shall be erected within one month from the commencement of the Works and shall not be taken down without prior approval of the SO Rep.
18.39
STAINLESS STEEL PLAQUE AT FIRST STOREY LIFT LOBBY Where specified, provide and fix one number 2mm thick (minimum) stainless steel plaque to first storey lift lobby of size as shown in the Drawings. The exact position shall be decided and approved on the Site by the SO Rep. The stainless steel shall be of Grade 304 and shall be in hair-line finish. Fixing of the plaque shall be by heavy duty high bond double sided adhesive tapes. All letterings and numberings shall be engraved and painted in black. HDB symbol (logo) shall be engraved and painted in red. Regardless of the number of building block in the Contract, only one number stainless steel plaque shall be provided.
UPG07/S18.DOC(25) lkk(181206) DPD
18.40
BRONZE ANODISED ALUMINIUM OR POWDER COATED ALUMINIUM HOUSE NUMBER (a) For Flat Provide and fix bronze anodised aluminium or powder coated aluminium house number to each and every unit of flats. The house number shall be fixed on to steel plate by heavy duty high bond double sided adhesive tapes or other concealed method. The steel plate shall be painted in a colour matching the mild steel metal gate. The fixing of house number plate to the mild steel gate shall be by heavy duty high bond double sided adhesive tapes or other concealed method. The anodic coating to aluminium shall be 15 microns minimum. All numberings shall be as shown in the Drawings. (b) For Shops And Other Premises Unless otherwise specified, provide and fix bronze anodised aluminium or powder coated aluminium house number to each and every unit of shops and other premises. The house number shall be fixed by heavy duty high bond double sided adhesive tapes or other concealed method. The anodic coating to aluminium shall be 15 microns minimum. All numberings shall be as shown in the Drawings.
18.41
SIGN PLATES FOR SERVICE ROOMS Provide and fix sign plates to all services rooms as shown in the Drawings. Unless otherwise specified, the sign plates shall be fixed on the doors. The thickness of sign plates shall be as shown in the Drawings. The "Danger" sign plates shall be fixed onto door leaf and shall not block the ventilation louvres. The letterings shall be engraved in red. The "No Smoking" sign plates shall be provided for all electrical switchrooms and lift machine rooms.
18.42
SIGN PLATES FOR SERVICE DUCTS Provide and fix sign plates to service ducts as shown in the Drawings. The sign plates shall be fixed at position as shown in the Drawings.
18.43
LIFT NOTICE SIGNAGE FOR TYPICAL UPPER STOREY Where specified, provide and fix lift notice signages to the walls of every lift landing from the second storey to the top most storey. The position of the signages shall be as shown in the Drawings. The signages shall be made from powder coated extruded aluminium frame with sign face using powder coated aluminium sheet cut outs with sign face of acrylic sheet as shown. The acrylic sheet shall be reverse silkscreen graphics. The floor number indication shall be 3-dimensional injection moulded letterings. The wordings on the aluminium sheet shall be silkscreen printed and the colour shall be approved by the SO Rep. Seek and obtain approval from the SO Rep on the actual block number, block layout plan, the design for the logo and telephone number before providing the lift notice signages. The logo and telephone number of essential maintenance services shall be provided in reverse self-adhesive sticker. The signages shall have an additional housing using extruded polycarbonate frame and acrylic panels as shown in the Drawings. The entire sign hall be mounted onto the wall as shown in the Drawings. Provide shop drawings and a sample to the SO Rep for approval prior to their installations. The powder coating shall be superdurable architectural powder coating and shall comply with subclause 18.13.2.3. "Polyester Powder Coating". The colour of the powder coating shall be approved by the SO Rep.
UPG07/S18.DOC(26) lkk(181206) DPD
18.44
LIFT NOTICE SIGNAGE AND NOTICE BOARD AT FIRST STOREY LIFT LOBBY Provide and fix lift notice signage and notice board to the wall at the first storey lift lobby. The position shall be as shown in the Drawings. The signages shall be made from powder coated extruded aluminium frame with sign face using powder coated aluminium sheet. The thickness of the aluminium frame and aluminium sheet shall be as shown in the Drawings. The block number indication shall be of 3-dimensional injection moulded letterings. It shall be attached with a notice board with an openable door panel. The hinges for the doors shall be concealed. The sign face of the notice board shall be polycarbonate panel with reverse silkscreen graphics and letterings. Seek and obtain approval from the SO Rep on the actual block number, block layout plan, the design for the logo and telephone number before providing the lift notice signages. The logo and telephone number of essential maintenance services shall be provided in reverse self-adhesive sticker. Hardwood frame with softboard covered with fine felt of approved colour shall be fitted in the notice board. The notice board shall be provided with light tube for illumination. The signages shall have additional housing using extruded polycarbonate frame and acrylic panels as shown in the Drawings. The entire sign shall be mounted onto the walls as shown in the Drawings. The details shown shall serve as a guide. Site measurements shall be taken prior to the fabrication of the lift notice plate, notice board and casing. Provide shop drawings to the SO Rep for approval prior to the installation of the plate. Provide and fix all electrical cables, ballast, lamp holders, fluorescent tubes and other necessary lighting accessories including connection with wiring from the nearest connection box. Site measurements shall be taken prior to the fabrication of the lift notice signages and notice boards. Provide shop drawings and a sample to the SO Rep for approval prior to their installations. The powder coating shall be superdurable architectural powder coating and shall comply with subclause 18.13.2.3. "Polyester Powder Coating". The colour of the powder coating shall be approved by the SO Rep.
18.45
PRECINCT DIRECTIONAL SIGNBOARD Where specified, the Contractor shall provide and fix precinct directional signboard to the details as shown in the Drawings. The locations and number of precinct directional signboards shall be as shown in the Drawings. The signboard shall be made from powder coated extruded aluminium frame with an openable door panel. The hinges for the door panel shall be concealed. The thickness of the extruded aluminium frame shall be as shown in the Drawings. Approved gasket shall be used along the main frame to ensure the signboard is watertight. The frame shall be reinforced with zinc plated mild steel brackets as shown in the Drawings. The signboard shall have powder coated aluminium sign face cut out compartment with A2 size panel map sign face using acrylic sheet with reverse silkscreen graphics. The bottom of the signage shall be perforated with holes as shown. The thickness of the aluminium sheet and acrylic sheet shall be as shown in the Drawings. The signboard shall be fitted with luminares for illumination. The whole signboard shall be mounted to a concrete slab as shown in the Drawings. The precinct layout shall be made known later in the course of the Works. Submit shop drawings and a sample to the SO Rep for approval prior to their installations. Provide and fix all electrical cables, ballast, lamp holders, fluorescent tubes and other necessary lighting accessories including connection with wiring from the nearest connection box. The powder coating shall be superdurable architectural powder coating and shall comply with subclause18.13.2.3 "Polyester Powder Coating". The colour of the powder coating shall be approved by the SO Rep.
UPG07/S18.DOC(27) lkk(181206) DPD
18.46
SIGNBOARD FOR BLOCK ENTRANCE Provide and fix one number of signboard for the block entrance to the details as shown in the Drawings for each building block. The signboard shall be located at the position as decided by the SO Rep. The signboard shall be made from powder coated extruded aluminium frame with an openable door panel. The hinges for the door panel shall be concealed. The thickness of the aluminium frame shall be as shown in the Drawings. Approved gasket shall be used along the main frame to ensure the signboard is watertight. The frame shall be reinforced with zinc plated mild steel brackets with washers and screws as shown in the Drawings. The signboard shall have powder coated aluminium sign face cut out text mounted with 3dimensionmal injection moulded lettering/number. The signboard shall be perforated with holes as shown. The thickness of the aluminium sheet and acrylic sheet shall be as shown in the Drawings. The signboard shall be fitted with luminares for illumination. The whole signboard shall be mounted to a concrete slab as shown in the Drawings. Submit shop drawings and a sample to the SO Rep for approval prior to their installations. Provide and fix all electrical cables. ballast, lamp holders, fluorescent tubes and other necessary lighting accessories including connection with wiring from the nearest connection box. The powder coating shall be superdurable architectural powder coating and shall comply with subclause 18.13.2.3. "Polyester Powder Coating". The colour of the powder coating shall be approved by the SO Rep.
18.47
ILLUMINATED DIRECTIONAL SIGNANGES FOR ESTATE BLOCK Where specified, provide and fix one number of illuminated directional signage for estate block per ingress as shown in the Drawings. The signage shall be made from powder coated extruded aluminium frame with an openable door panel. The hinges for the door panel shall be concealed. The sign face shall be polycarbonate with text using transparent vinyl sticker reverse paste. The thickness of the aluminium frame and polycarbonate shall be as shown in the Drawings. Powder coated aluminium sheet shall be attached to the signages as shown in the Drawings. The directional signages shall be mounted to a 100mm diameter powder coated aluminium support in ribbed detail and interlock with powder coated multi slot ring. The entire sign shall be mounted to the floor embedded down to the ground as shown in the Drawings. The actual block numbers shall be made known later in the course of the Works. Submit shop drawings and a sample to the SO Rep for approval prior to their installations. Provide and fix all electrical cables. ballast, lamp holders, fluorescent tubes and other necessary lighting accessories including connection with wiring from the nearest connection box. The powder coating shall be superdurable architectural powder coating and shall comply with subclause 18.13.2.3. "Polyester Powder Coating". The colour of the powder coating shall be approved by the SO Rep.
18.48
DIRECTIONAL SIGNAGES FOR ESTATE BLOCK Where specified, provide and fix directional signages for estate blocks as shown in the Drawings. The locations and the number of directional signages for estate blocks shall be as shown in the Drawings. The signages shall be made from powder coated extruded aluminium frame with sign face using polycarbonate with text front sticker paste using reflective stickers. The thickness of the aluminium sheet and polycarbonate shall be as shown in the Drawings. Powder coated aluminium sheet shall be attached to the signages as shown in the Drawings. The directional signages shall be mounted to a 100mm diameter powder coated aluminium pole interlock with powder coated multi slot ring. A panel to house the layout map shall be provided as shown. The panel shall be powder coated aluminium sheet of the thickness as shown with sign face of acrylic sheet with reverse silkscreen graphics. It shall be mounted to the powder coated aluminium support interlock with powder coated multi slot ring. The entire sign shall be mounted to the floor embedded down to the ground as shown in the Drawings. The actual block numbers shall be made known later in the course of the Works. Submit shop drawings and a sample to the SO Rep for approval prior to their installations. The powder coating shall be superdurable architectural powder coating and shall comply with subclause 18.13.2.3. "Polyester Powder Coating". The colour of the powder coating shall be approved by the SO Rep.
UPG07/S18.DOC(28) lkk(181206) DPD
18.49
ALUMINIUM CHAMBER DOOR TO REFUSE CHUTE Where specified, provide and install new aluminium chamber door to refuse chute chamber with 5mm thick (with tolerance of 10%) alloy 6063 T5 door frame with 5052S aluminium alloy sheet anodising 25 micron, 13mm diameter x 180mm long stainless steel barrel shoot bolt with 100mm x 38mm handle and eye and stainless steel staple 118mm x 50mm x 36mm upturn.
18.50
COLLAPSIBLE GATE TO TRAP DOOR Where specified, collapsible gate to trap door shall be provided and fixed as shown in the Drawings. The gate shall slide along the 50 x 50 x 6 mm thick mild steel angle guide. Painting to the gate shall be as specified in Section 23 "PAINTING AND DECORATING".
18.51
REFUSE CHUTE HOPPERS WITH LOCKING DEVICE Where specified, the Contractor shall remove the existing hoppers and as shown in Drawings, fix to openings to refuse chute walls, approved aluminium hoppers made from 2.03mm sheets with tolerance of 10% of aluminium alloys to quality ASTM B209-74-5052 or better with rivets and galvanised steel butt hinges complete with a self-locking device. Aluminium sheets shall have anodised coating not less than 15 micron. All trimmings around the 4 sides of the hopper must be sealed and all tiling around the hopper shall butt the hopper in a straight line.
18.52
MILD STEEL/ALUMINIUM GRILLES, RAILINGS, HOLLOW SECTION, ETC Where mild steel or aluminium grilles, railing, hollow sections, etc. are required, the Contractor shall, unless otherwise specified or shown in the drawings, design, fabricate, supply and install such components complete with surface treatment specified in this Specification including submission of workshop drawings for the approval of the SO Rep before commencement of work.
18.53
REPLACEMENT OF EXISTING WINDOWS WITH NEW BRONZE ANODISED EXTRUDED ALUMINIUM WINDOWS AND GRILLES The Contractor shall exercise extreme care in hacking and replacing the existing windows so as not to cause any inconvenience to the Occupants. While removing and replacing the windows, precaution must be taken by the Contractor to ensure the safety and security of the Occupants, their properties and possession, and to prevent ingress of water into the apartments. All existing works/ structures disturbed in the course of the works must be rectified to match the existing. The Contractor shall consult the SO Rep on the method of removing and fixing the windows. Upon removal of the existing window and window frames, all the gaps between the new frames and the surrounding wall or structure are to be in-filled with non-shrink mortar. The Contractor shall provide workshop drawings for all window details together with the window's grilles.
18.54
OPTION FOR CASEMENT AND/OR SLIDING WINDOWS WITH GRILLES Where two or more types of windows and grilles (eg. casement window, top-hung window and adjustable or fixed lourved windows together with the grilles) are specified or shown in the Drawings for the same window opening, the Contractor shall provide all types of window specified for the selection and approval by the SO Rep without cost adjustment to the Contract. The type of window to be installed shall be decided by the SO Rep and shall comply with Building Control Unit requirements. Where the types of windows and the grilles are shown in the Drawings and in the event of any omission to the windows, the valuation of the variation shall be based on the type of window which is the most expensive.
UPG07/S18.DOC(29) lkk(181206) DPD
18.55
ALUMINIUM GRILLES TO WINDOWS (SAI, KITCHEN, LIVING & BEDROOMS) Provide and fix bronze anodised extruded aluminium grilles complete with many lock combinations, aluminium plate 3mm thick locking eyes, relevant components and accessories. The Contractor shall provide locksets to the aluminium grilles with different combinations instead of onetype for the project. Such extruded aluminium sections shall include sliding, casement, fixed and folding grilles as shown in the Drawings or unless specified otherwise. The sections shall be spaced not greater than 100mm from the external face of the grilles on both directions. Thickness of sections shall not be less than 1.2mm (main frame) and 0.9mm (grilles) with security fixing of jointings to prevent force entry or other approved by SO Rep. The aluminium shall be finished by one of the following : (a) (b) Anodic coating to 25 microns minimum complying with BS 3987. Combined coating to comply with BS 4842, except the minimum thickness of coating shall be 9 microns for the anodic coat and 7 microns for the liquid organic coat. The actual appearance of the finish shall be assessed by reference to samples to be agreed upon between the Contractor and the SO Rep and thereafter maintained within agreed limits.
(c)
Complete samples of grilles shall be installed at the site for approval by the SO Rep.
18.56
GRAB BAR IN TOILET Provide and fix stainless steel grab bar in the bath and/or wc complete with cover sockets as shown in the Drawings. The grab bar shall withstand weight not less than 150 kg.
18.57
NOTICE BOARD WITH ALUMINIUM CASING AT FIRST STOREY LIFT LOBBY Where specified, provide and fix aluminium notice board to details as shown in the Drawings. The aluminium shall be bronze anodised and the anodic coating shall not be less than 15 microns. Submit samples of the fabric to the SO Rep for approval and selection of colour before full implementation.
18.58
ROOF RAILINGS Contractor shall provide railings, plate, fixing bolts, etc. to the roof as shown in the Drawings. Provide gap of 25mm for thermal movement along the railing, as a guide approximately 5m to 6m. Railings shall be connected to the lightning conductors in accordance to clause 49.12. The waterproofing membranes or coatings that are affected by the fixing shall be re-dressed and make good condition to the satisfaction of the SO Rep.
18.59
FASTENING DEVICES FOR ALL EXTERNAL BUILDING FEATURES AND ATTACHMENTS SUCH AS FLUOROCARBON COATED ALUMINIUM SUNBREAKERS, LOUVRES & PANEL For All External Building Features and Attachments Like Aluminium Sunbreakers, Cladding , Clothes Drying Racks, Roof Features; and Metal Railings /parapets exposed to the weather like those along common access and private balconies . The screws, bolts and nuts, rivets, brackets and other fastening devices shall be of stainless steel. The finished stainless steel rivets shall have a combined large circular flat disc and dome-shaped head after formation. The design and use of the stainless steel rivets shall be in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions. In the situation where the fastening devices like bolts and nuts are to be embedded in concrete or approved structural grout, approved galvanised bolts and nuts and other approved galvanised fastening devices can be used. The requirements in this clause shall take precedence over those specified in other clauses on external building features and attachments and roof features, on the use of screws, bolts and nuts, rivets and brackets and other fastening devices SECTION 19/...
UPG07/S18.DOC(30) lkk(181206) DPD
Ugdg Spec TS 19-1/25 SECTION 19
19.0 19.1 19.1.1
FLOOR FINISHES NON STRUCTURAL CONCRETE SCREED Cement Cement shall be Ordinary Portland Cement as specified in Section 4 "STRUCTURAL CONCRETE".
19.1.2
Aggregate Aggregate shall comply with SS 31:1984. The maximum size of the aggregate shall be 10mm.
19.1.3
Preparation of Surfaces All surfaces to be screeded shall be clean and damp but not wet before commencement of screeding work.
19.1.4
Locations The Contractor shall, where shown in the Drawings, rescreed all existing play areas, access corridors, steps/staircases, footpaths etc. Concrete screed shall be of Grade 25 concrete with 10mm maximum size aggregate. It shall be laid to floor surfaces in locations specified in Clause 19.2.6 "Schedule of Screed/Rendering" and also to other locations as shown in the Drawings. The screed shall be laid to fall towards water outlets or scupper drains and to finish to a surface directed by the SO Rep.
19.1.5
Thickness The minimum thickness of screed shall be 15mm for staircase half-landings and 25mm elsewhere or as shown in the Drawings.
19.1.6
Finishing and Curing Concrete screeds shall be finished with a minimum of two passes power trowel and a final pass of hard steel trowelling. Where constraint of space does not allow for power trowel, the concrete screeds shall be compacted by mechanical vibrator subject to the approval of the SO Rep. The finishings shall be done without any sprinkling of cement dust, cement grout or water to the surface of the screed. Ensure that the crew of the finishing team is sufficient to complete the job before final set of the concrete screed. The concrete screed shall be moist cured immediately for seven days or with approved curing compound or other approved methods. For areas that are not accessible for power trowelling, the screed shall be finished with hand steel trowelling.
Ugdg Spec TS 19-2/25 19.1.7 Reference Panel and Sample Panel A "Reference Panel" shall be designated by the SO Rep reflecting the current standard of the industry which is expected of the Contractor. The Contractor shall make himself available to view the designated reference sample and establish a common understanding of the required standard. At the commencement of screeding work, at least one "Sample Panel" shall be laid to the standard of the Reference Panel. The Sample Panel shall be approved by the SO Rep and all remaining screeding shall be carried out to the minimum standard of the approved Sample Panel. Sub-standard work shall be rejected and replaced to the established standard. 19.2 19.2.1 CEMENT AND SAND SCREED/RENDERING Pre-Packed Mortar Screed Factory pre-packed dry-mixed screed shall be used for all floor screeding or floor tiling with cement and sand mortar. Approved pre-packed waterproof screed (dry mix of cement and sand with powder waterproofing additive) shall be used for areas where waterproof screed is specified. For mortar screeding to other floor areas, which do not require waterproofing, approved pre-packed floor screed shall be used. The pre-packed floor screed and waterproof screed shall be mechanically mixed with the right amount of water as specified by the manufacturer. The pre-packed screed and pre-packed waterproofing screed shall comply with the following performance requirements when subjected to the specified laboratory testing : Prepacked Waterproofing Screed S/No 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Type of Evaluation Average compressive strength Water penetration under 0.2/kgf/cm Shrinkage Flow Water absorption Flexural strength Water Retentivity Stiffening time 2 a) 1.0 N/ mm 2 b) 2.0 N/ mm Volume change
2
Testing Method ASTM C 109 : 2001 HDB Method (DIN 1084:Pt 5) Coutinho Ring ASTM C 109 : 2001 ASTM C 413 : 2001 ASTM C 348 : 1997 BS 4551 : Pt 1 : 1988 BS EN 1015 9 : 1999 (Method A) ASTM C 827 : 2001
Requirement 25 N per mm 40 N per mm2 5mm at 28 days No crack 80% -120% < 5% > 2 N per mm > 90% a) 360 mins b) 420 mins Shrinkage value of not more than 1%
2 2
Prepacked Floor Screed S/No 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Type of Evaluation Average compressive strength Shrinkage Flow Water absorption Flexural strength Water Retentivity Stiffening time 2 a) 1.0 N/ mm 2 b) 2.0 N/ mm Volume change Testing Method ASTM C 109 : 2001 Coutinho Ring ASTM C 109 : 2001 ASTM C 413 : 2001 ASTM C 348 : 1997 BS 4551 : Pt 1 : 1988 BS EN 1015 9 : 1999 (Method A) ASTM C 827 : 2001 Requirement 25 N per mm 2 40 N per mm No crack 80% -120% < 5% > 2 N per mm > 90% a) 360 mins b) 420 mins Shrinkage value of not more than 1%
2 2
UG03/S19.DOC(2) (LKK)(15122002) (CAD)
Ugdg Spec TS 19-3/25 19.2.2 Preparation of Surfaces Before screeding, prepare the surfaces by cleaning and damping slightly. Freshly laid screed, where exposed to direct sunlight shall be kept damp and adequately cured to prevent shrinkage and cracking. 19.2.3 Locations (Pre-packed Screed/Rendering) Unless otherwise specified, screed/rendering shall be laid to all floor surfaces as specified hereunder in the "Schedule Of Screed/Rendering" and also to other locations as shown in the Drawings. Except for rendering to treads and risers of stairs, the rendering shall be laid to fall towards water outlets or scupper drains, and finished to a surface directed by the SO Rep. Pre-packed screed to treads of stairs shall be laid level and finished to a consistent fine rough texture to give a non-skid surface. The minimum thickness of the screed shall be 15mm or as shown in the Drawings. Where waterproof membrane is applied around the pipes and water outlets, pre-packed waterproof screed shall be laid to cover the waterproof membrane, as shown in the Drawings. 19.2.4 Water Test To Internal Floor Slab Water test shall be conducted to check the watertightness of the Bath/WC floor and the floor area surrounding the pipes and water outlet in the kitchen and balcony. In conducting the water test, the floor outlet shall be blocked off temporarily with an approved water plug or by other approved suitable means. The floor shall be flooded with water to a minimum depth of 10mm. For water testing the area surrounding the pipes or water outlets in the kitchen and balcony, temporary blocking shall be provided to maintain a minimum water level of 10mm depth. The amount of water shall be maintained (replenish if necessary) for a minimum of four hours. The underside of the floor slab and the base of the adjacent walls shall be checked for signs of leakage within half an hour after the test period. Water test shall be conducted at the Bath/WC floor and the pipe surround and water outlet in the kitchen and balcony after the approved pre-packed waterproof screed has been laid but before the laying of the floor tiles. In the event that any leakage occurs, the Contractor shall be required to rectify the defective Works as directed by the SO Rep all at the Contractors cost and expense. After the rectification, the same water test procedure specified above shall be repeated. 19.2.5 Rendering To Lift Pit Approved pre-packed mortar shall be used to render the lift pit. Unless otherwise shown, the rendering shall be of an average thickness of 18mm.
UG03/S19.DOC(3) (LKK)(15122002) (CAD)
Ugdg Spec TS 19-4/25 19.2.6 Schedule Of Screed/Rendering Unless otherwise specified, screed/rendering shall be laid to all floor surfaces as specified in the Schedule below and also to other locations as shown in the Drawings :
Accommodation Location Kitchen Kitchen/Dining 1-Room/2-Room/ 3-Room/ 4-Room Bath/WC Bedroom, Living Room & Utility Room Bath/WC * Only required for areas around the pipes and water outlets as shown in the Drawings. Prepacked Waterproof Screed * * * * Required only where floor tiling is specified for these locations Prepacked Screed Grade 25 Concrete Screed Self Levelling Screed Remarks
Kitchen 5-Room and/or Executive Apartment
Kitchen/Dining Private Balcony Bedroom, Living Room & Utility Room Wash Area Next To Refuse Chute Chamber Wash Area Lift Lobby Utility Pump Room, Switch Room & MDF Room Public Staircase Landing Access Balcony & Void Deck Risers & Treads Of Public Staircase Room & Display Area
* * * Required only where floor tiling is specified for these locations.
* * * * * Concrete screed shall be used where no floor tiling is specified
All Residential Block Common Areas
* Concrete screed shall be used where no floor tiling is specified No rendering Is required for precast staircase
* * * * Waterproof screed shall be used where the nd shop is at the 2 storey & above
Shop
Kitchen Bath/WC Service Yard
*Denotes the specified screed/rendering
UG03/S19.DOC(4) (LKK)(15122002) (CAD)
Ugdg Spec TS 19-5/25 19.2.6 Schedule Of Screed/Rendering (Cont'd)

Remarks
Accommodation
Location Display Area Preparation Area
Prepacked Waterproof Screed
Prepacked Screed * *
Grade 25 Concrete Screed
Self Levelling Screed
Market produce Lock-Up Shop
Toilet
Toilet
Wet Market
Bin Area
Eating House
Switch Room Refreshment Area Stall (Preparation & Serving Area) Toilet/Bath/WC Wash Area Bin Area Room & Store
* * * * * * *
Waterproof screed shall be used where the shop is at the nd 2 storey & above Waterproof screed shall be used where the wet market is at nd the 2 storey & above Waterproof screed shall be used where the eating house nd is at the 2 storey & above Waterproof screed shall be used where the restaurant is nd at the 2 storey & above
Restaurant
Kitchen & Toilet
Service Area
*Denotes the specified screed/rendering.
Provided always that where the SO Rep is of the opinion that the conditions of the existing areas to be laid with self-levelling screed are such that the self-levelling screed may not be suitable and reasonably fit for the purpose for which it is required, the SO Rep may direct the Contractor to remove the existing floor finish of the said areas and lay it with Grade 25 concrete screed. The Contractor is deemed to have included in the Contract Sum all costs and expenses that may be incurred for the compliance with this requirement. 19.3 19.3.1 WATERPROOFING MEMBRANE AT BATHROOM/TOILET AND/OR KITCHEN AND/OR SERVICE BALCONY Scope of Work Where the existing floor finishes at the bathroom/toilet and/or kitchen and/or service balcony have to be removed and new tiles are to be laid or where floor tiles are to be laid on new Bath/WC and/or service balcony, the Contractor shall allow for the provision and laying of a waterproofing system in the aforementioned areas. The waterproofing system shall be applied over the entire floor of the bathroom/toilet and over areas of the kitchen floor where existing floor finishes are hacked off or removed in the course of the Works. The waterproofing system shall be carried 200mm up the walls and also to the top surface of the kerb. In the kitchen and service balcony, the waterproofing system shall be applied around water outlets. Application shall be limited to a radius of 400mm from the centre of the outlets unless otherwise stated.
UG03/S19.DOC(5) (LKK)(15122002) (CAD)
Ugdg Spec TS 19-6/25 19.3.2 Specification Of The Waterproofing Membrane The flexible non-cementitious (water-based) waterproofing membrane or other approved water-based waterproofing membrane shall comply with the following performance and/or product specifications when subject to laboratory testing : S/N 1. Characteristics/ Properties Testing Method Specifications Polymer which undergoes hydrolysis shall not be used
Verification of base polymer FTIR, DTA and TGA
2.
Volatile content Resistance to water penetration; 0.2 Kg/cm for 12 hrs (3 specimens are to be cured for 3 days); Observe : Depth of penetration (mm) Adhesion to substrate (after 3-day cure) -(N/mm2 ); condition as at cast; water immersion Tensile strength (N/mm) after 3-day cure - Before aging - After aging at 50 C, 14 days - Change in tensile strength (%) - After immersion in the following chemicals for 72 hrs. at room temp: a) 0.5% (v/v) NaOCl, change in tensile strength (%) b) 1.25% (v/v) NH4OH, change in tensile strength (%) c) 3.70% (v/v) HCl, Change in tensile strength (%)
TGA
< 50%
3.
DIN 1048, Pt 5: 1991 (HDB METHOD)
Depth of penetration shall be 0
4.
ASTM D4541:93
0.2 N/mm
5.
1.2 N/mm2 ) ) ) ) ) ) ) ) ) ) ) ) ) ) ) ) ) ) ) )
ASTM D412 : 98a
Value 1.0 N/mm2 & -ve change 20% no limit for +ve change
UG03/S19.DOC(6) (LKK)(15122002) (CAD)
Ugdg Spec TS 19-7/25 19.3.2 Specification Of The Waterproofing Membrane (Cont'd) S/N 6. Characteristics/Properties Elongation at Break (%) after 3-day cure - Before Aging - After Aging at 50oC, 14 days, Change in Tensile Strength (%) - After immersion in the following chemicals for 72hrs at room temp: a) 0.5% (v/v) NaOCl, Change in Elongation at break (%) b) 1.25% (v/v) NH4OH, change in elongation at break (%) c) 3.7% (v/v) HCl, change in Elongation at break (%) Testing Method Specifications 150%
ASTM D412 : 98
) ) ) ) ) ) ) ) ) ) ) ) ) ) ) ) a) b)
Value 120 % and -ve change 20% no limit for +ve change
Crack Bridging Hardness (after 2- hour cure) -(Shore A) Set to touch dry testing
ASTM C836 : 95 ASTM D2240 : 95 ASTM D1640 : 89
8 9 Notes:
No cracking at 2mm width No cracks after 10 cycles of stretching and closing to a width of 1mm. 30
Shall touch dry within 60 min.
1. 2.
The concrete test block for the application of membrane under ASTM 412 (98a) and 2 ASTM C836 (95) shall have a compressive strength of 40 5N per mm . The thickness of the membrane applied for the testing shall be equal to or less than the recommended thickness. It shall not deviate more than 0.2mm from the recommended thickness.
Where the waterproofing membrane span across any joint which is likely to crack, the waterproofing membrane shall be reinforced. To ensure compatibility with the waterproofing membrane, the reinforcement shall form an integral part of the proprietary system for the flexible water-based waterproofing membrane.
UG03/S19.DOC(7) (LKK)(15122002) (CAD)
Ugdg Spec TS 19-8/25 19.3.3 Application And Preparation Of Surface Where the existing floor finishes at the bathroom/toilet and/or kitchen and/or service balcony have to be removed, the Contractor shall ensure that the underlying concrete slab is not damaged. The Contractor shall use only approved tools for the removal or hacking works. At locations where sanitary pipes and/or floor traps penetrated the concrete slab, the Contractor shall carefully remove the concrete or mortar in-fill around such penetrations to a depth of about 40mm and to a width of about 100mm from the pipe surface. The resultant depression surrounding the pipe penetrations shall be filled with approved non-shrink grout. The non-shrink grout shall, at the same time, also be laid over the entire floor of the bathroom/toilet floor to achieve a level surface to receive the waterproofing membrane. The Contractor shall ensure that all concrete surfaces are free from dust and laitance before laying the non-shrink grout. Prior to the laying of the waterproofing membrane, the Contractor shall ensure that the surface receiving it is free from dust and laitance and is well wetted but without any stagnant water. All seepage of water from adjacent bath and/or toilet shall be stopped by the use of water-plug. 45 degrees mortar fillet with about 10mm leg length shall be formed to the edge between the floor and wall or pipe. The Contractor shall apply the waterproofing membrane in two coats. The waterproofing membrane, if packed in a two-part system, shall be mechanically mixed with a proper mixer. The method of application and the curing time between the two coats shall be in accordance with the manufacturers instruction and/or recommendations. The Contractor shall provide measuring gauges for the SO Rep to check on site the wet film thickness of the membrane at the time of application. The Contractor shall allow adequate time for the waterproofing to cure in accordance with the manufacturers instructions and/or recommendations before the laying of the approved pre-packed waterproof screed as specified under Clause 19.2.1. The Contractor shall take all necessary measures to protect the waterproofing membrane from damage during the screeding of the floor.
UG03/S19.DOC(8) (LKK)(15122002) (CAD)
Ugdg Spec TS 19-9/25 19.4 CERAMIC FLOOR TILES (COMMON AREAS AND NON-RESIDENTIAL UNITS) Where existing floor tiles or screeding are to be removed and retiled, the Contractor shall chisel off the existing floor tiles and/or screed completely and clean the exposed surfaces thoroughly before laying the new tiles. 19.4.1 General (a) Location and Extent Provide and lay structure/texture, glazed and unglazed ceramic floor tiles to common areas, nonresidential units and to any locations specified in the subclause Schedule of Ceramic Floor Tiles hereunder and at other locations as shown in the Drawings. Where specified, provide and fix 400mm x 80mm x 8mm thick or other approved matching glazed skirting tiles to access balcony, columns and walls at the void deck. The skirting tile shall be roundedged at one of the length. The Contractor shall submit a full range of colour glazed skirting tiles for the approval of the SO Rep. (b) Inconsistent Sizes In the event that the ceramic floor tiles delivered to the Site are inconsistent in sizes but fall within the allowable tolerances as specified in this Clause including all subclauses under it, the tiles shall be sorted out into separate groups of compatible sizes to the satisfaction of the SO Rep. Tiles of one size group shall be laid in one area separate from tiles belonging to other size groups. 19.4.2 Approved Ceramic Floor Tiles The type of ceramic floor tiles provided by the Contractor as specified in this clause including all subclauses under it shall be subject to the approval of the SO Rep. The list of ceramic floor tiles is posted at HDB InfoWEB. The SO Rep shall have the absolute prerogative to select the type of tiles from the list of ceramic floor tiles for such locations as specified and no adjustment to the Contract Sum shall be made. Notwithstanding any approval by the SO Rep, the Contractor shall ensure that all such ceramic floor tiles for such locations as specified comply with the requirements as specified in this clause including all subclauses under it. 19.4.3 Testing Requirements (a) Test Samples And Methods All test samples shall be randomly chosen from the same batch of delivery by the SO Rep. The test methods shall be in accordance with SS 483 unless otherwise stated. (b) Test Certificate And Compliance Requirement Provide test certificates by a testing laboratory accredited under SINGLAS to cover the tests mentioned in this clause and all other tests mentioned in the testing schedule. 19.4.4 Technical Specifications Dimensional and surface quality requirements and physical and chemical properties shall be accordance with Table A unless otherwise stated : Table A : Requirements Compliance Type of tile (a) (b) (c) Structure/Texture Tile Glazed Tile Unglazed Tile SS 483 : 2000 Annex G Annex J Annex H
UG03/S19.DOC(9) (LKK)(15122002) (CAD)
Ugdg Spec TS 19-10/25 19.4.4 Technical Specifications (Contd) (a) Dimensions The dimensions shall be as follows : Nominal Length Structure/Texture Tile Glazed Tile Unglazed Tile 300mm 200mm 200mm Nominal Width 300mm 200mm 200mm Nominal Thickness 9mm 8mm 8mm
The dimensional tolerances shall be in accordance to the following : Structure/ Texture Tile Length The deviation, in %, of the average length of each tile from the average length of 10 test specimens. Glazed Tile Unglazed Tile
Not more than 0.6%
Not more than 0.75%
Not more than 0.75%
Width The deviation, in %, of the average width of each tile from the average width of 10 test specimens.
Not more than 0.6%
Not more than 0.75%
Not more than 0.75%
Thickness The deviation, in %, of the average thickness of each tile from the average thickness of 10 test specimens.
Not more than 5%
Not more than 5%
Not more than 5%
(b)
Surface Quality The tiles shall be free from objectionable surface blemishes such as projections, depressions, flakes, hairline cracks and bubbles. The tiles shall be level and regular in size with properly formed corners and shall not be warped or deformed in any manner.
(c)
Physical Properties Structure/Texture Tile Water Absorption Percent by mass Max of 0.5% Glazed Tile Max of 6 % Unglazed Tile Max of 1%
UG03/S19.DOC(10) (LKK)(15122002) (CAD)
Ugdg Spec TS 19-11/25 19.4.4 Technical Specifications (Contd) (d) Chemical Properties (i) Staining Test : The procedure for carrying out the test is as follows : Allow 3 or 4 drops of each of the test solutions (Methylene blue solution, 10g/L and Potassium permanganate solution, 10g/L), to fall on a fresh part of the test specimen. Place an approximately 30mm diameter convex watch glass on the applied drop in order to spread it to an approximately circular area. Allow to remain for 24 hours and then rinse the surface with running water and wipe with a damp cloth. If a stain remains, thoroughly clean with a solution of the standard cleaning agent. Performance Criteria The stain on the test specimen shall be able to be cleaned by cleaning solution. (ii) Slip Resistance : The Slip resistance test method shall be in accordance with SS 485:2001. Performance Criteria The test shall be conducted under wet conditions using a pendulum friction test method with a classification of X. The test shall also be conducted under dry condition using dry floor friction test method with a coefficient of friction of minimum 0.4. (iii) Reverse Staining Test (for Glazed Tile only) : The procedure for carrying out the test is as follows : (a) Five full pieces of tiles shall be selected and checked to ensure that there are no Defect or damages. The tiles shall also be checked for signs of tonality difference. Dry the tiles in a ventilating oven at 105oC for 48 hours. With the top or glazed surface facing downwards, pond the biscuit (ie. back of the tile) with potable water over a circular area of 50mm diameter and with a water height of 25mm. At interval of every 5 minutes, inspect with the naked eye or prescription glasses if usually worn and under sufficient light intensity (> 300 lux), the top or glazed surface for signs of dark patches up to a total ponding duration of 30 minutes. Repeat the aforementioned test on another five pieces of tiles but using methylene blue solution diluted at 2g of methylene blue per litre. Performance Criteria The tiles shall not show any sign of dark patches on the top or glazed surfaces.
(b) (c)
(d)
(e)
UG03/S19.DOC(11) (LKK)(15122002) (CAD)
Ugdg Spec TS 19-12/25 19.4.5 Schedule Of Ceramic Floor Tiles Where specified, provide and lay ceramic floor tiles to locations as tabulated in the Schedule below including any other areas not listed in this Schedule but as shown in the Drawings. Accommodation Wash Area Refuse Chute Chamber Upper Floor Lift Lobby Common Areas Ground Floor Lift Lobby Access Balcony Void Deck Utility Room At Ground Floor Lift Lobby Toilet Adjoining Utility Room Stall (Preparation And Serving Area) Refreshment Area Eating House Toilet/Bath/W.C Bin Area Preparation Slab Wash Area Shoplet, Lock-Up Shop Market Produce Shop, Market Produce, Lock-Up Shop Toilet/Bath/W.C Display Area Bin Area Preparation Area Toilet Toilet Mini-Market Restaurant Bin Area Floor Toilet *Denotes the specified tile 19.4.6 Laying of Floor Tiles The lift lobby, wash area, void deck and access balcony including the scupper drains shall be tiled. The structured/textured ceramic floor tiles shall be laid to fall evenly towards water outlets. Movement joints shall be provided at appropriate locations and approved by the SO Rep. Movement joints shall be provided at not more than 6m centres. UPVC expansion/movement joints shall be used and its colour shall match the floor tiles and approved by the SO Rep. Provide complete set of workshop drawings showing the laying pattern of floor tiles and/or wall tiles of void deck, lift lobbies and access balconies, wash areas and other locations where tiling work is indicated. The workshop drawings shall include plans, elevations, detailed section and other relevant details required by the SO Rep. These drawings shall be submitted to the SO Rep for approval prior to the laying of floor tiles and/or wall tiles. * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * Location Structured / Textured tiles * * Unglazed tiles Glazed tiles
UG03/S19.DOC(12) (LKK)(15122002) (CAD)
Ugdg Spec TS 19-13/25 19.5 CERAMIC FLOOR TILES TO KITCHEN, KITCHEN/DINING, UTILITY ROOM KITCHEN EXTENSION, SERVICE BALCONY, COURTYARD, BATH/WC AND WC General (a) Location And Extent Provide and lay ceramic floor tiles conforming to all the requirements as specified in this Clause including all sub-clauses under it and at such locations specified in the sub-clause "Schedule Of Ceramic Floor Tiles To Kitchen Extension, Bedroom Extension, Living Room Extension, New Living Room's Balcony, Utility Room, Service Balcony, Courtyard and Bath/WC" hereunder and/ or as shown in the Drawings (b) Inconsistent Sizes The tiles shall be sorted out at the factory into two size groups with each size group having the size range of 1 mm. Tiles of one size group shall be laid in one area separate from tiles belonging to other size group. There shall be clear indication of the size group in the tile boxes. This is required even if the sizes are within the dimensional tolerance allowed for the production variations spelt out in the subclause Technical Specifications specified hereunder. 19.5.2 Approved Ceramic Floor Tiles The type of ceramic floor tiles provided by the Contractor as specified in this clause including all subclauses under it shall be subject to the approval of the SO Rep. The list of ceramic floor tiles is posted at the HDB InfoWeb. The SO Rep shall have the absolute prerogative to select the type of tiles from the list of ceramic floor tiles for such locations as specified and no adjustment to the Contract Sum shall be made. Notwithstanding any approval by the SO Rep, the Contractor shall ensure that all such ceramic floor tiles for such locations as specified comply with the requirements as specified in this clause including all subclauses under it. The colour of ceramic floor tiles for such locations as specified in the schedule of the said subclause shall be BLUE and/or PINK and/or BEIGE and/or GREY. Provide samples of ceramic floor tiles with the colour range as specified for selection and approval by the SO Rep. 19.5.3 Testing Requirements (a) Test Samples And Methods All test samples shall be randomly chosen from the same batch of delivery by the SO Rep. The test methods shall be in accordance with SS 483 : 2000 ( Annex J ) unless otherwise stated. (b) Test Certificate And Compliance Requirement Provide test certificates by a testing laboratory accredited under SINGLAS to cover the tests mentioned in this clause and all other tests mentioned in the testing schedule.
19.5.1
UG03/S19.DOC(13) (LKK)(15122002) (CAD)
Ugdg Spec TS 19-14/25 19.5.4 Technical Specifications Dimensional and surface quality requirements and physical and chemical properties shall be accordance with SS 483 : 2000 ( Annex J ) unless otherwise stated : (a) Dimensions The dimensions shall be as follows : Nominal Length Nominal Width Thickness and/or Nominal Length Nominal Width Thickness : 200mm : 200mm : 8mm : : : 300mm 300mm 9mm
and/or as directed by the SO Rep The dimensional tolerances shall be as follows : (i) Length Average length of each tile shall not deviate by more than 1mm from the average length of 10 test specimens. Average width of each tile shall not deviate by more than 1mm from the average width of 10 test specimens. Average thickness of each tile shall not deviate by more than 5% from the average thickness of 10 test specimens.
(ii) Width (iii) Thickness (b) Surface Quality
The tiles shall be free from objectionable surface blemishes such as projections, depressions, flakes, hairline cracks and bubbles. The tiles shall be level and regular in size with properly formed corners and shall not be warped or deformed in any manner. (c) Physical Properties (i) Water Absorption Shall be a maximum of 6% Minimum average strength shall not be less than 22 N per sq.mm. Not less than 1000 N The colour tone of the tiles shall be consistent. The SO Rep reserves the right to reject tiles that show colour tone variation including such tiles that have already been laid.
(ii) Modulus Of Rupture (iii) Breaking Strength (iv) Colour Tone
UG03/S19.DOC(14) (LKK)(15122002) (CAD)
Ugdg Spec TS 19-15/25 19.5.4 Technical Specifications (Cont'd) (d) Chemical Properties (i) Staining Test The procedure for carrying out the test is as follows : Allow 3 or 4 drops of each of the test solutions (Methylene blue solution, 10g/L and Potassium permanganate solution, 10g/L), to fall on a fresh part of the test specimen. Place an approximately 30mm diameter convex watch glass on the applied drop in order to spread it to an approximately circular area. Allow to remain for 24 hours and then rinse the surface with running water and wipe with a damp cloth. If a stain remains, thoroughly clean with a solution of the standard cleaning agent. Performance Criteria Location Methylene Blue Kitchen Class 1 Class 2 Bath/WC Class 2 Potassium Permanganate Class 2
Where ; Class 1 = Stain removed by water; Class 2 = Stain removed by cleaning agent. (ii) Slip Resistance (for Bath/WC only) Slip resistant properties shall be required and test carried out for ceramic floor tiles to bath/WC. The slip resistance test method shall be in accordance with SS 485:2001. The test shall be conducted under wet conditions using a pendulum friction test method with a classification of X. The test shall also be conducted under dry condition using dry floor friction test method with a coefficient of friction of minimum 0.4. (iii) Slip Resistance (for kitchen and service yard)) The slip resistance test method shall be in accordance with SS 485:2001. The test shall be conducted under wet conditions using a pendulum friction test method with a classification of Y The test shall also be conducted under dry condition using dry floor friction test method with a coefficient of friction of minimum 0.4. Minimum GB
(iv)
Resistance to household chemicals
UG03/S19.DOC(15) (LKK)(15122002) (CAD)
Ugdg Spec TS 19-16/25 19.5.4 (d) Chemical Properties (Contd) (v) Reverse Staining Test The procedure for carrying out the test is as follows : (a) Five full pieces of tiles shall be selected and checked to ensure that there are no Defect or damages. The tiles shall also be checked for signs of tonality difference.
o Dry the tiles in a ventilating oven at 105 C for 48 hours.
(b) (c)
With the top or glazed surface facing downwards, pond the biscuit (ie. back of the tile) with potable water over a circular area of 50mm diameter and with a water height of 25mm. At interval of every 5 minutes, inspect with the naked eye or prescription glasses if usually worn and under sufficient light intensity (> 300 lux), the top or glazed surface for signs of dark patches up to a total ponding duration of 30 minutes. Repeat the aforementioned test on another five pieces of tiles but using methylene blue solution diluted at 2g of methylene blue per litre. Performance Criteria The tiles shall not show any sign of dark patches on the top or glazed surfaces.
(d)
(e)
19.5.5
Schedule Of Ceramic Floor Tiles To Kitchen Extension, Bedroom Extension, Living Room Extension, New Living Room's Balcony, Utility Room, Service Balcony, Courtyard and Bath/WC Where specified, provide and lay ceramic floor tiles to locations as shown in the Schedule tabulated below and including any other locations not listed in this Schedule but as shown in the Drawings. Glazed 200 x 200 x 8mm (Nominal Size) * * * * * * * * * * * * * Glazed 300 x 300 x 9mm (Nominal Size) *
Accommodation
Location Kitchen Extension Utility Room
1-Room, 2-Room, 3-Room, 4-Room, 5-Room, Executive Apartment, Rental Flat
Bedroom Extension Service Balcony Courtyard Bath/WC Living Room Extension New Living Rooms Balcony Rental (Kitchen/Living)
*Denotes the specified tile and/or approved by SO Rep. For the bath/ wc, flat owners shall be given a choice of Slip Resistant Tiles in accordance with Clause 19.5.4(d)(ii) or Non-slip Resistant Tiles. There shall be no adjustment to the Contract Sum arising from the flat owners choices of either Slip Resistant or Non-slip Resistant floor tiles.
UG03/S19.DOC(16) (LKK)(15122002) (CAD)
Ugdg Spec TS 19-17/25 19.5.6 Skirting Tiles to Utility Room, Service Balcony, Bedroom Extension, Living Room Extension, New Living Room's Balcony And Courtyard Where specified, provide and fix 400mm x 80mm x 8mm or 300mm x 80mm x 8mm thick matching glazed skirting tiles to utility room, service balcony, bedroom extension, living room extension, new living room's balcony and courtyard as shown in the Drawings. The skirting shall be round-edged at one of the length. The Contractor shall submit a full range of colour glazed skirting tiles for the approval of the SO Rep. 19.6 19.6.1 LAYING OF CERAMIC FLOOR TILES Workshop Drawings Provide complete set of workshop Drawings showing the laying pattern of ceramic floor tiles and wall tiles in kitchen, kitchen/dining, bath/wc, courtyard and other locations where tiling work is indicated. The workshop Drawings shall include plans, elevations, detailed section and other relevant details required by the SO Rep. These Drawings shall be submitted to the SO Rep for approval prior to the laying of ceramic floors tiles, ceramic wall tiles and pattern colour glazed wall tiles. The ceramic floor tiles shall be laid with the joints to coincide with the joints of wall tiles. 19.6.2 Pre-Packed Mortar Screed Approved pre-packed screed and waterproof screed shall be used for all floor screeding required or floor tiling, as shown in the schedule for rendering/screeding in Clause 19.2.6 "Schedule of Screed/Rendering". The pre-packed screed and pre-packed waterproof screed shall be mechanically mixed with the right amount of water as specified by the manufacturer. The pre-packed floor screed and pre-packed waterproof screed shall comply with the performance specified in Clause 19.2.1 Pre-Packed Mortar Screed. The pre-packed floor screed and pre-packed waterproof screed shall comply with the following performance when subjected to the specified laboratory testing : 19.6.3 Workmanship Lay ceramic floor tiles with tile joints coinciding with the joints of wall tiles and to the approval of the SO Rep. The tiles shall be laid to form an even and flat finished surface, with consistent joint width. Where there is a water outlet, the floor tiles shall be laid to fall evenly towards the water outlet. Each tile shall be fully bonded to the floor rendering without hollow sound upon tapping. The Contractor shall use tile spacers for laying of floor tiles to achieve consistent joint width. The tile spacers to be used shall be subjected to the approval of the SO Rep before the commencement of the tiling Works.
UG03/S19.DOC(17) (LKK)(15122002) (CAD)
Ugdg Spec TS 19-18/25 19.6.4 Storage and Protection All tiles shall be handled with care to avoid breakage and chipping. They shall be stored in their original packaging in a clean, dry area to avoid damage and contamination. The contractor shall provide temporary polyethylene sheet or other protective material to cover the whole finished floor to protect it against damage or staining by cement and plaster splashing or dropping and all other subsequent trades. The protective material must be sufficiently thick, impermeable to water and non-staining in wet and dry conditions. It shall also be tough so that it cannot be torn or punctured easily on site. The protective material shall be provided immediately during and after laying of tiles. Prior to laying of the protective material, the contractor shall carefully inspect the finished floor and ensure that the tiling is completed with the workmanship to the SO Rep satisfaction. All tiled areas shall be thoroughly cleaned before laying of the protective material. The contractor shall be required to carry out regular maintenance to ensure that the protection is firmly in place and in serviceable condition at all times. The protective material shall be removed until such time that all other works have been completed and the building is ready for handover. 19.6.5 Inspection Prior to the commencement of tiling works, carefully inspect the installed work of all other trades and verify that all such works are complete up to the point that tiling can properly commence. 19.6.6 Mortar Bed (i) Waterproofing System to Bath/WC and Kitchen Extension, Service Balcony and Courtyard After the waterproof membrane is applied to the floor and is cured sufficiently, prepacked waterproof screed of minimum 10mm shall be laid to the membrane as protection layer against damage from other trades Before floor tiling, the surface shall be swept clean of any sand, loose mortar, grease and dirt. Lay prepacked waterproof screed to form the mortar bed to the required level with a fall evenly towards the water outlet as specified in the Drawings. The mortar bed shall be cured for at least 3 days before laying the tiles. (ii) Floor Tiling At Areas Without Waterproofing Prepare the concrete surface to be clean of any sand, loose mortar, grease and dirt. Lay prepacked mortar mix to form the mortar bed to the required level with a fall evenly towards the water outlet where specified in the Drawings. The mortar bed shall be allowed to cure for at least 3 days before laying the tiles. 19.6.7 Bedding Mortar For Fixing of Floor Tiles within Flats The floor tiles shall be fixed to the mortar bed with bedding mortar one part fine sand with two parts cement. Prior to laying the floor tiles, the bedding mortar shall be applied thinly to the mortar bed. The spreading of bedding mortar to the mortar bed shall not exceed one square metre in each application. In laying the tiles, the bedding mortar shall be spread uniformly over the back of each tiles to a thickness of about 2mm taking care to fill deep keys, frogs and all remaining depressions. Sand for the bedding mortar shall be cleaned and free of foreign materials and comply with the following grading requirement : BS 410 sieve mesh size 2.36mm 1.18mm 0.6mm 0.3mm 0.15mm 0.075mm Percentage by mass passing the BS sieve % (mm) 100 90 100 80 100 30- 100 0 60 Not greater than 5
UG03/S19.DOC(18) (LKK)(15122002) (CAD)
Ugdg Spec TS 19-19/25 19.6.8 Tile Adhesive (Normal Set) For Floor Tile in Common Areas of Housing Blocks The Contractor shall use pre-approved tile adhesive and shall submit the brand and method of application to the SO Rep for approval prior to the commencement of the tiling Works. The tile adhesive shall be applied onto the surface of floor tile screed then notch-trowelled to a finishes thickness not exceeding the manufacturers recommendation. The area of application shall not exceed 2. 1m in each application. The tile adhesive shall also be spread uniformly over the back of each tile, taking care to fill deep keys and all remaining depressions. The tile shall then be placed into the position within the specified open time and be tapped firmly into position to ensure that each tile is made fully contact over the whole area. The tile adhesive shall be stored and used in accordance with the manufacturers instructions. The normal set tile adhesive shall comply with the following requirements : S/N 1 2 3 4 Characteristics Tensile Adhesion Bond Strength Tensile Adhesion Bond Strength (After Water Immersion) Tensile Adhesion Bond Strength (After Heat Aging) Open Time Test Method EN 1348 : 1999 EN 1348 : 1999 EN 1348 : 1999 EN 1346 : 1999 (using tile as specified in EN 1346) EN 12002 : 2002 Performance Criteria 7 days 0.3 N/mm2 28 days 1.0 N/mm2 28 days 1.0 N/mm2 At 28 days 1.0 N/mm2 Circulating oven: 70 C 2 C for 14 days => 0.5 N/mm2 after not less than 30 mins After 28 days storage under standard conditions 2.5mm (minimum)
5 19.6.9
Deformity
Grouting To Tile Joints Approved tile grouts shall be used to fill the joints between floor and wall tiles. They shall be used in all floor and wall tiling works at flats and common areas except water tanks. The grouts shall have good working characteristics, low shrinkage and good adhesion to the sides of the joints. They shall be suited for the width of the joints and intended use of the tiling application. The contractor shall submit the brand and method of application to the SO Rep for approval prior to the commencement of the work. The contractor shall submit samples of the grouts to the SO Rep for selection of colours to match the tiling works.
19.6.9.1
Material The proprietary grouts shall be modified by the inclusion of various polymer additives. They shall be easy to prepare, apply and clean up at the Site. A sample for each type of grouts shall be taken at the Site and tested at an accredited laboratory according to the following requirements : a) Tile grout for joint width up to 4mm S/N 1 2 3 4 5 Characteristics Shrinkage Water absorption Compressive strength (After dry storage) Abrasion resistance Flexural strength (After dry storage) Test Method EN 12808-4 EN 12808-5 EN 12808-3 EN 12808-2 EN 12808-3 Performance Criteria 2 mm/m 2g (after 30 min) 5g (after 240 min) 15 N per mm minimum 35 N per mm maximum 2000 mm3 3.5N per mm
UG03/S19.DOC(19) (LKK)(15122002) (CAD)
Ugdg Spec TS 19-20/25 19.6.9.1 Material b) Tile grout for joint width above 4mm S/N 1 2 Characteristics Shrinkage Water absorption Test Method EN 12808-4 EN 12808-5 Performance Criteria 2 mm/m 2g (after 30 min) 5g (after 240 min) 15 N per mm minimum 35 N per mm maximum 1000 mm3 3.5N per mm
Compressive strength (After dry storage) Abrasion resistance Flexural strength (After dry storage)
EN 12808-3
4 5
EN 12808-2 EN 12808-3
The grouts shall be light-fast and colour-fast. Their colours shall not fade or show inconsistent tones for the whole tiling Works. 19.6.9.2 Application The proprietary grouts shall be stored and used in accordance with the manufacturers instructions. The potential risk of staining shall be verified by applying the grout to a few tiles in a small trial area. Coloured grouts shall be cleaned off promptly in accordance with the manufacturers instructions as they may be difficult to be removed from matt glazed tiles, tiles with textured surfaces and some unglazed tiles. i. ii. iii. iv. v. vi. vii. The grouting shall commence within 7 days upon completion of tile fixing; Ensure all building dust and debris are removed from the open joints; Mechanically mix the grout in accordance with the manufacturers instructions; Spread the grout with a rubber squeegee or grouting trowel, working back and forth over the area until the joints are completely filled; Remove surplus grout from the tiles with the aid of a rubber squeegee or grouting trowel and a damp, not wet, cloth; Tool the joints with a piece of wood or other material of suitable size and shape; After the grout has dried, the tile surface shall be cleaned and given a final polish using a clean, dry cloth.
All grout joints shall be uniformly finished. Cushion edge tiles shall be finished evenly to the depth of the cushion.
UG03/S19.DOC(20) (LKK)(15122002) (CAD)
Ugdg Spec TS 19-21/25 19.6.11 Other Materials Any other material not specifically described but required for a complete and proper laying of ceramic floor tiles shall be provided by the Contractor at its own cost and expense, but subject to the approval of the SO Rep. 19.6.12 Cleaning Up Upon completion of grouting, thoroughly clean all exposed surfaces of the ceramic tiles. The tiles shall be thoroughly cleaned before the handing over. The contractor shall use tile-cleaning agents to clean all finished surfaces. The tile cleaner shall be effective blend of penetrants which could instantly penetrate deep into mortar and scale on tiles surfaces and remove the mortar completely. The tile cleaner shall be safe to use and does not harm or burn the skin. The tile cleaner shall be prepared and used according to the manufacturers instructions. 19.6.13 Damage and Replacement In the event of any damage to the new and existing ceramic tiles and accessories, the Contractor shall immediately make all repairs and replacements necessary to the satisfaction of the SO Rep all at the Contractors costs. Where the new tile is laid next to the existing tile in the kitchen/ utility room/ service balcony/ front balcony etc, the Contractor shall limit the replacement up to the first course adjacent to it. 19.7 TESTING TOOLS FOR TILING WORK The Contractor shall provide a retractable tapping rod to each clerk-of-works and the SO Rep for detecting hollowness in tiling works during and on completion of the tiling works. The retractable tapping rod shall have a solid steel ball of 15mm diameter rigidly attached to one end. When fully extended, the tapping rod shall have a length of about 630mm and possesses adequate rigidity for tapping the tiles. When the rod sections collapse, the tapping rod shall be about 130mm long. A pocket clip shall be provided on the rod. 19.8 Testing Of Tensile Pull-Out Strength On Floor Tiles In Common Areas The Contractor shall conduct tensile pull-out tests on floor tiles in common areas according to the Schedule Of Material Tests. Each test shall determine the tensile pull-out strengths of five randomly selected pieces of tiles at any location within a room. The joint around the tile shall be cut to the depth of the joint before the pull-out test. The test shall be conducted within 21 to 28 days after fixing the tiles. The average tensile pull-out strength of the 5 tiles tested shall achieve a minimum of 0.20 N per mm2. In 2 addition, the individual tensile pull-out strength of each tile shall not be less than 0.16 N per mm . 19.9 19.9.1 SELF-LEVELLING SCREED Over-Riding Clause The Contractor and his Specialist executing the works as required in this Section have to ensure that the works, goods or materials used shall be suitable and reasonably fit for the purposes for which they are required (hereinafter referred as "Performance Requirement"). In the event the works, goods or materials to be used as specified in this Section are upgraded in order to meet the Performance Requirement, the Contractor and his Specialist shall do all necessary upgrading at no extra cost to the Employer, subject always to the approval of the SO Rep, but such approval shall not in any way affect the Contractor's and his Specialist's duties or obligations arising under the Contract.
UG03/S19.DOC(21) (LKK)(15122002) (CAD)
Ugdg Spec TS 19-22/25 19.9.2 Materials The Contractor shall install either one of the following self-levelling screed systems listed under the HDB List of Products and Suppliers subject to the approval of the SO Rep: System A : 6mm polymer-modified cementitious screed and silane-siloxane resin penetrating sealer. System B : 3mm acrylic polymer-modified cementitious screed and water-borne polyurethane or acrylic polymer cementitious topcoat. (a) Screed Material Both self-levelling screed systems shall comply with the performance requirements specified in subclause 19.9.3 Test Properties And Test Methods. The material packaging shall be printed with details approved by the SO Rep, including Batch No. Manufacturer Date, Expiry Date, Polymer Content, Pot Life, and Mix Proportions. (b) Penetrating Sealer/Topcoat For System A, penetrating sealer shall be of water-based, colour-less, non-film forming silanesiloxane silicon resin or other active compounds. The penetrating sealer shall be fully compatible with the self-levelling screed material, be able to penetrate deeply into the screed surface, and to repel contaminants and thus protecting the finished surface against staining from olive oil, coffee with milk, used engine oil, black rubber hose or other staining agents. The penetrating sealer shall not be diluted on site by solvent or any other liquid. For System B, the completely cured topcoat is to provide protection for the finished surface against staining from olive oil, coffee with milk, used engine oil, black rubber hose or other staining agents. The topcoat shall not be diluted on site. 19.9.3 Test Properties And Test Methods All tests must be performed by a testing laboratory accredited by SINGLAS in accordance with the test methods and in compliance with the Performance Requirement as specified in Table 1 or in the HDB List of Products and Suppliers. The testing sampling and frequency shall be conducted in accordance with the Schedule of Material Tests provided in the Contract. (a) Work-In-Process Stage The SO Rep shall obtain random samples for either System A or B during application for compliance test. The Contractor shall submit the selected samples to a laboratory accredited by SINGLAS for the following tests: (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) Abrasion resistance (after Thermal Aging) Shrinkage (after QUV Weathering) Slip resistance (after Thermal Aging) Resistance to stains Silane-Siloxane or other approved active compounds content for penetrating sealer. Fourier Transformed Infrared Spectrophotometric Anaylsis (FTIR) for topcoat.
The slip resistance and resistance to stains shall be carried out after treatment with penetrating sealer or topcoat. For System B, the test results of FTIR shall match the chemical thumbprint of the topcoat established during the application for listing under HDB List of Products and Supp
UG03/S19.DOC(22) (LKK)(15122002) (CAD)
Ugdg Spec TS 19-23/25 19.9.3 Test Properties And Test Methods (Contd) (b) Post-Work Stage The Contractor shall carry out in-situ testing for slip resistance and tensile adhesion bond strength for System A or B at the location to be decided by the SO Rep. The Contractor shall carry out in-situ surface penetration depth on the sealed finished screed for System A at the location to be decided by the SO Rep. Table 1 Performance Requirements of Self-Levelling Screed System A & B S/N 1 PROPERTY /TEST Flowability Water Absorption (After 7 Days Air Curing followed by 14 Days Circulating Thermal Aging @ 70 2 0C) Abrasion Resistance ( After 7 days air curing followed by 14 days circulating thermal aging @ 70 + 2 C ) Abrasion Resistance Tensile Adhesion Bond Strength Shrinkage / Visual cracks (After 100 cycles of Alternating UVA Heating to 60 C for 4 hours and followed by 10 mins of intermittent spraying of water) Slip Resistance ( After 7 days air curing followed by 14 days circulating thermal 0 aging @ 70 + 2 C )
TEST METHOD ASTM C 939 :2002
ACCEPTANCE CRITERIA Flow Time 150 sec (Cementitious Screed Materials) Absorption 10 % (max) (After 30 minutes water immersion)
ASTM C 413 :2001
Concrete Abrasion Tester BS8204 Pt 2:2003 Use BS EN 13892-4:2002 Concrete Abrasion Tester; BS8204 Pt 2:2003 Use BS EN 13892-4:2002 BS8204 Pt 3:1993 (Annex B.2) Use BS 13892-8:2002
Wear Depth < 0.6 mm
4 5
Wear Depth < 0.5 mm Bond Strength > 1.0 N/mm2
ASTM C531:2000
a)Shrinkage / Expansion 0.05 % (max) b)No visible crack.
TRL Pendulum Slip Resistance Tester BS8204 Pt 2:2003 Use BS 7976-2:2002 TRL Pendulum Slip Resistance Tester BS8204 Pt 2:2003 Use BS 7976-2:2002 ISO 10545-14 (Staining agents include olive oil, coffee with milk, used engine oil, and black rubber hose )
SRV (wet) > 40
Slip Resistance
SRV (wet) > 40
Resistance to Stains
Class 4 or Class 5 Cleanability
UG03/S19.DOC(23) (LKK)(15122002) (CAD)
Ugdg Spec TS 19-24/25 19.9.3 Test Properties And Test Methods (Contd) The Silane-Siloxane or other approved active compounds content shall be 10% by weight (minimum). The average surface penetration depth for System A shall be 1.0mm(minimum). The finished floor screed shall have a grey tone falling within the range of Munsell N-Colour Series N-5.0 and N-6.5 or other similar colour chart as approved by the SO Rep. In the event of any non-compliance of the performance requirements, the Contractor shall have to make good or replace the non-compliance screed at his own costs and expenses to the satisfaction of the SO Rep. 19.9.4 Applications Method of application shall be as per suppliers specifications approved by the SO Rep and shall include the checking and rectification of existing unstable screed, placement of expansion joints, and installation of protective edge trims. The Contractor shall provide temporary access platforms of sufficient width for residents use at all times during the works in common areas or staircases. The access platforms shall be firmly secured without hindering the works operations. (a) Preparation Works and Surface Cleaning All existing areas to be re-screeded shall be checked for defects such as de-lamination, loose materials and structural cracks. Existing screeds that are loosened, hollowed, or bulged and delaminated of an area more than 0.5 m2 shall be repaired using epoxy injection method or other equivalent approved by the SO Rep. Areas having structural cracks are to be repaired as per Clause 34.6 Method of Structural Repairs. Expansion joints of approved material shall be installed at locations susceptible to cracking. Install approved UV stablised, high impact (min. 100 J/m Izod Impact Strength, ASTM D256-88) rigid UPVC edge trims to protect the floor screed edges at void decks before laying of screed material. The installation method and design profile of the edge trims shall be approved by the SO Rep. Existing main entrance gate, if obstructing the laying of self-levelling screed, shall be modified and/or adjusted to facilitate the re-screeding works. If adjustment or modification is not possible, a new gate equivalent to existing one is to be provided. All costs and expenses associated with the adjustment, modification, supply and installation of the gate shall be deemed to have been included in the contract. Scupper drains, to replace existing ones and be formed with pre-pack cement mortar at the corridor, landing and void deck areas, shall be constructed before priming and re-screeding commence. Where tile band/pattern is to be provided, the affected existing screed shall be roughened or removed to provide the necessary bond. The edges of tile band/pattern shall be finished to level with new screed to the required fall. The surface after preparation shall be clean, dry, and free of dust, dirt, oil grease, curing compounds, or previous coatings prior to the application of primer coat, self-levelling screed, or penetrating sealer/acrylic polymer cementitious topcoat. (b) Laying of Self-Levelling Screed A minimum 6 mm thick polymer modified cementitious for system A or 3mm acrylic polymer-modified cementitious screed for system B is to be laid over existing screed with a sufficiently cured primer coat. The screed should be laid to follow the gradient of existing screed or the gradient otherwise specified in the Drawings or by the SO Rep. The primer should suit the existing floor conditions, be compatible with the screed material and is capable of achieving the minimum tensile bond strength specified in subclause 19.9.3 Test Properties And Test Methods. The manufacturers instructions about the use and method of application shall be strictly followed. Place, spread and finish screed with the appropriate laying tools and continuity to prevent the formation of trowel marks, bubbles, or cold joints. The finished screed must gain sufficient strength for it to be opened to foot traffic within two hours after laying.
UG03/S19.DOC(24) (LKK)(15122002) (CAD)
Ugdg Spec TS 19-25/25 19.9.4 Applications (Contd) (c) Application of Sealer/Topcoat For System A, the new screed surface to be impregnated with penetrating sealer shall be sufficiently cured, clean and free of loose deleterious matters before application commences. Distribute penetrating sealer evenly by continuous spray or roller technique to give saturation flooding with a mirror wet look for a minimum 5 seconds. 2 saturated coats of sealer shall be applied wet on wet ie. second application needs to take place as soon as the first coat sealer has fully absorbed. For System B, the new screed surface to be coated with topcoat shall be sufficiently cured, clean and free of loose deleterious matters before application commences. The Contractor shall apply the topcoat in accordance to the manufacturers methods statement. 19.9.5 Warranty The Contractor and his Specialist shall warrant the Works on the terms and conditions as stipulated in Clause (Clause 59.2.) 'Provision of Warranty' and the specimen of Deed of Warranty as produced in Appendix (Appendix A1). In this respect, the Contractor and his Specialist shall submit such Deed of Warranty to the Employer or to such other party or such Town Council(s) as the SO Rep may at his sole discretion decide. In the event that the Deed of Warranty for part of the works or for the whole works is to be submitted to such Town Council(s), the Contractor and his Specialist shall submit such Deed of Warranty in accordance with the specimen of Deed of Warranty as produced in Appendix (Appendix A1.) (TC) and Clause (Clause 59.2.) 'Provision of Warranty' to such Town Councils. The duly executed warranty shall be submitted immediately upon request by the SO Rep, and if no such request is made, then at such time when the SO Rep considers the works have been substantially completed in accordance with the Contract. In the event that the Contractor and his Specialist shall fail to execute and submit the Deed of Warranty within the time specified, the SO Rep shall be allowed to withhold 15% of the payment of any sums due to the Contractor in relation to the execution of such Works, subject to the minimum sum of S$5,000.00 per Deed of Warranty. However, such sums withheld shall be released to the Contractor upon submission by him of the duly executed Deed of Warranty. 19.10 PRECAST STAIRFLIGHT CAPPING OVER EXISTING STAIRCASES Supply and lay 8mm thick 285mm girth (approx) precast fibre reinforced acrylic polymer cementitious based stairflight tread tile and 8mm thick precast riser tile strip to existing stairflights including cutting precast tiles to desired length, adjusting tiles to desire level with Polymer Mortar, Decodeck or other equivalent as bedding material and all other related works are as shown in the Drawings. The precast tread and riser shall be good colour consistency homogeneity, non-skid, scratch resistant and chemical resistant features conforming to the specifications as stated in the Drawings. The Contractor shall provide a detailed method statement on the laying of the tiles for the SO Reps approval. The tiles shall be laid directly on existing good and firm substrate to be properly and fully bedded down.
SECTION 20/...
UG03/S19.DOC(25) (LKK)(15122002) (CAD)
20.0
WALL FINISHES Where existing wall tiles or plastering are to be removed and retiled, the Contractor shall chisel off the existing wall tiles and/or plaster completely and clean the exposed surfaces thoroughly before laying the new tiles.
20.1 20.1.1
APPROVED MATERIALS FOR PLASTERING AND SKIMMING WORKS Mortar Mix For Plastering Works The Contractor shall use premixed mortar system or pre-packed mortar listed in HDBs List of Products and Suppliers for all plastering works on brick walls, solid block walls and RC surfaces. Plastering of RC surfaces shall be restricted to internal surfaces only. The premixed mortar system shall be a fully automated system that stores, conveys and mixes mortar for instant application. The pre-packed mortar shall be in bag form and shall be mixed mechanically according to the manufacturer's recommendation. The Contractor shall submit a work method statement to the SO Rep for approval. The premixed mortar system or pre-packed mortar shall be formulated with at least 0.80% of pure polymer by mass. The premixed mortar system or pre-packed mortar shall comply with the following performance requirements and product specification when subjected to the specified laboratory testing:
Pre-packed Mortar S/No Type of Evaluation Testing Method Tensile adhesion strength test according to HDB method on a sample cured for 14 days under shaded ambient condition. Twelve spots on the sample slab shall be tested. Shear adhesion test according to HDB method on a sample cured for 14 days under shaded ambient condition. Six spots on the sample slab shall be tested. ASTM C 531 2000 Requirement Average strength > 0.75 N per mm2 Individual strength 2 > 0.60 N per mm Average strength 2 > 1.00 N/mm Individual strength > 0.70 N/mm2 < 0.10% 12 - 20 N/mm2 BS 4551 : Part 1 : 1998 > 65% > 95% BS 4551 : Part 1: 1998 > 240 mins 360 mins < 500 mins Thermal Gravimetric Analysis & SDTA Fourier Transformed Infrared Spectrophotometric Analysis 0.8% min. by mass The chemical blueprint shall match the record of the approved product
Tensile Adhesion Strength
Shear Adhesion Strength
3 4 5 6 7
Average Shrinkage Compressive Strength 28 days Consistence Retentivity Water Retentivity Setting Time Initial set Final set
8 9
Polymer Content Product Identification Analysis
20.1.1
Mortar Mix For Plastering Works (Contd) HDB may instruct the contractor to conduct site sampling of the pre-packed mortar for testing to determine the pure polymer content by Thermal Gravimetric Analysis & SDTA to be conducted by an accredited laboratory. The pure polymer content of the site sample shall exceed 0.64%, i.e. 80% of the specified content for production. The 20% margin allowed for acceptance of individual test result has taken into consideration that it will be difficult to achieve perfect distribution of the polymer in the production and the tolerance for test accuracy. Pre-packed mortar with pure polymer content less than 0.64% shall be removed from HDB's List of Products and Suppliers. The Contractor shall remove all unused pre-packed mortar with deficiency in pure polymer content from the site. To avoid delay to the building works, the Contractor is required to use only those pre-packed mortar listed in HDBs List of Products and Suppliers and subject to the approval of the SO Rep. The Contractor may be required by the SO Rep to remove all works that used the pre-packed mortar with deficiency in pure polymer content.
20.1.2
Skimming Materials The Contractor shall use pre-packed external skim coat listed in HDBs List of Products and Suppliers for skimming works on external RC surface. The skimming works on other areas shall use pre-packed internal skim coat listed in HDBs List of Products and Suppliers. The pre-packed skimming materials shall be mechanically mixed with the amount of water as specified by the manufacturer. The pre-packed internal skimmed coat shall be formulated with at least 1.0% of pure polymer by mass and shall comply with the following performance requirements and product specification when subjected to the specified laboratory testing : Pre-packed Internal Skim Coat S/No Type of Evaluation Tensile Adhesion Strength Test Average Shrinkage Compressive Strength 28 days Water Retentivity Setting Time i) Initial set ii) Final set Thermal Gravimetric Analysis & SDTA Fourier Transformed Infrared Spectrophotometric Analysis Testing Method Tensile adhesion strength test according to HDB method on a sample cured for 14 days under shaded ambient condition. Twelve spots on the sample slab shall be tested. ASTM C 531 2000 BS 4551 : Part 1 : 1998 BS 4551 : Part 1 : 1998 BS 4551 : Part 1: 1998 Requirement Average strength 2 > 0.80 N per mm Individual strength 2 > 0.60 N per mm < 0.10% 7 - 12 N/mm > 95% > 240 mins 360 mins < 500 mins 1.0% min. by mass The chemical blueprint shall match the record of the approved product
2
2 3 4 5 6 7
20.1.2
Skimming Materials (Contd) The pre-packed external skim coat shall be formulated with at least 2.0% of pure polymer by mass and shall comply with the following performance requirements and product specification when subjected to the specified laboratory testing : Pre-packed External Skim Coat S/No Type of Evaluation Tensile Adhesion Strength Test Testing Method Tensile adhesion strength test according to HDB method on a sample cured for 14 days under shaded ambient condition. Twelve spots on the sample slab shall be tested. Tensile adhesion strength tests after accelerated weathering for 100 cycles* of alternate heating and cooling. Twelve spots on the sample slab shall be tested. * Each cycle consist of 4 hours of heating by UVA 340 lamps at 60C and then 10 minutes of intermittent water spray to produce a thermal shock. ASTM C 531 2000 BS 4551 : Part 1 : 1998 Requirement Average strength 2 > 0.80 N per mm Individual strength > 0.60 N per mm2
Tensile adhesion strength tests after accelerated weathering for 100 cycles* of alternate heating and cooling.
Loss of strength < 15% (compared to 14-day strength under normal condition)
3 4 5 6 7 8
Average Shrinkage Compressive Strength 28 days Water Retentivity Setting Time i) Initial set ii) Final set
< 0.10% 7 - 12 N/mm2 > 95%
BS 4551 : Part 1: 1998 Thermal Gravimetric Analysis & SDTA Fourier Transformed Infrared Spectrophotometric Analysis
> 240 mins 360 mins < 500 mins 2.0% min. by mass The chemical blueprint shall match the record of the approved product
HDB may instruct the contractor to conduct site sampling of the pre-packed internal and external skim coat for testing to determine the pure polymer content by Thermal Gravimetric Analysis & SDTA to be conducted by an accredited laboratory. The pure polymer content of the site sample shall exceed 0.80% for pre-packed internal skim coat and 1.60% for external skim coat, i.e. 80% of the specified content for production. The 20% margin allowed for acceptance of individual test result has taken into consideration that it will be difficult to achieve perfect distribution of the polymer in the production and the tolerance for test accuracy. Pre-packed internal skim coat with pure polymer content less than 0.80% or external skim coat with pure polymer content less than 1.60% shall be removed from HDB's List of Products and Suppliers. The Contractor shall remove all unused pre-packed internal skim coat or external skim coat with deficiency in pure polymer content from the site. To avoid delay to the building works, the Contractor is required to use only those pre-packed internal or external skim coat listed in HDB's List of Products and Suppliers and subject to the approval of the SO Rep. The Contractor may be required by the SO Rep to remove all works that used the pre-packed internal skim coat or external skim coat with deficiency in pure polymer content.
20.2
CONTROL OF PLASTER THICKNESS ON RC SURFACE The overall thickness of plastering on RC surface shall not exceed 18 mm. If the structural Works are constructed with good alignment and surface condition, application of a thinner coat of plaster or skimming is acceptable. The finished surface shall be smooth and true to plane and shape.
20.3
PLASTERING TO RC SURFACE The RC surface shall be cleaned, using high pressure water jet, such that the surface are free of dust, residue from oil and organic growth prior to the application of the plaster. The Contractor shall allow the Clerk-of-Works to check the background preparation before plastering. The prepacked mortar mix can be applied to the RC surface without spatterdash. The first coat of the plaster to the RC surface shall be of a thickness between 5 to 8 mm and shall be pressed hard onto the surface during application. For better bonding of the second coat, the first coat shall be lightly scratched and allow to cure for at least 12 hours before the application of the second coat. All plastering works to new or existing brickwalls, solid blockwalls and RC surfaces shall be limited to within the first storey building height or on internal surfaces not more than 1 storey high. For plastering of support base plates of external attachments, the plaster shall be reinforced and the Contractor shall submit connection details of the reinforcing mesh to SO Rep for approval.
20.4
ADHESION STRENGTH OF PLASTER ON RC SURFACE The Contractor shall conduct site pull-out tests on plasters applied on concrete surface according to Schedule of Materials Tests. The first test at each building block shall be conducted at the early stage of plastering Works. The remaining tests shall be spread out and be carried out progressively. Each test shall cover five randomly selected spots to be conducted within 21 to 28 days after plastering. The test spots shall be cut to a size of 75 mm x 75 mm for the pull-out test. The average tensile pull-out strength shall achieve a minimum value of 0.35 N per mm2. However, no individual strength shall fall 2 below 0.25 N per mm .
20.5
SKIMMING TO THE EXTERNAL SURFACE OF REINFORCED CONCRETE MEMBERS The surface of all new reinforced concrete members forming part of the external faade shall be constructed to good alignment and verticality such that no plastering is required to provide a good aesthetic appearance. Where there are minor surface unevenness or blemishes, the new RC surface shall be skim-coated with approved skimming materials. The skimming can be applied in two coats up to a total thickness not exceeding 6mm. This requirement shall be applicable to new external RC members of all storeys, including the ground floor void deck structures.
20.5.1
Workmanship Of RC Works The Contractor shall construct new peripheral reinforced concrete members to good alignment and verticality. The concrete surface shall be plane and true to shape. The verticality of the peripheral RC members shall comply with the following tolerance, in accordance to Grade II tolerance of SS CP 23. Allowable Variation From The Plumb Type Of RC Members/Surfaces Exposed continuous column corners or other conspicuous lines Corner or surface of columns and walls etc with continuity broken by beams or nibs or other protrusions Within Each Floor 10mm For Any Continuous Height Of 10 Storeys 20mm
10mm
40mm
To achieve the required structural workmanship, the Contractor shall be required to : (a) (b) (c) Regularly check and maintain their formwork to be in a good and acceptable condition; ensure proper and adequate bracing and strutting; conduct thorough checking of plumb and alignment before casting.
Ugdg Spec TS 20-5/14 20.5.2 Measurement Of RC Works At least fourteen(14) days before commencement of Works, the contractor shall submit to the SO Rep for his approval the measurement plan and survey methods. The areas of the Works to be measured and incorporated into the measurement plan and survey methods shall, inter alia, include the following : (a) (b) (c) (d) Verticality and alignment of corners of every building block Verticality and alignment of columns Verticality of walls Straightness, horizontality, alignment and evenness of beams and slabs
The Contractor shall engage a competent person to carry out measurements of the plumb and alignment of all new external columns, walls and corners of the building blocks. This measurement shall be carried out for every storey, including the first storey. The Contractor shall be required to use a precision laser plummet capable of shooting a vertical laser beam for up to 100mm in range and at an accuracy of at least 5 seconds; and a precision multidirectional laser marker capable of beaming right angle lines for up to 30m in range and has an accuracy of at least 3mm at 10m horizontal and vertical distances. Proper records of the RC verticality measurements shall be submitted to the SO Rep within one month after casting of the RC members or any other period as instructed by the SO Rep. The Contractor shall highlight in their report all deviations that exceed the tolerance. Upon completion of the finishing work, the Contractor shall carry out another measurement of the building block. 20.5.3 Rectification Of Misalignment And Surface Defects The Contractor shall carry out structural rectification to the new external RC members with poor alignment and plumb, poor construction joint, honeycombed and badly formed surfaces to the satisfaction of the SO Rep all at the Contractors cost and expense. The structural rectification of such Defect shall commence not later than two months after casting. The Contractor shall rectify minor bulging or depression on the RC surface, which does not affect the reinforcement cover, with the following method : (a) (b) (c) (d) trim and roughen the surface, clean the surface with pressure jetting, apply approve bonding agent to the surface patch the areas with approved polymer modified mortar.
For serious structural Defect or misalignment, the Contractor shall be required to submit a PE proposal for the rectification work subject to the approval of the SO Rep. 20.5.4 Application Of External Skimming Skimming shall not commence until the surface has been properly prepared and cleaned with water jet. The Contractor shall allow for the inspection of the surface preparation prior to the skimming application. Upon completion of the skimming Works, the Contractor shall carry out another measurement of the building blocks. All measurement data shall be submitted to the SO Rep. 20.5.5 Testing Of External Skimming The Contractor shall conduct tensile pull-out tests on the external skimming at each building block according to the Schedule Of Material Tests. Each test shall cover five randomly selected spots of skimming with age between 21 to 28 days. The average tensile pull-out strength of the 5 spots shall 2 exceed 0.4 N per mm . In addition, the individual tensile pull-out strength of each spot shall not be less than 0.30 N per mm2. The first test at each building block shall be conducted in the initial stage of skimming Works. The remaining tests shall be spread out and be carried out progressively.
20.6
ARRISES AND ANGLES IN PLASTERING AND SKIM COAT (WITHIN FLATS) All arrises, internal angles, etc. shall be straight plumbed. All external angles shall be formed with proprietary pvc plaster angle beads to the SO Rep approval. Square pvc angle beads shall have a face flange minimum 20mm wide that subtends a 90 degrees angle and shall have a short reveal of 2 mm on the front edge for the finishing skim coat. The face flange shall be perforated and its surface tooth formed to hold and receive the plaster and skim coat. The entire length of the pvc angle beads shall be clean and straight, any damaged or used beads shall not be recycled. Samples of the pvc angle beads shall be submitted to the SO Rep. for approval prior to ordering and commencement of skim coat or plastering work on site.
20.7
MAKING GOOD All making good of defective plaster shall be carried out in rectangular areas, the edges undercut to form dovetailed key and finished flush with face of surrounding plaster. Cut out and make good all cracks, blisters and other Defect and clean the whole of the work on completion.
20.8
PARTIALLY OR WHOLLY SET PLASTER No partially or wholly set plaster shall be allowed to be used or remixed.
20.9
DRIPS AND GROOVE Drips and grooves shall be formed to give a clean clear and straight surface free from loose sandy mortar.
20.10 20.10.1
LAYING OF CERAMIC WALL TILES Wall Tiling Method The Contractor shall carry out wall tiling according to the following procedures: (a) Clean the background to remove all laitance, dust, oil or other substances that affect the bonding of rendering. The background shall be washed using water jet. Apply rendering to the background to a finished thickness not exceeding 10mm to achieve a flat and even surface. The background shall be first dampened to prevent excessive absorption of water from the rendering before its placing. The rendering shall be increased to a finished thickness not exceeding 18mm to allow for concealment of water pipes. Allow the rendering to set for at least 12 hours. Apply a layer of bedding mortar onto the rendered substrate and spread another layer as thin as possible on the full back of the tiles before placing tiles in position within flats and other areas. The keys, frogs or depressions at the back of the tile shall be completely filled with mortar before fixing. Place each tile and tap it firmly into position to ensure that each tile makes contact over its whole area. Adjust the position of any tile within 5 minutes of fixing. The grouting to the tile joints shall commence within 7 days after fixing the wall tiles. Dust or foreign materials shall be removed from the joints. The grout shall be wet mixed mechanically before application. It shall be spread with a grout spreader (rubber squeegee or grout trowel), working back and forth over the area until the joints are completely filled. Excess grout shall be removed with the aid of a spreader and a damp (not) wet cloth. After the grout has stiffened slightly, tool the grout with a piece of wood or other suitable tool to a consistent depth and shape. After the grout has dried, the tile surface shall be cleaned and given a final polish using a clean, dry cloth.
(b)
(c) (d)
(e)
(f)
Ugdg Spec TS 20-7/14 20.10.2 Prepacked Mortar For Mortar Bed The Contractor shall use approved pre-packed mortar mix for rendering to concrete surface and block walls to receive the wall tiles. Potable water supplied by PUB shall be used for mixing the mortar. The pre-packed mortar mix shall be mixed mechanically according to the manufacturer's recommendation. The pre-packed mortar mix shall comply with the following performance requirements, as stated in clause 20.1.1 when subjected to the specified laboratory testing. 20.10.3 Bedding Mortar For Fixing The Wall Tiles Within Flats The bedding mortar for fixing the tiles shall consist of one part OPC cement to one part fine sand. Sand for the bedding mortar shall be cleaned and free of foreign materials and comply with the following grading requirement : BS 410 sieve mesh size 2.36mm 1.18mm 0.6mm 0.3mm 0.15mm 0.075mm Percentage by mass passing the BS sieve % (mm) 100 90 - 100 80 - 100 30 - 100 0 - 60 Not greater than 5
The Contractor may use proprietary tile adhesive or add polymer additive into the bedding mortar to improve the adhesion of the wall tiles. The use of tile adhesive or polymer additive shall be subjected to the approval of the SO Rep. 20.10.4 Tile Adhesive (Normal Set) For Wall Tile in Common Areas of Housing Blocks The Contractor shall use pre-approved tile adhesive and shall submit the brand and method of application to the SO Rep for approval prior to the commencement of the tiling Works. The tile adhesive shall be applied onto the surface of rendered wall and then notch-trowelled to a finishes thickness not exceeding the manufacturers recommendation. The area of application shall not exceed 1m2 in each application. The tile adhesive shall also be spread uniformly over the back of each tile to fill deep keys and all remaining depressions. The tile shall then be placed into the position and be tapped firmly to ensure its full contact with the adhesive. The tile adhesive shall be stored and used in accordance with the manufacturers instructions. The normal set tile adhesive shall comply with the following requirements : S/N 1 Characteristics Tensile Adhesion Bond Strength Tensile Adhesion Bond Strength (After Water Immersion) Test Method EN 1348 : 1999 Performance Criteria 7 days > 0.3 N/mm2 28 days > 1.0 N/mm2 28 days N/mm2 > 1.0
EN 1348 : 1999
Tensile Adhesion Bond Strength (After Heat Aging)
EN 1348 : 1999
At 28 days > 1.0 N/mm2 Circulating oven: 70 C 2 C for 14 days > 0.5 N/mm2 after not less than 30 mins After 28 days storage under standard conditions 2.5mm (minimum)
Open Time
EN 1346 : 1999 (using tile as specified in EN 1346) EN 12002 : 2002
Deformity
Ugdg Spec TS 20-8/14 20.10.5 Testing Of Tensile Pull-Out Strength The Contractor shall conduct tensile pull-out tests on wall tiles according to the Schedule Of Material Tests. Each test shall determine the tensile pull-out strengths of five randomly selected pieces of tiles at any location within each block. The test shall be conducted within 21 to 28 days after the laying of the tiles. The average tensile pull-out strength of the 5 tiles tested shall achieve a minimum of 0.18 N per mm2. In 2 addition, the individual tensile pull-out strength of each tile shall not be less than 0.14 N per mm . 20.11 20.11.1 COLOUR GLAZED CERAMIC WALL TILES INSIDE DWELLING UNITS General Provide and lay colour glazed ceramic wall tiles to locations as specified in the subclause Schedule Of Colour Glazed Wall Tiles hereunder and at other locations as shown in the Drawings. 20.11.2 Approved Colour Glazed Wall Tiles The type of colour glazed wall tiles provided by the Contractor to locations specified in the sub-clause "Schedule Of Colour Glazed Wall Tiles" hereunder shall be subject to the approval of the SO Rep. The SO Rep shall have the absolute prerogative to select the type of colour glazed wall tiles and no adjustment to the Contract Sum shall be made. Notwithstanding any approval by the SO Rep, the Contractor shall ensure that all colour glazed wall tiles comply with the requirements specified in this clause including all sub-clauses under it. The colour of glazed wall tiles for such locations as specified in the schedule of the said subclause shall be BLUE and/or PINK and/or BEIGE and/or GREY. Provide samples of colour glazed wall tiles with the colour range as specified for selection and approval by the SO Rep.
20.11.3
Testing Requirements (a) Test Samples And Methods All test samples shall be randomly chosen from the same batch of delivery by the SO Rep. The test methods shall be in accordance with SS 483 : 2000 (Annex L) unless otherwise stated. (b) Test Certificate And Compliance Requirement Provide test certificates by a testing laboratory accredited under SINGLAS to cover the tests mentioned in this clause and all other tests mentioned in the testing schedule.
20.11.4
Technical Specifications Dimensional and surface quality requirements and physical and chemical properties shall be accordance with SS 483 : 2000 (Annex L) unless otherwise stated : (a) Dimensions Nominal Length Nominal Width Thickness : : : 200mm 200mm 7mm
And/or
20.11.4
Technical Specifications (Contd) (a) Dimensions (Contd) Nominal Length Nominal Width Thickness : : : 250mm 200mm 7mm
And/or
Nominal Length Nominal Width Thickness : : : 300mm 200mm 7mm
And/or
Nominal Length Nominal Width Thickness : : : 300mm 300mm 7mm
The dimensional tolerances shall be as follows : (i) Length : Average length of each tile (2 or 4 sides) shall not deviate by more than 0.3% from the average length of 10 test specimens. : Average width of each tile (2 or 4 sides) shall not deviate by more than 0.3% from the average length of 10 test specimens.
(ii)
Width
(iii) Thickness : Average thickness of each tile shall not deviate by more than 0.5mm from the average thickness of 10 test specimens. (b) Surface Quality The tiles shall be free from objectionable surface blemishes such as projections, depressions, flakes, hairline cracks and bubbles. The tiles shall be level and regular in size with properly formed corners and shall not be warped or deformed in any manner. (c) Physical Properties The water absorption shall be a maximum of 18%. (d) Chemical Properties (i) Staining Test : The procedure for carrying out the test is as follows : Allow 3 or 4 drops of each of the test solutions (Methylene blue solution, 10g/L and Potassium permanganate solution, 10g/L), to fall on a fresh part of the test specimen. Place an approximately 30mm diameter convex watch glass on the applied drop in order to spread it to an approximately circular area. Allow to remain for 24 hours and then rinse the surface with running water and wipe with a damp cloth. If a stain remains, thoroughly clean with a solution of the standard cleaning agent. Performance Criteria The stain on the test specimen shall be able to be cleaned by cleaning solution.
20.11.4
Technical Specifications (Contd) (d) Chemical Properties (Contd) (ii) Reverse Staining Test : The procedure for carrying out the test is as follows : (a) Five full pieces of tiles shall be selected and checked to ensure that there are no Defect or damages. The tiles shall also be checked for signs of tonality difference. Dry the tiles in a ventilating oven at 105 C for 48 hours. With the top or glazed surface facing downwards, pond the biscuit (ie. back of the tile) with potable water over a circular area of 50mm diameter and with a water height of 25mm. At interval of every 5 minutes, inspect with the naked eye or prescription glasses if usually worn and under sufficient light intensity (> 300 lux), the top or glazed surface for signs of dark patches up to a total ponding duration of 30 minutes. Repeat the aforementioned test on another five pieces of tiles but using methylene blue solution diluted at 2g of methylene blue per litre. Performance Criteria The tiles shall not show any sign of dark patches on the top or glazed surfaces.
o
(b) (c)
(d)
(e)
20.11.5
Schedule Of Colour Glazed Wall Tiles Provide and lay colour glazed wall tiles to locations as specified below including any other areas not specified but as shown in the Drawings.
Accommodation 1-Room, 2-Room, 3-Room, 4-Room, 5-Room, Executive Apartment Rental Flats ) ) ) ) ) )
Location Kitchen Kitchen/Dining Bath/WC WC
UPG05/S20.DOC(10) lkk(181204) DPD
20.11.6
Laying of Glazed Wall Tiles a) Soaking Of Glazed Wall Tiles The glazed wall tiles shall be unpacked and soaked thoroughly in portable PUB water for at least 12 hours. Prior to fixing, the wall tiles shall be removed from the water and stacked tightly and vertically together on a clean surface to drain off excess water from the surface. At the time of fixing, the tiles shall be surface dry. b) Surface Preparation for Glazed Wall Tiles Clean down the surfaces to be tiled and wet it thoroughly prior to commencement of application of mortar.
20.12
LISTELLO TILE TO BATH/WC OF DWELLING UNITS Where required under the Contract, provide and lay one course of matching Listello tiles to all bath/wc of residential units including other areas as shown in the Drawings. The type of Listello tiles provided by the Contractor shall be subjected to the approval of the SO Rep.
20.13
CERAMIC WALL TILES FOR NON-RESIDENTIAL UNITS AND COMMON AREAS OUTSIDE DWELLING UNITS CERAMIC WALL TILES (NON RESIDENTIAL UNITS AND COMMON AREAS) General Provide and lay first quality, first choice wall tiles to locations as specified in the subclause Schedule Of Ceramic Wall Tiles hereunder and at other locations as shown in the Drawings.
20.13 20.13.1
20.13.2
Testing Requirements (a) Test Samples And Methods All test samples shall be randomly chosen from the same batch of delivery by the SO Rep. The test methods shall be in accordance with SS 483 : 2000 ( Annex J ) unless otherwise stated. (b) Test Certificate And Compliance Requirement Provide test certificates by a testing laboratory accredited under SINGLAS to cover the tests mentioned in this clause and all other tests mentioned in the testing schedule.
20.13.3
Technical Specifications Dimensional and surface quality requirements and physical and chemical properties shall be accordance with SS 483 : 2000 ( Annex J ) unless otherwise stated :(a) Dimensions Nominal Length Nominal Width Thickness : : 200mm : 200mm 8mm
The dimensional tolerances shall be as follows : (i) Length : Average length of each tile (2 or 4 sides) shall not deviate by more than 0.75% from the average length of 10 test specimens. Average width of each tile (2 or 4 sides) shall not deviate by more than 0.75% from the average length of 10 test specimens. Average thickness of each tile shall not deviate by more than 5% from the average thickness of 10 test specimens.
(ii)
Width
(iii)
Thickness
UPG05/S20.DOC(11) lkk(181204) DPD
20.13.3
Technical Specifications (Contd) (b) Surface Quality The tiles shall be free from objectionable surface blemishes such as projections, depressions, flakes, hairline cracks and bubbles. The tiles shall be level and regular in size with properly formed corners and shall not be warped or deformed in any manner. (c) Physical Properties The water absorption shall be a maximum of 6% (d) Chemical Properties
(i)
Reverse Staining Test
The procedure for carrying out the test is as follows : (a) Five full pieces of tiles shall be selected and checked to ensure that there are no Defect or damages. The tiles shall also be checked for signs of tonality difference. Dry the tiles in a ventilating oven at 105 C for 48 hours. With the top or glazed surface facing downwards, pond the biscuit (ie. back of the tile) with potable water over a circular area of 50mm diameter and with a water height of 25mm. At interval of every 5 minutes, inspect with the naked eye or prescription glasses if usually worn and under sufficient light intensity (> 300 lux), the top or glazed surface for signs of dark patches up to a total ponding duration of 30 minutes. Repeat the aforementioned test on another five pieces of tiles but using methylene blue solution diluted at 2g of methylene blue per litre. Performance Criteria The tiles shall not show any sign of dark patches on the top or glazed surfaces.
o
(b) (c)
(d)
(e)
20.13.4
Colours, Patterns And Textures Provide a full range of colours, patterns and textures of wall tiles for the SO Rep to select from. The SO Rep shall have the absolute prerogative in his selection and no adjustment to the Contract Sum shall be made for difference in colour pattern and texture within each category of tiles.
20.13.5
Accessories Provide and lay all accessories in matching size and colour to the approval of the SO Rep.
UPG05/S20.DOC(12) lkk(181204) DPD
20.13.6
Schedule Of Ceramic Wall Tiles Where indicated, provide and lay glazed ceramic wall tiles to locations as specified below including any other areas not specified but as shown in the Drawings. Accommodation Location Walls at centralised chute hopper Wash areas at void deck All Housing Blocks Refuse Chute Chambers Walls in toilet adjoining Utility Room at ground floor lift lobby Walls at upper floor lift lobbies Refreshment Areas Stalls Eating House Toilets/Bath/WC Bin Areas Wash Areas Bath/WC Lock-Up Shop, Shop, Market Produce Lock-Up Shop Display Areas Preparation Areas Bin Areas Walls and Columns Mini-Market Toilets Bin Areas Restaurant (Family) Toilets Display Area Market Produce Shop WC Bin Areas Dustbin Compound Walls and Columns * Denotes the specified tile
20.13.7
Tile Spacers Tile spacers shall be used for laying of wall tiles and floor tiles to achieve consistent joint width. The tile spacers to be used shall be approved by the SO Rep before commencement of the tiling works.
UG03/S20.DOC(13) (LKK0(15122002) (CAD)
20.14
POLISHED HOMOGENEOUS WALL TILES Provide and lay 300mm x 300mm x 9mm (Nominal Size) polished homogeneous wall tiles to locations as specified below : Accommodation All Housing Blocks Location Walls of ground floor lift lobbies. Wall enclosures at letter box including low walls defining the ground floor lift lobby.
Provide full range of colours and texture of polished homogeneous wall tiles for the SO Rep to make a selection. The SO Rep shall have absolute prerogative in his selection and no adjustment to the Contract Sum shall be made for differences in colour and texture
20.15
WORKSHOP DRAWINGS Provide complete sets of workshop drawings showing the laying patterns of ceramic floor tiles and wall tiles in kitchen, kitchen/dining, bath/wc, lift lobby, courtyard and other locations where tiling work are indicated. The workshop drawings shall include plans, elevations, detailed sections and other relevant details required by the SO Rep. These drawings shall be submitted to the SO Rep for approval prior to the laying of ceramic floor tiles, ceramic wall tiles and white glazed wall tiles. The ceramic floor tiles shall be laid with tile joints that coincide with the joints of wall tiles and to the approval of the SO Rep.
20.16
TESTING TOOLS FOR TILING WORK The Contractor shall provide retractable tapping rods to the SO Rep and the Employers officers for detecting hollowness in tiling Works during and on completion of the tiling Works. The retractable tapping rod shall have a solid steel ball of 15mm diameter rigidly attached to one end. When fully extended, the tapping rod shall have a length of about 630 mm and possesses adequate rigidity for tapping the tiles. When the rod sections collapse, the tapping rod shall be about 130 mm long. A pocket clip shall be provided on the rod.
20.17
Testing Of Tensile Pull-Out Strength On Wall Tiles In Common Areas The Contractor shall conduct tensile pull-out tests on wall tiles in common areas according to the Schedule Of Material Tests. Each test shall determine the tensile pull-out strengths of five randomly selected pieces of tiles at any location within a room. The joint around the tile shall be cut to the depth of the joint before the pull-out test. The test shall be conducted within 21 to 28 days after fixing the tiles. The average tensile pull-out strength of the 5 tiles tested shall achieve a minimum of 0.20 N per mm . In 2 addition, the individual tensile pull-out strength of each tile shall not be less than 0.16 N per mm .
2
20.18
Testing Of Tensile Pull-Out Strength On Wall Tiles (Within Flats) The Contractor shall conduct tensile pull-out tests on wall tiles within flats according to the Schedule Of Material Tests. Each test shall determine the tensile pull-out strengths of five randomly selected pieces of tiles at any location within each block. The test shall be conducted within 21 to 28 days after the laying of the tiles. The average tensile pull-out strength of the 5 tiles tested shall achieve a minimum of 0.18 N per mm . In addition, the individual tensile pull-out strength of each tile shall not be less than 0.14 N per mm2.
2
SECTION 21/...
UG03/S20.DOC(14) (LKK0(15122002) (CAD)
Ugdg Spec TS 21-1/2
SECTION 21
21.0
ELECTRICAL,TELEPHONE AND CATV INSTALLATIONS
21.1
EXTERNAL TRENCHES FOR ELECTRICAL CABLE Where directed by the SO Rep, excavate trenches for the laying of electrical cables complying with the requirements of the PowerGrid and/or SPSL. The excavation work where done shall be paid for as a variation to the Contract. Contractor shall provide cable chambers, junction boxes and concrete trenches as shown in the Drawings.
21.2
OPENINGS/RECESSES FOR ELECTRICAL TRUNKINGS Further to Clause 4.21 "Openings and Recesses" and Clause 1.3.25 "Contractor's Work in Connection With Subsidiary Contracts", ensure that all these openings are flushed with the ceilings and align with each other and with the building lines. Ensure that the recesses are continuous and on the same plane from floor to floor.
21.3
METAL TRUNKING FOR TELEPHONE CABLE Metal trunking shall be complete with slotted brackets for the fixing of telephone cables inside the trunking. Slotted brackets shall be welded to the base of the trunking and shall be three numbers per floor or to the requirements of the Relevant Authorities. The size of metal trunking to be used shall be 200mm x 50mm (norminal size) for all storeys and locations. For horizontal metal trunking, nominal size 200mm x 50mm metal trunking shall be used. The horizontal metal trunking shall be complete with slotted brackets for fixing of telephone cables inside the trunking. Slotted brackets shall be welded to the base of horizontal trunking and shall be spaced not more than 300mm centres. The horizontal metal trunking shall have provisions for cabling from lead-in risers to riser ducts with no lead-in pipes and to the requirements of the Relevant Authorities. The thickness of mild steel sheet used in the fabrication of trunking shall not be less than those specified hereunder : Normal Thickness of Mild Steel Sheet Thickness of Body Material 1.6mm Thickness of Cover Material 1.4mm
Construct metal trunking to details as shown in the Drawings. All metal trunkings shall have removable covers extending over the entire lengths as shown in the Drawings. The covers shall be fixed to the trunking by means of brass screws or stainless steel screws or steel screws protected against corrosion with a finish of zinc coating. The spacing between each screw shall be as shown in the Drawings. Wire grille of diameter 3mm (nominal) shall be welded to the base of the trunking so as to fasten cables and joint boxes to the trunking. All welded parts shall be smoothened. All surfaces of the metal trunkings shall be painted with two (2) coats of anti-rust under coat and two (2) finishing coats giving an overall coating thickness of not less than 45 microns. Alternatively, oven-bake powder coating shall also be accepted. The colour of finishing coats shall be Off White to BS 10B 15. Each metal trunking shall be wrapped with layers of paper or packed with paper box to prevent scratches on the painted surfaces. Submit samples of metal trunkings to the SO Rep for approval prior to installation. The samples shall be checked to conform to dimensions, material quality, colour and finishing requirement. Approved samples shall be retained as basis of delivery and shall count as part of delivery. Unless specified otherwise, all materials, supports, fixings, attachments and other items associated with and necessary for the complete installation, together with all of the work involved shall be provided.
Ugdg Spec TS 21-2/2
21.4
MAIN DISTRIBUTION FRAME (MDF) ROOM AND EQUIPMENT CLOSET FOR OPTICAL FIBRE CABLE INSTALLATION All UPVC (SS 272) lead in pipes to MDF room and Equipment Closet shall be encased in concrete as shown in the Drawings. All bent pipes straight pipes and trunkings shall be purchased from sources approved by IDA or the respective PTL. All bent pipes, straight pipes and trunkings shall be installed as shown in the Drawings.
21.5
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION WORKS TO MDF ROOM, EQUIPMENT CLOSET AND UTILITIES ROOM The Contractor shall engage a licensed electrician to carry out electrical installation works to MDF Rooms, Telecoms Equipment Rooms and Utilities Rooms all as shown in the Drawings.
21.6
ELECTRICAL AND CATV INSTALLATION Electrical and CATV installation shall form part of the Contract unless as specified otherwise. Only electrical contractors who are registered with BCA shall be employed by the Contractor to execute the electrical & CATV installation work. Where electrical installation forms part of the contract, the Contractor shall allow for attending to and coordination work.
SECTION 22/...
Ugdg Spec TS 22-1/2
SECTION 22
22.0
GLAZING
22.1
FIXED AND ADJUSTABLE GLASS LOUVRED VENTS Unless otherwise specified, glass louvre used externally shall be obscured wired rough cast glass of thickness 6mm 0.3mm and housed at least 10mm at each end. Glass blades shall not have clearance at each end exceeding 3mm. All exposed edges of the glass louvre shall be ground mechanically to a consistent smooth finish.
22.2
CLEANING GLASS On completion, clean all glass inside and outside, replace all cracked, broken or defective glass and leave the whole work in good condition to the satisfaction of the SO Rep.
22.3 22.3.1
LAMINATED SAFETY GLASS Material Requirements All glazing to the fixed panels below the cill height, described under this clause including all subclauses under it, shall be of 12.76 mm laminated safety glass units comprising of 6 mm thick tinted float glass and 6 mm thick clear float glass cemented together with 0.76 mm thick clear polyvinyl butyral (PVB) interlayer with glazing gaskets and a shading co-efficient of 0.69, where shown in the Drawings. The tint of the glazing shall be the same as those of the remaining glass panels when viewed from the external and inner surfaces of the glass. The laminated safety glass shall be of Grade A and shall comply with the relevant requirements in SS 341:2001. The safety glazing shall pass the impact test and boil test in accordance with SS 341:2001 and other requirements all as specified hereunder : (a) Impact Test The glazing material tested in accordance with Annex A of SS 341:2001 shall comply with the requirements for breakage given in Annex A. (b) Boil Test When tested in accordance with Annex C of SS 341:2001, the glazing material itself might crack, but no bubbles or other defects shall develop more than 12 mm from the edge of the test specimen or from any cracks that have developed. (c) Flatness Of Glazing Panels The flatness of panels shall be within the following limits : (i) (ii) Localised warp 1.0mm over any 200mm span; Overall bow and warpage shall be in accordance with Table 3 Flatness Limits for Glass of Standard Nominal Thickness of SS 341:2001.
(d)
Squareness Of Rectangular Panels The squareness of rectangular panels shall be such that the difference between the two diagonals does not exceed 5mm for panels where the largest dimension is less than 1200mm and does not exceed 10mm for all other panels.
(e)
Size Tolerances The tolerances on size of safety glass shall be as specified in Table 2 Size Tolerance for All Safety Glass of SS 341:2001.
Ugdg Spec TS 22-2/2
22.3.1
Material Requirements (Cont'd) (f) Thickness Limit For Safety Glass The thickness limit shall comply with Table 1.1 Thickness limits for standard nominal thickness of glass of SS 341:2001
22.3.2
Design Loads The laminated safety glass panels shall comply with the Building Regulations requirements - "Fourth Schedule for Parapets And Balustrades, Table 4". The laminated safety glass panels shall be designed to resist the loads stipulated in the said Fourth Schedule for Parapets And Balustrades, Table 4.
22.3.3
Professional Engineer's Calculations The Contractor shall submit his Professional Engineer's calculations for the design of the laminated safety glass fixed panels and the aluminium framing for the fixed panels, to show compliance with the lateral load requirements of the Building Regulations.
22.3.4
Workshop Drawings And Samples The Contractor shall submit complete workshop drawings for all glazing and aluminium Works with PE calculations and endorsement for the approval of the SO Rep prior to its fabrication and installation. Complete samples shall be installed at the Site for approval by the SO Rep.
22.3.5
Replacement In the event of damage arising from breakage, chips and delamination, replacement shall be immediately carried out all at the cost and expense of the Contractor.
SECTION 23/...
SECTION 23
23.0
PAINTING AND DECORATING
23.1 23.1.1
GENERAL Paint The paints used shall be manufactured by an approved Specialist and shall be of those under the PSB PSB Product Listing Scheme Class 1A. All paint shall be delivered to the Site in their original containers with the PSB Certificate Mark and the containers shall not have been opened before. Unless otherwise specified, all paint shall comply with the relevant Singapore Standards shown below and their latest amendments : Standard SS7:1998 SS34:1998 SS37:1998 SS38:1998 SS150:1998 SS345:1990 SS494:2001 Type of Paint "Gloss Enamel Finishing" "Undercoat for Gloss Enamel" "Aluminium Paint" "Aluminium Wood Primer (Leafing and Non-Leafing)" "Emulsion Paint" "Algae Resistant Emulsion Paint for Decorative Purposes" "Lead and Chromate-free Primer"
Before the commencement of any painting work, provide and submit colour charts of approved paint to the SO Rep for the selection of colour scheme. All water based algae resistant emulsion paint shall comply with SS 345:1990 and shall be certified under the PSB Product Listing Scheme Class 1A. All enamel paint shall be synthetic enamel paint unless otherwise approved by the SO Rep. 23.1.2 Mixing of Paint During the progress of work, the SO Rep may at his discretion obtain samples of paint being used on site for testing. Should paint used in this Contract be found to be adulterated or over-diluted, the SO Rep shall exercise its rights under Clause 1.10 "Nuisance and Irregularities" to impose charges against the Contractor. In addition, all such paint shall be removed from the Site and replace the same with paints that meet the prescribed standards. All work executed with paint which fails to meet the prescribed standards shall be burnt off or otherwise removed and the work shall be re-executed at the Contractor's own costs and expenses to the satisfaction of the SO Rep.
23.1.3
Workmanship Unless otherwise specified, all paints shall be applied in accordance with the Manufacturer's recommendations and instructions. All paints for priming coats, undercoats and finishing coats used for the work shall be of the same brand and from the same manufacturer. Where available, undercoats shall be of different shades to correspond with the shade of the finishing coat. Provide sample panels of paintwork showing the shades of the respective coats.
23.1.3
Workmanship (Cont'd) All external paintwork shall be executed under dry condition and the surface to be painted shall be dry before the paint is applied. The whole of the interior and exterior surfaces of the building including the ceilings and soffits shall be cleaned down thoroughly and all cracks and blemishes made good prior to the commencement of the painting work. After the completion of each coat of painting work, the SO Rep shall be notified before the application of next coat.
23.1.4
Precautionary Measures To Prevent Paint Drips Before painting any section of walls, ceilings beams or columns, the Contractor shall lay canvass sheets gunny sacks, PVC sheets or other floor covering on the corridor/areas as covering to prevent paint dripping/staining on to the floors. Charges shall be imposed on the Contractor for noncompliance.
23.1.5
Preparation Of All External Surfaces, Wall Etc. And Final Touching Up All external surfaces etc are to be cleaned by cold water high pressure jet or thoroughly wire brushed and washed down and all extraneous matter scraped and cleaned off. The Contractor shall take all necessary precaution to prevent any water from splashing into tenants' flat. Clean and wipe down all watermarks on all windows and sun-breakers etc left behind after the washing. Repair all cracks, damaged, hollow, loosened or bulging plaster in wall surfaces as specified in Section 32 GENERAL REPAIR TO BUILDING WORKS. All concrete waste, dropping, nails, wires etc shall be chiselled off.
23.1.6
Eradicate Algae Growth On External Walls The Contractor shall eradicate algae growth on all external walls in the preparation of the surfaces for painting. When algae growth is found on the wall surface, the Contractor shall scrub and wash away the algae growth from the wall, and then apply algicidal treatment to the whole of the wall surface. The wall shall then be rinsed with water in sections, starting from the top downwards. The algicidal solution shall be of sodium hypochlorite diluted with water in accordance with the manufacturer's instruction. The Contractor may propose to use chemicals in the preparation of this solution, with no cost adjustment to the contract sum. The algicidal solution proposed for use in this contract shall be submitted for the SO Rep's approval before it is used. The diluted algicidal solution shall be applied by brush or roller, or sprayed with high density plastic knapsack portable chemical sprayer. The Contractor shall take all necessary precautions to prevent the splashing of any algicidal solution onto members of the public during the application of the algicidal solution and shall indemnify the Employer from any claims in this respect. The Contractor shall also wash and apply the same treatment as detailed above to the whole of all facing brick walls, if algae growth is found on the wall surfaces, although the facing brick walls may not be painted under this contract. The Contractor is to note that the application or non-application of the anti-algae solution to the various parts of a building shall not in any way nullify nor reduce the Contractor's liability under the six (6) years warranty requirement as required in the Specification.
23.2
EXTERNAL PAINTING
23.2.1
Over-Riding Clause The Contractor and his Specialist executing the Works as required in this clause including subclauses have to ensure that the works, goods or materials used shall be suitable and reasonably fit for the purposes for which they are required (hereinafter referred to as "Performance Requirement"). In the event the works, goods or materials to be used as specified in this clause including sub-clauses are upgraded in order to meet the Performance Requirement, the Contractor and his Specialist shall do all necessary upgrading at no extra cost to the Employer, subject always to the approval of the SO Rep, but such approval shall not in any way affect the Contractor's and his Specialist's duties or obligations arising under the Contract.
23.2.2
Water Based Algae Resistant Emulsion Paint (a) Type and Location The water based algae resistant paint shall comply with SS345:1990 and shall be PSB Marked. Unless otherwise specified, all colours of paint to be used shall be approved by the PSB under the PSB Product Listing Scheme Class 1A and to comply with BS 4800:1972 "Paint Colour for Building Purposes". Unless otherwise specified or instructed by the SO Rep, all plastered, skim coated and concrete surfaces of all exterior surfaces of the external walls which are subject to weathering including walls, ceilings and other surfaces of the ground floor void decks shall be finished with three coats of water based algae resistant emulsion paint. The first coat may be with thinning of up to ten percent by volume with clean water. Subsequent coats shall not be diluted. Allow for different colour tones for all undercoats to distinguish the different coatings. Should the finished paintwork be found to be unsatisfactory, ie. brushy work, unevenness in applications, original stains, etc., repaint the same with additional coat or coats to the satisfaction of the SO Rep. External painting to parapet walls, refuse chutes, columns and beams shall cover up to and including returned surfaces. External painting to exterior surfaces of external walls shall cover up to and including returned surfaces stopping at a convenient point to be directed by the SO Rep. (b) External Painting to Electrical Sub-Station/Utilities Centre/Dustbin Compound For electrical sub-station/utilities centre/dustbin compound, the external painting works shall be executed with three coats of water based algae resistant emulsion paint. (c) Touch-up Coat Painted surfaces which have to be overcoated by touch-up work should not be confined to the affected spots only. The whole panel of the wall or area affected by touch-up shall be repainted to match the colour tone of the finished coat. (d) Painting of Sample Units At the appropriate time prepare the exterior of one or more typical flat unit for each type of flats to receive the paint and inform the SO Rep to select his colour scheme. Paint the sample units, changing colours as directed, until the SO Rep is satisfied with the workmanship and/or colour scheme.
23.2.2
Water Based Algae Resistant Emulsion Paint (Cont'd) (e) Warranty
The Contractor and his Specialist shall warrant the Works on the terms and conditions as stipulated in Clause 59.2 'Provision of Warranty' and the specimen of Deed of Warranty as produced in Appendix A1. In this respect, the Contractor and his Specialist shall submit such Deed of Warranty to the Employer or to such other party or such Town Council(s) as the SO Rep may at his sole discretion decide. In the event that the Deed of Warranty for part of the works or for the whole works is to be submitted to such Town Council(s), the Contractor and his Specialist shall submit such Deed of Warranty in accordance with the specimen of Deed of Warranty as produced in Appendix A1(TC) and Clause 59.2 'Provision of Warranty' to such Town Councils. The duly executed warranty shall be submitted immediately upon request by the SO Rep, and if no such request is made, then at such time when the SO Rep considers the works have been substantially completed in accordance with the Contract. In the event that the Contractor and his Specialist shall fail to execute and submit the Deed of Warranty within the time specified, the SO Rep shall be allowed to withhold 15% of the payment of any sums due to the Contractor in relation to the execution of such Works, subject to the minimum sum of S$5,000.00 per Deed of Warranty. However, such sums withheld shall be released to the Contractor upon submission by him of the duly executed Deed of Warranty.
23.2.3
Acrylic Emulsion Paints Unless otherwise specified, all external plastered, skim coated and concrete surfaces, except those subjected directly to weathering as mentioned earlier, shall be painted with one priming coat and two subsequent coats of approved acrylic emulsion paint. The priming coat may be with thinning of up to 20% of clean water by volume. Subsequent coats shall not be diluted. External surfaces to be painted with acrylic emulsion paint shall include all surfaces except those within the enclosing walls of the dwelling units, switch rooms, motor rooms, pump rooms, water tank compartment and other enclosed spaces. Wall and ceilings of the private balcony of dwelling units and common access corridors shall be considered as external surfaces to be painted with acrylic emulsion paint.
23.3
PAINTING OF INTERNAL SURFACES (a) Internal Surfaces of Dwelling Units Where specified or instructed by the SO Rep, all plastered, skim coated and concrete surfaces of internal walls and ceilings of dwelling units shall be painted with two coats of approved emulsion paint of white colour. The first coat may be with thinning of up to 20% of clean water by volume. The second coat shall not be diluted. The method of painting for these coats, with the exception of the two coats for the ceilings of the toilets and the kitchen (if applicable), shall be by means of an appropriate portable airless spraying equipment as approved by the SO Rep. No compressed air shall be used to assist the spraying. The two coats for the ceilings of the toilets may be painted by using rollers. (b) Other Internal Surfaces Where specified, all plastered, skim coated and concrete surfaces of internal walls and ceilings of shops, shoplets, eating houses, living quarters, switch rooms, lift motor rooms, pump rooms, water tank compartments, stores, MDF rooms, electrical substations and areas other than dwelling units shall be painted with three coats of approved emulsion paint. The first coat may be with thinning of up to 20% of clean water by volume. The second and third coats shall not be diluted. (c) The emulsion paint shall be of those qualities approved by PSB and the SO Rep.
23.4
PAINTING OF WOODWORK
23.4.1
Preparation All joinery and finished woodwork shall be properly cleaned down, knotted, stopped, sand-papered smooth and primed. Two coats of wood preservative shall be applied to the back of door frames and window frames and other woodwork abutting masonry work. The wood preservative shall be "Solignum", "Creosote" or other approved.
23.4.2
Painting (a) New Surfaces Unless otherwise specified, surfaces of all woodwork shall be prepared and painted with one priming coat, one undercoat and one finishing coat of approved enamel paint. (b) Existing Painted Surfaces All existing painted surfaces, shall be thoroughly scrapped, rubbed down as directed to remove all loose scales etc. Surfaces with thick paint coats shall be removed by paint remover, heater, mechanical grinder or other approved means. Prime all bare spot surfaces with aluminium wood primer before new painting. Prepare and apply one undercoat and one finishing coat of enamel paint.
23.4.3
Wood Varnish To Main Entrance Doors And Bedroom Doors To Flats Unless otherwise specified, all main entrance doors and bedroom doors to flats shall be finished with wood varnish all as specified.
23.4.3.1
Surface Preparation All pin holes and recesses on the main entrance door and bedroom door surfaces shall be filled and stopped with putty. The door surfaces shall be properly sanded smooth by mechanical means and cleaned prior to the application of wood varnish.
23.4.3
Wood Varnish To Main Entrance Door, Bedroom Doors And Bath/WC Doors To Flats (Cont'd) Wood Varnish The main entrance door surface shall be finished off-site under a factory environment with a minimum of two coats of wood stain/dye and three coats of clear varnish/lacquer, in semi-gloss finish or other approved finish. The colour of the wood stain/dye shall be approved by the SO Rep. The wood varnish shall comply with the requirements as specified hereunder:
Test Test Method Substrate Application Method/Film Thickness Requirements
23.4.3.2
Varnish Only a) Condition in container SS 5 Part B4: 1987 NA NA No coagulation, precipitation, or separation of components, free from foreign particles; No coagulation, precipitation, or separation of components, free from foreign particles; Maximum 30 microns; Minimum 50 microns;
b)
Keeping qualities
SS 5 Part B6: 1987
NA
NA
c) d)
Fineness of grind Dry film thickness
SS 5 Part B13: 1987 SS 5 Part B1:1985 (Method 5) SS 5 Part D2: 1985
NA Burnished tinplate
NA 3 coats by brush
e)
Surface drying time Through dry time
Burnished tinplate
Metered bar/wft 50 microns Metered bar/wft 50 microns Metered bar/wft 50 microns NA Metered bar/wft 80 microns Metered bar/dft 25 microns Metered bar/dft 25 microns
2 hrs maximum;
f)
ISO 9117: 1990
Burnished tinplate
6 hrs maximum;
g)
Gloss (60 deg.)
SS 5 Part E1: 1985
Glass plate
25 50 gloss units;
h) i)
Flash point Washability
SS Part B15: 1987 SS 5 Part F5: 1992
NA Glass with alkyd undercoat Burnished tinplate
23 deg.C minimum >3000 cycles with no wearoff; Minimum 1000 g;
j)
Scratch (1000 g)
SS 5 Part F2: 1988
k)
Accelerated weathering (500 hrs dry cycle) Mildew resistance
SS 5 Part G4: 1992
Burnished tinplate
Maximum gloss loss 30 %;
l)
SS 150 Appendix C
NA
NA
No growth;
Varnish over stain m) Application properties (brushing) SS 5 Part B9: 1987 Kapur wood 2 coats stain, 1 coat varnish by brush Easy application, good levelling. Dried film to show no excessive brush mars, sagging, running, streaking or cracking; < 5 % tape-off
n)
Cross-cut adhesion MEK double rubs
ASTM D3359 - 95a
Kapur wood
2 coats stain, 3 coats varnish by brush 2 coats stain, 3 coats varnish by brush 2 coats stain, 3 coats varnish by brush 2 coats stain, 3 coats varnish by brush
o)
ASTM D5402 - 93
Kapur wood
100 double rubs minimum;
p)
Humid- dry cycle
ASTM 3459 - 87
Kapur wood
< 25 % gloss loss after 5 cycles; No changes for any of the chemicals tested
q)
Chemical resistance*
ASTM D1308 - 87
Kapur wood
* Chemicals used in the Chemical resistance test : Shoe polish (Kiwi brand black solid wax polish) for 15 mins.; Bleach (5.5% sodium hypochlorite) for 15 mins.; Vinegar (5% acidity) for 30 mins; Ethanol (100% solution) for 30 mins; Detergent (5% tetrapotassium pyrophosphate, 10 % dodecylbenzene sulphonate, amine salt in distilled water) for 30 mins.
23.4.3
Wood Varnish To Main Entrance Door, Bedroom Doors And Bath/WC Doors To Flats (Cont'd) Wood Varnish (Cont'd) In addition, the wood stain shall also meet the requirements as specified for tests a, b, c, d and h above. The stain shall also be used in conjunction with the varnish in tests for application properties, MEK double rubs, adhesion, humid-dry cycle and chemical resistance.
23.4.3.2
23.4.3.3
Protection Of Timber Doors The factory varnished doors shall be covered by protection materials at the factory before delivered to the site. The protection materials shall be adequate to cushion the door surface against impact or knocking during transportation and installation and to prevent staining. It shall not be removed, unless instructed by the SO Rep, till the flats are fully completed. The protection details shall be subjected to approval by the SO Rep. The cushioning material for the door surface could be cardboard, bubblefoam or other suitable materials of adequate thickness. The materials used, including the adhesion tape, shall not cause staining to the doors in wet and dry conditions. The design of the protection shall allow it to remain intact during and after the installation of the lock set and hinges at site.
23.4.3.4
Storage Of Doors The Contractor shall also be required to provide one storage area per block for the proper storage of the main entrance doors, bedroom doors and bath/wc doors.. The storage areas shall be kept in a dry condition. The doors shall not be installed earlier than one month before the handing over inspection, unless instructed otherwise by the SO Rep. They shall be brought to the various units just prior to their installations.
23.4.3.5
Existing Entrance Door Not Replaced Existing entrance doors not replaced shall be painted with enamel paint or other approved by the SO Rep. No cost variation if the existing doors are not painted as requested by the Flat Owners.
23.4.4
Painting To Exposed Roof Timber Structural Members All exposed roof sawn timber structural members shall be painted with one coat of "Solignum'" "Presotim", or "Creosote" wood preservative or other approved.
23.5 23.5.1
PAINTING OF FERROUS METAL WORK Preparation Of Surface Remove all dust, rust, scale, grease and oil before painting.
23.5.2
Painting Unless otherwise specified, paint all exposed metal surfaces with one coat of lead and chromate-free primer, one undercoat and one finishing coat of approved enamel paint. Primer to mild steel door frame shall be approved cathodic electrodeposition primer. Unless otherwise specified, paint all metal surfaces in contact with or embedded in concrete, masonry work, etc, except for concrete reinforcement, with one coat of lead and chromate-free primer. Paint stainless steel, brass and aluminium Works only if specified.
23.6
PAINTING OF PIPES Allow for the painting of all sanitary, water and gas installation pipes, rainwater downpipes, balcony waste discharge stacks and all services pipes including water supply pipes (except stainless steel pipes and pipes in the water tank compartment). Unless specified otherwise, the colour shall match with the general background colour tone of the building to the satisfaction of the SO Rep. Paint pipes and trunking as specified hereunder and including other types of pipes and trunking not so specified but shown in the Drawing. Type of Pipe/Trunking UPVC pipes and fittings Paint Coat Required Two coats enamel paint unless specified otherwise. However, those within trunking, stacks/ceiling and service ducts need not be painted. Two coats acrylic emulsion paint to match the general background colour tone. However, those within trunking, stacks/ceiling and service ducts need not be painted. First coat one coat of polyvinyl butyral etching primer; Second coat one coat of lead and chromate-free primer; Third coat one coat of undercoat for enamel paint; Fourth coat one finishing coat of enamel paint. Two coats of lead and chromate-free primer followed by two coats of enamel paint. Two coats of approved ceramic insulation coating.
UPVC trunking for electrical wiring, water and gas pipes outside residential units. Galvanised steel pipes and fittings.
Ductile iron pipes and fittings including supports. Ductile iron pipes and fittings for water distribution mains including supports on roof level. Copper gas pipes including fittings. Stainless steel, copper and brass pipes.
Two coats of white enamel paint or other colour to match the background as instructed by the SO Rep. No painting required unless specified otherwise.
23.7
* PAINTING TO EXTERNAL REINFORCED CONCRETE SLOPING ROOF OF CENTRAL REFUSE CHUTE CHAMBER [*Applicable if specified in the Contract] The external reinforced concrete sloping roof of the central refuse chute chamber shall be painted with water based algae resistant emulsion paint in accordance with Clause 23.2 "External Painting" including all subclauses under it.
23.8
DISPOSAL OF SPENT PAINT The Contractor shall ensure that all spent paint and waste water from the washing of paint brushes/instruments are properly disposed off. The disposal of spent paint and waste water/waste solvent shall be in accordance with MEWR guidelines. The Contractor shall provide the necessary 220-litre drums and engage a licensed industrial toxic waste collector to collect the drums for proper disposal. The Contractor shall put up a consignment note to the Pollution Control Department.
23.8
DISPOSAL OF SPENT PAINT (CONT'D)
23.8.1
Solvent Based Enamel Paint All spent paint and waste solvent (generated from washing) shall be collected in 220-litre drums. There shall be no discharge of spent paint and/or waste solvent/waste water (generated from washing) into the sewerage system. The drums shall be in good and sound conditions so that they can be transported safely for proper disposal by the licensed industrial toxic waste collector. The drums shall be properly labelled and stored within a curbed area to prevent spillage. The drums shall be covered to prevent fire hazard and smell nuisance.
23.8.2
Water Based Emulsion Paint All spent paint and waste water (generated from washing) shall be collected in 220-litre drums. There shall be no discharge of the spent paint and/or waste water (generated from washing) into the sewerage system. The drums shall be in good and sound conditions so that they can be transported safely for proper disposal by the licensed toxic industrial waste collector. The drums shall be properly labelled and stored within a curbed area to prevent spillage.
23.9
SCAFFOLDING Provide and erect scaffolding over all faces of the buildings for the application of paint. Scaffolding shall not be removed until painted surfaces are inspected by the SO Rep and until test results of paint samples taken out for testing are known.
23.10
CLEARING UP ON COMPLETION All areas stained by paint including but not limited to floors, staircases, aprons and public areas and drains shall be thoroughly washed and removed upon completion of the Works before handing over to the Employer. All debris and superfluous materials shall be cleared away.
23.11
PAINTING TO TIMBER DOOR FRAMES & STEEL GATES The exposed surfaces of the timber door frame and metal gate shall be painted with one undercoat and one finishing coat of enamel paint regardless of the exposed width. However, exposed surfaces of metal gates that are made of aluminium, stainless steel and wrought iron need not be painted unless specified otherwise.
23.12
PAINTING SEALER COAT TO EXTERNAL FACES OF REFUSE CHUTE WALLS, RC ROOF FASCIA AND WATER TANK ROOM Before application of emulsion paint, the walls shall be treated with water-proofing sealer of approved quality in accordance with the manufacturer's instruction.
23..13
AREA PLANTED WITH CREEPERS All walls and fencing which are planted with creepers shall be excluded from painting. However, repairs shall be carried out as specified.
23..14
PAINTING TO ALUMINIUM WINDOWS Unless otherwise specified, painting to aluminium windows shall be excluded from this contract. All existing aluminium windows shall be brush cleaned.
23.15
NON-FERROUS METAL STAINED DURING PAINTING Non-ferrous metal stained or smeared during painting shall be removed with approved paint remover. Area tarnished by the process shall be polished with wool buffer.
23.16
WASHING OF PAINT TINS AND TOOLS Washing of paint tins and tools shall be carried out in sewered areas such as wash areas and dustbin compounds.
23.17
TELEMONITORING SYSTEM TRIANGLE (TST) INDICATORS All existing TST indicators located near the topmost floor motor-rooms are not to be disturbed by the Contractor. If the TST indicators have been defaced, it must be immediately rectified to match the existing. The Contractor shall exercise care in the execution of the works to prevent any damage to the Telemonitoring System.
23.18
SHANGHAI PLASTER FINISHES All surfaces of building finished with shanghai plaster shall be properly washed, clean to remove dust, stains, dirt etc. Cracks on existing surfaces shall be properly patched up to match existing. The shanghai plastered surfaces shall be painted with one coat of approved silicone sealer or other approved to the satisfaction of the SO Rep.
23.19
PAINTING HOT DIPPED GALVANISED RAILINGS Galvanised steel surfaces shall first be treated with one coat of polyvinyl butyral etching primer and one coat of lead and chromate-free primer and then painted with one undercoat and one finishing coat of enamel paint. The finishing colour shall be approved by the SO Rep.
23.20
PROVISION OF PAINT CONTAINERS FOR PAINT TEST SAMPLES BY THE CONTRACTOR The Contractor shall provide adequate number of approved 500cc container with air-tight cover for the paint samples to be taken for tests. The container shall be cylindrical in shape with a diameter of approximately 9cm and height of 10cm. The capacity of "500cc" shall be sprayed or written on the top cover. The paint containers shall be delivered to the site office on commencement of the contract and shall be place under the safe custody of the Employer's Clerk-of-Works. The cost of the supply and delivery of the paint containers shall be deemed to be included in the Contract Sum.
23.21
PAINT TESTING The SO Rep may cause samples to be taken from each consignment of materials or from the works (where the materials have been incorporated in the works) in the presence of the contractor or his representative, for testing. All testing fees incurred shall be paid by the contractor direct to the testing centre. To facilitate the payment for paint tests carried out by PSB, PSB will send the invoices for the testing fees incurred to the contractor. The contractor shall settle the payment of the testing fees promptly as directed by PSB. Should the Employer be informed by PSB that the contractor has failed to settle the payment within the time stipulated by PSB, the Employer may upon request by PSB, make-direct payment to PSB and recover the costs from the contractor either by deducting from any monies payable to the contractor or through invoice to the contractor. However, if there are more than 3 occasions where the contractor fails to pay PSB in time, the contractor may be restricted from tendering for all the Employer's future projects for a period to be decided by the SO Rep.
SECTION 24/...
UPG07/S23.DOC(10) lkk(181206) DPD
Ugdg Spec TS 24-1/1
SECTION 24 RESERVED
SECTION 25/
Ugdg Spec TS 25-1/5
SECTION 25
CHILDRENS PLAYGROUND, FITNESS STATION AND HARDCOURT
25.1
GENERAL Construct badminton court, sepak takraw court, volley ball court, basket ball court, fitness station, and children's playground, complete with play equipment, play sculpture, sand filling; or concrete base with line markers, table and concrete benches in numbers and to positions as shown in the Drawings.Details and finishes shall be as shown and as specified in this Section including all clauses and subclauses under it.
25.2
SETTING OUT Set out outline of playground, courts, fitness station, or position of play equipment and obtain approval from the SO Rep before proceeding further. Allow for shifting and making adjustment when directed by the SO Rep.
25.3
LEVELS Levels of playground and equipment shall be based on finished ground level adjourning and not necessarily on finished platform level shown on the Drawings. Check on site in all cases to ensure that rainwater collected on these playground can be discharged into nearby drains. Adjust levels where necessary.
25.4
GROUND BASE After removal of the top layer of the soil, the ground shall be well consolidated mechanically before laying hardcore. Consolidate again, filling more hardcore to make up to level. Should ground be soft, obtain the decision of the SO Rep on the necessity for piling work.
25.5
CONCRETE STRUCTURE
25.5.1
Construct concrete structure of Grade 25 concrete as specified in Section 4 "Structural Concrete" including all clauses and subclauses under it.
25.5.2
Base of playgrounds shall be hardcore base of an average net thickness of 100mm, consolidated hardcore, blended and topped with 50mm thick crusher run (6-40mm) and compacted to a net thickness of 100mm and to a fall 1:50 or as shown in the Drawings. Provide expansion joints to positions and details as shown.
25.5.3
Hardcourts And Multi-Purpose Courts Where hardcourts and multi-purpose courts are included in the Works, these shall be constructed strictly in accordance with the Drawings. The slab shall be a minimum of 150mm thick reinforced with wire mesh D8 placed 35mm from the top surface. The Grade 30 concrete shall be cast as specified in Section 4 "Structural Concrete" including all clauses and subclauses under it.
Ugdg Spec TS 25-2/5
25.5.3
Hardcourts And Multi-Purpose Courts (Cont'd) Contraction joints shall be introduced into the slab at a spacing of 9500mm or as shown in the Drawings. It shall be formed by a saw-cut after the concrete has aged for at least one day. The depth of the saw-cut shall be at least 40mm. For multi-purpose courts, a 25mm expansion joint shall be formed strictly in accordance with the Drawings at the half-court line. The slab shall be finished with 3 passes of power trowel done without sprinkling of cement dust, cement grout or water onto the surface. The trowelling shall be completed before the concrete set. Ensure a sufficient team of workmen to complete the job. The concrete shall be immediately cured for seven days with approved curing compound or other approved methods. The basketball court stand shall be constructed in accordance with the Drawings. Concrete footing shall be as shown in the Drawings. All joints shall be fully welded to a neat and smooth finish. 50 mm thick nylon cushion padding shall wrap round the standpost to the height as shown in the Drawings. The backboard shall be 18 mm clear acrylic sheet and shall be fixed to the angle support with 6 mm diameter stainless steel counter sunk screws and at intervals as shown in the Drawings. All galvanised steel pipes, angles and supports shall be treated with one coat of polyvinyl butyral etching primer and one coat of approved zinc chromate primer and then painted with one coat of undercoat and one finishing coat of approved enamel paint. All court lines shall be painted with polyurethane paint in bright red, orange, blue or white as indicated. Samples of polyurethane paint showing the colour range as specified shall be submitted to the SO Rep for approval. The Contractor shall ensure that the steel structure are adequately and effectively protected from lightning strike. The lightning protection system shall be in accordance with the Drawings.
25.6
CONCRETE PIPES Concrete pipes shall be of the dimensions as shown in the Drawings & conforming to BS 556.
25.7
PRECAST SLABS Precast slabs around edges of playground shall be 300 mm x 300 mm x 100 mm thick of Grade 30 concrete as specified in Section 4 "Structural Concrete" including all clauses and subclauses under it and cast in steel moulds. Lay slabs on 1:3 cement mortar bed with 25mm gaps between slabs. Fill these gaps with 5 to 10 mm graded granite chippings.
25.8
SUB-SOIL PIPES All sub-soil pipes shall be installed at areas as indicated in the Drawings. All sub-soil pipes shall be of perforated UPVC sub-soil pipes conforming to BS 4962:1989 or SS 272 UPVC pipes with perforations as shown in the Drawings. All sub-soil pipes shall be wrapped with approved non-woven geotextile fabric and encased with washed sand as shown in the Drawings. All sub-soil pipes shall be laid in 1:100 gradient (minimum) and with UPVC pipe joint fittings. The maximum length of sub-soil pipe shall be 25m. For perimeter open drains with depth of 400mm and above, the diameter of the sub-soil pipes shall be 150mm. Where the depth of the perimeter open drain is less than 400mm, the diameter of the sub-soil pipes shall be 100mm. Under such case, consult with the SO Rep before proceeding. All sub-soil pipes shall be connected to sumps and drains at the outlet. Upon completion of laying all sub-soil pipes, the Contractor shall prepare and submit 3 copies of as-built drawings to the SO Rep.
Ugdg Spec TS 25-3/5
25.9
PLAY EQUIPMENT Fabricate all playground equipment as shown and complying with SS 457:1999. Install these equipment in the positions and in accordance with details as shown or as directed by the SO Rep. Inform the SO Rep when this work begins. Upon handing over the playground including play equipment, the Contractor shall submit a Performance Compliance Certificate in the format as shown in Appendix A3, to the SO Rep.
25.10
CAST-IN-SITU EPDM RUBBER FLOORING FOR CHILDRENS PLAYGROUND Over-Riding Clause The Contractor and his Specialist executing the Works as required in this clause including all sub-clauses under it have to ensure that the Works, goods or materials used shall be suitable and reasonably fit for the purposes for which they are required (hereinafter referred to as "Performance Requirement"). In the event the Works, goods or materials to be used as specified in this clause including all sub-clauses under it are upgraded in order to meet the Performance Requirement, the Contractor and his Specialist shall do all necessary upgrading at no extra cost to the Employer, subject always to the approval of the SO Rep, but such approval shall not in any way affect the Contractor's and his Specialist's duties or obligations arising under the Contract.
25.10.1
25.10.2
Concrete Base The concrete base shall be finished in accordance with the manufacturers requirements with the necessary drainage and falls before laying the cast-in-situ rubber flooring.
25.10.3
Cast-In-Situ Rubber Flooring The wet-pour rubber flooring for the childrens playground consists of a two-layer system, comprising of a base mat of Styrene Butadiene Rubber (hereinafter referred to as SBR for the purposes of this clause including all subclauses under it) rubber granular and a top surface of Ethylene Propylene Dienemonomer (hereinafter referred to as EPDM for the purposes of this clause including all subclauses under it). The completed rubber flooring shall be free from Defect, such as blistering, fissure, peeling, delamination, disintegration, unevenness and discolouration. The performance of the rubber flooring surfacing shall comply with SS 495:2001. (a) Polyurethane Binder The binding agent shall be a solvent free single component Methylene Diphenyl Isocyanate (hereinafter referred to as MDI for the purposes of this clause including all subclauses under it) based, moisture curing binder. It shall be Toulene Diphenyl Isocyanate (hereinafter referred to as TDI for the purposes of this clause including all subclauses under it) free. The binder shall be Flexilon 1102; Stobielast S133/S134; Tennek TPB 4811 (2c); Incorez 902/023; Poly 8112C; or other approved, polyurethane binder. (b) EPDM Top Layer The EPDM shall be peroxide cured only. The typical physical properties of the peroxide cured EPDM shall be as follows: Hardness (IRHD) Tensile (Mn/m) Elongation at break (%) Specific Gravity : : : : 65 5; > 4.2 > 650 1.58 0.03
EPDM pigment synthetic rubber granules (size 1 4mm) shall be coloured EPDM and must be UV stable. Strand, shave, chipped or shredded rubber is not acceptable in the top layer. A minimum of 10mm thick top layer EPDM rubber surface shall be a seamless surface. The colours and design shall be submitted to the SO Rep for approval prior to its installation. The EPDM shall be BRG; MRI; or other approved.
Ugdg Spec TS 25-4/5
25.10.3
Cast-In-Situ Rubber Flooring (Cont'd) (c) Base Layer The base layer shall be a precise combination of black granular rubber SBR (size 4 to 10 mm) mixed with binder. The thickness of the SBR base rubber shall be minimum 65mm thick. (d) Thickness The total thickness of the cast-in-situ EPDM rubber flooring shall not be less than 75 mm thick.
25.10.4
Method Of Installation The system shall be laid-in-situ on top of the concrete base and trawled to provide an even, seamless. porous, slip resistance and resilient rubber flooring. (a) Surface Preparation All surfaces are to be laid to fall and shall be clean and dry before commencement of the Works. The new concrete base shall be allowed to cure for a minimum of seven days prior to the commencement of the rubber flooring. (b) SBR Base Rubber SBR base rubber granules shall be thoroughly mixed by mechanical mixer with the polyurethane binder and laid onto the concrete slab. A minimum ratio of 100:12 by weight, between the rubber granules and binder shall be mixed on the Site. The SBR rubber layer shall be minimum 65mm thick . The screed shall be trowelled to form a uniform and seamless layer. A roller is required to roll the surface to maintain an equal density surface throughout. (c) Curing For Base Rubber The surface shall be cured in ambient temperature for a minimum of 12 hours before proceeding to the next layer. (d) EPDM A minimum thickness of 10mm EPDM layer is laid on a SBR rubber base. A minimum ratio of 100:18 by weight between the EPDM rubber and binder shall be mixed. The screeding shall be cast-in-situ screeding and hand trowel to maintain a seamless application. (e) Curing For EPDM The surface can be walked on only after 18 hours. However, the playground shall only be opened for public usage after 5 days when full curing is achieved. Proper barricade shall be provided during the process of curing. (f) Edges The surface edges shall be flush with adjacent areas or tapered to provide a safe and barrier-free transition.
25.10.5
Performance Requirements Where cast-in-situ EPDM Rubber flooring for children's playground in included in the Works, test certificates for the performance requirements specified hereunder shall be submitted to the SO Rep for approval. The performance requirements and test methods for impact absorbing playground surfacing shall comply with SS 495:2001. (a) Resistance To Abrasive Wear The cast-in-situ surfaces shall exhibit the performance specified hereunder: (i) (ii) Wear index shall be less than 1.0; Wear ratio (p) shall be not less than 1.0 and not more than 3.0
Ugdg Spec TS 25-5/5
25.10.5
(b)
Slip Resistance The minimum slip resistance measured in any direction of test , under either wet or dry conditions shall not be less 40.
(c)
Resistance To Indentation The residual indentation (r), after 24 hour recovery, shall not be more than 5.0mm. After removal of the load and after allowing for 24 hour recovery, none of the specimens tested shall exhibit any cracking, splitting or perforation around the point at which the load was applied.
(d)
Ease Of Ignition The greatest radius of effects of ignition shall not exceed 35mm and shall thereby be classified as having a LOW radius of effects of ignition.
(e)
Critical Fall Height Critical fall height of impact absorbing surfacing shall comply with SS 495:2001.
Before handing over the playground including playground equipment, contractor is required to conduct impact attenuation test at site to comply with SS 495:2001 and shall submit Performance Compliance Certificate, together with test report attached in the format as shown in Appendix A3, to the SO Rep.
25.10.6
Warranty The Contractor and his Specialist shall warrant the Works on the terms and conditions as stipulated in Clause 59.2 'Provision of Warranty' and the specimen of Deed of Warranty as produced in Appendix A1. In this respect, the Contractor and his Specialist shall submit such Deed of Warranty to the Employer or to such other party or such Town Council(s) as the SO Rep may at his sole discretion decide. In the event that the Deed of Warranty for part of the works or for the whole works is to be submitted to such Town Council(s), the Contractor and his Specialist shall submit such Deed of Warranty in accordance with the specimen of Deed of Warranty as produced in Appendix A1(TC) and Clause 59.2 'Provision of Warranty' to such Town Councils. The duly executed warranty shall be submitted immediately upon request by the SO Rep, and if no such request is made, then at such time when the SO Rep considers the works have been substantially completed in accordance with the Contract. In the event that the Contractor and his Specialist shall fail to execute and submit the Deed of Warranty within the time specified, the SO Rep shall be allowed to withhold 15% of the payment of any sums due to the Contractor in relation to the execution of such Works, subject to the minimum sum of S$5,000.00 per Deed of Warranty. However, such sums withheld shall be released to the Contractor upon submission by him of the duly executed Deed of Warranty.
25.11
BONDING OF SPRING ROCKERS (PLAYGROUND) All spring rockers in playground shall be electrically bonded to weldmesh in accordance to SS CP 33:1996. The Contractor shall ensure proper bonding is done.
SECTION 26/...
SECTION 26
26.0 26.1 26.1.1
TREE & SHRUB PLANTING AND TURFING PLANTING TREES AND SHRUBS General The work generally includes : (a) (b) (c) Preparation of plant bed and tree hole including soil supplements. The search, selection, supply, delivery and planting of nursery plants. Protection, maintenance, guarantee and replacement of all plant materials and mulched beds.
26.1.2
Quality Of Workmanship And Materials (a) (b) (c) All materials shall be approved by the SO Rep prior to use on the Site. Materials shall be obtained from approved sources/or suppliers. All materials and workmanship shall be of the best quality. All plant materials supplied shall be free of pest disease, discolouration and damage. Plants shall be well branched with vigorous shoots. The root system of each plant shall contain a good proportion of fibrous roots.
26.1.3
Inspection (a) (b) All materials shall be subjected to inspection and approval by the SO Rep. Inspection and approval of plants on delivery shall be for quality, size and variety only and shall not in any way impair the right of rejection for failure to meet other requirements during the planting or at the time of inspection for final acceptance.
26.1.4
Submission (a) Samples Submit samples of each of the following type of materials to be approved except where specified otherwise : Topsoil Materials for planting mixtures Materials for staking, guying and wrapping Fertilizers (b) Request for Substitution If substitutions for the plants listed in the plant schedule are required, submit request for substitution approval in writing within six weeks from the date of the Letter of Acceptance. (c) Photographs of Plant Material Within six (6) calendar months from the commencement date of the Time for Completion, submit two (2) complete sets of photographs of all plant material subject to inspection. All photographs shall be labelled and representative of the plant materials specified. (d) Maintenance Reports and Schedule During the Maintenance Period, submit monthly reports describing the work completed for the previous month and the work to be accomplished in the following month.
26.1.5
Horticultural Supervisor The Contractor shall employ a competent, experienced (min 2 years) and qualified horticultural supervisor (minimum Certificate of Ornamental Horticulture or equivalent) to be stationed full time at the Site and for the full duration of the Works required under this Section including all clauses and subclauses under it, who shall receive and act upon instructions given by the SO Rep, and such instructions given to the horticultural supervisor shall be deemed to have been given to the Contractor.
26.1.6
Notice Of Works The Contractor shall inform the SO Rep at least 24 hours in advance of his intention to commence any of the following operations : setting out; excavation; backfilling; plant delivery and planting.
26.1.7
Topsoil All topsoil shall be of good quality, free from rubbish, roots, stumps or other extraneous matter, be friable and porous in texture. The texture content shall be 40-50% sand, 20-25% clay and 20% approved organic matter.
26.1.8
Sub-Soil The clay content of the sub-soil which is the strata found just below the top soil layer shall not be greater than 45%.
26.1.9
Unwashed Sand The unwashed sand shall be free of any debris, stones or other foreign material.
26.1.10
Soil Conditioner Soil conditioner shall be peat, cocopeat, organic compost, or other approved fibrous organic matters suitable for mixing with soil to make a friable growing medium for plants.
26.1.11
Setting Out (a) The Contractor shall set out the Works in accordance with the Drawings or as directed by the SO Rep. Any discrepancies between the Drawings and actual conditions on the Site shall be notified to the SO Rep before commencement of the Works. If the Contractor fails to notify the SO Rep on any such discrepancies, all costs and expenses of any adjustment, amendment, resetting and realignment of the setting out shall be borne by the Contractor. The location of trees, palms and shrubs shall be laid out and pegged by the Contractor on the Site to be inspected by the SO Rep before further commencement of the Works. The pegs shall be painted to indicate sizes of holes/pits as follows : Holes/Pit Sizes 0.5m x 0.5m x 0.5m 1.0m x 1.0m x 1.0m 1.5m x 1.5m x 1.0m (d) Colour Indication Yellow Not Painted Red
(b)
(c)
The shape, pattern and layout of flower beds shall be demarcated and drawn by the Contractor on the Site. The Site shall be inspected by the SO Rep before further commencement of the Works.
26.1.12
Hole For Planting Holes for planting shall be decided by the SO Rep. All holes excavated shall be inspected and approved by the SO Rep before backfilling soil mixture. All excavated and unwanted materials shall be removed from the Site. The Contractor shall allow in the Contract Sum for excavating clayish subsoil, broken concrete, rubble or other material when excavating holes for tree planting as no claim for extras shall be entertained for excavation in difficult or hard ground. Holes for planting shall be of the following sizes : (a) (b) Minimum 1.0m x 1.0m x 1.0m deep for planting of tree saplings. Minimum 1.5m x 1.5m x 1.0m deep for the planting of semi-mature (instant and 30-litre bag and above) trees and fruit trees. Minimum 500mm deep for flower beds or trenches to areas as shown in the Drawings. Minimum 500mm x 500mm x 500mm deep for planting of shrubs and foliage plants.
(c) (d)
26.1.13
Soil Mixture For Backfilling (a) Waterlogged Hole If there is underground water or the hole is waterlogged, necessary action or measure shall be taken to rectify the waterlogged condition. (b) Soil Mixture All planting holes shall be backfilled with 3:1 topsoil, soil conditioner and 1kg per m3 of granular fertilizer NPK (15:15:6:4) or 4:2:1 subsoil, unwashed sand and soil conditioner with 1kg per m3 of granular fertiliser NPK (15:15:6:4) well mixed to a level 250mm higher than the adjacent ground level at time of filling. (c) Soil Mixture For Roof Garden All planting boxes/ beds shall be backfilled with 4:3:2 topsoil, unwashed sand and soil conditioner with 20g of water-holding medium per m3, well mixed to the same level of the planter boxes at the time of filling. (d) Soil Mixture Used For Instant Tree All planting holes for transplanted instant trees/palms/shrubs shall be backfilled with only topsoil. (e) Soil Mixture For Fruit Trees Similar soil mixture shall be used. The excavated earth shall be used to constructed earth mound averaging 50 mm high and 1750mm wide along the edge of the holes all round.
26.1.14
Purchase Of Trees The Contractor shall purchase the trees/palms/shrubs etc. from his own source.
26.1.15
Plant Protection (a) All plant materials shall be carefully protected and if necessary wrapped in the nursery during the lifting, awaiting transportation, unloading and during storage on the Site. Any evidence of unsatisfactory protection to roots, stems, branches and leaves will result in plants being rejected. Unprotected plants shall not be transported during hot weather and all plants shall be kept moist during transportation and storage. No plant shall be left on the Site unplanted for more than two (2) days.
(b)
Ugdg Spec TS 26-4/15 26.1.16 Plant Quality (a) (b) All trees, palms, shrubs and other plants delivered to the Site shall be of the specified size, free of pests and diseases and undamaged. Plants shall be well branched with bushy foliage. All the general conditions of plants delivered to the Site shall be to the satisfaction of the SO Rep and approved by him before planting out onto the Site in accordance with the Drawings or as directed by the SO Rep. The SO Rep shall reserve the right to reject undersized, unhealthy, unspecified, damaged, injured, diseased, infested or any other plants not in accordance with the Contract and to the satisfaction of the SO Rep during the entire period including the Maintenance Period and Defects Liability Period of the Contract. The Contractor shall immediately remove and replace all rejected plants at his own cost and expense. The plant size shall be measured on the day of planting at the Site in accordance with the Drawings or as directed by the SO Rep in writing. Plants not complying to the specified sizes shall be rejected and rectified by the Contractor. All associated costs involved including plant material cost shall be charged and deducted from any monies due to the Contractor, if he fails to rectify. All trees, palms and shrubs shall possess the natural characteristics and growth habit typical of its variety and species to the satisfaction of the SO Rep. All trees, palms and shrubs where required under the Contract shall comply with the descriptions and requirements specified hereunder : "Instant Trees" Instant trees are semi-matured trees especially prepared in advance for transplanting. Instant trees shall have the specified minimum clear and upright straight tree trunk of the specified height and girth with at least 3 branches and a well developed secondary branch system. "Big Saplings" Big saplings are medium-sized nursery grown trees having a single straight stem and unbroken leader with an overall height as specified. The stem shall be fully furnished with an evenly spread and balanced lateral branches and shall be of the specified girth measured at 0.5m from the ground. "Saplings" Saplings are small sized nursery grown trees having single straight stem and unbroken leader with an overall height as specified. The stem shall be fully furnished with evenly and balanced lateral. "Edible Fruit Trees" Edible fruit trees shall be of minimum height of 1.2m or as specified. They shall be marcotted or grafted saplings especially as follows : Pouteria caimito (Abiu) Persea americana (Avocado) Achras zapota (Chiku) Durio zibethinus (Durian) Psidium guajava (Guava) Artocarpus heterophyllus (Jackfruit) Eugenia aquea (Jambu Air) Citrus microcarpa (Lime) Mangifera indica (Mango) Nephelium lappaceum (Rambutan) Annona muricata (Soursop) Averrhoa carambola (Starfruit) Artocarpus incisus (Breadfruit) Grafted Grafted Marcotted Grafted Grafted or Marcotted Grafted Marcotted Grafted Grafted Grafted Grafted Grafted Grafted
(c)
(d) (e) (f)
(g) (h)
Ugdg Spec TS 26-5/15 26.1.16 Plant Quality (Cont'd) (h) Cont'd "Single-stemmed Palms" Single stemmed palms shall have a straight trunk of the specified height measured from the root collar. The heads of the palms shall be balanced with at least five fronds and evidenced of one new shoot. "Clustered Palms" Clustered palms are palms which naturally grow as a multi-stemmed clump by sending out suckers. Such palms shall have a minimum of three suckers each and have a specified overall height measured from the root collar. They shall have at least three fronds on each stem and evidence of one new growing shoot per stem. "Shrubs" Shrubs are woody perennials of generally multi-stemmed and bushy habit and shall have a minimum height measured from the ground level to the top of plants as specified. Such shrubs shall be well balanced and bushy with strong developed fibrous root systems, and shall be pruned in advance as required to achieve the specified height tolerances. Branches shall break from the base of the plant just above the root collar, and shall be well furnished with leaves right down to the ground level unless otherwise specified by the SO Rep. All plants shall be grown in containers of suitable dimensions for the species. "Herbaceous Plants" Herbaceous plants are non-woody perennials usually of a clump forming habit. Such plants shall have well-developed main stem or stems with good symmetry, and a healthy root system. Clump of herbaceous plants shall include rhizomes, corns, tubers or roots with soil undisturbed by lifting with evidence of growing shoots emerging above the soil level. All herbaceous plants shall be grown in containers unless specified as being produced by an alternate method. "Groundcover" Groundcover plants are low growing or prostrate shrubs or herbaceous plants whose habit are to totally cover the soil. All groundcover species shall be evenly balanced to allow equal growth in all directions. Plants shall have fully developed roots and leaves. All plants shall be grown in containers. "Climbers" Climbers are plants whose growth habit are to climb upwards by means of twining stems, tendrils or clinging roots. Such plants shall have at least two leader shoots up to the specified height or length and a vigorous root system. All plants are to be grown in containers.
26.1.17
Planting Techniques (a) Where trees/palms are planted in turf or shrub areas, plant trees and palms before the turfing or shrub planting operations. Where shrubs are planted in turfed areas, plant the shrubs before the turfing work. The Contractor shall handle the plant in such a manner so that the ball of soil surrounding the roots is not broken. The plant should be firmly held by the pot, plaster bags, containers, etc. The Contractor shall ensure that trees, palms and shrubs are properly removed from their pots, containers, plaster bags, etc and securely planted in the ground. The Contractor shall straighten the plants whenever directed by the SO Rep.
(b)
(c)
26.1.17
Planting Techniques (Cont'd) (d) All plants shall be planted with their collars levelled with the ground and covered with soil as directed by the SO Rep. All plants shall be planted to accommodate the spreading root system of the plant to the same soil depth as in the nursery and shall be well watered before removing them from the containers. The plants shall be positioned upright and the soil firmed around the roots. For large areas, the outer rows are to be set out first to ensure that the correct shape of the bed is established. The remaining plants shall then be evenly distributed to cover the planting area. The SO Rep shall be notified in advance if there are too many or too few plants to fill the area required, and an assessment of the laying out adjustments will be directed accordingly. The laying out of plants shall be completed and approved before planting into the soil bed can commence. Small shrubs, groundcovers and herbaceous plants shall be planted in pockets formed by a trowel or hand spade. The pocket shall be deep enough and wide enough to accommodate the root ball of the plant. The plants shall be placed upright in the planting pockets and make firm into the ground by treading or hand pressure. All plants shall be watered thoroughly immediately after planting.
(e)
(f)
(g)
(h)
26.1.18
Tree Support (a) To Tree Sapling Tree saplings shall be supported immediately as directed after planting. The supporting stakes shall be in 75mm diameter Bintangore pole or other approved material, minimum 3.0m long and driven vertically 1.2m deep into the ground without injuring the rootballs and projecting 250mm above the crown of the sapling. Fasten tree saplings to the supporting stakes by rubber or PVC hose and tie wires. Tying wire shall be No. 20 SWG galvanised wire, threaded through 10mm diameter rubber or plastic hose and be wound around the tree trunk in a single loop. The tree trunk shall be secured at a point just above its branch and also at a point just 500mm above ground level. (b) To Semi-Mature/Mature/Instant Tree (Tripod Support) For semi-mature/mature/instant tree, 3 tree stakes of Bintangore poles shall be evenly spaced around the tree to form a tripod system to support the transplanted tree at about two thirds of its height or under the main fork. The tree stakes of Bintangore poles are driven at least 0.5m into the ground at an angle. 2 layers of gunny sack or similar material shall be wound around the tree trunk where it meets the supporters. The meeting point of the supporters are tightened up with galvanised wire to form a sturdy tripod support system. The support system shall be checked monthly and be removed after 6 months when the tree becomes stable.
26.1.19
Tree Guards Provide tree guards to trees planted as specified by the SO Rep. The pattern of the tree guard shall be decided by the SO Rep.
26.1.20
Tree Shade Provide shading to mangosteen, rambutan or other sensitive fruit trees as directed by the SO Rep. Nylon netting or other approved with 60% to 70% shading effect shall be used to cover the top of the tree guard and upper 500mm of its four (4) sides.
Ugdg Spec TS 26-7/15 26.1.21 Transplanting Existing Trees (Instant Tree) Where required under the Contract, transplanting of existing trees shall be carried out as follows : (a) Branch Pruning Prune branches or pollard the tree as directed by the SO Rep. Paint all cuts with fungicidal sealant. (b) Rootballs All trees/palms, shrubs to be transplanted shall have an earth rootball of a minimum diameter ranging from 3.5 to 7.5 times the diameter of the tree trunk measured at 1.0m above ground level or to the size to be decided by the SO Rep. This shall be done by excavating a trench about 0.8m deep around the tree at appropriate distance. All protruding roots shall be cut and painted with a fungicidal sealant. Excavated trees shall be transplanted within the same working day unless otherwise directed by the SO Rep. (c) Tree Pits To avoid delay, the new pit for the tree transplant shall be ready before the tree is brought to the new location. Pit shall be at least 0.5m wider and 0.25m deeper than the rootball to allow for incorporation of topsoil beneath the root. The minimum tree pit dimension shall be 1.5m x 1.5m x 1.0m deep. All planting holes for instant tree shall be backfilled with good quality approved topsoil to a level 250mm higher than the adjacent ground level at time of filling. (d) Lifting And Transporting The tree shall be lifted by motor crane or other lifting machinery of appropriate capacity. Every precaution including rootball securely wrapped by moisten canvass and angle bar frame or other approved materials shall be taken to prevent damage to the rootball during the loading and transporting of the tree to the new location. (e) Before unloading tree into position, the depth and diameter of the rootball shall be measured and adjustment made to the pit. The tree shall be set in the hole, orientated, depth adjusted and planted with minimum delay. The tree shall be planted to its former depth. Backfilling shall then be firmly consolidated to eliminate air pockets under and around the roots. Tripod shall be provided to keep it firmly in position if required.
26.1.22
Tree Pruning Trees with dead, rotten or crossed branches shall be pruned to maintain a clear stem up to the specified height using the methods described below. The pruning operation shall be carried out by an experienced worker with appropriate tools and equipment under the supervision of the Horticultural Supervisor : (a) Pruning shall be done with a cut just above and sloping away from an outward facing healthy bud; Removal of branches shall be done by cutting flush with the adjoining stem and in such a way that no part of the stem is damaged or torn; Ragged edges of barks shall be trimmed with a sharp knife; Any cut or wound over 25mm diameter shall be painted with an approved sealant such as "Arbrex" or other approved after trimming; and All pruning shall be cleared and removed from the Site after pruning.
(b)
(c) (d)
(e)
Ugdg Spec TS 26-8/15 26.1.23 Maintenance Of Trees, Shrubs And Ground Covers, Etc Planted trees, shrubs and ground covers, etc. shall be maintained prior to handing over to the Employer and shall be further maintained for another 6 months from the date the planting is handed over to the Employer by performing and/or providing the following : 26.1.23.1 Watering (a) Trees 20 litres of water per tree shall be watered as and when directed by the SO Rep. (b) Landscaped Site 10 litre of water per m of the landscaped site shall be watered as and when directed by the SO Rep. (c) Method Watering shall be carried out by using rubber hose fitted with an adjustable spraying head/gun to wet the soil thoroughly. 26.1.23.2 Soil-Loosening (a) Ornamental Tree Saplings For ornamental tree saplings, the weeding circle shall be loosened to a depth of 75mm using a garden fork. (b) Shrub/Foliage/Landscaped Site For shrub/foliage/landscaped site, the weeding area shall be spiked to a depth of 100mm using a garden fork. 26.1.23.3 Weeding (a) Ornamental Trees For ornamental trees, weed to 1.0m diameter around the sapling tree base using hand trowel or weeding hoe. Weed out an annular band of 50mm around mature or semi-mature tree base using hand trowel or weeding hoe or approved weedicide. (b) Fruit Trees For fruit tree saplings, spread 100mm of mulch consisting of dry shredded leaves, grass sword, wood chips, cocopeat or compost over the 1.0m diameter weeding circle. Spray weedicide on the edge of mulched area (50mm band) using a knapsack sprayer equipped with a "drift-shield". The mulched area shall be weeded monthly. For semi-mature and mature fruit trees, a weeding annular band of 200mm around the tree base shall be maintained by weeding operation. (c) Shrub/Foliage (Individually Planted) A weeding circle of 0.5m diameter around individually planted shrub/foliage shall be manually weeded using hand trowel or weeding hoe. (d) Landscaped Site The Landscaped site shall be weeded using hand trowel or weeding hoe. (e) Hedge An annular band of 0.5m diameter around the base of hedge shall be weeded using hand trowel or weeding hoe.
2
26.1.23 26.1.23.4
Maintenance Of Trees, Shrubs And Ground Covers, Etc (Cont'd) Fertilising (a) Ornamental Trees Sapling Fertiliser NPK Mg (15:15:6:4) shall be broadcasted at a rate of 375g per ornamental tree sapling within the weeding circle 120mm away from stem. Semi-Mature/Mature Trees For semi-mature/mature ornamental trees, fertilizer NPK Mg (12:12:17:2) shall be inserted at a rate of 0.5kg per 250mm girth into holes 300mm deep and at 500mm apart along the dripline. (b) Fruit Tree Saplings Less Than 1 Year Old For fruit tree saplings less than 1 year old, fertiliser NPK Mg (15:15:6:4) shall be placed under the mulch at a rate of 300g per tree, 120mm away from the stem. Saplings/Semi-Mature Trees For fruit tree saplings/semi mature fruit trees, fertilizer NPK Mg (15:15:6:4) shall be broadcasted at a rate of 0.5kg per tree within drip zone away from stem. Matured Trees (Flowering/Fruiting) For mature (flowering/fruiting) fruit trees, fertilizer NPK Mg (12:12:17:2) shall be broadcasted (on level ground) or shall be pocketed (on slope) at 1.0 kg per tree as directed by the SO Rep within drip zone away from stem. (c) Shrub/Foliage For shrub/foliage, fertilizer NPK Mg (12:12:17:2) shall be broadcasted at 50g per m2, with weeding circle 100mm away from stem. (d) Landscaped Site/Hedge For landscaped site/hedge, fertilizer NPK Mg (12:12:17:2) shall be broadcasted at 50g per m2 as directed by the SO Rep. (e) Climber/Creeper For climber/creeper, approved foliar fertilizer shall be sprayed as directed by the SO Rep.
26.1.23.5
Trimming Trees shall be trimmed as directed by the SO Rep including performing and/or providing the following: (a) (b) Trim and remove all extra leader. Trim and remove all side branches from the main trunk measured 3.0m from ground for trees along footpaths, carparks and roadside. Trim and remove all dead, broken, diseased and unwanted branches/shoots. Trim and remove all overlapping branches rubbing each other. Remove and clear from the Site all trimmed vegetation. Paint all cut surfaces exceeding 25.4mm with 2 coats of anti-fungus wound sealant.
(c) (d) (e) (f)
26.1.23 26.1.23.6
Maintenance Of Trees, Shrubs And Ground Covers, Etc (Cont'd) Pest Control (a) Vegetative Stage Of Trees For vegetative stage of trees, top and bottom of tree leaves shall be thoroughly sprayed. Respraying shall be done if it rains within 6 hours after spraying. Approved pesticides are : Pesticides Dimethoate Deltamethrin White Summer Oil Abate 1% Sand Granules Benomyl Captan Thiram Terrazole Copper Fungicide (Metalic Copper) Mancozeb Captafol Omite Tenac (sticker) (b) Fruiting Stage Of Fruit Trees For fruiting stage of fruit trees, brown paper or raffia bags shall be used for control of fruit fly 3 to 4 weeks after flowering for Chiku, Chempedak, Guava, Jackfruit, Jambu Ayer, Mango, Pomelo and Starfruit. Approved brown paper and raffia bags shall be used to bag the fruits as follows : Fruit Chiku; Starfruit Guava; Mango Jambu Ayer; Pomelo Chempedak Jackfruit Size of Bag 150 x 150mm 150 x 300mm 400 x 400mm 400 x 500mm 500 x 800mm Material of Bag Brown Paper Brown Paper Brown Paper Brown Paper or Raffia Brown Paper or Raffia 40% EC 1.25% EC 80% EC 50% EC 50% UP 80% UP 24% EC 50% 80% WP 39% EC 30% WP
Remove and clear from the Site all rotten fruits on trees or on ground. (c) Shrubs/Foliage Etc For shrubs/foliage etc, immediately spray with approved pesticides after the infestation is spotted. Continue such spraying until the infestation is controlled.
UPG07/S26.DOC(10) lkk(181206) DPD
26.1.23 26.1.23.7
Maintenance Of Trees, Shrubs And Ground Covers, Etc (Cont'd) Maintenance Planted trees shrubs and ground covers, etc shall be maintained by adjusting tree tie, making good damaged tree guards, adjusting tripod support including providing and/or performing other reasonable work. The Contractor shall allow in the Contract Sum for all costs and expenses for maintaining all planted trees, shrubs and ground covers, etc provided under the Contract for a further period of six months commencing from the Date of Substantial Completion for the Works or phase or sub-phase of the Works as certified by the Superintending Officer (hereinafter referred to as "Maintenance Period" for the purposes of this section including all clauses and subclauses under it) by providing and/or performing the following : Operation Soil Loosening Weeding Watering Pest Control Fertilising Pruning Adjusting tree ties Damaged/Missing Tree Guards, Supporters, Trees, Shrubs, Ground covers, etc. Monthly Monthly Daily Monthly Monthly Monthly Monthly ) ) and/or to be carried out ) as directed by the SO Rep. ) ) Frequency
) To be replaced/repaired as directed by ) the SO Rep
26.1.23.8
Warning Sign (a) The Contractor shall display sufficient warning signboards at strategic locations on the Site during the progress of tree pruning/spraying of pesticide works, as directed by the SO Rep. The Contractor shall also seal off the Site with red and white plastic tapes as an additional safety precaution during the execution of the Works. The signboard shall measure 1000mm long x 600mm wide using aluminium plate with reflective sheeting and reflective wordings "DANGER - TREE PRUNING IN PROGRESS" OR "DANGER PESTICIDE SPRAYING IN PROGRESS". A sample of the signboard shall be submitted to the SO Rep for approval before using on the Site.
(b)
(c)
26.1.23.9
Working Hours Of Tree Pruning The Contractor shall carry out routine tree pruning/trimming operation within the following hours : Monday to Friday Saturday : : 7am to 3pm 7am to 12 noon
No routine tree pruning/trimming shall be carried out outside the above hours except otherwise instructed by the SO Rep. 26.1.23.10 Updating of Landscape Plan The Contractor shall update a landscape plan within one month after final planting and to provide 6 sets of updated plans to the SO Rep.
UPG07/S26.DOC(11) lkk(181206) DPD
26.2
TURFING
26.2.1
SITE PREPARATION AND TURFING The Contractor shall allow for turfing Works, forming slopes and platforms with even surfaces to the levels all as shown in the Drawings. Clear away loose stones, gravels, tree stumps and building debris. Seek the approval of the SO Rep before commencing turfing Works.
26.2.1.1
Soil For Site Formation The soil used for backfilling shall be original clean earth and the topmost 600mm shall be soil with a clay content of not more than 45%.
26.2.1.2
Soil Scarification For Compacted Site The top layer shall be scarified or loosened to 100mm deep for the whole Site and graded to fall towards drains or as instructed by the SO Rep all at the Contractors cost and expense.
26.2.1.3
Site Gradient The Site shall be graded to fall towards drains at a minimum ground gradient of 1 in 70 or as instructed by the SO Rep all at the Contractors cost and expense.
26.2.2
SITE CONTROL TESTS AND TESTING INSTRUMENTS Provide all necessary labour, Construction Equipment, tools, instruments etc. for carrying out all checking and testing of site Works. The Contractor shall be deemed to have allowed for all costs and expenses to comply with the foregoing requirements in the Contract Sum. No claim for compensation or extras shall be paid for any work carried out by the Contractor in connection with such Works.
26.2.2.1
Number Of Soil Test The number of soil samples shall be 1 per 500m subject to a minimum of 3 samples.
2
26.2.2.2
Percolation Test Procedures for Percolation Test on dry soil sample are as hereunder specified: (a) (b) (c) (d) (e) Randomly select a spot where the test is to be conducted; Dig a hole measuring about 400mm x 400mm x 600mm deep; Fill the hole with water up to the top; Cover the hole; After 24 hours, observe whether or not all the water has drained off. The drainage performance of the soil is acceptable if no water remains in the hole.
UPG07/S26.DOC(12) lkk(181206) DPD
26.2.2 26.2.2.3
SITE CONTROL TESTS AND TESTING INSTRUMENTS Jar Test The procedures for Jar Test on dry soil sample are as hereunder specified: (a) (b) (c) (d) (e) (f) (g) (h) Fill a 250 ml measuring cylinder with water up to its two-third level; Pour in a teaspoon of washing detergent; Shake the contents well; Pour in soil sample until the water level rises to the 250ml mark; Shake the contents well; Place the measuring cylinder on a level bench and gently tap until the surface of the sand is level; Take measurement of the sand level; After 3 hours of standing, take measurement of the height of the silt visible above the sand-silt interface; After 24 hours of standing, take measurement of the height of the clay visible above the silt-clay interface; Work out the percentage of clay, silt and sand.
(i)
(j)
26.2.3 26.2.3.1
Soil Mixture General Requirement All topsoil shall be of good quality, free from rubbish, roots, stumps or other extraneous matter, be friable and porous in texture. The texture content shall be 40-50% sand, 20-25% clay and 20% approved organic matter.
26.2.3.2
Type of Soil Mixture The soil mixture shall be three (3) parts of topsoil with one (1) part of soil conditioner and 1kg per m3 of granular fertilizer NPK (15:15:6:4) or 4:2:1 subsoil, unwashed sand and soil conditioner with 1kg per m3 of granular fertilizer NPK (15:15:6:4).
26.2.4
Thickness Of Soil Mixture The minimum thickness of soil mixture shall be 150mm (including 25mm of original soil attached to turf) at time of construction. A 125mm layer of soil mixture shall be spread over the prepared surface, followed by the planting of the fresh turf.
26.2.5
Use Of Non-Potable Water The Contractor shall allow in the Contract Sum for all costs and expenses incurred in the collection, storage, transportation and use of non-potable water, when directed by the SO Rep, for watering turf, trees and shrubs. Non-potable water can be collected free of charge from the ENV Sewage Treatment Works. These Sewage Treatment Works are located at : (a) (b) (c) (d) (e) (f) Ulu Pandan Sewage Treatment Works Kim Chuan Sewage Treatment Works Seletar Sewage Treatment Works Kranji Sewage Treatment Works Bedok Sewage Treatment Works Jurong Sewage Treatment Works
UPG07/S26.DOC(13) lkk(181206) DPD
26.2.5
Use Of Non-Potable Water (Contd)
The Contractor shall use water tankers or water-tight tanks mounted on trucks to collect the non-potable water from any of the above ENV Sewage Treatment Works. The tank is preferred to have a minimum capacity of 9000 litres. The Contractor must also ensure that unused non-potable water is returned to the Sewage Treatment Works for proper disposal and not discharged into open drains in water catchment areas. The Contractor shall submit detailed particulars of their water tankers or tank mounted trucks to the SO Rep who will then obtain an authorization letter from ENV for the registered tanker to collect non-potable water. The Contractor shall submit detailed justifications to the SO Rep for not using non-potable water for watering turf, trees and shrubs, after direction has been given by the SO Rep to do so.
26.2.6
Turfing Materials Provide turfing materials of size 300mm x 300mm with about 25mm of original soil adhering to the roots, be of good quality, free from pests or diseases and of vigorous growth. The type of turf shall be Cow Grass (Axonopus Compressus). The turf shall be planted promptly to avoid desiccation.
26.2.7
Planting Turf Sods shall be laid within 24 hours upon delivery, in brick-like patterns. Sods shall be firmly sunken into the ground with their edges in contact but without stretching or overlapping or gap. Water the turf immediately after planting until the turf is thriving.
26.2.8
Rolling When the level of the completed turfing Works is undulating or uneven, the turfed areas except those on steep slopes shall be properly rolled out with a garden roller of weight not more than 150 kg or with other approved means. The turfing shall give a uniform even surface on completion. Rolling shall be carried out when the turf is established after the second grass cutting.
26.2.9
Temporary Fencing Provide and fix temporary barricade to all turfed areas comprising 50mm x 50mm x 1.65m long Balau timber posts spaced at 2.4m centres with one end driven 450mm into the ground. Corner and end posts shall be strutted by 2 nos. of 50mm x 50mm x 1.65m Balau timber post. Run 10mm diameter nylon ropes diagonally and horizontally across the top and bottom of the barricade.
26.2.10
Maintenance (Turfing Works) The Contractor shall allow in the Contract Sum for all costs and expenses for providing maintenance services, as specified hereunder, to the turfing Works during the Time for Completion and any time period where liquidated damages are imposed under the Contract, and for a further period of six months commencing from the Date of Substantial Completion for the Works or phase or sub-phase of the Works as certified by the Superintending Officer (hereinafter referred to as the Maintenance Period for the purposes of this clause including all subclauses under it) by providing and/ or performing the following: (a) Watering with a volume of 10 litres per m daily for the first two weeks after planting and when necessary or as directed by the SO Rep; Weeding where and when necessary or as directed by the SO Rep; Replacing dead turf or re-turf base areas; Fertilising before handing over, and on the 3 and 6 month of the Maintenance Period; Cutting grass fortnightly.
rd th 2
(b) (c) (d) (e)
UG03/S26.DOC(14) (LKK)(15122002) (CAD)
26.2.11
Safety Measures For Grass-Cutting Machines (a) Provide all safety precaution to eliminate danger to his workmen, the general public and the property of others. All mechanised driven or walk behind grass-cutting machines used shall be installed with suitable protective guards of steel or other approved materials to eliminate splinters and flung-off objects from causing damage. Under no circumstances shall the protective guards be removed from machines in operation. Hand held open blade rotary machine shall not be allowed to be used without approved guards. The grass-cutter shall wear safety boots, goggles, helmets and safety vest. When these safety requirements are not complied with, the Contractor's foreman or the SO Rep shall instruct the grass-cutter to stop work. Before grass-cutting commences, the public shall be kept at least 10 metres radially away from the grass-cutter and a signboard shall be erected on the Site with the wordings "DANGER KEEP OFF. GRASS CUTTING WORK IS IN PROGRESS". The grass-cutting blade shall be securely fixed to the machine. When the machine is in continuous use, regular checks shall be made. The blade shall be kept in good condition. A worn-out blade shall be replaced immediately. The bolts and nuts which are fastened to the cutter blade shall be checked before the machines are operated to prevent the blade from flying off.
(b)
(c) (d)
(e)
(f)
(g)
26.3
GEOTEXTILE Geotextile fabric shall be non-woven type and approved by SO Rep. The tensile strength of geotextile shall be minimum 7.0kN/m and flow rate shall be 80-150 litres/sq.m/sec. Submit test report and sample for the approval of SO Rep before installation on the site.
26.4
WATER-HOLDING MEDIUM Water-holding medium is an absorbent co-polymer water crystal that increase the water-holding capacity of any soil mixture to at least 15 times its own weight.
SECTION 27/
UG03/S26.DOC(15) (LKK)(15122002) (CAD)
Ugdg Spec TS 27-1/5
SECTION 27
27.0
MULTI-STOREY CARPARK
27.1
GENERAL Construct multi-storey carpark to details as shown in the Drawings. In addition to complying with the requirements in the Specifications, the Contractor shall also comply with the requirement specified in this section including all clauses and subclauses under it.
27.2
WATER REDUCING ADMIXTURE FOR REINFORCED CONCRETE/CONCRETE TOPPING OF CARPARK ROOF DECKS AND REINFORCED CONCRETE SLAB/CONCRETE TOPPING ABOVE ELECTRICAL SUBSTATION Water reducing admixture shall be used for the reinforced concrete slabs/concrete topping at the roof deck level and reinforced concrete roof slab/concrete topping above electrical substation. The application shall be in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations and instructions. The Contractor to check and ensure that the admixture shall not affect the strength or other properties of the reinforced concrete. The admixture shall comply with SS 320 or relevant British Standards and shall be approved by the SO Rep.
27.3
HALF-HOUR FIRE-RATED TIMBER SURFACE FINISHED COMPOSITE DOORS TO STAIRCASE OF MULTI-STOREY CARPARK (A) Over-Riding Clause The Contractor executing the works as required in this clause including sub-clauses has to ensure that the works, goods or materials used shall be suitable and reasonably fit for the purpose of complying with the required fire-rating (hereinafter referred as "Performance Requirement"). In the event the works, goods or materials to be used as specified in this clause including sub-clauses are upgraded in order to meet the Performance Requirement, the Contractor shall do all necessary upgrading at no extra cost to the Employer subject always to the approval of the SO Rep, but such approval shall not in any way affect the Contractor's duties or obligations arising under the Contract. (B) General Provide and install half-hour fire-rated timber surface finished composite doors complete with door frames and ironmongery to staircase of multi-storey carpark. The half-hour fire-rated timber surface finished composite doors, door frames and ironmongery shall be provided as a complete system complying with SS 332 : 2000. The complete system shall have PSB test certificates, PSB labels and shall be certified under PSB Product Listing Scheme Class 1A or 1B . Details of the half-hour fire-rated timber surface finished composite doors shown in the Drawings shall serve as a guide. (C) Shop Drawings And Sample Prior to the installation, submit workshop Drawings and PSB test certificates for the approval of the SO Rep. Further, install a complete sample on the Site for the approval of the SO Rep before full implementation.
Ugdg Spec TS 27-2/5
27.3
HALF-HOUR FIRE-RATED TIMBER SURFACE FINISHED COMPOSITE DOORS TO STAIRCASE OF MULTI-STOREY CARPARK (CONT'D) (D) Ironmongery Provide and fix all ironmongery required to complete the whole work in accordance with the following schedule subject to the approval of the FSSD. All ironmongery shall be at least half-hour fire-rated. The brand names specified in the schedule shall serve as a guide to the respective quality and profile of ironmongery required. Unless otherwise specified, the grade of stainless steel shall be AISI Grade 304 . Schedule Of Ironmongery (a) (b) 4 no. 1 no. Stainless steel hinges. Door closer shall be listed in PSB Product Listing Scheme Class 1A. Approved slim line door closer with cushioned back checking action shall be of silver colour. Stainless steel pull handles. The diameter shall be 18mm minimum and the length shall be approximately 225mm. Stainless steel push plate of size 300mm x 150mm. The thickness shall be 1.2mm minimum. The word "PUSH" shall be engraved and painted on the push plate
(c)
1 no
(d)
1 no.
(E)
Certificates The Contractor shall submit to the SO Rep certificates as documentary proof that the complete system of the fire-rated timber finish composite door including door frames and ironmongery installed are of at least half-hour fire-rated in all aspects approved by the FSSD.
27.4
WATERPROOFING MEMBRANE AT PLANTER BOXES AT TYPICAL DECK OF MULTI-STOREY CARPARK
27.4.1
Scope of Work Where waterproofing membrane at planter boxes at typical deck of multi-storey carpark are included in the Works, the Contractor shall provide and lay liquid applied Flexible Non-Cementitious (Water-Based) Waterproof Membrane, as listed in HDBs List of Products and Suppliers or other approved Flexible Water-Based Waterproof Membrane to all the sides ( internal surfaces ) of the planter boxes. All the surfaces shall be examined for defects, and the waterproofing treatment shall be applied on sound concrete.
27.4.2
Preparation Work Concrete surfaces shall be clean from all scale, laitance, loose material, mould oil, curing agents, cracks and honeycombs. The structure shall be ponded prior to the waterproofing treatment to allow identification and rectification of cracks and honeycombs by grouting.
27.4.3
Application The liquid applied Flexible Non-Cementitious (water-based) Waterproof Membrane shall be applied in three coats to obtain a minimum dry film thickness of 1.5mm. The subsequent coats shall only be applied after the first coat has dried.
Ugdg Spec TS 27-3/5
27.4.4
Testing and Checking After completion of the waterproofing work but prior to the laying of screed or other infill material, the planter boxes shall be tested for water-tightness by ponding by plugging all outlets; and flooding it, with clean water, to the full height of the planter box. There shall be no leakage after a flooding period of at least 48 hours. In areas where leaks are observed during test periods, such areas shall be recoated with the application of additional membrane material. Recoated areas shall be re-tested and further re-coated until such recoated areas pass the water test.
27.4.5
Protection Immediately after the approval by the SO Rep of water test, the Contractor shall apply a skim coat to all the sides (internal surfaces) of the planter boxes to prevent damages to the waterproofing membrane
27.5
HANDRAILS, PIPE SOCKETS AND EXPANDED METAL TO PARAPET OF MULTI-STOREY CARPARK Provide and fix hot-dipped galvanized steel handrails and pipe sockets as shown in the Drawings. The hot dipped galvanised steel handrails and pipe supports shall be in accordance with the requirements specified in Section 17 STRUCTURAL STEELWORK including all clauses and subclauses under it. Provide and install Bestal BMM 3060 or Emco SM 3060; or other approved hot dipped galvanised steel expanded metal to parapet. The expanded metal shall be of the following nominal size : SWM LWM Thickness Strand Width = = = = 42mm 115mm 3mm 6mm
All metal strips and screws used for fixing shall be of hot dipped galvanised steel. The details of the expanded metal shall be shown in the Drawings. The handrails, pipe supports and expanded metal shall be fabricated and assembled in the factory unless otherwise specified. All exposed surfaces shall be straight and smooth. All joints shall be fully welded and no spot welding shall be used in the Works. All welds shall be finished smooth and secured. All galvanised steel surfaces shall first be treated with one coat of polyvinyl butyral etching primer and one coat of lead and chromate-free primer and then painted with one undercoat and one finishing coat of enamel paint. The finishing colour shall be approved by the SO Rep.
Ugdg Spec TS 27-4/5
27.6
RAILING, PIPE SUPPORTS AND BALUSTERS TO STAIRCASE OF MULTI-STOREY CARPARK Provide and fix hot dipped galvanised steel railings, pipe supports and balusters as shown in the Drawings. The hot dipped galvanised steel railings, pipe supports and balusters shall be in accordance with the requirements as specified in Section 17 Structural Steelwork including all clauses and subclauses under it. All exposed surfaces shall be straight and smooth. All joints shall be fully welded and no spot welding shall be used for the works. All welds shall be smooth and secured. All galvanised steel surfaces shall first be treated with one coat of polyvinyl butyral etching primer and one coat of lead and chromate-free primer and then painted with one undercoat and one finishing coat of enamel paint. The finishing colour shall be approved by the SO Rep.
27.7
GALVANISED STEEL L-ANGLE TO ALL CORNERS OF COLUMNS AND WALLS Provide and fix galvanised steel L-angle and mild steel flat to all corners of columns and walls (next to driveways and ramps including 500mm walls) to the dimensions and details as shown in the Drawings. The L-Angle shall be flushed against the finished surfaces of walls or columns. Paint mild steel angles with two coats of luminous paint approved by the Land Transport Authority. The colour shall be approved by the SO Rep.
27.8
SIGNBOARDS All signboards and letterings shall be as shown in the Drawings. These shall be installed at positions as decided by the SO Rep or as stated in the Drawings.
27.9
TRAFFIC SIGNS Traffic signs shall be of retro-reflective material and of brightness as approved by the Land Transport Authority. Letterings, plates and details shall be as shown in the Drawings. Galvanised steel pipes specified in the Drawings shall comply with SS17. Samples of the traffic signs shall be approved by the SO Rep.
27.10
PAINTING (A) External Painting And Warranty Paint all external plastered, skim coated and concrete surfaces with water based algae resistant emulsion paint in accordance with Section 23 "EXTERNAL PAINTING" including all subclauses under it. The Contractor and his Specialist shall warrant the work on the same terms and conditions as stipulated in the Deed of Warranty For External Painting as produced in Appendix A1 and/or A1(TC) as decided by the SO Rep. (B) Internal Painting Paint all internal plastered, skim coated and concrete surfaces with one priming coat and two subsequent coats of approved acrylic emulsion paint. The priming coat may be with thinning of up to 20% of clean water by volume. Subsequent coats shall not be diluted. (C) Painting Of Sample Prior to the commencement of the painting work, submit the colour chart of approved paint to the SO Rep for selection of colour scheme. The Contractor shall then paint one or more panels of the multi-storey carpark parapets for the approval of the SO Rep.
Ugdg Spec TS 27-5/5
27.11
TRAFFIC LINES, ARROWS AND DIRECTIONAL ARROWS ON FLOORS Unless otherwise specified, all traffic lines, arrows and directional arrows on floors shall be of reflectorised thermoplastic road marking as approved by the Land Transport Authority. The thermoplastic material shall comply with SS 498 : 2002 "Specifications for Hot Applied Thermoplastic Road Marking Materials". The reflectorised thermoplastic road marking shall be provided strictly in accordance with the supplier's instructions. Samples shall be approved by the SO Rep before full implementation.
27.12
CAR PARKING BAYS Paint white lines, red lines, numbers and letterings of the parking bays as shown in the Drawings or as instructed by the SO Rep. Unless otherwise specified, the paint shall be quick drying chlorinated rubber based and shall comply with the requirements specified in SS221 2002 ""Specification for Road Marking Paint".
27.13
FORMWORK TO MULTI-STOREY CARPARK In addition to complying with the requirements specified in Clause 4.19 "Formwork", the Contractor shall also comply with the following requirements for formwork to Multi-Storey Carpark : (a) Propping to the slabs and beams at the lower floor deck shall not be removed until the slabs and beams of the upper deck have been cast for 3 days. The Contractor shall check and ensure that propping to the slabs and beams is adequate at all times.
(b)
27.14
FINISHES TO RAMPS AND LANDINGS Contractor shall use hard-brush and/or broom to draw lines across the ramps and beyond the landing before and after the ramp on the top/bottom landings just above/below the ramps to create slip resistant grid lines on the surfaces while the concrete is about to harden.
SECTION 28/...
Ugdg Spec TS 28-1/8
SECTION 28
28.0
ELECTRICAL SUB-STATION/UTILITIES CENTRE/DUSTBIN COMPOUND
28.1
ELECTRICAL SUB-STATION
28.1.1
General Electrical Substation shall also include Ring Main Substation, Transformer Room, Generator Room, Tank Storage Room and all other utility rooms for electrical transmission, whether located separately or within a building block. Where metal roofing is used, it shall be as specified in Clause 13.3 "Metal Roofing and Insulation Sheet".
28.1.2
Construction Time Commence work immediately when site is handed over and shall complete the electrical substation including fencing as shown, not later than the completion date as specified in the contract. Where no such date is stipulated, the substation including fencing shall be completed not later than six (6) calendar months before the completion date of the earliest phase of the contract or the completion date of the earliest dwelling block if the contract is to be completed as a single phase.
28.1.3
Cable Room of Electrical Substation Where shown in the Drawings, the cable shall be cast in waterproof concrete with precaution taken to render it watertight. In case where the water table is high, provide drainage for the cable room after consulting with the SO Rep.
28.1.4
Cable Ducts Provide and lay underground 155mm UPVC pipes in numbers, positions and lengths as shown and encased all round with mass concrete to serve as cable ducts. All UPVC pipes shall be of at least Class C type complying with the requirement of SS 141 or other approved by PowerGrid. Both ends of the UPVC pipes shall be sealed with removable water-tight plugs. The cable ducts shall be extended at least 600mm beyond the apron and adjacent drain. Prior to the laying of ducts, check the ground conditions and should the ground be soft, inform the SO Rep who shall decide whether piling is required or not.
28.1.5
Cable Trenches, Drains and Switch Gear Floor Openings Cable trenches, drains and switch gear floor openings shall be provided with removable heavy duty A1 chequer plates or heavy duty GS gratings as shown in the Drawings capable of supporting a minimum load of 100 kg. Depth of trenches shall be as shown in the Drawings. After the completion of cable installation by PowerGrid, all entries shall be sealed and water tight to PUB's requirements. Sand or granite chips shall be provided to fill cable trenches.
Ugdg Spec TS 28-2/8
28.1.6
Concrete Paved Areas Surrounding concrete paved area within fence shall be 75mm thick 1:2:4 concrete reinforced with 1 layer No. A6 welded steel fabric on 100mm consolidated hardcore.
28.1.7
Reinforced Concrete Drain and Crossing Construct length of surface drain in reinforced concrete to details as shown. Precast concrete drain covers shall be 75mm thick reinforced with 2 layers No. A6 welded steel fabric or approved reinforcement with main reinforcement spanning across drain.
28.1.8
Hollow Glass Blocks Build hollow glass block panels shown in the Drawings and in accordance with the Manufacturer's printed instructions. The size of the glass block shall be 150 x 150 x 100mm and approved by the SO Rep. Fix 'EXMET' 60mm No. 20 or other approved reinforcing strip at every second course. Carry reinforcements into brickwork or leave dowel bars of 4mm galvanised wire in reinforced concrete structure to lap with reinforcement. Mortar shall be in accordance with Clause 12.1 "Mortar Mix For Block And Brickworks and pointed with white Portland Cement. Paint openings around panel with bitumen before laying glass blocks.
28.1.9
Bronze Anodised Extruded Aluminium Vents to Electrical Substation Provide and install bronze anodised extruded aluminium vent together with all necessary components to all electrical substation as indicated in the Drawings. The aluminium frames and louvred blades shall be extruded with the minimum thickness of 2.3mm and finished with 25 microns (minimum) anodic coating.
28.1.10
Finishing to Internal Floors, Landings and Steps All internal floors except basement landing, steps and transformer plinth shall be provided with 50mm thick cement rendering including a smooth 20mm thick granolithic finish of 1 part cement, 1 part fine granite chippings and 1 part sand with the addition of approved hardener all mixed in accordance with the Manufacturer's printed instructions. All walls and columns shall be provided with minimum 18mm cement plastering.
28.1.11
Time for Rendering Allow for carrying out rendering after PowerGrid, has installed their floor frames, switch gears and equipment which may be some time after sub-station is handed over to PowerGrid after the date of Substantial Completion for the sub-station. The PowerGrid Engineer-in-charge shall be notified prior to final rendering of the switch room floor.
28.1.12
Finish to Flat Roof Lay screed to flat roof with minimum fall of 1 in 60 of 1:3 cement:sand mix gauged with approved waterproofing compound to the Manufacturer's printed instructions. Screed shall be minimum 18mm thick.
28.1.13
Painting External and Internal Walls and Ceiling Paint all vents, fascias, columns and beams, skimmed and plastered surfaces as in Section 23 "PAINTING AND DECORATING" including all clauses and subclauses under it.
Ugdg Spec TS 28-3/8
28.1.14
Final Coat Painting and Touching Up Allow for waiting until Electricity Department, PowerGrid has installed sub-station equipment before applying final coat of painting and touching up. This work may not be carried out within the Time for Completion of this part of the Works.
28.1.15
Electrical Installation
(A)
General Provide and install electrical installation and fittings shown including earthing systems for the electrical installation. Installation shall be carried out by a licensed electrician to the satisfaction of the SO Rep and complying with the requirements of PowerGrid. All wiring shall run in galvanised steel exposed conduits (not smaller than 20mm diameter) with spacer bar saddles and bases to BS 729.
(B)
Application For Testing The installation shall be tested/verified by and to the requirements of HDB's Plan Approval (M&E/Testing ) Unit and approved by the SO Rep before handing over to PowerGrid. For all tests, at least seven (7) working days advance notice shall be given to the SO Rep.
(C)
Retesting Any omissions or Defect or faults detected during the day of testing shall be rectified and the Contractor shall arrange for re-testing within three working days from the date of the last test.
28.1.16
Ironmongery All ironmongery shall be as shown in the Drawings.
28.1.17
Fence and Gate Where shown in the Drawings, fencing shall be carried out in accordance with Section 12 "BRICKWORK AND BLOCKWORK" including all clauses and subclauses under it. Gates shall be as detailed, hung on clay brick piers and run on rollers over rails all as shown in the Drawings. Chainlink perimeter fencing shall be of the P.V.C. covered type (green or grey) wire mesh. The base support of the fencing shall be embedded in 150mm concrete kerb. Ironmongery to gate shall be as shown in the Drawings.
28.1.18
Painting Fence and Gate Paint all metal work and gate as specified in Section 23 "PAINTING AND DECORATING" including all clauses and subclauses under it.
Ugdg Spec TS 28-4/8
28.1.19
Catch for Trap Door in Switch Room Floor Provide and fix brass hook and eye for trap door.
28.1.20
Cat Ladder and Handle Provide and fix mild steel cat ladder and handrail as shown.
28.1.21
Stainless Steel Pipe Handrail Provide and fix stainless steel pipe handrail of 50mm diameter to locations as shown in the Drawings.
28.1.22
Doors to Electrical Substation (A) Extruded Anodised Aluminium Doors Provide and fix extruded natural anodised aluminium doors with anodic coating not less than 25 micron (including all components, shoot bolt etc) as shown and in accordance with the detailed Drawings. (B) Galvanised Steel Roller Shutter Doors Provide and fix galvanised steel roller shutter doors as shown in the Drawings. The shutter shall be of galvanised steel handchain-operated curtain lath of 18 gauge complete with galvanised steel channel guide of 3.0mm thick galvanised sheet steel hood, zinc plated chain locking cleat, galvanised steel "T" section bottom rail cold rolled from 2mm thick pre-galvanised steel strip, galvanised steel endplate finished in paint primer, suitable endlock to lath profile and securely riveted, heavy duty windguides, and all other necessary components in accordance with the Manufacturer's instructions for the heavy duty performance of the door. All galvanised sheet steel components shall be in accordance with BS 1449, Part 2/Plated BS 2989 Class C. All galvanised cold rolled steel angles shall be to BS 4360/43A. All motor enclosures shall be protected to BS 5420. The Drawings shown shall serve as a guide. Submit workshop Drawings showing all the detailed sections, plans and relevant details and accessories to the SO Rep for approval prior to installation. (C) Acoustic Doors to Generator Rooms Provide and fix extruded natural anodised aluminium doors infilled with 38mm thick rockwool insulation material of density 150 kg/m3 (10% tolerance). The noise reduction coefficient shall be NRC 0.76 within the sound range of 180-2800 Hz. Moisture resistance shall not be more than 0.2% by volume. The rockwool shall be non-combustible with fire hazard indices at Class O. Where rockwool is shown in the Drawings, the rockwool shall be of "Bradford Rockwool, FibertexR60" or other approved. Doors (including all components, shoot bolt etc) shall be of natural anodised aluminium of anodic coating not less than 25 micron and constructed to resist any water penetration into the cavity of the door. Provide and fix heavy duty door hinges capable of bearing 80 Kg of load per leaf. The Drawings shown shall serve as a guide. Submit workshop drawings all the detailed sections, plans and relevant details and accessories to the SO Rep for approval prior to installation.
Ugdg Spec TS 28-5/8
28.2
UTILITIES CENTRE/DUSTBIN COMPOUND
28.2.1
General Construct Utilities Centre/Dustbin Compound to details as shown in the Drawings unless specified otherwise. Timber benches, shelves, notice board, lockers, etc., shall be provided and fixed to locations all as shown in the Drawings.
28.2.2
Floor Slab The floor slab shall be cast in Grade 40 structural concrete. Compliance criteria and specifications shall follow Section 4 "STRUCTURAL CONCRETE" including all clauses and subclauses under it. The slab shall be finished with a minimum 3 passes of a power trowel strictly without sprinkling of cement dust, cement grout or water. Provide a sufficient team of workmen to finish the work before final set. The slab shall be immediately cured for seven days with approved curing compound or other approved methods. The surface shall be hardened with approved liquid hardeners strictly in accordance with the Manufacturer's instruction. The liquid hardeners shall have zinc and/or magnesium flurosilicates as its active ingredients. The scupper drain shall be finished with rendering of 1 part cement to 3 parts sand by volume. The rendering shall be laid to fall towards water outlets. The rendered surface shall then be finished with two coats of liquid hardeners (with zinc and/or magnesium fluorosilicates as its active ingredients).
28.2.3
Finish to Reinforced Concrete Flat Roof Provide and lay screed of 1:3 cement:sand mix gauged with approved water-proofing compound to the Manufacturer's instructions to reinforced concrete flat roof with minimum fall of 1 in 180. Screed shall be of a minimum of 18mm thick.
28.2.4
Roller Shutter to Utilities Centre/Dustbin Compound (i) Motorised Roller Shutter for Door Height Four (4) Metres and Above Provide and install motorised roller shutter complete with channel guide, shutter motor, angle bolts, bottom rail and other necessary components in accordance with the Manufacturer's instructions to utilities centre/dustbin compound of door opening height 4 metres and above unless otherwise specified. (a) Material The motorised roller shutter shall be of 0.8mm thick minimum galvanised steel or 1.6 mm thick natural anodised aluminium interlocking slats with end clips to secure slats laterally or 0.5mm thick minimum Zincalume steel curtain permanently lock-seamed to form a continuous curtain. Provide a seamless PVC weatherseal at the base of the rail. Secure the curtain top and wrap it around the drum assembly. Provide box housing of similar material with the curtain to house the entire drum assembly and integral chainwheel complete with galvanised steel chain or other approved for manual operation. Provide perforation slots of 100 mm x 25 mm spaced at 400 mm apart to approximately the top one-third of the curtain height to the approval of the SO Rep. Provide edge-treatment to prevent metal to metal contact between the curtain and the guides during operation.
Ugdg Spec TS 28-6/8
28.2.4
Roller Shutter to Utilities Centre/Dustbin Compound (Cont'd) (i) Motorised Roller Shutter for Door Height Four (4) Metres and Above (Cont'd) (b) Coating Aluminium shutter shall be natural anodised to 25 microns (minimum). Zincalume steel and galvanised steel shutter shall be finished with 25 microns (minimum) colorbond silicone modified polyester coating. The finishing colour of the coating shall be selected by the SO Rep. (c) Power Supply and Operation System Tap the power supply for the motor from a 10 Amp TPN isolator (provided by the Employer unless otherwise specified) in the utilities centre/dustbin compound. Connect the electrical wiring from the isolator to the motor. Provide a built-in auto-stop safety device to the system so that the roller shutter shall automatically stop when it is obstructed during the closing. Provide push-button switches enclosed in a weatherproof control box and mount it outside at 1.6 m measured from the floor to the base of the control box and on the right hand side of the utilities centre/dustbin compound viewing from the front. Provide the control box with Camlock model "L & F" A/CR 11 or 16 with key no. 01/3S/N65 or other approved. The control box shall contain "Up", "Down", and "stop" buttons. Indicating arrows pointing upwards and downwards shall be marked indelibly beside the "Up" and "Down" buttons. The motorised roller shutter shall stop immediately after the end of "Up" or "Down" operation. (d) Workshop Drawings The details shown in the Drawings shall serve as a guide. Submit workshop Drawings showing all the detailed sections, plans and relevant details and accessories to the SO Rep for approval prior to the ordering of the system. (ii) Manually Operated Roller Shutter for Door Height Below Four (4) Metres Provide and install zincalume steel or galvanised steel or natural anodised aluminium roller shutter complete with channel guide, angle bolts, bottom rail and other necessary components in accordance with the Manufacturer's instructions to utilities centre/dustbin compound of door opening height below four (4) metres unless otherwise specified. (a) Material The roller shutter shall be of 0.8mm thick minimum galvanised steel or 1.6 mm thick natural anodised aluminium interlocking slats with end clips to secure slats laterally or 0.5mm thick minimum Zincalume steel curtain permanently lock-seamed to form a continuous curtain. Provide a seamless PVC weatherseal at the base of the rail. Secure the curtain top and wrap it around the drum assembly. The drum assembly shall consist of suitably graded oiltempered torsion springs secured to drumwheels moulded from engineering plastics. Provide box housing of similar material with the curtain to house the entire drum assembly and integral chainwheel complete with galvanised steel chain or other approved for manual operation. Provide perforation slots of 100 mm x 25 mm spaced at 400 mm apart to approximately the top one-third of the curtain height to the approval of the SO Rep. Provide edge treatment to prevent metal to metal contact between the curtain and the guides during operation. Locking device with master key shall be provided at waist level.
Ugdg Spec TS 28-7/8
28.2.4
Roller Shutter to Utilities Centre/Dustbin Compound (Cont'd) (ii) Manually Operated Roller Shutter for Door Height Below Four (4) Metres (Cont'd) (b) Coating Aluminium shutter shall be natural anodised to 25 microns (minimum). Zincalume steel and galvanised steel shutter shall be finished with 25 microns (minimum) colorbond silicone modified polyester coating. The finishing colour of the coating shall be selected by the SO Rep. (c) Operation System The shutter shall be hand chain operated. The raising and closing of the shutter shall be 250mm minimum per metre chain-pull. (d) Workshop Drawings The details shown in the Drawings shall serve as a guide. Submit workshop Drawings showing all the detailed sections, plans and relevant details and accessories to the SO Rep for approval prior to the ordering of the system.
28.2.5
Extruded Aluminium Louvred Vents (i) Bronze Anodised Extruded Aluminium Vents To Utilities Centre/Dustbin Compound (attached to ESS or multi-storey garage) Provide and install bronze anodised extruded aluminium louvred vents together with all necessary components as shown in the Drawings. The aluminium frames and louvre blades shall be extruded with minimum thickness of 2.3mm and finished of 25 microns (minimum) anodic coating. (ii) Bronze Anodized Extruded Aluminium Louvred Vents (Detached Utilities Centre) Provide and install bronze anodised extruded aluminium louvred vents together with all necessary components as shown in the Drawings. The aluminium frames and louvre blades shall be extruded with minimum thickness of 2.3mm. The anodic coating shall be bronze anodised of 25 microns minimum.
28.2.6
Ceramic Floor Tiles Provide and lay 200mm x 200mm x 8mm thick glazed ceramic floor tiles to wash areas and toilets all as shown in the Drawings. The qualities shall be as specified in clause 19.4 Ceramic Floor Tiles (Common Areas And Non-Residential Units) including all subclauses under it.
28.2.7
Key Boards Provide and install one 1200 x 1200mm keyboard consisting of Kapor frame, plywood backing, plywood door panel all as shown in the Drawings for every block of Utilities Centre. Provide angle hooks for keys fixed 75mm centres both ways and 2 nos. brass hangers to each board. Paint woodwork according to Section 23 "PAINTING AND DECORATING" including all clauses and subclauses under it.
Ugdg Spec TS 28-8/8
28.2.8
Steel Plate for Compactors Where shown in the drawings, provide and fix 15mm thick mild steel plate onto the floor slab with stopper and capping at both ends in accordance with the Drawings.
28.2.9
Galvanised Steel L-Angle To Corners Of Columns And Walls Provide and fix 50mm x 50mm x 6mm x 1500mm high galvanised steel L-angle and 100mm x 25mm x 3mm thick galvanised steel flats welded to galvanised steel angle and ramset into wall at 300mm centre to centre to be reinforced with 1 layer "EXMET" approximate 100mm wide x 1500mm long to all corners of columns and walls (next to driveways and ramps). The L-angle shall be flushed against the finished surfaces of walls and columns. Paint mild steel angles with two coats of luminous paint approved by Land Transport Authority. The colour shall be approved by the SO Rep.
28.2.10
Wall Finishes with Rubber Tile Band Provide and fix ceramic wall tiles with a band of rubber tile along the height of bulks bin in the Dustbin Compound.
SECTION 29/...
Ugdg Spec TS 29-1/3
SECTION 29
29.0
EATING HOUSES
29.1
FLOOR FINISHES Where shown in the Drawings, the `Store' and `room', the whole floor of Eating houses shall be finished in ceramic tiles as specified in sub-clause 19.4.5 "Schedule of Ceramic Floor Tiles". Tiles shall continue up doorways to abut external floor rendering. The colour and pattern of the tiles shall be approved by the SO Rep. The quality and laying of the tiles shall be as specified in Clause 19.4 "Ceramic Floor Tiles (Common Areas And Non-Residenial Units) and Clause 19.6 Laying Of Ceramic Floor Tiles including all subclauses under them.
29.2
CERAMIC WALL TILE (EATING HOUSES) Where shown in the Drawings, the `store' and `room', all internal surfaces of walls and columns in the refreshment area and stalls of eating houses shall be finished with 200 x 200 x 8 mm glazed ceramic wall tiles to a height of 2100mm above reinforced concrete floor level. Where shown in the Drawings, provide and lay 200 x 200 x 8 mm glazed ceramic wall tiles to a height of 600mm above stainless steel sink and draining board or to window cill height if the sink and draining board is located along the window. Provide and lay 200 x 200 x 8 mm glazed ceramic wall tiles to kitchen, toilets/bath/wc, bin area and wash area. The height of glazed ceramic wall tiles shall be as shown in the Drawings. All glazed ceramic wall tiles shall be of quality as specified in Clause 20.13 " Ceramic Wall Tiles For NonResidential Units And Common Areas Outside Dwelling Units including all clauses under it.
29.3
BRICK/BLOCKWORK AND PLASTERING Construct walls as shown in the Drawings and as specified in Section 12 "BRICKWORK AND BLOCKWORK" including all clauses and subclauses under it. Plastering where shown shall be as specified in Section 20 "WALL FINISHES" including all clauses and subclauses under it.
29.4
PAINTING Painting shall be as specified in Section 23 "PAINTING AND DECORATING" including all clauses and subclauses under it.
29.5
DOORS AND IRONMONGERY Where applicable, doors to eating houses shall be as shown in the Drawings, complete with ironmongery as specified in Section 16 "IRONMONGERY" including all clauses and subclauses under it.
29.5.1
Timber Doors All timber doors where shown in the Drawings shall be constructed as specified in Section 15 "CARPENTRY AND JOINERY" including all clauses and subclauses under it. Sizes are nominal. Plywood panels shall be of grade 2 moisture resistant quality.
Ugdg Spec TS 29-2/3
29.5.2
PVC Doors Where indicated, extruded PVC doors to common water closets and bathroom shall be as specified in Clause 15.15 "Full Panel Extruded PVC Swing Doors". Except for bath/w.c. in room and main entrance door to toilets, each common w.c. door shall be fixed with a pair of aluminium alloy eyes for hanging on to mild steel hooks and rides built into masonry. Provide and fix plastic male and female toilet signs with thickness and sizes all as shown in the Drawings.
29.6
PREPARATION TABLES Where shown, construct preparation tables in Grade 25 and 100mm thick in-situ concrete slabs reinforced with one layer of No. A6 welded steel fabric supported on 90mm thick solid concrete block wall finished with 197 x 197 x 8 mm (work size) thick ceramic tiles with mosaic cove tiles for returned edges all as shown in the Drawings.
29.7
COOKING SLABS Where shown, cooking slabs shall be constructed and finished as specified in Clause 29.6 "Preparation Tables".
29.8
FAN HOOKS Cast fan hooks into positions as shown, bent out of 13mm diameter mild steel rod to ceiling of eating houses.
29.9
EXHAUST FAN OPENING Where indicated, provide opening for exhaust fans in positions shown and trim with Kapor frame rebate and bead. Fill with 12mm thick Masterboard or other approved panel with moisture resistant quality. Paint frame and panel as specified in Section 23 "PAINTING AND DECORATING" including all clauses and subclauses under it.
29.10
EXTRACTOR FANS AND DUCTS Extractor fans and ducts are not included in this Contract unless specified otherwise.
29.11
ALUMINIUM ROLLER SHUTTER Where shown in the Drawings, provide and install aluminium roller shutters to eating houses as specified in Clause 18.8 "Aluminium Roller Shutter".
29.12
ALUMINIUM CASING TO DISCHARGE STACKS/PIPES AND ALUMINIUM SHEET COVERING Where shown in the Drawings, the aluminium casing to discharge stacks/pipes enclosure and aluminium sheet covering shall be constructed with 50 x 25 x 1.2 mm thick aluminium frame and lined with 1.2mm thick (18 SWG) natural anodised aluminium sheet. The anodic coating shall be 15 microns minimum. Access panels shall be provided as shown in the Drawings and at positions of cleaning eyes.
Ugdg Spec TS 29-3/3
29.13
ADJUSTABLE AND FIXED GLASS LOUVRES Where shown in the Drawings, provide and install natural anodised aluminium frame adjustable and fixed glass louvres. The anodic coating shall be 25 microns minimum. Glazing shall be in accordance with Section 22 "GLAZING" including all clauses under it.
29.14
PLYWOOD SHELVES Where shown, the 19mm thick plywood shelves to store shall be supported by 31 x 31 x 1.2 mm thick mild steel hollow sections.
29.15
METAL ROOFING AND INSULATION Where shown in the Drawings, the metal roofing and the insulation shall be provided and laid as specified in Clause 13.3 "Metal Roofing and Insulation Sheet" including all subclauses under it.
29.16
SUSPENDED CEILING Where indicated, provide and fix 1200 x 600 x 16 mm thick non-combustible mineral fibre board to stalls with aluminium T section and be supported by 14 SWG galvanised steel hanger wire all as shown in the Drawings. Each panel shall be reinforced with 2 nos. of spline glued to the back of the board.
SECTION 30/...
Ugdg Spec TS 30-1/1
SECTION 30
30.0
MISCELLANEOUS (BUILDING)
30.1
GROUND FLOOR FACILITIES Where shown or specified, provide and fix the facilities (e.g. table tennis table, kiosks, tables, benches etc.) at 1st storey all as shown in the Drawings. Painting to timber and metal work shall be as specified in Section 23 "PAINTING AND DECORATING" including all clauses and subclauses under it.
30.2
CONTRACT SIGNBOARD Provide, erect and maintain a contract signboard. The size of the contract signboard shall not be smaller than the dimensions shown in the Drawings. However, the other details shown in the Drawings shall serve as a guide. Before erecting the contract signboard, submit details and drawings of the proposed contract signboard for the approval of the SO Rep. The position and location of the contract signboard at the Site shall be approved by the SO Rep. The contract signboard shall be erected within one month from the commencement of the Works and shall not be taken down without prior approval of the SO Rep
30.3
COMPLETION SIGNAGE OR SIGNBOARD Provide, erect and fix a signage or signboard with light fittings and stainless steel or non-corrosive fasterners as shown in the Drawings or as approved by the SO Rep.
SECTION 31/...
SECTION 31
31.0
LIFT INSTALLATION/REFURBISHMENT
31.1
GENERAL
31.1.1
Lift installation and/or refurbishment shall form part of a separate contract unless otherwise specified. Where lift installation an/or refurbishment forms part of the Contract, only Lift Contractors who are registered with BCA shall be employed by the Contractor to execute the lift installation and/or refurbishment work.
31.1.2
Unless otherwise specified, all building works in connection with lift installation and/or refurbishment shall be provided by the Contractor. Such building works shall include but not be limited to the provision of protective hoardings and/or barricades, filling up void between landing walls and lift door jambs, improvement to lift machine rooms, preparation of hoistways, etc.
31.1.3
The Contractor shall liaise with the Lift Contractor on the scheduling and coordination of their respective works in connection with lift installation and/or refurbishment to ensure that the whole works are completed on time. Upon receipt of the SO Reps instruction to start work, the Contractor shall commence the work as soon as is reasonably possible and complete the work expeditiously. Any change to the schedule shall be approved by SO Rep.
31.1.4
The Contractor shall be required to attend site meetings in connection with lift installation/ refurbishment works from time to time when notified by the SO Rep. The Contractor shall appoint a responsible person authorised to accept and to make decisions or otherwise act on the Contractors behalf to attend such meetings.
31.1.5
Provided always that written approval shall be obtained from the SO Rep prior to the commencement of any hacking work to the lift machine room, lift shaft, etc.
31.2
PROTECTION/HANDING OVER OF LIFTS AND LIFT EQUIPMENT
31.2.1
During the currency of the contract, the lifts shall not be used for transportation of goods or materials.
31.2.2
Upon Substantial Completion of the lift refurbishment/replacement work but pending handover of the building to the Employer, the Contractor shall liaise with the Lift Contractor for protection of the work. Such protection work shall be provided by the Contractor.
31.2.3
The lift entrance door jambs, lift car panels, door columns and floor and any other lift and/or landing equipment directed by the SO Rep shall be boarded up for each lift individually with 6mm thick veneered plywood of adequate strength and suitably braced. All other lift equipment at the landings including the call buttons, car position indicators and siren boxes shall also be protected with timber board or other appropriate means until such time the building is handed over. The lift car floor shall be protected with plywood and linoleum and the front edge of the plywood on the floor along the door sill shall be prominently marked with a 50mm wide yellow strip.
31.2.4
All lift equipment in the lift machine room, hoistway and lift landings shall not be tampered with nor removed. The Contractor shall make good any damage to the lift equipment.
31.2.5
Any equipment and component damaged by the Contractor shall be repaired by the Lift Contractor to the satisfaction of the SO Rep and the cost so incurred shall be borne by the Contractor. Before construction of any new ramp at the lift entrance and new tiling at the lift landing wall, the Contractor shall arrange with the Lift Contractor for a joint inspection to ascertain any existing damages to be rectified by the Lift Contractor.
31.2.6
Before handing over the buildings and lifts to the Employer, the Contractor shall arrange for a joint inspection with the Lift Contractor and SO Rep to ascertain any damages to the lift/lift equipment which requires making good. Such making good shall be repaired by the Lift Contractor at the Contractors cost as specified in this Clause.
31.2.7
Where the lift machine room needs to be modified, widened or reconstructed, the Contractor shall take all necessary precautions by providing adequate shelter and protection to the lift equipment from possible damage and accumulation of dirt, rain water and other foreign objects. Whenever there is lift equipment in the machine room regardless of the lift being under installation, operational or otherwise, the Contractor shall ensure that the lift machine room is partitioned with a wall or hoarding and door with lock to prevent unauthorised access. Where hoarding is provided, it shall be adequately strengthened with ribs. It shall cover the full height from the floor to the ceiling of the lift machine room and shall be rigid enough to withstand a horizontal force of 50 kg. Any wall, roof, floor and louvre that is removed in the process shall be enclosed with temporary hoarding or boarding. The contractor shall maintain sufficient ventilation and lighting for the lift equipment and workers. Such door, partition, hoarding and boarding shall be of sufficient rigidity and proper design and construction for safeguarding the lift equipment and lift and contractors workers from weather, debris, dust, damage, loss and injury.
31.2.8
When the building is handed over to the Employer or when directed by the SO Rep, the Contractor shall remove and dispose of all temporary materials used for the protection of the lift equipment. The Contractor shall clean areas where the lift equipment had been protected to remove all marks and stains to the satisfaction of the SO Rep.
31.3
LIFT MACHINE ROOM
31.3.1
The Contractor shall maintain both the 3-phase and single phase electricity supply to the lift machine room of each lift during the currency of the Contract. This is to enable the lift equipment to be charged and lift servicing to be carried out during the Time for Completion.
31.3.2
For access into the lift machine room the Contractor may collect the keys for machine room door and building trap door from the Town Council office or the Employers clerk-of-works on the day of commencement of work. The keys must be returned to the Town Council office or clerk-of-works immediately after the Substantial Completion of the work. All machine rooms and trap doors must be locked when there are no workers in the machine room and on Substantial Completion of the job.
31.3.3
All holes or chipped-off area on walls of all lift machine rooms shall be roughened, well brushed to remove all loose materials and dirt, applied with a coat of bonding agent and patched or sealed up with cement mortar (1:3).
31.3.4
The painting and finishes of interior of all lift machine rooms shall be as specified in Section 23.0 Painting And Decorating to the satisfaction of the SO Rep.
31.3.5
The Contractor shall repair any spalling concrete and/or water leakage in the lift machine rooms.
31.3.6
All existing precast ventilation louvres in the lift machine rooms shall be removed, the resultant wall opening enlarged and new aluminium or other approved louvres installed as specified or shown in the drawings. Unless otherwise specified and where structural elements are not affected, the openings for the new louvres shall be 20 percent of the lift machine room floor area with cross ventilation for all lifts contained in the lift machine room. Where required by the SO Rep, a canopy is to be provided to prevent rainwater from spilling into the lift machine rooms through the louvres. The design of the canopy shall be as approved by the SO Rep. The existing lift machine room doors or trap doors shall be removed and replaced with a new robust door complete with locking facilities having the same master keys as existing locks all to the approval of the SO Rep. For lift machine room where normal natural ventilation is restricted because of size and location of the lift machine room and there is need to close existing ventilation opening, a fire damper in at least three pieces for the ventilated area shall be installed subject to SO Reps and FSSD approval instead of closing the existing ventilation opening.
31.3.7
The Contractor shall take all necessary precautions to avoid damaging the walls, floors, and woodwool slab on the ceiling of the lift machine rooms and any water pipes, CATV wiring, telephone lines, lighting fixtures, isolator, consumer unit and cables found in the lift machine room, if such services cannot be diverted out of the lift machine room. Where such services which are not part of lift installation can be diverted, they should be diverted outside the lift machine room as specified in Clause 31.9 to the satisfaction of SO Rep. The Contractor shall be responsible for making good all such damages, if any, to the satisfaction of the SO Rep.
31.3.8
Where the existing lift machine rooms are to be modified or widened, the Contractor shall carry out all building works required including but not be limited to the enlargement of existing openings and/or provision of new openings in the lift machine room floor and/or wall, new reinforced concrete beams, kerbs, plinth, hoisting hook, etc. in accordance with the drawings and the requirements of the Lift Contractor. Where necessary, the entire lift machine room floor shall be hacked and reconstructed in accordance with the SO Reps drawings. The Contractor shall also seal up any unused openings with reinforced concrete or chequer plate of minimum 6mm thick painted with anti-rust and remove any redundant reinforced concrete machine beam, plinth, kerb, hoisting hook, etc. Chipped-off or damaged area of the lift machine room floor shall be made good by roughening, brushing off all loose materials and dirt, applying a coat of bonding agent, patching up with cement mortar (1:3) and finished smooth.
31.3.9
Where it is necessary to hack the existing lift machine room floor to create new openings, the Contractor shall take all necessary precautions to avoid damaging the underside of the lift machine room floor. Such damages, if any, shall be made good by the Contractor to the satisfaction of SOs Rep.
31.3.10
Details of the works described in the above Clause 31.3.8 and 31.3.9 shall be as shown in the drawings provided or to be provided by the SO Rep. The Contractor shall liaise with the SO Rep to ensure that such details are confirmed at least two (2) months before commencement of the works.
31.3.11
Where the height of the existing lift machine rooms are to be raised or where new lift machine rooms are to be constructed, the Contractor shall carry out all building works including but not be limited to the construction of new walls, roof, beams, columns, etc.; provision of machine beam, floor trenches, floor openings, reinforced concrete kerbs and plinths, hoisting hooks, etc.; and hacking of the existing lift machine room. Details of such works shall be as shown in the drawings or as provided by the SO Rep. The Contractor shall liaise with the SO Rep to ensure that such details are confirmed at least two (2) months before commencement of the works. Any revision to the details of such work shall not constitute a Variation to the Contract.
31.3.12
Where the existing lift machine rooms are modified/widened and/or where its height are raised or new lift machine rooms are constructed, the Contractor shall comply with the following requirements: (a) Where required, the existing machine beam shall be cut flush to the wall and the plinth completely hacked and removed or modified to the specifications of the Lift Contractor; All exposed steel bars or beams shall be cut flush with the edges of the openings. All unsound and/or loose concrete and the scale on rusted steel bars/beams shall be removed. Rust-proof protective coating shall be applied to the exposed steel bars/beams prior to the application of 25mm thick non-shrink cement mortar on the edges of the openings to cover the exposed steel bars/beams; Where required, the existing chequer plates for covering openings on the floor of the lift machine room shall be removed; and All openings in the floor of lift machine rooms required for new lift installation shall be temporarily covered to prevent objects from dropping into the hoistway until the lift machine room is taken over by the Lift Contractor. Such temporary covers shall be securely mounted and shall be of adequate strength and rigidity to withstand the load of workmen standing on it.
(b)
(c)
(d)
31.3.13
Where the new or reconstructed lift machine room is raised above the main roof of a building, RC staircase or galvanized mild steel cat ladder/stair should be provided as a means of access to the lift machine room from the main roof level as specified by the SO Rep. The galvanized cat ladder/stair shall have steps up to the lift machine room floor level at 200mm interval with hand-hold of approved design from lift machine room level up to 1.6m above lift machine room floor level. The cat ladder/ stair and hand-hold shall be installed away from the door way of the lift machine room. The lift machine room door shall be provided with means (eg. hook) to secure it in the open position once opened.
31.3.14
The Contractor shall provide a safe and unobstructed passageway of 2m wide and 1.8m high leading from the roof trap door to the lift machine room to facilitate the moving, installation and maintenance of lifts and lift equipment/parts. Provided always that the dimensions of the passageway may be reduced to suit site conditions subject to the approval of the SO Rep and without any cost adjustment in order to avoid causing any damage to existing structural elements.
31.3.15
In conjunction with Clause 31.3.11 and 31.3.12, whether the lift machine room is to be improved, modified, enlarged, re-constructed or constructed (new), the tender drawings on the lift machine room plan shall serve only as a guide. The Main Contractor shall follow the drawings and any amendments to be provided by the SO Rep and the Lift Contractors requirements. Any change to the tender drawings shall not constitute a Variation to the Contract.
31.3.16
For all new or raised lift machine rooms, once the lift machine is set in position and the floor trunking is installed by the Lift Contractor, the Contractor shall screed the entire floor with cement mortar of up to the top of the floor trunking. A layer of approved galvanized expand mesh shall be embedded in the cement screed. The cement screed shall be isolated from the lid of the trunking such that it is not sealed and can be opened and closed without difficulty.
31.3.17
All existing bird-proof netting covering the ventilation opening in the lift machine room and hoistway which are rusty and/or damaged, missing or improperly installed shall be replaced by the Contractor. Where required, new bird-proof netting shall be installed as specified by SO Rep and to his satisfaction. The replacement or new bird-proof netting shall be installed at the outer side of the window/ventilation opening such that it leaves no ledge for the birds to perch on. All netting used shall be of galvanized mild steel material and of adequate rigidity.
31.3.18
The Contractor shall provide the following signages in etched 2mm thick anodized aluminium plate in accordance with Clause 18.41 and to SO Reps approval : (i) (ii) (iii) LIFT MACHINE ROOM AUTHORIZED PERSONNEL ONLY NO SMOKING with approved logo
The same signages shall be mounted onto the lift machine room door or outside wall of the lift machine room with stainless steel screws to the SO Reps satisfaction except (iii) above which shall be mounted on the inside wall of the lift machine room.
31.3.19
Contractors shall not remove the TMS communication cable and the single phase A/C power supply to the TMS equipment in the lift machine room without prior permission from the SO Rep. This shall include the TMS communication cable running from the Lift Monitoring Device (LMD) inside the lift machine room to the rosette which is usually located at the top-floor staircase, and finally to the Singapore Telecom's distribution point.
31.3.20
The TMS equipment shall be operational as long as the lift is working during the upgrading period of the flat. If there is a need to remove the cables subjected to prior approval, the Contractor shall provide temporary cables to maintain the system's functionality within the same working day. Should the Contractor fail to provide the temporary cables, the SO Rep shall appoint a third party to execute the work and all costs and expenses incurred, plus 20% administrative charge, shall be recovered by the Employer from the Contractor by deduction from any monies due or that shall become due to the Contractor, or made payable direct from the Contractor to HDB. The Contractor shall engage HDB's approved or appointed contractor to remove, re-install and commission Lift monitoring Device (LMD) and/or any other services that obstruct the upgrading of the said lift. Such work is necessary if, for example, the LMD of another lift poses an obstruction to the upgrading of the lift which the Contractor is working on. The Contractor should contact the SO Rep involved in the lift upgrading work for details if in doubt. The Contractor shall bear the cost of the above-mentioned works, including any charges by HDB's approved or appointed contractor and/or other specialist contractors.
31.3.21
The Contractor shall provide the new PVC trunking and cables at his own costs from the Telephone service provider distribution point to the TMS rosette when the upgrading work has finished.
31.3.22
Unless otherwise directed by the SO Rep, for lift machine room with more than one lift and at least one lift in the same machine room needs to remain operational during the lift upgrading works as directed by the SO Rep, the Contractor shall engage the Lift Maintenance Company of the lifts to isolate the lift control circuits of different lifts to keep the required lift(s) operational. Where required, the lift equipment/controller, trunking, etc shall be shifted in order to raise, construct or modify the lift machine room. The work shall only be carried out after the Lift Contractor has done all the preparatory work, protection of the lift equipment and confirmation by the Lift Contractor. The construction and modification of the lift machine room shall be in multiple stages. At any one stage, at least one lift shall be kept running. Access to lift equipment and sufficient working space shall be provided for the maintenance of the operational lift(s) and the installation of new lift(s) or upgrading of the existing lift(s). The operational lift(s) and/or lift(s) being installed or upgraded shall be protected from weather as well as debris, dust, damage and loss of lift equipment at all times. The method of raising the lift machine floor and roof shall cater for this requirement. All necessary safety and protective hoarding shall also be provided to cater for the same requirement. The Contractor shall be responsible for and bear all costs to make good all damages due to ingress of water, falling debris and/or accumulation of dust, other foreign objects, loss of the equipment and injury to both lift and contractors workers arising from contractors negligence. Under these circumstances, he shall also be responsible for the poor performance of the lift equipment.
31.3.22
(Cont'd) During upgrading of the lifts, the Contractor shall partition the lift machine room to separate the lift to be replaced/upgraded from the other lift(s) in the group. The partition shall be adequately strengthened with ribs and complete with a door and latch. It shall cover the full height from the floor to the ceiling of the lift machine room and shall be rigid enough to withstand a horizontal force of 50 kg. A separate temporary door with lock shall be provided where required for each part of the Lift Machine Room so partitioned. Any wall, roof, floor and louvre that is removed in the process shall be enclosed with temporary hoarding or boarding. The contractor shall maintain sufficient ventilation and lighting for the lift equipment and workers. Such door, partition, hoarding and boarding shall be of sufficient rigidity and proper design and construction for safeguarding the lift equipment and lift and contractors workers from weather, debris, dust, damage, loss and injury. This process of isolation, protection, and partitioning to the Lift Machine Room and between different lifts shall be repeated as necessary until all lifts in the lift machine room have been completed substantially and are in operation. The Contractor shall be deemed to have included the cost of all the works necessary to comply with this clause in the Tender Sum.
31.3.23
Electrical Installation In Lift Machine Room
31.3.23.1 Where electrical rewiring is not carried out, the Contractor shall replace the existing Consumer Control Unit (CCU) with a 3+5 way split load type CCU complete with a 30mA Residual Current Device (RCD) of the appropriate rating to match the existing installation. The arrangement of the ways in the CCU shall be to the SO Rep's requirements. The Contractor shall also provide 2 numbers of 20A DP Isolators, to be connected to the unprotected side of the split load CCU. The exact locations of the isolators shall be determined with the Lift Contractor. 31.3.23.2 The replacement of the CCU and the installation of the new isolators shall be carried out prior to the handover of the lift machine room to the Lift Contractor. Electricity supply, whether of a temporary nature or permanent, shall then be provided through this new CCU. 31.3.23.3 All electrical supply including temporary supply provided by the Contractor shall be certified by a relevant LEW prior to the handover to the Lift Contractor. 31.4 31.4.1 LIFT LANDINGS Temporary Protective Hoarding The Contractor shall provide, erect and maintain temporary protective hoardings to cordon off area of work from Occupants and to prevent unauthorised entry into the hoistway and the work area at all existing and new landings before the commencement of any works (including works by the Lift Contractor) to the lift landing openings. The temporary protective hoardings shall be made of 0.42mm (minimum) thick zincalume galvanised steel and strengthened with at least two horizontal ribs covering the full height from floor to ceiling at the lift lobby. If the width of the hoardings exceed 2m, then a metal vertical rib must be installed at the centre of the hoarding. The hoarding shall have sufficient strength and rigidity to withstand a horizontal force of 50kg. All exposed metal sheet surface of new metal hoarding shall be finished with 25 microns colour bond silicone modified polyester coating. Undamaged recycle metal hoarding are allowed. All exposed surface of recycled metal hoarding shall be painted with at least 3 coats of approved enamel paint of approved colour scheme prior to commencement of the construction works or when directed by the SO Rep. All hoardings for the lift openings shall be full height from floor to ceiling. However, in cases where full height hoardings will affect the ventilation (or smoke dispersal in case of a fire) of the staircase landings or lift landings, the hoarding height shall be between 1.8m and 2m so that a gap is maintained between the top of the hoarding and the ceiling to allow for ventilation (or smoke dispersal).
31.4.1
Temporary Protective Hoarding (Cont'd) The temporary protective hoarding shall incorporate a metal door complete with padlocking facilities. The door shall be kept closed and locked at all times in order to prevent Occupants from gaining access into the work area. Where the door in the temporary protective hoardings has to be opened, the Contractor shall also ensure that it is watched over by his workmen at all times to prevent Occupants from entering the work area. The Contractor and the Lift Contractor shall each provide his own padlock locking into each others padlock at every hoarding door to maintain accountability in keeping the hoarding doors locked at all times when there is no work being carried out. "DANGER - KEEP OUT" reflective signs on metak plates in the four official languages are to be displayed at conspicuous locations on the exterior side of the hoardings. Such signs shall be painted in red on white background with approved gloss finishing enamel paint. An opening of size 100mm x 100mm with a viewing panel made of transparent Perspex or other approved material shall be provided on the hoardings at each lift landing opening at 1.5m above the floor level for inspection of work. On Substantial Completion of the works, the temporary protective hoarding shall be cleared away upon approval of the SO Rep.
31.4.2 31.4.2.1
Signage at Lift Landing The Contractor shall provide an approved signage with messages etched on 2mm thick stainless steel plate or any other material specified in Clauses 18.43 and 18.44 and shown in the Architectural drawings mounted with Allen key type stainless steel screws at each landing in between every two (2) lifts. The messages carried in the signage plate shall be as follows in the four (4) official languages : BLOCK NUMBER AND LIFT NUMBER CAUTION IN CASE OF FIRE, DO NOT USE LIFT DO NOT PUT YOUR HAND ON LIFT DOOR AND DOOR FRAME ESSENTIAL MAINTENANCE SERVICE CENTRE TELEPHONE NUMBER LIFT (NO.) SERVES (STOREYS NOS)
31.4.2.2
Unless otherwise stated, the Contractor shall also put up additional signage of approved message to be provided by SO Rep such as the above at each lift landing of every lift in four (4) official languages etched on 2mm thick stainless steel plate or any other material specified in the Architectural drawings informing residents of the storeys served by each lift. The notice may be incorporated into the lift signage as specified in Clause 31.4.2.1.
31.4.3 31.4.3.1
Lift Door Sill Level and New Painting Where rendering and/or tiling the lift landing wall and floor is required, the lift door sill shall be maintained at 50mm above and slope downwards at a gradient of 1:10 to the final finished floor level. To prevent slipping, the slope shall not begin immediately from the lift door sill, ie. the tiles nearest to the lift door sill shall be level. For the same purpose, the tiles nearest to the sill may also be grooved as directed by the SO Rep. Where the lift door sill cannot be maintained at 50mm above the final finished floor level, the Contractor shall form a concrete hump of gentle slope less than 1:10 with the approval of SO Rep at the lift landing next to the sill. The Contractor shall also patch up any hole, recess, etc. resulting from the removal of any old siren box, hall call plate, hall position indicator, etc with cement mortar.
31.4.4 31.4.4.1
Enlarging Existing and Creating New Lift Landing Openings Where the existing lift landing openings are to be closed-up, enlarged, modified and/or relocated or where new lift landing openings are to be created, the Contractor shall carry out all building works required including but not be limited to the hacking of existing and construction of new lift landing walls, retiling the lift landing walls and floors, all in accordance with the drawings and the requirements of the SO Rep and Lift Contractor; and provision of temporary protective hoarding at the existing/new lift landings to cordon off the work area from Occupants during the works. The Contractor shall liaise and coordinate with the Lift Contractor to check the verticality of the existing lift hoistway walls (ie. truly plumbed) immediately after the lift has been dismantled and determined the exact location and size of all lift landing openings before carrying out the aforesaid works. Should the hoistway walls be out of plumb and thereby necessitating the adjustment of the position of the lift landing openings, the Contractor shall at his own cost and expense hack and reconstruct the hoistway wall lift/landing openings in accordance with the Lift Contractor's requirements. For lifts sharing a common lift shaft and where any of the lift(s) inside this lift shaft remains operational while the other lift(s) are being upgraded, the Contractor shall take all necessary care to prevent excessive dust and debris from getting into the common lift shaft and affecting the proper operation of the running lift(s). Where hacking works are necessary to create new lift landing openings or enlarging or relocating existing ones, screen walls shall be erected inside the common lift shaft directly behind the areas to be hacked prior to the hacking works. The screen wall shall cover the entire areas to be hacked to prevent debris from getting into the common lift shaft. All debris from the hacking works shall be packed into bags and brought down to the ground using material hoist and disposed off immediately.
31.4.4.2
Where the landing transom is required, the Contractor shall provide a new opening/recess of 500mm(W) x 150mm(H) or as directed by the SO's Rep above or on the side of the lift door opening, the exact location shall be decided by the SO Rep. Subject to written approval of the SO Rep, the Contractor shall hack and remove any structural element such as reinforced concrete lintel, where necessary, to provide sufficient lift landing opening height to accommodate the head jambs of new lift landing doors. Where required, new lintel above the head jambs of landing doors shall be provided in accordance with the drawings and the requirements of the Lift Contractor. The Contractor shall also hack any opening required in lift landing walls for the mounting of hall position indicators, etc. Where required, the Contractor shall modify any upstanding reinforced concrete beam at the new lift landings such that the beam is flush with the floor level and there is adequate structural lift opening height both above and below the beam and/or construct new landing bridge complete with parapet walls or railings at the new landings for those lift hoistways located outside the main building all in accordance with the drawings and the requirement of the Lift Contractor. Where new lift landings are created, the lift landing floor shall be extended into the hoistway as shown in the structural drawings and in accordance with the Lift Contractor's requirements. Such extensions shall be in accordance with the SO Structural Engineer's design. The extension at each storey shall be truly plumbed with the lift landing floor on all other storeys. For the purpose of adding new lift landings at storeys among the existing landings, new landing floor, landing wall and RC floor beam with extension shall be constructed at these storeys and the existing landing floor, landing wall and RC floor beam with extension shall be modified at the remaining storeys in accordance with drawings and specification of the SO Rep. Where there is insufficient structural lift opening height for installing the lift equipment by the Lift Contractor due to irregularities in the existing building or otherwise, the Contractor shall modify the lift opening height with the approval of SO Rep. Any cost of such modification work shall deem to have been allowed for by the Contractor. At any storey, where the floor to floor height is sufficient, the Contractor shall reconstruct the RC lintel above the lift opening to increase the structural lift opening height to 2,350mm above a 40mm high RC curb and a further 50mm concrete ramp on the RC floor as shown in the SO's drawings.
31.4.4.3
31.4.4.4
31.4.4.5
31.4.4.6
31.4.4.7
Subject to the approval of the SO Rep, the Contractor shall make all necessary adjustment to the details shown in the drawings to cater for construction tolerances.
31.4.5 31.4.5.1
Filling Up Voids Between Lift Landing Walls and Landing Door Jambs New lift landing doors and jambs, where required, shall be installed by the Lift Contractor engaged by the Employer under a separate contract. Upon Substantial Completion of the installation of the new lift door jambs, the Contractor shall fill up voids between the lift landing walls and the new lift landing door jambs with brick wall and re-tile the entire lift landing wall to the satisfaction of the SO Rep. The Contractor shall also fill up the void within the lift door jamb with concrete up to a height of 1.6m from the floor level. All gaps around the hall position indicators, hall call plate, etc. shall be sealed up with cement mortar. The time allowed for bricking up and sealing gaps as required shall be as follows : Up to 4 landings per lift 5 to 25 landings per lift = 1 week = 2 weeks
31.4.5.2
31.4.5.3
The Contractor shall carry out the aforesaid works only after receiving instruction from SO Rep to do so. The works shall be carried out on a lift by lift basis. The Contractor shall complete the works in accordance with a time schedule approved by the SO Rep. Wherever possible, the works shall be carried out concurrently at different landings. The Contractor shall ensure that the Lift Contractor is not in the hoistway when the work is in progress.
31.4.5.4
The Contractor shall take all necessary precautions to ensure that all lift equipment, parts, etc. are not scratched, stained or damaged in any manner and that no debris or wet concrete/cement falls into the lift hoistway or equipment during the course of the works. The Contractor shall bear all cost and expense incurred in making good any damages to the lift system. The Contractor shall arrange for the lift landing doors and landing door jambs to be cleaned with agent(s) not damaging to the landing door, door jamb and other lift equipment upon Substantial Completion of the works.
31.4.5.5
31.5
LIFT HOISTWAY
31.5.1
The Contractor shall plumb the hoistway and give results of verticality of the hoistway to the SO Rep. Where required, the Contractor shall carry out all structural works to the hoistway including but not be limited to the chasing of off-plumb hoistway wall to facilitate the installation of new lifts.
31.5.2
Where required by the SO Rep, the Contractor shall plaster to a smooth finish all hoistway walls facing the lift car doors (inside lift hoistway) at all storeys for all lifts and paint it over with 2 coats of black emulsion paint with primer and sealer to the satisfaction of the SO Rep. Where there are existing safety netting fixed onto the hoistway wall the SO Rep shall require the Contractor to either securely mount a facia plate onto the existing safety netting after rust-proofing the same netting instead of plastering the wall or remove the existing safety netting and plaster and paint the wall. The facia plate, if required, shall be made of 1.5mm thick galvanised mild steel plate with reinforcement for rigidity and primed adequately with anti-rust and painted black with 2 coats of black enamel paint; the existing safety netting shall also be painted with anti-rust. The Contractor shall coordinate with the Lift Contractor for carrying out the work.
31.5.3
Any water leakage in the lift hoistway and lift pit shall be repaired or rectified by the Contractor. The Contractor shall also render any uneven portion of the lift pit floor and remove any unused concrete plinth in the lift pit.
31.5.4
Where required, the depth of the lift pit shall be lowered or deepened in accordance with the drawings and the requirements of the Lift Contractor.
31.5.5
For any replacement of existing bird-proof netting and installation of new bird-proof netting in the lift machine room and hoistway, Clause 31.3.17 shall apply.
31.5.6
Where shown in the drawings and subject to the written approval of the SO Rep, the Contractor shall create new openings or enlarge existing openings at the top of the existing lift shaft to enable adequate ventilation of the lift hoistways. Such ventilation openings shall face away from the existing building and ventilate into open air. The opening area shall not be less than 0.1m2 per lift for all the lifts contained in the lift shaft. Where required by the SO Rep, a canopy is to be provided to prevent rainwater from seeping into the lift hoistway through the louvre ventilation. The design of the canopy shall be as approved by the SO Rep. The lift shaft may alternatively be ventilated by way of masonry ventilation duct of same fire rating as the compartment wall provided that such ventilation ducts do not run into the lift machine room. All costs shall be borne by the Contractor. Where the existing opening cannot be relocated to ventilate into open air or ventilated through a masonry duct to the open air, a fire damper shall be installed subject to SO Reps and FSCs approval instead of closing the existing ventilation opening to comply with Building Regulations.
31.5.7
The Contractor shall check the state of the RC nib (floor) protruding into the lift hoistway at the existing lift landings for the purpose of lift installation. Any damaged nib with crack or otherwise shall be repaired to the satisfaction of the SO Rep. If required by the SO Rep, RC nibs shall be removed for the purpose of lift installation.
31.5.8
For lifts in common lift shafts, hoistway partition hoarding between every two adjacent lifts shall be erected by the Main Contractor before the commencement of work, even if dismantling/upgrading of lifts is not by the Main Contractor. The hoarding, to be made of 12mm thick plywood and timber reinforcement, shall separate the two hoistways completely and shall only be removed after the installation/upgrading work on the last lift is completed. The Contractor shall co-ordinate with the Lift Contractor for carrying out the work.
31.5.9
For each lift where lift landing(s) is/are to be added or existing lift landing equipment is to be replaced but not the whole lift, the Contractor shall erect a horizontal working platform in the hoistway just below the storey where the work is required, closing the entire lift hoistway cross-section for protection of the existing lift equipment in the hoistway and collection of debris. The platform shall be of such construction to be able to take all expected loading and be protected from weather. The hoistway shared by 2 or more lifts shall be partitioned between the lift under upgrading and the other lift(s) not upgraded at least above the working platform as specified in Clause 31.5.8. This platform and hoistway partitioning shall be repeated to each lift in the hoistway under upgrading and removed after substantial completion of the upgrading work. The Contractor shall be responsible and bear all costs to make good all damages due to ingress of water, falling debris and/or accumulation of dust, other foreign objects, loss of the equipment and injury to both lift and contractors workers arising from contractors negligence. He shall also be responsible for poor performance of the lift equipment under these circumstances.
31.5.10
The Contractor, where required shall remove and/or construct or re-construct any RC plinth or lift buffer support in the lift pit in accordance with the requirements of the SO Rep and Lift Contractor.
31.5.11
Fire Seal Brickwall For those lifts installed with additional lift landings by the Lift Contractor, there may be a void of 115mm thick created between the lift landing wall and the hoistway at the existing landings with the displacement of lifts into the hoistway. In such case and if deemed necessary by the SO Rep, the Contractor shall erect a brickwall of at least 100mm thick and 2-brick length from the floor level to the underside of the overhead RC beam; one on each side of the existing lift landing opening at all existing lift landings as shown in the SO Rep's drawings as fire seal at the lift entrance. These brickwall seal shall interlock with the existing lift landing wall for stability.
UPG07/S31.DOC(10) lkk(181206) DPD
31.5.12
When working in a duplex or triplex lift hoistway, the Contractor shall take precautions to prevent debris and dust from going into the adjacent lift shaft. For such hoistway, when creating, enlarging or modifying the lift landing openings, the Contractor shall hack outwards from the hoistway to the landings and not vice versa so that the debris will not fall into the hoistway using screen wall as specified in Clause 31.4.4.1. The debris shall not be removed by throwing or hoisting into the lift pit. When modifying or re-constructing the machine room in a duplex or triplex lift hoistway, the Contractor shall ensure that the debris will not fly into the lift shaft or ricochet onto the hoistway partition. The Contractor shall provide a netting and platform in the hoistway to catch falling debris.
31.6
DISMANTLING OF EXISTING LIFTS
31.6.1
Dismantling by the Contractor Where the dismantling of existing lift system is included in the scope of the Contract, the Contractor shall comply with the requirements stipulated below.
31.6.1.1
General The Contractor shall dismantle and, unless otherwise specified, dispose of the existing lift equipment and complete all necessary building works to the lift machine room, hoistways and lift landings before handing over the same to the Lift Contractor to install the new lifts. Before commencement of the works, the Contractor shall check and confirm with the SO Rep for the correct lifts to be dismantled and disposed. For lifts sharing the same machine rooms, the Contractor shall check and ensure that no parts of the lift not due for dismantling is damaged or removed by mistake.
31.6.1.2
Work Schedule The Contractor shall carry out the works only after receiving instruction to do so from the SO Rep. The Contractor shall commence the works within one week from date of the SO Rep's instruction and complete the works for each lift within 7 continuous working days thereafter. The works shall be scheduled such that at any one time there is at least one lift running in a building block. A detailed work schedule and method statements shall be submitted to and approved by the SO Rep before commencement of the work.
31.6.1.3
Lift Machine Room All existing lift parts and equipment in the lift machine room including machine, controller, governor machine, cables and trunkings, travelling cables, wire ropes, EBOPS, ARD and LMD shall be removed and disposed of unless otherwise specified. Machine oil shall not be spilled on floor.
31.6.1.4
Lift Hoistway All existing guides, guide brackets, lift car and counter-weight, travelling cables, wire ropes, bolts and nuts, safety netting, metal separators, landing doors, door headers, door sills, sill supporting brackets, hoistway trunking and wiring and all other lift fittings shall be dismantled and disposed unless otherwise specified. All bolts and plugs encased in hoistway walls shall be cut flush to the walls. All separators embedded in hoistway walls at landing floor levels shall be cut flush and/or completely removed. All dismantled guide rails, fish plates, guide brackets, bolts and nuts shall not be disposed off until they are inspected by the Lift Contractor for possible re-use in installation of the new lifts. For lifts in common lift shafts, hoistway hoarding shall be erected before the commencement of dismantling work. The hoistway hoarding shall separate the adjacent lifts completely and shall only be removed after the Substantial Completion of the second lift. The hoarding shall be made of 12mm thick plywood. For multiplex lifts, the Contractor shall ensure that the hoistway trunking and wiring are not removed when dismantling any lift as this will remove the hall calls for the other lift.
UPG07/S31.DOC(11) lkk(181206) DPD
31.6.1.4
Lift Hoistway (Cont'd) The Contractor shall remove any bird nests found in hoistway. New bird-proof netting shall be provided by the Contractor if the old one covering the ventilation opening in hoistway has become rusty or has been damaged or missing. The Contractor shall also remove any timber, steel rods, formwork and any other rubbish or debris found in hoistway. The Contractor shall take all necessary precautions to prevent damage to any water or sewerage pipes and CATV wiring found in the hoistway. All necessary scaffolding required for the proper, efficient and safe dismantling of hoistway equipment shall be provided by the Contractor.
31.6.1.5
Lift Landing and Lift Pit The Contractor shall dismantle all lift landing doors, door jambs, landing sill and all fixtures at the lift landing. All old siren box, hall call plate, old position indicator and the existing car and counterweight buffers, buffer stands, and any other part of the lift found at the lift landings and lift pits shall also be removed. The Contractor shall take all necessary precautions to prevent damage to the existing waterproof cement plastering, any water or sewerage pipes and other wiring not related to old lift found in lift pit. No lubricant is allowed to spill on the floor of lift pit.
31.6.1.6
Lift Component, Equipment, Parts to be Returned to Employer The Contractor shall return to the Employer, including transportation to a designated location, the following items and any other item instructed by the SO Rep immediately after their being dismantled: (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) ARD (Automatic Rescue Device) EBOPS (Emergency Battery Operated Power Supply) LMD (Lift Monitoring Device) Stainless steel lift car cage Any other lift parts as required by the SO Rep.
The above components and equipment of all lifts shall be dismantled and brought down to ground floor carefully and the Contractor shall deliver the same to locations within Singapore as instructed by the SO Rep. The Contractor shall take all necessary precautions to protect and safeguard the aforesaid components and equipment against damage, corrosion, theft, ingress of dust, etc. The Contractor shall immediately inform the SO Rep if any lift component, equipment or parts is lost due to theft; and if deemed necessary by SO Rep, the Contractor shall make a police report. Notwithstanding the above, the SO Rep may decide not to salvage or accept any of the above components and equipment or part thereof. In such event, the Contractor shall remove and dispose the said components and equipment or part thereof. 31.6.1.7 Handover of Lift Machine Room and Hoistway Upon Substantial Completion of the dismantling work and all building works to lift machine room, hoistway and landings of each lift the Contractor shall immediately inform the SO Rep and arrange with the Lift Contractor for handover inspection of lift machine room, hoistway and landings. Before the Contractor arranges for a handover inspection with the Lift Contractor, he shall ensure that all debris and dismantled parts are cleared from the lift machine room, hoistway and landings, water in lift pit removed and leave the lift machine room, hoistway and landings in a clean and dry condition. A list of Defects detected during the joint inspection shall be given to the Contractor who shall promptly rectify the Defects and arrange for another inspection. The Contractor shall be responsible for the protection of lift machine room and hoistway and provision of safety measures until handover to the Lift Contractor.
UPG07/S31.DOC(12) lkk(181206) DPD
31.6.2
Dismantling by the Lift Contractor Where the dismantling of the existing lift system is NOT included in the scope of the Contract and may be undertaken by the Lift Contractor engaged by the Employer under a separate contract, the Contractor shall carry out all building and structural works to the lift machine room, hoistway and landings specified in this Section. In such event, all movable lift components, equipment and parts including lift landing door jambs, guide rails and guide brackets shall be dismantled by the Lift Contractor. Structural components such as machine beams shall be removed by the Contractor, if required. All disputes and/or differences arising under this Clause relating to interpretation of the respective scope of works to be carried out by the Contractor and the Lift Contractor shall be determined by SO Rep.
31.6.3
Where lift dismantling is by the Lift Contractor, the Contractor shall provide Air Plasma Cutting equipment for the Lift Contractor to use if such equipment is required for the work.
31.7
HOISTING OF NEW LIFT EQUIPMENT AND/OR PARTS The Contractor shall be deemed to have included in the Contract Sum for profit and attendance in respect of the works involved in the installation of new lifts and/or upgrading of existing lifts executed by the Lift Contractor. The facilities to be provided by the Contractor shall include but not be limited to the provision of cranes, operators and supervision for hoisting lift car, counterweight, door and jamb, machine and controller and other lift equipment and/or parts; the provision of all necessary reinforcement to existing roof or other existing structures to receive and support the landing and moving of the lift equipment/parts into the lift machine room and hoistway; and where necessary, hack existing lift machine room walls and/or floors to enable entry and/or hoisting up of the lift equipment/parts including making good. The Contractor shall carry out the lifting and hoisting service as required by the SO Rep and Lift Contractor including horizontal movement where there is no access on the ground.
31.8
ESTATE CONSERVANCY WORK As part of the estate conservancy work, throughout the Time for Completion, the Contractor shall clean and mop the lift car floor and sills once a day until the handover of the blocks to HDB/Town Council. In addition, for every lift in a block which has commenced any upgrading activity, he shall also clean the lift door sill at every lift opening and the lift car of any sand and other objects falling into the sills twice a day, on all working days until the building is handed over to HDB/Town Council. The recommended timing for the sill cleaning is at noon time (12pm to 1pm) and the end of the day (5pm to 6pm).
31.9
DIVERSION OF BUILDING SERVICES Where the following building services are in the way of the new or modified lift machine room and lift openings, they shall be diverted to location as required for the construction of the new/enlarged/raised lift machine room and lift openings as directed and specified by the SO Rep before the lift machine room and hoistway modification and Construction work begins. (a) (b) (c) (d) (e) (f) Water pipe/down pipe Water pump sets CATV conduit pipe, antenna and equipment Electrical wiring conduit/trunking and main switches Gas pipe Telephone and Rediffusion wiring and equipment
The diversion work shall be planned and completed before the scheduled commencement of the building modification work on the lift machine room and lift landing openings. Any delay in the completion of the modification work due to the diversion of the building services shall not entitle the Contractor to any extension of the Time for Completion. The Contractor shall allow for all costs related to the diversion in the Contract Sum.
UPG07/S31.DOC(13) lkk(181206) DPD
31.10
TEMPORARY SUPPLY TO EXISTING AND NEW LIFTS The Contractor shall ensure that the electricity supply to the existing lift/s still required to be in operation are provided with electricity supply at all times. Where necessary, the Contractor shall install temporary cables and arrange for temporary supply for these lifts to ensure that they remain in operation. The Contractor shall also arrange for the electricity supply, whether temporary or permanent, to be made available for those new lifts, including the lifts in new lift shafts, that are completed and ready to be commissioned. Where the electricity supply to new lifts are to be taken from a new switchroom, the Contractor shall arrange for the new lift submains to be completed and energised before the scheduled commissioning of the new lifts. In the event that the new switchroom is not completed and energised at the time the new lifts are completed, the Contractor shall arrange for temporary supply to be provided to these new lifts until such time that the permanent supply is available. The Contractor shall liaise with the Lift Contractor to arrange for an agreed schedule to disconnect the existing or temporary supply and reconnect the permanent supply to the lifts to ensure minimum disruption to the lift service. All temporary electrical supply provided by the Contractor shall be certified by a relevant LEW.
31.11
TIME FOR COMPLETION OF BUILDER'S WORK FOR LIFT REFURBISHMENT/UPGRADING Time for completing builder's work as specified in this Section 31 and in the Supplementary Specification is given in the Supplementary Specification on lift by lift basis. Unless otherwise directed by the SO Rep, the Contractor shall also provide for a 2-week run-in period after the commissioning of each lift. This run-in period shall be factored into the time for completion of works within the block. This arrangement shall not be construed as giving rise to separate sections, phases or sub-phases of the Works. If the Contractor fails to complete any of such items of works within the respective specified time period or if the SO shall certify in writing that in his opinion the Contractor despite previous warning by the SO Rep in writing fails to proceed with any of such items of works with due expedition and without delay, the Employer may himself complete such item or items of works or may employ any other Contractors to complete such item(s) of works. All costs and expenses for such item(s) of works including the Employer's charges shall be recovered by the Employer from monies due or becoming due to the Contractor or may be recovered by the Employer as a debt due from the Contractor without prejudice to any loss or expenses in connection with or in consequence of the Employer carrying out such item(s) of works. In the event of the Employer completing any such item(s) of works, the Contractor should not be entitled to any extension of time or any loss or expense in connection with or in consequence of the Employer carrying out such item(s) of works. The Defects Liability Period in respect of any such item(s) of works (whether completed by the Contractor or the Employer) shall not commence until the completion of the respective sections, phases, or sub-phases in which such item(s) of works is (are) included.
31.12 31.12.1
LIFT SURVEILLANCE SYSTEM (LSS) Where the installation of Lift Surveillance System (LSS) is required, the Contractor shall comply with the requirement stipulated below. Lift Surveillance System (LSS) basically consists of two cameras in each lift, a CCTV monitor with a camera at each lift lobby (optional item) and a recording device (located in lift machine room) to record all the activities. LSS shall form part of a separate contract unless otherwise specified. The Contractor shall coordinate with the LSS contractor on the installation and commissioning of the LSS as and when there is a request to install the system to the lift(s). The Contractor shall coordinate work at the lift lobby, inside the lift, inside the lift machine room and other areas required for the complete installation of LSS.
31.12.2
31.12.3
31.12.4
UPG07/S31.DOC(14) lkk(181206) DPD
31.12.5
The Contractor shall liaise with the LSS contractor on the scheduling and coordination of their respective works in connection with LSS installation to ensure that the whole works are completed on time. Upon receipt of the SO Reps instruction to start work, the Contractor shall commence the work as soon as is reasonably possible and complete the work expeditiously. Any change to the schedule shall be approved by SO Rep. The Contractor shall be required to attend site meetings in connection with LSS installation works from time to time when notified by the SO Rep. The Contractor shall appoint a responsible person authorised to accept and to make decisions or otherwise act on the Contractors behalf to attend such meetings.
31.12.6
SECTION 32/
UPG07/S31.DOC(15) lkk(181206) DPD
Ugdg Spec TS 32-1/3
SECTION 32
32.0
GENERAL REPAIR TO BUILDING WORKS
32.1
REPAIRS TO DAMAGED/SUNKEN INSITU UNSUSPENDED APRONS AND PAVEMENT (MINOR WORKS) Damaged/sunken insitu concrete areas of aprons and pavement (not exceeding 10m square in each damaged portion), shall be repaired under minor works where directed on site by the SO Rep. The Contractor shall visit the site and make careful assessments on the extent of repairs of damaged areas of aprons/pavement classified under this clause. No extra claims upon misunderstanding of the extent of repair work shall be entertained. Repair Works (a) Break-up badly damaged isolated portions of the existing concrete aprons/pavement as directed. Top up existing level of hardcore bed with broken bricks to make up the desired level before blinding the hardcore with 25mm thick quarry waste/sand. Compaction with mechanical rammers where required. Reconstruct affected areas with 100mm thick cast-in-situ concrete (grade 25) reinforced with BRC No. A6 fabric reinforcement placed 75mm from the bottom. Top surface of apron to be finished with two passes of power float is to be carried out only after all bleeding has stopped and evaporated. Curing for seven days.
(b)
(c)
(d)
32.2
BITUMEN EXPANSION JOINTS IN APRONS Pluck out all grass, shrubs, all foreign matters and dried bitumen from existing expansion joint. Ram in gap with polystyrene and fill with sand. Top joint with bitumen infill or other approved equivalent to a depth of 30mm minimum.
32.3
POT HOLES All pot holes shall be filled up with cement mortar (1:3) and finished smooth to match the surrounding. Before filling, all loose and foreign materials shall be removed. Brush a coat of bonding agent before reinstatement work.
32.4
CHIP OFF AT STAIRS, WALLS, COLUMNS ETC. All chip off areas of stairs, columns, wall etc. shall be repaired with cement and sand 1:3 added with 2 litres of Rapidard or equivalent accelerator approved to every bag of cement used. Before reinstatement, chip-off areas shall be roughened and wire brushed off all loose materials, dirt and foreign matters. Brush a coat of bonding agent.
32.5
SURFACE WATER CHANNELS The Contractor shall determine the extent of damaged sections of channels at the site prior to the submission of his Tender. Repairs and reconstruction of the surface water channel shall be as and when directed by the SO Rep on site.
Ugdg Spec TS 32-2/3
32.5.1
Badly Damaged Sections Badly damaged and sunken sections of existing surface water channels shall be removed as and when directed by the Superintending Officer's Representative on site. Reconstruct the affected sections as follows : (a) (b) Erect proper formwork. Construct base of 100mm thick and 75mm sides in concrete (grade 25) reinforced with one layer of BRC No. A5 wire mesh with 150mm lapping over existing reinforcement. Form inverts of channels to match existing. Render all exposed surfaces with (1:3) cement mortar.
(c) (d)
32.5.2
Worn Out or Cracked Inverts All damaged and sunken existing invert of channels shall be hacked off to receive new base of 100mm thick in concrete grade finished smooth to match the surrounding walls of channels.
32.5.3
Cover Slabs Leading to Staircases or Lift Landings or Shop Fronts Replace all missing or broken 50m thick precast reinforced concrete slabs over surface water channels to match existing. Covers shall be of 1:1:2 cement, sand and 10mm granite chipping mix reinforced with 1 layer fabric no. A6 BRC weldmesh.
32.6
FLOOR EXPANSION JOINTS (COMMUNAL AREAS/CORRIDORS) Leaking existing floor expansion joints of floor slabs at communal areas/corridors shall be reconstructed by : (a) (b) (c) Cutting rebates on both edges of slabs by mechanical saw. Stripping off old damaged expansion metal strips/damaged bituminous filling. Where the metal expansion strip is missing or corroded, the Contractor shall supply and install new aluminium expansion strip gauge 20, 250mm girth bent to required shape with both wings plugged and railed staggered at 200mm centres. Turn up ends of aluminium strips min. 150mm high. Before laying aluminium strip fill joint with polyethylene backer rod. Fill up gap with bituminous compound flush with surrounding surfaces.
Generally, old and brittle bituminous compound filling shall be stripped off and removed and refilled with hot bituminous compound or other approved equivalent to expansion joints where directed at sites by the SO Rep.
32.7
REPAIRS TO EXTERNAL STEPS Repair and make good to all damaged existing external steps and to repaint all concrete balustrade walls with 2 coats of solvent based paints (all steps within contract boundary). Re-constructed steps should not be greater than 150mm with new handrail as shown in Drawings. Existing rusty handrails shall be treated with rust primer and apply fresh coats of enamel paints to all existing mild steel handrails.
Ugdg Spec TS 32-3/3
32.8
HOLLOW BLOCK WALLS (EXTERNAL AND COMMUNAL AREAS) All serious cracks at all external hollow block walls shall be repaired as follows : (a) (b) (c) Hack out to form 'V' shaped grooves (min) 50mm deep x 25mm wide. Insert 20mm x 3mm x 460mm long galvanised flat bar fish tailed both ends at fourth courses. Fill up existing gaps with non-shrink or compo mortar mix with bonding agent onto cracks to match existing adjacent walls.
32.9 32.9.1
WALLS (EXTERNAL AND COMMUNAL AREAS) Repair To Loosened, Hollow And Bulging External Plaster (a) (b) (c) (d) (e) (f) Mark the area of defective plaster to a rectangular shape. Cut the boundary of the defective plaster with a diamond cutter. Hack and remove the panel or strip of plaster with approved tool. Hack and form keys on smooth concrete surfaces as determined by the SO Rep. Clean the hacked areas with a stiff brush and water. Prior to re-plastering, apply bonding agent on the surface in accordance with the Manufacturers specifications. Re-plaster to the affected area with polymer modified mortar to the affected areas in accordance with Manufacturers specifications. Paint to match existing
(g)
(h) 32.9.2
Repair To External Wall Cracks Cut out cracks in external walls and fill in with prepacked mortar to include build-in bonding bars where required and touch up disturbed work.
32.9.3
Pointing Of Gaps Point all gaps around external window frames and sills including external door frames in prepacked nonshrink mortar mixed with bonding agent.
SECTION 33/...
SECTION 33
33.0 33.1
REMEDIAL WORK TO RAINWATER SEEPAGE THROUGH THE EXTERNAL WALLS GENERAL The remedial work is to stop the rainwater through the external walls including the repairs to the adjacent reinforced concrete beams and columns of the walls concerned. The Contractor is to provide all necessary facilities and mechanical suspended cradle etc. in order to execute these works. The remedial work to be applied to the wall of a certain unit specified in the Schedules shall include the work on the wall panel together with that for the beams at that floor level and at the ceiling level of the panel unless otherwise stated.
33.2
PROTECTION OF PUBLIC AREA Wherever the site interrupts public area or footpath, the Contractor shall provide adequate and safe covered walkways with proper barricades and handrails. In addition, all access routes/points immediately below wall areas to be remedied shall be closed and adequately barricaded and where possible, alternative safe routes shall be provided. The costs for these requirements is deemed to have been included by the Contractor in his Contract Sum.
33.3
BUILDING BLOCK NUMBER PLATES Where the remedial work is to be carried out to brickwall panels with existing building block number plates, these shall first be carefully removed and stored and upon completion of the remedial work, they are to be properly reinstated, using `HILTI' Hud 6 with 5 diameter stainless steel (grade 316) wood screw or other approved material spaced at not more than 575mm c/c. All plates damaged during removal shall be replaced with new plates of same size and type.
33.4
REPAIR TO REINFORCED CONCRETE BEAM CRACKS Wherever there are visible cracks on the reinforced concrete beams, contractor shall hack out the existing plaster 40mm width on either side of the crack to expose the reinforced concrete beam. The cracks in the reinforced concrete beam will then be carefully chiselled or by mechanical angle grinder to a depth of 15mm and of width 10mm on either side of the crack in Ù' section. After hacking, all loose dirt will be brushed clean and the surface wetted and excess water allowed to drain off before applying the patching cement mortar. The first operation is to patch the cracks in the beams with 1:1 cement, fine sand mix gauged with 'ARCYL 60' or other approved acrylic polymer modifiers mixed strictly in accordance with manufacturer's instructions to the face of the reinforced concrete beam. The mortar will then be allowed to set for at least 3 days before the affected parts of the beam is replastered. The plastering mix over the beam shall be 1:3:0.25 (OPC:Sand:Sandy Clay; with approved plasticiser).
33.5
REPLASTER TOP AND BOTTOM FACES OF REINFORCED CONCRETE BEAMS Hack out carefully the plaster on the underside of the beam for the whole length above the brick wall panel to be treated. Re-render to make sure that the plaster finish will give a definite fall towards the outer face of the beam to form a drip. Similarly, hack away the existing plaster on the upper edge of the beam, which is at the bottom of the facing brick wall panel to be treated for the whole length of the panel. Hack further to remove about 10mm deep off the top of the reinforced concrete beam. Re-render making sure that the upper surface will finish with a definite slope outwards with the higher edge below the lowest bed joint of the brickwork.
33.6
REPAIR TO FACING BRICK WALL PANELS (NON-CAVITY WALL CONSTRUCTION) (1) Stains and foreign materials on the surfaces to be repaired are to be removed by high pressure waterjet. All edges of each panel of the wall joint shall be raked out carefully with mechanical angle grinder to a depth of 30mm and filled with approved polyurethane sealant in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions. (Note: If the wall recesses in from the reinforced concrete beam, then the bottom edge shall be treated differently. Instead, a 55 non-shrink grout fillet shall be formed as shown in the Drawing.) Where after the initial hacking detailed above, the depth encountered is greater than 25 to 30mm on account of the existing brick joint being of poor or inadequate mortar filling, the Contractor shall first fill the groove solid with an effective backing piece before proceeding with the application of the sealant. Also, if the joint, after raking out, is found to be jagged and uneven, then it shall be made good to the satisfaction of the SO Rep before applying the sealant. Cracks in the fair-face bricks shall be patched with brick-colour cement mixed with approved bonding agent. Point all brick joints with cement-sand (1:1) mortar gauged with approved bonding agent to BS 5270. Apply 2 coats of approved clear acrylic sealers `Thoroclear 777' and 2 subsequent coats of approved clear water repellents `Thoroglaze' or other approved materials. Conduct water test to all surfaces treated. Any sign of seepage shall be repaired.
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
33.7
REPAIR TO THE FACING BRICK WALL PANELS IF PLASTERING IS SPECIFIED (NON-CAVITY WALL CONSTRUCTION) Rake out every mortar joint of the brick wall with a pneumatic hand chisel to an even depth of 10 to 15mm. Brush away all loose mortar and sand particles immediately before applying plastering. Wet the brick surface and allow excess water to drain off. Apply two different coatings with at least 10 hours interval between coats : the first coat is applied with cement-sand (1:3) mix plaster whereas the second coat is applied with approved cement-based waterproofing material to BS 4887:1973. The first coat shall be applied with a wooden trowel applying pressure to force the mortar into the grooves already formed in the brick joints described above. The mortar coat shall be of a mean thickness of about 8mm from the brick surface. This coating shall be finished rough to form a key for the subsequent coat. The subsequent coat shall be applied to bring the surface as close to a true vertical plane as is practical. The mean thickness of this coating shall be 4mm. If the wall recesses in from the reinforced concrete beam, then a 55 non-shrink grout fillet shall be formed at the base of the facing brickwall before applying the two different coatings. On completion of the repair work, allow the coatings to cure and set before carrying out the water test as specified in Clause 33.11 "Water Test". Paint the repaired surface as specified in Clause 33.10 "Painting". The colour of the paint shall be approved by the Board's SO Rep.
33.8
PATCH AND JOINTS BETWEEN PRECAST SILLS For point blocks where the windows in the affected wall exceed about 1200mm in width the precast concrete sill should be in separate lengths end-jointed at about 1200mm intervals. The Contractor shall hack out carefully the top part of the mortar joint 6mm deep, brush clean and apply approved silicone weather sealant for use on masonry work as detailed in the Drawings and to the satisfaction of the SO Rep. Concrete surface shall be dry when applying sealant. Sealant shall be continuous and sealing up with the window frame.
33.9
REPAIR TO HOLLOW-BLOCK OR SOLID-BLOCK WALL PANELS (NON-CAVITY WALL CONSTRUCTION) (1) Grind the whole hollow-block wall exterior surface with mechanical angle grinder. Clean the whole hollow wall exterior surface by brushing with either a stiff brush or wire brush, at the same time washing down with water. All edges of each panel of the wall joint shall be raked out carefully with mechanical angle grinder to a depth of 30mm and filled with approved polyurethane sealant in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions. (Note - if the wall recesses in from the reinforced concrete beam, then the bottom edge shall be treated differently. Instead, a 55 non-shrink grout fillet shall be formed as shown in the Drawing.) Where after the initial hacking detailed above, the depth encountered is greater than 25 to 30mm on account of the existing blockwork joint being of poor or inadequate mortar filling, the Contractor shall first fill the groove solid with an effective backing piece before proceeding with the application of the sealant. Also, if the joint after raking out is found to be jagged and uneven, then it shall be made good to the satisfaction of the SO Rep before applying the sealant. Point all joints and cracks with cement-sand (1:1) mortar gauged with approved bonding agent to BS 5270. Provide new drips to be formed by cement and sand (1:3) mortar at top and bottom edges of the reinforced concrete beam as shown. Apply a coating of approved cement-based water-proofing material to BS 4887:1973 averaging 4mm thick over the whole exterior surface of the hollow block wall; mixed in the proportion in accordance with the instructions of the manufacturer. When the plastered surface has been properly set, conduct water test to all surfaces treated. Any sign of seepage shall be repaired. When the water test is successful, apply the decoration as specified in Clause 33.10 "Painting". The colour of the paint shall be approved by the SO Rep.
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
(7)
33.10
PAINTING On completion of the repair work, allow for as long a time as is feasible for the mortar to mature, weather and dry before applying decoration. Apply three (3) coats of approved water based algae resistant emulsion paint. The first coat may be with thinning of up to ten (10) percent by volume with clean water. Subsequent coats shall not be diluted. Paint shall be in a colour matching the surrounding works. The paint is to be used strictly in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
33.11
WATER TEST After the completion of the remedial works, the Contractor shall carry out water test for signs of water seepage as instructed by the SO Rep, as follows: A continuous jet of water is to be sprayed on the upper joint between the reinforced concrete beam and the repair blockwall corresponding to 600 1/hr (max.) from a water hose having a nozzle velocity of 2m/sec and a cone scatter of approximately 60 held at a distance of 1.0 - 1.2 m from the surface under test. The duration of the test shall not be less than 4 hours. The hose should be placed with the nozzle as shown in the attached Figure 1 (refer Clause 12.14). The water shall not seep into any part of the building during the test or within the period of 12 hours after the completion of the test. However, the Contractor shall note that these operation will not in any way release the Contractor from his responsibility for maintenance during the Defects Liability Period.
Ugdg Spec TS 33-4/11 33.12 ON COMPLETION All parts disturbed or damaged during the execution of the works shall be repaired or replaced or reinstated to the satisfaction of SO Rep. All floors soiled by contractor's work shall be thoroughly washed, drip marks or paintwork removed and the works generally touched up. All debris and contractor's tools, materials and equipment shall be removed on completion of the works and the whole site shall be left clean and tidy. 33.13 REMEDIAL WORK TO RAINWATER SEEPAGE THROUGH THE END CAVITY BRICK WALL (INCLUSIVE OF SOLID BLOCK AND HOLLOW BLOCK WALL) (1) General The remedial work is to stop the rainwater seepage through the end cavity brickwall. The Contractor is to provide all necessary facilities, safety measures prior to commencement of work. The Contractor shall barricade the ground level of the end wall and display sufficient number of `DANGER - KEEP OUT' warning signs each 800mm x 500mm in 4 official languages at strategic points to keep the public from places where work is in progress. At least 2 such sign boards shall be fixed to scaffolding for each block of flats where work is in progress. The remedial work is to be applied to the end cavity wall (outer layer) shown in the Drawings. (2) Removal of Lowest Two Courses of Existing Brickwall Hack out carefully the lowest two courses of brickwork of every panel of the wall to be treated (including end cavity brickwall which has been plastered) by hammer or chisel in stages. Each stage involves not more than 1500mm span of the wall. Provide and install temporary support according to the Drawings at not more than 1500mm c/c between the upper edge of the existing reinforced concrete beam and the underside of the third course of existing brickwall to ensure the wall panel is safe during the course of remedial work. All the broken brick shall be removed immediately from the wall panel and scaffolding. The Contractor shall ensure the third course of brickwall is in good condition, free from crack, breakage and without sign of sagging during the process of hacking out. Remove carefully all cement mortar below the third course of brickwork and expose the brick surface underneath. Alternative design of temporary support may be considered provided approval is obtained from the SO Rep. The design of the alternative temporary support shall be submitted to SO Rep with detailed calculation prior to the commencement of work. (3) Clearing to Cavity Remove all existing cement mortar dropping in the cavity by hammer hacking and chiselling. All the existing mortar dropping embedded above the second course of brickwall shall be removed thoroughly. The existing damp proof course shall be removed together with all the cement mortar dropping. The Contractor shall ensure the existing internal hollow block wall, the adjacent reinforced concrete beam, reinforced concrete column and existing brickwall are protected from damage during the hacking and removal of cement mortar dropping. After all cement mortar dropping has been removed from the cavity, the Contractor shall make arrangement for the clerk-of-work to inspect the cavity to ensure the cavity is free from any foreign object. The Contractor shall obtain the endorsement from the clerk-of-work on a report book to certify the cavity of every wall panel to be treated are thoroughly clear as indicated in the Drawings. The report book shall be presented to the SO Rep upon the completion of every block. The Board will keep the report book upon the completion of the work. (4) Laying of Damp Proof Course Supply and lay damp proof course to the cavity as shown in the Drawings. The damp proof course shall be extended to 200mm above the floor level and bonded to the hollow block wall with rubberised bitumen adhesive to manufacturer's recommendations. The other end of damp proof course shall be bonded to the top edge of the existing reinforced concrete beam. The damp proof course shall be AH1 Moistop 737 or other approved and shall be laid in continuous stretch to the whole width of the wall with only two overlapped sections.
Ugdg Spec TS 33-5/11 33.13 REMEDIAL WORK TO RAINWATER SEEPAGE THROUGH THE END CAVITY BRICK WALL (INCLUSIVE OF SOLID BLOCK AND HOLLOW BLOCK WALL) (CONT'D) (5) Reinstate the Lowest Two Courses of Brickwall Provide and lay the lowest two courses of brickwork to the existing after the cleaning of the cement mortar dropping and the installation of DPC to the cavity. The Contractor shall lay the brickwork in two operations. The brickwork shall be divided into two vertical sections. The Contractor shall remove the temporary support of the half of the existing wall then lay the lowest two courses of brickwork for this half of the wall. The other half of the brickwork shall only be laid after the first half of the brickwork has been set. All bricks used shall be of same size and similar colour to the existing bricks of the wall panel. The Contractor shall submit a sample to the SO Rep for approval prior to the reinstatement of the brickwork. Weepholes at 600mm c/c shall be provided at the lowest course as shown in the Drawings. The mortar mix shall be 1 part of masonry cement and 3 parts of sand by volume. The mortar shall be carefully mixed upon properly constructed timber platforms and prepared in small quantities as required. Care shall be taken to make the mixture mortar of the right consistency. No mortar which has commenced to set may be used or mixed with any other mortar. (6) Repair to the Existing External Brickwork Panels The topmost mortar joint of every brick panel immediately under the beam shall be carefully raked out by a pneumatic hand chisel to an even depth of 25mm to 30mm. Brush out all loose sand and mortar and fill the groove with approved polyurethane sealant with backer rod to manufacturer's recommendations and instructions, leaving no voids or gaps in between, to form a continuous seal. All surfaces of the groove shall be dry when applying sealant. If the joint, after raking out, is found to be jagged and uneven, then it shall be made good to the satisfaction of the SO Rep before applying the sealant. Also, where after the initial hacking detailed above, the depth encountered is greater than 25mm to 30mm on account of the existing brick joint being of poor or inadequate mortar filling, the Contractor shall first fill the groove solid with an effective backing before proceeding with the application of sealant. Cracks (except hairline cracks) in the fairface bricks shall be patched with brick-colour cement mixed with approved bonding agent. (7) Plastering and Painting Plastering shall then be carried out to the lowest two courses of the treated brickwall which had been plastered prior to the remedial work and painted to match existing finish colour. The weepholes shall be exposed after plastering. Unless otherwise stated, all plaster surfaces affected by the remedial work shall be made good and to be even, smooth and aligned to match with the existing surface. All plaster surfaces shall be painted with 3 coats of emulsion paint as specified in Clause 33.10 "Painting" with colours approved by the SO Rep.
33.14
REPAIR AND WATERPROOFING TREATMENT OF EXISTING REFUSE CHUTES
33.14.1
Over-riding Clause The Contractor and his Specialist executing the works as required under this clause including sub-clauses have to ensure that the works, goods or materials used shall be suitable and reasonably fit for the purposes for which they are required (hereinafter referred as "Performance Requirement"). In the event the works, goods or materials to be used as specified in this clause are upgraded in order to meet the Performance Requirement, the Contractor and his Specialist shall do all necessary upgrading at no extra cost to the Employer, subject always to the approval of the SO Rep, but such approval shall not in any way affect the Contractor's and his Specialist's duties or obligations arising under the Contract.
33.14.2
General Where repair and waterproofing treatment of existing refuse chutes is included in the scope of this Contract, the Contractor shall carry out at least the following items of work : (a) Provide all labour, materials, tools and equipment necessary for the repair and waterproofing treatment work of existing refuse chutes. Provision of high powered fan for adequate ventilation and spotlight to facilitate the waterproofing treatment work. Cut through/hack off existing roof slab/roof waterproofing membrane and expose the steel reinforcement above refuse chute and reinstatement and make good. The exposed roof slab steel reinforcement must be protected from rust during the course of work. Such work shall be approved by the SO Rep. Propose and install an approved mechanised suspended cradle system for access and work execution within the refuse chute. Temporarily seal and block up all refuse chute hoppers during the duration of the waterproofing treatment work. Kill and remove pest, insects and nests within the chutes with approved insecticide or by other means as approved by the relevant authorities. Brush and clean down internal walls of refuse chute with high pressure water jet and with any other tools as deemed necessary. Remove all stains and solid grease or waste deposits on the inner walls of the chute by scrapping, grinding, chipping or other methods approved by the SO Rep. Remove all loosen or spalled concrete by grinding or chipping, and prime and patch the areas before the application of the bonding agent. Carry out waterproofing treatment work to the refuse chute inner walls using Epoxy Waterproofing system as described in sub-clause 33.14.12 "Epoxy Waterproofing Treatment" below. Provision of labour and material to remove daily domestic refuse from affected households. Provide any other work incidental to the completion of the waterproofing treatment work.
(b)
(c)
(d)
(e)
(f)
(g)
(h)
(I)
(j)
(k) (l)
33.14.3
Precautionary Measures The work shall be carried out in the order and manner, as may be directed by the SO Rep, so as to cause minimum inconvenience to occupants and the public. The Contractor shall provide adequate barricades and warning signs and take such safety measures as may be required to comply with the requirements of the relevant authorities. As the existing buildings are occupied, the Contractor shall take every precaution to prevent injury to persons, loss/damage to property, excessive noise or vibration and dust nuisance by appropriate means. Permission to enter occupied premises must be arranged and obtained by the Contractor. The Contractor shall exercise great care to protect the existing structures, fittings and fixtures in the execution of the work. In the event of any dispute, the Contractor shall indemnify the Employer from claims arising thereof.
33.14.4
Site Safety Measures The Contractor shall comply with the Factories Act 1973 (hereinafter referred to as "the Act') and the provisions of the Factories (Building Operations and Works of Engineering Construction) Regulations 1985 (hereinafter referred to as "the Regulations") and any amendment thereto. It shall be the duty of the Contractor to comply with all such requirements of the Regulations, as affect him or any person or persons employed by him and as related to any work, act or operation performed or about to be performed by him. The Contractor shall not permit an employee to do anything not in accordance with the generally accepted principles of safe and sound practice. The Contractor shall ensure a safe environment on site at all times. All safety provisions shall be properly maintained and shall not be removed without the written approval of the Employer's Safety Unit. The Contractor shall ensure that all necessary and sufficient precautions are taken by his workmen when safety provisions are installed. The Contractor shall not allow any safety provision to be used, unless he has satisfied himself that the provision is safe. The Contractor shall submit his proposed mechanised suspended cradle system, certified by a Professional Engineer, for access and work execution within the refuse chute to the Employer's Safety Unit for approval prior to the commencement of the work. The Contractor must take note that such approval shall not in any way relieve the Contractor and his Professional Engineer of the need to ensure the adequacy and sufficiency of the safety provisions. The Contractor is deemed to have allowed in his Contract Sum for all costs of the safety provisions and for all additional costs that may arise from amendment's to the Regulations and changes in the requirements of the Ministry of Manpower and the Employer's Safety Unit.
33.14.5
Time For Completion Before commencement of the work, the Contractor shall submit a work method statement together with a work programme of the refuse chute waterproofing treatment work for the SO Rep's approval. The Contractor shall ensure that the repair work for any stack of refuse chute including the satisfactory completion of water test must complete within 3 weeks from the time the Contractor issues advance notices to affected residents. The waterproofing treatment of refuse chutes in a building block shall be completed no later than the Time for Completion for Works in common areas within the block as specified in the Appendix to Public Sector Standard Conditions of Contract for Construction Works.
33.14.6
Notice To Residents Upon the approval of the work method and work programme by the SO Rep, the Contractor shall give 7 days advance notice to the affected residents before the actual commencement of the work in the particular stack of refuse chute.
33.14.7
Provision of Refuse Containers During the execution of the work, the Contractor shall provide minimum 10-litre durable plastic refuse containers complete with cover for affected households' usage. The Contractor shall place the refuse container besides the main entrance of every household or in a location as decided by the SO Rep. A sample of such container must be forwarded to the SO Rep for approval before use. The Contractor shall provide a fresh plastic garbage bag for each container daily and undertake to clean all containers which are dirty or in an unhygienic condition or as and when directed by the SO Rep. All containers provided shall be leak proof and in proper condition fit for its purpose. Should any container leak or be damaged or be lost subsequently whether by the Contractor or his workers or as a result of vandalism, the Contractor shall undertake to replace the container immediately at no extra cost to the Employer.
33.14.8
Daily Removal of Domestic Refuse The Contractor shall provide labour to collect and remove the refuse from the containers of all the affected households and dispose them to the dustbin compound in an orderly manner by trolley or other means as approved by the SO Rep. The refuse shall be removed daily before 10.00 am. In daily removal of refuse from the containers, the Contractor must take all necessary precautions to prevent spillage or drippings of refuse. All spills or drips during removal are to be cleaned immediately.
33.14.9
Diversion of Existing Services Before commencing the repairs of any part of the structure, all affected electrical and other services which come within the area to be repaired shall be temporarily disconnected or diverted (if necessary) and reinstated the same after completion of the work. All diversion/disconnections and reinstatement of services shall be carried out to the satisfaction of the SO Rep by Licenced Electricians and Plumbers and shall comply with the current by-law requirement and regulations of the relevant local authorities.
33.14.10
Protection and Reinstatement of Existing Roofing System The Contractor shall remove and stack properly the secondary roofing slabs to allow for sufficient working space. The Contractor shall provide canvas to protect the exposed waterproofing membrane from damage by the refuse chute waterproofing treatment activities. The Contractor shall reinstate and make good the damaged roofing system during the course of the work. The Contractor shall engage the Employer's original roofing specialist contractor, who has provided the warranty for the roofing system to carry out the repair/replacement, reinstatement or installation work in order not to invalidate the existing warranty on roofing system given to the Employer by the roofing specialist contractor. Failure in engaging the Employer's original roofing specialist contractor would render the Contractor liable to uphold the terms of the existing warranty for the whole roofing system of the affected block.
33.14.11
Propping and Strutting The Contractor shall provide and maintain during the execution of the work all necessary propping, strutting and other supports to support adequately the area to be repaired and any adjacent structures, and shall take all necessary precautions or adopt such other approved measures as may be necessary to prevent damage to the unaffected part of the structure. The Contractor shall note and take all responsibility for the satisfactory performance of the propping and all other supports for the purpose for which they are erected. In the event of any damage occurring due to the inefficiency of the supports such damage resulting thereof shall be made good by the Contractor at his own expenses. Any approval given by the SO Rep in respect of the propping and strutting shall not relieve the Contractor of his responsibility in the safety of the structure under repair.
33.14.12
Epoxy Waterproofing Treatment The waterproofing treatment work to be carried out to the inner walls of the refuse chute shall include : (a) (b) Preparation of the inner wall surface to be treated. Application of an approved bonding agent before rendering with a nominal 20mm thick cement/sand screed on the prepared inner chute walls. Application of 2 coats of approved epoxy coating and 2 coats of approved solventless epoxy.
(c)
33.14.12
Epoxy Waterproofing Treatment (Cont'd) (A) Surface Preparation The inner wall surface to which the bonding agent is to be applied shall be clean, dry and free from all contaminants, loose or unsound materials. After removal of contaminants, solid grease or waste deposits on the inner walls by brushing, scrapping, high powered water hosing down etc., the surface shall then be cleaned by jetting with oil-free compressed air so that all dust and loose material is removed. Repairs of all cracks are to be carried out by 'V'-ing the crack to a width of 5 millimetres at the surface. The cracks shall be cleaned out with oil-free compressed air or other approved method. The prepared cracks and other spalled areas shall be brushed with an approved bonding agent and then filled and patched with waterproofing cement/sand finished to a smooth even surface. (B) Waterproofing Cement/ Sand Screed An approved bonding agent shall be applied by brushing or other method as approved by the SO Rep as soon as the prepared surface is dry. Allow the bonding agent to be adequately cured before applying a layer of nominal 20mm thick waterproofing cement/sand screed. The screed shall be of one part cement to two parts sand (1:2) waterproofed with 1.5 kg of "Sika No. 1" or other approved waterproofing compound to 50 kg of cement. The mixture shall be thoroughly mixed using a mechanical mixer. Mixing of waterproof compound shall be done strictly in accordance with manufacturer's printed recommendations or instructions. The cement shall be of a brand currently approved by the Employer, be fresh when delivered and used in the orders of delivery. Any bag of cement containing partly set cement shall be removed from the site. Cement of different brands shall not be mixed in use. Sand used shall be clean, evenly graded from fine to coarse pit sand, free from loams, silt and other organic matter. Clay sediment shall not exceed 10% by volume. All screed when applied shall be kept damp and adequately cured to prevent shrinkage and cracking. (C) Application of Epoxy Coatings Prior to application of the epoxy waterproofing membranes, the entire screeded surfaces are to be thoroughly clean, free from dust, etc and in a visibly dry condition. The waterproofing membranes shall consist of 2 coats of approved epoxy coating and 2 coats of approved Solventless Epoxy. Allow each coat to be "tack free" dry before application of subsequent coat. The Contractor shall submit relevant technical information, test reports from PSB or other approved testing institutes and other additional information on the epoxy resins as required by the SO Rep.
33.14.13
Safe Use of Epoxy Compounds Epoxy materials may be skin irritants or sensitizers to many people. The Contractor shall instruct all personnel working with epoxy resins of the potential hazards. Particular attention shall be given to the label warnings specified by the manufacturer. The Contractor shall provide adequate ventilation through the refuse chute and instruct all personnel not to smoke in the vicinity of the epoxy resins. Face shields or goggles must be worn when applying or mixing the epoxy components. Long sleeves shall cover the forearms and rubber gloves must be worn at all times while using epoxy resins. The Contractor shall supply all necessary equipment, protective clothing, creams, cleaning materials and first aid kit.
33.14.14
Testing of Materials Notwithstanding any provisions in the Conditions of Contract, the Contractor shall include in his Contract Sum the cost of carrying out testings of materials as and when directed by the SO Rep including destructive testings and the cost of arranging for materials to be sent to the testing institutes. The SO Rep may cause samples to be taken from each consignment of material or from the works (where the materials have been incorporated in the works) in the presence of the Contractor or his representative, for testing. The sample or samples so taken shall be deemed to represent the consignment or the works as decided by the SO Rep. If the test or tests reveal that the sample tested does not comply with the product specification or any other requirements as indicated by the SO Rep., the material, whether fixed or yet to be fixed, shall be rejected and removed from site and replaced at the Contractor's own expense. However, if the SO Rep decides to retain such materials which have been fixed, the Contractor shall be liable to pay to the Employer the decrease in value, as ascertained by the SO Rep, of the works due to these materials. In either case, the Contractor shall pay to the Employer a charge of a quantum to be determined by the SO Rep.
33.14.15
Testing of Waterproofed Refuse Chute Against Weather and Water The complete refuse chute inner walls will be subjected to tests for water and weather-tightness. Testing is to be conducted only when all pipes, services, etc have been installed and the penetrations sealed. All refuse chutes are to be tested by spraying water from the top of refuse chutes prior to the reinstatement of the hacked/cut roof over it. The water shall spray vertically downwards on all internal walls for a duration of minimum 2 hours, as decided by the SO Rep. In the event of failure of water test, the Contractor is required to rectify the defective area and to repeat the test. If the repeated water test also fail to comply with the passing criteria, the Contractor is required to rectify the defective area and to repeat the test. This procedure shall be repeated until all tests comply fully with the passing criteria. The cost of all the extra water tests and rectification works shall be borne by the Contractor. Furthermore, the Employer reserves the right to reject the use of any waterproofing materials that perform unsatisfactorily during water tests at no cost to the Employer. Under no circumstances is the Contractor allowed to carry out their own later test without the presence of the SO Rep. All water tests (specified or unspecified) must be witnessed and certified by the SO Rep as well as by the Contractor's representatives.
33.14.16
Cleaning Up The Contractor shall keep the work clean and tidy as it proceeds, and regularly remove from the site rubbish and surplus material arising from the execution of the work. In the event of stains occurring on the external painted walls of the building blocks or on the outer walls of refuse chute inside the units arising from the repair, the Contractor shall remove the stains, make good or re-paint the affected surfaces to the satisfaction of the SO Rep.
UPG07/S33.DOC(10) lkk(181206) DPD
33.14.17
Warranty The Contractor and his Specialist shall warrant the Works on the terms and conditions as stipulated in Clause 59.2 'Provision of Warranty' and the specimen of Deed of Warranty as produced in Appendix A1. In this respect, the Contractor and his Specialist shall submit such Deed of Warranty to the Employer or to such other party or such Town Council(s) as the SO Rep may at his sole discretion decide. In the event that the Deed of Warranty for part of the works or for the whole works is to be submitted to such Town Council(s), the Contractor and his Specialist shall submit such Deed of Warranty in accordance with the specimen of Deed of Warranty as produced in Appendix A1(TC) and Clause 59.2 'Provision of Warranty' to such Town Councils. The duly executed warranty shall be submitted immediately upon request by the SO Rep, and if no such request is made, then at such time when the SO Rep considers the works have been substantially completed in accordance with the Contract. In the event that the Contractor and his Specialist shall fail to execute and submit the Deed of Warranty within the time specified, the SO Rep shall be allowed to withhold 15% of the payment of any sums due to the Contractor in relation to the execution of such Works, subject to the minimum sum of S$5,000.00 per Deed of Warranty. However, such sums withheld shall be released to the Contractor upon submission by him of the duly executed Deed of Warranty.
SECTION 34/...
UPG07/S33.DOC(11) lkk(181206) DPD
Ugdg Spec TS 34-1/4
SECTION 34
34.0
RECTIFICATION OF ALIGNMENT OF BUILDING ELEMENTS AND STRUCTURAL REPAIRS
34.1
GENERAL Where rectification of the alignment of building elements or structural repairs on the existing buildings is required, the provisions of this section shall apply.
34.2
SCOPE OF WORK The work included in this Section are : (a) Supply of materials, Construction Equipment and labour for repair, reconstruction and reinstatement of all defective RC beams, slabs, columns & other parts of the building; Making appointments/arrangements with all the affected tenants/lessees for the inspection and execution of the works; Repair to defective structural members and correction of alignment and levels; Removal of plaster and/or defective concrete and replacement with approved repair material; Removal of corroded reinforcement and replacement/addition of new reinforcing bars as directed by SO Rep; Grouting; and Re-rendering and re-plastering to the structural members.
(b)
(c) (d) (e)
(f) (g)
and any other associated work not included above but otherwise specified in the Contract, and as shown in the Drawings or indicated in the Work Schedule. The works shall be carried out under the supervision, instructions and to the satisfaction of the SO Rep.
34.3
APPROVAL OF REPAIR MATERIALS All repair materials used in this contract shall be those specified in the Employer's approved list of materials. However, the Contractor may propose other repair materials for the approval of the SO Rep subject to the materials undergoing standard test methods specified by the Employer and achieving the specific performance standards and/or any other additional performance standards as required by the Employer from time to time.
34.4
REPAIR MATERIALS DELIVERED TO SITE All repair materials delivered to site shall be properly packed sealed and clearly labelled. Delivery of repair materials in loose, unlabelled packing and weighing on site shall not be allowed.
Ugdg Spec TS 34-2/4 34.5 CORRECTION OF ALIGNMENT Prior to the start of the work, the Contractor shall take measurements of all building elements as stipulated in the General Specification. The Contractor shall submit all measurements, together with all deviations from true alignment, to the SO Rep. The acceptable tolerance is specified in Clause 4.22. Where the element is out of tolerance, and is determined to be unacceptable, the Contractor shall remove all existing paintwork and plaster to correct the alignment or level. Hacking of the existing concrete shall be allowed only with the written permission of the SO Rep. Where hacking is allowed, the Contractor shall ensure that the concrete cover to the reinforcement bars is not reduced below the minimum cover specified in the Structural Drawings. 34.5.1 Method of Rectification for Deviation less than 25mm Where the deviation is less than 25mm after removing any excess concrete, the method of rectification as stipulated in the Section 20 "WALL FINISHES" shall be adopted. 34.5.2 Method of Rectification for Deviation between 25mm and 50mm Where the deviation is between 25mm and 50mm after removing all excess concrete, the Contractor shall provide a layer of 50mm x 50mm x 3mm diameter weld mesh and plaster to acceptable alignment. The weldmesh shall be anchored to the concrete surface with approved chemical anchors. The number, size and type of chemical anchors shall be to the approval of the SO Rep. The Contractor shall ensure that the weld mesh is adequately protected with a 25mm cover. 34.5.3 Method of Rectification for Deviation greater than 50mm Where the deviation is greater than 50mm after removing all excess concrete, the Contractor shall use the conventional concreting method to correct the alignment. The edges of all areas to be repaired shall be recessed 5mm to 10mm to avoid feather edging. Where reinforcement bars are exposed, all rust shall be removed by wire brushing or other approved means. A layer of D6 weld mesh shall be provided and anchored to the concrete surface with approved chemical anchors. The number, size and type of chemical anchors shall be to the approval of the SO Rep. The Contractor shall ensure that adequate cover is provided for the weldmesh. Concrete of similar grade as that of the existing structural member shall be used. The maximum size of the aggregate shall be 10mm. Concreting works shall be in accordance with the section on Structural Concrete. 34.5.4 Alternative Method of Rectification for Deviation greater than 50mm If the grouting method is used for deviations greater than 50mm, the Contractor shall remove unwanted concrete as directed by the SO Rep. The edges of all areas to be repaired shall be recessed 5mm to 10mm to avoid feather-edging. Where reinforcement bars are exposed all rust shall be removed by wire brushing or other approved means. D6 weld mesh shall be cut and bent to shape and firmly anchored to the surface of the building element with approved chemical anchors. The Contractor shall ensure that adequate cover is provided to the weld mesh. Formwork shall be erected and the void inside shall be filled with clean dry 10mm size aggregate complying with SS31. The edges of the formwork shall then be sealed to ensure it is airtight. In-let pipes shall then be provided at a spacing of not more than 600mm c/c. After bracing the formwork to withstand the grouting pressure, approved cementitious based non-shrink grout shall be pumped in through the inlet pipes, working from the bottom upwards. At the last in-let pipe, the pressure of the grout shall be maintained at 140 N/mm2 for at least 5 minutes after which, the in-let pipes shall be sealed and the formwork allowed to stand for 48 hours. After the striking of the formwork, the repaired or rectified area shall be cured for at least 3 days as stipulated in the Section 4 "STRUCTURAL CONCRETE".
Ugdg Spec TS 34-3/4 34.6 34.6.1 METHOD OF STRUCTURAL REPAIRS General In preparing for repair, all defective and unsound concrete must be removed until sound concrete is reached. The Contractor shall use only hammer and chisel or light pneumatic tools (max. weight 2 kg) to remove the concrete to avoid the shattering effect on the buildings. The surface of the concrete shall be thoroughly cleaned and any surfaces coated with soot or other deposits should be wire brushed. All rusted steel bars shall be chipped to remove scale. Steel bars with equivalent strength shall be added or replaced if the SO Rep finds necessary. The Contractor shall take every precaution to protect the finishes, fixtures and fittings inside the flats. 34.6.2 Repairs to Structural Members All defects found on the structural members shall be repaired in compliance with technical requirements and details shown in Upgrading Standard Details Manual (USDM). 34.6.3 Repair to Spalling Concrete Allow a Provisional Sum Item as shown in the Tender Cost Breakdown of the Form Of Tender for the repair of spalling concrete to the internal of the units. For repair of spalling concrete in the common area outside the units, the Contractor is required to carry out such works as and when directed by the SO Rep. The Contractor is deemed to have allowed in the Contract Sum, all costs and expenses for the patch repair and pressure grouting methods for repairing spalling concrete.
34.6.4
Repair to Water Seepage The concrete surface to be repaired shall be free from dirt, paint and other impurities. It shall be kept thoroughly and uniformly moist by spraying the area with water prior to any repair works. The surface must be kept damp with no surface water. The approved waterproofing compound shall be applied in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions. Where there is water seepage through porous concrete, the seepage shall be repaired by injecting an approved water-reactive polyurethane grout. At least two injection ports shall be provided and the distance between adjacent injection ports shall not be more than 200mm centre-to-centre. Upon completion of the repair, the Contractor shall carry out a 4 hour watertest as stipulated in the Section 19 "FLOOR FINISHES". The Contractor shall rectify all leakages to the satisfaction of the SO Rep.
34.7
APPLICATION OF PAINT WITH ANTI-CARBONATION PROPERTY TO EXISTING SLAB SOFFITS AND BEAMS OF THE GROUND FLOOR VOID DECKS All atmospherically exposed concrete surfaces of slab soffits and beams of the ground floor void decks shall be applied with paint with anti-carbonation property unless otherwise specified or instructed by the SO Rep. The paint and painting works on all finish surface shall comply with all technical requirements, preparation work, workmanship and quality control as required under Section 23 Painting and Decorating of the Standard Specifications for Upgrading Works. The Contractor shall obtain the paint with anti-carbonation property from approved suppliers in the HDBs List of Approved Materials and Suppliers. Any repair works shall be carried out prior to the application of the paint with anti-carbonation property. The method statement shall be submitted to SO Rep for approval. The method statement shall include the relevant illustration on the preparation, application and quality control check of the system for every stage of the entire work process.
Ugdg Spec TS 34-4/4
34.8
REINSTATE & MAKE GOOD The work shall be carried out without damage to the adjoining parts of the structure or adjoining property and if such damage occurs during the repair works, the Contractor shall reinstate and make good the same at his own expense. All repairs and making good are to be executed with materials and workmanship to the satisfaction of the SO Rep.
34.9
ON COMPLETION All parts disturbed or damaged during the execution of the works shall be repaired, repainted or replaced to match existing. All floor shall be thoroughly washed, marks of paint work removed and the works generally touched up. All rubbish and Contractor's tools, materials and equipment shall be removed on completion of the works and the whole site concerning the repairs shall be left clean and tidy to the satisfaction of the SO Rep.
SECTION 35/
Ugdg Spec TS 35-1/5
SECTION 35
35.0
SITE LANDSCAPING WORKS
35.1.1
Setting out Levels For all landscaping and paved areas, Contractor shall set out works and notify the SO Rep three days in advance before commencing work. The Contractor shall allow for making adjustment when instructed.
35.1.2
Setting out Works Contractor shall be responsible for setting out landscaping works. He shall make due allowance in his Tender for engaging qualified Surveyor, subject to agreement and approval of the SO Rep to set out the entire works as indicated in the Drawing and from the existing boundary stones, reference points or any other control points which shall be checked for correctness by qualified Surveyor.
35.1.3
Existing Services (a) The Contractor shall notify the SO Rep promptly of any cables, pipes, water mains, manholes, poles valves, etc. met with during the progress of the works, and shall immediately provide adequate support and protection for the same to the satisfaction of the SO Rep. The Contractor shall be held responsible for any damage thereto during the progress of the work and shall meet all cost of repair and reinstatement. In the event where cables, pipes etc. have to be lowered, relocate or removed, the Contractor shall co-operate with the relevant Authority concerned and all cost and delay due to this is deemed to have been allowed for by the Contractor in his Contract Sum. The Contractor shall liaise closely with the SO Rep and the relevant Authority regarding the location of the existing services prior to the commencement of the works.
(b)
(c)
The Contractor shall prior to the construction of foundations, excavate trial pits or trenches across line of proposed works and satisfy himself as to the presence of cables and other underground services and take necessary action against damaging the same.
35.1.4
Diversion of Existing Drains and Subsoil Drains The Contractor shall be responsible and bear all the costs for the diversion of the existing drains. Before the existing drains are cut off, the Contractor shall submit his proposal for the diversion and maintenance of the existing drains during the whole period of construction to the SO Rep for approval. The Contractor shall be responsible for the maintenance of the free flow of the drains at all times. At no times shall the Contractor obstruct or reduce the free flow area of the existing drain without the prior approval of the SO Rep. If, in the opinion of the SO Rep, the Contractor has not carried out or i.e. unable to carry out all such maintenance of temporary drain diversion to SO Rep satisfaction, the SO Rep reserves the right to employ separate Contractor to carry all such works to ensure the proper maintenance of all such temporary works and deduct the cost of all such works plus administrative charge from any money due to or become due to the Contractor. The Contractor shall remove all such temporary works as soon as those are no longer required and reinstate the site to its original condition to the complete satisfaction of the SO Rep.
Ugdg Spec TS 35-2/5
35.1.5
Backfill and Reinstatement The SO Rep will determine whether the material proposed by the Contractor is suitable for use as selected fill. If, in the opinion of the SO Rep selected material of the required quality is unobtainable from the excavation under the contract boundary, the Contractor shall obtain the material as borrow with no extra payment. The existing carriageway, centre island, hard shoulder, side-table, kerbs and drains, etc. shall be reinstated to their original condition to the satisfaction of the SO Rep. The Contractor shall make good any depression of the carriageway arising as a result of settlement of backfill material and other Defects due to unsatisfactory reinstatement immediately and as directed by the SO Rep.
35.1.6
Site Control Tests and Testing Instruments The Contractor shall provide all the necessary labour, Construction Equipment, tools, instruments and materials for carrying out all tests at the site including the provision of all necessary transport for the transportation of materials, samples, etc. The Contractor must make allowance for all the above in his Contract Sum as no monetary claim for compensation or extras shall be paid for any work carried out by the Contractor in connection with the above work unless specified otherwise elsewhere in the specification.
35.1.7
Discrepancies The whole of the works especially figured dimensions, etc. must be checked at site to ensure correctness before construction and any serious discrepancy should be immediately reported to the SO Rep prior to commencement of the works.
35.2
FOUNDATION FOR LINKWAYS AND OTHER LIGHT PRECINCT STRUCTURES Where linkways and other light precinct structures are designed to rest on footings or raft or similar foundations, the ground shall be properly compacted by rolling successively with compaction equipment. The compacted ground shall have a minimum soaked CBR of 5% and shall be compacted to a minimum of 95% of maximum dry density obtainable using the modified A.A.S.H.O. Compaction test (Heavy Hammer) or Test No. 13 BS 1377: 1975.
35.3
EARTHWORKS Constructing the earthmound where shown in the Drawings and final trimming work is included in this contract. If Contractor find shortage or surplus earth, the Contractor shall supply or remove the earth at his own expense. If the Contractor finds undesirable materials from the excavation works, he shall remove all undesirable materials (such as organic, debris etc) away from the site and backfill with good sandy soil.
35.4
PLANTING TREES, SHRUBS AND GROUND COVERS, ETC The Contractor shall take full responsibility to maintain the trees, shrubs and ground covers, etc. after they are planted. However, in the event that the trees or shrubs are dead after planting, Contractor shall immediately replace them and the cost of replacement shall be wholly borne by the Contractor. The replaced trees shall be of similar quality as the ones replaced.
35.5
SUMP Sump for sub-soil drainage shall be constructed to size and in position as shown in the Drawings.
Ugdg Spec TS 35-3/5
35.6
PRESERVATION OF EXISTING TREES DURING CONSTRUCTION & DEVELOPMENT Where any existing tree(s) on the Site is stipulated to be preserved (hereinafter referred to as "preserved trees" for the purpose of this clause), the Contractor shall take all necessary precaution to avoid damage or injury to such trees and its roots and comply with the following requirements : (A) Treatment of Preserved Trees in Area of Fill (a) Tolerable Depth of Fill The area around preserved trees shall not be filled more than 300mm in depth. (b) Construction of Wall Around Trees Well not exceeding 1m in depth shall be constructed around preserved trees. The minimum diameter of well shall be 6 times the diameter of preserved trees measured at the trunk 0.5m above ground level. Details of well shall be as shown in the Drawings. (c) Existing Trees in Area of Cut and Fill The change of level for existing level in areas of cut and fill should not be more than 300mm. The lowering of ground level around a tree must be done by hand under the supervision of a Horticultural Officer. Machine must not be used. If roots are removed in the process of lowering of ground level, light branch trimming is carried out to balance any reduction in the root system. (B) Treatment of Preserved Trees in Area of Cut (a) Tolerable Depth of Cut The area around preserved trees shall not be cut to a depth exceeding 300mm. (b) Retention of Raised Planter Around Tree An area around preserved trees shall be retained as raised planter to conserve the root system. The minimum diameter of raised planter shall be 6 times the diameter of preserved trees measured at the trunk 0.5m above ground level. Details of retention of raised planter are as shown the Drawings. (C) Protection of Existing Trees From Physical Damage by Equipment etc During Construction (a) All preserved trees shall be protected against damage during construction operation by suitable fencing or armouring. The protection of preserved trees shall be placed before commencing any excavation or grading operation/work and shall be maintained in repair for the duration of the contract unless otherwise directed. The extent of fencing shall be determined by the SO Rep. Fencing shall be erected all round not less than 1.2m from the trunk of preserved trees. Individual preserved trees near heavy construction traffic shall be wrapped with gunny sacks and 50mm x 100mm planks worn vertically as armour around the trunk and spaced at no more than 50mm apart to a height of 1.5m above ground. (b) Any damage to preserved tree root system shall be repaired immediately by the Contractor under the supervision of a qualified horticulturist. Roots that are exposed an/or damaged during grading operations shall be cut off immediately and the inside of the exposed and/or damaged area cleaned; cut surfaces shall be treated with approved sealing compound and topsoil spread over the exposed root area.
Ugdg Spec TS 35-4/5
35.6
PRESERVATION OF EXISTING TREES DURING CONSTRUCTION & DEVELOPMENT (CONT'D) (C) Protection of Existing Trees From Physical Damage by Equipment etc During Construction (Cont'd) (c) Any damage to preserved tree branches shall be treated in accordance with the Drawings. (i) Branch Trimming of Damaged Branches (1) A first cutting is to be made at point A, 300mm from the main trunk of preserved trees; depending on the diameter of the branch being cut. The depth of the cut shall not be more than of the diameter of the branch. A second cutting is to be made at point B, parallel to cutting at point A. The distance between these two cuttings shall be 75mm to 150mm. Make a shallow cut at C. Final cut is to be sharp and clear. 2 coats of anti-fungus wound sealant are to be applied on cut area.
(2)
(3) (4) (5) (ii)
Wound Treatment (1) (2) (3) Clean away ragged or loose edges of bark with a sharp pruning knife. Shape the wound into an oval, pointed at both ends. Coat the entire exposed surface with tree-wound paint.
(d)
If any preserved trees are severely injured by mechanically equipment, etc., the SO Rep shall impose charges against the Contractor in accordance with Clause 1.10 "Nuisance And Irregularities".
(D)
Health & Condition of Preserved Trees (a) The Contractor shall ensure that : (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) Compaction of soil around preserved trees shall be avoided. No materials shall be stored within the root system. There shall be no spillage of any nature within the spread of the preserved trees. There shall be no parking of vehicles underneath the preserved trees. There shall be no dumping of excavated materials, concrete, equipment etc. within the spread of the preserved trees crown. Soil around preserved trees is properly cultivated to ensure that adequate supply of air and water get to the roots. The site is drained in periods of heavy rainfall and irrigated during periods of drought.
(6)
(7) (b)
The Contractor shall also carry out any other routine maintenance of the preserved trees eg. branch trimming, pesticide spraying etc. as instructed by the SO Rep. If the growth of the preserved trees is stifled, the Contractor shall interalia bear the cost of making good and charges in accordance with Clause 1.10 "Nuisance and Irregularities" shall be imposed against the Contractor.
(c)
Ugdg Spec TS 35-5/5
35.7
GRASS PAVIOR BLOCK FOR FIRE ENGINE ACCESS Where specified in the Drawing, the fire engine access shall be laid with grass pavior block on sandy soil planting base and foundation (to CE's requirement).
SECTION 36/
Ugdg Spec TS 36-1/5
SECTION 36
36.0
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR SANITARY, WATER AND OTHER PLUMBING INSTALLATION
36.1
WORK BY REGISTERED PLUMBER AND LICENSED WATER SERVICE PLUMBER It is the intention of the Drawings and Specifications to provide a complete operating system. The omission from the Specifications or Drawings of any details in construction, installation materials, or specialities necessary for a complete operating and safe system shall not relieve the Contractor from furnishing and completing the same in place all at the Contractor's own cost and expense. Should the requirements of the Drawings or Specifications conflict with codes, regulations or standards, the most stringent of the requirements shall govern the Works. All sanitary, water and gas installation Works shall be carried out by a Registered Plumber (LP) registered under Singapore Plumbing Society (SPS) , Licensed Water Service Plumber (LWSP) and Licensed Gas Service Worker (LGSW) respectively and shall comply with all current Code-of-Practices, Bye-Laws, Requirements and Regulations of the relevant Authorities.
36.2
CERTIFICATE FROM WATER RECLAMATION (NETWORK) DEPARTMENT, PUB Apply in writing to Water Reclamation (Network) Department, PUB for final inspection of the sanitary installation and obtain the final approval before the date of completion of the Contract. On Completion of the whole of the installation work, obtain a Certificate from Water Reclamation (Network) Department, PUB, certifying that the work has been carried out complying fully with their Regulations and Requirements before the Final Payment can be released. Failure by the Contractor to apply for such inspection on time, shall render him liable for damages or loss suffered by the Employer due to the delay in approving the sanitary installation by PUB, arising out of or in connection with the Contractor's failure to apply for such inspection on time. Notwithstanding the above, the SO Rep shall exercise its rights under Clause 1.10 "Nuisance and Irregularities" to impose charges against the Contractor.
36.3
INSPECT DRAWINGS AND MAKE ALLOWANCE The Contractor shall carefully examine all drawings, especially the civil and structural drawings and ascertain for himself all probable obstructions such as pile caps, foundations, beams footings, etc. which may necessitate diversions of drains lines, inspection chambers positions and other fittings, from the lines and positions shown on Drawings. Allow in the Contract Sum for all costs arising from necessary additional lengths of drain pipes, bends, etc. which are required to cater for such adjustments in alignment and running of drains, lines, inspection chambers, other fittings, etc. No claims for extras shall be entertained by the Board for non-compliance or misinterpretation of this Clause by the Contractor. Civil, Structural and Architectural drawings may be inspected at the Employer's Drawing Office during normal working hours.
36.4
DIAMETER OF PIPES Unless otherwise stated, the sizes of copper, stainless steel, ductile iron and UPVC pipes are meant to be their nominal sizes.
Ugdg Spec TS 36-2/5
36.5
CONTRACTOR TO GIVE NOTICES AND SUBMIT DRAWINGS FOR APPROVAL Submit all necessary application forms, drawings and give all notices required in connection with the works. Submit sanitary drawings and Water Service drawings and gas installation drawings with application form to the Water Reclamation (Network) Department PUB, Water Department PUB and City Gas respectively for approval not later than 14 days from the date of the Letter of Acceptance. or information.
36.6
EXCAVATE TRENCHES AND REMOVE EXCESS EARTH Excavate all trenches and pits for new drain-lines and inspection chambers as shown. The soil condition shall be inspected by the SO Rep. After drain-lines have been tested and approved by the SO, backfill the soil, properly consolidated to original levels and cart away surplus earth promptly and in any case not later than 7 days from the date of SO Rep's instruction to do so. Where ground is soft, hardcore, bakau piling etc. shall be provided to drain-lines, inspection chambers/waste sumps and such works shall be treated as variations unless otherwise stated.
36.7
WORK THROUGH CONCRETE STRUCTURE Every care shall be taken in drilling, coring holes through concrete structure so as not to disrupt the concrete and steel. Seek approval from the SO Rep before carrying out such work. Where, in the opinion of the SO Rep, concrete structure has been affected or unnecessarily disrupted, reinstate at own expense the affected parts of structure to the satisfaction of the SO Rep.
36.8
DRILLING OR CORING ON FINISHED AREAS Where drilling or coring of holes are to be carried out on areas where tiles, or other types of finishing had been completed, take all precaution and care to ensure that damage is minimised. In the event of any damage, make good the damage to the satisfaction of the SO Rep at own expenses.
36.9
PROVISION OF HOLES IN CONCRETE STRUCTURE OR WALLS Where holes are provided, enlarge the holes to the diameter and position as required without damaging the surrounding area. All damage shall be made good to the satisfaction of the SO Rep at own expenses.
36.10
PATCHING UP Patch up hacked portions and drilled holes of structure with grade 30 concrete mixed with water reducing admixture in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions and of workmanship at least equal to that of the surrounding parts. Where pipes penetrate floor or roof slab, brush away loose particles on concrete and pipe. Brush on one coat neat, thick cement grout immediately before patching. Any leakages through such patching shall be made good by the Contractor. All patching up work shall be carried out to the satisfaction of the SO Rep.
36.11
TESTING OF WATER AND SANITARY INSTALLATION Test the whole sanitary and water installation as follows :
36.11.1
Water Test As soon as PUB's water supply is available, carry out water test to the following items, in accordance with the procedure described below and complete the water test, including making good all Defects, within 10 days from the date PUB's water supply is available : (a) (b) (c) (d) Water supply pipe. Direct supply pipe. Joints between floor slab and floor trap in bathrooms and kitchens and joints between branching-off for WCs and floor slab. Water pumping plant.
Ugdg Spec TS 36-3/5 36.11.2 36.11.2.1 PROCEDURE OF WATER TEST Water Supply Pipe Test all water supply pipes for leaks. 36.11.2.2 Direct Supply Pipe Where required, apply to PUB and pay all fees for installing meters to the lower floors with direct water supply for the purpose of testing for leaks in the pipe. 36.11.2.3 Floor Traps The gratings to the floor traps in bathrooms and kitchens shall be blocked temporarily with polythene sheets or by other suitable means and the floor flooded with about 20mm depth of water above the gratings. The amount of water shall be maintained for about 2 hours, replenished when necessary, during which the underside of the floor slab shall be checked for signs of leaks. Towards the end of this test, the water shall be allowed to drain off. During this process there shall be no signs of chokage and leakage in the system. The water test shall be carried out 3 days after laying of floor finishes. 36.11.2.4 Water Pumping Plant Arrange with the SO Rep for test of the whole pumping plant including transfer pump and booster pump for signs of leak and proper performance of the pumps. Rectify all the Defects found during the inspection immediately so that a re-inspection can be carried out. Arrange for the test to be carried out not later than four (4) weeks before the buildings are handed over to the Employer. Provide electricity for operating the pumps, provide temporary piping, connections, fittings and accessories necessary for the test to be carried out. 36.11.3 HYDROSTATIC TEST OF UNDERGROUND MAINS Where necessary, arrange for hydrostatic test of all underground ductile iron pipes after PUB bulk meter according to CP 48. After laying, jointing and anchoring of the main and before any backfilling or concreting, change the piping system slowly and carefully with potable water so that all air is expelled. Test the mains under pressure. Before testing the main, fit all open ends of the main with blank flange and secure them with struts or otherwise to resist the end thrust of the water pressure in the main. Apply a test pressure of 125m head or the maximum working pressure plus 50% whichever is the greater, by means of manually operated test pump or by power-driven test pump. Maintain the test pressure by the pump for 1 hour and check the main for any leakage. General leakage shall not exceed 2 litres per cm per pipe diameter per km of pipe per 100m head per 24 hours. Notwithstanding the above, rectify all visual leaks detected. 36.11.4 STERILISATION OF UNDERGROUND WATER DISTRIBUTION MAINS Where applicable, sterilisation of underground distribution water mains shall be carried out in accordance with CP48 "Code of Practice for Water Services" and to the requirements of PUB. The water samples shall be taken for bacteriological and chemical testing by PSB accredited laboratory. Two days after taking such samples, flush the underground distribution mains and further water samples shall be taken for testing as described in the foregoing. Provide the water examination and analysis report to the SO Rep and the result of water analysis shall be within the acceptance limits for human consumption. The underground distribution mains shall only be commissioned after two consecutive tests are satisfactory otherwise the sterilisation procedure shall be repeated until such requirements are met. All costs and expenses shall be borne by the Contractor.
Ugdg Spec TS 36-4/5
36.12
WATER FITTINGS
36.12.1
General Requirements All water fittings shall comply with the standards stipulated by PUB and its use in water service installations shall conform to the Public Utilities (Water Supply) Regulations and SS:CP 48.
36.12.2
Marking Of Information All water fittings shall be legibly marked with the following: (a) (b) (c) (d) Manufacturer's identification mark, either on the body or plate; Marking of appropriate national standards e.g. BS EN 545; Nominal size and direction of flow; Colour codes for hot and cold water supply.
36.12.3
Non-Metallic Material All non-metallic material in contact with water shall comply with SS 375:2001 and valves with non-metallic seat washers shall also comply with BS 3457.
36.12.4
Metallic Material All metallic material in contact with water shall comply with the test on "Extraction of Metals - App H" of AS/NZS 4020.
36.12.5
Copper Alloy Water Fittings All copper alloy water fittings shall be of gunmetal, or bronze or DZR brass materials only. Gunmetal or bronze water fittings shall comply with BS EN 1982:1999. Water fittings of the Dezincification Resistant (DZR) type shall comply with the tests on "Composition" and "Resistance to dezincification" of BS EN 12163 or BS EN 12165 or BS EN 12420. Such fittings shall have the additional marking of "DZR" or "CR".
36.12.6
Water Fittings With Elastomeric Seals All water fittings with elastomeric seals for joints in pipework and pipeline shall comply with SS 270.
36.13
STRUCTURAL CONCRETE All structural concrete shall be as specified in Section 4 "STRUCTURAL CONCRETE" including all clauses and subclauses under it.
36.14
PSB PRODUCT LIST SCHEME All water closets shall be listed in the PSB Product Listing Scheme.
36.15 36.15.1
AS-BUILT DRAWINGS Sanitary/Water/Gas Installations The Contractor shall also submit to the SO Rep one set of A1 size as-built tracings, three sets of A1 size as-built prints, and two CDROMs in pdf format. Tthe tracings, prints and CDROMs in pdf format shall all be duly checked, certified and endorsed by the Contractor's LP/LGSW.
Ugdg Spec TS 36-5/5
36.15
AS-BUILT DRAWINGS (CONT'D) The as-built drawings shall include but not limiting to the following information where applicable : (a) (b) (c) (d) position of pump rooms routes of all rising mains and pipes piping and equipment arrangement inside the pump room schematic diagram of the rising main hydraulic circuit showing the positions of each pump, valve, pressure switch, flow switch and etc. schematic circuit diagram and single line diagram of the overall system wiring
(e)
The Contractor shall submit a listing of the as-built tracings and prints and a letter certifying that the submitted tracings and prints are of true record of the works as-built. Without this certification letter, the as-built tracings and prints will not be accepted. The thickness of the as-built tracings is of the size such that its weight is approximately 110 gram per m . The ink in the as-built tracings shall be permanent and not of the powdered-type. The details in the tracings shall be legible and shall not have double or faded images. The as-built tracing will be rejected if found to be of poor quality.
2
SECTION 37/...
SECTION 37
37.0
SANITARY INSTALLATION
37.1
SCHEDULE OF UPVC PIPES FOR FITTINGS FOR SANITARY INSTALLATION Unless specified otherwise, all UPVC pipes and fittings provided for sanitary installations shall be in accordance with the following schedules : Types Of Pipe/Fitting ( SS : Singapore Standard ) SS 213 SS 141 Class D SS 272 *
Sanitary Installation (Including Waste/Rain Water Down-Pipe System) Underground Sanitary Drainage System-Main/Branch Drain Lines Above Ground Sanitary Plumbing System (Soil/Waste to I/C) : (a) All except Void Decks
Remarks
Anti-Mosquitoes Devices, Socket Sleeves and Pipe Skirtings to be used. SS 213/SS 141 Adaptor to be used.
(b) Void decks - Discharge stacks - Discharge pipes & fittings Waste/Rain Water Down-Pipe System (RWDP) : (a) 200 diameter pipes for RWDP system (b) Underground pipes/fittings for 200 diameter pipes (RWDP) (c) Above ground pipes/fittings connected to 200 diameter RWDP system (d) 50, 80, 100 & 150 diameter waste discharge (balcony, lift lobby, etc) pipes/fittings : i. ii. Above ground except void decks and MSCPs Void decks and MSCPs - Down pipes - Discharge pipes/fittings - Underground pipes/fittings
* *
* (White)
Roof Outlet to be used. Rectangular Section Fittings to be used.
* SS 213/SS141 Adaptor to be used. *
* *
*Denotes the specified pipes/fittings.
37.2
MAIN AND BRANCH DRAIN LINES Unless otherwise stated, all pipes for main and branch lines shall be UPVC conforming to SS 272 and free from breakage, distortions or cracks and of sizes specified in Clause 37.6 "Drain Sizes". All drain-lines shall be laid on grade 30 concrete bed at least 150mm thick, fully haunched with 150mm thick grade 30 concrete all round and reinforced with a layer of BRC A10 or other approved as shown in the Drawings unless otherwise stated. All drain-lines under roads and carparks shall be cement mortar lined ductile iron pipes complying with BS EN 598 and laid on grade 30 concrete bed at least 150mm thick, fully haunched with 150mm thick grade 30 concrete all round and reinforced with a layer of BRC A10 or other approved as shown in the Drawings unless otherwise stated. Jointing of pipes of different materials in branch drain- lines or in the continuous length of main drain-lines in between two inspection chambers shall not be allowed unless otherwise shown in the Drawings. The section of main drain lines under roads and carparks shall be constructed under the supervision of the SO Rep and the Contractor shall arrange for the inspection by and approval of the SO Rep before covering up. All drain lines in basement carparks shall be of ductile iron pipes complying with BS EN 598 and approved by the SO Rep. Where individual connections of discharge stacks to the inspection chamber are impracticable, a common pipe of adequate size to serve the main discharge stack and a common pipe to serve the secondary discharge stack may be provided to suit the connection to the inspection chamber subject to approval of the relevant authorities. All drain-lines for eating establishments such as eating houses, restaurants, food stalls, etc shall be constructed with cement mortar lined ductile iron pipe to BS EN 598 . The floor traps for the eating establishments shall be of stoneware type or cast iron. The trenches for main and branch drain-lines shall be backfilled with quarry dust and finished as shown in the Drawings.
37.3
GRADIENT FOR DRAIN-LINES Unless otherwise stated or approved by the Water Reclamation (Network) Department, PUB, the gradient of drain-lines shall be as follows : (a) Branch Drain-Lines Diameter of Branch Drain-Lines UPVC 110 160 (b) Main Drain-Lines Diameter of Main Drain-Lines UPVC 160 250 Ductile Iron 150mm 250mm Maximum Gradient upstream of Back Drop/Tumbling Bay 1 in 70 1 in 90 Allowable Gradient in other cases 1 in 30 to 1 in 90 1 in 49 to 1 in 150 Ductile Iron 110mm 150mm Maximum Gradient Upstream at Back Drop Tumbling Bay 1 in 70 Allowable Gradient in other cases 1 in 20 to 1 in 60 1 in 30 to 1 in 90
37.4
JOINTS FOR DRAIN-LINE PIPES Only flexible jointed pipes shall be used for drain line pipes.
37.5
JUNCTIONS IN DRAINS All junctions between drains shall be of curved junctions or obtuse angled junctions made at sides of pipes.
UG03/S37.DOC(2) (YCS)(15122002) (CAD)
37.6
DRAIN SIZES All drain branches from building to inspection chamber shall be as shown in Drawings. Main drain-lines shall be UPVC pipes to SS 272 unless specified otherwise.
37.7
WATER TEST FOR DRAIN-LINES Water test all drainlines before they are surrounded and covered. Drainlines shall be perfectly watertight and it is essential that every length of pipes be tested when completed with water before haunchings and backfilling. For water test, the drainline shall be subjected to a pressure of 1.2 metre head of water and such pressure shall be maintained for half an hour without leakage in excess of 1.0 litre for each length of drainline between the inspection chambers. The fact that the pipes have been tested shall not relieve the Contractor from his responsibility to locate any leak and make good the section, including re-excavation, timbering and backfilling and making good.
37.8
BEDDING AND HAUNCHING TO BRANCH AND MAIN DRAIN-LINE The pipes which have been tested and found satisfactory shall be bedded and haunched with grade 30 concrete to details as shown in Drawings. Provide break joints at pipe joints not greater than 6m intervals and at the first pipe joint next to inspection chamber, all to the requirements of the Water Reclamation (Network) Department, PUB. Carry out all work in accordance with the requirements of the Water Reclamation (Network) Department, PUB.
37.9
BREAKING UP ROADS AND CARPARKS FOR LAYING OF DRAIN-LINES Allow in the Contract Sum for breaking up roads and carparks for laying of drain-lines etc. and reinstatement of damages all to the satisfaction of the SO Rep.
37.10 37.10.1
INSPECTION CHAMBERS AND DRAIN LINES General Requirements Where inspection chambers and drain lines are included in the Works, the Contractor shall include in the Contract Sum for either one or both of the following systems as shown in the Drawings:
` (a) (b) 37.10.2 suspended from building and/ or; supported on piling
Suspended From The Buildings Where the inspection chambers and main drain lines are required to be suspended from the building, they shall be constructed according to the details as shown in the Drawings.
37.10.3
Supported on Piling Where piles are required to support the inspection chambers and drain lines as indicated in the Drawings, the Contractor shall ascertain the pile penetration lengths required. All costs and expenses incurred on the piling Works are deemed to have been included in the Contract Sum. In ascertaining the pile penetration lengths, the Contractor may, if he wishes, refer to the Soil Investigation Report available from the Employer. However, the Contractor shall note that the Soil Investigation Report does not form part of the Contract or be taken into consideration in the interpretation or construction thereof of the Contract. The Contractor shall also take note that all the information in the Soil Investigation Report is only indicative of the likely soil conditions to be encountered at the Site. The Contractor shall at his own cost, ascertain the actual soil conditions and shall conduct his own site investigations. Notwithstanding the pile penetration lengths ascertained by the Contractor, there shall be no adjustment to the Contract Sum for any difference in pile penetration lengths between those actually provided at the Site and those ascertained by the Contractor. However, if for whatever causes the piles cannot be driven into the ground, omission by way of variation to the Contract shall be effected. For the purpose of computing the value of such omission, the penetration length of each pile shall be deemed to be 8.0m.
37.10.4
Inspection Chamber Construct inspection chambers to details and positions as shown in the Drawings. All inspection chambers/manhole covers and frames shall comply with the general requirement of SS 30 and approved by the Water Reclamation (Network) Department, PUB. Heavy duty cast iron frames and covers (Grade A) shall be used in driveways and carparks and other areas as shown in the Drawings. Form open branch/main channels in inspection chambers with half-round vitrified clay purposed made or cut channels with benching haunched up to the walls of the inspection chambers in granolithic concrete 1:1:1 mix and trowel to a smooth finish to fall towards the channel. The first inspection chamber of the drainage system shall have a minimum depth of 1070mm from the surface level to the invert level, unless otherwise specified. Construct all walls and slabs of the inspection chambers with grade 30 reinforced concrete as shown in the Drawings and to the requirements of the Water Reclamation (Network) Department, PUB. Plaster the internal walls with approximately 13mm thick 1:2 cement mortar and trowel to a smooth finish. Connect the invert of the branch drain-line entering the inspection chamber above the horizontal diameter of the main channels. Grade C light duty covers shall be completed with stainless steel handles as shown in the Drawings and approved by the SO Rep.
37.11
CONCEALMENT OF SANITARY STACKS, DISCHARGE PIPES AND FITTINGS (Clause applicable if specified in the Drawing or approved by SO Rep) All sanitary stacks shall be fully housed within masonry ducts (stack ducts). Leakage tests to all sanitary stacks, discharge pipes and fittings shall be completed before they are fully concealed in the stack ducts and ceiling ducts. All sanitary pipes and fittings at the ceiling shall be fully concealed by ceiling duct of 9mm thick calcium silicate boards, fixed on 30mm x 30mm x 1mm thick galvanised steel angle frames. All screws used shall be galvanised. Board joints shall be taped with paper tape and gypsum compound used to fill screw holes and board joints on the calcium silicate, and this shall be sanded smooth and not visible after painting. The completed boards shall be finished with base coating and 2 layers of emulsion paint. Lighting diffusers shall be 15mm x 15mm x 10mm thick egg crate chromed plastic type in powder coated aluminium frames. Detailed workshop drawings showing the type of boards and fixing methods, including access panels and lighting diffusers, shall be submitted to the SO Rep for approval prior to their installations.
37.11
CONCEALMENT OF SANITARY STACKS, DISCHARGE PIPES AND FITTINGS (CONT'D) (Clause applicable if specified in the Drawing or approved by SO Rep) The calcium silicate boards shall comply with the following physical properties: Physical Properties Dry density Weight Flexural strength across grain Flexural strength along grain Moisture movement from normal to saturated Nominal moisture content-in situ Thermal conductivity Alkalinity Requirements 910 kg per m3, 10% 9.5 kg per m , 15% 10 MN per m 6 MN per m 0.15% 3 to 5% 0.161 W/mk 7 to 10 pH value
2 2 2
The Contractor shall submit a test report showing compliance with the requirements of the physical properties specified to the SO Rep for evaluation.
37.12
UNPLASTICIZED PVC PIPES AND FITTINGS FOR SOIL, WASTE AND VENT APPLICATIONS (ABOVE GROUND)
37.12.1
Material
37.12.1.1 General All the unplasticized PVC pipes, fittings and accessories for soil, waste and vent and application above ground shall be all approved by Water Reclamation (Network) Department, PUB and to the requirements of SS 213 and its latest amendments. But the UPVC soil and waste stack in the void deck/play area shall be UPVC pipes to the requirements of SS 141 and its latest amendments as shown in the Drawings. The internal and external surfaces of the pipes and fittings shall be clean, smooth, and reasonably free from grooving and other Defects that would impair their performance in service. Provide pipe in standard lengths of 6m + 50mm - 0mm. The pipe shall be supplied with ends with +2 degree of being normal to the main axis of the pipe, free from chips, rough edges and with sharp edges removed. 37.12.1.2 Dimensions of Soil, Waste and Vent Pipes to SS 213 Outside Diameter Nominal Size Wall Thickness Mean Diameter De Min 32 40 50 65 80 100 125 150 Note : 36.2 42.8 55.7 68.7 82.3 110.0 140.0 160.0 (i) De (ii) D Max 36.5 43.1 56.0 69.1 82.7 110.0 140.0 160.5 Incl Ovality D Min 36.1 42.7 55.5 68.5 82.1 109.6 139.5 159.5 Max 36.2 43.2 56.2 69.3 83.0 110.8 140.4 161.1 Min 2.1 2.3 2.4 2.7 3.0 3.2 3.7 4.0 Max 2.4 2.6 2.7 3.1 3.5 3.6 4.2 4.5
= mean outside diameter = any measured diameter
37.12
UNPLASTICIZED PVC PIPES AND FITTINGS FOR SOIL, WASTE AND VENT APPLICATIONS (ABOVE GROUND) (CONT'D) Minimum Socket Dimension to SS 213 The minimum socket dimension for 3m length UPVC pipes shall be as follows : Nominal Pipe Size in mm 32 40 50 65 80 100 125 150 Minimum Socket Dimension in mm 19 21 23 25 29 34 42 45
37.12.1.3
37.12.1.4
Dimension and Colour of the Waste and Soil Stack To SS 141 Class D Wall Thickness Average Value max (mm) 5.3 6.8 9.9 Individual Value min (mm) 4.6 6.0 8.8 max (mm) 5.3 6.9 10.2
Nominal Size (mm) 80 100 155
Average Outside Diameter min (mm) 88.7 114.1 168.0 max (mm) 89.1 114.5 168.5
All pipes shall be indelibly marked and imprinted longitudinally at interval of not greater than 3m. The markings shall show the following : (a) (b) (c) Manufacturer's name and/or trade mark. the nominal size. SS 141 Class `D'
The marking of pipe shall be in accordance with SS 141. 37.12.1.5 Adaptor to Couple the Fitting (to SS 213) and UPVC Pipes (to SS 141) An adaptor shall be used to couple the fitting to SS 213 and its latest amendment (Single junction/single junction with inspection eye) and UPVC pipe to SS 141 to be installed at the void deck. The shape of the adaptor shall comply with the design as shown in the Drawings. The strength, dimensional tolerance and thickness of the adaptor shall comply with the standard and specifications laid down in SS 213 (except that the dimensional tolerance for the socket of the adaptor shall comply with SS 174). Obtain prior approval from the SO Rep before use. Random samples may be chosen for testing at PSB or SAC accredited laboratory. 37.12.1.6 Swept Junction Fitting Use only swept junction fittings (single or double cross junction) with 50mm minimum root radius in all sanitary installation unless otherwise stated. 37.12.1.7 UPVC Pipe Skirting Provide and fix approved UPVC pipe skirting with square base, at the base of each discharge stack as shown in the Drawings. UPVC pipe skirting shall comply with SS 213. Installation of the UPVC pipe skirting shall be in accordance with Clause 37.12.2 "INSTALLATION".
37.12.2 37.12.2.1
Installation General All soil, waste and vent pipes used shall be unplasticized PVC pipes complying with SS 213 or SS 141 and all tests as required by Water Reclamation (Network) Department, PUB. All jointing and fixing requirements shall be in strict accordance with the manufacturer's instructions. Provide main discharge stack of 150mm diameter and secondary discharge stack of 100mm diameter as shown in the Drawings. Install double 45o bends to SS 272 at the base of the discharge stacks in accordance with the Drawings. Install cross ventilating pipes to required size between the main the secondary discharge stack at specified locations as shown in the Drawings. Unless otherwise indicated in the Drawings or required by PUB, anti-syphonage pipe connecting the appliances to the discharge stack shall not be necessary.
37.12.2.2
Inspection Openings, Connectors and Fittings All inspection openings shall be of the screw and washer type with proper adaptors where necessary. New UPVC spigot adaptors and connectors shall be used to replace the existing cast iron pipes embedded between the floor slab.
37.12.2.3
Floor Traps Unless as required otherwise, fit all floor traps with 150mm square body, circular hinged UPVC gratings with frames having a 30mm deep collar protruding below to fit into the opening of the floor traps. The gratings shall comply with SS 213 and complete with an Anti-Mosquito Device approved by Environmental Health Department, NEA. The gratings for floor traps shall be fixed at 5mm below the graded floor level and as shown in the Drawings.
37.12.2.4
Method of Fixing The method of fixing UPVC pipes shall be as follows : (a) All pipes shall be cut square with the edge chamfered 15o. All cutting of pipes shall be carried out using approved pipe cutting tools before installation. The pipe cutting tool shall be capable o of producing the square cut and 15 chamfer in one continuous operation. The pipe cutting tool shall be portable and capable of cutting pipes of all sizes. Clean the pipe ends and sockets or fittings with an approved cleaning fluid or methylated spirit and allow them to dry. Mark the pipes and fittings with a marker at a distance to the depth of the socket in the depth of the socket formed in pipes. Coat the pipe ends, up to the marking, and the internal surface of the socket fully with solvent cement and insert the pipe into the socket immediately. The edge of the socket must be in line with the marking on the pipe. Remove surplus solvent cement from the socket using a dry cloth. After jointing, hold the joint firmly for a period of 30 seconds and ensure that it is not disturbed for at least another 5 minutes. All joints shall be assembled using sockets recommended by the pipe manufacturer. In situations where a pipe and socket joint is not possible, a coupling or adaptor shall be used. No socket belling shall be allowed when jointing UPVC pipes. The type of solvent shall be in strict accordance with the manufacturers instructions and recommendations.
(b)
(c)
(d)
(e)
(f)
(g) (h)
For jointing of UPVC pipes to other materials, the bonding agent shall be subject to the approval of the SO Rep.
37.12
UNPLASTICIZED PVC PIPES AND FITTINGS FOR SOIL, WASTE AND VENT APPLICATIONS (ABOVE GROUND) (CONT'D) Solvent Cement For Joining UPVC Pipes And Fittings Solvent cement used to connect UPVC pipes and fittings shall be approved by the SO Rep and comply with BS4346:Part 3. The solvent cement shall be in an approved light colour to enable visual inspection. The Contractor shall submit the test report of the solvent cement to be used to the SO Rep for approval prior to the commencement of the sanitary works and water installation works. Tests shall be carried out by an SAC accredited testing laboratories and shall include : (a) (b) (c) Shear strength Film properties Long-term hydrostatic pressure
37.12.2.5
37.12.2.6
W.C. Joint Place rubber seal over the spigot of the w.c. outlet with the open end facing towards the pan. Lubricate the outer surface of the seal and insert pan spigot complete with seal into connector socket. Snap plastic cover over rim of connector socket. Use pan collar connectors in cases where P-traps are utilised. Apply silicone sealant to groove and recess at pan collar and cover to prevent stagnation of water at groove and recess.
37.12.2.7
Fixing of Bosses Use bosses for jointing waste and vent pipe into the soil stack. Use bosses for jointing of waste pipe from basin or kitchen sink to the hopper of floor waste or floor trap. Cut the appropriate sized hole in the position required using special hole cutters such as mechanised drill which is attached to a circular hole-saw by a mandrill. Apply solvent weld cement and clean mating surfaces of the boss and pipe. Insert the inner portion of the boss from inside the pipe with the outer portion located. Apply and tighten the toggle clamp and leave it in position for fifteen minutes. When fixing into the stack, ensure that the 92 degree marks on both parts are upper-most. Ensure that the angles marked on the inner and outer portions of the boss coincide and that the boss is assembled in the correct sequence to give an angle of fall to the stack pipe.
37.12.2.8
Access Doors Access doors may be fitted to pipe or straight portion of branches. Mark positions of holes with template and cut the holes with a fine tooth keyhole saw. Clean the edges of the hole before inserting the access door. The inner portion of the access door shall be set in the hole to locate the unit before it is tightened into position.
37.12.2.9
Weathering Where pipes penetrate through either flat or sloping roofs, the normal type of approved weathering material shall be used. Where necessary, fix an approved weathering apron in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions and as shown in the Drawings.
37.12.2.10
UPVC Vent Cowl Clean the mating surfaces of the pipe fitting before assembling the unit in accordance with normal solvent weld cement procedure.
37.12.2.11
Provision for Thermal Movement In cases where the piping is likely to be subjected to any large variations in temperature and to prevent slightest movement, use a seal/sleeve ring joint between fixed joints.
37.12.2.12
Support Distances of UPVC Pipe Lines Horizontal pipes which exceed 1400mm in length shall be supported with PVC coated mild steel hangers. Vertical pipes passing from floor to floor shall be supported with PP collars attached to the pipes as shown in the Drawings. The spacing of the hangers and collars shall not exceed 1400mm for horizontal pipes and 1800mm for vertical pipes.
37.12.2.13
Bonding Keys to Concrete Slab Provide bonding keys to concrete floor slab where UPVC pipes go through. Roughen the whole surface of the UPVC pipe which is in contact with the floor slab to form keys. Apply thin coat of solvent cement and sprinkle fine sand to the whole area of the roughened surface before the solvent cement sets. Use solvent welded cement method for all jointing assemblies. Carry out all fixing work in strict accordance with the pipe manufacturer's instructions. Use UPVC pipes to SS 213 where the stacks continue above roof level. Use UPVC pipes to SS 141 where the stacks continue below the ceiling of the open 1st storey.
37.13
UPVC DOUBLE 45 BEND Where applicable, provide and fix 150mm diameter UPVC double 45 bend or 90 large radius bend (minimum 200mm to centre line of pipe) to SS 272 encased in 150mm thick of grade 30 concrete and reinforced with a layer of BRC A10 or other approved at the base of each discharge stack below ground level. If the discharge stack is in 100mm diameter, a 150mm x 100mm UPVC taper piece to SS 213 shall be used at above the ground level to connect the 100mm diameter stack to the 150mm single junction fitting with inspection eye to SS 213. Provide single junction fitting with inspection eye to the discharge stack at 150mm above the finished ground floor level. Secure screw down cap of the inspection eye of the single junction fitting must be secured with 2 nos. of brass screws.
37.14
UPVC GULLIES AND UPVC FLOOR TRAPS WITH UPVC GRATING AT GROUND FLOOR Where ground floor wastes shall discharge into the floor trap or apron gully or direct sullage water drain line at the ground floor as shown in the Drawings, the gullies shall be 100mm diameter UPVC fitting with 150mm square UPVC grating and set on and encased in concrete minimum 150mm thick and connected to drains discharging into inspection chambers. The gratings for floor wastes/traps and gully traps shall be of approved UPVC 150mm square top body with screw-in round grating cover and to the requirements and approval of the Water Reclamation (Network) Department, PUB, HDB and complying with SS 213. The grating over floor trap and gully trap shall be complete with Anti-Mosquito Device approved by the Environmental Health Department, NEA.
37.15
GULLY AND DEEP SEAL TRAP All floor traps to upper floors shall be deep seal traps minimum 100mm diameter with 75mm deep seal all to SS 213 and to the requirements of the Water Reclamation (Network) Department, PUB. No gully of floor traps shall be deeper than 600mm from the top of grating.
37.16
LOW CAPACITY SQUATTING WC PANS Squatting w.c. pans shall be of vitreous china complying with SS 379 the "Singapore Standard For WC Pans For Use With Low Capacity Flushing Cisterns" and with `P' or `S' traps with cleaning eye. The cleaning eye at ground floor shall be UPVC screw cap to SS 213. Each pan shall be complete with approved high level plastic flushing cistern to SS 378 "Singapore Standard on Low Capacity WC Flushing Cisterns up to 4.5 litres (max)" and UPVC flush pipe of minimum 32mm diameter. Flush pipes shall be held at mid height by holderbat securely fixed to wall. Overflow from cisterns shall be drained within building. Carry out concrete infill and floor finishes around pans. Provide foot treads where there is no floor tile finish. Where the existing squat pan protrudes below the reinforced concrete floor, the Contractor shall hack the pan and floor to remove the pan and seal up the opening with high strength grout. Bonding agent shall be applied to the concrete interface between the old and new concrete. Provide new low capacity squating WC pans complete with cistern, discharge pipes, UPVC pipe, fitting or low capacity WC suite.
37.17
LOW CAPACITY WC FLUSHING CISTERNS All flushing cistern must comply with the SS 378 "Singapore Standard on Low Capacity WC Flushing Cisterns up to 4.5 litres (max)". Flushing cisterns shall be approved high level flushing cistern or other approved in which metal pull chain will release not more than 4.5 litres of water.
37.18
FIXING LOW AND HIGH LEVEL CISTERNS TO WALL New support brackets and spacer shall be provided for back fixing of the cistern as shown in the Drawings. All stainless steel support brackets used for installing cisterns (high or low level type) shall be of suitable design and comply with SS 378. The stainless steel shall be of grade 304. The spacer shall be of non-corrosive material and shall firmly adhere to the back of the cistern shell and the wall. The support brackets shall be installed at the based of the cistern. Fix flush pipe support bracket to the wall for every 600mm run of pipe. When installed, the cistern shall be free from any movement while the operating lever arm is pulled down for flushing operation.
37.19
WATER SUPPLY PIPE AND WASTE OUTLETS FOR SINK Where applicable, the Contractor shall fix and terminate the water supply pipe to sink and provide the waste outlets for sink at positions and to details all as shown in the Drawings.
37.20
LOW CAPACITY WC SUITE AND WASH BASIN
37.20.1
Schedule Of Low Capacity WC Suite And Wash Basin Where specified or shown in the Drawings, provide and install the following : Blue and/or Pink and/or Beige and/or Grey# Low Capacity WC Suite * * Blue and/or Pink and/orBeige and/or Grey # Vitreous China Wash Basin * *
Accommodation
Location Common Bathroom/WC Attached Bathroom/WC
1 Rm, 2 Rm, 3 Rm, 4 Rm, 5 Rm
*Denotes the specified type #The colour shall be decided by the SO Rep. The Contractor shall provide the colour range specified for selection and approval by the SO Rep. The WC suite and wash basin shall be of the same brand and approved as a set by the HDB.
37.20.2
Vitreous China Wash Basin Provide and install wash basin as specified in subclause 37.20.1 "Schedule Of Low Capacity WC Suite And Wash Basin". The wash basin shall be approved 500mm x 400mm vitreous china (with non-corrosive wall bracket fixings), complying with SS 42, complete with 15mm chrome plated brass pillar tap and handle conforming to BS 5412, waste plug, brackets, chain and 32mm approved UPVC bottle trap with all necessary washers, seals and nuts. The colour of the wash basin and pedestal (if applicable) shall be decided by the SO Rep as specified in the foregoing subclause. The mixer tap shall be completed with the necessary nut and two rubber washers. Fix and secure the pillar tap firmly on the wash basin. Unless specified otherwise, the waste pipe shall be 40mm diameter UPVC pipe. For the case where 2 to 5 no. of basins are connected in series, the waste pipes shall be 50mm diameter UPVC pipes.
*37.20.3
Integral Cultured Marble Basin And Top (*Clause applicable if specified in the Drawing) (A) Scope Of Work Where specified, provide and install integral cultured marble basin with monolithic top to bathrooms as specified in sub-clause 37.20.1 "Schedule Of Low Capacity WC Suite And Wash Basin" and in accordance with the dimensions as shown in the Drawings.
*37.20.3
Integral Cultured Marble Basin And Top (*Clause applicable if specified in the Drawing) (B) Material And Product The integral cultured marble basin and top shall be of solid, non-porous, homogeneous polymeric material, either of polyester or acrylic base. It shall be of 12.5mm thick, complete with 100mm backsplash, 200mm front apron, and with 3 galvanised steel supporting brackets as shown. Bonding material and sanitary sealants of approved matching colour shall be provided in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions. The integral cultured marble basin and top shall be obtained from manufacturers approved by the SO Rep. (C) Physical Properties The integral cultured marble basin and top shall comply with the following requirements : Characteristics 1. 2. 3. 4. Workmanship and Finish Impact Resistance Barcol Hardness Oven Test for Cracking and Crazing Water Absorption Gel Coat (if applicable) International Association of Plumbing and Mechanical Officials (IAPMO PS 18-66) Requirements Shall be free from cracks, crazing, pinholes, porosity, blisters, chipped areas or moulding Defects. Shall not show cracks in the gel coat. 40 unit After oven test at 74C 2C for 10 days, shall not show evidence of cracking or crazing. Shall not absorb water in excess of 0.58% in 24 hrs. Shall not be less than 0.37mm or more than 0.87mm in thickness.
5. 6.
Characteristics 7A. Stain Resistance to : a. Coffee b. Tea c. Detergent d. Acetone e. Olive oil f. Lipstick g. Fly spray h. Ink, washable i. Urea (6%) j. Alcohol k. Iodine (1%) l. Shoe polish m. Vinegar 7B. Cigarette test
International Association of Plumbing and Mechanical Officials (IAPMO PS 18-66) Requirements Shall be such that it will withstand all reagents.
All stain shall be removed without sanding through the gel coat. If sanding is required, not more than 0.37mm of the gel coat shall be removed. Shall withstand 40,000 cycles in the scrub test (only slight brush marks are allowable). Shall withstand the test with no visible damage.
8. 9.
Washability Drain fitting connections
*37.20.3
Integral Cultured Marble Basin And Top (*Clause applicable if specified in the Drawing) (Cont'd) (D) Test Certificate And Compliance Requirements The Contractor shall submit test certificates by PSB or PSB accredited laboratories in relation to the physical properties of the integral cultured marble basin and top. The tests shall be in accordance with the relevant IAPMO PS 18-66 test methods conducted by PSB or PSB accredited laboratories. (E) Basin Accessories The basin shall be complete with 15mm chrome plated ceramic disc cartridge operated single lever mixer tap, with pop-up waste, aerator and bottle trap. It shall be complete with all necessary seals and nuts, firmly fixed and secured on the basin. The dimension of the tap spout measured from the centre of the outlet orifice to the centre of the inlet shall be 90mm minimum and measured vertically from the lowest part of the outlet orifice to the basin top shall be 25mm minimum. Mixer tap shall comply with BS 5412 and approved by the PUB and the SO Rep. It shall be complete with all necessary seals and nuts. Fix and secure the mixer tap firmly on the basin. Bottle trap shall be approved by the SO Rep and connecting to a 32mm diameter UPVC waste pipe discharging into floor trap as shown.
37.20.4
Coloured Or White Low Capacity Wc Suite (A) Scope of Work Where installation of pedestal pan (including new and/or replacement of existing pedestal pan) is required under the Contract, provide and install close-coupled low capacity WC suite to all the common and attached bathrooms of all flat types as specified in subclause 37.20.1 "Schedule Of Low Capacity WC Suite And Wash Basin" and other locations as shown. The complete system of the close-coupled low capacity WC suite including the WC bowl, cistern, internal parts and fittings forming the complete flushing mechanism, seat and cover, and all the necessary accessories needed for the proper installation and functioning of the WC shall be to the approval of HDB and also to conform with SS 42 "Quality of Vitreous China Sanitary Appliances", Singapore Standards SS 378 - specification for vitreous china WC pans for use with low capacity WC flushing cisterns up to 4.5 L max., and SS 379 - specification for low capacity flushing cistern up to 4.5 L max, Close-coupled low capacity WC suite shall be operated with a low flushing volume of 3.5 litres to 4.0 litres per single action flush with S-trap or P-trap outlet as shown in the Drawings. The rigid plastic seat and cover with buffers and hinging device shall conform to SS 16 "WC seats (Plastic)", or its latest amendment. The coloured plastic seat and cover shall match the profile of the WC bowl and approved by the HDB. The whole pedestal WC suite including the internal parts and fittings forming the complete flushing mechanism and all the necessary accessories shall be assembled in the factory as a complete system before delivery to the Site. The coloured WC Suite shall be listed in the PSB Product Listing Scheme Class 1A and approved by HDB. The WC Suite model shall have streamlined lower pan body and fully concealed outlet with no visible WC trap profile. A copy of the user manual/maintenance instruction shall be supplied with the WC and shall be affixed onto the WC using plastic bag and heavy duty adhesive tape.
37.20.4
Coloured Or White Low Capacity Wc Suite (Cont'd) (B) Installation Fix the close coupled low capacity WC suite including rigid plastic seat and cover with buffers, hinging devices and with all necessary accessories and associated works in accordance with the manufacturer's written instructions to enable the proper functioning of the system. Fix the WC onto the floor using 4 no. of the original screws provided together with the WC and seal the gap between the base of the WC and the floor with approved silicone sealant. The WC shall not be fixed using cement grout or using other type of screws. Any WC installed using method not in accordance with the instructions of the manufacturer shall be dismantled and re-installed in accordance with the correct method. (C) Floor Openings The Contractor is to patch up the existing openings and to create new openings as shown in the Drawings to suit the water saving pedestal suite for "S-trap". If the sanitary stack is near the new pedestal suite, "P-trap" water saving pedestal suite shall be used, subject to SO Rep's approval (Contractor need not create another opening through the existing slab to suit the pedestal). (D) Colour or White Sanitary Wares Where coloured low capacity w.c. suite and/or coloured wash basin are to be supplied and installed, the contractor shall provide the following colour range of the aforesaid sanitary wares for the selection and approval by the SO Rep : Blue and/or Pink and/or Beige and/or Grey and/or White. 3 colours and/or white shall be decided by the SO Rep. (E) Sealant Silicone sealant shall be used to seal up the gap between sanitary wares and tiled surface. The approved sealant shall be of one-component system, non-sag, class 25 in accordance with ASTM C920-01, able to be applied without a primer and meet the following performance requirements: S/N 1 2 Characteristics/Properties Fungal Resistance Test Chemical Resistance Test a) a) b) Household bleach Urea b) Concentrated sodium hypochlorite solution ANSI Z124.3 : 1986 (spot covered) Urea, 6.0% (Urine) - ANSI Z124.3 : 1986 (spot covered) : 4hrs Surface shall be unaffected after 16 hours of spot covered test Test Method ISO 846:1997 (Method B) Requirements No growth
Tack Free Time (hrs)
ASTM C679-87 (1997)
The contractor shall submit the brand and method of application to the SO Rep for approval prior to the commencement of the work. The contractor shall also submit samples of the sealant to the SO rep for selection of colour to match the sanitary works.
37.20.5
Basin For 1-Room Flat Provide and install smaller wash bin as decided by the SO Rep.
37.20.6
Double Bowl Single Drainage Board Stainless Steel Sinks Where specified or shown in the Drawings, the double bowl single drainage board stainless steel sink shall be of HDB's currently approved type made of stainless steel complete with fittings and accessories, complying with SS 40 and approved by MEWR. Each sink shall be supported on 3 nos. stainless steel cantilever channels and stainless steel brackets all as shown in the Drawings and provided with 40mm approved UPVC bottle trap approved by Water Reclamation (Network) Department, MEWR complete with all necessary washers, seals and nuts, vulcanite plug and chrome brass chain or other approved. Sink waste shall discharge into floor waste or trap as shown with proper branch connection. A complete sample shall be installed for the approval of the SO Rep before fixing the rest. The sink waste shall be 50mm UPVC pipe. Tap for the sink shall be installed in position so that water shall discharge into the bowl and not onto the edges of the bowl. Provide and install to each flat a double bowl single drainage board stainless steel sink as follows : Flat Type 2-Room 3-Room 4-Room 5-Room Exec Apartment/Maisonettes Type of Sink ) ) Double bowl single drainage ) board (left or right) stainless ) steel sink ) Overall Size ) ) ) 1500 x 500mm ) )
The two (2) ends of the back upturn of the stainless steel sink shall be splayed at 10 degree (10) and the corners rounded off. The upturn is to be bent slightly outwards. The stainless steel channels and brackets shall be provided together with the sink from the same supplier. The fixing of sinks by stainless steel channels and brackets shall be to the sizes and shapes as shown in the detailed Drawings. Sound deadening pad shall be fixed to the reversed side of the sink as shown in the Drawings. 37.20.7 *Single Lever Basin Mixer And Accessories (*Clause applicable if specified in the Contract) All basins shall be complete with 15mm chrome plated ceramic disc cartridge operated by a single lever mixer tap, with pop-up waste, aerator and bottle trap. It shall be complete with all necessary seals and nuts, firmly fixed and secured on the basin. The dimension of the tap spout measured from the centre of the outlet orifice to the centre of the inlet shall be 90mm minimum and measured vertically from the lowest part of the outlet orifice to the basin top shall be 25mm minimum. The Hot/Cold indicator shall be clearly visible. The indicator may either be by colour coding and/or with character identification. Hot indicator shall be on the left and cold indicator on the right side. The lever and the body shall be of chrome plated brass. The operation of the lever shall be smooth and effortless. The lifting of the lever shall not leave any gap or opening which is likely to trap the finger and/or cause injury. The mixer tap shall comply with BS 5412 and approved by the PUB and the SO Rep. Bottle trap shall be approved by the SO Rep and connected to a 32mm diameter UPVC waste pipe discharging into a floor trap as shown.
37.21
COLOURED UPVC GRATING OVER FLOOR TRAP/ WASTE OUTLET FOR BATH/WC,KITCHEN AND SERVICE YARD All UPVC gratings over 100mm or 50mm diameter floor traps/waste outlets in the Bath/WC, Kitchen and Service Yard with floor tiles shall be coloured gratings. The colour shall be one of the four basic colours, ie. Blue, Pink, Beige or Grey and shall be approved by the SO Rep. However, the anti-mosquito device need not be in colour.
37.22
BIB TAP AND DRAINAGE OUTLET FOR WASHING MACHINE Where specified or shown in the Drawings, provide and fix 15mm diameter chrome plated brass hose union bib tap with cross-head handle at the kitchen. The bib tap shall comply with BS 5412 and approved by the SO Rep. 50mm diameter outlet for washing machine shall be finished with UPVC adaptor and screw-down cap as shown in the Drawings.
37.23
LAY SEWER TO CONNECT TO MINOR SEWER AND SEWER CONNECTION Where specified or shown in the Drawings, lay the last length of main drain-line to join the inspection chamber to the minor manhole connection pipe provided by the Employer's civil engineering contractor or Water Reclamation (Network) Department, PUB unless otherwise specified. Allow for the connection to be carried out at a later stage. The connection shall be done under the supervision of the SO Rep or Water Reclamation (Network) Department, PUB. Where in the case of the pipe joints not being provided, the Contractor shall provide the necessary connections by other methods approved by the Water Reclamation (Network) Department, PUB pipe all as shown in the Drawings and to the approval of Water Reclamation (Network) Department, PUB. Backfill with quarry dust and finished as shown. Apply to the Water Reclamation (Network) Department, PUB for the connection and bear all costs and expenses including the necessary fees.
37.24
RAINWATER DOWNPIPE (RWDP) SYSTEM The rainwater downpipe system shall be of UPVC pipes and fittings, all as shown in the Drawings and approved by the SO Rep. Unless specified otherwise, all rainwater downpipes above ground slab level shall be 200mm nominal diameter white UPVC pipes. The rainwater downpipe system shall be complete with downpipes, branch pipes, roof and balcony outlets with gratings, couplings, pipe brackets, swept tee junctions, access pipes, adaptors, rectangular section bends, underground pipes and Y-branch fittings. The 200mm nominal diameter white UPVC pipe shall comply with the requirements of SS 272:83 as shown below : Measurements/Tests a) Dimensions. SS 272:83 Requirements Outside Diameter : Mean- minimum 200.0, maximum 200.6; Ovality-minimum 196.3, maximum 204.3; Wall Thickness : minimum 4.9, maximum 6.0. b) c) Opacity. Hydrostatic Pressure. Not exceeding 0.2 per cent of visible light. No sign of leakage or any Defect at 70 kPa.
The method of jointing pipes and fittings shall be as specified in subclause 37.12.2.4 "Method of Fixing".
37.25
WASTE AND RAINWATER DISCHARGE FROM BALCONIES, SERVICE YARDS, LANDINGS, LIFT LOBBIES AND MSCP DECKS As shown in the Drawings, waste and rainwater discharge from the access balconies, private balconies, sercive yards, landings, lift lobbies at the second storey and above, and all multi-storey carpark/garage decks shall be connected to the rainwater downpipe system or to waste downpipes discharging into surface drains. All branch pipes and fittings used in the connections shall be of UPVC and comply with SS 213. The discharge outlets shall be square base, screw-in domical grating type as shown in the Drawings. All 80mm, 100mm and 150mm nominal diameter outlets for the private balconies/service yards shall have an adjustable square base of minimum 40mm adjustment. All 50mm nominal diameter outlets for private balconies shall have flat screw-in gratings. The method of jointing pipes and fittings shall be as specified in subclause 37.12.2.4 "Method of Fixing".
37.26
WASTE AND RAINWATER DISCHARGE AT GROUND FLOOR Unless shown otherwise in the Drawings, all ground floor surfaces of void decks, play areas, multi-storey carparks/garages, link buildings, linkways, etc, shall be graded to drain waste water and rainwater into surface drains.
37.27
PAINTING Except for sanitary pipes and water supply pipes, all other ferrous metal surfaces of work installed by the Contractor (eg. mild steel brackets and others) shall be painted with 1 coat of approved primer and 2 coats of gloss enamel paint. All paints used shall be of those quality controlled by PSB and approved by the Board. Allow for numbering to be painted to all sanitary pipes and water supply pipes at void deck.
37.28
MODULAR BRICKS Where clay bricks are shown in the Drawings, the bricks shall be of modular bricks. The common and facing clay bricks shall be 190mm x 90mm x 90mm and 290mm x 90mm x 90mm.
37.29
STAINLESS STEEL PIPE RAIL (FOR HANDICAP) Where indicated, provide and install stainless steel pipe rail for handicap in public toilets as shown in the Drawings. The stainless steel shall be of Grade 304, and the internal diameter shall be as shown in the Drawings. End of pipe shall be split to form fishtail and fixed into the wall and complete with stainless steel capping of the same grade all details as shown in the Drawings. The fixing of pipe rail shall be rigid and secure tightly into the walls.
37.30
CONNECTING TUBE TO PILLAR TAPS AND CISTERNS The connecting tube shall be flexible stainless steel tube 15mm diameter and complete with UPVC adaptor coupling where necessary.
37.31
50MM DIAMETER WASTE OUTLET AT ATTACHED BATHROOM Waste discharge outlet for 50mm diameter pipe at attached bathroom shall be UPVC screw-in flat grating with square base as shown in the Drawings.
37.32
PILLAR TAPS TO WASH BASINS IN BATHROOM/WC AND KITCHEN Where specified or shown in the Drawings, provide and fix to all wash basins 15mm diameter chrome plated brass pillar taps, complying with BS 5412 and approved by Water Department, PUB and the SO Rep. The tap bodies including operating handle shall be brass and chrome plated. The dimension of spout measured from the centre of the outlet orifice to the centre of the inlet shall be minimum 83mm and measured vertically from the lowest part of the outlet orifice to the basin top shall be minimum 20mm.
37.33
BRASS SINK PILLAR TAP WITH SWIVEL SWAN NECK Where specified or shown in the Drawings, supply and fix 15mm (nominal size) sink pillar tap with swivel swan neck to all the stainless steel sinks. It shall be of brass and chrome plated. The brass tap and the swivel swan neck (spout) shall be of brass tube chrome plated to BS 5412, BS 1400:DCB3 and DD18. The whole fitting shall be of the type approved by Water Department, PUB and shall also to SO Rep approval. the operating handle shall be brass and chrome plated.
37.34
REPLACEMENT OF SOIL AND WASTE STACKS For the purpose of this clause, sanitary discharge stacks shall include soil stacks, waste stacks, soil and waste stacks all branch pipes, vent pipes and other discharge stacks which serve the purpose of carrying soil and/or waste.
37.34.1
Sanitary Discharge Stacks in Toilets, Bathrooms, Void Decks, etc The Contractor shall, unless otherwise stated, replace all the sanitary discharge stacks (Including all the branch pipes, vent pipes, floor traps, gratings and connection to basins and w.c. pan) in the toilets, bathrooms, bath/w.c. and void decks with new UPVC pipes to comply with all current Bye-laws, Regulations & Requirements of the relevant Authorities. Unless otherwise stated, cast iron discharge stacks shall be replaced with new UPVC pipes as shown in the Drawings. The Contractor shall construct and connect the new pipes to discharge into the nearest inspection chambers. All exposed internal and external surfaces of all existing cast iron stack pipe portions embedded in the floor slab shall be cleaned to remove all existing paint, dust, dirt, grease and foreign particles from the surfaces. The cleaned surfaces shall be coated with a layer of approved epoxy coating. This approved epoxy coating shall cure within 5 minutes. The Contractor shall supply and install UPVC connectors complete with 2 rubber rings. One rubber ring shall tightly-fit the cast iron pipe protruding the ceiling. The other rubber ring shall tightly-fit the UPVC spigot adaptor. The joints must be water tight. The rubber ring shall comply with SS290. The Contractor shall submit detailed drawings and samples of the UPVC connector complete with 2 rubber rings for the SO Rep's approval prior to the commencement of replacement works. The Contractor shall apply sufficient Epo Putty or other approved materials between the UPVC rubber ring connectors and existing cast iron pipe protruding below the ceiling. The UPVC connector shall butt the ceiling. The Contractor shall apply sufficient thickness of Epo Putty or other approved materials of 10mm width to the top most portion around the existing cast iron pipe protruding below the ceiling 5 mins before the installation of the UPVC connector. The Epo Putty or other approved materials shall fully fill the gap in the UPVC connector, above the top rubber ring and below the ceiling. The excess Epo Putty or other approved materials shall be finished off to produce a smooth joint between the ceiling and the UPVC connector. The Contractor shall ensure that the joints between UPVC rubber ring connectors and existing cast iron pipes are watertight. The Epo Putty or other approved materials shall be able to apply in wet conditions. They should have a tool time of at least 5 minutes at 27C and tack free of not more than 90 minutes. They should be natural cure and free from toxic smell. The Contractor shall produce a test report of the Epo Putty or other approved material prior to use. This test report shall include proof hydrostatic test, burst test and endurance hydrostatic test. Provide and fix approved UPVC pipe skirting with square base at the base of each discharge stack and vent pipe in the bath and w.c. shown in the drawings.
37.34.1
Sanitary Discharge Stacks in Toilets, Bathrooms, Void Decks, etc (Cont'd) The Contractor shall also remove and/ or clear all debris, grease, etc. from underground sections of the existing soil and stack pipes to ensure a smooth flow of soil and waste into the inspection chambers. All existing squat pans and water cisterns shall be removed and replaced with new pedestal pans complete with water cisterns, as shown in the drawings. Any existing opening left in the floor shall be reinstated in accordance with the drawings. All existing pedestal pans and water cisterns shall be removed and replaced with new pedestal pan with the same colour complete with water cisterns. All damaged bath/ w.c. or toilet wall tiles shall be reinstate with tiles of matching size, colour and texture. The Contractor shall reinstate all existing fixtures and fittings in the toilets, bathrooms, and bath/ w.c. which are affected by the replacement of the sanitary discharge stacks and its related branch pipes, vent pipes, etc.
37.35
SANITARY DISCHARGE STACKS IN KITCHENS (PROVISIONAL SUM ITEMS) Allow a Provisional Sum Item as shown in the Tender Cost Breakdown of the Form of Tender for the replacement of all waste stacks and/or sanitary pipes (including all branch pipes, vent pipes, floor traps, gratings and connections to basins/sinks) in the Kitchen, the removal of affected fittings and fixtures and the reinstatement of all damaged floor and wall finishes (including re-tiling of the whole dapoh slab, where necessary) in the kitchen. Where specified or instructed by the SO Rep, the Contractor shall replace all waste stacks and/or sanitary pipes (including all branch pipes, vent pipes, floor traps, gratings and connections to basins/sinks) in the Kitchen. Where applicable, existing floor finishes around the floor trap grating in the kitchen shall be hacked to facilitate the removal of the existing floor trap grating and to allow the new UPVC spigot grating adaptor to sit on the portion of the existing cast iron pipe embedded in the floor slab. The area of existing floor finishes to be hacked shall be about 100mm around the existing floor trap gratings and shall be square or rectangular in shape. The hacked area shall be filled with approved non-shrinkage grout and made good with matching colour floor tiles. The Contractor need not reinstate the existing kitchen's fixtures and fittings which are affected by the aforesaid replacement of waste stacks and/or sanitary pipes in the kitchen but shall reinstate all damaged floor and wall finishes (including re-tiling the whole dapoh slab, where necessary) to the satisfaction of the SO Rep. The contractor shall use baseless pipe skirting for the replacement of cast iron stack pipe in the kitchen to minimize hacking of existing floor adjacent to the existing stack pipe. The baseless pipe skirting shall be bonded onto the existing floor tiles in the kitchen by using Epo-putty or other equivalent water proofing bonding agent. The contractor shall ensure the water tightness of the joint between the baseless pipe skirting and the existing floor tiles."
37.36
TAPS IN PUBLIC AREAS Where specified, new taps located at the staircase landings, access balconies, wash areas and for civil defence purposes at the 1st Storey shall be of 15mm diameter chrome plated hose union bib tap with removable handle, as shown in the Drawings. The tap shall be approved by the SO Rep and Water Supply (Network), Department, PUB. The handles shall be handed over to the Employer or the relevant Town Councils as directed by the SO Rep upon handing over of the blocks.
37.37
COLOURED OR WHITE UPVC GRATING OVER FLOOR TRAP/WASTE OUTLET FOR BATH/WC AND KITCHEN All new UPVC gratings over 100mm or 50mm diameter floor traps/waste outlets in the Bath/WC and Kitchen with floor tiles shall be coloured or white gratings. The colour or white shall be one of the four basic colours, ie. Blue, Pink, Beige or Grey or white and shall be approved by the SO Rep. However, the anti-mosquito device need not be in colour.
37.38
METHOD OF REPLACEMENT OF SOIL AND WASTE STACKS (i) The Contractor shall carry out a thorough survey of all the existing cast iron soil and waste stacks and pipings. The survey should cover the size, shape and configuration of the existing cast iron soil and waste stacks and pipings in every flat. The Contractor shall ensure that the diameter, dimension and the shape of the new UPVC fittings are tailor-made to suit the existing individual soil and waste stacks, fittings and site condition. The Contractor shall submit the full set of samples of the proposed new UPVC fittings, together with Drawings showing the connection details and the sequence of works for the approval of SO's Rep at least one month prior to commencement of replacement works. All new UPVC fittings shall be approved by MEWR before being delivered to the site. The Contractor shall ensure that the replacement of the existing soil stack to the new UPVC fitting for each flat is completed within one working day (ie. from 9.00 am to 5.00 pm) and the sanitary system in each flat is functionable at the end of the working day. (ii) The method of fixing new UPVC pipes to existing cast iron pipes shall be as follows : (a) hack off the cement mortar and cut-off the upper and lower exposed portion of the existing cast iron fitting. All exposed internal and external surfaces of all existing cast iron stack pipe portions embedded in the floor slab shall be cleaned to remove all existing paint, dust, dirt, grease and foreign particles from the surfaces. The cleaned surfaces shall be coated with a layer of approved epoxy coating. slot a piece of 2 rubber ring connector through the lower UPVC pipe and apply solvent cement on UPVC pipe. To the external cast iron pipe surface, apply Epoxy Putty or other approved materials. push the connector and the lower UPVC pipe to the cast iron pipe and ensure that they are properly sticking. Finish off the excess Epo Putty or other approved materials to produce a smooth joint between the ceiling and the rubber ring connector. insert pipe skirting with square base into the base of each stack and vent pipe and the upper pipe into the UPVC fitting. for soil and waste stacks inside bathroom, toilet or bath/wc, paint entire ceiling to match existing.
(b)
(c)
(d)
(e)
(iii)
The Contractor shall cut and remove the existing cast iron soil pipes and branch pipes and replace with new UPVC pipes and fittings as shown in the Drawing. The proposed method of cutting the existing cast iron pipes are to be submitted to SO 's Rep for approval at least one month prior to the commencement of soil stack replacement work. The method of cutting and removing of the existing cast-iron soil stacks and branch pipes and the equipment to be used shall comply with the following requirements: (a) The cutting tool/equipment shall be capable of cutting the cast iron pipes with minimal distortion to the cut areas and capable of producing cut surfaces with a straight finish. The tool/equipment shall be portable and does not obstruct the residents' movements within the flat. The tool/equipment shall be equipped with adequate safety features and shall not pose any danger or safety hazard to the residents staying inside the flat. The method/equipment used shall not generate excessive smoke or smell that may dirty the surroundings and inconvenient the residents.
(b)
(c)
(d)
The Contractor shall exercise care and provide adequate protection/cover to avoid damage to any of the residents' properties such as wall tiles, cabinets, electrical appliances, etc.
37.39
FLOOR WASTES/FLOOR TRAP (i) Floor waste shall be UPVC pipes with UPVC hinged grating as in Clause 37.14 "UPVC Gullies and UPVC Floor Traps with UPVC Grating At Ground Floor" set in concrete floor and connected to UPVC waste pipes leading into gully traps or floor trap. Existing cast iron floor trap shall be replaced with new UPVC trap together with the branch UPVC pipe and connector. Where specified or shown in the Drawings, provide and fix approved UPVC pipe skirtings with square base, at the base of each discharge stack in the bath/wc. UPVC pipe skirtings shall comply with SS 213. Installation of the UPVC pipe skirtings shall be in accordance with Clause 37.12.2 "Installation".
(ii)
(iii)
37.40
INSPECTION OF OVERLAPPING BETWEEN UPVC PIPES AND FITTINGS FOR UPVC SANITARY SYSTEM The Contractor shall include the easy check double locking system (patent application No. 9905211-0) to the UPVC sanitary system to ensure that the UPVC pipes and fittings are fully overlapped to minimize leakage at the joint. The Contractor shall arrange for inspection of all the joints between UPVC pipes and fittings after the installation of the completed system to prove that all the joints between UPVC pipes and fittings are fully overlapped. The pipe joint system shall include : (a) The pipes and fittings shall be connected in such a way that the soil and waste will flow smoothly from the outlet to the fittings, through the horizontal branches and vertical stacks to the main line. The system shall not allow any possibility of back flow, stagnation of fluid at the joint due to insufficient overlapping of UPVC pipes and fittings. The overlapped portion at the joint between UPVC pipes and fittings shall be exposed and can be inspected visually after the installation of the system. The Contractor shall ensure full overlap between UPVC pipes and fittings. In the event that the UPVC pipes and fittings are not overlapped sufficiently, the Contractor shall dismantle the affected portion of the system and re-install to the satisfaction of the SO Rep. Big access opening shall be provided (at least 75mm diameter) to the fittings (including tee, cross tee and elbow) to facilitate the easy clearance of the chokage. The access opening shall be capped with UPVC screw cap with proper rubber seal and PP insert to ensure water and air tightness at all times.
(b)
(c)
The Contractor shall submit the full set of shop drawings, samples and mini-mock up including sectional view to demonstrate the above requirements to the satisfaction of the SO Rep prior to the installation of the UPVC sanitary system on site. The Contractor shall also ensure that their UPVC fitting manufacturer is licensed to use the patented design. Copy of the licensing agreement between the UPVC fitting manufacturer and the vendor shall be submitted to the SO Rep together with the shop drawings and the samples. The Contractor is deemed to include the cost of the above requirements and the royalty to be paid under the licensing agreement in the Contract Sum.
SECTION 38/
SECTION 38
38.0 38.1
WATER INSTALLATION GENERAL REQUIREMENT All pipes and pipe fittings shall be approved by Water Supply (Network), Department, PUB unless otherwise specified. The Employer reserves the right to carry out test on material at site as and when required. The test shall be conducted at PSB accredited or other approved testing laboratory and all costs of testing shall be borne by contractor. All pipes and pipe fittings shall comply with the standards and requirements stipulated by PUB, conform to the Public Utilities (Water Supply) Regulations and SSCP48: Code of Practice for Water Services. The SO Rep reserves the right to carry out test on material at the Site as and when required. The test shall be conducted at SAC accredited testing laboratory.
38.2 38.2.1
WATER SUPPLY PIPES Ductile Iron Pipes And Fittings Where specified, all new ductile iron pipes and fittings for water installation shall comply with BS EN 545 and ductile iron flanges type PN16 shall also comply with BS EN 545. These pipes and fittings shall be internally cement mortar lined in accordance with the relevant clauses in BS EN 545.
38.2.2
STAINLESS STEEL WATER PIPES Where necessary, the Contractor shall arrange with Water Supply (Network), Department, PUB when work commences, to carry out random test on pipes and the test results shall be submitted to the SO Rep. Provide and fix stainless steel water supply pipes to areas as shown in the Drawings. All stainless steel water pipes, fittings and accessories shall comply with the standards stipulated by PUB and to the requirements of BS 4127:Part 2. The internal and external surfaces of the pipes and fittings shall be clean, smooth and free from Defect. Cutting and fixing shall be in strict accordance with the manufacturer's instructions. All stainless steel pipes shall not be bent. Support pipes with stainless steel supporting clips or as shown in the Drawings. Use light gauge stainless steel pipes for water supply unless otherwise specified. The stainless steel pipe fittings shall be of compression fittings of copper alloy or stainless steel pressfitting joints. Compression fittings of copper alloy shall conform with BS EN 1254 Part 2:1998. Stainless steel pressfitting joints shall conform with Japanese Waterworks Association (JWWA) G116 "Stainless Steel Pipe Fittings For Water Works". All fittings shall conform with all PUB latest requirements. Fittings of 15mm size and longer shall be legibly marked with the manufacturer's name or trade mark. Support pipes with supporting stainless steel clips and hangers. The maximum spacing for horizontal and vertical support shall be as follows : Nominal Size (mm) 15 20 to 28 35 to 42 54 and above Maximum Horizontal Support Spacing (mm) 1000 1000 1200 1200 Maximum Vertical Support Spacing (mm) 1200 1200 1800 1800
Notwithstanding this, the Contractor shall ensure that all the pipes shall be secured firmly.
38.2.3
UPVC (Service/Distributing Pipes and Fittings within the Dwelling Units) Where specified or shown in the Drawings, all the new service/distributing pipes and fittings within the dwelling units shall be unplasticized PVC corrosion resistant pipes complying with SS 141 Class E and fitting complying with SS 174 and its latest amendments and all tests as required by Water Supply (Network), Department, PUB. Provide and fix all the UPVC pipes to the sizes and locations where shown in the Drawings. The diameter shown shall be of nominal size. The mean tolerances on outside diameter shall conform to SS 141. The pipe walls shall be homogeneous throughout and the internal and external surfaces shall be clean, smooth and reasonably free from grooves, blisters, wrinkles, dents and heat marks. The ends shall be cleanly cut and square with the axis of the pipe. The method of fixing UPVC pipes to UPVC pipes shall be as follows : (a) (b) (c) All pipes must be sawn square. Remove all swarf, burr and sharp edges after cutting. Clean pipe end and the socket in pipes or fittings with cleaning fluid or methylated spirit and allowed to dry. No sand paper is allowed for cleaning the pipes and fittings. Mark the spigot with a pencil line at a distance to the depth of the socket in fittings or to the depth of sockets formed in pipe. Coat all pipe ends and internal face of socket thoroughly with solvent and allowed to dry. The pipe shall be inserted into the socket immediately after applying the second coat of solvent. Remove solvent from the top of socket using a dry cloth. After jointing the joint shall be held firmly for a period of 30 seconds and not disturbed for at least 5 minutes. All joints must be jointed with suitable sockets recommended by the pipe manufacturer. In situations where a pipe and socket joint is not possible, a coupling shall be used. No socket belling shall be allowed when jointing UPVC pipes.
(d)
(e)
(f)
(g)
(h)
Use UPVC adaptors for the jointing of UPVC pipes to other materials and in accordance with the pipe manufacturer's recommendation or as follows : (a) (b) Use an approved epoxy compound. Glue a caulking ring or bush to the end of the UPVC pipes. Use solvent weld cement method for all jointing assemblies.
Carrying out all fixing work in strict accordance with the pipe manufacturer's instructions. Solvent cement used for jointing UPVC pipes and fittings shall comply with SS 4346:Part 3. The Contractor shall submit test report of the solvent cement to be used on the Site for approval by the SO Rep before the commencement of the sanitary and water installation Works. The tests shall be carried out by PSB accredited or other approved testing laboratory and shall include : (a) (b) (c) Shear Strength Film Properties Long-term Hydrostatic Pressure
38.2.3
UPVC (Service/Distributing Pipes and Fittings within the Dwelling Units) (Cont'd) Support pipes with UPVC shackle clips. The supports shall allow sufficient free movement of the pipe during temperature changes. The maximum spacing for horizontal and vertical support shall be as follows : Nominal Size (mm) 10 15 20 25 32 40 50 65 and above Maximum Horizontal Support Spacing (mm) 400 400 500 600 700 800 900 1000 Maximum Vertical Support Spacing (mm) 800 1000 1200 1400 1600 1800 1800 1800
38.3
CONTRACTOR'S WORK COMMENCES FROM PUB MAIN Public Utilities Board will provide and lay water main up to bulk meter for direct and indirect supply or individual meter points for direct supply as shown in the Drawings. The contractor's work shall commence from these points.
38.4
BULK METER POSITIONS Exact position of bulk meter, where not fixed by existing mains must be approved by the SO Rep and Water Supply (Network), Department, PUB before fixing. Otherwise the contractor shall make good at his own expense to proper position determined by SO Rep and to bear all cost incurred for such alteration.
38.5
WATER METER POSITIONS Meter for supplying off SPSL mains to flats and meters for supply from tanks to upper floor flats shall be placed along access balconies/corridors on each floor as shown on Drawings.
38.6
BRASS STOPCOCKS, STOP VALVES, GATE VALVES AND COPPER AND COPPER ALLOY GATE VALVE Where specified or shown in the Drawings, provide and fix to every branch service pipe or main supply pipe, one stop valve to SS 75:Pt 2 or gate valve to BS 5163. Provide valve with a detachable crutch head. Where ball stop valves and stopcocks are along public corridors or public access balconies, the upper end of projecting shank of valves shall be tilted to an angle of 15 degrees towards the wall where such pipes are tee off from direct up-riser pipes or indirect down supply pipes. The installation shall comply with PUB regulations. Install copper and copper alloy gate valve to BS 5154 at the down supply pipe on the roof top. When directed by the SO Rep, the Contractor shall remove the detachable levers and deliver them to the Branch Office or Town Council.
38.7
DIRECT SUPPLY TO FLATS Where indicated, run 100mm diameter underground ductile iron distribution main and 80mm ductile iron sub-main complying with BS EN 545 as shown in the Drawings. From this main, run direct riser of size shown in the following schedule, each serving only 2 units on each floor unless otherwise shown. (Where applicable, for all Executive Maisonettes, the tee-off shall be 28mm diameter stainless steel pipes, the internal service UPVC pipes shall be 25mm diameter. Provide and install 25mm diameter stopcocks before individual sub-meters.) Schedule Of Common Direct Riser And Tee Off Pipes For 3, 4, 5-Room Flats And Executive Apartments (Where Applicable) (To be of stainless steel complying with BS 4127:Part 2) (a) Block without void deck
Storey No. Served by Common Riser Size of Riser No. of Storey *Tee Off Size No. of Storey *Tee Off Size
54mm 1st 22mm
54mm 1st 22mm 2nd 28mm
54mm 1st to 2 22mm 3rd 28mm

nd
54mm 1st to 3rd 22mm 4th 28mm
Size of Riser No. of Storey *Tee off Size No. of Storey *Tee Off Size
54mm 5th 22mm
54mm 5th 22mm 6th 28mm
54mm 5th to 6th 22mm 7th 28mm
54mm 5th to 7th 22mm 8th 28mm
(b)
Storey No. Served by Common Riser Size of Riser No. of Storey *Tee Off Size No. of Storey *Tee Off Size Size of Riser No. of Storey *Tee off Size No. of Storey *Tee Off Size
Block with void deck
54 mm 2nd 22mm
54mm 2nd 22mm 3 28mm

rd
54mm 2nd to 3rd 22mm 4th 28mm
54mm 2nd to 4th 22mm 5th 28mm
54mm 2nd to 3rd 22mm 5th 28mm 54mm 6th 22mm
54mm 2nd to 4th 22mm 5th 28mm 54mm 6th 22mm 7th 28mm
54mm 2nd to 4th 22mm 5th 28mm 54mm 6th to 7th 22mm 8th 28mm
54mm 2nd to 4th 22mm 5th 28mm 54mm 6th to 8th 22mm 9th 28mm
*The diameter of tee off pipe sizes shall be applied through up to junction of last fitting within the flat unit as shown in the above schedule. The pipe shall be reduced to 15mmdiameter at fitting all as shown in the Drawings.
38.8
PIPES INSIDE FLAT UNIT Where specified or shown in the Drawings, the diameter of pipes inside flat units shall follow the diameter of tee off pipe throughout up to junction of last fitting within the flat unit. The pipe shall be reduced to 15mm diameter at fittings. Fix all water pipes clear of finished wall surface with supporting shackle clips at centres similar to Clause 38.2.3 "UPVC (Service/Distributing Pipes and Fittings within the Dwelling Units)" all to the satisfaction of SO Rep.
38.8.1
*HOT AND COLD WATER SUPPLY PIPES AND FITTINGS. (*Clause Applicable If Specified In The Contract.) Hot and cold water supply pipes and fittings shall be provided within the residential units. All water pipes within the residential units shall be copper pipes to BS EN 1057, approved by the SO Rep. All pipes shall be chased (embedded) in walls, columns and beams. No pipe shall be exposed within the residential units. The nominal size of the water pipes shall be of nominal outside diameter of 22mm with nominal wall thickness of 1.2mm. However, nominal outside diameter of 28mm with nominal wall thickness of 1.2mm shall be used for the topmost 2 storeys. The water pipe shall be reduced to 15mm nominal outside diameter with 1.0mm nominal wall thickness at the tap fittings. The Contractor shall be responsible for forming all notches, chases, and recesses in walls, columns and beams. All fittings required for joints, bends, etc on the pipes shall be of capillary fittings complying with BS 864:Part 2 and approved by PUB and the SO Rep. All pipeworks installed shall be hydrostatically tested at 7 bars or one and a half times the maximum working pressure, whichever is greater, for 24 hours. All joints shall be left exposed for inspection during testing. A cold water pipe shall be tee-off from the distribution pipe to the designated heater position. Hot water pipes shall be provided from the heater position to all basin and bath mixers. A pressure relief drain-off pipe shall also be provided for discharging to the floor trap. The cold water inlet, hot water outlet and the drain-off pipe shall all be terminated with compression fitting cappings, at 30mm from the wall. All 3 termination points shall be fixed with 30mm x 20mm aluminium tags, with engraved markings of "cold water inlet", "hot water outlet" and "drain-off", respectively. All water pipes including all pipe fittings (tees, bends, etc.) are to be tested for leakages before concealment of the pipes and fittings can be carried out. Light duty coloured masking tapes of 10mm width, shall be fixed on the wall surfaces of the pipe routing lines concealed behind walls, columns, and beams in the kitchen. No wall finish shall be damaged by the removal of the tapes. For each basin, a 15 mm diameter isolating ball stopvalve shall be fixed below the tap mixer, connecting to the cold water inlet. A bath/shower mixer complete with diverter adjustable jet shower head, sliding bar, 1.5m flexible hose (all in chrome finish), and a basin mixer, approved by the SO Rep, shall be provided within each Bath/WC.
38.9
REFUSE CHUTE FLUSHING SYSTEM
38.9.1
Flushing Pipes From Ground Level Where refuse chute flushing pipes are supplied directly from PUB mains, every refuse chute shall have its own supply teed off from the distribution mains located at apron. Supply pipe of 35mm diameter stainless steel pipe to refuse chute shall have a brass stopcock with detachable brass crutch head located outside at 1.8m above apron. The brass components shall be dezincification resistant complying to BS EN 12163:1998 or BS EN 12165:1998 or BS EN 12420. Such fittings shall have the additional marking of "DZR" or "CR". The flushing pipe shall be 25mm diameter UPVC pipe complying with SS 141 Class E ringing round four sides of chute and perforated with 5mm + 1mm diameter holes at maximum 50mm centres such that the water flowing out of the holes are directed at 45 degrees towards the refuse chute wall. The flushing pipe shall be supported by non-corrosive clips or hangers to each side of the refuse chute wall.
38.9.2
*Flushing Pipe to Refuse Chute From Distribution Mains at Roof (* Clause applicable if specified in the Contract) Where shown in the Drawings, tee off from distribution mains as in Clause 38.10 at roof 35mm diameter stainless steel supply pipe to top of refuse chutes as shown in Drawing for flushing chutes. One such pipe shall supply not more than 2 chutes. Teeing off to chutes shall be at mid point between chutes. Distributing pipe shall be provided with 40m brass stop valve with loose crutch head for control fixed at 1.8m height at top most storey access balcony or landing. The flushing pipe shall be in 25mm diameter UPVC pipe to SS 141 Class E ringing round four sides of chute and perforated with 5mm 1mm diameter holes at maximum 50mm centres. The flushing pipe shall be supported by non-corrosive clips or hangers to each side of the refuse chute wall.
38.10
INDIRECT SUPPLY FROM ROOF TANKS For new installation, where supply is from roof storage tanks, run 100mm diameter ductile iron distribution mains complying with BS EN 545 with cement lining internally on roof to beyond the last down supply pipes as shown in the Drawings. From these mains, run down supply pipes of sizes shown in the following schedule, each serving only 2 units one each floor unless otherwise stated in the Drawing. Pipe joints, fittings and special tee for ductile iron distribution mains and drawout pipes at roof level shall be of flanged type. The use of special tee is subject to approval by the SO Rep.
SCHEDULE OF DOWN SUPPLY PIPES AND TEE OFF PIPES FOR 3, 4, 5-ROOM FLATS AND EXECUTIVE APARTMENTS (WHERE APPLICABLE) (To be of stainless steel complying with BS 4127:Part 2)
Where Tank Supply No. of Storey Below Roof Size of Down Feed Pipe Nos. of Storey Below Roof *Tee Off Size Nos. of Storey Below Roof *Tee Off Size Size of Down Feed Pipe Nos. of Storey Below Roof *Tee Off Size Size of Down Feed Pipe Nos. of Storey Below Roof *Tee Off Size Size of Down Feed Pipe Nos. of Storey Below Roof *Tee Off Size Size of Down Feed Pipe Nos. of Storey Below Roof *Tee Off Size
1-Storey 42mm 1st Storey 28mm
2-Storey 42mm 1st to 2nd 28mm
3-Storey 42mm 1st to 2nd 28mm 3rd Storey 22mm
42mm 3rd to 4th 22mm
42mm 3rd to 5th 22mm 42mm 8th to 9th 22mm
' *The diameter of tee off pipe sizes shall be applied throughout up to junction of last fitting within the flat units as shown in the above schedule. The pipe shall be reduced to 15mm diameter at fitting all as shown in the Drawing. *Provide and install 25mm diameter stopcock before individual sub-meters for top-most 2 storeys dwelling units. Where directed by the SO Rep, the Contractor shall remove the detachable levers and deliver them to the Branch Office or Town Councils.
SCHEDULE OF DOWN SUPPLY PIPES AND TEE OFF PIPES FOR 3, 4, 5-ROOM FLATS AND EXECUTIVE APARTMENTS (WHERE APPLICABLE) (To be of stainless steel complying with BS 4127:Part 2)
Where Tank Supply No. of Storey Below Roof Size of Down Feed Pipe Nos. of Storey Below Roof *Tee Off Size Size of Down Feed Pipe Nos. of Storey Below Roof *Tee Off Size Size of Down Feed Pipe Nos. of Storey Below Roof *Tee Off Size Size of Down Feed Pipe Nos. of Storey Below Roof *Tee Off Size Size of Down Feed Pipe Nos. of Storey Below Roof *Tee Off Size
10-Storey 42mm 1st Storey 28mm 42mm 3rd to 6th 22mm 42mm 7th to 10th 22mm
11-Storey 42mm 1st to 2nd 28mm 42mm 3rd to 6th 22mm 42mm 7th to 11th 22mm
14-Storey 42mm 1st to 2nd 28mm 42mm 3rd to 6th 22mm 42mm 7th to 10th 22mm 42mm 11th to 14th 22mm
SCHEDULE OF DOWN SUPPLY PIPES AND TEE OFF PIPES FOR 3, 4, 5-ROOM FLATS AND EXECUTIVE APARTMENTS (WHERE APPLICABLE) To be of stainless steel complying with BS 4127:Part 2
Where Tank Supply No. of Storey Below Roof Size of Down Feed Pipe Nos. of Storey Below Roof *Tee Off Size Size of Down Feed Pipe Nos. of Storey Below Roof *Tee Off Size Size of Down Feed Pipe Nos. of Storey Below Roof *Tee Off Size Size of Down Feed Pipe Nos. of Storey Below Roof *Tee Off Size Size of Down Feed Pipe Nos. of Storey Below Roof *Tee Off Size
18-Storey 42mm 1st Storey 28mm 42mm 3rd to 6th 22mm 42mm 7th to 12th 22mm 42mm 13th to 18th 22mm
20-Storey 42mm 1st to 2nd 28mm 42mm 3rd to 6th 22mm 42mm 7th to 10th 22mm 42mm 11th to 15th 22mm 42mm 16th to 20th 22mm
21-Storey 42mm 1st to 2nd 28mm 42mm 3rd to 6th 22mm 42mm 7th to 10th 22mm 42mm 11th to 15th 22mm 42mm 16th to 21st 22mm
22-Storey 42mm 1st to 2nd 28mm 42mm 3rd to 6th 22mm 42mm 7th to 10th 22mm 42mm 11th to 16th 22mm 42mm 17th to 22nd 22mm
23-Storey 42mm 1st to 2nd 28mm 42mm 3rd to 6th 22mm 42mm 7th to 11th 22mm 42mm 12th to 17th 22mm 42mm 17th to 23rd 22mm
38.11
RESERVED
38.12
SILT TRAP AT FOOT OF DOWN SUPPLY PIPES For new installation, every down supply pipe shall extend at least 250mm below the last tee-off to form a silt trap fitted with plug to facilitate cleaning. A gate valve with detachable crutch head shall be provided just before the silt trap.
38.13
PIPEWORKS TO THE STAINLESS STEEL FLANGES AT THE CONCRETE WATER TANKS Where connecting pipes to the concrete water tanks are to be provided for distribution mains, rising main inlets, overflow pipes, washout pipes and other as shown in the Drawings, they shall be cast-in-situ in the water tank floor or wall by the contractor. The fixing of pipes, valves and fittings, including bolts, nuts and gaskets, to the stainless steel flanges of the connecting pipes shall be fixed by the contractor, all as shown in the Drawings. Use only stainless steel bolts and nuts. All stainless steel material shall conform to AISI Grade 316 and flanges shall be in accordance with BS 4504. Allow for all pipeworks cost and water for sanitary and water installation leakage test. The cleaning and commissioning of the water tanks, together with the use of chemical for sterilization of the water tank shall be carried out by the contractor. The costs of water, materials and etc. for the commissioning of water tanks shall be borne by the contractor.
38.14
PIPING TO HIGH LEVEL TANKS Where specified or shown in the Drawings, provide and install piping to high level water tanks as follows :
38.14.1
Rising Mains Install 100mm ductile iron pipes to BS EN 545 with cement lining internally from bulk meters or low level suction tanks at ground level to high level water tank whichever is applicable. The rising mains shall be connected to a 100mm ball float valve with a 100mm gate valve at inlet. Floats shall be of copper and approved type.
38.14.2
Distribution Outlet Mains Install 100mm diameter ductile iron pipe to BS EN 545 with cement lining internally as shown in the Drawings. Support the pipes on precast concrete block 450mm high and 150mm thick of 1:3:6 mix concrete, embedded onto 150mm high concrete base by mortar at intervals of not exceeding 2700mm all as shown in the Drawings. Provide supports at every fitting or bend. Mains shall extend past the last branching-off of down supply pipe and shall be encased by reinforced concrete end-thrust supports as shown in the Drawings. Provide and fix ductile iron short pipe 450mm in length with 180mm diameter ductile iron collar 20mm thick, welded at middle section of the short pipe. Provide approved flange adaptors along the distribution pipe before each thrust support. All ductile iron pipe joints, flange adaptor, fittings and special tees shall be of flanged type in compliance with BS EN 545 type PN 16.
38.14.3
Interconnecting Pipe Install 100mm diameter ductile iron pipe to BS EN 545 with cement linings installed between tanks as shown in the Drawings with 100mm gate valve. The invert level of the connecting pipe shall be 400mm above the internal base of the water tank unless shown otherwise in the Drawings. Pipe joints, fittings and special tees shall be of flanged type ductile iron. Flanges type PN 16 shall comply with BS EN 545.
UPG07/S38.DOC(10) lkk(181206) DPD
38.14.4
Overflow Pipes 100mm diameter ductile iron overflow pipes to BS EN 545 with cement lining or one size bigger than the diameter of the inlet rising main pipe as shown in the Drawings to each tank compartment shall be connected to washout pipe. Provide an additional 28mm diameter stainless steel overflow warning pipe for each roof storage tank and discharging off roof edge at its nearest point preferably at the kitchen side. The pipe shall project 300mm from eaves of roof as shown in the Drawings. Cover open end of pipes with brass gauze mosquito screen.
38.14.5
Tank Washout Pipes Install 100mm diameter ductile iron washout pipes to BS EN 545 with cement lining before the gate valve from tanks to roof level as shown in the Drawings. The pipe shall discharge direct into roof rain water gutter and properly drained off through rain water downpipes, surface drains at ground level via 150mm ductile iron pipes and with 100mm x 150mm reducer embedded into concrete apron. The end of the discharge pipe shall be minimum 150mm above the invert of the surface drain/sump.
38.14.6
Stop Valves, Sluice/Gate Valves, Copper and Copper Alloy Gate Valves Provide and install all necessary stop valves to SS 75:Pt 2, gate valves to BS 5163, Copper and Copper Alloy Gate Valves to BS 5154 and other fittings required to comply with the requirements and regulations of the Water Supply (Network), Department, PUB, regardless of whether such items have been specifically mentioned or not. The wedge of the gate valves (BS 5163) used shall be of rubber bonded gate. Coat the internal surface of valve body with approved material. The spindle of the gate valves shall be stainless steel or high tensile bronze or other approved type.
38.14.7
Raise Pipes Install raised pipes to raise and support all horizontal pipes above concrete roof as stated in Clause 38.14.2 "Distribution Outlet Mains" to a level of not less than 330mm to clear precast secondary roofing slabs.
38.15
BIB TAP AND STOPCOCK/STOPVALVE Where shown in the Drawings, provide and fix 15mm diameter brass bib taps conforming with BS 5412 and BS 3457; and 15mm and 25mm diameter stopcocks/stopvalves conforming with SS 75:Part 2 and BS 3457. Such bib taps, stopcocks and stopvalves shall be approved by the SO Rep and Water Supply (Network), Dept, PUB. Bib taps shall be chrome plated brass body with chrome plated brass operating handles. UPVC tee and cap for fixing bib tap as shown in the Drawings shall conform with SS 174. Fix the cap to the wall by "Ramset ED 655" or other approved.
38.16
TAPS IN PUBLIC AREAS Taps located at staircase landings, access balconies, wash areas shall be of 15mm diameter chrome plated hose union bib tap with removable handle, as shown in the Drawings. The tap shall be approved by the SO Rep and Water Supply (Network), Dept, PUB. The handles shall be handed over to the Employer or the relevant Town Councils as directed by the SO Rep upon handing over of the building blocks.
UPG07/S38.DOC(11) lkk(181206) DPD
38.17
WATER SERVICES TO UTILITIES CENTRE For new installation, run 25mm diameter UPVC pipe from water meter point to the utilities centre. Water pipes inside the buildings shall be 20mm diameter up to bib taps. Provide and fix 15mm diameter chrome plated brass self-closing delay-action bib tap over lavatory basin and 15mm isolating ball stop valve to W.C. cisterns. Bib tap and ball stop valve shall be of brass high pressure screw down type. Provide similar 15mm bib tap with screw on connecting nozzle for the utilities centre.
38.18
WATER SERVICES TO CENTRALISED REFUSE CHUTE CHAMBER
38.19
FIXING FITTINGS BEFORE HANDING OVER When required, provide and fix new taps, stop valves and other removable fittings immediately before all the buildings blocks are handed over to the Employer or Town Council.
38.20
BRASS WATER PRESSURE REDUCING VALVE Where specified or shown in the Drawings, provide and fix PUB approved bronze or brass water pressure reducing valves (NF E29-170) to down feed pipes where the pressures are more than 35 m hydrostatic head, all to be in accordance with the requirements of Water Supply (Network), Department, PUB. The Contractor shall remove the pressure gauge of the pressure reducing valve and install a plug after testing.
38.21
SILICON THIMBLE FOR BASIN TAPS Where instructed by the SO Rep, the Contractor shall supply and install silicon thimbles to kitchen sink and/ or wash hand basin taps. Silicon thimbles are not required for those in units at the top-most 4 storeys and those units with direct water supply. The silicon thimbles shall be of natural colour food-grade type and shall be obtained from suppliers approved by the SO Rep. Silicon thimbles for the pillar taps shall be of 18.5mm diameter, 2.5mm thick with 4 holes of 2.5mm diameter each. These silicon thimbles are to be installed between the tap inlets and the stainless steel flexible tubes. Silicon thimbles for the tap mixers shall be of 21mm outside diameter, 2.5mm thick with 4 holes of 2.5mm diameter each. These silicon thimbles are to be installed inside the tap outlet aerators.
38.22
CONSTANT FLOW REGULATOR Constant flow regulators of 8 litres per minute type shall be provided for all bib taps in the common areas (such as wash areas, staircases, etc), and all bib taps in the Pump Rooms, Centralised Refuse Chambers and Bulky Refuse Rooms of residential building blocks; except for those at the topmost four storeys. The constant flow regulators shall be fixed between the tap inlets and the tees or elbow pipe fittings. The constant flow regulators shall be of the type approved by the SO Rep and comply with the standards and regulations stipulated by PUB.
38.23
TAPS FOR STAIRS ACCESS BALCONIES Where specified or shown in the Drawings, tee off from distribution mains above roof or from SPSL mains, whichever is applicable, a 35mm stainless steel distributing pipe to supply crutch head brass hose taps at staircase in positions shown and at 1500mm high. Provide a locking device box and approved padlock to each such tap as shown in Drawings. Install stopcock to the 35mm diameter distributing pipe at the top most storey. The height shall be 1.8 m from the finished floor level. The approved padlock shall be "Union" No. 3104, "Yale" No. 110.30, "Abloy" 225, "ALA" No. 103-30, "Abus" No. 65-30, "Rocket" Size 30 or other approved padlock.
UPG07/S38.DOC(12) lkk(181206) DPD
Ugdg Spec TS 38-13/18 38.24 TWO-WAY BIB TAP (FOR BATHROOM) Where specified, provide and fix two-way bib taps to bathrooms as shown in the Drawings. Two-way bib taps shall be 15mm diameter chrome plated brass body with chrome plated brass operating handle and approved by the SO Rep and the Water Supply (Network), Department, PUB. UPVC elbow with bracket for fixing two-way bib taps as shown in the Drawings shall conform to SS 174. The bracket shall be fixed to the wall by stainless steel screws and PVC plugs. 38.25 UPVC TRUNKING FOR GAS AND WATER PIPES Where specified or shown in the Drawings, provide and install white UPVC trunking to house water and gas pipes complete with bends and fixing holders. The position and profile of UPVC trunking shall be as shown in the Drawings. Fixing holders shall be at approximately 600mm apart. Provide 5mm diameter ventilating hole at 2000mm centre to centre. 38.26 BIP TAP IN SERVICE BALCONY Where specified or shown in the Drawings, provide and fix 15mm diameter chrome plated brass hose union bib tap with knob handle to service balcony. The bib tap shall comply with BS 5412 and approved by Water Supply (Network), Department, PUB. All UPVC tee cap for fixing bib tap shall conform to SS 174 all as shown. Fix the cap to the wall by "Ramset ED 655" or other approved. 38.27 FIXING OF TAPS, STOPVALVES ETC. DURING DEFECTS LIABILITY PERIOD Alternatively the Contractor is required to retain taps, stopvalves, sink chains, plugs, etc. and fix these items as and when required by the Estates and Lands Division during the Defects Liability Period. 38.28 REFUSE CHUTE FLUSHING SYSTEM (INDIVIDUAL REFUSE CHUTES) Where applicable, Refuse Chute Flushing System shall comply with the following requirements : 38.28.1 Flushing Pipes from Ground Level Where refuse chute flushing pipes are supplied directly from PUB mains, every refuse chute shall have its own supply teed off from the distribution mains located at apron. Supply pipe of 35mm diameter stainless steel pipe to refuse chute shall have a brass stopcock with detachable brass crutch head located outside at 1.8m above apron. The brass components shall be dezincification resistant complying to BS EN 12163:1998 or BS EN 12165:1998 or BS EN 12420. Such fittings shall have the additional marking of "DZR" or "CR". The flushing pipe shall be 25mm diameter UPVC pipe complying with SS 141 Class E ringing round four sides of chute and perforated with 5mm + 1mm diameter holes at maximum 50mm centres such that the water flowing out of the holes are directed at 45 degrees towards the refuse chute wall. The flushing pipe shall be supported by non-corrosive clips or hangers to each side of the refuse chute wall. 38.28.2 Flushing Pipes to Refuse Chutes from Distribution Mains at Roof-Top where specified in the Contract (For Block With Individual Refuse Chutes) (a) Pipe & Fittings The 42mm diameter stainless steel supply pipes shall be teed off from the boostered distribution main at the roof top as in Clause 38.10 "Indirect Supply from Roof Tanks". Provide the supply pipes with 40mm ball valve, 40mm solenoid valve and 32 mm stopcocks or globe valves. There shall be one stopcock or globe valve for each refuse chute. The layout and arrangement shall be as shown in the Drawings to tops of refuse chutes or as shown in Drawing for flushing chutes. The flushing pipe shall be 25mm diameter UPVC pipe complying with SS 141 Class E ringing round four sides of chute and perforated with 5 mm +1 mm diameter holes at maximum 50 mm centres such that the water flowing out of the holes are directed at 45 degrees towards the refuse chute wall. Support the flushing pipe with non-corrosive clips or hangers to each side of the refuse chute wall.
UPG07/S38.DOC(13) lkk(181206) DPD
Ugdg Spec TS 38-14/18 38.28.2 Flushing Pipes to Refuse Chutes from Distribution Mains at Roof-Top where specified in the Contract (For Block With Individual Refuse Chutes) (Contd) (b) Solenoid Valve The 40mm solenoid valve shall be electrically operated, two-way, closed and capable of operating at zero differential pressure. The supply voltage shall be 230 + 10% at 50 Hz. The coil shall be epoxy or plastic encapsulated, of at least class F insulation, and capable of 100% continuous duty. The enclosure protection shall be at least IP 65 (according to BS 5490) and suitable for conduit connection. The enclosure shall incorporate earthing terminal and terminal block for easy maintenance. The pipe threads shall comply with BS 21. The operating pressure range shall be 0 to 4 bars. The valve body shall be of brass, bronze or other approved metal. Parts in contact with water shall be of stainless steel, brass, bronze or other approved material. All brass components shall be dezincification-resistant complying with BS EN 12163:1998 or BS EN 12165:1998 or BS EN 12420:1999. Such fittings shall have the additional marking of "DZR" or "CR" The Contractor's proposed solenoid valve shall be the type approved by the SO Rep for the refuse chute flushing systems. Submit technical information of the solenoid valve, as listed in APPENDIX S(38)-1, to the SO Rep for approval. Whenever the pressure of water leading to the solenoid valves exceeds 4 bars, such as in some staggered blocks, provide and install appropriate pressure reducing valves subject to the approval of the SO Rep. (c) Control Board The dimensions, layout and circuit diagram of the control board shall be in accordance with the Drawings. The number of relays to control the solenoid valves for refuse chute flushing shall depend on the number of solenoid valves to be used. The control board cabinet shall be securely wall mounted in the roof storage tank room next to the booster pump control panel; or at the nearest available wall space sufficient to mount the cabinet. The chosen location shall subject to the approval of the SO Rep. Provide and install rain shelter wherever it is necessary. The cabinet shall be manufactured from a minimum 2 mm gauge steel sheet using folded section or angle form bracing for rigidity of construction. The cabinet shall provide IP 33 protection while allowing for sufficient ventilation. The design and construction shall give easy access to all parts of the control board so as to minimize any hindrance to the maintenance work. Provide and install a lock to the cabinet. Provide rubber bushes at knockout holes of the cabinet for the entry of all incoming and outgoing cables. Mount one power-on indicator light directly on the front panel with locknuts to hold it firmly in position under all conditions of operation. The control board shall contain the following : (a) (b) (c) (d) (e) 1 No. 1 - 5 Nos. 2 Nos. 3 Nos. 1 No. Transformer Relays to control the solenoid valves for refuse chute flushing Earth Leakage Circuit Breakers MCB units for control circuit and solenoid valves Circuit diagram to be pasted inside the front panel
The control board shall be the type approved by the SO Rep for the refuse chute flushing system. Submit technical information of the control board, as listed in APPENDIX S(38)-1, to the SO Rep for approval. All electrical work done shall comply with EMA Wiring Regulations and shall subject to the approval of PUB and the SO Rep. All electrical work done shall comply with SSCP 5 and shall be subject to the approval of the SO Rep.
UPG07/S38.DOC(14) lkk(181206) DPD
Ugdg Spec TS 38-15/18 38.28.2 Flushing Pipes to Refuse Chutes from Distribution Mains at Roof-Top where specified in the Contract (For Block With Individual Refuse Chutes) (Contd) (d) Control Switch The control switch shall be of push-button type with one red indicator light. The red light shall be connected to the 0 - 20 hrs timer so as to indicate that the system has been activated once on that day and cannot be used until the following day. The control switch and the indicator light shall be wall mounted in the void deck close to the entrance of the pump room if possible, otherwise they shall be mounted to the wall of the nearby staircase. The chosen location shall subject to the approval of the SO Rep. The control switch and the indicator light shall be housed in a metal box, wall mounted separately and secured with a lock, to be approved by the SO Rep. (e) Electrical Wiring The power supply to the system shall be from the red phase of the booster pump system after the isolator. For blocks where there are no booster pump systems, the power supply to the system shall be from the isolator inside the water tank room. All cables and electrical wiring shall be carried in their own conduit. Cables carrying a voltage of 230V shall be PVC insulated to SS 358 and of 1.5mm2 nominal cross-sectional area. There shall be six cables, with 23 strands of 0.2mm diameter and PVC insulated, connecting the control panel to the control switch. They shall be of colour yellow, blue, brown, white, green and grey. The grey coloured cable shall be reserved as a spare. The metal conduits shall be of heavy gauge, galvanised steel conduit (Class 4), complying with BS 4568, free from internal roughness and burrs. The conduits shall run inside the building and along the staircase landing. Fixing to walls and other flats surfaces shall be by means of spacer bars saddles at maximum 1m centres for horizontal runs and 1.5m centres for vertical runs. Provide concrete stumps of 50mm diameter and 100mm high to encase the conduits at every floor level. The conduit work to the solenoid valves shall run along the piping and be properly supported. All electrical cables and conduits shall be electrically and mechanically continuous throughout. Earth the conduits with copper earthwire of appropriate size. The conduit installation shall be completed before the cables are drawn. The number of cables to be drawn into the conduits shall not exceed those set out in the PSB Code of Practice CP 5. Earth all non-current carrying metal parts of electrical equipment. Earth continuity conductors shall have a cross-sectional area of not less than that specified in CP 5. The power supply to the system shall be from the red phase of the booster pump system after the (f) Labelling of Refuse Chute Doors Label all refuse chute doors at the ground level with two alpha-numeric characters at the top right hand corner. Each character shall be about 60 mm x 40 mm. The paint used shall be waterproof and black in colour. The numbering scheme and the sample shall be approved by the SO Rep. (g) Approval of Details of Flushing System The Contractor shall complete Appendix S(38)-1 and submit the technical details of the flushing system to the SO Rep for approval within two (2) months from the date of the Employer's letter of acceptance of the Contractor's Tender.
38.28.3
Inspection During Progress of Work Provide all necessary facilities such as torch lights etc and access leading to the refuse chute flushing system for inspection by the SO Rep.
UPG07/S38.DOC(15) lkk(181206) DPD
38.28.4
Testing of Installation One month before the completion of the new installation, arrange with the SO Rep for testing of the performance and installation of the refuse chute flushing system. All Defects notified during inspection shall be rectified within such time as instructed by the SO Rep. Take all necessary precautions to prevent any collection of water inside the refuse bins during any testing which involves the flushing of refuse chutes.
38.28.5
Testing for Leakages Carry out leakage test to the following items : (a) (b) (c) joints between floor slab; joints between branch off pipes; and all the water pipes installed.
Complete the tests, including making good of all Defects within 14 days from the date work is certified complete in each apartment block.
38.28.6
Efficient Call Back Service During the period from the commencement till expiry of the contract, the Contractor shall be required to provide at no extra cost to the Employer an efficient 24 hours (whole day) call-back service and carry out necessary repairs, whether major or minor, including adjustments of all equipment installed under this contract, at any time immediately after notification by the SO Rep. Such repairs and adjustment shall be completed within the same day or such further extended time as given by the SO Rep. The Contractor shall provide a telephone pager for his maintenance supervisor and the pager number shall be given to the SO Rep. Should the Contractor fail to respond within 30 minutes after being paged the Employer reserves the right to appoint other party, or parties to execute such works, all costs and expenses incurred shall be recovered from the Contractor by the Employer or may be deducted by the Employer from monies due to the Contractor.
38.28.7
Defects Liability Period The Contractor shall during the Defects Liability Period maintain the works installed in this Contract in such manner that upon the expiration of the Defects Liability Period the works shall be in as good order and condition (fair wear and tear excepted) as they were at the commencement of the Defects Liability Period. One month before the expiry date of the Defects Liability Period, the Contractor shall arrange with the HDB's Branch Office and SO Rep to have a final joint inspection. All Defects listed after this joint inspection must be rectified by the 13th month after the certified completion of the contract. The Contractor shall rectify the outstanding Defects and conduct detailed checks on work before arranging for inspection by the Representative from HDB's Branch Office for the purpose of certifying completion of rectification of Defects. After the final inspection by the Representative from HDB's Branch Office, a list of outstanding Defects will be issued to the Contractor and the Contractor shall rectify all Defects on the list within fourteen (14) days. If the Contractor fails to rectify and make good the Defects on the second final inspection the SO Rep shall exercise its right under Clause 1.10 "Nuisance and Irregularities" to impose charges against the Contractor. Notwithstanding the above, the SO Rep shall have the right to engage his own workmen or other contractor to rectify and make good all Defects and the cost of rectification and charges imposed shall be recovered from the Contractor.
UPG07/S38.DOC(16) lkk(181206) DPD
APPENDIX S(38)-1
TECHNICAL INFORMATION ON REFUSE CHUTE FLUSHING SYSTEM
The Contractor shall provide the following information when making submission to the SO Rep for approval.
Contract Title Contract No. SO Rep Block No. Location
: : : : :
SOLENOID VALVES
Brand Type Model Country of Origin Voltage Coil Insulation Enclosure Protection Flow Rating
: : : : : : : : l/s when the pressure difference across the valve is 1 bar. Class Volts Hz
Holding Power Operating Temperature
: : : Ambient temp Fluid temp 0 to degree celcius degree celcius bars
Operating Pressure Range
UPG07/S38.DOC(17) lkk(181206) DPD
APPENDIX S(38)-1 (CONT'D)
TECHNICAL INFORMATION ON REFUSE CHUTE FLUSHING SYSTEM
Material
Valve Body Plunger Diaphragm Others (please specify)
: : : :
CONTROL PANEL
CONTROL PANEL MANUFACTURER : MCB ELCB Make Type Rating Make Type Tripping Current : : : : : : _
PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARD MANUFACTURER :
Name of Contractor
Address
Name & Position Tel No. Date
: : :
SECTION 39/...
UPG07/S38.DOC(18) lkk(181206) DPD
SECTION 39
39.0
GAS PIPE INSTALLATION The gas pipe installation shall refer to the gas pipes after the City Gas Ltd Service Valve (SV) and which includes buried service pipes, horizontal service pipes, risers and internal gas pipes. The gas pipe installation work shall be suitable for City Gas Ltd manufactured gas as specified in CP51 Code of Practice for Manufactured Gas Pipe Installation and shall be carried out by a Licensed Gas Service Worker (hereinafter referred to as "LGSW" for the purpose of this Section including all clauses and sub-clauses) and shall comply with the City Gas Ltd Requirements.
39.1
CODE OF PRACTICE AND REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS The Contractor's Registered Professional Engineer shall supervise the gas pipe installation and ensure that the work is carried out in accordance with the following requirements : (i) (ii) (iii) Public Utilities Act (Chapter 261), Public Utilities (Gas Supply) Regulations, Code of Practice for Manufactured Gas Pipe Installation, ie. CP51 including any amendments, City Gas Ltd Procedures and Requirements for gas supply; and Any other relevant rules, regulations and requirements by the relevant authority from time to time.
(iv) (v)
39.2
NOTIFICATION FOR COMMENCEMENT OF WORK Before commencement of work, the Contractor's Registered Professional Engineer shall arrange with the City Gas Ltd project coordinator and SO Rep for a site meeting. After the site meeting, the Contractor's Registered Professional Engineer shall notify City Gas Ltd before work can be carried out.
39.3
SAMPLE UNITS The Contractor shall put up sample unit for each typical installation for inspection and approval by both the City Gas Ltd Engineer and the SO Rep. The Contractor's Registered Professional Engineer shall submit two (2) sets of drawings of the sample unit to City Gas Ltd before inspection. The Contractor's Registered Professional Engineer shall only proceed with the whole installation only after the sample unit has been inspected and approved by the City Gas Ltd Engineer.
39.4
APPLICATION FOR FINAL PRESSURE TEST OF GAS PIPE INSTALLATION The Contractor's Registered Professional Engineer shall ensure that the gas pipe installation complies with the approved plan before submitting an application for final pressure test. The Contractor's Registered Professional Engineer shall carry out preliminary testing of the completed installation and rectify all Defects before arranging with the City Gas Ltd Project Coordinator for the final pressure test. All preparation for the final pressure test shall be made by the Contractor and the Contractor's Registered Professional Engineer. The final pressure test shall be conducted by the City Gas Ltd Engineer or his authorised representative.
39.4
APPLICATION FOR FINAL PRESSURE TEST OF GAS PIPE INSTALLATION (CONT'D) The application for final pressure test (City Gas Ltd Form PH-G2) must be accompanied by the following: (i) Four (4) sets of as-built drawings duly endorsed by the Contractor's Registered Professional Engineer. City Gas Ltd Form PH-G1B if necessary.
(ii)
The same endorsed as-built drawings shall be submitted to the SO Rep for endorsement. Thereafter the Contractor's Registered Professional Engineer shall be informed by City Gas Ltd in writing on the approval of the application for the final pressure test of the gas pipe installation through Form PH-GR2. A certificate of Final Pressure Test (Form PH-G2A) shall be prepared by the Contractor's Registered Professional Engineer and endorsed by City Gas Ltd once the final pressure test is passed. A copy of this certificate shall be submitted to City Gas Ltd by the Contractor's Registered Professional Engineer. In the event that the installation has failed the final pressure test, the Contractor's Registered Professional Engineer must resubmit a fresh application for final pressure test. After the gas pipe installation has been tested and passed, the Contractor's Registered Professional Engineer or LGSW shall affix all plugs, caps and end-points of the installation with warning labels which read `Gas Pipe Tested. Do Not Tamper'.
39.5
UNAUTHORISED WORK ON GAS PIPE INSTALLATION After the gas pipe installation has passed its final pressure test, the Contractor's Registered Professional Engineer shall ensure that no person is allowed to carry out any further work without prior written approval from the City Gas Ltd approving authority. Any further work on the installation, shall render the final pressure test null and void. If any further work has to be carried out, a new application for the work shall be made together with the plans. No person other than an authorised City Gas Ltd employee or authorised City Gas Ltd contractor is permitted to connect any gas pipe installation onto City Gas Ltd gas main.
39.6
APPLICATION FOR CHARGE-IN/TURN-ON OF GAS SUPPLY After the gas pipe installation has passed the final pressure test and approved by City Gas Ltd Engineer, the Contractor's Registered Professional Engineer shall apply for charge-in/turn-on of gas supply by submitting City Gas Ltd Form PH-G3. The Contractor's Registered Professional Engineer shall attach a copy of the line drawing of the gas pipe installation indicating the location of the service valves, valves, risers, meters and all installation pipes downstream of the meter. The line drawing shall be subjected to the approval of the SO Rep. The line drawing(s) of the gas pipe installation shall be displayed inside the 1st storey gas riser service duct(s). The line drawing(s) shall be placed and sealed inside an A4 size clear perspex cover and securely mounted with four stainless steel screws onto the inside of the door(s) of the riser service duct(s). Thereafter the Contractor's Registered Professional Engineer shall be informed by City Gas Ltd on the approval and charge-in/turn-on of gas supply through Form PH-GR3 & PH-GR4 respectively.
Ugdg Spec TS 39-3/15 39.7 CHARGE-IN OF GAS The Contractor's Registered Professional Engineer must be present during the charge-in of gas. The Contractor's Registered Professional Engineer shall arrange for a proof test and set up all necessary equipment, fittings and vent points for purging and ensure that all necessary safety precautions are taken. After the installation has been confirmed to be sound with the proof test, the installation is then purged and charged-in with manufactured gas. After the charge-in of the gas supply, the Contractor's Registered Professional Engineer or LGSW must affix the labels `Live Gas. Do Not Tamper' to all plugs, caps and other end points of the gas pipe installation. 39.8 USE OF GAS DETECTOR The Contractor shall use a gas detector which measures the volume of gas in air, when necessary. The LGSW is responsible for the accuracy and the use of this instrument in all the work that is carried out by him. 39.9 PIPES, FITTINGS AND VALVES All pipes, fittings and valves used in the gas pipe installation shall comply with CP51 and City Gas Ltd requirements. The diameter of all pipes as specified in the Specifications and Drawings shall be their nominal diameter. The diameter of all Polyethylene pipes as specified in the specifications and drawings shall be their outer diameter (OD) and based on a Standard Diameter Ratio (SDR) of 11. Unless otherwise specified, copper pipes to BS EN 1057: "Copper and copper alloys - seamless, round copper tubes for water and gas in sanitary and heating applications" shall be used within the unit for overhead internal gas supply pipe from meter to kitchen of individual unit. Fittings shall be of compression fittings of copper alloy and shall comply with BS EN 1254 Part 2:1998 "Capillary and Compression Tube Fittings for Copper Tubes". The contractor shall provide label/tag of unit numbers where one service duct serves more than two dwelling units per floor. The label or tag shall be a permanent feature with dwelling unit number clearly indicated and firmly attached to the piping. Galvanised steel pipes (heavy) complying with SS17 "Steel Tubes suitable for Screwing to BS 21 Pipe Threads" or BS 1387 "Screwed and Socketed Steel Tubes and Tubulars and for Plain End Steel Tubes Suitable for Welding or for Screwing to BS 21 Pipe Threads" shall be used outside the unit for incoming gas supply pipe, gas riser and horizontal supply pipe. The galvanised malleable cast iron pipe fittings shall comply with BS143 and BS1256 "Specification For Malleable Cast Iron & Cast Copper Alloy Threaded Pipe Fittings". Ductile iron pipes shall be of the flexible bolted gland joint type complying with BS EN 545 - Class K9. The gland ring shall be lead tipped nitrile rubber or epichlorhydrin. All galvanised steel pipes and fittings shall first be treated with one coat of polyvinyl butyral etching primer and one coat of approved zinc chromate primer . All the exposed galvanised steel pipes and fittings shall be painted with one undercoat and one finishing coat of approved enamel paint of colour to match the background as instructed by the SO Rep. All the galvanised steel and copper pipes including the fittings inside the service ducts, inside the false ceiling and other enclosure shall be painted with one undercoat and one finishing coat in canary yellow to BS 381C colour no. 309. For buried Service Pipe at the building apron, Polythene pipe sleeve in Unplasticised Polyvinyl Chloride (UPVC) pipe shall be used. The UPVC pipe shall conform to JIS 6741 : Class AW or SS 141 Class E. All Polyethylene pipes and fittings shall be of PE 80 Polymer and must be manufactured in accordance with (International Standard Organisation) ISO 4437. The Polyethylene pipes and fittings shall be of City Gas approved types.
Ugdg Spec TS 39-4/15 39.10 CATEGORIES OF PIPE The pipe to be installed is categorised and located in the areas as detailed below : (a) Buried Service Pipe - Pipe connecting to the vertical service pipe and is laid in concrete channels. The pipe shall extend 300mm beyond apron drain to receive City Gas Ltd connection. The pipe shall be Polyethylene pipe complying to the standards as specified and shall be sized to OD 63mm. The Polyethylene pipes shall be sleeved in Diameter 80mm UPVC pipes, and both ends of the sleeve shall be stopped with rubber wall grommet. The pipe-end to receive City Gas Ltd Connection shall be fitted with a temporary 50mm SS141 Class E UPVC end cap with the Internal Diameter pre-enlarged (Hot Water treatment) to 63.5 mm for close-fit to the Outer Diameter of the Polyethylene Pipe. The pipe-end to join to the riser shall be fitted with a 50mm GI BSP Adaptor X PE 63 mm Electrofusion Transition Elbow complying to Gas Business Engineering specifications GBE/PL3 or equivalent. Alternatively, the above-mentioned Service Pipe configuration can be installed by a factory-fitted Above Ground Entry Elbow. It shall be provided with an assembled 4 m Polyethylene tail and a 3.6 m UPVC sleeve; the elbow is zinc plated and a grey fusion bonded epoxy coated; and the steel nipple is protected by a Polyethylene sleeve and terminates in a male thread. All buried/concealed pipes shall be left exposed for City Gas Ltd inspection, testing and approval before concealment. (b) Horizontal Service Pipe - Horizontal pipe runs normally at the ground floor ceiling level and connecting to all vertical risers. The pipe shall be galvanised steel pipe to SS 17 or BS 1387. Riser - Rising pipe from ground/first floor to the top floor with a branch for a meter connection shall be provided at each floor (a riser supplies gas to either one or two flats per floor depending on the piping layout). The pipe shall be galvanised steel to SS 17 or BS 1387. - Pipe installed after the City Gas Ltd meter. The pipes shall be copper pipes which complies to BS EN 1057. Brass compression fittings for copper pipes must comply to BS 864: Part 2.
(c)
(d)
Internal Pipe
39.11
PIPE CHANNEL Where service pipes have to cross the floor aprons before entering the building, such pipes shall be accommodated in channels in the apron. The channel shall be cleared of all debris and shall be dry before the gas pipe is laid. The void space between the pipe and the channel shall be filled with cement mortar. Under no circumstances shall the service pipe be located underneath a ground beam.
39.12
PIPE SUPPORTS/BRACKETS The Contractor shall provide galvanised steel pipe brackets on horizontal run and at the ground floor areas at an interval of 3000mm (maximum) or as directed by the SO Rep. The pipe brackets shall be installed before and after every change of direction of the pipe. The pipe brackets shall also be provided at an interval of 3000mm (maximum) for vertical riser pipes. Every riser pipe shall be supported at its base by a duckfoot or similar flange device capable of supporting the total weight of the riser in accordance to CP51. Where the riser passes through a floor, the floor shall be haunched up around the riser or its pipe sleeve. The pipe sleeve shall be at least 50mm above the floor level.
39.13
PIPE SLEEVE ON FLOOR Where the gas riser pipe are not enclosed in service ducts, a PVC sleeve with a minimum of 300mm protruding above the floor level shall be provided to accommodate the gas pipe run through the floor slab. The section of the gas pipe within the sleeve shall be wrapped with petrolatum tape and the gap between the sleeve and the pipe shall be sealed with water-proofed sealant.
39.14
PIPE JOINTING MATERIALS All jointing compounds, jointing pastes, thread sealants and other jointing materials shall be of the approved type complying with BS 5292. All Polyethylene pipes shall be joined only for City Gas Ltd approved types of electrofusion fittings. The approved types of Electrofusion Control Units shall operate an output voltage of 39.5 volts. All electrofusion joints shall be carried out by trained workers, certified by the City Gas Ltd Approved Vendors or the Singapore Power Training Institute.
39.15
THREADED JOINTS Galvanised iron pipes of 80mm and below and corresponding fittings shall have taper threads except for connector backnuts to BS 21. Unsintered PTFE (Polytetra fluoro ethylene) tape complying with BS 4375 shall be used on all threaded joints. Prior to jointing, the threads shall be cleaned of all grease and particles. There shall be a 50% overlap when wrapping threads.
39.16
IDENTIFICATION OF GAS PIPES FOR COMMERCIAL AND INDUSTRIAL BUILDINGS All gas pipes shall be painted canary yellow to BS 381C Colour No. 309. In addition, a line diagram shall be provided at a suitable location indicating the position of metres, pipework and isolation valves.
39.17
ENTRY OF GAS PIPE BELOW GROUND LEVEL Direct underground pipe entry into basement shall not be allowed. Gas service pipe shall come up above ground before entering into the building. If entry of underground gas pipes through retaining walls below ground level is necessary, a steel sleeve shall be cast in situ into the retaining wall. The space between the pipe and sleeve shall be sealed at both ends with cement mortar or any other suitable sealing material. The gas pipe shall also be of heavy gauge galvanised iron to BS 1387 or SS17-Class C wrapped up with petrolatum tape with a 50% overlap for buried service pipes 80mm and below. Unsintered PTFE (Polytetra fluoro ethylene) tape complying with BS 4375 shall be used on all threaded joints.
39.18
SOLID SHAFT FOR METER INSTALLATION A solid metal shaft shall be installed at each tee-off of the riser where the gas meter is to be installed as specified in CP51.
39.19
INSTALLATION OF SOLID SPOOL A solid spool shall be installed at the vertical service pipe from the ground in the building during installation stage. The solid spool of 150mm in length shall be installed 600mm above the ground level. The spool(s) shall be replaced with standard double flanged distant piece(s)/short pipe(s) with Johnson Coupling Connectors according to CP 51 after the gas pipe installation have passed the pressure test and the installation is ready for charge-in.
39.20
BRASS BALL AND PLUG VALVES FOR GAS PIPE INSTALLATION Brass ball stop valves shall be provided to every riser pipe just before the first "Tee-off" pipe and at the riser tee-off point to every dwelling unit. The ball stop valves shall be suitable for use on City Gas Ltd town gas. The ball stop valves shall have the following : (a) Two female end connections having BSP threads, tapered in accordance with BS 21 "Specification For Pipe Threads For Tubes and Fittings Where Pressure-Tight Joints Are Made on the Threads (Metric Dimensions)". Ball and plug valves shall be of the full bore type complying with BS 1552.
(b)
39.21
GAS PIPE WITHIN THE FALSE CEILING SPACE, BASEMENT AND CONCEALED AREAS Where gas pipe is installed within the false ceiling space, basement and concealed areas (these cases to be specially approved by the City Gas Ltd ), only steel pipe of heavy gauge complying with BS 3601 or complying with the American Petroleum Institute (API) Standard 5L Grade B shall be used and shall comply with the requirements of CP 51. The pipe shall be welded and full circumferential radiography test shall be carried out on all the welds by an accredited laboratory engaged by the Contractor to verify that all these welded joints are sound. The result of radiography tests shall be endorsed and certified by the Contractor's Registered Professional Engineer and a copy shall be submitted to the SO Rep. Stainless steel pipe sleeve, one size larger than that of the gas pipe, shall be provided and exposed by 50mm on both ends of the false ceiling. All threaded joints, gas valves, fittings and controls shall be installed outside the false ceiling space of the building. Where gas pipes pass through air-conditioned areas, it shall be adequately lagged with insulating material to prevent excessive condensation.
39.22
MECHANICALLY VENTILATED KITCHEN In a mechanically ventilated kitchen where City Gas Ltd gas is to be used, a solenoid valve shall be installed before the gas meter. This solenoid valve shall automatically shut off the gas supply whenever the ventilation fan is switched off or failed to operate. In the event that the mechanically ventilated kitchen in air-conditioned or linked to an air-conditioned space, adjoining the kitchen, a gas detection system, electrically interlock to the solenoid valve and the mechanically ventilated system, shall be installed. This is to ensure that if there is a gas leak, the gas supply would be shut off automatically.
39.23
AIR-CONDITIONED AREAS WHERE GAS APPLIANCES ARE INSTALLED In air-conditioned areas where gas appliances are installed, a leak detection system shall be installed to monitor the presence of gas. Leak detector used shall comply with BS EN 50054 and BS EN 50057 or equivalent. The leak detection system shall be connected to a solenoid valve controlling gas supply to the area. The leak detection system may be linked to a monitored alarm system if necessary. All detectors and solenoid valves shall also be explosion proof and shall be certified for use in a hazardous area zone 2 environment as described under SS 254:Part1 or any equivalent standard having a similar classification. The setting for the system to cut-out shall not be more than 20% of the Lower Explosive Limit of manufactured gas (hydrogen).
39.24
PRESSURE TESTING OF PIPES Gas pipes shall be tested in accordance with the following procedures as specified in CP 51: (a) Cap or plug off all outlets of the system leaving only one opening which shall be fitted with a Tpiece having a gas cock on one end and a manometer (U-gauge)/or a pressure gauge, in the other; Pump air in the system through the gas cock on the T-piece until a pressure of 300mm w.g. is registered on the U-gauge and shut the cock. If there is no pressure drop after 10 minutes, the installation may be deemed sound; For the Polyethylene service or installation pipe after the service valve, the required test pressure is 7 kPa using a 0-200 kPa pressure gauge, and a test duration of 30 minutes; If there is no pressure drop after 30 minutes, repeat Point (b) to (c) to complete the testing; If there is a fall in pressure at the end of the test, the leak shall be traced with a soap solution, rectified and re-tested.
(b)
(c) (d)
(e) (f)
For chokage test, drop a 15mm diameter ball bearing through each riser from the highest point of the riser and ensure that the ball bearing is able to fall vertically all the way through without any obstructions from inside the riser. After the gas pipe installation has been tested and approved by City Gas Ltd, no further work shall be allowed unless written approval is obtained from City Gas Ltd . The Contractor's Registered Professional Engineer shall arrange with City Gas Ltd for charging in of gas before the blocks are handed over to the Employer.
39.25
PURGING OF PIPES (a) Purging of gas must be organised by the Designated Representative and conducted in the presence of the City Gas Ltd Project Co-ordinator. A proof test shall be carried out immediately preceeding to charging-in of all pipes. Steps must be taken to ensure that there is no naked flame or any other source of ignition in the vicinity of the purging areas and the areas are well barricaded with relevant warning signs. Vent points consisting of standpipes more than 2m long with flame traps and control valves shall be erected at suitable locations and connected to the appropriate points of the pipework via rubber hoses or other suitable hoses. Every vent point shall be supervised by the Licensed Gas Service Worker and vent points are to be located such that vent gas cannot drift into buildings. A gas detector shall be used to check the mixture content at the end of the standpipe. During the purging process, the valve cover shall be left opened. Purging is only completed when 100% discharge of gas at the standpipe is achieved. On successful completion of the purging process, the standpipe shall be disconnected from the pipe and the pipe properly plugged off and all valve corners replaced. The disturbed joints shall be tested for leakage.
(b) (c)
(d)
(e)
(f) (g) (h) (i)
(j)
FORM PH-G1B Our Ref Date : :
TEL (DID) : FAX : General Manager City Gas Pte Ltd 111 Somerset Road #05-05 Singapore 238164 Attn : ___________________________________ (Name of City Gas Project Coordinator)
Dear Sir APPOINTMENT OF DESIGNATED REPRESENTATIVE (DR) FOR GAS PIPE INSTALLATION AT (Name of Project with Block No.)
I hereby appoint the following Licensed Gas Service Worker (LGSW) to be my Designated Representative (DR) to liaise directly with your Project Coordinator on all matters relating to gas pipe installation. However I am still fully responsible for all gas pipe installation matters in this project.
Name of DR (LGSW) Licence No. Address Tel No. Fax No.
: : : : :
Yours faithfully
NAME & SIGNATURE OF QUALIFIED PERSON PE NO. CONTRACT NO. cc PMgr, Surbana : :
(Attn: ______________) (Attn: ______________)
Mech Engr, Surbana
Note :
This Form is to be used by the Qualified Person if he wishes to delegate part of his responsibility to the DR(LGSW).
FORM PH-G2 City Gas Ref No: To : General Manager City Gas Pte Ltd Attn: (City Gas' Project Co-ordinator) APPLICATION FOR FINAL PRESSURE TEST OF GAS INSTALLATION AT (Address of Premises/Development) PART I I, hereby, submit my application for testing of the following gas installation work : (Please tick the appropriate boxes) External and internal gas service pipe Internal gas pipe
The abovementioned work was carried out by our appointed LGSW. The as-built drawing (inclusive of line diagram) is attached. I confirm that the work has been carried out in accordance with the Public Utilities Act (Cap. 261) (2002 Ed), Public Utilities (Gas Supply) Regulations 1998 Ed, the Code of Practice for Manufactured Gas Pipe Installation, Singapore Standard, CP51, the Procedures and Requirements for Gas Supply and all relevant acts, regulations and rules. I will notify all parties of the date for final pressure test. Name of Designated Representative :
Signature :
Date:
I certify that the gas pipe installation for the above project has been completed and is in accordance with the Public Utilities Act (Cap. 261) (2002 Ed), Public Utilities (Gas Supply) Regulations 1998 Ed, the Code of Practice for Manufactured Gas Pipe Installation, Singapore Standard, CP51, the Procedures and Requirements for Gas Supply and all relevant acts, regulations and rules, and is ready for the final pressure test. Name of Qualified Person:
Date: Signature : ____________________________________________________________________________ PART II (This section is applicable only for minor addition and alteration work on existing gas installation) I also request that gas be turn-on to the installation upon successful completion of the final pressure test. After turn-on of the gas supply, I will inform all relevant parties accordingly not to tamper with the gas installation.
Signature of Designated Representative Date ____________________________________________________________________________ cc (1) (2) (3) (4) Developer/Owner Professional Engineer Architect Main Contractor
(Please see overleaf on Notes)
NOTES: a) b) c) The applicant shall be the Designated Representative. The Designated Representative must attend the final inspection and final pressure test. Final pressure test and turn-on of gas supply will be carried out in one operation for the following minor addition and alteration work on existing gas installations: 1 2 Turn-on of single/multi stall after charge-up to food court/eating house/canteen. Replacement/addition/relocation of appliances, inclusive of minor pipe extensions. Renewal of corroded gas pipes. Installation of valves. Termination/cap-off of gas pipes. Diversion/alteration/addition of existing service pipes in void deck or ground floor of residential premises.
3 4 5 6
UPG07/S39.DOC(10) lkk(181206) DPD
FORM PH-G2A City Gas Ref No:
To:
General Manager City Gas Pte Ltd Attn: (Name of City Gas Project Co-ordinator)
CERTIFICATE OF FINAL PRESSURE TEST LOCATION: ADDRESS: AS-BUILT PLAN NOS: _____ (1) This is to certify that the gas installation has passed the final pressure test on _______________. No person shall be allowed to carry out any further work on the installation without prior written approval from City Gas.
Certified by: ______________________________________ (Designated Representative) PE No./LGSW No: ______________________ Date: __________________ _ Approved by: ________________________________________ (City Gas Project Co-ordinator) Date: __________________ _____
cc
1) Architect 2) Owner/Developer 3) Professional Engineer 4) Main Contractor
UPG07/S39.DOC(11) lkk(181206) DPD
FORM PH-G3 City Gas Ref No : To : General Manager City Gas Pte Ltd. Attn : (City Gas' Project Co-ordinator) REQUEST FOR CHARGE-IN/TURN-ON OF GAS TO (Address of premises/development) As-Built Plan Nos : 1. I certify that the site is ready to receive gas. I further certify that the gas installation has passed the final pressure test , no further work has been carried out on the gas installation after the final pressure test and is safe for CHARGE-IN/TURN-ON. 2. After charge-in/turn-on of the gas supply to the above project, I will inform all relevant parties accordingly not to tamper with the gas installation. I also undertake to affix warning labels at all end-points of the gas pipe installation. 3. I attach a copy of the line drawing of the installation covered under this application. A copy of the line diagram has been given to the owner for display. 4. The number of end-points in the gas pipe installation is .
Signature of Designated Representative PE No/LGSW No : Name Address : Tel No : Note : 1)
Date
In the case of a designated representative who has been nominated by the Qualified Person, he should only be allowed to submit this application with the consent of the main contractor and the Qualified Person.
CONSENT BY QUALIFIED PERSON AND MAIN CONTRACTOR/OWNER (where applicable) We consent to the above application. Name of Qualified Person/Owner : PE No : Name of authorised person on behalf of Main Contractor : (with company stamp) Signature : Date : Signature : Date :
UPG07/S39.DOC(12) lkk(181206) DPD
FORM PH-GR2 Our Ref Your Ref Date TEL No. FAX No. To : (QP / DR) : : : : :
Dear Sir
APPROVAL FOR FINAL PRESSURE TEST AT (Name of Project & Block No.)
We are pleased to inform that your application for Final Pressure Test dated ________ for gas supply has been approved.
The test will be carried out on _____________ at _____________.
3 As the Designated Representative, you are required to be present. You are also required to notify all parties of the date and time for the Final Pressure Test.
For clarification, please contact our Project Coordinator Mr _________________________________ at
Tel : ______________.
Yours faithfully
for SENIOR MANAGER (CUSTOMER SUPPLY)
cc CPM, HDB (Attn : ________________)
UPG07/S39.DOC(13) lkk(181206) DPD
FORM PH-GR3 Our Ref Date TEL No. FAX To : (QP / DR) : : : :
Dear Sir
APPROVAL FOR CHANGE-IN / TURN-ON OF GAS SUPPLY AT (Name of Project & Block No.)
We refer to your application for charge-in/turn-on dated ____________ for gas supply to the above project / block.
2 We are pleased to inform you that your application has been approved and the work will be carried out on ___________ at ___________.
You are required to notify all relevant parties to witness the charge-in.
Yours faithfully
for SENIOR MANAGER (CUSTOMER SUPPLY)
cc CPM, HDB (Attn :
UPG07/S39.DOC(14) lkk(181206) DPD
FORM PH-GR4 Our Ref Date TEL No. FAX To : (QP / DR) : : : :
Dear Sir
STATEMENT OF TURN-ON OR CHARGE-IN OF GAS SUPPLY TO ________________________________________________________________ (Name of Project & block no)
This is to inform you that in response to your application for turn-on/charge-in of gas supply to the above premises, we have on _________(date) at ________(time) introduced gas into the above gas pipe installation. Kindly notify all relevant parties that gas has been turned on / charged in to the above premises. 2 You are hereby informed that no further work on the above gas pipe installation can be undertaken without our written approval.
Yours faithfully
Name & Signature of authorised officer City Gas Pte Ltd
I acknowledge that gas has been turned on / charged in on the date and time as indicated above.
Signature & Company Stamp of Applicant / Designated Representative ___________________________ Name & NRIC / Passport No.
Witnessed by HDB's C/W (applicable to gas mains only)
________________________________ Name & Signature of HDB's C/W cc CPM, HDB (Attn : ____________________) / MPC(CAD)
CEME, HDB (Attn : ____________________)
SECTION 40/.....
UPG07/S39.DOC(15) lkk(181206) DPD
SECTION 40
40.0
TRANSFER PUMPING SYSTEM INSTALLATION Where applicable, Transfer Pumping System Installation shall comply with the following requirements : Details of the proposed transfer pumping system shall be submitted to the SO Rep for approval. All work shall comply with Public Utilities (Water Supply) Regulations and SSCP48: Code of Practice for Water Services , the requirements and regulations of the Water Department, PUB and other relevant Statutory requirements.
40.1
Scope of Work The work shall include the provision, installation and testing of transfer pumping system based on the data given, complete with motors, pipework, valves, switch gears, electrical wiring, switch board and connections and all necessary accessories. Details of proposed transfer pumping system shall be submitted to the SO Rep for approval. All work shall comply with the requirements and regulations of the Water Department, PUB and other relevant Authorities and Standards.
40.2
Pumproom - General (a) (b) Water supply mains shall be brought into the building at the positions shown. A suction (low level) tank shall receive water from the water supply main through equilibrium ball float valve. Suction pipes shall then be of individual feed to each pump-set. The pumps shall deliver water through a vertical rising main direct to the storage (high level) tank at the roof of the building. The pipework shall incorporate appropriate valves and fittings as specified. Floatless level control electrodes in the suction (low level) and storage (high level) tanks shall be arranged to start and stop the pumps on predetermined water levels in the tanks as specified. Pumps (duty and standby) shall be operated by electric motors direct-coupled to them and started by suitable starters in the control switch board. The whole assembly within the pump room shall be laid out to permit ready access to all components: tanks, pipework, valves, pumps, motors, switch board, floatless level control electrodes and wiring for purposes of maintenance and repair. The switch board and pump sets shall be installed near to the entrance of pump room for this purpose.
(c) (d)
(e)
(f)
40.3
Approval of Drawings and Details of Transfer Pumping System Submit one (1) set of the following to the SO Rep for approval within two (2) months from the date of the Employer's letter of acceptance of the Contractor's Tender : (a) (b) (c) Detailed proposal complete with Appendix S(40)-1 duly filled and signed by the Contractor. Characteristic curves of every pump to indicate the points of performance. Three (3) sets of fully dimensioned scaled drawings of every pump room to indicate : (i) (ii) (iii) (iv) (v) (vi) (vii) Piping and pumpset layout in pump room Position of control panel and floatless level control electrodes PUB's water incoming pipe Rising main Sizes of all fittings Points and details of support for pipes, valves and fittings Mounting of pumpsets
Submit to the SO Rep, fully dimensioned final drawings of the above before the installation is commissioned by the SO Rep.
40.4
Deviations from Approved Drawings and Details of Transfer Pumping System Work shall commence only after the approval of the proposal by the SO Rep. Seek fresh approval for any deviation from the approved proposal, failing which the whole installation shall not be accepted by the Employer. The written approval of the Drawings shall in no way relieve the Contractor of his responsibility or obligations should the plant or any of its parts proved inadequate with regard to strength, performance or efficiency.
40.5
Building-In The Employer reserves the right to build in any steel supporting members or frameworks for the pumping system. Supply all relevant dimensions and information on these pumping system and steel member supports and attend to the work. The Contractor shall be responsible for any error or damages found subsequently.
40.6
Pumps All pumps shall be of horizontal spindle, single-stage, end suction centrifugal pumps or vertical multi-stage centrifugal pumps with mechanical seals and high performance efficiency of not less than 55%, driven by electric motors through suitably guarded flexible couplings. The whole unit shall be mounted on a common steel base and secured with galvanised steel plain washers, spring washers and double lock nuts. The pumpset foundation shall be properly grouted on complete installation. Galvanised steel bolts and nuts shall be used for mounting the pumpset. The casing of the end suction centrifugal pump shall be of hard, close-grained cast iron or other approved metal. The casing of the vertical multi-stage centrifugal pump shall be stainless steel, bronze or other approved metal. All internal surfaces of the pump (cast iron type) that come into contact with water shall be coated (fusion bonded) with an approved layer of non-toxic epoxy complying with SS 375:2001. The impeller shall be bronze or stainless steel and the shaft shall be of stainless steel and able to transmit the required power and to ensure the rigidity of rotating parts. The entire length of the shaft shall be suitably protected against corrosion and be supported by heavy duty bearings in robust housing well clear of the rotating parts. Bearings shall be protected against corrosion and be efficiently lubricated. The pump shall be of approved type and able to deliver the required capacity of water based on data given in Appendix S(40)-1. Type and make of pump shall be subjected to the approval of the SO Rep.
40.7
Ductile Iron Pipes, Fittings and Special Castings All pipes and pipe fittings shall be approved by Water Department, PUB. All pipes, fittings and special castings in the pump room and to the roof tanks shall be ductile iron complying with BS EN 545. Ductile iron flanges type PN 16 shall comply with BS EN 545. All pipes and fittings shall be internally cement mortar lined in accordance with the relevant clauses in BS EN 545. The mixture shall be tested according to the relevant clauses in BS EN 545. Pipe joints and fittings along any section shall be of flanged type, the thickness and drilling of which shall comply with BS EN 545 type PN 16. Thickness of sealing compound between the flanged ends shall be at least 2mm. Galvanised steel bolts, washers and nuts shall be used for the installation. Ductile iron pipes, socket and spigot type complying with BS EN 545 is permissible only for vertical riser except that the joint immediately above roof shall be of flanged joint. All vertical rising mains shall run inside the buildings along the staircase landing/access corridor. All pipes which pass through walls or floors shall be insulated by cork and sealed on the outer 12mm with approved compound. All pipes which do not pass through the wall or floor but running along the wall shall be supported with built in clips spaced at maximum 2.7m centres. Unless otherwise specified, sizes of pipework shall be as follows : Size of Delivery Piping 100mm Size of Suction Piping 80mm
40.8
Valves An approved 100mm equilibrium ball float valve shall be fitted in the suction tank and bolted directly to the incoming water supply pipe. It shall be able to operate on a water pressure in the incoming water supply pipe of not less than 700 KN/m2 and shall be tested and approved by Water Department, PUB. The fulcrum and lever shall be of bronze with copper ball float. The internal valve shall be of bronze with leather trim and the packing plate of gun metal with winged guide and links. The body shall be of copper alloy with bronze liner and gun metal seal ring and the flange shall be at right angle and drilled to BS 4504 or BS 10 with approved rating. Gate valves and check valves shall be of type used in the high quality water works practice and shall comply with BS 5163 and BS 5153 respectively. The valves shall be tested and approved by Water Department, PUB and the SO Rep. The wedge of the gate valves used shall be of rubber bonded gate. The internal surface of valve body shall be coated with approved material. The spindle of the gate valves shall be stainless steel or high tensile brass or aluminium bronze or other approved. Gate valves shall have the directional arrow and the words "open" and "shut" cast on and shall be installed near the inlets and outlets of each suction low level tank and storage high level tank. The suction pipe of each pump shall be fitted with a 80mm gate valve followed by a 80mm rubber expansion joint. The delivery pipe shall be fitted with a 80mm rubber expansion joint, a 80mm spring loaded check valve and a 80mm gate valve. The check valve and gate valve shall be separated by a short pipe of 200mm in length. A 80mm to 100mm enlarger shall be provided between the 80mm pipe and 100mm rising main. An approved 100mm non-slam type check valve shall be fitted along the rising main in the pumproom followed by 100mm gate valve. This check valve shall also be separated from the gate valve by a short pipe of 300mm in length. All 80mm and 100mm check valves shall be of approved non-slam silent spring loaded type (with stainless steel spring).
40.9
High Pressure and Expansion Connection 80mm rubber expansion joint of approved type shall be used to connect the outlet of the pump and the delivery pipe and shall be flanged at both ends and be able to sustain a working pressure of not less than 1400 KN/m2. The rubber expansion joint shall be limited from expanding excessively in axial direction. The delivery pipe shall be supported by at least 2 nos. of 50mm galvanised mild steel pipe and be properly secured to the floor or wall for this purpose. 80mm rubber expansion joint shall be used to connect the suction pipe and the discharge pipe of each pump.
40.10
Bends All bends used in the pipework shall be of 90 degree long bend flanged at both ends and shall be cement mortar lined internally in accordance with BS EN 545.
40.11
Metal Soil Tray Provide and install metal soil tray under sanitary pipe in the pump room.
40.12
Ball Float Valve Position 100mm ball float valve as indicated in the Drawings to allow full flow of water from PUB main.
40.13
Power Supply Power supply available for electric motors shall be 415 volts, 3 phase 50 cycles alternating current.
40.14
Motors High efficiency electric motors shall be squirrel-cage, totally enclosed fan cooled type with minimum Class F insulation except where specified otherwise and be designed for continuous maximum rating. The motors shall be the approved type and model. Terminal boxes shall be totally enclosed, of water-tight design and fitted with cable glands.
40.15
Motor Starters The starter shall be submitted for approval before installation. the starter shall provide means of starting or stopping the motors by push-button or be automatically activated by the control electrodes in the suction (low level) and storage (high level) tanks. The starters shall be wired in such a way that the duty pumpset shall be activated by normal level floatless control relay unit and standby pumpset shall be activated by alarm and emergency level floatless control relay unit. Selection of duty or standby pumpsets shall be determined by a manual selector switch. Automatic duty change over relay shall also be provided to alternate standby and duty pumpsets automatically and shall be interconnected to a time setting device to cut off the operation of the pumpset during night time. (a) Star-Delta Starter (For blocks below 25-storey) The starters for motors shall be star-delta starters, capable of limiting current to 2 1/2 times the full load current at (a) standstill (starting up the Plant) and at (b) changeover (when the starter automatically changes the connections from Star to Delta winding). Each starter shall have time relay, overload release, no volt release pilot lamp. The operating voltage of the control coil shall be 230 V. The starting apparatus shall be of "frequent duty" rating and be capable of starting under the above conditions intermittently up to 40 times per hour at not less than 20 seconds intervals. It shall be so designed such that under 16 operation hours per day the Mechanical and Electrical Endurance is not less than 50,000 operations. A manufacturer's certificate to this effect shall be produced when required. (b) Soft Starter (For blocks with 25-storey & above) The soft starters shall be designed to operate at 3-phase 400V 50Hz shall be suitable for starting/stopping 3-phase induction motor used for water pumping system. The soft starter shall provide soft acceleration during starting of motor and soft deceleration during stopping of motor. It shall be able to reset by itself automatically when power supply resumed from the power failure. Built-in fault indication lights shall also be incorporated in the soft starter to indicate the fault conditions. The approved soft starter shall consist of three pairs of thyristors with full wave control and shall be designed for continuous operation above 40 degree C. The soft starter shall also be sized according to the full load current of the motor and shall comply with IEC 947-4-2 or the equivalent.
40.16
Time Switch Connect digital time switch of approved type within the electric circuit, wired to control the pumping hours within the preset time. Time switch shall be able to operate on 24 hours basis with minimum 150 hours reserve to cater for temporary power failure.
40.17
Floatless Level Control Relay Units Floatless level control electrodes mounted on the suction (low level) and storage (high level) tanks in each building shall be connected directly to the relay units mounted on the wall beside the tanks. These floatless level control electrodes shall be positioned near to the manhole of the tank and be easily accessible for maintenance. The floatless level control electrodes shall be installed on the storage tanks operating at Normal Demand Settings. The floatless level control electrodes shall be arranged to start and stop the pumpset at predetermined high and low levels. A floatless level control relay unit mounted on the wall beside the suction tank shall be used to provide over-riding control of the storage tank floatless level control relay units such that at a preset low water level in the suction tank, the storage tank floatless level control relay units will not start the pump. The floatless level control relay units shall be interconnected to the motor starters through the pumps' automatic change over relay. Separate floatless level control relay unit shall be installed for the alarm system and shall be set to activate the alarm device and standby pumpset when the water falls below a predetermined level. The floatless level control relay unit shall also activate the alarm device and deactivate the duty pumpset when the water rises to a predetermined overflow level. The floatless level control relay unit shall be of plug-in relay unit type for easy maintenance. The unit shall have built-in arrester circuit to protect against surge from power source and lightning surge from the electrodes. Electrodes shall be stainless steel and be provided with adequate electrode separators. The ceilings roses and flexible cables from the electrode holders shall be legibly marked `NL' and ÈA' respectively. Electrodes holders mounted on tanks shall be easily accessible and removed for maintenance. Run the wiring and conduits from the electrodes to the floatless level control relay units and keep them as short as possible. The wiring to the electrodes shall not run through the same conduit as the power supply wiring. Provide wirings and conduits from the switchboard inside the pump-room to each of these floatless control relay units. The type and make of this floatless control relay unit shall be approved by the SO Rep.
40.18
Number of Floatless Level Control Relay Units Provide a total of three numbers of floatless level control relay units. Where storage tanks are divided into two or more separate tanks, at least two separate tanks shall be installed with floatless level control electrodes.
40.18.1
Floatless Level Control Relay Unit No. 1 (At Storage Tank Room) Two sets of electrodes for the normal level setting shall be connected so as to activate the starters independently and to activate the alarm and deactivate the duty pumpset when the water rises to a predetermined overflow level. The operating points of both sets of floatless level control electrodes shall be of the same setting.
40.18.2
Floatless Level Control Relay Unit No. 2 (At Storage Tank Room) Provide two sets of alarm and emergency electrodes to activate the alarm and standby pumpsets in case the water level falls below a predetermined level.
40.18.3
Floatless Level Control Relay Unit No. 3 (At Pumproom) Provide one set of electrodes for the suction tank to actuate a warning indicating light and override the operation of pumpsets when the water level in the suction tank (low level tank) falls below a predetermined level. Provide one set of electrodes to activate a warning indicating light and alarm when the level in the suction tank rises to a predetermined overflow level.
40.19
Control Panel Provide and install an approved control panel required to serve the pumproom as shown on the Drawings. Sufficient wall space shall be selected within the pumproom for the wall mounted control panel and it shall be near to the entrance of the pumproom. Unless otherwise specified, the panel shall be of front connected type and manufactured from electrogalvanised sheet metal of minimum 1.5 mm thickness using folded section or angle form bracing for rigidity of construction. The panel shall have adequate ventilation and shall be drip proof. The construction shall be such that it allows for ready access to the interior of the cubicles for operation and maintenance purposes. Provide control panel with rubber bushes at knockout holes for the entry of all incoming and outgoing cables. Mount instruments indicating lights, rotary switches, etc. directly on the front panel with locknuts to hold such items firmly in position under all conditions of operation. The control panel shall contain the following : (a) (b) 1 No. ON/OFF control switch. 1 No. Automatic/Manual Selector rotary switch for Auto and Manual operation as described in Clause 40.15 "Motor Starters". 2 Nos. Starters as described in Clause 40.15 "Motor Starters". 2 Sets ON/OFF isolators with 3 phase MCB unit for each starter. 2 Sets Manual `START'/`STOP' button switch for the starter with pilot lamps indicating `run' and `trip' as described in Clause 40.15 "Motor Starters". 1 No. Pump selector switch as described in Clause 40.17 "Floatless Level Control Relay Units". 1 No. Digital Time switch as described in Clause 40.16 "Time Switch". 1 No. Relay for reset of àlarm bell' and `light'. 1 No. Relay to cut off the warning device and pumpsets during night time. 2 Nos. Relays to activate overflow warning device. 2 Nos. Relays to activate alarm bell for motor overload trip. 3 Nos. Relay to control the pumpsets. 3 Nos. Relays for testing of alarm bell and indicating panel lights. 1 No. Automatic change over relay. 1 No. Suction tank low level warning indicating panel light. 3 Nos. Alarm indicating panel light. 6 Nos. MCB (4A) units for control circuits. 3 Nos. Phase indicating panel light with MCB (2A) unit. 1 No. MCB (4A) unit for alarm circuit. 2 Nos. Hour-run counters for pumpsets.
(c) (d) (e)
(f) (g) (h) (i) (j) (k) (l) (m) (n) (o) (p) (q) (r) (s) (t)
40.19
Control Panel (Cont'd) (u) (v) (w) 1 No. Ammeter with appropriate scale and current transformer (C/T) if required. 1 No. Phase Selector Switch for Ammeter. 1 No. Test push button for alarm bell and indicating panel lights.
The whole of the electrical work shall comply with SS CP5 and be subject to the approval of the SO Rep.
40.20
Electrical Wiring Install the cables from the electrical mains isolator in the pumproom. Internal cables and wiring within the pumproom shall be PVC insulated to SS 358 suitable for a 400V 3 Phase 50 cycles 4 wire system and they shall be carried in conduit or cable trunking. The metal conduit shall be of heavy gauge, G.I. conduit (Class B), complying with BS 4568, free from internal roughness and burrs. Fixing to walls and other flat surfaces shall be by means of spacer bars saddles at maximum 1 m centres for horizontal runs and 1.5 m centres for vertical runs. Conduit termination to loop-on boxes shall consist of a screwed socket and smooth bore bush butt to adaptors boxes, fuse boards and cable trunking, etc. The termination shall consist of a flanged coupling, lead washer and smooth bore bush. Where the conduit is in contact with any structural steel work an efficient and permanent metallic connection shall be made between the conduit and the steelwork. All conduits and trunking shall be electrically and mechanically continuous throughout and shall be efficiently earthed with copper earthwire (in conduits and 100mm x 50mm trunking) and copper tape (in 150mm x 75mm trunking). Copper earth wire or tape shall be of appropriate sizes. Cable trunking shall comply with SS 249 and shall be fabricated from 1.0mm mild steel sheets, in 1.83 m or 2.44 m lengths and provided with a 50mm fixing sleeve, spot welded on one end of each length. The trunking shall be treated with approved anti-corrosion paint and finishing paint to a minimum thickness of 45 microns. Jointing of trunking shall be effected by means of round headed bolts and nuts. 4 mm x 20 mm copper earth tap shall be laid in the trunking run. The copper shall be tinned where it is bolted down. The entire trunking and conduit installation shall be completed before the cables are drawn. The number of cables to be drawn into the conduits shall not exceed those set out in the relevant table in the PSB Code of Practice CP 5. Run conduits for the floatless level control relay units wiring inside the building and along the staircase landing. Provide an inspection joint for every 10 metres run of conduit. Where exposed to rain, the inspection boxes, elbows and tees shall be sealed. Provide concrete stumps of 50mm diameter and 100mm high to encase the conduits at every floor level. All seals shall be tested not less than 24 hours after completion. This test shall be made with insulation testing equipment of the "Megger" type at 500V and an infinity reading shall be obtained before the conductors are connected to any apparatus. Where wiring are to be in conduit or duct buried in the floor, it shall terminate in approved junction boxes adjacent to the machine or foundation plinth with water-tight flexible conduit enclosing the cables between motors and junction boxes. All non current carrying metal parts of electrical equipment shall be effectively earthed. Earth continuity conductors shall have a cross-sectional area of not less than that specified in CP 5 .
40.21
Alarm and Emergency Device Alarm device shall be turned on by the alarm and emergency level control relay units at the storage (high level) tank and the level control relay unit at the suction (low level) tank. This alarm device shall be in the form of an alarm bell placed beside the control panel in the pumproom and a red bulb placed outside the pumproom and near the entrance. The bell shall be weather-proof and of heavy duty type. The make and model shall be approved by the SO Rep. The alarm bell shall be cut off during night time by the time switch so that only the emergency start warning light on the switchboard panel shall function at night when the water level falls below the èmergency level'. Provide a re-set button for the alarm and the warning device. The location of the warning device shall be approved by SO Rep. If a shield is required, the design shall be approved by the SO Rep.
40.22
Installation of Pump Sets The water pumpsets shall be properly installed onto the concrete foundation. The 16mm high tensile steel foundation bolts shall be cast into the concrete to a minimum depth of : 100mm for motor up to 7.5 KW 150mm for motor above 7.5 KW The Contractor shall be responsible to ensure that the pumpsets are installed according to standard procedure of installation or according to the pump supplier's recommendation subject to approval by the SO Rep. The pumpset nearest to the pump room door shall be legibly marked permanent lettering and numbering of "P1" and the other "P2", or as directed by the SO Rep. The pumpsets shall be isolated from the foundation by anti-vibration mounting between the base plate and the foundation. Provide mechanical insulators to isolate the pumpset from the floor if vibration is still substantial. All pumpsets shall be properly aligned and levelled. The pumpsets shall be isolated from the suction and delivery pipes by rubber expansion joints as specified in Clause 40.9 "High Pressure and Expansion Connection". The outlet of the suction pipe shall be set in line with the inlet of the pump and the inlet of the delivery pipes in line with the outlet of the pump. The delivery pipes shall be properly supported and secured by rigid steel supports. The sizes and types of fittings in front of the pumps shall be approved by the SO Rep before installation. Check the location for the switch board. Should this location be not at optimum position, inform the SO Rep immediately. All bolts, nuts and washers used for mounting the pumpsets shall be of galvanised steel.
40.23
Vibration and Noise The vibration and noise generated by pumpsets shall not be unduly disturbing to dwellers in the adjacent flats. Provide and fix all necessary noise and vibration abatement devices and equipments to reduce vibration and sound.
40.24
Inspection During Progress of Work Provide all necessary facilities such as torch lights etc and access leading to the tanks for inspections by the SO Rep during progress of work.
40.25
Sterilisation of Pipes, Fittings and Pumps Before Operation Clean and flush all pipes, fittings and pumps internally with sufficient chemical to give the water a dose of 50 parts of chlorine to one million part of water (ie. 50 ppm) before the commencement of the operation of the system, in accordance with PUB requirement.
40.26
Testing of Transfer Pumping System Installation One month before the completion of the installation, arrange with the SO Rep for the test of performance and installation of the transfer pumping system. Furnish the data on transfer pumping system in Appendix S(40)-2 and submit 2 copies to the SO Rep one week before the testing of the transfer pumping system. All Defects notified during the inspection shall be rectified before the building blocks are handed over to the Employer, failing which appropriate action shall be taken against the Contractor by the SO Rep.
40.27
Servicing and Maintenance During Time for Completion/Defects Liability Period Allow for making good of all Defects and leakages, carry out routine servicing and maintenance of the transfer pumping system and provide an efficient call-back service during the Time for Completion/Defects Liability Period.
40.27.1
Making Good Defects and Leakages During the Maintenance Period, make good all Defects and leakages found in the system and installation, replace and/or repair all defective parts or items whenever required if such replacement or repair has been necessitated by the reasons of Defects in the equipment, or as a result of wear and tear. All costs involved shall be deemed to be included in the Contract Sum. The Contractor shall have a supervisor-in-charge of the service, maintenance and repair work to be carried out under this Specifications. The supervisor shall be thoroughly competent in supervising the service, maintenance and repair of transfer pumping system and the workmen shall also be skilled in the service, maintenance and repair of transfer pumping system.
40.27.2
Fortnightly and Monthly Inspection All parts and equipment comprising the complete transfer pumping system shall be maintained and inspected strictly in accordance with the check-list as set out in Appendix S(40)-3. The check-list shall be duly completed by the Contractor when performing the fortnightly and monthly inspections. Any Defect detected shall be rectified by the Contractor immediately. Always arrange for a Representative from HDB's Branch Office to be present during these inspections. Furnish to the HDB's Branch Office a Maintenance Schedule for fortnightly and monthly inspections upon certified completion of the Contract. The Contractor's Supervisor shall also sign on the attendance book/card provided by the Employer in the pump room after completion of each inspection. Items in the check-list for fortnightly inspection shall include : (a) (b) (c) (d) (e) (f) (g) (h) General condition of pumproom Correct setting of time switch Auto/Manual selector switch in "Auto" position Power supply selector switch in "On" position Control panel indicating lights Alarm bell and bulb Suction tank electrode and control module Motor running current
40.27
Servicing and Maintenance During Time for Completion/Defects Liability Period (Cont'd) Fortnightly and Monthly Inspection (Cont'd) (i) (j) (k) (l) (m) (n) 80mm check valve 80mm gate valve Alignment of couplings 100mm check valve 100mm gate valve Ball float valve
40.27.2
In addition to items under fortnightly inspection, items required to be inspected monthly shall also include: (a) (b) (c) (d) (e) 40.27.3 Motor insulation Pump mechanical seal Pump lubrication oil level (if applicable) Contactors and relays Storage tank electrode and control module
Efficient Call-Back Service Provide an efficient 24 hours (whole day) call-back service. All urgent calls or complaints such as no water supply or triggering of the alarm bell of the Transfer Pumping System shall be attended to immediately upon notification to the Contractor by the Representative from Essential Maintenance Service Unit or Branch Office. Provide mobile phone for his maintenance supervisor and the mobile phone number shall be given to the respective Branch Office so that immediate notification of any urgent call-back service can be met. Provide a set of standby pump to keep the transfer pumping system functioning when the faulty pumps are taken back to the workshop for repairs. In the event that the Contractor fails to : (a) (b) (c) respond within 30 minutes after being called; or attend to an urgent call or complaint immediately upon notification; or carry out the fortnightly and monthly inspection of the transfer pumping system;
the SO Rep may engage another Contractor to carry out the work and all cost incurred shall be recoverable from him by the Employer or deducted by the Employer from monies due or become due to the Contractor. Notwithstanding the above, the SO Rep shall exercise its rights under the Clause 1.10 "Nuisance and Irregularities" to impose charges against the Contractor. The Contractor's obligations under the Contract shall not be invalidated in the event that other Contractors are instructed to rectify Defects in the transfer pumping system or to carry out the routine servicing and maintenance of the transfer pumping system arising out of the Contractor's failure to do so when directed by the SO Rep.
40.28
Rectification of Defects Prior to Issuance of Final Completion Certificate One month before the expiry date of the Final Completion Certificate, the Contractor shall arrange with HDB's Branch Office and the SO Rep for a final joint inspection. All Defects listed after this joint inspection shall be rectified by the 13th month after the certified completion of the contract. Rectify the outstanding Defects and conduct detailed checks on work before arranging for inspection by the Representative from HDB's Branch Office for the purpose of certifying completion of rectification of Defects.
UPG07/S40.DOC(10) lkk(181206) DPD
40.28
Rectification of Defects Prior to Issuance of Final Completion Certificate (Cont'd) After the second final inspection by the Representative from HDB's Branch Office, a list of outstanding Defects shall be issued to the Contractor and the Contractor shall rectify all Defects on the list within fourteen (14) days. If the Contractor fails to rectify and make good the Defects on the second final inspection, the SO Rep shall exercise its right under Clause 1.10 "Nuisance and Irregularities" to impose charges against the Contractor. Notwithstanding the above, the SO Rep shall have the right to engage his own workmen or other contractor to rectify and make good all Defects and the cost of rectification and charges imposed shall be recovered from the Contractor.
UPG07/S40.DOC(11) lkk(181206) DPD
APPENDIX S(40)-1 HOUSING & DEVELOPMENT BOARD
DATA ON TRANSFER PUMPING SYSTEM The Contractor shall furnish the following data for all transfer pumping systems when making submission to the SO Rep. Contract Title Contract No. SO Rep Building Block No. No. of Storeys : : : : :
____________________________________________________________________________________________ Water Supply PUB direct water supply to _____________________ storey No. of flats units to be supplied from roof tanks F = ___________________
Vertical Head from ground floor to inlet of roof tank H = ___________________ metres
Roof Tanks (a) (b) (c) Total effective capacity of roof tanks required C1 = 700F = ______________ litres ____________ cu m No. of separate Tank groups (to be interlinked) = _______________________ Tank internal dimension (Length x Width x Height) Tank 1 = _________________ x __________________ x __________________ = ____________ cu m Tank 2 = _________________ x __________________ x __________________ = ____________ cu m or (d) Precast Tanks = _____________________ Nos. x 11.83 cu m = ____________________ cu m
Suction Tanks (a) Capacity of suction tank = ____________________ cu m
Tank internal dimension (Length x Width x Height) = ____________ x _____________ x ____________ or (b) Precast Tank = Nos. x 3.731 cu m = cu m
_____________________________________________________________________________________________ Pump Room Location Platform Level Floor space available : : : _______________________________ _______________________________ m Length x Width Height _______________________________ sq m _______________________________ m
UPG07/S40.DOC(12) lkk(181206) DPD
APPENDIX S(40)-1 (CONT'D) Pump
Discharge capacity required Vertical Head Proposed Pumps
: : :
Q1 = 0.05F = ______________________ l/sec H1 Make Type Model = ______________________ m water ______________________ ______________________ ______________________ ______________________ l/sec ______________________ m water ______________________ rpm ______________________ mm ______________________ KW ______________________ %
Flow Total Head Speed Impeller Diameter Power required Pump efficiency
: : : : : :
Q2 H2
(Please attach characteristics curve for pumps) The Contractor must propose the pump to operate at maximum pump efficiency. However, the flow rate shall preferably not exceed 10 l/s and the pump efficiency shall not in any case be less than 55%. ____________________________________________________________________________________________ Motor Make Type Model Rated Output Voltage/Phase Frequency No Load Speed Insulation Class Line Current at Full Load : : : : : : : : ______________________ ______________________ ______________________ ______________________ KW ______________________ ______________________ RPM _____________________ ______________________ amp
_____________________________________________________________________________________________ Coupling
Make and Type Main Dimension
: :
_____________________ _____________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
UPG07/S40.DOC(13) lkk(181206) DPD
APPENDIX S(40)-1 (CONT'D) Control Panel
MCB for main incoming supply :
Make Type Rating
______________________________________________________ ______________________________________________________ ______________________________________________________
Starter
MAKE, TYPE AND MODEL _______________________________________ Capacity _____________________________________________________ Overload release ratings ________________________________________ Approximate Kw ratings ____________ Kw at ___________ v ________ ph
Floatless Level Switch Time Switch
: :
MAKE, TYPE & MODEL MAKE, TYPE & MODEL Reserve for
________________________________________ ________________________________________ _____________________________________ hrs ________________________________________
Selector Switch Automatic Change Over Relay
: :
MAKE, TYPE & MODEL
_____________________________________________________________
PIPELINES Diameter of Suction Pipe : Total Length of Suction Line : No. and Type of Valves Along Suction Line : Diameter of Discharge Pipe : Diameter of Rising Main : Total Length of Discharging Line : No. and Type of Valves Along Discharge Line :
Remarks :
Contractor's Name : _________________________________________________________________________ Address : ________________________________________________________________________
Signature Telephone No.
: ________________________________ : _________________________________
Name : ____________________________ Date : _____________________________
UPG07/S40.DOC(14) lkk(181206) DPD
APPENDIX S(40)-2 TESTING DATA ON TRANSFER PUMPING SYSTEM The Contractor shall furnish the following data and submit to the SO Rep one week before the testing of the transfer pumping system. Contract Title : Block No. : Location : Building Data No. of Storey Direct Supply Total head Suction tank : : : : Contract No. Ref No. Contractor : : :
(storey) (m) m
Dwelling units per storey : Total dwelling units from tanks (F) Required pumping capacity (0.05xF) : m (Internal Dimension) Motor 2 TEFC
(l/s)
Motor Data Brand Type Model Serial No. Rated Output (Kw) Volt/Phase/Frequency Insulation Class/Speed (rpm) Related Current (A) Pump Data Brand Model Type Serial No. Impeller Diameter (mm) Specified capacity (l/s) Control Panel Data Starter - Brand - Model - Type Starter Changeover Relay Starter MCB Overload Protector Pump 1
Motor 1 TEFC
/ 3 / 50 / rpm
/ 3 / 50 / rpm
Pump 2
Fitting Data Coupling (brand)/size Rubber expansion joint (Brand) 80 dia. suction gate valve (Brand) 80 dia. delivery gate valve (Brand) 80 dia. check valve (Brand) 100 dia. gate valve (Brand) 100 dia. check valve (Brand) No. 1 No. 2
Brand Brand Brand Model Setting Range Suction Tank Module Storage Tank Module - Normal Storage Tank Module - Emergency Suction Electrode Holder Normal Level Electrode Holder Emergency Level Electrode Holder
Time Switch
Latching Relay 8-Pin Relay 11-Pin Relay -
Brand Model Serial No. Brand Brand Brand :
______________________________ _________________________ (Contractor's Name) Company Stamp (Signature) Date ____________________________________________________________________________________________ FOR OFFICIAL USE Motor Motor 1 Motor 2 Tested by : _____________________ Starting/Changeover Current (A) 1) TO/HTN/TN ( ) Date Running Current (A) R/Y/B 2) TO/HTN/TN ( ) Date Pump Pump 1 Pump 2 Checked & Time for 250mm of water (sec) Verified by : _____________________ STO/HTO ( ) Date Approximate Capacity (l/s)
Recorded & Submitted by
UPG07/S40.DOC(15) lkk(181206) DPD
APPENDIX S(40)-3 To : SO ( )
#FORTNIGHTLY/MONTHLY ROUTINE INSPECTION REPORT ON TRANSFER PUMPING SYSTEM DURING TIME FOR COMPLETION/DEFECTS LIABILITY PERIOD
Date of Inspection :
_________________________ Pump Room : 1/2#
Contract Title
: ___________________
Block No. : _____________________
Location : _________________ Remedial Action/Date
(A) 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8.
Item Fortnightly General Condition of Pumproom Correct Setting of Time Switch Auto/Manual selector switch in "Auto" position Power supply selector switch in "On" position Control panel indicating lights Alarm bell and bulb Suction Tank electrode and control module Motor Running Current R Y B
Checked
Rated current : _________ A Motor output : _________ KW 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14. 80mm Check Valve 80mm Gate Valve Alignment of Couplings 100mm Check Valve 100mm Gate Valve Ball Float Valve
Pumpset 1 * A * A * A
Pumpset 2 * A * A * A
(B) Monthly (in addition to items in fortnightly inspection) 1. Motor insulation (megaohms) 2. Pump mechanical seal 3. Pump Lubrication Oil Level (if applicable) 4. Contractors and Relays 5. Storage tank electrode and control module
Signature Inspection conducted by Name/NRIC Name of Contractor Acknowledged By
: : : :
_____________________________________________ _________________________________/___________ _____________________________________________ _____________________________________________ Clerk-of-Works ( ) Date
# x *
: : : :
Delete as necessary Checked and found in order To rectify immediately Readings by measuring instrument
SECTION 41/...
UPG07/S40.DOC(16) lkk(181206) DPD
Ugdg Spec TS 41-1/1
SECTION 41
41.0
MISCELLANEOUS (SANITARY & WATER INSTALLATION)
41.1
WATER SAVING TAPS FOR PUBLIC WASH HAND BASINS AND SHOWERS
41.1.1
Water Saving Taps For Public Wash Hand Basins Where applicable, taps to all wash hand basins in staff and public toilets, in swimming complex, sports complex, indoor stadium, training stadium, training hall, bus interchange etc shall be 15mm diameter chrome plated brass self-closing delay-action taps comply with Public Utilities (Water Supply) Regulations and SSCP48: Code of Practice for Water Services , the requirements and regulations of the Water Department, PUB and other relevant Statutory requirements The flow rate and the timing shall not be more than 8 litres per minute and 3 seconds respectively.
41.1.2
Water Saving Tap For Public Showers Where applicable, taps to all the public showers and showers in swimming complex, sports complex, indoor stadium, training hall etc shall be of self-closing delayed action shower taps complying with the standards stipulated by the PUB. The flow rate and the timing shall not be more than 8 litres per minutes and 15 seconds respectively.
41.2
FLUSH VALVES Unless otherwise stated, provide and install sensor operated flush valves (battery operated) to all public toilets (water closets and urinals only) as shown in the Drawings, all in accordance with the "Guidelines on Flush Valves" issued by Water Reclamation (Network) Department, PUB, "Code of Practice on Sanitary, Facilities and Fittings for Public Toilet" and "Code of Practice for Water Services". Submit application and obtain approval from the relevant authorities prior to installation of the flush valves.
41.3
SOAP TRAYS Where specified, soap trays shall be recessed white vitreous china 150mm x 150mm "Twyfords 3008" or other approved type, one to each shower compartment. Position of soap trays shall be determined by SO Rep.
SECTION 42/...
Ugdg Spec TS 42-1/1
SECTION 42
(RESERVED)
SECTION 43/...
SECTION 43
43.0
BOOSTER PUMPING SYSTEM INSTALLATION Where applicable, Booster Pumping System Installation shall comply with the following requirements :
43.1
SCOPE OF WORK The work shall include the provision, installation and testing of booster pumping system based on the data given, complete with motors, pipework, valves, flow sensors, switch gears, electrical wiring, control panel and all necessary accessories. Details of proposed booster pump installation shall be submitted to the SO Rep for approval. All work shall comply with Public Utilities (Water Supply) Regulations and SSCP48: Code of Practice for Water Services , the requirements and regulations of the Water Department, PUB and other relevant Statutory requirements
43.2
APPROVAL OF DRAWINGS AND DETAILS OF BOOSTER PUMPING SYSTEM Submit one (1) set of the following to the SO Rep for approval within two (2) months from the date of the Employer's letter of acceptance of the Contractor's Tender : (a) (b) Detailed proposal complete with Appendix S(43)-1 duly filled and signed by the Contractor. Characteristic curves of every pump to indicate the point(s) of performance.
Work shall commence only after the approval of the proposal by the SO Rep. The Contractor shall seek fresh approval for any deviation from the approved proposal, failing which the whole installation shall not be accepted by the Employer. The written approval of the Drawings shall in no way relieve the Contractor of his responsibility or obligations should the plant or any of its parts proved inadequate with regard to strength, performance, efficiency or other aspect.
43.3
BUILDING-IN The Employer reserves the right to build in any steel supporting members or frameworks for the pumping system. Supply all relevant dimensions and information on these pumping system and steel member supports and attend to the work. The Contractor shall be responsible for any error or damages found subsequently.
43.4
BOOSTER PUMPS AND MOTORS All booster pumps of approved type shall be of vertical in-line centrifugal pumps with mechanical seals and high performance efficiency, driven by TEFC electric motors except otherwise specified in this Specifications. Casing of pump shall be of hard, close-grained cast iron or other approved metal. The impeller shall be bronze or stainless steel and the shaft shall be of stainless steel type and able to transmit the required power and to ensure the rigidity of rotating parts. The entire length of the shaft shall be suitably protected against corrosion and be supported by heavy duty bearings in robust housing well clear of the rotating parts. The shaft seal shall be of mechanical seal type. Bearings shall be protected against corrosion and be efficiently lubricated. Make of the pumps shall be tested and approved by the SO Rep. The electric motors shall be squirrel-cage, totally enclosed fan cooled type and with at least Class B insulation except where specified otherwise and be designed for continuous maximum rating. Type and model shall subject to approval of the SO Rep before installation. Terminal boxes shall be totally enclosed, of water-tight design and fitted with cable glands. The power supply for the electric motors shall be 415 volts, 3 phase 50 cycles alternating current. 230 volts single phase motor shall be used as and when directed and approved by the SO Rep. The power of the motor shall not be more than 1 kw.
43.4
BOOSTER PUMPS AND MOTORS (CONT'D) Unless otherwise specified, the design requirements of the booster pumps shall be as follows : No. of Dwelling Unit Served by Booster Pump 20 or below Above 20
Specified Flow Rate (l/s) 3 5
Pressure Head (m) 9 9
Shut-off Head (m) Not less than 12 Not less than 12
The pumpsets shall be marked with permanent letterings "P1" & "P2" respectively.
43.5
PIPE AND FITTINGS All pipes and pipe fittings shall be approved by Water Department, PUB. All stainless steel pipes, fittings and accessories shall conform to BS 4127 : Part 2. All ductile iron pipes and fittings shall comply with BS EN 545. Ductile iron flange type PN 16 shall comply with BS EN 545. All ductile iron pipes and fittings shall be internally cement lined in accordance with the relevant clauses in BS EN 545. Test the mixture according to the relevant clauses in BS EN 545. Apply two coats of PUB approved epoxy to the portion where cement lining is not possible. Pipe joints, fittings and special tees, for all ductile iron distribution mains and draw-out pipes at roof level shall be ductile iron flanged type. Flanges type PN 16 shall comply with BS EN 545. The internal and external surfaces of the stainless steel pipes and fittings shall be clean, smooth and free from Defects. Cutting and fixing shall be in strict accordance with the manufacturer's instructions. Pipes shall be factory marked with manufacturer's name or identification mark and classification of pipes. Any unmarked pipes shall not be accepted. Unless otherwise specified, use light gauge stainless steel pipes for water supply. The stainless steel pipe fittings shall be of capillary or compression fittings of copper alloy and shall comply with BS 864 : Part 2 and all PUB latest requirements. All stainless steel pipes shall not be bent. Support the pipes with stainless steel supports and clips or concrete supports. All pipes which pass through walls or floor shall be insulated and sealed with approved compound. All pipes which do not pass through the wall or floor but running along the wall shall be supported with built in stainless steel supports and clips spaced at 1m centres. Unless otherwise specified, sizes of pipework shall be as follows : Size of Suction Piping Size of Discharge Piping Size of By-Pass Piping 42mm 42mm 15mm
Connect suction pipe of each pump from the 100mm interconnecting pipe of roof storage tanks and connect the discharge pipe of each pump to the 100mm distribution main which serves the top-most 2 storeys only. No mechanical tee shall be used for connections between suction pipe and interconnecting pipe and between discharge pipe and distribution main. Provide end thrust supports at both ends and bends of 100mm distribution main according to the Drawings. All bolts, nuts and washers used for the ductile iron pipes for installation shall be galvanised steel whilst those for the stainless steel pipes and supports shall be stainless steel of similar grade.
43.6
VALVES Provide suction pipe of each pump with a 40mm full bore ball stop valve. Fit the delivery pipe of each pump with a 40mm spring loaded check valve and 40mm full bore ball stop valve. Provide the by-pass pipe with a 15mm stop cock. All valves used shall comply with PUB Water Supply Regulations.
43.7
LABELLING STICKERS Stick aluminium foil stickers of length 75mm and width 40mm bearing the words "DO NOT OPEN" onto the 100mm gate valves at the draw-out pipes from storage tanks to the 100mm distribution main serving the top-most 2 storeys. The base colour of the aluminium foil stickers shall be in white and the wordings shall be in red. The dimensions of the wordings shall be of height 10mm and width 6mm and the line thickness 1mm. Submit a sample of the stickers to the SO Rep for approval.
43.8
POWER SUPPLY Power supply to the booster pumps and control system at the roof storage (high level) tank room shall be connected from the electrical mains isolator in the roof storage tank room.
43.9
MOTOR SOFT-STARTERS Soft-starters for motors shall be of the type as approved by the SO Rep. The soft-starters shall provide means for the soft-start and soft-stop of the motors automatically. The operating voltage of the soft-starter shall be 230V. Both soft-start time and soft-stop time of the soft-starter shall be set at 3 seconds. Each soft-starter shall be designed to operate intermittently during the 24 hours of operation per day. The soft-starters shall be wired in such a way that the duty and standby booster pumps shall be actuated by flow sensors and floatless level switch. Selection of duty or standby booster pumps shall be determined by a selector switch. Provide automatic duty change over relay to alternate standby and duty booster pumps and it shall be interconnected to a flow sensor to start and stop the operation of the booster pumps according to actual water demand.
43.10
FLOW SENSORS The flow sensor shall be of the type approved by the SO Rep. A flow sensor shall be installed at the central discharge pipe of the booster pumps. Monitoring head of the sensor shall be of stainless steel. The enclosure protection shall be at least IP 67. The voltage of the flow sensor shall be 24V DC. The flow rate range shall be set to 115mm per seconds (adjustable range : 10mm per seconds to 2m per seconds).
43.11
FLOATLESS LEVEL CONTROL RELAY UNIT Connect floatless level switch control electrodes mounted on each storage (high level) tank directly to the floatless level switch mounted inside the switch board panel. Position the floatless level switch control electrodes near to the manhole of the tank for easy maintenance. Arrange the floatless level switch control electrodes to start and stop the pumpset at pre-determined levels. Interconnect the floatless level switch to the motor soft-starters through the pumps' automatic change over relay. The floatless level switch shall be of plug-in relay unit type for easy maintenance. The unit shall have built-in arrester circuit to protect against surge from power source and lightning surge from the electrodes. Provide stainless steel electrodes with adequate electrodes separators. The ceiling roses and flexible cables from the electrode holders shall be legibly marked "BP". Electrodes holders mounted on tanks shall be easily accessible and removed for maintenance. Run the wiring and conduits from the electrodes to the switch board panel and keep them as short as possible. The wiring to the electrodes shall not run through the same conduit as the power supply wiring. The type and make of the floatless level switch shall be approved by the SO Rep.
43.12
CONTROL PANEL Provide and install approved control panel required to serve the booster pumpsets. Sufficient wall space shall be selected within the roof storage tank room for the wall mounted control panel and shall be near to the booster pumpsets subject to approval of the SO Rep. Unless otherwise specified, the panel shall be of front connected type and manufactured from electrogalvanised sheet metal of minimum 1.5 mm thickness using folded section or angle form bracing for rigidity of construction. The panel shall have adequate ventilation and shall be drip proof. The construction shall be such that it allows for ready access to the interior of the cubicles for operation and maintenance purposes. Provide control panel with rubber bushes at knockout holes for the entry of all incoming and outgoing cables. Mount instruments indicating lights, rotary switches, etc directly on front panel with locknuts to hold such items firmly in position under all conditions of operation. The control panel shall contain the following : (a) (b) (c) (d) (e) (f) (g) (h) (i) (j) (k) (l) (m) 1 No. Rotary selector switch for Auto selection 1 No. Rotary key selector switch with 3 points selection 2 Nos Soft-Starters as described in Clause 43.9 "Motor Soft-Starters" 2 Sets ON/OFF isolators with 3 phases MCB unit for starters 1 No. Delay Timer with 0-6 seconds setting 1 No. Timer with 0 - 30 minutes setting 6 Nos. Relays to control the pumpsets 1 No. Automatic change over relay 5 Nos. MCB unit for control circuits 3 Nos. Phase indicating panel light 2 Nos. Pump "run" indicating panel light 2 Nos. Pump "trip" indicating panel light 1 No. Low level warning indicating panel light
The whole of the electrical work shall comply with SS CP 5 and be subject to the approval of the SO Rep.
43.13
ELECTRICAL WIRING Install cables from the electrical mains isolator in roof storage tank room or at other locations. Internal cables and wiring shall be PVC insulated to SS 358 suitable for a 400V 3 phase 50 cycles 4 wire system and they shall be carried in conduit or cable trunking. The metal conduit shall be of heavy gauge, GI conduit (Class B), complying with BS 4568:1970, free from internal roughness and burrs. Fixing to walls and other flat surfaces shall be by means of spacer bars saddles at maximum 1 m centres for horizontal runs and 1.5 m centres for vertical runs. Conduit termination to loop-on boxes shall consist of a screwed socket and smooth bore bush butt to adaptors boxes, fuse boards and cable trunking, etc. The termination shall consist of a flanged coupling, lead washer and smooth bore bush. In the event that the conduit comes in contact with any structural steel work, an efficient and permanent metallic connection shall be made between the conduit and the steelwork. All conduits and trunking shall be electrically and mechanically continuous throughout and shall be efficiently earthed with copper earthwire (in conduits and 100mm x 50mm trunking) and copper tape (in 150mm x 75mm trunking). Copper earth wire or tape shall be of appropriate sizes. Cable trunking shall comply with SS 249 and be fabricated from 1.0mm mild steel sheets, in 1.83m or 2.44m lengths and provided with a 50mm fixing sleeve, spot welded on one end of each length. The trunking shall be treated with approved anticorrosion paint and finishing paint to a minimum thickness of 45 microns. Jointing of trunking shall be effected by means of round headed bolts and nuts. 4mm x 20mm copper earth tape shall be laid in the trunking run. The copper shall be tinned where it is bolted down.
43.13
ELECTRICAL WIRING (CONT'D) The entire trunking and conduit installation shall be completed before the cables are drawn. The number of cables to be drawn shall comply to SS CP 5. Test all seals not less than 24 hours after completion. This test shall be made with insulation testing equipment of the 'Megger' type at 500V and an infinity reading shall be obtained before the conductors are connected to any apparatus. Where wiring are to be in conduit or duct buried in the floor, it shall terminate in approved junction boxes adjacent to the machine or foundation plinth with water-tight flexible conduit enclosing the cables between the motors and junction boxes. Earth all non current carrying metal parts of electrical equipment. Earth continuity conductors shall have a cross-sectional area of not less than that specified in CP 5.
43.14
INSTALLATION OF BOOSTER PUMPS Install booster pumpsets on the floor/wall and support and secure them with stainless steel or concrete supports along the pipes close to suction and discharge side of the booster pumpsets. Install pressure gauge of appropriate scales at the discharge pipe of each booster pump. The pressure gauge shall comply with BS1780 for measuring gauge pressure. The pressure gauge shall be marked with the manufacturer's trademark or brand name. The Contractor shall be responsible to ensure that the booster pumps are installed according to standard procedure of installation or according to the pump supplier's recommendation subject to the approval of the SO Rep. Check the location for the control panel. Inform the SO Rep immediately should this location be not at optimum position.
43.15
VIBRATION AND NOISE Vibration and noise generated by the pumpsets shall not be unduly disturbing to dwellers immediately below. Provide and fix all necessary noise and vibration abatement devices and equipments to reduce the vibration and sound.
43.16
STERILISATION OF PIPES, FITTINGS AND PUMPS BEFORE OPERATION Clean and flush all pipes, fittings and pumps internally with sufficient chemical to give the water a dose of 50 parts of chlorine to one million parts of water (ie. 50 ppm) before the commencement of the operation of the system, in accordance with PUB requirement.
43.17
INSPECTION DURING PROGRESS OF WORK Provide all necessary facilities such as torch lights etc and access leading to the tanks for inspections by the SO Rep during of progress of work.
43.18
TESTING OF BOOSTER PUMPING SYSTEM INSTALLATION One month before the completion of the installation, arrange with the SO Rep for the test of performance and installation of the booster pumping system. Furnish data on booster pumping system in Appendix S(43)-2 and submit 2 copies to the SO Rep one week before the testing of the booster pumping system. All Defects notified during the inspection shall be rectified by Contractor at his own cost and expense before the building blocks are handed over to the Employer, failing which action shall be taken against the Contractor by the SO Rep.
43.19
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE DURING TIME FOR COMPLETION/DEFECTS LIABILITY PERIOD Allow for making good of all Defects and leakages, routine servicing and maintenance of the booster pumping system and provision of an efficient call-back service during the Time for Completion/Defects Liability Period.
43.19.1
Making Good Defects and Leakages During the Defects Liability Period, make good all Defects and leakages found in the system and installation, replace and/or repair all defective parts or items whenever required if such replacement or repair has been necessitated by reasons of Defects in the equipment, or as a result of wear and tear. All costs involved shall be deemed to be included in the Contract Sum. The Contractor shall have a Supervisor-in-Charge of the service, maintenance and repair work to be carried out under the Specifications. The Supervisor shall be thoroughly competent in supervising the service, maintenance and repair of the booster pumping system and the workmen shall also be skillful in the service, maintenance and repair of booster pumping system.
43.19.2
Monthly Inspection Maintain and inspect all parts and equipment comprising the complete booster pumping system strictly in accordance with the check-list as set out in Appendix S(43)-3. The check-list shall be duly completed by the Contractor when performing the monthly inspection. Any Defect detected shall be rectified by the Contractor immediately. The Contractor shall always arrange for a Representative from HDB's Branch Office to be present during these visits. The Contractor shall furnish to HDB's Branch Office a maintenance schedule for monthly inspection upon certified completion of the Contract. Items in the Check-list shall include : (a) (b) (c) (d) (e) (f) (g) (h) (i) (j) (k) Flow sensors Soft-starters, relays and control module Power supply selector switch in "On" position Control panel indicating lights Electrodes in storage tanks Motor running current Motor insulation Pump mechanical seal Pressure gauges 40mm check valve and ball stop valves Thrust supports at distribution main
43.19.3
Efficient Call-Back Service Provide 24 hours (whole day) call-back service. Attend to all complaints immediately upon notification to the Contractor by the Representative from Essential Maintenance Service Unit or Branch Office. Provide mobile phone for his Maintenance Supervisor and the mobile phone number shall be given to the respective Branch Office so that immediate notification of any call-back service can be met. Provide a set of standby pump to keep the booster pumping system functioning when the faulty pumps are taken back to the workshop for repairs. In the event that the Contractor fails to : (a) (b) (c) respond within 30 minutes after being called; or attend to complaint immediately upon notification; or carry out the monthly inspection of the booster pumping system;
the SO Rep may engage another Contractor to carry out the work and all cost charges shall be recoverable from him by the Employer or from monies due or become due to the Contractor. Notwithstanding the above, the SO Rep may exercise its rights under Clause 1.10 "Nuisance and Irregularities" to impose charges against the Contractor. The Contractor's obligations under the Contract shall not be invalidated in the event that other Contractors are instructed to rectify Defects in the booster pumping system or carry out the routine servicing and maintenance of the booster pumping system arising out of the Contractor's failure to do so when directed by the SO Rep.
43.20
RECTIFICATION OF DEFECTS PRIOR TO ISSUANCE OF FINAL COMPLETION CERTIFICATE One month before the expiry date of the Defects Liability Period, the Contractor shall arrange with HDB's Branch Office and SO Rep for a final joint inspection. All defects listed after the joint inspection shall be rectified by the 13th month after the certified completion of the Contract. Rectify all outstanding Defects and conduct detailed checks on work before arranging for inspection by Representative from HDB's Branch Office for the purpose of certifying complete rectification of Defects. After the second final inspection by the Representative from HDB's Branch Office, a list of outstanding Defects shall be issued to the Contractor and the Contractor shall rectify all Defects in the list within fourteen (14) days. If the Contractor fails to rectify and make good the Defects on the second final inspection, the SO Rep shall exercise its right under Clause 1.10 "Nuisance and Irregularities" to impose charges against the Contractor. Notwithstanding the above, the SO Rep shall have the right to engage his own workmen or other contractors to rectify and make good all Defects and the cost of rectification and charges imposed shall be recovered from the Contractor.
DATA ON BOOSTER PUMPING SYSTEM
The Contractor shall furnish the following data for all booster pumping systems when making submission to the SO Rep. Contract Title Contract No. SO Rep Building Block No. No. of Storeys No. of Dwelling Units Per Storey No. of Storeys served by Booster Pump No. of Dwelling Units served by Booster Pumps No. of Water Tanks on the Roof Top : : : : : : : : :
BOOSTER PUMPS
Discharge capacity required Pressure Head Shut-off Pressure Head Proposed Booster Pumps
: :
Q H Ns
l/sec m water m water
Make Type Model
Speed Impeller Diameter Power required
: : :
rpm mm kw
(Please attach characteristics curve for booster pumps)
APPENDIX S(43)-1 (CONT'D) MOTOR
Make Type Model Rated Output Voltage/Phase/Frequency No-Load Speed Insulation Class Line Current at Full Load
: : : : : : : : amp RPM KW
CONTROL PANEL
MCB for main incoming supply :
Make Type Rating
Soft-Starters
BRAND & MODEL CAPACITY
Overload Release Ratings KW ratings Floatless Level Switch Flow Sensor Selector Switch Automatic Change over relay
: : : : : : kw at BRAND & MODEL BRAND & MODEL BRAND & MODEL v ph
Name of Contractor Address
: :
Signature Tel No.
: :
Name : Date :
TESTING DATA ON BOOSTER PUMPING SYSTEM The Contractor shall furnish the following data and submit to the SO Rep one week before the testing of the booster pumping system. Contract Title : Block No. Location A. PUMPS 1. Brand 2. Model B. MOTORS 1. Serial 2. Brand 3. Rated Output 4. Rated Current C. VALVES 1. 40 mm Ball Stop Valve 2. 40 mm Check Valve 3. 15 mm Gate/Ball Stop Valve 4. 15 mm Stop Cock 5. 40 mm Solenoid Valve 6. 40 mm Stop Cock 7. 32 mm Check Valve F. FLOW SENSOR kw A kw A BRAND No. 1 No. 2 : : No. 1 No. 2 D. PRESSURE GAUGE E. CONTROL PANEL 1. Timer 2. Delay Timer 3. Control Module 4. Auto Changeover Relay 5. Control MCB 6. Starter MCB 7. Key Switch 8. Control Relay 9. Overload Relay 10. Soft-Starter Key No. Contract No. Ref No. Contractor : : : Brand Model Range Key No.
Recorded & Submitted by : (Contractor's Name) Company Stamp
FOR OFFICIAL USE Shut Off Pressure (bar) PUMP NO. 1 Running Pressure (bar) Running Current (A) Shut Off Pressure (bar) PUMP NO. 2 Running Pressure (bar) Running Current (A)
Mode 1 Mode 2 Mode 3 Mode 1 Mode 2 Mode 3 -
Pass/Fail Pass/Fail Pass/Fail Pass/Fail Pass/Fail Pass/Fail
Tested by 1) TO/HTN/TN ( 2) TO/HTN/TN ( ) Date )
Checked & Verified by STO/HTO ( ) Date
UPG07/S43.DOC(10) lkk(181206) DPD
APPENDIX S(43)-3
To :
SO (
MONTHLY ROUTINE INSPECTION REPORT ON BOOSTER PUMPING SYSTEM DURING TIME FOR COMPLETION/DEFECTS LIABILITY PERIOD
Date of Inspection : Block No. :
Contract Title Pump Room : 1/2#
: Location :
Items 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Flow Sensor Soft-starter, relay and control module Power, supply selector switch in "On" position Control panel indicating lights Electrodes in storage tanks Motor Running Current Rated current : Motor Output : 7. 8. 9. A KW B Motor insulation (megaohms) Pump mechanical seal Pressure gauges * * R Y * *
Checked
Remedial Action/Date
Pumpset 1 A A A * * * *
Pumpset 2 A A A
10. 40mm check valves and bell stop valves 11. Thrust supports at distribution main
Signature : : Checked & found in order X : To rectify immediately * : Readings by measuring instrument Inspection conducted by Name/NRIC : Name of Contractor : Acknowledge By : Clerk-of-Works ( ) Date /
SECTION 44/.....
UPG07/S43.DOC(11) lkk(181206) DPD
SECTION 44
44.0
DRY/WET RISING MAIN AND DOWN-COMER (FIRE FIGHTING) INSTALLATION
44.1
GENERAL It is the intention of the Drawings and Specifications to provide a complete operating system. The omission from the Specifications or Drawings of any details in construction, installation materials, or specialities necessary for a complete operating and safe system shall not relieve the Contractor from furnishing and completing the same in place all at the Contractor's own cost and expense. Should the requirements of the Drawings or Specifications conflict with codes, regulations or standards, the most stringent of the requirements shall govern the Works. For buildings under construction, dry/wet rising mains shall be provided according to the requirements of the FSSD. The Contractor shall make the necessary arrangements to enable the officers from FSSD and/or BCU to carry out inspection and also to witness the testing during the Time for Completion and any time period where liquidated damages are imposed under the Contract. The Contractor shall engage a company/firm which is registered under BCA registration head of ME06 (Fire Prevention and Protection System) for the Works. The Contractor shall shall be responsible for the necessary submission, supervision, completion, testing and commissioning of the installations under the Contract as required by FSSD and/or BCU. The Contractor shall submit all requisite certificates including testing and commissioning certificates to the SO Rep according to the requirements of FSSD and/or BCU.
44.2.1
Scope of Work (a) Dry rising main shall be installed in building where any floor is at a height beyond 10m and not exceeding 60m above the ground level. The dry rising main shall be complete with landing valve at every storey, breeching inlet and breaching inlet cabinet (where applicable). The minimum nominal bore of a dry rising main shall be : (i) 100mm galvanised steel Class `C' where the rising main does not exceed 45m in height. The rising main shall be complete with 2 way breeching inlet. 150mm galvanised steel Class `C' where the rising main exceed 45m in height. The rising main shall be complete with 4 way breeching inlet.
(ii)
(b)
For building with height above 60m and the building is not more than 25 storey, both dry rising main and down-comer (fire fighting) shall be provided as shown in the Drawings. The dry rising main shall be provided as per sub-clause 44.2.1 "Scope of Work" in (a)(ii) above. The down-comer (fire fighting) shall be 100mm diameter galvanised steel class `C' pipe. The down-comer (fire fighting) shall be connected to domestic water tank and installed with check valves, gate valves and drain cocks at roof top. It shall be complete with landing valves from the topmost storey to the storey at 60m level. The exact location of the 60m level shall be confirmed with the SO Rep. In the case for existing building, the Contractor shall alter the existing pipe-works according to details as shown in the Drawings.
44.2.1
Scope of Work (Cont'd) (c) For building which is more than 25 storey, wet rising main shall be provided according to SS CP 29 and the requirements as shown in the Drawings. Fire intercom system shall be provided between the pump rooms of transfer pumps and the fire pumps. The Contractor shall provide all technical data as in Appendix A30. (d) For buildings with existing down-comer or dry/wet rising main systems the Contractor shall carry out the complete test stipulated herein and rectify all defects before the application of TOP or CSC to BCU (ARCH).
44.2.2
Rules And Regulations Ensure that the installation of dry/wet rising main system is in accordance with the latest requirements of the following : (a) (b) (c) (d) (e) (f) Building Control Act and the Regulations made thereunder; Public Utilities Act, and the Regulations made thereunder; Professional Engineers Act; Fire Safety Act; SS CP 29; Any other relevant rules, regulations and by-laws.
In cases of discrepancies between the various standards, the local standards shall prevail.
44.2.3
Material Material, appliances and components shall comply with the requirements of the relevant Singapore Standards, British Standards or their equivalent. Particular items shall comply with the following requirements or their equivalent : (a) (b) (c) (d) (e) (f) (g) (h) (i) (j) (k) Ball Valves Boxes for landing valves Breeching inlets Landing valves Pipes Pipe fittings Pipe and valve flanges Pressure gauges Gate valves Starting switches (automatic) Fire safety signs, notices and graphic symbols BS 1212 : Part 1, 2 or 3 BS 5041 : Part 4, 5 BS 5041 : Part 3 BS 5041 : Part 1, 2 BS 1387, ASTM A120 BS 1740 BS 10 or BS 4504 BS 1780 BS 5163 BS 587 BS 5499 : Part 1
44.2.4
Quality Of Goods And Materials The quality of goods and materials shall comply with the requirement and regulations of the HDB and the relevant Authorities. No Works shall commence until samples of the materials have been approved by the SO Rep. However, if the installed materials are subsequently found to be of inferior quality to that of the samples submitted, or if the materials proved to be unsuitable for use, or if the materials failed to perform to the requirement specified in the Specifications, the approval of the samples shall be withdrawn with immediate effect. In this respect, the Contractor shall allow for up to 2 tests for each type of fittings to be carried out by PSB or PSB's accredited laboratory as and when requested by the SO Rep. The sample shall be selected at random at the discretion of the SO Rep. The Contractor shall make good all Defects and replace all inferior or defective materials at his own cost and expense. The SO Rep shall exercise its right under Clause 1.10 "Nuisance And Irregularities" to impose charges for irregularities committed if the materials supplied are inferior or different from the samples approved. Where products are manufactured under PSB's Batch Inspection Scheme, additional testing shall not be necessary unless otherwise specified. The SO Rep shall be consulted when in doubt. Any other relevant requirements issued by the FSSD shall be complied with.
44.2.5
Approval/Submission of Drawings and Details Where applicable, submit to the SO Rep for approval two sets of the following documents : (a) (b) (c) (d) (e) Detailed installation proposal complete with necessary drawings. Technical specifications and samples (if appropriate) of all equipment employed in the installation. Electrical wiring diagram of the whole installation. Technical specifications and characteristic curves of every pump to indicate point/s of performance. Fully dimensioned scaled drawings of every pump room to indicate : (i) Proposed water levels in the suction tank of which the pump shall start and stop operation. (ii) Position of switchboard. (iii) Piping/Water tank layout. (iv) Sizes of all pipes and fittings. (v) Points and details of support for pipes, valves and fittings.
The Works shall only commence upon approval of the Contractor's proposal by the SO Rep but additional approval shall be sought before any deviations from the approved proposal can be carried out, failing which the whole installation may not be accepted by the SO Rep. The approval of the proposal shall in no way relieve the contractor of his responsibility should the installation or any of its parts proved inadequate in any aspect. On completion of the installation, provide three sets of operation and maintenance manuals and the testing record/results of each installation. Upon completion of the Works, the Contractor shall produce and submit the following to the SO Rep: 1 2 3. Two CDROMs containing the as-built drawings in "pdf" format. Every "pdf" drawing must show the "As-Built" stamp plus the LEW's Certification/Stamp. One set of as-built tracings. Every tracing must be stamped "As-Built" plus the LEW's Certification/Stamp. Three sets of as-built prints. Every print must be stamped "As-Built" plus the LEW's Certification/Stamp.
Incorporate the following information where applicable : (a) (b) (c) (d) Position of pump rooms. Routes of all rising mains and pipes. Piping and equipment arranged inside the pump room. Schematic diagram of the rising main hydraulic circuit showing the positions of each pump, valve, pressure switch, flow switch and etc.
44.2.5
Approval/Submission of Drawings and Details (Cont'd) (e) (f) (g) (h) Locations of every landing valve and breeching inlet. Schematic circuit diagram and single line diagram of the overall system wiring. Control circuit diagram of wet riser pump. Circuit diagram of the floatless level control relay units.
44.2.6
Installation (a) (b) Seek approval from the SO Rep before any hacking work is to be done. For rising main pipe and down-comer (fire fighting) through the floor slabs, provide concrete curb around the rising main pipe. The concrete curb shall be 100mm high and surrounding the pipe. Casting of the concrete curb shall be done together with re-casting of concrete slab as one single operation. The concrete curb and slab shall be water tight. The work shall include hacking, coring, drilling etc, as well as re-casting the concrete slab. The Contractor shall provide and cast water-proof concrete slab of not lesser strength than the original slab.
(c)
44.2.7
Damage To Existing Roof Structures And Roofing System For work to existing building blocks, the Contractor shall liaise with the relevant Branch Office or Town Council for a joint inspection together with the SO Rep to determine the existing roof condition before the commencement of the Works. All Defects noted shall be recorded in writing and verified by the parties concerned before the commencement of the Works. Upon the completion of the Works, the Contractor shall engage the same roofing specialist contractor, who had provided the warranty for the existing roofing system, to replace any broken or cracked secondary roof slab and carry out all the repairs and reinstatement works to the damaged waterproofing membrane and roof structure. During the progress of the Contract, the Contractor shall upon verbal or written notification by the SO Rep, engage the same roofing specialist contractor, who had provided the warranty for the roofing system, to repair immediately any leakage in the roof caused by the Contractor.
44.3.1
Pipeworks & Fittings (a) General Pipework for dry/wet rising mains and down-comers (fire fighting) shall be galvanised steel conforming to BS 1387 or ASTM A120 and BS 1740. Tubes/pipes and fittings used shall be suitable for pressures up to 21 bars. Mill certificates shall be produced on request to countercheck with the heat numbers of tubes/pipes at the Site. All fittings shall, as far as practicable, be the same size as the pipes connected. Elbows shall be used, where practicable, in preference to bends; square elbows shall not be permitted. Valves used shall be FM and UL listed according to the pressure rating of SS CP29. All fittings/ valves used shall be rated at least 1.5 times the system working pressure. All valves shall be kept securely strapped with padlock. All underground pipework shall be of ductile iron cement lined or other approved material.
44.3.1
Pipeworks & Fittings (Cont'd) (a) General (Cont'd) Pipework shall follow the contours of walls and shall be graded to ensure venting and draining. The clearance between pipework and wall and any other fixtures shall be as shown in the construction detail of service duct for dry/wet rising main and down-comer (fire fighting). Joints shall not be embedded in any wall, floor or ceiling and pipework shall not be embedded in the structure of floors. Where pipework passes through walls, sleeves shall be provided. Sleeves shall be of the same metal as the pipe. The space between pipework and sleeve shall be plugged with an approved sealant. All entry and exit holes to or from a building for pipework shall be sealed and plugged. The sealant shall be mastic compound or silicone rubber. Where the pipework enters the building through a large hole or duct, a mild steel blanking plate not lesser than 6mm thick shall be built into the walls of the hole or duct; the service pipes shall pass through clearance sockets welded to the plate and the space between pipe exterior and socket interior shall be sealed and plugged. For wet rising main landing valves, a permanent notice shall be provided in 25mm(minimum) block letters of RED colour on a WHITE background and place it in a position adjacent to the valve reading DANGER! HIGH PRESSURE LANDING VALVE. (b) Pipe Joints All piping shall be installed by means of flanged fittings, mechanical pipe couplings or other approved means. Flanges shall be raised face conforming to BS 4504. Flanged joints shall be made with flat ring gaskets suitable for the pressure and temperature and extending to the inside of the bolt circles. Mechanical pipe couplings shall be self-centring and engage and lock in place the grooved or shouldered pipe and pipe fitting ends in a positive watertight couple. Coupling housing clamps shall consist of two or more metal castings holding in place a composition water sealing gasket so designed that the internal water pressure increases the watertightness of the seal. The coupling assembly shall be securely held together by two or more heat treated carbon steel bolts and nuts. Pipe grooving shall be in accordance with the pipe coupling manufacturer's latest specifications. The entire coupling installation shall be from the same manufacturer and in accordance with the latest manufacturer's recommendations. Couplings and fittings used shall be FM and UL listed according to the pressure rating of SS CP 29. (c) Pipe Supports Typical pipework hangers for the dry/wet rising main and down-comer (fire fighting) system shall be as shown in the Drawings. Support the pipework on main load bearing members of the structure. The method of support shall be done according to the practice in the industry subject to the approval of the SO Rep. Rising main support shall be located at every storey. Horizontal pipe runs shall be provided with hangers spaced at a maximum distance of 4m. (d) Painting Galvanised steel pipes and fittings shall be painted in accordance with the provisions of Section 23. All pipework shall be stencilled with white directional arrows of minimum 200 x 30mm in size. Provide a sample showing the pipework painting and welded flange to the SO Rep for approval.
44.3.2
Breeching Inlet Provide inlets with instantaneous male couplings for connection to the Singapore Civil Defence Force's 63.5mm diameter standard hose to each rising main with a two-way breeching inlet for a 100mm or fourway breaching inlet for 150mm diameter rising main about 760mm above ground level. Each breeching inlet shall conform with the requirements of BS 5041:Part 3. Enclose all inlets in a rust-proof steel inlet box (either galvanized, zinc sprayed or metal coated) with glass front. Position the inlet box with its lower edge between 400mm and 600mm above ground level. Position of inlets shall be indicated on inlet box using appropriate signs in accordance with BS 5499: Part 1 and using a letter height of at least 50mm. Inlets shall be painted yellow for dry rising mains and red for wet rising mains. The inlet box shall be installed with key lock and painted red at the edge with 25mm thick lines. Where more than 1 stack are provided for the rising main, the labelling of the rising main shall be subject to the approval of the SO Rep. Provide all pipework of rising main that falls below inlet box level with an additional 25mm drain valve at the lowest point of the pipework, together with either fixed piping or an adequate length of flexible tubing (fitted with a suitable coupling for connection to the valve) to conduct water from the valve to a suitable drain. Where such a low level drain is fitted, provide a permanent notice in 25mm (minimum) block letters of a suitable colour on a contrasting background and place it in a position adjacent to the valve reading `DRY RISING MAIN - DRAIN VALVE' or `WET RISING MAIN -DRAIN VALVE'. Provide another permanent notice in the inlet box, similar in size to the indicator plates mentioned in BS 5041: Part 5, reading `LOW LEVEL DRAIN VALVE IN' (state location of the valve). The low level drain valve shall be kept securely strapped and padlock closed except when in use.
44.3.3
Landing Valve Provide landing valve with an instantaneous female coupling for connection to the Singapore Civil Defence Force's 63.5mm diameter standard hose for each rising main as shown in the Drawings. The SO Rep reserves the right to instruct the Contractor to remove items vulnerable to be stolen such as handwheel, blank caps, chain, etc from the landing valves which have already been installed. The Contractor shall deliver these items for storage at a place to be decided by the SO Rep. No claim for such work shall be allowed as all costs and expenses for such work are deemed to be included in the Contract Sum. The SO Rep decision on items considered vulnerable to be stolen shall be final binding and conclusive on the Contractor. The landing valve shall be kept securely strapped and padlock closed except when in use. (a) Location Provide landing valves at a height with its lowest point between 760mm and 1m above the floor level. (b) Recesses And Enclosures For Landing Valves Enclose landing valves for rising mains within a duct as shown in the Drawings. Where a landing valve is in an open recess, duct or alcove, and where a landing valve of a rising main is enclosed in a box, the opening giving access to the landing valve shall not be lesser than 150mm clearance on both sides and not lesser than 230mm below the centre line of the outlet of the landing valve and not lesser than 250mm clearance above the handwheel. Depth of the opening shall not be greater than is necessary, and the front edge of the female coupling of the landing valve shall not be more than 75mm behind the face of the door. Allow adequate space around the valve to permit easy maintenance and testing. Signplate in block letters of height not less than 50mm with the words `DRY RISING MAIN OUTLET', `WET RISING MAIN OUTLET' or `DOWN-COMER (FIRE FIGHTING) OUTLET' for the respective rising mains shall be displayed on the door. Landing valves shall be painted yellow for dry rising mains and red for wet rising mains and downcomers (fire fighting).
44.3.4
Automatic Air Release Valve for Rising Mains A suitable automatic air release valve shall be provided at the highest point in each rising main to permit air in the pipe to discharge to atmosphere when water is pumped in at ground level. The automatic air release valve shall have gunmetal or brass bodies, non-ferrous or stainless steel floats and guides, and non-corrodible valves and seats.
44.3.5
Electrical Earthing of Rising Mains Rising mains shall be electrically earthed as shown in the Drawings. Joints which do not provide electrical continuity shall be bonded. Where the rising main is situated in the vicinity of any lightning conductor, it shall also be bonded to the lightning conductor in accordance with the requirements of the code on lightning protection.
44.3.6
Drain Valves Provide each breeching inlet with a drain valve in the form of a 25mm gate valve complying with the requirements of BS 5154, rating PN 16. For ease of attaching a drain hose, the drain valve outlet shall be positioned so that it faces in the same direction as, and is at a lower level than, the inlet connections to the breeching. The outlet of the drain valve shall have 25mm male threads complying with the requirements of BS 21, and shall be fitted with a female blank cap and chain.
44.3.7
Blank Caps Provide each inlet with a female instantaneous blank cap acceptable to FSSD. Attach every blank cap to the breeching inlet and landing valve by a suitable lug, s-hook and chain.
44.3.8
Signboard The breeching inlets shall be identified by an appropriate sign reading `DRY' or 'WET' RISING MAIN'. Where the inlets are not readily visible from outside, a sign shall be posted in a conspicuous place directing the Singapore Civil Defence Force to the inlets subject to the approval of the SO Rep. Dry rising mains shall be labelled according to the requirements of FSSD.
44.4
WET RISING MAIN SYSTEM
44.4.1
Wet Rising Main Water Supply Generally, a water supply capable of providing a minimum of 27 litres second for a residential building or 38 litres per second for a non-residential or mixed occupancy building at all times shall be required. When more than one wet rising main is required in any zone in a building, the minimum common water supply shall be as stated below : (a) For a residential building 27 litres per second for the first rising main and 13.5 litres per second for each additional rising main, subject to a total maximum supply rate of 135 litres per second. For a non-residential or mixed occupancy building 38 litres per second for the first rising main and 19 litres per second for each additional rising main, subject to a total maximum supply rate of 190 litres per second.
(b)
44.4.1
Wet Rising Main Water Supply (Cont'd) The supply from the breeching inlets shall discharge openly into the tank and at a level of not less than 150mm above the maximum water level in the tank. To reduce the risk of hose bursting, provisions shall be made in accordance with BS 5401 : Part 1 so that when the water is shut off at the nozzle the static pressure in any line of hose connected to a landing valve does not exceed 8 bar. To dispose of excess flows and pressures over and above those required (i.e. when only one jet is in use) a pressure control valve shall be incorporated in the body of the landing valve which is then permanently connected into the relief pipe, where applicable. This relief pipe shall run throughout the length of the wet rising main installation and shall terminate either back into the suction tank or to drain. The relief pipe shall be 100 mm galvanised steel. All pump control panels shall be of IP 54 enclosures.
44.4.2
Wet Rising Main Water Tank Unless agreeable by FSSD, tanks supplying water for domestic purposes shall not be used as suction or storage tanks for wet rising mains. The tank shall be compartmented into two separate water-tight sections connected by a valve, normally kept open, to permit tank maintenance without interruption to the water supply. Nevertheless, when more than one water tank is provided in parallel to store the required amount of water, tank compartmentation is not necessary provided the tanks are interconnected with isolating valves which are secured open. Water level indicator mounted on Aluminium plate shall be provided as shown in the drawing. Each tank or tank compartment shall be provided with ductile iron cement lined overflow pipe of at least 100mm in diameter, adequately supported, and extended to discharge into a suitable drain. Ductile iron cement lined drain pipe of at least 100mm size and controlled by a gate valve shall be provided for each tank or compartment. Voltex inhalators shall be installed where applicable to maintain the required water tank storage capacity according to SS CP 29. An approved visual level indicator shall be fitted to show the depth of water in each tank or compartment. A permanent aluminium gooseneck ladder with safety guard extending a sufficient distance above the top of the tank shall be provided for each tank. UPVC ladder shall also be provided inside each tank. Reinforced concrete tank shall comply with the requirements specified in Section 9 "Reinforced Concrete Water Tank". However, notwithstanding the requirements specified therein, sterilisation of water is not required.
44.4.3
Wet Rising Main Pumps The horizontal split case fire pumps for use in wet rising mains and transfer pumps shall be listed by PSB and UL, FM, LPC or other institutions recognised by FSSD. Pumps/motors shall be selected to meet design as well as maximum flow requirements. All pumps and control panels shall be mounted on at least 150 mm height plinths. Spring type vibration isolators shall be provided for each pump to ensure minimal vibration transmission to the building structure. The first three pipe supports from the pump discharge shall be the spring mounted type. Pump control panels near/below pipework shall be protected from water leakage/splash. The pumps shall have an independent source of power supply and each shall be capable of providing independently the necessary flow and pressure requirements. The duty pump (or standby pump, in the event of failure of the duty pump) shall start automatically when there is a flow of water or when a fall in pressure occurs in the rising main exceeding 5% of the fire pump churning pressure. The pump shall be fully operational within 30 seconds after starting. Means shall be provide for manual starting by reproducing the pressure reduction. Once started, the pump shall run continuously until stopped manually. Means shall be provided for the `lagging' pump to operate should the `leading' pump fail to function upon closing of the starting circuit.
44.4.3
Wet Rising Main Pumps (Cont'd) (a) Pressure-sensor switches shall be supplied and fitted on the main supply pipes to initiate automatic starting of the pumps. Pressure-sensor switches shall be of approved type with provisions for independent adjustment of high and low pressure settings. The automatic starting of any pump shall also initiate a visible and audible indication in the main fire alarm panel, if any. Floatless level control relay unit complete with electrodes shall be provided for each suction and storage tank to override the control of all the pressure switches in such a way that at a pre-set low water level, the pressure switches shall not cause starting of the jockey and wet rising main pumps. In addition, any pump in operation shall be stopped by the relay unit at that low water level. The relay unit shall also actuate a visible and audible alarm indication when the water level reaches a pre-determined high or low limit. (c) The associated jockey pump shall be controlled by pressure-sensor switches so as to maintain a static pressure in the wet rising main 0.7 bar (23 feet) to 0.2 bar (6 feet) higher than the pressure when the wet rising main pump is churning. The jockey pump shall be automatically de-energised when any of the wet rising main pump operates.
(b)
All pumps shall be capable of being started and stopped manually. All pumps shall be primed automatically at all times. This will be effected if the pumps are sited so that at least two thirds of the effective capacity of the suction tank is above the level of the centre of pump suction. Where this is not possible, separate priming tanks maintained automatically and foot valves shall be provided for each pump. Pumps which are automatically controlled shall be provided with a reliable float-operated air release or equivalent valve not less than 12mm in size, to automatically release air from the pump. Means must be provided to allow a continuous flow of water through each pump at a sufficient rate to prevent overheating of the pump when churning. A test valve and direct reading flow meter shall be provided on a pipe connection coupled to the pump delivery branch downstream of the check valve to test the pump. The test piping shall be sized not less than the meter size appropriate to the pump rated capacity. The test piping shall discharge to a suitable drain. A discharge pressure gauge shall be connected to the discharge of each pump. The gauge shall have a valve with arrangement for draining. Its indication dial shall have a range of at least twice the rated working pressure of the pump. All electrical wring, including that for the control and monitoring circuits shall be in accordance with PUB's requirements and shall be: (a) (b) of the fire-resistive type complying with SS 299 or enclosed in a 2-hour fire-rated duct throughout the run to the pump room.
A fire-rated duct may house electrical wiring for other emergency services if the running of the wiring does not affect the fire-integrity of the duct. The sharing of a common electrical rising main for the wet rising main and other emergency services is acceptable provided that there is proper protection by fuses or circuit breakers for each and every emergency service. Any switches on the power feed to the motor shall be locked "ON" and clearly labelled "WET RISING MAIN PUMP - NOT TO BE SWITCHED OFF IN THE EVENT OF FIRE". Acoustic treatment shall be provided to reduce the noise generated from the pump to be within the ENV guideline. The proposal for noise reduction shall be approved by the SO Rep before the actual commencement of the pump room pipe work installation.
44.4.4
Wet Rising Main Pumps Control Panels The Contractor shall prepare fully detailed control wiring diagram for the approval of the SO Rep prior to manufacture of control panels. Provision at the Wet rising main pump Control Panel shall include but not limited to the following : (a) For each and every pump, indicating lamps shall be provided to show that power supply is available on every phase of each motor. Power failure on any phase of the supply to the wet rising main pumps shall be automatically indicated on the control panel. Manual/OFF/AUTO rotary selector switches shall be provided for each pump. "Start" and "Stop" push-button switches shall be provided for each pump. Lead/Lag rotary functions shall be provided for the selection of the duty pumps. "Running" and "stop" indicting lamps shall be provided to each pump. Green colour lamps shall be provided to show the pump "Running" status and red colour lamps shall be provided to show the "Stop" status. Start push button shall be provided for each pump to close the main contactor for the pump motor mechanically independent of any control circuit. Indicator lamps giving indication of the failure of each wet rising main pump to start as monitored by the flow switch at each pump discharge. Indicating lamps giving indication of `Pump on Demand' as controlled by the pump actuation pressure switches mounted above the alarm valves. The starting of the pump shall not cancel the indication. Remote visible and audible indication besides the main control panel, if any for the following conditions : (i) Pump on demand (ii) Operation of each wet rising main pump (iii) Power failure on any phase of the supply to each wet rising main pump (iv) Pump fails to start as monitored by the flow switch at each pump discharge (v) Manual and auto mode selection. Indicating lamps shall be provided to show the high and low water level of the wet rising main storage tanks. Indicator lamp and buzzer/bell test push button. Fault alarm facilities in addition to the indicator lamps shall be provided for the following conditions: (i) Power failure on any phase of the supply to each pump (ii) Pump fail to start (iii) Faults in the battery and charger system (iv) High and low level at suction and storage tanks (v) Other faults not mentioned above The fault alarm facilities shall incorporate a fault alarm buzzer audible from 10m away and a buzzer muting switch. The visual fault alarm indication shall persist unless the fault is rectified. The occurrence of a further different fault while the buzzer is silenced shall cause the buzzer to resume the sound again. The restoration of the silencing switch to its normal position whilst a fault exists shall transfer the fault back to the audible fault warning. In addition, a weatherproof red light bulb with wire guard shall be installed outside the pump room near the entrance to indicate the above fault conditions. (m) Auxiliary contacts to generator panel to be provided Volt-Free contacts and wiring to relay signals to Fire Indicator Board where applicable.
(b) (c) (d) (e)
(f)
(g)
(h)
(i)
(j)
(k) (l)
UPG07/S44.DOC(10) lkk(181206) DPD
44.4.5
Jockey Pump Control Panel The jockey pump controllers shall be used for pressure maintenance in the installation to prevent unnecessary cycling of the wet rising main pumps. The jockey pump controller shall either be housed in a separate compartment within the wet rising main pump controller or in a totally separate sheet steel cubicle. The jockey pump controllers shall incorporate incoming MCCB protection, starter with thermal overload relay, contactors, control relays and the following facilities : (a) (b) (c) (d) (e) (f) (g) Indicator lamps to show that power supply is available on every phase of the motor Auto/OFF/Manual rotary selector switch `Run' and `stop' indicator lamps `Start' and `stop' pushbutton Pump Òverload' indicator lamp Connections to pressure switch Minimum running period timer to prevent frequent automatic starting of the pump. The timer shall be set to keep the motor in operation for at least one minute and interlock with the pressure switch. Fault alarm facilities shall be provided to indicate fault conditions of pump overload, pump power supply failure on any phase and pump fail to start.
(h)
44.4.6
Wet Rising Main Transfer Pump Control The Contractor shall prepare fully detailed control wiring diagram for the approval of the SO Rep prior to the manufacture of control panels. The transfer pump controllers shall incorporate incoming MCCB protection, starter with thermal overload relay, contactors and control relays. Provision of transfer pump Control Panel shall include but not limited to the following : (a) (b) (c) (d) (e) (f) (g) Indicator lamps to show that power supply is available on every phase of the motor Auto/OFF/Manual rotary selector switch `Run' and `stop' indicator lamps `Start' and `stop' pushbutton Pump Òverload' indicator lamp Connections to pressure switch Fault alarm facilities shall be provided to indicate fault conditions of pump overload, pump power supply failure on any phase, pump fail to start and high and low water level.
UPG07/S44.DOC(11) lkk(181206) DPD
Ugdg Spec TS 44-12/30 44.5.1 Tests On Rising Main System & Down-Comer (Fire Fighting) The Contractor shall submit an application to the SO Rep to witness the inspection and commissioning test of the complete installation. The application shall include information on the testing appointment date and statement of completion of the whole Works by the Contractor. The appointed date shall be at least 2 months before the completion of the building work. For wet rising main system, the Contractor shall provide complete information as produced in Appendix A31 and submit two copies to the SO Rep one week before the testing of the system. 44.5.2 Static Pressure Test The Contractor shall ensure that the system is in order so that water is allowed to flow through it discharging via the topmost and/or lowest outlet to flush out any debris that may be present. The system shall then be completely charged with water to a hydrostatic pressure according to SS CP 29 for 2 hours. During this period, an inspection of the system shall be made to check that no leakage of water is taking place at any of the joints or landing valves. The system shall also be charged to the working pressure and at selected landing valve to be tested for operational requirements with matching water hose. Landing valves shall be tested randomly on the proper engagement with matching water hose and hose coupling. Provide diesel driven pump for the tests. Alternatively, electric driven pump shall be used but the Contractor shall arrange for its own power supply. The Contractor shall arrange for all the necessary parties such as the FSSD to witness the test as and when required. Provide water and all the necessary instruments such as water hose, hose coupling, pressure gauges for the testing. Water from the domestic water tank shall not be used. The Contractor shall find other means of providing the water subject to the approval of the SO Rep. Instrument for the testing shall be properly calibrated by PSB or PSB accredited laboratory. The Contractor shall ensure that all pipes are securely anchored before carrying out any pressure test. 44.5.3 Flow test (Wet Rising Mains only) The following minimum water supply flow-rate shall be maintained in the wet rising system when 3 landing valves within the system are in the fully-open position : (i) (ii) 27 litres per second for a residential building. 38 litres per second for a non-residential or mixed occupancy building.
A minimum running pressure of 3.5 bar and a maximum of 5.5 bar shall be maintained at each landing valve when any number, up to three, are fully opened. When water is shut off at the nozzle of the hose connected to a landing valve, the static pressure in that hose line shall not exceed 8 bar. When more than one wet rising main is required in any zone in a building, the minimum water supply flow rate shall be as stated below. (i) (ii) For a residential building, 27 litres per second for the first rising main and 13.5 litres per second for each additional rising main, subject to a total maximum supply rate of 135 litres per second. For a non-residential or mixed occupancy building 38 litres per second for the first rising main and 19 litres per second for each additional rising main, subject to a total maximum supply rate of 190 litres per second.
UPG07/S44.DOC(12) lkk(181206) DPD
44.5.4
Performance Test The Contractor shall submit to the SO Rep two copies of the test results using approved HDB Testing Form. Additional FSSD requirements shall also be included. Provide a minimum seven days notice to the SO Rep to verify the test results on the Site and demonstrate to the SO Rep that the installation fulfils the function for which it has been designed. Adjust, balance and regulate the Works concerned as necessary until the required conditions are attained. Should the SO Rep find discrepancies between the recorded test results and the measurements demonstrated on the Site, the test shall be repeated by the Contractor to the satisfaction of the SO Rep. The test shall be witnessed by the Contractor together with the SO Rep. The testing form shall be endorsed by the Qualified Person.
44.5.5
Remedial Action and Re-testing Remedy all Defects within such time as instructed by the SO Rep and arrange for a re-test of the system.
44.6
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES FOR DRY RISING MAIN & DOWN -COMER (FIRE FIGHTING) The Contractor shall allow in the Contract Sum for all costs and expenses for providing maintenance service and call-back service to the dry rising main and down-comer (fire-fighting) system as specified hereafter for a period of one year commencing from the Date of Substantial Completion for the Works or phase or sub-phase of the Works as certified by the Superintending Officer (hereinafter referred to as the "Defects Liability Period" for the purposes of this clause including all sub-clauses under it. Whenever, the rising main and down-comer (fire fighting) system or any portion thereof is out of service for any reason, notice shall be given immediately to the Singapore Civil Defence Force and a suitable sign shall be displayed at a prominent position. When the installation is reinstated, the Singapore Civil Defence Force shall again be informed. All parts and equipment comprising the complete system shall be maintained and inspected strictly as specified hereafter and in accordance with the check-list as set out in Appendix A32. The check-list shall be duly completed by the Contractor when performing the routine inspections. Any Defect detected shall be rectified by the Contractor immediately. Always arrange for a Representative from HDB Branch Office to be present during these inspections. Furnish to the HDB Branch Office a Maintenance Schedule for the inspection upon Substantial Completion of the Works or phase or sub-phase of the Works. The Contractor's Supervisor shall also sign on the log book in the pump room after completion of each inspection. For Inspection at every 6 months, rectify any Defect found after the following inspections : (i) (ii) (iii) (iv) (v) (vi) (vii) (viii) (ix) (x) Check and verify operation of breeching inlets. Check that breeching inlets and landing valves are not obstructed. Check and verify that landing valves are fully closed and the handwheel are strapped locked. Check that valve caps are secured in position. Check rubber washers of the outlets and replace them if missing. Check handwheel to ensure that they are not jammed, missing or broken. Inspect the earthing connection and tighten it if necessary. Check for damaged and any leakage of pipes, landing valves Check the valve cabinets for damage. Any other inspection as instructed by the SO Rep.
In addition, wet tests shall be carried out annually when the main can be checked for leaks.
UPG07/S44.DOC(13) lkk(181206) DPD
44.7
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES FOR WET RISING MAIN SYSTEM The Contractor shall allow in the Contract Sum for all costs and expenses for providing maintenance service and call-back service to the wet rising main system as specified hereafter for a period of one year commencing from the Date of Substantial Completion for the Works or phase or sub-phase of the Works as certified by the Superintending Officer (hereinafter referred to as the "Defects Liability Period" for the purposes of this clause including all sub-clauses under it. All parts and equipment comprising the complete system shall be maintained and inspected strictly as specified hereafter and in accordance with the check-list as set out in Appendix A33. The check-list shall be duly completed by the Contractor when performing the routine inspections, Any Defect detected shall be rectified by the Contractor immediately. Always arrange for a Representative from HDB Branch Office to be present during these inspections. Furnish to the HDB Branch Office a Maintenance Schedule for the inspections upon Substantial Completion of the Works or phase or sub-phase of the Works. The Contractor's Supervisor shall also sign on the log book in the pump room after completion of each inspection. Maintenance of wet rising mains shall include the requirements as specified in Clause 44.6 "Servicing And Maintenance Procedures For Dry Rising Main & Down-Comer (Fire Fighting)" including any subclauses under it. In addition, the following checks are also required : (a) Monthly Tests Inspect and service all machinery and equipment comprising the complete Plant and Ancillary Equipment under this Contract once a month set out in the code of practice, except where otherwise directed by the SO Rep. At each such monthly inspection and service of the complete Plant and Ancillary Equipment, the minimum items of work detailed below and in the relevant code of practice shall be performed by the Contractor. Any special maintenance requirements on equipment not covered by the following list but recommended by the manufacturers shall be included. (i) Inspect all water pumps, and (1) (2) (3) Check all seals, glands and pipe lines for leaks, and rectify as necessary. Check all pump bearings and lubricate with oil or grease as necessary. Check the alignment and condition of all rubber couplings between pumps and drive motors, and rectify as necessary. Check all bolts and nuts for tightness, and tighten as necessary. Check and verify the automatic starting of each pump by actuating the drain and test valve in a manner to reduce the applied water pressure and the starting device and simulate a fire condition. Record that the pressure is correct. Keep each pump running for a period of at least five (5) minutes and verify the operation of the relief valve. Check and verify pump running alarm and phase failure alarm. Check pump starting equipment including fuses, circuit breakers and starters. Conduct a running pressure test of each pump at full alarm condition by opening the test valve of the pump testing pipe and recirculate water back to the water tanks. Run each pump for a period of not less than 1 minute.
(4) (5)
(6) (7) (8)
UPG07/S44.DOC(14) lkk(181206) DPD
44.7
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES FOR WET RISING MAIN SYSTEM (CONT'D) (a) Monthly Tests (Cont'd) (i) (Cont'd) (9) Simulate failure on one of the pump and verify the operation of the duty-standby changeover mechanism. Check and verify no excessive noise and vibration of each pump and motor whilst the unit is running.
(10)
(ii) (iii)
Inspect and lubricate with grease as necessary all electric motors. Inspect and check the routine operation of all electrical starters, electrical control gears and ancillary electrical apparatus. Inspect and check the routine operation of all automatic controls, gears and relays. Inspect all water suction and storage tank and rains, clean and flush out the tank as necessary. Check that stop valve and tank inlets interconnecting pipes and pump suction pipes are secured fully open. Verify the operation of the automatic tank filling mechanism. Visually check that tank contains requisite amount of water and verify operation of floatless level control units. Check and inspect breeching inlets. Check and verify operation of water level indicators. At the monthly inspection of control valves, gauge showing water pressure in the system shall be read to make sure that normal pressure are being maintained - check the gauges with an inspection gauge once a year.
(iv) (v)
(vi) (vii) (viii)
(b)
Quarterly Test For quarterly testing, servicing and maintenance, repeat all the testing, servicing and maintenance requirement as specified in Clause 44.6 "Servicing And Maintenance Procedures For Dry Rising Main & Down-Comer (Fire Fighting)" including all subclauses under it and subclause 44.7(a) "Monthly Tests" above. In addition, provide the servicing and maintenance as detailed below: (i) (ii) (iii) (iv) Check any relays for correct adjustment and quick effective operation. Thoroughly check the whole system for loose connections, terminals, frayed wires, etc. Replace any broken or faulty equipment as may be required. Enter test results and details of any faulty components, repairs and replacements in the log book. Every pump tank shall be completely flushed out and thoroughly cleaned annually. Other maintenance as recommended by the tank supplier shall be carried out. The stays, cleats, bolts and nuts, surface of the plates and other accessories of the tank shall be examined for rust, corrosion, crack, etc. The water in the whole pipework system shall be completely drained out and filled with fresh water again. Meggar test the motor winding cables and wiring to check the insulation resistance between phase to phase and phase to earth.
(v)
(vi)
(vii)
UPG07/S44.DOC(15) lkk(181206) DPD
44.8
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE For routine tests and inspection during the Defects Liability Period, all parts, Plant and equipment comprising the complete rising main system shall be maintained and inspected strictly in accordance with the specifications and check-list as set out in Appendix A32 and A33. The check-list shall be duly completed by the Contractor when performing the routine inspection. Any defects detected shall be rectified by the Contractor immediately. Always arrange for a Representative from the HDB Branch Office to be present during the inspection. Furnish to the HDB Branch Office a Maintenance Schedule for the routine inspection upon Substantial Completion of the Works or phase or sub-phase of the Works.
44.9
CALL-BACK SERVICE During the Defects Liability Period, provide an efficient 24 hour (whole day) call-back service. All urgent calls or complaints shall be attended to immediately upon notification by the Representative from Essential Maintenance Service Unit or Branch Office. The Contractor shall provide a mobile phone for his maintenance supervisor and the mobile phone number shall be given to the respective Branch Office so that immediate notification of any urgent callback service can be met. In the event that the Contractor fails to : (a) (b) (c) respond within 30 minutes after being called; or attend to an urgent call or complaint immediately upon notification; or carry out the routine inspection of the rising main system.
the SO Rep may engage another contractor to carry out the Works and all costs and charges shall be recoverable from the Contractor by the Employer or deducted by the Employer from monies due or becoming due to the Contractor. Notwithstanding the above, the SO Rep may in addition exercise his rights under Clause 1.10 "Nuisance and Irregularities" to impose charges against the Contractor. In the event that other contractors are instructed to rectify Defect in the rising main system or to carry out the routine servicing and maintenance of the rising main system due to or arising out of the Contractor's failure to do so when directed by the SO Rep, such actions shall not in any way affect, vary or relieve the Contractor's obligations under the Contract.
44.10
MAKING GOOD DEFECTS AND LEAKAGES During the Defects Liability Period, make good all Defects and Leakages found in the system and installation. Replace and/or repair all defective parts or items as produced in Appendix A30. Whenever required if such replacement or repair has been necessitated by the reasons of defect of the system and equipment. The Contractor shall have a supervisor-in-charge of the service, maintenance and repair work to be carried out. The supervisor shall be thoroughly competent in supervising the service, maintenance and repair of rising main systems and the workmen shall also be skilled in the service, maintenance and repair of rising main systems.
UPG07/S44.DOC(16) lkk(181206) DPD
44.11
RECTIFICATION OF DEFECTS PRIOR TO ISSUANCE OF MAINTENANCE CERTIFICATE One month before the expiry date of the Defects Liability Period, the Contractor shall arrange with HDB Branch Office and the SO Rep for a final joint inspection. All Defect listed after this joint inspection shall be rectified by the end of the succeeding one month commencing from the expiry date of the Defects Liability Period. Rectify the outstanding Defect and conduct detailed checks on the Works before arranging for inspection by the Representative from HDB Branch Office for the purpose of certifying completion of rectification of Defect. After the second final inspection by the Representative from HDB Branch Office, a list of outstanding Defect shall be issued to the Contractor and the Contractor shall rectify all Defect on the list within fourteen days. If the Contractor fails to rectify and make good the Defect on the second final inspection, the SO Rep shall exercise his rights under Clause 1.10 "Nuisance and Irregularities" to impose charges against the Contractor. Notwithstanding the above, the Employer shall in addition have the right to engage his own workmen or other contractors to rectify and make good all Defect and the cost of rectification and charges imposed shall be recovered from the Contractor.
44.12
LOG BOOK Keep a log book at the pump room in which details of all alarms (genuine, practice test or false), faults, tests, routine maintenance and repairs carried out shall be recorded. The type of log book and the record format shall be subject to the approval of the SO Rep.
44.13
CONSUMABLE MATERIALS Provide the following consumable materials as and when required during the Defects Liability Period : (a) All oils and grease required for lubrication of pump bearings, motor bearings, pivots and other moving parts. All carbon brushes required to replace worn brushes in electric motors. All electric contact points required to replace those points in switch gears, motor starter gears, electric control gears and electric relays. All indicating lamps required to replace blown lamps. All cotton waster, soap detergent and other cleaning materials required for cleaning purposes.
(b) (c)
(d) (e)
UPG07/S44.DOC(17) lkk(181206) DPD
APPENDIX A30 Page 1 HOUSING & DEVELOPMENT BOARD
SCHEDULE OF TECHNICAL DATA The technical data provided hereunder is for information only and shall not override any requirements specified in the Specifications. The requirements specified in the Specifications shall be regarded as minimum only and should any materials or equipment described in this Schedule fall below the minimum requirements, the Specifications shall prevail. Catalogues should be enclosed to provide more comprehensive information wherever possible.
WET RISING MAIN 1. WET RISING MAIN PUMPSETS (The Contractor shall state pump working heads taking into account the systems as designed and all equipment, etc offered by the Contractor). Particulars Pumps Manufacturer Country of Origin Type & Fig. No. Materials Casing Shaft Impeller Type of Bearings Nominal Characteristics (A) Flow rate (l/min.) Discharge head (bar) KW Efficiency (%) Characteristics (B) Flow rate (l/min.) Discharge head (bar) KW Efficiency (%) Characteristic (C) Flow rate (l/min.) Discharge head (bar) KW Efficiency (%) Electrical Diesel Driven Transfer Pump Electrical Transfer Pump Diesel Driven
UPG07/S44.DOC(18) lkk(181206) DPD
APPENDIX A30 Page 2
1.
WET RISING MAIN PUMPSETS (CONT'D) Particulars Pump R.P.M. Churning Pressure (bar) Motors Manufacturer Country of Origin KW RPM Electrical Rating (V/O/Hz) Full load current (A) Max. Starting Current (A) Type of Drive/Coupling Insulation Class Enclosure Protection Class Vibration Isolators Manufacturer Static Deflection (mm) Type of Model No. Motor Starters Manufacturer Country of Origin Type & Fig. No. Protecting Devices Total Operating Wt of Pumpsets (kg) Electrical Diesel Driven Transfer Pump Electrical Transfer Pump Diesel Driven
UPG07/S44.DOC(19) lkk(181206) DPD
APPENDIX A30 Page 3
2.
JOCKEY PUMSETS (The Contractor shall state pump working heads taking into account the systems as designed and all equipment, etc offered by the Contractor) Equipment No. Particulars Pumps Manufacturer Country of Origin Type & Fig. No. Materials Casing Shaft Impeller Type of Bearings Flow rate (l/min.) Discharge head (bar) KW Efficiency Pump R.P.M. Type of shaft seal Motors Manufacturer Country of Origin Type & Model KW RPM Electrical Rating (V/O/Hz) Full Load Current (A) Max. Starting Current (A) Type of Drive/Coupling Vibration Isolators Manufacturer Make/Type/Model Static Deflection (mm) Total Operating Wt. of Pumpsets (kg) Jockey Pump
UPG07/S44.DOC(20) lkk(181206) DPD
APPENDIX A30 Page 4
3.
PIPEWORK (N.B. ONLY ONE MANUFACTURER SHALL BE INDICATED) Black Steel Pipe Manufacturer Local Supplier Country of Origin Grade (Thickness) BS Specification Manufacturer of Pipe Fittings Galvanized Steel Pipe Stainless Steel Pipe Ductile Iron Pipe Steel Pipes to BS 3601
4.
VALVES, GAUGES & PIPE FITTINGS Material of Valve Body NA NA NA Material of Valve NA NA NA
Make
Type
Model
Other Information
Water Level Gauges Water Motor Alarms c/w alarm gongs and water turbines Fire Brigade Breeching Inlet Isolating Gate Valves Alarm Valves Non-return Valves Strainers Drain Cocks Gauge Cocks Combined Drain & Test Valves Automatic Air Vents Anti-Vibration Couplings Ball Float Valves Pressure Gauges Globe Valve Pressure Relief Valve Vortex Inhibitor
NA
NA
NA
NA
UPG07/S44.DOC(21) lkk(181206) DPD
APPENDIX A30 Page 5
5.
CONTROL PANELS Item Wet Rising Main Pump Control Panel Wet Rising Main Transfer Pump Control Panel Jockey Pump Control Panel Manufacturer Country of Origin Local Supplier
6.
D.C. POWER SUPPLY UNITS Manufacturer
Country of Origin Type/List No./Model
Output Voltage Per Cell No. of Cell Operating Voltage Ampere Hour for 10-hour Rating Dimension Battery Chargers Manufacturer Country of Origin Type/List No. Output Voltage Range Charging Rate - Normal - Maximum
Volt
Volt AH mm
Volt Amp Amp
UPG07/S44.DOC(22) lkk(181206) DPD
APPENDIX A30 Page 6
7.
ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS IN CONTROL PANELS Make Contactors Ammeters Voltmeters Push Buttons Key Switches Selector Switches MCB Timers Relays Indicating Lamps (transformer operated) Terminal Boards Anti-Condensation Heaters Current Transformers HRC Fuses Isolating Switches MCCB Earth Leakage Relay Type Model Rated Voltage Other Information
8.
ELECTRICAL WIRING & ACCESSORIES Manufacturer PVC Cable & Jointing Accessories Conduit & Accessories Cable Trunking & Accessories Cable Tray & Accessories Floatless Level Control Relay Unit Country of Origin Local Agent
UPG07/S44.DOC(23) lkk(181206) DPD
APPENDIX A30 Page 7
9.
PIPE SPRING HANGER Make, Type & Model Size (mm) Rated Capacity (kg) Rated Static Deflection (mm) Material of Spring Spring Constant (kg/m)
10.
FLEXIBLE PIPE CONNECTOR Make, Type & Model Material Maximum Working Pressure/Temperature Maximum Vacuum (mm Hg) Minimum burst pressure (Kpa) Allowable elongation/compression/transverse movement (mm) Allowable Angular Movement
11.
DIRECT READING WATER FLOW METER Make/Type/Model Operation water flow range (1/min) Accuracy (%)
UPG07/S44.DOC(24) lkk(181206) DPD
APPENDIX A31 Page 1 TESTING DATA ON WET RISER SYSTEM Clause 44.5.1 "Testing on Rising Main System "
The Contractor shall furnish the following data and submit to the SO Rep one week before the testing of the wet riser system.
Contract Title Block No. Location Building Data
: : :
Contract No. Ref No. Contractor
: : :
Suction Tank size : Total Head :
M (m) (l/s)
Transfer Tank size : Total Head : Required pumping capacity
M (m) (l/s)
Required pumping capacity
Motor Data Brand Type (PSB and FM,UL,LPC or other acceptable by FSSD) Model Serial No. Rated Output (KW) Volt/Phase/Frequency Insulation Class/Speed (RPM) Rated Current (A)
Jockey Pump 1
Fire Pump 1
Fire Pump 2
Transfer Pump 1
Transfer Pump 2
Pump Data Brand Model Type (PSB and FM,UL,LPC or other acceptable by FSSD) Serial No. Impeller Diameter (mm) Specified capacity (l/s)
Jockey Pump 1
Fire Pump 1
Fire Pump 2
Transfer Pump 1
Transfer Pump 2
UPG07/S44.DOC(25) lkk(181206) DPD
APPENDIX A31 Page 2 TESTING DATA ON WET RISER SYSTEM Clause 44.5.1 "Testing on Rising Main System "
The Contractor shall furnish the following data and submit to the SO Rep one week before the testing of the wet riser system. Control Panel Data Starter Brand Model Type Starter Change over Brand Model Type Starter MCB Brand Model Type Overload Protector Brand Model Setting Fitting Coupling Size Brand Time Switch Latching Relay 8-Pin Relay 11-Pin Relay Brand Model Type Brand Model Type Brand Model Type Brand Model Type Type
Rubber expansion joint
Gate valve
Check valve
Flow switch Flow meter Motorize valve Pressure gauge Pressure switch
UPG07/S44.DOC(26) lkk(181206) DPD
APPENDIX A31 Page 3
TESTING DATA ON WET RISER SYSTEM Clause 44.5.1 "Testing on Rising Main System "
The Contractor shall furnish the following data and submit to the SO Rep one week before the testing of the wet riser system. Fitting Limit switch Landing valve Breeching Inlet Size Brand Type
Recorded & Submitted by
: (Contractor's Name)/Company Stamp (Signature)/Date
FOR OFFICIAL USE Motor Starting/Changeover Current (A) Running Current (A) R Y B Jockey Pump Fire Pump 1 Fire Pump 2 Transfer Pump 1 Transfer Pump 2 Jockey Pump Fire Pump 1 Fire Pump 2 Transfer Pump 1 Transfer Pump 2
Pump Approximate Capacity (l/s)
Tested by
: 1) HTO / TO ( 2) HTO / TO ( ) ) Date
Checked & Verified by
: D Eng ( ) Date
UPG07/S44.DOC(27) lkk(181206) DPD
APPENDIX A32
BI-YEARLY ROUTINE INSPECTION REPORT ON DOWN-COMER / DRYRISER SYSTEM DURING DEFECTS LIABILITY PERIOD Clause 44.6 "Servicing and Maintenance During Defects Liability Period"
To : Head ( Date of Inspection : Block No. : Items 1. Pressure test for 2 hours * 2. 100mm Gate Valve (for down-comer) 3. 100mm Check Valve (for down-comer) 4. Discharge and refill water in riser pipe (for down-comer) 5. Check and inspect all landing valves condition (open and shut position) 6. Check landing valve handle secure with strapper and cap in position 7. Check earthing terminal connection 8. Check Breeching inlets condition 9. Additional requirements from FSSD
Branch Office ) Contract Title : Location : Checked Remedial Action /Date
Other Comments
# a X * +
: : : : :
Delete as necessary Check and found in order To rectify immediately Reading by measuring instrument Test to be done Yearly
Signature : Inspection conducted by Name/NRIC : Name of Contractor : Acknowledge By : HTO/TO/HTN/TN(H&M) ( ) Date /
UPG07/S44.DOC(28) lkk(181206) DPD
APPENDIX A33 Page 1 MONTHLY/QUARTERLY ROUTINE INSPECTION REPORT ON WET RISING MAIN SYSTEM DURING DEFECTS LIABILITY PERIOD Clause 44.7 "Servicing and Maintenance During Defects Liability Period"
To : Head ( Date of Inspection : Block No. : Items Monthly/Quarterly 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. General Condition of Pumproom Correct Setting of Time Switch Auto/Manual selector switch in "Auto" position Power supply selector switch in "On" position Control panel indicating lights Alarm bell and bulb Contractors and Relays
Branch Office ) Contract Title : Pump Room Location (s) : Checked Remedial Action/Date
Check and tighten control panel wiring + Suction Tank electrode and control module Transfer Pumpset 1 A KW R Y B A A A Fire Pumpset 1 A KW R Y B A A A Jockey Pumpset 1 A KW R Y B A A A Pumpset 1 (bar) (bar) (bar) Pumpset 2 (bar) (bar) Transfer Pumpset 2 A A A Fire Pumpset 2 A A A
10(i). Transfer Pump Rated current : Motor Output :
10(ii). Fire Pump Rated current : Motor Output :
10(iii). Jockey Pump Rated current : Motor Output :
11.
Pump Running Pressure Transfer Pump Fire pump Jockey Pump
UPG07/S44.DOC(29) lkk(181206) DPD
APPENDIX A33 Page 2 MONTHLY/QUARTERLY ROUTINE INSPECTION REPORT ON WET RISING MAIN SYSTEM DURING DEFECTS LIABILITY PERIOD Clause 44.7 "Servicing and Maintenance During Defects Liability Period" Items 12. Pump / Motor Condition Motor insulation test + Motor Running condition Pump mechanical seal Pump Lubrication Oil Level (if applicable) 13. Alignment of Couplings 14. Ball Float Valve condition Transfer tank Fire tank 15. 100mm Check Valve 16. 100mm Gate Valve 17. 150mm Check Valve 18. 150mm Gate Valve 19. Discharge and refill water in riser pipe+ 20. Check and inspect all landing valves condition + 21. Check Breeching inlets condition 22. Update Log Book 23. Additional requirements from FSSD Tank 1 Tank 2 Jockey Pump Fire Pumpset 1 Checked Fire Pumpset 2 Transfer Pumpset 1 Transfer Pumpset 2 Remedial Action/Date
Other Comments
# : a: X: * : +
Delete as necessary Check and found in order To rectify immediately Reading by measuring instrument Test to be done quarterly
Signature : Inspection conducted by Name/NRIC : Name of Contractor : Acknowledge By : HTO/TO/HTN/TN(H&M) ( ) Date /
SECTION 45/...
UPG07/S44.DOC(30) lkk(181206) DPD
SECTION 45
45.0
FIRE PROTECTION INSTALLATION
45.1
DEFINITIONS "Electrical Worker" shall mean a qualified competent person to perform electrical work under the Electricity Act (Cap 89A).
45.2
SCOPE OF WORK
45.2.1
General The fire protection installation work under this Contract shall include the provision, installation, testing, commissioning and maintenance of the Fire Fighting and Protection Installation. Unless otherwise specified, work shall include : (a) (b) (c) Fire hose reel system (complete with hose reel, suction tanks, pressure tanks and pumpset) Portable fire extinguishers, where applicable. Fire hydrants.
Pipes shall be made of steel in accordance with BS 1387. However, the pipework for hose reels with direct water supply from PUB mains shall be copper or stainless steel, notwithstanding other provisions specified in this Section including all clauses and subclauses under it. For hose reels with direct water supply from PUB mains, pumpset and its associated work including suction tanks and pressure tanks shall not be included in the scope of work for the purposes of this Section including all clauses and subclauses under it. The Drawings shall in part be diagrammatic and when read in conjunction with the Specifications shall be intended to convey the scope of the work, indicate the general arrangement of plant, piping, and the like, and show approximate sizes of plant and outlets. The Contractor shall follow the Drawings as closely as practicable in laying out work and in so doing shall co-ordinate all systems to secure the best possible installation in the available space. Where work is specified but the exact location of plant or control is not specifically shown, obtain the approval of the SO Rep prior to installation. It is the intent of the Drawings and Specifications to provide a complete operating system, unless specified otherwise. The omission from the Specifications or Drawings of any details in construction, installation, materials, or specialities necessary for a complete operating and safe system shall not relieve the Contractor from the provision of a complete operating and safe system. The Contractor shall provide all technical data, rates and prices as produced in Appendix A34.
45.2.2
Regulations and Codes of Practice Provide and install the fire hose reel system in accordance with BS 5306 : Part 1, EN671.1, SS CP 29 and the requirements of local governing authorities such as Building Control Authority (BCA), FSSD and PUB. The Contractor shall engage a company/firm which is registered with the BCA under the registration head of ME06 (Fire Prevention & Protection System) and shall be responsible for all applications to and arrangements with the local authorities such as PUB and FSSD representatives for the necessary completion, testing and commissioning of the installation for each building under the Works and all costs in connection therewith shall be deemed to have been included in the Contract Sum. Should the requirements of the Drawings or Specifications conflict with codes, regulations or standards, of the relevant authorities, the most stringent of the requirements shall govern the Works.
Ugdg Spec TS 45-2/29 45.2.3 Weatherproof and Flameproof Designs Where any apparatus forming part of the installation is situated outdoor or subjected to damp condition, such apparatus shall be of weatherproof design. Where any apparatus forming part of the installation is sited in an area where flammable vapour of explosive gas is liable to occur, such apparatus shall be of flameproof construction.
45.2.4
Provision of Openings for Electrical Wirings Provide structural openings through walls, floor and roof for the installation of pipework and electrical wiring. Make good such openings with non-combustible and waterproof material to the satisfaction of the SO Rep. All costs connected with the hacking and making good of structural openings shall be deemed to have been included in the Contract Sum.
45.2.5
Painting Galvanised steel pipes and fittings shall first be treated with one coat of polyvinyl butyral etching primer and one coat of approved zinc chromate primer and then painted with two coats of approved enamel paint.
45.2.6
Approval of Drawings and Details of Pumping Plant Where applicable, submit to the SO Rep for approval two (2) sets of the following document : (a) (b) (c) (d) Detailed proposal complete with necessary drawings. Technical specifications and samples (if appropriate) of all equipment employed in the installation. Electrical wiring diagram of the whole installation. Technical Specifications and Characteristic curves of every pump to indicate point/s of performance. Fully dimensioned scaled drawings of every pump room to indicate : (i) (ii) (iii) (iv) (v) Proposed water levels in the suction tank of which the pump shall start and stop operation. Position of switchboard. Piping / Water tank layout. Sizes of all pipes & fittings. Points and details of support for pipes, valves and fittings.
(e)
Work shall only commence upon approval of the Contractor's proposal by the SO Rep but additional approval shall be sought before any deviations from the approved proposal can be carried out, failing which the whole installation may not be accepted by the SO Rep. The approval of the proposal shall in no way relieve the Contractor of his responsibility should the plant or any of its parts proved inadequate in any aspect.
Ugdg Spec TS 45-3/29 45.2.7 Quality of Goods and Materials The quality of goods and materials shall comply with the requirement and regulations of the HDB and the relevant Authorities. No works shall commence until samples of the materials have been approved by the SO Rep. However, if the installed materials are subsequently found to be of inferior quality to that of the samples submitted, or if the materials proved to be unsuitable for use, or if the materials failed to perform to the requirement specified in the Specifications, the approval of the samples shall be withdrawn with immediate effect. In this respect, the Contractor shall allow for up to 2 tests for each type of fittings to be carried out by PSB or PSB's accredited laboratory as and when requested by the SO Rep. The sample shall be selected at random at the discretion of the SO Rep. The Contractor shall make good all Defects and replace all inferior or defective materials. The SO Rep shall exercise his right to impose charges for irregularities committed if the materials supplied are inferior or different from the samples approved. Where products are manufactured under PSB's Batch Inspection Scheme, additional testing shall not be necessary unless otherwise specified Prior to the installation of hose reels at the site, where corrosion test is not conducted under the PSB Batch Inspection Scheme, the Contractor shall arrange to submit a sample under the same batch to PSB for the test. The test report shall be submitted to the SO Rep. Any other relevant requirements issued by the FSSD shall be complied with.
45.3
FIRE HOSE REEL SYSTEM
45.3.1
General (a) Installation Fix the hose reels so that the centre is between 0.75 metre and 1.4 metre above floor level. Mount the hose reels on a swivel bracket suitable for mounting in a 1.6mm thick sheet steel hose reel cabinet or recesses clearly marked with "FIRE HOSE REEL" in white letters of at least 50mm high. Hose reel cabinet and recesses shall be painted red. Any doors provided for hose reel cabinet or recess shall be so hinged that they open approximately 180 degree and they shall not obstruct the running out of hose in either direction. The door shall have a 4mm glass front with spring locked to open from within. The Contractor shall provide five sets of master keys to the Employer. Where the hose reel is within a service duct, a signplate with words `FIRE HOSE REEL' in block letters of at least 50mm height shall be displayed on the door. (b) Rubber Hose The rubber hose shall be of 25mm internal diameter and shall have a minimum working pressure of 7 bars and shall be of the non-kinking type. The rubber hose shall be manufactured with an inner tube or lining, a reinforcement braided with textile material and an abrasion resistant rubber cover. The reinforcement shall consist of a single rayon braid or double braid of cotton. The length of rubber hose on the reel shall be 30 metres. There shall be no joints in the length of hose. Sample and certification shall be provided to verify that the hose is manufactured according to the requirements of BS 3169/EN 694. (c) Stop-valve Provide and fix 25mm stop-valve for the connection of the hose reel to water supply. An indication of the open and shut position shall be fixed or permanently marked on the wheel of the valve, and the body of the valve except for gate valves which shall be marked with a directional arrow indicating the direction of flow through the valve.
Ugdg Spec TS 45-4/29 45.3.1 General (Cont'd) (d) Shut-Off Nozzle Provide a shut-off nozzle assembly in accordance with the following requirements : (i) The assembly shall be constructed of a corrosion resistant metallic material or other materials approved under EN 671-1. In the absence of a hose reel cabinet, means shall be provided for the attachment of the assembly in a locked enclosure in such a manner that it cannot be disengaged until the enclosure has been opened. The assembly shall be permanently marked to indicate the open and shut position of the valve. The internal surface of the nozzle shall be finished to provide a smooth surface. The internal diameter of the nozzle shall be 6.35mm.
(ii)
(iii)
(iv) (v)
45.3.2
Hose Reel (a) General The hose reel shall extend not more than 350mm from the mounting surface and shall have an overall diameter not greater than 760mm. The side plates of the hose reel shall have a continuous outer rim and shall be rigid in construction. The side of the reel shall be painted red. The diameter of the inner core on which the hose is wound shall be not less than 200mm. When the full length of the hose is coiled on the hose reel without the use of abnormal tension, the rim of the side plates of the hose reel shall project at least 10mm beyond the external diameter of the coiled hose of any point. The fittings to which the hose are attached on the hose reel shall be arranged in such a manner that the hose is not restricted or flattened by the application of additional layers. The water connection through the rubber hose shall permit the full flow of water to the hose without external leakage during any rotation of the hose reel. The hose reel waterways connecting the water supply to the hose including the inlet pipe after the stop valve, shall be constructed of nonferrous material and/or stainless steel and/or galvanised steel. Where hose reels are within service ducts, they shall be mounted such that their operations are not hindered. The mounting position shall be approved by the SO Rep. The clips used to attach the hose to the nozzle and the drum shall be galvanised ear clips. (b) Markings Mark every hose reel with the following information : (i) (ii) The manufacturer's name, trade name or mark. Instructions for operation and use which shall include the following : (1) Turn on stop valve (2) Run out hose (3) Turn on water at nozzle (4) The hose shall be fully charged before winding it onto the reel (5) The year of manufacture (6) The test pressure in Bar
All notices and instructions shall be weather and corrosion resistant and shall be set out in letters easily readable. In addition, the operating instructions For Emergency Only: Break glass to open the door from inside and TO TURN ON THE INLET VALVE BEFORE RUNNING OUT THE HOSE shall be of 12mm height and printed in white on the hose reel cabinet. Where there is no cabinet, the same notice shall be provided on a 2mm thick aluminium plate affixed to the wall adjacent to the reel.
Ugdg Spec TS 45-5/29 45.3.2 Hose Reel (Cont'd) (c) Tests The hose reel shall be factory tested against water leakage after assembly at a test pressure of 13.8 bars (200 psi). The Contractor shall furnish documentary evidence of such factory test to the SO Rep before delivery of hose reels to the Site on request by SO Rep.
45.3.3
Pumpset (a) Hose reel Pumpset The hose reel pumpset shall consist of two (2) sets of fire pumpsets, one duty and one standby to the approval of the SO Rep. Pumpsets shall be of centrifugal multistage vertical pumps. Notwithstanding the above requirements, single stage centrifugal end suction pumps shall be used where applicable. The pumps shall have stainless steel shafts and mechanical seals and shall be driven through flexible couplings by electric motors with speed of not more than 3000 rpm. Each pump shall be capable of providing a flow of water of at least 0.8 litres per second in the rising main. Multistage vertical pumps shall have stainless steel outer sleeve and the suction/discharge casing shall be of cast iron. The pump impeller shall be of either stainless steel or bronze. Each pump shall also be capable of being started or stopped manually. The standby pump shall be so arranged that it will operate automatically on failure of the duty pump. The pumpsets shall be able to withstand 20 times start/stop per hour. Provide each pump with a ball valve and flexible connection at both the suction and discharge ends, a spring loaded check valve at the discharge end and a strainer at the suction end. The suction and discharge connections shall be flanged. Screwed suction and discharge connections shall have flange adaptors. Provide pressure gauges at the main discharge pipe. The gauge shall have a range of at least twice the rated working pressure of the pump. All pumps shall be automatically primed at all times. This shall be activated if the pumps are sited so that at least two thirds of the effective capacity of the suction tank is above the level of the centre of pump suction. Where this is not possible, provide separate priming tanks with foot valves for each pump. Submit to the SO Rep for approval the characteristic performance curves of the pumps offered. The efficiency of the pumpset shall not be less than 50% at the operating conditions. Mark each pump conspicuously and permanently with letter "P1" or "P2" to the satisfaction of the SO Rep. Provide and install all the pipework and accessories connecting the pumpsets to the suction tank and hose reel riser. Provide spring type vibration isolation mounting for each pump to ensure minimal vibration transmission to the building structure. (b) Hose Reel Pumps Controls Provide, install, connect and test all necessary starting and control equipment. Enclose all such equipment in a front connected wall mounted and manufactured from electrogalvanised sheet metal of minimum 1.5mm thickness IP 54 cubicle with full locking hinged door. The cubicle shall be painted in accordance with sub-clause 45.3.6(h)(iv) "Painting".
Ugdg Spec TS 45-6/29 45.3.3 Pumpset (Cont'd) (b) Hose reel Pumps Controls (Cont'd) The sequence of operation of the hose reel pumps shall be as follows : (i) The duty pumpset shall automatically come into operation when a pressure switch located in the branch out pipe feeding the two pressure tanks detects a fall of normal static pressure in the pipe below a predetermined value. If the duty pump fails to start or the demand for water exceeds the nominal output of the duty pump (ie. when three or more hose reels operate simultaneously), this drop in pressure shall be sensed by another pressure switch located adjacent to the first pressure switch, which shall then start the standby pump. The exact cut-in pressure of the standby pump shall be varied according to the normal system pressure and the performance curve of the pump. As the requirements for water reduces, the pressure in the system increases. When there is no demand to the system and the normal static pressure has been established, this preset pressure shall be sensed by both pressure switches and the duty and standby pump shall be switched off respectively.
(ii)
(iii)
After each start/stop pumping cycle, the duty pump shall be alternated automatically by the use of an auto changeover relay to avoid one pump remaining stationary for long period. Provide a manual selector switch to select the duty or standby pump. Provide a 7-Day Dial, 2-Hour Dial time switch to start the pumps running for a pre-set duration of time weekly. At a pre-set time of each week, the time switch shall energise the coil of a solenoid valve for a pre-set period of time. The solenoid valve shall be located in a by-pass pipe connecting the main discharge line with both the suction tanks. As the solenoid valve is opened, water shall be forced to flow back to the water tanks by the system pressure which will then reduce progressively. This drop in system pressure shall be sensed by the pressure switch which shall then start the duty pump and the standby pump. Each pump shall be activated after the other when the solenoid valve is opened at two different pre-set times on the time switch. Provide a globe valve to throttle excessive pressure upstream of the solenoid valve. Install a ball stop valve to enable manual test run of the pumpsets and a pressure relief valve to avoid excessive build-up of system pressure in parallel with the solenoid valve. Use the third pressure switch installed next to the above two pressure switches to initiate an audible and visual alarm in the event that the normal pressure in the pipe falls to 1 bar. The controller shall be fully wired and mounted within the cubicle requiring only incoming supply, necessary control and alarm connections. The following starting and control equipment shall be incorporated in the cubicle : (i) (ii) (iii) (iv) (v) (vi) (vii) (viii) (ix) (x) (xi) (xii) (xiii) (xiv) (xv) (xvi) (xvii) (xviii) 1 no. ON/OFF isolating switch for incoming. 1 no. MCB unit for incoming. 2 sets ON/OFF isolators, each completed with MCB unit for starters. 2 nos. direct on line starters. 2 nos. thermal overload relays with ambient temperature compensation. 1 no. rotary selector switch for AUTO/MANUAL selection. 1 no. pump selector switch. 2 sets START/STOP button switch for the starters. 8 nos. MCB units for control circuits. 1 no. automatic change over relay (100% continuous rating). 2 nos. relays to activate alarm bell for motor overload trip. 1 set of cancel alarm pushbutton and cancel alarm relay. Relays to control the pumpsets. 1 no. water tank low level warning light. 1 no. power supply on light. 2 nos. pump "RUN" indicating lights. 2 nos. pump "TRIP" indicating lights. 1 no. low pressure warning light.
Ugdg Spec TS 45-7/29 45.3.3 Pumpset (Cont'd) (b) Hose reel Pumps Controls (Cont'd) 1 no. 7-Day Dial, 2-Hour Dial Time Switch to control the weekly running of the pumpsets. Voltage-free contacts to relay signal to remote fire indicator board and initiate a fire alarm when flow switch is actuated. (xxi) 2 nos. relay for lamp and bell test. (xxii) 1 no. pushbutton for lamp and bell test. (xxiii) 1 no. 230V/24V AC transformer. (xxiv) Terminal block for connection to remote equipment. Submit the control circuit diagram for approval before installation. Provide the pressure switch settings on a 240 by 150mm perspex sheet mounted by self-adhesive tape. The details and locations shall be approved by the SO Rep. (xix) (xx)
45.3.4
Pipes & Fittings (a) Scope This section sets out the requirements, standards of workmanship and materials in general for the piping system for the hose reel system. (b) General Before delivery to Site, clean all pipes thoroughly so that they are free from scale and rust. Reject old and damaged pipes and use only new pipes. On Site, all pipes shall be again checked and thoroughly wire brushed and prime coated prior to installation. Install all pipework so that clearance of approximately 80mm is left between the outside of the pipe and the nearest wall, ceiling or equipment surface, whenever possible. Pipe joints or fittings shall not be permitted within the thickness of walls, floors, any partitions or below a beam. (c) Materials Provide and install all pipework as indicated in the Drawings. The internal and external surfaces of the pipes and fittings shall be clean, smooth and free from Defects that would impair their performance. Cutting, bending and fixing shall be in strict accordance with the manufacturer's instructions. Pipes shall be factory marked with manufacturer's name or identification mark and classification of pipes. Any unmarked pipes shall not be accepted. Lay pipes outside buildings underground, and the depth of cover measured from the top of the pipe to the finished surfaced of the ground level shall not be less than 750mm. Stainless steel pipes shall comply with BS 4127:Part 2. Stainless steel pipe fittings shall be of capillary fittings and compression fittings in accordance with BS 864:Part 2. Fittings of 15mm and longer shall be legibly marked with the maker's name or trade mark. All stainless steel water pipes, fittings and accessories shall be approved by Water Department, PUB. Ductile iron cement lined pipes shall comply with BS EN 545 and medium galvanised steel pipes shall comply with SS17. Joints and connections to galvanised steel pipework of up to and including 65mm diameter shall be made by means of screwed connections. Join pipes of 80mm diameter and above by means of flanged connections. Unless otherwise specified, use galvanised steel bolts and nuts for all supports and flanged connections. Flanges shall be raise face conforming to BS 4504. All flanges shall be flushed and aligned, and shall be made with corrugated jointing rings, coated on both sides with the recommended jointing compound. Use ductile iron cement lined pipes where pipes are concealed such as those within concrete slabs or below ground.
Ugdg Spec TS 45-8/29 45.3.4 Pipes & Fittings (d) Valves All valves shall either be of bronze, brass or cast steel construction and conforming to the relevant British Standard and be suitable for the working pressure encountered. Where valves are located above 2m from the floor level or in an inaccessible location they shall be operated by chain mechanism. Valves used for working pressure above 19 bar shall be of flanged type. All valves shall be located in accessible positions. Isolation valves of 50mm diameter and below installed along pipework inside the pump room shall be of ball stop valves approved by Water Department, PUB. Valves up to and including 65mm diameter where connected to steel pipe shall be of brass/bronze with female screwed connections. Valves of 80mm diameter and above where fitted to steel pipes shall be of the flanged cast iron or ductile iron type. Check valves shall be of the spring loaded non-slamming type. The Contractor shall select these valves in relation to the velocity of the water in the pipe. In all cases the valve shall operate silently on reversal of water flow. Solenoid valve shall be of the normally closed, magnetically operated pilot type. Valve body shall be brass or bronze and the solenoid coil shall be replaceable on Site without removing valve body from pipe fitting. Install "Y-type" strainer upstream of the solenoid valve to trap any dirt and debris. The power supply of the solenoid valve shall be 24V AC 50Hz. (e) Strainers Install "Y-type" strainers upstream of all pumpsets. Provide all strainers with isolating valves so that the strainers can be cleaned without draining away the water of the system. Where a system cannot be shut-down for strainer cleaning, install by-pass in parallel to the strainer. (f) Pressure Gauges, Pressure Switches And Flow Switches Pressure gauges shall be of the 100mm diameter brass cased type. They shall be designed for pipe mounting and be provided with suitable gauge cocks and snubbers to prevent vibration of the needles. Pressure gauges shall conform to BS 1780 Part 2. Pressure gauges shall be of the Bourdon tube type and be calibrated in m-bar. Select suitable gauges for mid-range indications at normal working pressure and the maximum measurable pressure shall be twice the maximum working pressure. Pressure gauges shall have scales with divisions not exceeding 0.2 bar for a maximum scale value of 10 bars, not exceeding 0.5 bar for a maximum scale value of 16 bars, and not exceeding 1.0 bar for a maximum scale values in excess of 16 bars. Pressure switches shall comply with BS 6134 and shall be of automatic reset type. Install pressure gauge and pressure switches near to the pressure tanks. The enclosures of the pressure switches shall be of water tight IP 65 construction. Pressure switches shall be suitable for conduit construction and with terminal block for wire connection. Power supply for the pressure switches shall be 24V AC 50 Hz. Failure of pressurized components of the pressure switches shall not result in a build up of pressure within the enclosure. The parts in contact with water for the pressure switches and pressure gauges shall be brass, stainless steel or other approved corrosion resistant materials. The pressure switch shall have adjustable and independent high and low pressure settings.
Ugdg Spec TS 45-9/29 45.3.4 Pipes & Fittings (Cont'd) (g) Pressure Tanks Two rechargeable pressure tanks of replaceable membrane type and pre-charged according to operating conditions shall be installed at the discharge of the pumps to keep the hose reel riser pressurized at any time. The pressure tank shall be of carbon steel, designed and fabricated to British Standard or Standard of American Society of Mechanical Engineers for Pressure Vessels. The Contractor shall furnish the design and detailed calculations for the proposed pressure tanks. The design and construction of the pressure tanks shall be subjected to the approval of the SO Rep. The pressure tanks shall be of vertical type and the impermeable diaphragm shall be of heavy duty vinyl or butyl material. The system shall consist of two numbers of interconnected pressure tanks. The capacity of each tank shall not be less than 50 litres. The pump shall be started automatically by a pressure switch to recharge the pressure tanks in response to a drop of storage pressure below a pre-set value according to operating conditions. The pump shall be stopped automatically when the required storage pressure has been reached in the pressure tanks. Provide each pressure tank with safety relief valve. Technical details including the manufacturer , specification and pressure setting shall be labelled on metal or plastic plate attached to each of the tank. (h) Vibration Isolation Connectors All pipe connections to pumpsets and any equipment subjected to vibration shall be carried out by means of flexible neoprene connectors. Unless specifically permitted by the SO Rep, rigid connections between pipelines and equipment shall be rejected. Use neoprene or spring hangers of approved manufacturer for supporting pump delivery and return mains. (i) Pipe Supports And Fittings Support all pipework by pipe hangers and supports. Unless otherwise stated, all pipe hangers and supports shall be of mild steel adjustable for height. Vertical pipe risers penetrating through floor slab shall be supported to each floor by clamp or collars. All vertical pipe risers shall have foot elbows or concrete block supports at their lowest point. The spacing of fixings of pipe supports shall not exceed the following : Maximum Spacing Horizontal Vertical (m) (m) 1.75 2.5 2.5 3.0 2.75 3.0 3.0 3.5 3.5 4.5 2.75 2.75 1.75 2.5 2.5 3.0 2.75 3.0 3.0 3.5 3.5 4.5
Material of Pipe Galvanized Steel Pipe
Diameter of Pipe (mm) 10 20 32 40 65 75 10 20 32 40 65 - 15 - 25 - 50 - 80 - 100 - 15 - 25 - 50 - 80
Ductile Iron Pipe Stainless Steel Pipe
Fixing shall wherever possible be built into the building structure. Alternatively, they shall be secured to the building structure by means of expansion or power driven bolts.
Ugdg Spec TS 45-10/29 45.3.4 Pipes & Fittings (Cont'd) (j) Pipework, Testing And Cleaning All pipework shall be flushed with clean water before final topping up and putting into service. All pipework shall be hydrostatically tested to 10 bars or two times the working pressure whichever is the greater before lagging or putting into service. The test pressure shall be maintained for a minimum duration of 24 hours.
45.3.5
Suction Tanks (a) General Tank supplying water for domestic purposes shall not be used as suction for hose reel installation. Lay a separate line from the PUBs bulk meter position to supply water to the suction tanks or the fire hose reels directly in case boosting of the PUBs water pressure is not required. The line shall serve the fire hose reel system only. To prevent contamination, provide approved double check valves assembly complete with drain cocks in accordance with the Drawings. The effective water capacity of two suction tanks with automatic inflow shall not be less than 1100 litres. The effective water capacity shall be labelled as instructed by the SO Rep. The tanks shall be constructed of reinforced concrete and flanged stainless steel (AISI Grade 316) pipe connections. The interconnecting pipes for the tanks shall be correspondingly aligned. Nominal pipe thickness for stainless steel pipe shall be 4mm complying with JIS G3459 Schedule 20S. Provide and install piping to each suction tank of nominal diameter as follows : (i) (ii) (iii) (iv) (v) (vi) (vii) 1 no. 54mm diameter stainless steel incoming pipe from PUB's bulk meter; 1 no. 50mm diameter galvanised steel outlet pipe to fire hose reel booster pump; 1 no. 32mm diameter galvanised steel by-pass pipe; 1 no. 100mm diameter ductile iron washout pipe; 1 no. 100mm diameter ductile iron over-flow pipe. The over-flow pipe shall be connected to the washout pipe if suction tanks are situated at the 2nd storey and above. 1 no. 28mm diameter stainless steel over-flow warning pipe if suction tanks are located at 2nd storey and above; and 1 no. 100mm diameter cement mortar lined cast iron or ductile iron interconnecting pipe.
Provide a 100mm diameter UPVC air vent to each tank. All air vents shall be fitted with elbow end and covered by mosquito netting. Provide a 100mm diameter UPVC pipe to each tank for the mounting of level control electrodes. (b) Level Control (i) Ball Float Valve Approved 50mm equilibrium ball float valve shall be fitted in the suction tank and bolted directly to the incoming water supply pipe. It shall be able to operate on a water pressure in 2 the incoming water supply pipe of not less than 700 KN per m and shall be approved by the PUB. The fulcrum and lever shall be of bronze with copper ball float. The internal valve shall be of bronze with leather trim and the packing plate shall be of gun metal with winged guide and links. The body shall be of cast iron with bronze lines and gun metal seal ring and the flange shall be at right angle and drilled to BS 4504 or BS 10 with approved rating.
UPG07/S45.DOC(10) lkk(181206) DPD
Ugdg Spec TS 45-11/29 45.3.5 Suction Tanks (Cont'd) (b) Level Control (Cont'd) (ii) Floatless Level Control Relay Units Connect floatless level control electrodes mounted on each suction tank directly to the relay units mounted on the wall beside the tank. Arrange floatless level control electrodes to stop the pumpset at pre-determined low level. Use a floatless level control relay unit mounted on the wall beside the suction tank to provide over-riding control of pressure switches such that at a pre-set low water level in the suction tank, the pressure switches shall not start the pump. At that low water level, even a pump in operation shall be stopped by the relay unit. The floatless level control electrodes shall also actuate a warning indicating light and an alarm bell when the water level in the suction tank falls to a predetermined level. The floatless level control relay unit shall be of plug-in relay unit type. Electrodes shall be stainless steel and provided with electrode separators. Electrode holders mounted on tanks shall be easily accessible and removable to facilitate maintenance and shall be installed to the satisfaction of the SO Rep. Run the wiring in conduits from the electrodes to the floatless level control relay units and keep it as short as possible. The wiring to the electrodes shall not run through the same conduit as the power supply wiring. (c) Alarm And Emergency Device Install alarm device to be turned-on by the floatless lever control relay unit which shall be activated when low water level in the suction tanks and/or low pressure relay and/or thermal overload relays for the pump motors are encountered. This alarm device shall be in the form of an alarm bell placed beside the control panel in the pumproom and a red bulb placed outside the pumproom and near the entrance or other location as directed by the SO Rep. The bell shall be weatherproof and of heavy duty type. The alarm bell shall give a distinctive sound different from that of any fire alarm sounder and the audible fault alarm at the fire indicator board. Provide a pushbutton to cancel the alarm bell. The make and model shall be approved by the SO Rep.
45.3.6
Power Supply (a) General The power supply available for electric motors is 415 volts, three phase, 50 cycles alternating current. (b) Motors The electric motors shall be squirrel-cage totally enclosed fan cooled type with minimum Class F insulation unless specified otherwise and shall be designed for continuous maximum rating. Motor type and model shall be approved by the SO Rep before installation. Terminal boxes shall be totally enclosed, of water-tight design and fitted with cable glands. The motor efficiency and power factors of the motors shall be more than 90% and 0.85 respectively at full load and shall comply with the current PUB Regulations.
UPG07/S45.DOC(11) lkk(181206) DPD
Ugdg Spec TS 45-12/29 45.3.6 Power Supply (Cont'd) (c) Motor Starters The starters for the motors shall be direct on-line type. The starter shall provide means of starting or stopping the motors by push-button or be automatically actuated by the pressure switches in the main riser pipe. Each starter shall have time relay, undervoltage release, no volt release, adjustable and ambient compensated (-5C to 50C) thermal overload protection with manual reset and pilot lamp. The starter shall be submitted to the SO Rep for approval before installation. The operating voltage of the control coil shall be 230V. The starting apparatus shall be of "frequent duty" rating and be capable of starting under the above conditions intermittently up to 40 times per hour at not less than 20 seconds intervals. The mechanical and electrical endurance of the starter shall be not less than 50,000 operations. Provide the manufacturer's certificate to this effect when requested by the SO Rep. The starters shall be wired in such a way that the floatless level control relay unit shall be able to override other pump controls and actuate the pumps according to different pre-set conditions. (d) 7-Day Dial, 2-Hour Dial Time Switch Use an approved type of time switch. Connect the time switch to control the coil of the solenoid valve. Time switch shall be able to operate on 7-days basis with a minimum 24 hours reserve to cater for temporary power failure. The time switch shall be capable of providing at least two on-off operations per week. Time switches shall incorporate a 7-day dial and a 2-hour dial with a shortest switch period of not more than 3 minutes for the 2-hour dial. Provide ON/OF lever transfer switch for each time switch to facilitate manual ON/OFF to override control without disturbing the preset schedule. The power supply for the timer shall be 230V AC 50 Hz. Provide time switch with a clear plastic front cover. (e) Auxiliary Relays Auxiliary relays shall be suitable for AC operation and shall have silver contacts with an inherent self cleaning action. Auxiliary relays shall close satisfactorily at 80% nominal volts and hold in satisfactorily at 65% nominal volts. Auxiliary relays with functions common to a number of circuits and which are fitted to a common panel as referred to previously shall be plug-in type. Auxiliary relays fitted to demountable units shall be plug-in type where possible. Fixed relays are acceptable if they are a design feature of the units. Auxiliary relays shall have a minimum of 6 contacts rated at 5 Amps minimum for an inductive load. Contacts shall be capable of carrying and breaking without damage, the inrush and operating currents of contactor or starter coils they are switching. The contact arrangement shall be easily alterable. (f) Pushbuttons Pushbuttons shall be of the oil tight pattern heavy duty unless otherwise specified and rated at a minimum of 5 Amps inductive. Pushbuttons shall consist of an actuating button assembly coupled to an interchangeable contact assembly of sufficient poles to suit the application. Pushbutton bezels shall be black.
UPG07/S45.DOC(12) lkk(181206) DPD
Ugdg Spec TS 45-13/29 45.3.6 Power Supply (Cont'd) (f) Pushbuttons (Cont'd) Employ the following colour codes : Green Red Black (g) "START" or "ON" "STOP" or "OFF" Reset
Indicator Lamps Indicator lamps shall be 24V rating. Each lamp shall be clearly labelled to indicate the designation of service, circuit and locations. Indicating lamps shall be of the domed glass or plastic lens type rated at 6 watts. The indication shall be clearly visible from the sides or front. Indicating lamps shall have black bezels. The bodies of indicator lamps shall be ventilated to ensure efficient heat dissipation. Connection to lamps shall be by screws or clamp terminals; soldered terminations shall be rejected. Employ the following colour codes : Green Amber Red "ON" status "OFF" status "FAULT", "FAILURE", "ALARM" status
(h)
Hose Reel Pump Control Panel (i) Construction Provide and install approved switchboard required to serve the booster pumpsets. The wall mounted switchboard cabinet shall be installed in the pumproom and it shall be near to the entrance of the pumproom. The location shall be subject to the approval of the SO Rep. The cabinet shall be of front connected type and unless otherwise specified, manufactured from minimum 2mm gauge sheet steel using folded section or angle form bracing for rigid construction. The cabinet shall have adequate ventilation and shall be drip proof. The construction shall be such that it permits ready access to the interior of the cubicles for operation and maintenance purposes. The opening of a panel door shall allow access to that compartment only. Provide continuous mild steel to complete separate adjacent cubicle. Provide switchboard cabinet with rubber bushes at knockout holes for the entry of all incoming and outgoing cables. Schematic wiring and field connection diagrams shall be permanently secured to the inside of the enclosure door. Instruments indicating lights, rotary switches, selector switches, push buttons, isolating switches, etc shall be mounted directly on front panel with locknuts to hold such items firmly in position under all conditions of operation. Indicating lights shall be of the transformer type. Isolating switch shall be mechanically interlocked so that the enclosure door cannot be opened with the handle in the ÒN' position. Carry out the whole of the electrical work in compliance with SS CP 5 and subject to the approval of the SO Rep.
UPG07/S45.DOC(13) lkk(181206) DPD
Ugdg Spec TS 45-14/29 45.3.6 Power Supply (Cont'd) (h) Hose Reel Pump Control Panel (Cont'd) (ii) Internal Wiring The control panel shall all be internally wired, including all wirings between individual units and between units and terminal strips located near the room entrance. Number all terminals on the strips and these numbers shall correspond with the numbers on the wiring and field connection diagrams permanently secured to the inside of the enclosure door. Wiring shall be multi-strand of not less than 1.5 mm copper conductors, PVC insulated, colour coded and numbered for identification. Identification shall be by means of moulded ferrules or sleeves at both ends of the cables. The ferrules or sleeves shall be of insulating materials with white glossy finish and black lettering. The ferrules or sleeves shall be unaffected by oil or damp. The numbering shall be approved by the SO Rep. No PVC tapes shall be used for colour coding of cables. Each wire shall be separately terminated with tinned (but not soldered) crimped lugs of approved type. Conductor terminations need not be provided where insertion or tunnel type terminals are employed. Unless otherwise approved by the SO Rep, connect only one wire to each terminal of insertion or tunnel type block. Terminals shall be identified using an approved marking and numbering system. Run all control circuit wirings separately from power circuit wiring and protect them by using MCB units or fuses. (iii) Labelling Provide each supervisory control panel with a main label mounted in a prominent position. Labels shall be easily replaceable and shall be secured with brass screws or rust proofed steel screws or in other approved manners. Unless otherwise specified, all labels shall be black lettering engraved on white traffolyte. The size of lettering and the wording of the labels shall be approved by the SO Rep. Submit schedule to the SO Rep for approval prior to manufacture. Labels shall designate circuit number and equipment function. Label terminal strips to identify the circuit number, phase connection, terminal number and function - eg. control, indication, protection, etc. Label clearly all control relays, timers, fuses and other items of switchgear located on common panels to identify circuit number, function and rating. (iv) Painting After degreasing, apply one coat of etch primer, follow by one undercoat and two top coats of synthetic enamel. All coats shall be stoved baked to paint manufacturer's requirements. The finished colour of internal and external surfaces shall be red. Make good all damages occurred during transit or installation to a standard equal to that manufactured originally.
2
UPG07/S45.DOC(14) lkk(181206) DPD
Ugdg Spec TS 45-15/29 45.3.6 Power Supply (Cont'd) (h) Hose Reel Pump Control Panel (Cont'd) (v) Wiring The wiring shall comply with SS CP 5. Label clearly isolation switches and circuit breakers on the power feed to the pumps : "Fire hose reel pump supply - Do not switch off in case of fire". Install the cables from the pumproom electrical mains isolator to the pump's starting and control switchboard. Trunking cables and wiring within the pumproom shall be PVC insulated to SS 358 suitable for a 230V single phase 50 cycles system and they shall be carried in conduit or cable trunking. The metal conduit shall be of heavy gauge, G.I. conduit (Class B), complying with BS 4568, free from internal roughness and burrs. Fixing to walls and other flat surfaces shall be by means of spacer bars saddles at maximum 1m centres for horizontal runs and 1.5m centres for vertical runs. Conduit termination to loop-on boxes shall consist of screwed socket and smooth bore butt to adaptor boxes, fuse boards and cable trunking, etc. The termination shall consist of a flanged coupling, lead washer and smooth bore bush. Where the conduit is in contact with any structural steel work, make permanent metallic connection between the conduit and steel work. All conduits and trunking shall be electrically and mechanically continuous throughout and shall be earthed with matching standing copper link. Cable trunking shall comply with SS 249 and shall be fabricated from 1.0mm mild steel sheet, in 1.83m or 2.44m lengths and provided with a 50mm fixing sleeve, spot welded on one end at each length. Treat the trunking with anti-corrosion paint and finishing paint to a minimum thickness of 45 microns. Jointing of trunking shall be by means of round headed bolts and nuts. Lay 4mm x 20mm copper earth tape in the trunking run. The copper shall be tinned where it is bolted down. Complete the entire trunking and conduit installation before the cables are drawn. The number of cables to be drawn into the conduits shall comply with SS CP 5. Test all seals not less than 24 hours after completion. This test shall be made with insulation testing equipment of the "Megger" type at 500V or other approved and obtain an infinity reading before the conductors are connected to any apparatus. Terminate wiring in conduit and duct in the floor in approved junction boxes adjacent to the machine or foundation plinth with water-tight flexible tubing enclosing the cables between motors and junction boxes. Earth all non current carrying metal parts of electrical equipment. Earth continuity conductor shall have cross-sectional area of not less than that specified in Table D1 of CP 5. 45.4 PORTABLE FIRE EXTINGUISHER Provide and install portable fire extinguishers in locations as shown in the Drawings. Extinguishers for use in all Pump Rooms, Ejector Pump rooms, Generator Rooms shall be appropriate for dealing with class B and C fires for eg. CO2 Fire Extinguishers. Those for use in Utilities Centre, Centralised Refuse Chambers, Consumer Switch Rooms, Lift Machine Rooms and similar nature services rooms shall be appropriate for dealing with class A, B & C fires for eg. Type ABC Dry Chemical Fire Extinguishers in accordance to CP 55. Provide and install each fire extinguisher complete with horn, wall bracket and visual indicator (indicating whether the extinguisher has been used). Extinguishers equipped with nonmetallic horns, such as plastic or PVC horns, shall be used in location with energised electrical equipment such as switch rooms. Metal horns shall not be used in location with energised electrical equipment. All fire extinguishers location, quantity, rating, type and weight shall comply with SS 232, CP 55 and other current codes and regulations and shall be approved for use by all relevant local authorities.
UPG07/S45.DOC(15) lkk(181206) DPD
Ugdg Spec TS 45-16/29 45.4 PORTABLE FIRE EXTINGUISHER (CONT'D) Good practice as recommended in BS 5306:Pt 3 and SS CP 55 shall be observed and implemented where applicable. Install fire extinguisher at a height of 1m above the floor level on the hangers/brackets supplied together with the fire extinguisher. They shall be placed in a manner such that their operating instructions face outward. The operating instructions shall be simple and shown clearly in pictorial form. Fire extinguisher shall be embossed with 2 number of HDB logo not smaller than 30mm x 30mm on the external face of every extinguisher. The logo shall be red and white. No stick-on logo shall be acceptable as a substitute. House each fire extinguisher in a 1.6mm thick sheet steel case complete with front hinged door, 3mm thick glass panel and handle master lock. The case shall be coated with 2 coats of red paint. Lettering such as "FIRE" or "FIRE EXTINGUISHER" shall be eminently and permanently marked on the case and shall be of approved sizes and colour. Provide each case with a master key placed inside a recess covered by a front break glass and the recess shall be mounted on the front hinged door.
45.5
TESTING AND COMMISSIONING
45.5.1
General The Contractor shall submit an application to the SO Rep to witness the inspection and commissioning test of the complete installation. The application shall include information on the testing appointment date and statement of completion of the whole works by the Contractor. The appointed date shall be at least 2 months before the completion of the building work. The Contractor shall provide complete information as produced in Appendix A35 and submit two copies to the SO Rep one week before the testing of the System. Provide a complete set of testing equipment. The minimum requirements of which shall be set out below: (a) (b) (c) Tachometer with accessories for measurement of pumps and motor shaft speeds. Meter-Recorder for measuring flow rate through orifice plate. All necessary electrical testing equipment such as insulation resistance tester.
The whole of the instruments, equipment and labour required for conducting these tests and demonstrations shall be provided by the Contractor and the cost thereof shall be included in the Contract Sum. The test instruments and equipment shall remain the property of the Contractor.
45.5.2
Test Records The records shall include : (a) (b) (c) (d) (e) (f) date and time for inspection or test person carrying out the test test results noted any external factors significantly affecting the results follow-up actions required work carried out as a result of (e) above with date and result of re-test
45.5.3
Pipework All water pipework and other fittings shall be hydrostatically tested to 10 bar or 2 times the working pressure whichever shall be the greater, and this test pressure shall be maintained for 24 hours. Allowable pressure drop during 24 hours testing shall be decided by the SO Rep but generally shall not exceed 3% of test pressure. During tests, all welded joints shall be hammered.
UPG07/S45.DOC(16) lkk(181206) DPD
Ugdg Spec TS 45-17/29 45.5.4 Control Equipment Set and calibrate all limit switches, pressure switches, time switches, etc. as required to ensure that operating directions are correct. Test and verify the time and control sequence.
45.5.5
Pumps Check all pumps for alignment, flow rates, pressure and speed and their balance to comply with the required flow and head.
45.5.6
Performance Test On Substantial Completion of the Work, the Contractor shall submit to the SO Rep two (2) copies of the test results using approved HDB Testing Form. Provide a minimum of seven (7) days notice to the SO Rep to verify the test results on Site and demonstrate to the SO Rep that the installation if adjusted and regulated correctly fulfils the function for which it has been designed. Adjust, balance and regulate the work concerned as necessary until the required conditions are attained. Should the SO Rep find discrepancies between the recorded test results and the measurements demonstrated to him on Site, the test shall be repeated to the satisfaction of the SO Rep at the Contractor's own cost and expense.
45.5.7
Electrical Commissioning Tests Test the complete installation, both before and after the connection, to the requirements of the SO Rep. The Contractor shall be responsible for all electrical tests at the Site in the presence of the SO Rep during the whole of the period required for the tests. All materials and equipment provided or installed which fail the tests shall be replaced or rectified at once by the Contractor without additional cost to the Employer and the tests shall be repeated at the Contractor's own cost and expense. Conduct all tests to the satisfaction of the SO Rep. Provide all necessary instruments, apparatus, connections, skilled and unskilled labour required for the tests to the satisfaction of the SO Rep. Make accurate records of all tests and furnish test certificates and a schedule of the results in an approved form. Two copies of such schedules and of each test certificate shall be required. Make good any circuit or section of the installation failing to comply with the required standard for acceptance at the Contractor's own cost and expense. The site tests to be carried out on each completed section of the electrical installation where applicable, shall be as follows : (a) (b) (c) (d) (e) (f) Insulation resistance tests to earth and between conductors of cables and wires Continuity tests Tests to prove correct operation of interlocks, tripping and closing circuits, indications, etc Test operation of alarm devices Rotational tests on all motors Insulation resistance test on any electrical apparatus supplied and/or installed before and after connecting such apparatus to the supply
UPG07/S45.DOC(17) lkk(181206) DPD
Ugdg Spec TS 45-18/29 45.5.8 Hose Reel Tests (a) Flushing Out Before any water is introduced into the hose reel, it shall be thoroughly flushed out to ensure that no harmful matter is passed into the reel. After flushing out, the tubing shall be run out and the water turned on to establish that the assembly is fully operational. (b) Procedure For Direct SPSL Mains Supplies The most hydraulically remote reel shall provide a jet of at least 10m in length at a flow rate of at least 0.4 litres per second. (c) Procedure For Boosted Supplies The most hydraulically remote reel shall provide a jet of at least 10m in length at a flow rate of at least 0.4 litres per second. Check and verify pump running alarm. Repeat the test with simulated mechanical or electrical failure of the duty pump. Check and test the ability of the standby pump to come into service automatically and to maintain the required outputs. Check and verify pump failure warning indicated on local control panel and remote fire indicator board. Test the various control features of the hose reel booster pump to verify that they function correctly. (d) Putting Into Operational Readiness When the tests have been satisfactorily completed, restore the system to its normal operating state. Reels shall never be left under pressure and, where practicable, drain the hose prior to returning it to the drum. Restore the hose on the drum, pay particular attention to automatic hose reels to ensure that the automatic valve is fully closed when the hose has been restored. Where an isolation valve has been incorporated, close the isolation valve on completion of storage, and complete the nozzle interlock, where fitted.
45.5.9
Final Drawings And Operating Manuals On completion of the installation, provide three (3) sets of operation and maintenance manuals and the testing record/results of each installation. Upon completion of the Works, the Contractor shall produce and submit the following to the SO Rep: 1. Two CDROMs containing the as-built drawings in "dwg" format 2. Two CDROMs containing the as-built drawings in "pdf" format. Every "pdf" drawing must show the "As-Built" stamp plus the LEW's Certification/Stamp. 3. One set of as-built tracings. Every tracing must be stamped "As-Built" plus the LEW's Certification/Stamp. 4. Three sets of as-built prints. Every print must be stamped "As-Built" plus the LEW's Certification/Stamp. Incorporate the following information where applicable : (a) (b) (c) (d) position of pump rooms routes of all hose reel risers and pipes piping and equipment arrangement inside the pump room schematic diagram of the hose reel booster pump hydraulic circuit showing the positions of each valve, pressure switch, flow switch and hose reels. A copy of the schematic diagram in laminated A2 size shall be hard mounted in the hose reels pump room locations of every hose reel and portable fire extinguisher schematic circuit diagram and single line diagram of the overall system wiring control circuit diagram of hose reel booster pump circuit diagram of the floatless level control relay units
(e) (f) (g) (h)
UPG07/S45.DOC(18) lkk(181206) DPD
Ugdg Spec TS 45-19/29 45.6 SERVICE AND MAINTENANCE The Contractor shall allow in the Contract Sum for all costs and expenses for providing maintenance service and call-back service to the Fire Protection System as specified hereunder, for a period of one year commencing from the Date of Substantial Completion for the Works or phase or sub-phase of the Works as certified by the Superintending Office (hereinafter referred to as the "Defects Liability Period" for the purposes of this clause including all sub-clauses under it).
45.6.1
General During the Defects Liability Period, provide all consumables/materials and make good all defects and leakages found in the system/equipment. Replace and/or repair all defective parts or items as produced in Appendix A34 whenever required if such repair or replacement has been necessitated by reasons of defects in the system/equipment.
45.6.2
Workmanship and Materials The service and maintenance work shall be performed by workmen skilled in the service, maintenance and repair of pumping plants and fire protection systems of all types. All materials to be provided in connection with such service and maintenance work shall be new and unused, and shall generally be of the best quality as regards manufacture and performance.
45.6.3
Supervision Provide a foreman to take charge of the service, maintenance and repair work. This foreman shall be thoroughly competent in supervising the service, maintenance and repair of pumping plants and fire protection system, and shall be in the direct employment of the Contractor, and acceptable to the SO Rep. The Contractor shall have in his direct employment, workmen who shall be skilled in the service, maintenance and repair of pumping plants and fire protection system.
45.6.4
Servicing and Maintenance Schedule For monthly tests and inspection, all parts, plant and equipment comprising the complete hose reel pumping system shall be maintained and inspected strictly in accordance with the specifications and check-list as set out in Appendix A36. The check-list shall be duly completed by the Contractor when performing the monthly inspection. Any Defects detected shall be rectified by the Contractor immediately. Always arrange for a Representative from the HDB's Branch Office to be present during the inspection. Furnish to the HDB's Branch Office a Maintenance Schedule for monthly inspection upon Substantial Completion of the Works or phase or sub-phase of the Works. The Contractor's foreman shall also sign on the log book provided by the Contractor in the pump room after completion of each inspection. Items in the check-list for the monthly inspection shall include : (i) (ii) (iii) (iv) (v) (vi) (vii) (viii) (ix) General condition of pumproom Correct setting of the time switch Auto/Manual selector switch in "Auto" position Power supply selector switch in "On" position Control panel indicating lights Alarm bell and bulb Suction tank electrode and control module Motor running current Check valves
UPG07/S45.DOC(19) lkk(181206) DPD
Ugdg Spec TS 45-20/29 45.6.4 Servicing and Maintenance Schedule (Cont'd) (x) (xi) (xii) (xiii) (xiv) (xv) (xvi) (xvii) (xviii) 45.6.5 Gate valves Alignment couplings Ball float valves Motor insulation Pump mechanical seal Pump lubrication oil level (if applicable) Contactors and relays Hose reel Pressure and flow switches
Call-Back Service Provide an efficient 24-hour (whole day) call-back service. All urgent calls or complaints shall be attended to immediately upon notification by the Representative from HDB Essential Maintenance Service Centre or Branch Office. The Contractor shall provide a mobile phone pager for his maintenance supervisor and the mobile phone number shall be given to the respective Branch Office so that immediate notification of any urgent callback service can be met. In the event that the Contractor fails to : (a) (b) (c) respond within 30 minutes after being called; or attend to an urgent call or complaint immediately upon notification; or carry out the routine inspection of the rising main system;
the SO Rep may engage another contractor to carry out the Works and all costs and charges shall be recoverable from the Contractor by the Employer or deducted by the Employer from monies due or becoming due to the Contractor. Notwithstanding the above, the SO Rep may in addition exercise his rights under Clause 1.10 "Nuisance and Irregularities" to impose charges against the Contractor. In the event that other contractors are instructed to rectify Defect in the rising main system or to carry out the routine servicing and maintenance of the rising main system due to or arising out of the Contractor's failure to do so when directed by the SO Rep, such actions shall not in any way affect, vary or relieve the Contractor's obligations under the Contract. 45.6.6 Rectification of Defects prior to Issuance of Maintenance Certificate One month before the expiry date of the Defect Liability Period, the Contractor shall arrange with HDB Branch Office and the SO Rep for a final joint inspection. All Defect listed after this joint inspection shall be rectified by the end of the succeeding one month commencing from the expiry date of the Defects Liability Period. Rectify the outstanding Defect and conduct detailed checks on the Works before arranging for inspection by the Representative from the HDB Branch Office for the purpose of certifying completion of rectification of Defect. After the second final inspection by the Representative from HDB Branch Office, a list of outstanding Defect shall be issued to the Contractor and the Contractor shall rectify all Defect on the list within fourteen days. If the Contractor fails to rectify and make good the Defect on the second final inspection, the SO Rep shall exercise his rights under Clause 1.10 "Nuisance and Irregularities" to impose charges against the Contractor. Notwithstanding the above, the Employer shall in addition have the right to engage his own workmen or other contractors to rectify and make good all Defect and the cost of rectification and charges imposed shall be recovered from the Contractor. 45.6.7 Log Book Keep a log book at the pump room in which details of all alarms (genuine, practice test or false), faults, routine maintenance and repairs carried out shall be recorded. The type of log book and the record format shall be subject to the approval of the SO Rep.
UPG07/S45.DOC(20) lkk(181206) DPD
Ugdg Spec TS 45-21/29 45.6.8 Consumable Materials Provide the following consumable materials as and when required during the Defects Liability Period : (a) All oils and grease required for lubrication of pump bearings, motor bearings, pivots and other moving parts. All carbon brushes required to replace worn brushes in electric motors. All electric contact points required to replace those points in switch gears, motor starter gears, electric control gears and electric relays. All indicating lamps required to replace blown lamps. All cotton waster, soap detergent and other cleaning materials required for cleaning purposes.
(b) (c)
(d) (e)
45.7
Fire Hydrants Private Fire Hydrants where so required by The Fire Authority shall be provided within the perimeter of the building lot. The Contractor shall be responsible for the design and submission of plans to the Relevant Authorities for approval. Where any part of the base design contravene with the code requirements, the onus is on the Contractor to make amendments to the design prior to submission to Relevant Authorities. The Contractor shall be deemed to have allowed in the Contract Sum for all costs and expenses for such amendments. The Contractor's Professional Engineer shall be responsible for the supervision of the installation until the Certificate of Statutory Completion is obtained. The fire hydrant shall be positioned to be within 50 m from an entry to the building and not more than 50 m apart. In the case of a building where rising mains are installed, the 50 m distance shall be measured up to the breeching inlets of the rising mains. The siting and type of fire hydrants shall comply fully with the requirements stated in SS CP 29: Code of Practice for Fire Hydrant Systems and Hose Reels. Fire hydrants shall be of suitably corrosion protected and sufficiently robust material. Their works parts shall be of gunmetal to BS 1400 or other suitable material. The fire hydrant shall be installed on concrete plinths with size of 750 mm x 750 mm x 150 mm thickness. A control valve shall be installed to each hydrant. The control valve shall be able to open and closed from the surface of the ground. Fire hydrant mains shall be of heavy duty ductile iron with cement lining type conforming to BS 4772. The hydrant mains routes and locations shown on the Drawings are approximate and intended to indicate the general runs and locations only. The exact routes and locations of the mains shall be determined at the Site all at the Contractors cost and expense. Any mains that are routed in basement of building shall be in protective enclosure. The protective enclosure to the mains shall have the same fire resistance as the elements of structure of the building where the mains are located. The protective enclosure to the hydrant mains shall be labelled with the word " HYDRANT MAIN " of minimum 50 mm height at suitable intervals. The Contractor shall be deemed to have allowed in the Contract Sum for all costs and expenses for such protective enclosures. The fire hydrants shall be painted on the stem with a 100 mm yellow band, the lower edge of which is 300 mm from the ground. The outlets shall be provided with protective standard caps of cast iron or other suitable material and attached to the standpipe by stainless steel chains. The topmost part of the valve shall not exceed a depth of 1000 mm from the ground level. The water supply for the fire hydrant shall comply with the requirements stated in latest Code of Practice for Fire Precautions in Buildings. Valve pits shall be of adequate size, and readily accessible for inspection, operation, testing and maintenance and removal of equipment contained therein. They shall be so constructed and arranged as to properly protect the installed equipment from ground movement and accumulation of water as specified in SS CP 29. For fire hydrants sited in roadways, care shall be taken that the pits and covers are capable of bearing the heaviest vehicle that may use the road.
UPG07/S45.DOC(21) lkk(181206) DPD
APPENDIX A34 LIST "A" - SCHEDULE OF TECHNICAL DATA
The Contractor shall provide all technical data as set out below. The technical data provided hereunder is for information only and shall not override any requirements of the Specifications. The requirements of the Specifications shall be regarded as minimum only and should any materials or equipment described in this Schedule fall below the minimum requirements, the Specifications shall prevail. Catalogues should be enclosed to provide more comprehensive information wherever possible.
1.
HOSE REEL BOOSTER PUMP Make Country of origin Type Model No. of units Casing material Impeller material Shaft material Flow rate Head Speed (r.p.m.) Impeller diameter Motor rated output Motor make, type and model Voltage/Phase/Frequency Motor insulation class Line current at full load _____________________________________________ _____________________________________________ _____________________________________________ _____________________________________________ _____________________________________________ _____________________________________________ _____________________________________________ _____________________________________________ _____________________________________________ _____________________________________________ _____________________________________________ _____________________________________________ _____________________________________________ _____________________________________________ _____________________________________________ _____________________________________________ _____________________________________________
2.
MOTOR STATER Make, type and model Rating Overload release rating Approx. KW rating Voltage/Phase _____________________________________________ _____________________________________________ _____________________________________________ ___________ KW at ____________ V __________ Ph ______________________________________________
UPG07/S45.DOC(22) lkk(181206) DPD
APPENDIX A34 Page 2 LIST "A" - SCHEDULE OF TECHNICAL DATA (CONT'D)
3.
FLOATLESS LEVEL CONTROL RELAY UNIT Make Type Model ____________________________________________ ____________________________________________ ____________________________________________
4.
PRESSURE TANK Country of origin Make Type Model Capacity Operating pressure Maximum working pressure Casing material Diaphragm material Internal coating material _____________________________________________ _____________________________________________ _____________________________________________ _____________________________________________ _____________________________________________ _____________________________________________ _____________________________________________ _____________________________________________ _____________________________________________ _____________________________________________
5.
RUBBER HOSE Make Type Material Diameter (internal) Length Working pressure _____________________________________________ _____________________________________________ _____________________________________________ _____________________________________________ _____________________________________________ _____________________________________________
6.
PRESSURE GAUGE Make, Type & Model Range (Bar) Material in contact with water Enclosure Protection _____________________________________________ _____________________________________________ _____________________________________________ _____________________________________________
UPG07/S45.DOC(23) lkk(181206) DPD
7.
PRESSURE SWITCH Make, Type & Model Range (Bar) Maximum working pressure (Bar) Upper limit (Bar) Material in contact with water Enclosure Protection Voltage/Frequency _____________________________________________ _____________________________________________ _____________________________________________ _____________________________________________ _____________________________________________ _____________________________________________ ______________________________________________
8.
FLOW SWITCH Make, type, model Rang (L/s) Maximum working pressure (bar) Material in contact with water Enclosure protection Voltage/frequency ____________________________________________ ____________________________________________ ____________________________________________ ____________________________________________ ____________________________________________ ____________________________________________
9.
SOLENOID VALVE Make, Type & Model Body material Valve seat material Stem material Maximum working pressure Test pressure (Bar) Uv value (MH/Bar) _____________________________________________ _____________________________________________ _____________________________________________ _____________________________________________ _____________________________________________ _____________________________________________ _____________________________________________
UPG07/S45.DOC(24) lkk(181206) DPD
10.
MISCELLANEOUS MAKE a. b. c. d. Gate valve Check valve Strainer Floatless level control relay unit Globe valve Selector switch Automatic changeover relay Time switch Automatic air vent Ball float valve Shut-off nozzle Flexible coupling Pipe spring hanger Ball stop valve Alarm bell Auxiliary relay Pressure relief valve Indicator lamp Pipe _______________ _______________ _______________ TYPE _______________ _______________ _______________ MODEL _______________ _______________ _______________
_______________ _______________ _______________
_______________ _______________ _______________
_______________ _______________ _______________
e. f. g.
_______________ _______________ _______________ _______________ _______________ _______________ _______________ _______________ _______________ _______________ _______________ _______________ _______________
_______________ _______________ _______________ _______________ _______________ _______________ _______________ _______________ _______________ _______________ _______________ _______________ _______________
_______________ _______________ _______________ _______________ _______________ _______________ _______________ _______________ _______________ _______________ _______________ _______________ _______________
h. i. j. k. l. m. n. o. p. q. r. s.
___________________________________ Signature & Official Stamp of Contractor/s Date : ____________
UPG07/S45.DOC(25) lkk(181206) DPD
APPENDIX A35 Page 1 TESTING DATA ON HOSE REEL SYSTEM Clause 45.5.1 "Testing of Hose Reel System Installation" The Contractor shall furnish the following data and submit to the SO Rep one week before the testing of the hose reel system. Contract Title : Block No. : Location : Building Data Suction Tank size : Suction Tank size : Total Head : Required pumping capacity Hose reel Motor 1 M M (m) (l/s) Hose reel Motor 2 Brand Type (PSB and FM,UL,LPC or other acceptable by FSSD) Model Serial No. Impeller Diameter (mm) Specified capacity (l/s) Hose reel Pump 1 Hose reel Pump 2 Contract No. : Ref No. : Contractor :
Motor Data Brand Type (PSB and FM,UL,LPC or other acceptable by FSSD) Model Serial No. Rated Output (KW) Volt/Phase/Frequency Insulation Class/Speed (rpm) Rated Current (A) Control Panel Data Starter Brand Model Type Floatless level control Relay Brand Model Type Starter MCB Brand Model Type Overload Protector Brand Model Setting
UPG07/S45.DOC(26) lkk(181206) DPD
Pump Data
11-Pin Relay
Brand Model Type
8-Pin Relay
Brand Model Type
Latching Relay
Brand Model Type
Time Switch
Brand Model Type
APPENDIX A35 Page 2 TESTING DATA ON HOSE REEL SYSTEM Clause 45.5.1 "Testing of Hose Reel System Installation"
The Contractor shall furnish the following data and submit to the SO Rep one week before the testing of the hose reel system. Fitting Coupling Size Brand Type
Rubber expansion joint
Gate valve
Check valve
Flow switch Flow meter Solenoid valve Pressure gauge Pressure switch Limit switch PressureTank 1 Pressure Tank 2 Rubber Hose reel
UPG07/S45.DOC(27) lkk(181206) DPD
APPENDIX A35 Page 3 TESTING DATA ON HOSE REEL SYSTEM Clause 45.5.1 "Testing of Hose Reel System Installation"
The Contractor shall furnish the following data and submit to the SO Rep one week before the testing of the hose reel system.
Recorded & Submitted by : (Contractor's Name)/Company Stamp (Signature)/Date
FOR OFFICIAL USE
Motor Starting/Changeover Current (A) Running Current (A) R Y B
Hose reel Pump1
Hose reel Pump1
Pump Approximate Capacity (l/s)
Hose reel Pump1
Hose reel Pump1
Tested by
: 1) HTO / TO ( 2) HTO / TO ( ) ) Date
Checked & Verified by
: DEng ( ) Date
UPG07/S45.DOC(28) lkk(181206) DPD
Ugdg Spec TS 45-29/29 APPENDIX A36 MONTHLY ROUTINE INSPECTION REPORT ON HOSE REEL PUMPING SYSTEM DURING DEFECTS LIABILITY PERIOD Clause 45.6.4 "Servicing and Maintenance Schedule"
To :
Head ( Date of Inspection : Block No. : Items Monthly
Branch Office ) Contract Title : Pump Room Location : Checked Remedial Action/Date
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
General Condition of Pumproom Correct Setting of Time Switch Auto/Manual Selector Switch in "Auto" Position Power Supply Selector Switch in "on" Position Control Panel indicating Lights Alarm Bell and Bulb Suction Tank Electrode and Control Module Motor Running Current Rated Current : Motor Output : A KW R Y B Pumpset 1 * * * A A A Pumpset 2 * * * A A A
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18
Check Valves Gate Valves Ball Float Valves Motor Insulation (Megaohms) Pump Mechanical Seal Pump Lubrication Oil Level (if applicable) Contactors and Relays Hose Reel Pressure and Flow Switches Update Log Book * *
# / X *
: : : :
Delete as necessary Check and found in order to rectify immediately Reading by measuring instrument
Signature : Inspection conducted by Name/NRIC : Name of Contractor : Acknowledge By : HTO/TO/HTN/TN(H&M) ( ) Date
SECTION 46/...
UPG07/S45.DOC(29) lkk(181206) DPD
Ugdg Spec TS 46-1/9
SECTION 46
46.0
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR ELECTRICITY SUPPLY AND EXISTING ELECTRICAL/TELEPHONE INSTALLATIONS AND LIGHTNING PROTECTION SYSTEM
46.1
CHECKING OF EXISTING DEFECTS Before commencing work for any apartment, eating house, shop and living quarter of shop/eating house, the contractor shall carry out an inspection of the existing electrical installation within the premises which could be affected by the works, in the presence of the owner. Any Defect in the existing electrical installations or electrical accessories which are outside the scope of the electrical works shall be recorded by the contractor, and duly witnessed by the Superintending Officer's Representative and the owner of the premises. The contractor shall take careful note that any faults or damages not proven to be existing will be deemed to have arisen out of his works and are to be rectified within the scope of the contract.
46.2
PREVENTION OF ELECTRICAL HAZARD The Contractor shall ensure that thorough measures are taken to prevent electrical hazards to the Occupants of the building. Adequate measures must be taken to prevent any exposed `live' parts, loosely mounted electrical points and broken electrical fittings or accessories from endangering the occupants and the public during the course of his works. Wherever possible, all the temporary sitework supply cables shall be run in the buildings' service ducts. Cables, other than those supplying power to portable equipment, shall be securely fixed so as not to cause hazards to persons in the work area. All cables are to be installed without obstruction to the use of passageways, walkways, stairs and the like. The contractor shall ensure that the existing electrical installations at any parts of the apartment block affected by his work, are safe for use. Otherwise, proper barriers and signs shall be put up to warn the occupants against touching or using them. The above measures are applicable both during and after working hours.
46.3
ELECTRICITY SUPPLY FOR SITEWORK The Contractor shall arrange to obtain electricity supply directly from SPSL for his construction/installation work. As far as possible, the use of generators for site works shall be avoided. The contractor is strictly not allowed to tap electrical supply from any of the apartment's metered supply or from any of the building's metered supply during the course of work.
46.4
ELECTRICITY SUPPLY TO THE DWELLING UNITS, RENTAL PREMISES AND EXISTING ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
46.4.1
Interruption of Supply The Contractor shall ensure that the electricity supply to the dwelling units, rental premises, existing installations such as lifts, water supply system and CATV equipment is maintained and not interrupted, due to Contractor's work throughout the course of the Contract. Where interruption of electricity supply is unavoidable, the Contractor shall obtain prior approval from the SO Rep and arrange to give sufficient notice to the residents and occupants. In the event of non-compliance, the Employer shall exercise its rights under Clause 1.10 "Nuisance and Irregularities" to impose charges against the Contractor.
Ugdg Spec TS 46-2/9 46.4.2 Shutdown of Electricity Supply The Contractor shall obtain approval from the SO Rep and arrange to notify all Occupants of any shutdown of electricity supply at least 7 days in advance. A schedule of the times for transferring over the supply, showing the units affected and the time of disruption of the supply, shall be provided to the SO Rep prior to carrying out the Works. In the event of non-compliance, the Employer shall exercise its rights under Clause 1.10 "Nuisance and Irregularities" to impose charges against the Contractor. All fees related to shutdown shall be included in the Contract. 46.5 EMPLOYMENT OF LICENSED ELECTRICAL WORKER The Contractor shall station at Site during the progress of the Works an Licensed Electrical Worker who shall be responsible for supervising the Works and shall be empowered to receive and act upon the instructions given by the SO Rep. Any such instructions given to the Licensed Electrical Worker shall be deemed to have been given to the Contractor. The Contractor shall also engage the service of a Licensed Electrical Worker of the appropriate grade throughout the course of the Contract. The Contractor shall inform the SO Rep of the proposed commencement date for the building works prior to the actual commencement. The Licensed Electrical Worker should be able to handle all aspects of electrical fault without the assistance of the Employer's electrical engineer. The duties of the Licensed Electrical Worker during normal working hours as well as during Public Holidays/Sundays/after normal working hours, shall include but not be limited to the following : (a) (b) Attending to scheduled shutdown/re-energization of electrical installation in this Contract as required; and Attending to interruptions of the electricity supply.
The Licensed Electrical Worker, together with the Contractor, shall inform the SO Rep on the works required to be carried out to restore the electricity supply and the time required for the repairs to be completed. 46.6 EXISTING ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION/ LIGHTNING PROTECTION SYSTEM Protection of Existing Installations The Contractor shall take all necessary precautions to protect the existing electrical and lightning protection system installations and ensure that they are safe and in operation until the new installations are completed, commissioned and put into operation. Where the existing installations are already damaged and not in good working order prior to the commencement of Works, the Contractor shall inform the SO Rep and arrange for an inspection to have the nature of the damage or working conditions recorded. (a) Lighting The Contractor shall ensure that the lighting to the common areas is maintained throughout the course of the Works. Where the existing fittings are affected by the building works and the new ones not yet installed and commissioned, temporary fittings, properly wired and secured, shall be provided. (b) Lightning Protection System This Clause shall be read in conjunction with Section 49 "Lightning Protection" of the Standard Specifications for Upgrading Works. The Contractor shall ensure that the lightning protection system of the building is in the form of a closed loop and is electrically continuous down to the earthing system during the course of the Works. Where the existing air termination network or the down conductors are in the way of the building works and are required to be removed, temporary conductors shall be installed to maintain the closed network and the connections to the earthing system.
46.6.1
Ugdg Spec TS 46-3/9 46.6.1 Protection of Existing Installations (Cont'd) (c) Temporary Earthing System This Clause shall be read in conjunction with Clause 47.7 "Earthing System" and Section 49 "Lightning Protection" of the Standard Specifications for Upgrading Works. The Contractor shall ensure that the earthing systems for the existing Main Switchboard and the Lightning Protection System are intact and of the correct values at all times until they are replaced. Where the existing earthing systems are affected by the Works, temporary earthing systems of the appropriate earth values shall be provided. The earthing systems shall not, at any times, be allowed to be disconnected from the electrical or lightning protection system installations.
46.6.2
Replacement, Reinstatement and Removal of Existing Installations (a) Replacement of Existing Mains/Sub-Mains Cables The Contractor shall inform the SO Rep and seek his approval prior to disrupting the supply during the course of the replacement of the mains and sub-mains cables. The Contractor shall only disconnect the existing cables after the new cables have been installed and energised. A schedule of the times for transferring over of the supply from the existing to the new mains/submains, showing the units affected and time of disruption of the supply, shall be provided to the SO Rep prior to carrying out of the Works. The transfer of the power supply shall be completed before 6 pm or any earlier times as directed by the SO Rep. (b) Reinstatement of Existing Installations The Contractor shall at his own cost reinstate/reconnect any existing installations/fittings which are to be retained, to the new main switchboard/ mains/sub-mains/final circuits to the requirements of the SOs Rep. (c) Removal of Existing Electrical Installation The Contractor shall at his own cost remove from site all existing Main Switchboards, meter boards, wirings, lighting fittings, power points, switches, trunkings, lightning air termination network, down conductors and all other accessories taken down. All electrical equipment removed shall become the property of the Contractor and shall not be re-used.
46.7
ELECTRICAL/TELEPHONE INSTALLATION OF DWELLING UNITS AND PREMISES
46.7.1
New Electrical Service Mains The Contractor shall relocate the existing meter of the Dwelling Units to the position indicated. A new set of electrical service cables shall be run from the new meter position to the dwelling unit. A multi-compartment trunking shall be provided for the installation of the new electrical service cables and telephone cables.
Ugdg Spec TS 46-4/9
46.7.2
Telephone Cabling Further to Clause 47.11 "Telephone Cabling" where applicable, the Contractor shall install the telephone cables from the riser to the block terminal outside each dwelling unit. The block terminal shall be located near to the existing electrical opening of the dwelling unit and shall be installed in the multi-compartment trunking. A pvc-sleeved opening of diameter 20mm shall be provided in the brick wall beside the existing electrical opening.
46.7.3
Existing Final Circuits from Occupants' Consumer Control Unit (CCU) The Contractor shall not interfere with the existing final circuits from the Occupants' consumer control unit (CCU). However, all conversions, extensions and connections of all final circuits in connection with the provision of the new service cables between the meter and the CCU shall be carried out by the Contractor and shall be deemed to be included in the Contract Sum.
46.7.4
Existing Meter The Contractor shall prepare a schedule listing of all the dwelling unit numbers and the corresponding meter numbers and submit to PowerGrid for verification, and shall liaise closely with PowerGrid and the SO Rep on an agreed work procedure, prior to carrying out any work to relocate the meters. All meters taken down shall be properly numbered and identified and re-installed correctly back to the same dwelling unit. The Contractor shall be responsible for any mix up of the meters and shall be liable for any fine or penalty imposed by PowerGrid for loss of revenue, and by Employer for inconvenience caused, arising from the mix-up in the meters.
46.7.5
Meter Board/Box The Contractor shall liaise with and obtain approval from PowerGrid on the actual layout and dimensions of the replacement Meter Board/Box before commencing construction of the Board/Box. A set of drawings showing the approved layout and dimensions shall be forwarded to the SO Rep for record.
46.8
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION FOR NEW ADDED SPACE The new lighting point at the newly added space shall either be extended from the nearest appropriate lighting points, or wired directly from the consumer control unit. Where the lighting point is extended from the nearest lighting point, the Contractor shall check and make good the affected lighting circuit, including the addition of a circuit protective conductor to ensure that the circuit complies with the requirements of SS CP5 and EMA/SPSL requirements. Reinstatement of the affected area to match the existing shall be carried out by the Contractor at his own cost.
46.9
METAL TRUNKING INSTALLATION IN SERVICE DUCTS Further to Clause 47.4.1.2 "Metal Trunking - Installation", where the trunking is installed in riser ducts made of lightweight panels, it shall be suitably supported on brackets at regular intervals not exceeding 1.5m apart. The bracket on which the trunking is to be mounted, and the mounting method, shall be such as to be able to support the total weight of the trunking and all the cables/accessories installed.
Ugdg Spec TS 46-5/9
46.10
WIRING/TRUNKING ROUTES Further to Clause 47.4.1.2 "Metal Trunking - Installation", the Contractor shall make use of the existing beam openings already available at Site when running the wirings and trunkings. Where the existing openings are inadequate for the number of cables to be installed, or are not available along the proposed cable/trunking routes, the trunking shall be installed wrapped round the beams. Factory manufactured bends and accessories shall be used for wrapping around the beams, and they shall be designed to allow for cable installation complying with the bending radii of cables as required under the Code of Practice CP 5. No opening shall be hacked or drilled through beams/column without the prior approval of the SO Rep.
46.11
WORKS ON LIGHTNING PROTECTION SYSTEM For any works on the lightning protection system, they shall comply with the requirements of Section 49.
46.12
WORK IN EXISTING SUBSTATION
46.12.1
General When Works are to be carried out in an existing substation, the Contractor shall take note that the equipment in the switchroom and transformer room is `live' and serves the power requirements of the neighbouring blocks. He shall take all precautions and exercise extreme care when working inside the substation to prevent power disruptions arising from damage to the equipment and fatal injury to his workers. All requirements imposed by Grid shall be strictly adhered to. The Contractor shall refer to Appendix S(46)-1 for Grid's requirements on safety and precautionary measures.
46.12.2
Taking Over of Substation The Contractor shall liaise with Grid and the SO Rep on the taking over of the substation for the addition and alteration work and shall comply with the procedures and requirements set by Grid for working in an existing `live' substation. The Contractor shall arrange for the substation to be series-locked on taking over and shall be fully responsible for the existing equipment within the substation thereafter and until the substation is handed back. He shall undertake to control the movement of workers in the substation and prevent unauthorised persons from entering. The substation shall be locked at all times whenever there is no work carried out and during tea-break and after work has ceased for the day. It shall not be left open when unattended.
46.12.3
Provision of Deed of Indemnity When required, the Contractor shall provide a Deed of Indemnity prior to the commencement of work in the substation. The Deed of Indemnity shall be in accordance with the enclosed format in Appendix S(46)-2 or the latest requirements of Grid.
46.12.4
Protection of Existing Equipment The Contractor shall provide hoardings around the existing equipment to protect against mechanical damage during the course of the Addition and Alteration works. The hoardings shall be constructed in accordance with Grid's requirements.
46.13
MAKING GOOD On Substantial Completion of the Works, all affected parts of the building, including internal flat units shall be made good, patched up and painted or otherwise finished by the Contractor to match the existing original adjacent works, at the Contractor's expenses all to the satisfaction of the SO Rep.
Ugdg Spec TS 46-6/9
46.14
ELECTRICITY SUPPLY TO PASSENGER HOISTS Where required, the Contractor shall modify the existing main switchboards to provide electricity supply to the passenger hoists to be installed for each block, and shall include the addition of new MCCBs and the installation of new cables. The supply shall be taken from the metered section of the switchboards. The Contractor shall determine the sizes of the MCCBs and the cables based on the power requirements of the passenger hoists and shall provide them in accordance with these requirements. Where it is necessary to upgrade the metered section and/or the main switchboard to cater for the power requirements of the hoists, the Contractor shall carry out the upgrading at his own cost. The Contractor shall submit his proposal for the modification works to SO Rep and seek his agreement prior to carrying out any work.
Ugdg Spec TS 46-7/9
APPENDIX S(46)-1
APPENDIX TO CLAUSE 46.12 WORKS IN EXISTING SUBSTATION
Safety and Precaution Measures to be taken for Works perform within Substation Compounds :
(1)
Contract workers should be reminded that all cables, wires, electrical device, equipment, apparatus and installation are "LIVE" in the substation.
(2)
No contract workers shall touch, remove or meddle with the parts and switches of the transformers, switchboards, apparatus or any electrical equipment. Should physical contact is unavoidable, approval must be obtained from the officer-in-charge.
(3)
The Contractor is to ensure that the substation's main gate is locked at all times when performing work in the substation. This is to prevent trespassers or unauthorised persons from entering the substation. The Contractor should also check and ensure that the main gate is properly locked before leaving the substation.
(4)
The Contractor shall ensure that all debris, rubbish and unwanted materials are disposed-off upon completion of work.
(5)
No materials, tools, plants, debris, etc are allowed to be placed near or lean against cables, wires, electrical device, apparatus and installation.
(6)
The Contractor is to put-up appropriate safeguards and protection, if necessary, to prevent damages to the cables, wires, electrical device, equipment, apparatus and installation in the course of performing work.
(7)
All contract workers must wear safety gears to prevent injuries.
(8)
The Contractor should appoint a competent supervisor on site to ensure that the works are carried out safely and within the designated work areas and compliance with the statutory requirements.
(9)
The working hours allowable in the substation is 8.00 am to 5.00 pm.
Ugdg Spec TS 46-8/9
APPENDIX S(46)-2 APPENDIX TO CLAUSE 46.12 WORKS IN EXISTING SUBSTATION
DEED OF INDEMNITY
THIS DEED OF INDEMNITY is made the
day of
1992 between , a Company incorporated in
Singapore
and , Singapore
having
its
registered
office
at
(hereinafter call "the Company") of the one part and the Power Grid
Ltd, a body corporate incorporated in the Republic of Singapore under an by virtue of the Public Utilities Act (Cap 211 1970 ed) and having its principal office at PUB Building, 111 Somerset Road, Singapore 238164 (hereinafter called "Grid") of the other part.
WHEREAS :
(1)
Grid is the owner of electrical installation in the 22 KV and 6.6 KV substation at , Singapore (hereinafter called "the Substation").
(2)
The Company has requested Grid to allow the Company, its agents or servants to enter the Substation to carry out substation building modification work.
(3)
The Company will undertake to indemnify Grid against all or any claims in any manner whatsoever arising out of the entry.
NOW THIS DEED WITNESSETH that the Company covenants with Grid that :
(a)
the Company will at all times hereinafter indemnify Grid in respect of any claims arising out of the entry to the Substation by the Company, its agents or servants and against all liabilities for personal injury (whether fatal or otherwise), loss, action, suits, proceedings, demands, costs and expenses whatsoever which Grid may be required to pay to any third party in respect thereof.
(b)
the Company undertakes to indemnify Grid for any damage howsoever caused to Grid's equipment arising out of the said entry.
(c)
the Company undertakes to indemnify Grid, its employees and agents from and against all liabilities for personal injury (whether fatal or otherwise) arising out of the said entry by the Company, its agents and servants.
Ugdg Spec TS 46-9/9
APPENDIX S(46)-2 Page 2
IN WITNESS WHEREOF the Company has hereunto set its hand and seal the day and year first above written.
THE COMMON SEAL of
was hereunto affixed in the presence of :
) ) ) ) ) ) ) ) ) ) ) ) ) ) ) ) )
DIRECTOR
DIRECTOR
SECTION 47/...
47.0
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATIONS
47.1 47.1.1
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS Regulations The electrical works include electrical installation, lighting installation, lightning protection works, telephone cabling, fire alarm system and other miscellaneous electrical works. The electrical installation works shall comply with all statutory rules, regulations and requirements of the EMA, Government Authority, Statutory Authorities, SP Services Ltd and PowerGrid, current at the date of submission of the Tender and to the complete satisfaction of the SO Rep. In particular, the electrical installation works shall comply with the following: (a) Electricity (Electrical Installations) Regulations made under The Electricity Act (CAP.89A) including any subsequent and amendments of the Regulations; (b) Singapore Standards CP 5; (c) Any additional regulations issued by EMA, SPSL and PowerGrid. (d) All other electrical works shall comply with their respective Codes of Practice.
47.1.2
Interpretation Of Drawings It is the intention of the Drawings and Specifications to provide a complete and safe operating system. The omission from the Drawings or Specifications of any details in construction, installation, materials or specialities necessary for a complete, operating and safe system shall not relieve the Contractor from furnishing and completing the same in place all at the Contractors own cost and expense. The Drawings and Specifications indicate the minimum requirements of the Employer only. Should the requirements of the Drawings or Specifications conflict with the requirements of the Statutory Rules or Regulations, the most stringent of the requirements shall govern the Works. Before Tender submission and prior to the execution of the Works, the Contractor shall study the Drawings and inspect the Site to satisfy themselves that the Works could be carried out as specified. Should it be deemed necessary to make modifications to the Drawings, method of installation or site adjustments to suit the structural and site constraints and to ensure compliance with Statutory rules and Regulations, he shall inform the SO Rep of his recommendations within two weeks from the commencement date of the Time for Completion and to obtain the concurrence of the SO Rep before proceeding with the modifications. The Contractor shall be deemed to include all costs and expenses for complying with the requirements specified herein in the Contract Sum
47.1.3
Ambient Conditions All equipment or materials specified in the Specifications and any other equipment or materials provided under the Contract shall be fully tropicalised and suitable for use in Singapore. The local climate is tropical with a mean shade temperature of 27.8C. The normal maximum shade temperature is 31C and the minimum shade temperature is 23.9C. The mean relative humidity is 80%, the maximum and minimum being 100% and 65.1% respectively.
47.1.4
Items Of Any One Classification Any items, fittings or accessories which are used in quantity, shall in each case be the product of one manufacturer and shall be used only for the service recommended by the manufacturer.
47.1.5
Incoming Service Cables The incoming service cables will be provided by PowerGrid up to and terminated at the incoming service panel provided by the Contractor. For service entries where there are no switch rooms, the Contractor shall provide weatherproof enclosures to house the incoming service terminations. The enclosures shall have hinged doors and facilities for locking. Where necessary, the Contractor shall provide concrete pedestal bases to the requirements of SPSL/PowerGrid for mounting the weatherproof enclosures. The Contractor shall provide jumper or consumer terminal service (CTS) cables connecting the Employer's installation to the weatherproof enclosure.
Ugdg Spec TS 47-2/55 47.1.5 Incoming Service Cables (Cont'd) For service entries terminated directly at the main switch board inside a switch room, the Contractor shall provide suitable cable end boxes for the termination. 47.1.6 Fixing Screws All screws used for fixing meter boards, moulded or steel boxes, switches, socket outlets, consumer control units etc shall be in brass. 47.1.7 Switch Rooms Unless otherwise specified in the Drawings, all switch rooms shall be provided with at least a lighting point controlled by a switch, a 13 Amp switch socket-outlet, a consumer control unit, a fluorescent batten luminaire complete with tube and emergency battery/inverter pack( 2 hours), a glass framed Single Line Diagram of the electrical installation in at least A3 size (the wordings of the diagram shall be legible), first aid chart and a 900mm wide rubber mat complying with SS 298 shall be provided. The rubber mat shall be placed all around the floor standing switch board and indoor service electrical distribution box if any. All switches, socket-outlets and consumer control units shall be metal clad. All final circuit wirings to lighting and power points in the switch rooms/meter rooms shall run in metal conduit. Wirings for public lighting circuits shall be grouped and taped together according to their circuits. The circuits shall be bunched and secured on the cable tray by means of plastic fixing ties. All other cables shall run on metal cable trays. The cables shall be neatly secured on the trays by plastic fixing ties or PVC coated metal saddles at regular intervals not exceeding 300mm. No over lapping of cables shall be allowed except for crossing of different circuits which shall be kept to a minimum. 47.1.8 Power Supply Points Outside Switch Rooms And At Staircase Landings A 15 Amp metal-clad switch socket-outlet housed in a metal enclosure shall be installed outside each switchroom and at staircase landings or as indicated in the Drawings. These power supply points shall be connected to a separate way of the consumer control unit in the switchroom. The wiring to the power supply point shall run in metal conduit or PVC trunking. The metal enclosure shall be fabricated from electro-galvanised sheet steel of 1.2mm thickness. It shall be treated with a coat of finishing paint giving an overall paint thickness of not less than 45 microns. A sample of the metal enclosure shall be submitted to the SO Rep for approval before installation. 47.1.9 47.1.9.1 Testing Of Installation General The following work of the electrical installation shall be inspected and tested on site after completion : (a) (b) (c) (d) (e) Main Switchboard and Mains Cables Earthing System Unit's Wiring & Final Circuit Wiring Lightning Protection System Telephone System
All electrical tests including continuity, insulation resistance, polarity, earth fault loop impedances, phasing and earth electrode resistance shall be made in a manner prescribed in Singapore Standard CP 5 or other relevant Standard Specifications and Codes of Practice. Where no Standard/Code/Regulation is applicable, the tests shall be conducted in a manner approved by the SO Rep. For new wiring installations, the value of insulation resistance shall be as follows : (a) (b) (c) Main Switchboard and Mains Cables shall be more than 10 Megaohms New underground cables shall be more than 5 Megaohms Unit's Wiring & Final Circuit Wiring shall be more than 1 Megaohms
Ugdg Spec TS 47-3/55 47.1.9.1 General (Cont'd) The Contractor shall check and test the installation to ensure that it is complete and complies with the requirements of the Specifications, EMA and SPSL. Test report duly endorsed by Contractors LEW shall be submitted to the consultant for verification. Consultant or Employer reserve the right to conduct any audit testing if required. lnspection or approval of tests by the SO Rep of any equipment, work or installation shall not relieve the Contractor from the obligation to supply the complete equipment, and complete work and installation in accordance with the Specifications. The Contractor shall supply all necessary instruments, apparatus, consumable stores, connections, skilled and unskilled labour and services with proper, reasonable and safe facilities required for the tests and any audit testings. If site electricity supply is not available for testing or setting protection relays, the Contractor shall provide a portable diesel generator set for the purpose. Any costs which may be involved in the tests shall be deemed to be included in the Contract Sum by the Contractor. 47.1.9.2 Application For HDB Testing HDB reserve the right to conduct audit testings if necessary on main switchboards, risers, distribution boards and telephone system etc including the earthing system. The Contractor shall test the installation works and submit all the test reports to SO Rep/or Consultant for verification/endorsement before submission to Technical Management (M&E) Unit, HDB for audit testings. If any of the test reports and relevant documents are not submitted to Technical Management (M&E) Unit, HDB for audit testings, HDB reserve the right not to take over the block upon completion until the outstanding test reports and documents are submitted to HDB and HDB is satisfied with the testings. The onus will be on the Contractor to submit all test reports and relevant documents to Technical Management (M&E) Unit, HDB at least 14 days prior to any scheduled handing over date of the block. The electrical installation to individual residential unit shall be tested by Technical Management (M&E) Unit, HDB. HDB will test at random at least 10% of the units. If the results of the test is satisfactory, no further testing will be conducted. If any of the units fail the random test, testing will be conducted for the remaining 90% of the units. Should any of the units fail the random test of the first 10% of the units, the Contractor shall then arrange for testing within three (3) working days for the failed units in the first 10% and the remaining 90% of the units. The Contractor shall apply to the Technical Management (M&E) Unit, HDB at least 7 working days in advance together with the respective test reports and supporting documents duly endorsed by the Contractors LEW and verified by the Consultant The following shall be submitted at the time of application for unit testing: (a) One Certificate Of Fitness For Turn-On For Residential Units in each building block (b) A schedule of electrical installation for each residential building block (Form E) (c) A block layout plan showing the types of residential units on each floor and unit layout plans with relevant single line diagrams (d) A photocopy of Certificate of Compliance (COC) of the electrical installation for each block (e) A photocopy of licence to use or operate electrical installation for each block (f) A soft copy (in CD Rom) of the as-built Single Line Drawings (in dwg format) of the electrical installations of the main switchboard and sub-switch board for each block. (g) Quality Acceptance Report for the telephone wiring installation (h) Telecom installer testing report for each block 47.1.9.3 Re-Testing And Charges Any omissions or Defect or faults or failure to meet test requirements detected during the testing shall be rectified by the Contractor within three (3) working days and verified by the Consultant. For re-testing of residential unit, the Contractor shall arrange for re-testing with Technical Management (M&E) Unit, HDB within three (3) working days. 47.1.9.4 Application For SPSL Testing For tests required to be conducted by the LEW or approved testers and witnessed by SPSL, the Contractor shall engage such authorised licenced electrical worker of the appropriate grade to conduct the tests in the latter case. The endorsed test reports shall be submitted to the SO Rep and SPSL in conjunction with the application for turn-on of electricity supply. All costs relating to the above shall be deemed to be included in the Contract Sum.
Ugdg Spec TS 47-4/55 47.1.10 Contractor's Licensed Electrical Worker (LEW) The Contractor shall engage a LEW of the appropriate grade to produce and endorse all electrical drawings necessary for submission to SPSL, for approval and endorsement and also to EMA Inspectorate Division for the EMA Licence required by the EMA for all Works under the Contract. The Contractor's LEW shall conduct the electrical testing of the main switchboards, risers, distribution boards, unit's wiring and final subcircuit, etc including the earthling system and protective Plant and equipment setting/operation. The Contractor shall submit the complete set of test reports for the electrical installation in each block to the SO Rep at least one week before the handing over inspection for the block. The test reports shall indicate the test results for every circuit installed and shall be endorsed by his LEW. After the Works have been successfully tested, the Contractor's LEW shall endorse Form C-Certificate of Fitness for Turn-on and CS/1 Form and submit to SPSL. The LEW shall also arrange for the installation of meters. Where the Space Adding Items (SAIs) are included in the Works, the Contractors LEW shall test the new electrical installation for the SAI, including the new Split-load Consumer Unit (if provided under the Contract) and all new and affected wirings, and certify that the electrical installation complies with the requirements of the Electricity (Electrical Installations) Regulations and SS CP5 before he re-energises the supply to the Unit and to the new electrical installation. The disruption and re-energising of the supply back to the unit shall be carried out within the same day. The Contractor and his LEW shall be responsible for the electrical installation until the handing over of the Works to the Employer. All costs and expenses incurred by the Contractor in their submissions to SPSL for approval of the Drawings and application for the EMA Licence for the electrical installations including the Licence Fee payable to the EMA shall be included in the Contract Sum. 47.1.11 Wiring/Trunking Routes And Position Of Electrical Equipment/Accessories And Fittings The wiring/trunking routes indicated in the Drawings and the positions of electrical equipment/accessories and fittings indicated in the Drawings are meant to serve as a guide only. The actual routes or positions shall be determined on site subject to the approval of the SO Rep. There shall be no variations or adjustments to the contract sum arising from the selection of a more suitable route or position which might differ from those indicated in the drawings. The Contractor shall be deemed to have allowed for all costs and expenses for complying with these provisions specified herein. 47.1.12 Segregation Of Metered Supply Cables Metered supply cables after the kWH meters shall be installed in their own separate trunkings/conduits or if installed in a common trunking with other unmetered supply cables, then they shall be installed in the manner hereinafter specified: The metered supply cables shall be grouped and secured together by plastic fixing ties. These shall be tagged and identified as metered supply cables within each removable sections of the trunkings. 47.1.13 Wiring For Lighting Points For lighting points in utility rooms, multi-storey carparks, switchrooms and etc except for public lighting in blocks of flats, all wiring shall be carried out on the "looped-in" principle with connections made at polarised plug and socket connectors installed in metal circular through boxes. The circular through boxes, complete with removable plate covers, shall be located immediately adjacent to the light fittings and a short length of metal conduit connecting the through boxes to the light fittings shall be provided. 47.1.14 As-built Drawings During the progress of work, the Contractor shall record and update all wiring routes, circuiting, circuitry, electrical points, legends, lightning protection system based on actual site installations on the Drawings. Upon completion of the Works, the Contractor shall produce and submitto the SO Rep the following: (a) Two CDROMs containing the as-built drawings in pdf format. Every pdf drawing must show the "AsBuilt" stamp plus the LEW's Certification/Stamp. (b) One set of as-built tracings. Every tracing must be stamped "As-Built" plus the LEW's Certification/Stamp. (c) Three sets of as-built prints. Every print must be stamped "As-Built" plus the LEW's Certification/Stamp.
Ugdg Spec TS 47-5/55 47.1.14 As-built Drawings (Cont'd) The Contractor's LEW shall duly certify and endorse on the tracings and all amendments from the Drawings shall be highlighted in the 3 sets of prints. The above shall be submitted to the SO Rep not later than one month after the certified completion of the respective blocks and respective phases of the Works. The quality of the as-built tracings and prints shall be the same or better than those supplied by the SO Rep and will be rejected if found to be of poor quality. 47.1.15 Type Test Type test reports issued by the following third-party certified laboratories are acceptable: PSB and their Memorandum of Understanding (MOU) partners; Laboratories with SAC-SINGLAS accreditation; Laboratories with SAC-SINGLAS-MRA (Mutual Recognition Agreement) partners accreditation; Laboratories participating in IECEE CB (Certification Body) Scheme.
47.2 47.2.1 47.2.1.1
SWITCHBOARDS, DISTRIBUTION BOARDS AND SWITCHGEARS Switchboards General The switchboards shall be suitable for use on a 400/230V 3 phase 4 wire 50 Hz supply system and shall comply with the requirements of IEC 60439.. The requirement of switchboards shall incorporate all the items as set out in the Drawings. All costs relating to testing, testing fees and miscellaneous charges necessary for the completion and commissioning of the switchboards ready for continuous operation at its designated site positions shall be included in the Contract Sum.
47.2.1.2
Drawings Detailed construction drawings and circuit and wiring diagrams of all switchboards shall be submitted to the SO Rep for approval before construction. These drawings and diagrams shall indicate clearly the following (where applicable) : (i) (ii) (iii) (iv) (v) (vi) (vii) (viii) (ix) (x) (xi) (xii) (xiii) (xiv) (xv) Equipment Current ratings including short circuit capacities Colour of indicating lamps Position of switches Internal connections of all apparatus with all terminal markings All equipment to be shown in the open or de-energised position All secondary or primary plugged contacts Wire ferrule numbers Size, type and colour of wire Current transformer terminal markings and outputs Ammeter and voltmeter scaling Relay settings The main physical dimensions showing all necessary clearances required for removing covers, opening doors and withdrawing compartments. Position of all equipment on panel faces indicating whether flush or projecting Identification of all equipment with the appropriate label engraving describing function and coding
The quantities, sizes and ratings of equipment incorporated within the switchboards shall be as indicated in the Drawings.
Ugdg Spec TS 47-6/55 47.2.1.3 Construction The switchboards shall be of enclosed assembly design, suitable for indoor use in the form of free standing or wall mounting, self-contained, flush fronted cubicles sectionalised as necessary to facilitate easy transportation and erection. The assembly shall be Type Tested Assembly (TTA) or Partially Type Tested Assembly (PTTA) in accordance with the type tests listed in IEC 60439. The main incoming unit, functional units of metered and unmetered supply, the metered and unmetered busbar sections shall be separately housed in their own cubicles. Wall mounting switchboards shall be suitable for front access only and the maximum height shall be 2.0m. Floor mounting switchboards shall be suitable for front and back access. The cubicle sections shall be constructed of electro-galvanised sheet steel frames of minimum thickness of 2.0mm and the panels shall be constructed from electro-galvanised sheet steel of minimum thickness of 1.6mm. It shall be able to withstand a fault level of 36 KA for 1 second unless specified otherwise in the single-line-diagrams. The switchboards shall be constructed with degree of protection IP 4X. Each cubicle unit shall be incorporated with a removable cover with hidden hinges. The front cover shall have apertures for the protrusion of operating handles of circuit breakers. The covers shall be constructed of folded electro-galvanised sheet steel of minimum thickness of 1.6mm. The various units comprising a complete switchboard shall be grouped in a multi-tier arrangement including cabling and wiring chamber of ample dimensions to accommodate terminal boards, cable boxes and gland plates. The inside and outside surfaces of all the external panels of the switchboard shall be treated with a coat of finishing paint giving a total paint thickness of not less than 50 microns. All coats of paint shall be oven baked and dried. Busbars Four pole air insulated busbars of uniform cross-sectional area throughout their length with a continuous rating or dimensions not less than that indicated in the Drawings shall be arranged neatly. The busbars and busbar connections between the busbars and various items of switchgear shall be manufactured from copper complying with IEC 60439-2. All busbars shall be tinned, and continuous lengths without connections shall be insulated with heat shrinking sleeves. Busbars shall be mounted on non-hygroscopic, anti-tracking insulators strong enough to endure, without damage, forces set up by any thermal expansion within the bars under normal operating conditions and forces created by prospective fault currents. Busbars shall be housed in separate compartments and these compartments shall not contain any wiring or apparatus other than that required for coupling to the busbars. Access to busbars and busbar connections shall be gained only by the removal of a cover secured by bolts. Behind the covers, an insulating sheet with warning labels bearing the word "DANGER" in bold letters and the lightning symbol shall be provided so that final access can be gained only through removing this sheet secured by round head screws. In addition, for the chambers housing the main busbars, the insulating sheet shall be of transparent material with the word "Danger" in bold letters and the lightning symbol. The material for the transparent sheet shall be of minimum 3mm thick clear polycarbonate similar to "LEXAN" Model MR5 sheet with the following properties : (a) (b) (c) greater than 86% light transmittance special treatment for high abrasive resistance high self ignition temperature.
47.2.1.4
The busbars shall, where necessary, have built-in facilities near the load side of the incomer to enable PowerGrid to fit their metering transformers and sealing of this compartment.
Ugdg Spec TS 47-7/55 47.2.1.5 Circuits And Connections All connections between busbars and the switchgears shall be copper busbars or PVC insulated copper cables of minimum cross-sectional area of not less than the rating of outgoing cables connected to the switchgear. All cable connections shall be terminated with proper cable lugs and shrouded with heat shrunk PVC sleeves of the appropriate phase identifying colour. Small wiring shall be neatly bunched and cleated in harness form, or shall be enclosed in plastic purpose made small wiring trunking or trough. Supplies for control circuits shall be taken from within the compartment of the related item of switchgear. A HRC fuse shall be fixed within the respective compartment to protect the control circuit. Where control circuits pass through auxiliary contacts the fuse shall also be used to isolate the terminals of these contacts. Where auxiliary contacts are used for interlocking purposes and supplies are derived from other sources, isolating facilities shall be provided to render the auxiliary switches safe. This isolation shall be in the form of auxiliary switches mounted on the respective compartment isolating device or a separate isolator mounted within the respective compartment. All small wiring shall be of multi-stranded copper not less than 1.5mm (7/0.50mm) with PVC insulation. All control wiring shall be identified with numbered ferrules. These numbers shall be shown on the schematic wiring diagram. All fuses shall be of the HRC type complete with bridges, terminal shrouds and carriers. Small wiring associated with external control circuits shall be connected to terminal strips which shall be conveniently arranged to facilitate the termination of incoming multi-core cables. Each connection shall have separate incoming and outgoing terminals and no more than two wires shall be connected to any outgoing. Each terminal block for external wiring shall have a minimum of 10% spare capacity. All wiring diagrams shall show the terminal blocks in terminal sequence.
2
47.2.1.6
Earth Bar A solid, tinned copper earth bar shall be provided at the base of the switchboard. The minimum crosssectional dimensions of the earth bar shall be 25mm x 3mm. It shall run the length of the switchboard and shall be easily accessible by removing the bottom front panels of the switchboard. All circuit protective conductors of the mains cables shall be terminated by means of appropriate cable lugs at the earth bar. The earth terminal of any cubicle of the switchboard shall also be connected to the earth bar by an adequately-sized protective conductor. The earth bar shall be connected by a PVC insulated 70mm copper earth cable to the main earth bar in the switch room.
2
47.2.1.7
Metering, Instruments And Accessories Facilities shall be provided on switchboards for the PowerGrid to carry out their metering. The cubicle for housing the PowerGrids meters, fuses, cut-outs and neutral link shall comply with PowerGrid's requirements. Where required, the Contractor shall collect and install the meters for PowerGrid. Where indicated, voltmeters and ammeters shall be provided. Indicating instruments shall comply with IEC 60051, accuracy class 1.5. Instruments shall be of the moving iron type, with external zero adjustment. They shall be flush-mounted, housed in a pressed steel or plastic case with shield plate. Instrument terminals shall be shrouded. Voltmeters shall be incorporated with selector switches for phase to phase and phase to neutral indication.
Ugdg Spec TS 47-8/55 47.2.1.7 Metering, Instruments And Accessories (Cont'd) Ammeters shall be current transformer operated type and shall be incorporated with selector switches for indication of all phase currents. Switches shall be of the rotary wafer type. Where maximum demand ammeters are specified, they shall be of the bimetallic type with thermal delay to suppress the short-term current and indicate the average effective value. The response time of the maximum demand ammeter shall be 8 minutes. The maximum pointer shifted by the bimetallic mechanism shall be reset manually by means of an external knob. Maximum demand ammeter shall be provided for each phase. Phase indicator lamps shall be of the light emitting diodes (LED) types, operating on direct 230 volts or on step-down voltage provided by step-down transformer.
47.2.1.8
Current Transformers Current transformers shall be the straight through type with suitable ratio, output and class of accuracy for their function and shall comply with IEC 60044. Measuring current transformers shall have accuracy of Class 1 and protective transformers shall have an accuracy of 5P10. Groups of current transformers used on three phase systems shall have their secondary connections starred and earthed. When measuring line current values using a common meter with a selector switch, they shall be connected so that the current transformers shall be shorted out when not being used for indication. This shall be carried out in the selector switch by "make before break" contacts.
47.2.1.9
Digital Protection Relay The digital protection relays offered shall be in compliance with the following: Parameters Operating temperature Humidity Vibration Shock and Bump Seismic Insulation Relevant Standard IEC 60068 IEC 60068 IEC 60255 IEC 60255 IEC 60255 IEC 60255 -10C to +55C 56 days at 40C and 95% RH class I class I class I 2kVrms for 1 min between all terminals and earth 2kVrms for 1 min between independent circuits 1kVrms for 1 min across NO contacts class III, 5kV 1.2/50s between all terminals and earth without damage or flashover. 2.5kV common mode <3% deviation 1.0kV series mode <3% deviation 8kV direct without mal-operation or damage 20MHz to 1 GHz at 10V/m and <5% deviation class IV ,4kV 5/50ns IP52 minimum <3% deviation Requirements
Transient Overvoltage
IEC 60255
High frequency Disturbance Electrostatic Discharge Radio Frequency Disturbance Fast Transient Enclosure Protection EMC Compliance
IEC 60255
IEC 60255 IEC 60255 IEC 60255 SS IEC 529 EN50081-1,2 EN50082-1,2 89/336/EEC IEC60255 IEC60255
Dielectric withstand Impulse voltage
2KV common mode 1KV differential mode 5KV common mode 1KV differential mode
All protective relays shall be mounted in dust-proof cases, which shall be earthed. The relay front shall be protected by a transparent cover and shall be designed for flush mounting at the door of the low voltage compartment of switchgear panel. In the event of a failure, the faulty module can be replaced without the need of soldering.
Ugdg Spec TS 47-9/55 47.2.1.9 Digital Protection Relay (Cont'd) The relays shall have an integrated keypad with LCD or LED display. The LCD display shall be backlighted during reading of relay parameter. There must be at least one LED with one indicating trip (red). Resetting of LEDs indications shall be possible with front cover closed. When the relay front cover is closed, only the reading of relay settings is possible. Changing of relay settings shall require the removal of relays front cover. The LCD or LED display shall give a clear message of the fault type by indicating the affected phase and the type of operation such as instantaneous, DTL earth fault or IDMTL overcurrrent. Fault code is not preferred and where this is inevitable, a non-fading, waterproof self-adhesive label is to be provided next to the relay. The relay shall be able to store the last fault record. The digital protection relays shall display load current and maximum demand current in primary values. Panel meter shall be used to display primary current. The relay shall be suitable for operation in a 50 Hz system. The relay shall have at least two contacts for direct tripping of the circuit breakers. Relay contacts shall make firmly without bounce. The relay parameter and setting relay parameter shall be intact in the event of power failure. All relays shall be suitably marked, visible from the front of the relay without removing the cover with the following information: a) b) c) Function of relay (e.g. IDMTL overcurrent /DTL earth fault relay) Maximum demand current Rated frequency
All digital relays provided shall have at least 2 binary outputs for external telemonitoring connections. The Contractor may in lieu of digital protection relay , provide electromechanical protection relays complying with the undermentioned requirements: Electromechanical Earth Fault Relay Earth fault protection shall be afforded by instantaneous attracted armature earth fault relay with a flag indicator that can be reset by hand The earth fault relay shall operate at primary fault current not exceeding 140 amps. Adjustment of operating time lag shall be provided by a solid state delay timer with a setting range of 0.1 to 1 second. The time lag setting shall not exceed 0.5 second unless otherwise indicated. The relay shall be flush-mounted and located in a cubicle adjacent to the incoming circuit breaker. Electromechanical Overcurrent Relay Overcurrent relays shall be Inverse Definite Minimum Time Lag (IDMTL) relay or Definite Time Lag (DTL) relay as indicated in the Drawings. IDMTL relay shall be heavily damped induction disc units with time/current characteristics in accordance with IEC 60255-6. Its accuracy shall be calibrated at 50 Hz to fall into accuracy class 1 as given in IEC 60255-6. The relay shall be suitable for flush or project mounting and shall be tropicalised and protected o against dust, shock and vibration. It shall remain operative up to an ambient temperature of 50 C without deterioration of its performance characteristics. DTL relay shall have adjustable current setting of 2 Amp to 7 Amp and adjustable delay time setting of 0 second to 1 second. Setting accuracy for current shall be less than 5% at full scale and setting accuracy for time shall be less than 10% at full scale. The relay shall be incorporated with a test button, rest button and indicating lamp. 47.2.1.10 Identification Of Equipment And Circuits Each item of switchgear, including each switch forming part of a switchboard or panel shall be clearly labelled externally, to identify its relation to Drawings details. Labels shall be of "Formica" engraving laminate or similar material having black characters on white background, with 5mm minimum height characters. They shall be secured to the front of the panel by instrument headed screws or adhesive or epoxy glue. All circuits shall be phase identified at their terminations by means of colour coded heat shrunk sleeves.
Ugdg Spec TS 47-10/55 47.2.1.11 Tests (i) Type Tests (a) Switchboards shall be subjected to type tests to verify compliance with the requirements laid down in the Specifications. The type tests shall include the following : 1) 2) 3) 4) 5) 6) 7) (b) Verification of temperature rise unit Verification of dielectric properties Verification of short circuit strength Verification of the continuity of the protective circuit Verification of clearances and creepage distances Verification of mechanical operation Verification of degree of protections.
The type tests shall be conducted by independent testing authority which shall be a member of the Association of Short Circuit Testing Authority (ASTA) or by SAC-SINGLAS accredited laboratories. The type test certificate shall be accompanied by a complete type test report which shall include amongst other information, on arrangement and details of switchboard construction, calibration oscillograms of short circuit test, temperature rise measurements.
(ii)
Factory and Delivery Tests With all control circuits disconnected but with all isolators and MCCBs closed and power fuses fitted, the switchboard panels shall be subjected to a pressure test of 2.5kV for one minute, across the following points : (1) (2) (3) (4) Phase to phase Phase to neutral Phase to earth Neutral to earth
The above tests shall be conducted at the place of manufacture and witnessed by SO Rep. A test certificate by the switchboard manufacturer shall be issued on completion of the tests. The site tests of main switchboards and setting of the protective relays shall be also witnessed by the SO Rep. Approval of tests and test certificates received by the SO Rep shall not relieve the contractor of their obligations to supply the complete equipment assembly in accordance with the other requirements of the Specifications and Drawings. 47.2.2 47.2.2.1 Indoor Service Electrical Distribution Box General Unless otherwise indicated, the Contractor shall supply and incorporate an indoor service electrical distribution box (overground pillar type box) with each main switchboard. The indoor service electrical distribution panel shall be totally segregated and compartmentalised from other panels of the main switchboard. It shall be located next to the main switchboard or in a room adjacent to the switchroom. Electrical connections shall be made by the Contractor between the distribution panel to the incoming circuit breaker. 47.2.2.2 Type and Design The distribution panel shall be the indoor type comprising : (a) (b) (c) (d) (e)
UPG07/S47.DOC(10) lkk(181206) DPD
Housing or enclosure Phase and neutral busbars and earth bar Three (3) numbers of strip fuse-way distribution units with link units Phase barriers and insulated covers for contacts Six (6) numbers of solid links of 630 Amp rated normal current and three (3) numbers of HRC fuse links
Ugdg Spec TS 47-11/55 47.2.2.2 Type and Design (Cont'd) (f) Accessories
The rated insulation level of the distribution panel shall comprise of the highest rated voltage of 600V and the one minute power frequency withstand voltage of 2.5 kV. The rated normal currents of the busbars shall be 630 Amp. The overground distribution panels shall be protected by fuses located at transformer sources. The maximum fuse rating shall be 630 Amp and the cut-off current shall be of the order of 55kA peak based on a 60kA (rms) prospective fault current. All components shall be capable of withstanding a short circuit current of this rating without damage. 47.2.2.3 Housing The housing shall be manufactured from electro-galvanised steel sheet frames of minimum thickness of 2.0mm. The panel shall consist of : (a) (b) (c) A shell A root or frame support for the shell A pocket
Ventilation of the distribution panel shall be ensured by suitable screened apertures at the side panels. The door shall be provided with a push-button panel lock with flush handle which can be opened only with approved master key. The door shall be made detachable from the panel. The distribution panel shall be of compact design and shall have the dimensions not less than 750mm W x 350mm D x 1420mm H. 47.2.2.4 Busbars Busbars shall be of tinned hard-drawn high conductivity copper complying with IEC 60439-2. Busbars shall be securely mounted at the rear of the panel behind the strip fuse-way distribution units and also mounted on non-hygroscopic, anti-tracking insulators, strong enough to endure without damage, forces set up by any thermal expansion within the busbars under normal operating conditions and force created by prospective fault current. The cross-sectional area of each phase or neutral busbar shall be at least 45 x 10 mm and its minimum length shall be 500 mm. The busbars shall be of sufficient length so as to allow for the installation of an additional strip fuse-way distribution unit, where required. Spare holes complete with M12 nuts and bolts shall be provided and shall be positioned such that the required clearances and creepage distances can be achieved with the installation of an additional strip fuse-way distribution unit. The bolts shall be permanently secured onto the busbar such that they will not fall off during removal of the nuts. Phase busbars shall be colour marked in sequence from top to bottom, red, yellow, blue and the neutral busbar mounted at the bottom shall be coloured black. The colouring of the busbars shall not be continuous and shall be such that it cannot be mistaken for an insulating covering. For the neutral busbar, four holes complete with M12 bolts and nuts shall be drilled. The bolts shall be permanently secured onto the busbar such that they will not fall off during removal of the nuts. For busbars and busbar connections in air, the clearances and creepage distances shall be not less than 25mm between live conductors and not less than 20mm between live conductors to earth. Where these clearances cannot be obtained, or where special risks exist, adequate non-inflammable solid insulation shall be provided. 47.2.2.5 Strip Fuse-Way Distribution Units The strip fuse-way distribution unit shall comply with the requirements of DlN 43623. It shall be independently supported at the rear by cross metal supports. It shall be of the Form B type with downward connections at the bottom of the strip fuse-way. lt shall be of the vertically arranged triple-pole construction.
UPG07/S47.DOC(11) lkk(181206) DPD 2
Ugdg Spec TS 47-12/55 47.2.2.5 Strip Fuse-Way Distribution Units (Con'td) The link unit of each pole shall be of the DlN type fusing with spring silver-plated copper contacts suitable for DlN size 2 fuse links. The triple-pole fuse base shall be manufactured from proven durable insulating material having adequate mechanical strength and resistance to heat. The distribution unit shall have cable terminals for direct cable connection at the bottom of each unit. The cable terminals shall be drilled complete with M12 bolts and nuts. The bolts shall be permanently secured onto the busbar such that they will not fall off during removal of the nuts. For each strip fuse-way distribution unit, six (6) numbers of DlN size 2 knife type solid links (tinned plated) and three (3) numbers of DlN size 2, HRC fuse links shall be provided. The solid links and fuse links shall comply with the requirements of VDE 0660 Pt 4 and DIN 43620. The dimensions of the solid links shall be not less than 150mm L x 32mm W x 6mm thick. The rated breaking capacity of the HRC fuses shall be at least 80 kA at 500V rms. The HRC fuses shall be of class (time/current range) GT (slow) and of maximum power dissipation of 28 watts. Insulated dividing barriers shall be provided between phase contact assemblies in each distribution unit. These shall be securely fixed to the distribution unit. Plastic covers shall be provided to prevent accidental touching of the live contacts of the link units. These shall be of a type which can be pushed onto the contacts easily and snaps into position automatically. A circuit label of insulating material shall be mounted on the barrier between the red and yellow phases of each distribution unit. This label shall be securely held without the use of screws and it shall be possible to slot into position and remove the label from the front of the barrier. The distribution units shall be secured onto the busbars and metal supports by bolts and nuts. The bolts shall be permanently secured onto the busbars and metal supports such that they will not fall off during removal of the units. 47.2.2.6 Cable Clamps Three solid metallic cable clamps shall be provided in each distribution panel adequate to support the cable in normal service. The centre line of the cable clamps shall not be less than 450 mm below the fixing centre of the cable lug on the neutral busbar. 47.2.2.7 Earth Bar A tinned copper earth bar shall be provided to facilitate earthing of the steel wire armour of the cable. The minimum cross-sectional dimensions of the earth bar shall be 31.5mm x 6.3mm and its minimum length shall be 500mm. The earth bar shall be rigidly bolted onto the top of the metal cable clamp. There shall be electrical continuity between the earth bar, the metal cable clamp and the housing of the distribution panel. On the earth bar, five holes equally spaced shall be drilled to accommodate M10 bolts. Two lengths of 70 mm2 cross-sectional area flexible tinned copper braid shall be provided for each distribution panel. The length of each braid shall be 400 mm. One end of the braid shall be crimped with 2 a 70 mm tinned copper lug. The stud hole of the lug shall be suitable for M10 stud size. 47.2.3 47.2.3.1 Tap-Off Boxes General The tap-off boxes shall be purpose made according to details given in the Drawings and shall comply with the following clauses. 47.2.3.2 Design And Dimension The overall dimensions and essential details of the tap-off boxes shall be according to the Drawings. The tap-off boxes shall comply with IEC 439-1. The internal layout may be re-arranged to suit the type of electrical accessories used in the box. Tap-off boxes shall have hinged access doors facilities for locking with master key system. Four master keys shall be handed over to the relevant Area/Branch Office by the Contractor on Substantial Completion of the Contract.
UPG07/S47.DOC(12) lkk(181206) DPD
Ugdg Spec TS 47-13/55 47.2.3.2 Design And Dimension (Cont'd) All line-branch connectors shall be adequately sized for the cables used. It shall allow the main and branch cables to be separately secured to the connecting block with the main cable continuous and uncut. 47.2.3.3 Metal Box The metal box shall be fabricated from electro-galvanised or phosphate-dipped sheet steel. The body of the box shall be of 1.2mm thickness and the mounting plate for electrical equipment shall be of 1.5mm thickness. It shall be treated with a coat of finishing paint of thickness not less than 45 microns and shall be oven baked and dried. The metal box shall comply with the latest edition of SS 5. 47.2.3.4 Phase Marking All line-branch connectors shall be identified with their respective phase colours after completion of installation. 47.2.3.5 Type Testing All tap-off boxes shall be type tested and passed by SAC-SINGLAS accredited laboratories before they can be delivered for installation. A sample of the tap-off box shall be submitted to the SO Rep for approval. 47.2.4 Distribution Boards Distribution boards shall be of the 400/230V type, of appropriate size, and they shall house the number of ways and miniature circuit breakers or HRC fuses as indicated in the Drawings. Distribution boards shall have hinged access doors with suitable dustproof seals. Each board shall have insulated protective shields to prevent accidental contact with live parts. Neutral and earth busbars shall have an outgoing terminal for each neutral or earth conductor connected to them. Each distribution board shall have an approved circuit list fixed on the inside of the door. Labels shall also be supplied for each distribution board screwed to the front giving board reference. The construction of distribution boards shall comply with the requirements for the construction of switchboards. Miniature circuit breaker distribution boards shall comply with the requirements of IEC 60439. 47.2.5 Moulded Case Circuit Breakers (MCCBs) All MCCB shall comply with IEC 947-2. Triple pole MCCB shall be rated at 400V ac and double pole MCCB shall be rated at 230V ac. The rated service short circuit breaking capacity (Ics) shall be at least 50% of the rated ultimate short circuit breaking capacity (Icu) for all MCCB. The fault level of the incoming switchgear at the main switchboard taking supply directly from PowerGrid shall be assumed to be 36 kA at rated voltage of 400V. All MCCB within the main switchboard shall be rated to comply with the calculations based on the above starting fault level. The main incoming MCCB shall be fitted with a round type external handle. The handle shall incorporate provisions for locking the handle in either the "OFF" or "ON" position and for interlocking with the hinged door of the compartment. There shall be a marking plate to indicate the "ON", "OFF", "RESET" and "TRIP" modes. It shall be possible to adjust the instantaneous tripping of the main incoming MCCB from 2 to 8 times of its rated current. It shall also be incorporated with shunt trip facility where external earth fault protection is required. Each triple pole MCCB shall be provided with a neutral link housed in the same compartment. The neutral link shall be constructed of tinned copper bar of suitable cross-section to match the circuit conductors with a bridged piece to facilitate disconnection without removal of the connection cables during testing. Connection of cables to the neutral link shall be by cable lugs, bolts and nuts. All MCCB shall be mounted and installed according to the manufacturer's recommendations.
UPG07/S47.DOC(13) lkk(181206) DPD
Ugdg Spec TS 47-14/55 47.2.6 Miniature Circuit Breakers (MCBs) All miniature circuit breakers shall be of the thermal magnetic type with a toggle-type tripping switch, and shall comply with the requirements of IEC 898. The MCBs shall be of type B or C and rated for phase voltage of 240V, 50 Hz operation and shall have an interrupting capacity of at least 6 KA (M6) unless stated otherwise.
47.2.7
Residual Current Circuit Breakers (RCCBs) All RCCB shall be of the high sensitivity, direct acting current-operated type with a tripping time not exceeding 0.1 second. The RCCB shall be rated for operation at 400/230V, 50 Hz and shall have a tripping current of 30 mA, unless otherwise indicated. All RCCB shall comply with the requirements of SS 97. All RCCB shall be registered with Spring Singapore and bear the Safety Mark and PSB Test Mark or other approved equivalent. In addition to compliance with the latest SS97, the RCCB must also comply to IEC 61008-1 (consolidated Edition 2.1) including amendment 1 : 200
47.2.8
Switch Fuses, Isolators And Isolating Switches Switch fuses, isolators and isolating switches shall be of the quick-made and break type, suitable for the rating of the equipment served. Switch fuses shall comply with 1EC 947-3 and shall be fitted with fuses to BS 88, bolted type, Class Q1, certified for 415V and category of Duty AC23. Isolators and isolating switches shall comply with IEC 947-3. For isolating switches, solid copper links shall be fitted in place of fuses.
47.2.9
Contactors Contactors shall be suitable for use on three-phase four-wire 400/230V 50 Hz supplies and fitted with 220 - 250V a.c. coils, unless otherwise specified. Contactors shall comply with BS 5424:Part 1. Contactors shall be rated for intermittent periodic or intermittent duty Class 0.3. The utilization category shall be AC-3.
47.2.10
Block Connectors All block connectors used for branching of circuits or neutral links shall be tinned brass blocks contained within phenolic moulded cases. They shall be rated for the load current of the circuits. The cable entries and terminals of the connector shall be of the correct size for the termination of the conductors. Not more than one cable shall be terminated into each terminal of the connector. All exposed parts of the connection shall be covered and sealed. Terminals shall be designed to clamp the conductor between the metal surfaces with sufficient contact pressure but without causing damage to the conductors. The Contractor shall ensure that the cables are properly terminated and all terminations are tightened at each conductor. He shall make good all damages resulting from loose or faulty connections.
UPG07/S47.DOC(14) lkk(181206) DPD
Ugdg Spec TS 47-15/55 47.3 47.3.1 MAINS AND SUB-MAINS CABLES General All cables, except for fire rated cables shall have the PSB Test mark or other approved equivalent. Fire rated cables shall be listed under PSB PLS Class 1. The cable conductors shall be annealed copper. Identification trade marks, voltage rating and cross-sectional area of the conductor shall be embossed or printed on the surface of the sheathing of the cable. Every coil or drum of cable shall have a tag as label attached giving the following information : (a) (b) (c) (d) (e) Name and type of cable Cross-sectional area and number of core Length Manufacturers name, mark or other trademark Rated operating voltage
All cables shall be new and unused and shall be delivered to the Site with the manufacturers seals, labels or other proof of origin intact. All cables shall be of the size and type specified in the Drawings or Specifications. 47.3.2 PVC-Insulated Cables All PVC-insulated cables shall comply with the following standards unless specified otherwise in the Drawings : (a) Single core PVC-insulated non-sheathed cables shall comply with SS 358 with all the latest amendments. The cable shall be rated at 450/750 Volts. Single and multi-core PVC-insulated, PVC sheathed cable shall comply with IEC 502 with all the latest amendments. The cable shall be rated at 600/1000 Volts. Underground cable shall be PVC/SWA/PVC copper cables and shall comply with BS 6346. The cable shall be rated at 600/1000 Volts.
(b)
(c)
47.3.3
Fire Rated Cables All fire rated cables use in fire safety measures to maintain integrity of main supplies shall comply with SS 299 be approved by FSSD. Signal cables shall be rated at least 300/500 Volts. The rating of other cables used in 230 Volts and 400 Volts systems can be 450/750 Volts or 600/1000 Volts. They shall be single or multicore cables as shown in the Drawings, each comprising stranded circular annealed copper conductors and a fire resisting barrier. Cable sizes of 1.5 mm2 to 4 mm2 can be single insulated and cable sizes of 6 mm2 and above shall have both insulation and sheath. The thickness of the insulation and sheath shall be in accordance with the manufacturers technical specification where the relevant BS or IEC standards are not applicable. Further, the construction of the cables shall be in accordance with its relevant SS, BS or IEC standards and a type test report shall be submitted. Fire rated cables shall be listed under PSB PLS Class 1..
47.3.4 47.3.4.1
Cable Installation General All cables shall be installed generally along the routes and in the manner indicated on the Drawings and in accordance with the notes and instructions thereon. Notwithstanding the above requirement, all cable routes shall be approved by the SO Rep before any work commences. All cables shall run directly from point to point without joints unless the length required is in excess of the length obtainable in one piece from the cable manufacturer. In such a case, the position of each and every joint shall be approved by the SO Rep. No other joints, whether straight through or tee, will be permitted.
UPG07/S47.DOC(15) lkk(181206) DPD
Ugdg Spec TS 47-16/55 47.3.4.1 General (Cont'd) All cables shall be run neatly and truly vertical, horizontal or parallel with the features of the building. Where a cable has to change direction, whether in a horizontal or a vertical plane, the radius of the bend in the cable shall not be less than the minimum laid down in CP 5 or the manufacturer's recommendations. Unless otherwise specified, all materials, supports, fixings, attachments and other items associated with the installation of cables, together with all of the work involved, shall be provided by the Contractor whether or not it is or they are specifically mentioned in the Specifications. 47.3.4.2 Mains Cables Installation Mains cables shall be encased in metal trunking supported on walls, ceilings or structural steelwork. The cables shall be clipped together in sets with nylon cable ties, PVC covered metallic cable ties. However, only PVC covered metallic cable ties shall be used to secure fire-resistant cables. No overlapping of set of cables will be permitted. Cables shall be fixed to the perforated steel bridges provided at the base of the trunking. Before placing an order for the trunking, the Contractor shall submit to the SO Rep for approval his proposals relating to the arrangement of the cables in the trunking and the sizes of the trunkings. The SO Rep shall have the right to reject any such proposals if, in his opinion, the metal trunking is of inadequate size to facilitate ease of installation of cables in the trunking. All mains cables shall be run continuously without any joints or breaks. Branching of horizontal sub-mains or load cables shall be made by the removal of the PVC insulation and sheath of the main cables to facilitate connection at line-taps in tap-off units. 47.3.4.3 Sub-mains Cables Installation Horizontal sub-mains cables shall be encased and secured in PVC cable trunking fixed on the surfaces of ceilings, walls and structures. The cables shall be retained in the trunking by means of PVC clips or retainers. Cables shall be installed on the "loop in" basis and joints between terminal points shall not be permitted. The "loop in" terminal points shall be connector blocks incorporated in the electrical service boxes outside the flat units. 47.3.4.4 Small Wiring Unless otherwise indicated, all small wiring for final sub-circuits shall be enclosed in PVC cable trunking or conduit fixed on the surfaces of ceilings, walls and structures. For trunking, the wiring shall be retained in the trunking by means of PVC clips or retainers unless specified otherwise. Wiring shall be carried out on the "loop in" principle with joints made at the terminal points. No joints between terminal points shall be permitted. Wherever the wiring pass through walls, ceilings, partitions and the like, they shall be threaded through a high impact PVC sleeve. 47.3.5 47.3.5.1 Installation Of Underground Cables General Underground cables shall be laid direct in the ground or drawn into pipe ducts as indicated on the Drawings. The Contractor shall excavate trenches for the laying of cables and/or the installation of cable ducts, and subsequently backfilling them. He shall also dispose of surplus debris arising from the excavations and reinstate the ground surfaces to match adjacent surface finishes. The Contractor shall be responsible for ensuring that due care is taken when excavating in the vicinity of existing buried services, and shall bear the cost and expense of any damages incurred. All cables buried direct in the ground shall be laid at a depth such that the vertical distance from the top of the cable to the ground surface is not less than 750mm.
UPG07/S47.DOC(16) lkk(181206) DPD
Ugdg Spec TS 47-17/55 47.3.5 47.3.5.1 Installation Of Underground Cables (Contd) General (Contd) Before cable laying commences, all cable trenches shall be drained, the bed graded and tamped, and all loose stones and similar debris removed. After laying, the cable shall be covered with finely sifted sand to provide a 50mm cover after tamping. All cables shall be further protected by a continuous layer of PVC cover plates. 47.3.5.2 PVC Cover Plates The cable cover plates shall be of standard lengths of 1.0m and 2.0m. Each cover plate shall be nominal 150mm in width and nominal 2.0mm in thickness. The cable cover plates shall be made of high impact resistant hard PVC. The colour of the plate shall preferably be yellow and shall remain permanent and non-fading. Each cable cover plate shall be linked to the adjacent cover plates at both ends to form a continuous chain.
The cable cover plates shall be designed, manufactured and tested in accordance with the latest revision of the following standards or their equivalent. Description (a) (b) (c) (d) Impact Test Tensile Strength Vicat Softening Temperature Accelerated Ageing Standard Clause 7.3 of E6530 (Austrian Standard) Clause 7.4 of E6530 ASTM D1525 ASTM D3045
The PVC cover plates shall have the following properties : (a) Three fully processed specimens tested for their impact strength should not have more than 3 cracks respectively (5 drop hammer tests per specimen). And the drop hammer should not penetrate the specimens more than 100mm for more than 3 times in a series of 15 drop hammer tests. If these requirements are not met, the same test series are repeated on the specimens. Should the specimens tested on the second series of test also fail to meet the requirements the whole test is to be considered failed. The longitudinal connections (linking mechanism) of the fully processed specimens shall withstand a tensile strength of minimum 100 newtons. The Vicat softening temperature of the fully processed samples shall not be less than 72C (Rate A at 50C 5C per hour). The fully processed specimens shall be aged at 70C for 168 hours. Aged specimens shall also be tested for their tensile strength in the longitudinal connections. The change in properties shall be less than 25% of the original value.
(b)
(c)
(d)
The cable cover plates shall be type tested by PSB in accordance with the above requirements. All cables shall run at least 300mm clear of all other services, regardless of whether these other services are laid parallel with or transversely to the cable trench. Cables shall, in general, pass below all intersecting piped services which cross the cable route, unless this would mean the cables descending to a depth of more than 2.0 m. In such cases the cables shall be run according to the directions of the SO Rep. Where cables cross roads or carparks, or enter buildings, or elsewhere as indicated on the Drawings, they shall be drawn into underground UPVC pipes of minimum 100mm diameter. Where such pipes are not provided by others, they shall be supplied and installed by the Contractor. All UPVC pipes shall be Class "B" type in accordance to SS 141. The installation of underground cables shall be carried out in the "loop-in" principle. All cable joints shall be carried out at the terminal boxes and fuse cut-outs. No underground joints shall be permitted without the prior approval of the SO Rep.
UPG07/S47.DOC(17) lkk(181206) DPD
Ugdg Spec TS 47-18/55 47.3.5 47.3.5.2 Installation Of Underground Cables (Cont'd) PVC Cover Plates (Cont'd) The cables shall be terminated in brass compression glands with clamping device for the armour. The glands shall be of approved design and of the correct size. At all cable terminations, the armouring of the cables shall be solidly bonded to earth by means of properly designed clamps and a copper conductor of appropriate size. For excavation work involving existing roads, carparks, paved areas or other services such as gas and water, the Contractor shall seek prior approval from the relevant authorities before commencing any work. 47.3.5.3 Cable Glands All armoured PVC insulated cables shall be properly terminated with brass compression glands of suitable size for clamping the steel wire armour. The glands shall comply with the requirements of BS EN 50262. All cable glands shall be provided complete with shrouds, brass locknuts and earth tags. The earth tags shall be solidly connected together and to the earth terminal by a PVC insulated copper conductor of appropriate size. 47.3.5.4 Underground Cable Joints for Armoured PVC Insulated Cables Underground cable joints shall only be permitted where the length of cable required is in excess of the length of cable obtainable in one piece from the cable manufacturer, or, in special circumstances where approved in writing by the SO Rep. The Contractor shall inform the SO Rep of any proposed underground cable joints and the position of all joints shall be approved by the SO Rep before any work commences. The underground cable joint shall be made with a resin type joint kit complete with thermoplastic mould and accessories and the Contractor shall submit to the SO Rep for approval, full details of the joint kit which he proposes to supply, together with a full jointing specification. All jointing work, once commenced, shall be completed and sealed in the shortest possible time, without interruption. No jointing work, shall commence without the prior approval and visual observation of the SO Rep. All joints shall be made exactly in accordance with the cable joint kit manufacturer's instructions, using only the materials approved in the manufacturer's specifications and kit. To ensure continuity and full conductivity of the steel wire armour, a copper lead of minimum crosssectional area as the cable conductors shall be used in conjunction with the armour bond kit available from the cable joint manufacturer. 47.4 47.4.1 47.4.1.1 CABLES SUPPORTING SYSTEMS Metal Trunking Metal Trunking - General All metal trunking and associated fittings shall comply with SS 249. They shall have removable lids extending over their entire lengths. Lids shall be lipped and fixed at intervals not exceeding 1m by means of brass or steel screws which are protected against corrosion by a finish of zinc coating or equivalent to zinc coating. Electro-brass plated screws shall not be used. Trunkings encased by cement when passing through floor slabs shall be of separate sections such that the exposed lids not encased shall be removable. Perforated steel bridges shall be spot welded at the base of the trunking for the fixing of cables. Two rows of perforations of different sizes shall be provided. The bridges shall be spaced at intervals of 400mm and at not more than 200mm from ends. All trunking and fittings shall be manufactured from electro-galvanised or phosphate-dipped steel and treated with epoxy powder paint giving a paint thickness of not less than 45 microns.
UPG07/S47.DOC(18) lkk(181206) DPD
Ugdg Spec TS 47-19/55 47.4.1 47.4.1.1 Metal Trunking (Cont'd) Metal Trunking - General (Cont'd) The thickness of the sheet steel used in the fabrication of trunking and fittings shall not be less than those of the following table : Nominal Thickness of Sheet Steel Thickness of Body (mm) 1.0 1.2 1.4 1.6 Thickness of Cover (mm) 1.0 1.2 1.2 1.4
Nominal Width of Trunking (mm) 50mm and below 75mm to 100mm 125mm to 175mm Above 175mm
The standard depth of the trunking used shall be 50mm and the standard length shall not be less than 2m. At the ground floor of the buildings, the size of metal trunking installed from the consumer switch room to all the rising mains shall be at least 100mm by 50mm throughout. The size of the metal trunkings for the lift risers and flat risers, shall be at least 100 mm by 50 mm throughout from the ground floor level to the roof level. Notwithstanding the above requirements, the figure in percentage of the sum of the overall cross-sectional areas of cables (including insulation and sheath) to the internal cross-sectional area of the trunking in which they are installed shall also not exceed 35%. Cables shall be installed in trefoil, neatly tied together in each set and secured to the bridges at the base of the metal trunkings. The sets shall be clearly labelled for easy identification of its usage and shall be arranged so that the spare space is reserved on one side. The Contractor shall submit to the SO Rep for approval his proposal relating to the installation of cables in the metal trunking. All metal trunking and associated fittings shall bear the PSB Test Mark or other approved equivalent. 47.4.1.2 Metal Trunking - Installation Metal trunking shall be run vertical, horizontal or parallel with the features of the building. In general, the trunking shall be installed on the ceiling or along the wall just below the ceiling. For very high ceiling, the trunking may be installed lower but in any case, it shall be at least 2.2m high. Manufacturers' standard fittings shall be used for bends, angles, offsets, cross-overs and other nonstandard runs. The practice of cutting and bending trunking to form flanges and attachments shall not be permitted. Where the use of manufactures' standard fittings would result in gaps/holes between the trunking and the building ( beams, walls, columns, etc), the Contractor shall install customised factory-made fittings that completely fill up the gaps/holes. To achieve this, part of the trunking may be customised/enlarged/extended to fill up the gaps/holes. Provide chamfer at the appropriate bends inside the trunking to prevent the cables from being bent beyond the permitted bending radii. Trunking shall be properly aligned and securely fixed by gun tool method or rawl plug fitted at regular intervals not exceeding 600mm and at not more than 300mm from ends. Where the trunking is suspended from the ceiling, wall or structure, it shall be supported by mild steel angle or channel iron brackets at regular intervals not exceeding 1.5m. The brackets shall be finished to the same standard as the trunking. Each individual piece of trunking on straight runs shall be independently supported. Where bends, angles or offsets occur, additional fixings shall be supplied at a distance of not exceeding 150mm on either side of the accessory. Any bonding links and their fastening supplied to satisfy electrical continuity conditions shall not cause any electrolytic corrosion. Trunking connectors shall span the complete internal surface of the trunking and shall be so designed that the trunking sections mate with butting joints.
UPG07/S47.DOC(19) lkk(181206) DPD
Ugdg Spec TS 47-20/55 47.4.1.2 Metal Trunking Installation (Cont'd) Where the trunking passes through a floor slab or beam, the portion of the trunking which is to be embedded in the floor or beam opening shall have a permanently fixed lid to form a steel sleeve at least 250mm long. Floor skirting (with similar grade of concrete or screed as for the floor slab) with approved water proofing admixture added shall be provided at the location where the trunking penetrates through the floor slab to prevent ingress of water into the trunking. Where the trunking crosses expansion joints, a trunking joint shall be made. The connector at this point shall be made with slotted fixing holes to permit a movement of 10mm in both the horizontal and vertical planes. Where any cutting or damage is caused during erection, the finish shall be made good. All burrs and rough edges shall be removed. Where any corrosion has occurred, it shall be removed and the area treated with a rust proofing agent. After this, it shall be treated by the application of a zinc epoxy and followed by a coat of colour matching paint. Holes cut in the trunking for the passage of PVC covered cables shall be treated as above and provided with grommets, or alternatively bushed or lined to prevent damage to the PVC covering. 47.4.1.3 INSTALLATION OF TRUNKING FROM THE MAIN ROOF TO THE LIFT MACHINE ROOM The Contractor shall ensure that the electrical riser trunking is not exposed to any ingress of water when it is run from the main roof to the lift machine room (LMR). The trunking shall run vertically from the main roof to the soffit of the LMRs floor. It shall then run on the underside/soffit of the LMRs floor such that the beams prevent the rain from entering the trunking. Puncture the floor and enter the LMR at the most appropriate location. Provide a 500mm wide x 100mm thick brickwall for the vertical run from the main roof to the soffit of the LMRs floor so as to mount the trunking and to protect the trunking from any ingress of water/rain. Provide a 100mm high x 50mm thick concrete kerb all round the base of the trunking to prevent water from seeping into the base of the trunking. Additional protection shall be provided, if required, to suit the site conditions and where the trunking is still very exposed to weather. The opening through the main roof must be properly sealed to prevent water from seeping through it. Obtain the concurrence of the SO Rep before installing the brickwall. 47.4.2 47.4.2.1 Cable Tray Cable Tray - General Cable trays and accessories shall be perforated and manufactured from hot rolled mild steel conforming to BS 1449:Part 1 or JIS G3131 SOHC with hot dip galvanised finish to BS 729. Electrolytic zinc coated steel sheet conforming to JIS G3313 SECC and coated with epoxy powder paint giving a paint thickness of not less than 45 micron can be used in indoor environment. The thickness of sheet steel used in the fabrication of cable tray and accessories shall not be less than those of the following table : Nominal Width of Tray (mm) 100 150 210 300 360 450 600 The standard length of cable tray shall not be less than 2.4m. Nominal Thickness Sheet Steel (mm) 1.0 1.0 1.2 1.6 1.6 1.6 2.0
UPG07/S47.DOC(20) lkk(181206) DPD
Ugdg Spec TS 47-21/55 47.4.2.2 Cable Tray - Installation All accessories including bends (vertical and horizontal), intersections, tees, risers and reducing sections shall be purpose made by the tray manufacturer. Where site conditions necessitate site fabrication, the SO Rep's specific approval of the proposals shall be given before fabrication commences and the standards of fabrications and finish shall not be less than that of manufacturers' standard items. Sections of cable tray and accessories shall be jointed using mushroom-head roofing bolts, nuts and washers. The joint screws, nuts and washers shall all be galvanised or sherardized steel. Brass shall not be used. The cable tray shall be of adequate size to meet the installation requirements. Cables shall be installed on trays in a single layer leaving 25% of the tray width spare for future use. The Contractor shall submit to the SO Rep for approval his proposal relating to the installation of cables on the tray and the width of the trays. Cable trays shall preferably be installed such that they offer direct support to cables. Fixings and supports shall be installed at regular intervals not exceeding 1200mm and 150mm from all bends, tees, intersections and risers. They shall be fabricated from mild steel flat bar or angle iron or channel iron, and treated with an anti-rust undercoat and zinc chromate finishing coat to give a paint thickness of not less than 45 microns. Where horizontal runs of cable tray cross building or structure expansion joints, then the tray shall be cut between supports installed on either side of the expansion joint. The tray sections shall then be jointed with bolts, nuts and washers installed in elongated holes permitting a lengthwise movement of 10mm from the initial fastening position. Cable trays shall be cut along a line of plain metal and not through perforations. Burrs or sharp edges shall be removed prior to the installation of tray sections or accessories. The cut or damaged metal shall be made good by the Contractor by first treating the surfaces with a suitable rust proofing agent and then applying finishes comparable to the remainder of the surface. Cables shall be secured to the cable tray by means of plastic fixing ties or saddles at intervals of 400mm and at not more than 200mm from ends. Cable tray and accessories shall be electrically and mechanically continuous throughout its length. Sections of cable tray shall be thoroughly cleaned before overlapping and secured with a minimum of two screwed fixings. The remote ends of the cable tray shall be effectively bonded to the earthing system. 47.4.3 47.4.3.1 PVC Trunking General All PVC trunking shall be of a non-flame propagating type complying with the dimensions and performance requirements of SS 275. The PVC trunking shall be made in white base and white clip-on cover from high impact PVC and shall be supplied in nominal lengths of 2.0m or more. All PVC trunking shall pass type test conducted by SAC-SINGLAS accredited laboratories and shall have PSB Test Mark Or Approved Equivalent. 47.4.3.2 Single Compartment Trunking The nominal external dimensions of the PVC trunking shall be 40mm, 32mm and 25mm width and the height shall be in accordance with SS 275. The downdrop for the domestic socket outlets and lighting switches shall be of 32mm by 16mm size except where multi-compartment trunking is used. The ceiling tees to lighting points shall be of 25mm by 12.5mm size. 47.4.3.3 80 x 32 mm Two-Compartment Trunking The overall dimensions and essential detailing of the trunking shall be according to the Drawings. The trunking shall have two compartments, one for electrical power cables and the other for telephone or CATV/SCV cables. The space between the cover and the two compartments is reserved for crossing of these services within the trunking. This space should be used for the crossing of these cables only if allowed under CP5 and IDA COPIF
UPG07/S47.DOC(21) lkk(181206) DPD
Ugdg Spec TS 47-22/55 47.4.3.4 60 x 20 mm Two-Compartment Trunking This trunking shall have two compartments, 40mm wide and 20mm wide. The larger compartment is for electrical power cables while the smaller is for telephone or CATV/SCV cables. 47.4.4 47.4.4.1 PVC Trunking - Installation General The PVC trunking shall run truly horizontal, vertical or parallel to the building lines. In general, the trunking shall be installed on the ceiling or along the wall just below the ceiling. For very high ceiling, the trunking may be installed lower but in any case, it shall be at least 2.2m high. For the multi-compartment trunkings, the electrical contractor shall liaise closely with the Singapore Telecom and other parties involved such that all wiring works could proceed smoothly and the cover is installed after all the wiring works by all other parties are installed. The Contractor shall not in any circumstances be absolved from the responsibility for replacing any trunking or cover found damaged or defective. The PVC trunking shall be installed continuously through beam openings so as to ensure segregation of the low voltage and extra low voltage. Where this is not possible, individual PVC sleeves shall be provided for the protection of the different voltage categories of cables. The trunking cover passing through the beam shall be a short piece so as to facilitate removal of the cover for easy maintenance and replacement or addition of cables. 47.4.4.2 Single Compartment Trunking - Installation The PVC trunking shall be surface mounted and fixed with masonry nails at regular intervals not exceeding 400mm and at not more than 100mm from ends. The fixings shall be staggered across the width of the trunking base. Cables shall be secured with purpose-made PVC clips at interval of 250mm and at not more than 125mm from ends except for the two trunking sizes of 32mm by 16mm and 25mm by 12.5mm which do not require PVC clips. 47.4.4.3 80 x 32 mm Two-Compartment Trunking - Installation The trunking shall be surface mounted and fixed with masonry nails, staggered across the two compartments at regular spacing of 200mm and at not more than 100mm from ends. The electrical compartment shall be separately enclosed with PVC cover while the other compartment shall be provided with PVC clips at interval of 250mm and at not more than 125mm from ends. The trunking shall be provided from the electrical tap-off unit, telephone and CATV distribution boxes to all dwelling units at each floor as shown in the Drawings. The Contractor shall liaise with the Telecoms and CATV contractors to determine the exact locations of their distribution boxes. In addition, the Contractor shall install a short length of trunking above the electrical meter board or outside the units to house the telephone rosette and CATV connectors where applicable. 47.4.4.4 60 x 20 mm Two-Compartment Trunking - Installation The trunking shall be surface mounted and fixed with masonry nails, at regular spacing of 200mm and at not more than 50mm from ends. Cables shall be secured with PVC clips at intervals of 250mm and at not more than 125mm from ends.
47.4.5
Metal Conduit All metal conduit shall be heavy gauge screwed steel conduits complying with BS 4568 : Part 1 and shall have minimum Class 4 protection against corrosion. All flexible steel conduit and adapters shall comply with BS 731 including all its latest amendments. All conduit fittings shall comply with BS 4568: Part 2 and indelibly marked with the name or trademark of the item. Bushes and plugs shall be of brass. All other fittings and components shall be galvanised and having Class 4 protection against corrosion.
UPG07/S47.DOC(22) lkk(181206) DPD
Ugdg Spec TS 47-23/55 47.4.5 Metal Conduit (Cont'd) Metal boxes for the enclosure of electrical accessories shall comply with BS 4662 with heavy protection both inside and outside. All conduit shall be free of rust patches or other Defects on delivery and protected from mechanical damage and weather when stored on the Site. No conduit smaller than 20mm diameter shall be used. Spacer bar saddles shall be hot dip galvanised steel with minimum thickness of 0.8mm. Retaining screws for saddle tops shall be of brass or steel zinc plated. Electro-brass plated screw shall not be used. The inner radius of any conduit bend shall not be less than 2.5 times the external diameter of the conduit. Where the conduit has to be bent, it shall be bent using an approved bending machine such that the conduit section shall not be altered. No more than 2 numbers of 90 angle bends shall be installed in any run of conduit without a conduit box. All metal conduits and its fittings shall pass type and batch test. They shall bear the PSB Test Mark or other approved equivalent 47.4.6 Rigid PVC Conduit All rigid PVC conduit shall comply with the requirements of BS EN50086-2-1. All conduit shall be of the high impact heavy mechanical strength type. Unless otherwise specified, all conduit shall be coloured white. All conduit fittings shall comply with the requirements of BS 4607 Pt 1 and Pt V and indelibly marked with the name or trademark of the item. Conduit, fittings and accessories shall be from the same manufacturer. No conduit smaller than 20mm diameter shall be used. All conduit joints shall be made using a solvent adhesive recommended by the manufacturer of the conduit to methods laid down by the manufacturer. All such joints shall be watertight. The same conditions apply to joints between conduit, fittings and accessories. Dipping of conduit or fittings into solvent adhesives is forbidden. Before joints are made, conduit ends shall be cut square and all burrs and sharp edges shall be removed. Care should be taken to remove all damp, grease, cement dust and oil from all faces of conduit and accessories prior to jointing. Conduits shall be entered fully into box spouts and butted into couplers, other than expansion couplers, for jointing purposes. Screwed PVC conduit shall not be used unless specifically called for or when the PVC conduit is to be connected to metal equipment, conduit and fittings with screwed entries. Where such entries are not available, non-screwed male bushes and couplers shall be used. Expansion couplers shall be used where straight runs of conduit exceed 8m. Within such couplers, a space of not less than 10mm shall be allowed between the ends of the conduit. The solvent adhesive used in such joints shall allow for movement caused by expansion without affecting the watertightness of the joint. A similar system shall be employed when conduits cross building expansion joints in any situation and the couplers shall span the joints. All bends shall be made using the correct size spring. Conduit sizes of 25mm and below may be set cold but all larger sizes shall be set hot. A pipe vice shall not be used during this or any other operation. The radius of any conduit bend shall not be less than 4 times the outside diameter of the conduit. Naked flames shall not be used directly to heat conduit for bending purposes and the manufacturer's recommendations shall be followed. Spacer bar saddles shall be of PVC with bases. The fixings shall be such that the conduits may be taken into accessories without sets or bends. All rigid PVC conduit and PVC conduit fittings shall bear the PSB Test Mark or approved equivalent.
UPG07/S47.DOC(23) lkk(181206) DPD
Ugdg Spec TS 47-24/55 47.4.7 47.4.7.1 Installation Of Conduit General In general, the trunking shall be installed on the ceiling or along the wall just below the ceiling. For very high ceiling, the trunking may be installed lower but in any case, it shall be at least 2.2m high. The Contractor shall be responsible for co-ordinating his work with other trades and for working to any conduit layout in the Drawings that may be issued. Where such Drawings are not issued, the Contractor shall prepare and submit drawings showing all conduit routes to the SO Rep for approval prior to erection. The maximum number of cables drawn into any one conduit shall not exceed those allowed by reference to the relevant regulations and tables in the current CP 5. The size of the conduits shall be decided on this basis unless otherwise stated. The whole of the conduit system in any particular section shall be completed and swabbed through to remove any dirt or loose matter before cables are drawn in. All sub-circuit cables drawn into one conduit shall be connected to the same phase. In the case of three phase circuits, all three phases and the neutral shall be contained in the same conduit. Conduits shall be supported at intervals not greater than 600mm for vertical run exposed to touch and not greater than 1m for others. Where conduit connects to surface-mounted equipment or accessories, it shall be additionally supported within 150mm of either side of the item. Where bends and sets occur, the conduit shall be fixed at a distance of 150mm, either side of such diversion. The inner radius of any conduit bend shall not be less than 2.5 times the external diameter of the conduit. Where the conduit has to be bent it shall be bent without altering its section, using an approved bending machine. No more than 2 numbers of 90 angle bends shall be installed in any run of conduit without a conduit box. Where conduits connect to distribution boards, trunking, switch fuse units, consumer control units, switch boxes, etc they shall be secured to the apparatus by means of flanged couplings. Where conduits cross the expansion joints they shall be installed so as not to resist relative movement between the sections. A suitable arrangement is to use a flexible conduit and adaptors in these positions. 2 The adaptors shall be earth bonded by a PVC insulated copper conductor of not less than 2.5mm . Final connections from the conduit installation to all motors, other apparatus subject to vibration and as specified elsewhere, shall be made using watertight, PVC sheathed, rustproof flexible conduit. 47.4.7.2 Surface-mounted Surface-mounted conduit shall be run truly horizontal, vertical or parallel to the building lines. Conduits shall be fixed by means of spacer bar saddles. Conduits boxes shall be fixed to the structure of the building independently of the conduit. Inspection type elbows, bends or tees shall be installed so that they can remain accessible for purposes such as the withdrawal of existing cables or the installing of new or additional cables. Where metal conduit has been cut or otherwise damaged, including exposed threads and connections, it shall be repaired by application of a zinc rich epoxy to generously overlap the existing sound metal coating. Open ends of metal conduit shall be free from burrs and so bushed as to obviate damage to cables.
UPG07/S47.DOC(24) lkk(181206) DPD
Ugdg Spec TS 47-25/55 47.4.7 47.4.7.3 Installation Of Conduit (Cont'd) Concealed For conduit concealed in suspended type ceilings, the weight of the conduit shall under no circumstances be carried by the suspended ceiling. Suitable fixings and hangers shall be installed direct to the structure by the Contractor only after they have been approved by the SO Rep. Concealed conduit work in concrete or composition slabs, walls, cast in-situ and in plaster shall be offered to the SO Rep for inspection prior to concealment. The Contractor shall give the SO Rep two days notice that a reasonable section of concealed conduit work will be ready for inspection. Where conduits are laid in concrete or composition slabs, cast in in-situ slabs, walls, beams, etc the Contractor shall arrange for a competent person to be in attendance whilst the pouring operation is being carried out, in order to avoid any damage which may be caused to the conduits. Where it is necessary to hack chases for conduit runs, the Contractor shall mark out the proposed runs at site and shall seek the approval of the SO Rep before commencing any work. Immediately on completion of erection of each conduit run, all exposed terminations shall be plugged effectively against the ingress of water and dirt. Conduit buried in concrete shall have a minimum of 25mm depth of cover. Conduit buried in plaster shall have a 5mm minimum depth of cover. Dimensions other than the above shall be subject to prior approval of the SO Rep. Where concealed electrical wiring is installed in an electrical installation at a depth of less than 50 mm from the surface, metal conduit complying with clause 52.4 shall be used. Where metal conduit is buried in the ground, it shall have two coats of bituminous paint applied over its complete length and to a distance of 200mm beyond the point where it emerges from the ground. All concealed conduit work shall be installed on the "loop-in" system. Inspection elbows or bends and tees shall not be allowed. Where it is impracticable to set conduit, normal factory made bends may be used but only with the approval of the SO Rep. Draw-in boxes shall be provided to give access to all conduits for the drawing in or out of any cable; these shall be of ample size to enable the cables to be neatly diverted from one conduit to another without undue cramping. No joints shall be allowed in draw-in boxes under any circumstances. Ceiling point boxes or draw-in boxes on a concealed installation shall finish flush with the underside of the ceilings. All conduit boxes not carrying lighting or other fittings shall be installed with a suitable cover fixed with brass or stainless steel roundhead screws. Where any surface mounting control gear or other equipment is to be installed in conjunction with concealed conduit work, the conduit shall be terminated at a flush mounted adaptable box. The back of the equipment shall be drilled and bushed for back entry and the equipment mounted so as to conceal the adaptable box. A short length (maximum 200 mm length) of PVC pliable conduit may be used to connect the misaligned moulded boxes to the PVC rigid conduits
47.5 47.5.1
ELECTRICAL ACCESSORIES AND FIXTURES Switches Switches shall be of 6-Ampere rating designed specifically for use on a.c. inductive circuits and complying with SS 227. Unless otherwise indicated in the Drawings, switches shall be single-pole, one-way, rocker operated and of white square plate pattern. Where two or more switches are to be fixed adjacent to each other, multigang switches on a single cover plate shall be used. All switches shall be registered with Spring Singapore and bear the Safety Mark and PSB Mark or other approved equivalent
UPG07/S47.DOC(25) lkk(181206) DPD
Ugdg Spec TS 47-26/55 47.5.2 Switch Socket-Outlets Each power point shall be a switch socket-outlet of similar construction to match the switches. The switches socket-outlet shall comprise a combined switch and 3-pin shuttered type outlet rated at 13 Amperes and complying with SS 145. All switched socket-outlets shall be registered with Spring Singapore and bear the Safety Mark and PSB Test Mark or other approved equivalent 47.5.3 Water Heater Point For water heater point, a double pole switch and a connection unit shall be provided. Both the switch and connection shall be rated at 20 amperes. The switch shall comply with SS 227 and complete with a neon light indicator and a durable mark Water Heater. The connection unit shall have a three terminal connection block with white moulded cover plate and cable clamp included. The connection unit shall be typed tested to to SS 241. All water heater switches shall be registered with Spring Singapore and bear the Safety Mark and PSB Test Mark or other approved equivalent. 47.5.4 Bell Push Point Bell push shall be of a similar construction to match the lighting switch, with push to make mechanism. The bell push shall be rated at 5 amp and complying with SS 227. The bell point shall be terminated on a connection block and marked Bell Point with approved sticker or tag. 47.5.5 Moulded Box Moulded boxes used for casting in concrete for flush mounting of switches, switched socket outlets and other accessories shall comply with the requirements of IEC 60670 and the dimensions as specified in BS 4662. The maximum temperature during the building process is assumed to be less than 90 deg. C. Surface and flush mounting moulded boxes not used for casting in concrete shall comply with BS 4662.. The colour appearances and the profile of the moulded boxes shall match the switches, switched socket outlets and other accessories. 47.5.6 Batten Lampholders Batten lampholders can be white moulded insulated bayonet-type complete with a skirt, two terminals and a loop-in earth terminal. It shall be rated at 2 Amperes and shall have a temperature rating of at least T1 complying with SS 125. They can also be Edison screw lampholders complying with SS 471. 47.5.7 Consumer Control Unit Where Consumer Control Units are included in the Works, the enclosure shall be surface-mounted and complete with back plate, mounting rail, multi-terminal earth bar, busbar, busbar insulating shield, neutral terminal block, circuit identification label, miniature circuit breakers and earth leakage circuit breaker. The consumer control unit shall comply with BS EN60439-3. Unless otherwise stated in the Drawings, a main switch shall be provided and placed before RCCB in the consumer unit. The main switch shall be a double-pole M6 Type B miniature circuit breaker with contact position indicator to indicate the positions of the moving contacts. The main switch shall have in the opening position a minimum isolating distance of 3mm between the contacts. The miniature circuit breakers shall be of the thermal magnetic type with a toggle type tripping switch, and shall comply with the requirements of IEC898. The MCBs shall be rated for 240V, 50 Hz operation. They shall possess a Type B tripping characteristic and shall have an interrupting capacity of at least 6 KA (M6).
UPG07/S47.DOC(26) lkk(181206) DPD
Ugdg Spec TS 47-27/55 47.5.7 Consumer Control Unit (Contd) The RCCB shall be double-pole and of the high sensitivity direct-acting current-operated type with a tripping time not exceeding 0.1 second. All RCCB shall comply with SS 97. All RCCB shall be registered with Spring Singapore and bear the Safety Mark and PSB Mark or other approved equivalent In addition, there must be a space provision ( 2 spare slots) in the main consumer control unit of the dwelling unit for the installation of surge arrestor. 47.5.8 Polarised Plug & Socket Connector Only one cable shall be terminated at each screw terminal of the polarized plug & socket connector. Where looping is done at the socket, each pole of the socket shall have two screw terminals so that only one cable is terminated at each screw terminal. The polarised plug & socket connector shall comply with the relevant clauses of IEC 60998-1 and IEC 60998-2-1.
47.5.9
Approval of Items Switches, switched socket-outlets, water heater switches and connection units and bell push shall be of the same manufacturer and product range. Consumer control units shall bear the PSB Test Mark or other approved equivalent. Surface mounting moulded boxes, flush mounting moulded boxes, polarised plug, socket connectors, batten lamp holders, water heater switches and connection units and bell push shall pass type tests.
47.6 47.6.1
LUMINAIRES General The quantity and types of fitting shall be ascertained from the Drawings. All control gears shall be provided together with the fittings by the lighting supplier or using approved control gears specified by the supplier where such control gears are not provided together with the fitting.
47.6.2
Installation All lighting fittings shall be securely hung or mounted as follows : (a) Surface and wall mounted fittings shall be secured with metal threaded studs complete with two lock nuts and washers using approved metal studs cartridge hammer. The threaded metal stud shall penetrate into the surface to a depth of at least 32mm. Alternatively, the light fittings may be installed in accordance with the installation method recommended by the lighting fitting manufacturer and using the mounting accessories supplied by the manufacturer For pendant fittings, the downrods shall be securely fixed to the ceiling with conduit terminating boxes. Recessed fitting shall be supported independently. The false ceiling grid system shall not be used to support light fittings. There shall be no noticeable ceiling deflection when the fittings are installed in place. Steel wires tied to metal studs that are penetrated into the concrete surface at a depth of at least 32mm shall be used to support the fittings.
(b)
(c)
The above represents the minimum requirements and Contractor shall take further precautions if the fittings to be mounted are exceptionally heavy such as high bay fittings. The Contractor shall ensure that all fittings are securely mounted.
UPG07/S47.DOC(27) lkk(181206) DPD
Ugdg Spec TS 47-28/55 47.6.2 Installation (Cont'd) All light fittings shall be wired from a light point unless otherwise specified. A 3 core cable of 1.5 sq mm shall be used for the interconnection from the lighting point to the fitting. This connecting cable shall be suitably rated for operation at the surrounding steady state temperature in the light fitting. The Contractor shall ensure all metal parts of components of the fittings be effectively earthed. 47.6.3 Lighting Luminaires All luminaires shall be pre-wired and complete with lamps, control gears, lampholders, capacitors and diffusers. The exact type and rating of the luminaires shall be as specified in the Drawings. All luminaires shall be power factor corrected up to 0.85 lagging or higher. Fluorescent luminaires shall comply with the following Singapore Standards where applicable : SS 263 Part 3 : SS 490 Part 2 and SS 491 : Particular requirements for general purpose luminaires. Ballast for fluorescent lamps in AC 50 Hz supplies.
Tubular fluorescent fittings shall be type tested to SS263 Part 3. Ballasts for tubular fluorescent lamps shall be low loss type with maximum of 7 watts loss at its rated voltage and wattage. All ballasts shall pass type tests. Where lighting luminaires are specified with two or more lamps, each of the lamps shall be provided with its own control gears unless indicated otherwise in the Drawings. All ballasts for tubular fluorescent lamps shall be registered with Spring Singapore and bear the Safety Mark and PSB Test Mark or other approved equivalent 47.6.4.1 T5 Fluorescent Lamps (a) All tubular fluorescent lamps shall comply with IEC 60081:Double-capped fluorescent lamps Performance specifications. The fluorescent lamp shall be of the Bi-Pin lamp cap with G5 base and the following information shall be distinctly and durably marked on the lamp : (i) Trademark or mark of origin; (ii) Nominal Wattage/Voltage; (iii) Colour Definition; and (iv) Colour Rendering Index. he operational life span of the fluorescent lamps shall be of minimum 16000 hours at a mortality rate of 50% or better. The guaranteed life span shall be at least 10000 hours. The fluorescent lamp shall have the following characteristics : Lamp Wattage (W) 14 28 Length Diameter (mm) (mm) Approx. 550 16 Approx. 1150 16 Output (Lumen) 1200 ( @ 25 C ) 2600 ( @ 25 C ) Colour Rendering (Index) 80 or better 80 or better
(b)
(c)
(d)
The output value quoted shall be the minimum value after 100 burning hours. The lumen maintenance of the lamp shall be not less than 92% of the rated lumen maintenance value at any time in its life. (e) The correlated colour temperature of the fluorescent lamp shall be 4000K unless indicated otherwise in the Drawings. The metallic part of the Bi-Pin lamp cap shall be either non-corroding or suitably protected against corrosion. The temperature rating of the lampholder shall be T140 as specified in IEC 60400. The current and voltage rating of the lampholder shall be 2A/500V as specified in IEC 60400.
(f)
(g) (h)
UPG07/S47.DOC(28) lkk(181206) DPD
Ugdg Spec TS 47-29/55 47.6.4.2 T8 Fluorescent Lamps (a) All tubular fluorescent lamps shall comply with IEC 60081:Double-capped fluorescent lamps Performance specifications. The fluorescent lamp shall be of the Bi-Pin lamp cap with G13 base and the following information shall be distinctly and durably marked on the lamp : (i) Trademark or mark of origin; (ii) Nominal Wattage; (iii) Colour Definition; and (iv) Colour Rendering Index. The operational life span of the fluorescent lamps shall be of minimum 8000 hours at a mortality rate of 50% or better. The guaranteed life span shall be at least 5000 hours. The fluorescent lamp shall have the following characteristics : Lamp Wattage Length Diameter Output (W) (mm) (mm) (Lumen) 18 Approx. 600 26 1300 or better 36 1200 26 3200 or better
(b)
(c)
(d)
Colour Rendering Index 80 or better 80 or better
The output value quoted shall be the minimum value after 100 burning hours. The lumen maintenance of the lamp shall be not less than 92% of the rated lumen maintenance value at any time in its life. (e) The correlated colour temperature of the fluorescent lamp shall be 4000K unless indicated otherwise in the Drawings. The metallic part of the Bi-Pin lamp cap shall be either non-corroding or suitably protected against corrosion. The temperature rating of the lampholder shall be either T130 or T140 as specified in IEC 60400. The current and voltage rating of the lampholder shall be 2A/500V as specified in IEC 60400.
(f)
(g) (h)
47.6.5
Compact Fluorescent Lamps (a) All compact fluorescent lamps shall comply with IEC 901 : Single-capped fluorescent lamps Performance Specifications. The compact PL-S or PL-C fluorescent lamp shall be single ended and shall have a 2 pin base complete with a built-in starter and a radio frequency interference suppression capacitor. The following information shall be distinctly and durably marked on the lamp : (i) (ii) (iii) (iv) (c) Trademark or mark of origin; Nominal Wattage/Voltage; Colour Definition; and Colour Rendering Index.
(b)
The operational life span of the compact fluorescent lamps shall be of minimum 8000 hours at a mortality rate of 50% or better. The guaranteed life span shall be at least 5000 hours. The compact fluorescent lamp shall have the following characteristics : Wattage/Type (W) 9W PL-S 11W PL-S 13W PL-C 18W PL-C 26W PL-C Overall Length (mm) 167 237 140 154 173 Base G23 G23 G24d-1 G24d-2 G24d-3 Output (Lumen) 600 900 900 1200 1800 Colour Rendering Index 80 or better 80 or better 80 or better 80 or better 80 or better
(d)
The output quoted shall be the minimum value after 100 burning hours. The output after 2000 burning hours shall not fall below 10% of the value at 100 burning hours.
UPG07/S47.DOC(29) lkk(181206) DPD
Ugdg Spec TS 47-30/55 47.6.5 Compact Fluorescent Lamps (Contd) (e) The correlated colour temperature of the compact fluorescent lamp shall be 3000 K unless indicated otherwise in the Drawings.
47.6.6
Starters For Fluorescent Lamps All starters shall be of the glow-switch type and shall comply with the safety and performance requirements of IEC 155. The starters shall be suitable for use with fluorescent lamp of wattage from 4 to 65W at 220-240V. The starter shall have the following distinctly and durably marked on the canister : (i) Trademark or mark of origin; and (ii) Nominal Wattage/Voltage.
47.6.7 47.6.7.1
Electronic Ballast For Fluorescent Lamps Electronic Ballast For T5 Fluorescent Lamp 1 The high frequency electronic control gear shall be designed to reliably start and operate standard commercially available T5 krypton tubular fluorescent lamp in the ambient conditions and within the limit specified by the lamp manufacturer. The electronic ballast must be single piece fully electronic, low weight, low profile and hum-free. Ferro-magnetic filters are not allowed. Separate (non-integral with ballast housing) filters are not allowed. The electronic ballast shall be designed to operate at 50Hz nominal frequency and at nominal voltages indicated on the label, 230 volt single phase a.c. 6% The electronic ballast shall be designed with high quality components consisting low pass filter to limit harmonic distortions and radio interference, rectifier, HF generator in the range of 25khz to 60khz and an output lamp stabilization section. The electronic ballast shall be designed to comply with the following standards and requirements : a) Safety requirement : IEC 61347-2-3:2000, SS 490 Part 2:3:2002 b) Performance requirement : IEC 60929, EN 60929. c) Harmonics requirement : IEC 61000-3-2 d) Radio freq. interference : CISPRI 15, EN 55015 All electronic ballasts shall have in-line fuse protection. The ballast is a Controlled Good as defined by the Singapore Consumer Protection (Safety Requirements) Registration Scheme or CPS in short, it must be registered with SPRING Singapore and bear the SAFETY Mark. It shall also bear the PSB Test Mark or be under similar product quality assurance scheme by other SAC-SINGLAS accredited laboratories The electronic ballast shall be designed with integrated safety shutdown upon lamp failure, component failure and/or no load operation. The circuit must completely shutdown the ballast within 5 seconds. Power oscillation or constant output voltages detected under these conditions are not acceptable. Two lamp fittings shall be furnished with single electronic ballast suitable for two lamps operation. It shall automatically switch on after lamp replacement with supply connected.
6 7
10 Regulated light output. The electronic ballast shall have constant output power such that light output shall not vary by more than 5% over the nominal supply voltage per clause 3. 11 Total Harmonic Distortion must not exceed 15%. Control gear must comply with and be substantially better than IEC 61000-3-2 requirements. 12 Power factor to be regulated to achieve greater than 0.95. 13 Ballast lumen factor (BLF) must be 0.95 and above.
UPG07/S47.DOC(30) lkk(181206) DPD
Ugdg Spec TS 47-31/55 47.6.7.1 Electronic Ballast For T5 Fluorescent Lamp (Contd) 14 The electronic control gear shall comply fully with IEC 61347-2-3:2000 and IEC 60929 for line voltage transient protection. 15 The electronic control gear shall incorporate an overvoltage detection circuit to operate lamps during short duration of over-voltage up to 280V without negative effect. 16 The electronic ballast shall have preheated starting feature to start the lamp within two seconds. 17 The design life of the electronic ballast shall be 50,000 hrs at measuring point temperature (Tc) of 70C on the ballast with failure rate of not more than 0.2% per 1000 hours of operation. 18 The ballast must comply to CELMAs Guide of Class A2 and better as per Energy Efficiency Index. 19 The electronic ballast loss shall have the following characteristics: Fluorescent Lamp (wattage) A single electronic ballast with 1 number of 14 W lamp A single electronic ballast with 2 numbers of 14 W lamps A single electronic ballast with 1 number of 28 W lamp A single electronic ballast with 2 numbers of 28 W lamps 47.6.7.2 Electronic Ballast For T8 Fluorescent Lamp 1 The high frequency electronic control gear shall be designed to reliably start and operate standard commercially available T8 krypton tubular fluorescent lamp in the ambient conditions and within the limit specified by the lamp manufacturer. The electronic ballast must be single piece fully electronic, low weight, low profile and hum-free. Ferro-magnetic filters are not allowed. Separate (non-integral with ballast housing) filters are not allowed. The electronic ballast shall be designed to operate at 50Hz nominal frequency and at nominal voltages indicated on the label, 230 volt single phase a.c. 6% The electronic ballast shall be designed with high quality components consisting low pass filter to limit harmonic distortions and radio interference, rectifier, HF generator in the range of 25khz to 60khz and an output lamp stabilization section. The electronic ballast shall be designed to comply with the following standards and requirements : a) Safety requirement b) Performance requirement c) Harmonics requirement d) Radio freq. interference 5 7 : IEC 61347-2-3:2000, SS 490 Part 2:3:2002 : IEC 60929, EN 60929. : IEC 61000-3-2 : CISPRI 15, EN 55015 Electronic Ballast Loss (max) 3.5 W 7W 6W 12 W Total Circuit Power (max) 14 + 3.5 = 17.5 W 2x14 + 7 = 35 W 28 + 6= 34W 2x28 + 12 = 68 W
All electronic ballasts shall have in-line fuse protection. The ballast is a Controlled Good as defined by the Singapore Consumer Protection (Safety Requirements) Registration Scheme or CPS in short, it must be registered with SPRING Singapore and bear the SAFETY Mark. It shall also bear the PSB Test Mark or be under similar product quality assurance scheme by other SAC-SINGLAS accredited laboratories. The electronic ballast shall be designed with integrated safety shutdown upon lamp failure, component failure and/or no load operation. The circuit must completely shutdown the ballast within 5 seconds. Power oscillation or constant output voltages detected under these conditions are not acceptable.
UPG07/S47.DOC(31) lkk(181206) DPD
Ugdg Spec TS 47-32/55 47.6.7.2 Electronic Ballast For T8 Fluorescent Lamp (Contd) 9 Two lamp fittings shall be furnished with single electronic ballast suitable for two lamps operation. It shall automatically switch on after lamp replacement with supply connected.
10 Regulated light output. The electronic ballast shall have constant output power such that light output shall not vary by more than 5% over the nominal supply voltage per clause 3. 11 Total Harmonic Distortion must not exceed 10%. Control gear must comply with and be substantially better than IEC 61000-3-2 requirements. 12 Power factor to be regulated to achieve greater than 0.95 13 Ballast lumen factor (BLF) must be 0.95 and above. 14 The electronic control gear shall comply fully with IEC 61347-2-3:2000 and IEC 60929 for line voltage transient protection. 15 The electronic control gear shall incorporate an overvoltage detection circuit to operate lamps during short duration of over-voltage up to 280V without negative effect. 16 The electronic ballast shall have preheated starting feature to start the lamp within two seconds. 17 The design life of the electronic ballast shall be 50,000 hrs at measuring point temperature (Tc) of 70C on the ballast with failure rate of not more than 0.2% per 1000 hours of operation. 18 The ballast must comply to CELMAs Guide of Class A2 and better as per Energy Efficiency Index. 19 The electronic ballast loss shall have the following characteristics: Fluorescent Lamp (wattage) A single electronic ballast with 1 number of 18 W lamp A single electronic ballast with 2 numbers of 18 W lamps A single electronic ballast with 1 number of 36 W lamp A single electronic ballast with 2 numbers of 36 W lamps Electronic Ballast Loss (max) 3W 6W 4W 8W Total Circuit Power (max) 16 + 3 = 19 W 2x16 + 6 = 38 W 32 + 4 = 36W 2x32 + 8 = 72W
47.6.8 47.6.8.1
Emergency Evacuation Lighting General All emergency lighting, emergency exit lighting and emergency lighting conversion kits shall comply with SS CP 19 and approved by FSSD. All luminares for exit lighting and signs shall be approved by the FSSD under the PSB Product Listing Scheme Class 1. The Contractor shall ensure that the installation complies with the requirements of SS CP19 and the Code of Practice for Fire Precautions in Building. On completion of the Works, the Contractor shall submit certifications to FSSD or SO Rep, where required, in accordance with FSSD requirements.
47.6.8.2
Exit Sign And Exit Lighting All exit lighting and exit signs shall be of white LED type unless shown otherwise in the Drawings, complete with 2 hour nickel cadmium batteries, IP 30 or other approved and shall comply with the requirements of SS CP 19. All luminaires for the exit lighting and exit sign shall be approved by the FSSD under the PSB Product Listing Scheme Class 1. The duration of the battery operation shall be for the continuous rated period of 2 hours
UPG07/S47.DOC(32) lkk(181206) DPD
Ugdg Spec TS 47-33/55 47.6.8.3 Emergency Lighting And Conversion Kit All emergency lighting including lighting conversion kits shall comply with the requirements of SS CP 19. They shall be approved by the FSSD under the PSB Product Listing Scheme Class 1. The duration of the battery operation shall be for the continuous rated period of 2 hours. Emergency lighting conversion kits shall be provided for some of the lighting luminaires as shown in the Drawings. The luminaire shall be pre-wired in such a manner that, under healthy supply condition, the luminaire shall operate normally, but under supply interruption, the fluorescent/PL or PLC tubes are connected to the emergency lighting conversion kit. Wiring of the conversion kit shall be arranged so as to allow easy removal of the kit, where required, without affecting the normal operation of the luminaire. Terminal blocks shall be provided for this purpose. The emergency lighting conversion kit shall incorporate a charging and changeover device and shall be powered by sealed nickel cadmium batteries. The charging device shall be designed to charge the batteries and keep it in a charged state from a 230 volts 50 Hz supply. The conversion kit shall be located away from the ballasts. A separate unswitched live wire which shall be of the same phase as the normal supply, shall be run to provide the line condition monitoring. Such separate unswitched live wire shall be clearly marked as live and unswitched and with a danger sign. It shall be terminated at the terminal block before the connection to the conversion kit.
47.6.9
AIRCRAFT OBSTRUCTION LIGHT (AOL) General The AOL system shall comply with the requirement of "Visual Aids For Denoting Obstacles" specified in the standard of International Civil Aviation Organization (ICAO) and its amendments, and the regulations issued by the Civil Aviation Authority of Singapore (CAAS) and Ministry Of Defence. The works shall include the supply, installation, testing and commissioning of the AOL system as shown in the Drawings. Should the requirements of the Drawings or Specifications conflict with codes, regulations or standards, the more stringent of the requirements shall govern the works. Where any apparatus/equipment forming part of the installation is situated outdoor or subjected to damp condition, such apparatus/equipment shall be of weatherproof design. AOL System The AOL system consists of a main AOL, a standby AOL, control circuit panel and remote monitoring panel. The AOL system shall be either of the following 2 types: (a) low intensity AOL -- where both the main and standby AOL shall be LED low intensity type operate on a DC power supply. medium/high intensity AOL -- where the main AOL (medium/high intensity) operates on a AC power supply of 230 volts with standby AOL of LED low intensity type operates on a DC power supply.
(b)
The DC power supply shall be provided by sealed type maintenance free lead acid batteries, maintained in an adequately charged condition by a AC/DC rectifier/charger.
UPG07/S47.DOC(33) lkk(181206) DPD
Ugdg Spec TS 47-34/55 47.6.9 AIRCRAFT OBSTRUCTION LIGHT (AOL) (CONT'D) Control Circuit Panel The control circuit panel shall be located at roof level. It shall be weatherproof type and mounted on a wall sheltered from the rain where possible. The control circuit panel shall have the following functions: (a) Time Of Operation The AOL system shall be switched on by means of photocell connected to the Light Sensitive Switch. It shall be switched on during hours of low visibility (eg. haze, rain and night). In the event the photocell is faulty the system shall automatically by pass the photocell. (b) Change Over Relay When the AOL system is switched on the main AOL shall be triggered. In the event the main AOL is faulty the change over relay mechanism shall automatically switched on the standby AOL. (c) Daily Test Relay After the event the main AOL is switched off, the daily test relay mechanism shall automatically switched on the standby AOL for a few seconds to test the functionality of the standby AOL.
(d)
Fault Relay The fault relay mechanism shall send signals to activate the indicating lamps on the remote monitoring panel in the event the following occurs: (i) (ii) (iii) main AOL faulty standby AOL faulty AC/DC rectifier/charger faulty
The reset button shall be fixed at the control circuit panel. The reset button shall be unable to reset the fault relay mechanism until the AC/DC rectifier/charger is rectified or replaced. (e) Mains Power Failure In the event there is a mains power failure the following shall occur: (i) (ii) for a low intensity AOL, the system shall switch over to DC supply to operate the main AOL. for medium/high intensity AOL, the system shall automatically switch over to the DC supply and operate the standby LED AOL.
The system shall automatically switch back to the mains power supply once the mains power supply is restored. The standby batteries should be designed to be able to last for at least 6 hours.
Remote Monitoring Panel

The remote monitoring panel shall be located in the switchroom. The remote monitoring panel shall contain the following: (i) (ii) (iii) 1 No. of push button for lamp test (Main and Standby AOL); 3 No. of indicating lamps for main AOL, standby AOL & fault occurence; 1 set of contacts for remote warning lamp.
UPG07/S47.DOC(34) lkk(181206) DPD
Ugdg Spec TS 47-35/55 47.6.9 AIRCRAFT OBSTRUCTION LIGHT (AOL) (CONT'D) Indicating Lamp Indicating lamp installed on the panels shall be of light emitting diode (LED) type. Remote Warning Lamp & Warning Notice An amber warning lamp to indicate occurrence of fault shall be extended from the remote monitoring panel to outside of the switchroom. The warning lamp shall be mounted on a wall near the ceiling and clearly visible from the void deck. A warning notice shall be mounted directly under the warning lamp. Labels All panels, push buttons and lamp indicators shall be labelled clearly with an identification tag made of durable material. 47.6.10 Existing Aviation Obstruction Light Where the as-built building height after a topographical survey does not exceed the height limit imposed by CAAS & DSTA, the SO Rep shall arrange with the Contractor to remove, relocate or shut down the AOL system. The prerogative to remove, relocate or shut down the AOL system shall rest on the SO Rep. He shall inform CAAS, DSTA and HDB of his decision. If relocation of the AOL system is required, the Contractor is to ensure that the AOL system including the circuit control panel, all accessories and wirings are in good condition before commencing the works. He shall take note that any faults or damages to the existing AOL caused by him during relocation works are to be rectified within the scope of the contract. The Contractor shall be deemed to have allowed for all costs and expenses in the Contract Sum for complying with the requirements of this clause.
47.7 47.7.1
EARTHING SYSTEM Main Earth Bar The Contractor shall provide and fix to the wall of the switch room a tinned copper earth bar of crosssectional dimensions 31.5mm by 6.3mm mounted on porcelain insulators. The main earth bar shall be at least 240mm long with six holes complete with M6 bolts and nuts. Alternatively, the main earth bar can be an extension of the earth bar of the switchboard such that it is exposed and located on the external of the switchboard. From the main earth bar, two lengths of 25mm by 3mm copper tape shall be run to two separate earth electrodes outside the switchrooms. The earth electrodes shall be interconnected by copper tape to form 2 a loop. A PVC insulated 70mm green earth cable shall connect the main earth bar to the earth bar within the main switchboard.
47.7.2
Circuit Protective Conductor A circuit protective conductor shall be provided for each electrical circuit. It shall be installed along the route of its respective circuit conductors. Joints in circuit protective conductors, other than at terminal points shall not be permitted. The cross-sectional area of all circuit protective conductors, bonding and earthing conductors shall comply with the requirements of the CP5. All circuit protective shall be copper. Conductors of cross-sectional area up to 6 mm shall be insulated to 2 450/750V with green or green/yellow PVC. Conductors greater than 6 mm in cross-section may be bare, stranded and tinned.
2
UPG07/S47.DOC(35) lkk(181206) DPD
Ugdg Spec TS 47-36/55 47.7.2 Circuit Protective Conductor (Cont'd) Connections between earth bars, equipment frames etc and stranded copper cables shall be made with the appropriate lug, bolt, washers, nut and lock nut. The earth terminal of all socket outlets shall be connected to the circuit protective conductor of the final circuit. Where this circuit takes the form of a ring, then the circuit protective conductor shall also be run in the form of a ring. An earthing point shall be provided at each lighting point and connected to the circuit protective conductor. 47.7.3 Bonding All exposed conductive parts of the electrical installation shall be effectively bonded to the circuit protective conductors. Similarly, other exposed conductive parts which under fault conditions, could become live or constitutes an alternative earth fault return path shall be bonded to the circuit protective conductors. For direct water supply system to the block, all metallic water service pipes entering the building shall be bonded to the main earth bar. For indirect water supply system, all downfeed water pipes at the topmost floor and one intermediate floor shall be bonded to the earth terminal of the tap-off unit. The bonding of water service pipe for individual dwelling units and premises shall comply with Clause 47.9 "ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION OF DWELLING UNITS AND PREMISES" of the Specifications. All bonding connections to water pipes shall be made with purpose made clamps complying with SS 322. 47.7.4 Earth Electrode The Contractor shall install a minimum of 2 earth electrodes for earthing system of each supply incomer. Each earth electrode shall comprise two sections of nominal 16mm diameter copper-weld, steel rods suitably coupled to form a continuous 3.6m length. Earth electrodes shall be driven into the ground using a suitable hammer. The two electrodes shall be connected to the main earth bar and interconnected by 25mm by 3mm copper tape, forming a loop. Copper tape shall be connected to the electrode with purpose made clamp complying with SS 322. Parallel connected earth electrodes shall be spaced at a horizontal distance not less than the buried length. The resistance to earth of the electrode system shall not exceed 1 ohm. If the resistance exceeds this value, the Contractor shall drive in, at his own costs and expenses, extra electrodes complete with interconnecting conductors, clamps, inspection pits, to reduce and achieve the value of earthing resistance. 47.7.5 Earth Rods Each sectional rod shall have a copper-weld, steel rod with a nominal size of 16mm x 1800mm. The copper shall be molecularly bonded into the steel core and shall have a thickness of not less than 0.25mm at any point. The proportion of copper maintained on those parts of a sectional rod intended for permanent connecting linkage with other sectional rods shall be such that no bare steel shall be visible with a 4 x magnifying aid. The rod shall pass a type test conducted by SAC-SINGLAS accredited laboratories in accordance with the requirements of the American UL 467 Standard. All earth rods shall be listed under PSB Product Listing Scheme Class 2 or approved equivalent. 47.7.6 Coupling Rod section couplings shall be of bronze counterbored to completely enclose threads, protecting them from damage and corrosion and exhibiting mechanical strength and electrical continuity between sections.
UPG07/S47.DOC(36) lkk(181206) DPD
Ugdg Spec TS 47-37/55 47.7.7 Earth Electrode Inspection Pits The top of each earth electrode shall be housed in a purpose made hot dipped galvanised lid inspection pit to facilitate inspection. The dimensions of the cover shall be 250mm by 250mm. It shall have a 8mm diameter opening for lifting up. The pit shall withstand a force of 50 kN and the permanent deflection shall not be more than 0.5 mm. For each inspection pit, an identification tag made of durable plastic or metal shall be fixed onto the top inside. The tag shall provide information of the block number, street name, types of earthing (whether main electrical earthing or lightning earthing and etc), value of earth, number of earthing points (e.g. 1 of 4) and the date of testing. All wordings shall by engraved and shall be durable. Where pits are located on the building apron, it shall be sunk flushed with the finish level. Further, all its positions are to be chosen such that they are aligned and co-ordinated with other services' inspection pits, apron line, apron joints, apron drains, building lines or any other immediate features. Earth electrode inspection pits shall not be located within footpaths, linkways, shelters and pavilions. The Contractor shall submit a sample of the galvanised pit assembly to SO Rep for approval before commencing installation. The pit shall be installed such that the bottom is not concreted so that any accumulated water can seep through. After installation and testing, all inspection pits shall be filled up with sand or other approved aggregates to the satisfaction of the SO Rep. The earth inspection pit shall be listed under PSB Product Listing Scheme Class 2 or approved equivalent.
47.8 47.8.1
PUBLIC LIGHTING General This section covers the installation of public lighting for the corridors, staircases, ground floor play areas and other public areas in blocks of flats. Unless specified otherwise in the Drawings, surface wiring in PVC conduit/PVC trunking shall be used.
47.8.2
Wiring All wiring shall be installed in PVC trunking in all exposed public areas except that it shall be enclosed in PVC conduit when passing vertically through floors and when installed behind false ceilings. A square knock-out box or purpose made transformation piece shall be provided at such PVC conduit and PVC trunking interface. For the lighting point behind false ceiling, the polarised plug and socket connector shall be installed in a mounting box and the 3 core termination cable from the connector to the light fitting shall be installed in flexible PVC conduits, properly secured to the mounting box and light fitting at its respective ends. All wiring shall be 1.5 mm PVC insulated unless otherwise indicated in the Drawings. The conductor shall be plain annealed copper, preferably stranded. All wiring shall be carried out on the `loop-in' principle with terminal points at the socket end of the plug and socket connectors. The connectors shall be polarised and rated at 10 Amp. The flexible cables from the luminaires shall be terminated at the plug end. For 3-pin polarised plug and socket connectors, the middle pin shall be the earth pin. The polarised connectors shall be of such construction that the earth connection is first to make and last to break. All plug and socket connectors shall be tested to comply with the relevant clauses of BS 5733. The connectors shall be small enough to fit into the PVC trunking which is installed adjacent to the luminaires.
2
UPG07/S47.DOC(37) lkk(181206) DPD
Ugdg Spec TS 47-38/55 47.8.3 Public Lighting Control All public lighting circuit shall be controlled through a contactor energised by time switch. The time switch shall be powered using AC supply and have programmable input and output conditions per line and have minimum three inputs and three outputs. The output shall have a relay switching capacity of 5A at 240V AC with independent common. The time switchs central processing unit shall be provided with built-in realtime clock and calendar functions. The real time clock shall have an accuracy of +/- 6 minutes maximum per year. The data of real time clock, calendar and counter present value shall be held for a minimum of 48 hours for prolonged power interruptions. The time switch must also be able to store its program and system setting data to prevent loss during power failure. A LCD display with backlight that will be automatically cut-off through adjustable settings shall be provided. Password protection function should also be included to prevent unauthorized modification of time switch programs and settings. The time switch shall support communication via RS232C communication port to devices like computer and personal digital assistant (PDA). It shall allow downloading of program and setting through the RS232C port or infrared port. Windows based (Windows CE for PDA) software programming tools and drivers for the set-up of the communication between the time switch and the host devices shall be provided. The time switch shall have self-diagnostic functions and shall be able to display the message on its LCD and communicate all error message back to host devices via RS232C communication port. The time switch shall operate correctly at temperatures up to 70 C and suitable for use in tropical climate. A by-pass switch shall be incorporated in the public lighting installation for flexibility of control. 47.8.4 Luminaires Public lighting luminaires shall be provided as shown in the Drawings. 47.9 47.9.1 ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION OF DWELLING UNITS AND PREMISES Individual Electricity Metering For all dwelling units provided with the electrical service ducts, the Contractor shall provide a meter board inside the service duct for each unit unless otherwise shown in the Drawings. All meter boards shall be clearly labelled to indicate the corresponding house numbers served by it. Meter boards shall comply with the Clause 47.9.2 "Electrical Meter Boards". For all dwelling units not provided with electrical service ducts, the Contractor shall provide a meter box just outside the unit or at other locations shown in the Drawings. The meter boxes shall be clearly labelled to indicate the corresponding house numbers if meter boxes of two adjacent units are located side by side. The meter boxes shall comply with the Clause 47.9.3 "ELECTRICAL METER BOXES". The labels of the house numbers on the electrical meter boards/boxes where required shall be of 'Formica engraving laminate' or similar material having black characters on white background with minimum 5mm height characters. They shall be secured to the front of the panel by screws or epoxy glue. For other premises, the Contractor shall supply an incoming service MCB for electricity KWh meter protection, rated as shown in the Drawings. All such MCB shall also comply with PowerGrids requirements. The service MCB shall be provided with a suitable protective cover for wall mounting. The protective cover shall have an opening for the toggle switch and provision of knock-outs for the supply and load cables. Sealing of the toggle switch in the OFF position shall be possible. Protective cover, if fabricated from sheet steel, shall have a minimum thickness of 0.8mm. Instructions for the re-setting of the MCB in case of overload or other abnormal conditions shall be provided and fixed adjacent to the MCB switch. Mounting bracket shall be provided for the MCB. The bracket shall have a terminal for earthing. The service MCB shall be clearly labelled to indicate the house numbers served by it.
o
UPG07/S47.DOC(38) lkk(181206) DPD
Ugdg Spec TS 47-39/55 47.9.2 47.9.2.1 Electrical Meter Boards General The construction of the meter board shall comply with requirements of PowerGrid. An isolator shall be provided in the meter board and located adjacent to the Miniature Circuit Breaker (MCB) for the isolation of supply. The isolator and the MCB for the meter protection shall be totally enclosed and compartmentalised with separate covers for the isolator and MCB. The isolator and the MCB shall be individually lockable and provided with locking facilities. Locks need not be provided. Instructions for the resetting of the operating handle of the MCB in the case of overload or other abnormal conditions shall be displayed adjacent to the operating handle as shown in the Drawings. The Contractor shall be deemed to have included all costs and expenses for providing the isolators to all the meter boards in the Contract Sum. The overall dimensions and essential details of the electrical meter boards shall be in accordance with the Drawings. 47.9.2.2 Construction Electrical meter boards shall be fabricated from electro-galvanised or phosphate-dipped sheet steel. The body of the meter board shall be of 1.2mm thickness and the front panel shall be of 1.5mm thickness. It shall be finished with epoxy powder paint giving a total thickness of not less than 45 micron. All coat of paint shall be individually oven baked and dried. The metal box shall pass the salt spray and scratch test as specified in latest SS5. The removable front meter panel shall be mounted on hinges either on the left or right as required according to the site conditions. Mounting holes for the fixing of kWH meter shall be provided as indicated. 47.9.2.3 Miniature Circuit Breaker (MCB) For Meter Protection The miniature circuit breaker shall be of thermal magnetic type with toggle type tripping switch complying with IEC 898 as follows : Voltage Rating Frequency No. of Poles Category of Duty Instantaneous tripping : : : : : 240 V ac 50 Hz 2 M6 minimum Type C (7-10 In)
Such MCB shall be approved by PowerGrid for use as meter protection. The temperature rise of the terminals shall not exceed 35C when carrying the rated current. The live parts or exposed terminals of the MCB in the installed position shall not be accessible in accordance with the standard test finger specified in BS 3042. 47.9.2.4 Terminal Blocks Terminal blocks shall be of the insulated feed-through type of terminal blocks with screw clamp connections in which conductors can be connected without any special preparation. All current carrying parts of the terminal blocks shall be of copper or other materials at least equivalent with regard to its conductivity and resistance to corrosion. All other metallic parts shall be electroplated or otherwise specially treated to prevent corrosion. 47.9.2.5 Sample For Approval A sample of the electrical meter board shall be approved by the SO Rep before they are delivered to the Site for installation.
UPG07/S47.DOC(39) lkk(181206) DPD
Ugdg Spec TS 47-40/55 47.9.3 47.9.3.1 Electrical Meter Boxes General The Contractor shall supply electrical meter box for meter protection to each individual unit of flat and other premise as indicated. The electrical meter boxes shall comply with the following clauses. 47.9.3.2 Design And Dimension The overall dimensions and essential details of the electrical meter boxes shall be according to Drawings. The internal layout may be rearranged to suit the type of electrical accessories used in the box. The electrical meter boxes shall comply with IEC 60439-1. 47.9.3.3 Construction The electrical meter box may be of metallic or non-metallic material or a composite of both. Boxes of steel material shall be fabricated from electro-galvanised sheet steel of thickness not less than 1.2mm. They shall then be finished with epoxy powder paint, giving a total paint thickness of not less than 45 micron. All coats of paint shall be individually oven baked and dried. The metal box shall pass the salt spray and scratch tests as specified in latest SS 5. Non-metallic boxes shall be of glass reinforced polyester or other materials of adequate mechanical strength and resistant to ultra violet or chemical deterioration. The front edges of the box shall have rounded profile with the 4 corners rounded. A clear transparent polycarbonate inspection window of minimum dimension 120mm x 160mm shall be provided to allow reading of kwh meter. The transparent polycarbonate shall be stabilized against ultraviolet rays. A solid teak board of at least 20mm thick shall be provided for mounting of kwh meter. Other alternative mounting methods shall be subject to PowerGrid's approval. The box shall be provided with hinged door and locking facilities. The locking device shall be opened by a special tool or by a master key. The Contractor shall hand over to the Branch Office four numbers of such tool or master key for each contract. The operating handle of the service MCB within the box shall be accessible through a separate opening without the need to open the door of the box. This opening shall be covered with a separate flap. The operating handle shall be provided with locking accessories and padlock complete with two keys. The Contractor shall hand over all the keys to each individual flat's MCB to the Branch Office during the handing over of the block of flats. All sharp edges either inside or outside the box shall be filled smooth such that it will not cause injury to users or to workers. Instructions for the re-setting of the operating handle in case of overload or other abnormal conditions shall be displayed as shown in the Drawings. 47.9.3.4 Miniature Circuit Breaker For Meter Protection The miniature circuit breaker shall be of the thermal magnetic type, with toggle-type tripping switch mounted on DIN-rail, complying with IEC 898 as follows : Voltage Rating Frequency No. of Poles Category of Duty Instantaneous Tripping : : : : : 240V ac 50 Hz 2 M6 Type C (7-10 In)
The ON and OFF position of the MCB shall be indelibly marked and visible in the installed position. The temperature rise of the terminals shall not exceed 35C when carrying the rated current. The live parts or exposed terminals of the MCB in the installed position shall not be accessible to the standard test finger as specified in BS 3042.
UPG07/S47.DOC(40) lkk(181206) DPD
Ugdg Spec TS 47-41/55 47.9.3.5 Terminal Blocks Terminal blocks shall be of the insulated, DIN-rail mounted, feed-through type of terminal blocks with screw clamp connections in which conductors can be connected without any special preparation. They shall comply with the relevant requirements of SS 241, IEC 685-1 and 2, DIN 57611 and DIN 57609. All current carrying parts of the terminal blocks shall be of copper or other materials at least equivalent with regard to its conductivity and resistance to corrosion. All other metallic parts shall be electroplated or otherwise specially treated to prevent corrosion. The terminal blocks for each of the incoming live and neutral mains shall contain integral cross-connection 2 facility to form a minimum of 3 ways connections : 2 ways suitable for 25mm copper cables and one way 2 for 10mm copper cable. The terminal blocks for the earth terminal shall contain similar integral cross-connections to cater for outgoing circuit protective conductors. Marking and suitable colour code for live, neutral and earth shall be provided at the appropriate terminals.
47.9.3.6
Type Testing All electrical meter boxes shall be type tested and passed by SAC-SINGLAS accredited laboratories. Samples of electrical meter box shall also be submitted to PowerGrid for prior approval before they are delivered to site for installation.
47.9.4
Final Sub-circuit Wiring All final sub-circuit wiring shall be PVC insulated cables unless otherwise indicated in the Drawings. The conductors shall be annealed copper, preferably stranded. The insulation of the conductors shall be colour identified throughout in accordance with the CP5 and the requirements of SPSL. Wiring shall be carried out on the "loop-in" principle with terminating points at consumer control units, socket outlets, switches, batten lampholders or ceiling roses. No joints between the terminal points shall be permitted. All wiring shall be run in surface-mounted PVC trunking. The trunking shall run along walls at a height just below the ceiling with branch-offs on the ceilings to lighting points and down the surface of walls to switches and socket outlets. For any wiring stopping short of the end wall, the SO Rep's instructions shall be sought on whether to terminate the PVC trunking or to extend the trunking to the end wall.
47.9.5
Bonding The metallic water service pipe and gas pipe to each unit shall be bonded to the earth terminal at the meter box. The bonding connection to the water service pipe and gas pipe shall be made as near as practicable to the point of entry of the service. and, where possible, keeping a minimum distance of 150mm away from any pipe joints to prevent the pipes from being deformed and thus giving rise to gas or water leakage at the joints. All bonding connections shall be made with purpose made clamps complying with SS 322. All bonding conductors shall be of cross-sectional area not less than the appropriate size given in CP5, subject to a minimum size of 2.5mm2. The associated circuit conductor shall be the largest conductor connected into the input side of the consumer control unit.
UPG07/S47.DOC(41) lkk(181206) DPD
Ugdg Spec TS 47-42/55 47.10 47.10.1 ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION TO PLANT ROOMS General The plant rooms shall include consumer switch rooms, ift motor rooms, pump rooms, dustbin centres, refuse centres, water tank rooms, generator rooms, telephone MDF rooms, telephone equipment rooms, etc. The Contractor shall liaise with the appropriate contractors/PTL/occupiers of the plant rooms to determine the desired positions of the isolator and consumer control unit in the plant rooms. 47.10.2 Mains Cables The mains cables shall be installed in metal trunking or conduit from the switch room to the plant room in accordance with the Drawings. 47.10.3 Electrical Equipment The mains cables for the electrical equipment shall be terminated in metal-clad isolators. 47.10.4 Lighting And Small Power The mains cables for lighting and small power shall be terminated in a metal-clad consumer control unit. The wiring for lighting and small power in the plant rooms shall be installed in steel conduits and all switches and switch socket-outlets shall be of metal-clad type. Lighting points shall be terminated on ceiling roses complying with SS 23. Switches, lighting points, switch socket-outlets and luminaires shall be installed as shown in the Drawings. 47.11 47.11.1 TELEPHONE CABLING Scope Of Work Telephone cabling Works shall be carried out in accordance with the requirements of the latest IDA Code of Practice for Info-communications Facilities (COPIF) 2004Where electrical rewiring is carried out to the horizontal mains of the dwelling units, all the affected existing telephone lines from the telephone distribution points to the block terminals of the dwelling units are to be re-installed with new telephone materials at the same time. The work to be carried out shall include the collection of telephone materials from Singapore Telecom, delivery to site, installation, testing and commissioning of the telephone cablings. The Contractor shall be responsible for the custody of the telephone materials until certification of completion. Any damage or loss of materials shall be replaced by the Contractor.
UPG07/S47.DOC(42) lkk(181206) DPD
Ugdg Spec TS 47-43/55 47.11.1 Scope Of Work (Cont'd) For commercial units, the existing telephone lines from the telephone distribution points to each unit shall also be re-installed with new telephone materials when there is electrical rewiring to the sub-mains, but all the new telephone materials are to be supplied by the Contractor. 47.11.2 General The Contractor shall be supplied with the telephone materials by Singapore Telecom for the rewiring of the horizontal telephone mains as well as for the installation of the telephone wires to the dwelling units. The materials supplied will comprise of block terminals and telephone cables. The Contractor shall provide labour and all other tools and materials necessary for the telephone cabling works. For the horizontal mains, the Contractor shall install the telephone cables inside the "CATV/SCV" or "Telephone" compartment of the multi-compartment trunking and terminate at the block terminals. 47.11.3 Installation Of Telephone Wires For each dwelling unit, telephone cables shall be installed and terminated from the Distribution Point (DP) box to the block terminal. The block terminal (BT) shall be installed outside the unit, placed inside a length of trunking solely for this purpose. The telephone 6-way cable shall be installed from the DP to BT. Numbering sleeves shall be fixed to the cables at the ends terminating at distribution and block terminal. Numbering scheme shall be standardised with telephone wiring for the smaller house number being labelled with a smaller collect pair number. Telephone cables shall be segregated from electrical cables at all crossovers by using trunking to bridge over. Where telephone cables pass through beams/walls, PVC sleeves shall be provided to segregate them from electrical cables. Plastering of wires at beam openings shall not be allowed. 47.11.4 Sample Units Sample for running of telephone cables from the distribution box to the block terminal shall be set up for inspection by Telecom. 47.11.5 Testing And Completion Upon completion of telephone cabling and installation of block terminal, the Contractor shall inform the SO Rep and Telecom for a joint site inspection. All PVC covers for trunking shall be left uncovered to facilitate easy inspection. All Defects reported during the inspection shall be rectified by the Contractor within one week. Telecom will conduct a technical test on the cabling to check for insulation, continuity and correct termination during the inspection. The actual quantity of cables used shall also be measured and verified by Telecom by site measurements. Any shortfall of cables not due to loss, damage or excessive wastage shall be supplied by Telecom. Any balance of cables shall be returned to Telecom. Telephone cabling work shall only be deemed to be completed upon issue of the certified quality acceptance report from Telecom. All existing telephone lines that are no longer in use shall be removed by the Contractor at his own cost after the issue of the certified quality acceptance report from Telecom. 47.11.6 Installation Of Telephone Point For Space Adding Item (SAI) The Contractor shall install one telephone point at the SAI in each unit. The work shall include the supply and installation of the 6-wire telephone cable, telephone socket, block terminal and other materials required to complete the work. The Contractor shall install the telephone wiring from outside the unit's main door to the SAI. One end of the telephone wiring is to be terminated at the telephone socket at the SAI, and the other end is to be terminated at the block terminal to be installed outside the unit's main door. All the materials for the telephone cabling work shall be approved by Telecom. The telephone socket shall match the electrical accessories and of the same construction.
UPG07/S47.DOC(43) lkk(181206) DPD
Ugdg Spec TS 47-44/55 47.12 47.12.1 FIRE ALARM SYSTEM Scope of Work
47.12.1.1 General The work include the supply, installation, testing and commissioning of the electrical fire alarm system installation as shown in the Drawings. The fire alarm system shall comply with SS CP 10, BS EN54: Pt 2&4 and the requirements of local authorities. All fire alarm panels shall be approved by FSSD. All fire alarm accessories shall be type tested. Where any apparatus forming part of the installation is situated outdoor or subjected to damp condition, such apparatus shall be of weatherproof design. The Contractor shall be responsible for the necessary completion, supervision, testing and commissioning of the fire alarm installation under the Contract. The Contractor shall submit all the requisite certificates including testing and commissioning certificates to the SO Rep, URA and BCA. In addition to the requirements as specified in subclause 47.12.1.1 "General", the main alarm panel and sub-alarm panels of an automatic alarm system shall be provided with an alarm verification feature complying with CP 10 and approved by the relevant Authority. 47.12.1.2 Approval of Drawings and Details The Contractor shall submit two sets of the following documents within one month from the date of the Letter of Acceptance to the SO Rep for approval : (a) Layout and construction of main alarm panel and sub-alarm panel including the battery compartment. Technical Specifications and samples (if required) of all Plant and equipment employed in the installation. Other information of the system as specified in the Specifications or required by the SO Rep.
(b)
(c)
Work shall only commence upon approval of the Contractor's proposal by the SO Rep. Notwithstanding the approval given by the SO Rep, the Contractor shall remain liable for providing the panel and other Plant and equipment fitting on the Site that meet the operating requirements under the said Code of Practice and the relevant Authorities.
47.12.2
System of Operations
47.12.2.1 General The fire alarm system shall be a closed circuit continuously monitored installation, comprising essentially of a main alarm panel, triggering devices and alarm bells, fed from a continuously charged DC power supply source. 47.12.2.2 Alarm Operation The operation of one or more trigger devices shall result in an immediate fire alarm given by : (i) (ii) an audible/visual alarm from all the alarm bells/strobe lights situated in the entire building; a visible indication for each zone in which a trigger device operates.
Where a number of alarm signals are received in quick succession, or simultaneously, the plant and equipment shall be designed so that a general audible alarm continues or resounds as each visible indication commences. The alarm state shall be maintained by the main alarm panel without a continued signal from the trigger device so that even destruction of a connection after the trigger device operates shall not discontinue the sounding of the alarm.
UPG07/S47.DOC(44) lkk(181206) DPD
Ugdg Spec TS 47-45/55 47.12.2 System of Operations (Cont'd)
47.12.2.3 Alarm Silencing Switch The audible and visual alarms shall continue until silenced by the manual operation of a silencing switch; they shall not be automatically silenced. The design of the silencing switch shall be such that the audible alarm can only be silenced after 3 minutes of sounding. The principle of design shall be such that no other control is able to override the silencing switch during the 3 minutes of sounding. The operation of a silencing switch while an alarm condition exists shall not cancel the visual indication of the fire alarm nor shall the operation of the silencing switch prevent the proper receipt of alarms from any zone(s) not yet providing an alarm signal. Further, its operation shall not prevent the transmission of the alarm signal to the monitoring station. There shall be only one switch for the silencing of the audible and visual fire alarm. In addition, the operation of the audible and visual fire alarm re-sounding system shall not require the activation of any other manual switches and devices. The restoration of the silencing switch to its normal position whilst an alarm condition exists shall transfer the alarm to the fire alarm bells. 47.12.2.4 Fault Warning The fire alarm system shall be capable of detecting fault automatically whenever it develops in any of the circuits and a fault warning shall be given by both an audible warning from a buzzer and a visible indication in the main alarm panel. This buzzer in the main alarm panel shall be distinctive and of a different character from fire alarm bells. The buzzer warning shall be cancelled by a single silencing switch solely designed for this purpose and unless the fault is rectified, the visual indication shall persist. The removal of fault shall automatically reset the audible fault warning circuit. The occurrence of another further fault while the buzzer is silenced shall cause the buzzer to sound again. Similarly, the restoration of the silencing switch to its normal position whilst a fault exists shall transfer the fault back to the audible fault warning of the system. Any fault warning shall not prevent a fire alarm being given at the same time. At any time, an alarm of fire shall take priority over any other indication such as fault warning. A distinct visible and audible signal shall be given on the main alarm panel in the event of any of the following situations : (i) (ii) (iii) (iv) failure or disconnection of the normal power supply to the main panels; failure such as low/high voltage or disconnection of the standby battery; failure such as low/high voltage or disconnection of the battery charger; triggering circuit faults such as open circuit, short circuit, earth fault of the +ve or -ve line in the wiring between trigger devices and the main alarm panel including the removal of any trigger devices; bell circuit faults such as open circuit, short circuit, earth fault of the +ve or -ve line in the wiring between alarm bells and the main alarm panel including the removal of any bells; open circuit in any of the looping circuits that control the networking of general alarm, silencing and reset function; rupture or disconnection of any fuse or the operation of any protective devices that would prevent a fire alarm being given.
(v)
(vi)
(vii)
Should any of the above situations from (i) to (vii) occur in the respective sub-alarm panels, a distinct visible signal shall also be given on the main alarm panel.
UPG07/S47.DOC(45) lkk(181206) DPD
Ugdg Spec TS 47-46/55 47.12.3 Main Alarm Panel
47.12.3.1 General The main alarm panel (MAP) shall be of solid state electronics type. Other equivalent types may be proposed, subject always to the approval of the SO Rep. The main alarm panel shall be approved by the FSSD under the PSB Product Listing Scheme Class 1.The main alarm panel and sub-alarm panels of an automatic alarm system shall be provided with an alarm verification feature complying with CP 10 and approved by the relevant Authority. The MAP shall contain the following plant and equipment: (a) (b) (c) (d) (e) (f) (g) (h) (i) (j) (k) (l) (m) (n) Switches and indicating facilities for zones. "System On" indicator. "Mains Fault", "Earth Fault", "Charger Fault", "Battery Fault" and "Sounder Fault" indicators. A voltmeter to indicate battery voltage. Fire alarm buzzer. Silencing switch for fire alarm complete with indicator. Audible fault warning buzzer. Silencing switch for fault warning buzzer complete with indicator. Indicator for bell circuit fault. Evacuation switch to energise all alarm bells complete with indicator. Light indicator test facility. System reset switch. Auxiliary contacts complete with isolation switch and indicator. A separate indicator for each sub-alarm panel to indicate that its isolation switch is activated.
The main alarm panel shall be accommodated in a well-finished self-sustained sheet cabinet constructed from at least 1.5mm thick hot- dipped galvanised sheet steel. The cabinet housing shall be bright red in colour and shall be fitted with a hinged, glazed door which shall be locked. All alarm zone indicators and associated switches shall be visible behind the locked door. The manufacturer's name shall be clearly and permanently marked on the front of the cabinet. Two spare zones or 10% of total zones, whichever is higher, shall be provided for the alarm panels. Facilities shall be provided in the main alarm panel so that easy connection to extension unit can be made when future expansion of the main alarm panel becomes necessary. A manual call point and an alarm bell/strobe light shall be provided adjacent to the main alarm panel. All main alarm panel shall incorporate the automatic facilities to receive, interpret and operate the signals from their fire fighting systems installed in the buildings. Letterings using reversed silk screen designating the alarm zone, the functions of the various indicators, apparatus and switches shall be provided for every main alarm panel. All manual controls shall be clearly labelled to indicate their functions. An information chart listing the circuit schedule shall be fixed inside each board. Other type of labelling may also be used subject to the approval of the SO Rep. Approved silk screen white perspex sheet with reduced scale coloured drawings of approved sizes showing the boundaries and locations of the alarm zone shall be provided by the Contractor and located next to each main alarm panel, sub-alarm panel and repeater board. Locations of fire protection Plant and Equipment such as main alarm panel, sub-alarm panel, portable fire extinguishers, fire hose reels, dry riser, etc shall also be indicated on the white perspex coloured drawing in the form of clear and distinctive symbols. Escape routes including corridor, staircase, etc shall be clearly indicated in the above zoning diagram. 47.12.3.2 Alarm Zone - Zone Switches and Indicating Facilities The following switches and indicating facilities shall be provided for each alarm zone : (i) (ii) (iii) (iv) Fire alarm indicator Fault indicator Isolation indicator Isolation position switch
UPG07/S47.DOC(46) lkk(181206) DPD
Ugdg Spec TS 47-47/55 47.12.3 Main Alarm Panel (Cont'd)
47.12.3.3 Fire, Fault and Isolation Indicators The fire alarm indicator shall be a twin light emitting diodes (hereinafter referred to as "LED" for the purposes of this clause including all sub-clauses under it). The fault indicator and isolation indicator can each be a separate single LED or a single LED incorporating both the fault indicator and isolation indicator.The LED shall light up upon actuation and remain lit until manually reset. The fire alarm indicator shall be coloured red and clearly labelled with the word "FIRE". The fault warning indicator and the isolation indicator shall be coloured yellow and clearly labelled with the words "FAULT" and "ISOLATED" respectively. 47.12.3.4 Isolation Switch A switch shall be provided for the deliberate isolation of each individual alarm group from the main alarm panel common circuitry. Operation of the isolation switch shall prevent the alarm group from initiating either alarm or fault signals and shall not impair the normal functioning of any other alarm groups. Unless normal conditions have been restored, operation of the isolation switches shall not cause the associated alarm groups to be isolated if the switches are operated after an alarm activation of the respective zones. 47.12.3.5 Indicators Lamp indicators shall be the light emitting diode (LED) type. The arrangement of indicator circuits and the design of the apparatus shall be such that the operation of one indicator does not prevent the proper and separate operation of other indicators. The operation of any alarm bell or the transmission of fire alarm signal to approved monitoring station shall not be prevented by any faulty indicator and shall not depend on the operation of any indicator. 47.12.3.6 Connection Of Ancillary Services Ancillary services shall not affect the functioning of the Plant and Equipment. A 24V DC supply may be provided from the fire alarm control panel to operate a relay or similar operating device controlling the ancillary Plant and Equipment. The mechanism shall be such that it does not impose a continuous load on the battery under non-alarm conditions. Provision for the interface between the main alarm panel and auxiliary Plant, control Plant and Equipment or external devices which require to be operated or disconnected in the event of an alarm shall also be made by the use of at least two separate and uncommitted relays. Each relay shall provide 2 sets of voltage free changeover contacts having minimum rating of 5A 30V d.c. Outputs to any ancillary services shall be fused or similarly protected to ensure the safety of the control equipment. 47.12.3.7 Sub-Alarm Panel The construction and requirements of sub-alarm panel shall be similar to the main alarm panel. Sub-alarm panel shall contain indicators together with associated switches and indicating facilities for zones. The sub-alarm panel shall have additional facilities for transmitting a sector signal to the main alarm panel. Where sub-alarm panel is provided in a sector of a premise, the sector in which an alarm originates shall be shown on the main alarm panel and the zone of origin of the alarm shall be shown on the sub-alarm panel. Where both sector and zone indication are provided on one main alarm panel, clear differentiation shall be made between the two functions.
UPG07/S47.DOC(47) lkk(181206) DPD
Ugdg Spec TS 47-48/55 47.12.3 Main Alarm Panel (Cont'd)
47.12.3.8 Power Supply The fire alarm system shall be operated on a DC power supply of 24 volts provided by sealed type maintenance-free lead-acid batteries which are maintained in an adequately charged condition by a 230 volts AC/24 volts DC rectifier/charger. A double-pole 230 volts rated switch with neon indicator shall be provided for the direct termination of the incoming mains supply. This supply shall be exclusive to the fire alarm system and connected to a separate circuit from the main switchboard and the controlling circuit breaker shall be clearly labelled "FIRE ALARM: DO NOT SWITCH OFF". The batteries shall be suitable for standing on open circuit or floating across a constant voltage supply and discharging at infrequent intervals. The capacity of the battery used to energise the alarm system shall be such that in the event of mains failure, the battery is capable of maintaining the system in normal working condition for at least 24 hours. Thereafter it shall be capable of supplying an additional load resulting from an alarm originating in two separate alarm zones or groups for a period of half an hour and, if utilised to supply emergency evacuation alarms, it shall in addition be capable of supplying the full emergency evacuation alarm load for a period of at least 10 minutes. Calculations for ascertaining the capacity of the batteries and the design of the battery charging Plant and Equipment to meet the above requirements shall be submitted to the SO Rep. The battery terminal pillars and intercell connectors, bolts, nuts and washers used for fastenings of intercell and terminal connectors shall be made of highly conductive and corrosion-free materials. The cell container of the battery shall be enclosed and made of rugged and self-extinguishing type plastic. The battery shall be arranged in the compartment in such a way as to allow easy maintenance so that the inspection of batteries shall not require the removal of cells and connections from the battery assembly. A rating plate containing the following information shall be securely fixed within the battery enclosure : (a) (b) (c) (d) (e) (f) (g) (h) Type of cell Numbers of cells Ampere hour capacity Nominal voltage Final voltage Float voltage of battery charger Output current and limit of battery charger Date supplied and recommended date of replacement
47.12.3.9 Battery Charger The battery charger shall be of constant voltage current limiting type with automatic boost charge by voltage level sensing and capable to function under the following environmental conditions: (i) (ii) (iii) Temperature Relative humidity Abnormal foreign potential : : : : 10C - 40C 20% - 95% Power line surge
The charger circuit shall be designed to suit the local climate. The charger shall be capable of supplying any possible load of the system while maintaining the battery in fully charged condition and recharging the battery as prescribed below. The charging system shall be current limiting constant voltage type. The rating of the battery charger shall be such that : (i) after the battery has been discharged from the fully charged state by supplying the load as specified in the aforementioned requirements, and after recharging for a period of not more than 24 hours, the battery shall have recovered to the extent that it shall be capable of sustaining a further discharge of supplying the same load as specified in the aforementioned requirement.
(ii)
UPG07/S47.DOC(48) lkk(181206) DPD
Ugdg Spec TS 47-49/55 47.12.3.9 Battery Charger (Cont'd) The output voltage provided by the battery charger shall be maintained within 0.1% of the preset value whilst operating within any combination of the conditions described below and whilst delivering a current within the range of values required for float charging : (i) (ii) Voltage Frequency : : 230V r.m.s. +10% 50 Hz + 5% single phase
The battery charger shall keep the battery under constant voltage charge. It shall incorporate automatic control features with output designed to charge and maintain the cells of the battery within the limits specified by the battery manufacturer, taking into account any quiescent load imposed by the associated system. The voltage output of the charger shall be adjustable to 20% of the nominal voltage. The battery maximum allowable charging current shall be designed to suit the selected battery size at fixed current limitation. The trimmers shall be arranged so that adjustment can be done without removing any circuit boards or obstacles. All electronic parts including rectifiers, power transistors and resistor shall be designed to function at the case temperature below 75C unless otherwise approved by the SO Rep. Printed circuit boards, fuses, relays and other electrical parts employed in the battery charger shall be mounted and connected in such a way that facilitate inspection of them without any need to dismantle them from their operating positions. An approved self-resetting low voltage cut-off device with adjustable low voltage setting shall be installed in the circuit between the battery and the system if the system is not self-resetting. This under-voltage protection device shall disconnect the battery from supplying the system if the pre-set low voltage limit as recommended by the battery manufacturer is reached.
47.12.4
Manual Call Points Manual call points shall be of the "break-glass" type complying with the requirements of BS 5839 Part 2, and notwithstanding this, be of a type approved by the relevant statutory authorities. The call point must come with hinged transparent protective cover. The word LIFT COVER AND BREAK GLASS shall be provided on every cover. The casing of the call point shall be of shatterproof corrosion resistant plastic, finished red in colour. The front glass fitted shall be replaceable and shall be such that the possibility of accidental breaking is reduced to a minimum. Manual call point installed outdoors shall be of approved weatherproof to at least IP65 and watertight steel box construction complete with screwed conduit entry hole. The word "FIRE" shall be embossed on the front surface. For fire alarm systems which are not connected to monitoring stations (DECAM), a IN CASE OF FIRE, CALL 995 signage shall be provided at every manual call point.
47.12.5
Fire Alarm Detectors Fire alarm detectors shall be of the types approved by the relevant statutory authorities. The detectors shall preferably be flushed mounted where possible and installed in a manner that each can be readily removed for servicing without affecting the effectiveness of the remaining detectors and the system operation. In addition, all heat detectors shall comply with CP 10, Code of Practice for the Installation and Servicing of Electrical Fire Alarm Systems and the technical specification EN 54:Part 5:2001 "Fire Detection and Fire Alarm Systems-Part 5: Heat Detectors-Point Detectors" or AS 1603-1:1997 "Automatic Fire Detection And Alarm Systems:Heat Detectors" & relevant parts of AS 2362 "Fire Detection, Warning, Control & Intercom Systems" or UL Standard 521 "Heat Detectors For Fire Protective Signaling Systems" or other approved equivalen.
UPG07/S47.DOC(49) lkk(181206) DPD
Ugdg Spec TS 47-50/55 47.12.6 Alarm Bells with Strobe Light Alarm bells shall be of cast or pressed steel underdome type, finished red in colour. It shall be complete with a strobe light on top of the bell cover. The bell shall be the trembling type with a gong diameter of 150mm, and shall be capable of giving a minimum sound level of 90 dBA within a range of 1m continuously. The strobe light shall be attached with the alarm bell or mounted directly above it. The strobe light shall a high intensity flashing strobe light with flash rate of 50 to 80 flashes per minute. The lens cover of the light shall be red or amber in colour. The bells and light shall be suitable for operation on 24 volts DC. Alarm bells shall be mounted on conduit boxes above the manual call points. Alarm bells installed outdoors shall be of approved weatherproof and watertight construction to at least IP65.
47.12.7
Installation Wiring Wiring of the fire alarm system shall be installed in accordance with the appropriate provisions of SS CP5 except as modified by the relevant clauses in SS CP10. The wiring of the fire alarm system including the incoming supply mains shall be exclusive to the fire alarm installation and shall be segregated from the wiring of any other circuit. Fire alarm wiring shall be spaced at least 50mm away from any other service. The mains feed to the power supply Plant and Equipment of the fire alarm system shall be segregated from the wiring of all other services and also from all other circuits of the fire alarm system. Each alarm zone or group shall be separately wired and indicated on the main or sub-alarm panel. Manual call points shall be connected in an "open" circuit and an "end-of-line" resistor shall be provided to enable line monitoring. All wiring except the low voltage mains feed to the power supply Plant and Equipment of the fire alarm system shall be of fire resistant cables. Fire resistant cables shall be single or multi-core unarmoured cables rated at 300/500V, comprising plain copper stranded circular conductors, fire barrier tape and insulated with extruded polythene, or ethylene propylene rubber (EPR), or other approved fire resistant compound, and an extruded oversheath of PVC. Such fire resistant cables shall pass type test conducted by SAC-SINGLAS accredited laboratories and be listed under PSB Class 1 as required by FSSD.. All wiring shall be run in steel metal conduits or metal trunking exclusive to the five alarm system. The Contractor shall ensure that the furthest point of the system shall have sufficient supply to facilitate the proper functioning of the system. No joints between terminal points shall be permitted except in long runs, in which case the joints shall only be made in a suitable enclosed terminal box employing screwed terminations. The box shall be labelled "Fire Alarm Link Box". The wiring diagram shall be submitted to the SO Rep for approval before installation commences. The Contractor shall ensure that the furthest point of the system shall have sufficient supply to facilitate the proper functioning of the system.
47.12.8
Sensing Circuit A pair of voltage-free normally closed fire-resistant signal cables for the sensing of the activation of the fire alarm system shall be provided from the main alarm panel to the lift machine room.
UPG07/S47.DOC(50) lkk(181206) DPD
Ugdg Spec TS 47-51/55 47.12.9 Monitoring for Automatic Fire Alarm System Where the automatic fire alarm system is required to be connected to monitoring stations shown in the Drawings, the connection shall be done in accordance with the requirements of SS CP 10 and as approved by the Supervising Officer. The Contractor shall allow in the Contract Sum for all costs and expenses for the one-time rental charge and installation of the fire alarm transmitter, installation of the fixed leased-line and back-up dialed-up telephone line from the transmitter to the nearest telephone distribution point and interconnection between the transmitter and the main alarm panel leading to the commissioning of the complete monitored system. The transmitter shall be complete with the leased-line transmitter, digital communicator and all associated power supply units. The Contractor shall also include in the Contract Sum the first three-months rental charges for the leasedline and the back-up telephone line from a PBTS and the first year 24-hour monitoring charge by the monitoring station, all commencing from the Date of Substantial Completion for the Works or phase or sub-phase of the Works as certified by the Superintending Officer. If other mean/s of DECAM transmission, approved by Singapore Civil Defence Force, is/are proposed by the Contractor, the Contractor shall still be required to install the fixed leased-line and back-up dialed-up telephone line from the telephone terminal block to the transmitter. In addition, the first three-months rental charge/s for such other mean/s of transmission shall deemed to be included in the Contract Sum. Such alternative shall be approved by the Supervising Officer.
47.12.10
As Installed Drawings On Completion of the installation and before the final inspection and testing, the Contractor shall supply to the SO Rep 3 sets of suitably scaled "as-installed" drawings of the complete fire alarm installation. The drawings shall comprise the followings : (a) (b) positions and boundaries of various alarm zones; positions of main alarm panel, sub-alarm panels, battery charger, transmitter, manual call points, detectors and bells; circuitry diagram of the alarm panels and battery charger; legend showing clearly all the symbols and abbreviations used; technical specifications of all Plant and equipment used in the system including the manufacturer's recommended testing requirements for detectors in-situ.
(c) (d) (e)
47.12.11
Inspection, Testing and Commissioning The Contractor shall submit an application to the SO Rep to witness the inspection and commissioning test of the complete installation. The application shall include information on the testing appointment date and statement of completion of the whole Works by the Contractor. The commissioning test shall be carried out by the Contractor and to be witnessed by the SO Rep. The format of the test report shall be in accordance with the Specifications. The entire system shall be tested to ensure that it operates satisfactorily and that : (a) (b) (c) (d) (e) (f) all manual call points, detectors and bells function correctly; all fault monitoring circuits function correctly; the battery and battery charger comply with the requirements of the Specifications; all ancillary Plant and Equipment function correctly; all control features and indicators in the alarm panels function correctly; cable insulation resistance of all circuits are satisfactory in accordance with SS CP5.
The Contractor shall submit 3 copies of the test report, duly completed and signed, to the SO Rep not later than 7 days after the test.
UPG07/S47.DOC(51) lkk(181206) DPD
Ugdg Spec TS 47-52/55 47.12.12 Maintenance Service The Contractor shall allow in the Contract Sum for all costs and expenses for providing maintenance of the Fire Alarm System and an efficient call-back service as specified hereunder for a period of one year commencing from the Date of Substantial Completion for the Works or phase or sub-phase of the Works as certified by the Superintending Officer (hereinafter referred to as the "Defects Liability Period" for the purposes of this clause including all sub-clauses under it). The maintenance during the one year Defects Liability Period shall include all items listed in the Schedule For Maintenance Of Fire Alarm System specified hereunder. 47.12.12.1 47.12.12.1.1 Schedule For Maintenance Of Fire Alarm System Type of Maintenance Service This service shall include the following items : (A) The Contractor shall provide an efficient call-back service between 9.00 am and 9.00 pm every day without charge. On Substantial Completion of the Works as certified by the SO Rep, the Contractor shall install and maintain one (1) one-way exchange line or apply for the radio paging service from the Telecommunication Authority of Singapore to receive calls from the Branch Offices. The telephone numbers allotted to the radio paging service shall be kept strictly confidential for the use by the Employer. All fees and expenses incurred for the application, installation and maintenance of the one-way exchange line or the radio paging service shall be borne by the Contractor. (B) Emergency call-back service shall be provided by the Contractor at any time and all such urgent calls shall be attended to within the same day if the Contractor is notified before 9.00 pm. All other calls shall be attended to within 24 hours on notification by telephone or through the radio paging service as specified in the aforementioned requirement, otherwise the Owner reserves the right to engage any other person to rectify the fault and all expenses incurred plus the Employer's charges shall be recovered from the Contractor. The Contractor shall provide the following servicing and maintenance : (a) Monthly Test and Annual Test The Contractor shall inspect, test and service the complete fire alarm system under this Contract at least once a month except where otherwise directed by the Owner. At each such monthly test and the annual test, the minimum items or work detailed below shall be performed by the Contractor. Any special maintenance requirements on Plant and Equipment not covered by the following list but recommended by the manufacturers shall be included. The results of each test shall be recorded in the attached test report format as produced in the Appendix entitled MONTHLY/ ANNUAL TEST REPORT MAINTENANCE OF FIRE ALARM SYSTEM and file in the log book. (b) Monthly Test For monthly tests, the following inspection and testing procedures shall be carried out each month : (i) (ii) (iii) Simulate fire conditions on all alarm zones and reset the system to normal. Confirm with the monitoring station when the test has been completed. Check battery voltage and charging current in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions. Check batteries and their terminals as specified by the manufacturer to ensure that they are in good serviceable condition. Where applicable, examine to ensure that the specific gravity and the level of the electrolyte in each cell is correct.
(C)
UPG07/S47.DOC(52) lkk(181206) DPD
Ugdg Spec TS 47-53/55 47.12.12 47.12.12.1 47.12.12.1.1 Maintenance Service (Cont'd) Schedule For Maintenance Of Fire Alarm System (Cont'd) Type of Maintenance Service (Cont'd) (C) (b) Monthly Test (Cont'd) (iv) (v) (vi) (vii) (viii) Check condition of battery cabinet for corrosion and to ensure that batteries are stored in a secure condition. Check to ensure that all indicating lights are operating correctly and replace if faulty. Check operation of all alarm sounders. Disconnect the battery supply and ensure that the visual and audible fault signals are activated at the main alarm panel. Simulate main power supply failure and ensure that the system will operate correctly with the standby battery power supply (as specified in the Specifications). Simulate fire alarm conditions and check the output signals available to initiate the remote auxiliary functions that is required to be in operation in the event of fire as in accordance with the appropriate codes. Simulate fault conditions on all alarm zones to ensure that the main alarm panel is operating correctly. Check that the main alarm panel is in a clean and operative condition. Visually inspect the condition of components, terminations and cables. Ensure that faulty parts are replaced and the replacement has been carried out satisfactorily. Record in the log book any circuit fault that require repair. Check that all switches are returned to their operating position after the test. The person carrying out the test should record in the log any fault(s) identified and that the above test has been carried out.
(ix)
(x) (xi) (xii) (xiii) (xiv) (xv) (c)
Annual Test For annual tests, in addition to carrying out all the inspection and testing procedures specified in the monthly test in the aforementioned requirement, the following shall also be provided : (i) The maintenance personnel shall arrange to check the operation of at least 20 percent of the detectors in the installation each year. The selection of detectors to be tested shall be spread over as many zones as possible and shall be made in such a way that all the detectors in the installation shall have been checked at least once in 5 years. The checking of detectors shall take the form of either : the testing of a detector in-situ; or the removal of a detector and its replacement by a detector which has been checked and calibrated by the supplier/manufacturer. (ii) (iii) Circuits requiring automatic voltage regulated supplies shall be checked to ensure correct operation and voltage output. Where the heat-sensitive element of thermal detectors or the enclosure of other detectors are found to be coated with paint or any other material likely to affect the operation of the detectors, such material shall be cleaned off or if necessary, have the detector replaced.
UPG07/S47.DOC(53) lkk(181206) DPD
Ugdg Spec TS 47-54/55 47.12.12 47.12.12.1 47.12.12.1.1 Maintenance Service (Cont'd) Schedule For Maintenance Of Fire Alarm System (Cont'd) Type of Maintenance Service (Cont'd) (C) Location : (d) Monthly/Annual Test Report Time : Date :
Type of Test : Monthly/Annual* Alarm Zone Test Thermal Isolation In-situ Test Smoke Detectors# Flame Isolation In-situ Test Isolation In-situ Test Manual Isolation In-situ Main Supply Charger# Battery Charger Emergency Lamp On Alarm Monitoring Alarm# Alarm Transmitter Alarm Sounder Ancillary Controls
Remarks :
I hereby certify that the above tests have been carried out
Tester's Name
Signature
Witnessed By
Signature
* Delete if unapplicable. # Tick if satisfactory; put asterisk `*' if unsatisfactory and give explanation under the remarks space.
UPG07/S47.DOC(54) lkk(181206) DPD
Ugdg Spec TS 47-55/55 FIRE ALARM SYSTEM COMMISSIONING TEST REPORT DATE : ALARM ZONE, Z TEST THERMAL/SMOKE DETECTORS MANUAL CALL POINT ISOLATION IN-SITU TEST ISOLATION IN-SITU MAIN SUPPLY CHARGER# AND BATTERY BATTERY CHARGER EMERGENCY LAMP ON MONITORING STATION ALARM TRANSMITTER ALARM SOUNDER/STROBE LIGHT LIGHT INDICATOR TEST FACILITY LIGHT INDICATORS ALARMS# AND ANCILLARY CONTROLS & SWITCHES ANCILLARY CONTROLS FAULT BUZZER ALARM BUZZER REMINDER BUZZER S/C OF MAIN SUPPLY S/C OF LEADS TO ALARM DEVICE S/C OF BATTERY CHARGING EQUIPMENT ELECTRICAL SUPERVISION OF PANEL EARTH FAULT OF CABLE CONTAINING DC SOURCE DISCONNECTION OF CALL POINT DISCONNECTION OF THERMAL/ SMOKE DETECTOR
OPERATIVE NONOPERATIVE REMARKS
TIME :
Remarks :
I hereby certify that the above tests have been carried out
Tester's Name _____________________________ ____ Signature ______ Witnessed By
Signature # ( - Satisfactory, X - Not satisfactory )
SECTION 48/...
UPG07/S47.DOC(55) lkk(181206) DPD
Ugdg Spec TS 48-1/8
SECTION 48
48.0
OUTDOOR AMENITIES LIGHTING
48.1
SCOPE This Section covers the installation, diversion and removal of outdoor amenities lighting.
48.2
STEEL LIGHTING COLUMN
48.2.1
General The general dimensions, arrangements and details of the columns shall be as shown in the Drawings. Unless approved, indicated or otherwise, all columns supplied shall be of straight planted type. The design of the lighting columns provided in the Drawings shows the minimum requirements only. The Contractor and his QP shall be responsible for determining and ensuring that the lighting column is structurally adequate to cater to the overall weight, brackets and the luminaire, bending moment as well as the environment and soil conditions. Where these factors necessitate improvements or modifications to the design of the lighting columns, the Contractor and his QP shall provide the necessary modifications or improvements. It is deemed that the Contractor has included the costs for the improvements and modifications in the Contract Sum. The circular column and bracket arms shall be manufactured from steel tubes in accordance with BS 5649. The thickness of the steel shall be as specified in the Drawings. The tolerance on the thickness of the material shall be +10 percent of the thickness. The steel tubes shall be formed either by continuous welding or one of the seamless processes. The tubes so formed shall be free from all injurious Defects. The circular column shall be made of steel tubes of suitable lengths swaged together when hot, or by any other acceptable processes. The length of joints on the swaged circular columns shall comply with the following dimensions : Outside Diameter of Smaller Tube Length of Joint In mm 60 180 75 200 90 230 100 260 115 300 130 360 170 410 195 & Over 460
The exposed edge of each joint shall be welded and shall be chambered off at an angle of 45 degrees. The cross-section of the column shall be nearly as circular as possible and except at joints and door openings, the tolerance on the external diameter of the column shall be +3.0 percent. The nominal height of the column as shown in the Drawings shall be the distance between the centre line of the point of entry of the lantern and the intended ground level. The columns shall be planted in the ground to the specified depth. The complete column shall not deviate from straightness by more than 2mm per metre length. A weatherproof door shall be provided with a locking device, over the door opening at the base of the column as shown. A baseboard made of sheet steel shall be provided and fitted in each column for mounting of control gear and cut-out as shown in the Drawings.
Ugdg Spec TS 48-2/8
48.2.1
General (Cont'd) A corrosion resistant electrical earthing terminal in the form of a bolt of not less than 8mm in diameter and 20mm long shall be provided inside the column in a position as shown in the Drawings. Two suitably sized washers and two nuts shall be provided. Each planted column shall have a baseplate securely fixed to its base to prevent the column sinking into the ground and to help prevent the column overturning. The details of the baseplate, planting depths and buried concrete block shall be in accordance with the Drawings. Surface mounted columns secured on top of concrete or other structures shall comply with BS 5649 unless shown otherwise in the Drawings. A cable entry slot of dimensions 150mm x 50mm shall be provided in the column, the lower end of the slot being about 500mm below the intended ground level. Other non-standard columns can be used. Such columns shall comply with the requirements of BS 5649 and approved by the SO Rep.
48.2.2
Columns With Bracket Arms The completed column shall include the bracket arm connected to the column. The bracket arm (single or double) shall be manufactured as separate units suitable for mounting or fixing on to the column. The tolerance on the total length of the columns with bracket arms and planted Sections shall be 1 percent. The single or double bracket arms shall be formed from one continuous steel tube section or two separate steel tube sections, which will permit electrical wiring to reach the lanterns mounted at the end of the bracket arms. The bracket projection (horizontal distance from the point of entry to the lantern to a vertical line passing through the centre of the cross-section of the column) shall be 2m and the tolerance on bracket projection shall be 2 percent (without spigot). The bottom end of the curved arm shall slip onto the top of the lighting column and shall be fixed by means of bolts to prevent rotational movement. The top end of the curved arm shall finish with a spigot of outside diameter of dimension to suit the specified lantern. The fixing angle of the lantern fixing axis, from the horizontal shall be within 2 degree of the angle specified. The lantern fixing angle shall be 5 or 15 degrees as indicated in the Drawings.
48.2.3
Post Top Columns For post top columns, the tolerance on the total length of the columns with planted sections shall be the greater value of 0.5 percent or 50mm. The top end of the column shall finish with a spigot of outside diameter to suit the specified lantern or mounting bracket for the lantern.
48.3
TAPERED OCTAGONAL COLUMNS The Contractor shall be required to supply tapered octagonal hot-dip galvanised lighting column as shown. The mounting height and all other requirements shall be similar to those earlier prescribed. In addition, each column section shall be machine-formed and longitudinally welded by continuous automatic gas shielded electric arc process.
Ugdg Spec TS 48-3/8
48.3
TAPERED OCTAGONAL COLUMNS (CONT'D) The bracket arm shall be octagonal in shape and finish with round pipe at the smaller end. The bottom end of the curved arm shall slip into the top section of the main column. The smaller end of the curved arm shall finish with a spigot for the safe mounting of the required lantern. The Contractor shall submit the column and arm design including the design calculations (if necessary), test reports, certificates and furnish a test certificate from the manufacturer to show all base metal, zinc coating weight or other test conform to the Specification requirements. Columns which fail to comply with the Specifications shall be rejected and replaced by the Contractor at his own cost and expense.
48.4 48.4.1
CORROSION PROTECTION FOR STEEL COLUMNS Hot Dip Galvanizing All steel columns and brackets shall be protected against corrosion by hot dip galvanizing internally and externally in accordance with BS 729. Unless otherwise indicated, all welding work for columns and brackets shall be done before galvanising. The treatments prior to galvanizing shall include degreasing, rinsing, pickling, then rising and fluxing. The minimum average zinc coating weight shall be 450 gm/m2 and minimum thickness of zinc coating shall be 65 microns. The coating shall be adherent, smooth, continuous and free from flux stains. All bolts shall be galvanized after screwcutting. The Contractor shall furnish a test certificate from the galvanizer, ensuring that all base metal, zinc coating weight or other tests conform to the specification requirements of BS 729. If the lighting column is not in conformity with the specified requirements, the columns will be rejected and be replaced by the Contractor at his own cost and expense. Where the length of the column exceeds 10m and the length of the galvanizing bath, the column shall be galvanized in two sections. The joining of the two sections by welding after galvanizing will only be permitted with the approval of the SO Rep. The welded metal and adjacent damaged areas of the zinc coating shall be applied with zinc rich paints conforming to BS 4652. The surface shall be prepared by removing any welding slag with a chipping hammer followed by vigorous wire brushing. The paint is applied by brush in two coats to give a total paint film thickness of about 100 microns. Any damage to the coating of the galvanised columns and brackets during transportation and erection shall be made good by applying two coats of zinc rich paint at the cost and expense of the contractor.
48.4.2
Bitumen Coating One coat of bitumen paint shall be applied externally to the planted section on top of the galvanised coating/epoxy powder coating/synthetic enamel paint. It shall be applied over the length of the buried ground section and for a distance of 200mm above the ground level. For lighting columns not exceeding 4m heights where aesthetic appearance is of concern, then, the latter distance above the ground can be reduced to about 100mm. The contractor shall refer to the Standard Drawings for the various lengths of the planted sections corresponding to the lighting column's heights so as to determine the level of the bitumen coatings. The surface shall be thoroughly cleaned of all contaminations before application of bitumen coatings. The bitumen painting shall comply with BS3416:1975 or approved equivalent. The first coat shall be dried before applying the second coat, which shall be applied at right angle to the first. The application for the coating shall be the rate of approximately 6 squares metres per litre. The overall dry film thickness of the bitumen coats shall be at least 300 microns. The sections of the lighting columns with bitumen shall be wrapped with durable plastic covering so as to prevent the bitumen from smudging the clean sections of other columns during transportation and storage. the plastic coverings need not be removed during the installation of the columns.
Ugdg Spec TS 48-4/8
48.4.3
GROUTING OF LIGHTING COLUMN Before grouting, three numbers of 30mm diameter pliable PVC conduits shall be inserted into the lighting column (as shown in Drawings). Cables shall be pulled in only after 9not before) grouting and casting of the concrete footing. The PVC sleeve shall be extended out from the slot hole (as shown in Drawings) by at least 300mm to ensure that the sleeves openings are not covered by cement grout and concrete footing. If, due to the layout or other constraints/considerations, the PVC sleeves need to be trimmed to flush with the top of the grout, the Contractor shall carry out such works at no additional costs and without delay to the schedule. The Contractor shall ensure that three (3) numbers of T10 reinforcement bars are inserted in the lighting column. Each T10 bar shall be inserted till it reaches the base plate of the lighting column and the top of the bar shall stop 25mm short of the top of the grout so as to provide sufficient cover for the bar (as shown in the Drawings). The columns shall be grouted to the specified depth as shown in the Drawings. The Contractor shall use pre-packed non-shrink grout and pump through the door opening of the column until it reaches 100mm below the bottom of the access door (as shown in Drawings). The Contractor shall be responsible for ensuring that due care is taken when grouting is carried out.
The Contactor shall be responsible for ensuring that all cables can be pulled in and out of the columns at any time and can be connected back to the distribution board after the grouting and casting are completed. Alternatively, the Contractor can grout the lighting column together with PVC sleeve and T10 bars off-site, before it is delivered to the Site. The Contractor shall take all necessary precautions to protect galvanized coating of lighting column during transportation, installation and before handing over to the Employer. 48.4.4 Glass Fibre/Reinforced Polyester Lighting Column Glass fibre/reinforced polyester column shall be manufactured in accordance with BS 5469 and shall include the following features : (i) (ii) (iii) (iv) High mechanical strength and high impact strength. Corrosion resistance, impervious to ground decay and insect attack etc. Uniformity in colour Maintenance free
The Contractor shall provide complete details of the proposed column, base plate assembly and details of assembly procedure etc including all dimensional and weight measurements of the column. The expected life span of the column shall also be included in the particulars. The Contractor shall also submit a test certificate from the manufacturer to prove conformity to the Specification.
48.5
POSITION OF LIGHTING COLUMNS Before erection, the Contractor shall peg up the positions of lighting columns as indicated in the Drawings. The Contractor shall then confirm with the SO Rep the positions of the lighting columns are well clear from the way of tree, pavements, walkways, roads, etc, failing which any necessary repositioning of the columns shall be carried out at the cost and expense of the Contractor.
Ugdg Spec TS 48-5/8
48.6
ERECTION The columns shall be planted in the ground to the specified depth and grouted as shown in the Drawings. Excavation of trial holes to locate the buried UPVC pipes of road crossing, cable entries to switch rooms including backfilling and making good shall be carried out by Contractor. Erection of the columns shall include excavation of pit to the required depth, concrete footing, backfilling, concrete skirting around the base of the columns where required, reinstatement of ground surfaces, the transportation and disposal of surplus earth from the site and the painting of identification numbers on the external surface of the column. For erection of column or laying of underground cables which affect the building apron, the Contractor shall ensure that provisions are made before the apron is concreted. For existing apron and other concrete surfaces, the Contractor shall include the cost of reinstatement of these surfaces in his Contract Sum. Any hacking and reinstatement should be carried out in neat, rectangular panels to minimise the mismatch of surface texture. The Contractor shall be responsible for ensuring that due care is taken when excavating in the vicinity of existing buried services, and shall bear all the cost and expense arising thereof. The door opening of the column shall be positioned parallel to the bracket arm on the side away from the direction of traffic.
48.7
BONDING OF METALLIC LIGHTING COLUMNS All metallic lighting columns planted inside the concrete surfaces of the playground , fitness corner and hardcourt shall be electrically bonded to the weldmesh or BRC. Where indicated in the drawing, the lighting columns shall be linked together and earthed for lightning protection. The overall earth resistance value shall not exceed 10 ohms.
48.8
POWDER COATING AND PAINTING Before the galvanized lighting columns are delivered to site, the Contractor shall confirm with the SO Rep regarding the colour of the columns, if not already specified. All columns of 6m and below shall be powder coated. Polyester Powder Coating suitable for outdoor application, with resistance to atmospheric aging and ultra-violet light, shall be used. The thickness of the polyester powder coating shall be between 50 to 80 microns. The work shall be done off-site in a factory with the appropriate facilities. The Contractor shall take all necessary precautions to protect the finished paint work during transportation, installation and before handing over to the Employer. No painting shall be allowed on site, with the exception of painting of the identification number. For columns of length above 6m, where painting is required for aesthetic reasons, only lead and chromate free primer conforming to SS 494: 2001 and poly uretane paint shall be used.
48.8
POWDER COATING AND PAINTING (Contd)
Before painting, the surfaces shall be thoroughly clean, dry and free from grease and oil. Non-oily soils and dirt shall be removed by brushing or scrubbing followed by thorough rinsing with clean water. Grease and oil shall be removed by swabbing generously with a suitable hydrocarbon solvent such as white spirit or mineral turpentine, using several clear swabs on each area. The Contractor shall then apply one coat of lead and chromate free primer and two coats of poly uretane paint to the galvanised steel surfaces. The Contractor shall ensure that the correct types of finishing or paint work are provided and the preparation of galvanised steel surfaces for painting is properly carried out, failing which the columns shall be rejected and the Contractor shall bear all the cost in making good the defects. Identification number shall be painted on all lighting columns.
Ugdg Spec TS 48-6/8
48.9
WIRING AND ELECTRICAL ACCESSORIES All lighting columns shall be provided with the following wiring and electrical accessories : (a) a 25 Amp 440V cut-out with provision for looping in of two numbers of phase, neutral and earth conductors and looping out of one number of phase, neutral and earth conductors of up to 25 mm2 and a 5 Amp `HRC' fuse as shown in the Drawings. internal wiring of minimum size of 2 x 1.5 mm2 PVC/PVC complete with 1.5 mm2 PVC (green) earth connecting the cut-out to the luminaires. brass compression glands for armoured PVC insulated cables, complete with brass locknuts and earth tags and support bracket as shown in the Drawings.
(b)
(c)
48.10
CONCRETE FOOTING Concrete footing shall follow dimensions as indicated in the Drawings for lighting column. All mass concrete used shall compose of cement, fine aggregate and coarse aggregate in the ratio of 1:3:6. The cement shall be ordinary Portland Cement of an approved brand and manufacture and shall comply in every respect with SS 26. Fine aggregates shall be well washed by fresh water or pit sand, free from clay, organic matters and other impurities. It shall comply with SS 31. Coarse aggregate shall be crushed granite, angular in shape, free from quarry refuse and other impurities and comply with SS 31. It shall not exceed 40mm in size. The ratio of water to cement in all mixes shall not exceed a maximum value of 0.6. Concrete shall be mixed in batch-type mixers until the concrete is uniform in colour. The mixing time shall not be less than that specified by the manufacturer. When ready mixed concrete is used, it shall conform to SS 119 and approval shall be sought from the SO Rep.
48.11
REMOVAL OF LIGHTING COLUMNS Removal of lighting columns shall include excavation, uprooting the columns, baseplates and concrete footings, backfilling, reinstatement of ground surfaces, and the transportation and disposal of surplus earth and columns from the Site. Electricity supplies shall be cut-off and the cables made dead, isolated or abandoned before work commences. The Contractor shall provide, erect and maintain such traffic signs, lamps, barriers, flashing lights, guards etc and other measures as may be necessary in the removal work, for the safety and convenience of the public and others. The Contractor shall be responsible for ensuring that due care is taken when excavating in the vicinity of existing buried services, and all cost and expense arising thereof shall be borne by the Contractor.
Ugdg Spec TS 48-7/8
48.11
REMOVAL OF LIGHTING COLUMNS (CONT'D) The columns shall be lifted and removed using suitable mechanical handling plant or cranes. After the columns have been removed, the holes in the ground shall be filled in with suitable earth and compacted with mechanical rammers and the ground surfaces shall be reinstated to match existing adjacent surface finishes.
48.12
LIGHTING DISTRIBUTION BOARDS Lighting distribution boards shall be of the 400/230V type, and of adequate size to house the number of HRC fuses, miniature circuit breakers, contactors, time switch, isolator, by-pass switch, and associated equipment, as indicated in the Drawings. The miniature circuit breakers shall be rated for 240 V, 50 HZ operation and shall have an interrupting capacity of at least 6 kA (M6). The distribution board shall be fabricated from electro-galvanised sheet steel of thickness not less than 1.6mm. It shall be treated with a coat of finishing paint and oven dried to finish with a paint thickness of not less than 45 microns. The distribution board shall have a hinged front access door with suitable dustproof seals and facilities for locking. Insulated protective shields shall be provided to prevent accidental contact with live parts when the door is in the open position. Neutral and earth busbars and connecting blocks shall have an outgoing terminal for each neutral or earth conductor. A removable copper plate of thickness not less than 1.6mm shall be provided at the base of the distribution board. Suitable sized holes shall be punched for the termination of armoured PVC insulated cables, where necessary. The Contractor shall submit layout drawings in three elevations, circuit diagrams and wiring diagrams to the SO Rep for approval prior to the fabrication of the lighting distribution boards. The distribution board shall have an approved circuit diagram fixed on the inside of the door. Formica engraving laminated labels shall also be supplied and screwed to the front of the distribution board to provide board references. For outdoor lighting distribution control board, the board shall be weatherproof and mounted on concrete pedestal. Suitable cable box terminations shall be arranged to receive the incoming underground cables. A separate earth system shall be provided for each outdoor distribution control board. Identification number shall be printed on the outdoor distribution board. The Contractor shall carry out all wiring and connections between the lighting distribution board and the main switch board. All wiring shall be protected throughout their lengths by a continuous enclosure of metal conduit or metal trunking except where the cables are installed within the enclosure of electrical equipment.
48.13
TURFING The Contractor shall reinstate the turfing affected by the excavation to match existing adjacent turfing when directed by the SO Rep. All topsoil shall be of approved quality, free from rubbish, roots, stumps, subsoil or other extraneous matter, be friable and porous in texture and shall be obtained from approved sources.
Ugdg Spec TS 48-8/8
48.13
TURFING (CONT'D) Sludge shall be dry, solid and well-treated type from approved sources. The use of sludge for turfing and other work shall comply with all requirements of the NEA on the prevention of smell and flies problems : (a) Sludge delivered to sites shall be used for turfing as soon as possible. Sludge shall not be stored at site. When necessary sludge heaped on site shall be evenly covered with a layer of topsoil or tarpaulin sheets firmly pegged to the ground. After planting of turf, no additional spreading of sludge or soil on the turfed area shall be allowed.
(b)
(c)
The soil mixture shall be three (3) parts of topsoil with one (1) part of sludge. The minimum thickness of soil mixture (topsoil mixed with sludge) shall be 150mm (including 25mm of original soil attached to turf) at time of construction. A 125mm layer of soil mixture shall be spread over the prepared surface, followed by the planting of the fresh turf. The Contractor shall provide turfing materials of size 0.1m (square in shape) with about 25mm of original soil adhering to the roots, be of good quality, free from pests or diseases of vigorous growth. Types of turf may be any one of the following species : (a) (b) (c) Cow Grass (Axonopus Compressus) Serangoon Grass (Digitania Didactyla) Manila Grass (Zoysia Japania)
2
The turf shall be planted promptly to avoid desiccation. When the level of the completed turfing work is undulating or uneven, the turfed areas except those on steep slopes shall be properly rolled over with garden roller or other approved means so that the turfing shall achieve a uniform and even surface on completion. All new turfing shall be maintained for six (6) months from the date the work is certified by the SO Rep as completed by watering and weeding and mowing whenever required. Contractor shall replace dying, old or missing turfs from original source during the Defects Liability Period.
48.14
MAKING GOOD The Contractor shall make good, patch up and paint, at his own cost and expense, any damaged part of the building and any openings or recess in the building walls and other parts of structures affected by the Works to the complete satisfaction of the SO Rep.
SECTION 49/...
Ugdg Spec TS 49-1/3
SECTION 49 49.0 49.1 LIGHTNING PROTECTION GENERAL The lightning protection system shall comply with the requirements of the SS CP 33 and its amendments, this specification and the regulations issued by the Building Control Authority (BCA). The Contractor shall ensure that the lightning protection system installed is in accordance with SS CP 33 1996 and its amendments.and the regulations issued by the Building Control Authority (BCA). 49.2 CONDUCTORS The air termination network and down conductors shall be high conductivity aluminium tape of crosssectional area 25mm x 3mm. Aluminium strip conductors shall be fixed with purpose-made aluminium clips with base strips at intervals recommended by SS CP33 . The aluminium base strip shall be fastened to the masonry surface by a single set screw and the aluminium clip shall be secured on the base strip by two screws. The thickness of the base strip and clip shall be 3mm and 1.5mm respectively. Screws and nails for securing clips and base strips shall be of aluminium alloy or stainless steel. Coated or plated steel screws or nails are not acceptable. 49.3 AIR TERMINALS Air terminals shall be installed in the positions indicated on the Drawings or where specifically approved by the SO Rep. Each air terminal shall consist of a taper pointed aluminium rod, 16mm in diameter and 300mm in length. The rod shall be tapered to a sharp point and concentric on a centre line of the air terminal point. The distance of the taper shall be a minimum of 4 times the diameter of the rod. Air terminal bases shall adequately support the point and provide a strong secure continuous connection to the connecting conductor. The base shall be of aluminium of cast or stamped construction. Points shall be attached to the base by male threads to a female hub on the base. Fixing bolts and screws for the air terminal bases shall be of aluminium alloy or stainless steel. 49.4 AIR TERMINATION NETWORK Conductors shall be located along ridges, around the perimeter, behind or on top of parapets and across large open areas of the roof, as indicated in the Drawings. They shall be run parallel to the building lines in such a way as to join each air terminal to all the rest including those on projections above the roof, and form a closed network. For tile roofing, aluminium tape shall be secured by purpose made fasteners and not cement mortar. For metal roofing, aluminium tapes shall be secured by purpose-made fasteners and care must be taken not to puncture the metal roofing sheets. 49.5 JOINTS Joints in conductors shall be kept to a minimum and shall not be permitted without the permission of the SO Rep. Joints shall be both electrically and mechanically sound. Joints between aluminium strips shall be made by overlapping clean tinned joint faces and securing with a purpose-made bolted clamp. The length of the overlap shall not be less than 25mm. Alternatively, joints shall be made using welding process such as "Furseweld" exothermic powder ignition method or other approved. The welding process shall be carried out in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. For cross-over or T-joints, the aluminium strip conductors shall be secured using a purpose-made square tape clamp similar to Furse Cat No. CT005 or other approved. Joints between dissimilar metals shall be effected by bi-metallic joints as recommended in BS PD 6484 (commentary on corrosion at bi-metallic contacts and its alleviation).
Ugdg Spec TS 49-2/3
49.6
BONDING The Contractor shall bond all exposed metal work on the roof of the building to the air termination network. The metal work includes metal roofing, gutters, flashings, mast of CATV antenna, aviation obstruction light mast, catladders, etc. Bonding leads shall be of the same cross-sectional area as the roof conductors. Where dissimilar metals are in contact, the contractor shall take precautions to prevent electrolytic corrosion. Bonding shall be effected by means of purpose made bonding clamp complying to SS322 where applicable. For external facade which are metal cladded, the Contractor shall bond the metallic structure to the lightning protection system.
49.7
DOWN CONDUCTORS Down conductors shall be distributed round the outside walls of the building in the positions indicated on the Drawings or where specifically approved by the SO Rep. A down conductor shall follow the most direct path possible between the air termination and the earth termination. Each down conductor shall be connected by an earthing lead of copper tape of cross-sectional dimensions 25mm x 3mm to an earth electrode. The copper earthing lead of the down conductor shall be "ramset" to prevent unauthorised removal. In particular, all conductors below ground shall be copper tape. Appropriate copper or brass clips with base strips shall be used to fasten the copper strip conductor above ground. A bi-metallic aluminium/copper connector which is friction welded and designed for connecting the two dissimilar metals shall be provided for the connection of the aluminium down conductor to the copper earthing lead. The bi-metallic connector which also serves as a test link shall be located at a height of 2.5m above ground. Where recommended by the manufacturer, a non-water soluble, non-petroleum based polymer grease or inhibiting compound shall be used with the connector clamp to seal the electrical connections from the ingress of moisture and air.
49.8
EARTH ELECTRODE Each down conductor shall be separately connected to an earth electrode by an earth clamp complying with SS322. Each electrode shall consist of nominal 16mm diameter copper-weld, mild steel rods suitably coupled by a threaded bronze connector to form a continuous 3.6m length. All earth rods and earth electrode pit shall comply with the relevant parts of Clause 47.7 "Earthing System". Each electrode shall be driven into the ground by a suitable mechanical hammer as close as practicable to the bottom of the down conductor. During the driving process, the contractor shall fit an appropriate driving accessory in order to ensure that there is no damage to the top of the electrode.
49.9
COUPLING Rod section couplings shall be of bronze alloy. The coupling shall be of sufficient length to completely enclose the threads of two rods coupled together to protect them from damage and corrosion. Couplings shall be suitable for use on the earth electrodes, as recommended by the earth electrode manufacturer or otherwise approved by the SO Rep.
49.10
RESISTANCE TO EARTH The overall resistance to earth of the lightning protection system, before bonding to any metal services in or on the structure shall be less than 10 ohms. In addition, each earth termination which is not interconnected at or below ground level shall have a resistance to earth not exceeding 20 ohms.
Ugdg Spec TS 49-3/3
49.10
RESISTANCE TO EARTH (CONT'D) If it is not possible to achieve the 10 ohm overall resistance to earth or the 20 ohm resistance to earth requirement for each individual electrode, then the Contractor shall provide up to two additional earth electrodes per down conductor, at contractor's expense, to reduce the value of earth resistance. The additional earth electrode(s) shall then be connected to the first electrode with 25mm x 3mm copper strip buried at 450mm below ground level, and shall be complete with the necessary earthing clamp and earth inspection pit. Where more than one earth electrode per down conductor need to be installed then, where applicable, they shall be equally spaced at a horizontal distance of not less than the buried length, in a line parallel to the base of the structure.
49.11
COPPER CONDUCTOR The clauses in this Section are also applicable if copper conductors are used. The conductor shall be copper tape of dimensions 25mm x 3mm or stranded copper conductors of cross sectional area as indicated in the Drawings. All material used including joints and fastener shall be copper based and complying with SS CP 33.
49.12
LIGHTNING PROTECTION TO METALLIC ROOFING SYSTEM, WALL CLADDING AND METALLIC MOTIFS/RAILING For metallic roofing system or roof structure or wall cladding or metallic motifs or railing at the roof or envelope of the building, the whole metallic body and any individually isolated metallic parts shall be bonded to the main lightning protection system to comply with or otherwise satisfy the lightning protection requirements specified in Singapore Standard CP33. The design (where applicable), manufacture and installation of these metallic bodies or parts shall be carried out judiciously such as to ensure the electrical continuity of the whole metallic roofing system or structure or wall cladding or motifs by proper connections/joints and maintain its warranty. An adequate number of accessible bonding points shall be provided and connected to the main lightning protection system. Upon Substantial Completion, the Contractor shall submit to the SO Rep detailed drawings showing the metallic roofing or structure or wall cladding or motif and the bonding to the main lightning protection system.
49.13
APPROVAL OF ITEMS Earth rod clamp, pipe bonding clamp and earth rod coupling shall be approved under PLS Class 2 or other approved equivalent. The approval for earth rod and earth inspection pit shall comply with the relevant clauses and subclauses specified in Section 47.7 Earthing System.
SECTION 50/...
50.0 50.1
MATV INSTALLATIONS GENERAL The MATV installation shall comply with all statutory rules and regulations of the Info-communications Development Authority of Singapore (IDA), Media Development Authority (MDA), Government Authorities, Statutory Authorities, current at the date of submission of the Tender and to the complete satisfaction of the SO Rep. The Contractor shall divert, relocate, reposition, reinstate, re-calibrate, re-test, re-commission and make good all parts of the MATV system at locations directly affected by the Works or indirectly due to the effects (eg, poor reception) of Works under the Contract (eg, addition/relocation of lift shafts, addition of pitched roof) or latest statutory requirements. All Works shall be executed to the complete satisfaction of the SO Rep. Minor design modification may be acceptable if it is justified and approved by the SO Rep. All the reinstatement works shall be carried out to the satisfaction of the SO Rep.
50.2
MATV SYSTEM AT ROOF TOP The Contractor shall make readjustment, reposition the existing MATV antenna, amplifier, surge diverter box and other part of the installation, which is on, in, obstructed by or near the affected area such as roofing work, extension of lift motor room, relocation of consumer switch room, erection of new roof structures, and etc. The Contractor shall also check and to lower the mounting height of the existing MATV antenna to comply with the maximum allowable building height limit set by relevant authorities. If the reception signal is affected by the lowering of the antenna, the existing antenna shall be relocated to a lower ground on the roof or to be wall mounted. The Contractor shall be deemed to have allowed for all costs and expenses in the Contract Sum for complying with the requirements of this clause. The contractor shall provide underground linking between blocks all at his own costs, if the re-location of the antennae cannot achieve a satisfactory TV reception.
50.2.1
Reposition/Reinstatement and Alteration of Antennas/Equipment/Accessories Before the roofing work commence, the Contractor shall reposition the existing antennas/masts to a suitable location which will not obstruct the Work. However, if the new location does not provide satisfactory TV reception, TV signals shall be tapped from the neighbouring block by temporary overhead cables and the SO Reps approval must first be sought. Subsequently the Contractor shall follow up and submit proposal to lay permanent MATV underground or surface linking cables to the neighbouring block for SO Reps approval before commencing the installation work. The Contractor shall remove the temporary overhead cable once the installation of the linking cables are completed. The Contractor shall be deemed to have allowed for all costs and expenses in the Contract Sum for complying with the requirements of this clause. When the existing antenna is required to be relocated to a new mounting, the contractor shall engage a PE (C&S) to ensure the mounting integrity of the antenna system. The contractor shall search for a suitable location, which could provide satisfactory TV reception. The Contractor shall submit the PEs (C&S) endorsement on the mounting integrity of the antenna system and the as-built overall height of the antenna to the Consultant for verification before submission to the respective Branch Office for record. Provision of opening and the mounting of the antennae system shall be provided by the contractor at their own cost. The contractor also shall check and ensure that the overall height of the antenna mounted does not exceed the maximum allowable height limit set by the relevant authorities. If necessary, the Contractor is to provide with a new set of antenna system or to run linking cable from a nearby block. The Contractor shall be deemed to have allowed for all costs and expenses in the Contract Sum for complying with the requirements of this clause. The Contractor shall construct proper shelter (of approved designed) for the amplifier and surge diverter box at new location. The Contractor shall be deemed to have allowed for all costs and expenses in the Contract Sum for complying with the requirements of this clause. Where the guy wires are removed, they shall not be hung on the TV antenna. An alternative support for the antenna masts shall be provided. The Contractor may secure the masts with steel wires and fasten them to the barricade posts. The Contractor shall be deemed to have allowed for all costs and expenses in the Contract Sum for complying with the requirements of this clause.
Ugdg Spec TS 50-2/6 50.2.1 Reposition/Reinstatement and Alteration of Antennas/Equipment/Accessories (Cont'd) The Contractor shall protect all the MATV cables by using PVC conduit/PVC trunking at their own cost so as to prevent it from being accidentally damaged by other upgrading work. The repositioning and/or alteration of the MATV equipment/antennas etc shall be carried out within the same day and that the MATV system shall resume functioning by 5:30 p.m. on the same day. The Contractor shall provide the power points for the temporary installation of all MATV equipment. The Contractor shall arrange with the SO Rep to check the TV reception for acceptance after reposition and/or alteration of antennae/masts. The Contractor shall be deemed to have allowed for all costs and expenses in the Contract Sum for complying with the requirements of this clause.
The Contractor shall provide all accessories and materials (including amplifier box, booster amplifiers, 7way mixers with adjustable attenuators, tees, splitters, etc) that are required for the temporary as well as the permanent reinstatement of the existing MATV system. If the Works cause the existing amplifiers cannot be reinstated at its original location, thus causing a drop in signal strength to some of the trunk lines, the Contractor shall provide all the necessary equipment and accessories including the power points at their own cost. The contractor shall seek the permission of the appropriate Branch Office at least 5 days in advance for any works that affected the reception signal of the MATV system. 50.2.2 Notification to the Residents The Contractor shall liaise with the site office and Branch Office concerned and send letters to all residents of the blocks affected by the repositioning of antennae/masts. The letter shall be in 4 languages informing them on the period date/time when the TV reception will be disrupted. 50.2.3 MATV Conduits and Accessories Prior to removal of the existing roof tiles or secondary roof, the Contractor shall inform the appropriate Branch Office, if the rooftop MATV conduits and accessories are required to be raised, replaced or diverted. During the process of removing the roof tiles or secondary roof, the Contractor shall ensure that the existing MATV conduit pipes are firmly supported. Upon removal of the roof tiles or secondary roof, the Contractor shall raise (if necessary) the conduits or repair/replace the corroded or broken conduits, accessories and any other items found below the secondary roof before waterproofing work commences. The Contractor shall be deemed to have allowed for all costs and expenses in the Contract Sum for complying with the requirements of this clause. If the Contractor fails to abide by the above, he shall carry out all rectification works to the MATV conduits and accessories and roof waterproofing system all at his own costs should there be consequent complaints of water leakage arising due to broken or corroded MATV conduit pipe and accessories not repaired/replaced before the weatherproofing. As far as possible, ramps or other means shall be provided to prevent the MATV conduit pipes from being accidentally damaged by the upgrading works. All the damaged conduits, splitter/tee boxes, cables and accessories shall be replaced by materials listed in HDBs List of Products and Suppliers. The conduits, splitter and tee boxes shall be painted with one coat of approved primer and one coat of approved aluminium paint after the installation is completed. PVC or metal supports for the MATV conduit pipes shall not be removed or bent during the execution of the Works. The Contractor shall bear all costs and charges for repair and reinstatement work arising as a result of his failure to abide by the above-mentioned requirements and shall indemnify the Employer against all liabilities in the execution of the Works. The Contractor shall arrange with the appropriate Branch Office for inspection upon Substantial Completion of Works.
Ugdg Spec TS 50-3/6 50.2.4 AC Power Supply During the entire period of the work, the Contractor shall check daily and ensure that the power supply to the amplifier box is not switch off before they leave the site. A separate main switch (MCCB) shall be provided for the power supply to the temporary MATV equipment. The main switch shall be clearly labelled in both English and Chinese Languages with the following: DO NOT SWITCH OFF, 24 HOURS SUPPLY REQUIRED FOR CATV EQUIPMENT. For the permanent relocation and/or reinstatement of equipment, the Contractor shall provide one number of non-ELCB protected power points with a lockable metal enclosure and install it beside the MATV amplifier box. Approved plastic warning labels with Non-ELCB protected power supply shall be provided on the metal enclosures and amplifier box(es). The actual position of power points shall be determined on site and approved by the SO Rep. 50.2.5 MATV Internal wirings The Contractor shall make provisions and allow in the Contract Sum for the diversion of all existing MATV internal wiring including conduits, trunkings, cables and TV points that may be affected by the works within the units. 50.2.6 MATV Underground Cables The Contractor shall make provisions and allow in the Contract Sum for the temporary and permanent diversion of all existing MATV underground cables to new locations that may be affected by the precinct works. Temporary overhead cables are allowed for the tapping of TV signal between blocks where the existing underground cables are affected by the precinct works. The Contractor shall submit proposal for the permanent MATV underground cable installation to the SO Rep for approval. 50.2.7 Installation Of TV Point(s) For Additional Unit(s) The Contractor shall engage SCV to provide the TV point(s) for the additional unit(s), as a result from the conversion of void deck space to residential unit(s), RC Centre or shop(s). If SCV signal is not available at the block during the contract period, TV point(s) shall be tapped from the MATV system. TV point(s) shall be provided to the following additional unit(s), even if it is not stated in the drawings : Eating House/Food Court (2 nos.) Kindergarten/Child Care Centre (2 nos.) Senior Citizens Home/Home for the Age (2 nos.) Recreation Hall (2 nos.) Community Centre (2 nos.) CD Shelter (2 nos.) Shops (1 no.) RC Centre (1 no.) Residential unit(s) (same number of point as the existing unit of the same block) 50.2.8 Installation of SCV point for Space Adding Item (SAI) The Contractor shall install one TV point (c/w isolator and outlet) at the SAI including co-axial cable, connectors, PVC trunkings, conduits, boring of openings and all necessary accessories to the nearest SCV splitter box or tee box at the common area outside each unit. Separate openings at the SAI are required to separate electrical cable, telephone cable and co-axial cables. The electrical cables and the telephone cable shall not be in contact with the coaxial cable in the PVC trunking. In case of crossing between various cables, the Contractor shall provide PVC bridge/separator approved by the SO Rep to separate the co-axial cable. The Contractor is required to follow work procedures given by the SO Rep and may require to notify all residents of the blocks affected regarding the period date/time of the installation and commissioning.
Ugdg Spec TS 50-4/6 50.2.8.1 Coaxial Cable For Service Drops (i) The cables used for the SCV point shall comply with the following requirements : Construction Dielectric Nominal impedance Nominal attenuation Structural Return Loss Screening factor Nominal Velocity of Propagation (ii) (iii) : : : : : : : Coaxial Type Gas expanded Foam Polyethylene 75 5 (5-824 MHz) less than 20 dB/100m (5-824 MHz) At least 20dB (5-824 MHz) At least 80dB At least 82%
The centre conductor shall be copper-clad steel or equivalent. The outer conductor (shield) shall comprise at least an inner shield of polypropylene laminated tape, with overlap, bonded to dielectric, and an outer shield comprising of a layer of braid wire of 90% coverage. The characteristics of the cable shall be non-deteriorating during its normal life span, that is, it shall be ageing resistant. The PVC material used for the outer sheath (Jacket) shall be anti-migrating and the shrinkage shall be less than 9.5mm after tested for jacket longitudinal shrinkage The dielectric strength between the conductors shall not breakdown, which shall withstand up to 1kVac for 1 minute at 50Hz. Leakage current flowing through the Jacket shall be less than 10mA at 1.5kVac at 50 Hz for 90 seconds. The minimum insulation resistance shall be 1524 M-km. All coaxial cable for service drops shall pass Type and Batch Tests. Type test reports issued by the following third party certified laboratories are acceptable: PSB and their Memorandum of Understanding (MOU) partners; Laboratories with SAC-SINGLAS accredition; Laboratories with SAC-SINGLAS-MRA(Mutual Recognition Agreement) partners accredition; Laboratories participating in IECEE CB (Certification Body) Scheme. The maximum height of damage shall be 244cm when the cables are tested to vertical-tray test of UL 1581. All coaxial cable for service drops shall bear the PSB Test Mark or other approved equivalent
(iv)
(v) (vi) (vii) (viii)
(ix)
50.2.8.2
The Subscriber's Outlet (Isolator/Box) (a) All outlets shall pass Type and Batch Tests. Type test reports issued by the following third party certified laboratories are acceptable: PSB and their Memorandum of Understanding (MOU) partners; Laboratories with SAC-SINGLAS accredition; Laboratories with SAC-SINGLAS-MRA(Mutual Recognition Agreement) partners accredition; Laboratories participating in IECEE CB (Certification Body) Scheme. All outlets shall bear the PSB Test Mark or other approved equivalent. (b) The TV/FM front plate of the isolators shall be made of white polycarbonate, urea or other material approved by the SO Rep and match the colour of the electrical/telecoms outlets and having the same brand/finishes. The polycarbonate, urea or other approval material shall be UV stabilised and shall not discolour within the Defects Liability Period even if the outlet is exposed to sunlight. Both the isolator box and the cover plate shall not emit toxic fumes or support combustion when burnt. The flame shall extinguish as soon as the flame is withdrawn. The printed board shall be fibreglass type. It shall be 'masked', 'tin-resisted'. The isolator shall be clearly and indelibly marked with: Manufacturer's name, trade mark, or identification; Manufacturer's model or type reference
(c) (d) (e)
Ugdg Spec TS 50-5/6 50.2.8.2 The Subscriber's Outlet (Isolator/Box) (Cont'd) (f) The isolator shall be clearly and indelibly engraved on as TV and FM on the front to indicate the television and FM radio ports. It is preferred that the markings be made below the ports. Separate ports shall be provided for TV and FM receptions. The spacing between the ports shall preferably be 25.4mm. The two ports are preferably to be horizontally positioned. The isolator shall be capable of accepting coaxial cables having "F" type connector. The isolator shall be designed to operate in both the VHF and UHF bands. The isolator of both the TV and FM ports shall have 75 (nominal) impedance. It shall have a frequency range of 5 to 860 MHz. Its electrical performance shall comply with the requirements as stated in Table 1. Table 1 Insert Loss Type Description TV 1 TV & 1 FM Socket FM Mutual Attenuation Between TV & FM Sockets of Same Isolator
(g)
(h) (i) (j)
Return Loss at Input & Output
Isolator
VHF < 1.5 dB UHF < 2 dB
10 dB
> 10 dB
VHF 17 dB UHF 12 dB
(k)
The electrical performance shall also comply with the requirements as stated in Table 1 above over the temperature range of 20C to 40C. For safety isolation, isolating transformer or blocking capacitors, shall be provided at the centre conductor. The socket isolator shall be proof against humid conditions, ie. relative humidity between 91% to 95%, with the temperature of the air at 40C 2C, which may occur in normal applications. Under such conditions, the isolator shall show no damage. The insulation resistance between the isolator plate and each conductor of the socket isolator shall be more than 5 M at 500V DC for the duration of 1 minute in accordance with SS 255:1981. Every isolator unit shall be capable of withstanding a voltage of 2 kV of approximately sine wave form a frequency of approximately 50 Hz applied for one minute. The cut-off current shall not be more than 5mA. No flashover or breakdown shall occur during the test. The isolator shall include the required safety isolator, and shall be constructed and installed so as to maintain shielding (screening) integrity and moisture sealing of the connector ports. The isolator shall utilise female F type connectors for TV and FM ports. The isolators shall have a minimum of 60 dB RF shielding (screening), the shielding effectiveness test should cover the range of 55MHz, 200MHz, 400MHz, 600MHz and 750MHz, when measured in accordance with BS EN 500832:1995 Part 2 "Electromagnetic Compatibility for Equipment". The quality and workmanship of the isolator shall be acceptable to the SO Rep.
(l)
(m)
(n)
(o)
(p)
(q)
Ugdg Spec TS 50-6/6 50.2.8.3 RF Cable Connectors
50.2.8.3.1 Trunk Connector (a) The construction shall be : Heavy duty, alloy aluminium construction, superior alloy for corrosion resistance or other approved type; Ultra Violet Resistant O-rings; Contacts : Brass with Brite Nickel Plate for long life impervious to ageing and extreme environmental conditions or other approved type; Withstands minimum 40 PSIG pressurisation. (b) (c) (d) The nominal impedance shall be 75 2. The Return Loss should be better than -30dB up to 824 MHz. At extreme temperatures (-40C to +60C) high RF integrity maintained, with shielding effectiveness better than 80dB. Connector Holding Power maintained over the full temperature range, without damage to cable. Positive weather seal with controlled O-Ring compression. Each connector individually stamped to identify connector size and type.
(e) (f) (g)
50.2.8.3.2 Drop Connector (a) The construction shall be : High quality brass or equivalent; Cadmium plated with iridescent chromate coating for maximum corrosion resistance or equivalent; Ultra Violet Resistant plastic and O-rings providing a reliable environmentally sealed product; Contacts : Long life impervious to ageing and extreme environmental conditions. (b) (c) (d) (e) (f) The nominal impedance shall be 75 2. The Return Loss shall be better than -20dB up to 824 MHz. The shielding effectiveness better than 80dB. Connector to cable retention 40 pounds minimum. F-nuts/connectors shall be of the long-sleeve type, snap-and-seal or 360 full compression connectors shall be used. The Contractor shall use the specially designed tool to clamp the Fnuts/connectors. Each connector individually stamped to identify connector size and type.
(g) 50.2.9
Testing and Inspection The Contractor shall arrange with the SO Rep/Consultant and the respective Branch Office for testing after the reinstatement work is completed. The repositioning and reinstatement work shall be considered as completed if the TV reception and workmanship are both satisfactory as determined by the SO Rep/ Consultant and the respective Branch Office. SECTION 51/...
SECTION 51
51.0
SETTING OUT, EXCAVATION AND DRAINLAYING
51.1 51.1.1
SURVEY OF WORKS Setting Out of Entire Works The Contractor shall engage a Registered Surveyor at his own cost and expense to set out the entire Works. Relevant bench marks, traverses and co-ordinates will be provided by the Superintending Officer's Representative to facilitate setting out. The Contractor shall be held fully responsible for the accuracy of such setting out. The Contractor shall submit the following documents to the Superintending Officer's Representative three(3) weeks upon completion of the above survey : (i) Setting out computation plan of layout of blocks, MSCP, ESS, linkbuilding and all other new structures. All computation involved in the layout including co-ordinates are to be submitted. All setting out drawings showing the azimuth adopted, setting out ties to all new structures, piling block dimensions, sewer manhole position and service road alignment.
(ii)
51.1.2
Reserved
51.2
DRAINAGE DEPARTMENT'S REQUIREMENTS ON SITE CONTROL The Contractor shall comply with the following site control requirements by the Drainage Department, Public Utilities Board. (a) Submitting all proposals for temporary drains and silt control measures to the Head, Drainage Department for approval before commencement of the Works; Providing adequate silt-control facilities including lined temporary perimeter drains, close turfing on both sides of the perimeter drains, silt-trapping devices, turfing, wash-bays incorporating proper discharge outlets, etc. to control silt and mud from the site to enter the drains;
(b)
51.2
DRAINAGE DEPARTMENT'S REQUIREMENTS ON SITE CONTROL (CONT'D) (c) Maintaining regularly all such silt-control facilities to ensure their effectiveness and desilting all affected drains until completion of the Works; Ensuring that the execution of the Works shall not disrupt, fill, block or disturb the existing overland flow, existing drains, temporary diversion drains or perimeter cut-off drains; Ensuring that runoff within, upstream of and adjacent to the site can be effectively drained away without causing flooding within the site or in areas outside the site; Ensuring that discharge consequent to de-watering from basement or trench excavation is channelled into silt trapping devices before reaching existing drains; Implementing adequate measures, including the provision of proper barricades between the work areas and existing drains, to ensure that construction materials are not discharged or washed into the drains.
(d)
(e)
(f)
(g)
The Contractor shall be responsible for designing and implementing at its own cost and expense, any additional or more stringent measures as may be necessary to achieve satisfactory site control standards as required by the Drainage Department, Public Utilities Board on surface water drainage.
51.3
EROSION AND SILT CONTROL MEASURES The Contractor shall not allow and be responsible for preventing silt from being washed into drains and canals. The Contractor shall comply with the following requirements strictly : (a) Treatment Of Silt-Laden Water Ensure that silt-laden water is not discharged directly or by pumping into drains or canals. The siltladen water shall be channelled to silt traps, sedimentation tanks or other measures for removal of silt before discharging into drains or canals. (b) Provision Of Silt Traps And Perimeter Cut-Off Drains (i) Silt traps, perimeter cut-off drains and other facilities shall be provided to ensure that earth, silt, mud, etc are not discharged into drains or canals. Details of these facilities shall be duly designed and endorsed by a Professional Engineer. These facilities shall be constructed before the commencement of the Works. Silt traps, perimeter cut-off drains and other facilities shall be desilted and maintained at least once a week or more often if necessary to effectively prevent the discharge of silt from the Site.
(ii)
(c)
Protection Of Exposed Earth Surfaces Provide and carry out close turfing promptly to prevent soil erosion at site. All exposed earth surfaces not affected by construction activities shall be planted with turfing on an immediate basis. Where necessary to prevent soil erosion, the Contractor shall also carry out progressive turfing on site. In cases where turfing is not practical or not effective in protecting exposed earth surfaces which are left bare and undisturbed for more than one month, such surfaces shall be protected from soil erosion by spraying with bitumen based emulsion or other effective methods to be approved by the SO Rep. Notwithstanding the approval of the SO Rep, the Contractor shall ensure that the methods are effective in the prevention of soil erosion.
51.3
EROSION AND SILT CONTROL MEASURES (CONT'D) (d) Excavated Material (i) All surplus excavated materials shall be carted away to the disposal ground immediately. The surplus excavated material shall not be stockpiled on the Site. Earth materials stockpiled on site for construction work shall be within properly contained areas and covered to prevent the earth from washing into drains or canals. The locations for stockpiling the earth shall be subject to approval by the SO Rep. Notwithstanding the approval of the SO Rep, the Contractor shall ensure that earth is not washed into drains or canals. The Contractor shall only carry out trench excavation work provided the rate of construction keeps pace with the rate of excavation.
(ii)
(iii)
(e)
Treatment Of Mud Slurry Check and ensure that mud slurry from drilling, tunnelling, diaphragm wall construction and jet grouting, etc, are not discharged into drains or canals.
51.4
SURFACE EXCAVATION The Contractor shall grub up and clear all shrubs, vegetable matter, bushes, roots and other obstructions encountered on Site. No tree shall be removed without written permission from the SO Rep. Any top soil which covers the site shall be carefully scraped and piled up at a suitable location, with the use of mechanical or manual labour, for subsequent use in turfing or tree planting. The Contractor shall salvage whatever existing top soil there is on Site, failing which he shall be liable to reimburse the Employer for the loss. No top soil shall be removed from the Site without the permission of the SO Rep.
51.5
SITE LEVEL FORMATION The proposed levels of the building or other structures platforms and open areas in the Works are indicated in the Drawings and these platform levels shall be prepared by the Contractor. The Contractor shall allow in the Contract Sum for earth cutting or earth filling to make up to the stated proposed levels.
51.6
EXCAVATION GENERALLY Visit and examine the Site carefully and ascertain the nature thereof and the kind of materials to be excavated, and make provision in the Contract Sum to cover for the types of materials to be excavated. Prior to commencement of excavation, the Contractor shall carry out pre-construction survey of the neighbouring properties and comply with the requirements of BCA. The Contractor shall set out the lines and structures for the inspection and approval of the SO Rep. Original ground levels shall also be taken and submitted to the SO Rep for record. For excavation, the Contractor shall comply fully with the relevant provisions of the Telecommunications Act 2000, the Public Utilities Act, the Factories Act 1998 and the Factories Building Operations and Works of Engineering Construction Regulations 2005 or any amendment or re-enactment thereof. The Contractor shall not be allowed to make any extra claim for work or cost and expenses incurred in complying with the requirements of this subclause. Excavation shall be carried out neatly in accordance with the Drawings in whatsoever material may be found, including hard rock or other hard material which requires breaking up by pneumatic drills and the excavated materials shall be used as filling if required. Any surplus excavated materials may be spread or dumped within the Site of the Works if required by the SO Rep. Alternatively, dispose off any surplus material and if so required, provide lorries for transport and make all necessary arrangements for use of an approved dumping ground and bear all costs and expenses in connection with the use thereof. Do not deposit excavated materials on private land unless written permission of both the owner and occupier of the land are submitted to the SO Rep.
51.6
EXCAVATION GENERALLY (CONT'D) Unless decided by the SO Rep, surplus excavated materials shall not become the property of the Contractor and it shall not be construed that he has the right of ownership of them. Carry out excavations by any suitable methods but subject to the approval of the SO Rep. The excavated materials may temporarily during the course of the Works be tipped on either side of the excavations only where sufficient space is available without causing obstructions and shall not be tipped nearer to the excavation than a distance equal to the depth of the excavation where the soil condition is poor. The SO Rep may prescribe and limit the lengths and/or widths and/or depths of excavation to be proceeded with at one time. Excavation shall not be carried down in the first instance to a depth nearer than 150mm to formation level. The bottoming-up to formation shall be done by hand immediately in advance of placing hardcore, concrete or pipe laying unless directed otherwise by the SO Rep. Also take such steps as are necessary, in the opinion of the SO Rep, to prevent damage to the formation owing to exposure to the atmosphere and the trampling of the formation by workmen. Where, in the opinion of the SO Rep the formation is softened or spoilt, the soft or spoilt areas shall be excavated and filled with Grade 15 concrete. Cut pipe trenches to a sufficient width to receive and allow the pipes to be easily and properly jointed, but subject to the foregoing requirements, keep to the minimum practicable width. The trench width may also be reduced at or about the pipe soffit level in order to reduce the formation width. Do not construct Permanent Works in any excavation until the excavation has been approved. Form the entire excavation and leave complete and as accurate to the widths, levels, contours and slopes as possible or as otherwise directed.
51.7
EXCAVATION IN ROCK Remove any rock or boulders met with in excavation to the required depths by wedging, blasting or other means as directed. When blasting is required, obtain prior permission in writing from the SO Rep. Comply with the Local Laws and Regulations and any requirements imposed by the relevant Authorities with regard to blasting operations. The Contractor shall be required to submit the blasting proposal to the SO Rep for approval. The following information shall be required on all the blasting Works : (a) (b) (c) (d) (e) (f) blasting method, method statement and special techniques; vibration control and measurement; average depth, diameter and spacing of the boreholes; drilling and blasting programme; safety control measures; and over excavation and remedial measures.
Over excavation by blasting method shall not exceed 1.0 metre unless otherwise specified or directed by SO Rep. The Contractor shall make good all the over excavation to the required formation level and shape as directed by SO Rep. The cost and expense of such Works shall be borne by the Contractor.
51.7
EXCAVATION IN ROCK (CONT'D) The SO Rep must be fully informed as to the steps and precautionary measures taken to safeguard the surrounding properties. Be liable for any accident, damage or injury to any person, property or thing, resulting from the use of explosives. Prior to the start of blasting operations and in the presence of the SO Rep, conduct a survey of all structures within 120m of the site where blasting is proposed, and any other structures which the SO Rep considers may be affected, in order to determine the existing or preblast condition of these structures. Prior to commencing blasting operations, a written report, supported by photographs where necessary, listing any existing defects in the structures, shall be submitted to the SO Rep. When blasting operation are being carried out, any road affected shall be closed to traffic and the appropriate signs erected.
51.8
ERRORS IN EXCAVATION Excavate to such depths only as shown on the Drawings or as directed. Any excavation done to a greater depth than is necessary for execution of the Works shall be filled with concrete of such proportions or with such compacted material to the required formation levels as directed. The cost and expense of such Works shall be borne by the Contractor.
51.9
EXCAVATION FOR PILE CAPS The Contractor shall excavate for pile caps and complete excavation expeditiously after the piling contractor has cut off excess length of piles. The Contractor shall take care and precaution to avoid damaging or displacing the piles and the Contractor shall be held fully responsible for any damage or displacement to piles in the excavation pits. Any water accumulating in excavated pits shall be pumped dry to facilitate construction of pile caps.
51.10
TEMPORARY COVERS Prior to excavation for footing foundations, temporary covers may be erected over the area to be excavated to prevent rainwater from getting into the excavations. When such temporary covers are instructed to be erected by the SO Rep, they will be paid for as a variation.
51.11
KEEPING EXCAVATIONS DRY The whole of the excavations shall be kept free from water arising from rain, drains, floods or other causes by pumping, bailing, drainage or other means. Should any water get into the excavations, the Contractor shall remove such water, excavate the affected wet soil and fill up the excess excavation with Grade 15 concrete, all at his own cost and expense and to the satisfaction of the SO Rep.
51.12
BACKFILLING The Contractor shall backfill with selected excavated material around foundation excavations, etc up to the required level in layers not exceeding 300mm thick or in such layers as directed and carefully ram and consolidate.
51.13
DISPOSAL OF SURPLUS EXCAVATED MATERIAL The Contractor shall allow for spreading and levelling on site or transporting off the site all surplus excavated material which remains after completion of backfilling and compaction of excavations, including the surplus excavated material left by the services departments of the relevant local authorities.
51.14
PLANKING AND STRUTTING The term "planking and strutting" shall be deemed to cover whatever method the Contractor adopts to uphold the sides of excavations to prevent damage to adjoining properties, earth movement and injury to workmen. The Contractor shall be held responsible for upholding the sides of all excavations and shall provide all planking and strutting to the satisfaction of the SO Rep. Such planking and strutting shall be designed and supervised by the Contractor's PE.
51.15
PRE-TREATMENT OF SOIL FOR PROTECTION OF BUILDINGS AGAINST SUBTERRANEAN TERMITES Over-Riding Clause The Contractor and his Pest Control Operator (hereinafter referred to as the Specialist), executing the Works as required in this Clause including sub-clause have to ensure that the Works, goods or materials used shall be suitable and reasonably fit for the purposes for which they are required (hereinafter referred to as the Performance Requirement). In the event the Works, goods or materials to be used as specified in this Clause including sub-clauses are upgraded in order to meet the Performance Requirement, the Contractor and his Specialist shall do all necessary upgrading at no extra cost to the Employer, subject always to the approval of the SO Rep, but such approval shall not in any way affect the Contractors and his Specialists duties and obligations arising under the Contract.
51.15.1
51.15.2
Scope Of Work Chemically pre-treat the soil for the protection of buildings against subterranean termites for stand-alone electrical substations and stand-alone dustbin compounds. Unless otherwise specified, the areas to be chemically treated shall include: (a) The entire ground floor slab area or part thereof, as directed by the SO Rep, prior to the laying of any concrete floor slab. The areas surrounding all sides of column stumps. All round the building perimeter or part thereof, as directed by the SO Rep, prior to concreting any apron area where applicable. The width of the treatment shall follow the perimeter defined by the apron slab but shall not exceed 2.0 metre in width.
(b) (c)
The Contractor shall comply with all the requirements of the National Environment Agency (NEA) pertaining to such soil treatment work and such compliance shall form part of the Scope of Work. The Contractor shall also comply with the requirements specified in the Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS), product labels and instructional materials supplied by the chemical and equipment manufacturers or their licensed representatives. In addition, the Contractor shall submit a detailed Work Method statement, stipulating the strategic work processes control and personnel responsible etc., to the SO Rep for approval prior to commencement of such Works. 51.15.3 Chemical To Be Used And Rate Of Application All chemicals to be used for the pre-treatment of the soil shall be those approved by the National Environment Agency (NEA). The Contractor may propose either one of the following chemicals listed in the table below: Chemical Fipronil Application Rate An aqueous emulsified concentrate having an active ingredient (A.l) concentration of not less than 3 g of 2 Fipronil per m (i.e. 125 ml of Agenda 25 EC or equivalent per m2 ) An aqueous suspension concentrate having an active ingredient (A.I) concentration of not less than 2.5 g of Imidaclopid per m2 (i.e. 12.5 ml of Premise 200SC 2 or equivalent per m ) For Works Which Are
Within or outside water catchment areas
Imidacloprid
No other application rate shall be permitted.
51.15.3
Chemical To Be Used And Rate Of Application (Cont'd) The chemical shall be applied uniformly over the area to be treated. The dilution rate of these chemicals must be in accordance with the labelled rates as stipulated on the labels and/or in accordance with the chemical manufacturers (or their representatives) published recommendations and within National Environment Agency (NEA) guidelines. No other dilution rates will be permitted. At the start of each treatment, the Contractor shall proposed to the SO Rep the size and the location to be treated. The Contractor will conduct all the calculations required to ensure accurate application and dilution rates for the termiticide and submit to the SO Rep prior to its application on the Site. The SO Rep shall be informed for all dilution and mixing procedure by the Contractor. The Contractor shall mix/dilute the exact amount to be used on the Site. No premixing will be permitted. No mixing offsite prior to its use on the Site will be allowed. All chemicals mixed on the Site MUST be completely used on the Site. No chemical mixed for use on the Site will be permitted to be removed or disposed off without the approval of the SO Rep. The total volume of flow of diluted chemical termiticide used will be measured/ metered using a Flow Meter. Other methods for measuring the flow of chemicals will not be permitted. The Contractor shall submit the Specialist report to the SO Rep on the Application rate and Dilution rate of the chemicals at the end of each site treatment and/or as directed by the SO Rep. The Report shall contain the following information: Date of Application Amount of Area Treated Amount of Concentrate Termiticide used Amount of Diluted Chemical used Amount of Diluted Chemical unused after the treatment DD/MM/YYYY XX.XX m2 XX.XX Litres XX.XX Litres XX.XX Litres
This report must be verified and signed by the SO Rep at the end of each treatment.
51.15.4
Chemical Preparation Preparation of the chemicals shall be conducted in strict accordance with the Material Safety Data Sheets and the Product Labels. All necessary Personal Protective Equipment (PPE) required for the chemical preparation and the PPE required for the site will be used at all times. Contractors should also ensure that the instructions on handling of the chemicals for the following procedures are in accordance with the published safely information. A declaration document on these safety procedures on handling of chemicals shall also be submitted to the SO Rep for approval prior to the commencement of such Works: o o o o o o o o o Washing of Hands Washing of equipment used Calibration of equipment used on site Pre-Application Checklist Mixing procedure Dilution procedure Amount of diluents used Type of diluents used All PPE required for the works to be carried out.
No work shall comence without these procedures and safety documentations submitted to the SO Rep.
51.15.5
Time of Application Treatment shall be carried out immediately before the lean concreting of the floor slabs and apron areas. Soil treatment shall not be carried out when the soil is saturated, eg. during or immediately after rainfall.
51.15.5
Time of Application (Cont'd) Verify the ground water table before soil treatmentis conducted. For this purpose, the Contractor shall at his own cost and expense, excavate trial holes of more than 0.5m deep measured from the level of the soil to be treated. The Contractor shall submit a report on the ground water table to the SO Rep prior to commencing the soil treatment. As required by National Environment Agency (NEA), soil treatment shall not be carried out if the ground water table is 0.5m or less below the level of the soil to be treated, and in such event the Employer is entitled to recover from the Contractor the value of work so omitted by way of a variation order. The variation order shall be priced based on the applicable or analogous or prorated rates in the Rates times the untreated area measured flat on plan. Notwithstanding such cost recovery, the Contractor is deemed to have allowed in the Contract Sum for the provision of warranty for the work and the cost recovery shall not absolve the Contractor from his responsibilities to rectify future occurrence of Defect in respect of the work under the warranty. The restriction to soil treatment by virtue of compliance with National Environment Agency (NEA)'s requirements shall not in any way affect or diminish the Contractors responsibilities under the warranty. Provided always that in the event chemical pre-treatment of the soil for the protection of buildings against subterranean termites is omitted altogether from the Scope of Work for a building block either on account of National Environment Agency (NEA)'s requirements or by reason of an Authorisation Order, then the provision of a warranty for the chemical pre-treatment of the soil for that building block shall be deemed to be waived by the Employer.
51.15.6
Application Procedure Immediately after the soil treatment is completed, the treated soil shall be securely covered with black polythene sheet. A layer of lean concreting shall be cast on top of the polythene sheet. When it rains during the course of soil treatment, all treated soil shall be covered immediately with black polythene sheet. The coverage shall extend one (1) metre into the untreated areas. The polythene sheet, especially their overlapping parts, shall be properly secured by heavy objects to ensure that all rain water runs into the surrounding temporary drains.
51.15.7
Application Equipment All equipment used in soil treatment shall be in good order and in serviceable condition. A list of all equipment to be used on the Site shall be provided to the SO Rep. Also all these equipment must be accompanied with last service date records prior to their use on the Site.
51.15.8
Provision Of Temporary Drainage Temporary drainage of adequate capacity shall be provided around the whole area to be treated with an outlet connected to a sump.
51.15.9
Quality Control Sampling To verify the concentration of the chemical used, one (1) sample of the chemical shall be taken randomly on each day of application as directed by the SO Rep and stored in a one (1) litre container, properly marked with the date and location of the sample taken. The samples taken shall be kept under lock and at a cool and dry location in the SO Rep room, for a period of not more than seven (7) calender days. The keys shall be kept by the SO Rep. For every 3 samples taken on a per building block basis, the SO Rep shall randomly select one of the samples for concentration test at an accredited/approved laboratory. The Contractor shall provide at his own cost and expense containers of one litre capacity for the collection of the samples. The sample container must be able to protect its contents against Ultra Violet Light
51.15.10
Administrative Charge For Failure Of Test On Chemical Concentration/Excessively High In Chemical Concentration The SO Rep shall exercise his rights under Clause 1.10 Nuisance and Irregularities to impose charges against the Contractor for each sample that fails to attain the required exact concentration as specified in the foregoing requirement in the subclause Chemical To Be Used And Rate Of Application. In addition to the charges, the Contractor shall re-treat the part of the work represented by the failed sample.
51.15.10
Administrative Charge For Failure Of Test On Chemical Concentration/Excessively High In Chemical Concentration (Cont'd) If each and every sample concentration equal or exceeds 25g /l or 2.9% w/w for Fipronil or 18.3% w/w for Imidacloprid, the SO Rep shall also impose charges against the Contractor under Clause 1.6 Nuisance and Irregularities. Due care shall be exercised by the Contractor when mixing and preparing the chemical on site. For any areas that were deemed to have failed the minimum concentration, immediate re-treatment by the Contractor is required at no additional cost to the Employer. However, if the slab were already placed and the Chemical Concentration were found to be below an acceptable level, Slab-Injections of the previously used chemicals shall be introduced to the satisfaction of the SO Rep at no additional cost to the Employer.
51.15.11
Approved Pest Control Operators Only Pest Control Operator who is registered with the BCA under the work head for Pest Control shall be engaged to execute the pre-treatment of soil. The Pest Control Operator shall hold a valid clearance letter for the chemical to be used from the Pollution Control Department, NEA. In this respect, the Contractor shall submit the name of the Pest Control Operator, proof of BCA registration, clearance letter for the chemical to be used from NEA and the type and details of chemicals to be used (including the rate of application) to the SO Rep for approval prior to commencement of the treatment. In addition, the Contractor shall also ensure that the Pest Control Operator produce a letter of support from the supplier confirming the availability of the chemical to be used for the Works. The SO Rep reserves the right to disapprove the use of the type of chemical and/or the Pest Control Operator so selected by the Contractor. The Contractor shall not be entitled to any claim and there shall be no adjustment to the Contract Sum nor extension of Time for Completion arising from or out of such decision by the SO Rep.
51.15.12
Warranty The Contractor and his Specialist shall warrant the Works on the terms and conditions as stipulated in Clause 59.2 "Provision of Warranty" and the specimen of Deed of Warranty as produced in Appendix A1. In this respect, the Contractor and his Specialist shall submit such Deed of Warranty to the Employer or to such other party or such Town Council(s) as the SO Rep may at its sole discretion decide. In the event the Deed of Warranty for part of the Works or for the whole Works is to be submitted to such Town Council(s), the Contractor and his Specialist shall submit such Deed of Warranty in accordance with the specimen of Deed of Warranty as produced in Appendix A1(TC) and Clause 59.2 "Provision of Warrnty" to such Town Councils. The duly executed Warranty shall be submitted immediately upon request by the SO Rep, and if no such request is made, then at such time when the SO Rep considers the Works have been substantially completed in accordance with the Contract. In the event the Contractor and his Specialist shall fail to execute and submit the Deed of Warranty within the time specified, the SO Rep shall be allowed to withhold 15% of the payment of any sums due to the Contractor in relation to the execution of such Works, subject to the minimum sum of S$5,000/- per Deed of Warranty. However, such sums withheld shall be released to the Contractor upon submission by him of the duly executed Deed of Warranty
51.15.13
Re-treatment During Warranty Period If subterranean termite infestation should occur in the treated buildings within the warranty period, the Contractor shall provide Powder or Dust Treatment to exterminate the infestation at his own costs and expenses. Should the Powder or Dust Treatment fail to exterminate the infestation, the Contractor shall re-treat the soil using the Post-Construction Soil Treatment method at his own costs and expenses. Drilled holes shall be patched and walls and/or floors refinished. In addition, in the event of additions or extensions to the buildings during the warranty period, the Pest Control Operator and the Contractor shall be informed and shall also execute soil treatment to extend the chemical barrier to cover such additions or extensions. The costs of such extensions of soil treatment shall, however, be borne by the Employer.
51.15.14
Safety Precaution Provide and exercise safety precautions during all treatment processes. Personnel engaged in the soil treatment shall wear protective clothing eg. goggles, long sleeved shirt and long legged trousers or an overall type garment, impervious footwear and gloves as specified in the foregoing requirements. Spray drifts beyond the area to be treated shall be avoided. Every precaution shall be taken to prevent accidental spillage of the chemical. Spillage shall be mopped up with soil or other absorbent materials. The affected soil shall be added to the treated area or kept in plastic bags for disposal at the National Environment Agency (NEA)'s dumping grounds. Signs in the areas of application shall be posted to warn workers and the public that the area has been treated with poisonous chemicals. Unwanted chemicals and containers shall be disposed off safely at the National Environment Agency (NEA)'s dumping grounds.
51.16
FINISHED PLATFORMS, SLOPES AND EMBANKMENTS Platform levels shall be the level at the top of surface drains around the building. The Contractor shall finish the open spaces between buildings with a fall of not less than 1 in 80 towards surface drains. The Contractor shall cut, trim and adjust all slopes and banks to give gradual and regular slopes with no abrupt change of direction, or as directed by the SO Rep.
51.17
SERVICES ROUTES The Contractor shall clear all obstructions from proposed sewer, electrical, water, gas, telephone and Rediffusion services routes and either fill or excavate ground to within 70mm of proposed final platform level as directed by the SO Rep at any time during the Contract. Such instructions may be given separately for each of the services at different times and each instruction shall be carried out within seven days.
51.18
ELECTRICAL CABLE PIPES AND TRENCH Where applicable, the Contractor shall excavate and lay 4 nos. of 150mm diameter UPVC pipe at a depth of 750mm from the trench in the electrical switch room to the position as shown in the Drawings. The pipes shall be laid on 100mm thick mass concrete bed of 600mm width. One end of the pipe shall project 600mm beyond the surface drain or as shown and the other end shall be flushed with the trench. The trench shall be covered with removable RC slabs of 300mm width, capable of supporting a minimum load of 100 kg. Sand shall be provided to fill the trench after installation of the cables into the trench. Where applicable, excavate and lay 2 nos. of 100mm diameter UPVC pipe and 1 no. of 50mm diameter UPVC pipe at a depth of 300mm from the floor of the HDB switchroom to the positions as shown in the Drawings. Pipes used shall be free from leakage, distortion and cracks. Gaps between pipes and trench wall shall be patched up with cement mortar and made watertight. A length of drawn wire strong enough to pull in the cable, shall be provided in each pipe. The drawn wire shall project 600mm at both ends of pipe. All UPVC pipes shall be of at least Class C (wall thickness 6.6mm) type, complying with the requirements of SS 141:1976.
51.19
TELEPHONE CABLE DUCTS Where applicable, the Contractor shall provide and lay where shown 1OOmm diameter underground UPVC pipes to serve as ducts for telephone cables. Ducts shall turn with gradual bend and continue to extend 600mm beyond aprons, drains and paths outside the building. Provide threading wires for electrical cable ducts. The number of pipes required are as shown in the Drawings.
UPG07/S51.DOC(10) lkk(181206) DPD
51.20
DRAIN CASCADES The Contractor shall excavate and lay cascade drains where surface drains flow down steep slopes or banks. Cascades shall not exceed 600mm in length and 300mm in each drop with top of sides finished straight and parallel to slope of ground.
51.21
LEVELS, POSITIONS, LINES, ETC. In arriving at the Contract Sum of the Contract, the Contractor shall be deemed to have used as a basis the levels, if any, which are shown on the various cross-sections and longitudinal sections of the Drawings relative to the existing ground levels in determining his quantities of excavation or filling for the completed work. The precise positions, lines, depths and directions of the work, if shown, are indicated within all practicable limit. Should the Contractor not agree with any level of existing land or other property as given on the Drawings, he shall submit his objection in writing within 2 weeks from the date of the Employer's Letter of Acceptance of the Contractor's Tender, otherwise the Drawings shall be taken as correct for purposes of setting out and determination of variations (if any). Note that all existing ground levels are given as spot levels or contours on plan and that straight lines on the sections represent the average ground levels. Any small differences of levels therefore shall not be regarded as sufficient reason for the Contractor to disagree with the information as shown on the Drawings.
51.22
CLEARANCE OF SITE, TURF AND TOPSOIL Clear the Site at such time and to the extent required by the SO Rep and take down hedges, trees, hack up belukar, roots and any other obstruction from Site. All such waste materials removed shall be disposed off as directed. Should the quantity of work involved appear greater than that shown on the Drawings the Contractor shall make due allowance in the Contract Sum to cover such work and no adjustment to the Contract Sum shall be made. When digging and cutting of turfed ground are carried out, the turf and topsoil shall first be removed and stored for re-use as directed. Turf and topsoil shall not be taken away from Site without prior permission of the SO Rep and they shall remain the property of the Employer.
51.23
DEMOLITION AND MAKING GOOD The Contractor shall take care when demolishing or cutting away existing work such that no adjacent work is unnecessarily damaged in any way. Make good any work so damaged. Old materials may not be re-used in the new work, except where so specified or as directed by the SO Rep. Exposed raw faces of existing concrete or brickwork which will not have new work built on them shall be made good with cement, rendering or new brickwork and finished to a neat, straight, vertical or plane surface in harmony with the adjoining surfaces.
UPG07/S51.DOC(11) lkk(181206) DPD
51.24
BREAKING UP OF EXISTING WORK If it is found necessary to break up existing pavement, road or footpath, etc for constructional purposes as required in the Contract, such intention of doing so shall be conveyed to the SO Rep prior to commencement of work. If construction work is to be carried out on public roads, first obtain permission from LTA. In the event that normal flow of traffic is interrupted due to contract work in progress, minimise the inconvenience caused to the public by constantly cleaning the roadway such that a steady flow of traffic is maintained. Temporary traffic directional signboards shall be installed at strategic points if required. All existing work broken up by the Contractor shall be made good by him at his own cost and to the satisfaction of the SO Rep. The reinstatement shall comply with all the requirements of the Road Management Branch, LTA. Works which does not conform to the standard and requirements of the SO Rep or LTA shall be immediately removed and replaced or extended. On completion of the reinstatement, maintain all the road surfaces etc., affected during the Time for Completion and Defects Liability Period. All faults, settlements etc., developed within this period shall be made good immediately upon receipt of an instruction from the SO Rep. Be liable for all claims for injury or damage arising from any Defect in the reinstated road surface during the Time for Completion and Defects Liability Period. Adhere strictly to the requirement set out in LTA's specification on Reinstatement of Trenches and the HDB Standard Conditions governing Trench Opening within HDB Estates when carrying out the work required in this Clause.
51.25
EXCAVATION OF SERVICE TRENCHES AND STORAGE OF CABLE DUCTS Excavate trenches for the laying of services within the contract area. Such excavations and provision of cable ducts crossing the road shall be paid for according to the Standard Schedule of Rates if they are not indicated in the Drawings. If cable ducts are to be provided by the Service Department concerned, provide storage space on the Site and shall be responsible for their loss or damage.
51.26
REINSTATEMENT OF SERVICE TRENCHES All service trenches for the laying of cables, pipes, etc within the Contract boundary shall be reinstated immediately after the services have been laid and completed by the Services Authorities. All backfilling materials for cross or longitudinal trench within completed or partly completed road carriageway or carpark shall be of approved materials conforming to the following characteristics : (a) (b) The percentage passing 75 m B.S. sieve shall be not more than 35%; The fraction passing through 75 m sieve shall have liquid limit not exceeding 35 and plasticity index not exceeding 12; Dry density shall not be less than 1760 kg/cum.
(c)
Dry excavated soil may be used for backfilling only in open field outside road carriageway and carparks. Backfilled materials shall be mechanically compacted in layers of 200mm and conform with the following requirements : (a) (b) Within 500mm of formation level - 95% of max dry density using Test No. 13 BS 1377:1975; More than 500mm below formation level - 85% of max dry density using Test No. 12 BS 1377:1975;
UPG07/S51.DOC(12) lkk(181206) DPD
51.26
REINSTATEMENT OF SERVICE TRENCHES (CONT'D) Damages, directly or indirectly caused by the trench to carriageway, kerb, footpath, drain, sidetable, etc regardless of its existing condition shall be reinstated to conform to the current standard and practice of HDB. Edges of all reinstated road pavement shall be cut straight with a power-saw. The saw-cut shall be of a minimum depth of 75mm and edge of cut shall be at least 150mm from the edge of the trench depending on the extent of damages to the road surface. Unless otherwise stated, the reinstated road pavements shall consist of the following : (a) (b) (c) 150mm asphalt premix. 350mm compacted crusher run road base binded with granite fines. The layer below the road base to the bottom of trench shall be made up of compacted granite fines.
The level of reinstated road shall be allowed a tolerance of + 5mm from the existing road surface level when measured with a 3m straight edge. Reinstatement of footpath shall cover the full width of the footpath. For turfed area, the reinstatement shall conform to the relevant clauses on turfing in this Specifications. The Contractor shall be paid for work done under this Clause according to the Standard Schedule of Rates. All backfilling materials not conforming to or not compacted according to this Specifications shall be removed and replaced with approved materials and recompacted to the stipulated standard at the Contractor's own expenses.
SECTION 52/...
UPG07/S51.DOC(13) lkk(181206) DPD
52.0
MATERIALS, WORKMANSHIP AND CONSTRUCTION IN GENERAL FOR EXCAVATION AND CIVIL ENGINEERING WORKS
52.1
LOCAL MATERIALS So far as is practicable or unless otherwise stated, materials and articles shall be of local manufacture. They shall be obtained from suppliers who shall be approved by the SO Rep.
52.2
QUALITY OF MATERIALS AND PROVISION OF STANDARD All materials used in the construction of roads, drains, sewers, manholes etc shall be obtained from approved manufacturers. Materials and articles used shall comply with appropriate Singapore Standards (SS) published by PSB where these exist, otherwise British Standards (BS) or other specified Standards shall apply. Where the Standard given in this document has been amended or superseded, the current standard shall apply. Where British Standards are given in this document, the corresponding Singapore Standards (SS) where exist shall prevail. The recommendations in the appropriate Singapore Codes of Practice (CP) shall be referred to during the construction where these exist, otherwise British Codes of Practice or other codes shall apply unless otherwise directed by the SO Rep. Where two or more alternative materials manufactured locally are proposed, the SO Rep may at his sole discretion give preference to the use of a material that is approved under ISO 9000 or any of the quality certification schemes of the PSB, such as PSB (Singapore Quality Mark/Product Listing Scheme) Certification Scheme. For the purpose of this Clause, obtain all precast concrete products such as kerbs, aeration slabs, drain units etc from ISO 9000 or PSB (Singapore Quality Mark/Product Listing Scheme) Certification Scheme Suppliers.
52.3
CERTIFICATE OF COMPLIANCE WITH RESPECTIVE STANDARDS If required, obtain from the manufacturers and supply to the SO Rep the appropriate certificate of compliance with the Standard for which those materials or articles are specified to comply with.
52.4
TESTING OF MATERIALS The SO Rep may appoint independent persons to carry out tests on materials to be used in the Works. Bear the cost of making any test unless otherwise specified. The SO Rep may cause a sample to be taken from each consignment of materials to be tested at a SAC accredited laboratory and the results of such testing shall be accepted as final. If a sample does not conform to the required Standard, the whole consignment shall be rejected and shall be removed from Site at the Contractor's own expense and charges to be decided by the SO Rep shall be imposed. If for good reasons the consignment cannot be rejected eg. material already installed, then the cost difference between the inferior/undersized/non-complied materials and/or omitted labour costs based on latest Schedule of Rates shall be recouped plus the imposition of charges under Clause 1.10 "Nuisance and Irregularities" to be decided by the SO Rep. Also bear the cost of the final testing to be carried out by LTA, the Employer or any authority responsible for the final taking over of the completed works such as premix, precast concrete kerbs, dividers, etc.
Ugdg Spec TS 52-2/65 52.5 RATE OF EXCAVATION AND CONSTRUCTION Arrange the work so that the rate of construction keeps pace with the rate of excavation. However, the distance over which excavation may advance ahead of the concreting and drain construction will be specified from time to time by the SO Rep.
52.6
SAFEGUARDING PROPERTIES ADJACENT TO SITE Where work is undertaken near or adjacent to buildings and properties and in the opinion of the SO Rep, the stability of such buildings and properties is liable to be affected as a result of the work, arrange to have such buildings and properties inspected and record any cracks or any other defects which may be affected by the work. Every precaution shall be taken to safeguard such building or property and it shall be to the complete satisfaction of the SO Rep. When directed, excavate in such lengths of excavation as will permit the least amount to be opened at one time in order to minimize the danger of such open excavation affecting the stability of buildings or their supports. Be responsible for damage to public, private or other buildings and properties adjacent to the Site of the works which is caused as a direct or indirect result of the Contractor's work. Should the Contractor fail to take the necessary precautions, the SO Rep may, after giving the Contractor twenty-four (24) hours notice in writing, carry out such work as may be necessary using labour, material, Construction Equipment, implements and transport from other sources. The cost of such work will be charged to the Contractor.
52.7
DEALING WITH WATER Be responsible and pay for the cost for the maintenance of temporary diversion or damming of any existing drains, wherever necessary. Prior approval from the Drainage Department, PUB, shall be obtained before Works commences. Any drains or water-courses so diverted shall be re-constructed in their original positions on completion of the Works. Remove all water which may arise or be brought into the trenches or excavations and keep the level of such sub-soil or accumulated water below the bottom of any permanent work by the use of pumps or suitable well-point apparatus. After raising the water referred to, at once convey it away in such a manner as not to cause any damage, nuisance or injury. All sumps or wells which may be required for the purpose of keeping the work dry shall be sunk clear of any permanent work and shall be refilled after completion of the permanent works. Conduct the pumping operations so as to avoid undermining any part of the work.
52.8
APPROVAL OF EXCAVATION Report to the SO Rep when the excavations are ready to receive hardcore or lean concrete sub-base and await the inspection and approval of the SO Rep. Any hardcore or lean concrete sub-base or other work put in before the excavation has been inspected and approved shall, if so directed, be removed and new work substituted in accordance with the Specifications.
52.9
PREVENTION OF FLOATATION The structures may not be heavy enough to resist the possible uplift due to water pressure until the structure, soil cover and backfilling have been completed. Make adequate arrangement to keep the excavation dry until the structures and filling are complete or adopt other approved means of ensuring the stability of the temporary or permanent works. Submit proposed method to the SO Rep for approval before Works commences and provide for adequate standby Construction Equipment and attendance throughout 24 hours each day. For pipelines laid in wet, waterlogged ground subject to flooding, take all necessary precautions to prevent floating or movement of pipelines whether laying, laid or under test.
Ugdg Spec TS 52-3/65 52.10 REFILLING The Contractor's attention is drawn to the absolute necessity to compact the refilling by adequate consolidation and ramming. Pay particular attention to filling and ramming around and above pipes in trench to thoroughly compact the filling around structures and to the complete filling of the voids created by the withdrawal of timbering. When a trench is excavated under or near any existing work liable to be affected by subsidence of the material in the trench, or where any permanent work will later be constructed under, across, along, or over the line of the trench, fill the trench with Grade 15 concrete, or take such other means to prevent damage by subsidence as the SO Rep may direct, whether such work is shown on the Drawings or not. Any extra work so necessitated shall be paid for according to the Schedule of Rates, unless, in the opinion of the SO Rep, it is necessitated by the Contractor's negligence, bad workmanship, faulty materials or lack of reasonable foresight. Maintain all refilled surfaces and be responsible for claims arising from accidents due to subsidence or inadequate maintenance. (a) Refilling for Portion of Trenches within the Service Roads and Carpark/Sewer Works All concrete shall be thoroughly set before refilling is commenced. In refilling the excavation, only selected granular material free from large stone or lumps (eg. unwashed sand or granite fines) shall be used in the initial refilling and carefully placed on top/next to the Permanent Works and well packed and well rammed in a layer of 300mm as directed. Fill the remainder of the excavation with unwashed sand or granite fines, in layers of not more than 600mm deep or such depth as directed, each layer shall be thoroughly rammed before the next layer is placed. In all cases efficient mechanical rammers shall be employed in refilling. Refilling shall include the filling in of all voids caused by the withdrawal of timbering. During the removal of timbering from the trench withdraw the runners only to the level of the backfilling as it proceeds regularly and in layers. As timbers are lifted without exposing the face of the trench, immediately ram the filling hard into the space left by the timber. For sewer works, fill the trenches to a depth of 600mm over the pipes before the pipes are emptied of water after testing, so that any damage that may be caused by ramming can be detected. (b) Refilling for Roadbase Keep separate those excavated materials which are suitable for subsequent backfilling. Carefully repack selected excavated materials in place after refilling to form a compact neat surface.
52.11
IMPORTED FILLING MATERIAL Where filling is required and suitable material from the excavations on Site is not available, imported filling shall be used. This imported filling which must be to the approval of the SO Rep shall be good lateritic gravel or hogging, broken stone, hardcore, quarry waste or other approved material. Inform the SO Rep the source of supply of the imported filling materials.
52.12
WORKING SHAFT FOR HEADING Obtain access to tunnel or heading work from the working shafts proposed on ends of the open excavation in trench. The Contractor may be permitted to open additional working shafts within the length of tunnel to facilitate the Works but such working shafts shall be formed and refilled at the Contractor's expense. Provide adequate timber and protect the ends of the open trench used as tunnel or heading access. All such additional work shall be allowed for in his lump sum for excavating the tunnel.
Ugdg Spec TS 52-4/65 52.13 TUNNEL EXCAVATION Engage a registered Professional Engineer to submit all proposals for excavating, timbering and constructing sewers and pipelines in tunnel and obtain the approval of the SO Rep before any work may commences. Be responsible for the safety of the timbering. Submit for approval, the design, calculation and full details of the supports and timbering to be used. The excavation for the tunnel shall be of sufficient size for proper execution of the construction work and all timbering shall be driven and fixed in close contact with the ground to be supported. No payment for overbreak or additional excavation shall be made and all such excavation shall be packed with concrete at the Contractor's own expense. Unless otherwise approved, the tunnels shall be close timbered and the timber shall be left in place on completion of the Works at the expense of the Contractor. During excavation, securely fixed running boards shall be provided to the floor of the tunnel and on completion or excavation, such running boards shall be removed, the formation cleaned and dried out and a concrete sealing coat provided. The tunnel shall be driven complete between access points before permanent work may commence and the work shall at all times be carried out as quickly as possible so that the excavation shall remain open for the shortest possible time. The working face of the tunnel excavation shall be supported as necessary and shall be boxed up at the end of each shift when continuous working is not in progress or whenever required by the SO Rep. When work is in progress, proper access ladders shall be fixed and maintained at the tunnel access points and the tunnel lighted by electricity at not more than 110 volts. Lamps shall be provided at not more than 9 metres intervals and no flame or other naked light shall be used. Proper and adequate ventilation fans and ducts shall be provided, maintained and operated at all times. Pipes laid in heading shall be carefully bedded on Grade 25 concrete adjusted to line and level and jointed, inspected, tested and approved. After approval, the whole of the tunnel section shall be carefully and solidly packed with Grade 25 concrete all at the Contractor's own expense.
52.14
DEWATERING OF EXCAVATION Where dewatering is approved, provide, operate and maintain a system satisfactory to the SO Rep of temporary drains intercepting ditches, cut off drains, sub-drains, sumps, pumps, well-points, dewatering equipment and all other things necessary for keeping the sub-soil or accumulated water out of the excavation or at a level below the bottom of any permanent works for such a period as the SO Rep may direct. Where ground water irrespective of the sources, is encountered or anticipated provide sufficient pumps to handle the ingress of water and provide and maintain in working order standby pumping units. Also arrange for night and day manning and operation of the pumps wherever necessary to ensure that at all times and weathers the work may proceed. After raising the water herein referred to, at once convey it away in such a manner as not to cause any nuisance or injury. No new or existing pipe may be used for the purpose of carrying water away from the excavations without permission in writing from the SO Rep. Make good any damage whatsoever resulting from such use of new or existing pipes or culverts. When sand, silt or mud particles are suspended and maintained in the pumped water, tanks to settle the solids shall be provided to remove the solids before discharge of the water. Site temporary works for the control of water clear of the permanent works, except where temporary subdrains under the permanent works are approved. Should the SO Rep give permission for temporary sub-drains under the permanent works, the pipes shall be laid with a 75mm surround of 19mm single size aggregate and the top surface of the surround shall be covered with tarred felt cloth or other approved material.
Ugdg Spec TS 52-5/65 52.14 DEWATERING OF EXCAVATION (CONT'D) Unless otherwise directed all temporary drains and sub-drains shall be finally sealed with concrete at intervals to the SO Rep satisfaction and all temporary ditches, sumps, wells etc, shall be filled and reinstated. Include in his excavation rates for the cost of complying with this clause, irrespective of the methods adopted.
52.15
SUPPORT FOR EXISTING WORK When any excavation is carried out near, or under any existing work including buildings, services, mains, cables, and surfaces such as roads, etc., liable to be affected by subsidence, take necessary measures to prevent damage by subsidence, whether such existing work is shown on the Drawings or not. If it becomes essential, in the opinion of the SO Rep to permanently divert any sewer, drain, pipe, cable or other service, or to reconstruct any existing building in an alternative position, the diversion or reconstruction shall be paid for by the Employer.
52.16
HARDCORE Hardcore shall be composed of approved broken stone, brick, cement, concrete or other similar approved material, free from excessive dust, foreign matter and other impurities. It shall not contain pieces exceeding 150mm or less than 60mm gauge. Oversized hardcore shall not be considered for use unless it can be broken down to allowable range effectively.
52.17
TIMBER All timber delivered to Site shall be properly seasoned to moisture content not exceeding 20%, straight, sound, square cut, free from injuries, waney, edges, decay, shakes, large and dead knots, insect attack and other serious Defects, and of the appropriate grade according to the Malayan Grading Rules for Sawn Hardwood Timber (current edition) as below : (a) All scantlings up to 400 sq. cm. in cross-section shall comply with the requirements of grade "Merchantable". All large structural timber above 400 sq. cm. in cross-section shall comply with the requirements of grade `Baulks & Large Squares'. All timber for joinery and dressing used in natural state shall comply with the requirements of grade `Standard and Better'. All timber for joinery and dressing which is to be painted shall comply with the requirements of grade `Merchantable'.
(b)
(c)
(d)
Any portion of the timber works showing signs of warps, shakes or other Defects within the Defects Liability Period shall be replaced with new works together with all other works which may be affected thereby, all at the Contractor's expense. Submit sample pieces of the timber proposed to be used in the works to the SO Rep for approval. Remove from the Site immediately any timber member or component which the SO Rep does not approve. The recommendations of the Singapore CP 1 and CP 7 for use of timber shall be referred to except where they conflict with this Specifications. Where plywood is used, it shall comply with SS 1 and SS 72.
Ugdg Spec TS 52-6/65 52.18 CARPENTRY AND JOINERY All timber for structural works shall be Balau, Chengal or Kapur. All timber joinery works shall be Kapur. All carpentry works shall be sawn except where specified as wrot. All exposed surfaces of joinery works shall be wrot by planing and sand-papering to an approved finish. Wrot timber shall be worked to the correct sizes and shapes shown in the Drawings. Sizes of timber indicated in Drawings are nominal and a maximum allowance of 2.5mm shall be permitted for each wrot face. Upon delivery all timber shall be properly stacked under cover to ensure free air circulation round all faces and minimum of warping. Take measurements for joinery works on Site and verify it with the dimensions shown in the Drawings. When discrepancy occurs between the measurement shown in the Drawings and that taken on Site, obtain the confirmation of the SO Rep before proceeding with the Works. Joints shall be formed in a proper workmanlike manner, well proportioned and tight fitting. Dress all exposed surfaces of joinery work. Where glue joinery work is likely to come into contact with moisture, the glue shall be waterproofed. All joinery requiring painting shall be knotted, stopped and primed before fixing. Coat the backs of all carpentry and joinery works in contact with masonry work with one coat of "Solignum" or "Presotim" or other approved preservative. Allow the preservative to be thoroughly dried before fixing of the Works. Treat all sawcuts similarly. All structural members, assemblies or framework shall be capable of sustaining with due stability and stiffness the whole dead and imposed loads without exceeding the Limits of Stresses stated in CP 1 and CP 7. The timber shall be seasoned as far as practicable to a moisture content appropriate for its particular use as spelled out in CP 1 and CP 7. Treat all timber exposed to damp conditions or in contact with ground with "Solignum" or "Creosote" or other approved wood preservative applied with brush in two coats, or be treated with approved pressurised process. 52.19 PLYWOOD Plywood shall be of the grades specified in SS 1 which in the opinion of the SO Rep appropriate to the work and shall be as follows : Grade I Grade II For use in the natural state. The veneer shall be free from knots, worm and beetle holes, splits, glue, stains or other Defects. For use where subsequent painting or similar treatment is required. The veneer on the face side may have a few sound knots, occasional minor discolouration or stains and small inlay repairs. For use where the plywood is not normally visible. The veneer on the face may have other Defects than those specified above provided that its serviceability is not affected.
Grade III
Adhesives for plywood are to be one of the following types : Type 1 Type 2 Phenol Formaldehyde resin adhesive classified as weather and boil proof in BS 1203 (WBP). Urea formaldehyde resin adhesive classified as moisture and weather resistant (WR).
Unless otherwise specified, plywood for internal use shall be Grade II with Type 2 adhesive and plywood for external use shall be Grade II with Type 1 adhesive. Adequately protect all plywood used in permanent structure under damp or wet service conditions against decay and insect attack by treatment conforming to SS 72. Include in the Contract Sum cost of carrying out tests on plywood samples to determine the moisture content and bonding according to SS 1 at the discretion of the SO Rep.
Ugdg Spec TS 52-7/65 52.20 TIMBERING OF EXCAVATION The term "timbering" shall cover all necessary methods of support including the use of timber, concrete, steel sheet piling, steel sheeting or such materials as may be approved. If timber is used, it shall be of species of Keruing or Kempas. Supply and fix strong and sufficient timbering to support the sides and/or bottom of the excavation to the satisfaction of the SO Rep and maintain the same until the constructional work is sufficiently advanced, in the opinion of the SO Rep to permit the timbering to be withdrawn, which shall be conducted only under the personal supervision of a competent person employed by the Contractor. Carry out such timbering and shoring with due consideration to full flow or flooding conditions all to the satisfaction of the SO Rep. Submit to the SO Rep drawings and calculations showing details of the proposed timbering for approval. Where excavation exceeds a depth of 4m, engage a registered Professional Engineer to submit the design and supervise the erection of the timbering. No excavation work may start until the timbering details are approved. Where excavations for culvert, drains, sewers and manhole are required, submit the full details of the proposed timbering methods within one month from the date of the Employer's Letter of Acceptance of the Contractor's Tender. Failure to submit and obtain approval of details expeditiously may result in delays and the Contractor shall not be entitled to any extension of time on this ground. Notwithstanding the approval given, the SO Rep reserves the right to instruct the Contractor to improve, alter, revise, strengthen the timbering from time to time. Be responsible for any injury to the Work and any consequential damages caused arising out of the remedy of the timbering and any advice, permission or approval given by the SO Rep related to the relieve of timbering shall not relieve the Contractor from the responsibility here defined. The SO Rep shall have the right to order excavation and construction work to be carried out in such lengths and in such sections of the Works, as will, in his opinion, minimise the danger of such open excavation affecting the stability of any nearby structures or ground, and the Contractor shall have no claim for extra payment on this account. Shoring timbers shall be removed as the work proceeds only if their removal does not endanger existing adjacent structure. Where the SO Rep deem it dangerous to remove the shoring timbers, such timbers shall not be removed.
52.21
TIMBERING LEFT-IN The Contractor shall be paid for all timbering left in the excavation on the instruction of the SO Rep provided the timber is required to give permanent support to trench sides, services or buildings. No payment shall be made where timber has to be left in, on the instruction of the SO Rep to counter any Defect or negligence in the Contractor's execution of the Works. Only the actual quantity of timber left in shall be paid for. Payment shall not be made for labour in cutting nor for timber in ends thus cut off, nor for the disposal of additional surplus excavated materials due to the leaving in of timber.
52.22
STEEL TRENCH SHEETING Where the subsoil conditions are expected to be of a soft and unstable character in trench excavation, the normal methods of timbering will probably prove inadequate to avoid subsidence of the adjoining road surfaces and other services. The Contractor shall be responsible for all such damages as specified elsewhere. In such circumstances use Steel Trench Sheeting or Sheet Steel Piling adequately supported by timber struts, walings, etc. Supply, pitch, drive and subsequently remove trench sheeting or piling in accordance with other items of the Specifications and the terms Timber or Timbering shall also apply to Steel Trench Sheeting.
Ugdg Spec TS 52-8/65 52.23 STEEL SHEET PILING The Contractor may use steel sheet piling during the construction of the Works subject to the approval of the SO Rep and shall bear all and every expense in connection therewith, including waste and burning off piles if necessary. Steel sheet piles shall conform to the provisions of BS 4360 and shall be driven where required and approved or directed. Engage a registered Professional Engineer to design the layout of the piling and the overall dimensions of the excavation to suit the sheets and corners available and to give sufficient working space for the proper construction of the Works. For purposes of this Contract, it shall be clearly and definitely understood that the terms `timber' or `timbering' as used in any portion of the Specifications or Drawings shall be held to include `Steel Sheet Piling'.
52.24
LIABILITY OF TIMBERING Approval by the SO Rep of the timbering shall not absolve the Contractor from his responsibility and he shall be responsible for making good any damage caused as a result of the timbering failing to give proper support to the sides of the excavation. Carry out the timbering to the sides of excavation for structures in such a way that there is no obstruction caused to the fixing of formwork for the walls. Remove the supporting struts and walings in stages to suit progress of concreting. If the SO Rep is not satisfied that the standard of timbering is equal to that shown on the approved drawings or that the sides of the excavations have not been secured in a manner to render such excavations safe for working, he may, one hour after notifying the Contractor or his representative in writing, employ other persons to alter the timbering and the cost of such workmen and materials employed shall be paid for by the Contractor.
52.25
WITHDRAWAL OF TIMBERING Withdraw runners and sheets and steel sheet piles in lifts as backfilling and compaction is taking place. Any damage caused by subsidence of the excavation resulting from the careless withdrawal of support shall be the responsibility of the Contractor.
52.26
TIMBER PILING (a) Scope of Piling Work and Valuation The value of Works completed at any stage shall be the product of the net penetration of driven piles and the rate per metre run, as described in the Standard Schedule of Rates. Unless described otherwise, such rate shall include preliminaries, all labour, materials, Construction Equipment and its mobilisation, supply and driving of piles, excavation for piling and cutting, piles cutting, wastage and everything necessary for the execution and completion of piling work. The difference between the value of piling works completed and that as specified in the Contract as computed in the manner described in the foregoing shall be adjusted as a variation to the Contract. (b) Construction Equipment & Experience for Driving Piles At the time of Tender submit a schedule, full details of the equipment and plants to be committed on Site. A resume showing the experience of the Contractor and operators in piling work shall also be submitted.
Ugdg Spec TS 52-9/65 52.26 TIMBER PILING (CONT'D) (c) Warranty Be responsible for the proper execution of the piling work according to the Specifications and the pile layout drawings. Make good any damage or Defect to the super-structure resulting from defective execution of Work at the Contractor's expense to the satisfaction of the SO Rep. The warranty period shall be one year after the completion of the superstructure. (d) Timber Piles Timber piles specified shall be from the HDB's list of approved suppliers and of approved brands/trademarks. Timber piles shall be 100mm x 100mm, 125mm x 125mm, 150mm x 150mm or 175mm x 175mm square sawn timber foundation piles with an allowance tolerance of + 5mm, produced from the species Kempas or Keruing. The safe working load shall be 8.5 N/mm2 in direct compressive stress and with an ultimate resistance of all piles of not less than 3 times the nominal working load. The centre line of pile shall not deviate from the straight line joining the mid points of the butt and toe by more than 25mm for any pile up to 6m in length, or 38mm for pile over 6m in length. Use only timber piles produced under the ISO 9000 or PSB (Singapore Quality Mark/Product Listing Scheme) Certification Scheme Sippliers. Each batch of piles delivered to the Site shall be subjected to random sampling, for testing by an SAC accredited laboratory, in accordance with the following frequency : (i) (ii) for every contract supply, a minimum of two tests; For supply up to 3,000 metre run, the first test will be carried out from any batch of piles, subsequent test will be made at each interval of 3,000 metre run, the number of test will depend on the quantity of supply but subject to a minimum of two tests for each contract as stated in (i) above.
All piles shall be pressure-treated with copper-chrome-arsenic wood preservative under a pressure of not less than 12.5 kg per cm2, with minimum depth of penetration of preservative of 25mm and with a net dry salt retention in the outermost 25mm of pile of not less than 16kg per m3. All methods of chemical treatment and testing shall be in accordance with SS 72 : 1988 or BS 4072. The SO Rep shall exercise his rights under Clause 1.10 "Nuisance and Irregularities" to impose charges against the Contractor for each test that fails to comply with the above requirement. In the event that any test by SAC accredited laboratory resulted in failure, remove the batch of piles from which the random sampling is obtained completely from the Site. Should the Contractor negligently or wilfully transport the same batch that had failed previously to the Site again, this act shall be deemed to be an infringement and Clause 1.10 "Nuisance & Irregularities" shall apply. (e) Steel Box Joint Join two piles by using a mild steel welded box joint 450mm long made from 4.5mm thick plate and coat with bituminous paint and approved by the SO Rep before use. (f) Hammer and Set for Pile Driving Use free drop hammer to drive the timber pile. The hammer weight for driving 175mm x 175mm pile shall be 1.5 tonnes, and for driving 150mm x 150mm, 125mm x 125mm or 100mm x 100mm pile shall be 1 tonne. The hammer shall drop a minimum of 1300mm. The acceptable set for the last 10 blows for 175mm x 175mm pile shall be not more than 15mm. The acceptable set for the last 10 blows for 150mm x 150mm, 125mm or 100mm x 100mm pile shall be not more than 20mm.
Ugdg Spec TS 52-10/65 52.26 TIMBER PILING (CONT'D) (g) Driving of Piles Drive Piles accurately in the correct locations true to line both laterally and longitudinally as indicated in the Drawings. Guide piles at the top and bottom during driving and suitably constrain them to maintain their correct position by means of guides. No piles which has been deflected from its course, or has been wrongly aligned may be forcibly brought back to correct alignment except with the written approval of the SO Rep. The centre of each pile shall not deviate from its true position as shown in the drawings by more than 25mm. Bear all additional costs of the amendment in pilecaps, ground beams, etc as designated by the SO Rep as a countermeasure to the pile eccentricities exceeding the permissible tolerance. Alternatively, the SO Rep may require extra piles to be driven at the Contractor's own expense. During driving, protect the heads of all piles with the helmet of mild steel fitting closely around the pile. A 25mm thick plywood covering the head of the pile shall be contained within the helmet to separate the helmet from the head of the pile. Rigidly & securely join all piles with metal box joints. The joints shall be driven to a tight fit with the pile hammer and spiked to the section of both piles. (h) Piling Record Drive piles only in the presence of the SO Rep. The penetrations and sets of every pile shall be subject to the approval of the SO Rep. Record of driving for every pile shall be submitted to the SO Rep on Site and a copy shall be kept by the Contractor. The record shall include the following items : (i) (ii) (iii) (iv) (v) (vi) (vii) (viii) Set Temporary compression Penetration from ground level Length of pile and size of section Ground level Cut-off level to the top of pile No. of joints used Time of starting and time of completion
The method of measuring set and temporary compression shall be approved by the SO Rep. The above record shall show a series of sets and temporary compressions measured during the whole process of driving. Once the driving of a pile is commenced it shall continue until the final penetration or set is reached. (i) Penetration of Piles The penetration of driven piles is the actual length measured from the bottom tip to the cut-off level of the driven piles. The penetration of every pile shall be recorded by the SO Rep and the Contractor. Mark the timber piles with red paint at every 300mm to enable easy determination of pile penetration. (j) Damaged or Rejected Piles All piles which are broomed, split or damaged during handling or transportation shall be rejected. All piles damaged during driving, or driven unduly out of position, or driven out of plumb resulting in no set after driving for considerable length, where it should set based on soil data and site condition, shall also be rejected.
UPG07/S52.DOC(10) lkk(181206) DPD
Ugdg Spec TS 52-11/65 52.26 TIMBER PILING (CONT'D) (k) Compensating Piles Replace all piles driven into ground and rejected with compensating pile or piles. The position and number of compensating pile/s as decided by the SO Rep shall be such that the concentricity of the pile group is not altered. The Employer shall only pay the cost for the original number of pile/s in the pile group as shown in the Drawings. (l) Removal of obstructions of Piling In the course of piling, only the removal of natural obstruction 2.5m below the ground surface shall be paid for by the Employer as an extra item based on the Contract Schedule of Rates and only if the SO Rep is satisfied that the Contractor has made every effort to proceed with piling by avoiding the obstruction. Any excavation for obstruction not exceeding 2.5m, including restoring of ground surrounding the piles, and any other works necessary to complete the operation to the satisfaction of the SO Rep shall deemed to be included in the Contract. (m) Cutting off of Piles Excavate and cut off the pile to the required level shown on the pile layout drawings or otherwise directed by the SO Rep. Checking and recording of cut-off level shall be followed up immediately. In cutting of piles, ensure that a surveyor is maintained at the Site for such work. Not to reuse any pile which has been cut off as wastage unless the waste pile length exceeds 2.5m and the cut-off head has been treated.
52.27
PAINTING (a) Material All paints, primers and other materials shall comply with SS5, SS6, SS7, SS34, SS37, SS38, SS150, SS206 and SS345 or other relevant specifications of PSB. Where such paints, primers and other materials are locally manufactured they shall be used in preference to products manufactured by foreign country or countries. (i) Enamel Gloss Paint Paint for timber and metal work shall have a synthetic enamel gloss finish with an alkydresin base. Where an undercoat is specified, obtain the paint from the same manufacturer whose gloss paint is approved for the particular work. A different brand shall not be used unless the SO Rep has given his consent. If more than one under-coat is specified, the undercoats shall be of different colour from each other to enable the number of coats applied to be checked. Before the following coat is applied, allow each coat at least 24 hours to dry. Carry out painting with proper paint brushes. Any other method of painting shall not be allowed unless approved by the SO Rep. (ii) Primers Primer for aluminium, zinc or galvanised iron shall be an approved Etching Primer with a Polyvinyl resin base and then cover with another coat of approved red lead primer with a pure linseed oil base. Thoroughly mix etching primer with the Activator before use in the ratio of 3 parts Base to 1 part Activator. Being a dual pack material, the mixture shall have a pot life of 12 hours.
UPG07/S52.DOC(11) lkk(181206) DPD
Ugdg Spec TS 52-12/65 52.27 PAINTING (CONT'D) (a) Material (Cont'd) (ii) Primers (Cont'd) Carry out the painting of etching primer coat under shed or in the factory. The dried etching primer coat shall not come in contact with water and apply a coat of Red lead primer over it within two days of applying the etching primer. (iii) Emulsion Paint All emulsion paints shall be of an approved brand with an acrylic base. Apply with a proper paint brush and not a locally made colour wash brush. If more than one coat is specified the previous coat shall be properly dried before the following coat is applied. (iv) Carriageway Marking Paints All paints used for carriageway marking shall be quick-drying, chlorinated rubber based and shall comply in all respects with the requirements specified in the Singapore Standard 221:1979 (UDC 667.633:625.746) for Road Marking painting. The Contractor may be required to submit to the SO Rep for his approval two cans each of five litres of the white and yellow colour paint he proposes to use. If during the term of this Contract the Contractor of his own accord decides to change the manufacturer of the above approved paint(s), he is required to submit samples of the new paint as directed hereto before. The paints so submitted shall be sent to PSB for testing for compliance with this Specification and of the corresponding statement of characteristics so submitted. The SO Rep may direct the Contractor to change the supplier or manufacturer of the paints used in this Contract if he is satisfied that the paints used in this Contract do not comply with this Specification and of the corresponding Statement of Characteristics. Comply further with the instructions of the SO Rep all at his own expense. The SO Rep may require samples of reasonable quantity of any paint used in the works for testing by PSB. The Contractor shall be advised of the results of testing by PSB through the SO Rep. Bear the costs of all testing. If the paint tested fails to meet the approved requirements on the corresponding Statement of Characteristics, then all works represented by the paint sample or the entire road or roads painted on the same day where such paint was taken for testing shall be rejected and no payment shall be made for such paintings. Deliver all paints for carriageway marking to the Site ready for use. When the container for the paint is opened, the paint shall show no signs of livering or instability and be free from skin, dry sediment, and caking and shall mix readily with a paddle to a smooth homogeneous state. The paint shall meet the quantitative requirements specified in the following table : Characteristic Pigment content, percentage by weight of paint Non volatile matter, percentage by weight of paint Viscosity, kerbs unit Specific Gravity Fineness of grind, microns "No pick up" drying time, mins Opacity (contrast ratio), percent White Yellow Red Requirement Minimum Maximum 40 60 60 70 1.22 70 60 50 80 50 15 -
UPG07/S52.DOC(12) lkk(181206) DPD
Ugdg Spec TS 52-13/65 52.27 PAINTING (CONT'D) (a) Material (Cont'd) (iv) Carriageway Marking Paints (Cont'd) Tests conducted by PSB The properties and characteristics for all road line paints used in this Contract shall if required, be tested in accordance with the methods of testing specified in and requirements inferred from the respective standard adopted by PSB. Item 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 (b) Certificate Submit a certified `STATEMENT OF CHARACTERISTICS' on the prescribed Form A provided. This statement shall be completed by the paint manufacturer whose paint the Contractor proposes to use in the Works. This statement shall be used to make periodic assessment of the Contractor's paints as sampled from time to time and is for the strict confidential use of the SO Rep and the information in the Statement would not be revealed but shall serve and assist in identifying and testing the paint samples taken during the execution of the Works. Test Non volatile matter Colour Flexibility and Adhesion (Bend Test) Scratch resistance Condition in container Skimming properties Specific gravity Dilution stability Brushing properties Spraying properties Viscosity (Stormer viscosimeter) Fineness of grind Pigment content Opacity (contrast ratio) "No pick-up" drying time Resistance to bleeding Abrasion resistance Method of Test (Refer to SS 5) Part 6 Part 10 Part 12 Part 13 Part 16 Part 17 Part 19 Part 20 Part 21 Part 22 Part 23A Part 24 Part 26 Part 29 Part 39 Part 40 Part 41
UPG07/S52.DOC(13) lkk(181206) DPD
Ugdg Spec TS 52-14/65 FORM "A" STATEMENT OF CHARACTERISTICS FOR CARRIAGEWAY MARKING PAINTS
To :
The SO Rep in -charge
CONFIDENTIAL
Dear Sir The following are the characteristics of the designated sample of carriageway marking paint submitted by:
M/s (Paint Manufacturer) of (Address)
to M/s (Name of Contractor) to be used under this contract.
1. 2. 3. 4. 5.
Manufacturer's Code No. : Colour : White/Yellow Type : Chlorinated Rubber Based or Weight per litre Drying time : (a) (b) No pick up Hard dry kg per litre for both colours minutes for both colours minutes for both colours kerbs for both colours for both colours for both colours for both colours (specify)
6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11.
Viscosity (as ready for spraying application) Percentage of pigment in paint Pigment volume concentration Percentage of vehicle in paint Percentage of non-volatile in vehicle State chemical nature of non-volatile vehicle :
12.
Recommended rate of application of paint on a road line 100mm wide linear kilometers per litre of paint
UPG07/S52.DOC(14) lkk(181206) DPD
Ugdg Spec TS 52-15/65 FORM "A"
White Paint 13. (a) (b) (c) Nature of pigment Weight of above pigment per litre of finished paint Recommended solvent for (i) (ii) Thinning Cleaning : % of
Yellow Paint
I, (Name of Officer)
, (Designation in Company)
of (Manufacturing Firm)
certify the above to be true. This statement of paint characteristics is submitted for
(Name of Contractor)
________________________ (Seal of Company)
_______________________ (Signature)
_________________________ (Date)
UPG07/S52.DOC(15) lkk(181206) DPD
Ugdg Spec TS 52-16/65 52.27 PAINTING (CONT'D) (c) Equipment Mechanisation in all aspects of painting of road line and carriageway markings is compulsory under this Contract. It shall be a prerequisite for the Contractor to own and make available the following equipment for use under the Contract : (i) Carriageway Marking Machines The apparatus shall be self propelled and constructed so as to apply or spray paint under pressure in continuous uniformity to dimensions of the markings. It shall be equipped with the devices for agitation of the paint while in operation. All parts of the apparatus which come into contact with the paint shall be so constructed as to be easily cleaned and maintained. The apparatus shall be capable of adjustment to provide a uniform spray wet film thickness of between 200 to 500 microns and in this respect shall be automatically self drive and be capable of travel at uniform speed. It shall be mobile and manoeuvrable to the extent that straight lines can be followed and regular curves can be prescribed in a true arc. The apparatus shall have the capacity of selection of either automatic or manual skip marking operations preferably to four preset programmes. The apparatus shall also be capable of marking line widths varying from 100mm to 600mm with extended facilities of applying paint to symbolic signs and messages using templates. The marking apparatus shall also be equipped with devices capable of applying glass beads ballotini in such a manner that the ballotini are dispersed almost instantly upon the freshly painted surface at a rate of 0.72 kg per litre of paint or at the recommended rate of the paint manufacturer. The ballotini depositor shall be synchronised with the cut off of the paint application control. The ballotini shall be applied with sufficient velocity to ensure retention in the surface of the paint. (ii) Roadline Erasing Machine The apparatus shall be mechanically propelled and be able to erase road lines uniformly in the cold state. (iii) Flow Cups and Wet Films Gauges All painting machines shall be provided with approved flow cups (ISO flow cups or equivalent) for measuring the consistency of viscosity of the paint used and wet film gauges (Ericksen type 333 or equivalent) with a measuring range of 0 to 600 microns having an accuracy of 25 microns for the determination of the wet film thickness of paint laid. Also supply six aluminium plates 200mm x 200mm of 15 gauge for the purpose of the testing of the thickness of the road line paint. (d) Mode of Operation All road line paintings and carriageway markings which include pedestrian crossing, box junctions, continuous broken lines, numerals, bus zones, arrows, letterings, etc shall be fully mechanised and drawn or spray painted by road line painting machine. On no account shall paint be applied by brushes to road lines and markings and in the event that such lines and markings are drawn no payment shall be considered and made to the Contractor. Painting of other traffic appurtenances and road related facilities may unless otherwise directed by the SO Rep be carried out by brushes. Under the circumstances workmanship shall be of the highest standard and care shall be exercised to produce a smooth and uniform coat of paint.
UPG07/S52.DOC(16) lkk(181206) DPD
Ugdg Spec TS 52-17/65 52.27 PAINTING (CONT'D) (e) Weather Conditions (i) No painting shall be done on surfaces which are wet or damp from rain, dew or any other causes until they have been properly dried. Prepare all surfaces before the application of paints. Preparation shall have the following meaning for the surfaces indicated : Preparation (1) On new concrete or plastered surfaces to receive cement paint or emulsion paint. Prepare by washing down with soap (if necessary) to remove dirt, grease and other adhering materials. Rinse off with clean water and allow to dry thoroughly. (2) On existing painted plastered or concrete surfaces to receive cement paint or emulsion paint. Prepare by removing all nails etc., scraping thoroughly and brushing briskly with a stiff brush to remove efflourescent and flaking materials. Where necessary wash down with soap to remove dirt, grease and rinse off with clean water and allow to dry thoroughly. Make good areas of defective plaster or concrete and fill up cracks and holes with approved filler. (3) New metal surfaces to receive paint. Prepare by scraping and removing all rust, mill scales by sand paper and rub down with emery cloth. (4) Existing painted metal surface to receive primer coat and paint. Prepare by burning down all existing paint, thoroughly wash off the surface with soap and rinse with clean water. Allow it to dry thoroughly and rub down with emery cloth. (5) Existing painted surface to receive paint only. Prepare by rubbing down with sand paper to remove the flaky old paints, and rinse surface thoroughly with water and allow to dry thoroughly. (6) Painting of road line and carriageway markings. Prepare by sweeping off all dust, grit and foreign matter on the road surface with stiff brushes. Mark out to the required dimensions and alignment for directional arrows, box junctions, bus zones continuous or broken lines, lettering, etc. before the application of the paint. (f) Wet Film Thickness Supply all paints for carriageway marking ready mixed by the manufacturer and no thinning with any materials to the already mixed paints shall be permitted. Apply all paints for carriageway marking by apparatus approved by the SO Rep to a wet film thickness of 375 microns (plus or minus 50 microns). The SO Rep may request the Contractor to mark measurements with respect to the thickness of wet paint film by measuring with the appropriate gauge. For this purpose, supply at least six pieces of clean aluminium gauge No. 15 plates each of size 200mm by 200mm. The marking apparatus with set settings shall run over one plate and the wet film thickness measured expeditiously.
(ii)
UPG07/S52.DOC(17) lkk(181206) DPD
Ugdg Spec TS 52-18/65 52.27 PAINTING (CONT'D) (g) Colour Scheme The colour schemes for any work and the various coats to be applied shall be determined by the SO Rep. (h) Adulteration (i) Under no circumstances shall any oil or spirit be added to paint. All oil or spirit found in the possession of any painter or the presence on Site of any tins, drums, kegs or other containers marked with the name of a brand or material or manufacturer different from those which the SO Rep has selected to be used as a receptacle for brushes, as paint kettles, etc. shall be taken as evidence of adulteration. At any one time during the actual painting the SO Rep shall have the right to take samples of paint, or scrap or chip off actual painted work for the purpose of laboratory testing. The testing of such samples shall be borne by the Employer. Paint which is found to be adulterated, or different from the original sample as tested, shall be dealt with under the provisions of Clause 1.10 "Nuisance & Irregularities". Erase off and clean all the rejected paint work applied up to that time and to repaint same, at his own expenses. Before any paint is applied the prepared surfaces shall be inspected and approved by the SO Rep. After a coat has been applied the succeeding coat shall not be applied until the work has similarly been inspected and approved and not before 24 hours have lapsed after the first application.
(ii)
(iii)
(iv)
(i)
Durability of Paintwork The visibility of roadlines and carriageway markings shall not be decreased by more than 50% at any time after the initial panting or repainting. Provide everything necessary to maintain all paintworks during the Defects Liability Period at his own expense. For roadlines and carriageway markings, repaint the entire work when the paintworks failed to meet the above requirement and at the end of the Defects Liability Period. In this respect, the decision of the SO Rep on the 50% visibility requirement shall be final. For other painted items of structures, provide everything necessary and repaint every and all such items with 1 coat of approved paints at the end of the Defects Liability Period. Satisfactorily attend to all Defects such as rust, chipped or dented surfaces, etc. prior to repainting. In this respect, arrange a joint site meeting with the SO Rep before any remedial work is carried out, and comply with all requirements as directed.
52.28
REFLECTORISED THERMOPLASTIC ROAD MARKING (a) General Where reflectorised thermoplastic road marking is indicated on the Drawings or where directed by the SO Rep, the road shall be prepared and the prime coat and reflectorised thermoplastic road marking supplied and applied in the manner as specified. On receipt of instructions from the SO Rep, proceed promptly with such work on receipt of such instructions. Carry out the Works continuously and complete within such time as specified allowing only for unavoidable lost time because of any inclement weather during the course of the Works.
UPG07/S52.DOC(18) lkk(181206) DPD
Ugdg Spec TS 52-19/65 52.28 REFLECTORISED THERMOPLASTIC ROAD MARKING (CONT'D) (b) Material Specifications (i) Thermoplastic Material The thermoplastic material to be used under this Specifications shall comply with the British Standard BS 3262:1982 - "Hot Applied Thermoplastic Road Marking Materials". The material shall be able to resist damage caused by the spillage of petroleum on the road. The material shall be tough, durable, elastic and of heavy duty, formulated to adhere excellently on pavements of all descriptions and to provide superior resistance to abrasion. The material shall be able to withstand the ravages of traffic impacts, staling and flaking. The thermoplastic material shall be so manufactured to be applied by extrusion onto the pavement in molten form with glass beads mixed in and also dropped into the material immediately after it is applied. Reflectorization with solid glass beads of a suitable grading shall be used to improve the visibility of road markings at night. The proportion and grading of glass beads shall be in accordance with paragraph (b)(vi) of this Clause and shall be correctly sprayed to achieve the specified retroreflection throughout its lifetime. (ii) Aggregate The aggregate shall consist of light coloured silica and, calcite, quartz and calcined flint. (iii) Pigment White material shall be titanium dioxide complying with the requirements of type A (anatese) or type R (rutile) of BS 1851. Yellow material shall consist of sufficient yellow pigment of lead chromate of sufficient heat stability when heated to temperature of 200 centigrade to substitute part or all of the titanium dioxide. (iv) Extender Extender shall be in whiting (calcium carbonate prepared from natural chalk) complying with BS 1795. (v) Binder Binder shall consist of synthetic hydrocarbon resin plasticized with mineral oil. (vi) Solid Glass Beads The reflectorization shall be done by solid glass bead, of which the following classes are appropriate for use : Class A B Application Incorporation in thermoplastic road marking compounds Surface applied for thermoplastic road marking compounds and pavement marking paints
The solid glass bead shall be made from soda glass and not less than 70% by mass shall be of transparent glass, reasonably spherical and free from flaws.
UPG07/S52.DOC(19) lkk(181206) DPD
Ugdg Spec TS 52-20/65 52.28 REFLECTORISED THERMOPLASTIC ROAD MARKING (CONT'D) (b) Material Specifications (Cont'd) (vi) Solid Glass Beads (Cont'd) Class A glass beads shall conform to the following requirements of BS 6088 with respect to particle size distribution, roundness and Defects : Minimum % spherical beads by mass tested in accordance with Appendix C of BS 3262 ) ) ) ) Maximum % of defective beads as tested in accordance with Appendix D of BS 3262
Sieve
% Retained
1.18 mm 1.18 mm 850 m 425 m
0 0 0 90
to 3 to 3 to 10 to 100
70
30
Class B glass beads shall conform to the following requirements of BS 6088 with respect to particle size distributions, roundness and Defects : Minimum % spherical beads by mass tested in accordance with Appendix C of BS 3262 Maximum % of defective beads as tested in accordance with Appendix D of BS 3262
Sieve
% Retained
(m) 850 600 300 180 Below 180 0 5 30 10 0 to 5 to 20 to 75 to 30 to 315 ) ) ) 80 ) )
20
The solid glass beads may be applied by either gravity feed or air assisted feed and may have a moisture proof coating or a flotation coating. The solid glass bead used shall be of the chemical composition given in the tables below: Chemical Composition Silicon dioxide Calcium oxide Magnesium oxide Sodium oxide Potassium oxide Aluminium oxide Ferric oxide Si02 Ca0 ) Mg0 ) Na20 ) K20 ) Al203 ) Fe203 ) Requirement not less than 70%
together not less than 8%
together not more than 18%
UPG07/S52.DOC(20) lkk(181206) DPD
Ugdg Spec TS 52-21/65 52.28 REFLECTORISED THERMOPLASTIC ROAD MARKING (CONT'D) (b) Material Specifications (Cont'd) (vi) Solid Glass Beads (Cont'd) The proportions of the constituents of the mixed materials shall comply with the following requirements : Item 1 2 3 Constituents Binder (resin and oil) Solid glass beads Aggregate, pigment extender, and solid glass beads* Percentage by Mass of total mixture Minimum Maximum 18 22 20+ 78 82
* where specified + 20% shall be maintained even in the case of material to which solid glass beads are to be applied by pressure application. The grading or the combined aggregates, pigment, extender and solid glass beads as found on analysis shall comply with the following requirements : Sieve Size 2.80mm 600 microns Percentage by mass passing 100 75 - 95
(c)
Equipments Specification Mechanisation in all aspects of painting of road line and carriageway markings is compulsory under this Contract. It shall be a pre-requisite for the Contractor to own and make available the following equipments for use under the Contract : (i) Carriageway Marking Machines The equipment shall be self propelled and constructed so as to apply thermoplastic roadmarking using screed method, or where the roadmarking thickness required are of 1.5mm only, spray thermoplastic can be applied. It shall be equipped with devices to provide uniform heating, continuous mixing and agitation of the material with ballotini beads while in operation. The equipment shall be capable of adjustment to ensure continuous uniformity in the dimensions of the stripe. It shall be mobile and manoeuvrable to the extent that straight lines can be prescribed in a true arc. It shall provide a means of clearly cutting off square stripe ends upon the installed line. The finished lines shall have well-defined edges and free of wariness. Provide a special melting kettle for heating, melting and mixing of the thermoplastic material. The kettle shall be equipped with a correct thermometer so as to provide positive temperature control and prevent overheating of the thermoplastic material. Heated thermal oil jacket may be utilised to keep the thermoplastic material at constant temperature. When the spray method is employed, the traverse speed of the equipment shall be between five (5) to seven (7) kph. In this case, a self contained preheater unit shall be provided. The heating shall be by oil jacket and thermostatically controlled. A transport trailer unit towable easily by a land rover or equivalent vehicle shall be provided for the transportation of the spray machine from site to site. The trailer shall be twin-ram and of tiltable deck raised and lowered by a screw lever device without any wheel housing to interfere with a machine having side mounted equipment.
UPG07/S52.DOC(21) lkk(181206) DPD
Ugdg Spec TS 52-22/65 52.28 REFLECTORISED THERMOPLASTIC ROAD MARKING (CONT'D) (c) Equipments Specification (Cont'd) (i) Carriageway Marking Machines (Cont'd) The equipment shall also be equipped with devices capable of applying solid glass beads ballotini in such a manner that the ballotini are dispersed upon the freshly painted surface. The ballotini depositor shall be synchronised with the cut off of the paint application control. The ballotini shall be applied at a sufficient rate to ensure retention in the surface of the paint. For the case of a glass bead spray gun, the rate of glass bead dispersion shall be up to 7 kg/min. All parts of the equipment which come into contact with the paint shall be so constructed as to be easily cleaned and maintained. Ensure that the equipment is properly cleaned or maintained at all times. (ii) Roadline Erasing Machine The apparatus shall be mechanically propelled and be able to erase road lines uniformly in the cold state. (iii) Retroreflectometer for Measuring Retroreflectives of Roadmarking It is essential that the Contractor provides at least two (2) units of retroreflectometer for use in this Contract. The instrument shall be robust, simple and quick to operate, weighing not more than 10kg and portable (preferably having dimensions not more than 500 x 210 x 210mm) and be operated by one-operator. It shall be easily connected to a 24 Volt carbattery or a suitable generator for power supply and shall have digital readout in mcd/lx.m2. The measuring area of the instrument shall be of a maximum width of 100mm for each reading taken. The measuring geometry shall be as follows : Entrance Angle Observer Angle : : 86.5% -85%
The lamp used shall be a single 12 volt 100W halogen/quartz Iodide lamp which shall be easily replaceable without tools. The instrument shall be internally zeroed and calibrated; ie. it shall have a built in zero and reference standard and when in normal use shall be 2 capable of setting to zero and calibrating to 600 (six hundred) mcd/lx.m . (iv) Deep Frame Micrometer for measuring thickness of Roadmarking It is essential that the Contractor provide two (2) units of approved deep frame micrometer with an anvil area of at least 10mm2 and an accuracy of 0.01mm for use in this Contract. (d) Method Specifications for Application of Thermoplastic Roadmarking (i) Preparation of Site An approved adhesive primer coat at the rate of 220 gm per sq metre shall be provided on old polished surfaces of bituminous pavements, existing road markings and on concrete before the markings are applied to ensure optimum adhesion. The thermoplastic material shall not be laid over loose detritus, mud or extraneous matter or over old flaking markings of roadline paint or thermoplastic material. The road surface shall be clean and absolutely dry before markings are placed over. The surface shall be swept by a handsweeper, and any damp spot or grease stain shall be burned off with a gas burner. In events whereby existing road lines and markings are out of alignment with the new thermoplastic lines and markings, erase off such existing road lines and markings using Roadline Erasing Machine.
UPG07/S52.DOC(22) lkk(181206) DPD
Ugdg Spec TS 52-23/65 52.28 REFLECTORISED THERMOPLASTIC ROAD MARKING (CONT'D) (d) Method Specifications for Application of Thermoplastic Roadmarking (Cont'd) (ii) To avoid discoloration and embrittlement of the material due to heating at a temperature in excess of that laid by the manufacturer, the thermoplastic material shall be heated in sufficient quantities in a heater fitted with a mechanical stirrer. Once molten, the material shall be laid on expeditiously. It shall not remain in a molten state for more than 6 hours for hydrocarbon resins and shall not at any time heated above the manufacturer's declared safe heating temperature. Laying of Thermoplastic Materials The application of the material to the road shall be by machines using the screed and/or spray method. Equip his machine with various sizes of shoes or to employ a range of machines that would enable him to mark the required lines in one pass. The materials shall be laid within the temperature range specified by the manufacturer and not exceeding 180 centigrade. The thermoplastic markings shall be uniform in texture and thickness and free from blisters, bubbles and streaks. The finished lines shall be sharp and free of ragged edges. Proper templates shall be used for marking of arrows and letterings. The thermoplastic material shall be applied at the specified thickness excluding surface applied solid glass beads or otherwise specified. Be responsible for road surface preparation to ensure satisfactory adhesion of the thermoplastic material. The road surface shall be free from moisture and loose particles. The application of the material shall take place when the road temperature is lower than 40 centigrade and the relative humidity of the air not greater than 85%. (iv) Reflectorization by Surface Application The material shall have minimum 20% (by weight) of ballotini beads incorporated in the thermoplastic as specified in Paragraph (b) (vii) of this clause. To achieve immediate reflection, a further quantity of glass beads shall be sprayed onto the hot material at the time of application. The beads shall be applied by pneumatically "fired" drop-on or by 2 gravity at the rate of approximately 300 50 gm/m , immediately after the thermoplastic material has been deposited on the road but before it has hardened. The retroreflectorization of the thermoplastic roadmarking shall be measured in the field by the retroreflectometer as in paragraph (c) (iii) of this Clause. Measurements shall be done at suitable time when traffic density is lowest with proper signing as specified in Clause 1.9.1 "Site Safety Measures". (v) Thickness The material shall be laid to the specified thickness of 1.5mm/3.0mm. When the film thickness is specified as 1.5mm/3.0mm, the minimum thickness of thermoplastic lines, as viewed from a lateral cross section, shall be not less than 1.5mm/3.0mm at the edge and centre. These measurement shall be taken as an average through any one metre section of the line. The minimum thickness specified are exclusive of surface applied solid glass beads. The method of thickness measurement shall be in accordance with Appendix B of BS 3262:1981.
(iii)
UPG07/S52.DOC(23) lkk(181206) DPD
Ugdg Spec TS 52-24/65 52.28 REFLECTORISED THERMOPLASTIC ROAD MARKING (CONT'D) (e) Performance Specification and Related Test Methods All material properties and their related test methods shall as far as possible conform to BS 3262:1981 unless otherwise stated or approved by the SO Rep. Generally the material shall be easy to apply, has high brightness, very short overdriving time and very low dirt attack. In order for the material to be considered it should have the following properties : (i) Colour Luminance When tested in accordance with BS 3262:1981 Appendix D, the luminance factor of white shall not be less than 70 (as delivered) while that for yellow shall not be less than 80 (as delivered). (ii) Density The density of the thermoplastic material shall not be less than 1.65 kg/1. (iii) Softening Point When tested by the Ring and Ball method in connection with Appendix C of BS 4692, the softening point shall be greater than 80 centigrade. (iv) Heat Stability When tested in accordance with Appendix E of BS 3262:1981, the decrease in luminance factor of the white and yellow material as measured in accordance with Appendix D shall not be more than 5. (v) Flow Resistance A cone made and tested in accordance with Appendix F BS 3262:1981 shall not slump by more than 25%. (vi) Resistance to calcium chloride The material when immersed in a strong solution of calcium chloride for a period of 4 weeks will remain completely unaffected. (vii) Viscosity The material shall possess the following characteristics - solid at 20 centigrade, thick fluid at 170 centigrade. (viii) Abrasive Resistance The material shall possess excellent wear-resistance properties. The wear resistance shall be measured on a Taber Abraser Type 503 standard abrasion tester using H-22 calibrade wheels in accordance with Appendix K of BS 3262:1981. The loss in weight of the test panel after 200 revolutions shall not exceed 0.5gm. (ix) Skid Resistance When tested in accordance with Appendix G, BS3262:1981 skid resistance of the newly placed road marking or any roadmarking that is still within the one-year Defects Liability Period shall not be less than 45.
UPG07/S52.DOC(24) lkk(181206) DPD
Ugdg Spec TS 52-25/65 52.28 REFLECTORISED THERMOPLASTIC ROAD MARKING (CONT'D) (e) Performance Specification and Related Test Methods (Cont'd) (x) Degree of Erosion When the material applied in accordance with the Specifications, is tested in accordance with Appendix M of BS 3262:1981, the total wear index for the test area on each stripe shall not exceed 30 at each of the regular inspection intervals. (xi) Reflectivity Measure the reflectivity by the retroreflectometer as specified in paragraphs (c)(iii) and (d)(iv) of this Clause immediately after the thermoplastic roadmarking has hardened. Four measurements are to be taken at representative locations. The average of the ten readings in any one measurement shall achieve : (a) For white roadmarking : retroreflection reading not less than 2 300 mcd/1x.m retroreflection reading not less than 200 mcd/1x.m2
(b)
For yellow roadmarking and other colours
(xii)
Thickness of material laid Measure the thickness of the thermoplastic laid by a deep frame micrometer. Carry out measurements immediately after the thermoplastic roadmarking has hardened. 10 measurements are to be taken at representative locations. For each measurement at a selected location, 3 samples' mean of 4 readings are taken by the deep frame micrometer to make up one measurement. The 3 samples are to be taken from positions at least 3 metres apart. The average of the 3 samples' mean forming one measurement shall not be less than the thickness specified in paragraph (d)(v) and as shown in the Drawings.
(xiii)
Penalty for non-compliance of thickness and reflectivity If the thickness or reflectivity is found to be below the values specified grind away the surface of the portions represented by the sample readings and then apply thermoplastic material and glass beads to bring the thickness to 1.5/3mm and the reflectivity to at least the minimum required values. All the foregoing shall be at the Contractor's own cost as penalty for non-compliance of the specification.
(f)
Shape and Spacing of Roadmarking For new road surfaces, ensure that the surface be sufficiently clean and dry before the application of the thermoplastic material. The Contractor shall be responsible for erasing the old roadmarkings and the resetting of the whole intersection and marking of the lines to the required widths and dimensions as shown in the Drawings or as directed where existing markings have faded or have run out of alignment. All markings shall be laid in accordance with the Drawings.
(g)
Guarantee of Material Quality Guarantee the thermoplastic road marking material furnished and installed under this Specifications against failure due to poor adhesion resulting from defective materials or method of application for a period of twelve (12) months in conjunction with the Defects Liability Period.
UPG07/S52.DOC(25) lkk(181206) DPD
Ugdg Spec TS 52-26/65 52.28 REFLECTORISED THERMOPLASTIC ROAD MARKING (CONT'D) (h) Test Samples and Testing for Content of Material Present the proposed grading of the glass beads, and aggregates; and samples of the following materials intended for use under the Specifications to an approved Highway Authority Material and Research Laboratory for test. The Authority testing the material may be the same country where the product is manufactured. Details of testing requirements and the test methods shall conform to BS 3262:1981 Appendices A to M or of a method and standard acceptable to the SO Rep. Submit latest test reports of the samples to the SO Rep for consideration. If materials presented under this Clause are accepted, they shall be the standard by which materials actually applied under the Contract shall be compared. (i) Samples to be supplied at the start of Time for Completion Supply 2 (nos.) of white roadmarking and 2 Nos. of yellow roadmarking properly laid on 30mm x 150mm aluminium sheets before the start of the Time for Completion. The thermoplastic roadmarking materials shall be of 3mm thickness. The tone of colour agreed upon by the SO Rep for the samples shall be used as the standard tone for all the Works embraced in this Contract. The SO Rep reserves the right to request for another supply of these same number of samples if he feels that the tone of colour has inevitably changed. (j) Information of product to be supplied by manufacturer Obtain from the manufacturer the following information of the thermoplastic material he proposed to use : (i) (ii) (iii) (iv) Maximum safe heating temperature of the material. Temperature range of application for screed laying. Flash point of the material. Composition of the mixture.
The foregoing information shall be provided to the SO Rep one week before the start of the laying operation. (k) Protection of New Road Marking Make arrangements for the protection of new marking until such time as the material has "set-up" sufficiently to resist being damaged by traffic. Replace at his own cost all materials laid and subsequently rendered unfit by the action of traffic or other road users.
52.29
WATER FOR THE WORKS Obtain all water to be used for making mortar or concrete or for other purposes from the PUB mains. Make provisions for such storage tanks, temporary connections, etc as may be required and for moving such tanks to keep them sufficiently adjacent to the part or parts of the works in progress. Arrange for the supply of water to the Works and for paying all charges.
UPG07/S52.DOC(26) lkk(181206) DPD
Ugdg Spec TS 52-27/65 52.30 CEMENT All cement used in the Works shall be of approved local manufacture except otherwise permitted by the SO Rep. Where cement is specified it shall comply with SS 26 and BS 12. With each delivery the Contractor may be required to send to the SO Rep a memorandum of the quantity delivered and the manufacturer's test certificate. Unless otherwise specified, the compressive strength test shall be used to determine the strength of cement.
52.31
AGGREGATES (a) The materials used as aggregates shall be chemically inert, strong, hard, durable and free from clay lumps and organic and other impurities. All materials and grading of aggregates shall comply with SS 31, SS 73, SS 74, BS 812, BS 882, 1201 and tested in accordance with the requirements of SS 73 and BS 812. Grading of Fine Aggregates The grading of the aggregate, when based on sieve analysis as described in SS 31, SS 73, SS 74, BS 812, 882 and 1201 shall be within the limits of one of the grading zones given in Table 52.2, except that a total tolerance of up to five percent may be applied to the percentage given in bracket. For crushed stones, the permissible limit is increased to 20 per cent. The fine aggregates shall be described as fine aggregates of the grading zone into which it falls, eg. SS 31, Grading Zone One. (c) Grading of Coarse Aggregates The grading of coarse aggregate, carried out in accordance with the procedure detailed in SS 31, SS 73, BS 882, 1201 and BS 812 shall be within the following limits of Table 52.1 : TABLES 52.1 - COARSE AGGREGATES Percentage by weight passing BS Sieves Nominal size of graded aggregate Nominal size of single-sized aggregates
(b)
BS410 Test Sieve
1 in to 3/16 in (38mm to 5mm)
in to 3/16 in (19mm to 5mm)
in to 3/16 in (13mm to 5mm)
2 in (64 mm)
1 in (38 mm)
in (19 mm)
in (13 mm)
3/8 in (10 mm)
in 3 2 1 3/8 3/16 No. 7
mm 76.20 63.50 38.10 19.00 12.70 9.52 4.76 mm 2.36 0-5 100 95 - 100 30 - 70 10 - 35 0-5 100 95 - 100 25 - 55 0 - 10 100 90 - 100 40 - 85 0 - 10 100 85 - 100 0 - 30 0-5 100 85 - 100 0 - 20 0-5 100 85 - 100 0 - 20 0-5 100 85 - 100 0 - 45 0 - 10 100 85 - 100 0 - 20
UPG07/S52.DOC(27) lkk(181206) DPD
Ugdg Spec TS 52-28/65 52.31 AGGREGATES (CONT'D) (c) Grading of Coarse Aggregates (Cont'd) TABLES 52.2 - FINE AGGREGATES Percentage by weight passing BS Sieves Grading Zone 1 Grading Zone 2 Grading Zone 3 Grading Zone 4
BS 410 Test Sieve in 3/8 3/16 No. 7 14 25 52 100 mm 9.52 4.76 mm 2.36 1.18 Microns 600 300 150
100 90 - 100
100 90 - 100
100 90 - 100
100 (95) - 100
60 - (95) 30 - (70) 15 - 34 5 - (20) 0 - (10)
(75) - 100 (55) - 90 35 - 59 (8) - (30) 0 - (10)
(85) - 100 (75) - 100 60 - 79 (12) - (40) 0 - (10)
(95) - 100 (90) - 100 80 - 100 (15) - 50 0 - 15
Store the fines and coarse aggregates separately and in such a manner that segregation of the various size particles shall not occur, form the stockpiles on a platform of weak concrete, timber or similar approved hard standing and keep aggregates clean and free from foreign substances.
52.32
SAMPLES OF AGGREGATES Methods of sampling and testing of aggregates shall comply with SS 73 and BS 812. If required submit samples of the aggregates to the SO Rep at least two weeks before the Contractor begins to deliver materials at the Site of the works. Materials shall not be delivered until samples have been approved. Samples of fine aggregates, each of about 0.015 cu m shall be submitted in air tight containers and samples of coarse aggregate each of about 0.030 cu m shall be submitted in suitable containers. Label all samples plainly with descriptions of the material and source of supply. Furnish additional samples as directed. Test sieves shall comply with SS 74 and BS 410.
52.33
CEMENT MORTAR Cement mortar for general purposes shall consist of one volume of Portland Cement to three volumes of fine aggregates unless otherwise specified or as directed by SO Rep. Testing of cement mortar shall comply with BS 4551. Thoroughly mix the materials in a dry state either by hand on a close jointed wooden platform or in a mechanical mixer of an approved type and sufficient water shall then be added and the whole mixed to a mortar of even and proper consistency. The proper consistency is that when moisture is excluded under a slight pressure, the mortar binds together into a solid lump. Use mortar immediately after it has been prepared and on no account shall it be used after it has commenced to set.
UPG07/S52.DOC(28) lkk(181206) DPD
Ugdg Spec TS 52-29/65 52.34 CONCRETE Unless otherwise stated, concrete mix refers to "designed mix". In designed mixes, the strength shall be the main criterion specified, with compliance to minimum and maximum cement content, and maximum water/cement ratio. The workability of the mix shall be such that the measured slump shall not deviate from the agreed value by more than 25mm or one third of the value, whichever is greater, or Clause 16.6 of BS 5328. Mix design shall be based on a target mean strength not less than the specified characteristic strength plus 7N per mm2. The Contractor shall design the mix and shall be responsible to ensure that the mix supplied will give the required properties including strength. Unless otherwise specified for protection against aggressive soil conditions, designed concrete mixes shall comply with the specifications in the Table below : Specifications For Designed Concrete Mix Grade Minimum crushing strength N per mm2 at 7 days Characteristic strength N per mm2 at 28 days Minimum cement content in kg per m3 of fully compacted concrete Maximum cement 3 content in kg per m of fully compacted concrete Maximum water/cement ratio 55 37 50 34 45 30 40 27 35 24 30 20 25 17 20 14 15 9
55
50
45
40
35
30
25
20
15
475
425
375
350
350
325
300
270
205
550
550
550
550
550
550
550
550
550
0.4
0.45
0.45
0.5
0.5
0.5
0.55
0.6
0.7
Design of mix shall ensure no segregation, no excessive bleeding and ability to achieve specified surface finish. Segregation and bleeding shall be determined by visual inspection. "Nominal mix" may be used in place of "designed mix" provided : the works are of minor nature or involving a small quantity of concrete. the approval of the SO Rep is given. the strength of the concrete is still the responsibility of the Contractor.
The Contractor may adopt the prescribed nominal mix and preparation of ingredients as shown in the table below : Nominal Mix For Use In Minor Works Or Involving Small Quantity Of Concrete Class of Concrete Nominal Volumetric Proportions Weight of Cement kg (a) Grade 30 Grade 25 Grade 20 Grade 15 ' 1:1:2 1:1.5:3 1:2:4 1:3:6 50 50 50 50 Volume of Fine Aggregates m
3
Volume of Coarse Aggregates (19mm to 5mm) m

3
Minimum Crushing Strength N per mm 7 Days 20 17 14 9

2
(b) 0.035 0.050 0.070 0.105
(c) 0.07 0.100 0.140 0.210
28 Days 30 25 20 15
UPG07/S52.DOC(29) lkk(181206) DPD
Ugdg Spec TS 52-30/65 52.34 CONCRETE (CONT'D) Basing on : (a) (b) (c) Cement of bulk density 1450 kg per m . 3 Semi-dry sand (30% voids) of bulk density 1600 kg per m . Coarse aggregate (45% voids) of bulk density 1400 kg per m3.
3
The whole of the concrete shall be dense, compact and thoroughly homogeneous. It shall be placed in foundations, walls, floors, slabs, moulds or shuttering after mixing as soon as practicable and no concrete shall be placed without being thoroughly tamped and compacted. Complete all tamping well before the initial setting of the cement commences. The SO Rep reserves the right to instruct the Contractor to modify, alter and improve the concrete mix from time to time during the progress of the Works. Keep the fine and coarse aggregates separately until actually mixed in the hopper of the concrete mixer, which shall be of the batch or other approved type. Mix each batch for a sufficient period to produce a mixture of even and proper consistency. Immediately after mixing, convey the concrete to the place of final deposit as rapidly as possible by methods which will prevent the segregation, loss or contamination of any of the ingredients. In all cases place the concrete and compact within 20 minutes of the addition of water to the mix. Any concrete left unplaced after this time or showing any indication of drying out or taking its initial set shall be immediately rejected and removed from the Works. Transport the concrete in clean metal buckets, barrows, dumpers or trucks and obtain the written approval of the SO Rep before any method involving the use of concrete pumps, placers, pipelines, chutes or spouts may be used. For transporting concrete by means of chutes, segregation should be minimized by providing a downpipe at the end of the chute. Chutes shall be of metal or metal-lined, preferably round-bottomed, and large enough to guard against overflow. Slopes shall not be flatter than 1 to 3 or steeper than 1 to 2 for ordinary mixes. The SO Rep may allow the use of steeper slopes for stiff mixes. Hand mixing shall be allowed only for small quantities of concrete and subject to the mixing being satisfactorily performed and approved by the SO Rep and to the addition of 10% extra cement. Adjust the proportions of water and aggregates according to the moisture content of the aggregate. Add only sufficient water to the cement and aggregates during mixing to produce a concrete having sufficient workability to enable it to be well consolidated, to be worked into the corners of the shuttering and around the reinforcement and to have the specified strength. When a suitable amount of water has been determined, maintain the resulting consistency throughout the Works and conduct tests from time to time to ensure consistency. The method of determining the consistency of concrete shall either be by slump test or by the compactor tests as defined in SS 78 and BS 1881. Supply all labour and materials necessary to carry out the tests as directed. All concrete which has too high a water content shall be rejected straightaway. No concrete shall be re-mixed after it has once become partially set or hardened but shall be rejected and removed from the Works.
52.35
DEPOSITING AND COMPACTING CONCRETE Do not tip the concrete from a height of more than 2m but lowered in chutes or skips. It shall be placed in regular courses, in layers of not more than 250mm thick, punned down, beaten and neatly levelled to a smooth surface. It shall not be covered up until passed. When the Works is interrupted, the surface of the unfinished concrete shall be thoroughly cleaned, watered, coated with cement grout and covered with a layer of cement mortar, at least 10mm thick, immediately before further concrete is added and whenever practicable, wooden battens shall be inserted in the unfinished concrete and withdrawn to form a continuous key for further concrete, both in horizontal and vertical joints.
UPG07/S52.DOC(30) lkk(181206) DPD
Ugdg Spec TS 52-31/65 52.35 DEPOSITING AND COMPACTING CONCRETE (CONT'D) At all junctions between new and existing concrete work, clean, roughen, coat and spread with at least 10mm thick of cement mortar the surface of the existing concrete; immediately before the new concrete is deposited. No concrete shall be placed unless the SO Rep has inspected the receiving surfaces and is satisfied with the conditions for concreting. Concrete shall be normally compacted by means of approved immersion vibrators of minimum 5000 cycles per minute or otherwise well rammed between and around the steel reinforcement by hand rammers to ensure compactness and to avoid air-holes, or voids and to produce smooth surfaces, free from honey combs. Remove any water accumulating on the surface of newly placed concrete by approved means and place no further concrete thereon until such water be removed. Take great care to prevent the displacement, bending or deformation of the steel before, during or after concreting. Insert all reinforcement members in position before concreting has been started and they shall be temporarily held, fixed, tied or wired securely in position.
52.36
PROTECTION AND CURING OF CONCRETE Allow no load of any kind, however light, on concrete which has not properly matured. Do not allow walking on or laying of planks on concrete until it has been properly matured and ready to carry load. Allow a period of 24 hours between the laying of the concrete foundation and the laying of pipes or kerbstones before backfilling. After being placed in position, all fresh concrete shall be protected from rain, sun and drying wind, and shall not be subjected to any vibrational disturbance other than that arising from compacting. The exposed surfaces of concrete, other than concrete foundation and haunching for kerbstones and pipes, shall be cured with an appropriate curing compound as approved by the SO Rep. The curing compound shall be applied by mechanical sprayer and comply strictly with the manufacturers' instruction. If the curing compound is exposed to rain or water within 4 hours from the time the application is completed, the Contractor shall re-apply the area affected with appropriate curing compound again. The curing compound shall not be used in concrete containing Portland Blast Furnace Cement or Sulphate - Resisting Cement. In such instance, other appropriate curing method shall be adopted.
52.37
CONCRETING AGAINST SURFACE OF EXCAVATION Place concrete only against surfaces of excavation when the receiving surfaces are clean, firm and free from any accumulation of water. Should the receiving surfaces deteriorate as a result of the Contractor's delay in placing concrete, the Contractor shall, as directed, cut the loose material and top-up with compacted firm material or lean concrete at his own cost. Unless otherwise specified, concrete sealing to foundations shall be 75mm Grade 15 concrete. Wherever in the opinion of the SO Rep that ground conditions permit, the timbering shall be removed before concreting and the concrete placed in the walls for the full width from the shuttering to the face of the excavation in one operation. The Contractor's attention is drawn to the desirability of keeping the working space or overbreak to a minimum in all cases. Where concreting in one width is called for by the SO Rep payment for any extra concrete involved will be made for under the Standard Schedule of Rates, the appropriate item for rough shuttering will be omitted.
52.38
CONCRETING THROUGH WATER Concreting shall not be deposited under water without the prior consent of the SO Rep. Submit his proposed method in detail of placing concrete through water for the approval of the SO Rep. Design a concrete mix for this purpose with a high workability of approximately 150mm slump and an increased cement content of 25%. Bear the extra cost involved in placing concrete under water and that of the designated concrete mix unless otherwise specified.
UPG07/S52.DOC(31) lkk(181206) DPD
Ugdg Spec TS 52-32/65 52.39 FINISH OF CONCRETE Upon removal of the shuttering and with approval of the SO Rep make good honeycombed surfaces immediately by a method approved by the SO Rep and superficial water and air holes shall be filled in. Unless instructed to the contrary, rub down the face of exposed concrete placed against shuttering with a carborundum stone immediately upon removal of the shuttering to remove fins or other irregularities. Float the face of concrete for which shuttering is not provided (other than slabs) to give a finish equal to that of the rubbed down face where shuttering is provided. No cement wash, mortar or paint may be applied to any concrete surface without the permission of the SO Rep. Generally concrete finishes as struck from the shuttering are required. Lay all floors, slabs and inverts to the required depths, thickness, inclinations and curvatures shown on the detail Drawings. The falls shall be even so that no pockets occur and the concrete well rammed, consolidated and formed to a true and even slope by means of wooden screeds and straight edges, and immediately thereafter be floated over with a wooden float, any hollows or rough places unavoidably left after screeding being filled up with fine concrete. Subsequently and just before setting, finish off the concrete to a smooth and even surface with metal floats, unless otherwise directed by the SO Rep. Do not lay concrete floors and inverts in two courses, except where specified or by special permission of the SO Rep in writing. Where screeds are required or approved, key and roughen the structural concrete to ensure proper bond. First class plane surfaces free from ripples, hollows, air holes or exposed aggregate is required.
52.40
CONCRETE ADDITIVE Suitable additives may be used in concrete only with the approval of the SO Rep. Apply the concrete additives as approved in accordance to the manufacturer's recommendation and instructions. Verify the suitability of concrete additives by trial mixes and laboratory tests at the Contractor's own cost should the SO Rep deems it necessary.
52.41
PREMIX AND READY-MIX CONCRETE If the Contractor wishes to use ready-mix concrete, obtain prior approval from the SO Rep who will, inter alia, require to be satisfied that the proposed supplier will adhere to the requirement specified to this Specifications and that the quality and control of the mix are satisfactory and comply with SS 289 and BS 5328. The SO Rep shall have access during all working hours of the ready-mix plant. The ready-mix concrete shall comply in all respects with the specified requirements for concrete. The concrete shall comply in all respects with the specified requirements for concrete and the Contractor shall arrange and pay for the making of all the requisite tests. Transport premix concrete only in continuous mixing lorries of an approved design and type. Transport the concrete dry and the water only added to the mix only after arrival at the Site and immediately before placing. Transport ready-mixed concrete only in continuous mixing lorries complying with the manufacturer's operating standard. Appropriate retarder when used shall be subject to the approval of the SO Rep. No additional water shall be added to the ready-mixed concrete.
52.42
TESTING OF CONCRETE CUBES The methods of sampling and testing concrete shall comply with SS 78, BS 1881 and BS 5328. Provide a minimum of 4 numbers of standard metal moulds. No concreting work shall be allowed to commence unless the required number of moulds is present at the Site. No extension of the Time for Completion shall be allowed for stoppage of work due to the Contractor's failure to comply with this requirement. On each concreting day, for every 20 cubic metres or part thereof of each grade of concrete, at least one test shall be taken. At least 4 cubes shall be cast for each test. Two cubes shall be tested at 7 days and the remaining two cubes shall be tested at 28 days for compliance of specified concrete strength. Testing for Grade 15 concrete is not required unless directed by SO Rep.
UPG07/S52.DOC(32) lkk(181206) DPD
Ugdg Spec TS 52-33/65 52.42 TESTING OF CONCRETE CUBES (CONT'D) Compliance of the specified concrete strength shall be judged by tests made on cubes at an age of 7 days and 28 days respectively. Two test cubes shall be made for each test at the age required. The cube strength shall be calculated from the maximum load sustained by the cube at failure. The appropriate strength requirement shall be considered to be satisfied if : (i) (ii) the average of the two cubes is not less than the specified minimum crushing strength; and the difference of the two cube strength is less than 15% of the average crushing strength.
The test cubes shall be cured in accordance with SS78, BS 1881 and BS 5328. Concrete shall be placed in standard steel mould in layers approximately 50mm deep and each layer compacted by using a steel bar 300mm long weighing 1.8 kg and having a ramming face of 25mm square. The number of strokes per layer shall not be less than 35 for 150mm cubes. The cubes shall be tested at the HDB Prefabrication Technology Centre or other approved accredited testing laboratory with equivalent or better testing facilities, auto-capturing and computerized monitoring system with analysis capabilities. The Contractor shall submit the information pertaining to the proposed laboratory to SO Rep for approval. All contract information and test results shall be uploaded to EPTC e-cube website. The Contractor shall provide lockable humid boxes of adequate size to store all the test cubes for the specified period. The humid boxes shall be placed in a covered area and maintained at a relative humidity of above 95%. The keys to such curing facility shall be exclusively held in custody by a person designated by the SO Rep. The test cubes to be tested at HDB Prefabrication Technology Centre shall be collected by the SO Rep from the designated site at regular interval. The SO Rep shall inform Contractor of the designated collection site and the Contractor shall deliver cubes to the designated collection site on the day of collection. The Contractor shall remove crushed cubes from the HDB Prefabrication Technology Centre and used them as recycling materials for worksites. The Contractor shall provide facilities to enable the identification of test cubes by radio frequency or similar means. The Contractor shall provide at least one web-based radio frequency identification (RFID) reader able to read the RFID tags on concrete cubes from a minimum distance of at least 40 mm. The Contractor shall include the appropriate interfacing software to a web-based controller. The Contractor shall logon to a website of the Employer to register the concrete cube data and tag IDs using the RFID reader. The registration of cube data and tag IDs shall be done within the same casting day. The appropriate RFID tags shall be placed at the corner of the cubes while the cube is still fresh. The top surface of the RFID tag shall be level with the concrete cube surface. The Contractor shall protect the RFID tags on the concrete cube while demoulding. For damage or loss of RFID tag, the Contractor shall be charged the replacement cost based on the Employer's purchase price The Employer shall deduct the charges payable by the Contractor from any monies due or becoming due to the Contractor or recover the same from the Contractor as a debt due by the Contractor to the Employer. 52.43 FAILURE OF TEST ON CONCRETE TEST CUBES For each batch of concrete, make two test cubes for each test at 7 days and 28 days respectively. The crushing strength to be achieved is specified in Clause 52.34 "Concrete". Notwithstanding that the test on the 7 days cubes pass the strength as indicated in Clause 52.34 "Concrete" the test on the 28 days cubes shall still be required to be carried out. The SO Rep shall exercise his rights under Clause 1.10 "Nuisance and Irregularities" to impose charges against the Contractor for each test that fails to attain the required crushing strength at 28 days. The SO Rep may also direct that the part of works represented by the cubes that has failed be taken down or cut and replaced to comply with the Specifications or that additional measures shall be provided to make the Works secure all at the Contractor's expense. 52.44 CONCRETE WALLS Concrete walls generally shall be constructed in alternate bays not exceeding 7m in length. The height of any lift of concrete shall not exceed 2.5m unless otherwise permitted by the SO Rep. Walls shall be truly vertical and all surfaces which are exposed to view or to liquids finished to a smooth surface.
UPG07/S52.DOC(33) lkk(181206) DPD
Ugdg Spec TS 52-34/65 52.45 SHUTTERING All shuttering or formwork shall comply with Singapore Standard CP 23 and shall be, in every respect, rigidly constructed of approved material and shall be true to the shape and dimensions as shown in the Drawings. Timber used for formwork shall be medium hardwood, machined dressed to a uniform thickness. The timber shall be well seasoned, free from loose knots and, unless otherwise approved, wrought on all faces. Where plywood is to be used, it shall be Phenolic film faced plywood complying with SS1 and cut to size from sheets at least 12mm thick. The Contractor shall provide appropriate formwork system that produce concrete surfaces with good offform finish requiring no plastering or skimming. However, if the off-form finish is unsatisfactory, the SO Rep reserves the right to instruct the Contractor to carry out plastering and skimming work to achieve the required finish as specified. The form face in contract with concrete shall be free from dirt, adhering grout, projecting nails, splits and other defects. Formwork shall be coated with an approved form oil which is compatible with the required finish. Such oil shall be insoluble in water, non-staining, not injurious to concrete and shall not become flaky or be removed by rain or wash water. Diesel oil and liquids which retard the setting of concrete shall not be used. The same approved type of form oil shall be used for all work. The application of the form oil shall be such that no reinforcement is coated by the oil and there shall be no accumulation of the oil on the formwork. Close all joints tightly and prevent all leakage of liquid cement from the concrete. All formwork shall be inspected and approved by the SO Rep before any concreting operation is commenced but this shall in no way affect, vary or relieve the Contractor of any of his responsibilities under the contract.
52.46
STRIKING OF SHUTTERING Striking or removing shuttering shall not begin until the concrete is matured to sufficient strength to carry its own weight plus any constructional or designed loads likely to come upon it, and this work shall be conducted only under the personal supervision of a competent foreman. After striking of formwork, any honeycombed surface and defective or damaged concrete work arising from improper work procedures shall be immediately made good, as, directed by the SO Rep. Any remedial measures carried out without the knowledge and approval of the SO Rep shall be liable for rejection and re-execution. All holes formed by tie bolts shall be filled with cement mortar. The minimum period before striking of the formwork for ordinary Portland Cement concrete shall be in accordance with the following : Minimum Period Before Striking 12 hours 3 days
Type of Formwork
Remarks
All vertical or side formwork Soffit formwork to slabs and beams
The period shall commence from the time of last pour of concrete.
Props to slabs and beams Props to cantilever slabs and cantilever beams
14 days 21days
After striking of formwork, props shall be immediately put up to support the structure.
UPG07/S52.DOC(34) lkk(181206) DPD
Ugdg Spec TS 52-35/65 52.47 RE-CONSTRUCTION OF FAULTY WORK Remove and reconstruct any structural member of work which gives evidence before or after removal of the shuttering that the concrete was of faulty quality at the time of deposition or was not properly deposited and rammed in the shuttering or gives evidence that any member of the reinforcement was omitted, incorrectly placed, or displaced by any agency or cause or which gives evidence of any Defect, fault or injury from any cause whatsoever which might prejudicially alter the strength and durability of the construction.
52.48
STEEL REINFORCEMENT All steel reinforcement shall be pre-cut and pre-bent before delivery to Site. No cutting and bending of steel reinforcement is allowed to be done on Site. Obtain steel reinforcement from local manufacturer or other manufacturers as may be approved in writing by the SO Rep and comply with SS 2, SS 18, SS 32, BS 4449, BS 4461, BS 4482 and BS 4483 wherever applicable. All reinforcement shall be free from scale and all loose rust. It shall not be coated with any grease, oil, paint or adhering earth that may impair the bond between the concrete and reinforcement.
52.49
TESTING OF STEEL Whenever required by the SO Rep, arrange for the manufacturer to supply direct to the SO Rep a test certificate stating the process of manufacture and the results of each of the mechanical tests applicable to the description of the material purchased, the chemical analysis and all as specified in the relevant Standards. Alternatively, the SO Rep may require that the steel elements be tested according to BS 4360. If the representative samples fail to achieve the minimum value specified, the batch represented shall be rejected and the SO Rep shall exercise its rights under Clause 1.10 "Nuisance and Irregularities" to impose charges against the Contractor for each such failure.
52.50
BENDING, PLACING AND FIXING REINFORCEMENT BARS The number, size, form and position of each steel bar, tie, link, stirrup or other member of the reinforcement shall be in exact accordance with the approved drawings. Nothing shall be allowed to interfere with the disposition of any member of the reinforcement and special precaution shall be taken that it is not only correctly placed but made to keep its correct place during the placing and setting of the concrete. The ties of links connecting longitudinal bars in columns shall be taut so that the main bars shall be properly braced in all directions. Bend reinforcement bars by machine or other approved means producing a gradual and even motion. Bend bars cold unless the SO Rep shall approve bars of over 25mm in size being bent hot. Bars bent hot shall not be heated beyond cherry-red colour and after bending allowed to cool slowly without quenching. Bars depending on cold-working for their strength shall always be bent cold. Where it is necessary to reshape steel previously bent, this shall only be done with the SO Rep approval and each bar shall be inspected for sign of fracture. Bends shall comply with the dimensions given in the bending schedule. Dimensions of bent bars and internal dimensions of binders and the like shall not exceed the dimensions given on the bar schedule or elsewhere, and shall not be more than half per cent shorter than the specified dimensions. The internal radii of bends shall not be less than twice the size of the bar unless described to the contrary. The internal radii of the bends at corners or binders or the like shall be half the size of the bar embraced by the binder. For the purpose of this requirement the size of a bar shall mean the diameter of plain round bar or wire, or twice the diameter of one of the composing bars of a twin twisted bar, or one-and-a-half times the nominal dimensions of the side of a twisted square bar.
UPG07/S52.DOC(35) lkk(181206) DPD
Ugdg Spec TS 52-36/65 52.50 BENDING, PLACING AND FIXING REINFORCEMENT BARS (CONTD) Where steel fabric is required as reinforcement carefully and accurately bend to the required shape when cold, either with a bending machine or edge block. Do all bending before the fabric is laid in position and no heating or welding shall be allowed. Carefully straighten steel fabric if they come in rolls. No piece of steel, wood or any foreign material whatsoever shall be employed on the bottom board, or against the side board of the shuttering to keep the reinforcement bars in position. The length of lap joints shall be not less than forty times the diameter of the steel member unless otherwise permitted by the SO Rep. Hooks shall have a diameter of curvature of at least four times the diameter of the member and shall be bent to a semi-circular form with a straight and measuring in length at least four times the diameter of the member. Wherever shown on the Drawings all free ends of bars shall be hooked as above and all joints in the length of bars shall be lapped and laps shall be at points of minimum stress. Maintain the vertical distances required between successive layers of bars in beams of similar members by the provision of mild steel spacer bars inserted at such intervals that the main bars do not perceptibly sag between adjacent spacer bars. Immediately before concreting, examine the reinforcement for accuracy of placing and cleanliness and corrected if necessary. No concreting shall commence until the SO Rep has inspected the reinforcement in position and until his approval has been obtained. Reinforcement projecting from work being concreted or already concreted shall not be bent out of its correct position for any reason unless approved and shall be protected from deformation or other damage. Provide and maintain the cover of concrete to the reinforcement as described in the Drawings and within a tolerance of 3mm by means of distance pieces of plastic spacers or cement mortar. 52.51 FIXING FABRIC REINFORCEMENT Securely and accurately tie fabric reinforcement which shall comply with SS 32 and fix in position in accordance with the general requirements for fixing bar requirement. All fabric shall be "lapped" and the minimum lap allowed in the case of rectangular mesh fabric shall be: 450mm overlap of the longitudinal wires, 75mm overlap of the transverse wires. With square mesh fabric the minimum lap allowed shall be : 300mm overlap of the longitudinal wires, 300mm overlap of the transverse wires. In all types of fabric the lap provided shall be sufficient to develop the full strength of the material. Allow for all cutting to waste. 52.52 CONSTRUCTION JOINT Construction joints shall be of an approved shape and shall be vertical or horizontal, as required and except that in an inclined member, the joint shall be at right angle to the axis of the member. Provide in the positions shown on the Drawings or as directed. Key by the use of battens placed in the concrete and subsequently remove. Before placing new concrete against concrete that has already set, clean and roughen the face of old concrete and remove loose aggregate therefrom. Immediately before placing the new concrete, wet the face thoroughly and apply a coating of neat cement grout thereto. Ram the new concrete well against the prepared face before the grout sets.
UPG07/S52.DOC(36) lkk(181206) DPD
Ugdg Spec TS 52-37/65 52.53 BRICKS Bricks shall be at the best of their respective kinds, sound, hard, squarely made, well burnt throughout, regular in size and shape, with good faces and clean arrises and free from lime, chalk, pebbles, shells or other Defects. They shall be of the standard size and conform to SS 103 and BS 3921. They shall not be removed away from the Site without written permission by the SO Rep. The crushing strength of bricks shall not be less than 27.5 KN/m2.
52.54
BRICKWORK GENERALLY Lay each brick after being immersed in water as far as practicable or wetted in full and close joints of cement mortar in its bed, ends and sides in one operation, each course being subsequently flushed and finished solid without damage to the external faces of the work. In no case shall a brick be laid dry or with insufficiently filled joints and afterwards flushed in. At least every fourth course shall be laid fair and smooth to line and joints shall not exceed 6mm in thickness and shall be neatly finished on the face with flat or flushing joints. Transport bricks carefully in carts or lorries and stack and remove all broken bricks from the Site without delay. Press every brick firmly into position, the surplus mortar being lightly struck off flush with the trowel or pointed. Wet the top of any work left unfinished immediately before re-starting. Keep all faces of brickwork clean. Fill bed and vertical joints of brickwork solid with mortar and no vertical joint allowed to be flushed up from the top, but each joint filled up as the bricks are laid. All Works found not complying strictly with this requirement shall be taken down and rebuilt. Maintain vertical joints in alternate courses in vertical lines. No work shall be carried up to a height greater than 1m above the level of adjacent work. The style of brickwork in vertical walls shall be English Bond unless otherwise specified. The height of four courses of bricks laid in mortar shall not exceed by more than 25mm the height of the same brick laid dry. Where the work is curved on plan, crop the bricks when necessary to ensure that they break joint correctly.
52.55
CONCRETE PIPES Concrete pipes, bends and channels for sewers, manholes and culverts shall be obtained from an approved manufacturer and shall be made from Portland Cement and the pipes shall preferably be spun reinforced concrete pipes. If permitted by the SO Rep, pipe may have collar joints when socketted pipes are unobtainable. Socketted pipes shall have the sockets cast with the barrel of the pipe. The sewer pipes shall comply with the requirements of the Water Reclamation (Network) Department, PUB, and also comply with SS 183 wherever applicable. Unless otherwise permitted, use only concrete pipes and fittings with spigot and socket rubber ring joints or similar approved for sewers. They shall be of the required class and be tested and certified satisfactory by SAC or Water Reclamation (Network) Department, PUB. Unless otherwise specified, such as limestone aggregate or using PVC lining, all concrete pipes shall be thickwall reinforced concrete pipe using Ordinary Portland Cement all in accordance with the Standard Specifications and tests of Water Reclamation (Network) Department, PUB. The Contractor's attention is drawn to the requirement that the Clauses laid down in the current Standard Specifications for Sewerage Works published by the Water Reclamation (Network) Department, PUB, shall be complied with.
UPG07/S52.DOC(37) lkk(181206) DPD
Ugdg Spec TS 52-38/65 52.56 REINFORCED CONCRETE PIPES OF DIAMETER 300MM TO 825MM FOR SEWERAGE WORK All sewers using reinforced concrete pipes and are of nominal internal diameter between 300mm and 825mm shall comply with the following requirements : (a) thickwall reinforced concrete pipe using Ordinary Portland Cement and with an extra internal wall thickness of 38mm over the normal cover to reinforcement, as provided for in the approved standard of manufacture. the extra wall thickness of 38mm shall be added monolithically to the internal surface of the pipe barrel.
(b)
and the specifications of Water Reclamation (Network) Department, PUB. 52.57 52.57.1 VITRIFIED CLAY PIPES Vitrified Clay Pipes and Joints (a) (b) Vitrified clay pipes and fittings shall comply with either European Standard EN 295: 1991, Australian Standard AS 1741: 1991 or other Equivalent Standard. All pipes shall be sampled and tested to the requirements of the relevant Standards. PSB Test Report or PSB Certificate of conformity for vitrified clay pipes certified under the PSB Product Listing Scheme (PLS) is acceptable as proof of compliance with the required standards. Typetested pipes by other local/overseas test laboratories accredited with PSB are also acceptable. All pipes and its joints must be watertight. Rubber sealing ring and other jointing materials used in the joint assemblies shall comply with the requirements as specified in the relevant Standards. The chemical resistance, hydraulic roughness, abrasion resistance and shear resistance of all pipes and fittings shall be tested and comply with the requirements as specified in the relevant Standards. Dimension Requirements Vitrified clay pipes shall have minimum bore as follows : Nominal Size (mm) Minimum Bore (mm)* *Note: 200 195 225 219 250 244 300 293 400 390 500 487 600 585 700 682 800 780
(c) (d)
(e)
Other nominal sizes greater than nominal size 200mm may be manufactured to comply with this standard, providing that the minimum permissible bore is not more than 2.5% less than the nominal size, rounded to the nearest mm.
(f)
Marking Requirements (i) All pipes manufactured and supplied shall have the following marks indented on the exterior of the barrel : The manufacturer's name Date of manufacture Nominal bore size of pipe Standard Reference Crushing Strength in kN/m (ii) All pipes and fittings shall be from only one (1) manufacturer. The Contractor shall forward the manufacturer's signed certificate stating that the pipes and fittings comply with the relevant standard and the results of all tests to the SO.
UPG07/S52.DOC(38) lkk(181206) DPD
Ugdg Spec TS 52-39/65 52.57.2 Vitrified Clay Pipes and Joints for Trenchless Construction The following sets out the requirements for flexibly jointed vitrified clay pipes for construction by trenchless installation technique including pipe jacking. (a) Strength Requirements (i) Vitrified clay pipes shall have minimum crushing strength as follows : Nominal Size (mm) Strength (kN/m) (ii) (iii) ' (iv) When tested in accordance with EN 293-3:1991, the deviation from squareness measured at the pipe ends should be not greater than 1mm. 200 48 225 54 250 60 300 72 400 80 500 80 600 96 700 112 800 128
The manufacturer shall declare the design jacking load. All pipes or pipe sections shall be sampled after any grinding or cutting of ends and tested to the requirements of the relevant Standards.
(b)
Jointing Sleeves The joints of the vitrified clay pipes shall be of the double spigot type that are suitable for direct jacking or microtunnelling. The jointing sleeves shall be made of Type 316 stainless steel.
(c)
Rubber Rings The rubber sealing rings and other jointing materials used in the joint assemblies shall comply with the requirements as specified in the relevant Standards.
(d)
Buffer Rings
The buffer ring shall be made of standard flooring grade chipboard sheets.
52.57.3
Vitrified Clay Pipes and Joints in Open-Cut Method of Construction The following sets out the requirements for flexibly jointed vitrified clay pipes for installation by open-cut method of construction. (a) Strength Requirements (i) Vitrified clay pipes shall have minimum crushing strength as follows : Nominal Size (mm) Strength (kN/m) (ii) 200 32 225 36 250 40 300 48 400 64 500 80 600 80 700 84 800 96
All pipes or pipe sections shall be sampled after any grinding or cutting of ends and tested to the requirements of the relevant Standards. Pipes shall meet the tolerance for squareness at ends of pipes as specified in EN 295-1. This is fixed at 6mm for pipes up to and including nominal diameter 300mm and then at 2% of nominal diameter for larger sizes.
(iii)
UPG07/S52.DOC(39) lkk(181206) DPD
Ugdg Spec TS 52-40/65 52.57.4 Flexible Joint to Vitrified Clay Pipe (a) Flexible joints to stoneware pipes shall be of the rubber ring or polyester type of a design and form approved by the SO Rep. The joints shall be of a type to remain completely watertight while accommodating a deflection of 5E in any direction. Where polyester joints or polyester/rubber ring joints are supplied the formed polyester must be securely bonded to the stoneware and pipes having damaged or loose polyester rings or socket packings shall be rejected.
(b)
(c)
52.58
PITCH-FIBRE PIPE Pitch-Fibre pipes shall be of an approved type and manufacture conforming in all respects with BS 2760. The joints shall be of a design to permit flexibility and movement without leakage.
52.59
CAST IRON PIPE (a) Unless otherwise specified cast-iron pipes and specials and cast (spun) iron pipes shall comply with BS 4622 and shall be Class "B". Flanged pipe fittings and flanges shall also comply with BS 4622 Class "B". The expression "cast-iron" also embraces spun iron where applicable. Joints to cast iron pipes unless otherwise indicated shall be "screwed gland", "bolted gland" or a proprietary rubber ring joint "Tyton" or similar.
(b)
52.60
STEEL PILES
52.60.1
Sizes and Lengths of Steel Pipe (a) The diameters described are the finished internal diameter of the linings, and the steel pipes, joints, flexible joints, etc, shall all be made to such dimensions as to suit the required finished internal diameter. A tolerance of plus or minus 3 mm will be allowed in the finished lining thickness. The tolerance for the finished internal diameter shall not exceed plus or minus 1% of the nominal diameter of the pipe. The pipe lengths stated are effective lengths when laid and the Contractor shall allow in his prices for the additional length of pipe required to form the joints.
(b)
52.60.2
Thickness of Steel (a) (b) The thickness of steel plate to be used in manufacturing the pipes is stated in the drawings. In the even of the plate thickness stated not being available, the Contractor shall allow in his prices for supplying the nearest available thicker plate section.
52.60.3
Steel for Pipe and Special The steel for the pipes and specials shall be manufactured by the open-hearth or electric process, acid or basic and shall conform to and be tested in accordance with BS 534.
UPG07/S52.DOC(40) lkk(181206) DPD
Ugdg Spec TS 52-41/65 52.60.4 Testing of Steel Pipes (a) All pipes and specials shall be hydraulically tested after manufacture (i.e. without the lining or coating) as described in BS 534 in the presence of the SO Rep to a test pressure of 200 metres load of water. Where specials and fittings are of a shape or size on which it is not practicable to apply the hydraulic test the SO Rep may give approval to an alternative method of test such as the paraffin test. The Contractor shall bear the cost and expense for all the tests specified.
(b)
(c)
52.60.5
Lining of Steel Pipes (a) All the pipes and specials shall after the removal from the inner surfaces of all rust, loose seals, oil, grease or other foreign matter and thorough cleansing, be lined with concrete or other materials as specified and shall be in accordance with the current BS 534. It shall be terminated as near to the ends of the pipes and specials as will allow for effective jointing without damage to the lining. Great care must be taken to avoid overstressing the lining at any stage of manufacture, handling or during delivery and storage and linings showing hollow, drumming sections or with cracks, other than surface cracks which can be shown not to penetrate more than 6mm below the surface will not be accepted. All pipes above 900mm diameter shall be clearly marked "Top" and "Bottom" as soon as the pipe is lined.
(b)
52.60.6
External Coating of Steel Pipes The external coating shall be ad described hereunder : (i) All pipes and specials shall be cleaned over the whole of their external surface by sand or grit blasting, acid pickling or mechanical wire brushing in order to remove all millscales, rust, paint, grease and loose dirt. Within two hours of cleaning, the dry clean surface shall receive one cold application of approved bitumen primer by brush or spray application over the whole external surface. When the primer is dry and within 5 days of its application, the pipes shall be coated to within 75mm of each and with a continuous coating of not less than 2.4mm thickness of hot applied coaltar enamel by pouring onto the primed pipes as they are mechanically rotated. The temperature of the enamel as it flows onto the pipes shall be between 225EC and 250EC but the temperature of the enamel in the melter is not to exceed 260EC. Any melt which has been overheated shall be immediately removed from the rolling rig and discarded. Simultaneously with the pouring of the hot enamel 150mm wide coal-tar saturated felt reinforced with glass fibres at 6mm spacing outer wrap shall be spirally wrapped with 6-12mm overlap on to the exterior of the exterior of the hot coating, on the rotating pipes, so as to firmly adhere to it. The primer and enamel shall meet American Water Works Association Specification C:203:1962 which is for plasticised coal-tar base materials.
(ii)
(iii)
(iv)
(v)
52.60.7
Joints to Steel Pipes (a) Expansion and welded joints are to be made in accordance with drawings although changes may be proposed by the Contractor and such changes must be approved in writing by the SO Rep before manufacture commences. The flexible joints are to be of an approved form similar to Viking Johnson Couplings. Details of the type of joints is subject to SO Rep's approval.
(b)
UPG07/S52.DOC(41) lkk(181206) DPD
Ugdg Spec TS 52-42/65 52.60.8 Protection during Transit and Storage of Steel Pipe (a) The coated pipes shall be lime washed and provided with sufficient protection such as straw roping to prevent any damage during transit or storage. The ends of all pipes and specials shall be covered with caps or discs of an approved pattern to prevent damage to the pipe ends, joints and lining. The unprotected surfaces of all pipes and specials after lining (eg. pipe ends, joints, etc.) shall be protected from corrosion during storage by the application of Shell "Ensis" or other approved temporary coating.
(b)
52.61
GASKETS FOR FLANGED PIPE (a) (b) Gaskets for flanged pipes shall comply with the requirements of BS 2494 and BS 3063. They shall be "full face" Class "D" 3mm thick.
52.62
BOLT, NUT AND WASHER FOR FLANGED PIPE JOINT (a) (b) Bolts, nuts and washers for flanged pipe joints shall be in accordance with BS 4190 and BS 4320. Where flange bolts are to be installed and buried under ground the bolts, nuts and washers shall be non-ferrous or metal coated to prevent any corrosion.
52.63
UPVC PIPES Unplasticized polyvinyl chloride (UPVC) pipes and fittings shall be of an approved type and manufacture complying with the requirements of the Water Reclamation (Network) Department, PUB. They shall conform to SS 272, BS 4660, BS 5481 and the relevant Australian Standards where applicable.
52.64
ORDER OF SEWER PIPES, FITTINGS AND MANHOLE PARTS For the construction of sewers, place order for the supply of all the required pipes and manhole parts within 7 days from the Date of the Letter of Acceptance and shall notify the SO Rep of this in writing. The order shall stipulate the specified times of delivery to the Site after all the necessary tests required by SAC or Water Reclamation (Network) Department, PUB. If no such order is made, the SO Rep may place on behalf of the Contractor the necessary order to a supplier decided and approved by the SO Rep. Bear all costs involved in such an order and these shall be paid to the supplier by deducting from the Contract Progress Payment.
52.65
PIPE LAYING Carefully brush all pipes inside and visually test for soundness before being laid. Lay the pipes to true inverts, straight lines and falls, each pipe being separately bonded between sight rails and bearing evenly upon the solid ground or concrete for its full length. Where pipes are to be laid in rock cutting, take the excavation down to 100mm below bed level and take great care to ensure that there are no projecting pieces of rock on which the pipe will ride. Make up the bed to its true line and level by refilling with either 100mm of consolidated, selected material from the excavation, well rammed and watered if necessary or with 100mm of compacted sand or with 100mm of Grade 15 concrete as directed.
UPG07/S52.DOC(42) lkk(181206) DPD
Ugdg Spec TS 52-43/65 52.65 PIPE LAYING (CONT'D) Where pipes are to be supported on a bed of concrete or surrounded with concrete, provide rectangular blocks composed of concrete made in approved moulds at least 14 days before use and approved hardwood folding wedges. Provide two blocks for each pipe set and bond into the correct level on the formation bottom and lay the pipe on them properly centred and socketted. Two hardwood folding wedges of a width equal to the width of the concrete block shall then be inserted between the body of the pipe and the block and shall be driven together until the pipe is brought to the exact level required. Blocks and wedges shall then be left undisturbed while the pipes are being jointed and the concrete surround is being placed in position. Ensure that all blocks and wedges are of sufficient size and strength to prevent settlement of the pipes and make good any settlement.
52.66
JOINTING CAST IRON PIPE In general for all types of joint, thoroughly clean the pipe joint and jointing ring or material of dirt and grease before any jointing commences. The pipes shall be properly supported, bedded and lined up before the joint is set up and made. Make bolted gland, screwed gland and similar types of flexible patent joint in accordance with the manufacture's instructions. Clean the joint rings, lubricate with the manufacturer recommended material and accurately position it. Firmly push or jack home the joint and where screwed or bolted glands are involved steadily and evenly tighten the glands all round. No lead caulked joints shall be permitted. Carefully clean the flanged joints, centre and line up with only 3mm allowed for the gasket between the faces of the flange. The flanged gasket shall be carefully positioned and held by the flanged bolts.
52.67
JOINTING STEEL PIPE (a) Welded pipe joints shall be made by means of the metal are welding process in compliance with the general requirements for this process laid down in BS 1856. The jointing of pipes and specials shall be done with the pipes and specials laid in their final positions. Their positions shall be so adjusted in preparation for welding that the clearance between pipe barrel and jointing sleeve does not exceed 3mm. If tack welds are used they shall be limited in number and positioned evenly throughout the circumference of the joint. The length of each tack weld shall not be less than 40mm. The section size of the tack welds shall be similar to that of the root run to be deposited in the joint. The extremities of tack welds shall be chipped or ground to facilities the proper fusion with subsequent disposition if they are to be incorporated in the initial root run. A whipping technique shall be employed at end of the run on each tack weld and all other electrode changes to prevent and craters. The main welds shall be fillet welds and the leg of each weld shall not be less than the thickness of the steel plate being welded. Steel pipes above 825mm diameter shall be welded both internally and externally. Welding shall not be performed where, in the opinion of the SO Rep, the weld would be subject to excessive cooling rates and welded joints shall not be disturbed until thoroughly cooled. Welds shall be free from undercut, porosity, cracking, zones of incomplete fusion, inadequate root penetration, or any other defect listed in BS 499, Section 6 and Appendix. Porosity, slag inclusion of any other foreign body shall not exceed 1.6mm in any dimension nor shall there be more than six such inclusions of this maximum size per square inch of weld metal, nor shall the combined 2 areas or any numbers of defects exceed 0.02mm of weld metal.
(b)
(c)
(d)
(e)
(f) (g)
(h)
UPG07/S52.DOC(43) lkk(181206) DPD
Ugdg Spec TS 52-44/65 52.67 JOINTING STEEL PIPE (CONT'D) (i) Cut lengths shall be jointed by the use of welded butt straps or flexible joints. Wherever necessary the external and internal lining shall be made good as specified after completion and acceptance of the joint. When butt straps are used they shall be welded both internally and externally. Short tubes may be provided on the side of the pipes to form an access for welding leads during pipelaying. These access tubes shall be sealed off by welding sockets into the tubes.
(j)
52.68
JOINTING CONCRETE PIPES Push well home each concrete pipe with the rubber ring accurately positioned on the spigot into the socket of the previously laid pipe by means of uniformly applied pressure with the aid of a jack or similar appliance. Use roll on rubber rings and they shall be lubricated before making the joint using soft soap, water or other approved lubricant supplied by the manufacturer. The manufacturer's instruction shall be deemed to form part of this Specifications. Lay the PVC lines concrete pipes and join as specified above except that all necessary precautions shall be taken to protect and safeguard the PVC lining from any damage during pipe laying. After the pipes have been laid, jointed and approved by the SO Rep, "Thermo Weld" the cover flaps of the PVC lining across the pipe joints, according to manufacturer's instruction and this shall be carried out in conjunction with the pipe laying progress. Where the lined pipes enter the manholes and other structures, seal the PVC lining by the welding of approved preformed cover fillets or angles forming returns to the arrises built into the in-situ concrete work. The manufacturer's instructions for jointing and thermo-welding the joints shall be deemed to form part of this Specifications. The manufacturer shall submit to the SO Rep for approval, the methods for field testing the PVC lining and thermo-welded joints for flaws, burnt surfaces, pin holes etc. Employ approved methods for the complete testing of the lining, jointing and welding throughout the line.
52.69
FRACTURE OF PIPES In the event of pipes being fractured after being, to all appearances, properly laid, whether due to imperfect beds having been formed or the material for refilling having been improperly selected or to any other cause, the Contractor shall be responsible and shall be called upon to replace such defective pipes at his own cost, if such defect appears before the expiry of the Defects Liability Period. Immediately remove and replace any pipe or length of pipes found to be defective and remake all leaking joints.
52.70
PRECAST CONCRETE DRAIN CHANNELS, KERBS, DIVIDERS, ETC Precast concrete drain channels, kerbs, road channels (gutters) and dividers shall be constructed in accordance with the Drawings and shall comply with the requirements as regards to strength of concrete, water absorption, rate of wear, finish and size, where applicable with BS 7263 and/or SS 214. Obtain precast concrete units from ISO 9000 or Good Manufacturing Practice Scheme Suppliers only. Lay precast concrete drain channels, kerbs, road channels (gutters) and dividers, true to line and level in accordance with the Drawings. 0.5% of the total number of precast units to be used for the Works subject to a minimum of three numbers of precast units shall be selected at random by the SO Rep for water absorption tests by a competent Authority whilst work is in progress. The SO Rep shall exercise his rights under Clause 1.10 "Nuisance and Irregularities" to impose charges against the Contractor for every test that exceeds the average absorption rate as stated below. For each water absorption test, three test pieces shall be used for determining the average increase in weight by water absorption.
UPG07/S52.DOC(44) lkk(181206) DPD
Ugdg Spec TS 52-45/65 52.70 PRECAST CONCRETE DRAIN CHANNELS, KERBS, DIVIDERS, ETC (CONT'D) When tested for water absorption, the average increase in weight by absorption of water in the first 30 minutes shall not exceed 3% of the dry weight of the three test pieces for all precast concrete channels, kerbs, etc. These tests shall be in addition to those to be carried out by either LTA or the SO Rep prior to taking over of the completed works before the expiry of Defects Liability Period. Comply with the final decision made by LTA or the SO Rep in respect of any test carried out by them.
52.71
PRECAST CONCRETE SLABS Precast concrete slabs for footpaths, etc shall comply with requirements of BS 7263, whenever applicable. Submit the details of the supply of this item to the SO Rep for approval.
52.72
TRAFFIC SIGNS, CONES, BARRIERS AND LAMPS All traffic signs, cones, barriers and lamps shall comply with the requirements of LTA, subject to the approval of the SO Rep. (a) Traffic Sign All warning, regulatory and information signs shall be made of aluminium sheeting. The sheeting shall be 2.03 mm thick of SWG No. 14 and the materials for the sheeting shall comply with the relevant specification of BS 873 and BS 1470. The reflective sheeting adhered to the aluminium plate shall be diamond grade. It shall consist of spherial lens elements embedded in transparent plastic having a smooth, flat outer surface. The material of the reflective sheeting shall comply with the relevant specification and be tested according to ATM D4956. The thickness of the reflective sheeting inclusive of adhesive shall be in the range of 5.5 mils to 6.5 mils. All warning, regulatory and information signs shall be supported/fixed on to galvanised square hollow section, tripod stand or plate support as shown in the Drawings. All mild steel pipe frames shall consist of 25 mm internal diameter medium grade mild steel pipe vertically and horizontally.
UPG07/S52.DOC(45) lkk(181206) DPD
Ugdg Spec TS 52-46/65 52.72 TRAFFIC SIGNS, CONES, BARRIERS AND LAMPS (Contd) (a) Traffic Sign (Contd) All tripod stands shall consist of 19 mm internal diameter medium grade galvanised iron pipes all round. The information plate supports shall consist of 50 mm internal diameter medium grade galvanised iron pipes all round. The weight of the warning and regulatory signs together with the support shall not be less than 15 kg. (b) Cones The traffic cones shall conform to all the relevant clauses and parts of the latest BS 873. All cones shall be conical in shape and hollow. The opening at the top shall be manufactured to accommodate the blinkers adaptor. The sleeve of the cone shall be made of replaceable retro reflective sheet of BS 873 : Part 6 Class/material or better with the HDB logo printed on three sides or two sides if space does not allow. The cones shall be made of medium density polyethylene with additional stabiliser or pigmented poly-vinyl chloride. Each cone shall have a minimum weight of 4.40 kg and the minimum thickness shall be 3 mm. The cones shall be sufficiently stable that they remain upright and not creep or topple under normal traffic condition. Ballast shall not be used. The cones shall not overturn when it is tilted up to an angle of 49 degrees away from its vertical axis. The cones shall also have excellent impact performance and shall be sufficiently flexible for the cone to recover its shape after distoration at normal temperature or after being knocked over by any vehicle. The cones shall be stackable. (c) Barriers (i) Plastic Barriers The plastic barrier board shall be rectangular in shape. The board shall be stiffened by fixing flat metal bars to the top and bottom edges of the board. The barrier shall be moulded with flexible toggle fixing to fit the barrier stands. The board shall be made of high density polyethylene. The minimum wall thickness of the board shall be 3.5 mm and the minimum weight per metre run of the board shall be 1.8 kg per metre run. The stand shall not overturn when it is tilted up to an angle of 46 degrees from its vertical axis. The stand shall have drainage holes at its base to prevent water collecting there. Provision shall be made to accommodate the toggles of barrier and blinker. There shall be a locking device to prevent the easy removal of the barrier board from the stand. The materials for the stand shall be medium density polyethylene with additional stabiliser. The minimum wall thickness of the stand shall be 3mm and the minimum weight of the stand shall be 18.8 kg. The materials for the stand shall have a minimum tensile strength of 2 15 N per m .
UPG07/S52.DOC(46) lkk(181206) DPD
Ugdg Spec TS 52-47/65 52.72 TRAFFIC SIGNS, CONES, BARRIERS AND LAMPS (Contd) (c) Barriers (Contd) (ii) Barrier Fencing Barrier fencing is a continuous plastic mesh which may serve as an alternative for close barricading. The plastic mesh shall only be used by fixing securely to stable supports and the gaps between these support should be not more than 6.0 m. Barrier fencing is used to exclude pedestrians from a worksite and for the containment of workers. If it is erected parallel and adjacent to traffic, a separate delineation with a line of traffic cone shall be provided between the plastic mesh and the traffic. The colour of the mesh shall be high visibility orange or red. The material shall be re-usable, high durability, non-fading and UV resistance plastic. (iii) Longitudinal Safety Barrier The type of barriers may be required for the protection of traffic, the works as well as the workers in long term stationery works. They may also be used to separate opposing traffic. Suitable treatment of the ends of such barriers shall be taken to minimise risks associated with end-on collisions. The longitudinal safety barriers are a continuous close barricading formed by interconnection of individual portable units that are made of concrete, steel or polyethylene reinforced with steel. The performance of the safety barrier system shall be fully tested to meet the recommended structural adequacy, occupant risk and vehicle trajectory criteria set forth in the National Cooperative Highway Research Programme (NCHRP) Report 350 for Test Level 2. Test reports shall be provided by the manufacturer for verification by SO Rep. Only safety barrier system satisfying the required performance criteria shall be used for the protection purpose. (d) Lamps (i) Flashing Lamps All low and high intensity flashing lamps shall comply with BS 3143:1985 and the Australian Standard AS 1165-1982 on traffic hazard warning lamps. The flashing lamp shall have a luminous intensity integrated over flash duration of not less than 2 cd.sec (minimum photometric performance) for low intensity type and not less than 50 cd.sec for higher intensity type as in AS 1165 (cd stands for candela). The rate of flashing shall not be less than 60 pulsations per minute. The requirements of the light output of flashing lamps shall apply within an elliptical cone bounded by : (a) Directions 5 degrees above and below an axis normal to the surface of the geometric centre of the light emitting face in the vertical plane containing the axis. Directions 7.5 degrees on either side of the axis normal to the surface of the geometric centre of the light emitting face in the horizontal plane containing the axis.
(b)
UPG07/S52.DOC(47) lkk(181206) DPD
52.72
TRAFFIC SIGNS, CONES, BARRIERS AND LAMPS (Contd) (d) Lamps (Contd) The flashing lamp shall be provided with photoelectric control so that the flashing lamps shall operate when the horizontal illuminance is less than 100 lux and shall cut off when the horizontal illuminance is exceeding 1800 lux. The flashing lamp shall be resistant to corrosion or be suitably treated to prevent corrosion and shall be weatherproofed. The flashing lamp shall be provided for swivelling the lens 360 degrees and shall be designed so that the rotation will not damage any wiring or components. The flashing lamp shall be designed so as to facilitate easy replacement of the batteries and lamp. The flashing lamp shall be clearly and indelibly marked as tested to BS or AS Standards. The battery shall be designed to operate the lamp for at least 200 hours and of which the output during this period shall not drop below 50% of its initial lamp output. The flashing lamp shall also pass the impact test as detailed in BS 3143 Appendix A. Also submit test reports by independent testing authority on the flashing tested to BS 3143 or AS 1165 and the Specifications, as and when required. Use low intensity flashing lamps for all barricading and cone tapering area. In residential areas use low intensity flashing lamps at warning signs and regulatory signs instead of high intensity flashing lamps. They may be switched on to static mode if the flashing light is posing a problem to residents. Use high intensity flashing lamps for all warning signs and first regulatory signs only. They shall be used along all other roads but not for private residential minor roads. Ensure that : (a) (b) the flashing lamps are mounted between 1.0m and 1.2m above the road surface. the flashing lamps of directional type are aimed at centre of on-coming traffic at about 100 to 200m away. The orientation of the lamp are checked to ensure correct aiming and alignment is maintained.
(c)
Check all flashing lamps daily to ensure that they are functioning properly. Replace any blown lamps or weak batteries and also ensure that the flashing lamps are cleaned daily and after rain so that dust and dirt do not accumulate on the surface of the lens.
UPG07/S52.DOC(48) lkk(181206) DPD
52.72
TRAFFIC SIGNS, CONES, BARRIERS AND LAMPS (Contd) (d) Lamps (Contd) (ii) Rotating Lamps All portable amber rotating lamps shall comply to BS 3143:Part 4 and the Australian Standard AS 1165 on traffic hazards warning lamps. The rate of flashing shall be between 120 and 150 flashes per minute. The power requirement for the rotating lamp shall be of 12V and have a minimum wattage of 50 watts. The bulb shall be of halogen type. The material for the lens shall be of polycarbonate material. Use portable amber rotating lamps for all cases in lane diversion, road diversion, bends, crests and all other roads except for private residential minor roads. Unless otherwise indicated, they shall generally be placed at the first warning sign and the last regulatory sign. The rotating lamp shall be operational at all times (24 hours). To replace with static mode high intensity warning lamps if the rotating mode is posing a problem to residents. For longer duration work, the AC current type of portable amber rotating lamps may be used. However, the lamps shall meet all the requirements of the DC current type. On the safety aspect, the requirement of PowerGrid shall be met and approval from PowerGrid shall be obtained before they are allowed to be used on the Site.
52.73
HOT DIPPED GALVANISED GRATINGS All galvanised gratings shall be zinc coated by the hot-dip galvanising process in accordance with SS 117 or BS 729 Part 1. Batches of galvanised gratings delivered to the Site shall be accompanied by a certification letter or copy of invoice from the firm at which they are galvanised. The word `gratings' used in this Clause shall also be deemed to include the frames and their miscellaneous components. Submit the details of the galvanising to the SO Rep for approval. All gratings shall be thoroughly removed of all welding slags prior to galvanising. Galvanised gratings found having welding slags remaining on them shall be rejected and all such items shall be immediately removed from the Site. The galvanised gratings shall be tested for their zinc mass coating. The testing shall be performed at a SAC accredited laboratory using magnetic or electronic thickness measuring devices. 2% of the total number of gratings delivered to the Site subject to a minimum of three numbers of gratings shall be selected for testing. The mass of zinc coating tested shall be carried out at regular points of not less than 32 no. total on the surface of all the steel angles and flats of the grating.
UPG07/S52.DOC(49) lkk(181206) DPD
Ugdg Spec TS 52-50/65 52.73 HOT DIPPED GALVANISED GRATINGS (CONT'D) The results of the tests at every point for one grating shall be averaged to determine the average zinc coating weight of the grating. The mass of zinc coating on each grating shall comply with the following average coating mass : Average Coating Mass g per m2 610 410 350 Minimum Permissible Value g per m2 580 390 330
Thickness of Steel 5mm thick and over Under 5mm, but not less than 2mm Under 2mm
Gratings which fail to achieve the requirements specified above shall be dealt with as follows : (a) The SO Rep shall exercise his rights under Clause 1.10 "Nuisance and Irregularities" to impose charges against the Contractor for any grating the zinc coating mass of which is less than the average coating mass but greater than the minimum permissible value. The batch of galvanised gratings having any one of the representative samples failing to achieve the minimum permissible value shall be rejected and the SO Rep shall exercise his rights under Clause 1.10 "Nuisance and Irregularities" to impose charges against the Contractor for each such failure. Batches of rejected gratings may be sent for re-galvanising and may be accepted if tests show that they comply with the requirements of the zinc mass coating.
(b)
52.74
GEOTEXTILE (a) General Where indicated in the Drawings or as directed, the type of geotextile specified shall be laid strictly in the manner required and also in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions. Generally woven or non-woven type geotextile may be used for road construction and other civil engineering construction. Use non-woven type geotextile for sub-soil drainage unless otherwise specified. The geotextile shall be composed of one or a combination of the following polymers. (i) (ii) (iii) polypropylene polyethylene polyamide
Other polymers may be used subject to the approval by the SO Rep. (b) Protection The geotextile shall be properly sealed when delivered to Site. Ensure that it is well protected against direct sunlight and contamination by chemical solutions while in storage. Only minimum exposure to weathering in the course of laying is permitted. Geotextile with stain markings shall be rejected. (c) Testings Random samples of the geotextile shall be selected for testing for its mechanical and hydraulic properties to be carried out by a SAC accredited laboratory when required. The batch of geotextile fabric from which failed samples are taken shall be rejected and taken out of Site immediately. In addition to the rejection, the SO Rep shall exercise his rights under Clause 1.10 "Nuisance and Irregularities" to impose charges against the Contractor.
UPG07/S52.DOC(50) lkk(181206) DPD
Ugdg Spec TS 52-51/65 52.74 GEOTEXTILE (CONT'D) (d) Method of Testings Geotextiles shall be tested for its properties in accordance with ASTM unless otherwise specified. The following tests shall be carried out when required by the SO Rep : (i) (ii) (iii) (iv) (v) (vi) Load vs strain characteristic Curve (ASTM D1682) Grab Tensile Test (ASTM D1682) Trapezoidal Tear Test (ASTM D2263-68) Mullen Burst Test (ASTM D751-73) Water Permeability Test Pore-Size Distribution Curve
52.75
MANHOLE COVER AND FRAME The manhole covers and frames shall be of cast iron machined type and of approved size, weight and pattern. The heavy duty type shall be used in roadways and paved areas. Manhole covers and frames shall comply with SS 30 and BS 497 and be of the standard type and size specified by the Water Reclamation (Network) Department, PUB and Drainage Department of PUB and Road Management Branch of LTA and shall be in accordance with the Drawings. The cover and frame shall be cast from a mixture of cast iron scrap and a suitable grade of pig iron. The mixture of the resultant metal shall be such as to provide a strong grey structure free from chill. The cover and frame shall be free from air, sand holes and cold shuts. They shall be neatly dressed and carefully fettled. All casting shall be free from voids, whether due to shrinkage, gas inclusion or other causes. Supply manhole covers and frames coated with a black bituminous composition. They shall be well fitting, flush at the top and shall not rock. Where required, the cover and frame shall be tested in accordance with SS 30.
52.76
STEP-IRONS Step-irons shall be of malleable cast iron and complying with BS 1247 and shall be used only under the direction of the SO Rep.
52.77
HAND-RAILING All mild steel pipes used for handrailing shall be bare steel light tubes of 40mm nominal bore conforming to BS 1387 and SS 17:1970. All mild steel tubes and flats shall conform to BS 15 or SS 104. Provide on Site a building or shed which shall be dry and close to entry of water. The floors and walls shall be dry and the building or shed shall be well lit and ventilated. Before painting, bring the handrailing into the building or shed and cleaned with a wire brush to remove all rust and mill scale. Paint the handrailing with one coat of approved priming paint or as specified. Allow the paint to dry completely before it is removed from the shed or building for erection. After erection, paint the handrailing with one undercoat of approved oil base paint and one finishing coat of approved oil base paint or as specified. Provide all the necessary items to carry out painting of one additional finishing coat of approved oil base paint before the expiry of the Defects Liability Period. Attend to all Defects such as rust, chipped or dented surfaces prior to the repainting.
52.78
SAFETY CHAINS Safety chains shall be made of aluminium alloy HE 30 FT.
UPG07/S52.DOC(51) lkk(181206) DPD
Ugdg Spec TS 52-52/65 52.79 LADDERS Ladders shall be made of aluminium alloy HE 30 FT and of approved design complying with BS 1474 and BS 2037 unless otherwise specified. The ladder rungs shall be at 300mm centres and stringers 380/450mm apart. Strong support stays shall be provided on both sides of the ladder at not more than 2.5m centres.
52.80
BAKAU PILES Bakau piles shall be of an approved species, good, sound, straight with fresh uninjured bark and of reasonably uniform size throughout. They shall be supplied in minimum 4.0m length, measured after the heads have been squared and the undersized ends cut off. They shall not be less than 80mm in diameter at the larger end and not less than 55mm in diameter at the smaller end, including the thickness of bark. Such measurements shall not be done over knobs and protuberances. The permissible deviation of the axis of the pile from the straight joining the centres of the two ends shall not be more than 25mm. All bakau piles shall be inspected and approved by the SO Rep before being used. Bakau piles that have been rejected shall be removed from the Site immediately. When the piles need to be joined, such joints shall be made of mild steel collars of 300mm long. The steel collar joint shall be divided into 2 equal sections, each with different diameters. The internal diameter of the mild steel collar for the top 150 mm section shall be 70mm and for the lower 150 mm section shall be 90 mm, with a diaphragm plate welded at the connection. The minimum thickness of the mild steel collar and the diaphragm shall be 1.8mm with joints fully welded and coated with tar or bituminous paint approved by the SO Rep. Prior to the commencement of the bakau piling work, the Contractor shall submit to the SO Rep a design sketch duly endorsed by the Contractor's Professional Engineer to show the full details of the mild steel collar joint including the type and size of the welding. A sample of the collar joint made to the Professional Engineer's design shall also be submitted for the approval of the SO Rep before it is used on the Site for the bakau piling work. Bakau piles shall be joined with such mild steel collar firmly wedged with the axis of the top pile properly aligned to coincide with the driven pile. Unless specified otherwise, the Contractor shall provide all the bakau piles driven to the numbers and lengths according to the Specifications and Drawings. The Contract Sum shall be adjusted for the net quantities actually provided in the Works.
52.81
BAKAU PILING Where indicated on the Drawings, bakau piles as specified and of approved lengths shall be driven plumb and in approved positions to the full length of the piles or to refusal or otherwise directed by the SO Rep. Piling shall be carried out by experienced operators and shall be in accordance with the SO Rep instructions. The piles shall be driven with a piling frame with a drop hammer of approved weight of not less than 200 kg to a final set of 200mm for the last 10 blows from a drop of 1.0m to 1.5m height. Wherever required by the SO Rep, drive piles at required set with number of blows and the weight of hammer determined and the bearing capacity of the piles assessed. The SO Rep may call for test piles to be driven in different sections of the excavations to determine the stability of the ground below the formation level and hence the approved requirements of piles. Extract and replace or else duplicate all incorrectly or badly driven piles and piles damaged during driving. On completion of bakau piling saw off all pile heads to the required level and trim the excavation around the pile heads. Under certain circumstances, the Contractor may be required to carry out simple load tests to determine the bearing capacity of the driven pile, as directed all at the Contractor's own cost.
52.82
TURFING Provide a layer of minimum 125mm thickness of approved soil mixture evenly spread over the Site or as directed by the SO Rep, followed by the planting of fresh turves. Sludge can be omitted for heavily built up and pedestrianised across areas such as neighbourhood and town centres and eating houses and compound fertilizers substituted. The type of grass used for turfing shall be of approved species. All turves supplied by the Contractor shall be of healthy and vigorous stock of approved type and quality. The turfing shall be cut square and approximately 0.2m x 0.2m (0.04 sq m) in area, and the sod, a minimum 25mm thickness. All turves supplied shall be free from weeds especially Mimosa Pudica.
UPG07/S52.DOC(52) lkk(181206) DPD
Ugdg Spec TS 52-53/65 52.82 TURFING (CONT'D) Submit for approval a sample of the grass whenever an area is to be turfed. Plant the approved turf promptly on arrival to avoid desiccation. Lay turves abutting unless otherwise directed, with a tolerance of 10mm +5mm between adjoining turves. Roll each sod with a suitable garden roller. On slopes steeper than 1 in 2, peg down each sod properly. The turfing shall on completion present a uniform appearance. Establish the turves in 3 months from the date of planting by means of : (a) (b) (c) (d) Watering at regular intervals Weeding regularly Replacing badly growing or unsatisfactory turves immediately Applying fertilizer and cutting the grass once every two weeks.
Thereafter, apply compound fertilizer once every 3 months. The compound fertilizer shall be of approved type and the application rate shall be 10 g to 15 g per m2. All earth slopes when specified to be closed turfed shall be carried out as soon as possible in order to ensure rapid growth of protective grass. Provide and fix the turves promptly after laying the top soil in order to prevent erosion thereof due to wet weather or other causes. Make good any loss of unprotected or inadequately protected top soil.
52.83
MAINTENANCE OF TURVES The Contractor shall allow in the Contract Sum for all costs and expenses for providing maintenance services as specified hereunder, to the turfing Works, for a period of one year commencing from the Date of Substantial Completion for the Works or phase or sub-phase of the Works as certified by the Superintending Officer (hereinafter referred to as the "Defects Liability Period" for the purposes of this clause). Throughout the Time for Completion and any time period where liquidated damages are imposed under the Contract and during the Defects Liability Period, maintain the turves by cutting and removing dead turves and weeds once every two weeks and replacing with new stock. Before commencing necessary grass cutting, manually remove all weeds and undesirable vegetation growing in the turfed areas. Close cut grass as short as possible following the general contours of the ground. The stock or blade of the grass after each cutting shall not stand higher than 20mm above the ground level. Approved mechanical cutters of various capacities to suit site conditions shall be utilised to cut the grass. Remove all cut grass from the Site. Cut back the edges of all sidetables and other turfed areas adjoining roadways, footpaths, kerbs, dividers and concrete paved areas to proper straight lines or curves as the case may be, and trim thereafter to produce a neat and tidy appearance. Carry out this work immediately after the grass in the area has been cut or manually weed out and clear. Cut and manually weed out and clear grass growing in the joints of footpaths, scupper drains, etc. If the Contractor fails to maintain the turves, the Employer shall have the right to engage his own workmen or other contractors to carry out such work and the cost incurred shall be recovered from the Contractor. In addition, the SO Rep shall exercise his rights under Clause 1.10 "Nuisance and Irregularities" to impose charges against the Contractor.
52.84
SAFETY MEASURES FOR GRASS-CUTTING MACHINES (a) Take every safety precaution to eliminate danger to his workmen, the general public and the property of others. Install all grass-cutting machines used with suitable protective guards of steel or other approved materials to eliminate splinters and flung-off objects from causing damage. Under no circumstances shall the protective guards be removed from machines in operation. The Contractor shall not use open blade rotary machine. Hand held rotary gross cutters shall be of the nylon cord type.
(b)
(c)
UPG07/S52.DOC(53) lkk(181206) DPD
Ugdg Spec TS 52-54/65 52.84 SAFETY MEASURES FOR GRASS-CUTTING MACHINES (CONT'D) (d) The grass-cutter shall wear safety boots, goggles, helmets and safety vest. When these safety requirements are not complied with, the Contractor's foreman or the SO Rep shall instruct the grass-cutter to stop work. Keep the public away from the grass-cutter and erect a signboard on Site with the wordings "DANGER", KEEP OFF, Grass Cutting Works In Progress".
(e)
52.85
TREE PLANTING WITHIN ROAD SIDETABLES Tree planting reserve shall consist of a 1000mm deep trough of loamy soil throughout. Loamy soil shall be considered to be within the following range of composition of Sand, Silt and Clay. Sand : 30 - 60% Silt : 10 - 70% Clay : 0 - 30% Testing of the soil composition at the rate of 1 test for every 200m of sidetable subject to a minimum of 2 tests are to be carried out at an approved laboratory. Where the existing soil does not conform to the above requirement replace the existing soil with loamy soil. Samples of the replaced soil may be required by the SO Rep for testing at an approved laboratory. Provide all the necessary, Construction Equipment, tool, instruments and materials for carrying out the tests including the provision of all necessary transportation of test materials, samples, etc. Instant Trees shall be planted according to the details specified in the Drawings. The instant trees must have a minimum of 2.0m clear and upright straight trunk of 0.3m girth (measured at 0.5m height from the collar of the trunk) with at least three (3) branches of minimum 0.08m girth each and 1.0m in length each (lowest branching at above 2.0m) with rootball dimension 750mm diameter x 600mm deep minimum and to be of good, healthy stock, undamaged and subject to SO Reps approval before planting. Tree collar protectors are to be provided for all proposed trees. A protector is made of a PVC tube of length 200mm, diameter 75mm and thickness 2mm with a silt cut along the full length of the tube. The cost of the whole transplanting operation including the purchase of trees shall be included in the Contact Sum.
52.86
PLANTING OF INSTANT TREES (a) Transplanting of Existing Trees (Instant Trees) Purchase Instant Trees from the HDB's Nursery, unless otherwise directed. Arrange to transplant such trees from any of the HDB's Nurseries to the proposed work. The cost of the whole transplanting operation including the purchase of the trees shall be included in the Contract Sum. (b) Transplanting Requirements and Procedures Transplanting of existing trees shall be carried out as follows : (i) Branch Pruning Prune branches or pollard the tree as directed and paint all cuts with fungicidal sealant. (ii) Rootballs All trees to be transplanted shall have an earth rootball of a minimum diameter or a size to be decided by the SO Rep. This shall be done by excavating a trench about 0.5m deep around the tree at appropriate distance. Cut all protruding roots and paint with a fungicidal sealant. Transplant excavated trees within the same working day unless otherwise directed.
UPG07/S52.DOC(54) lkk(181206) DPD
Ugdg Spec TS 52-55/65 52.86 PLANTING OF INSTANT TREES (CONT'D) (b) Transplanting Requirements and Procedures (Cont'd) (iii) Tree Pits To avoid delay, make ready the new pit for the tree transplant before the tree is brought to the planting site. Pit shall be at least 0.5m wider and 0.25m deeper than the rootball to allow for incorporation of topsoil surrounding the roots. The minimum tree pit dimension shall be 1.5m x 1.5m x 1.0m. All planting holes for instant trees shall be backfilled with good quality approved soil mixture to a level 250mm higher than the adjacent ground level at time of filling. Tripod shall be provided to keep it firmly in place, if required. (iv) Tree Guards Provide tree guards to Instant trees planted as specified. (v) Lifting and Transporting Lift the tree by motor crane or other lifting machineries of appropriate capacity. Take every precaution including wrapping rootball securely by moistened canvas and angle bar frame or other approved materials to prevent damage to the rootball during the loading and transporting of the tree to the worksite. (vi) Before unloading tree into position, measure the depth and diameter of the rootball and adjustment made to the pit. Set and orientate the tree in the hole, adjust the depth and plant with minimum delay. Firmly consolidate the backfilling to eliminate air pockets under and around the roots.
(c)
Fertilising of Instant Trees Apply fertilizer NPK Mg (12:12:7:2) at a rate of 0.5 kg per 25mm girth into holes 300mm deep and 500mm apart along the dripline. Carry out the first fertilising at the end of 6 months after planting. Thereafter, carry out fertilising twice in the next 6 months.
(d)
Maintenance of Instant Trees The Contractor shall allow in the Contract Sum for all costs and expenses for providing maintenance services, as specified hereunder, to the instant tree Works, for a period of one year commencing from the Date of Substantial Completion for the Works or phase or sub-phase of the Works, as certified by the Superintending Officer (hereinafter referred to as the "Defects Liability Period" for the purposes of this subclause). Maintain planted Instant trees by carrying out the following works : Operation Watering Frequency (i) (ii) (iii) (iv) Daily watering for the 1st month. Thereafter, water on alternate days for the 2nd month. Thereafter, water once a week for the 3rd month. Thereafter, water when necessary or as directed until the end of Defects Liability Period.
In addition, make good all damaged tree guards during the Defects Liability Period.
UPG07/S52.DOC(55) lkk(181206) DPD
Ugdg Spec TS 52-56/65 52.87 LANDSCAPING OF PEDESTRIAN OVERHEAD BRIDGE Plants for the pedestrian overhead bridge shall be of selected/approved stocks and shall be obtained from the Contractor's own source, transported to Site and planted according to the Drawings or as directed. Comply with the current requirements of planting of shrubs/palms/creepers etc as laid down by the NParks. The standards of the planting and maintenance of the plants may be obtained from the NParks. Ensure that the plants are established and grown to reasonable size at the end of the Defects Liability Period before handing over to NParks for their maintenance. The planting scheme shall strictly comply with their requirements. The planting and maintenance of the shrubs/palms/creepers shall conform to the following requirements : (a) Soil Mixture for Planting Excavate holes for planting as indicated in the planting scheme plan or as directed. Backfill all planting holes beneath the staircases/ramps, around bridge columns and the entire planting trough along the prestressed concrete beams with 3:1 top soil, dried sludge mix. For planting holes, carry out the backfilling to levels not exceeding 250mm higher than the adjacent ground level at time of filling. (b) Planting of Shrubs/Palms/Creepers Handle the plants in such a manner that the ball of earth surrounding the roots is not broken. This shall be firmly held by plastic or other wrapping. Remove all plastic and other imperishable wrappings before planting. Plant with ground level at the same level as the soil mark on the stem. Water all plants thoroughly immediately after planting. (c) Watering Use 10 litres of water per m2 for watering the plants. Additional watering may be required as and when directed. Carry out watering by using rubber hose fitted with an adjustable spraying head/gun to wet the soil thoroughly. (d) Soil-Loosening Spike the weeding area to a depth of 100mm using a garden fork. (e) Weeding Weed the landscaped area using hand towel or weeding hoe. (f) Fertilising (i) Palms Broadcast fertiliser NPK Mg (15:15:6:4) at a rate of 375 gm per palm within the weeding circle 120mm away from stem. (ii) Landscaped Area Broadcast Fertiliser NPK Mg (12:12:17:2) at 50 gm per m2 as directed. (iii) Climber/Creeper Spray approved foliar fertiliser as directed. (g) Pest Control Spray approved pesticides immediately after the infestation is spotted until the infestation is controlled.
UPG07/S52.DOC(56) lkk(181206) DPD
Ugdg Spec TS 52-57/65 52.87 LANDSCAPING OF PEDESTRIAN OVERHEAD BRIDGE (CONT'D) (h) Maintenance Maintain planted shrubs/palms/creepers for a period of 1 year by carrying out the following work: Operation Watering (1) (2) (3) (4) Frequency Daily watering for the 1st month. Thereafter, water on alternate days for the 2nd month Thereafter, water once a week for the 3rd month Thereafter, water only as directed until the end of the Defects Liability Period
Soil Loosening Weeding
Monthly till the end of the Defects Liability Period Monthly till the end of the Defects Liability Period
52.88
SOIL MIXTURE (TOPSOIL AND SLUDGE) Soil mixture shall consists of 3 parts of top soil to one part of sludge for non-water catchment areas. All topsoil shall be of good quality, free from rubbish, roots, stumps, subsoil or other extraneous matter, be friable and porous in texture. Sludge shall only be used in non water catchment areas. Sludge shall be dry, solid and well treated type from approved sources. The use of sludge for turfing and other work shall comply with the Water Reclamation (Network) Department, PUB's instructions and recommendations on the prevention of smell and flies problems : (a) (b) Immediately use sludge delivered to Site meant for the turfing works. Evenly cover sludge stockpiled on the Site with a layer of lime and cover over with a layer of topsoil. After planting of turf no additional spreading of sludge or soil on the turfed area shall be allowed.
(c)
For water catchment areas, soil conditioner shall be used instead of sludge. Soil conditioner shall be peat, cocopeat, organic compost; or other approved fibrous organic matters suitable for mixing with soil to make a friable growing medium for planting. The soil mixture shall be three parts of topsoil with one part of sludge for non water catchment areas or 3 3 parts of topsoil with 1 part of soil conditioner and 1 kg per m of compound fertilizer NPKMg (15:15:6:4) for water catchment areas. Provide and spread the required amount of top soil for such turfing and tree planting works.
52.89
PLANT SOIL In the event that the Contractor is unable to obtain the necessary top soil of the quality acceptable to the SO Rep from any source, subject to the approval of the SO Rep, plant soil may be provided as a substitute for top soil. Provide, mix and use the plant soil for the Works. Manufacture the plant soil by mixing 4 parts of sub-soil, 2 parts of unwashed sand and 1 part of treated sludge for non water catchment areas to achieve a thorough and homogenous mix relatively free of lumpy material. In water catchment areas, the one part of sludge shall be substituted by one part of soil conditioner and 1 kg per m3 of compound fertilizer NPK Mg (15:15:6:4). The mixing may be carried out by spreading the various components on the ground in layers and ploughing and mixing them using appropriate machinery or by using a mixer or by any other process. The resulting plant soil shall be relatively free of lumpy material and shall have the following range of composition by weight : Sand Clay Organic Matter 40% to 70% 10% to 25% 2% to 5%
UPG07/S52.DOC(57) lkk(181206) DPD
Ugdg Spec TS 52-58/65 52.89 PLANT SOIL (CONT'D) (a) Sub-Soil The clay content of the sub-soil which is the soil strata found just below the top soil layer shall not be greater than 45%. Only approved sub-soil shall be utilised for the production of the plant soil. (b) Unwashed Sand Provide the unwashed sand required for the manufacture of plant soil. The unwashed sand to be used shall be free of any debris, stones or other foreign material. The unwashed sand delivered to Site shall be rejected if it fails to meet this requirement and shall be immediately removed from the Site. Neatly store all acceptable unwashed sand on Site prior to their use. (c) Treated Sludge Provide the treated sludge required for the manufacture of plant-soil. Collect the treated sludge as and when required from any of the following treatment works as directed. The treatment works are : (i) (ii) (iii) (iv) (v) Bedok Wastewater Treatment Plant Serangoon Sludge Treatment Works Ulu Pandan Sewage Treatment Works Kranji Sewage Treatment Works Seletar Sewage Treatment Works
Collect, transport and proper storage the treated sludge properly. Bear all costs incurred in this respect, including any charge levied by PUB for the collection of the treated sludge. Neatly store the treated sludge within a demarcated area on Site prior to their use. Treated sludge shall only be used in non water catchment areas. In water catchment areas, use approved soil conditioner and compound fertilizer in its place. Before proceeding with the manufacture of plant soil the Contractor shall first carry out a trial mix using the approved sub-soil, unwashed sand and sludge. Three samples of the trial mix shall be analysed for its physical composition to ascertain if the composition of the final mix falls within the range of composition specified above. Mixes that do not conform to the Specifications shall have their mix proportion modified to achieve an acceptable composition.
52.90
PRECAST R.C. AERATION SLABS (a) General Where indicated in the Drawings or as directed, precast R.C. aeration slabs shall be manufactured and laid in the manner as specified. Submit details of the R.C. aeration slabs to the SO Rep for approval. 75mm thick aeration slabs shall be used in the carparks while 100mm thick aeration slabs shall be used in the lorry parks. The details of the slabs shall comply strictly with that shown in the Drawings. For purpose of identification, there shall be different types of slab arrangement used for the car and lorry parks. Locations of a particular type of slab arrangement to be adopted in each car or lorry park shall be as shown in the Drawings. The number of slabs per lot for each type of arrangement shall be as shown in the Drawings.
UPG07/S52.DOC(58) lkk(181206) DPD
Ugdg Spec TS 52-59/65 52.90 PRECAST R.C. AERATION SLABS (CONT'D) (b) Good Manufacturing Practice Scheme Obtain the precast R.C. aeration slabs only from suppliers licensed under ISO 9000 or SAC's Good Manufacturing Practice Scheme. (c) Laying of Aeration Slabs Roll the crusher run base to a level to allow the granite fines layer to be laid. The finished surface level of the slabs after laying shall follow the gradient of the surface of the adjacent premix and the straight edges of the slabs when formed shall be true to line and level. Inspect each slab for stability after laying. If rocking takes place, remove from position and regrade the granite fines to achieve the desired result. (d) Turfing between Aeration Slabs Fill the gaps between the slabs with approved good quality top soil to a level 10mm below the top surface of the aeration slabs. Tear or Cut the turves to a size slightly wider than the gaps and close plant into position followed by light tamping with a piece of timber. Do not use excessive pressure produced by heavy objects. Watering of the turf just planted shall immediately be followed up. Mix top soil with sludge to a proportion of 3:1. (e) Watering of Turves Water the turves and trees at least twice daily once they are planted in position or otherwise directed. This process shall continue for a period of not less than one month or until such length of time when the plants have taken roots and show signs of growth. Convey water through a hose connected to a tapped supply or where this is not available in the vicinity, from water tanks of sufficient capacity and direct towards the gaps and voids where turves are planted or at the pits where the trees are planted, at a distance not more than 150mm away to avoid splashing. (f) Water Absorption Tests Select random samples of the precast RC aeration slabs for water absorption tests to be carried out by PSB accredited laboratory. The maximum average rates of water absorption (%) calculated on the dry weight of three test pieces per sample shall not exceed 3% at 30 minutes. 0.5% of the total number of slabs from the stockpile subject to a minimum of three numbers of slab shall be taken for water absorption test. Break the selected slabs to be tested into three test pieces each before transporting them to the laboratory. (g) Failure of Water Absorption Tests The SO Rep shall exercise his rights under Clause 1.10 "Nuisance and Irregularities" to impose charges against the Contractor for every sample of aeration slab whose average water absorption exceeds 3% at 30 minutes. (h) Transverse Strength Tests Samples of RC aeration slabs at a rate of up to three pieces per every 1,000 pieces shall be selected for transverse strength test performed in the manner as described in BS 7263 and in SAC accredited laboratory. For purpose of this test, the supporting rollers shall be spaced at 500mm apart for the 75mm slabs and 635mm apart for the 100mm slabs and the slabs when subjected to a centrally placed vertical load shall not fail at a value of 40 KN and 48 KN for the 75mm and 100mm thick aeration slabs respectively.
UPG07/S52.DOC(59) lkk(181206) DPD
Ugdg Spec TS 52-60/65 52.90 PRECAST R.C. AERATION SLABS (CONT'D) (h) Transverse Strength Tests (Cont'd) The SO Rep shall exercise his rights under Clause 1.10 "Nuisance and Irregularities" to impose charges against the Contractor for each sample that fails to comply with the above test requirement. Each batch of slabs represented by the three sample whose combined average results fail to attain 40 KN or 48 KN for the 75mm and 100mm thick aeration slabs respectively shall be accepted only at the sole discretion of the SO Rep after he has considered the degree of failure and other related circumstances. (i) Maintenance The Contractor shall allow in the Contract Sum for all costs and expenses for providing maintenance services, as specified hereunder, to the Precast RC Aeration Slabs and turfing Works, for a period one year commencing from the Date of Substantial Completion for the Works or phase or sub-phase of the Works, as certified by the Superintending Officer (hereinafter referred to as the "Maintenance Period" for the purpose of this Clause). Keep a schedule of completion date of work done in each and every car and lorry park and return to the Site so as to carry out the necessary maintenance work of regular trimming, deweeding, tending and watering the turves and plant at least once a month throughout the Time for Completion and any time period where liquidated damages are imposed under the Contract and the Maintenance Period. Maintain all the aeration slabs in proper conditions once they have been laid. Keep a schedule of completion dates and return to the Site at least once a month throughout the Time for Completion and any time period where liquidated damages are imposed under the Contract and the Maintenance Period to inspect and ensure that the slabs are stable and do not rock under the loads of vehicles. Replace any slab found cracked or chipped to an extent which is unsatisfactory.
52.91
PRECAST BG SLABS (a) General Manufacture precast B.G. slabs as indicated in the Drawing or where directed by the SO Rep and in accordance to the requirement of BS 7263 or SS 214 whenever applicable. Random samples of 3 for every order of 1000 are to be taken for carrying out Water Absorption Test and Transverse Strength Test as specified in BS 7263 or SS 214 at a SAC accredited laboratory subject to a minimum of 3 numbers. The maximum average rate of water absorption (%) calculated on the dry weight of three test pieces per sample shall not exceed 3% at 30 minutes. For the Transverse strength test, the supporting rollers shall be spaced at 450mm apart and the slabs when subjected to a centrally placed vertical load shall not fail at a value of 19 KN. The SO Rep shall exercise his rights under Clause 1.10 "Nuisance and Irregularities" to impose charges against the contractor for each sample that fails to comply with the above test requirement. Bear the cost of carrying out the test and that of transporting the samples to the designated laboratory. (b) Laying of B.G. Slabs Inspect each B.G. slabs for stability after laying. If rocking takes place, remove it from position and regrade and compact the base to achieve the desired result.
UPG07/S52.DOC(60) lkk(181206) DPD
Ugdg Spec TS 52-61/65 52.91 PRECAST BG SLABS (CONT'D) (c) Turfing between B.G. Slabs Fill the gaps between the slabs with approved good quality top soil to a level 10mm below the top surface of the B.G. slabs cut or tear turves to a size slightly wider than the gaps and close planted into position followed by light tamping with a piece of timber. Excessive pressure produced by heavy objects shall not be allowed. Follow up immediately with watering of the turf just planted. (d) Watering of Turves Water the turves at least twice daily once they are planted in position or otherwise directed. Continue watering for a period of not less than one month or until such length of time when the plants have taken roots and shown sign of growth. Convey water through a hose connected to a tapped supply or where this is not available in the vicinity, from water tanks of sufficient capacity and direct towards the gaps and voids where turves are planted, at a distance not more than 150mm away to avoid splashing. (e) Maintenance The Contractor shall allow in the Contract Sum for all costs and expenses for providing maintenance services, as specified hereunder, to the Precast B.G. Slabs and turfing works, for a period of one year commencing from the Date of Substantial Completion for the Works or phase or sub-phase of the Works, as certified by the Superintending Officer (hereinafter referred to as the Maintenance Period for the purposes of this subclause). Keep a schedule of completion date of work done and return to the Site so as to carry out the necessary maintenance work of regular trimming, deweeding, tending and watering the turves and plant at least once a month throughout the Time for Completion and any time period where liquidated damages are imposed under the Contract and the Maintenance Period. Maintain all B.G. slabs in proper condition once they have been laid. Ensure that the slabs are stable and do not rock throughout the Time for Completion and any time period where liquidated damages are imposed under the Cotnract and Maintenance Period. Replace any slab found cracked or chipped to an extent which is unsatisfactory.
52.92
TESTING OF PREMIX The quality and standard of premix for the road and carparks shall be in accordance with the Clauses and Subclauses on premix bituminous surfacing. Should the bitumen content of the premix or the grading of aggregate fall outside the specified limits, the premix shall be rejected. In these circumstances, the Contractor shall be required to accept the corrective measures including compensation by additional layer of premix or the payment of fines as maintenance fees as directed by the SO Rep or LTA who shall be the final authority for the road.
52.93
TAKING OVER BY LTA AND THE EMPLOYER All materials used for the roads and carparks such as concrete kerbs, channels, concrete pipes, etc are to conform to the standard requirements of LTA and the SO Rep in strength, hydraulic, bearing, grading, absorption tests, for taking over purposes.
52.94
LTA'S OR THE SO REP'S REQUIREMENTS The Contractor's particular attention is drawn to all tests required by LTA or the SO Rep for premix and such concrete precast units as roadside kerbs, dividers, road base and sub-base etc. Bear the costs of such tests. Samples shall be extracted from the Works actually incorporated for analysis to ensure compliance with this Specifications. Provide the necessary labour in extracting the samples as requested by the SO Rep, and patch up all cavities caused by the removal of these samples. The number of test samples shall conform to LTA (Road Management) requirements on the relevant SS or BS.
UPG07/S52.DOC(61) lkk(181206) DPD
Ugdg Spec TS 52-62/65 52.94 LTA'S OR THE SO REP'S REQUIREMENTS (CONT'D) For service roads and carparks to be taken over by the HDB, the number of samples for final testing shall comply with the following : Rate of Sampling Kerbs Premix 1 sample for every 120 m length 1 sample for every 550 m2 of carpark 1 sample for every 450 m2 of service road/driveway Precast Footpath Slabs 1 sample for every 350 m2 Minimum Number Two Two Two
Two
Where any of the tests carried out by LTA or the SO Rep fails to pass the requirements, the decision taken by them shall be final irrespective of whether the same samples had been passed by other Authorities or not. The Contractor shall either : (a) replace the sections of the rejected works as indicated by LTA or the SO Rep with the approved ones, or pay to LTA or the Employer the sum of money determined by the LTA or SO Rep according to the degree of failure.
(b)
The SO Rep shall determine whether item (a) or (b) of the above is to be adopted and reserves the right to set off such bills and expenses against monies due or becoming due to the Contractor.
52.95
LTA'S ROAD TESTING REQUIREMENT
(1)
The Contractor shall engage the services of SAC/SINGLAS laboratories for plant, material, labour and transport needed for cutting of samples and to carry out testing of the cut samples and shall be responsible for the supervision of the cutting of samples and reinstatement after extraction. Prior to road testing, the Contractor shall submit the following to the SO Rep for his approval and subsequent submission to LTA: (a) A copy of coloured site plan showing the road/roads to be tested and the location where samples would be extracted. (i) For premix, cut sample to be obtained from pavement at every 50m on each carriageway. (ii) For rigid pavement (concrete), cut sample to be obtained at every 50m3 of concrete on each carriageway. (iii) For precast kerbs, 3 test kerbs shall be taken at random for every 2000 units or less. A minimum of 3 samples is required on each type of pavement and kerb of the road Works. The test results endorsed by a PE are to be submitted to the SO Rep. (b) (c) Name of the SAC/SINGLAS laboratory Name of Supplier of premix
(2)
UPG07/S52.DOC(62) lkk(181206) DPD
Ugdg Spec TS 52-63/65 52.95 LTA'S ROAD TESTING REQUIREMENT (Contd) (d) (e) (f) (g) (3) Date of premix and concrete laid on site Type of premix and concrete mix laid on site Thickness of premix and concrete laid on site Date and Time of sample cutting.
The following Tests are to be carried out: 3.1 Water absorption test for precast kerb To conform to the requirements and criteria for acceptance specified in Section 9.18.8 of LTA Materials & Workmanship Specification.
3.2 Compressive strength test for concrete (core strength) the compressive strength of a core shall be prepared and tested in accordance with BS 1881. to conform to the requirements and criteria for acceptance specified in Table 9.5 of Section 9.9.7 of the LTA Materials & Workmanship Specification.
3.3 Aggregate gradations and bitumen contents of Wearing Course and Asphaltic Base Course to conform to the requirements and criteria for acceptance specified in the following Sections of LTA Materials & Workmanship Specification : - Graded Granite Aggregates - Section 13.3.2.3(f), (g) & (h) - Aggregate Grading Requirement - Section 13.3.3.2 Table 13.17 Requirement for Bitumen - Section 13.3.3.2 Table 13.17
(4) The following are to be submitted together with the test results: 4.1 A record of the thickness of wearing course, base course and sub-base measured at the locations where the samples are extracted. 4.2 Photographs showing the samples at each location during extraction. 4.3 Photographs showing the road after reinstatement. 4.4 Test results be endorsed by the SAC/SINGLAS Laboratory supervisor and a PE. 4.5 For road test for Asphaltic Concrete Mixes, the accredited laboratory certified by the PSB has to compute the Deduction Factor (a factor used to determine whether the asphaltic concrete used falls within the acceptable limit) and reflect it in the individual sample test result and provide a summary of computation of laboratory test results for all the samples. (5) The LTA's road testing requirement is applicable for roads designed to LTA standard under Section 18 of the Streets Work Act and in addition to other testing requirements specified in the Specifications.
52.96
SEALANT USED FOR EXPANSION JOINT IN RIGID PAVEMENT (a) General Expansion joints shall be of an approved shape and be provided in the positions as shown in the Drawings or as directed. Suitable joint filler material is placed between the pavement slabs to allow the slabs to expand and contract. Joint shall be sealed using appropriate joint sealant.
UPG07/S52.DOC(63) lkk(181206) DPD
Ugdg Spec TS 52-64/65 52.96 SEALANT USED FOR EXPANSION JOINT IN RIGID PAVEMENT (Contd) (b) Joint Sealant (i) Type of Sealant The type of sealant used shall be cold applied, fuel resistant. Cold applied sealant capable of accommodating high movement. (ii) Requirements The sealant shall comply with the British standard BS 5212 : 1990 "Cold applied joint sealant systems for concrete pavements" Type F. (ii) Requirements (Cont'd) Cold applied, high duty pavement sealant shall possess the following properties : Form : Two part compound Base compound - viscous liquid Curing agent - liquid : Black : Butt joints 25% : Chemical cure : After 16 to 24 hours, sealant will be tacked free and accepted traffic. Full cure and maximum hardness are attained in approximately 3 to 4 days at 25 C. : To avoid unacceptably prolonged cure times, do not apply to temperatures below 5C. : 12 to 17 : Dilute acids : Mild alkalis Petrol Aviation fuels Diesel fuels Synthetic oils Mineral oils Hydraulic fluids Kerosene : 100% : 1.36 kg/litre : Over 65C : Burns but does not readily support combustion - resistant resistant resistant resistant resistant resistant resistant resistant resistant
Colour Movement accommodation Factor (BS 6093) Physical or Chemical change Setting time
Application temperature Hardness shore A at 25C Chemical resistance to Occasional spillage
Solids content Density Flash point Flammability (c) Method for application of sealant (i) Joint Preparation
Joint sealing slots shall be accurately formed and shall be dry, clean and sound. All grease, water and dust shall be removed from the joint before applying the primer (if requires). Ensure that any expansion joint filler is tightly packed in the joint and at the required depth to provide the seal dimensions specified.
UPG07/S52.DOC(64) lkk(181206) DPD
Ugdg Spec TS 52-65/65 52.96 SEALANT USED FOR EXPANSION JOINT IN RIGID PAVEMENT (Contd)
(c)
Method for application of sealant (Contd) (ii) Priming Primers shall be applied only to sealant contact surfaces which must be clean, dry, sound and free of contaminants. Prime joint sealing slot surface with appropriate prime for the type of sealant approved by the SO Rep. Allow primer to air dry prior to applying sealant. Drying time also depends on the type of primer used and ambient temperature. The surface shall be touch dry. The approved sealant shall be applied within the time period after priming before the primer film has completely reacted. Primed surfaces not sealed with sealant within the required time period shall be re-primed before applying sealant. (iii) Application of sealant Dried primer is free of any residue and prepared joints are free of any foreign matters or contaminations. Apply sealant into the sealing slot so that the finished level of the seal is recessed below the trafficked surface as specified.
(d)
Information of product to be supplied by manufacturer Obtain from the manufacturer the following information of the sealant/primer proposed for use for the works : Maximum safe heating temperature of the material. Temperature range of application. Flash point of sealant and primer. Composition of the mixture. Type of primer required. Application instructions. Health and Safety Data Sheets on sealant and primer for additional information concerning usage, handling precautions, first aid procedures, warranty including shelf life. The foregoing information shall be provided to the SO Rep one week before the start of the sealant application.
SECTION 53/...
UPG07/S52.DOC(65) lkk(181206) DPD
SECTION 53
53.0
CONSTRUCTION AND WORKMANSHIP FOR ROADS AND DRAINS
53.1
SEQUENCE OF CONSTRUCTION Commence construction of the road work with the excavation for and construction of stormwater drains commencing at their outfalls. Excavation for and construction of roads shall not commence until the construction of stormwater drains is sufficiently advanced in the opinion of the SO Rep to permit free drainage of the road formation.
53.2
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS OF DRAINAGE DEPARTMENT, PUB The Contractor's attention is drawn to the following general requirements of Drainage Department, PUB the failure to comply with these requirements may render him liable to prosecution under the Water Pollution Control and Drainage Act : (a) The execution of any work shall not change, disrupt, fill, block or disturb the existing overland flow or the existing system of drains unless an alternative approved drainage system has been provided and permission for use has been given by the Drainage Department, PUB. Close turf all earth slopes adjacent to any drain. Obstruction of any kind shall not be placed, laid or erected within drainage reserves and drains both of which shall remain accessible at all times. No temporary structures such as cofferdams, crossings, stagings, etc shall be constructed in or over an existing drain without the prior approval of the Drainage Department, PUB. Remove any temporary structures if approved within the drainage reserve immediately on completion of the construction work. Bunds of stockpiled earth from trench work shall not be longer than 10m long and gaps of at least 1 m wide shall be provided between the bunds to allow the free flow of surface runoff. Material from any stockpile shall not be allowed to fall or be washed into drain. Adequate preventive measures, including the provision of proper and stable barricades or screens where necessary, shall be provided. Scupper inlets shall not be blocked by excavated or stockpiled material. Drains shall not be covered without the approval of the Drainage Department, PUB. Report any damage to existing drains arising out of any work immediately to the Drainage Department, PUB. Any obstruction to flow arising from the damage shall be immediately and completely cleared, and repair & reconstruct the damaged drain to the requirement of the Drainage Department, PUB. Reclamation work, earthwork, roadwork, development work or any other construction work shall not be carried out unless a system of temporary lined perimeter cut-off drains and silt traps or other approved alternative measures are provided to prevent overflowing of surface runoff and silt from the worksite to the drains and adjacent premises. Desilt and maintain regularly all temporary lined perimeter cut-off drains and silt traps to ensure that the discharge from the silt trap is free of silt.
(b) (c)
(d)
(e)
(f)
(g)
(h) (i) (j)
(k)
(l)
53.3
ADDITIONAL REQUIREMENTS OF DRAINAGE DEPARTMENT, PUB Ensure and take all necessary precautions and actions for preventing silt from being washed into drains and canals and comply with the following requirements strictly : (a) Treatment of Silt-laden water Ensure that silt-laden water is not discharged directly or by pumping into drains or canals. Channel the silt-laden water to silt traps, sedimentation tanks or other measures for removal of silt before discharging into drains or canals. (b) Provision of silt traps and perimeter cut-off drains (i) Provide silt traps, perimeter cut-off drains and other facilities to ensure that earth, silt, mud, etc are not discharged into drains or canals. Details of these facilities shall be duly designed and endorsed by a Professional Engineer. Construct these facilities before the commencement of Works. Desilt silt traps, perimeter cut-off drains and other facilities and maintain at least once a week or more often if necessary to effectively prevent the discharge of silt from the worksites.
(ii)
(c)
Protection of exposed earth surfaces Carry out close turfing promptly to prevent soil erosion at Site. Plant all exposed earth surfaces not affected by construction activities with turfing on an immediate basis. Where necessary to effectively prevent soil erosion, carry out progressive turfing on Site. In cases where turfing is not practical or not effective in protecting exposed earth surfaces which are left bare and undisturbed for more than one month, protect such surfaces from soil erosion by spraying with bitumen based emulsion or other effective methods to be approved by the SO Rep. Notwithstanding the approval of the SO Rep, ensure that the methods are effective in the prevention of soil erosion.
(d)
Excavated Material (i) Cart away all surplus excavated materials to own disposal ground immediately. The surplus excavated material shall not be stockpiled on Site. Earth materials stockpiled on Site for construction work shall be within properly contained areas and covered to prevent the earth from washing into drains or canals. The locations for stockpiling the earth shall be subject to approval by the SO Rep. Notwithstanding the approval of the SO Rep, the Contractor shall ensure that earth is not washed into drains or canals. Only carry out trench excavation work as the rate of construction keeps pace with the rate of excavation.
(ii)
(iii)
(e)
Treatment of Mud Slurry Ensure that mud slurry from drilling, tunnelling, diaphragm wall construction and jet grouting, etc. is not discharged into drains or canals.
53.4
EXCAVATION Carry out the excavation in accordance with Clauses in the Specifications.
53.5
PIPE CONDUIT DRAINS Excavation of trenches shall be to straight lines and gradients required for the pipes and beds as specified. The trench bottom shall be of sufficient width to allow adequate working space but beyond these requirements, the width shall be kept to a minimum. Maintain the setting out of a sufficient length of pipe lines in advance of pipe laying and carry out such exploration excavation as may be necessary. For lengths of pipelines, which are curved in plan, the curve shall be obtained by deflecting the pipes at each joint. Set the inverts of the drains by wooden pegs with the help of boning rod or other means at regular intervals of not more than 5 metres. Thoroughly compact the bedding for the pipes and lay the pipes evenly on the barrel at the required level. There shall be no hollows, voids or foreign material under the pipe. Take particular care to ensure that proper bedding is obtained at either side of the pipe joints. When concrete beds foundation is specified it shall consists of concrete or reinforced concrete as shown in details on the Drawings. In all cases, well ram or vibrate and work the concrete under and around the pipes. No concrete shall be placed around the pipes until the pipe joints have been inspected and approved. At approximately every four pipes or 6 metre whichever is the lesser interval form a joint in the concrete bed or surround by vertically shuttering the bed or surround with 25mm thick fibreboard, timber or other approved material. The shuttering material shall be left in to form a permanent joint. Where the concrete bed is required to be reinforced all reinforcement shall stop on either side of the joint. At every point of loading, or unloading, handle pipes or castings by approved lifting tackle. Not allowed to unload by roll down planks or any other form of inclined ramp unless the consent of the SO Rep to the method proposed has been obtained. Carefully stacked pipes on Site with timber packings under and between the pipes. Where pipes are stacked, the height shall never exceed 2m. All pipes shall be carefully brushed out inside and shall be tested for soundness before being laid. Lay the pipes separately to true inverts, straight lines and falls, each pipe being separately boned between sight rails and bearing evenly upon the solid ground or concrete for its full length. Where pipes are laid without a concrete bed, cut holes in the bottom of the trench of such size and depth so as to allow the joints to be properly made and the barrel of the pipe to bear evenly on the solid ground of its full length. Where pipes are to be laid on rock formation, take the excavation down to 100mm below bed level and take great care to ensure that there are no projecting pieces of rock on which the pipe will ride. Make up the bed to its true line and level and refill with either 100mm of consolidated, selected material from the excavations, well rammed, and watered if necessary or with 100mm of grade 15 concrete as directed by the SO Rep. Ensure that all blocks and wedges are of sufficient size and strength to prevent settlement of the pipes. Push home each well positioned concrete pipe with rebated joint into the previously laid pipe by means of uniformly applied pressure. Then carry out jointing by filling the opening at the joint with cement mortar and finish off flush. Gauge mortar for jointing pipes and precast concrete units in the proportions of one part of cement to three parts of sand. Mix cement mortar in small quantities sufficiently only for 30 minutes work and do not remix or work up again after setting or hardening; any mortar that has become set or hard shall be rejected and removed from the Works. In the event of pipes being fractured after being to all appearances properly laid whether due to imperfect beds having been formed or the material for refilling having been improperly selected or to any other cause, the Contractor in every instance, shall be held responsible and shall be called upon to replace such defective pipes at his own cost, if such Defect appears before the expiry of the Defects Liability Period.
53.6
CULVERTS Construct pipe culverts of precast reinforced concrete pipes as specified herein all in accordance with the Drawings. Lay and joint pipes as described in Clauses 52.65 to 52.68 of this Specifications. Where box culverts are to be cast-in-situ reinforced concrete, Construct them in accordance with Clause 52.34 "Concrete" and to the approval of the SO Rep.
53.7
BACKFILLING FOR CULVERTS When backfilling the excavation after the pipe-laying and concreting has been approved, carefully place and well pack selected material free from large stones next to the work to avoid injury to it. Fill in the remainder of the excavation with the best and most suitable portions of the excavated material, in layers of not more than 600mm deep; each layer shall be thoroughly rammed and watered to achieve adequate compaction and consolidation. If directed by the SO Rep, use imported filling for backfilling. Note carefully that proper backfilling of trenches shall be required and measures shall be taken as may be necessary to enforce compliance with this Clause. Maintain all backfilled surfaces including existing roads until they are completely reinstated. Bear liability for claims arising from accidents due to subsidence or inadequate maintenance.
53.8
FILL ADJACENT TO BRIDGE ABUTMENTS, CULVERTS AND RETAINING WALLS Before backfilling, place a filter drain against weepholes in all structures. The filter drain shall consist of clean, hard and durable broken stones or hardcore. The large stones shall be placed adjacent to the weepholes and the smaller particles behind and above the larger particles. Extend the length of the filter drain horizontally throughout the whole width of the structures or as shown in the Drawings. Unless otherwise stated, it shall have a width of 300mm and shall vertically cover the weephole by at least 300mm. Place special filling material adjacent to all structures in accordance with Table 53.1. Other approved materials may be used as backfill outside the limits as specified in the same Table. Table 53.1 Special Fill Adjacent to Abutments, Culverts and Retaining Walls Structure Bridge abutment & wingwalls Culverts windwalls Retaining walls Barrels of box culverts Barrels of pipe culverts Minimum Width of Special Fill 2.0 m H/3 H/3 H/3 H (H-height of structure)
Place backfill in horizontal layers of thickness appropriate to the compacting plant used. Compact backfill with care to the required density but avoid excessive compaction. For framed structures, bringing fill at both ends of the structure up simultaneously and equally, with the difference in levels of fills at both ends limited to 600mm. No fill shall be placed against concrete structures within 21 days after placing concrete unless the Contractor has provided at his own expense sufficient supports to the walls to the approval of the SO Rep. The supply, filling and compaction of the special filling material shall form part of the Contract and the Contractor shall allow for such works in the Contract Sum.
53.9
COFFERDAMS Any proposal for cofferdams shall not be implemented without the prior written approval of the SO Rep. The proposal shall include the method of construction, materials used, width, height, length and location of the cofferdams.
53.10
PREPARATION OF ROAD FORMATION Where the bearing capacity of the soil is determined by the SO Rep or his representative as adequate and where the road is in cut, carry out excavations to the required levels as required by the thickness of construction and the levels of the finished road. Excavate the formation to the required level of the camber or cross-fall shown for the finished road and trim to an even surface. Thoroughly roll the formation with 10 tonne rollers or similar equipment until thoroughly compacted. Where the road is on previously filled ground or where excavation has to be carried deeper than normal formation level on account of weakness in the subsoil as may be shown on the Drawings or determined by the SO Rep during the progress of the work, bring up the formation to the correct level with filling as specified in Clause 55.5 "Filling Generally". Properly compact such filling up to formation level by rolling successively with compaction equipments as detailed in Clause 55.9 "Compaction" and bring to proper shape and camber as is the case of the formation where the road is in cut. Trim off all high spots and reconsolidate the section. Should any depressions appear in the formation during compaction, fill in, level and compact with material as specified, before crusher run laying is commenced. The SO Rep may require fill materials to be tested by a SAC accredited laboratory in accordance with BS 1377 to determine its maximum dry density and optimum moisture content for compaction. One test will be conducted to determine the maximum dry density and optimum moisture content for each class of material to be compacted. Maintain the moisture content of the in-situ material during compaction as close to the optimum moisture content as possible. If necessary, this shall be adjusted by wetting or drying on Site to enable the required in-situ field densities of the fill material to be obtained consistently. Following the compaction process, carry out in-situ field density tests in accordance with BS 1377:1975 Test No. 15(A) (Sand Replacement Method) or Test No. 15(F) (Water Displacement Method). The in-situ field density may also be determined using nuclear density meters. At least one in-situ field test shall be made for every 300m2 of surface area of each compacted layer. Obtain the following in-situ field densities of compacted materials given as percentage of the maximum dry density derived from BS 1377 Test No. 13 (4.5kg rammer) : (a) Within 500mm of formation level (sub-grade or foundation) - 95% of maximum dry density From 500mm below formation level - 90% of maximum dry density
(b)
The Contractor may choose to establish by site trials the relationship among the in-situ material for compaction, compaction plant used, thickness for each layer, and compacting effort in terms of number of passes. If so established and agreed by the SO Rep the Contractor shall allow the same compaction arrangement for each and every subsequent layers in compaction. However, the SO Rep may at any time carry out in-situ field density tests to determine whether the degree of compaction is satisfactory. The agreed compaction arrangement as mentioned above shall be adjusted when the compaction is found inadequate.
53.11
SUB-GRADE OF CARRIAGEWAY (a) Sub-grade Formation In addition to Clause 53.10 "Preparation of Road Formation", trim the finished level of sub-grade along the road centre-line and finish to the lines, grades and cross-sections as shown on the Drawings. On straight lengths of roads, trim the sub-grade to a cross-fall as shown in the Drawing on each side of the road's centre-line. Where the alignment is curved the cross-fall of the sub-grade shall be the same as that of the pavement on both super-elevations and transitions. Trim the sub-grade so that the level does not vary more than 25mm above or 50mm below the levels shown on the Drawings. (b) Sub-grade Material Fill material for the last 500mm of the sub-grade shall be the best selected material which shall have a soaked CBR (California Bearing Ratio) value of not less than the value shown on the Drawings or the Supplementary Specifications or given by the SO Rep in writing. In cut or natural ground where the soaked CBR value of the last 500mm of sub-grade material is less than the required minimum value and if directed in writing, remove 500mm of this material and replace it with an approved selected fill material which conforms to the minimum value required at the expense of the Contractor. Compact the last 500mm of the sub-grade material in layers not exceeding 150mm to the required density given below. (c) Compaction of Sub-grade Carry out compaction of the sub-grade by mechanical means using the approved type of compaction equipment such as smooth-wheel roller, tamping roller, pneumatic typed roller and vibrating smooth drum roller, to the required density as specified in Clause 55.9 "Compaction". For undisturbed natural ground, compaction shall be the required dry density for a depth of not less than 200mm. Compact the last 500mm layer of sub-grade material below the level of the granite base course to a density as shown in the Drawings or to the Specifications. The location of the samples and the field measurement of the dry density of the compacted material shall be carried out in-situ with a standard instrument approved by the SO Rep. At the time of compaction of each layer, adjust the moisture content of the material by spraying water uniformly or allowing the material to dry out sufficiently to obtain the required compaction. No base course material shall be laid on the carriageway until the sub-grade has been approved by the SO Rep. Remove any material laid on the sub-grade before the sub-grade has been approved by the SO Rep from Site, if directed by the SO Rep, at the Contractor's own expense. The location where test is required shall be determined and approved by the SO Rep. The laboratory test shall be carried out at the HDB laboratory or PSB's accredited laboratories. During construction, the SO Rep may take samples from the compacted sub-grade for CBR tests, the location of which shall be determined by the SO Rep depending on the uniformity of the soil type encountered and all the costs incurred shall be at the Contractor's own expense. The number of samples to be taken shall be at a rate of one sample for every 50m of carriageway subject to a minimum of 3 samples. However, if the soaked CBR values fail to achieve the standard required, further tests will be carried out and paid for by the Contractor.
53.11
SUB-GRADE OF CARRIAGEWAY (CONT'D) (d) Improved Sub-grade Course of Carriageway No sub-grade material or granite base material shall be laid on the carriageway until the sub-grade has been approved by the SO Rep for the laying of the improved sub-grade or base course materials. Unless otherwise stated, the thickness of the base and sub-base course shown on the Drawings shall be the compacted thickness.
53.12
CONCRETE HAUNCHED UPVC SCUPPER DRAINS Concrete haunch 250mm diameter upvc pipe to SS272 (with no joint) and lay within the side-tables to the details shown on the Drawings. Provide drop inlets to the details shown in the Drawings and the connection to the scupper pipes/drains neatly joint in cement mortar.
53.13
ROADSIDE KERBS, CHANNELS, ETC All precast concrete roadside kerbs channels (gutters), dividers and drain channels shall comply with BS 7263 and/or SS 214:1979. Set the kerbs, dividers etc in cement mortar on a bed of concrete and haunched with concrete all as shown on the Drawings. Great care shall be taken to ensure the trueness of the line and level of the kerbs. Trim, cut or cast end units squarely to suit required dimensions. The composite and other drain channels shall conform entirely to the shape and dimensions shown on the Drawings. All joints between kerb units shall be of a uniform thickness and pointed in 1:3 cement-sand mortar. Cast the kerbs to the necessary radii to suit sharp curves on plan and the required proportion shall have shaped insets to suit the entrances to scupper drains.
53.14
CRUSHER RUN BASE COURSE Crusher run material shall consist of hard, clean, durable, and angular aggregate with a nominal size of 100mm and maximum size of not more than 125mm. If the required compacted depth of the base course exceeds 150mm, construct the base in two or more layers of approximately equal thickness compacted and blinded as specified or indicated on the Drawings. The maximum compacted thickness of any layer shall not exceed 150mm irrespective of the type of compacting equipment employed. Mechanically spread the crushed granite or by any other means approved by the SO Rep to a uniform thickness. Roll each layer of the crushed granite base course with a smooth steel wheeled roller of at least 10 tonnes until a uniform surface is attained. Spread 20mm granite aggregate and brush into the surface voids and rolling shall continue until a smooth and uniform surface is attained and there is no movement in the crushed granite layers. Begin rolling at the sides and progress gradually towards the centre parallel to the longitudinal axis of the road, with a uniform over-lap of each succeeding trip of the roller. Make good irregularities of the compacted crusher run layer before the next course is laid. Blind the surface of each layer with granite dust or an approved blinding material. Brush these blinding materials into the interstices of the granite base course and water with a watering cart. Roll and water the whole surface sweep and roll repeatedly until all the interstices in the granite base course have been filled and the granite base course forms a dense and compact layer. On completion the surface of the base course shall present a smooth and compact appearance, true to levels and camber or cross-fall and shall be sufficiently water-bound to withstand traffic.
53.15
PLANT MIXED CRUSHED GRANITE AGGREGATE BASE COURSE All crushed granite base course shall consist of graded crushed, clean and hard angular aggregate of maximum size 38mm. The grading of the materials is as shown in Table 53.2 below : Table 53.2 Grading Requirements for Plant Mixed Crushed Granite Base Course BS Sieve Size 50 38.0 19.0 9.5 4.8 2.4 425 75 mm mm mm mm mm mm m m % Passing (by weight) 100 95 - 100 60 - 80 40 - 60 25 - 45 15 - 35 6 - 18 0 - 10
Mix the aggregates at a mixing plant by continuous mixing using a pug-mill mixer, or batch type mixing using a revolving blade, rotary pan, or rotary tilting drum mixer. The plant shall be in sound mechanical condition and shall consistently produce a uniform mixture or aggregates and water at optimum moisture content or at a moisture content as directed by the SO Rep. To achieve the desired grading, the use of any sand, granite dust or approved filler such as laterite, the quality of such materials and the amount to be added into the mixing plant shall be subject to the approval of the SO Rep. Water used for mixing shall be clean and substantially free from detrimental impurities such as oil, salts, acids, alkali and vegetable substance. The method of loading and unloading of material shall be such that segregation shall be minimised. Remove from site material which does not comply with the Specifications. During delivery, cover the material with canvas, or other approved material to prevent loss of moisture during transport. Vehicles used for delivery of material to the hoppers of spreading machines shall have bodies or discharge equipment which shall enable the load to be discharged direct into hopper without spillage and in such a way that segregation shall be minimised. The Contractor is required to furnish information on the following : (a) (b) (c) (d) Date and time of loading The name of the supplier The registered number of the vehicle The nature and source of the material
The record book shall be kept by the SO Rep on Site. Spreading of the pavement material shall not commence without the prior consent of the SO Rep Complete spreading within 3 hours of the time of loading the delivery vehicle. Spread the whole of the mixture by an approved self propelled mechanical spreader with an automatic tamping device. Each layer shall be spread in an uniform layer not exceeding 200mm consolidated thick. After the final rolling which shall be carried out with a self propelled steel-wheeled roller of at least 12 tonnes in weight, the whole surface shall then be allowed to "cure" by opening the carriageway to traffic for a period of at least two (2) weeks or longer if required by the SO Rep.
53.15
PLANT MIXED CRUSHED GRANITE AGGREGATE BASE COURSE (CONT'D) When used in a pavement which is not to carry a bituminous surfacing, that portion of the material which will pass a 425 m sieve shall have the following properties : Liquid Limit Plasticity Index Linear Shrinkage not more than 25% not more than 6% not more than 3%
The sand equivalent of the material passing the 4.8mm sieve shall not be less than 30. When used in a pavement which is to carry a bituminous surfacing, the portion of the material which will pass a 425 m sieve shall have the following properties : Liquid Limit Plasticity Index Linear Shrinkage not more than 35% between 4 and 9% between 2 and 4%
53.16
PREMIX BITUMINOUS SURFACING (a) General Where indicated in the Drawings or where directed, lay the road with hot Asphalt Premix Surfacing to a consolidated thickness of either 25mm, 50mm or thicker as shown on the Drawings and as detailed below. Works under this Contract shall include the following : (i) (ii) (iii) (iv) Sweeping and brushing surface prior to applying tack coats or asphalt surfacing. Supply and application of suitable tack coats wherever required. Supply and unloading of hot mix asphalt paving mixes as directed. Supply, lay by mechanical spreader/finisher, and rolling and finishing of hot mix asphalt paving mixes.
On receipt of instructions from the SO Rep, the Contractor shall proceed promptly with such work within 48 hours. Carry out the work continuously and complete within such time as is specified by the SO Rep, having due regard to the output capacity of the Contractor's mixing plant and allowing for unavoidable lost time because of any inclement weather during the course of such work. (b) Materials All bitumen supplied shall comply with SS 84 and SS 85 and shall be approved type asphaltic bitumen of either 60/70 penetration and/or 80/100 penetration, as directed by the SO Rep (measured at 25C in both cases). All bitumen shall be straight-run bitumen prepared only by the refining of asphaltic-base petroleum and such refining shall not involve the "cracking process". No mineral matter other than that naturally contained in such bitumen shall be present. The bitumen shall be of uniform quality, free from water and shall not foam when heated to 175C. Submit, when required by the SO Rep the country of origin of all bitumen supplied, and the price paid for such bitumen, prior to its use in the Works. Test for the properties of bitumen shall be carried out whenever required in accordance with the methods set out in SS 86. Mineral Filler shall consist of crushed rock fines, Portland Cement to SS 26 and/or granite fines of appropriate grading. At least 85% of cement filler shall pass BS Sieve No. 200 and filler shall be thoroughly dry and shall be free from organic matter and clay particles.
53.16
PREMIX BITUMINOUS SURFACING (CONT'D) (b) Materials (Cont'd) Fine Aggregate shall consist of approved clean well-graded granite fines produced in a secondary crushing plant, or approved clean natural sand properly washed free from all impurities. Fine aggregate shall be taken as materials mainly passing a BS Sieve 4.76mm and retained on BS Sieve No. 200. Coarse Aggregate shall consist of clean, well-graded, angular, crushed granite of approved quality free from dust, dirt, and/or deleterious materials, and free from excess of flat, elongated or weathered pieces. Coarse aggregate shall be taken as material mainly retained on BS Sieve 4.76mm. (c) Rollers Rolling equipment shall, consist of steel wheel and pneumatic type rollers. Steel Wheel Rollers shall be of the following types unless otherwise approved by the SO Rep : (i) (ii) three-wheel rollers of 10 to 12 tonnes in weight. two-axle tandem rollers of 8 to 12 tonnes in weight.
These rollers shall, under working conditions, develop a compression in the rear-wheels of 44N per mm to 59N per mm of roll width. Rollers shall be in good working condition and be free from backlash, faulty steering mechanism, or worn parts. Rollers shall be equipped with adjustable scrappers to keep the rollers clean and with efficient means of keeping the wheels wet to prevent mixes from sticking to the rolls. Rollers shall also be free of flat areas, openings or projections which will mar the surface of the pavement. Pneumatic Tyre Rollers shall be self-propelled or towed type, single or double-axle, having an effective rolling width of not less than 1.2 metres. The rollers shall be equipped with smooththread pneumatic tyres of equal size and diameter. The wheels of the roller shall be so spaced that two passes of a single-axle roller or one pass of a two-axle roller shall accomplish one complete coverage equal to the rolling width of the machine. There shall be a minimum of 7mm over-lap of the tracking wheels of a double axle roller. The wheels shall not wobble. The roller shall be uniform for all wheels. Pneumatic-tyred rollers shall be constructed with ample ballast space to provide an operating weight per tyre of between 54 to 76 N per mm of tyre track width. The total operating weight of the roller may be varied by the SO Rep. The towing vehicle for towed-typed rollers shall be equipped with smooth-thread pneumatic tyres. (d) Preparation of Area to be Paved The area to be paved shall be true to line and grade, having a dry and properly prepared surface prior to the start of paving operations. It shall be brushed until the stone aggregate surfaces are exposed and the whole area shall be swept free of all excess granite dust or blinding material and other loose chippings or foreign material. Patch or correct all depressions and other irregularities to the complete satisfaction of the SO Rep. Apply a tack coat complying with SS 85 on the prepared crushed stone base before the Hot 2 Asphalt premix surfacing is laid. The rate of application of the tack coat shall be 0.55 litre per m . Paint the surface of kerbs, gutters, vertical faces of existing pavements and all structures in actual contact with the asphalt mixes with a thin uniform coating of approved bituminous emulsion complying with SS 85 to provide a closed bonded watertight joint.
UPG07/S53.DOC(10) lkk(181206) DPD
53.16
PREMIX BITUMINOUS SURFACING (CONT'D) (e) Tack Coat Supply and lay a suitable tack coat of cationic emulsion of 40% bitumen content as directed, to any surface, prior to the spreading of the asphalt thereon, and after such surface has been thoroughly cleaned and dried. Apply the bitumen emulsion by means of an approved type of mechanical sprayer only, and at the specified rate of application uniformly. Remove any excess or unevenly distributed bitumen from the road surface. The bitumen emulsion shall be allowed a period of 10 minutes "to break" before laying premix over it. (f) Asphalt Mixing & Delivery Furnish the SO Rep in advance with full details of all asphalt mixing plant to be used, including average output capacity, type, age, maintenance facilities and all other relevant particulars whenever required by the SO Rep. The mixing plant to be used shall have an output capacity of not less than 50 tonnes per hour. The appropriate mix required for each work shall be in accordance with the Table of Mix as specified in subclause 53.16(n) "Table of Mixes" of the Specifications. Wherever considered advisable, the SO Rep may vary the specified proportions of coarse and fine aggregate within a range of 10% and the Contractor shall NOT be entitled to any extra payment nor suffer any reduction in payment on this account. The SO Rep may vary the percentage of filler to be used, within a range of 2% and the Contractor shall NOT be entitled to any extra or reduced payment on this account. The SO Rep may likewise vary the percentage of bitumen to be used, whereupon the price paid for the work shall be adjusted by him in accordance with the change in bitumen content ordered, based only on the nett purchase price paid by the Contractor for the bitumen being used. If this price is greater than the ruling nett purchase price of bitumen at the time of variation, then the latter price shall be adopted for the purpose of calculating the value of any such variation. Thoroughly dry all aggregate of the requisite sizes and grading and feed at a temperature of 149C to 190C into a mechanical mixer of approved type. Install an accurate registering pyrometer at a suitable point at the discharge end of the drier with a registering device so located as to indicate clearly the temperature of the coarse and fine aggregate when discharged. Heat the bitumen in an approved type boiler, to a temperature of 136C to 163C, and thereafter add, together with the required proportion of filler, to the coarse and fine aggregate, and all ingredients thoroughly and effectively mixed together until complete coating of all aggregate and filler with the bitumen has been achieved. The SO Rep shall have access at all times to the asphalt mixing plant and shall at liberty take such samples of materials as considered necessary from time to time to verify the proper operation thereof. It is particularly important to avoid excessive heating of the bitumen binder as this will lead to hardening of the binder and result in a shortening of the useful life of the pavement. In all cases keep temperatures as low as is consistent with proper mixing and laying. Discharge the asphalt, after proper mixing, from the mixer direct into a tipping truck, for transportation to the work Site. The temperatures of the mix on arrival at the work Site shall not be less than 121C. Cover asphalt in transit when required, with suitable canvas cover to minimise heat loss. When required, provide an adequate number of accurate thermometers for checking the temperature. Vehicles used for transporting the asphalt shall be thoroughly cleaned, free of all foreign materials immediately prior to loading with asphalt. The use of dirty or otherwise unsatisfactory vehicles shall render the load(s) of asphalt liable to rejection.
UPG07/S53.DOC(11) lkk(181206) DPD
Ugdg Spec TS 53-12/30 53.16 PREMIX BITUMINOUS SURFACING (CONT'D) (g) Spreading and Finishing Furnish the SO Rep in advance with full details of the mechanical spreader/finisher to be used whenever required by the SO Rep. The mechanical self-propelled spreader/finisher shall be capable of laying an asphalt carpet of not less than three metre width, unless otherwise permitted, and of being operated at varying rates of travel consistent with the rate of delivery and the type of asphalt mixture to be laid. On arrival at the Site, tip the asphalt mix into the hopper of the mechanical self-propelled spreader/finisher and thereupon spread, level, tamp and finish to correct profile, camber or crossfall, without causing segregation, dragging, burning or other surface defects or irregularities. Follow the SO Rep instructions on the rate of travel of such machine at all times. Operate the spreader at a uniform rate of travel and feed the mixer to the spreader at such a rate as to permit continuous laying, in so far as the supply and site conditions allow. The spreader/finisher shall not operate on any type of side forms, but shall employ mechanical devices to adjust the grade and confine the edges of the asphalt to true lines. Immediately after laying, and before rolling, check the surface with a straight edge of not less than 3.0 m and a spirit level (both to be supplied by Contractor when required) to determine the proper crossfall or camber required. Correct all irregularities and Defect in alignment, grade, texture, etc in an approved manner. The surface, after final rolling, when tested with a straight edge 3.0 m long placed parallel to the centre line of the carriageway shall show no depression greater than 9mm. Carry out preliminary rolling with steel wheel rollers of the type approved by the SO Rep as soon as the asphalt mix has cooled sufficiently to support such roller without lateral flow of the mix. Carry out finishing rolling with an 8 to 12 tonnes tandem roller or other suitable type of roller acceptable to the SO Rep, as soon as practicable after the preliminary rolling, and proceed until no further compaction of the asphalt can be obtained. All rolling shall proceed at a sufficiently slow speed so as to avoid pushing or shoving of the asphalt carpet. The rollers shall not remain stationary on the warm asphalt carpet for any appreciable length of time. Do not use oil on the wheels of any roller to prevent adhesion of asphalt. Protect sections of newly compacted asphalt carpet from traffic for at least six hours, or until properly hardened by cooling. The requirements of the SO Rep in this matter shall be final. Clean all manholes, kerbs, channels and other projections against which the asphalt mix is to be laid, and apply a thin coating of bitumen emulsion applied prior to the laying of the asphalt. Carefully tamp the mixture around and against all projections by means of mechanical tampers and the finished surface left flush, or, if required, up to a maximum of 3mm above such projection. Where existing manholes are lower than the new premixed surface, provide wooden frames to demarcate its position during the process of the laying and premix, so that the manhole can be raised subsequently by the respective service departments. (h) Laying Hot Asphalt Premix Lay all asphalt premix against a timber batten laid and pegged into the stone base along the longitudinal joint if it is not laid against a kerb, gutter or against a paving. The battens shall be of a thickness not less than the specified compacted thickness of the asphalt paving. Immediately cut back all joints both longitudinal and transverse squarely prior to laying of further asphalt in contact with such joints. (i) Compaction of Asphalt Premix General At least two rollers shall be required at all times and as many additional rollers as necessary to provide specified pavement density. When plant production exceeds 75 tonnes per hour, at least one additional roller shall be required for each additional 50 tonnes or fraction thereof. During rolling, keep the roller wheels moist with only sufficient water to avoid picking up the material.
UPG07/S53.DOC(12) lkk(181206) DPD
53.16
PREMIX BITUMINOUS SURFACING (CONT'D) (i) Compaction of Asphalt Premix (Cont'd) General (Cont'd) After the longitudinal joints and edges have been compacted, start rolling longitudinally at the sides and gradually progress towards the centre of the pavement, except on super-elevated curves, begin rolling on the low side and progress to the high side. There shall be over-lapping on successive trips by at least one-half the width on tandem rollers and uniformly lapping each preceding track or covering the entire surface with the rear wheels where three-wheel rollers are used. The rollers shall move at a slow but uniform speed (not exceeding five kilometres per hour) with the drive roller wheel nearest the paver. The line of rolling shall not be suddenly changed or the direction or rolling suddenly reversed, thereby displacing the mix. If rolling causes displacement of the materials, the affected areas shall be loosened at once and restored to the original grade of the loose material before being re-rolled. Heavy equipment or rollers shall not be allowed to stand on the finished surface until it has thoroughly cooled. Rolling of the mix shall consist of six separate operations in the following order : (i) (ii) (iii) (iv) (v) (vi) transverse joints; longitudinal joints; edges; initial or breakdown rolling; second rolling; finish rolling
The edges shall not be exposed for more than fifteen minutes without being rolled. Particular attention shall be given to the construction of transverse and longitudinal joints in both base and wearing courses. Transverse Joints Carefully construct transverse Joints in both base and wearing course and thoroughly compact to provide a smooth riding surface over these joints in the pavement. If the joint is formed with a bulkhead, such as a board, to provide a straight line and vertical face, the joint face need not be trimmed before fresh material is placed against it to complete the joint. If a bulkhead is not used to form the joint and the roller is permitted to roll over the end of the new material, locate the line of joint at the back of the rounded edge a sufficient distance to provide a true surface and crosssection. Paint the joint with a thin coat of asphalt before fresh material is placed against it. To obtain thorough compaction tightly crowd the joint against its vertical face. Continue rolling until a thoroughly compacted neat joint is obtained. Longitudinal Joints Roll longitudinal joints directly behind the paving operation. The first lane placed shall be true to line and grade and have a vertical face. Tightly crowd the material being placed in the abutting lane against the vertical face of the previously placed lane. Position the machine such that in spreading, the material overlaps the edge of the lane previously placed by 25mm to 50mm and is sufficiently high to allow for compaction. Before rolling, carefully move the material over-lapping the joint by brooming onto the surface of the unrolled lane. When rolling is accomplished with a three-wheel roller, shift over into the previously placed lane so that no more than 150mm of the rear roller wheel rides on the edge of the fine material left by brooming. Continue rolling until a thoroughly compacted, neat joint is obtained. If only tandem rollers are used they shall be similarly operated to complete the joint. When the abutting lane is not placed on the same day or the joint is distorted during the day's work by traffic or by other means, carefully trim the edge of the lane to line and paint with a tack coat of bitumen before the abutting lane is placed.
UPG07/S53.DOC(13) lkk(181206) DPD
53.16
PREMIX BITUMINOUS SURFACING (CONT'D) (j) Density, Thickness and Surface Requirements The completed pavement shall have a density equal to or greater than 95% of a laboratory specimen made in the proportions of the approved job-mix formula and the Marshall test when required. Carefully control both density and thickness during construction and ensure they comply with the approved plans, Drawings and the Specifications. The checking of compacted thickness shall be carried out by the SO Rep by cutting test holes after he is fully satisfied that the asphalt layer has been fully compacted. As a guide each test hole shall be cut at 60 metres interval along each carriageway. Each test hole shall be 150mm diameter and the average thickness of four readings shall be taken as the depth of the asphalt at the test hole. Provide all the necessary labour and Construction Equipment for carrying out both density and thickness tests including the reinstatement of the test holes. Carry out tests for the densities of the asphalt base course and wearing course if required, using an Automatic Asphalt Density Recorder or any other method which the SO Rep may approve. The decision on whether or not the asphalt laid has been compacted to the required density shall be made by the SO Rep based on the above tests and his decision shall be final. If the tests carried out by the SO Rep show that the asphalt surface has not been compacted to the required density the Contractor shall immediately continue to roll the asphalt layer until the SO Rep is satisfied that the required density has been obtained. In addition to the use of a straight edge to check the asphalt surface finish if required, use a `Rolling Straight edge' to check the surface irregularity. The decision of the SO Rep on whether or not the asphalt surface has been finished to the regularity required shall be final. Take immediate steps to rectify Defect as directed by the SO Rep. (k) Sampling & Testing Samples of asphalt premix shall be taken as, when and where considered necessary, by the SO Rep and testing shall, as far as practicable, be in accordance with SS 86 and BS 598. The number of samples required to be tested shall be one sample for every 550m of carpark/450m2 of roadway subject to a minimum of two samples. Extract all test samples of 150mm diameter by coring method. The sampling and testing processes shall be conducted by an accredited laboratory approved by SAC. Where test results are unsatisfactory, the SO Rep may condemn all the asphalt represented by such unsatisfactory sample(s). The Contractor or the Contractor's Representative may be present during the carrying out of any tests, provided he has given one day's clear notice, on each occasion, of such intention. The Contractor shall be responsible for the immediate reinstatement of all cored holes on the road surface where samples have been extracted for testing purposes. Clean the cored holes and dry before backfilling with hot asphalt premix which shall be kept at the required temperature. Properly compact all reinstated cored holes in layers to achieve perfect match between the old and new surfaces.
2
UPG07/S53.DOC(14) lkk(181206) DPD
53.16
PREMIX BITUMINOUS SURFACING (CONT'D) (l) Extraction Test (i) Grading Analysis All aggregates shall be well graded to conform to the proportions specified in the various sieves and the grading curve of the mix shall fall within the approved design envelope bounded curves demarcating the maximum and minimum limits. Any grading falling outside these limits shall be considered as having failed the test and the premix so represented by the sample shall be rejected. The Contractor shall be required to accept the corrective measures including the payment of fees or charges as required by the SO Rep or LTA. (ii) Bitumen Content The percentage (%) of soluble bitumen in the mix of any sample shall not be less than the minimum percentage specified. Where any of the test samples fail to comply with the requirement as specified, all the asphalt surfacing represented by such unsatisfactory samples shall be rejected, and the Contractor shall be charged according to the Maintenance Fees imposed by the SO Rep or LTA. Where the bitumen content of any sample exceeds the maximum percentage specified, the entire premix represented by the samples tests shall be rejected and similar Maintenance Fees as specified shall also be imposed. The average percentage of soluble bitumen of all the samples tested shall also be not less than the average percentage specified. Similar Maintenance Fees as specified shall be imposed for failure to comply. (m) Marshall Test Result of all Marshall tests of the premix samples if required, shall comply strictly with the undermentioned critical limits : (i) (ii) (iii) (iv) Marshall stability (KN) - not less than 7.1 KN Flow value - not more than 4.05mm Voids in mix (%) : 3 to 5 Percentage of aggregate voids filled with bitumen binder - 75 to 82
As a guide, for the purpose of carrying out Marshall Tests, a set of minimum number of three samples shall be taken for each 150 linear metre of each carriageway or part thereof of premix laid. The samples shall be taken from positions as directed. Samples for Marshall Tests if required, shall be taken in conjunction with Grading Analysis and Bitumen Test or taken separately as directed. (n) Table of Mixes Mix the premix bitumen in the proportions as shown on the attached Table of Mixes. (o) Reinstatement of Test Holes Immediately reinstate all holes on the road surface where samples have been extracted for testing purposes.
UPG07/S53.DOC(15) lkk(181206) DPD
TABLE OF MIXES Mix Classification Type of Mix Thickness of course (vary) Max size of stone aggregate used Sieve size Passing 50 38 25 19 13 9.5 6.4 3.2 1.2 0.3 0.075 mm mm mm mm mm mm mm mm mm (BS 14) mm (BS 52) mm (BS 200) Mix % Soluble Bitumen (by weight of total mix) 60/70 penetration ) 80/100 penetration ) Overall requirements : % graded coarse aggregates retained on 3.2mm BS Sieve (by wt of total aggregate & filler) % graded fine aggregates passing 3.2mm BS Sieve but retained on 0.075 (BS 200) Sieve (by wt of total aggregate & filler) % mineral filler passing BS 200 Sieve (by wt of total aggregate & filler) % Soluble Bitumen by weight of total mix W1 W1 100 90 to 100 65 to 82 39 to 55 22 to 32 3 to 8 Min 5.5 5.5 Max 6.5 6.5 Mix W3 W4 W1 & W2 20mm Wearing Course 15mm to 20mm 10mm W3 & W4 25mm - 40mm Wearing Course (Type "C") 25mm to 45mm 20mm W5 & W6 50mm Wearing Course (Type "A") 45mm to 64mm 25mm B1 & B2 Base or Binder Course (Type "B") 50mm to 100mm 38mm
Total Percentage Passing Including Filler 100 95 to 100 70 to 83 50 to 65 29 to 44 15 to 24 3 to 8 Min 5.5 5.5 Max 6.5 6.5 Mix W5 W6 100 95 to 100 76 to 90 54 to 70 39 to 55 27 to 41 15 to 22 3 to 8 Min 5.5 5.5 Max 6.5 6.5 Mix B1 B2 100 95 to 100 84 to 92 65 to 82 48 to 62 35 to 50 22 to 35 12 to 19 3 to 8 Min 4.5 4.5 Max 6.0 6.0
31 63
42 52
52 43
57 39
6 6
6 6
5 6
4 5
UPG07/S53.DOC(16) lkk(181206) DPD
TABLE OF MIXES Mix Classification Type of Mix Thickness of Course (vary) Max size of stone aggregate used AI-IIIb Wearing Course 25mm to 45mm 20mm AI-IVa Wearing Course 20mm to 45mm 13mm AI-IVb Wearing Course 25mm to 45mm 20mm AI-IVc Wearing Course 45mm to 64mm 25mm AI-IId Base Course 45mm to 64mm 25mm AI-IIe Base Course 50mm to 100mm 38mm AI-IIId Base Course 45mm to 75m 25mm AI-IIIe Base Course 50mm to 100mm 38mm AI-A Skip Gradation 25mm to 45mm 20mm AI-B Skip Gradation 50mm to 100mm 38mm
Sieve Size Passing 50 38 25 19 13 9.5 4.75 2.36 600 300 150 75 mm mm mm mm mm mm mm mm m m m m 100 75 to 100 60 to 85 35 to 55 20 to 35 10 to 22 6 to 16 4 to 12 2 to 8 Min 4.5 Max 5.5 100 80 to 100 55 to 75 35 to 50 18 to 29 13 to 23 8 to 16 4 to 10 Min 4.5 Max 5.5 100 80 to 100 70 to 90 50 to 70 35 to 50 18 to 29 13 to 23 8 to 16 4 to 10 Min 4.5 Max 5.5
Total Percentage passing including filler 100 83 to 100 62 to 78 50 to 65 35 to 50 19 to 30 13 to 23 7 to 15 0 to 8 Min 4.5 Max 5.5 100 70 to 100 35 to 60 15 to 35 5 to 20 0 to 4 Min 3.5 Max 5.0 100 70 to 100 50 to 80 25 to 50 10 to 30 5 to 20 0 to 4 Min 3.5 Max 5.0 100 75 to 100 61 to 82 53 to 68 32 to 48 20 to 35 5 to 20 3 to 12 2 to 8 0 to 4 Min 3.5 Max 5.0 100 75 to 100 60 to 85 50 to 71 40 to 60 30 to 47 20 to 35 5 to 20 3 to 12 2 to 8 0 to 4 Min 3.5 Max 5.0 100 95 to 100 50 to 70 30 to 50 5 to 25 2 to 10 Min 4.5 Max 5.5 100 95 to 100 60 to 80 30 to 50 20 to 40 5 to 25 1 to 10 Min 4.5 Max 5.5
% Soluble Bitumen (60/70 Penetration Grade)* (% by weight of total mix)
*When required 80/100 Penetration Grade Bitumen shall be used instead of 60/70 Penetration Grade Bitumen at the Contractor's own cost and expense. No Claims for extra payment shall be allowed for using 80/100 Penetration Grade Bitumen.
UPG07/S53.DOC(17) lkk(181206) DPD
TABLE OF MIXES Road Mixes Mix Classification Type of Mix Thickness of Course Max. Size of Stone (BS) Passing 50 mm 37.5 mm 25 mm 19 mm 13.2 mm 9.5 mm 6.3 mm 3.35 mm 2.36 mm 1.18 mm 600 m 300 m 212 m 75 m % Soluble Bitumen (60/70 Pen Grade) (% by Wt of Total Mix) Void in Mix 50 - 75 mm 19 mm 100 80 - 90 63 - 77 46 - 56 16 - 26 8 - 18 6.5 - 10.5 5 0.5 WSS W1 Wearing Course 15 - 25 mm 10 mm 100 90 - 100 65 - 82 39 - 55 22 - 32 3-8 6 0.5 30 - 50 mm 19 mm 100 90 - 100 70 - 83 50 - 65 29 - 44 15 - 24 3-8 6 0.5 3.0 - 5.0 * When required 80/100 Penetration Grade Bitumen shall be used instead of 60/70 Penetration Grade Bitumen at the Contractor's own cost and expense. No Claims for extra payment shall be allowed for using 80/100 Penetration Grade Bitumen. W3 B1 Binder Course 50 - 100 mm 35 mm 100 95 - 100 84 - 92 65 - 82 48 - 62 35 - 50 27 - 41 15 - 22 3-8 5 0.5 45 - 65 mm 25 mm 100 95 - 100 76 - 90 54 - 70 39 - 55 27 - 41 15 - 22 3-8 5.5 0.5 W5 W3B Wearing Course 45 - 65 mm 19 mm 100 85 - 95 58 - 68 40 - 50 21 - 31 11 - 17 4-8 5 0.5 4.5 - 6.5 50 - 80 mm 25 mm 100 89 - 97 73 - 83 50 - 60 40 - 50 25 - 35 13 - 16 4-8 4.8 0.5 W5B
UPG07/S53.DOC(18) lkk(181206) DPD
53.17
INTERLOCKING CONCRETE PAVING BLOCKS (a) General The concrete blocks shall comply with the requirements of BS 6717:Part 1, unless otherwise specified. The interlocking concrete paving blocks shall be precast, vibrocompacted blocks. The maximum dimensional deviations from the standard work sizes for the paving blocks, measured in accordance with BS 6717 : Part I or SS 76M, shall be as follows : Length Width Thickness 2mm 2mm 3mm
Any pigment used shall comply with BS 1014. (b) Sampling and Testing for Compressive Strength A total of 16 concrete blocks shall be tested for each 550 m of interlocking concrete pavement. The average compressive strength of the paving blocks, tested in accordance with BS 6717 or SS 2 76M, shall not be less than 49N per mm , and the crushing strength of any individual block shall be 2 not less than 40N per mm . (c) Failure of Test on Compressive Strength The SO Rep shall exercise his rights under Clause 1.10 "Nuisance & Irregularities" to impose charges against the Contractor for : (i) each batch of 16 concrete blocks for which the average compressive strength is less than 49N/mm2; and each individual block of which the compressive strength is less than 40N/mm .
2 2
(ii)
In addition, the consignment represented by the test sample shall be accepted only at the sole discretion of the SO Rep, after he has considered the degree of failure and other related circumstances. Any consignment rejected by the SO Rep shall be removed from site immediately. (d) Sampling and Checking of Surface Layer Thickness In Composite Concrete Paving Blocks Coloured concrete paving blocks formed by the addition of pigments may be either homogeneous or non-homogeneous in colour. Non-homogeneous coloured concrete paving blocks are considered as composite concrete paving blocks. In composite concrete paving blocks, the coloured surface layer shall be formed as an integral part of the block and shall not be less than 5mm thick. A total of 5 composite concrete blocks shall be checked for surface layer thickness compliance for each 550 m2 of interlocking composite concrete pavement. The checking shall be carried out at a SAC's accredited laboratory. Each concrete block to be checked shall be cut neatly at the mid-span of the length of the composite concrete block, cutting of the blocks shall only be carried out at the accredited laboratory. The average surface layer thickness of each composite block shall be derived from the measured thickness at the left edge, middle and right edge of the surface layer thickness on the cross-sectional face of the cut-off block. The thickness shall be measured by a caliper. The measured thickness shall be to the nearest 0.1mm accuracy. The Contractor shall ensure that the cut samples are collected back from the accredited laboratory and returned to HDB for verification. These cut samples shall be kept at the site office and only disposed off at the sole discretion of the SO Rep.
UPG07/S53.DOC(19) lkk(181206) DPD
53.17
INTERLOCKING CONCRETE PAVING BLOCKS (CONT'D) (e) Failure to Comply with the Minimum Surface Layer Thickness Requirement in Composite Concrete Paving Blocks The SO Rep shall exercise his right under Clause 1.10 "Nuisance and Irregularities" of the Standard Specifications to impose charges against the Contractor for each composite concrete block for which the average surface layer thickness is less than 5mm. In addition, the consignment represented by the samples checked for surface layer thickness compliances shall be accepted only at the sole discretion of the SO Rep, after he has considered the degree of failure and other related circumstances. Any consignment rejected by the SO Rep shall be removed from site immediately. (f) Marking Before laying, divide the paving blocks into consignments designated for each area of not more 2 than 550 m . A sample of 16 blocks shall be taken from each such assignment. In the case of composite concrete paving blocks, an additional 5 blocks shall be taken from each such assignment. Clearly mark the sample at the time of sampling in such a way that the consignments represented by the sample are clearly defined. (g) Inspection Before commencing the placing of the sand bedding course and the laying of units, the sub-base shall be inspected and approved by the SO Rep. (h) Edge Restraints Provide adequate edge restraint along the perimeter of all paving in the form of integral kerb and gutter, concrete kerb or edge strip or established structure. The face of the edge restraint, where it abuts paving units, shall be vertical down to the sub-base. (i) Bedding Sand (i) Material Bedding sand shall be a well-graded sand passing a 4.75mm sieve and suited to concrete manufacture. The grading limits are : A.S. Sieve 9.52mm 4.75mm 2.36mm 1.18mm 600m 300m 150m 75m % Passing 100 95 to 100 80 to 100 50 to 85 25 to 60 10 to 30 5 to 15 0 to 10
The bedding sand shall be free of deleterious soluble salts or other contaminants likely to cause efflorescence or lead to reduced skid resistance. (ii) Moisture Content The sand shall be of uniform moisture content when spread and shall be protected against rain when stockpiled on Site prior to spreading.
UPG07/S53.DOC(20) lkk(181206) DPD
53.17
INTERLOCKING CONCRETE PAVING BLOCKS (CONT'D) (i) Bedding Sand (Cont'd) (iii) Spreading Bedding Sand Spread the sand bedding loose and in a uniform layer. Determine the precise depth in the field prior to spreading. Screed the sand bedding in a loose condition to the nominated design profile and levels plus the necessary surcharge to achieved a uniformly thick layer, following compaction to the thickness specified in the Drawings. (iv) Screeding of Bedding Sand Carefully maintain the spread sand in a loose condition and protect against precompaction both prior to and following screeding. Loosen any precompacted sand or screeded sand left overnight before further paving units are placed. Lightly screed sand in a loose condition to the predetermined depth only, slightly ahead of the laying of the paving units. Under no circumstances shall the sand be screeded in advance of the laying face to an extent to which paving will not be completed on that day. Protect screeded sand against accidental precompaction including compaction by rain or dew. Remove any screeded sand which is precompacted prior to laying of units and bring back to profile in loose condition. (j) Laying of Paving Units (i) General Place paving units on the uncompacted screeded sand bedding to the nominated laying pattern, care being taken to maintain the specified bond throughout the job. Place paving units to achieve a positive gap of 3mm +1mm between units. Under no circumstances shall units be allowed to touch nor should the gap between units exceed 5 mm. Correctly place all joints to suit the laying pattern and bond. The first row shall abut an edge restraint with a gap of 2 to 4 mm and shall be laid at a suitable angle to the edge restraint to achieve the required visual orientation of paving units in the completed pavement. In each row all full units shall be laid first. Cut closure units and fit subsequently. Such closure units shall consist of not less than 25% of a full unit. Units may be cut using a mechanical or hydraulic guillotine, bolster, or by power sawing. Except where it is necessary to correct any minor variations occurring in the laying bond hammer the paving units into position. Where adjustment of position is necessary take care to avoid premature compaction of the sand bedding. Any foot or barrow traffic shall use boards overlaying paving to prevent disturbance of units prior to mechanical compaction. No other construction traffic shall be allowed on the pavement at this stage of construction. (ii) Compaction After laying the paving units they shall be compacted to achieve consolidation of the sand bedding and brought to design levels and profiles by not less than two and preferably three passes of a suitable plate compactor. The compactor shall be a high-frequency, low-amplitude mechanical flat plate vibrator having a plate area sufficient to cover a minimum of 12 paving units.
UPG07/S53.DOC(21) lkk(181206) DPD
53.17
INTERLOCKING CONCRETE PAVING BLOCKS (CONT'D) (j) Laying of Paving Units (Cont'd) (ii) Compaction (Cont'd) Compaction shall proceed as closely as possible following laying and prior to the acceptance of any traffic. Compaction shall not be attempted, however, within one metre of the laying face. Compaction shall continue until lipping has been eliminated between adjoining units. Joints shall then be filled and compacted as hereinafter described. All work to within one metre of the laying face shall be left fully compacted at the completion of each day's laying. (iii) Damaged Units Immediately remove and replace any units which are structurally damaged during compaction. (iv) Filling Joints As soon as practical after compaction, and in any case prior to the termination of work on that day and prior to the acceptance of construction traffic, spread sand for joint-filling over the pavement. The joint-filling sand shall conform to the following grading limits : A.S. Sieve 2.36 mm 1.18 mm 600 m 300 m 150 m 75 m % Passing 100 90 to 100 60 to 90 30 to 60 15 to 30 10 to 20
and shall be as dry as possible prior to spreading and brooming into the joints. At least one pass of the vibrating-plate compactor is necessary to achieve compaction of the jointingfilling sand. After the first pass joints shall be checked for adequacy of filling and any shortfall shall be made good prior to a further pass of the compactor. (v) Pavement Preloading Where directed by the SO Rep the pavement shall receive not less than 5 and up to 10 passes of a pneumatic-tyred roller having a gross weight not less than 10 tonnes. (vi) Excess Sand Excess surface sand shall be removed by brooming prior to handing over the pavement. (vii) Tolerance to Design Profile All surfaces and pavement structures shall be true to line and levels, grades, thicknesses and cross sections shown on the Drawings. Finish all pavements to lines and levels to ensure positive drainage at all drainage outlets and channels.
UPG07/S53.DOC(22) lkk(181206) DPD
53.18
CLAY PAVERS (TYPE PB) FOR FLEXIBLE PAVEMENT (a) General The clay pavers (Type PB) shall comply with requirements of BS 6677 Part 1, unless otherwise specified. The maximum and minimum value for the overall measurement of 24 clay pavers (for commonly available work sizes) shall be as follows : Work Size (in mm) Length 215 210 200 105 102.5 100 65 50 Maximum 5216 5095 4852 2555 2494 2433 1594 1226 Minimum 5104 4985 4748 2485 2426 2367 1526 1174
Width
Thickness
Other work sizes may be used if permitted by the SO Rep. (b) Sampling And Testing For Transverse Breaking Load A total of 10 clay pavers shall be tested for each 200 m of clay pavers used for flexible pavement. The mean transverse breaking load of 10 clay pavers shall be not less than 7 kN and the transverse breaking load of each clay paver shall be not less than 4 kN. (c) Failure Of Test On Transverse Breaking Load The SO Rep shall exercise his rights under Clause 1.10 "Nuisance and Irregularities" to impose charges against the Contractor for : (i) (ii) Each batch of 10 clay pavers for which the mean transverse breaking load is less than 7 kN, or each individual paver of which the transverse breaking load is less than 4 kN.
2
In addition, the consignment represented by the test sample may be accepted only at the sole discretion of the SO Rep, after he has considered the degree of failure and other related circumstances. Any consignment rejected by the SO Rep shall be removed from the Site immediately. (d) Sampling, Testing And Failure Criteria For Wet Skid Resistance A total of 5 clay pavers shall be tested for each 200m2 of clay pavers used for flexible pavement. The Mean Wet Skid Resistance of the 5 clay pavers shall not be less than 60. The SO Rep shall exercise his rights under Clause 1.10 "Nuisance And Irregularities" to impose charges against the Contractor for each batch of 5 clay pavers whose mean wet skid resistance fails to attain the above criteria. In addition, the consignment represented by the samples may be accepted only at the sole discretion of the SO Rep, after he has considered the degree of failure and other related circumstances. Any consignment rejected by the SO Rep shall be removed from the Site immediately. (e) Marking Before laying, divide the pavers into consignment designated for each area of not more than 200 2 m for Transverse Breaking Load Test and Wet Skid Resistance Test. A sample of 15 pavers shall be taken from each such consignment. Clearly mark the sample at the time of sampling in such a way that the consignments represented by the sample are clearly defined.
UPG07/S53.DOC(23) lkk(181206) DPD
Ugdg Spec TS 53-24/30 53.18 CLAY PAVERS (TYPE PB) FOR FLEXIBLE PAVEMENT (CONT'D) (f) Laying of Interlocking Clay Paving Blocks The method for the laying of clay pavers shall comply with the requirements as specified in subclause 53.17(g) to subclause 53.17(j) inclusive for interlocking concrete paving blocks. (g) Colours and laying patterns The Contractor shall submit workshop drawings to the SO Rep showing the range of colours and laying patterns of the clay pavers for selection and approval. The SO Rep reserves the right to change the colours and laying patterns and his decision shall be final. 53.19 CONCRETE FOOTPATH The paving slabs shall be properly bedded on a layer 25mm thick of unwashed sand and 100mm thick hardcore well compacted and special care shall be taken to ensure that the earth formation of the footpath is fully compacted and free from any vegetable matter or roots before footpath construction is commenced. Footpaths shall be laid true to the lines and levels of the roadside kerbs or divider and shall be given a slight fall as shown on the Drawings transversely towards the carriageway. For cast-in-situ concrete footpath panels of approximately 3m length shall be cast. The surface of each panel shall be floated smooth with a wooden float or similar appliance. Provide Construction/Contraction joints at the intervals between panels. 53.20 BUS BAYS AND SHELTERS Construct all bus bays shown on the Drawings to proper lines and levels, in reinforced concrete. Complete construction of bus bays before the carriageway base course metalling is commenced and protect the edges of the concrete slabs during carriageway construction. Make good any damage to such concrete to the satisfaction of the SO Rep. Roll the bed for the bus bay with a 10 tonne roller to the satisfaction of the SO Rep before receiving crushed granite 100mm thick and blinded. Install all bus shelters adjacent to the bus bays as shown on the Drawings. 53.21 TRAFFIC AND ROAD DIRECTIONAL SIGNS The design, fabrication and installation of traffic signs and road directional signs shall comply with the following general requirements and the LTA's general guidelines laid down in the SIGNS MANUAL INFORMATION SIGNS, prepared by the Transportation Branch, Road Division, LTA, and/or revised LTA's guidelines on materials, support, letter types, colour codes, sign legibility, dimension etc. as and when applicable. Fabricate the signs with aluminium sheeting of thickness No. 14 SWG. The reflective sheeting shall be high intensity grade consisting of optical lens elements adhered to a synthetic resin encapsulated by a flexible transparent plastic that has a smooth, flat outer surface and an adhesive backing of pressure sensitive or heat sensitive type to LTA standard for Road Directional Signs; and engineering grade consisting of optical lens elements enclosed within a transparent resin that has a smooth, flat outer surface to LTA standard for Street Name Plate, Traffic Information Warning and Regulatory signs. The reflective sheeting shall be durable and remain sharp during its expected service life of not less than five years under local weather conditions. Submit a test report on the reflective sheeting from an SAC accredited laboratory and/or from the manufacturer and/or any other independent laboratory approved by the SO Rep together with the Tender and/or as and when required by the SO Rep. The test shall conform with ASTM D4956-90 for engineering and high density grade and the report shall carry technical information on the reflectivity factors' durability of reflective surface and adhesive, corrosion and abrasion resistance, colour tests etc. and any other technical information outlined in the LTA general guidelines and/or required by the SO Rep. The high intensity and engineering grade reflective sheeting shall be guaranteed by the supplier and/or the Contractor against any Defect such as discolouring, peeling, cracking, shrinking or any other apparent or latent Defect for a period of seven years for high intensity grade and three years for engineering grade commencing from the Date of Substantial Completion.
UPG07/S53.DOC(24) lkk(181206) DPD
Ugdg Spec TS 53-25/30 53.21 TRAFFIC AND ROAD DIRECTIONAL SIGNS (CONT'D) Generally, joints shall not be permitted for aluminium sheeting and reflective sheeting. Where the size of the sign requires joints, they shall be positioned horizontally at the dividing line between the legends or as directed by the SO Rep. Joints of reflective sheeting shall coincide with those of aluminium sheeting and joints shall be riveted. Use only round block script letters and numerals in all the traffic and road directional signs. The letter size and word spacing shall conform to the LTA's standard and/or Specifications stipulated in drawings and/or specified by the SO Rep. Support the signs either by 75 diameter GI pipe or 100mm x 100mm x 5mm SHS supports and embedded in Grade 25 concrete foundations, all in accordance with the LTA's standard and/or Specifications stipulated in the Drawings and/or specified by the SO Rep. Give the supports one coat of red lead primer undercoat and two finishing coats of enamel paint.
53.22
VEHICULAR IMPACT GUARDRAILS Erect the guardrail to the alignment specified in the Drawings or as directed by the SO Rep. Connect the adjacent rails by lap joints and the erection of the guardrail shall proceed in the direction of traffic flow to avoid vehicles striking rail ends. The nominal thickness of base metal for guardrails shall be 3.0mm formed into corrugated cross-section of width 300mm minimum and trough depth 75mm conforming to the requirement of AASHTO:M180-74. When simply supported over a span of 3.54 metres with its traffic face uppermost, the mid-point deflection of the rail shall not exceed 75mm under a concentrated load of 1000 kg at mid-span. The mechanical properties of the base metals for the rails shall conform to the following : Minimum yield point Minimum tensile strength Elongation 345N/mm 2 483N/mm 50mm, maximum 12%
2
All fabricated rails shall be hot-dip galvanised at shop in accordance with BS 729 and shaped in the workshop in standard length and assemble on Site by galvanised oval shoulder button headed bolts and nuts of 16mm nominal diameter. All guardrail posts and spacers, unless otherwise specified shall be Mild Steel Channels or Steel Hollow Sections.
53.23
ILLUMINATED SIGNBOARDS (i) Materials and Workmanship All materials used in the manufacture of the signboards shall be new and of the required quality, correct dimensions, sizes and gauges as approved by the SO Rep and free from any defect or damage on completion of the fabrication, assembly and delivery of the signboards. If any of the materials used is found to be defective or below the acceptable standard, the SO Rep may instruct the Contractor to cease all work and replace those materials with the proper and suitable materials in accordance with the specifications or conform to British Standards or equivalent PSB Standards. The Contractor shall submit details of components used for the proper fabrication and fixing of the various components and parts of the signboards to SO Rep for his approval before the Work is carried out.
UPG07/S53.DOC(25) lkk(181206) DPD
53.23
ILLUMINATED SIGNBOARDS (CONT'D) (ii) Electrical Installation The Contractor shall employ a licensed electrical worker of appropriate grade to carry out the Works. The licensed electrical worker shall mean a qualified competent person to perform electrical works under the Electrical Workers and Contractors Licensing Act 1974. The electrical installation shall comply with all regulations issued by the PowerGrid. All parts of the installation shall where applicable, be to the complete satisfaction of the SO Rep, PowerGrid, all Government Authorities and Fire Officers and shall be in strict accordance with all bye-laws, rules and regulations of such authorities. (iii) Bolts and Nuts All galvanised bolts and nuts for fixing signboards shall be provided with galvanised washers. (iv) Painting to Metal Surfaces Apply one coat approved lead and chromate free primer to surfaces of mild steel angles, hollow sections, brackets, welding nuts and bolts, etc. All primed metal surfaces shall be finished with two coats of approved paint. (v) Fluorescent Luminaires The signboard luminaires shall be fluorescent luminaires with : (a) 1200mm - 36W tubes and 600mm - 18W tubes All luminaires shall be pre-wired and completed with tubes, power factor corrected electronic ballasts and lampholders. The Contractor shall provide and wire the luminaires to a termination block within the signage box for termination purpose. Where applicable, the fluorescent luminaires shall comply with the following standards. (1) (2) (3) IEC 81 : 1984 IEC 400 : 1991 IEC 928 : 1995 Tubular fluorescent lamp for general lighting service Lampholders for tubular fluorescent lamps and starterholders Auxiliaries for lamps - A.C. supplied electronic ballasts for tubular fluorescent lamps. General and safety requirements A.C. supplied electronic ballasts for tubular fluorescent lamps. Performance requirements.
(4)
IEC 929 : 1994
(b)
Ballasts supplied shall be suitable for local use and separate ballasts shall be provided for each lamp. The ballasts shall have a protection feature to cut off the supply if it sense a faulty fluorescent tube and restart automatically when the faulty tube is replaced. Fluorescent tubes installed shall be `Philips' (Daylight), or other equivalent type approved by the SO Rep, of 26mm nominal diameter type with lamp wattage of 36W and 18W. All tubes shall have to pass batch tests conducted by SAC.
(c)
UPG07/S53.DOC(26) lkk(181206) DPD
53.23
ILLUMINATED SIGNBOARDS (CONT'D) (vi) Wiring and Electrical Accessories The wirings from the termination block in the illuminated signboards shall be 2 x 1.5mm PVC/PVC completed with 2.5mm2 PVC earth run in 20mm diameter Class 4 G.I. conduits including accessories and terminated at the weather proof termination box. The termination box shall be of steel construction not less than 2mm thickness and protected against corrosion by hop dip galvanising internally and externally. The termination box shall be provided with the following wiring and electrical accessories : (a) a 25mm Amp 440V cut-off with provision of looping in of two numbers of phase, neutral and earth conductors and looping out of one number of phase, neutral and earth conductors of 2 up to 25mm and a 5 Amp HRC fuse as shown in the Drawings. internal wiring of minimum size of 2 x 1.5mm2 PVC/PVC complete with 2.5mm2 PVC (green) earth connecting the cut-off to the luminaires. brass compression glands for armoured PVC insulated cables, complete with brass locknuts, earth tags, earthing tap and shroud.
2
(b)
(c)
(vii)
Bonding All exposed conductive parts shall be effectively bonded to the circuit protective conductor.
(viii)
Electrical Testing & Completion Certificate Upon completion of the Works, the Contractor's licensed electrical workers of technician grade shall test the installation to ensure that it complies with the PowerGrid requirement and CP5 1988. The Contractor shall furnish all data in the completion certificate and attach the single-line diagram to the SO Rep.
UPG07/S53.DOC(27) lkk(181206) DPD
ELECTRICAL TESTING & COMPLETION CERTIFICATE
To :
The Superintending Officer's Representative Housing & Development Board
Illuminated Signboards For
in the Name of :
I , a licensed electrical worker and authorised small installation tester hereby certify that the abovementioned has been inspected and tested by me in accordance with the Singapore Standard CP5 1988 : Code of Practice for Wiring of Electrical Equipment of Buildings, and that to the best of my knowledge and belief the abovementioned complies with the Singapore Standard CP5 1988 and other relevant Regulations. The aforesaid has been tested on . Description Lamp (18W) Lamp (36W) Ballasts Polarity Check Satisfactory Approved Method of Installation All Lamp Circuit Functional : : : Yes/No Yes/No Yes/No Brand/Model/Supplier Quantity
______________________________ Signature of Electrical Worker
_________________________ Date
Name of Electrical Worker
: ___________________________
PowerGrid License No. : ____________________________
Rubber Stamp of Licensed Electrical Contractor : ___________________________
PowerGrid License No. : 3/_________________________
UPG07/S53.DOC(28) lkk(181206) DPD
53.24
WORKS ON ROADS (a) Works On Roads With Speed Limit Below 70 Km Per Hour For any Works on roads with speed limit below 70 kph, the Contractor shall provide adequate signboards, blinker lights, cones, etc, in accordance with LTA Code of Practice For Temporary Traffic Control. The Contractor shall be deemed to have considered and allowed for all costs and expenses for the temporary precautions and measures in the Contract Sum. (b) Works On Roads With Speed Limit 70 Km Per Hour And Above For any Works on roads with speed limit 70 kph and above, the Contractor shall provide adequate signboards, blinker lights, cones, etc, in accordance with LTA Code of Practice For Temporary Traffic Control. The Contractor shall note that he is required to provide a collision attenuator or truck mounted attenuator (TMA) attached/fitted/mounted onto an appropriate shadow vehicle with the necessary equipment for traffic control and road safety in accordance with LTA Code of Practice For Temporary Traffic Control. The TMA provided shall comply with LTA specification and requirements. The Contractor shall be deemed to have considered and allowed for all costs and expenses for the temporary precautions and measures in the Contract Sum. (c) For road openings on public streets, the Contractor shall comply with LTA Code of Practice For Road - Opening Works. The Contractor shall be deemed to have considered and allowed for all costs and expenses for the temporary precautions, reinstatement works and measures in the Contract Sum.
53.25
PRECAST CONCRETE PERFORATED INTERLOCKING PAVING SLABS Where precast concrete perforated interlocking paving slabs are included in the Works, the Contractor shall comply with the requirements for sand bedding preparation and laying as specified in clause 53.17 'Interlocking Concrete Paving Blocks" including all subclauses under it. The colour of the interlocking paving slabs shall be decided by the SO Rep. For sampling and testing of the interlocking paving slabs, the Contractor shall comply with the following: (a) Sampling and Testing (i) Transverse Strength Test The transverse strength for each paving slab shall not be less than 19kN. Samples of paving slabs at a rate of 3 paving slabs for every 1,000 paving slabs delivered to the Site, shall be selected for transverse strength test to be performed in the manner as described in BS 7263 and in an SAC accredited laboratory. If the overall quantity of paving slabs in the Works is less than 1,000 pieces, a minimum of 3 numbers of paving slabs shall be chosen for the transverse strength test. (ii) Water Absorption Test The maximum average rate of water absorption test (%) calculated on the dry weight of 3 test pieces per paving slab shall not exceed 3% at 30 minutes. 5 numbers of paving slabs for every 1,000 paving slabs delivered to the Site, shall be selected for water absorption test to be performed in the manner as described in BS 7263 and in a SAC accredited laboratory. If the overall quantity of paving slabs in the Works is less than 1,000 pieces, a minimum of 5 numbers of paving slabs shall be chosen for the water absorption test. (i) Surface Layer Thickness in Composite Paving Slabs Coloured concrete paving slabs formed by the addition of pigments may either be homogenous or non-homogenous. Non-homogenous coloured paving slabs are considered as composite paving slabs. The coloured surface layer of each composite paving slab shall be formed as an integral part of the paving slab and shall not be less than 12mm thick. For every 550m of interlocking composite paving slabs laid on the Site, 5 numbers of paving slabs shall be checked for surface layer thickness. If the overall quantity of paving slabs in the Works is less than 550 m2, a minimum of 5 numbers of paving slabs shall be chosen for checking on surface layer thickness. The checking shall be conducted in a SAC accredited laboratory.
2
UPG07/S53.DOC(29) lkk(181206) DPD
53.25
PRECAST CONCRETE PERFORATED INTERLOCKING PAVING SLABS (Contd) (b) Sampling and Testing (Contd) Each paving slab shall be cut neatly at mid-span of its length. Cutting the paving slab shall only be carried out in the accredited laboratory. The average surface layer thickness of each composite paving slab shall be derived from the measured thickness at the left, middle and right edges of the surface layer thickness on the cross-sectional face of the cut-off paving slab. The thickness shall be measured to the nearest 0.1mm accuracy. The Contractor shall ensure that the cut samples are collected back from the SAC accredited laboratory and returned to HDB for verification. These cut samples shall be kept at the site office and disposed off only at the sole discretion of the SO Rep. The SO Rep shall exercise his rights under Clause 1.10 Nuisance and Irregularities of Standard Specifications to impose charges against the Contractor for each sample that fails to comply with the above test requirements. Each consignment of slabs represented by the sample testing may be accepted only at the sole discretion of the SO Rep after he has considered the degree of failure and other related circumstances. Any consignment rejected by the SO Rep shall be removed from the site immediately.
SECTION 54/...
UPG07/S53.DOC(30) lkk(181206) DPD
Ugdg Spec TS 54-1/9
SECTION 54
54.0
CONSTRUCTION AND WORKMANSHIP FOR SEWERS
54.1
ADDITIONAL WATER RECLAMATION (NETWORK) DEPARTMENT, PUB'S REQUIREMENTS FOR SEWERS AND MANHOLES Use approved flexible joints thickwall concrete pipes and vitrified clay pipes with flexible joints in accordance with the current Standard Specification and tests of the Water Reclamation (Network) Department, PUB. Comply with the clauses laid down in the current "Standard Specification for Sewerage Works" published by Water Reclamation (Network) Department, PUB. The Standard Specification may be obtained from the Water Reclamation (Network) Department, PUB.
54.2
EXCAVATION AND REFILLING Carry out the excavation in accordance these Specifications. Carefully excavate and install timbering in accordance with the Drawings in such a manner that the toes of the runners are always at least 150mm below the bottom of the excavation. Where necessary in order to keep the road open to vehicular and foot traffic, cart away excavated material from the trench as may be necessary so to keep the road open. Should any of the sewer trenches be excavated to a greater depth than is necessary for the proper execution of the Works, fill in the same at his own expense with Grade 15 concrete or other approved hard material.
54.3
TIMBERING OF EXCAVATION Brace all excavation adequately and securely with suitable timber using the methods indicated on the Drawings where necessary or otherwise approved by the SO Rep. Notwithstanding the approval given, the SO Rep shall, where necessary, instruct the Contractor to improve, alter or strengthen the timbering from time to time. Is responsible for any injury to the work and any consequential damages caused and any permission given by the SO Rep shall not relieve the Contractor from this responsibility. In the particular case of timber to be left in trenches the class of timbering shall be approved by the SO Rep and this timber shall be cut off only after backfilling is completed, as indicated on the Drawings. Take every precaution against slips and falls or other disturbances to both the temporary and permanent work in the excavations. If however any slips, falls etc should occur, at once make good the same including all surface restoration all at his own cost and to the satisfaction of the SO Rep. If any slip or fall disturbs or weakens any foundation or support of the works or to existing structures mains etc or cause a space to be left outside the new work itself or causes excessive surface cracks to appear in the ground surrounding the excavation, execute such additional works or take such additional precautions as the SO Rep may require in consequence thereof and fill up the space so caused with concrete if necessary, as the SO Rep may direct, all at the Contractor's own cost. Fully responsible for the reinstatement or repair cost to the disturbances or damages caused.
Ugdg Spec TS 54-2/9
54.4
PILING OF FOUNDATIONS Where bakau piles are indicated on Drawings, they shall be of approved lengths and driven straight and in approved positions and to the full length of the piles or to the required set as determined by the SO Rep and any pile not correctly driven shall be duplicated. Where other types of piles are indicated on the Drawings, they shall be installed in the approved manner. Where horizontal bakau rollers are specified they shall be laid horizontally in the bottom of the excavations to correct gradients in approved positions.
54.5
SEWER FOUNDATION Lay pipes and concrete in every instance on an even and solid foundation. The pipes shall be laid evenly on the barrel at the required level. Allow no hollows, voids or foreign material under the pipe. Complete the bedding to the correct profile as shown in the Drawings. Provide all sections of the sewer with either hard filling, concrete base with/without piling as specified. However, should the SO Rep decide to change the type of foundation after the close of the Tender, such change shall constitute a variation to the contract and shall be valued in accordance with the contract provisions.
54.6
SEALING COAT Where indicated on Drawings and immediately after a sufficient length of trench has been bakau piled and/or passed by the SO Rep, lay a seal coat of Grade 15 concrete, 75mm thick across the complete width of the trench, including filling with concrete the temporary drainage channel. Finish the seal coat neatly such that the bakau pile heads, if any, are left projecting 25mm.
54.7
CONCRETE BED FOUNDATION The concrete bed formation for the sewer pipes shall consist of a concrete foundation using Grade 30 concrete as shown on the Drawings according to the different Type Sections.
54.8
GRANOLITHIC CONCRETE Granolithic concrete shall consist of one part of Portland Cement, two parts of fine aggregate and three parts of 10mm granite chippings free from dust. In all other respects it shall comply with the remainder of the Specifications for concrete.
54.9
PIPE LAYING Lay pipes for sewers true to line and grade as shown on Drawings and all in accordance with Clause 52.65 "Pipe Laying".
54.10
CLEARING PIPELINES OF OBSTRUCTION After testing the pipelines as specified and at a time to be directed by the SO Rep, inspect the interior of the pipelines to ascertain that the pipes are entirely clear of obstruction and that the invert is smooth. The outside diameter of the ends of the plug shall not be smaller by 25mm less than the diameter of the pipe through which it is to be passed and its length shall not be less than its diameter. The SO Rep shall not apply this test until he is satisfied that the lengths concerned are complete and ready for operation.
Ugdg Spec TS 54-3/9
54.10
CLEARING PIPELINES OF OBSTRUCTION (CONT'D) Remove any obstruction in the pipelines and make good any unevenness of the invert. If, as a result of the removal of any obstruction, the SO Rep considers that any damage may have been caused to the pipelines, he shall be entitled to order the length to be re-tested at the expense of the Contractor. Should such re-test prove unsatisfactory, amend the work and carry out such further tests as required at the Contractor's own cost and expense.
54.11
TESTING GRAVITY SEWERS (i) General (a) All gravity sewers of 600 mm or less in diameter shall be tested by filling with water to an internal pressure of 1.5 metre head of water above the invert of the pipe at the highest end of the pipeline. Testing shall be carried out for the whole length of the pipeline between manholes and before the pipeline is concreted and covered. The Contractor shall bear the cost and expense for the testing of gravity sewers to comply with the requirements of ENV.
(b)
(ii)
Testing Procedure (a) Ensure that the following equipment is available:(i) (ii) (iii) A plug of appropriate size to be fitted at the downstream end of the pipeline. A measuring cylinder to measure the actual loss of water. A 90 degree elbow bend and vertical pipe of equal diameter to be fitted at the highest end of the pipeline. For minor sewers, the elbow bend and the vertical pipe shall be of the same diameter of the sewer. For main sewers, the minimum diameter of the elbow bend and vertical pipe shall be 225mm although the same diameter as that of the pipeline is always preferable.
(b) (c)
Ensure that the pipeline is properly anchored. Fit the plug at the downstream end of the pipeline and the elbow bend with the vertical pipe at the highest end of the pipeline. Fill the pipeline with water through the vertical pipe up to its brim making sure that there are no pocket of trapped air. Ensure that the pipeline is completely filled with water by allowing the water to drain away at the downstream end and topping up with water again to the brim of the vertical pipe.
(d)
(e)
Ugdg Spec TS 54-4/9
54.11
TESTING GRAVITY SEWERS (Contd)
(ii)
Testing Procedure (Contd) (f) Allow the pipeline to stand for a minimum of 2 hours for absorption and topping up as necessary before carrying out the water test. Test the pipeline at the required head of 1.5 metres head of water. Top up the vertical pipe using the measuring cylinder at intervals of 5 minutes and noting the quantity of water needed to maintain the test head over a period of 30 min. On completion of the test, remove the plug at the end of the pipeline and observe the water level at the vertical pipe to ensure that the level drops freely and the water in the pipeline drains away.
(g)
(h)
(iii)
Acceptance Criteria (a) The pipeline shall not be accepted until they have withstood the required pressure head of 1.5 metres head of water for 30 minutes without loss of water in excess of 1.5 litres for 100m length of pipe for each 300mm in diameter. Formula to calculate permissible loss of water for 30 minutes is as follows: Permissible Loss (ml) = Diameter of Pipe (mm) X Effective Length 0f Pipeline (m) X 1500ml 300 (mm) 100 (m) Gravity sewer of 600 mm and above in diameter need not be hydraulically tested. They shall be inspected by Closed-Circuit Television (CCTV) inspection or for man-entry sewers, manual inspection shall be carried out. The Contractor shall make appropriate arrangement to install the CCTV and keep proper record of the sewer inspection. The Contractor shall bear the cost and expense for the CCTV and man-entry inspection in accordance with the requirements of ENV. Do not cover the pipes until they have been inspected and passed.
(b)
54.12
BUILT-IN PIPES At all points where pipes are built into concrete walls or floors, take great care that the joint is watertight. If found to be otherwise, cut away and replace the concrete to make a watertight joint to the satisfaction of the SO Rep.
54.13
JUNCTIONS AND CONNECTIONS The junctions where provided shall be securely stoppered, such temporary stopper being secured with cement mortar.
54.14
CONCRETE AROUND PIPES After each length of pipes has been tested and passed, bed haunch and surround the pipes with Grade 30 concrete as shown in Drawings. At approximately every four pipes or 6m whichever is the lesser interval, form a joint in concrete bed or surround by vertically shuttering the bed or surround with 25mm thick fibre board, timber or other approved material. Leave the shuttering material in to form a permanent joint. Where the concrete bed is required to be reinforced, stop all reinforcement on either side of the joint. The whole of the concrete shall be thoroughly set before any work of refilling is commenced.
Ugdg Spec TS 54-5/9
54.15
TUMBLING BAYS AND BACKDROPS Where required, construct tumbling bays and backdrops in accordance with the details of the approved drawings. Use special spigot and socket junctions in the junction between the two lines of pipes. For backdrops and tumbling bays above 300mm diameter the junction shall be cast iron to approved dimensions and shape. Lay the tumbling bays or backdrop pipes on a concrete foundation and completely encase in 150mm Grade 30 concrete surround as shown on Drawings. Where indicated on Drawings, build tumbling bay pipes in the walls of the manhole by cutting a neat hole sufficient for building in the pipes and finish flush with the inside of the manhole and neatly splay on the outside to form a watertight joint.
54.16
BRICK MANHOLES Where detailed, build brick manholes in positions shown and in accordance with details on Drawings. Construct the brickwall in accordance with Clauses 52.53 "Bricks" and 52.54 "Brickwork Generally". Set the reinforced concrete slabs covering the chambers of the manhole and joint in cement mortar as specified to form watertight joints. Form channels and benching to the concrete floors of the manholes as detailed in Grade 30 concrete as specified and render in cement mortar 20mm thick. Build ends of pipes into the walls of the manholes and finish off in cement mortar. Set manhole covers and frames in cement mortar and covers left flush with the road surface or the finished ground level. Flush point internal and external joints of brick manholes in 1:3 cement mortar and finish off to a smooth surface.
54.17
PRECAST CONCRETE MANHOLES Where indicated, build precast reinforced concrete ring manholes shall be built in the positions shown on Drawings. Submit details of the supply of this item to the SO Rep for approval. Set the rings forming the chambers of the manholes on a reinforced concrete foundation comprising a base of Grade 30 concrete and a built-up section, sufficient to completely build in the ends of the pipes. Construct the base, benching and pointing of all precast and in-situ concrete manholes in Ordinary Portland Cement, unless otherwise directed. Form the benching at the soffit level of the out-going sewer pipe rising by 75mm to the manhole walls. Form curves and junction benchings to a radius in the centre line of the channel not less than one and a half times the diameter of this pipe. Set the reinforced concrete slabs covering the chambers and the shafts of the manholes in 1:3 cement mortar to form watertight joints. Form channels and benching to the concrete floors of concrete manholes in Ordinary Portland Cement concrete. Set manhole covers and frames as specified in Clause 52.75 "Manhole Cover and Frame" in cement mortar and surrounded with Grade 30 concrete and covers left flush with the road surface or the finished ground level.
54.18
CLEANING OF SEWERS Thoroughly clean all sewers to the requirements of Water Reclamation (Network) Department, PUB before final inspection prior to acceptance. Throughout the whole duration of the Contract, when required by the SO Rep, provide without charge one number aluminium ladder, two numbers powerful lamp of at least six cells, two pairs of keys for lifting manhole covers and one number spirit level, two numbers mirrors all to the approval of the SO Rep.
Ugdg Spec TS 54-6/9
54.19
INSPECTION AND APPROVAL OF SEWERS BY WATER RECLAMATION (NETWORK) DEPARTMENT, PUB Before their acceptance, thoroughly clean the sewers and made ready for inspections by the SO Rep and by the Water Reclamation (Network) Department, PUB's representative. No sewer or part of a sewer may be put into use until a final inspection has been carried out and the sewers and manholes found to be satisfactory. Provide and install all the necessary plugs to the manholes before the sewers are put into use and shall be responsible for their removal when the lines are to be in use all to the requirements and satisfaction of the SO Rep and Water Reclamation (Network) Department, PUB. The Works shall only be certified satisfactory when both the SO Rep and the Water Reclamation (Network) Department, PUB have approved all the sewers and manholes.
54.20
CONNECTION OF HOUSE DRAIN TO SEWER MANHOLE No final connections may be made from the house drain/s to a sewer manhole until the sewer has been passed as satisfactory, after a final inspection has been carried out.
54.21
CONNECTION OF SEWERS TO EXISTING MANHOLE All sewer connection to existing manholes shall be included in the Contract, unless otherwise indicated on Drawings.
54.22
PIPE JACKING (a) General (i) (ii) Where specified in the Drawings, sections of the sewer shall be laid by pipe jacking. Submit details of plant and equipment, materials and the method of construction to perform and complete the work for approval by the SO Rep before commencing these operations. Approval by the SO Rep shall not relieve the Contractor of his sole responsibility for the efficacy, reliability, soundness of the method employed in completing the work in a satisfactory manner. The general soil profile along the route of the sewer shall be given in the borelogs, for the Contractor's information only. The Employer accepts no responsibility for the accuracy, reliability or completeness of this information. Satisfy himself as to the soil conditions along the pipe jacking route and if he judges it to be necessary, carry out additional soil investigations at his own cost. In general, the soil shall usually be of an unstable nature and the ground water table shall usually be high. Maintain stable soil conditions at the jacking face to prevent loss of ground above the jacking operation and movement of the surrounding earth. The methods of maintaining face stability and preventing ground movement and subsidence shall be by means of compressed air or other plenum methods where fluid slurry or earth pressure is applied-to the tunnel face. Alternatively, stabilise unstable ground ahead of the jacking face by the injection of suitable chemicals. Methods which require dewatering of the ground and methods which may lead to significant ground loss shall not be accepted. Submit soil stabilization method to the SO Rep for approval. Monitor movement or settlement of structures, utilities and pavement during the jacking operation and report to the SO Rep. If movement or settlement occurs which, in the opinion of the SO Rep may cause damage, take immediate action to prevent further movement, settlement or damage. Repair any damage and restore structures or pavements to the satisfaction of the SO Rep. Inspect the location and familiarise himself with the conditions under which the work shall be performed and with all necessary details as to the orderly execution of the work. The omission of any details shall not relieve the Contractor of full responsibility for the satisfactory installation of the work in its entirety. No monetary or other claims made by the Contractor on the grounds of want of knowledge shall be entertained by the Employer.
(iii)
(iv)
(v)
(vi)
Ugdg Spec TS 54-7/9
54.22
PIPE JACKING (CONT'D) (b) Materials (i) The pipes for jacking operation shall be precast reinforced concrete pipes. The pipes shall be manufactured by a centrifugal or other equivalent process to be approved by the SO Rep. Design, manufacture and factory testing of the pipes and specials shall be to SS 183 or BS 5911 or AS 1342 or other acceptable standard. All pipes shall be manufactured with two sets of grout holes. Each set shall consist of three grout holes spaced at 120 C on centres circumferentially located at the quarter points from either end of the pipe. The precast reinforced concrete pipes shall be sufficiently reinforced with steel to withstand all stresses induced by handling, jacking, earth and water pressures and all working loads at the depths at which they are to be used without cracking, spalling or distortion. The pipes shall be of at least strength Class `H'. A load factor of not larger than 1.5 shall be used in the calculations to determine the strength of the pipes required. The strength of the pipes shall be tested by the three edge bearing test. When subjected to the design load in such a test, the maximum crack width developed on the pipe shall not exceed 0.25mm. Bear the cost of all such tests. Submit full details of his proposals for the pipes, giving detailed drawings showing sizes, reinforcement and type of joints, calculations, together with the name of the proposed manufacturer, the place of manufacture, and the manufacturing processes to the SO Rep for approval. All workmanship and materials used in the manufacture shall be subject to the approval of the SO Rep who shall from time to time be permitted to inspect materials at source and the manufacturing processes in the factory. The pipes shall be sufficiently matured before they are used in the construction of the Works. Handle the pipes with extreme care to prevent the edges of the pipes from chipping. Repaired pipes shall not be allowed for use in the Contract. The SO Rep may reject any pipes he considers not suitable for the Works and these rejected pipes shall be removed from Site immediately. After factory testing and before despatch, every pipe and special shall be marked in accordance with the Standard used. In addition, each pipe shall be marked with a number corresponding with the order of manufacture. Test certificates from the manufacturers or other relevant authority shall be submitted to the SO Rep. Where steel shield is utilized during the jacking operation, bolt this steel shield to or by other approved means jointed to the first piece of pipe which is being jacked. Use a jacking ring. The jacking ring may be either of steel or concrete construction and shall be used at all times when pipe is being jacked. This jacking ring shall allow the jacking pressure to be distributed evenly around the wall of the pipe. Use a jacking frame during all operations. The jacking frame shall be designed to distribute the stresses from the jacks evenly to the jacking ring.
(ii)
(iii)
(iv)
(v)
(vi)
(vii)
(viii)
(c)
Jacking Operations (i) Is fully responsible for the materials, equipment and facilities required in conjunction with jacking the reinforced concrete pipe. Before starting work, submit to the SO Rep for approval, a detailed schedule of the entire jacking operation. Approval of such schedule shall not relieve the Contractor of his responsibility to provide a fully satisfactory installation. Include with his submission evidence that he has successfully completed a jacking installation using procedures similar to those proposed. Where the Contractor proposes to use compressed air, his proposal shall comply with the requirements of the Specifications for "Working in Compressed Air" and "Work in Compressed Air". Where chemical stabilization of soil is used, pressure inject a chemical grout into the soil over and ahead of the pipe jacking to stabilise the soil. The chemical grout used shall have a demonstrated history of success for stabilizing soils similar to that through which the pipe is to be jacked.
(ii)
(iii)
(iv)
Ugdg Spec TS 54-8/9
54.22
PIPE JACKING (CONT'D) (c) Jacking Operations (Cont'd) (v) Where a mechanical shield is used, provide proof that the particular model of shield has been used successfully in soils similar to that on Site. The crew for the operation of the shield shall be specialists, with experience in the use of that particular type of machine. After the jacking operation has begun, work continuously (24 hours per day) until the complete length of jacked pipe is installed. Jack the pipes into place true to line and level. The maximum tolerance allowable in the displacement of the centreline of the laid pipe from the design centreline is 50mm in the horizontal plane and 25mm in the vertical plane but there shall be no backfall at any point. Any pipe which is not laid in its correct position shall be removed and relaid or adjusted to obtain its correct position. There shall be provision to prevent the relative movement between pipes at the joints by the use of steel gaiters or other approved methods during jacking operation. Provide a packing piece of compressible material at each joint and shall be securely held before the pipes are lowered into the thrust pit. Submit details of proposals to the SO Rep for approval. Furnish and install and remove to the extent required, thrust blocks or whatever provisions that may be required for backing up the jacks employed in driving the pipe forward. Equip the jacking pit with steel rails or beams embedded in concrete. Use these rails or beams for placement and alignment of each pipe during the jacking operation. Is responsible for the design and construction of the jacking and receiving pits, thrusting wall, installation of jacking equipment, sheeting, bracing, etc, and for the efficient execution of the jacking operation. Submit full details of his proposals, including plant, shield machine, equipment, operating procedures, jacking pit and intermediate jacking stations etc, to the SO Rep and shall be fully satisfactory to him before construction. However, review of the plans shall not relieve the Contractor from his responsibility to provide a safe and satisfactory jacking pit. Monitor closely the progress of the jacking operation. Daily site records of thrusting pressures and the line and level measurements shall be properly maintained and shall be made available to the SO Rep at all times. Ensure that the completed tunnels are watertight. If leakage occurs before completion or during the Defects Liability Period, carry out any remedial work that may be necessary to make the Works watertight all at his own expense.
(vi)
(vii)
(viii)
(ix)
(x)
(xi)
(xii)
(d)
Cement Grouting (i) Prevent the occurrence of voids outside the pipe and if they occur he shall fill them with cement grout. Immediately following the jacking operation pressure grout the jacked section to fill all voids existing outside of the pipe. Grouting shall be from the interior of the pipe through grouting holes as specified. Provide systems of standard pipe, fittings, hose, and special grouting outlets embedded in the pipe walls. Ensure that all parts of the system are maintained free from dirt. Carefully force grout composed of cement, sand and other approved compound and water under pressure into the grouting connections at the invert and proceed until grout begins to flow from upper connections. Make connections to these holes and the operation continue to completion. Apparatus for mixing and placing grout shall be of a type approved by the SO Rep and shall be capable of mixing effectively and stirring the grout and then forcing it into the grout connections in a continuous uninterrupted flow.
(ii)
(iii)
(iv)
Ugdg Spec TS 54-9/9
54.22
PIPE JACKING (CONT'D) (d) Cement Grouting (Cont'd) (v) After grouting is completed, maintain pressure by means of stop cocks, or other suitable devices until the grout has set sufficiently. After the grout is set, completely fill grout holes with dense concrete and finish neatly without evidence of voids or projections. For pipes with PVC or HDPE linings, carry out grouting and ensure that the pipeline is watertight before proceeding with the jointing of the linings of the pipes and the patching of the lining over the filled grout holes
(vi)
SECTION 55/...
Ugdg Spec TS 55-1/6
SECTION 55
55.0
CONSTRUCTION AND WORKMANSHIP FOR EARTHWORKS
55.1
DEFINITION AND CLASSIFICATION OF EARTHWORKS MATERIALS The following definitions of earthworks materials shall apply to this Specifications : (a) (b) `Top soil' shall mean the top layer of soil that can support vegetation. Àpproved material' shall comprise those that are acceptable in accordance with the Contract for use in the Works and those which are capable of being compacted in the manner specified in Clause 55.9 "Compaction" to form a stable fill. Ùnsuitable material' shall mean those other than the approved material and shall include : (i) (ii) (iii) (iv) (v) material from swamps; peat, logs, stumps and perishable material; material susceptible to spontaneous combustion; soil of liquid limit exceeding 70 and/or plasticity index exceeding 35; material having an in-situ moisture content greater than the maximum permitted for such materials in the contract, unless otherwise permitted by the SO Rep.
(c)
(d)
`Rock' shall mean hard material whose geological nature is to be regarded as such and individual boulders exceeding 0.20 cu m in size or other masses of hard material which necessitate the use of blasting or approved pneumatic tools for their removal. "Special filling material" shall mean "approved material" but shall all pass a 75m BS sieve. The fraction passing a 75m BS sieve shall have the following characteristics : (i) (ii) (iii) (iv) Liquid limit not exceeding 35. Plasticity index not exceeding 12. Coefficient of uniformity shall be greater than 10. The percentage passing 75m BS sieve shall be less than 20% by weight.
(e)
(f)
`Cohesive soil' shall include clays with up to 20% of gravel and having a moisture content not less than the value of the plastic limit minus 4. `Well-graded granular and dry cohesive soils' shall include clays containing more than 20% of gravel and/or having a moisture content less than the value of plastic limit minus 4, well-graded sands and gravels with a uniformity coefficient exceeding 10. Ùniformly-graded material' shall include sands and gravels with a uniformity coefficient of 10 or less, and all silts. Any soil containing 80% or more of material in the particle size range 60 m - 2 m shall be regarded as silt for this purpose.
(g)
(h)
55.2
EARTHWORKS GENERALLY Carry out all earthworks in such a manner as to prevent erosion or slips, limit working faces to safe slopes and height, and ensure that all surfaces have at all times sufficient gradients to enable them to shed water without causing erosion. At the end of each day, all surfaces shall be left with no area that can retain water. If necessary, provide and maintain temporary and approved surface or subsurface drainage system to ensure minimum delay in work progress due to wet weather. Alternatively, adequate means, such as covering all surfaces with polythene paper, shall be provided and maintained. Provide and maintain all necessary temporary access roads and shall divert and reinstate permanent drainage system. Submit the proposed alignments and levels of temporary access roads to the SO Rep for approval prior to their construction. Provide all temporary roads with drainage ditches over full length.
Ugdg Spec TS 55-2/6
55.3
CUTTINGS INCLUDING SLOPES Unless otherwise specified or shown on Drawings, neatly round the top edges of cuttings to the dimensions shown on the Drawing or as directed by the SO Rep. Unless otherwise specified or shown on Drawings, slopes to cuttings shall conform with the following : Table 55.1 Material Sand Loose gravel or clay Loam, shale or similar soft rock Rock with clay seams Jointed Laminated or soft rock Massive rock Allowable slopes in cutting Slope (Horizontal Distance to Vertical Rise) Two to one to Five to one Two to one One to one Three quarter to one One half to one One quarter to one 2:1 5:1 2:1 1:1 :1 :1 :1
Where the location of unsuitable soil is shown on the Drawings or specified to be removed, no payment shall be claimed against such removal by the Contractor. Where the SO Rep re-determines the slopes, the Contractor shall not be entitled to any claim whatsoever except where increased or decreased quantities of excavation become necessary because of re-determined excavation slopes, the difference between such measurements and the measurements herein given shall be dealt with as a variation to the Contract. In all cuttings, whether in earth or rock, undulations in the general plane of the slope shall not be permitted. The SO Rep may direct that any overhanging, loose or unstable material, whether outside or behind the specified slope, be removed. Additional cost so involved shall be paid as a variation to the Contract. Arrange the excavation such that the working areas are adequately drained throughout the period of construction.
55.4
FOUNDATION FOR FILLS Embankment construction shall include the preparation and compaction to the degree as specified under Clause 55.9 "Compaction" of the areas upon which embankments are to be placed, the placing and compacting of approved material within areas from which unsuitable material has been removed as specified hereunder, and the placing and compacting of embankment material in holes, pits, and other depressions within the foundation area. Unless otherwise specified, clear the natural ground over which filling is to be placed of all loose boulders, grass, topsoil, bushes, trees, roots and other vegetation. If the SO Rep considers that any underlying material is unstable or unsuitable, he may direct it to be removed and replaced with approved material, the cost of which shall be valued in accordance with the contract provisions and be borne by the Employer. Remove any overhanging rock ledges or caves within the foundation area before the placing of fill commences. Where ground water or extensive seepage are encountered in the foundation area, and no special drainage arrangements are shown on Drawings, the SO Rep may direct that suitable pipe drains be installed in the fill area, or that deep open drains be excavated clear of the fill. All these drainage works shall form part of the Contract and the Contractor shall not be entitled to any extra claim. The construction of any section of a fill shall not be commenced until the foundation for that section has been approved by the SO Rep.
Ugdg Spec TS 55-3/6
55.5
FILLING GENERALLY Carry out filling in layers compatible with the compaction plants used. End tipping of fill shall be allowed provided the end tipped material is compacted to the requirements as specified in Clause 55.9 "Compaction". When the state of the weather is such that, in the opinion of the SO Rep, it would adversely affect the placing of specially compacted fill, all such work shall be stopped. Remove and replace all filling material, whether placed and/or compacted or awaiting placing and/or compaction which, in the opinion of the SO Rep does not comply with the Specifications or has been damaged by weather or in any other way.
55.6
HILLSIDE FILLS Where an embankment is to be constructed on a hillside, or where the natural surface falls away at the toe of the fill at a slope steeper than one (1) vertical to four (4) horizontal, cut a horizontal bench to support the toe. The minimum width of the bench shall be equal to one third of the vertical height of the fill (measured from the toe) provided that the width shall not be more than 3.70m nor less than 600mm. Material excavated in benching may be used in fills, if it has satisfied the requirement of approved material under Clause 55.1 "Definition And Classification of Earthworks Materials". Where embankments are to be constructed on hillsides or on the slopes of existing embankments, or where embankments are to be constructed in part-widths, cut the existing slope, if it exceeds one (1) vertical to four (4) horizontal, in the form of horizontal terrace over the full area to be covered by new fill. As each layer of new embankment is constructed, step the existing slope in successive terraces, each at least 600mm in width, progressively cut the terraces as the embankment is placed. Recompact materials thus excavated as part of the new embankment material. No payment shall be made for material removed in the construction of benches and terraces, which shall be regarded as part of the earthworks. If, in preparing hillsides, the Contractor removes material outside the limits specified in this Clause in order to facilitate his operations, no payment shall be made for the removal of this extra material, and he shall be required to make good at his own expense any scars created by him.
55.7
PLACING FILLS IN EMBANKMENTS Construct embankments in even horizontal layers over the full width, laid in thickness appropriate to the compaction plant used and compacted to satisfy the requirement specified in Clause 55.9 "Compaction". At all times maintain the embankments with a sufficient camber and a surface sufficiently even to enable surface water to drain readily from them. If the material deposited as fill subsequently reaches a condition such that it cannot be compacted in accordance with the requirements of the Contract, the Contractor shall at his own expense either : (a) make good by removing the material off the embankment either to tip or elsewhere until it is in a suitable physical condition for re-use, and replacing it with suitable materials; or make good the material by mechanical or chemical means to improve its stability; or cease work on the material until its physical condition is again such that it can be compacted as described in the Contract.
(b) (c)
Rock material shall be broken down to dimensions not exceeding the compacted thickness of the layer in which it is placed. Rock material shall be well distributed in layers extending the full width of the fill, and sufficient fine material shall be placed around the larger material as it is deposited to fill the voids and produce a dense compact fill. Where insufficient fine material is present to fill the voids, additional fine material shall be obtained from other sources at the Contractor's own expense. Unless otherwise specified or shown on Drawings, the top edges of embankments shall be neatly rounded to the dimensions shown on the Drawings or as directed by the SO Rep. Such work shall be deemed to have been included in the Contractor's rate for earthworks.
Ugdg Spec TS 55-4/6
55.8
FILL SLOPES The slope faces of embankments or other fill areas shall be formed by overfilling, cutting back and trimming neatly to the desired profile. Unless otherwise specified or shown on Drawings, the slopes shall conform to the following : Table 55.2 Material Sand loam, soft clay and loose sand Ordinary earth Rock Rock filling - hand pitched Allowable slopes in cutting Slope (Horizontal Distance to Vertical Rise) Between two to one and five to one Two to one One and one quarter to one One to one 2:1 5:1 2:1 1 : 1 1:1
Where the SO Rep re-determines a slope, the Contractor shall not be entitled to claim whatsoever except where increased or decreased quantities of excavation or borrow become necessary because of redetermined fill slopes. The difference between such measurements and measurements herein given shall be dealt with as a variation of the Contract. When completed, the average planes of the slopes of embankments shall conform to those determined by the SO Rep or as specified in the Drawings.
55.9
COMPACTION All materials shall be compacted in layers as soon as practicable after deposition. The thickness of each layer shall be compatible with the compaction plant used and shall be agreed by the SO Rep. Table 55.3 may be used as a guide for the Contractor in establishing compaction arrangement. However site trials shall be carried out to ensure that the density requirement is achieved. The Contractor shall allow in his Tender for all costs incurred in executing compaction by whichever method he has adopted and any subsequent alteration as directed. The various types of compaction plants, and their compacting capabilities, are shown in Table 55.3. The definitions and requirements associated with the Table are given below : (a) "Number of passes" shall mean the number of times that each point on the surface of the layer being compacted has been traversed by the compaction plant (or struck in the case of power rammers or dropping weight compactors). The effective width of a pneumatic-tyred roller, for this purpose, is the sum of the widths of the individual wheeltracks together with the sum of the spacing between the wheeltracks provided that each spacing does not exceed 225mm. When the spacing exceeds 225mm the effective width shall be taken as the sum of the width of the individual wheeltracks only. The force per 100mm width shall mean the total weight on the roll divided by the total roll width. Where a smooth-wheeled roller has more than one axle the machine shall be assessed on the basis of the axle giving the highest value of force per 100mm width. Wheel load shall mean the total weight of the roller divided by number of wheels.
(b)
(c)
Ugdg Spec TS 55-5/6
55.9
COMPACTION (CONT'D) (d) Vibratory rollers shall mean self propelled or towed rollers having means of applying mechanical vibration to one or more rolls. (i) The requirements for vibratory rollers shall be based on the use of the lowest gear on a self propelled machine and a towing speed of 1800-2400 m/hour for a towed machine. If higher gears or speeds are used an increased number of passes shall be provided in proportion to the increase in speed of travel. Vibratory rollers operating without their vibration mechanism in use shall be classified as smooth-wheeled rollers. Vibratory rollers shall only be operated with their vibration mechanism operating at the frequency of vibration recommended by the manufacturers. All such rollers shall be equipped with a device automatically indicating the frequency at which the mechanism is operating.
(ii)
(iii)
(e)
Vibrating-plate compactors or machines having a base-plate to which is attached a source of vibration consisting of one or two eccentrically-weighted shafts. (i) The static pressure under the plate of a vibrating-plate compactor shall be calculated by dividing the total weight of the machine in working order by the area in contact with compacted material. Vibrating-plate compactors shall be operated at the frequency of vibration recommended by the manufacturer. They shall normally be operated at travelling speeds of less than 900m/hour but, if higher speeds are necessary, the number of passes shall be increased in proportion to the increase in speed of travel.
(ii)
(f)
Vibro-tampers shall mean machines in which an engine-driven reciprocating mechanism acts on a Spring system, through which osciliations are set up in a base-plate. Power rammers shall mean machines which are actuated by explosions in an internal combustion cylinder, each explosion being controlled manually by the operator.
(g)
The depth of compacted layer shall mean the height by which an embankment is raised by each successive compacted layer. Where combinations of different types of categories of plant are used, the compaction requirements shall be as follows : (a) (b) the depth of layer shall be that for the type of plant requiring the least depth of layer; and the number of passes shall be that for the type of plant requiring the greatest number of passes.
However, where the Contractor uses a lighter type of plant to provide some preliminary compaction only to assist the use of heavier plant, this shall be disregarded in assessing the above requirements.
Ugdg Spec TS 55-6/6
Table 55.3 Compaction Requirements

Cohesive Soil Type of compaction plant Max. depth of compacted layer (mm) Smoothwheeled roller Force per 100mm width 2.1 - 2.6 kN 2.61 - 5.2 kN More than 5.2 kN Force per 100mm width Grid-roller 2.6 - 5.2 kN 5.3 - 7.8 kN More than 7.8 kN Wheel Load 1 - 1.5 tonnes 1.5 - 2 tonnes 2 - 2.5 tonnes 2.5 - 4 tonnes 4 - 6 tonnes 6 - 8 tonnes 8 - 12 tonnes More than 12 tonnes Force per 100mm width 0.25 0.46 0.71 1.26 1.76 2.31 2.81 3.51 4.21 0.45 0.70 1.25 1.75 2.3 2.8 3.5 4.2 4.9 kN kN kN kN kN kN kN kN kN Unsuitable Unsuitable 100 12 125 8 150 4 175 4 200 4 225 4 250 4 75 75 125 150 150 175 200 225 250 16 12 12 8 4 4 4 4 4 150 150 150 200 225 250 275 300 300 16 12 6 10* 12* 10* 8* 8* 8* 125 150 175 225 300 350 400 450 6 5 4 4 4 4 4 4 Unsuitable Unsuitable 125 12 125 10 125 10 150 8 150 8 175 6 150 10* Unsuitable Unsuitable Unsuitable Unsuitable Unsuitable Unsuitable Unsuitable 150 150 150 10 8 4 Unsuitable 125 12 150 12 150 10 Unsuitable Unsuitable 125 125 150 8 6 4 125 125 150 10 8 8 125 10* 125 8* Unsuitable Min. no. of passes Well-graded granular and dry cohesive soils Max. depth of compacted layer (mm) Min. no. of passes Uniformly-graded materials Max. depth of compacted layer (mm) Min. no. of passes
Category
Pneumatic tyred roller
Vibratory roller
Static pressure under base plate Vibratory plate compactor 8.6 - 10.3 kN/m2 10.3 - 12.1 kN/m2 12.1 - 13.8 kN/m2 13.8 - 17.2 kN/m2 17.2 - 20.7 kN/m2 More than 20.7 kN/m2 Mass Kilogramme Vibrotamper 50 - 65 65 - 75 More than 75 Mass Kilogramme Power rammer 100 More than 500 150 275 4 8 150 275 6 12 Unsuitable Unsuitable 100 125 200 3 3 3 100 125 150 3 3 3 150 200 225 3 3 3 Unsuitable Unsuitable Unsuitable 100 150 200 Unsuitable 75 10 75 6 125 6 150 5 200 5 75 100 150 150 200 250 6 6 6 4 4 4
6 6 6
For items marked with * the rollers shall be towed by track laying tractors. Self propelled rollers are unsuitable.
SECTION 56/...
Ugdg Spec TS 56
SECTION 56
APPENDICES TO STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS FOR UPGRADING WORKS
LISTS OF APPENDICES
Appendix
A1 and/or A1(TC)
Deed Of Warranty For (Works/Materials To Be Warranted) [Sample]
A2
Letter of Undertaking From Original Roofing Contractor
A3
Performance Compliance Certificate
A4
Undertaking For Non-Disclosure
APPENDIX A1 SPECIMEN
SAMPLE
DEED OF WARRANTY FOR (Works / Materials to be warranted)*
To:
Housing & Development Board Republic of Singapore
CONTRACT NO.:
WHEREAS:-
1)
_____________________________________________________________________________________ (Name and Address of Contractor)
____________________________________________________________________________________________ (hereinafter called the "Contractor") is the contractor of the Housing & Development Board (hereinafter called the "Employer") in respect of the above contract works (hereinafter called the "Contract")
(2)
_____________________________________________________________________________________ (Name and Address of Specialist)
_____________________________________________________________________________________________ (hereinafter called the "Specialist") in the specialist engaged by the Contractor in respect of (Works / Materials to be warranted)* (hereinafter called the "Works") required under the Contract with the consent of the Employer given at the request of both the Contractor and the Specialist.
(3) Pursuant to Clause (Clause No.)* of (Standard / Supplementary Specification)# of the Contract the Contractor is obliged and has agreed to give this Warranty. In consideration of the premises and of the Employer giving the consent aforesaid at the request of the Contractor and the Specialist, the Contractor and the Specialist agree with the Employer as follows:1. The Contractor and the Specialist jointly and severally warrant for a period of (Period of Warranty)* years (hereinafter called the "Warranty Period") that the Works shall (Eventualities)*. The Warranty Period in respect of the Works shall commence from the date(s) of Substantial Completion of the Contract as certified by the Superintending Officer of the Contract.
* #
Details to be referred from Clause (Clause No.) 'Provision of Warranty' of the Supplementary Specifications. Delete where not applicable.
APPENDIX A1 SPECIMEN Page 2
2.
The Contractor and the Specialist jointly and severally further warrant that : (a) (b) (c) they have exercised all proper skill and care in the selection of materials and goods for the Works; they have exercised all proper skill and care in the design and execution of the works; their workmanship is of a standard that may be expected from a contractor with specialised experience and expertise in his particular trade; and the Works are fit and suitable for the purpose designed and required in the Contract.
(d)
3. It is an express term of the Warranty that the Works when completed and the goods or materials used shall meet the Performance Requirement of the Contract in respect of the Works. In the event the Works when completed and/or the goods and materials used should fail to meet such Performance Requirement, the Contractor and the Specialist shall be precluded from disclaiming liability under the Warranty on the ground that the Works as completed and/or the goods and materials used accord or comply with the Contract, and in this connection, the Contractor and the Specialist are deemed to have waived this defence in the event a claim is made by the Employer against them in respect of their breach of the Warranty.
4. Subject to Clauses 5 and 9 below, if any defects should occur in relation to the Works within the Warranty Period due to whatever cause, the Contractor and the Specialist jointly and severally undertake to remove and/or rectify and make good such damage or defects including ancillary works within a reasonable period or duration as specified by the Employer's notice in writing. If such damage or defects are attributable to the Contractors or Specialists breach of warranty under Clause 2 above, then the cost of such removal, rectification and/or making good work shall be borne by the Contractor and/or Specialist. If the Contractor and/or the Specialist shall fail to comply within the period or duration specified, it shall be lawful for the Employer to order such damage or defects as are referred to in such notice to be removed, rectified and/or made good by any other person and recover from the Contractor and/or Specialist such cost and expense incurred for which they may be liable. PROVIDED ALWAYS that such instructions shall be issued without prejudice to the Employer's right to recover damages against the Contractor and/or the Specialist by reason of their failure to comply with this Clause.
5. In the event of any damage or defects are caused wholly or in part by the Employer or a third party, and the Contractor and Specialist are required under Clause 4 above to remove, rectify and/or make good such damage or defects including ancillary works within the period or duration specified by the Employers notice in writing, then upon completion of such work, the Employer shall pay the Contractor and Specialist for the work or that part of the work which the Employers Chief Executive Officer or at the discretion of the Chief Executive Officer, a person nominated by him in writing may determine as occasioned by damage or defects caused by the Employer or third party, and the valuation of such work or such part of the work shall be ascertained in accordance with one or a combination of the methods mentioned below in descending order of priority: (a) (b) by measurement and valuation at fair market rates and prices; or if the above method is not applicable, then the valuation shall be based on the actual cost of the necessary materials or goods, labour and equipment (other than ordinary plant) plus 15% which percentage shall include the use of all ordinary plant, tool and supervision, overheads and profits
APPENDIX A1 SPECIMEN Page 3
6. The approval by the Employer of any works required under Clauses 4 or 5 above does not absolve the Contractor and/or the Specialist from their responsibility to rectify future occurrence of defects in respect of such works.
7. It is a term of this Warranty that the Contractor and/or the Specialist shall indemnify the Employer against all loss damage cost and expense suffered or incurred by the Employer in relation to any damage to property or injury to person caused or occasioned by the acts or omissions of the Contractor's and/or the Specialist's employees, representatives or workmen in the course of the works undertaken under the terms of this Warranty. The Contractor and/or the Specialist shall at their own cost and expense effect and maintain a Public Liability Insurance Policy for the execution of such works.
8. The Contractor and/or the Specialist shall indemnify the Employer against any compensation payable by the Employer under the Workmen's Compensation Act Cap 354 (1985 Edition) in connection with any accident arising out of rectification works undertaken by the Contractor and/or the Specialist pursuant to the provisions of this Warranty. The Contractor and/or the Specialist shall at their own cost and expense effect and maintain a Workmen's Compensation Policy for the execution of such works.
9. This Warranty shall not be invalidated in the event another person is instructed to execute the rectification work on account of the Contractor's and/or the Specialist's failure to discharge their obligations under clauses 4 and 5 above, nor shall this Warranty be invalidated in the event a third party is engaged without the consent of the Contractor and/or the Specialist to carry out regular maintenance and cleaning of the Works, provided that in the latter event, any rectification work or part thereof undertaken by the Contractor and/or Specialist that is occasioned by the negligence of such third party shall be valued in the manner described in Clause 5 above and paid by the Employer.
10. All differences and/or disputes arising under this Warranty (including questions relating to interpretation) shall be determined by the Employers Chief Executive Officer or at the discretion of the Chief Executive Officer, by a person nominated in writing by him. Any decision by the Chief Executive Officer or his nominee under this Clause shall be final and binding on and conclusive against the Contractor and/or the Specialist in any proceedings that may arise under this Warranty unless other otherwise determined by the Court in respect of proceedings arising under this Warranty.
11. This Warranty shall remain valid and shall not be affected by any extensions, variations or compositions granted or entered into with respect to the terms of or obligations under the Contract.
12. This Warranty shall be read together with the Contract but in case of any conflict between the two documents the provisions of this Warranty shall prevail.
APPENDIX A1(TC) SPECIMEN (TC) Page 4
13. The validity, construction and interpretation of this Warranty and all rights, obligations and liabilities arising hereunder shall be governed by, and interpreted in accordance with, the laws of Singapore.
14. The Employer shall have the absolute discretion to assign the benefit of this Warranty to any third parties without the consent of the Contractor and/or the Specialist.
IN WITNESS WHEREOF we have hereunto set out hands and seals the ______________ day of ____________ 20 _________.
APPENDIX A1(TC) SPECIMEN (TC)
SAMPLE
DEED OF WARRANTY FOR (Works / Materials to be warranted)*
To: Republic of Singapore
CONTRACT NO.:
WHEREAS:-
1)
_____________________________________________________________________________________ (Name and Address of Contractor)
____________________________________________________________________________________________ (hereinafter called the "Contractor") is the contractor of the Housing & Development Board (hereinafter called the "Employer") in respect of the above contract works (hereinafter called the "Contract")
(2)
_____________________________________________________________________________________ (Name and Address of Specialist)
_____________________________________________________________________________________________ (hereinafter called the "Specialist") in the specialist engaged by the Contractor in respect of (Works / Materials to be warranted)* (hereinafter called the "Works") required under the Contract with the consent of the Employer given at the request of both the Contractor and the Specialist.
(3)
Pursuant to Clause (Clause No.)* of (Standard / Supplementary Specification)# of the Contract the
Contractor is obliged and has agreed to give to the __________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________________________________________ (hereinafter called the Council) this Warranty. In consideration of the premises and of the Employer giving the consent aforesaid at the request of the Contractor and the Specialist, the Contractor and the Specialist agree with the Employer as follows:1. The Contractor and the Specialist jointly and severally warrant for a period of (Period of Warranty)* years (hereinafter called the "Warranty Period") that the Works shall (Eventualities)*.
* # .
Details to be referred from Clause (Clause No.) 'Provision of Warranty' of the Supplementary Specifications. Delete where not applicable
The Warranty Period in respect of the Works shall commence from the date(s) of Substantial Completion of the Contract as certified by the Superintending Officer of the Contract. 2. The Contractor and the Specialist jointly and severally further warrant that: (a) they have exercised all proper skill and care in the selection of materials and goods for the Works; they have exercised all proper skill and care in the design and execution of the works; their workmanship is of a standard that may be expected from a contractor with specialised experience and expertise in his particular trade; and the Works are fit and suitable for the purpose designed and required in the Contract.
(b) (c)
(d)
3. It is an express term of the Warranty that the Works when completed and the goods or materials used shall meet the Performance Requirement of the Contract in respect of the Works. In the event the Works when completed and/or the goods and materials used should fail to meet such Performance Requirement, the Contractor and the Specialist shall be precluded from disclaiming liability under the Warranty on the ground that the Works as completed and/or the goods and materials used accord or comply with the Contract, and in this connection, the Contractor and the Specialist are deemed to have waived this defence in the event a claim is made by the Employer against them in respect of their breach of the Warranty.
4. Subject to Clauses 5 and 9 below, if any defects should occur in relation to the Works within the Warranty Period due to whatever cause, the Contractor and the Specialist jointly and severally undertake to remove and/or rectify and make good such damage or defects including ancillary works within a reasonable period or duration as specified by the Employer's notice in writing. If such damage or defects are attributable to the Contractors or Specialists breach of warranty under Clause 2 above, then the cost of such removal, rectification and/or making good work shall be borne by the Contractor and/or Specialist. If the Contractor and/or the Specialist shall fail to comply within the period or duration specified, it shall be lawful for the Employer to order such damage or defects as are referred to in such notice to be removed, rectified and/or made good by any other person and recover from the Contractor and/or Specialist such cost and expense incurred for which they may be liable. PROVIDED ALWAYS that such instructions shall be issued without prejudice to the Employer's right to recover damages against the Contractor and/or the Specialist by reason of their failure to comply with this Clause.
5. In the event of any damage or defects are caused wholly or in part by the Council or a third party, and the Contractor and Specialist are required under Clause 4 above to remove, rectify and/or make good such damage or defects including ancillary works within the period or duration specified by the Councils notice in writing, then upon completion of such work, the Council shall pay the Contractor and Specialist for the work or that part of the work which the Councils Chairman or at the discretion of the Chairman, a person nominated by him in writing may determine as occasioned by damage or defects caused by the Council or third party, and the valuation of such work or such part of the work shall be ascertained in accordance with one or a combination of the methods mentioned below in descending order of priority: (a) (b) by measurement and valuation at fair market rates and prices; or if the above method is not applicable, then the valuation shall be based on the actual cost of the necessary materials or goods, labour and equipment (other than ordinary plant) plus 15% which percentage shall include the use of all ordinary plant, tool and supervision, overheads and profits
6. The approval by the Council of any works required under Clauses 4 or 5 above does not absolve the Contractor and/or the Specialist from their responsibility to rectify future occurrence of defects in respect of such works.
7. It is a term of this Warranty that the Contractor and/or the Specialist shall indemnify the Council against all loss damage cost and expense suffered or incurred by the Council in relation to any damage to property or injury to person caused or occasioned by the acts or omissions of the Contractor's and/or the Specialist's employees, representatives or workmen in the course of the works undertaken under the terms of this Warranty. The Contractor and/or the Specialist shall at their own cost and expense effect and maintain a Public Liability Insurance Policy for the execution of such works.
8. The Contractor and/or the Specialist shall indemnify the Council against any compensation payable by the Council under the Workmen's Compensation Act Cap 354 (1985 Edition) in connection with any accident arising out of rectification works undertaken by the Contractor and/or the Specialist pursuant to the provisions of this Warranty. The Contractor and/or the Specialist shall at their own cost and expense effect and maintain a Workmen's Compensation Policy for the execution of such works.
9. This Warranty shall not be invalidated in the event another person is instructed to execute the rectification work on account of the Contractor's and/or the Specialist's failure to discharge their obligations under clauses 4 and 5 above, nor shall this Warranty be invalidated in the event a third party is engaged without the consent of the Contractor and/or the Specialist to carry out regular maintenance and cleaning of the Works, provided that in the latter event, any rectification work or part thereof undertaken by the Contractor and/or Specialist that is occasioned by the negligence of such third party shall be valued in the manner described in Clause 5 above and paid by the Council.
10. All differences and/or disputes arising under this Warranty (including questions relating to interpretation) shall be determined by the Councils Chairman or at the discretion of the Chairman, by a person nominated in writing by him. Any decision by the Chairman or his nominee under this Clause shall be final and binding on and conclusive against the Contractor and/or the Specialist in any proceedings that may arise under this Warranty unless other otherwise determined by the Court in respect of proceedings arising under this Warranty.
11. This Warranty shall remain valid and shall not be affected by any extensions, variations or compositions granted or entered into with respect to the terms of or obligations under the Contract.
12. This Warranty shall be read together with the Contract but in case of any conflict between the two documents the provisions of this Warranty shall prevail.
13. The validity, construction and interpretation of this Warranty and all rights, obligations and liabilities arising hereunder shall be governed by, and interpreted in accordance with, the laws of Singapore.
IN WITNESS WHEREOF we have hereunto set out hands and seals the ______________ day of ____________ 20 _________ .
UPG07/S56.DOC(10) lkk(181206) DPD
APPENDIX A2
LETTER OF UNDERTAKING FROM ORIGINAL ROOFING CONTRACTOR
To :
1)
Housing & Development Board Republic of Singapore Town Council Republic of Singapore
2)
Contract No.
With reference to the Roofing Works required under the above-captioned Contract, we hereby confirm the following :
(a)
we are engaged by (Name of Main Contractor) (Address of Main Contractor) as Specialist Sub-Contractor to carry out new and/or repair/refurbishment works to the existing roofing system in Blocks (Relevant Block Numbers) the above-captioned Contract; and
of
of
(b)
the original roofing warranties given by us for the existing roofing system on the abovementioned Blocks remain and continue to be valid.
(Signature)
Full Name of Signatory Designation
: :
Name and Address of Original Roofing Contractor
Date
cc
UPG07/S56.DOC(11) lkk(181206) DPD
APPENDIX A3
Town Council ( Name & Address of Town Council ) ________________________________________________ ________________________________________________
PERFORMANCE COMPLIANCE CERTIFICATE
Contract No. _______________________________ Location of Playground: ______________________
Playground Type: ___________________________
Reference Standards: SS 457: 1999 Playground Equipment For Public Use SS 495: 2001 Impact Attenuation Of Surface Systems Under And Around Playground Equipment
This is to certify that I, ____________________________________________, a Certified Playground Safety Inspector have inspected, and hereby certify that the children playground equipments and EPDM Cast-In-Situ Rubber Flooring are in accordance with SS457: 1999 and SS459: 2001 respectively.
______________________________ Certified Playground Safety Inspector
_________________ Certification Number
_________________ Date
UPG07/S56.DOC(12) lkk(181206) DPD
APPENDIX A4-1 UNDERTAKING FOR NON-DISCLOSURE
TO :
THE HOUSING & DEVELOPMENT BOARD SINGAPORE In consideration of your agreeing at our request, to disclose or make available to us such information and documentation (Information) as may be applicable to the Contract for ______________________________ dated _______________ entered into between yourselves and us (Contract), we _____________________________________________ __________________________________________________________________________ (name of company) of ________________________________________________________________________ (address)
hereby agree and undertake that, save as hereinafter provided, such Information shall be treated by us as official and classified at all times and further agree and undertake as follows :
We will not without your prior written consent disclose the Information to any third party (within or In the event of obtaining your prior written approval, we will divulge the
outside Singapore).
Information only after such third party signs an Undertaking with you in the form set out in the Schedule or in such other manner as you may require. We shall use our best endeavours to prevent the unauthorised publication or disclosure of the Information.
We will divulge the Information only to those personnel who are directly connected with the
Contract (Personnel) and who have prior to such disclosure entered into an Undertaking with you in the form set out in the Schedule or in such other manner as you may require.
3.
We will ensure that the Personnel are aware of and will comply with the confidentiality and non-
disclosure obligations contained herein and we will fully indemnify you and keep you fully indemnified at all times against any losses, costs, expenses or damages that you may sustain or incur as a result of any breach of confidence by us and/or any of the Personnel.
We shall immediately notify you in writing if and when we become aware that a disclosure of the
Information may be required by law.
UPG07/S56.DOC(13) lkk(181206) DPD
APPENDIX A4-2
We will not use the Information for any purpose other than for effectively carrying out our
obligations under the Contract.
We shall take all precautions to prevent the loss of or unauthorised access, use, modification or
misuse of the Information by any third party (within or outside Singapore). We shall comply with any security procedures as may be specified by you and shall not deviate from or make any change in the security procedures without your prior written consent.
We shall immediately notify you in writing if we become aware of any breach of the requirements
of this Undertaking by us, any of our Personnel or any other person.
We shall cooperate and comply with any request, direction or guideline that you may from time to
time issue in relation to the protection and management of the Information.
We will return to you all Information (whether in the form of documents or otherwise) given to us
by you and any copies thereof or otherwise dispose of the same in such manner as may be directed by you.
10
The foregoing obligations shall continue in full force and effect notwithstanding the expiry or
termination of the Contract. We understand that we may be prosecuted under the Official Secrets Act (Cap 213) and/or the Statutory Bodies and Government Companies (Protection of Secrecy) Act (Cap 319) for any breach of this Undertaking.
Dated __________ 200_ .
SIGNED for and on behalf of
___________________________________________ (name of company)
Signature Name
____________________________ : ____________________________
Designation:
____________________________
UPG07/S56.DOC(14) lkk(181206) DPD
APPENDIX A4-3 THE SCHEDULE UNDERTAKING FOR NON-DISCLOSURE
TO : THE HOUSING & DEVELOPMENT BOARD SINGAPORE
In consideration of your agreeing at my request, to disclose or make available to me whether directly or through ______________________________________________ (Contractor) (name of company) such information and documentation, as may be applicable to the Contract for
_______________________________dated ____________ (Contract) expressed to be entered between you and the Contractor, I _______________________________________ of (name) ________________________________________________________ (address) hereby agree and undertake that, save as hereinafter provided, such documents and all the information that I may acquire (Information) at any time during my period of service with the Contractor shall be treated by me as official and classified at all times and further agree and undertake as follows :
I will not without your prior written consent disclose the Information to any third party (within or
outside Singapore). In the event of obtaining your prior written approval, I will divulge the Information only after such third party signs an Undertaking with you in the form set out in the Schedule or in such other manner as you may require. I shall use my best endeavours to prevent the unauthorised publication or disclosure of the Information.
I will divulge the Information only to those personnel who are directly connected with the Contract
(Personnel) and who have prior to such disclosure entered into a similar Undertaking with you.
I will ensure that the Personnel to whom I divulge any such Information are fully aware that the
Information is confidential to you.
I will indemnify you and keep you fully indemnified at all times against any losses, costs,
expenses or damages that you may sustain or incur as a result of any breach of confidence by me whether during the period of my service with the Contractor or at any time thereafter.
UPG07/S56.DOC(15) lkk(181206) DPD
APPENDIX A4-4 5 I shall immediately notify you in writing if and when I become aware that a disclosure of the
Information may be required by law.
I will not use the Information for any purpose other than for the purpose of effectively carrying out
the duties assigned to me by you or the Contractor in relation to the Contract.
I shall take all precaution to prevent the loss of or unauthorised access, use, modification or
misuse of the Information by any third party (within or outside Singapore). I shall comply with any security procedures as may be specified by you and shall not deviate from or make any change in the security procedures without your prior written consent.
I shall immediately notify you in writing if I become aware of any breach of the requirements of
this Undertaking either by me or any Personnel.
I shall cooperate and comply with any request, direction or guideline that you may from time to
time make in relation to the management of the Information.
10
I shall return all the Information (whether in the form of documents or otherwise) given to me by
you or by the Contractor relating to the Contract and any copies thereof or otherwise dispose of the same in such manner as may be directed by you.
11
The foregoing obligations shall continue in full force and effect notwithstanding the completion,
expiry or termination of my period of service with the Contractor.
12
I understand that I may be prosecuted under the Official Secrets Act (Cap 213) and/or the Statutory
Bodies and Government Companies (Protection of Secrecy) Act (Cap. 319) for any breach of this Undertaking.
Dated _________ 200_.
Signature Name Designation :
: :
____________________________ ____________________________ ____________________________
END/...
UPG07/S56.DOC(16) lkk(181206) DPD

HDB Specification A&amp;A

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Description:

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

HDB Specification A&amp;A

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

HOUSING & DEVELOPMENT BOARD

STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS FOR UPGRADING WORKS (2007 EDITION)

UPG07/IND.DOC(1) lkk(181206) DPD

UPG07/IND.DOC(2) lkk(181206) DPD

STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS FOR UPGRADING WORKS

UPG07/IND.DOC(3) lkk(181206) DPD

UPG04/IND.DOC(4) lkk(181203) DPD

UPG04/IND.DOC(5) lkk(181203) DPD

UPG04/IND.DOC(6) lkk(181203) DPD

SECTION 1 : GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS

UPG04/IND.DOC(7) lkk(181203) DPD

UPG04/IND.DOC(8) lkk(181203) DPD

UPG04/IND.DOC(9) lkk(181203) DPD

UPG04/IND.DOC(10) lkk(181203) DPD

Ugdg Spec GS Page 1

HOUSING & DEVELOPMENT BOARD

STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS FOR UPGRADING WORKS

SECTION 1 : GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS

"as required" or "as shown" or "as indicated" "HDB List"

UPG07/S1.DOC(1) lkk(181206) DPD

Ugdg Spec GS Page 2

UPG07/S1.DOC(2) lkk(181206) DPD

Ugdg Spec GS Page 3

UPG07/S1.DOC(3) lkk(181206) DPD

Ugdg Spec GS Page 4

UPG07/S1.DOC(4) lkk(181206) DPD

Ugdg Spec GS Page 5

$80.00 per unit per day

$135.00 per unit per day

$90.00 per unit per day

UPG07/S1.DOC(5) lkk(181206) DPD

Ugdg Spec GS Page 6

UPG07/S1.DOC(6) lkk(181206) DPD

Ugdg Spec GS Page 7

UPG07/S1.DOC(7) lkk(181206) DPD

Ugdg Spec GS Page 8

Assessment Of Extension Of Time Due To Exceptionally Inclement Weather

Jan 7 Jul 5 (d)

UPG07/S1.DOC(8) lkk(181206) DPD

Ugdg Spec GS Page 9

UPG07/S1.DOC(9) lkk(181206) DPD

UPG07/S1.DOC(10) lkk(181206) DPD

UPG07/S1.DOC(11) lkk(181206) DPD

Ugdg Spec GS Page 12

UPG07/S1.DOC(12) lkk(181206) DPD

Ugdg Spec GS Page 13

UPG07/S1.DOC(13) lkk(181206) DPD

Ugdg Spec GS Page 14

UPG07/S1.DOC(14) lkk(181206) DPD

Ugdg Spec GS Page 15

UPG07/S1.DOC(15) lkk(181206) DPD

Ugdg Spec GS Page 16

UPG07/S1.DOC(16) lkk(181206) DPD

Ugdg Spec GS Page 17

UPG07/S1.DOC(17) lkk(181206) DPD

Ugdg Spec GS Page 18

(2) (3) (4) (5) (ii)

UPG07/S1.DOC(18) lkk(181206) DPD

Ugdg Spec GS Page 19

UPG07/S1.DOC(19) lkk(181206) DPD

Ugdg Spec GS Page 20

UPG07/S1.DOC(20) lkk(181206) DPD

Ugdg Spec GS Page 21

HDB Specification A&A

HDB Specification A&A